Lehigh University Course Catalog 2009-2010

2009-2010 CATALOG

ProgramsandMajors

Your education at Lehigh University will help prepare

you to excel by discovering and building upon your per-

sonal strengths in a campus community where active

learning connects with real-world applications. Learning

at Lehigh incorporates active academic research and

hands-on experiences, both in and outside the classroom.

As a comprehensive university, Lehigh offers students an

education that integrates course work across four colleges

and different fields of study in a dynamic learning expe-

rience that can be customized to individual interests.

Strong programs in business, the humanities, education,

arts and sciences, and human services compliment our

well-known strength in engineering. Lehigh students can

choose from an array of courses and enjoy the resources

and facilities of a major research university and the

atmosphere and personal attention of a small college.

While most of the undergraduate programs listed are

offered as majors, many are also available as minors.

Graduate programs are offered in many of the subjects

listed as well. These are described in Section IV,

Graduate Study and Research.

Academic Programs and

Majors

Accounting

Africana Studies

American Studies

Anthropology

Applied Mathematics

Applied Science

Architectural History

Architecture

Art

Art History

Arts and Engineering

Asian Studies

Astronomy

Astrophysics

Behavioral Neuroscience

Biochemistry

Bioengineering

Biology

Business Economics

Business Information Systems

Chemical Engineering

Chemistry

Civil Engineering

Classical Civilization

Classics

Cognitive Science

Computer Engineering

Computer Science

Counseling and Human Services

Counseling Psychology

Design Arts

Earth and Environmental Sciences

Economics

Educational Leadership

Electrical Engineering

Elementary Counseling

Elementary and Secondary Educa-

tion (5-year program)

Energy Systems Engineering

Engineering Mechanics

Engineering Physics

English

Environmental Engineering

Environmental Policy Design

Environmental Studies

French

Finance

German

Globalization and Educational

Change

History

Industrial Engineering

Information and Systems Engineering

International Relations

Instructional Technology

International Counseling

Journalism

Journalism/Science Writing

Learning Sciences and Technology

Management

Marketing

Materials Science and Engineering

Mathematics

Mechanical Engineering

Molecular Biology

Music

Music Composition

Pharmaceutical Chemistry

Philosophy

Physics

Political Science

Psychology

Religion Studies

School Psychology

Science, Technology, and Society

Secondary Counseling

Sociology and Anthropology

Sociology/Social Psychology

Spanish

Special Education

Statistics

Structural Engineering

Supply Chain Management

Theatre

Women’s Studies

Cross-Disciplinary

Programs

Africana Studies

American Studies

Arts and Engineering

Asian Studies

Bioengineering

Civil Engineering /Environmental Sci-

ence

Cognitive Science

Computer Science and Business

(CSB)

Design Arts

Electrical Engineering/Engineering

Physics

Enterprise Systems Leadership

Environmental Studies

Global Citizenship

Global Studies

Integrated Business and Engineering

(IBE)

Integrated Degree

in Engineering, Arts and Sciences

(IDEAS)

Music and Engineering/Science

Pre-Dental Science

Pre-Medical Science

Pre-Optometry Science

Science, Technology, and Society

South Mountain College

Graduate level only

Dual-degree (5-year) program

Music and Engineering/Science is

not a major in itself. However, Lehigh

attracts many engineering and science

students who wish to continue their

active involvement in music and the

music department as dual majors,

minors, or elective participants.

Contents

Academic Calendar 5

I. Information of General Interest 6

II. University Resources 20

III. Undergraduate Studies 28

IV. Graduate Study and Research 51

V. Courses, Programs and Curricula 89

VI. An Overview from Past and Present 423

VII. Administration, Faculty and Staff 432

Index 454

To advance learning through the integration of teaching,

research, and service to others.

Excellence is the hallmark of a university of distinction.

Excellence requires a total quality commitment, which

must characterize every activity of Lehigh University.

Lehigh is an independent, coeducational university with

programs in the arts and humanities, business, educa-

tion, engineering, and the natural and social sciences,

offering bachelor’s degrees primarily to full-time, residen-

tial students and graduate degrees through the doctorate

for both full-time and part-time students. Lehigh is

small enough to be personal, yet large enough to provide

stimulating diversity and to play important national and

international roles.

Since Lehigh’s founding in 1865, the faculty has empha-

sized the integration of the academic disciplines,

combining the cultural with the professional, the theo-

retical with the practical, and the humanistic with the

technological in a modern, liberal education that serves

as preparation for a useful life. Lehigh is an intellectually

unified community of learners, and in this sense Lehigh

is an integral university.

Lehigh strives to earn international prominence as a uni-

versity of special distinction through its integration of

teaching, research, and service to society. The integrating

element of teaching, research and service is learning,

which is the principal mission of all members of the

Lehigh community. Our mission of advancing learning

has three aspects:

Teaching. The development of future leaders in our glob-

al society is first among Lehigh’s purposes and first

among our achievements. Preparation for leadership

requires the best of teaching, in which both mentor and

student are so deeply engaged that they become joint

owners of the learning process.

Research. Lehigh is deeply committed to the creative

search for new understanding of nature and human soci-

ety as an essential element of the learning process. The

scholarly inquiry and research of Lehigh faculty and stu-

dents add value to instruction on our campus, and

contribute to the distinction of our university.

Service. The special commitment of the Lehigh commu-

nity to experiential learning through service to others

imbues the entire university with a sense of purpose and

value in the larger society. Lehigh is extensively involved

in developing partnerships with industry, government

and others in education and human services to meet the

needs of our society. In a societal sense, Lehigh is devot-

ed to the concepts of unity, community, and cooperative

achievement.

Lehigh believes that its graduates must develop critical

thinking and effective communication as their habit;

they must have both a broad understanding of human

affairs and a domain of true competence; they are

expected to live by a set of mature cultural and personal

values, accept the virtue of work as a vehicle of service,

and have the will to live and work with exceptional self-

discipline.

Respect for human dignity is very important at Lehigh, a

caring community deeply committed to harmonious cul-

tural diversity as an essential element of the learning

environment. In order that all members of the Lehigh

community might develop as effective and enlightened

citizens, the University encourages physical, social, ethi-

cal, and spiritual development as well as rigorous

intellectual development.

4 Lehigh University Course Catalog 2009-2010

Mission Statement

Lehigh on the Web

www.lehigh.edu

Admissions information:

www.lehigh.edu/admissions

Parents & family:

www.lehigh.edu/parents

Sponsored Scholarships

Individuals, foundations, and corporations provide these

funds through annual contributions to the university.

Lehigh has 60 such sponsored funds. Lehigh University

grants are also used as a “placeholder” until we are noti-

fied of the amounts we are able to award for each of the

endowed funds.

Endowed Scholarships

Income from invested gifts to the university make these

scholarships possible. The university has over 800 such

funds, half of which are for general, unrestricted use.

Curriculum, geographic, outside interests, etc. restrict

most of the others.

Lehigh University Academic Merit Awards

The equivalent of seven full tuition awards (awarded as

one half or full tuition) will be awarded to entering

freshmen. Selections are made by the Office of Admis-

sions based on academic excellence, extra curricular and

leadership activities. Awards are renewable for four years

of undergraduate study and require a 3.0 average and

satisfactory progress toward a Lehigh degree.

Dean’s Scholarships

Approximately 70 scholarships, in an annual amount of

$10,000 will be awarded to entering freshmen. Selec-

tions are made by the Office of Admissions based on

academic excellence and significant extra-curricular and

leadership activities. Awards are renewable over four

years of undergraduate study, and require a 3.00 average

and satisfactory progress toward a Lehigh degree.

Baker Gifted Arts Scholarships

Awards are given to students from Northeast Pennsylva-

nia and are valued at $3,000 per year, renewable over

four years. Selections are made by the faculties of the

Music and Theatre departments, and are based on taped

performances and letters of recommendation.

Information of General Interest 13

per hour. You are paid on a bi-weekly basis, as you work

and submit timesheets. Your work-study earnings are not

deducted from your billed expenses.

The Job Locator Development Program is designed to

assist you if you do not qualify under the Federal Work-

Study program to find employment off-campus or with a

number of incubator companies located on the

Mountaintop Campus. This program is coordinated

through the Office of Career Services.

Aid from the Government

Lehigh University is an eligible participant in federally

funded student aid programs. Campus-based programs,

where the university makes the awards based on the dol-

lars available, include:

Federal Supplemental Educational Opportunity Grants

Federal Perkins Loans

Academic Competitiveness Grant

SMART Grant

Federal Work-Study

Direct entitlement programs (where the government

directly, or through commercial lenders for loan pro-

grams, provides the necessary funds) include:

Federal Pell Grants

Federal Stafford Loans

Federal Unsubsidized Stafford Loans

Parent Loan for Undergraduate Students (PLUS)

Alternative Educational Loan Programs

The Office of Financial Aid can provide a list of pro-

grams with current interest rates and terms and

conditions of repayment. It is the families’ decision and

responsibility to research loan options.

Army ROTC Scholarships

The U.S. Army awards tuition scholarships supplement-

ed with $480 toward course-related books and a $250

per month stipend. Recipients incur an obligation to

serve on active duty as commissioned officers. Contact

the Department of Military Science for details.

Information for all financial aid

applicants

1. Confirm that the correct Lehigh Identification

Number (LIN) is listed on all forms.

2. Keep copies of all forms filed for your records.

Submit the appropriate state grant application, especially

if a resident of Ohio, Massachusetts, Connecticut,

Rhode Island, Pennsylvania, Maryland, Delaware,

Vermont, or West Virginia - states from which Lehigh

students have brought scholarships. Be guided by the

specific instructions. The FAFSA will be the basic form

for state grant consideration, although some states do

require a supplemental application. Students should be

sure to meet all filing deadlines to be eligible for assis-

tance.

Student Rights

Students have the right to know

• the cost of attendance;

• the refund policy for students who withdraw;

• the financial assistance available from federal, state

and institutional sources;

• procedures and deadlines for submitting applications

for financial aid;

14 Lehigh University Course Catalog 2009-2010

• how financial aid recipients are selected;

• how eligibility was determined, including all resources

the aid office considered available to the student;

• how and when funds will be disbursed;

• an explanation of each type of award received;

• for any student loan received: the interest rate, total

amount to be repaid, when repayment begins, the

length of the repayment period, and the cancellation

or deferment provisions of the loan;

• for any Federal Work-Study or university-funded job:

a description of the job, the hours to be worked, the

rate of pay, and how and when the student will be

paid;

• the criteria used to determine satisfactory academic

progress for financial aid purposes; and

• how to appeal a decision by the Office of Financial

Aid concerning any aid award.

Student Responsibilities

It is the student’s responsibility to:

• read directions thoroughly, complete all application

forms accurately, and to comply with any deadlines;

• provide any supplemental information or documenta-

tion required by the Office of Financial Aid or other

agency if applicable;

• read, understand, and keep copies of any forms the

student is required to sign;

• repay any student loans received;

• attend an entrance interview and an exit interview if

federal, state or university loans are received while in

attendance at Lehigh;

• notify the Office of Financial Aid of any change in

enrollment status or financial status (including any

scholarships or grants received from outside sources);

changes of address and enrollment status must also be

reported to lender(s) for any loan(s);

• satisfactorily perform the work agreed upon in a

Federal Work-Study or university-funded work pro-

gram; and

• know and comply with all requirements for continua-

tion of financial aid, including satisfactory academic

progress requirements.

For additional information write to the Office of

Financial Aid, Lehigh University, 218 W. Packer Avenue,

Bethlehem, PA 18015; telephone (610) 758-3181; FAX

(610) 758-6211, email [email protected] or visit our

website www.lehigh.edu/financialaid.

Campus Life

Approximately 70 percent of all undergraduate men and

women live on campus. Campus living facilities include

traditional residence halls, apartments, suites in a multi-

story building, or residence in fraternity or sorority

houses. Physical facilities are also described in Section

VI.

Residence Halls

The offices of Residence Life and Residential Services at

Lehigh University are committed to providing quality

housing and educational services for residence hall stu-

dents. Lehigh firmly believes that living in a residence

hall allows students to become members of a positive

community, in which they can live and learn with indi-

viduals from diverse backgrounds and experiences.

Efforts are made to integrate academic and out-of-the-

class learning in order to better enable students to

develop balanced and realistic approaches as they prepare

for life after graduation.

Approximately half of all Lehigh undergraduates live in

residence halls. The university has twelve residence hall

complexes for undergraduate men and women.

Residence halls offer traditional style living (in buildings

with corridors), and suite/apartment-style living. A wide

variety of affiliated housing include: Global Citizenship

House, ROTC, Substance Free, Green House

(Environmental), UMOJA House, Healthy Living,

Musical Enrichment House, and the Technology in

Society House.

To help facilitate and maximize the residential experi-

ence, approximately one hundred staff members of the

Office of Residence Life live in the residence halls. On

every hall there is a student staff member, a Gryphon,

who provides assistance with personal and academic mat-

ters, serves as a campus resource, mediates roommate

conflicts, and provides educational, and social programs.

In addition to student staff, six full-time master’s degree

level professionals, Residence Life Coordinators, live and

work in the residence halls, and oversee the daily opera-

tions for their assigned areas on campus.

All residence halls include House Councils that are part

of the larger Residence Hall Association. Participation in

House Councils provide students opportunities to devel-

op leadership skills. House Councils are governed by the

Residence Hall Association, which is a vital and active

organization whose primary focus is to help fund and

provide residence hall programs, assess student feedback

and develop service-oriented programs.

All First and Second year students are required to live on

campus unless they petition and are approved for exemp-

tion. Due to this requirement, housing is limited and

not guaranteed for Junior and Senior students.

When a First Year student candidate accepts an offer of

admission, the candidate is provided with a Lehigh

Identification Number that will provide internet access

to the Campus Portal and the Residence Hall Room and

Board Application/Contract. Priority for assignment is

based on the date the candidate accepts admission. First

Year students are informed of their room assignment and

other information in early July.

Second Year students have the option of becoming a

member of a Greek Organization and residing in a

Fraternity or Sorority or they may participate in a Room

Selection Process to choose residence hall housing.

Housing that is available for Junior and Senior students

is distributed through a Residence Hall Housing Lottery

system. Students who are not given housing through this

process may apply to a waiting list to receive housing at

a later date, should it become available.

Any questions in regards to housing should be directed

to the Office of Residential Services by calling 610-758-

3500 or sending email to [email protected].

Fraternities and Sororities

The university has a long tradition of Greek life. The

continued strength of this system is due in part to the

efforts of the Interfraternity Council, Panhellenic

Council, the Greek Alumni Council, the Office of

Residential Services and the Office of the Dean of

Information of General Interest 15

Students to improve the quality of fraternity and sorority

life through membership, leadership, social, educational,

housing, and financial management training.

Greek life is an attractive alternative among the residence

options at Lehigh. Each fraternity or sorority is like a

close-knit community. These groups determine their

own goals; organize their own houses and business affairs

with the assistance of the Office of Residential Services;

conduct their own social, philanthropic, and athletic

activities; assist with planning their own meals; and

select their own membership. Because they are largely

self-governing, these organizations offer numerous

opportunities for student involvement and leadership.

The twenty-one fraternities and nine sororities form a

larger Greek community comprising approximately 35

percent of the undergraduate population at Lehigh.

Through the Interfraternity Council (IFC) and the

Panhellenic Council, they determine policies and organ-

ize social, philanthropic, and educational activities for

the Greek community as a whole.

There are nine sorority chapters at Lehigh, eight of

which are located on the Asa Packer Campus and one

which is non-residential. The sororities are Alpha Chi

Omega, Alpha Gamma Delta, Alpha Omicron Pi, Alpha

Phi, Delta Gamma, Gamma Phi Beta, Kappa Alpha

Theta, Pi Beta Phi and Lambda Theta Alpha.

Seventeen of the fraternities are located on the Asa

Packer Campus and four are non-residential. The frater-

nities are Alpha Tau Omega, Chi Phi, Chi Psi, Delta

Chi, Delta Phi, Delta Tau Delta, Delta Upsilon, Kappa

Alpha, Kappa Alpha Psi, Kappa Sigma, Lambda Chi

Alpha, Lambda Sigma Upsilon, Phi Gamma Delta, Phi

Kappa Theta, Phi Sigma Kappa, Pi Kappa Alpha, Psi

Upsilon, Sigma Chi, Sigma Phi Epsilon, Theta Chi, and

Theta Xi.

Religious Activities

The Religious Program is under the general supervision

of the university chaplain. The chaplain participates in

the ceremonial life of the University and conducts spe-

cial university worship services throughout the year. All

worship services are interdenominational, with some

being inter-religious. Roman Catholic masses are held

regularly. The Newman Hall can be contacted for a

schedule of services.

Lehigh University is non-denominational. Packer

Memorial Church, dedicated in 1887 in honor of the

University’s Founder, Asa Packer, continues to be the

center for campus worship services.

The University Chaplain works with representatives of

campus religious groups of all faiths and assists students

in planning religious life programming. The chaplain’s

office sponsors an Oxfam Fast in November, organized

the original Community Service Desk that helps coordi-

nate volunteer services on campus, and creates

opportunities for discussion of moral and spiritual issues

through the Chaplain’s Forum. In addition to providing

pastoral counseling, supporting religious groups, and

helping bring speakers to campus, the chaplain seeks to

provide leadership to the university on religious and eth-

ical issues.

Over fifteen religious groups on campus provide oppor-

tunities for religious fellowship. The groups include the

Newman Association for Roman Catholic students

under the guidance of a resident priest; the Jewish

Student Center, which sponsors various activities for

Jewish students; and organizations for Hindu and

Muslim students. A variety of Protestant Christian

organizations are available to students, including the

Lehigh Christian Fellowship and the Fellowship of

Christian Athletes.

The chaplain’s office makes information about religious

life available to all students through the Chaplain’s web

page and can be contacted at any time for information

about worship opportunities and religious activities

either on campus or in the local Bethlehem community.

Student Organizations

Lehigh offers a wide variety of extracurricular activities

and student organizations. The student-run campus

newspaper keeps the campus informed while the stu-

dent- run campus radio station and the many drama and

musical organizations entertain. Additionally, the Lehigh

University Student Senate recognizes over 150 student

clubs ranging from academic organizations and cultural

groups to competitive club sports and political organiza-

tions. Student club activities are open to everyone.

Students are invited to view a complete list of campus

organizations by going to the following UR

www.lehigh.edu/~instuact or by visiting the Lehigh

University homepage and selecting the link to clubs and

organizations.

Lehigh University Theatre

In Spring, 1997, the department of theatre moved to the

Zoellner Arts Center, Lehigh’s impressive performing arts

facility. Three theaters, scene and costume shops, a dance

studio, music practice rooms, classrooms and more

enhance the department’s curricular activities. The

department of theatre’s annual production program

includes four productions in the three hundred-seat

Diamond Theater and multiple lab productions in the

one-hundred seat Black Box Theater. The plays range

from classics to world premieres and recent mainstage

seasons have included: A Doll’s House, The Clean House,

Wintertime, and Rosencrantz and Guildenstern are Dead.

Shows directed and produced by students as class proj-

ects or independent work occur regularly in the Black

Box Theater. Recent lab theatre productions have includ-

ed: The House of Yes, Last Train to Nibroc, and the

One-Act

. Many events are sponsored by the Mustard

and Cheese Drama Society, the country’s second oldest

collegiate drama club.

Auditions and production crews are open to all members

of the university community. Production opportunities

exist in performance, choreography, set and costume

construction, properties management, lighting, sound,

house management and publicity. Advanced students

have opportunities to direct or design, under faculty

supervision.

Outstanding work in the mainstage or lab theatre sea-

sons may be recognized with Williams Prizes and theatre

department prizes in acting, directing, design, and tech-

nical production.

Professional guest artists - directors, playwrights, design-

ers, and actors - frequently visit the Lehigh campus to

work on mainstage productions, teach classes, and con-

duct seminars and workshops for all interested students.

The department also sponsors artists-in-residence, guest

lecturers, workshops, and touring performances.

16 Lehigh University Course Catalog 2009-2010

Musical Organizations

The music department offers students an array of ensem-

bles in which to perform and develop leadership skills.

The choruses, bands, orchestra, and ensembles are con-

ducted by members of the faculty and managed by

elected student leaders. Nearly all performances, except

Christmas Vespers, are held in Baker Hall in the Zoellner

Arts Center.

Students earn one credit per semester for each ensemble

or lesson course in which they are registered.

The Lehigh University Philharmonic Orchestra is a

body of 60-70 players from diverse backgrounds.

Though primarily a student orchestra, faculty and com-

munity members also participate, creating an ensemble

that contains unique intersections between students of

all majors and professionals, campus and community.

Students will have a chance to bring the great works of

orchestra repertoire to life in four concerts a year in

Baker Hall, Zoellner Arts Center. Membership is by

audition.

The Jazz Ensemble, Bill Warfield, director, performs

contemporary literature as well as the music of the more

traditional bands such as Basie, Ellington, Goodman and

Herman. In addition to performances on campus each

semester, other concerts take place in New York City and

the surrounding areas. Membership is by audition.

The Jazz Band, directed by Bill Warfield consists of stu-

dent, faculty, and community musicians performing

contemporary and traditional big band literature.

Concerts are performed in the fall and spring at Lehigh

as well as in the surrounding communities. Membership

is by audition or invitation.

The Jazz Combo is an advanced combo (chamber

group) for the most experienced improvisers under the

direction of Dave Riekenberg. The group performs sever-

al times each semester on and off campus. Membership

is by invitation only. Other combos are formed to

accommodate student interests.

The Marching 97 meets during the fall semester and

plays at each Lehigh home game, as well as several away

games. Made up of students from all of the colleges at

Lehigh, the band is a student-run organization dedicated

to building a positive Lehigh spirit at games and off the

field. Band camp is held three days during the week

prior to the start of classes. No audition is required.

The Symphonic Band meets and performs only in the

spring semester of each year. The ensemble consists of

students, faculty and staff who are interested in playing

music, and no audition is necessary.

The Wind Ensemble under the direction of David B.

Diggs, is a select group of students dedicated to perform-

ing music for woodwinds, brass and percussion. These

students represent many diverse majors. In 1999 The

Wind Ensemble was honored by Downbeat Magazine,

receiving the award for the most outstanding college

classical symphonic band.

The Lehigh University Choir, directed by Steven

Sametz, is an active force in campus life. The 60 mixed

voices of the Choir, drawn from all majors of the

University, are auditioned at the beginning of the aca-

demic year. They give four major concerts on campus

and tour internationally. The Choir frequently performs

with orchestra and regularly performs new music,

including many works written especially for them. They

have been heard five times on National Public Radio.

The Choir has toured to Austria, China, France,

Germany, Korea, Portugal, Russia, Thailand, Taiwan,

and has performed in Avery Fisher Hall at New York’s

Lincoln Center.

The Lehigh University Choral Union, composed of stu-

dents, faculty, staff, and Lehigh Valley community

members under the direction of Steven Sametz, performs

three times a year with internationally known soloists

and a full symphony orchestra. The 200 singers of the

Choral Union bring major works such as Beethoven’s

Ninth Symphony, Mahler’s Second Symphony, and the

Brahms Requiem to a broad audience.

The Lehigh University Glee Club – The recently revived

Glee Club sings traditional and new music for male

voices under the direction of Steven Sametz.

Enthusiastically welcomed by alumni and the university

community, the Glee Club has thrilled audiences on

campus, on tour in China, and at Lincoln Center, where

they performed with the University Choir.

Dolce – The Lehigh University’s Women’s Ensemble

begins a new tradition of women’s music on campus.

Under the direction of Debra Field, this group sings a

variety of music written especially for female voices as

well as music adapted for the group. Members of Dolce

also sing with the University Choir.

ArtsLehigh

ArtsLehigh is an all-university program serving students,

faculty, staff, administration and the local community.

ArtsLehigh’s mission is to facilitate and deepen engage-

ment in the arts among students, faculty, staff and the

community. Programs for students include: ArtsAlive

which is an orientation to the arts offered for Freshmen

and transfer students; grants which provide funding for

student initiated projects and activities in the creative

and performing arts. Programs for faculty and staff

include collaborative grants, workshops, faculty colloquia

and facilitation services to encourage out of classroom

experiences as well as interdisciplinary approaches to the

arts. ArtsLehigh also promotes an Artist in Residence pro-

gram which allows students, faculty, staff, and the

community to work creatively with leading artistic prac-

titioners.

Volunteer and Community Services

Lehigh’s Community Service Office, located in the

Ulrich Student Center, is a place where students, faculty,

staff, and student organizations interested in volunteer-

ing in the community can get information. The Office is

staffed by students who serve as Community Service

Assistants, a Graduate Assistant, an Administrative

Coordinator and the Director of Community Service.

Students are involved in a wide range of service pro-

grams. Some of the projects include tutoring and

mentoring programs with local youth through opportu-

nities such as the America Reads and America Counts

program. Many students are also active in local hospitals,

with environmental groups, senior citizen centers, and

shelters. In addition to the work with outside agencies,

the Community Service Office has its own major pro-

grams that aim to meet the needs of the South

Bethlehem community, such as Lehigh’s Move Out

Collection Drive, Parents’ Night Out, Spring Fling,

Spooktacular, Wonderful World of Sports and Livin’ La

Vida Lehigh. The Office also provides students with

week-long service initiatives over break giving students

Information of General Interest 17

the opportunity to travel around the country to serve in

homeless shelters, on environmental projects, Habitat for

Humanity and with youth programs.

Part of the Lehigh experience is getting involved. If you

are interested in making a difference in the greater

Lehigh Valley area, contact the Community Service

Office at (610) 758-4583 or check out our web site at

www.lehigh.edu/service.

Guest Speakers

Students have the opportunity to hear a wide variety of

notable speakers. Among those to visit the campus have

been former Attorney General Janet Reno; writer Salman

Rushdie; poet and writer Maya Angelou; author Kurt

Vonnegut; former Pakistani Prime Minister Benazir

Bhutto; U.S. Supreme Court Justice Antonin Scalia; Lee

Iacocca; General Colin Powell; South Africa’s Bishop

Desmond Tutu; Nobel Peace Prize recipient Shirin

Ebadi; Titanic discoverer Robert Ballard; and novelist

John Irving. Thomas Armstrong, director of the

Whitney Museum, spoke with students during a week-

long residency. An Engineering Expo with speakers

representing many prominent industries featured Peter

Bridenbaugh, former vice president of science and tech-

nology, Alcoa. From art to engineering, the campus stays

in touch with current issues, trends, and movements

through its many and varied speaker series.

Speakers are invited by various committees and academic

departments. Several of the committees, including the

Visiting Lecturers Committee, welcome participation by

students as well as faculty and staff. Major lectureships

include the Cohen Lecture, the Connell Lecture (on reli-

gion), the Distinguished Lecture Series: Leaders of

Practice (Education Department), and The Kenner

Lecture on Tolerance. Lectures are also presented by the

Humanities Center and the Friends of the Library.

Athletic Opportunities

Students can participate in many intercollegiate, recre-

ation, and intramural athletic programs.

NCAA Division I intercollegiate varsity sports include

the following. FALL: football, men’s and women’s cross-

country, men’s and women’s soccer, women’s field

hockey, and women’s volleyball. WINTER: men’s and

women’s basketball, wrestling, men’s and women’s indoor

track and field, and men’s and women’s swimming and

diving. SPRING: baseball, men’s and women’s tennis,

men’s and women’s golf, men’s and women’s outdoor

track and field, men’s and women’s lacrosse, women’s

softball and women’s rowing.

Athletic facilities are located in Taylor Gymnasium and

Grace Hall on the Asa Packer campus, and on the

Murray H. Goodman campus, which is located one and

one- half miles south of the main campus. The 500-acre

Goodman athletic complex includes Stabler Arena,

which seats 5,600 and hosts all Lehigh basketball games

and tournament wrestling matches. The campus also

contains Goodman Stadium, a 16,000-seat football sta-

dium, and the Philip Rauch Field House, which includes

a one-eighth-mile track and indoor tennis and basketball

courts. The four-court Lewis Indoor Tennis Center was

completed in 1994. A dual field complex, Ronald J.

Ulrich Sports Complex, features both artificial turf and

natural grass fields for lacrosse, soccer and field hockey.

Other facilities on the campus include a championship

cross-country course, baseball and softball fields, outdoor

tennis courts, the John C. Whitehead Football Practice

Complex, the A. Haigh Cundey Varsity House, numer-

ous practice fields, an all-weather, nine-lane, outdoor

400-meter track, and a golf clubhouse and driving range.

Lehigh is affiliated with the National Collegiate Athletic

Association (NCAA), the Patriot League and the Eastern

Intercollegiate Wrestling Association (EIWA). Lehigh fre-

quently hosts collegiate championship events in men’s

and women’s sports and is the summer training camp

facility of the Philadelphia Eagles of the National

Football League.

Intramural/Club Sports

The Department of Intramural and Club Sports super-

vises some 10 intramural and 30 club sports. The aim is

to insure the health and physical development of stu-

dents while participating in various levels of

competition. ALL PARTICIPANTS ARE RESPONSI-

BLE TO SUPPLY THEIR OWN APPROPRIATE

INSURANCE COVERAGE.

Through its program of intramural sports, the university

endeavors to maintain among its students a high degree

of physical fitness, to establish habits of regular and

healthful exercise, to foster the development of self-con-

fidence, good sportsmanship, and a spirit of cooperation,

and to provide each student with ample opportunity for

acquiring an adequate degree of skill in sports of the type

in which participation can be continued after gradua-

tion.

Club sports are oriented toward mutual interest and

physical activity. The underlying purpose of any club is

to join together those members of the student popula-

tion that share a common activity interest. Club

competition can range from a club varsity status (Men’s

Crew or Ice Hockey) to equestrian, cycling, cheerlead-

ing, skiing, rugby or water polo.

The Student Code of Conduct

Intellectual honesty and mutual respect are not acciden-

tal values in a university. They are, for students and

professors alike, a presupposition of the pursuit of truth,

which brings universities into existence. It is essential

that an academic community uphold these values. The

student code of conduct and the student conduct system

are mechanisms by which the university endeavors to

develop in all students a sense of responsibility to the

Lehigh University community.

The Lehigh University Student handbook

(http://www.lehigh.edu/~indost/dos/hbook.html) con-

tains information relevant for the student members of

our community. All students have an obligation to read

and be familiar with the Student Handbook, the Code

of Conduct, and the other policies contained therein.

18 Lehigh University Course Catalog 2009-2010

In Bethlehem, An Educational

Tradition

Lehigh University shares in the historical heritage of

Bethlehem, even though, having been founded in 1865,

it is a relative newcomer. The fact that Lehigh was estab-

lished in Bethlehem reflects the tradition of education

established by the community’s first settlers thirty years

before the founding of the nation.

The first Moravians were among the many German reli-

gious sects that came to the New World, and especially

to Pennsylvania, during the early 1700s. But unlike

William Penn, who established his sylvania as a new land

where he might hold his Quaker beliefs away from

England’s oppression, the Moravians came as missionar-

ies with the intent of converting the Indians to

Christianity. For this purpose they settled the Lehigh

Valley.

The early Moravians were industrious. Their first build-

ing, the Gemein Haus (community house) was

completed in 1741. This building stands today, one of

thirty-nine remarkably preserved pre-Revolutionary War

buildings constructed by the Moravian settlers and in

continuous use ever since by the Moravian community.

Many of these buildings are located on Church St., west

of the City Center; industrial buildings are located in the

18th Century Industrial Area in the Monocacy Creek

valley west of the business district.

The leader of the Moravians was Count Nicholas von

Zinzendorf of Dresden. He arrived in the settlement in

time for their observance of Christmas Eve in 1741 and

gave the settlement the name Bethlehem—“house of

bread”.

The settlers built high-quality structures of stone,

demonstrating principles of engineering that were not

generally used elsewhere. They were interested in music,

and established the first symphony orchestra in America.

In 1748, the settlement had a fourteen-man orchestra.

The community’s first organ was built in 1757 by John

Gottlob Klemm. The musical tradition, including the

trombone choir, continues today, perhaps most visibly in

the Bach Choir of Bethlehem, whose yearly Bach Festival

is held in the university’s Packer Memorial Church. In

1985, the 300th anniversary of the birth of Johann

Sebastian Bach was observed.

Zinzendorf envisioned Bethlehem as the center for man-

ufacturing; outlying Moravian settlements, such as

Nazareth, Pa., would be primarily devoted to agriculture.

On October 15, 1742, a large barn was “raised” with the

help of most of the residents. Three months later a grist

mill at the community spring produced the first flour. In

1758, the Sun Inn was built along Main St., a haven for

travelers. Reconstruction of the picturesque inn was

completed in 1982, and it now operates as a community

center and restaurant.

Zinzendorf’s determination that Bethlehem would be a

major industrial center was assisted by the completion in

1755 of the water works, the first public utility in the

New World.

The Moravian dedication to education was an extension

of the philosophy of John Amos Comenius, who had

written, “Everyone ought to receive a universal educa-

tion.” The Moravian educational institutions that

continue today, including Moravian Academy and

Moravian College, stem from this tradition.

The Moravians, although avowedly opposed to war,

found their community pressed into service as a hospital

when Washington’s troops bivouacked at Valley Forge

during the winter of 1777-78. Washington came to the

community once, and many other Continental Army

officers were visitors.

The Sun Inn was also used as a hospital during the war;

among its patients was an aristocratic renegade from

France, Marie Joseph Paul Ives Gilbert Motier, the

Marquis de la Fayette. Lafayette had come to assist the

Continental Army aboard his own ship, the “Victory.”

Fifty years later a college in Easton was named in his

honor and it became Lehigh’s traditional football rival.

The first bridge across the Lehigh River was built in

1794. It was replaced in 1816, but the latter was

destroyed by a flood in 1841. In 1759, the turnpike (toll

road) over South Mountain, generally along the route of

the present Wyandotte St. hill, was opened. The present

Hill-to-Hill Bridge was built some fifty years ago.

“Black gold.” During the late 18th century, anthracite

was found in the mountains north of the Lehigh Valley.

In 1818, the Lehigh Coal Co. and the Lehigh

Navigation Co. were formed, one to mine the anthracite

on the upper Lehigh River, the other to transport it

down river to metropolitan markets.

The Lehigh River was difficult to navigate.

Consequently, in 1829 the Lehigh Canal was completed

from Mauch Chunk (now Jim Thorpe), through

Bethlehem to Easton, where it connected with the

Delaware Canal. During the 1840s, iron mines were

opened in the area, and several blast furnaces, fueled by

coal, were in operation. Zinc ore, was found in neigh-

boring Upper Saucon Township. In the 1850s Asa

Packer built the Lehigh Valley Railroad. These origins

eventually led to the heavy industry that continues in the

Lehigh Valley today.

Information of General Interest 19

When Asa Packer founded Lehigh University in 1865,

one of his objectives was to make possible broadly based

education for young people of the region, combining the

technical skills needed to run the flourishing industry of

the Lehigh Valley with a liberal education.

In addition to its role as a steel-making center,

Bethlehem today is a major tourist attraction. The

Moravian community sets up an elaborate nativity scene

and the entire city is decorated with lighting during the

holiday period. The Moravian tradition of a single can-

dle (now electric) in each window is widely observed.

Atop South Mountain is a steel tower known as the Star

of Bethlehem. During the holiday period, the star’s hun-

dreds of bulbs create a 95-foot-high star that can be seen

for many miles. The star was the gift to the community

of Marion Brown Grace, wife of Eugene Gifford Grace,

the steel magnate and president of the university board

of trustees.

The community of Bethlehem has a population of

approximately 78,000 persons with segments from a

variety of nations who retain traditions of their country

of origin.

There are five principal independent colleges in the

Lehigh Valley besides Lehigh. They are Lafayette,

DeSales University, Moravian, Muhlenberg, and Cedar

Crest. A cooperative program is maintained that allows

cross-registration for courses as well as shared cultural

events. There are also two community colleges in the

area.

In August 1984, Bethlehem held its first Musikfest, a

10-day annual festival that features a variety of musical

performances and ethnic foods. An instant success,

Musikfest was the brainchild of Jeffrey A. Parks, a lawyer

and 1970 Lehigh graduate.

Library and Technology

Services

The exponential growth and increasing sophistication of

information technology offer new and exciting opportu-

nities for enhanced teaching, learning, and research. At

Lehigh University, one merged organization called

Library and Technology Services (LTS) delivers commu-

nications, computing, distance education administration,

enterprise systems implementation, library, and media

services to capitalize on these new opportunities.

Additional information about Library and Technology

Services, can be found at www.lehigh.edu/lts.

Libraries

Lehigh University has two major facilities, the

Linderman Library and the Fairchild-Martindale Library.

The Lehigh University library collection comprises over

one million volumes and subscriptions to more than

25,000 periodicals, many of them in electronic format.

The historic Linderman Library has reopened after an

extensive renovation that created a laboratory and show-

case for humanities programs and collections, as well as

an intellectual center for the campus at large. The 1878

high Victorian rotunda and the 1929 grand reading

room were retained in all their magnificence. Among the

new features are: four seminar rooms, a computer class-

room, a quiet study space, five group studies, a cafe, and

wireless throughout. Linderman houses books and jour-

nals in the humanities and Lehigh’s impressive collection

of rare books including Darwin’s Origin of Species and

James John Audubon’s four-volume elephant folio edi-

tion of Birds of America. Eleven digital library projects

highlight various aspects of the collection, ranging from

“Digital Bridges” (books on 19th century bridge con-

struction) to “Beyond Steel” (materials examining the

social and cultural impact of the Lehigh Valley’s industri-

al past). In addition Special Collections holds some 30

separate archival collections that focus on industrial and

regional history.

The Fairchild-Martindale Library contains books, jour-

nals, newspapers, audio-visual resources, and microform

collections in all branches of science, engineering, math-

ematics, and the social sciences, including business and

education. It provides collaborative learning spaces, wire-

less connectivity, and comfortable lounge areas. As a

government depository, the Fairchild-Martindale Library

holds more than 235,000 printed federal and

Pennsylvania documents, as well as additional govern-

ment publications on microform.

The “MyLibrary” tab on the campus portal offers stu-

dents, faculty, and staff a full range of electronic indexes,

reference works, full text databases, and image databases

customized for their disciplines, easily accessible from on

and off campus. Lehigh’s own online catalog (named

ASA after Lehigh founder Asa Packer) provides direct

links to electronic resources. Personalized interlibrary

loan software (“Illiad”) allows for easy borrowing from

collections in other libraries and offers a gateway to

request desktop delivery of scanned articles in Lehigh’s

print journal collection (JSCAN). Twenty-six million

books in Pennsylvania’s largest academic libraries may be

identified immediately for quick borrowing through a

shared online catalog. Students and faculty may borrow

books directly from other academic libraries in the

Lehigh Valley.

Networking and Voice Communications

Lehigh University is a “wired” campus in every sense of

the word. A high-speed fiber optic backbone network

ties together campus buildings and student residences,

including fraternities and sororities. The Campus Portal

allows each member of the Lehigh community to fully

customize their access to web-based information and

applications. Student computer use in the residences is

supported by the WIRED program. Staff communicate

with students in advance of their arrival at Lehigh to

identify for them compatible hardware and software for

use on the campus network. When students bring their

computers to campus, staff assist them with their initial

setup and provide continuing assistance with any net-

working problems throughout the semester. The front

line WIRED consultants are well-trained students who

live in the residences and can readily provide prompt,

on-site assistance. See www.lehigh.edu/wired.

Lehigh also provides secure wireless connectivity in many

campus settings – see www.lehigh.edu/wireless. Through

Lehigh’s enterprise systems, convenient interactive servic-

es such as online course registration and online grades

are offered to students. There is also a parent portal con-

figured to parent’s needs and interests. Library and

Technology Services supports a telephone system.

Computing

Providing technology and consulting services to support

classroom teaching, laboratories, and other aspects of the

academic and research programs is a strategic priority for

Lehigh University. About 600 microcomputers (PCs and

Apple personal computers) are distributed across campus

for convenient use by students at more than 24 comput-

ing sites. For example, there are more than one hundred

computers in the libraries and computing center, and

another hundred in Rauch Business Center. A twenty-

four hour site at Grace Hall has 30+ machines. There are

portable laptops equipped with wireless networking

available for short-term loan at the Libraries and at the

Media Center.

Students and faculty have access to site-licensed software

applications and central file space from the campus sites

or their residence facility. LTS provides software at public

sites such as desk top publishing and graphics software,

programming languages, mathematical and statistical

packages, and specialized applications for engineering,

scientific publishing, and creative writing.

Lehigh provides a variety of high performance computing

options suitable for research and computer-intensive

applications. Among them are: blade servers, a multi-

processor central compute server, Beowulf clusters, and a

Condor grid to utilize cycles on workstations and other

resources. For more information, see www.lehigh.edu/com-

puting/hpc. University computing capacity and Internet

bandwidth are constantly being increased to meet escalat-

ing demand and the campus is also connected to the

research-based Internet2 network.

The Technology Resource Learning Center supports facul-

ty innovation-see the Faculty Development section of this

catalog for details. Library and Technology Services pro-

20 Lehigh University Course Catalog 2009-2010

II. University Resources

University Resources 21

vides technical support for the many computer classrooms,

suitable for individual “hands-on” instruction. 85% of all

Lehigh University classrooms are equipped with perma-

nently-installed computer projection systems. Laptops and

portable computer projectors are available through

Instructional Media Services to enable faculty or students

to give computer-based presentations in any space.

Instructional Media Services

Instructional Media Services operates two facilities in

Fairchild Library to provide students with access to and

instruction in a wide range of media resources: the

Media Center and the Digital Media Studio. The Media

Center offers media resources, scanners, and color print-

ers. Resources include audio, video, and electronic media

and the equipment and viewing spaces needed for their

use. More than 5,000 videos and DVDs are available for

viewing or short-term loan, and the Center coordinates

their acquisition for classroom use. The Media Center is

also the location of Lehigh’s Technology Resource

Learning Center which offers faculty the services of

instructional designers and the use of a high technology

demonstration classroom with Internet2 teleconferencing

capability.

The Digital Media Studio offers students and faculty

consulting assistance, a graphics training lab, and a wide

range of technology to support the creation of profes-

sional audio, graphic, and video materials for classroom

presentations, projects, and portfolios. Students can scan

and edit text, photographs, and these images can be out-

put to printers or to computer files for further

manipulation. Digital still and video cameras, a video

and photography studio, and editing software facilitate

the production of audio and video material to support

the academic program.

A third media facility, the International Multimedia

Resource Center (IMRC), is located in nearby Maginnes

Hall. The IMRC helps train students to produce web-

based, graphic, video projects and consults with faculty

to adapt new approaches to educational technology. It

conducts workshops in web-authoring and multimedia

production, and includes flexible seating, a web-capture

whiteboard, scanners, a slide scanner, computer and

viewing stations, as well as the technology to support it

as the campus broadcasting hub. The adjacent World

View Room is used for viewing multimedia, cable and

satellite programming.

Student Services

The library, computing center, and most distributed com-

puting facilities are open seven days per week and for

evening hours during the fall and spring semesters. For

most of these hours, a help desk located at the Fairchild-

Martindale Library provides general help for students and

faculty on-site and for telephone inquiries relating to

both library research and computing. Help desk staff refer

more specialized questions to experts as needed.

Students may also take advantage of virtual help desks

where they enter the questions or problems relating to

library research, computing hardware or software, or

telecommunications at any hour of the day or night for

response at a later time, usually within one working day.

Most library and computing services are available elec-

tronically; for example, requests for books to be recalled,

film rental requests, and seminar registrations. “Live

chat” library reference and computing help services are

also available during many hours.

Each semester Library and Technology Services offers an

extensive program of seminars and course-based instruc-

tional sessions for students. Attendees learn how to use

software applications, the extensive print and electronic

library resources, and the Web-authoring tools. LTS pro-

fessionals work closely with faculty to integrate library,

computing and media resources into the curriculum.

They facilitate the use of course management software,

online courses of various kinds, and course projects in a

wide range of disciplines using interactive Web sites cre-

ated by faculty and students.

Through seminars and policies on the use of print and

electronic resources, students are taught computer ethics,

recommended computing practices such as frequent

backup and password changes, and an understanding

and respect for state and federal laws governing copy-

right, privacy, and destruction or vandalism of library

resources or computer systems, networks, databases or

software. A free electronic newsletter, LTS Digest, with

quick tips and updates is published throughout the year

and is available to students who subscribe.

Library and Technology Services maintains a variety of

facilities for printing, copying, and duplicating within

the constraints of copyright. In the library, public photo-

copiers and microform printers are maintained for

convenience in copying print or microform resources.

The Digital Media Studio (described under Instructional

Media Services) can duplicate audio and video resources.

At present there are free printers at most public sites.

Students are strongly encouraged to print responsibly to

minimize waste and environmental impact. Lehigh pro-

vides education to assist in this effort; for instance, use

duplexing, never print multiple copies, examine docu-

ments and eliminate unneeded sections before printing.

Student Employment

Student assistants are essential for the operation of most

Library and Technology Services functions. Working for

LTS, students gain valuable skills and good work habits.

At the job fair held each fall there are opportunities to

learn in-depth about the jobs available.

Art Galleries – Museum Operation

The Lehigh University Art Galleries are visual laborato-

ries that maintain and develop the university’s

permanent art collection, and present temporary exhibi-

tions designed to make visual literacy a result of the

university learning experience. More than twenty exhibi-

tions a year in six campus galleries introduce students

and the community to current topics in art, architecture,

history, science, and technology. The exhibition schedule

is supplemented by lectures, films, workshops, and

research opportunities in the permanent collection. The

galleries occupy exhibition, storage, office and workshop

space in several campus locations. The Upper Gallery

and Lower Gallery permanent exhibitions are in the

Zoellner Arts Center. Maginnes Hall houses the DuBois

Gallery, the Gallery at Rauch Business Center, the

Girdler Student Gallery is in the University Center, and

the Siegel Gallery is in Iacocca Hall on the mountaintop

campus. The Muriel and Philip Berman Sculpture

Gardens are located on Memorial Walkway and on the

mountaintop campus, and Saucon Fields on the Murray

H. Goodman campus. The Ralph L. Wilson Study

Gallery and Open Storage facility is located in Building

J, mountaintop campus and available by appointment.

LUAG offices are in the Zoellner Arts Center.

22 Lehigh University Course Catalog 2009-2010

Exhibitions

Exhibitions and gallery events supplement formal class-

room study in the visual arts, create educational

opportunities for the entire student body, and enrich the

cultural life of the campus and the community at large.

The annual schedule includes the exhibition of works

from the permanent collection, the use of borrowed

objects, and traveling exhibitions on loan from major

museums and cultural institutions. Experts in various

fields serve as guest curators of special project exhibi-

tions. Interdepartmental projects encourage increased

involvement by faculty and students. Undergraduates

may take advantage of courses in museum studies

including internship and independent study in the col-

lection.

Collections

Lehigh University’s permanent art collection is a

work/study collection intended as a resource for students

pursuing formal study in the visual arts and/or museum

studies, for the faculty, and for interested members of the

community. Each year, several exhibitions are prepared

from the collection and works are loaned to major muse-

ums throughout the nation.

The permanent art collection consists of a variety of

works by Old Masters and contemporary artists.

Important collection groups include: the Marion B.

Grace Collection of European Paintings (Gainsborough,

Reynolds, Goya, Hobbema, Hoppner, and others); the

Dreyfus Collection of French Paintings (Bonnard, Sisley,

Vuillard, Courbet); the Ralph L. Wilson Collection of

American Art (paintings by Prendergast, Sloan, Henri,

Lawson, Bellows, Davies, Burchfield; prints by Whistler,

Hassam, Motherwell, Johns, Rauschenberg, Calder,

Warhol); the Prasse Collection of Prints (Delacroix,

Matisse, Renoir, Kent, Kunyoshi, Rivera); the Philip and

Muriel Berman Collection of Contemporary Sculpture

(Kadishman, Unger, Tumarkin, Bertoia, Shaw and Segal).

Also, the Fearnside Collection of European Old Master

Prints and Drawings; the Baker Collection of Chinese

Porcelains; the Langermann Collection of Pre-

Columbian and Ethnographic Sculpture; the Mr. and

Mrs. Franklin H. Williams African Collection (gold

weights of the Akan and West African objects); the

Lehigh University Photography Collection (Fox-Talbot,

Warhol, Jackson, Atget, Steiner, Mendieta, Kasebier,

Brandt, Siskind, Clark, Martinez-Canas, Serrano); and

the Lehigh University Contemporary Prints and

Drawings Collection (Bearden, Rivers, Soto, Roth,

Ruscha, Tobey, Calder, Kitaj, Marca-Relli, Cruz Azaceta,

Segal, Lam, Picasso, Warhol, Llinas, Golub, Jimenez,

Piper, Simpson).

Faculty Development

Lehigh’s Faculty Development Program aims to foster

excellence in teaching and learning by providing faculty

with tools, development opportunities, workshops, and

consultation services.

As part of the Lehigh Lab—Lehigh’s award-winning

campus-wide initiative to advance the adoption of inno-

vative technologies and techniques that enhance

teaching, learning, and research—Faculty Development

works closely with the other divisions of Library and

Technology Services to provide a coordinated array of

support for faculty. Central to the Lehigh Lab is the

Technology Resource Learning Center (TRLC) located

in the Fairchild-Martindale Library Media Center, where

faculty can learn more about academic uses of technolo-

gy. Faculty are encouraged to arrange a visit to the

TRLC or the Digital Media Studio if they wish to

receive guidance, assistance, and training with instruc-

tional technology projects at any stage of development.

The Director of Faculty Development also offers confi-

dential, voluntary consultations to faculty about their

teaching, which may include discussions of effective

approaches to teaching, classroom observation visits,

informal mid-semester evaluations of classes, assistance

with course development questions, and advice on the

effective incorporation of academic technology into

courses. In addition, the Writing Across the Curriculum

Coordinator is available for meetings with faculty, indi-

vidually or departmentally, for discussions about the

effective use of writing assignments to teach disciplinary

subject matter and communication skills.

Dr. Gregory Reihman, Director of Faculty Development,

may be contacted at 610-758-6840 or [email protected].

Dr. Gregory Skutches, Writing Across the Curriculum

Coordinator, may be contacted at 610-758-4932 or

[email protected]. The Faculty Development web site

is accessible at www.lehigh.edu/~infdli.

Lehigh University Press

Lehigh University Press represents a clear expression of

faculty and institutional commitment to the advance-

ment of scholarship. Press management rests with a

Director, Scott Paul Gordon (English), and with an

Editorial Board comprised of university faculty.

The Press is interested in all fine scholarship, but has

strength in several areas: Studies in Eighteenth-Century

America and the Transatlantic World, and Science,

Technology, and Society. By linking the name of the uni-

versity to a list of exemplary work by scholars across the

nation, the Press reinforces the value of excellence in

scholarship for faculty, graduate, and undergraduate stu-

dents alike. Recent publications by the Press have won

national awards, including Peter Coates, The Trans-

Alaska Pipeline Controversy (1991: W. Turrentine Jackson

Award of the Western History Association) and Patricia

D’Antonio, Founding Friends: Families, Staff, and Patients

at the Friends Asylum in Early Nineteenth-Century

Philadelphia (2006: The American Journal of Nursing‘s

Book of the Year).

Recent publications include: Priscilla H. Roberts and

Richard S. Roberts, Thomas Barclay (1728-1793): Consul

in France, Diplomat in Barbary; Dennis W. Brandt,

Pathway to Hell: A Tragedy of the American Civil War;

Carrol L. Fry, Cinema of the Occult: New Age, Satanism,

Wicca, and Spiritualism in Film; Douglas Charles Kane,

Arda Reconstructed: The Creation of the Published

Silmarillion; Jewel A. Smith, Music, Women, and Pianos

in Antebellum Bethlehem, Pennsylvania, The Moravian

Young Ladies’ Seminary; Jean R. Soderland and Catherine

S. Parsynski, Backcountry Crucibles: The Lehigh Valley

from Settlement to Steel; Nikki Shehpardson, Burning

Zeal: The Rhetoric of Martyrdom and the Protestant

Community in Reformation France, 1520-1570; Erica

Obey, The Wunderkammer of Lady Charlotte Guest;

Charles K. Jones, Francis Johnson (1792-1844): Chronicle

of a Black Musician in Nineteenth-Century Philadelphia;

Steven Craig Harper, Promised Land: Penn’s Holy

Experiment, The Walking Purchase, and the Dispossession of

Delawares, 1600-1763; Kathleen L. Lodwick, The

Widow’s Quest: The Byers Extraterritorial Case in Hainan,

China, 1924-1925.

University Resources 23

For more information, contact Lehigh University Press,

Lehigh University, B040 Christmas-Saucon Hall, 14 East

Packer Avenue, Bethlehem, PA 18015. Phone: 610 758-

3933. Fax: 610 758-6331. Website:

www.lehigh.edu/~inpress/.

Resources for Students

The central mission of the Division of Student Affairs is

to foster student success both inside and outside of the

classroom. The Division of Student Affairs is comprised

of the many departments listed below that can be impor-

tant resources for students.

The Dean of Students Office is comprised of four major

areas: Campus Living, Campus Involvement and

Leadership, Academic Life and Student Transitions, and

Advocacy and Equity.

Campus Living: Because Lehigh values the residential

living and learning experience, all first-year and sopho-

more students are required to live on campus. While

juniors and seniors are permitted to live off campus,

many of them choose to remain living on campus in

apartment-style housing or fraternity and sorority hous-

es. Students find they make close affiliations through

their living environment as well as have the opportunity

to participate in a variety of educational, social, and per-

sonal development programs. The residential setting

supported by six live-in professional residence life coordi-

nators, and approximately 90 undergraduate residence

assistants, known as Gryphons.

Campus Involvement and Leadership: The Offices of

Student Activities, Community Service, Leadership

Development, and Student Center Facilities provide a

vast array of opportunities and options for students to be

involved and engaged on campus, while learning impor-

tant life skills. There are nearly 150 student-run clubs

and organizations, several leadership development pro-

grams, an experiential leadership training Ropes

Challenge Course, and many peer leadership training

experiences. Annually Lehigh students have been known

to provide nearly 50,000 hours of service. A diverse

offering of programs includes America Reads/America

Counts tutoring, Alternative Spring Break service trips,

and Service Roundtables.

Academic Life and Student Transitions: No matter how

accomplished the student, the university experience can

present an entirely new set of academic challenges. The

Office of Academic Support, The Center for Academic

Success, Office of the First-Year Experience, The Center

for Writing and Math, and Support Services for Students

with Disabilities are all available to assist students in

achieving academic success. These offices provide peer

tutoring, peer mentoring, academic counseling and

coaching, time management skills, study skills, and a

variety of transition programs such as new student orien-

tation.

Advocacy and Equity: The Office of Multicultural

Affairs, the Women’s Center, and LGBTQA Services all

work collaboratively with students, faculty and staff to

foster a welcoming, accepting campus environment.

Students create and participate in the numerous educa-

tional, social, and cultural programs and events that

enrich our campus. In addition, these departments serve

in the advocacy capacity for the diverse needs of our

campus community.

University Counseling and Psychological Services: The

college years are optimally a time of exploration, change,

inquiry and growth. In addition, students may experi-

ence crisis situations, transitions, stress, anxiety and

adjustments. The UCPS provides a number of confiden-

tial services including individual and group counseling

to assist students in all stages of development, interper-

sonal, and intra-personal issues.

University Health and Wellness Center: Students who

need assistance with their physical well-being, preventa-

tive health care measures, and health education, will find

a fully trained professional staff available to assist them.

The center is staffed by physicians, nurses, nurse practi-

tioners, and wellness educators.

Alcohol, Drugs, and Other Lifestyle Choices

Programs

Alcohol, drugs, and other lifestyle choices programs,

education, and services are integrated into many aspects

of student life. Much of this work is coordinated and

provided by the Office of Counseling and Psychological

Services (610-758-3880). Web based (see Counseling

Services Site) and direct services are provided for a wide

range of issues ranging from wellness and health to mat-

ters of substance use and misuse. Because members of

the Lehigh community recognize that substance abuse

and chemical dependency can significantly affect student

lives, educational programs are designed to encourage

peak performance and avoid high-risk behavior.

Confidential individual and group counseling and con-

sultation services are available to students who find

themselves having problems because of their own sub-

stance use, or related to friends and/or family members

having similar problems. Appointments for alcohol,

drug, and other addiction services are easily made by

calling the office of Counseling and Psychological

Services at 610-758-3880 or by visiting the 4th floor of

Johnson Hall during office hours (8:00 a.m. to 5:00

p.m. with some additional evening hours), Monday

through Friday.

Theme weeks and sponsored outreach programs such as

Alcohol and Drug Awareness Week and National

Alcohol Screening Day provide educational programs on

a variety of addiction and peak performance topics.

Consultation for peer education is also available to stu-

dents creating programs and planning interventions.

Intervention services include training programs for

Residence Life staff, peer educator groups, athletes, stu-

dents referred by the Dean of Students office, and other

members of the Lehigh community. Individual and

group counseling is provided by the office of Counseling

and Psychological Services. Students who struggle with

defining their own values regarding substance use and

other addictions (i.e., gambling, internet) are encouraged

to clarify and process their beliefs in a safe and confiden-

tial environment. On-campus counseling may allow

students to successfully enter into recovery (i.e., from

alcoholism or chemical dependency) without having to

disrupt their university careers. If a student cannot

accomplish this on campus, referrals to in-patient or out-

patient treatment programs can be made. Aftercare

services can be provided once the student returns to

campus, utilizing on-campus counseling or by referral to

12-step group meetings (such as A.A. and N.A). These

meetings are held on campus and in the surrounding

community. Referral to other treatment programs, com-

munity service programs, and programs associated with

the court system can also be facilitated by various offices

within Student Affairs.

24 Lehigh University Course Catalog 2009-2010

Disability Support Services

In accordance with the federal legislation, specifically

Section 504 of the Rehabilitation Act of 1973 and the

recently amended Americans with Disabilities Act

(2008), Lehigh University is committed to ensuring

equal access to students who are substantially limited by

a disability. Services for students with a documented dis-

ability who are in need of academic support services are

coordinated by the Dean of Students Office (610-758-

4152). Services for students with physical disabilities

who require assistance with nonacademic needs are coor-

dinated by the Dean of Students Office, in conjunction

with Facilities Services (610-758-4159). Students

requesting accommodations must present the University

with current and comprehensive documentation. For

more information refer to our website at:

http://www.lehigh.edu/~inacsup/disabilities/

Health & Wellness Center

The university offers health services to all students at the

Health Center in Johnson Hall. During the fall and

spring semesters, physicians and nurse practitioners are

available to see patients from 8:15 a.m. to 4:45 p.m.

Monday to Friday. A registered nurse is present to see

patients on Saturday 10:00 a.m. to 2 p.m. with a

provider on call. During breaks, hours are shortened.

The Health Center staff treats a variety of illnesses and

injuries. Gynecologic care is available by appointment.

Allergy injections can be administered. Some minor sur-

gery is performed at the Health Center. Many laboratory

studies can be done at the Health Center; students are

referred to local facilities for X-rays. Patients are referred

to local medical and surgical specialists when indicated.

More seriously ill students are sent to a general hospital.

Prior to arrival on campus, each new or transfer student

must submit to the Health Center a completed health

history form, and updated immunization record. A

recent physical examination is required if a student plans

to participate in varsity athletics.

Following enrollment, additional examinations are pro-

vided by the Health Center for students participating in

intercollegiate athletic programs, and when required for

graduate school or academic programs.

There is no charge for most of the care provided to stu-

dents. Some exceptions are as follows: referrals to

physicians, hospitals, or other medical facilities outside

the student Health Center, and medications not carried

by the Health Center which require prescriptions. A low-

cost university-sponsored insurance plan is available,

which complements the services of the Health Center.

Expenses covered include costs for services that are not

available at the Health Center, such as X-rays, laboratory

studies, consultant fees, and medications not stocked by

the Center. Hospital expenses are also covered. Students

are urged to check with their parents regarding existing

insurance coverage and to consider purchasing the uni-

versity-sponsored plan if they are not adequately covered.

Please consult your insurance carrier or physician if your

plan is of the managed care/preferred provider type.

For more information, please consult our web page at

www.lehigh.edu/health.

Counseling and Psychological Service

The University Counseling and Psychological Service, at

610-758-3880, is located on the fourth floor of Johnson

Hall. The office is open from 8:00 - 5:00 (with some

additional evening hours), Monday through Friday.

Most services are free of charge. Counselors are available

for 24-hour emergency consultations via campus police

(610-758-4200).

I. Philosophy & Mission

The University Counseling and Psychological

Service (UCPS) is dedicated to the belief that a per-

son’s college years are a time of challenge, inquiry,

experimentation, productivity and change. Services

are designed to help students not only manage

crises, but to thrive in meaningful ways . . . to grow

in self-understanding in order to make more satisfy-

ing and better use of their personal and

interpersonal resources. Individual contacts, group

therapy, faculty and staff consultation, and numer-

ous outreach activities are some of the primary

means by which the mission is accomplished. UCPS

staff members are committed to providing assistance

to all registered Lehigh students interested in per-

sonal, social, and academic growth and discovery,

and to the larger campus community through con-

sultation, teaching, research, and various other types

of involvement.

II. Direct Services

To accomplish its mission, and while upholding the

established state and APA (American Psychological

Association) ethical principles and code of conduct

for psychologists, the UCPS provides a variety of

services to the Lehigh University community includ-

ing:

• Crisis Intervention Services

The UCPS provides assistance to individuals and

groups in crisis. Psychologists provide 24-hour cover-

age through the campus dispatcher (call dispatcher at

758-4200 and ask for psychologist on call).

• Group and Individual Psychotherapy

UCPS staff members provide group and individual

counseling and psychotherapy services to both under-

graduate and graduate students. A short-term

treatment model is used for individual work while

much of the group work is of longer duration.

Referrals for psychiatric consultation are made when

requested and appropriate. All counseling and therapy

services within the UCPS are confidential.

• Outreach Programming

The UCPS provides programming focused on the

developmental needs of college students—designed to

enhance the capacity of students to maximize their

personal, social, and academic potential. These pre-

sentations occur in various settings, including living

residences, classrooms, athletic sites, and meeting

rooms across the university. Topics may include issues

related to race, eating and body image, sexuality,

drinking and other drug use, study styles, athletic per-

formance, grieving, stress, and relationships. Some of

this programming may include partnership with

UCPS sponsored student peer education groups.

• Assessment and Evaluation

Upon request and when appropriate, UCPS personnel

administer and use personality and career exploration

instruments. They also utilize a wide variety of assess-

ment tools when assisting groups and individual

students.

University Resources 25

• Consultation Services

Staff members provide consultative services to the

university community with the objective of helping

students, faculty and staff identify and resolve difficul-

ties that may be exerting a negative effect on some

individual, group, or system. This may include the

use of referral resources within the university or in the

local community.

• Training

One component of UCPS work is to help persons

such as residence life staff, peer counselors, university

personnel, student leaders, and faculty more effective-

ly advise, counsel, interact and communicate with

others. A second component is to enhance the devel-

opment of persons specifically interested in securing

the identity and skills of a psychologist - these typical-

ly being advanced graduate students, doctoral level

interns, and professional staff.

• Advocacy

Staff of the UCPS advocate for those students and

groups who struggle for understanding and respect in

a society sometimes blinded by traditional norms and

expectations. Through dialogue, education, program-

ming, consultation, and direct service, the staff is

committed to being engaged with issues such as

racism, sexism, and other practices that destroy self

and group esteem.

Center for Academic Success: University Center

403

Mastering time management, study skills appropriate for

college level courses, as well as specific subject matter is

imperative for academic success. The Center for Aca-

demic Success provides undergraduate and graduate

tutors for most first and second year courses as well as

study skills strategies and presentations to individual stu-

dents and student groups. Center staff members work

closely with other Academic Support Services to ensure

that students are supported in their academic endeavors.

The Writing and Math Center: 110 Drown

Success at Lehigh depends, in part, on mastery of a

number of advanced academic skills. The Writing and

Math Center supports these vital academic abilities, pro-

viding trained consultants in writing and math. The

Center provides individual or small group tutoring for

students enrolled in undergraduate math courses, and

writing consultation for students and for the Lehigh

community. Tutoring and consultations are provided by

graduate students and faculty; the service is free of

charge.

Career Services

One function of a college education is to foster the

growth and development of the student to prepare for a

meaningful and satisfying life after college. Lehigh pro-

vides career planning services for undergraduate and

graduate students as an integral part of the career devel-

opment process.

Career planning can best be described as an educational

process through which students (1) identify and develop

their abilities, aptitudes, and interests; (2) learn the rela-

tionship between their capabilities and interests, their

university experiences, and professional opportunities

outside the university; and (3) prepare for those oppor-

tunities.

Career Services assists students through the process of

researching targeted organizations that provide the types

of work desired, interviewing for specific positions

through which career or professional interests can be sat-

isfied, and then selecting from the available options the

one that best meets the student’s needs. This part of the

process requires students to develop skills in such areas as

effective resume and cover letter writing, interviewing

techniques, and individual job search strategies to

enhance productive interactions with employers.

The goals of this process are: to enable Lehigh students

to think of themselves as educated individuals with skills

and abilities of value to employers; to think in terms of

functional responsibilities rather than simply linking

major subjects to jobs; to acquire and develop the skills

necessary to become self-reliant and informed decision-

makers; to prepare for a competitive job market; and to

develop the potential to become self-reliant managers of

their own careers.

The Office of Career Services is committed to the prepa-

ration and education of all Lehigh students during the

transition from the academic environment to the work

place. Career Services offers the following resources and

services to help students prepare for professional oppor-

tunities after graduation:

Career Counseling. Students may meet with professional

counselors to discuss their career options and goals, indi-

vidual job-search strategies, effective interviewing, and

related interests. Self-assessment tools are available to

assist students in identifying interests, skills and values.

Peer Educators. Peer Educators are student volunteers

who have applied and interviewed to be trained to pro-

vide career assistance to their peers. Peer Educators are

available throughout the semester to students who walk

in with quick questions regarding resume assistance, the

LUCIE system, library resources, and general job search-

ing help.

Career Resources. Among the resources available in the

Career Library are books and articles on career planning,

current information on career opportunities, occupation-

al information, graduate school resources, job search

directories, a library of employer literature, and a data-

base of alumni contacts who have volunteered to assist

students with their job search strategies. Students may

obtain a free Career Planning Guide that describes how

to use the on-campus interviewing system, prepare for

interviews and plant/office visits, write resumes and let-

ters, and develop individual strategies.

Workshops and Special Programs. Throughout the year

counselors conduct a variety of seminars and presenta-

tions in collaboration with academic departments,

professional societies, living groups, and other interested

campus organizations. Workshops are offered on resume

writing, interviewing techniques, networking, career

portfolios, job searching and internet strategies. Special

programs are conducted each semester, including career

panels and mini career classes.

Experiential Education. Experiential Education programs

are designed to enable Lehigh students to make educated

decisions about career choices. Through participation in

these programs, students gain firsthand knowledge and

experience in a particular career field. Experiential

Education programs include: internships, part-time posi-

tions, externships and cooperative education.

26 Lehigh University Course Catalog 2009-2010

On-Campus Interviewing. Career Services works with

over 200 organizations that interview on campus each

year. Students utilize web-based software called LUCIE

(Lehigh University Career Information Exchange) to

view job openings, apply for positions using an on-line

resume and sign-up electronically for specific interview

times. Employers interview undergraduate and graduate

candidates from all four colleges. Each year the OCI

program is kicked off by a Career Fair that showcases

nearly 200 employers interested in recruiting Lehigh stu-

dents.

LUCIE. LUCIE is a searchable job listing database avail-

able on Career Service’s Web Page at

www.lehigh.edu/careerservices. Job openings for intern-

ships, full-time and advanced-level positions can be

searched by employer, location, job function, or major.

Undergraduates and graduate students from all four col-

leges will find listings related to their fields of study.

Pre-professional Advising. The pre-professional advisor,

along with a faculty advisory committee, provides infor-

mation and guidance to candidates pursuing careers in

medicine, dentistry, and other health professions, includ-

ing individualized advising, special programs on

health-related topics and field trips. In addition, infor-

mation and assistance is provided for students interested

in law school and legal careers.

The office is open throughout the year. The main phone

number is (610)-758-3710 and the website is

www.lehigh.edu/careerservices.

Office of Fellowship Advising

The Office of Fellowship Advising (OFA) helps Lehigh

undergraduates apply for competitive national fellow-

ships and scholarships. It publicizes opportunities,

oversees the selection of candidates for awards that

require university nomination and, with the assistance of

Fellowship Advisors, guides students through frequently

complicated application procedures.

The OFA web-site (http://www.lehigh.edu/~inofa/) con-

tains descriptions of more than two hundred fellowships

and scholarships, with links to the foundations’ official

sites. The descriptions are divided into three categories.

“Undergraduate Awards“ are grants which students hold

before taking their bachelor’s degrees and, in a few cases,

during the summer following graduation. “Graduate

Awards” are fellowships for which students apply either

as seniors or as graduate students. Other sections of the

site provide three types of information: the latest news

and deadlines of the major awards; advice about how to

present an effective application; and a compendium of

publications, databases, and web-sites pertaining to

awards in general.

Similar information is contained in the OFA’s booklet

National Fellowships and Scholarships, which is published

annually. Copies of the booklet and further information

about awards can be obtained from the OFA’s director,

Ian Duffy ([email protected]).

Special Academic Programs

Distance Education

The University’s distance education program provides

graduate degree and certificate programs, individual

graduate credit courses, and non-credit professional pro-

gramming through use of two cutting-edge technologies:

real-time satellite broadcasts over the Lehigh Educational

Satellite Network (LESN), or over the Internet (LESN-

Online). To provide the best educational experience for

our students, supplemental tools may be used, including

podcasts, live web-based conferencing, videoconferenc-

ing, Internet2, DVD, and CD, and Blackboard, Lehigh’s

course management system. You may even have an

opportunity to network on Lehigh’s Second Life Island.

Working professionals pursue their educational goals in a

manageable and convenient part-time schedule.

Satellite degree programs include Biological Chemical

Engineering, Chemistry, Chemical Engineering,

Information Systems Engineering, Manufacturing

Systems Engineering, Mechanical Engineering,

Molecular Biology, Quality Engineering, Polymer

Science and Engineering, and the MBA. Certificate pro-

grams in Chemistry, Engineering, and Business are also

available. Satellite courses are transmitted to corporate,

educational, private or community partner receive-sites.

Admission standards and course requirements are the

same for distance and on-campus students, and distance

education students receive the same transcripts and are

awarded the same degrees.

LESN-Online, using a broadband Internet format, pro-

vides programming to distance students utilizing both

synchronous and asynchronous streaming media in both

Windows Media or RealMedia, Online programs include

non-credit professional and technical short courses; indi-

vidual credit courses; credit/non-credit certificate

programs, including Regulatory Affairs, Analytical

Chemistry, BioOrganic Chemistry, Supply Chain

Management, and Project Management. Master degree

programs available fully online include, Chemistry,

Manufacturing Systems Engineering, and Mechanical

Engineering.

For specific information on programs and course offer-

ings, admissions, registration, and technical system

requirements, visit the distance education website at

www.distance.lehigh.edu or call (610) 758-4372.

University Resources 27

Summer Studies

The Lehigh summer sessions program has been in exis-

tence for more than a century and is still a vibrant piece

of the Lehigh experience. Opportunities abound at

Lehigh in the summer with more than 200 diverse

courses offered on campus, study abroad programs in

exciting international locales such as Prague, Belgium,

Shanghai, and Ireland, as well as a field camp in the

Rocky Mountains. We also offer an ever-increasing array

of web-based courses, ranging from basic subjects such as

Principles of Economics and Financial Accounting to eclec-

tic topics including Beyond Google-Internet Research,

Technical Writing for Engineers, Early American Scandals,

and Sociology of Cyberspace, just to name a few. In addi-

tion, there are many courses available, appropriate for

rising high school seniors, allowing them to get a jump-

start on their college career. For more information, visit

the summer sessions website at www.lehigh.edu/summers-

essions, see us on Facebook or call (610) 758-3966.

Continuing Education

Lehigh University departments and research centers offer

a varied selection of non-credit continuing education

programs for adults. Reflecting Lehigh’s traditional edu-

cational strengths, these offerings focus on professional

development, organizational problem solving, and tech-

nical skills. They carry no regular academic credit, but

participants can often earn some form of continuing

education credential.

Lehigh continuing education programs are designed to

meet specific needs. Contents, schedules, and timing are

adapted to effectively serve the audiences for which they

have been developed. Apart from programs presented on

the Lehigh campus, a number of seminars are available

for “in-house” presentation to organizations on a con-

tract basis. For more information about these programs,

contact the appropriate department or research center.

International English Language Center

(IELC)

For ESL students who want to improve their ability to

use and comprehend English on-campus and off-campus

in formal and informal settings.

The ESL International English Language Center pro-

vides private English language tutoring for

undergraduate and graduate international students and

their spouses wanting to improve theiEnglish skills in all

skill areas: academic and conversational speaking, listen-

ing, reading, writing and grammar, and test preparation

for the SPEAK, TOEFL, GRE and GMAT.

The ESL Language Center is located in the ESL

Department Office in Coxe Hall, Room 204. Contact

the ESL office for more information: (610) 758-6099 or

email [email protected]. Also, please visit our website for

online English assistance and information

www.lehigh.edu/~inesl/ELLC

28 Lehigh University Course Catalog 2009-2010

III. Undergraduate Studies

taken at Lehigh or in Lehigh residency programs. All

special second degree programs must be approved by the

dean of the college in which the degree is to be offered

and the Standing of Students Committee.

Advisement

Every undergraduate is assigned a faculty adviser.

Undeclared majors in the College of Business and

Economics are assigned to the undergraduate adviser and

a student mentor. Until the major is declared, assistance

is also available through the dean’s office of the college in

which the student is enrolled. When the major has been

chosen, a faculty member from the major department

will act as the academic adviser.

This adviser is one of the most valuable resources in the

educational process, not only to assist in making aca-

demic selections to match the student’s particular

background, interests, and future objectives, but also to

identify program options, to work out an academic pace,

and to develop career planning strategies. The adviser

will help to identify other resources and support systems

available at the university, such as The Learning Center,

the counseling service, and the Office of Career Services.

Guide to Academic Rules and

Regulations

The university has adopted over the years numerous

rules and regulations. Some of the principal rules and

regulations are given here so that currently enrolled and

potential undergraduates and graduate students will be

apprised of what is expected of them, and what they can

expect of the university.

This section concerns academic regulations. Additional

regulations can be found in the Lehigh Handbook, and

there is a comprehensive statement of all policy in the

publication Rules and Procedures of the Faculty. All stu-

dents are given a Handbook at the beginning of the fall

semester; Rules and Procedures is available on Lehigh’s

website.

Eligibility for Degree

In order to be graduated, a candidate for a baccalaureate

degree must achieve a minimum cumulative average of 2.00.

To be eligible for a degree, a student must not only have

completed all of the scholastic requirements for the

degree, but also must have paid all university fees, and in

addition all bills for the rental of rooms in the residence

halls or in other university housing facilities. Payment

also must have been made for damage to university

property or equipment, or for any other indebtedness for

scholarship loans or for loans from trust funds adminis-

tered by the university.

Responsibility for meeting academic requirements.

Each student is responsible for his or her progress toward

meeting specific requirements for graduation. Academic

advisers and department chairs are available to assist the

student. It is strongly recommended that the student

specifically consult with his or her adviser prior to the

senior year to ascertain eligibility for the degree for

which he or she desires to qualify and to determine that

all program and hours requirements are met.

Graduation Requirements

Students are expected to maintain regular progress

toward the baccalaureate degree by carrying the “nor-

mal” course load—between 12 and 18 credit hours each

semester. Each student is expected to complete the bac-

calaureate degree by attending four consecutive years and

eight semesters. They may, however, wish to accelerate

the pace toward graduation by using advanced place-

ment credits, summer session study, and receiving credit

for courses through examination. Students will have a

limit of 8 calendar years to complete the requirements

for the bachelor’s degree. Students may petition the

Committee on Standing of Students for up to a one-year

leave of absence for special circumstances beyond their

control.

Students in good academic standing earn their degrees

by meeting the requirements of their specific degree cur-

riculum as well as general university requirements.

Students should confer with their advisers on matters

related to curriculum.

Students are expected to satisfy the credit-hour require-

ments of their chosen curriculum. Basic military science

credit hours are in addition to the credit hours specified

in the curricula. A maximum of six credit hours of

advanced military science courses may be applied toward

the baccalaureate degree.

Undergraduate Residency Requirement

To be eligible to receive a Lehigh baccalaureate degree,

the candidate must have completed either a minimum of

90 credit hours in residence, or all of the last 30 credit

hours at the University or in residency programs.

Five-Year, Two-Bachelor-Degree

Programs

The university’s five-year, two-degree programs enable a

student to receive two bachelor degrees upon completion

of five years of study.

The civil engineering and earth and environmental sci-

ences program that affords two bachelor degrees, and the

electrical engineering and engineering physics two-

degree program are examples of programs in the College

of Engineering and Applied Science.

Some five-year, two-degree programs appear in the

description of courses under Arts-Engineering and Five-

Year Programs in Section V. It is possible to arrange for a

dual bachelor degree program even after studying at

Lehigh for some time. Engineering students, for exam-

ple, who decide at any stage of study that they wish to

meet the requirements for both the bachelor of arts and

bachelor of science degree may complete the combined

requirements in five years if the decision is made before

the third year.

Second degree candidates—A student entering Lehigh to

obtain a second bachelor’s degree, or those Lehigh stu-

dents who wish to declare a second major in another

college, or both a B.A. and a B.S. degree within the

College of Arts and Sciences must have a minimum of

30 additional credit hours beyond the first degree credit-

hour requirements in order to qualify for the second

degree. All of the 30 additional credit hours must be

The registrar’s office will provide, at the student’s

request, a printout of a degree audit noting all program

deficiencies. The degree audits are also available on the

web for all undergraduate students. All students are

requested to go through this process before registering

for their senior year.

Final date for completion of requirements. For gradua-

tion, all requirements, scholastic and financial, must

have been satisfied prior to the date stated in the univer-

sity calendar.

Application for Degree

Candidates for graduation on University Day in May

must file with the registrar on or before March 1 a writ-

ten notice of candidacy for the degree; candidates for

graduation in September file a notice of candidacy on or

before July 1; candidates for graduation in January file a

notice of candidacy on or before November 1.

Failure to file such notice by such dates mentioned

debars the candidate from receiving the degree at the

ensuing graduation exercises. If a petition for late filing

is granted, but before deadline to complete all require-

ments, a fee is assessed.

Graduating Thesis

The original of the undergraduate thesis, when required,

is accompanied by drawings and diagrams whenever the

subject needs such illustration. The original is kept by

the university, as a part of the student’s record, for future

reference; but copies may be retained by students and

may be published, provided permission has first been

obtained from the faculty.

Undergraduate Credit and Grades

A “semester hour,” used interchangeably with “credit

hour,” is a course unit normally involving three to four

hours of student effort per week during one semester.

This includes both in-class contact hours and out-of-

class activities. The major parameters influencing the

in-class/out-of-class division include the mode of instruc-

tion and the level of the course.

Latest date for registration. No registration is accepted

later than the tenth day of instruction in any semester, or

fifth day of a summer session.

Definitions of grades.

Course grades are A, A–, B+, B, B–, C+, C, C–, D+, D,

D–, P, F, N, X and Z. The meaning of each grade is as fol-

lows: A, A–, excellent; B+, B, and B–, good; C+ and C,

competent; C–, continuation competency (the student has

achieved the level of proficiency needed for the course to

satisfy prerequisite requirements); D+, D, and D–, passing,

but performance is not adequate to take any subsequent

course which has this course as a prerequisite. The student

must petition to waive a prerequisite. Upon presentation of

evidence of substantially equivalent preparation and with

the approval of the instructor of the course, the teaching

department chair and the chair of the major department,

the prerequisite will be waived. P, pass-fail grading with a

grade equivalent to D– or higher; F, failing; N, incomplete;

X, absent from the final examination; Z, absent from the

final examination and incomplete.

Other symbols used for courses on student records are:

Cr, credit allowed; NCR – no credit, W, withdrawn; WP,

withdrawn with permission and with passing perform-

ance at the time of withdrawal; WF, withdrawn beyond

the deadline and/or with failing performance.

Grades in the range of A through D–, P, and Cr may be

credited toward baccalaureate degrees within the limits

of program requirements. Grades of F, N, X, Z, W, WP,

and WF cannot be credited toward the degree. Grades of

W and WP do not count as hours attempted.

Courses in which grades of D+,D, D-,F, NCR, W, WF,

N, X, or Z are recorded do not meet prerequisite

requirements.

The grade N (grade) may be used to indicate that one or

more course requirements (e.g., course report) have not

been completed. It is the obligation of the student to

explain to the satisfaction of the instructor that there are

extenuating circumstances (e.g., illness or emergency)

that justify the use of the N grade. If the instructor feels

the N grade is justified, he or she assigns a grade of N

supplemented by a parenthetical letter grade, (e.g.,

NA9). In such cases, the instructor calculates the paren-

thetical grade by assigning an F (or zero score) for any

incomplete work unless he or she has informed the class

in writing at the beginning of the course of a substitute

method for determining the default grade.

In each case in which an N grade is given, the course

instructor shall provide written notification to the

department chairperson stating the name of the student

receiving the grade, the reason for the incomplete work,

the work to be done for the removal of the N grade and

the grade for the work already completed.

A student who incurs an N grade in any course is

required to complete the work for the course by the fifth

day of instruction in the next regular semester. The N

grade will be converted into the parenthetical grade after

the tenth day of instruction in the next regular semester

following receipt of the N grade unless the instructor has

previously changed the grade using the removal-of-

incomplete procedure. The parenthetical grade will be

dropped from the transcript after the assignment of the

course grade.

In no case shall the grade N be used to report absence

from a final examination when all other course require-

ments have been met.

N grades do not count as hours attempted and are not

used in computations of cumulative averages.

The grade X (grade) is used to indicate absence from the

final examination when all other course requirements

have been met. The grade in parentheses is determined

by including in the grade calculation an F (or zero score)

for the missing final exam. The X grade may be removed

by a make-up examination if the absence was for good

cause (e.g., illness or other emergency). To be eligible for

the make-up exam, the student must file a petition and

the petition must be approved by the Committee on the

Standing of Students. If the student fails to petition, or

if the petition is not granted, or if the student fails to

appear for the scheduled make-up examination, then the

X grade will be converted into the parenthetical grade

after the first scheduled make-up examination following

the receipt of the X grade. If the petition is granted and

the final examination is taken, the X grade will be

changed by the instructor using the make-up examina-

tion procedures and the parenthetical grade will be

dropped from the transcript.

Where valid reasons exist for not taking the make-up

examination at the scheduled time, the student may

petition for a later examination with a fee. A students

grade that was originally assigned an N, X, or Z grade

when converted or computed will be noted with an ‘*’

asterisk prefix.

Undergraduate Studies 29

The grade Z (grade) is used to indicate both absence

from the final examination and incompletion of one or

more course requirements. The instructor calculates the

parenthetical grade using an F (or zero score) for the

final examination and either an F (or zero score) or the

substitute method of calculation as described above for

the incomplete work.

The Z grade may be removed by the procedures present-

ed in the previous paragraph for removing the X grade.

If this results in an N grade because the course work is

still incomplete, the provisional Incomplete (N grade)

above shall apply, except that in no case shall the dead-

line for completion of the work be later than the last day

of classes in the first full semester in residence (except

summer) following receipt of the Z grade.

X and Z grades do not count as hours attempted and are

not used in computations of cumulative averages.

Where failure to complete coursework prevents the stu-

dent from taking the make-up examination at the

scheduled time, the student may petition the Committee

on the Standing of Students for a later examination.

A Z grade that is still outstanding after the tenth day of

instruction in the next academic-year semester following

receipt of the Z grade will be converted into the paren-

thetical grade. The parenthetical grade will be dropped

from the transcript.

The notation of NR (not reported) is temporarily placed

in a student record when due to circumstances, no grade

was reported by the instructor by the established deadline.

Scholastic Averages and Probation

Scholastic requirements for undergraduate students are

expressed in terms of the cumulative grade point average

(GPA)—the weighted average of all grades received in

residence or at institutions specifically approved for

grade transfer. The cumulative GPA is computed at the

end of each semester and the second summer session.

Following are the cumulative GPA requirements for

good standing:

freshmen 1st semester 0 to 21 credits earned 1.70

sophomores 22 to 51 1.80

juniors and seniors 52 or more 2.00

For computational purposes students who have complet-

ed 22 or fewer earned hours shall be required to achieve

a 1.70 cumulative grade point average. Students who

have completed 23 but fewer than 52 earned hours at

the end of the most recent graded term shall be required

to achieve a 1.80 cumulative grade point average.

Students who have completed 53 earned hours at the

end of the most recent graded term shall be required to

achieve a 2.00 cumulative grade point average. Other

undergraduates including all General College Division,

Lehigh Valley Association of Independent College cross

registered students, high school scholars and R.O.T.C.

students will be required to achieve a 2.0 cumulative

grade point average – the minimum average required for

graduation – to remain in good academic standing.

Any undergraduate student who achieves a l.69 or lower

cumulative grade point average in a given term is eligible

to be reviewed by and may be placed on probation or

dropped for poor scholarship at the discretion of the

Committee on the Standing of Students.

Students who do not meet the above requirements will

be placed on scholastic probation. Students who, regard-

less of their cumulative average, have failed more than

eight hours of course work in any semester are also

placed on scholastic probation.

While there is no specific credit hour requirement for

good standing, certain categories of students (e.g., those

on financial aid and those playing intercollegiate athlet-

ics) will be expected to maintain whatever hours are

required for eligibility.

Removal from probation. Students are removed from

probation at such time as they meet the standard listed

above, effective at the end of any semester or the second

summer session.

Dropped for poor scholarship. A student who makes a

2.2 GPA or better in the probationary semester but fails

to meet the standards stipulated is continued on proba-

tion for another semester. A student who makes less than

a 2.2 GPA in the probationary semester and fails to meet

the standards stipulated above, is dropped for poor

scholarship.

If a student goes on scholastic probation for a second

(although not necessarily consecutive) term, a review by

the Committee on the Standing of Students will deter-

mine whether the student will continue on scholastic

probation or be dropped for poor scholarship.

Withdrawal From a Course. A student dropping a course

within the first ten days of the semester (five days for sum-

mer sessions) will have no record of the course on the

transcript. A student dropping all courses for which he or

she is registered is considered to be withdrawing from the

university and the policy is noted below. A student who

drops a course with the approval of his/her advisor and

section instructor after the tenth day of instruction and

before the end of the eleventh week of instruction will

have a grade of “W” assigned to the course. A student

who drops a course with the approval of his/her advisor

and section instructor after the eleventh week of instruc-

tion and before the end of classes receives a “WP” or

“WF” at the discretion of the instructor. A “WF” is con-

sidered to be a failing grade. An Add/Drop form signed by

the student’s advisor must be submitted to the registrar’s

office, before the deadlines noted above, to be official. No

course may be dropped after the last day of classes during

a term as noted on the University Calendar.

University Withdrawal. A student withdrawing from the

university (dropping all courses during a given term)

must submit the withdrawal form to the dean of stu-

dents office. Withdrawal after registration day and

during the first 11 weeks of instruction will be noted on

the academic transcript by assigning a grade of “W” to

all courses. A withdrawal after the eleventh week of

instruction and before the end of classes will have the

grade of “WP” or “WF” assigned for each course at the

discretion of the instructor. The date of the withdrawal

will be noted on the academic transcript for a withdraw-

al at any time during the term.

A student who reduces his or her course load below the

minimum required for standing as a full-time student,

but does not withdraw from the university, becomes a

part-time student for the rest of that semester. Some

areas affected by part-time status are financial aid, athlet-

ic eligibility, veterans affairs, immigration status,

insurance and loan deferment.

Release of Final Grades. Grades for undergraduate stu-

dents are available from the registrar as soon as possible

following the deadline for reporting of grades on line

30 Lehigh University Course Catalog 2009-2010

using the secure access facility. Undergraduates students

who would like a grade report must submit the request

in writing to the Registrar’s Office each term. Instructors

may develop their own policies for release of unofficial

reports of academic progress to individual students, or to

their advisers, deans, or financial aid officers, on a need-

to-know basis, including early release of unofficial final

course grades. Any such policies must respect the rights

of students to privacy.

Repeating of courses. If a course is repeated, the final

grade received upon repetition of the course is counted

in the cumulative average. The original grade and credit

hours received will be dropped from the cumulative aver-

age. However, a student who fails a repeated course after

receiving a passing grade the first time will have the orig-

inal grade deleted from his or her average, but will retain

credit for the course toward graduation. Students must

inform the Registrar to assure credit is applied to the

degree.

A grade that was originally received in a course may not

be changed by repeating the course under the pass-fail

option.

Students repeating a course that has been graded C or

better may not overload (greater than eighteen credits)

during that term. For deletion of a grade from the

cumulative average after repeating a course, a student

must (a) file the deletion form with the registrar’s Office;

and (b) repeat the identical course with a final grade at

Lehigh.

Pass-Fail Systems for Undergraduates

Student Option System. The pass-fail grading option is

intended to encourage undergraduate students to take

challenging courses outside the major field that other-

wise might be avoided for fear of lowering grade-point

averages. Students are not permitted to take courses

numbered below 100 and over 400 using the optional

pass/fail grading system and should avoid wasting this

option on unsuitable courses, such as courses having no

college-level prerequisite or corequisite. The restrictions

on the use of the system are listed below.

A student may register for no more than one course

pass-fail numbered above 100 and below 400 in any one

semester. Students should check the pass/fail restrictions

for specific courses noted in section V of the catalog. He

or she may take a maximum of six courses pass-fail per

undergraduate career if the student is on a four-year pro-

gram, or a maximum of eight courses per undergraduate

career with a five-year, two-degree program. If a student

changes a course after the first ten days of instruction

from pass-fail grading to regular grading, as provided

below, that course shall still count toward the maximum

number of courses taken pass-fail during the student’s

undergraduate career.

Each college faculty shall decide under what conditions

and which courses or categories of courses throughout

the university may be taken for pass-fail credit by stu-

dents registered in that college, except for courses

designated specifically for pass-fail grading. Each college

shall keep the educational policy committee advised of

changes in its rules.

A student designates the course(s) to be taken pass-fail

normally at preregistration but not later than the fif-

teenth day of instruction in a regular semester or the

fifth day of instruction in any summer session. Prior to

this deadline, the student may transfer from pass-fail to

regular grading, or vice-versa, without penalty. The

courses designated for pass-fail grading by the student

require the written acknowledgment of the academic

adviser.

Since the instructor giving the course is not officially

notified which students are taking the course pass-fail, a

regular letter grade is reported to the Registrar for the

pass-fail students. The Registrar then records “P” for

reported letter grades from A through D–, and “F” for a

reported letter grade of F.

Under this system, the student surrenders his or her

equity to letter grades of A through D–, except as speci-

fied below. A grade of P applies to the student’s

graduation requirements but is not used in the computa-

tion of the cumulative average; whereas an F grade is

included in the cumulative grade point average.

If a student changes his or her program such that a

course previously taken for pass-fail grading is not

allowed for pass-fail grading in the new program, the

student must submit a petition to the Committee on the

Standing of Students requesting acceptance by the new

program of the pass-fail grading for that course, or sub-

stitution of the original letter grade submitted by the

instructor for the pass-fail grade, or the substitution of

another course for the course taken pass-fail. The recom-

mendation of the adviser must accompany the petition.

Transfer Credit

Transfer of credit from other institutions is the responsi-

bility of the Registrar. Any students planning to take

work at other institutions in the United States or else-

where should initially check with the Registrar on

policies and procedures. Full time students may not be

concurrently enrolled at any other institution, except for

the LVAIC Consortium cross registered courses, without

the advanced approval of the Committee on Standing of

Students. Transfer of grades from institutions other than

the LVAIC System is not possible.

• Pass/Fail credit/non-credit courses are not acceptable

for transfer.

• Courses taken at a two year or four year institution

where a grade lower than a “C” has been earned will

not transfer. (“C-“ or below will not transfer)

• Transfer courses may not be used to delete a prior

grade from your cumulative grade point average at

Lehigh University. Transfer grades are NOT calculat-

ed in the Lehigh GPA.

• No student may receive more credit at Lehigh than

was granted on the other institution’s transcript.

Courses taken on the quarter system will have credit

granted on a 3-2 ratio, no partial credit will be award-

ed. The student will receive credit equivalent to the

number of credits indicated on the transcript, up to

the number of credits for the equivalent course at

Lehigh. The registrar has the final authority for the

amount of credit awarded toward a Lehigh degree.

• No credit will be granted for a course in which the

student has already received credit for its equivalent at

Lehigh.

• No credit will be granted for continuing education

units courses, courses taken on-line, January or inters-

ession courses, correspondence, independent study or

any course less than 5 weeks and/or 15 contact hours

per credit without the advanced approval of a petition

to the Standing of Students Committee.

Undergraduate Studies 31

• Courses taken while in high school may require addi-

tional documentation. All questions should be

directed to the registrar.

• Courses must be taken at an institution that is accred-

ited by one of the six regional associations.

Course Auditing

A student who is in good academic standing and has not

failed any courses in the previous term may be admitted

as an auditor in not more than one course, which shall

be outside the curriculum requirements. Application for

such admission is by petition approved by the depart-

mental chair and the Standing of Students Committee.

In no case shall a student who has attended a course as

an auditor be given an anticipatory examination for

credit or register for the same course in the future. A stu-

dent completing a course in this manner will have the

course and the notation AU indicated on the permanent

record. A student rostered on an audit basis may be

withdrawn from the course with a grade of W for poor

attendance. Audit courses do not count toward full-time

status.

Review-Consultation-Study Period

The Review-Consultation-Study (RCS) period is intend-

ed to provide a few days for informal academic work

between the end of the formal instruction period and the

beginning of the final examinations.

It is expected that students will use this period to consol-

idate their command of the material in their courses.

Faculty members make themselves available to their stu-

dents at announced times during this period.

No quiz or exam may be given during the last five class

days before final examination period begins.

Graduation Honors

Beginning with all new degree seeking students in the

Fall of 2004 or any students graduating in the Spring of

2008, degrees with honors are awarded by vote of the

university faculty to those students who have attained an

average of not less than 3.40 in a minimum of 90 credit

hours in residence at Lehigh University or in programs

approved by the faculty to have grades and credit accept-

ed toward the undergraduate degree.

Degrees with high honors are awarded by vote of the

university faculty to those students who have attained an

average of not less than 3.60 in a minimum of 90 credit

hours in residence at Lehigh University or in programs

approved by the faculty to have grades and credit accept-

ed toward the undergraduate degree.

Degrees with highest honors are awarded by vote of the

university faculty to those students who have attained an

average of not less than 3.80 in a minimum of 90 credit

hours in residence at Lehigh University or in programs

approved by the faculty to have grades and credit accept-

ed toward the undergraduate degree.

For the purposes of graduation honors calculations,

courses taken more than once at Lehigh will only have

the most recent grade used in the calculation. Courses

taken under the cross-registration policy of the LVAIC,

the Washington Semester and the Urban Studies semes-

ter program will be used.

Students who spend part of their career at another insti-

tution, or are transfer admits to degree programs and

have fewer than ninety hours of in residency courses,

may qualify for graduation honors under the following

conditions:

The student must have at least sixty credit hours of regu-

larly graded (not pass/fail) courses that meet the

residency requirement. The graduation honors category

is determined by the lower of the two averages computed

as follows: (1) the average of grades received at Lehigh;

(2) the average of all grades received at Lehigh and

grades for courses taken elsewhere for a regular grade and

that are appropriate to be considered for transfer to

Lehigh, or in provisionally approved study abroad pro-

grams.

Department Honors

Many departments offer honors work adapted to its cur-

riculum for students who wish to demonstrate unusual

academic ability and interest in exploring a chosen field

through independent study and research. The precise

nature of the program for each student is determined by

the academic major department, but may include:

unscheduled work or independent study, participation in

graduate (400-level) courses, and an honors thesis or

project.

Qualified candidates should inform their academic advis-

ers by the end of the junior year of their intention to

work for departmental honors. The adviser will give the

college and the registrar names of seniors working for

departmental honors in particular majors. Names of

those students attaining departmental honors are pub-

lished in the commencement program.

Sophomores may apply for acceptance into the Eckardt

College Scholars Program, which offers unique opportu-

nities for those qualified to develop their critical faculties

and intellectual interests.

Honor Societies

There are at least 18 honor and course societies. The

three best-known are:

Phi Beta Kappa. The oldest honor society in the United

States is represented at Lehigh by the Beta chapter of the

Commonwealth of Pennsylvania, the 27th oldest chapter

in the nation. The chapter’s council considers for invita-

tion into its membership those students in each of

Lehigh’s three undergraduate colleges who satisfy the fol-

lowing profile:

• At least 60 credit hours of coursework completed at

Lehigh

• A minimum cumulative GPA of 3.75

• A minimum of 8 credit hours in the natural sciences

(including a lab)

• A minimum of 8 credit hours in the social sciences

• A minimum of 8 credit hours in the humanities, espe-

cially textual analysis beyond first-year English (the

council typically does not recognize some courses that

carry Humanities credit at Lehigh, such as Public

Speaking, Stage Design, one-credit Music lessons,

etc.)

• Calculus or advanced mathematics that requires calcu-

lus as a prerequisite

• Two years of college-level foreign language study or its

equivalent (may be satisfied by four years [9-12] of

high school study with excellent grades; or by a profi-

ciency exam administered by the Department of

Modern Languages and Literature)

• No disciplinary violations sufficient to warrant proba-

tion, suspension, or expulsion

32 Lehigh University Course Catalog 2009-2010

Please note: Satisfaction of this profile guarantees consid-

eration by the Phi Beta Kappa council; it does not

guarantee election to Phi Beta Kappa. Any undergradu-

ate who has questions about any of the items in this

profile should contact Prof. Scott Gordon, Executive

Secretary of Lehigh’s chapter. Office phone: 610-758-

3320; e-mail: [email protected]

Beta Gamma Sigma. Election to membership in Beta

Gamma Sigma is the highest scholastic honor that a stu-

dent in business administration can achieve. Beta

Gamma Sigma is the only national honorary scholarship

society in the field of business administration recognized

by the American Assembly of Collegiate Schools of

Business.

Tau Beta Pi. Tau Beta Pi recognizes engineering students

who have a history of distinguished scholarship and

exemplary character. The national organization was

founded at Lehigh in 1885. A bronze marker in front of

Williams Hall commemorates this event.

Among course societies are the following: Alpha Pi Mu,

for those in industrial engineering; Alpha Sigma Mu,

Materials Science and Engineering (http://www.alphasig-

mamu.org/). Beta Alpha Psi, accounting; Chi Epsilon,

civil engineering; Eta Kappa Nu, electrical engineering;

Lambda Mu Sigma, marketing; Omicron Delta Epsilon,

economics; Omicron Delta Kappa, leadership; Order of

the Omega, leadership in Greek activities; Phi Alpha

Theta, history; Phi Beta Delta, international; Phi Eta

Sigma, freshman scholastic excellence; Pi Tau Sigma,

mechanical engineering; Psi Chi, psychology; Sigma Tau

Delta, English; and Sigma Xi, research.

Eckardt Scholars Program

The Eckardt Scholars Program is a university-wide hon-

ors program designed for students who show

outstanding academic promise or unusual creativity. It is

a highly selective program, restricted to a small number

of especially qualified students, some of whom are

enrolled at the time of admission to the university and

the rest as first-semester sophomores. Entering freshmen

may join the program at the invitation of the Eckardt

Scholars Advisory Council. Applications from sopho-

mores are evaluated by the Advisory Council on the basis

of their academic records and written statements of edu-

cational goals, and recommendations from two faculty

members.

The Program allows students to engage in scholarly work

of an advanced nature. Participants are obliged to obtain

the same number of credits as other members of their

colleges, including at least two Eckardt Scholars

Seminars, and pursue departmental or interdisciplinary

majors. With the exception of students in some disci-

plines, they are released from distribution requirements

and, if necessary, modifications may be made in major

requirements. Responsibility for the student’s over-all

program lies with the director who cooperates closely

with the major adviser. In the final two years, the stu-

dent receives up to twelve credits for work with a faculty

member, leading to a senior project of substantial dimen-

sions. This can take whatever form is appropriate to the

nature of the subject. Seniors present accounts of their

projects at the annual Eckardt Scholars graduation din-

ner and are eligible for the George B. Lemmon Prize,

which is presented annually to members whose academic

performance has been outstanding. The award of

Eckardt Scholars graduation honors is subject to the rec-

ommendation of the program director (Prof. Ian Duffy,

340 Maginnes Hall) and the chair in the major field.

In addition to the academic privileges of the program,

Eckardt Scholars are offered a variety of extracurricular

opportunities. These include invitations to meet visiting

speakers, informal meetings with faculty members, din-

ners, lectures, plays, musical events, and other cultural

activities in the Lehigh Valley and nearby cities. For a

listing of courses and Advisory Council members, see the

Eckardt Scholars Program entry, section V.

College of Arts and Sciences

Anne S. Meltzer, dean; Michael Stavola, associate dean;

Augustine Ripa, associate dean; Jeffrey A. Sands, associate

dean.

The College of Arts and Sciences is the heart of Lehigh

University offering a wide variety of academic majors,

minors and programs, while also providing essential lib-

eral arts access to all Lehigh students. Arts and Science

faculty are engaged as active scholars, are highly accessi-

ble, and are committed to the teaching mission of our

undergraduate programs. A hallmark of our college is the

faculty’s ability to engage students interactively and expe-

rientially in research and scholarship.

Students in the College develop new habits of mind that

characterize the liberal arts education, such as testing

assumptions, respecting evidence, and probing the

unknown with curiosity and an open mind. Those habits

prepare our graduates to thrive in an uncertain world.

Through a combination of college-wide distribution

requirements and major field requirements, Lehigh Arts

and Sciences students investigate and acquire knowledge

of human cultures and the physical and natural world by

studying arts and humanities, mathematics, natural sci-

ences, and social sciences.

Studying broadly in the areas above and concentrating

deeply in a major field will help develop intellectual

traits and skills needed to create the lifelong learning

habits necessary to confront constantly changing social

conditions, emerging technologies, careers and lives.

The College of Arts and Sciences offers several curricular

options:

• A four-year arts and sciences curriculum leading to a

bachelor of arts or bachelor of science degree in desig-

nated fields

• A five-year arts-engineering curriculum leading to a

bachelor’s degree from the College of Arts and

Sciences and a bachelor of science degree from the

College of Engineering and Applied Science

• Double degree programs within the college and in

conjunction with the other two undergraduate col-

leges.

Teacher preparation

• A five-year program leading to a bachelor’s degree

from the College of Arts and Sciences and a master’s

degree in Education from the College of Education

Specific requirements for many of the degree programs

described in this section may be found in Section V.

Undergraduate Studies 33

Major Degree Programs in the College

Bachelor of Arts and Bachelor of Science Degree

Programs

Two distinct bachelor-degree programs are offered by the

College, each distinguished mainly by the proportion of

courses taken in the major field. For the Bachelor of Arts

degree the student takes a comparatively smaller number

of courses to fulfill the major requirements plus a selec-

tion of courses in various fields outside the major. For

the more professionally oriented Bachelor of Science

degree, offered by the College in designated disciplines,

the student takes a more extensive concentration in the

major field, along with a proportionally smaller number

of courses outside the major. Except for this distinction,

the same basic requirements must be met for both degree

programs (including the minimum number of 120 hours

for graduation and the minimum average in the major of

2.0). No more than six hours of military science may be

applied toward either degree.

Bachelor of Arts Degree

Humanities: architectural history, architecture, art, art

history, Asian studies, classical civilization, classics,

design arts, English, modern languages and literature

(French, German and Spanish), music, music composi-

tion, philosophy, religion studies, theatre

Social Sciences: Africana studies, American studies,

anthropology, cognitive science, economics, environmen-

tal studies, global studies, history, international relations,

IR/MLL joint major, journalism, journalism/science

writing, political science, psychology, STS (science, tech-

nology and society), sociology/social psychology,

sociology and anthropology, urban studies, women’s

studies

Mathematics and Natural Science: Astronomy, behav-

ioral neuroscience, biology, chemistry, computer science,

earth and environmental science, mathematics, molecu-

lar biology, physics

BA degrees in predental science, premedical science, or

preoptometry science are available to students who are

admitted to certain combined degree programs (see

Health Professions Programs).

Bachelor of Science Degree

Astrophysics, behavioral neuroscience, biochemistry,

biology, chemistry, computer science, earth and environ-

mental science, mathematics, molecular biology,

pharmaceutical chemistry, physics, psychology, statistics

General Plan of Undergraduate Study

Students in the College are required to choose - usually

by the end of the sophomore year - a major field and to

complete a program of courses, selected in consultation

with the student’s adviser, to provide the breadth that is

the mark of a liberal education. For most students, the

credits earned for the major and those earned for the dis-

tribution requirements are not enough to meet the

graduation requirement of 120, and students take free

elective courses in areas of interest to earn the remaining

credits. Three schemes of courses - one in the student’s

area of concentration (the major-field requirements), a

second set drawn from certain designated disciplines (the

distribution requirements representing the minimum

set), and a third set without constraints (the free elec-

tives) - make up the educational program in the College.

Major Field of Concentration

By majoring in a specific discipline, a student establishes

a foundation of knowledge in that field, learns to frame

its particular kind of questions, and starts to apply its

traditional body of knowledge. By submitting to increas-

ingly challenging and complex exercises in a distinct

discipline over several semesters under the guidance of

mature practitioners, the student can start to feel the

rewards of intellectual mastery of a subject. The student

thus experiences the gratification of developing expertise

and intellectual sophistication.

Along with introductory courses in the discipline, the

minimum number of credits for the major is 30. The

student must maintain a minimum grade-point average

of 2.0 in the major field.

Standard major sequences. When a student chooses one

of the standard majors, a faculty member from the

department or program offering the major becomes a

student’s major adviser and assists the student in con-

structing a program of study. In all cases, the final

responsibility for meeting both major and non-major

requirements rests with the student.

Special interdisciplinary majors. In addition to the stan-

dard major programs, specially structured

interdisciplinary major sequences between majors are

possible. For example, a student interested in a profes-

sional school of urban or regional planning might wish

to structure a special major consisting primarily of cours-

es in political science and economics or in economics

and social relations.

Any student may, with the aid of faculty members cho-

sen from the disciplines involved, devise an

interdisciplinary major program to include not less than

thirty credits of related course work, of which at least 15

credits must consist of advanced courses. The major

advisers and the dean of the college must approve the

program.

Multiple majors and Double degrees. A student who

wishes to fulfill the requirements for more than one

major program has two options. A double major is a sin-

gle BA degree with two majors (some students complete

triple majors). A student pursues a double major by

declaring both majors. Typically, double majors can be

completed in four years, but sequencing of courses and

time conflicts with required courses can introduce delays.

No more than three courses may overlap two majors. A

double degree program is a combined BA and BS pro-

gram or two Bachelor of Science degrees in one or more

of our undergraduate colleges. The BA is in the College

of Arts and Sciences, and the BS may be in any one of

the three undergraduate colleges. A student pursues a

double degree by declaring the first program and then

petitioning the standing of students committee for per-

mission to pursue the second degree program. A special

balance sheet and a major declaration for the second

degree must accompany the petition to pursue a second

degree. The double-degree student must satisfy major

and distribution requirements for both degrees and earn

a minimum of 30 additional credits beyond those

required for the first degree. All of the 30 additional

credits must be taken at Lehigh or in Lehigh residency

programs. The requirement of 30 additional credits typi-

cally makes the double degree program a five-year

program. There is no limit on the number of overlap-

ping courses between two degrees, but there must be at

least 30 credits of non-overlapping coursework in each

34 Lehigh University Course Catalog 2009-2010

degree program. For administrative purposes, students

who take two degrees or two majors must designate one

as the primary major or primary degree.

Distribution Requirements

Whatever expertise in a single discipline an undergradu-

ate may achieve, in the course of a lifetime, curiosity

lures most of us beyond the confines of a single chosen

specialty. Furthermore, in a swiftly changing world,

careers are being rapidly redefined, and only a person of

broad intellectual orientation can intelligently consider

where one may be most useful to our society and find

most personal gratification. Many of the basic modes of

thought and work in various fields are being reformulat-

ed, often producing surprising influences in the public

and private spheres. In this world-to devise for oneself a

satisfying professional life and to be a responsible citizen-

one needs some awareness of the concepts and methods

specific not to one field only but to a variety of disci-

plines.

The distribution requirements are the four domains of

learning in which the College faculty requires students to

develop an introductory level of expertise through

encountering the body of knowledge that each discipline

has gathered, the kinds of phenomena it describes and

manipulates, and the types of problems it addresses.

Specified numbers of credits are required in each of the

four domains: the mathematical sciences, the natural sci-

ences, the social sciences, and the arts and humanities.

Distribution Requirements for the B.A. and the B.S.

A. College Seminar/First-Year Class 1-4 credits

(one course during the first year)

B. English Composition 6 credits

(two courses during the first year)

Students and advisers should monitor closely the

progress toward completion of requirements C through

F. Courses taken to satisfy a major program may be used

to satisfy distribution requirements in only one distribu-

tion area.

C. Mathematical Sciences 3 credits

Chosen from mathematics or designated courses from

philosophy or computer science

D.Natural Sciences 8 credits

Chosen from those designated in: astronomy, biologi-

cal anthropology, biosciences, chemistry, earth and

environmental sciences, physics, and neuroscience.

At least one science course must also include the asso-

ciated laboratory.

E. Social Sciences 8 credits

Chosen from those designated in: anthropology, clas-

sics, economics, political science, history, international

relations, journalism, psychology, social psychology,

social relations, sociology, STS, and urban studies.

F. Arts and Humanities 8 credits

Chosen from those designated in: architecture, art,

classics, history, modern languages and literature,

English, music, philosophy, religion studies, and the-

atre.

Total required for graduation: 120 credits

A student’s program, including the choice of distribution

requirements, is not official until approved by the adviser.

Junior-Year Writing Certification

The faculty of the College of Arts and Sciences holds

that writing is an essential tool for learning and that

writing well is indispensable for performing responsibly

in a profession and in one’s life as a citizen. Beyond the

two writing courses required in the first year, students in

the College are encouraged to take courses that provide

continued practice in writing throughout their years at

Lehigh. In particular each student in the College must

complete at least one “writing-intensive” course-normally

during the junior year-and receive writing certification

from the instructor. Some major programs require that

the writing-intensive course must be taken in the major

field; others, that it be taken in a specific department

outside the major; still others, that it may be chosen

freely from writing-intensive courses offered by any

department in the College. Courses that satisfy the writ-

ing-intensive requirement may also be used to fulfill

major or distribution requirements.

Foreign Language Study

Students planning to pursue graduate study toward a

doctorate are reminded that most graduate schools

require doctoral candidates to demonstrate a reading

knowledge of one or two foreign languages. Proficiency

in foreign languages is advantageous for careers in law,

government, journalism, commerce, industry and other

fields.

Internships

Many departments and programs offer optional intern-

ship courses, and some require an internship as part of a

major program. Students should consult with the depart-

ment offering the internship course for information

about how the internships are arranged. The University

faculty has established three important criteria that must

be met by all internships: 80 hours of work are required

for each credit awarded, no credit can be awarded for an

internship ex post facto, and the student must register

for the internship course during the same term that the

internship work is actually conducted. Students should

be sure to pre-arrange all internship experiences with the

appropriate department. Internship credits cannot be

awarded for work experiences without a distinct educa-

tional component. A memorandum of understanding

circulated among the employer, student, and departmen-

tal internship course director helps to promote a

common understanding of the educational and work

objectives of the internship. Students are advised that

not all work experiences advertised as “internships” war-

rant academic credit, even though they may be otherwise

worthwhile.

Minor Programs in the College

Certain departments, divisions, and programs in the

College of Arts and Sciences afford an opportunity to

minor in an additional field of concentration other than

the major field.

A minor consists of at least 15 credits; the specific con-

tent is determined by the department, division, or

program concerned. A minor is optional and, if success-

fully completed, will be shown on the university

transcript in the same manner as the major field. A 2.0

minimum grade-point average is required for courses in

the minor. Because of this requirement, no course in the

minor program may be taken with Pass/Fail grading. No

more than one course may be double-counted toward a

Undergraduate Studies 35

major and a minor, and no more than one course may

overlap between two minors.

It is the responsibility of students desiring a minor to

initiate it no later than the beginning of the junior year

by filing a minor program with the department, division,

or program where it is offered. The student’s minor

adviser maintains appropriate records.

Minors in the College of Arts and Sciences departments

and programs are available for degree candidates in other

colleges within the university, with approval of their col-

lege adviser.

The following are established minors in the College of Arts

and Sciences. Program descriptions may be found in the

alphabetical listing of Section V. Some minor-program

descriptions are collected within departmental descriptions,

or located elsewhere, as indicated by parentheses. Students

in the College of Arts and Sciences may also complete a

minor in Business through the Business College or an

Engineering minor through the College of Engineering.

Actuarial Science (Mathematics)

Africana Studies

American Literature (English)

Anthropology (Sociology and Anthropology)

Art (Art and Architecture)

Art/Architecture History (Art and Architecture)

Asian Studies

Astronomy

Biology (Biological Sciences)

British Literature (English)

Business

Chemistry

Chinese (Modern Languages and Literature)

Classical Civilization (Classical Studies)

Classics (Classical Studies)

Cognitive Science

Communication (Journalism and Communication)

Computer Science

Design Arts

Earth and Environmental Sciences

Economics

Education (Education Minor, this section)

Engineering

English

Environmental Studies

French (Modern Languages and Literature)

German (Modern Languages and Literature)

Graphic Communication (Art and Architecture)

Health, Medicine and Society

History

Humanities Minor in Ethics

Humanities Minor in Medieval Studies

International Environmental Policy

International Relations

Japanese

Jewish Studies

Journalism (Journalism and Communication)

Latin American Studies

Mathematics, Applied (Mathematics)

Mathematics, Pure (Mathematics)

Military Science

Molecular Biology (Biological Sciences)

Museum Studies (Art and Architecture)

Music

Music Industry

Peace Studies

Philosophy

Physics

Political Science

Probability and Statistics (Mathematics)

Psychology

Public Administration (Political Science)

Public Relations (Journalism and Communication)

Religion Studies

Russian (Modern Languages and Literature)

Science, Technology and Society

Science Writing (Journalism and Communication)

Social Relations (Sociology and Anthropology)

Sociology (Sociology and Anthropology)

Social Psychology (Sociology and Anthropology)

Spanish (Modern Languages and Literature)

Studio Art (Art and Architecture)

Theatre

Women’s Studies

Writing (English)

College Seminar/First-Year Class (FYC)

Program

During the fall or spring semester of the first year, every

student in the College of Arts and Sciences is required to

enroll in a College Seminar or First-Year Class (FYC)

taught by a member of the faculty. With ten to 20 stu-

dents per class, these college seminars and special classes

provide an intimate and supportive environment that

facilitates the transition to university life. Students begin

to develop many of the skills that serve as a framework

for their future scholarly work-how to read closely, think

critically, write clearly, learn cooperatively, speak persua-

sively, and solve problems creatively.

Courses in this program are an excellent way to explore a

subject that may be new, or to enter more deeply into an

area of previous interest. Many of the topics are non-tra-

ditional or interdisciplinary subjects of special interest to

the professor.

Whatever the topic, FYCs involve considerable effort on

the part of students. Some classes emphasize reading

assignments, papers, and oral presentations; others

include tests, laboratory work, or fieldwork.

Pre-Law Programs

Lehigh has a strong pre-law tradition. In keeping with

the policy of the Association of American Law Schools,

the university does not have a prescribed pre-law curricu-

lum. Successful candidates for law school demonstrate

skills in critical analysis, logical reasoning, and commu-

nication and have pursued rigorous coursework of

significant breadth and depth. Lehigh students have

attained entrance to law schools from diverse curricula in

all three of the undergraduate colleges. Specifically law-

related courses are offered in the College of Arts and

Sciences (e.g. Constitutional Law, Civil Rights and Civil

Liberties, Law and Order) and the College of Business

and Economics (e.g., Introduction to Law and Legal

Environment of Business).

In addition to formal academic instruction, Lehigh pro-

vides other opportunities for learning about the law and

legal careers. The annual Tresolini Lecture series brings

nationally recognized speakers to campus for extended

interactions with faculty and students. Tresolini lecturers

have included present and past U.S. and state Supreme

Court justices and renowned legal scholars and practi-

tioners. Lehigh also provides opportunities for gaining

academic credit in several off-campus programs that pro-

vide practical experience in law and public affairs.

36 Lehigh University Course Catalog 2009-2010

Counseling is available to prospective pre-law students

on a continuous basis from first-year orientation through

the law school application process in the senior year. The

pre-professional advisor in Career Services coordinates

these pre-law counseling services.

Health Professional Programs

Schools of medicine, dentistry, optometry, podiatry, and

veterinary medicine stress the importance of a strong lib-

eral arts education as well as prescribed studies in the

sciences. Although most pre-health students will choose

a major in a pure or applied science, as long as candi-

dates have the essential courses in biology, chemistry,

physics, and mathematics, they may major in any of the

three undergraduate colleges.

A health professions advisory committee, which includes

the pre-professional advisor and faculty members from

the sciences, provides career and academic counseling

and works closely with students from first-year orienta-

tion through the entire process of applying to

professional schools. Students are urged to consult with

the pre-professional advisor in Career Services as early as

possible in their academic career. Those students interest-

ed in other allied health fields may also consult with the

pre-professional advisor to obtain pertinent information

to aid them in planning their college careers.

Combined-Degree Program in Medicine

In cooperation with Drexel University College of Medi-

cine, Lehigh offers an accelerated program that enables

selected students to earn both the baccalaureate degree

(B.A.) with a major in premedical science and the M.D.

degree after seven total years of study at the two institu-

tions. In the first three academic years at Lehigh, credit

hours are earned toward the 120 credits required for the

baccalaureate degree. The next four years are spent in the

regular program of medical education at Drexel Universi-

ty College of Medicine in Philadelphia. By successfully

completing their first year at the medical school, stu-

dents acquire the necessary additional credit hours for

the Lehigh baccalaureate degree.

During their pre-professional years at Lehigh, students

are expected to make satisfactory progress in academic

areas as well as in the more subtle task of personal

growth in those attributes ultimately needed as a physi-

cian. Drexel University College of Medicine receives

student grades and monitors student progress through

feedback from Lehigh. Students are expected to attain

specified grade point averages and MCAT scores.

Students’ undergraduate credentials are processed

through the Admissions Committee of Drexel University

College of Medicine before a final definitive acceptance

is offered. The medical college reserves the right to with-

draw an offer of acceptance on the grounds of academic

or personal maturation concerns.

Application for admission to this program is made

through Lehigh’s Office of Admissions. Application

deadline is November 15.

Required Science and Math Courses

Chemistry: CHM 30/31 (or CHM 40/41) and CHM

51/53 and 52/58

Biology: BIOS 41/42, 115/116, and 120

Physics: PHY 10/12 (or 11/12) and 13/22 (or 21/22)

Math: MATH 21/22 (or 51/52) and one Approved

Math Elective

Required Non-Science Courses

First-Year Seminar

English Comp & Lit (I and II)

Humanities (three courses, 9-12 credits)

Social Sciences (three courses, 9-12 credits)

Writing Intensive

Approved Electives (12-16 credits)

Combined-Degree Program in Dentistry

In cooperation with the School of Dental Medicine at

the University of Pennsylvania, Lehigh offers an acceler-

ated program that enables selected students to earn both

the baccalaureate degree (B.A.) with a major in predental

science and the doctor of dental medicine degree

(D.M.D.) after seven years of study at the two institu-

tions. In the first three academic years at Lehigh, credit

hours are earned toward the 120 credits required for the

baccalaureate degree. The next four years are spent in the

regular program of dental education at the Penn School

of Dental Medicine in Philadelphia. By successfully

completing their first year at the dental school, students

acquire the necessary additional credit hours for the

Lehigh baccalaureate degree.

During their first three years at Lehigh, students are

expected to make satisfactory progress in prescribed aca-

demic areas as well as in the area of personal growth,

developing those attributes ultimately needed to become

a dentist. Penn Dental School receives student grades

and monitors student progress through feedback from

Lehigh. Students are expected to attain specified grade

point averages and DAT scores. Students’ undergraduate

credentials are processed through the Admissions

Committee of Penn Dental School before a final defini-

tive acceptance is offered. The dental college reserves the

right to withdraw an acceptance, or require that a stu-

dent spend additional time on the undergraduate level,

on the grounds of academic or personal maturation con-

cerns.

Application for admission to this program is made

through Lehigh’s Office of Admissions. Application

deadline is January 1.

Required Science and Math Courses

Chemistry: CHM 30/31 (or CHM 40/41) and CHM

51/53 and 52/58

Biology: BIOS 41/42, 115/116, and 120; and two

Approved Electives (6 credits)

Physics: PHY 10/12 (or 11/12) and 13/22 (or 21/22)

Math: MATH 21/22 (or 51/52)

Required Non-Science Courses

First-Year Seminar

English Comp & Lit (I and II)

Humanities (three courses, 9-12 credits)

Social Sciences (three courses, 9-12 credits)

Junior Writing Intensive

Approved Electives (12-16 credits)

Combined-Degree Program in Optometry

In cooperation with the State University of New York

College of Optometry in New York City, Lehigh offers

an accelerated program in which students may earn both

the baccalaureate degree (B.A.) with a major in behav-

ioral neuroscience and the doctor of optometry degree

(O.D.) after seven years of study at the two institutions.

In the first three academic years at Lehigh, credit hours

are earned toward the 120 credits required for the bac-

calaureate degree. The next four years are spent in the

regular program of optometry education at SUNY Col-

Undergraduate Studies 37

lege of Optometry. By successfully completing their first

year at the optometry college, students acquire the neces-

sary additional credit hours for the Lehigh baccalaureate

degree.

SUNY College of Optometry receives student grades and

monitors student progress through feedback from

Lehigh. Students are expected to attain specified grade

point averages and OAT scores. Students’ undergraduate

credentials are processed through the Admissions

Committee of SUNY Optometry before a final definitive

acceptance is offered. The optometry college reserves the

right to withdraw an offer of acceptance on the grounds

of academic or personal maturation concerns.

Students may apply to this program either during their

initial application or during their enrollment at Lehigh.

Application for incoming students is made through

Lehigh’s Office of Admissions. Application deadline is

January 1.

Required Science and Math Courses

Chemistry: CHM 30/31 (or 40/41) and CHM 51/53

and 52/58

Biology: BIOS 41/42, 115/116, 120, 177, 276/277,

197, and 382

Physics: PHY 10/12 (or 11/12) and 13/22 (or 21/22)

Math: MATH 21/22 (or 51/52)

Required Non-Science Courses

First-Year Seminar

English Comp & Lit (I and II)

Psychology (PSYC 1)

Social Sciences (one course, 4 credits)

Humanities (two courses, 8 credits)

Writing Intensive

Approved Electives (two courses, 6-8 credits)

Education Minor

The education minor helps undergraduates explore

career options in school teaching or other professional

careers with elementary, secondary, or special education

students. The minor may accelerate entry into a teaching

career because appropriate credits from the minor may

be applied toward completion of teacher certification

credits for those admitted to Lehigh’s graduate-level

Teacher Intern Program.

The minor offers a systematic background of profession-

al education experiences, coordinating practicum

activities with theory courses designed to provide a foun-

dation for future educational studies. Its focus is

exploratory.

The experiences of the minor are intended to enrich an

individual’s understanding of education as a central intel-

lectual activity of our culture and to provide

self-understanding of one’s own potential as an educator.

An undergraduate may take these courses with the

approval of the adviser and minimum GPA of 2.75.

Completion of the minor does not assure admission to

the Teacher Intern Program to become a certified profes-

sional.

For more information about the Education Minor, con-

tact the Teaching, Learning, and Technology Program

Coordinator at 610-758-3230 or

TLTP[email protected].

Fifteen credit hours are required for the education minor

as follows:

TLT 314 Seminar in Elementary and Secondary

Education (3)

TLT 394 Special Topics in Education: (subtitle)

(3)

TLT 408 Development, Classroom Management

and Assessment: Elementary (3)

TLT 409 Development, Classroom Management

and Assessment: Secondary (3)

TLT XXX Elective-College of Education course (3)

The Five-Year Bachelor’s Plus Master’s of

Education and Teacher Certification

Program

The College of Education offers a five-year degree pro-

gram that is designed to allow students to earn both a

bachelor’s degree and a master’s degree in five years

instead of the traditional six.

The combined degree program leads to either a

B.A./B.S. degree in an academic discipline from the

College of Arts and Sciences, the P.C. Rossin College of

Engineering and Applied Sciences, or the College of

Business and Economics, and an M.Ed. degree in either

elementary or secondary education. In addition, an

Instructional I teaching certificate from the Pennsylvania

Department of Education (PDE) is also earned. These

certification areas are

Biology 7-12

Chemistry 7-12

Citizenship Education 7-12

Earth and Space Science K-12

Elementary K-6

English 7-12

Environmental Education K-12

General Science 7-12

Mathematics 7-12

Physics 7-12

Social Sciences 7-12

Social Studies 7-12

The Pennsylvania Department of Education (PDE) has

issued new certification guidelines for initial teacher cer-

tification that divide elementary (K-6) certification into

two separate certifications: Pre-kindergarten to 4

grade

and 4

grade to 8

grade. Lehigh is in the process of

revising its current elementary teacher preparation pro-

gram to address the requirements of these new

certifications. Students enrolled in the current K-6 ele-

mentary curriculum must complete their program of

study by August 31, 2013. After that date, all graduates

must have completed one of the newly approved certifi-

cation programs (PreK-4 or 4

-8

Freshman, sophomores and juniors with a minimum

overall GPA of 2.75 may apply to the program. Those

accepted will begin education courses in the second

semester of sophomore year (junior year for those admit-

ted later).

Criteria for admission to the program include:

• A demonstrable commitment to learning and intellec-

tual growth

• An expressed interest in teaching as a career

• Previous experience in working with young people;

this can be gained in the summers of freshman and

sophomore years.

38 Lehigh University Course Catalog 2009-2010

In the fall semester of senior year, students must com-

plete an application for admission to the graduate

College of Education (elementary or secondary educa-

tion) in order to continue in the program and complete

the master’s degree/Instructional Level I teacher certifica-

tion portion of the program.

For more information about the 5-year Teacher

Education Program, contact the Teaching, Learning, and

Technology Program Coordinator at 610-758-3230 or

TLTP[email protected].

College of Business and

Economics

Paul Brown, dean; Joan B. DeSalvatore, associate dean,

director of undergraduate programs; Michael Kolchin,

associate dean of graduate programs; Mary Theresa

Taglang, director of graduate programs; Kenneth P.

Sinclair, chair, department of accounting; James

Dearden, chair, department of economics; Richard J.

Kish, chair, Perella Department of Finance; Susan A.

Sherer, chair, department of management; K. Sivakumar,

chair, department of marketing; Shin-Yi Chou, director,

Ph.D. program; Robert J. Thornton, director, master of

science in economics; John W. Paul, director, master of

science in accounting; Michael Kolchin, director, MBA

and Professional Education.

The College of Business and Economics offers the bach-

elor of science degree in business and economics. In the

dynamic global environment of the 21st Century, today’s

business students face unprecedented challenges. Lehigh’s

College of Business and Economics prepares them to

meet these challenges and to succeed. The mission of

Lehigh University’s College of Business and Economics is

to provide an intellectual and professional learning envi-

ronment that advances knowledge through research and

scholarship and that develops future leaders through

experiential learning, rigorous analysis and the discipline

of a strong work ethic – the hallmarks of a Lehigh

University business education.

The College of Business and Economics consists of five

departments: accounting, economics, Perella Department

of Finance, management and marketing. Its programs,

accredited by the AACSB International—The

Association to Advance Collegiate Schools of Business—

provide students with a solid foundation in business and

economics principles. In addition to the traditional

undergraduate majors of accounting, economics, finance

and marketing, the College offers innovative programs

and courses that respond to today’s unique business

requirements, including:

The Business Information Systems major that answers a

recognized need in the business world. As businesses seek

to make themselves more productive and competitive,

they have become more reliant on information technolo-

gy. Students with a good understanding of information

systems can help businesses enhance their use of this

technology.

The Supply Chain Management major is another

response to the complex environment facing business

graduates. This undergraduate major gives students solid

exposure to supply management, logistics, business-to-

business marketing and operations management.

The College of Business and Economics has joined with

the College of Engineering to offer two cross-college

programs. These programs, Integrated Business and

Engineering (IBE) and Computer Science and Business

(CSB) are described in full in the following “Crossing

Boundaries” section.

All minors offered by the College of Arts and Sciences

are available to CBE undergraduate students. The engi-

neering minor offered by the College of Engineering is

also available to all CBE undergraduates.

Crossing Boundaries

A major strength of the College of Business and

Economics is its ability to develop programs by partner-

ing across academic disciplines within the College, across

the colleges within the University and with the business

community. Students are able to cross traditional bound-

aries and take advantage of all that the College of

Business and Economics and other colleges of the

University have to offer. The partnerships built with

alumni and the business community afford students the

opportunity for internships in their areas of interest.

As the needs in the marketplace change, the ingredients

necessary for success must reflect these new require-

ments. From courses in e-commerce to supply chain

management and joint degree programs, the College of

Business and Economics provides today’s undergraduate

students with the skills necessary to become tomorrow’s

business leaders.

Entrepreneurship Minor

The program aims to prepare students from all under-

graduate colleges at Lehigh with the skill sets, attitudes,

and understanding of the processes to realize their entre-

preneurial goals in either an emerging or established

company setting. The program is designed to be general-

ly accessible to students from all disciplines with an

emphasis upon innovation, the entrepreneurial process,

and cross-functional integration. The minor can be

added to any undergraduate degree at the university.

Integrated Real Estate Minor

Integrated Real Estate At Lehigh (ire@l) is a three or

four year course of study designed to complement a wide

range of majors, from art and architecture to civil engi-

neering to environmental science to finance to marketing

to economics. The mission of the ire@l program is to

prepare the next generation of real estate leaders. Stu-

dents completing the ire@l program will earn a minor in

real estate.

Career Placement

The undergraduate programs in the College of Business

and Economics provide the students with a strong foun-

dation in business and economic principles necessary for

success in business. Upon graduation, the majority of

students from the College of Business and Economics

enter business in many different professional positions

including accounting, investment banking, advertising,

marketing, management consulting and information sys-

tems. Further professional studies in law, graduate

business schools or specialized graduate education in

economics, operations research, or other related fields are

additional options open to graduates.

Variety of Options

While preparing students for a career in business and

economics, we recognize the importance of a well-

rounded individual. At Lehigh, this important exposure

to science, language and the arts and humanities is

accomplished by distribution requirements, within

which the student has wide choice. Students have a min-

Undergraduate Studies 39

imum of 52 free electives, 48 of which must be taken

outside the College of Business and Economics.

The bachelor of science in business and economics may

also lead to admission into the master of business admin-

istration program at Lehigh or another institution after

graduates have at least 2-3 years of work experience. In

addition, the college also offers the following graduate

degrees: doctor of philosophy, master of business admin-

istration and engineering, master of business

administration and educational leadership, master of sci-

ence in accounting and information analysis, master of

science in economics, master of science in health and

bio-pharmaceutical economics and master of science in

analytical finance. These are described in Section IV.

Computer Science and Business

Program

The College of Business and Economics and the

Computer Science and Engineering department in the

P.C. Rossin College of Engineering and Applied Science

jointly offer the Computer Science and Business (CSB)

program. The mission of the program is to provide rigor-

ous computer science education integrated with in-depth

business training that prepares high quality undergradu-

ate students with diverse backgrounds for lifelong

learning and to assume positions of leadership in the

business community. This 135 credit hour degree inte-

grates technology skills in software development with a

solid background in business and economics. Deep

immersion in both of these areas distinguishes CSB from

programs offered by other universities. At the same time

it is well balanced with approximately one third of the

courses in liberal arts, one-third in computer science,

and one-third in business.

After four years the program leads to a degree in

Computer Science and in Business, which is jointly

awarded by the College of Business and Economics and

the P.C. Rossin College of Engineering and Applied

Science. Graduates of the program will be ideal candi-

dates for placement within public accounting firms,

consulting companies, and startup companies. This pro-

gram provides students with the background needed to

become the CIO’s, decision makers, and general man-

agers of information age corporations.

While honors-like in quality and rigor, the CSB program

is open to any student wishing to accept the challenges it

offers. Students may matriculate at Lehigh specifically

into CSB or enter the program at a later point.

Transferring into CSB after freshman year, however, may

require students to take additional credits to graduate.

The co-directors of the CSB program are James A. Hall,

Peter E. Bennett Chair in Business and Economics

([email protected]) and Edwin Kay, Professor of

Computer Science and Engineering ([email protected]).

For additional information see Section V of this catalog

or visit the CSB web site at: www.cse.lehigh.edu/csb

Integrated Business and Engineering

Honors Program

The Integrated Business and Engineering Program (IBE)

is offered jointly by the College of Business and

Economics and the P. C. Rossin College of Engineering

and Applied Science. The mission of the Integrated

Business and Engineering Honors program is to produce

graduates with a unique set of skills and competencies:

In addition to the mastery of the concepts and proce-

dures taught in individual courses in each college, the

IBE Honors Program develops competencies that require

an integrated knowledge from both engineering and

business. This program recognizes the need for today’s

leaders in business and industry to have a sound founda-

tion in both commerce and technology.

After four years and a minimum of 137 credits, students

will receive a single Bachelor of Science Degree in

Business and Engineering. The program meets the

accreditation standards of AACSB International.

Students are required to maintain a minimum GPA of

3.25 in order to remain in the program.

Students in the IBE Honors Program can major in any

area of business or engineering that Lehigh offers. After

freshman year, each student will elect a major in either

the College of Business and Economics or the P. C.

Rossin College of Engineering and Applied Science.

Students wanting to major in an area of business can

select from: accounting, business information systems,

economics, finance, marketing, management or supply

chain management.

Admission to the Integrated Business and Engineering

Honors Program is highly selective, with annual admis-

sion limited to approximately 50 students. The

University’s Office of Admissions (610-758-3100) can

explain the procedure for applying to the program.

It is possible that a small number of exceptional students

may be admitted to the program following the comple-

tion of their freshman year. Admission at this point

would be highly competitive and based upon freshman

year GPA, faculty recommendations, and space availabil-

ity.

The co-directors of the IBE Honors Program are

Stephen G. Buell, Professor of Finance and Business

Information Systems ([email protected]) and Robert H.

Storer, Professor of Industrial and Manufacturing

Systems Engineering ([email protected]). For additional

information, see the IBE Honors Program entry in

Section V of this catalog or visit the IBE web site at

www.lehigh.edu/inibep/inibep.html.

Centers and Institutes

The college also oversees research and scholarship in a

number of centers and institutes, where graduate and

undergraduate students work closely with faculty mem-

bers. These include: Iacocca Institute, Martindale Center

for the Study of Private Enterprise, Murray H.

Goodman Center for Real Estate Studies, Philip Rauch

Center for Business Communications, Value Chain

Research Institute, Financial Services Laboratory, and

Small Business Development Center.

Bachelor of Science in Business and

Economics

The College of Business and Economics at Lehigh

University prepares students to become business and

community leaders in a broad range of organizations.

Our undergraduate students acquire the knowledge and

skills needed to excel in business. Overall, we expect our

graduates to be able to successfully solve complex,

unstructured business problems.

For the bachelor of science degree in business and eco-

nomics, 124 credit hours are required. A writing

requirement, which is included within the required 124

credit hours, is also a part of the college curriculum.

40 Lehigh University Course Catalog 2009-2010

Planning Courses of Study

First year

ENGL 1 Composition and Literature I (3)

ENGL 2, 4, 6, 8, 10 Composition and Literature II (3)

MATH 21 Calculus I (4) or

ECO 1 Principles of Economics (4)

BUS 1 Introduction to Business (3)

Excel competency must be completed before ACCT 151

and ECO 145.

ECO 045 Statistical Methods (3)

ECO 029 Money, Banking, and

Financial Markets (3)

BUS 005 Values-Based Decision Making

for Business (1)

Second Year

ACCT 151 Introduction to Financial

Accounting (3)

ACCT 152 Introduction to Managerial

Accounting (3)

BIS 111 Management Information Systems (3)

ECO 146 Applied Microeconomic Analysis (3)

FIN 125 Business Finance (3)

MGT 186 Supply Chain Operations

Management (3)

MKT 111 Principles of Marketing (3)

Students should plan their sophomore year core courses

in consultation with the department of their intended

major(s).

Third Year

LAW 201 Legal Environment of Business (3)

MGT 243 Management of Organizations (3)

Fourth Year

MGT 301 Business Management Policies (3)

Major Programs (15 credits - 21 credits)

Before the end of the first semester of the junior year,

students select a major consisting of sequential or related

courses in one of the following major programs:

accounting, business economics, business information

systems, economics, finance, management, marketing

and supply chain management. A GPA of 2.0 or higher

in the major program is required for graduation.

Double Majors

Students in the College of Business & Economics may

pursue a double major within the CBE according to the

following guidelines. Students must declare a single

major prior to declaring a second major, and must com-

plete an application including a statement of rationale

for pursuing the second major. Students planning to

pursue more than one major within the CBE must meet

a pre-requisite GPA of 2.0 or higher.

Distribution Requirements (15 credits)

Students are required to take six (6) credits of humani-

ties (HU), six (6) credits of social science (SS), and three

(3) credits of science (NS) for a total of 15 credits of dis-

tribution requirements. Students should refer to the

department in the catalog to determine which course

offerings may be taken to satisfy these requirements.

Electives (52-58 credits) - depending on major

Students will earn 52-58 credits of “free” electives; A

minimum of 48 credits are to be taken outside the Col-

lege of Business and Economics.

In the College of Business and Economics, the pass-fail

option is available for elective courses only. A student

desiring Lehigh credit for a course taken at another insti-

tution must complete a transfer credit form and obtain

approval from the appropriate Lehigh academic depart-

ment in advance.

Business Minor

The purpose of the business minor program is to enable

non-CBE students to pursue a course of business studies

which enables them to supplement their major studies

and enhances their career options upon graduation. The

overall learning objective of the program is to provide

non-CBE students with the knowledge and skills with

which to make more informed business decisions.

Courses offered in the business minor program are not

open to students currently in the CBE, nor may these

classes count as substitutes for CBE core classes should a

student later decide to transfer into the CBE.

Program of Studies: The business minor consists of 14

credit hours. The courses are integrated across the entire

program and must be taken in a stepped sequence. These

14 credit hours plus the prerequisite consist of the fol-

lowing courses:

Required prerequisite course:

• ECO 1 – Principles of Economics (4) ECO 1 can be

taken in either the freshman or sophomore year and

must be completed prior to entering the business

minor program.

Required courses:

First Year

• BUS 125 – Behavioral Skills Workshop (1) fall

• BUS 126 – Information Analysis and Financial

Decision Making I (3) fall

• BUS 127 – Information Analysis and Financial

Decision Making II (3) spring

Second Year

• BUS 225 – Developing, Producing, and Marketing

Products and Services I (3) fall

• BUS 226 – Developing, Producing, and Marketing

Products and Services II (3) spring

• BUS 326 – Business Strategy (1) spring

Recommended courses:

• Probability Theory and Statistics (e.g., ECO 045,

MATH 12, IE 111, PSYC 110.)

• An Integrated Learning Experience (e.g., ME/BUS

211, MGT 311, or internship.)

The courses required in the business minor program will

be offered in a stepped sequence requiring completion of

each course in the sequence before being able to contin-

ue to the next course. That is, students must first

complete BUS 125 and BUS 126 before taking BUS

127, BUS 127 before taking BUS 225, and BUS 225

before taking 226. BUS 125 and BUS 326 are to be

taken in conjunction with BUS 126 and BUS 226,

respectively.

Undergraduate Studies 41

Program admission requirements: Each spring, 80 stu-

dents will be accepted into the business minor program

for the following fall. Applications to the program will be

made by students and submitted to the program director

by the first Monday in March. An admissions committee

comprised of the business minor program director, asso-

ciate dean for the undergraduate CBE program and the

business minor curriculum committee will make admis-

sion decisions based on G.P.A., experience, and interest

in pursuing business opportunities upon graduation from

Lehigh (to be evaluated on the basis of a written essay).

Students will be notified of admissions decisions prior to

registration for the fall semester. Entrance into business

minor classes will be controlled by restricted overrides by

the director of business minor program. The Director of

the Business Minor program is Geraldo M. Vasconcellos,

Allen DuBois Distinguished Professor of Finance &

Economics (gmv0@lehigh.edu). Professor Vasconcellos’

office is in the Rauch Business Center, Room 320.

Integrated Real Estate @t Lehigh (ire@l)

Program

Integrated Real Estate At Lehigh (ire@l) is a three or four

year course of study designed to complement a wide range

of majors, from art and architecture to civil engineering to

environmental science to finance to marketing to eco-

nomics. The mission of the ire@l program is to prepare

the next generation of real estate leaders. Students com-

pleting the ire@l program will earn a minor in real estate.

Required Courses comprising the minor include:

• IPRE 001 Introductory Seminar in Real Estate (3)

• IPRE 002 Field Laboratory (2)

• IPRE 301 Case Studies in Real Estate Value Creation

(3)

• IPRE 302 Summer IPRE Internship (0 – 1)

• Bus 347 Practicum in Real Estate I (2)

• Bus 348 Practicum in Real Estate II (2)

Recommended Courses:

• IPRE 101 Real Estate Practicum Clerkship I (1)

• IPRE 102 Real Estate Practicum Clerkship II (1)

The director of the Goodman Center for Real Estate Studies

and the ire@l Program is Associate Professor Stephen Thode

([email protected]).

Entrepreneurship

Program Management: CBE and RCEAS faculty com-

mittee. Minor Program Director: Graham Mitchell

Minor in Entrepreneurship

The purpose of the entrepreneurship minor is to enable

students to supplement their major with knowledge and

skills that increase their ability to realize their entrepre-

neurial goal and/or make them more marketable upon

graduation. It will also work to create an environment

and campus center of gravity that fosters an entrepre-

neurial spirit and mindset among students and also serve

as a locus for community building among entrepreneur-

ial students, faculty, and alumni. This minor is available

for students at Lehigh University.

Required pre-requisite course:

• ECO 1 Principles of Economics (4) ECO 1 must be

completed prior to entering the entrepreneurship

minor program.

Required Courses:

• ENTP 101: Entrepreneurship I (3)

• ENTP 201: Entrepreneurship and Enterprise (3)

• One of the following Integrated Learning Experience

(ILE) options

• ENTP 311: Entrepreneurship Practicum (3)

• IBE 395: Capstone Projects 1 (3)

• MGT 311: LUMAC Management Assistance

Counseling (3)

• Or other independent experiential project

approved by the minor program director.

• ENTP 312: Launching Entrepreneurial Ventures (3)

Recommended Additional Courses:

• ACCT 108 or 151/152

• Law 201 and 202

• MGT 306

• MKT 211 and 319

• SCM 309

• Excel Competency Program

Students must complete the minor sequence with an

average GPA of at least 2.0 in the required minor courses

in order to qualify for the minor. Courses in the

Entrepreneurship minor cannot be used towards either

the Engineering Minor or the Business minor.

College of Education

The university’s College of Education offers opportuni-

ties for advanced study in the field of education. For

information, see Graduate Study in Education, Section

IV, or College of Education, Section V.

P.C. Rossin College of

Engineering and Applied

Science

David Wu, dean

John P. Coulter, associate dean for graduate studies and

research

Gerard P. Lennon, associate dean for undergraduate

studies

The P.C. Rossin College of Engineering and Applied

Science offers the bachelor of science degree in 17 pro-

grams, combining a strong background in sciences and

mathematics with requirements in humanities and social

sciences. Students in college programs learn principles

they can apply immediately in professional work; those

who plan on further academic experience can design a

curriculum centering on interests they will pursue in

graduate school.

The Mission of the college is to prepare undergraduate

and graduate students to be critical thinkers, problem

solvers, innovators, leaders and life-long learners in a

global society and to create an environment where stu-

dents pursue cutting-edge research in engineering and

engineering science.

42 Lehigh University Course Catalog 2009-2010

Major Programs

The P.C. Rossin College of Engineering and Applied

Science includes seven departments and offers under-

graduate and graduate degree programs at the bachelor,

master, and doctor of philosophy levels.

The undergraduate degree programs leading to the bach-

elor of science degree are:

Applied Science

Bioengineering*

Chemical Engineering*

Chemistry

Civil Engineering*

Computer Engineering*

Computer Science**

Computer Science And Business***

Electrical Engineering*

Engineering Mechanics

Engineering Physics

Environmental Engineering*

Industrial Engineering*

Information And Systems Engineering*

Integrated Business And Engineering

Integrated Degree In Engineering, Arts And Sciences

Materials Science And Engineering*

Mechanical Engineering*

*Accredited by the Engineering Accreditation Commission of

ABET, Inc., 111 Market Place, Suite 1050, Baltimore,

MD 21202-4012 – telephone (410) 347-7700

** Accredited by the Computing Accreditation Commission

of ABET, Inc., 111 Market Place, Suite 1050, Baltimore,

MD 21202-4012 – telephone (410) 347-7700.

***Accredited by both the by the Computing Accreditation

Commission of ABET, Inc., 111 Market Place, Suite 1050,

Baltimore, MD 21202-4012 – telephone (410) 347-7700

and the American Assembly of Collegiate Schools of Business

Programs in chemistry and physics have been approved by

the faculty program review committee in these disciplines.

Information about each of these programs may be found

under alphabetical listings in Section V.

Free Electives

The college, through its advisers, is prepared to help stu-

dents to use the credit hours of “free electives” that,

along with other electives in the curriculum, may be

used to develop a program of personal interest. Free elec-

tives may be satisfied by taking regular course offerings

or up to six credit hours from each of the following from

Mus 21-79, from Jour 1-8, or up to six credit hours of

advanced ROTC courses.

Freshman year, first semester (14 - 15 credits)

• ENGL 1 Composition and Literature (3)

• MATH 21 Calculus I (4)

• Science: Required natural science course*

• ENGR 1 Engineering Computations (3), or

• ENGR 5 Introduction to Engineering Practice (3)

Freshman year, second semester (14 - 15 credits)

• ENGL 2 Composition and Literature: Fiction,

Drama, Poetry (3)

• MATH 22 Calculus II (4)

• Science: Required natural science course*

• ENGR 1 Engineering Computations (3), or

• ENGR 5 Introduction to Engineering Practice (3)

*The required science courses, one taken fall semester and

the other taken in spring, are:

• CHM 25 Introductory Chemical Principles and

Laboratory (4)

• PHY 11, 12 Introductory Physics I and Laboratory

(5)

Bioengineering students take Chm 25 and ENGR1 in

the fall, and Bioscience 41/42 (instead of ENGR5) in

the spring along with PHY 11/12.

Humanities/Social Sciences (HSS)

Requirement for all Accredited

Engineering Majors

Basic Requirement: English and Economics. Three

courses totaling a minimum of ten credit hours: Students

must complete English 1 (or 3), English 2 (or 5, or 11)

and Economics 1. Students with advanced placements in

English 1 usually take English 11 to complete the

English requirements.

Advanced Requirement: Breadth and Depth. 13 credits

in courses designated as HU (humanities) or SS (social

science), with the following restrictions:

1. Depth: At least eight credits must be in a common

discipline and from the same department or pro-

gram. At least three of these credits must be at the

100-level or above, or at the intermediate level or

above for a single modern foreign language.

2. Breadth: At least three credits in a discipline differ-

ent from, and not cross-listed with, the discipline

employed to satisfy the concentration requirement

above.

3. At least three credits must be designated as HU.

4. None of the courses used for HSS can be taken

Pass/Fail.

5. None of the course can be one-credit courses.

Currently, the following technical minors are offered:

Technical Minor Department

aerospace engineering Mechanical Engineering

biotechnology Chemical Engineering

chemical engineering Chemical Engineering

computer science Computer Science and

Engineering

electrical engineering Electrical Engineering

engineering leadership Industrial and Systems

Engineering

environmental engineering Civil & Environmental

Engineering

manufacturing systems Industrial & Systems

Engineering

materials science Materials Science &

Engineering

nanotechnology Materials Science &

Engineering

polymer science Center for Polymer Science

Engineering

Undergraduate Studies 43

Interdisciplinary Minors

A minor in Engineering Leadership provides students

with knowledge, experiences and interaction with suc-

cessful business managers in order to become more

effective leaders.

The College of Business and Economics offers a minor

in Business for students in the College of Arts and

Sciences and P.C. Rossin College of Engineering and

Applied Science to provide students with knowledge and

skills to allow them to make informed business decisions.

A sequential sequence of courses is designed to integrate

such traditional topics as accounting, finance, marketing,

and management. Minors in Real Estate and

Entrepreneurship are also offered. The courses in the lat-

ter treat subjects such as intellectual property, creativity

and innovation, venture capital, positioning of products

and services, and understanding the entrepreneurial

mindset.

Students in engineering can also earn a minor in various

humanities or social sciences by using their humanities

and social science and free electives.

Engineering Minor

The college of engineering enables undergraduate stu-

dents enrolled in the Colleges of Arts and Sciences and

in the College of Business and Economics to earn a

minor in engineering. This unique program provides stu-

dents with insight into the world of engineers: who they

are, what they do, and how they think. Students taking

the Minor in Engineering develop an understanding of

the tools and techniques engineering use on a day-to-day

basis.

The mission of the minor is to educate non-engineering

students about engineering methodology, specifically

how engineers solve problems; how they design, manu-

facture, and analyze problems; and how other factors

such as economics, safety, ethics, and environmental

issues affect the engineering design process. Fifteen credit

hours is required to fulfill the engineering minor.

Music Option

Music and Engineering is not a major in itself. However,

Lehigh attracts many engineering and science students

who wish to continue their active involvement in music

and the music department. For those students who are

interested in pursuing this option, music can be taken as

a second degree or minor.

Cooperative Education (Co-Op)

Co-Op is available for undergraduates in the P.C. Rossin

College of Engineering and Applied Science; the pro-

gram provides eight months of paid, full-time work

experience, bridging the gap between engineering theory

and application and allowing students to graduate within

a four year time-frame. Because of the rigorous academic

schedule, the program is selective.

The Co-Op schedule provides for interviews and selec-

tion by the companies in the spring semester of the

sophomore year. Those students selected attend Lehigh

for a challenging summer schedule of junior-level course-

work, then begin their first work rotation with the

sponsoring company in mid-August. This rotation will

last until mid-January when the student returns to

Lehigh for the second semester coursework of the junior

year. The Co-Op experience is completed with a second

work rotation the following summer (mid-May through

August). Students earn 3 free elective credits per success-

ful work assignment for a total of 6 free elective credits.

Integrated Business and Engineering

Honors Program

The Integrated Business and Engineering Honors

Program (IBE) is offered jointly by the P.C. Rossin

College of Engineering and Applied Science and the

College of Business and Economics. The program recog-

nizes the need for today’s leaders in business and

industry to have a sound foundation in both commerce

and technology.

After four years and a minimum of 137 credits, students

will receive a single Bachelor of Science Degree in

Integrated Business and Engineering. The program meets

the accreditation standards of the American Assembly of

Collegiate Schools of Business. Students are expected to

maintain a minimum GPA of 3.25 in order to remain in

the program.

A second option is the five-year dual degree program.

This option allows students to obtain a second Bachelor

of Science degree in engineering by completing course

work in the engineering field chosen by the student as

their IBE major. Students enrolled in the four year IBE

Honors Program and in satisfactory standing are able to

transfer to a dual-degree at any time, and stay within the

honors program cohort. The additional time necessary to

complete the second degree will depend on the curricu-

lum selected, and the number of advanced placement

credits. The number of additional credit hours will typi-

cally be in the range of 27 to 30.

Students in the IBE Honors Program can major in near-

ly any area of engineering or business that Lehigh offers.

After their freshman year, each student will elect a major

in either the P. C. Rossin College of Engineering and

Applied Science or the College of Business and

Economics.

Admission to the Integrated Business and Engineering

Program is highly selective, with annual admission limit-

ed to approximately 45 students. The University’s Office

of Admissions can explain the procedure for applying to

the program. It is possible that a small number of excep-

tional students may be admitted to the program

following the completion of their freshman year.

Admission at this point would be highly competitive and

based upon freshman year GPA, faculty recommenda-

tions, and space availability.

The Co-Directors of the IBE Honors Program are

Robert H. Storer, Professor of Industrial and Systems

Engineering ([email protected]) and Stephen G. Buell,

Professor of Finance ([email protected]). For additional

information, see the IBE Honors Program entry in

Section V of this catalog or visit the IBE web site at

www.lehigh.edu/~inibep/inibep.html.

Integrated Degree Engineering, Arts and

Sciences (IDEAS) Honors Program

The B.S. in Integrated Engineering, Arts and Sciences

(IDEAS) provides students with a unique opportunity to

combine the breadth and depth of two focus areas, one

from engineering and one from arts and sciences in a

four-year experience. More information is available in

the IDEAS entry in this catalog, or online at

www.lehigh.edu/ideas.

44 Lehigh University Course Catalog 2009-2010

Centers and Institutes

Faculty and students in the college also have research

and scholarship activities in a number of centers and

institutes, where graduate and undergraduate students

work closely with faculty members. These include:

Center for Advanced Technology for Large Structural

Systems, Biopharmaceutical Technology Institute,

Chemical Process Modeling and Control Center,

Emulsion Polymers Institute, Energy Research Center,

Enterprise Systems Center, Fritz Laboratory, Sherman

Fairchild Center for Solid-State Studies, Polymer Science

and Engineering Center, Structural Stability Research

Council, Council on Tall Buildings and Urban Habitat,

Center for Manufacturing Systems Engineering, Ben

Franklin Technology Partners, Manufacturers Resource

Center, Center for Advanced Materials and

Nanotechnology, and Center for Optical Technologies.

Special Undergraduate

Academic Opportunities

The academic programs in the colleges are supplemented

by five-year, two-degree programs as well as opportuni-

ties for advanced, foreign, and experiential study.

Arts-Engineering Option

The curriculum in arts-engineering is designed for stu-

dents wanting a professional education in a field of

engineering and also the opportunity to study a second

field.

Arts-engineers fulfill all requirements for the professional

engineering degree for which they are working. However,

the first three years of science and engineering courses

are scheduled over four years for the arts-engineer.

During this period the arts-engineer is a student in the

College of Arts and Science pursuing a bachelor of arts

or bachelor of science major program.

In many instances it may be advisable to take the two

degrees at the end of the fifth year. Arts-engineers work-

ing towards the bachelor of science in biology, computer

science, environmental science, geological sciences, geo-

physics, molecular biology, and statistics are advised to

pay special attention to the engineering humanities and

social science requirements, which must be met in time

for the student to qualify for the B.S. in engineering.

Arts-engineers have the same opportunities for multiple

majors and special interdisciplinary majors as are avail-

able to students working for the baccalaureate (B.S. or

B.A. degree only) in the College of Arts and Sciences.

Additional information may be obtained by contacting

Prof. Bruce Thomas, Art and Architecture, Chandler-

Ullmann.

Bachelor/Master Degree Programs

Of increasing interest to undergraduates are the two-

degree programs that may lead to both a bachelor and a

master’s degree in five years. Because Lehigh’s well-estab-

lished graduate programs are closely integrated with the

undergraduate programs, it is possible to consider pro-

grams leading to the arts/master of business

administration degree and the engineering/master of sci-

ence in material science, among others. The fifth-year

program in the School of Education enables those receiv-

ing a B.A. or B.S. degree to accomplish professional

teacher training and serve as salaried interns in public

schools. After the completion of one year of full-time

teaching, secondary teachers can receive the master of

arts and elementary teachers can receive master of educa-

tion degrees.

Many other five-year, graduate-level combination pro-

grams exist, and students are advised to consult with

their adviser in planning such programs. All students

receiving masters degrees must be registered as full time

degree graduate students for at least one full term.

Interdisciplinary Programs

The university’s interdisciplinary programs are designed

to cross the boundaries between colleges to accommo-

date new and developing fields as well as the interests of

students. They include such programs as the following:

Africana Studies. A program offering a minor is available

to students interested in exploring various aspects of the

African American experience. Courses covering African

American art, history, literature, music, and society are

offered. The program is complemented with a lecture,

film, and arts series that highlights the richness and

diversity of black culture.

Environmental Studies. The Environmental Studies pro-

gram will provide broad exposure to the range of issues

confronting the human condition, cultural and historical

perspectives on how society has evolved to its present

state, and insights into the range of possible correspon-

ding methodological approached and solutions to the

global environmental questions humanity confronts.

This program complements existing Environmental

Sciences as well as the program in Environmental

Engineering.

Science, Technology and Society Program (STS).

Faculty from all three colleges explore the interrelation-

ships between science and technological advancement

and the quality of human life in the popular STS pro-

gram.

Office of International Students

and Scholars

“The development of future leaders in our global society is

first among Lehigh’s purposes.”

—Lehigh University Mission Statement

Gisela Nansteel, 32 Sayre Drive, Coxe Hall, Bethlehem,

PA, 18015-3123; (610) 758-4859. Fax (610) 758-5156.

E-mail: [email protected]. http://www.lehigh.edu/~intnl/

Lehigh fosters an environment that welcomes and

encourages the international exchange of students and

scholars. The Office of International Students and

Scholars (OISS) is a university-wide resource for stu-

dents and scholars from abroad, and for U.S. students

and faculty who are interested in the global focus. Its

mission is to provide support services for international

students and scholars to ensure maximum opportunities

for them to achieve their goals; be a resource to the fac-

ulty, staff and administration on issues related to

international students and scholars, cross-cultural com-

munication and diversity; support the University’s efforts

to internationalize the campus; and create an environ-

ment where the Lehigh community is exposed to a

multitude of cultures, traditions and viewpoints by pre-

senting internationally-focused academic, cultural and

social programming.

Undergraduate Studies 45

Services

A variety of cross-cultural programs are initiated by the

OISS, including a combined undergraduate and gradu-

ate orientation, spouse conversation groups, seminars on

immigration matters, international tax advising,

Thanksgiving Dinner, the International Bazaar, monthly

social programs, and The International Update

Newsletter. Lehigh is a member institution of Phi Beta

Delta, international honorary society.

The year for international students and scholars at

Lehigh begins with the International Orientation.

Orientation takes place in conjunction with other pro-

grams offered by the undergraduate admissions office

and/or graduate departments, starting immediately

before the university-wide orientation at the beginning

of each semester. Orientation is strongly recommended

for all new international students and scholars. Issues

discussed include filing for a social security number,

opening a banking account, health insurance, and

adjustment to university life at Lehigh and to the United

States. International Orientation is a time to become

accustomed to life in America, and to meet other foreign

students. Each person will receive a Guidebook for

International Students and Scholars.

Additional Special Services for

International Students

Career Services: Advising and special workshops for

careers for international students are provided.

Food Service: For undergraduate students on the meal

plan, menus meet the international dietary needs of the

students. There is a stir-fry bar and balanced meals for

vegetarian diets.

Health Center: Fully staffed medical personnel meet

both the physical and personal needs of all students. The

Counseling Center has special services for international

students.

Immigration/Visa Advising: Complete service is provid-

ed by OISS.

Learning Center: Free tutors are provided in writing,

math and science.

National Clubs: Home country clubs from all regions of

the world are established on campus. They form an

important part of the cross-cultural dimension of the

campus, providing social events, films, and international

dialogue.

Phi Beta Delta, International Honor Society: Lehigh’s

Beta Pi chapter of Phi Beta Delta, the international hon-

orary society with chapters across the U.S. and overseas,

is an important international organization on campus.

The purpose of the society is to honor those involved in

high academic achievement and service in the interna-

tional dimension, and to foster international exchange

on campus. The honor society has three categories of

membership: international students who have demon-

strated high scholastic achievement at Lehigh; U.S.

students who have demonstrated high scholastic achieve-

ment in the pursuit of international studies including

study abroad; faculty and staff distinguished in interna-

tional endeavors. Gisela M. Nansteel, Chapter

Coordinator.

Religious Services: Services for all the major religions are

on campus or nearby, including Muslim, Christian,

Jewish, Hindu and Buddhist.

Global Union

Bill Hunter, Director, Global Union, 215 Coxe Hall, 32

Sayre Drive, Bethlehem, PA 18015-3123, (610) 758-

4505; E-mail: [email protected]

http://www.lehigh.edu/~inglobal/

The Global Union, located in Coxe Hall Room 215, is a

collaboration of more than 40 student clubs and organi-

zations that promote global awareness and cultural

understanding within the Lehigh community. There are

more than 1,000 members of the Global Union from

over 30 countries, including two-thirds from the United

States.

The Global Union hosts panel discussions on world

issues, one of the nation’s largest International Education

Week celebrations, dinners and cultural festivals, musical

performances, and a language exchange program. All

events at the Global Union are free and open to the

Lehigh community.

The lounge also has a TV/VCR, stereo, comfortable

couches and a microwave, and can be used for meetings,

quiet study or film presentations.

For more information regarding the Global Union,

check our website at http://www.lehigh.edu/~inglobal/

Lehigh University/United Nations

Partnership

Bill Hunter, Lehigh Representative to the United

Nations, 100A Coxe Hall, 32 Sayre Dr., Bethlehem, PA

18015-3123, (610) 758-4505; Email: [email protected].

http://www.lehigh.edu/~inunited

Lehigh University is one of only eleven universities in

the world to be certified as a Non-governmental

Organization affiliated with the United Nations (UN)

Department of Public Information. Through this part-

nership, Lehigh students, staff, and faculty attend private

briefings with ambassadors and UN officials, take private

tours of UN headquarters, and attend conferences, work-

shops and symposia at the UN. Lehigh also hosts an

Ambassadorial Speaker Series on campus, and places one

intern per semester at the UN.

For more information about the Lehigh

University/United Nations Partnership, check out our

website at: http://www.lehigh.edu/~inunited

Study Abroad Office

Neil McGurty, Director; Jodeen Gemmel, Coordinator;

Katie Welsh Radande, Study Abroad Advisor; Tony

Rossi, Study Abroad Advisor; Lolita Garcia,

Administrative Clerk.

Coxe Hall, 32 Sayre Drive, Bethlehem, PA 18015.

Phone (610) 758-3351; Fax (610) 758-5156; email:

[email protected]; www.lehigh.edu/studyabroad.

Lehigh University recommends international study. We

support programs that offer rigorous academic environ-

ments, immersion in host cultures, and opportunities for

personal growth. Students should return to Lehigh with

an enhanced ability to appreciate global concerns.

Every student who studies abroad has different reasons

and goals. High priorities for many students include

developing sophisticated perspectives on global econom-

ic, social, and political issues, seeing the theoretical come

to life in a real-world context, learning or perfecting a

second (or third) language, engaging with people and

46 Lehigh University Course Catalog 2009-2010

cultures different from their own, developing valuable

career skills, and earning academic credit toward a

Lehigh degree. Many students find that study abroad is a

catalyst for intellectual and personal growth.

The Study Abroad Office conducts extensive advising

activities, guiding students through the process of identi-

fying programs that fit personal and academic goals;

group and individual advising sessions take place daily.

Study Abroad options exist for all majors and can take

place Freshman through Senior year. Students should

start discussing study abroad options with their academic

advisor and the study abroad office as early as Freshman

year.

Semester/Year: Lehigh approves over 150 semester and

yearlong programs of academic study in over 60 coun-

tries. The programs are evaluated by faculty in order to

ensure high academic quality and immersion in host cul-

tures. Academic credit is given for programs approved by

Lehigh faculty only. Students must receive a ‘C’ or better

for credit to transfer. Grades earned on semester and year

programs do not count in the student’s G.P.A.

Summer and Winter Break Study Abroad: Lehigh offers

several faculty-led summer and winter (break) study

abroad programs. Past programs have included: Religion

in India; Religion in Turkey; Business and History in

Belgium; Business in Prague; Microfinance Abroad in

various locations; Art and Architecture in Vicenza;

Internships and Language in Shanghai; Sustainable

Development in Costa Rica; French and Africana Studies

in Martinique; MLL in Spain; Economics and

Humanities in Ireland; Engineering in Germany. Lehigh

credit and grades are applied to a student’s transcript,

and are counted in the student’s GPA.

Lehigh University sponsors several six-week summer lan-

guage programs in Europe and Mexico through LVAIC,

the Lehigh Valley Association of Independent Colleges.

Credits and grades transfer to Lehigh and are counted in

the student’s GPA.

To view all program options and begin planning for a

Study Abroad Experience, visit

www.lehigh.edu/studyabroad.

Experiential Learning

The accommodation of student interest extends beyond

regular departmental offerings. Hands-on experiences in

learning enrich classroom instruction. Each of the three

colleges offers a number of such experiences to under-

graduates. Among them:

The Philadelphia Urban Semester. Undergraduates in all

fields of study can earn 16 Lehigh credit hours by spend-

ing a semester studying in the nation’s fourth-largest

metropolis. They live, work, and study with other stu-

dents from two dozen other institutions, supervised by

faculty of the Great Lakes Colleges Association. This

consortium of such leading Midwestern institutions as

DePauw, Kenyon, Oberlin, and Wooster is a recognized

leader in providing extra-mural academic programs both

here and abroad.

The curriculum consists of two four-credit seminars and

an eight-credit internship. All students are enrolled in a

core “Seminar on the City” which introduces them to

the field of urban affairs and to Philadelphia. The second

seminar is elected from a half-dozen more specialized

urban topics; recent choices available have included

“Folklore in Philadelphia,” “Art in the City” (which met

each week at a different site), and “Justice.” Internships

involve working four days weekly in a public or private

placement which tests the student’s aptitude in a variety

of practical ways while enhancing appreciation of city

life.

The Washington Semester. Opportunity is available each

year for six juniors or seniors to spend a term studying

in Washington, D.C., in cooperation with American

University. Lehigh University is a member with 180

other colleges and universities.

Students enroll at Lehigh but spend the semester in resi-

dence at American University with the students from

other participating colleges.

The curriculum consists of national-government semi-

nars, an internship, and a written research project.

Besides the national government program, the student

may choose other program offerings such as economic

policy semester, journalism, public administration, for-

eign policy semester and justice semester.

Inspection trips. The location of the university in the cen-

ter of industrial activities of various types affords unusual

opportunities for visits to manufacturing plants.

Inspection trips to individual plants are a required part

of specific courses in various engineering curricula.

Written reports may be required. These trips are general-

ly held during the senior year and involve an average

expense of $25 to $50.

English as a Second Language

Timothy Bonner, Director

205 Coxe Hall

Bethlehem, PA, 18015, (610) 758-6099

www.lehigh.edu/~inesl

The English as a Second Language Program (ESL) offers

academic semester and summer courses for undergradu-

ate and graduate students and their families. In addition,

academic support is provided for ESL students through

the ELLC language lab, conversation groups, and lan-

guage enrichment courses.

English Department Credit Courses. After reviewing

placement test results, undergraduates may be required

to take English 3 and English 5 (Composition and

Literature for International Writers I and II) in substitu-

tion for required English 1 and 2. Native English

speaking or near native-speaking upperclass and graduate

students who are interested in the ESL field as a career

can get an introduction to teaching ESL/EFL in English

310 and English 314. (Refer to the English department

course offerings.)

ESL Program Credit Courses. Both undergraduate and

graduate students may select from a variety of supple-

mental ESL credit courses in conversation, listening,

accent reduction, reading, and writing offered through-

out the year. (Refer to the English as a Second Language

course offerings.)

StepUp Intensive English Non-credit Program. The

StepUp Program provides an intensive academic English

experience for both enrolled Lehigh students and for other

students preparing to enter a U.S. university or who need

professional English skills for the workplace. StepUp

enhances English skills in academic reading and writing

and formal academic language, and provides an orientation

to American university culture. For more information,

view our website at www.lehigh.edu/~inesl/StepUp

Undergraduate Studies 47

International English Language Center (IELC). The

Language Center offers English language study through

the use of interactive ESL software and private tutoring.

Call the ESL Office or view the IELC program on our

website.

Credit by Examination

Upon petition and presentation of evidence that he or

she has qualified for it, a student already enrolled at

Lehigh may be permitted by the standing of students

committee to take a special examination for credit

towards graduation. Special examinations are granted

only for extraordinary reasons and upon petition. There

must be adequate supporting evidence of sufficient cause

accompanying each petition. There is a fee for all special

examinations.

Students taking a special exam after matriculation at

Lehigh will have the grade and credits assigned to their

permanent Lehigh record. Special exam credit will be

counted as in residence credit and the grade will be used

in all grade point average calculations. No special exam

will be granted in a course that the student has already

taken (except senior reexaminations) for credit or on an

audit basis, or in a course in which the student has

already completed more advanced work at Lehigh.

Preparation for Graduate Work

Students planning to continue in graduate programs

should take advantage of the flexibility in many under-

graduate programs to design an upper-division

curriculum that meets requirements in the anticipated

graduate program.

The policies of the colleges provides as much flexibility

as possible for students who wish to change to new but

related fields of study after the baccalaureate degree.

Students should consult with their previous program

adviser and the department representative of the new

field to establish an academic program that will remedy

any deficiencies in background.

Graduate Courses. Qualified undergraduates may peti-

tion the graduate committee to register for 400-level

courses if they are certified by the course instructor and

the department chairperson concerned.

Guidelines for Undergraduates

to Take Graduate Level Courses

1. No undergraduate student may take one 400-level

course during a term where the student’s total cred-

its are greater than 18 (including audits).

2. All students receiving a graduate degree must be

enrolled one full semester or summer as a regular

student prior to the awarding of a graduate degree.

3. An undergraduate student may use no more than 12

credits taken as an undergraduate toward a graduate

degree. These courses must be at the 300 and 400

level and beyond all undergraduate degree require-

ments.

4. Students should have achieved junior standing and a

grade point average of 3.0 to take 400 level courses.

5. Students must petition the Standing of Graduate

Students and the Standing of Students for a possible

exception to theses standards.

6. Students requesting a second graduate level course in

a given term must petition the Standing of Graduate

students committee. (Students should not expect to

be permitted to take a second graduate level course

if enrolled for more than 15 credits.)

Apprentice Teaching

The apprentice teaching program is designed to benefit

juniors and seniors who wish to learn about teaching

under the guidance of an experienced teacher.

Apprentices often do a limited amount of supervised lec-

turing or leading of discussions, assist in making up and

evaluating written assignments, and are available for

individual consultation with students.

To participate in the apprentice teaching program a stu-

dent must:

1. Have an over-all cumulative grade point average of

2.80 or better;

2. Have a cumulative grade point average of at least 3.3

and have completed at least two courses in the

major field in which apprentice teaching is done;

3. Have previously taken for credit the course or its

equivalent in which the apprentice teaching will be

done.

A student may register for apprentice teaching only once

each semester, only once in a given course, and only

twice during a college career.

To register for apprentice teaching each student-teacher

partnership will submit an apprentice teaching agree-

ment, indicating the duties and obligations for approval

to the department chair and the dean of the student’s

college in which the course is taken. This form must be

submitted to the registrar before the first day of classes in

the semester. To complete the course, the apprentice

teachers must submit a written report of their experience

to the supervising teacher, who will forward it to the

Office of the Provost.

Curricular Flexibility

Choice is a regular part of university life, and encom-

passes the determination of a college and major, the

selection of courses each term, and the development of

life goals and career options.

Many of these choices are academic in nature. The

undergraduate curricula are flexible, designed to accom-

modate the changing interests and needs of students.

Boundaries between colleges are as fluid as possible to

provide many options in an educational program. For

instance, students may take a bachelor of science (B.S.)

degree in the College of Business and Economics or the

College of Engineering and Applied Science with a

minor in journalism in the College of Arts and Sciences.

There are five-year programs for which degrees are

awarded in two colleges.

Transfers between undergraduate colleges is permitted

but only after the freshman year. Students considering

such a transfer must confer with their advisers to begin

the process.

Academic offerings of the various departments are

described in Section V. To provide additional flexibility

and encourage student initiative and depth of investiga-

tion, the university has developed academic alternatives

including the following:

48 Lehigh University Course Catalog 2009-2010

Provisional Courses. Departments may introduce provi-

sional courses temporarily within a semester, either

experimentally or as a response to a contemporary social

or scientific issue. If successful, a course may become

part of the regular curriculum. Such courses, identified

with a 95, 96, 97 or 98 number (preceded by a 1, 2, or

3 indicating level) may sometimes take provisional cours-

es numbered above 100 on a pass/fail basis.

Independent Study. Juniors and seniors of ability who

wish to concentrate in their chosen field can substitute

no more than four or six credit hours of independent,

unscheduled work each semester for an equal number of

credit hours of elective work required for graduation.

Students, in collaboration with the major adviser, with

the advice of the departmental chairperson and consent

of the college dean, may structure such a project for

study in any curriculum and most major study

sequences.

Pass/Fail Option. Undergraduate students have the

opportunity to study in areas without concern for possi-

ble poor grades by electing a pass/fail option. Intended

to encourage exploration at the upper division level out-

side the major field, this option is open to those who are

sophomores and above, in good standing, who have

declared a major. Courses numbered below 100 will not

be eligible for pass/fail. The pass/fail option may not be

used for major or minor subject credit toward graduation

or for distribution requirements. Consultation with the

adviser is required.

LVAIC Cross-Registration

Currently enrolled full-time degree seeking undergradu-

ate students in good academic standing who have

achieved sophomore status may register for up to two

courses per term that cannot be scheduled at the home

institution at any one of the member institutions

(Allentown College of St. Francis de Sales, Cedar Crest

College, Lafayette College, Moravian College, and

Muhlenberg College). The student must obtain the

appropriate approvals of his or her own adviser and the

host institution registrar. The courses must be in the

normal academic load and not produce an overload.

Graduate students and courses (courses numbered 400

and above) are not eligible for cross registration.

All grades of courses taken through the LVAIC cross reg-

istration process will be accepted by the home institution

and entered on the permanent record, and such grades

will be used in computing the grade point average.

Credits taken through the cross-registration process will

be calculated as in residence. The number of credit hours

assigned to a course is the responsibility of the home

institution registrar.

Students may not repeat a course at another LVAIC

institution in which they expect to have a Lehigh cumu-

lative grade point average adjustment.

Lehigh University students are not permitted to cross-

the evening program at Muhlenberg College, all week-

end courses at Cedar Crest College, or the Access

program at Allentown College. All independent study,

tutorial music lessons or groups, correspondence, and on

line courses are prohibited from cross-registration with-

out prior approval of the Lehigh University standing of

students Committee.

Summer Session

Lehigh students must have been registered full time in

the prior spring semester to be eligible to cross-register

for a summer term. A maximum of two courses per ses-

sion, and 12 credit hours over the course of the entire

summer may be rostered. Students may not cross-register

for a course being offered at Lehigh during the summer

term.

Undergraduate Leave of Absence

Each student is expected to complete the baccalaureate

degree by attending Lehigh for four consecutive academ-

ic years. Once a student that has matriculated at Lehigh

chooses to deviate from this attendance pattern a revised

degree plan, coordinated with his or her adviser and

associate dean, must be submitted with a request for a

leave by completing a petition to the SOS Committee

for an Academic Leave of Absence. Petitions are available

from the Registrar’s Office or the Dean of Students. The

form must be signed by the student’s faculty adviser,

associate dean of the college and the completed form

must be submitted prior to the start of any subsequent

enrollment at another college or university.

Current Lehigh University students are prohibited from

concurrent enrollment at any other college or university.

Courses taken concurrently will not be eligible to apply

towards a Lehigh degree. An exception is made for cross

registration at another LVAIC institution.

Special opportunity programs like the American

University Internship, Hope College Urban Semester

and the Institute for Shipboard Education (affiliated

with another university) have limited access to Lehigh

University students. For procedures concerning applica-

tion for these programs please see the Associate Dean of

Students for Academic Support.

Students can not assume that a leave will be granted to

study at another college or university (this policy does

not apply for study abroad through the auspices of

Lehigh Abroad or LVAIC programs). The program of

study and reason for the leave must be approved by the

SOS committee.

If unapproved leaves are taken, students are declared as

non returning and must apply for readmission to the

University through the SOS committee if they wish to

re-enroll. Courses taken at another college or university

while on an unapproved leave will not be permitted to

transfer toward a Lehigh University baccalaureate degree.

In addition, students taking an unauthorized leave of

absence must be aware that their eligibility for student

aid is jeopardized.

Any student who is uncertain about attending a future

fall or spring term at Lehigh University is urged to dis-

cuss the matter with the Dean of Students Office or the

Registrar prior to taking any action to withdraw or

attend another college or university.

Students may take courses at another institution during

a summer term without requesting an academic leave of

absence. Check with the Registrar’s Office for limitations

and processes for transfer course approval.

Undergraduate Studies 49

The General College Division

The General College Division supplements the mission

of the established undergraduate curricula. The division

provides an opportunity for persons not planning to

qualify for a degree to pursue work of a general or spe-

cialized nature that their preparation and interests make

desirable; provides a trial period for those who wish to

become candidates for baccalaureate or graduate degrees,

but whose preparation does not satisfy the entrance

requirements for the established curricula; and provides

an opportunity for qualified students to continue their

education without being committed to a restricted or

specialized program of studies. Courses taken in the

General College Division may not be submitted to meet

the requirements for a graduate degree.

For admission to the General College Division, the stu-

dent must submit a special, simplified application to the

undergraduate admissions office; the application must be

submitted at least one month prior to the start of the

semester in which the student hopes to enroll. The appli-

cant must show maturity, seriousness of purpose and

evidence of ability to pursue with profit the program of

studies he or she desires. The student must have the

established prerequisites for courses in which he or she

wishes to enroll, and may register for courses up to and

including those at the 300-level.

There is no established curriculum for the General

College Division. Each student works on a program out-

lined to meet his or her special needs. Each program

must be approved by the registrar, director of the divi-

sion. Students must obtain permission of the instructor

for courses in which they want to enroll. Students in the

division are not permitted to take courses using the

optional pass/fail grading system, or cross register for

courses in LVAIC.

Students in the division, as non-degree candidates, do

not meet the eligibility criteria for federal student aid,

under Title IV, including Federal Pell Grants and Federal

Stafford Student Loans. Similarly, institutional financial

aid also is limited to degree candidates.

Students in the division are not candidates for degrees

and must maintain a minimum 2.00 grade point aver-

age. A student may transfer to regular matriculated

undergraduate status in any of the colleges only upon

petition to, and with the approval of, the Committee on

the Standing of Students. Transfer to the graduate school

is possible only through the normal graduate admission

process.

With the exception above, students in the General

College Division are subject to the same rules and regu-

lations as students of the university. They pay the tuition

and fees established for regularly matriculated students.

50 Lehigh University Course Catalog 2009-2010

Graduate Study

Lehigh began awarding graduate degrees in 1882. The

first recipient, T.H. Hardcastle, of the Class of 1880,

wrote his thesis on Alexander Pope, entitled it The

Rights of Man, and read it aloud at commencement in

June 1882.

The first Ph.D. was granted in 1893 to Joseph W.

Richards, Class of 1886. Richards, who had a back-

ground in metallurgy and electrochemistry, taught at

Lehigh until his death in 1921.

Women were admitted to the graduate program in 1918

when the faculty and the board of trustees agreed to

grant the degrees of M.A. and M.S. to women, provided

they attended classes in the late afternoon and on

Saturdays “so that the general character of campus life

shall not be affected.” Three women received graduate

degrees in 1921, the first women to complete graduate

work at Lehigh. In 1929, the rule was changed, and

women were admitted on much the same basis as men.

In 1936, the Graduate School was established to admin-

ister the graduate program. The Ph.D., which was

temporarily discontinued in 1894, was reinstated in nine

departments: chemistry, chemical engineering, civil engi-

neering, geology, history, mathematics, mechanical

engineering, metallurgical engineering, and physics.

Tomlinson Fort, professor of mathematics, was selected

in 1938 as the first dean of the Graduate School.

In 1995, graduate programs were decentralized and are

now administered by the four colleges of the university,

as described below.

College of Arts and Sciences

Anne S. Meltzer, dean

Michael Stavola, associate dean for graduate programs

and research

The College of Arts and Sciences offers graduate degrees

in the humanities, social sciences, mathematics, and nat-

ural sciences. The master of arts, master of science, and

the doctor of philosophy degrees are given in most of the

traditional academic departments and in some interdisci-

plinary programs. Advanced degrees may be obtained in

the departments of biological sciences, chemistry, earth

and environmental sciences, English, history, mathemat-

ics, physics, political science, psychology, and sociology.

In addition, interdisciplinary degrees are available in

American studies, environmental policy design, photon-

ics, and polymer science and engineering.

Although degree requirements vary from department to

department, most require a combination of formal

coursework and independent research. Students work

closely with a faculty adviser in formulating and carrying

out their research programs. Students admitted to a tra-

ditional department who are interested in an

interdisciplinary approach may design a program of

study and research which draws on faculty and facilities

in other areas of the college or university.

Information on the various degree programs appears

under the departmental listings in Section V and the

Interdisciplinary Graduate Study and Research part of

this Section. For the most up to date information, inter-

ested students should check the CAS graduate website

(www.lehigh.edu/gradarts-sciences) or write to Office of

Research and Graduate Programs, College of Arts and

Sciences, 9 West Packer Ave., Bethlehem, PA. 18015

College of Business and Economics

Paul R. Brown, dean

Martin K. Saffer, associate dean

The College of Business and Economics offers the master

of science degree in accounting and information analysis;

master of science degree in economics; master of science

degree in health and bio-pharmaceutical economics; mas-

ter of business administration with concentrations in

corporate entrepreneurship, finance, marketing, interna-

tional business, project management and supply chain

management; and the doctor of philosophy degree in

business and economics. Three joint degrees are also

offered. The College of Business and Economics and the

P.C. Rossin College of Engineering and Applied Science

offer the MBA and Engineering. Students in this program

will have the opportunity to concentrate in both a busi-

ness area and an engineering area during their Master’s

studies. The College of Education and the College of

Business and Economics offer a joint masters degree in

MBA/Educational Leadership. This degree will develop

skills in business disciplines as well as preparing educators

for roles in school administration. The College of Business

and Economics, the P.C. Rossin College of Engineering

and the College of Arts and Sciences offer a master’s

degree in analytical finance. This degree provides a strong

education in advanced finance and quantitative financial

analysis tools. Students will be prepared to create innova-

tive solutions for real financial problems using state of the

art analytical techniques and computing technology.

There are five departments in the college: Accounting,

Economics, Perella Department of Finance,

Management, and Marketing. Course descriptions can

be found listed under business and economics graduate

courses in Section V. More information about the vari-

ous degree programs appears below. Information on the

college’s graduate programs may be obtained at

www.lehigh.edu/business or by contacting the College of

Business and Economics, Graduate Programs Office,

Rauch Business Center, 621 Taylor Street, Bethlehem,

Pa. 18015, 610-758-3418.

College of Education

Gary M. Sasso, Ph.D., Dean

Ward M. Cates, Ed.D., Associate Dean

The College of Education is a nationally recognized

graduate college. Our distinction resides in our ability to

function as a community of scholars and teachers. The

diversity of our partnerships, the quality of our research

and teaching, and the invigorating and supportive learn-

ing environment distinguishes us as leaders among

graduate colleges of education.

The College of Education offers a master of arts in edu-

cation, a master of education, a master of science in

education, the educational specialist, a joint master in

business administration/master of education, post-bac-

calaureate certificates in various concentrations, the

doctor of education, and the doctor of philosophy. A

total of 685 students were involved in advanced study

during the 2007-2008 academic year. More information

Graduate Studies 51

IV. Graduate Study and Research

about these programs can be found in Section IV under

Graduate Degrees in Education.

There are six academic programs within the college includ-

ing: Comparative and International Education, Counseling

Psychology, Educational Leadership, School Psychology,

Special Education, and Teaching, Learning and

Technology. The focus of these programs is to prepare stu-

dents for leadership roles in groundbreaking,

cross-disciplinary inquiry that shapes educational practices

nationally and internationally. While the College of

Education does prepare individuals for leadership roles in

school systems, we also prepare individuals for a variety of

positions in business and industry, healthcare, private prac-

tice, and community based organizations. We embrace the

philosophy that a top quality education should provide the

instruction, resources, and experience necessary to create a

new type of educator; one who understands the nature of

learning, social equity and cultural diversity, values collabo-

ration and teamwork, and embraces societal challenges.

In addition to the six core programs, there are four other

units within the College of Education:

Centennial School

The College of Education operates the Centennial

School, a laboratory facility for children with emotion-

al/behavior disorders, that has both an elementary and a

secondary component. Centennial School provides

research opportunities as well as practical experience for

advanced students in our counseling psychology, educa-

tional leadership, school psychology, and special

education programs. www.lehigh.edu/centennial

The Center for Developing Urban Educational

Leaders (CDUEL)

The mission of the CDUEL is to cultivate transforma-

tional educational leadership in urban communities by

conducting research, developing leadership competen-

cies, and improving leadership practice that enhances

student learning and development. The center is com-

mitted to leaders who support education at all levels of a

community, including teachers, principals, parents and

human service workers. Special emphasis is placed on

work involving small to mid-sized urban communities.

www.lehigh.edu/education/cduel

The Center for Promoting Research to Practice

The center’s mission is to generate new knowledge that

will truly impact the lives of individuals with disabilities.

The primary objective of the center is to create a living

laboratory that establishes partnerships with schools, par-

ents and families, and community service providers to

enhance the use of best practices for individuals with dis-

abilities. www.lehigh.edu/education/cprp

The Office of International Programs

The Office of International Programs is committed to

promoting global awareness and transcultural under-

standing to educators worldwide. The programs provide

professional development and degree opportunities for

teachers and school administrators using innovative tech-

nologies, evocative teaching strategies and current

research. It challenges learners to appreciate the complex-

ities of schooling in the midst of globalization.

www.lehigh.edu/lbl

Information on the various degree programs appears

under the departmental listings in Section V and can be

obtained by contacting the College of Education, 111

Research Dr., Bethlehem, PA 18015, 610-758-3231 or

visiting our website: www.lehigh.edu/~ineduc/.

P.C. Rossin College of Engineering and

Applied Science

David Wu, Iacocca Professor and dean

John P. Coulter, associate dean of graduate studies and

research

There are seven academic departments within the P.C.

Rossin College of Engineering and Applied Science:

chemical engineering, civil and environmental engineer-

ing, computer science and engineering, electrical and

computer engineering, industrial and systems engineer-

ing, materials science and engineering, and mechanical

engineering and mechanics. Master of science and doctor

of philosophy degrees are available in each of these

departments, as well as in bioengineering, computational

and engineering mechanics, environmental engineering,

computer engineering, structural engineering, and poly-

mer science and engineering. In addition, master of

science programs are provided in analytical finance, pho-

tonics, quality engineering, information and systems

engineering, management science, and wireless and net-

working engineering. Master of engineering degrees are

offered in chemical engineering, civil engineering, elec-

trical engineering, energy systems engineering,

environmental engineering, industrial engineering, mate-

rials science, mechanical engineering, and structural

engineering. In co-operation with the College of

Business and Economics, students can also pursue a

Master of Business Administration and Engineering

(MBA&E) degree. Certificate programs are available in

the area of nanomaterials and manufacturing systems

engineering.

Graduate study in the P.C. Rossin College of

Engineering and Applied Science is most often related to

the college’s extensive research activity, and graduate stu-

dents are expected to engage in analytical or

experimental research as part of their programs of study.

This activity involves students in the process of creating

new knowledge under the direction of the college’s dis-

tinguished faculty and brings them into contact with

some of the most modern and advanced experimental

techniques. Many college research programs are support-

ed by contracts, fellowships, and grants from industry

and from federal, state, and local governments. This

funding not only provides financial support for out-

standing students but also allows them to deal with some

of the more complex and pressing problems facing our

society in the 21st century.

Many faculty members and graduate students in the P.C.

Rossin College of Engineering and Applied Science are

associated with interdisciplinary research centers and

institutes as well as with their own departments. The

opportunity for interdisciplinary study allows them to

cross departmental lines in specific technological areas

and to work with faculty and graduate students from

other departments. Centers and institutes currently per-

form research in the areas of biotechnology, health

sciences, thermofluids, materials, energy, environmental

sciences, surfaces and coatings, solid-state studies, optical

technologies, structural and geotechnical studies, high-

rise habitats, emulsion polymers, metal forming,

robotics, computer-integrated manufacturing, value

chain science, nanotechnology, and design and manage-

ment innovation. Extensive research in many of these

areas is also conducted within academic departments.

Further information on the graduate programs appears

under the departmental listings in Chapter V and in the

Interdisciplinary Graduate Study and Research section of

52 Lehigh University Course Catalog 2009-2010

Chapter IV. Students can also contact the Office of

Graduate Studies and Research, P.C. Rossin College of

Engineering and Applied Science, 19 Memorial Drive

West, Bethlehem, PA 18015.

Admission to Graduate Study

A graduate of an accredited college or university may be

considered for admission to graduate study. The decision

to admit a student rests with the applicant’s major

department and stands for one year following the first

semester for which admission was offered. If more than

one year elapses, the prospective student’s department

reserves the right to reconsider the original offer.

Students wishing to pursue an interdisciplinary degree

may, in some cases, apply to the program directly.

Applications for admission may be obtained on-line at

the university’s graduate website or by writing to the

department to which admission is sought, or writing to

the office of the dean of the prospective college.

An applicant may enter the graduate program as a stu-

dent in the following categories: regular, associate, or

non-degree. Except for qualified Lehigh undergraduates,

only those who have been admitted officially by the

graduate program office of an appropriate college or by a

department in one of the categories above may register

for graduate courses or take them for credit.

Regular Graduate Students. Only regular graduate stu-

dents are candidates for graduate degrees. Application for

admission as a regular graduate student must be filed by

July 15 for the following fall semester or by Dec. 1 for

the spring semester. Regular graduate students wishing to

begin in the summer must apply before April 30.

Certain departments or programs have earlier deadlines.

Applicants should consult their respective departments

or their dean’s office. In order to be considered for

admission as a regular graduate student, the applicant

must satisfy at least one of the following conditions: have

an undergraduate G.P.A. of at least 2.75 out of 4.00

(note: College of Education GPA minimum is 3.0); have

an average of at least 3.00 for the last two semesters of

undergraduate study; have a graduate grade-point aver-

age of at least 3.00 for a minimum of twelve credit hours

of graduate work completed at other institutions; or have

successfully satisfied the probationary conditions as an

associate graduate student discussed below). Satisfying

one of these conditions is a necessary but may not be

sufficient condition for admission as a regular graduate

student. Foreign graduate students are required to take

the Test of English as a Foreign Language and achieve a

minimum score of 550 on the paper-pencil test. The

Computer-Based TOEFL (CBT) has been discontinued

and is no longer valid for admissions. Note: For any stu-

dent who has taken the Internet-based TOEFL or iBT

(released in September 2005) which contains a speaking

section, please contact either your department or the

ESL Department ([email protected]) for the minimum

required scores for admission to your program. The

TOEFL test may be waived if a student has obtained a

degree from an English-only university in an English-

speaking country and demonstrates effective English

language skills.

Individual departments may evaluate their candidates for

admission according to higher standards and additional

criteria. Students seeking admission to Professional

Certification Programs may have to meet additional

requirements to comply with Pennsylvania Department

of Education Regulations. Departments should be con-

sulted for information regarding required examinations

for admission. For example, candidates for the M.B.A.

program are required to take the Graduate Management

Admissions Test (GMAT). This does not include MBA

& Engineering students in the College of Engineering

and Applied Science who may substitute the Graduate

Record Exam if required by the Engineering

Department. In some cases the GRE subjects tests are

required.

Admission of a student to graduate standing is executed

through the Office of Graduate Studies in each college

or the respective dean’s office. Credentials for admission

to counseling psychology and school psychology pro-

grams and to the doctoral programs in special education

are acted upon only once a year.

Completed applications accompanied by requests for

financial aid must be submitted by January 15 for

admission in the following fall semester. Applications

received after the deadline will be considered on a space-

available basis.

Associate Graduate Students. Associate graduate student

status may be offered to applicants who apply but fail to

qualify for regular graduate student status. Only associ-

ate student applications will be considered during the

late admissions period between the end of the regular

admission period and the first day of classes. Applicants

for associate status may submit unofficial rather than

official transcripts; letters of recommendation are not

required at that time. However, the Registrar will require

an official final transcript before grades are released.

Certain departments or programs have earlier deadlines

and more stringent requirements. Applicants should con-

sult their respective departments.

Associate graduate students who are admitted during the

late admission period and who clearly qualify for admis-

sion as regular graduate students may petition for regular

status after classes begin if all credentials are in order.

There is no late application fee. Individual departments

may have more stringent requirements.

Other associate graduate students are allowed to take up

to nine credits of coursework numbered 300 or higher

before they must petition for regular student status. In

order to be granted regular student status, they must

have completed those nine credits with at most one

grade of below B-. Associate graduate students receiving

a grade lower than a C- will be dropped from the pro-

gram. Students should note that individual departments

may impose more rigorous probationary standards.

When the probationary period of nine credit hours is

completed, associate graduate students must petition for

regular student status in order to enroll for additional

coursework. Such a petition requires the submission of

any regular admission documents not already on file.

Courses completed during a successful probationary

period may count toward a graduate degree if they are

part of an approved program.

Non-Degree Students. Students who do not wish to

enter a degree program may seek admission with non-

degree status. In this case, the prospective student

completes an abbreviated application form (available

from the appropriate college). The admissions criteria for

non-degree graduate students are, 1) a bachelor’s degree

from an approved institution with an overall grade point

average of at least 3.0; (applicants with undergraduate

Graduate Studies 53

GPAs below 3.0 may be admitted with the approval of

the department in which they wish to take courses;) or

2) evidence that the applicant is presently a student in

good standing in an appropriate graduate program at an

approved institution; or 3) evidence that the applicant

has received an appropriate graduate or other advanced

degree from an approved institution. 4) International

students are required to demonstrate English language

skills equal to those required of degree-seeking students

and are held to the same TOEFL standards.

Admission decisions for non-degree students are made

by the dean of the appropriate college or other responsi-

ble official designated by him/her for this purpose. The

signature of the designated official on the application

and registration forms confers admission to the non-

degree graduate student status. Informal transcripts will

be accepted for initial admission, but formal transcripts

must be on record before the student can receive any

transcript or grade report from the university or enroll

for additional courses.

Non-degree Options: In addition to degree programs,

there are two non-degree options: (1) Regular non-

degree and (2) Non-degree for external certification.

Regular non-degree admission is for students that wish

to take up to 12 credits of graduate coursework without

seeking a degree. Non-degree for external certification

students are admitted to pursue coursework for the pur-

pose of obtaining certification through an external

accrediting agency. These students complete coursework

for the appropriate certification, with the number of

credits being dictated by the external accrediting agency.

Given this external control of credit requirements, the

number of credits will vary and will typically exceed the

12-credit limit for regular non-degree students. A stu-

dent admitted as non-degree for external certification

may subsequently be admitted to a degree program, but

needs to do so through a petition that includes all com-

ponents required for admissions consideration by that

degree program.

Graduate Course Auditing: With the permission of the

departmental chair, graduate students can be admitted to

a course as auditors. This course will not count for credit

towards any graduate degree, and may not subsequently

be taken for credit. In no case shall a student who has

attended a course as an auditor be given an anticipatory

examination for credit or register for the same course in

the future. A student completing a course in this manner

will have the course and the notation “AU” indicated on

the permanent record. A student rostered on an audit

basis may be withdrawn from the course with a grade of

“W” for poor attendance.

Lehigh University Undergraduates. A Lehigh under-

graduate with a 3.0 cumulative grade point average who

has achieved Junior standing may take any 400-level

course for which he or she is qualified. The qualifications

are defined by the department and are certified by the

course instructor and department chairperson through

petition to the graduate and research committee. For

additional information on constraints on undergraduates

taking graduate level courses please see Section III

Curricular Flexibility.

Undergraduates at Lehigh, who are within a few hours of

meeting the requirements for a baccalaureate degree may,

with the special approval of the Graduate and Research

Committee, enroll for up to 12 credit hours of study for

graduate credit (6 in the P.C. Rossin College of

Engineering and Applied Science). Lehigh undergradu-

ates may apply course credits taken in the undergraduate

program toward a graduate degree under the following

conditions: (a) the course credits are not submitted as

part of the requirement for an undergraduate degree; and

(b) courses for possible graduate credit are approved in

advance by the course instructor, department chairper-

son, and the dean of the college. The student must

receive a grade of B- or better.

Readmission. A student who has not been registered in a

Lehigh graduate program for one year must petition for

readmission. Petitions approved by the student’s major

department must be forwarded to the registrar’s office.

International Students and Scholars. International

applicants must hold an American bachelor’s degree or

an equivalent foreign degree requiring at least 16 years of

primary, secondary, and university education.

International applicants applying for regular graduate

student status must submit all documents required for

that status (see above).

Registration

Requirements. All graduate students using Lehigh

University resources must be registered. No graduate stu-

dent may register for more than 16 credits per semester.

University employees may register for, at most, two

courses per semester with appropriate approval. The

maximum registration in a summer session is two con-

current courses and no more than 14 summer credits

across all summer sessions.

Full-time Status. In order to maintain full-time enroll-

ment status, a graduate student must ordinarily register

for a minimum of nine credits each semester. Full-time

students may not be employed full-time. Identification

as a full-time student is important for three purposes: (1)

eligibility for financial aid, (2) compliance with visa

requirements for international students, and (3) for uni-

versity and national graduate enrollment data.

Full-time status may be maintained with fewer than nine

credits of registration after fulfillment of degree credit-

hour requirements and under some other selected

circumstances, provided that the student is, in fact, con-

tinuing a program of full-time study and research. In

such cases, the status must be certified each semester on

the Graduate Full Time Certification request form, first

by the department and then by the appropriate college.

Registration Procedure. Registration is scheduled for a

two-week period at a time designated on the university

calendar. Graduate registration for new students is held

during the week preceding the start of classes. Students

should check with their departments for registration and

semester class schedules. Graduate students may register

using the on-line system after consultation with their

adviser, or complete paper registration forms available in

their departments. A course adviser will discuss course

selections with students and provide the registration PIN

or sign registration forms upon approval.

Late Registration Penalties. Registration after the desig-

nated period during the prior term for continuing full

time graduate students or between the second and tenth

day of class during the fall and spring semesters, and the

second and fifth day of class during the summer sessions

will require a late registration fee. Students who have not

completed the registration process by the tenth day of

the regular academic semester or by the fifth day of the

summer session will not be permitted to attend class.

54 Lehigh University Course Catalog 2009-2010

Graduate Credit and Grades

Course grades are defined as for undergraduates in

Section III except that, at a minimum, no grade lower

than C- may be counted toward a graduate degree and

pass-fail registration is not allowed for graduate students.

No regularly admitted student who receives more than

four grades below a B- in courses numbered 200 or

higher is allowed to continue registration as a graduate

student. Individual degree programs may have higher

standards.

The N grade is defined in Section III except that paren-

thetical grades are not required for thesis or research

courses and graduate students have a calendar year to

remove course incomplete grades unless an earlier dead-

line is specified by the instructor. Graduate student

incomplete course grades that are not removed remain as

N or N (grade) on the student record for one year. After

one year, the N grade will be converted to an F and the

N (grade) will be converted to the parenthetical letter

grade. Incomplete grades may be extended an additional

year with approval of the course instructor and the grad-

uate coordinator. After two years, outstanding

incomplete grades will be converted to an F or the par-

enthetical mark. After two years, students may appeal to

the Committee on Standing of Graduate Students

(SOGS) with a timeline and plan for completion. Thesis

or research project N grades may remain beyond one

year until the work is completed.

The X grade is defined as for undergraduates except that

to be eligible for a make-up examination a graduate stu-

dent must file a petition and the petition must be

approved by the graduate and research committee.

The Z grade is defined as for undergraduates except that

graduate students have a calendar year to complete

coursework following a Z grade unless an earlier comple-

tion deadline is specified by the instructor. The X

portion of the grade is removed as described for under-

graduates. Z grades which are not removed remain on

the record of graduate students. All petitions for excep-

tions are sent to the Committee on Standing of

Graduate Students (SOGS).

A student’s grade that was originally assigned an N, X or

Z grade when converted or computed will be noted with

an “*” asterisk prefix.

Withdrawal from a Course. A student dropping a

course within the first ten days of the semester (five days

for summer sessions) will have no record of the course

on the transcript. A student dropping all courses for

which he or she is registered is considered to be with-

drawing from the university under the policy noted

below. A student who drops a course after the tenth day

of instruction and before the end of the eleventh week of

instruction will have a grade of “W” assigned to the

course. A student who drops a course after the eleventh

week of instruction and before the end of classes receives

a “WP” or “WF” at the discretion of the instructor. A

“WF” is considered to be a failing grade. An Add/Drop

form signed by the student’s adviser must be submitted

to the registrar’s office before the deadlines noted to be

official.

University Withdrawal. A student withdrawing from the

university (dropping all courses during a given term)

must submit the Drop/Add form signed by the adviser

to the registrar’s office. Withdrawal after registration day

and during the first eleven weeks of instruction will be

noted on the academic transcript by assigning a grade of

“W” to all courses. A withdrawal after the eleventh week

of instruction and before the end of classes will have the

grade of “WP” or “WF” assigned for each course at the

discretion of the instructor. The date of the withdrawal

will be noted on the academic transcript for a withdraw-

al at any time during the term.

Graduate Student Scholastic Requirements. The follow-

ing guidelines state the minimum requirements for all

graduate students. Individual degree programs may have

higher standards.

Associate and Non-Degree Students: will be placed on

probation when they receive their first grade below a “B-

” and will be dropped for poor scholarship at the end of

a term when the student has accumulated either two

“C”, “C-” or “C+” grades or one grade below “C-”.

If an associate student is assigned two grades below a “B-

” in the same term the student is eligible to be dropped

without any term on probation.

Once on probation, students remain on probation until

they are granted regular status or receive degree. Students

who are eligible to be granted regular status but fail to

apply by the regular student deadline will be evaluated

according to the regular student criteria.

Regular Students: will be placed on probation at the end

of the term in which they are assigned their fourth grade

below a “B-” in courses numbered 200 or above and will

be dropped for poor scholarship at the end of any term

in which they are assigned their fifth grade below a “B-”.

Once regular students are placed on probation they will

remain on probation until they receive their degrees.

Readmission: Graduate students who have been dropped

for poor scholarship are ineligible to enroll for the next

regular term. After one term away they may petition for

readmission. The department and the dean’s office must

approve the petition. The student will be readmitted on

probation and may be dropped again with any addition-

al grades below a “B-”.

Graduation

Degree Registration. A student must be registered in the

semester in which the degree is conferred. If a student is

not registered for a course, he/she must register for

maintenance of candidacy. Candidates for September

degree do not need to be enrolled the summer preceding

the degree if they were enrolled both fall and spring of

the current academic year.

Application for Degree. Candidates for degrees to be

conferred on University Day in May must file an appli-

cation for degree with the registrar by March 1.

Candidates for degrees to be conferred in January must

file by November 1. Candidates for degrees to be con-

ferred in September must file by July 1. Late application

for a degree will incur a penalty fee of $40.

Clearance. Graduate students must receive clearance

from the university prior to the awarding of the degree.

The following obligations must be satisfied:

• Students must complete all coursework for incom-

pletes they may have received.

• Theses must be cleared by the Registrar’s Office.

• Dissertations must be cleared by the appropriate

dean’s office.

• All financial obligations must be cleared with the bur-

sar. Tuition fees, bookstore charges, library fines, and

Graduate Studies 55

motor or vehicle fines must be paid before gradua-

tion.

• All library books on loan must be returned.

• Students must turn in their student identification

cards at the I.D. card office.

The interdepartmental clearance sheet must be complet-

ed. This form requires the signature of the student’s

department chairperson (except for the College of

Education), and the facilities services office before it is

submitted to the registrar at least three days prior to

graduation.

Tuition and Fees

Tuition Payment. Graduate students who register at least

six weeks prior to the start of classes will be sent a

tuition bill either to their Lehigh email account or their

home address listed in BANNER. Included with the

tuition bill will be information about the various pay-

ment options that are available. Students that register less

than six weeks prior to the start of classes will most likely

not receive a tuition bill prior to the start of classes. To

remain in good standing, tuition charges must be paid

prior to the start of classes even if the student has not

received a tuition bill because of his/her late registration

for classes. Students can review their current account bal-

ance on-line by logging into the Campus Portal,

selecting the BANNER icon, selecting “Student Services”

tab, selecting “Student Bursar Office Records”, and then

selecting “Account Summary by Term.” Additional infor-

mation on payment options is available on the Bursar’s

Office web site at www.lehigh.edu/inburs/ or by calling

the Bursar’s Office.

Tuition Refunds. A student in good standing who for-

mally withdraws from a course or courses before 60% of

the semester has been completed is eligible for a tuition

refund. Academic fees are non-refundable after the first

day of classes. The refund schedule for student with-

drawals and course adjustments is as follows.

Tuition Refunds

The tuition refund for a student who withdraws or drops

a course or courses is calculated on a daily basis accord-

ing to the Federal Refund Calculation Guidelines. No

refunds for tuition can be made for one-week workshops

after the first day of class.

Students should note that the first calendar week begins

with the first day of classes at the university.

Tuition and Fees for 2009-2010 per credit hour

College of Arts & Sciences $1150

College of Business & Economics $840

College of Education, and for full-time

elementary and secondary teachers and

administrators enrolled in the other

three colleges $525

College of Engineering & Applied Science $1150

Special Programs

MBA & Engineering $910

MBA/Educational Leadership $605

Audit charge per course – same as credit

charge in the appropriate college

Maintenance of candidacy – same as a

one-credit charge in the appropriate college

Master’s candidate registration fee – same as

a one-credit charge in the appropriate college

Living Accommodations. The university maintains a

graduate student housing complex in the Saucon Valley

that has 135 living units. This complex, Saucon Village

Apartments, provides units generally on a yearly lease

basis. For the 2009-2010 period beginning in

September, the following are the monthly rents exclusive

of utilities:

Efficiency apartment $495

One-bedroom apartment $580

Small two-bedroom apartment $615

Two-bedroom apartment w/o AC $630

Two-bedroom apartment w/AC $645

Three-bedroom apartment $655

Other Fees

Application fee Consult with individual college

(for graduate admission consideration)

Application fee Consult with individual college

(College of Business and Economics)

Non-degree application Consult with individual college

(engineering, education)

Non-degree application Consult with individual college

(College of Business and Economics)

Late pre-registration $100

(assigned to full-time graduate students

who do not select their full class load

during the designated period each term)

Late registration $100

(for completing registration after announced day)

Late application for degree $40

Late payment (after announced date) $200

Returned check fine $35

Identification card (replacement) $15

Thesis distribution $55

Dissertation distribution $90

Supervision fee, College of Education (per 3 credits)

Intern courses require a special supervision fee which

varies from $100 to $250. Inquire in your department.

Financial Aid

Financial aid is ordinarily available only for regular, full-

time graduate students. Teaching assistantships, research

assistantships, graduate assistantships, fellowships, and

scholarships are academic awards made by individual

academic departments. Several graduate assistantships

unrelated to a particular area of study can be obtained by

applying to administrative offices. International students

are also encouraged to apply for funding to outside

sponsoring agencies and/or home governments. Finally,

please note that all student loan programs, and the

Federal Work-Study program, are administered by the

Office of Financial Aid located at 218 W. Packer Avenue.

(Please read the section below regarding loans and work-

study.)

Academic Awards. Requests for fellowships, scholarships,

research assistantships, teaching assistantships, and grad-

uate assistantships to begin in the fall semester must be

filed with academic departments no later than January

15. Generally, a special committee formed by depart-

ment faculty selects the recipients of these awards based

upon merit; students are not required to submit a finan-

cial statement.

In addition to their stipends, graduate students holding

half-time teaching appointments generally receive tuition

remission. Fellowship holders also receive a stipend and

56 Lehigh University Course Catalog 2009-2010

tuition award. Scholarship recipients are awarded tuition.

Research assistants receive a stipend for research services,

but their tuition is commonly paid directly by research

projects.

Teaching Assistants and Graduate Assistants. Teaching

assistant and graduate assistant (TA/GA) are technical

terms used to describe specific types of Lehigh University

graduate students. The duties of TAs and GAs are gener-

ally set by the departments or offices that appoint them,

but certain conditions must be satisfied before a student

can be classified as a teaching assistant or a graduate

assistant. These include:

• Each TA/GA must be a regular full-time resident

Lehigh graduate student, which normally requires reg-

istration for at least nine credit hours per semester.

• A TA/GA is a half-time position and each TA/GA

provides services to Lehigh University of up to twenty

hours per week. Quarter-time and eighth-time

TA/GA appointments are possible for full-time resi-

dent graduate students, with stipends and tuition

remission appropriately reduced.

• Each TA/GA must be paid a specific stipend, which is

set for the academic year by the dean of the appropri-

ate college after consultation with the Director of

Budget.

• Qualified TAs/GAs receive tuition remission for at

most ten credit hours in a regular semester. No

TA/GA may register for more than ten credit hours. A

student who is a TA/GA during the preceding aca-

demic year is entitled to at most three hours of thesis,

research, or dissertation registration (not course cred-

it) in the following summer without payment of

tuition.

• Each TA/GA is appointed by a process which begins

with a formal letter of appointment issued by the

appropriate department chairperson. The appoint-

ment letter specifies standard university conditions

including stipend level, time of arrival, length of serv-

ice, and the requirement of satisfactory academic

progress and performance of duties. Each department

chairperson submits written notification of TA/GA

appointments to the appropriate college dean or vice

president.

The graduate and research committee endorsed academic

guidelines for new teaching assistants which exceed mini-

mum admission requirements. Each TA should satisfy

one of the following: have a G.P.A. of 3.0 or better in

the undergraduate major field of study; have a G.P.A. of

3.5 in the senior year major field; rank in the 85th per-

centile or higher on the Graduate Record Exam or other

standardized test; or have a G.P.A. of 3.5 in at least

twelve hours of graduate work in the major field.

Exceptions to these guidelines shall be made only with

the approval of the appropriate dean.

In addition, each teaching assistant must make normal

progress toward a graduate degree. The definition of nor-

mal progress may vary among departments, but the

criteria for satisfactory progress are established by the

department faculty and the graduate and research com-

mittee. Teaching assistants who fail to satisfy these

criteria are ineligible for reappointment.

In addition to a minimum passing TOEFL score,

Teaching Assistants whose native language is not English

must have on record with the ESL Program a SPEAK

score of 230+ (TSE 55+) in order to work with Lehigh

undergraduates in academic settings (i.e., classrooms,

recitations, labs, office hours, etc.).

Those whose SPEAK score is 200-225 (or TSE 50) may

also be appointed as TAs, but they are required to attend

ESL courses at Lehigh until their SPEAK score is at least

230 or until they no longer have a TA position. A com-

prehensibility score of 195 (or TSE 45) or below

eliminates an international graduate student from being

appointed as a TA.

The SPEAK is scheduled monthly throughout the year.

Contact the ESL Program (ext. 86099) for more details.

Please note, the TSE has been discontinued in the US

and Canada, but it is still offered in some countries

around the world.

Tuition remission for qualified TAs/GAs is authorized by

the appropriate dean or vice president as part of the reg-

istration process. Each college dean or appropriate vice

president will be provided tuition remission accounts

against which TA/GA remissions will be charged. The

accounts will be budgeted at an amount equal to the

nine hour TA/GA tuition rate times the approved num-

ber of TA/GA positions and will be included in the

annual operating budget. The budgets shall not be

exceeded. If additional TA/GA positions are desired on a

temporary basis, the account executive must provide for

the transfer of budget support to the remission account.

These budgets are to be used exclusively for tuition

remission for authorized TA/GA positions.

There are a limited number of summer TA/GA appoint-

ments. These TA/GA’s employees must receive the same

monthly stipend as academic year TAs/GAs and devote

of up to twenty hours per week their GA/TA responsibil-

ities. A summer TA/GA registers for a maximum of three

credit hours in each summer session of appointment and

receive tuition remission for that registration.

Other Graduate Assistantships. Graduate students may

apply directly to administrative offices for graduate

assistantships unrelated to their areas of study. The avail-

ability of these assistantships is based upon the needs of

the individual departments. GAs are appointed regularly

by the office of the vice provost for student affairs, the

dean of students office, the university counseling service,

and by career services.

Loans and Work-study Awards. Graduate students may

apply for the federally funded Stafford and Perkins loans,

and Federal Work-Study through the Office of Financial

Aid located at 218 W. Packer Avenue. These funds are

awarded on the basis of demonstrated need using the

Free Application for Federal Student Aid. In addition,

the University requires a university application

(Graduate Student Financial Aid Application) and a

copy of the student’s and spouse’s (where applicable)

most recent (2008) federal tax return and W-2.

Applications for loans cannot be processed, and funds

cannot be disbursed, until the FAFSA, and attending

forms, are received and reviewed. Because Stafford loans

are financed through commercial lenders, their availabili-

ty is virtually assured if a student qualifies. There is,

however, only limited availability of Federal Perkins

loans, and Work-Study.

Eligibility for student loans is based on: (1) the number

of credits to be taken, (2) the amount of assistance

received, and (3) the calculated financial need. Any

change to the number of credits to be taken, or the

amount of aid received may affect loan eligibility. To

Graduate Studies 57

avoid problems with your loan application, it is impor-

tant that you notify the Office of Financial Aid of any

changes in your enrollment or in the amount of aid

received. Unfortunately, students frequently change the

number of rostered credit hours, or receive Graduate

School aid, after their loan application has already been

processed. When either of these circumstances occur, a

student’s eligibility may change dramatically.

Literature on student loan programs is available through

the Financial Aid office or the website (www.

lehigh.edu~infao).

Degree Information

The following degrees are offered by the university: the

master’s degree, the doctor of philosophy, the doctor of

education, and the doctor of arts.

Master’s Degree

Candidates for the master’s degree have six years in

which to complete their programs. Students should con-

fer with their advisers to be certain that specific

department and program course requirements are met.

The following requirements must be satisfied by master’s

candidates in all departments.

Program for the Master’s Degree. A student’s program

must include: not less than 30 credit hours of graduate

work; not less than 18 credits of 400-level coursework

(research or thesis registration counts as part of the 400-

level coursework requirement); and not less than 18

credits of coursework in the major, of which 15 credits

must be at the 400 level. Coursework for the master’s

degree must be taken under at least two instructors and

must be approved by Lehigh University. With the

approval of the department chair, between nine and 15

credits of graduate coursework taken elsewhere may be

transferred to a Lehigh master’s program. The number of

credits that may be transferred depends on the number

of credits in the masters program: Up to nine credits for

programs of 36 credits or less; up to 12 credits for pro-

grams of 37 to 48 credits; and up to 15 credits for

programs of 49 to 60 credits.

A petition is submitted, with course descriptions and

transcript, as well as departmental recommendation.

Course grades of B or better are required, such courses

may not have been applied toward any prior degree, the

courses must have been completed at an institution

accredited by one of the six regional accrediting associa-

tions, and those courses must have been completed

within four years of the first enrollment in the Lehigh

masters program.

A student must complete the form, “Program for

Master’s Degree,” setting forth the courses proposed to

satisfy the degree requirements. This form should be

approved by the department and then submitted to the

registrar as soon as possible after 15 credit hours toward

the degree have been completed. Approval of the pro-

gram by the registrar signifies that the student has

formally been admitted to candidacy for the master’s

degree.

Thesis and Comprehensive Exam. Candidates may be

required to submit a thesis or a report based on a

research course of at least three credit hours, or to pass a

comprehensive examination given by the major depart-

ment. The department will specify which of these

requirements apply and may require both. If required,

the thesis or report shall not count for more than six

credit hours, and thesis registration is limited to a maxi-

mum of six credit hours. If the thesis or research project

involves human subjects, the student must complete the

university human subjects review packet and receive

written approval from the Institutional Review Board.

One unbound copy of the thesis, approved by the thesis

adviser and the department chair, must be delivered to

the registrar’s office at least three weeks before the degree

is conferred. A binding and microfilming fee must be

paid to the bursar, and the bursar’s receipt presented

with the completed thesis. Guidelines stipulating the

form of the thesis are available in the registrar’s office.

A non-thesis option exists for certain programs in the

Colleges. Students should check with their departments

regarding that option.

Doctor of Philosophy

Time and Registration Requirements. A candidate for

the doctor of philosophy degree ordinarily is expected to

devote at least three academic years to graduate work. In

no case is the degree awarded to someone who has spent

less than two full academic years of graduate work. All

post-baccalaureate work toward the doctorate must be

completed within ten years. A student beginning doctor-

al coursework after an elapsed period of at least one

semester after the master’s degree has been conferred is

granted seven years in which to complete the doctoral

program.

Doctoral students whose graduate study is carried out

entirely at Lehigh University must register for a mini-

mum of 72 credits beyond the Bachelor’s degree.

However, students who during their entire doctoral pro-

gram, including the semester of graduation, have paid

full tuition continuously (normally a minimum of 9

credits per academic semester) will have satisfied the

tuition requirements for the doctoral degree upon com-

pletion of all other requirements. Students who have

earned a Master’s degree at another university must regis-

ter for a minimum of 48 credits. These requirements

include registration for research or dissertation credits.

Students participating in approved dual-degree doctoral

programs involving external institutions may transfer up

to 25% of their total required doctoral program research

credits to Lehigh for work that was performed at the

external partner institution. Approval of such programs

is required by the dean of the relevant Lehigh college.

Full-time students working toward the doctorate normal-

ly register for a minimum of nine credits each semester.

If the minimum degree registration requirement of 72 or

48 credits is attained prior to formal admission to doc-

toral candidacy, continued registration of at least three

credits per semester is necessary. Such registration does

not automatically grant full-time student status, however.

Full-time student status must be certified on the gradu-

ate registration form.

Students seeking to receive both a master’s degree and a

doctoral degree must complete a minimum of 72 gradu-

ate credits at Lehigh and must meet the requirements of

both degrees.

After admission to doctoral candidacy, a student must

maintain candidacy by registering at least two times each

calendar year (in each academic semester or in one aca-

demic semester and one summer session). After

completion of the minimum registration requirement

plus any additional requirements of the student’s depart-

ment or program, registration is permitted for

‘Maintenance of Candidacy.’ The tuition charge is for

58 Lehigh University Course Catalog 2009-2010

one credit-hour. Full-time status must be certified on the

graduate registration form each semester.

Concentrated Learning Requirement. Each doctoral

degree candidate must satisfy Lehigh’s concentrated

learning requirement. This requirement is intended to

ensure that doctoral students spend a period of concen-

trated study and intellectual association with other

scholars. Two semesters of full-time Lehigh graduate

study or 18 credit hours of Lehigh graduate study, either

on or off campus, within a fifteen-month period must be

completed.

Individual departments may impose additional stipula-

tions. Candidates should check with their advisers to be

certain that they have satisfied their concentrated learn-

ing requirements.

Language Requirements. Language requirements for the

Ph.D. are the option of and in the jurisdiction of the

candidate’s department. Since proficiency in a language

is not a university requirement, each department decides

which languages, if any, constitute part of the doctoral

program.

Qualifiers. Many departments require students who wish

to enroll in doctoral programs to pass qualifying exami-

nations. Since these examinations vary among

departments, students should ask their advisers or

department chairpersons for more detailed information.

If a qualifying examination is not used, students should

find out how and when eligibility to pursue doctoral

studies is determined.

Admission to Candidacy. With the help of an academic

adviser, the student names the faculty members of the

doctoral committee, a special committee formed to guide

the student through the doctoral program. The commit-

tee is responsible for assisting the student in formulating

a course of study, satisfying specific departmental

requirements, submitting a suitable dissertation proposal

and for overseeing progress in research, and evaluating

the completed dissertation. At least four faculty are

appointed to the committee; one must be a member of

an outside department. Committee membership must be

approved by the university’s graduate and research com-

mittee.

A doctoral student should apply for candidacy no later

than two years after completion of the master’s degree or

its equivalent and after passing qualifying examinations

if they are required by the major department. The

prospective Ph.D. candidate must submit to the doctoral

committee a written program proposal that includes a

discussion of proposed dissertation research. Upon

receiving approval of the proposal, the candidate submits

the proposal, signed by the committee members, to the

appropriate dean for action by the graduate and research

committee. The dean will advise the student of the com-

mittee’s decision.

If the dissertation research involves human subjects, all

research procedures and instruments must be approved

by Lehigh University’s Institutional Review Board (IRB)

prior to the involvement of the subjects.

General Examinations. Examinations composed and

administered by the members of the student’s doctoral

committee are designed to test the candidate’s proficien-

cy in a particular field of study. These examinations,

which may be either written or oral, should be passed at

least seven months before the degree is to be conferred.

If a student fails the general examination, a second

examination will be scheduled not earlier than five

months after the first. If the results of the second exami-

nation are unsatisfactory, no additional examination is

scheduled.

Dissertation and Defense. The Ph.D. candidate is

required to write a dissertation prepared under the direc-

tion of a Lehigh University professor. The dissertation

must treat a topic related to the candidate’s specialty in

the major subject, show the results of original research,

provide evidence of high scholarship, and make a signifi-

cant contribution to knowledge in the field.

Upon approval of the advising professor and, if required

by the department secondary readers, the final draft of

the dissertation is submitted to the appropriate dean for

inspection by the date posted in the academic calendar.

Upon its return, the student should distribute copies of

the draft to the members of the doctoral committee for

review and for suggestions for revision. The candidate

then schedules a dissertation defense before the doctoral

committee, additional faculty members the department

may add to the examining committee, and the general

public. After the dissertation has been defended and

revised accordingly, the student must submit the finished

dissertation to the appropriate dean for review by the

university’s graduate and research committee no later

than the date specified in the academic calendar for

completion of all degree requirements. One unbound

copy must be delivered to the dean’s office. It must bear

the original signatures of the special committee mem-

bers. In addition, the candidate must pay a microfilming

fee and present a bursar’s receipt for the payment.

Guidelines stipulating the standard form of the disserta-

tion are available in the dean’s office.

Graduate Degrees in Business

Administration and Economics

Candidates for admission to graduate study in the

College of Business and Economics must provide the

results obtained in either the Graduate Management

Admissions Test (GMAT) for the degree in business

administration and the degree in accounting and infor-

mation analysis. The Graduate Record Examination

general test (GRE) or the GMAT must be submitted for

degrees in economics and analytical finance. International

students applying to any graduate programs in the

College of Business and Economics are required to take

the TOEFL for admission to the program.

Master of Business Administration

The Lehigh MBA program is accredited by AACSB

International; the Association to Advance Collegiate

Schools of Business. The Lehigh MBA program provides

a rich, integrated learning experience for students.

Business issues are viewed and taught from the perspec-

tive of the firm as a whole rather than along

departmental lines. Lehigh’s MBA curriculum is a fully

integrated model which simulates the business environ-

ment in the classroom. MBA students acquire skills in

leadership, managerial communication, and resource

allocation coupled with a comprehensive understanding

of complex domestic and global business issues.

The MBA program is available in two modes: on cam-

pus and satellite through the Lehigh Educational

Satellite Network (LESN). LESN broadcasts to partner

companies and public sites. Students may elect to follow

Graduate Studies 59

one mode exclusively or mix and match modes. Select

course work is available on-line. Students electing to

pursue the degree by satellite may choose a concentra-

tion in Supply Chain Management or Project

Management.

Due to the compact and integrated core, students have

increased flexibility to tailor the program to their indi-

vidual needs. Students may select a concentration in

corporate entrepreneurship, finance, international busi-

ness, marketing, project management, or supply chain

management or pursue a broader experience by selecting

courses from a variety of disciplines. Students may only

have one concentration.

Certificates

Students may also earn a certificate in corporate entre-

preneurship, project management, or supply chain

management by completing 12 credit hours of course-

work as defined in the certificate program.

MBA Mission Statement. The MBA program will fur-

ther the development of organizational leaders and

managers. This is accomplished by honing students’

knowledge, skills and abilities through a comprehensive

and integrated core curriculum and customized concen-

trations designed to meet the student’s individual needs.

The MBA program will also foster life-long learning

through continuing professional education programs.

Innovative Structure. The MBA Program requires 36

credit hours. Full-time students can fulfill that require-

ment in 12 to 16 months. Part-time students average

three years to complete the degree.

Prerequisites. Students should have completed under-

graduate courses in computer literacy, principles of

microeconomics and macroeconomics. Financial

accounting and statistics may be completed after accept-

ance into the MBA program

The statistics prerequisite may be fulfilled by having taken

a class within the past 5 years and receiving a “B” or bet-

ter, or by taking a proficiency exam administered through

the College. The Accounting prerequisite may be waived

by taking GBUS 401, Financial Accounting for Managers

and Investors at Lehigh or by taking a proficiency exam.

If a student has no previous background in financial

accounting or statistics, he/she is encouraged to take a

course in the subject area. If a student has previously

taken coursework but has not achieved a grade of “B” or

the course has exceeded the time limit, self-directed

learning and a proficiency exam may be appropriate.

The prerequisites of financial accounting and statistics

must be completed before enrolling in MBA 402 or

MBA 403.

Core Courses

MBA 401 Introduction to the Organization and Its

Environment (2)

MBA 402 Managing Financial and Physical

Resources (4) Prerequisite: Financial

Accounting

MBA 403 Managing Information (4) Prerequisites:

Financial Accounting and Statistics

MBA 404 Managing Products and Services (4)

MBA 405 Managing People (4)

MBA 406 Integrative Experience (3)

Electives. Students will take 15 credits of electives.

Students may design an area to study in consultation

with their adviser to best suit their career goals or they

may choose to complete an area of concentration.

Concentrations in international business and supply

chain management require nine credit hours of approved

electives. Concentrations in corporate entrepreneurship,

finance, marketing, and project management require

twelve credit hours of approved electives. Student may

also take up to six credit hours of electives outside of the

College of Business and Economics (but within Lehigh

University). All elective courses must be at the 400 level.

Waiver Policy. There are no waivers for courses in the

MBA Program.

GMAT Scores. All applicants are required to take the

Graduate Management Admissions Test (GMAT)

administered by Pearson Vue. The computer-based exam

is given during several weeks each month. To make an

appointment to take the GMAT exam call 1-800-717-

GMAT (4628) or by registering online at www.mba.com.

Work Experience. Students are required to have a mini-

mum of 2 years of full-time, professional work experience.

International Students/TOEFL. International students

must have 16 years of formal education, including four

years at the university level, to be considered for admis-

sion to Lehigh’s graduate programs. Applicants whose

native language is not English are required to take the

Test of English as a Foreign Language (TOEFL). For

information, write or call the TOEFL Registration

Office, P.O. Box 6154, Princeton, N.J., 08541-6154 or

at www.toefl.org.

Flexible Class Scheduling. Most classes are scheduled

Monday through Thursday in the evening. Seminars are

offered on Fridays and Saturdays. Part-time students may

complete the entire program during evenings. Many stu-

dents accelerate completion of the program by taking

courses during the two six-week summer sessions.

Student Profile. MBA students average seven years of

professional work experience and approximately sixty

percent have undergraduate degrees in engineering or

science. The combination of work experience and diver-

sity of background brings valuable professional

perspectives to classroom discussions.

Matriculated MBAs for the class of fall 2008 averaged

638 in the GMAT examination and had an undergradu-

ate GPA of 3.3. The average TOEFL score exceeded 250

for international students.

Further information about the MBA Program may be

obtained by contacting the Graduate Programs Office of

the College of Business and Economics, Lehigh

University, College of Business and Economics, 621

Taylor Street, Bethlehem PA 18015

phone: (610) 758-3418

email: [email protected]

www.lehigh.edu/mba

Certificate Programs

Certificate in Corporate Entrepreneurship

Businesses often nurture the entrepreneurial spirit by form-

ing New Ventures groups within their organizations. The

members of these groups require a special blend of educa-

tion to develop the skills of discovery, innovation and

leadership that starting a new enterprise requires. This cer-

tificate program prepares students to successfully evaluate

business opportunities within a corporate environment.

60 Lehigh University Course Catalog 2009-2010

Requirements

The certificate requires 12 credit hours of coursework

with six credit hours of required coursework and six

credit hours of electives.

Required Courses

GBEN 403 Anatomy of Entrepreneurship: Start-Ups

and Established Companies (1 cr.)

GBEN 404 Market Opportunity: Targeting Strategies

and Selling Tactics (1 cr.)

GBEN 406 Performing a Business Enterprise Audit:

Developing an Industry Perspective (1 cr.)

GBEN 408 The New Venture Organization:

Management Design and Governance (1 cr.)

GBEN 409 Financial Forecasting: Developing Pro

Forma Financial Statements (1 cr.)

GBEN 410 Financing Start-Ups: Seeking Outside

Venture Capital (1 cr.)

Elective Courses:

GBEN 401 Business Plan I: Strategic Considerations

(2 cr.)

GBEN 402 Business Plan II: Operating Strategies and

Implementation (2 cr.)

GBEN 405 Intellectual Property: Management and

Valuation (1 cr.)

GBEN 407 Processes and Infrastructure: Creating

Production and Delivery (1 cr.)

GBEN 411 Establishing Credit Facilities: Asset-Based

and Cash Flow Forecasting (1 cr.)

GBEN 412 Developing Exit Strategies: Concepts and

Approaches (1 cr.)

GBEN 413 Integrative Experience/New Venture

Internship (1-4 cr.)

Admission Requirements

Students admitted to the certificate program will enter as

non-degree students. Applicants are required to have a

3.0 undergraduate GPA and to have earned a 4 year bac-

calaureate degree from an accredited college or

university. Two years of full time professional work expe-

rience is also required.

Certificate in Supply Chain Management

Increasingly sophisticated information technology appli-

cations and the shift toward global economic activity

have shaped a competitive environment that rewards cre-

ating value for customers while reducing cost and cycle

time. Through in depth study of the organizations’ value

chain -logistics, operations, marketing, sales and service-

the certificate in supply chain management demonstrates

how these activities are linked both internally and exter-

nally.

Required Courses

GBUS 450 Strategic Supply Management (3)

GBUS 453 Transportation and Logistics

Management (3)

Elective Courses

ECO 402 Managerial Economics (3)

GBUS 464 Business to Business Marketing (3)

GBUS 447 Negotiations (3)

GBUS 459 Survey of Project Management (3)

GBUS 455 E-Business Enterprise Applications (3)

MSE 438 Agile Organizations and Manufacturing

Systems (3)

MSE 423/ME 401 Product Design Analysis (3)

GBUS 492 Field Project (1-4)

Admission Requirements

Students admitted to the certificate program will enter as

non-degree students. Applicants are required to have a

3.0 undergraduate GPA and to have earned a 4 year bac-

calaureate degree from an accredited college or

university.

Certificate in Project Management

This 12 credit hour certificate will prepare students to

take the Project Management Professional certification

exam offered by the Project Management Institute

(PMI) - the field’s leading global professional association.

Lehigh University is a Registered Education Provider

(REP) by the Project Management Institute. The certifi-

cate is cohort based and is completed within 12 months

through both on-line and on-campus modules.

Required Courses (12 credits):

PMGT 401 Course Framework & Project Leader

Assessment (1)

PMGT 402 Skills and Abilities for Effective

Leadership of Teams (1)

PMGT 403 Initiating the Project and Planning

Scope and Schedule (2)

PMGT 404 Planning Resources, Communication,

Quality and Risk Management (2)

PMGT 405 Project Leader Communications

Expertise and Evaluating Team

Performance (1)

PMGT 406 Implementing and Managing Projects

(2)

PMGT 407 Controlling Performance and Assessing

Outcomes (2)

PMGT 408 Problem Solving, Decision Making and

Ethics (1)

Admissions

Students admitted to the certificate program will enter as

non-degree students. Applicants are required to have a

3.0 undergraduate GPA and to have earned a 4 year bac-

calaureate degree from an accredited college or

university. Graduate students at Lehigh University may

apply for the program without meeting additional

requirements.

Further information about certificate programs may be

obtained by contacting the Graduate Programs Office of

the College of Business and Economics, Lehigh

University, College of Business and Economics, 621

Taylor Street, Bethlehem PA 18015

phone: (610) 758-3418

email: [email protected]

www.lehigh.edu/certificates

Master of Science in Accounting and

Information Analysis

The Lehigh Master of Science in Accounting and

Information Analysis (MSAIA) degree program offers an

outstanding opportunity to prepare for a career in

today’s demanding field of accounting. Accounting pro-

fessionals are engaged in a variety of services, including

assurance (auditing), business valuation, information

resources, and consulting. The program focuses on using

Graduate Studies 61

information and technology to improve business process-

es and forge business solutions. Accredited by AACSB

International, the Association to Advance Collegiate

Schools of Business, Lehigh’s M.S. in Accounting and

Information Analysis program satisfies the 150-hour

CPA educational requirement adopted by almost all

states. The program serves as an excellent foundation for

professional careers as CPAs, CMAs and related fields. It

provides the broad business education employers value so

highly.

The Master of Science in Accounting and Information

Analysis curriculum is designed to be flexible so that stu-

dents may choose either a general degree or one with a

specialization. The concentrations include Consulting

and Business Risk Management, Financial Services, and

Strategic Cost Management.

Students are encouraged to obtain an internship during

the summer prior to beginning the program. The intern-

ship will complement the chosen concentration and

provide an excellent practical framework to enrich the

academic coursework experience.

Non-Accounting Majors. The M.S.in Accounting and

Information Analysis program seeks applicants from a

variety of academic backgrounds. Those with undergrad-

uate business degrees in fields other than accounting

often lack twelve credits of background requirements in

intermediate accounting, accounting information sys-

tems and auditing. To the extent possible, applicants

should take those courses during their undergraduate

programs. We make every effort to offer those courses

during Lehigh’s Summer Session to accommodate stu-

dents needing those background courses. Please contact

the Program Director for information about the back-

ground courses to be offered in specific Summer

Sessions.

Applicants who do not have an undergraduate business

degree will likely require two years to complete the

Program. The first year is devoted to background courses

and the second to the graduate program itself.

Mission Statement. Lehigh University’s Master of

Science in Accounting and Information Analysis pro-

vides a broad business education and the specialized

coursework for a professional career in accounting.

Graduates aspire to leadership positions at top-tier

organizations in fields that include public accounting,

corporate accounting, financial services, consulting, and

information systems. Through this program, Lehigh con-

tinues a long tradition of providing accounting majors

with the necessary educational requisites for licensure as

certified public accountants within the United States and

its territories. The program seeks only the best and the

brightest applicants: motivated, dedicated to their stud-

ies, not afraid of challenges, possessing confidence,

self-discipline, and the ability to articulate their ideas

orally and in writing. The program continually pursues

the excellence necessary to meet the standards of only

the highest-quality educational institutions.

Core Program. The MSAIA core consists of eighteen

credits in the courses shown below and thirty credits

overall. Designed specifically for this program, and dedi-

cated to it, these innovative courses seek to develop a set

of skills and experiences not available in undergraduate

programs that will enhance MSAIA students’ ability to

perform in their chosen careers. Core courses are offered

once each academic year.

MACC 401 Professional Issues in Accounting-

Negotiation (1)

MACC 402 Professional Issues in Accounting-Case

Analysis (1)

MACC 403 Professional Issues in Accounting-Ethics

(1)

MACC 412 Information Systems Auditing (3)

MACC 413 The Corporate Financial Reporting

Environment (3)

MACC 420 Consulting Process and Practice in

Professional Accounting (3)

MACC 424 Corporate Governance and Business

Risk (3)

MACC 427 Analyzing Accounting Information for

Management and Business Solutions (3)

Electives. The MSAIA curriculum provides for twelve

elective credits that students may use to specialize in an

area of interest, such as finance, or to augment one’s gen-

eral business education. Frequently-taken electives

include graduate-level courses in taxation and business

decisions, financial statement analysis, corporate finan-

cial management, managerial economics, and marketing

communications. Waiver Policy. There are no waivers for

courses in the M.S. in Accounting and Information

Analysis Program.

GMAT Scores. All applicants are required to take the

Graduate Management Admissions Test (GMAT)

administered by Pearson Vue. Undergraduate students

should take the exam in the junior year. To make an

appointment to take the GMAT exam call 1-800-717-

GMAT (4628) or by registering online at www.mba.com.

International Students/TOEFL. International students

must have 16 years of formal education, including four

years at the university level, to be considered for admission

to Lehigh’s graduate programs. Applicants whose native

language is not English are required to take the Test of

English as a Foreign Language (TOEFL). For informa-

tion, contact the TOEFL Registration Office, P. O. Box

6154, Princeton, NJ 08541-6154 or at www.ets.org/toefl.

Admitted applicants typically are required to complete the

English as a Second Language Step-Up program before

beginning their graduate program.

Further information about the MSAIA program may be

obtained by contacting the Graduate Programs Office of

the College of Business and Economics or Dr. James

Largay, Director M.S. in Accounting and Information

Analysis Program, Lehigh University, College of Business

and Economics, 621 Taylor Street, Bethlehem PA 18015

phone: (610) 758-3418

email: [email protected]

www.lehigh.edu/msaccounting

Master of Science in Health and Bio-

Pharmaceutical Economics

The M.S. in Health and Bio-Pharmaceutical Economics

is designed for students with undergraduate life science

degrees. This course of study will develop the quantita-

tive and analytical skills that, in combination with their

science training, will prepare students to carry out

sophisticated studies of the benefits and costs associated

with new drugs, medical therapies and diagnostic proce-

dures and to perform critical analyses in support of

strategic marketing decisions and the management of

risk and uncertainty in portfolios of R&D projects.

62 Lehigh University Course Catalog 2009-2010

Prerequisites

Applicants should have completed at least two calculus

courses, a course in statistics, and courses in both princi-

ples and intermediate economics. Applicants lacking one

or more of these background courses may still be admit-

ted to the program but courses taken to remedy

background deficiencies will not count toward minimum

credit hours for the master’s degree.

Required Courses (21 credits)

ECO 402 Managerial Economics (3)

ECO 412 Mathematical Economics (3)

ECO 415 Econometrics (3)

ECO 425 BioPharmaceutical Economics (3)

ECO 447 Economic analysis of Market

Competition (3)

ECO 455 Health Economics (3)

ECO 457 Cost-Benefit Analysis (3)

In addition, students must take 9 credit hours of elective

courses, selected in consultation with and approved by

the MS advisor. A thesis is not required.

Admission

Prospective students must have an undergraduate degree

with a major in the life sciences or a related field (such as

chemistry, pre-med, chemical or bio-engineering, etc.).

Applicants must submit scores from either the GRE or

the GMAT examinations. International students must

also take the TOEFL exam. Applications for regular stu-

dent status are due by July 15. Associate students may be

admitted up if a completed application is received prior

to two weeks before the start of classes.

Further information about the M.S. in Health and Bio-

Pharmaceutical Economics Program may be obtained by

contacting the Graduate Programs Office of the College

of Business and Economics or Dr. Arthur King, Director

M.S. in Health and Bio-Pharmaceutical Economics

Program, Lehigh University, College of Business and

Economics, 621 Taylor Street, Bethlehem PA 18015

phone: (610) 758-3418

email: [email protected]

www.lehigh.edu/biopharm

Master of Science in Economics

The Master of Science program in Economics Program

is available for students wishing to pursue graduate study

in the areas of economics or economics and business.

The program offers considerable flexibility with respect

to the selection of courses as well as the ability to con-

centrate in a particular area of study. Students may

pursue the degree on either a full-time or part-time basis.

Recent graduates of the M.S. program have accepted

employment in industry, while other students have pur-

sued the master’s degree as a stepping stone to the Ph.D.

degree.

A minimum of 30 semester hours of course work is

required.

As part of the 30 hours, the following courses must be

taken:

ECO 402 Managerial Economics (3)

ECO 412 Mathematical Economics (3)

ECO 415 Econometrics I (3)

ECO 417 Advanced Macroeconomic

Analysis (3)

ECO 447 Economic Analysis of Market

Competition (3)

Each student in the M.S. program is also encouraged to

concentrate in one field of specialization within econom-

ics. (A listing of the fields currently offered is available

through the M.S. director.) Students may also elect to

write an M.S. thesis. The thesis is worth six hours of

credit toward the degree and is particularly encouraged

for those who may be considering the Ph.D. program.

Further information about the M.S. in Economics

Program may be obtained by contacting the Graduate

Programs Office of the College of Business and

Economics or Dr. Robert Thornton, Director M.S. in

Economics Program, Lehigh University, College of

Business and Economics, 621 Taylor Street, Bethlehem

PA 18015

phone: (610) 758-3418

email: [email protected]

www3.lehigh.edu/business/academics/msecon.asp

Doctor of Philosophy

The Ph.D. degree in business and economics is designed

to provide advanced knowledge and the capacity to carry

on independent research in various areas of business and

economics. Holders of the Ph.D. are normally employed

in academic positions in departments of economics or in

schools of business administration, or in policy analysis

and research positions in banks, business, government,

and research organizations. Employment opportunities

are excellent for graduates with this degree.

The Ph.D. program requires a minimum of 48 semester

hours of study (including dissertation) beyond the mas-

ter’s degree or 72 hours of study beyond the bachelor’s

degree. Each student is expected to choose two major

fields of specialized study. Each student must take core

courses in microeconomics, macroeconomics, economet-

rics, and mathematical economics. Students must also

take a written comprehensive examination in their major

fields. As a condition for advancement to candidacy, a

student must write an original third-year paper suitable

for submission to a scholarly journal. The major fields of

specialization normally available include, but are not

necessarily limited to, health economics, labor econom-

ics, and public finance.

Under the guidance of a dissertation chairperson and

committee, the candidate undertakes research culminat-

ing in a dissertation. The Ph.D. is awarded upon the

successful completion of the doctoral dissertation and its

oral defense.

Further information about the Ph.D. in Business and

Economics Program may be obtained by contacting the

Graduate Programs Office of the College of Business and

Economics or Dr. Shin-Yi Chou, Director Ph.D. in

Business and Economics Program, Lehigh University,

College of Business and Economics, 621 Taylor Street,

Bethlehem PA 18015

phone: (610) 758-3418

email: [email protected]

www3.lehigh.edu/business/academics/phdecon.asp

Graduate Degrees in Education

Lehigh’s College of Education offers only graduate

degree programs. Undergraduates may apply to the five-

year program in Teaching, Learning and Technology or

can minor in education (see section III). The five-year

program is designed to allow students to earn both a

Graduate Studies 63

bachelor’s degree and a master’s degree in five years

instead of the traditional six. The Education minor

allows upper level undergraduates to take selected

coursework that combines practicum activities with the-

oretical work and is designed to provide a foundation for

further educational studies at the graduate level. Students

enrolled in the College of Education should check with

their advisers for a list of regulations and requirements

governing degree programs.

Also available is a non-degree program designed for

those individuals that are interested in taking a few

courses in the College but are not interested in pursuing

a graduate degree. For information on the non-degree

program, contact Donna Johnson at 610-758-3231 or e-

mail [email protected]

Financial assistance. Graduate assistantships and research

assistantships are available in the college and in various

administrative offices on campus. In addition, graduate

students may be recommended for a limited number of

fellowships and endowed scholarships which are awarded

by the college.

Lehigh’s Centennial School, a laboratory school for chil-

dren with emotional/behavior disorders, provides

employment for some Lehigh education students.

Graduate students may apply for teaching internships,

which pay tuition plus salaries.

Other opportunities for financial assistance are available

through our field-based programs: Community Choices,

Lehigh Support for Community Living, and Lehigh

University Transition and Assessment Services.

Master of Education (M.Ed.)

This degree is offered in the following professional spe-

cializations: elementary education, secondary education,

special education, educational leadership, counseling and

human services, globalization and educational change,

international counseling, elementary school counseling,

secondary school counseling, and teaching and learning.

Degree requirements vary from program to program.

Master of Arts (M.A.)

The master of arts degree offered in the field of second-

ary education provides a major in education with an

academic specialty. The student must take graduate work

in education plus 12 credits of graduate work in an aca-

demic field. The academic fields that cooperate with the

College of Education in offering this program include,

among others: English, mathematics, political science,

sociology, and physical and natural sciences. The master

of arts degree offered in the field of comparative and

international education examines educational policy and

theory on an international level. Graduates are prepared

to work in educational research and policy organizations,

government offices, ministries of education, and interna-

tional development organizations.

Master of Science (M.S.)

The master of science degree is awarded in instructional

technology (IT). The IT masters focuses on enhancing

the use of technology in teaching and learning in

schools. Masters students work on projects throughout

their program and maintain and enhance their skills out-

side the class setting.

Master in Business

Administration/Master of Education

(MBA/M.Ed.)

The MBA and Master’s of Education joint degree pro-

gram offers students the opportunity to acquire a solid

foundation in both business and education. Designed to

increase the administrative skill required in today’s edu-

cational systems, the MBA/M.Ed. provides a framework

where excellent education and sound business practices

can flourish. The MBA/M.Ed. will provide an additional

option for students for business and students of educa-

tional leadership. The program should enhance the

student’s marketability in private and public sector edu-

cation while providing students with an understanding

of the cultures of both business and education.

Educational Specialist (Ed.S.)

Specialized post-master’s degree programs for practition-

ers are available in school psychology.

Certification Programs and Post-

Baccalaureate Certificates

The college offers state certifications in various profes-

sional specialties. Certification programs vary in the

number of credits required. The college also offers post-

baccalaureate certificate programs in International

Counseling, International Development in Education,

Project Management Certificate (jointly offered through

the College of Business and Economics and the College

of Education), Special Education, Teacher Leadership,

Teaching English as a Second Language, and Technology

Use in the Schools. Post-baccalaureate certificate pro-

grams differ from externally approved certifications.

Lehigh’s certificate programs are, instead, 12-15 credit

focused concentrations taken by students to enhance

their professional credentials. Certificate programs may

be included as part of a degree program, where appropri-

ate.

Doctor of Education (Ed.D.)

The doctor of education degree program provides spe-

cialized study in educational leadership. Successful

professional experience is required for admission to can-

didacy for this degree in most programs. The

requirements for the Ed.D. degree parallel those already

stated for the Ph.D. degree with the following excep-

tions: language examinations are not required.

Doctor of Philosophy (Ph.D.)

The College of Education also offers the Ph.D. degree to

students enrolled in the fields of counseling psychology,

learning sciences and technology, school psychology, and

special education. The requirements for this degree are

the same as those for the Ph.D. in the other colleges and

as described in previous sections.

Non-Degree Options

In addition to degree programs, there are two non-

degree options as well: (1) Regular non-degree and (2)

Non-degree for external certification.

Regular non-degree admission is for students who wish

to take up to 12 credits of graduate coursework at

Lehigh without seeking a degree. Any transcript or other

record from the University will clearly indicate the stu-

dent status as non-degree. Non-degree students are not

permitted to audit courses. University admissions criteria

for non-degree graduate students are (a) a bachelor’s

64 Lehigh University Course Catalog 2009-2010

degree from an accredited institution with an overall

grade point average of at least 3.0 on a four-point scale

(Applicants with undergraduate GPAs slightly below 3.0

may be admitted with approval from the department of

Education and Human Services) or (b) to have achieved

a GPA of 3.0 or higher on a four-point scale for a mini-

mum of 12 graduate credits at another accredited

institution.

Non-degree for external certification students are admit-

ted to pursue coursework for the purpose of obtaining

certification through an external accrediting agency.

Applicants are expected to have an undergraduate GPA

of 3.0 or higher on a four-point scale or to have achieved

a GPA of 3.0 or higher on a four-point scale for a mini-

mum of 12 graduate credits at another accredited

institution. Applicants are assigned certification advisors

on admissions and must work with the advisor to assure

that they complete all requirements for certification satis-

factorily. Non-degree for external certification students

complete the coursework and any other required field

experiences for the appropriate certification, with the

number of credits and field experiences being dictated by

the external accrediting agency. Given this external con-

trol of credit requirements, the number of credits will

vary and will typically exceed the 12-credit limit for reg-

ular non-degree students. Certification involves

qualitative components as well as credits; a non-degree

student seeking such certification must meet the quality

standards of the certification program, as well as com-

pleting the necessary coursework and field experiences.

Changing from Non-Degree to Degree Status

Non-degree students of either type may seek admission

to a degree program. Non-degree students who seek

admission to a degree program must meet all regular

admissions criteria, complete all regular procedures, and

present all documents normally required of degree-seek-

ing applicants to that program. Courses taken by a

non-degree student who later enters a degree program

will count towards the completion of the program to the

extent that those courses fall within the normal require-

ments of the program and to the extent that the

student’s performance in the course(s) is acceptable for

degree program purposes. Any course which is counted

towards the completion of a degree must be completed

within the established time limits for that degree,

whether taken initially as a degree or non-degree course.

Graduate Studies Organizations

The Graduate and Research Committee

The graduate and research committee consists of twelve

members representing the faculties of Lehigh’s colleges:

four from the College of Arts and Sciences; two from the

College of Business and Economics; four from the P.C.

Rossin College of Engineering and Applied Science; and

two from the College of Education; plus the college

deans, the registrar, the vice provost for research, the

director of the office of research, two non-voting graduate

student members, and a member of the student senate.

The committee formulates policies and regulations on

graduate education, and it recommends policies and pro-

cedures for research-related activities. The committee

interprets and applies faculty rules governing graduate

students and degrees, including questions concerning

student petitions and appeals.

Graduate Student Senate

The Graduate Student Senate is comprised of one gradu-

ate student from each academic unit. The general

assembly meets bi-monthly during the academic year.

This body represents the graduate student community

regarding graduate programs and graduate student life at

Lehigh. Graduate students selected by the Graduate

Student Senate are non-voting members of the Graduate

and Research Committee and other university commit-

tees.

The Senate provides a forum for discussion with univer-

sity officials and committees, advocates for policy

change, disseminates information, and plans social

events in order to facilitate communication and commu-

nity-building among graduate students.

Interdisciplinary Graduate

Study and Research

In addition to offering graduate degrees within academic

departments, Lehigh University offers interdisciplinary

graduate degrees in the fields of American Studies, man-

ufacturing systems engineering, photonics, polymer

science and engineering, business administration and

engineering, and business administration and education-

al leadership, and analytical finance.

Lehigh University also offers graduate certificate pro-

grams in certain specialized fields of study. Graduate

certificates consist of a minimum of twelve credits, six of

which must be at the 400-level. Students are admitted to

certificate programs in the same way as to degree pro-

grams. More specific information on admission criteria

and completion requirements are available from certifi-

cate program administrators.

In addition, Lehigh’s interdisciplinary research centers

and institutes address the research needs of government,

industry, and society. Organized to recognize research

efforts in interdisciplinary problem areas, they supple-

ment the university’s academic departments. Graduate

students pursuing M.S. and Ph.D. degrees in academic

departments as well as students enrolled in interdiscipli-

nary degree programs may pursue research opportunities

in the various centers.

A complete listing of research centers, institutes, and

other research organizations appears following the sec-

tion on interdisciplinary graduate programs.

Financial Assistance. Teaching assistantships and fellow-

ships are provided by individual academic departments,

while research assistantships are available through both

academic departments and research centers. Students

interested in research are encouraged to seek appoint-

ments with members of the faculty working in their

areas of special interest, with department chairpersons,

or with center or institute directors.

Graduate Certificates in Arts and

Sciences

Certificate in Cognitive Science

(For details see “Cognitive Science” in Section V)

Certificate in Stereotypes, Prejudice,

Discrimination, and Intergroup Relation

(For details see “Psychology” in Section V)

Graduate Studies 65

Certificate in Regulatory Affairs in a Technical

Environment (for details):

http://online.lesn.lehigh.edu/reg_affairs_overview.htm

Certificate in Analytical Principles of

Pharmaceutical Science (for details)

http://online.lesn.lehigh.edu/analytical_home.htm

Certificate in Bioorganic Principles of

Pharmaceutical Science (for details)

http://online.lesn.lehigh.edu/bioOrg_home.htm

Interdisciplinary Graduate Programs

Several interdisciplinary programs are offered to the

Lehigh graduate student.

American Studies

A Master of Arts degree in American Studies is offered

jointly by English, History, and other departments in the

humanities and social sciences. Candidates for the mas-

ter’s degree must complete at least 30 credit hours. In

addition to the Theory and Method course, students

must choose two courses in American history and two

courses in American literature and film from those

offered by the history department and the English

department. Students must also take one special topics

seminar. The other four courses for the master’s degree

will be divided between thesis or “thesis paper” credits

and American Studies courses not in history or litera-

ture/film. To fulfill the thesis requirement, students will

write one longer thesis or two thesis papers that are

aimed at conference presentation and/or publication.

Analytical Finance

This program provides students with a strong education

in advanced finance and quantitative financial analysis

tools to develop graduates who can create innovative

solutions for real financial problems, using state of the

art analytical techniques and computing technology. Stu-

dents with undergraduate degrees in computer science,

economics, engineering, finance, mathematics and the

hard sciences should have the quantitative background

needed for success in this field.

Prerequisites

Applicants must show basic competency in the following

areas: finance, corporate finance, investments, financial

accounting, economics, money and banking, statistics,

linear algebra, and calculus. These courses will not count

toward the masters degree.

Required Courses

The 33 credit hour program is a joint venture of the

College of Business and Economics, the P.C. Rossin Col-

lege of Engineering and Applied Science and the College

of Arts & Sciences. Required courses are as follows:

GBUS422 Derivatives and Risk Management (3)

Summer

MATH 467 Financial Calculus I (3) Fall

GBUS 473 International Finance (3) Fall

IE 426 Optimization Models and Applications

(3) Fall

ECO 415 Econometrics (3) Fall

IE 441 Financial Engineering Projects (3)

Fall/Spring

MATH 468 Financial Calculus II (3) Spring

GBUS 421 Advanced Investments (3) Spring

IE 447 Stochastic Programming and Portfolio

Analysis (3) Spring

ECO 424 Advanced Numerical Methods (3)

Spring

STAT 410 Probability and Its Applications (3)

Spring

Admissions. Students may apply through the Graduate

Programs Office in the College of Business &

Economics. Students must take either the GRE or

GMAT. International students must have 16 years of

schooling with four years at the University level to be

considered for admission. Applicants whose native lan-

guage is not English are required to take the Test of

English as a Foreign Language (TOEFL). Since the first

course, GBUS 422—Derivatives and Risk Management,

is offered during the first summer session, students are

encouraged to apply to the program by May 1.

Further information about the M.S. in Analytical

Program may be obtained by contacting the Graduate

Programs Office of the College of Business and

Economics or Dr. Richard Kish, Co-Director M.S. in

Analytical Finance Program, Lehigh University, College

of Business and Economics, 621 Taylor Street,

Bethlehem PA 18015

phone: (610) 758-3418

email: [email protected]

http://www3.lehigh.edu/business/academics/msanafin.asp

Master of Business Administration and

Engineering

In today’s business environment expertise is required

over a broad spectrum of skills in order to maximize per-

formance. To meet this challenge, Lehigh has developed

an interdisciplinary graduate program that provides a

solid foundation in both business and engineering. The

joint Master of Business Administration and Engineering

(MBA&E) degree has been developed through the co-

operative efforts of the P.C. Rossin College of

Engineering & Applied Science and the College of Busi-

ness & Economics. This program is part of Lehigh’s

commitment to developing the industrial leaders needed

to enhance our competitiveness in the new global mar-

ketplace, and is aimed at students with an engineering or

science background.

The basic 45 credit hour course sequence consists of:

MBA core courses 18 credits

Engineering core courses 12 credits

Business electives 5 credits

Engineering electives 6 credits

Free electives 3 credits

Integrated project 1 credit

Students can choose an appropriate engineering curricu-

lum from any of the following programs – chemical

engineering, civil engineering, computer engineering,

electrical engineering, industrial and systems engineer-

ing, manufacturing systems engineering, materials

science and engineering, mechanical engineering and

mechanics.

MBA Core Courses

MBA 401 Introduction to the Organization and Its

Environment (2)

MBA 402 Managing Financial and Physical

Resources (4)

MBA 403 Managing Information (4)

66 Lehigh University Course Catalog 2009-2010

MBA 404 Managing Products and Services (4)

MBA 405 Managing People (4)

Engineering Core Courses

Each engineering program has its own set of core cours-

es. Course choices are intended to be as flexible as

possible, and are tailored to meet the needs of individual

students. Further information can be obtained from the

appropriate departmental graduate coordinator, or from

the Office of Graduate Studies (610-758-6310) in the

P.C. Rossin College of Engineering and Applied Science.

Electives. Engineering electives are chosen from courses

in the appropriate RCEAS engineering program, and the

business electives are selected from course offerings in

CBE. Electives can also be chosen from joint courses

that are being developed by RCEAS & CBE.

Project. A short interdisciplinary project is required of all

students. Project topics, based on the specific interests of

each student, will be developed by CBE and RCEAS

faculty.

Admissions. Applications must be accepted by the MBA

program and by the relevant department in the P.C.

Rossin College of Engineering and Applied Science.

When required by the engineering program, students

must take the GRE. If this is not required, then the

GMAT examination must be taken. Students will not be

required to take both tests.

Further information can be obtained from:

Office of Graduate Studies

P.C. Rossin College of Engineering & Applied Science

610-758-6310

www.lehigh.edu/engineering

The Graduate Programs Office

College of Business & Economics

610-758-3418

www.lehigh.edu/mba

Master of Business Administration and

Educational Leadership

The MBA & Master of Education joint degree program

offers students the opportunity to acquire a solid foun-

dation in both business and education. Designed to

develop the administrative skills required in today’s edu-

cational systems, the MBA/M.Ed. provides a framework

where excellent education and sound business practices

can flourish. The MBA/M.Ed. will provide an additional

option for business students in educational leadership.

The program will enhance the students’ marketability in

private and public sector education while providing stu-

dents with an understanding of the cultures of both

business and education. Core courses from both colleges

will ensure that recipients of the joint degree will bring

to their future positions an extraordinary medley of skills

to manage human and financial resources efficiently

while employing expertise in instructional supervision

and training in both education and corporate settings.

This program of study will enhance training and skills

for those currently in the area of business and financial

management in the field of education.

The Lehigh MBA/Ed. Leadership is a 45-credit joint

degree program. Students earning an MBA/Ed.

Leadership will be prepared for positions such as: School

Superintendent, Principal, and School District

Administration

Educational Leadership Core Courses

Introduction to Organizational Leadership 3

Supervision of Instruction 3

Human Resources Management 3

School Financial Management 3

School Law 3

Practicum in School Business Management 1

Research 3

Multicultural Issues 3

Electives 3

MBA Core Courses

Introduction to the Organization & Its

Environment 2

Managing Financial & Physical Resources 4

Managing Information 4

Managing Products & Services 4

Practicum: Integrative Experience 1

MBA Electives 5

Electives. Educational electives are chosen from courses

in the College of Education and the business electives

are selected from course offerings in the College of

Business and Economics.

Admission Requirements. Applications need to be

approved through both the MBA Program and the

Educational Leadership program. Students are required

to take the GMAT. Students must have at least 2 years of

professional post graduate work experience to apply for

this joint degree program.

Further information about the program may be obtained

by contacting Dr. George White, Professor, College of

Education, 610-758-3262 or [email protected].

Manufacturing Systems Engineering

Lehigh’s award-winning graduate program leading to the

cross-disciplinary master of science degree in manufac-

turing systems engineering (MSE) is administered by the

Center for Manufacturing Systems Engineering within

the P.C. Rossin College of Engineering and Applied Sci-

ence. In addition, the College of Business and

Economics participates in teaching accounting, business,

finance, management, and marketing aspects affecting

manufacturing systems.

This graduate curriculum aims to develop engineers who

can design, develop, install, operate and modify manu-

facturing systems involving materials, processes,

equipment, facilities, logistics, and people using leading

edge technologies. A systems perspective is integrated by

means of interdisciplinary course offerings.

Distance Education

It is possible for distance students to earn the MS in

MSE degree remotely.

Major Requirements

The degree requires completion of 30 credits of graduate

level work, including:

four (4) core MSE courses.

MSE 362 Logistics and Supply Chain

Management (3)

MSE 443 (IE 443) Automation and Production

Systems (3)

MSE 438 Agile Organizations and Manufacturing

Systems (3)

Graduate Studies 67

MSE 481 (GBUS 481) Technology, Operations &

Competitive Strategy (3)

Either

MSE 451 Manufacturing Systems Engineering

Project (3)

MSE 490 Manufacturing Systems Engineering

Thesis (6)

And

Elective courses (12 or 15 credits). At least one elective

must be an MSE-numbered course.

Elective courses are selected in consultation with the

MSE academic adviser from technical and business areas

related to manufacturing.

These areas include:

• design

• materials, manufacturing processes and quality con-

trol

• automation, control systems, and computer integra-

tion

• computer and information systems

• business, management, organization, and operations

research

Admission requirements

• A bachelor’s degree in engineering or an appropriate

science is required.

• All candidates must have at least six months work

experience in industry.

• All candidates must follow admission procedures and

standards established by Lehigh University.

For further information contact: Carolyn Jones, MSE

Program Coordinator, 200 West Packer Avenue,

Bethlehem, PA 18015 (610) 758-5157, FAX (610) 758-

6527, Email [email protected] or visit the MSE web site

at www.lehigh.edu/~inmse/gradprogram/

Photonics

The Master of Science Degree in Photonics is an interdis-

ciplinary program designed to provide students with a

broad training in the various aspects of photonics, includ-

ing topics in electrical engineering, materials science, and

physics. Admission to the program requires a B.S. or

M.S. in either the engineering or physical sciences.

Applications should be directed to one of the three spon-

soring departments (Electrical and Computer

Engineering, Materials Science and Engineering, or

Physics). Procedures and admission criteria are the same

as those followed by the home department. International

students must satisfy minimum university language

requirements. The admissions process is under the super-

vision of the individual department to which you apply.

Required Courses*(15 credits):

PHY 352 Modern Optics (3)

[Prerequisite: Math 205, PHY 212/ECE

202]

PHY 355/455 Lasers and Nonlinear Optics (3)

[Prerequisite: PHY 31**, PHY 213/ECE

203 or MAT 201]

ECE 348/448 Lightwave Technology (3)

[Prerequisite: ECE 203]

ECE 372/472 Optical Networks (3)

[Prerequisite: ECE 81]

MAT 496 Photonic Materials (3)

Selected pre-requisites for the required courses may be

waived by the program director for students with equiva-

lent background.

A minimum of three courses must be selected from the

following list:

ECE 371/471 Optical Information Processing

ECE 347/447 Introduction to Integrated Optics

ECE 407 Linear and Nonlinear Optics

ECE 451 Physics of Semiconductor Devices

PHY 363 Solid State Physics

PHY 369 Quantum Mechanics

PHY 421-422 Electricity and Magnetism

MAT 302 Electronic Properties of Materials

MAT 423-427 Electron Microscopy (TEM and SEM)

MAT 430 Glass Science

PHY 312/412 Advanced Laboratory in Photonics

ECE 373/473 Optical Communications Laboratory

In order to complete the MS degree requirements of the

University, candidates must submit either a Master’s the-

sis or a report based on a research course of up to 6

credit hours. Research courses should be at the 400 level.

Polymer Science and Engineering

Lehigh has a diverse group of faculty members with

strong, primary interest in polymer science and engineer-

ing. In order to provide better opportunities for courses

and research in this interdisciplinary field, activities are

coordinated through the Center for Polymer Science and

Engineering (CPSE), and its academic Polymer Educa-

tion Committee. Polymer faculty from traditional

departments of chemical engineering, chemistry, materi-

als science and engineering, physics, and mechanical

engineering and mechanics, are participants of the

CPSE.

There are two ways in which qualified graduate students,

with degrees in the above or related fields, may partici-

pate. Students may pursue graduate studies within an

appropriate department. Departmental procedures must

be followed for the degree sought. The student’s adviser

may be in that department, or in another department, or

research center, in which case, the student receives a nor-

mal departmental degree, with emphasis in polymer

courses and research.

Alternatively, students may elect to pursue studies toward

an interdisciplinary M.S., M.E., or Ph.D. degree in poly-

mer science and engineering. The procedures for this

latter case are summarized as follows.

Students enter through the departments and must meet

each entering department’s criteria. When the student is

ready (must have taken/be taking at least one polymer

course and be in good standing in the department), the

student petitions to transfer to the Center for Polymer

Science and Engineering. After entering the center

degree program, his/her degree program becomes

Polymer Science and Engineering, but the student

remains in the home department.

Master of Science Degree in Polymer Science and

Engineering requires a total of 24 credits in course work

and six credits in research based on a pre-approved

library program. The research report is directed and

signed by a faculty member of the Center for Polymer

Science and Engineering and co-signed by the chairman

of the Polymer Education Committee or the director of

the CPSE.

68 Lehigh University Course Catalog 2009-2010

Required courses:

CHE (CHM/MAT) 388

Synthesis and Characterization Lab (3)

CHE (CHM/MAT) 393

Physical Polymer Science (3)

CHE (CHM) 394

Organic Polymer Science (3) Research (6)

Three 400-level polymer courses to be selected from the

following list (list may vary slightly from year to year,

check with Professor Pearson or Professor Roberts for

more details):

CHE 428 Rheology (3)

PHY 472 Polymer Physics (3)

CHE (CHM) 483 Emulsion Polymers (3)

CHE (CHM/MAT) 482

Engineering Behavior of Polymers (3)

CHE (CHM/MAT) 485

Polymer Blends and Composites (3)

CHE 486 Polymer Processing (3)

CHM 489 Organic Polymer Science II (3)

CHM 491 Physical Chemistry of Organic Polymer

Coatings (3)

CHE (CHM) 492 Topics in Polymer Science (3)

CHM 493 Organic Chemistry of Organic Polymer

Coatings (3)

CHE 487 Polymer Interfaces (3)

Courses in the admitting department must include one

of the following:

CHE (CHM) 400 Chemical Engineering

Thermodynamics (3)

CHM (CHE) 445 Elements of Physical Chemistry (4)

MAT 401 Thermodynamics and Kinetics I (3)

ME 420 Advanced Thermodynamics

PHY 442 Statistical Mechanics

plus one other 300- or 400-level non-polymer related

course from the admitting department.

Master of Engineering Degree in Polymer Science and

Engineering requires a total of 30 credits of course work.

This option is intended for those students who do not

work in a laboratory setting, or for whom thesis research

is not practical, but who wish to obtain an advanced

education in polymer science and engineering.

The additional six hours of coursework must include

two additional 300 or 400 level polymer courses, or one

polymer and one non-polymer home department course.

For full-time graduate students electing the M.E. degree

option, the polymer course program must include

Chem. Eng. (CHM.; MAT) 388, Polymer Synthesis and

Characterization, a laboratory course.

Part-time and Distance Education M.S. and M.E. degree

students in Polymer Science and Engineering may substi-

tute another polymer course for Chem. Eng. (CHM;

Mat) 388.

Ph.D. in Polymer Science and Engineering. For the

Ph.D., the student must satisfactorily complete a qualify-

ing examination administered by the Polymer Education

Committee; satisfactorily complete graduate course work

determined in consultation with the doctoral committee;

pass a general examination administered by the Polymer

Education Committee; and defend to the satisfaction of

the doctoral committee, a dissertation in the field of

polymer science and engineering. Students deficient in

polymer science or related topics may be required by

their committee to take remedial course work.

The doctoral committee consists of the research adviser,

at least two other members of the center for polymer sci-

ence and engineering, and at least one outside person.

The committee’s composition is subject to approval by

the Polymer Education Committee and the Graduate

and Research Committee of the university.

For more information, write to Dr. Raymond A.

Pearson, Director, Center for Polymer Science and

Engineering, Whitaker Laboratory, 5 E. Packer Avenue,

Lehigh University, Bethlehem, PA 18015, or Dr. James

E. Roberts, Seeley G. Mudd Building #6, Chairman,

Polymer Education Committee, Lehigh University, 6 E.

Packer Avenue, Bethlehem, PA 18015. Please address

applications to one of the participating departments.

Certificate Programs

Cognitive Science

Stereotypes, Prejudice, Discrimination, and Intergroup

Relations

Business College Certificates

Education College Certificates

Research Centers and Institutes

Lehigh has developed a number of centers and institutes

to provide greater research and academic opportunities

for primarily graduate students and faculty. Centers and

institutes are generally interdisciplinary and complement

the scholarly activities of academic departments and rep-

resent scholarship and research based on the expertise and

capabilities of a group of faculty members. Frequently,

centers relate to the broad-based research needs of gov-

ernment, industry, and the social community.

Research Organizations/ Directors and

Staff

Directors and staff members of the university’s research

centers and institutes are listed. Complete degree infor-

mation may be found in the faculty and staff

alphabetical listings. In some cases, areas of research

interest are given.

All addresses are Bethlehem, Pa. 18015, and the area

code is (610).

Advanced Materials and

Nanotechnology (CAMN) (Center for)

5 E. Packer Ave; 610-758-3850

Martin P. Harmer, Director, CAMN (Mat Sci); Chris

Kiely Director, Nanocharacterization Laboratory (Mat

Sci); Rich Aronson (Econ); Filbert Bartoli (ECE); Ricky

Blum (ECE); Alec Bodzin (Ed); Hugo Caram (Chem

Eng); Helen Chan (Mat Sci); Xuanhong Cheng (Mat

Sci); John Coulter (Mech Eng); Stephen Cutcliffe (STS);

Terry Delph (Mech Eng); Volkmar Dierolf (Phys); Yujie

Ding (ECE); John DuPont (Mat Sci); Alwyn Eades (Mat

Sci); Sharon Friedman (Journ and Comm); James

Gilchrist (Chem Eng); Joachim Grenestedt (Mech Eng);

Miltiadis Hatalis (ECE); James Hwang (ECE); Anand

Jagota (Chem Eng); Himanshu Jain (Mat Sci); Sabrina

Jedlicka (Mat Sci); Bruce Koel (Chem); Kai Landskron

(Chem); Tianbo Liu (Chem); Charles Lyman (Mat Sci);

Alastair McAulay (ECE); Anthony McHugh (Chem

Eng); Wojciech Misiolek (Mat Sci); Herman Nied

(Mech Eng); Daniel Ou-Yang (Phys); Ray Pearson (Mat

Sci); Jeffrey Rickman (Mat Sci); James Roberts (Chem);

Research Centers and Institutes 69

Donald Rockwell (Mech Eng); Slava Rotkin (Phys);

Richard Sause (Civil & Env Eng); Michael Stavola

(Phys); Svetlana Tatic-Lucic (ECE); Jean Toulouse

(Phys); Dmitri Vezenov (Chem); Richard Vinci (Mat

Sci); Masashi Watanabe (Mat Sci); Marvin White

(ECE); Zhiyuan Yan (ECE); Wei-Xian Zhang (Civil &

Env Eng)

Staff: David Ackland, Research Scientist; Andrea

Harmer, Director of Web Based Instruction; Deanne

Hoenscheid, Administrative Manager; Eugene Kozma,

Electro Mechanical Technician; Samuel Lawrence,

Research Scientist; Gene Lucadamo, Industrial Liaison

Officer; Alfred Miller, Research Scientist; William

Mushock, Electron Microscope Technician; Joan

Stanescu, Industrial Liaison Associate; Susan Stetler,

Coordinator; Xiaoli Zhao, Web Developer.

The CAMN, which evolved from the Materials Research

Center established over 45 years ago, was formed in

2003 to demonstrate Lehigh University’s commitment to

the emerging field of nanotechnology and to expand

established strengths in advanced materials. The mission

of the CAMN is to identify, promote, and engage in

strategic areas of research and education in advanced

materials and nanotechnology that meet the needs of

students and industry.

Innovative Interdisciplinary Research Programs with

State and Federal Government. The CAMN is engaged

in a variety of government supported research activities.

One example has been a multi-year program funded by

the Pennsylvania Ben Franklin Technology Development

Authority. This complements a National Science

Foundation Materials Research Science and Engineering

Center for collaborative research with Carnegie-Mellon

University to study the control and optimization of

interface-dominated material properties. This program

has supported many initiatives including the develop-

ment of the Materials Pennsylvania Coalition (MatPAC),

a web-based, multi-university education program in

materials science and nanotechnology; the purchase of

the latest instrumentation to enhance CAMN user facili-

ties; and R&D support for a broad range of companies.

Other areas of current research include nanoparticle syn-

thesis and self-assembly for catalysis, biotechnology, and

electronics; characterization and modeling of carbon

nanotubes; interfacial kinetic engineering to improve

materials properties and lifetime; polymer, ceramic, and

metal nanocomposites; and design and testing of micro-

electromechanical systems (MEMS).

Projects, Programs and Relationships with Industry.

The CAMN Industrial Liaison Program (ILP) facilitates

interactions with industry to provide effective and timely

results. The ILP connects with a range of technology-

based companies in need of technical expertise or

laboratory resources, and provides a vehicle to conduct

research with faculty and students. It also provides link-

ages that can help companies form partnerships to

obtain funding, create ideas, and stay competitive. These

connections often provide student exposure to industry,

internship opportunities, and employment of graduates.

The Lehigh Nanotech Network (LNN), founded at

Lehigh University in 2004 and administered by CAMN,

is an organization of business, education, and govern-

ment members that facilitates the understanding and

commercialization of nanotechnology. The mission of

the LNN is to maintain a strong, connected nanotech-

nology cluster in an opportunity-rich networking

environment to advance business partnerships and work-

force development; connect academic research and edu-

cation with business needs; promote visibility and

alignment of the network with government initiatives

and policies; and facilitate inclusion of socioeconomics,

arts, and education in nanotechnology pursuits. The

LNN currently includes over 80 organizations from

industry, government, and academia, as well as economic

drivers such as the PA Department of Community and

Economic Development, Ben Franklin Technology

Partners of Northeast PA, the Lehigh Valley Economic

Development Corporation, and the Lehigh Valley

Workforce Investment Board.

Multi-User State-of-the-Art Facilities. The

Nanocharacterization Laboratory within CAMN is one

of the leading centers for electron microscopy in the

country. Within a diverse collection of characterization

equipment, the laboratory houses the largest collection

electron microscopes of any university in the United

States and is operated by highly skilled scientists and

engineers doing cutting edge research. The facility cur-

rently houses transmission electron microscopes,

scanning electron microscopes, scanning transmission

electron microscopes, a focused ion beam instrument, an

electron beam lithography system, an electron micro-

probe, and several scanning probe microscopes. Lehigh is

the only university in the world that operates two aberra-

tion corrected electron microscopes that can resolve

images on a sub-nanometer scale. Our Scienta ESCA,

one of the best instruments for surface chemistry analysis

via XPS, is the only one in the United States. Since 1970

Lehigh has trained over 5,000 scientists and engineers in

electron microscopy through its highly reputed annual

Microscopy School.

Innovative Educational Courses and Programs. The

CAMN facilitates programs of study and research that

cross the traditional boundaries of science and engineer-

ing curricula, providing a fundamental, broad approach

to the field of materials science and nanotechnology. The

CAMN coordinates a statewide cooperative graduate

course program called the Materials Pennsylvania

Coalition (MatPAC), through which the six major

Pennsylvania research universities (Lehigh, Carnegie

Mellon, Penn State, University of Pennsylvania,

University of Pittsburgh, and Drexel) share specialized

courses live via videoconferencing.

Graduate students participating in research supported by

CAMN usually receive a Master of Science or Ph.D. in

the academic discipline of their choice, e.g., chemistry,

physics, materials science and engineering, electrical

engineering and computer science, etc.; or in an interdis-

ciplinary program such as polymer science and

engineering. Financial support for graduate students is

available through the CAMN by means of research

assistantships.

A four course graduate certificate program in

Nanomaterials enables students to gain a working

knowledge of a broad range of instrumentation and

techniques for studies in nanotechnology. Credits earned

towards this certificate may be accepted as part of a

Master’s or Ph.D. in Materials Science and Engineering,

or a Master’s in Nanomaterials. A Minor in

Nanotechnology can also be attained in connection with

most engineering and science Bachelor degrees.

Current nanotechnology courses offered include

Materials for Nanotechnology, Strategies for

Nanocharacterization, Electron Microscopy and

70 Lehigh University Course Catalog 2009-2010

Microanalysis, Advanced Transmission Electron

Microscopy, Advanced Scanning Electron Microscopy,

Nanotechnology and Environment: Applications and

Implications, Thin Film Processing and Mechanical

Behavior, and Crystallography and Diffraction.

For more information, write to Martin P. Harmer,

Director, CAMN, Lehigh University, 5 E. Packer

Avenue, Bethlehem, PA 18015-3194.

Advanced Technology For Large

Structural Systems (ATLSS) Research

Center

117 ATLSS Drive, Imbt Laboratories, Mountain

Campus

610-758-3525; Fax 758-5902; www.atlss.lehigh.edu

Administration: Richard Sause, Ph.D., Director,

Manager, Infrastructure Monitoring Program; James M.

Ricles, Ph.D., Deputy Director; Chad Kusko, Ph.D.,

Administrative Director; Frank E. Stokes, M.S., Manager

- structural laboratories; Peter Y. Bryan, B.S., Manager -

computer systems; Doris Oravec, B.S., financial services;

Mary Ann Cahalan, conference/research coordinator;

Leslie Ladick, research coordinator; Elizabeth MacAdam,

research coordinator; Richard Sause, Ph.D., Co-director-

Pennsylvania Infrastructure Technology Alliance (PITA);

James M. Ricles, Ph.D., Director - Real-Time Multi-

Directional Testing Facility, (RTMD); Eric J. Kaufmann,

Ph.D., Manager, material laboratories.

Faculty Associates: Helen M. Chan, Ph.D., Materials

Science & Engineering; John N. DuPont, Ph.D.,

Materials Science & Engineering; Dan Frangopol,

Ph.D., Structural Engineering; Joachim L. Grenestedt,

Ph.D., Mechanical Engineering & Mechanics; Wojciech

Z. Misiolek, Ph.D., Materials Science & Engineering;

Clay J. Naito, Ph.D., Structural Engineering; Herman F.

Nied, Ph.D., Mechanical Engineering & Mechanics;

Sibel Pamukcu, Ph.D., Civil & Environmental

Engineering; Raymond A. Pearson, Ph.D., Materials

Science & Engineering; Stephen P. Pessiki, Ph.D.,

Structural Engineering; James M. Ricles, Ph.D.,

Structural Engineering; Richard Sause, Ph.D., Structural

Engineering; John L. Wilson, Ph.D., Structural

Engineering; Shamim Pakzad, Ph.D., Structural

Engineering

Faculty Emeritus Associates: John W. Fisher, Ph.D.,

emeritus, Structural Engineering; John H. Gross, Ph.D.,

emeritus, Materials Science & Engineering; Le-Wu Lu,

Ph.D., emeritus, Structural Engineering; Alan W. Pense,

Ph.D., emeritus, Materials Science & Engineering ;

Robert Stout, Ph.D., emeritus, Materials Science &

Engineering; Ben T. Yen, Ph.D., emeritus, Structural

Engineering

Research/Staff Associates: Ian C. Hodgson, M.S.,

Infrastructure Monitoring; Thomas M. Marullo, M.S.,

Software Development/System Administration –

RTMD; Sougata Roy, Ph.D., Infrastructure

Monitoring/Fatigue; Jun Cao, Ph.D., Mechanical

Engineering

The ATLSS Research Center is a national center for

research and education on structures and materials of the

infrastructure. Established in May 1986 with a grant

from the National Science Foundation (NSF), the

Center now addresses the research goals of the NSF, the

U.S. Department of Transportation, the Commonwealth

of Pennsylvania, the U. S. Department of Defense, and

numerous national, state, and local industry and govern-

ment organizations and agencies. Approximately 80

people, including graduate and undergraduate students,

research associates, faculty and staff members represent-

ing the disciplines important to large structural systems

are active at the Center.

ATLSS research areas include: Advanced Structural

Systems and Materials; Measurement, Simulation, and

Evaluation of Structural Systems; Infrastructure

Reliability, Maintenance, and Life-Cycle Performance;

Intelligent Structural Systems; and Infrastructure Hazard

Mitigation with particular emphasis on Earthquake-

Resistant Structures. The research is conducted in close

association with engineers and scientists from several

Lehigh departments, industry, government, design and

professional groups and other universities.

ATLSS has excellent research facilities and equipment,

including two world-class structural testing facilities; the

Fritz Engineering Laboratory and the ATLSS Multi-

Directional Testing Laboratory, in which researchers

study large-scale structural subassemblies under static,

dynamic, and/or cyclic multidirectional loading with

complete computer-controlled experimentation. A recent

grant from the NSF created the real-time multi-direc-

tional (RTMD) equipment site for large-scale simulation

of earthquake effects on structures as part of NSF’s

George E. Brown, Jr. Network for Earthquake

Engineering Simulation (NEES). ATLSS also has out-

standing resources for computing, mechanical testing,

welding, metallography, and non-destructive evaluation.

Research Activities:

Advanced Structural Systems and Materials. Research is

conducted on new structural forms and structural sys-

tems to promote efficiency through innovation and to

promote the competitive use of high-performance steel,

concrete, fiber-composites, and mixed systems for

bridge, building, and ship-hull applications.

Measurement, Simulation, and Evaluation of Structural

Systems. Techniques for measuring and simulating the

behavior of structural systems under realistic loading

conditions are being developed and implemented in the

laboratory and in the field. Lab and field assessments are

made on bridge, highway, railway and ship structures for

evaluating their behavior under load, and evaluating the

effects of corrosion, fatigue, and other damage.

Infrastructure Reliability, Maintenance, and Life-Cycle

Performance. Research is conducted on optimal design,

maintenance, monitoring and management of infrastruc-

ture systems, and on structural health monitoring,

structural damage models and assessment, and predicting

the remaining life of structures considering uncertainty.

Infrastructure Hazard Mitigation. Research is conduct-

ed on engineering processes and structural systems and

materials technology to predict and reduce economic

losses and injuries from hazard events, such as earth-

quake, blast, fire, and vehicular impact.

Intelligent Infrastructure Systems. Research is conduct-

ed on materials, components, and systems for sensing,

processing and utilizing sensor information, and adap-

tively controlling the behavior of the large-scale

structures of the infrastructure.

Educational Opportunities. The ATLSS Center facili-

tates broad programs of study and research in the fields

of structures and materials. Graduate students in the

Center’s programs receive master of science, master of

Research Centers and Institutes 71

engineering, or doctor of philosophy degrees, usually in

structural engineering, materials science and engineering,

or mechanical engineering. Financial support for gradu-

ate students is available through the ATLSS Center by

means of fellowships and research assistantships related

to sponsored research programs.

Undergraduates participate in the Center’s research

through summer internships and academic-year special

projects.

For more information, write to Dr. Richard Sause,

Director, [email protected]; Chad Kusko,

Administrative Director, [email protected]; or

Elizabeth MacAdam, Research Coordinator,

[email protected]; ATLSS Research Center, Lehigh

University, 117 ATLSS Drive, Bethlehem, PA 18015-

4728; web-site address www.atlss.lehigh.edu.

Chemical Process Modeling and Control

Research Center

Iacocca Hall, 111 Research Drive; 610-758-4781

Mayuresh V. Kothare, Ph.D., co-director; William L.

Luyben, Ph.D., co-director; Hugo S. Caram, Ph.D.;

William E. Schiesser, Ph.D.; Stanley H. Johnson, Ph.D.;

James T. Hsu, Ph.D.

The mission of the Chemical Process Modeling and

Control Research Center at Lehigh University is to col-

laborate with industrial partners for their benefit through

the application and advancement of research in the areas

of control, design, synthesis, optimization and automa-

tion of a broad range of processing systems. A key

execution strategy includes incorporation of a strong

graduate education program at the M.S. and incorpora-

tion of a strong graduate education program at the M.S.

and Ph.D. levels grounded in work defined with indus-

trial partners. Our commitment is the delivery of Center

technologies and services that will meet or exceed the

expectations of economic return while advancing the

knowledge in the field of process automation.

The Chemical Process Modeling and Control Research

Center was established in January 1985 through the

efforts of faculty members of the chemical engineering

department at Lehigh University, leading industrial pro-

cessing companies, the Ben Franklin Partnership

Program of the Commonwealth of Pennsylvania, cou-

pled with the organizational and financial support of the

National Science Foundation (NSF). Many of the origi-

nal industrial member companies have been continuous

supporters of the center.

The center provides a unique atmosphere for fundamen-

tal research, development of specific techniques,

application to real industrial processes, and opportunities

for advanced education in chemical process modeling

and control for academics and industrial practitioners.

Facilities are available for real-time testing of new algo-

rithms in experimental process units, development of

dynamic simulations of real processes, and the close col-

laboration with researchers in several other fields of

chemical processing.

Interdisciplinary collaboration is encouraged with other

research groups, centers, or institutes engaged in biotech-

nology, polymer processing, environmental science,

applied statistics, signal processing, chemical reaction

engineering, and process design.

Direct industrial benefit is realized by participation in

the center by a number of companies through an indus-

trial consortium and its advisory committee. This com-

mittee actively participates in setting the research areas;

collaborates with the center faculty, students, and staff in

program assessment and implementation and provides a

portion of the funding for the operation of the center.

Education. An integral part of the center is the commit-

ment to conduct an outstanding program dedicated to

the education of undergraduate and graduate students.

The center has and continues to attract top quality stu-

dents from a large group of well-recognized international

universities. In addition to these gifted students, each

year several industrial companies send employees to

receive advanced training and engage in research efforts

for particular company technical requirements. Because

of the recognition of the value of the program and the

quality of the students, the center has established a

worldwide reputation as an outstanding educational and

research unit in this critical area of technology develop-

ment and implementation. More than a dozen graduate

students are engaged in the center’s research efforts and

are candidates for Ph.D. and masters degrees in this area

of specialization.

Faculty.The center brings together six faculty members

and research staff from different engineering disciplines

in the university engaged in the research and educational

efforts of the center. Visiting faculty from other well-rec-

ognized universities supplement these researchers and

provide opportunities for diversity of thinking and inno-

vative research. All of the associated faculty members are

recognized around the world as leaders in their respective

fields of specialization. They are invited very frequently

to present plenary lectures in international conferences,

industrial company meetings, and various universities.

They organize and chair national and international con-

ferences and symposia. They also serve as consultants to

a variety of industries seeking their advice on leading

technological developments in process modeling and

control.

Facilities.The Center is located in Iacocca Hall on the

Mountaintop Campus of Lehigh University. This build-

ing represents a unique facility available to the center as

well as the chemical engineering department and the

Emulsion Polymers and Bioprocessing Institutes. The

center has the use of several dedicated computer facilities

with more than 50 PC or workstation computers contin-

uously available to the students, faculty, and staff. In

addition to the local computing network, the center’s

researchers have access to the Lehigh University central

computing facilities and its outside links to other world-

wide computing systems and data networks. The center

has several laboratories with sophisticated equipment

dedicated to process control research work.

Areas of Research. The research activities of the Center

span a wide spectrum of problems in large complex

chemical process design, dynamical analysis and control,

as well micro and nanoscale complex process develop-

ment, evaluation, dynamical analysis and control. The

research themes emphasize a combination of new theo-

retical developments, new applications and translation of

new theoretical developments to practical problems. The

focal areas of research in the Center as summarized

below:

I. Synthesis and Plant-Wide Control

During the last decade Center faculty have done

pioneering work in the area of plantwide control,

72 Lehigh University Course Catalog 2009-2010

which has resulted in the only textbook that covers

this important area. There continue to be a number

of projects in this area.

(a) On-Demand Control of Processes with Multiple

Products: This project studies the design and con-

trol of processes in which consecutive reversible

reactions produce multiple products. The

demand for these products can vary, so the

process and its control system must be able to

produce exactly the desired amount of each indi-

vidual product. An ideal system has been studied

first in which the effect of equilibrium constants

and volatilities can be explored. A real chemical

system is also being studied (the production of

methyl amines).

(b) Design and Control of Tubular Reactors Systems:

Adiabatic gas-phase exothermic reactions are

often carried out in tubular reactors. There are

several types of systems: a single adiabatic reactor,

multiple adiabatic reactors in series with either

intermediate cooling or “cold shot” cooling (mix-

ing some cold feed with the hot reactor effluent)

and a cooled tubular reactor. These alternatives

are being studied in terms of both steady-state

design (which has the lowest total annual cost)

and dynamic controllability (which provides the

tightest temperature control in the face of distur-

bances).

II. Dynamics and Control of Distillation

Reactive distillation is an emerging area in chemical

engineering because it offers potential savings in

capital and energy costs in some systems, particular-

ly for reversible reactions. A recent project explored

several reactive distillation systems: ETBE, methyl

acetate, TAME, ethylene glycol and metathesis of

pentene. The steady-state economic designs of these

systems were studied. Then their dynamics and con-

trol were explored. Different types of chemical

systems require types of control structures. These

columns are sometimes operated using of an excess

of one of the reactants and sometimes using exact

stoichiometric amounts of the two fresh reactant

feeds. Both the process design and the control

scheme are different with these two scenarios.

III. Convex Optimization Techniques in Linear and

Nonlinear Process Control

The last few years have seen the emergence of a new

class of optimization problems that have been vari-

ously referred to as a Linear Matrix Inequalities

(LMIs), semi-definite programming (SDP) problems

and convex problems. We were one of the first

groups to explicitly show the applicability of LMIs

in process control by reformulating the model-based

predictive control (MPC) algorithms as LMI prob-

lems. There are several classes of problems involving

control of systems subject to constraints that are

amenable to LMI formulation. These include effi-

cient off-line MPC for fast sampling time processes,

observer-based nonlinear, MPC, multi-model transi-

tion control using MPC, anti-windup, moving

horizon estimation and evaluation of robustness, i.e.,

the impact of model uncertainty on controller per-

formance. These new control algorithms are being

tested on numerous application platforms, including

continuous stirred tank reactors, continuous poly-

merization processes and reactive distillation.

IV. Multi-Model and Hybrid Systems Analysis and

Control

Hybrid and multi-model systems are a class of sys-

tems in which there is interaction between

continuous dynamical behavior of systems with dis-

crete switching behavior. For example, systems

described by piecewise linear multiple models are

continuous and linear within a prescribed region

and switch to a different linear model description in

a different prescribed region of the state-space.

Other examples include switches and overrides that

switch one of a family of controllers into the closed-

loop, based on the operating space and control

objective.

Our research in this area has focused on two broad

problems (1) control of systems described by multi-

ple piecewise linear models; (2) formulation of

saturated systems as switched/piecewise linear mod-

els and subsequent anti-windup controller design

using piecewise quadratic functions. We demonstrat-

ed, through a case study, the control of a highly

nonlinear solution copolymerization reactor using

multi-model switching MPC. The algorithm was

successful in reducing off-specification product to

less than a third, when compared with a open-loop

transition. We have also shown how an appropriate

anti-windup controller synthesis problem can be for-

mulated using piecewise quadratic Lyapunov

functions.

V. Dynamics and Control of Micro and Nanochemical

Systems

Microchemical systems are a new generation of

miniature chemical systems that carry out chemical

reactions and separations in precisely fabricated

three dimensional microreactor configurations in the

size range of a few microns to a few hundred

microns. Typical microchemical systems combine

fluid handling and reaction capabilities with elec-

tronic sensing and actuation, are fabricated using

integrated circuit (IC) manufacturing techniques

and use silicon and related IC industry materials,

polymers, ceramics, glass or quartz as their material

of construction.

The goal of this integrated research and education pro-

gram is to study the unique dynamical properties of such

integrated microchemical systems and to develop a

framework for designing implementable feedback con-

trol techniques for this class of microsystems. Concepts

for distributed and boundary control theory will be

employed to study the model-based feedback control

formulation of microchemical systems and to develop a

technical framework for microsystem controller design.

The Integrated Microchemical Systems Laboratory

(under the direction of Professor M.V. Kothare) con-

ducts this research as part of the Center.

For more information, contract Mayuresh V. Kothare

(co-Director) or William L. Luyben (co-Director),

Center for Chemical Process Modeling and Control,

Iacocca Hall, Lehigh University, 111 Research Drive,

Bethlehem, PA 18015-4791, (610) 758 6654, fax (610)

758 5297, e-mail: [email protected],

[email protected].

Research Centers and Institutes 73

Developing Urban Educational Leaders,

The Center for (CDUEL)

111 Research Drive; 610-758-6092

George P. White, Ed.D., director; Margaret Barber,

Ed.D., assistant director for research; Floyd Beachum,

endowed Bennett professor of urban school leadership.

The mission of the CDUEL is to cultivate transforma-

tional educational leadership in urban communities by

conducting research, developing leadership competen-

cies, and improving leadership practice that enhances

student learning and development. The center is com-

mitted to leaders who support education at all levels of a

community, including teachers, principals, parents and

human service workers. Special emphasis is placed on

work involving small to mid-sized urban communities.

www.lehigh.edu/education/cduel

Emulsion Polymers Institute

111 Research Drive; 610-758-3590

Mohamed S. El-Aasser, Ph.D., director; Eric S. Daniels,

Ph.D., executive director; E. David Sudol, Ph.D., associ-

ate director; Victoria L. Dimonie, Ph.D.; Andrew Klein,

Ph.D.; Raymond A. Pearson, Ph.D.; James E. Roberts,

Ph.D.; Cesar A. Silebi, Ph.D.; Olga L. Shaffer, M.S.;

Leslie H. Sperling, Ph.D.

The Emulsion Polymers Institute, established in 1975,

provides a focus for graduate education and research in

polymer colloids. Formation of the institute constituted

formal recognition of an activity that had grown steadily

since the late 1960s.

The institute has close ties with polymer and surface sci-

entists in the Center for Polymer Science and

Engineering, Center for Advanced Materials and

Nanotechnology, Center for Chemical Process Modeling

and Control, and the departments of chemical engineer-

ing, chemistry, physics, and materials science and

engineering.

Polymer colloids or polymer latexes, as they are more

commonly called, are finely divided polymer particles

that are usually dispersed in an aqueous medium.

Important products produced and utilized in latex form

include synthetic rubber, latex paint, adhesives and paper

coatings. The small particle size of typical latexes makes

their colloidal properties as important as the polymer

properties in a number of applications. Hence, the study

of emulsion polymers is an interdisciplinary activity.

Research Activities. Emulsion polymers research

includes a broad range of problems in the areas of prepa-

ration, modification, characterization, and application of

polymer latexes. Most commercial polymer latexes con-

tain a number of important ingredients, some in only

small quantities.

Research programs at Lehigh are aimed at understanding

the function of recipe components during the prepara-

tion and application of the latexes. The research projects

are a blend of fundamental and applied efforts as well as

a mixture of theoretical and experimental problems:

emulsion polymerization kinetics, mechanisms, and mor-

phology of core/shell latexes; colloidal, surface, and bulk

properties of polymer colloids; dispersion polymeriza-

tion; miniemulsion polymerization; film formation and

properties; NMR studies of polymer colloids; and parti-

cle size characterization via capillary chromatography.

Significant research support for institute activities is

obtained from industrial organizations through their

membership in the Emulsion Polymers Industrial Liaison

Program. Hence some considerable effort is made to

relate the research results to industrial needs.

Consequently, graduates can find excellent opportunities

for employment.

Educational Opportunities. Graduate students in the

Institute undertake dissertation research leading to the

master of science or doctor of philosophy degree in exist-

ing science and engineering curricula or in the Center

for Polymer Science and Engineering.

Programs of study for individual students are designed to

meet the student’s interests, the requirements of the

appropriate academic department, and the student’s dis-

sertation committee. Considerable flexibility is permitted

in the selection of courses and a research topic.

Faculty members of the institute are involved in teaching

normal university courses and continuing education

courses for industrial personnel. The annual one-week

short course, Advances in Emulsion Polymerization and

Latex Technology, typically attracts about 60 industrial

participants and 15 Lehigh students. This course is an

important mechanism for developing meaningful inter-

actions between institute staff and students and

industrial scientists and engineers. Educational and

research opportunities exist for postdoctoral scholars and

visiting scientists as well as resident graduate students.

For more information, write to Mohamed S. El-Aasser,

Emulsion Polymers Institute, Iacocca Hall, Lehigh

University, 111 Research Drive, Bethlehem, PA 18015.

Please visit our web site at

http://fp2.cc.lehigh.edu/inemuls/epi/epi_home_page.htm for

further details.

Energy Research Center

117 ATLSS Drive; 610-758-4090

Edward K. Levy, Sc.D., director; Russell Glenn

Bateman, Ph.D.; Arlan O. Benscoter; Harun Bilirgen,

Ph.D.; Derek Brown, Ph.D.; Hugo S. Caram, Ph.D.;

Terry J. Delph, Ph.D.; Vladimir Dobric, Ph.D.; John N.

DuPont, Ph.D.; Sharon Friedman, M.A.; Richard G.

Herman, Ph.D.; Christopher Kiely, Ph.D.; Kamil Klier,

Ph.D.; Mayuresh Kothare, Ph.D.; Arnold H. Kritz,

Ph.D.; Gerard P. Lennon, Ph.D.; Ursla S. Levy, M.B.A.,

C.M.A.; Charles E. Lyman, Ph.D.; Sudhakar Neti,

Ph.D.; Herman F. Nied, Ph.D.; Sibel Pamukcu, Ph.D.;

Donald O. Rockwell, Ph.D.; Carlos E. Romero, Ph.D.;

John W. Sale, M.S., P.E.; Nenad Sarunac, Ph.D.;

Eugenio Schuster, Ph.D.; Arup Sengupta, Ph.D.; Shivaji

Sircar, Ph.D.; Charles R. Smith, Ph.D.; Arkady

Voloshin, Ph.D.; Zheng Yao, M.S.

Energy research at Lehigh involves faculty and students

from a wide range of disciplines. The Energy Research

Center coordinates the University’s energy research, help-

ing the faculty respond to research opportunities and

developments in energy and providing the main point of

contact between the university, industry and government

for matters dealing with energy research. Originally

founded in 1972 as the Task Force for Energy Research,

the Center was organized into its present form in 1978.

Energy Research. Research within the Center falls into

five major categories. Projects of interest include:

Energy Conversion/Power Generation. This research

program area has several components. The largest focuses

74 Lehigh University Course Catalog 2009-2010

on the equipment and processes used in large fossil-fired

electric power plants, with research on methods of

improving power plant conversion efficiency, of reducing

emissions of carbon dioxide and of other gaseous pollu-

tants, and of reducing the cost of generating electricity. A

second group of projects deals with fusion energy, with

an emphasis on the physics of magnetic plasma contain-

ment in fusion reactors. Other projects deal with topics

such as fuel cell conversion systems, hydrogen produc-

tion, capture of carbon dioxide, and reduction of fresh

water requirements for power plant cooling.

Energy-Related Environmental Research. The Center’s

environmental research program deals with air pollution,

solid waste, and ground water contamination issues

resulting from power generation and energy conversion

activities; and reduction of amounts of fresh water

required for power plant cooling.

Energy-Related Materials Research. This focus area con-

siders materials issues in the energy field. Examples

include high temperature coatings for boiler tubes, weld-

ing processes for new alloys, containment vessels for

nuclear waste materials, component life prediction, and

development of catalysts for pollution control. Energy

Conservation and Renewable Energy.The Center’s

research program in energy conservation deals with

reducing energy use in manufacturing and with the

development of high efficiency electric motors.

Renewable energy research focuses on utilization of bio-

mass materials as fuels.

Basic Energy Sciences. Faculty and students in engineer-

ing and science also carry out research to improve our

understanding of the basic phenomena that underlie the

knowledge base required for developing new and

improved energy technologies.

Educational Opportunities. The Center’s research pro-

grams provide opportunities for graduate students

interested in working in the energy area. Most of the

departments in the College of Engineering and Applied

Science, as well as several departments within the

College of Arts and Sciences, are active in energy

research and offer both masters and doctoral degree pro-

grams suitable for studies of energy-related topics.

All degrees are granted by the academic departments and

graduate students interested in energy enroll in tradition-

al graduate degree programs in departments of their

choice. These students specialize in energy by comple-

menting their programs with a selection of

energy-related courses. They pursue their graduate

research in energy areas under the supervision of faculty

from the Energy Research Center or from other research

centers or academic departments.

Financial support for graduate students is available

through fellowships and research assistantships.

Outreach and Industrial Liaison Activities. The Center’s

Energy Liaison Program is a mechanism for providing

consulting and problem-solving to member companies.

The Liaison Program also provides opportunities for

involving industry in sponsored research projects.

Additional Information. For more information, write to

Edward K. Levy, Director, Energy Research Center,

Lehigh University, 117 ATLSS Drive, Bethlehem, PA

18015, or e-mail at [email protected]. Please visit our

website at www.lehigh.edu/energy.

Enterprise Systems Center (ESC)

The Enterprise Systems Center (ESC), an affiliate of the

Industrial and Systems Engineering Department, was

established in 1995. This multidisciplinary center is

committed to fusing student experiential learning with

industry value creation. The center also seeks to advance

interdisciplinary research and scholarship relating to

information technology, new process development, and

integrated enterprise systems. Additional research initia-

tives focus on discovering new methods for collaboration

among education, industry and government partners

through the use of advanced technology. Emphasis is

given to an entrepreneurial approach to problem-solving.

Started as the Computer-Aided Manufacturing

Laboratory in the mid-seventies, the CAM Lab trans-

formed into the Computer-Integrated Manufacturing

Laboratory when it became clear that improvements in

plant operational efficiency would require computer-

based integration of the manufacturing processes

involved. Driven by industry and research needs to seek

performance improvements beyond the traditional man-

ufacturing domain, the CIM Lab expanded its mission

to encompass the entire enterprise, becoming the

Enterprise Systems Center. Housed in Mohler

Laboratory, the ESC provides undergraduate and gradu-

ate students from a variety of university disciplines

including engineering, business, education, and the arts

and sciences with the opportunity to work on teams

with faculty and professional engineers to solve a variety

of real world industry problems. Participation in these

work teams provides students with a level of work expe-

rience representative of what they will encounter

following graduation. Since its inception, the ESC has

completed more than 100 projects with industry and

government partners that have provided more than 500

students with an integrated learning experience that

develops leadership skills and sharpens entrepreneurial

thinking.

Research Activities. The ESC conducts research into the

development and implementation of effective strategies

to put information technology to work adding value to

engineering education and enterprise applications. In its

applied research efforts, the Center focuses on opera-

tional improvements, enterprise resource integration, and

product development and enhancement. Operational

improvement research with partner companies has

explored strategies for manufacturing support, the devel-

opment of decision support systems, processes for

work-flow analysis and facility reorganization, analysis of

constraints and throughput improvement, and new solu-

tions to supply chain management. Work in enterprise

resource integration has included methodologies for

business process re-engineering and for the analysis and

selection of Enterprise Resource Planning (ERP) systems.

Applied research in product development and enhance-

ment has included the use of computer modeling and

simulation to support integrated product development

along with analysis and evaluation of existing products,

and design for manufacturability and assembly support.

Involvement in these applied research activities with

industry partners provides Lehigh students with hands-

on learning experiences built on progressive

responsibility and contribution to real-world company

projects. From these activities, students gain leadership

skills and valuable industry experience.

Research Centers and Institutes 75

The creation of technology-enabled educational

resources augments traditional learning models. Coupled

with knowledge management technology, these resources

create integrated learning experiences and materials to

support engineering courses. The ultimate objective is to

identify key components of entrepreneurial behavior and

develop the educational methods necessary to transfer to

students the skills and experiences that will prepare them

for leadership roles in society.

Within the ESC is the Learning Collaboratory, an inno-

vative educational environment designed to promote

inquiry-based and competency-driven experiential learn-

ing that enriches the classroom lectures with practical

experience through corporate partner interactions. The

Collaboratory supports small-group learning, action

learning, and the application of technology to augment

educational resources. Collaboratory participants, includ-

ing students, professors, and industry partners, can take

advantage of such powerful communication methods as

broadband exchanges, internet conferences, digital real-

time linkages, and electronic management of

information.

Educational Opportunities. The ESC provides support

for courses in the analysis and design of manufacturing

systems and decision support systems, computer graph-

ics, computer-integrated manufacturing, industrial

engineering techniques, and experimental projects in

industrial engineering. The ISE senior project class uti-

lizes ESC facilities and a video teleconferencing system

to step beyond the traditional classroom experience in

the preparation and presentation of its culminating proj-

ect. These courses are offered through the Industrial and

Systems Engineering department. Graduate studies lead-

ing to both masters and doctoral degrees are also

available through the Industrial and Systems Engineering

department.

Participation in industry partner projects is open to all

Lehigh students, both undergraduate and graduate,

regardless of academic major, based on an interview

process. This emphasis on interdisciplinary cooperation

provides the opportunity to learn and work in an envi-

ronment analogous to the cross-functional teamwork

structure employed in many businesses. Applied research

and project work is conducted with both industry and

government partners.

For more information, contact Dr. Emory W. Zimmers,

Jr., Director, Enterprise Systems Center, Lehigh

University, Mohler Lab, 200 West Packer Avenue,

Bethlehem, PA, 18015 ([email protected])

Humanities Center

The Humanities Center provides a physical home - as

well as intellectual, financial, and organizational support -

for students, faculty, and staff who wish to come together

to participate in humanistic inquiry, understood in the

broadest possible terms. We seek to enrich the work of

existing academic departments and programs in the

humanities, by stimulating a wide range of activities that

move beyond and across disciplines, urging members of

the community to consider in the freest and fullest ways

what humans are or have been, what humans have pro-

duced and are producing. We seek to break down the

division between work and play, between the classroom

and the rest of life. We aim to foster vibrant intellectual

inquiry, and to diffuse the energies of such inquiry into

the broader culture of the Lehigh campus.

Research Activities: The Humanities Center fosters

interdisciplinary research activity in several ways. Faculty,

graduate students, and undergraduates may apply for

funding to support reading groups, colloquia, confer-

ences and visiting speakers. Graduate students may apply

for modest financial support to enable them to travel to

present research at academic conferences. The center also

sponsors a works-in-progress series, which fosters dia-

logue about ongoing research projects in the humanities.

Educational Opportunities: Each year, the Humanities

Center’s advisory board chooses a particular theme for

interdisciplinary exploration - “Creativity,” “The Public

Intellectual,” “Waste,” “Just Globalization,”

“Contagion,” and “New Bethlehem,” are recent exam-

ples - and the center brings a series of distinguished

scholars, intellectuals, artists and writers to address relat-

ed issues. We sponsor interdisciplinary curriculum,

including team-taught courses (or multiple courses

taught across a range of disciplines) focusing on the

year‘s theme. The center oversees interdisciplinary

Humanities Minor Programs in Peace Studies, Medieval

Studies and Ethics. The Humanities Center also hosts a

wide range of informal activities to create a lively,

unstructured humanistic community.

For more information, contact the Director, M. Edurne

Portela at the Humanities Center, 224 West Packer

Avenue, Bethlehem, PA 18015 or by email at

[email protected].

Institute for Interactivist Studies

Interactivism is a philosophical and theoretical approach to

modeling multiple biological, mental, and social phenome-

na. It is attracting interest from scholars and researchers

around the world. For a general description, see:

http://www.lehigh.edu/~mhb0/InteractivismManifesto.pdf

The primary functions of the Institute for Interactivist

Studies are:

1. to build on the growing interest in the model,

2. to promote interactivist research,

3. to give Lehigh greater visibility within this wider

community of people involved in the interactivist

research program.

The primary focus of the Institute is the sponsoring of

Summer Institutes on Interactivism. These are being

held biennially, and the tradition is to switch back-and-

forth between North America and Europe for location.

We have organized four International Summer Institutes:

2001 at Lehigh; 2003 in Copenhagen; 2005 at Clemson

University; and 2007 in Paris. These have attracted

philosophers, psychologists, biologists, roboticists, and

linguists from more than twenty countries. ISI 2009 is

planned for Vancouver.

The Institute also:

1. sponsors the Interactivist Forum, an email discussion

group which currently has about 140 members from

some 25 countries,

2. sponsors an institute web site —

http://www.lehigh.edu/~interact/index.html,

3. encourages and sponsors visiting scholars,

4. holds a weekly student reading and discussion

group,

5. participates in contributing to the journal New Ideas

in Psychology, published by Elsevier, and

76 Lehigh University Course Catalog 2009-2010

6. encourages collaborative work — we currently have

about half a dozen publications co-authored by

institute affiliates, and special issues on Interactivism

in two journals are in press or planned.

For more information, contact Mark Bickhard, Director,

[email protected].

Institute for Metal Forming

5 E. Packer Avenue; 758-4252

Wojciech Z. Misiolek Sc.D., director, Arlan O.

Benscoter, John C. Chen, Ph.D., Xuanhong Cheng,

Ph.D., John P. Coulter, Ph.D., John DuPont, Ph.D.,

Edwin W. Force II, Mikell P. Groover, Ph.D.,

Christopher Kiely Ph.D., Samuel Lawrance, Alparlslan

Oztekin, Ph.D., Sudhakar Neti, Ph.D., Herman F. Nied,

Ph.D., Michael Rex, Jean Toulouse, Ph.D., Kemal Tuzla

Ph.D. William Van Geertruyden, Ph.D.

The Institute for Metal Forming was established in 1970

to teach the principles and applications of metal forming

technology to graduate and undergraduate students, to

provide instructions and equipment for graduate research

in metal forming processes, and to assist industry with

solutions to problems in metal forming.

The main objective of the institute’s research is to con-

duct cross-disciplinary process engineering studies to

better understand and control manufacturing processes

and their impact on the microstructural response of a

material. The material microstructure developed during

processing is responsible for physical properties of the

material. Recently, classical metal forming research has

been expanded to include projects in powder processing,

microstructure characterization and analysis, as well as

forming processes for polymers, glasses, and ceramics.

The study of the forming processes encompasses physical

and numerical modeling; simulation of microstructure

response to process parameters. Computer enhanced

analysis of material flow also allows us to optimize tool-

ing design in many manufacturing processes. The

combined quantitative results of these techniques may

then be compared with experimental data obtained from

instrumented metal forming laboratories (such as those

maintained at the institute), or from our research part-

ners in industry.

Research Activities. Current research areas include:

extrusion of metals, metal and ceramic powders, glasses,

polymers, sheet material formability, rolling, wire draw-

ing, forging, semi-solid forming, light-optical and

electron-optical micro-texture analysis, coatings of pow-

ders, tooling design and tooling materials,

thermo-mechanical processing of metals, rapid prototyp-

ing, rapid tooling, and machinability of the sintered

powder materials. Additionally new research projects

have been initiated in development of materials for med-

ical and energy applications.

Educational Opportunities. Students interested in metal

forming should refer to course offerings in the depart-

ments of materials science and engineering, mechanical

engineering and mechanics, and industrial and manufac-

turing systems engineering.

For more information contact Wojciech Z. Misiolek,

Director, Institute for Metal Forming, 242 Whitaker

Laboratory, Lehigh University, 5 East Packer Avenue,

Bethlehem, PA 18015.

International Materials Institute for

New Functionality in Glass

7 Asa Drive. 758-6677. www.lehigh.edu/imi

Himanshu Jain, Eng.Sc.D., Director Carlo G. Pantano,

Ph.D. (Penn State University), Co-Director William R.

Heffner, Ph.D., Associate Director Sarah Wing, Program

Coordinator

Lehigh’s International Materials Institute for New

Functionality in Glass (IMI-NFG) is founded on a pro-

gram by the same name and sponsored by the National

Science Foundation under an initiative to advance mate-

rials research globally by enhancing coordinated

international collaboration between U.S. researchers and

educators and their counterparts worldwide. The

Institute’s long term goal is the creation of a worldwide

network in glass research for new applications, and the

development of a new generation of scientists and engi-

neers with enhanced international leadership capabilities.

Among the six IMI’s established in the country, IMI-

NFG is the only one dedicated to a single class of

materials. Specifically on campus, it promotes new activ-

ities in glass research through international and national

collaborations, and the development of new approaches

to the education of glasses. Faculty and students from

various Departments of Rossin College of Engineering

and Applied Science, and College of Arts and Sciences

participate in its activities listed below.

More than half of the engineering marvels of the 20th

century that made the greatest impact on the quality of

life have relied on the exceptional properties and fabrica-

tion methods available with inorganic glasses. Glass shall

remain partner in many advanced technologies of the

future, if it continues to develop with new functionality

that other types of material cannot provide. Indeed, glass

will continue to remain a high-tech material if we can

exploit recently discovered phenomena in new applica-

tions, and take advantage of new preparation methods

that are uniquely suitable for fabricating glassy meta-mate-

rials. Unfortunately, in recent decades glass education has

fragmented with the result that a larger number of stu-

dents is exposed to glassy materials, but with relatively

shallow, cursory knowledge that does not prepare them to

become a professional glass scientist or engineer. To meet

these challenges IMI-NFG is pooling together resources of

educational institutions, leading glass companies, national

laboratories and professional organizations from across the

globe, and promoting research through synergistic collab-

orations and international exchange of researchers at

undergraduate to faculty level.

The programs of IMI-NFG are carried out with the

guidance of a US Board of 8 Advisers from as many US

institutions, and an International Board of 9 Advisers

from as many countries, who also act as ambassadors of

the Institute to various technical communities and geo-

graphical regions. In addition, 6 senior executives of the

world’s leading glass companies help identify the techni-

cal areas in greatest need of research and development.

To keep the scope of its activities focused, currently IMI-

NFG is supporting collaborative research within six

thrust areas, viz. glassy meta-materials and nanocompos-

ites, functional coatings, and glasses engineered for

strength, ionic functionality, optical functionality, and

biofunctionality. To avoid duplication, the various activi-

ties are coordinated with existing glass organizations

such as the Glass Manufacturing Industry Council,

International Commission on Glass, and Center for

Glass Research.

Research Centers and Institutes 77

To promote international research collaborations for new

uses of glass, and to make glass education available without

geographical boundaries, IMI-NFG sponsors and provides

support for several programs as summarized below:

International Research Exchange Program, which is

available to the faculty, postdocs, graduate students or

industry researchers from any institution in the world to

establish collaborations with colleagues in USA. This

opportunity can be catalytic to building new internation-

al teams of complimentary expertise. It has supported

numerous short and long term visitors to Lehigh campus,

including sabbatical stay of professors from abroad who

have taught courses and lectured at Lehigh, and devel-

oped new multi-national research teams.

Development of Educational Material such as video

DVDs and hands-on demonstrations by the leading

international glass experts to promote the understanding

of glass at all levels. A variety of more than 100 video

tutorial lectures and overviews of the latest progress are

available via Internet to interested students without

charge. For example, a full semester course on Optical

and Photonic Glasses consisting of 39 lectures is accessi-

ble from IMI-NFG’s web site. The teachers at Lehigh and

other universities and colleges will find this collection a

useful resource for their lectures. Professionals in industry

can learn the subject by studying these lectures.

Research Experience for Undergraduates. This program

provides support for the involvement at an early stage of

US undergraduates in active glass research during sum-

mer at Lehigh / Penn State University or at an overseas

institution. Stipends are available for the Lehigh students

to participate in glass research during the regular semes-

ter as well.

International Conference Travel Scholarship for under-

graduate, graduate and postdoctoral researchers at US

universities to present their work on new functionality in

glass at an international meeting. Through this program

IMI-NFG hopes to give the new generation of

researchers a perspective of current challenges from inter-

national point of view, simultaneously encouraging

discussions and collaborations among glass scientists

from different parts of the world.

For more information, contact Dr. Himanshu Jain,

Director, International Materials Institute for New

Functionality in Glass, Lehigh University, 120 Sinclair

Lab, 7 Asa Drive, Bethlehem, PA 18015; (610-758-

4217), Dr. Bill Heffner, Associate Director or the IMI

Office (610-758-1112). Web site: www.lehigh.edu/imi or

email [email protected].

Lawrence Henry Gipson Institute for

Eighteenth-Century Studies

9 W. Packer Avenue; 758-3369/336

Scott Paul Gordon, Ph.D., co-director; Monica Najar,

Ph.D., co-director; Michael G. Baylor, Ph.D.; Marie-

Helene Chabut, Ph.D.; Stephen H. Cutcliffe, Ph.D.;

Elizabeth Dolan, Ph.D.; Edward J. Gallagher, Ph.D.;

Michelle LeMaster, Ph.D.; James S. Saeger, Ph.D.; John

Savage, Ph.D.; Jean R. Soderlund, Ph.D.

The Lawrence Henry Gipson Institute for Eighteenth-

Century Studies was established in 1971, to honor one

of America’s most distinguished scholars, who served as a

long-time member of the faculty at Lehigh. Gipson’s

monumental life work, The British Empire Before the

American Revolution (15 volumes) was written between

1936 and 1970. Gipson received the Pulitzer Prize in

History in 1962 for Volume 10, subtitled, The Great War

For Empire. When he died in 1971, Professor Gipson left

his entire estate to Lehigh and provided the original

endowment for the institute.

Research Activities. The income from the endowment of

the institute is used to encourage faculty and student

research in the eighteenth century by providing small

grants to defray travel costs, copying, and other expenses

to permit scholars to visit necessary libraries and deposi-

tories. The Gipson Institute normally awards one

fellowship annually to a Ph.D. candidate enrolled at

Lehigh University for dissertation research and writing in

any field of eighteenth-century studies. The institute also

helps provide additional resources to build the university

library’s research collections in eighteenth-century studies.

Educational Opportunities. The institute invites leading

scholars to give lectures and supports relevant programs

such as interdisciplinary seminars and visiting scholars

interested in the eighteenth century. Occasional sym-

posia honor Professor Gipson by bringing to campus

distinguished scholars to lecture and discuss various top-

ics. The essays generated at the symposia have been

published and the institute maintains a continuing close

relationship with Lehigh University Press for publishing

original manuscripts on the eighteenth century. For more

information, write to either of the co-directors, Monica

Najar, Department of History, Maginnes Hall, 9 W.

Packer Ave., or Scott Paul Gordon, Department of

English, Drown Hall, Lehigh University, 35 Sayre Drive,

Bethlehem, PA 18015.

Lehigh University Center for Optical

Technologies [COT]:

Sinclair Laboratory, 7 Asa Drive; 610-758-2600; FAX

610-758-2605; www.lehigh.edu/optics

Administration: Thomas L. Koch, Ph.D., Director;

Kimberly D.C. Trapp, Industry Liaison Officer; Anne L.

Nierer, Administrative Coordinator.

Faculty Associates: Fil Bartoli, Ph.D., Ivan Biaggio,

Ph.D., Rick Blum, Ph.D., Slade Cargill, Ph.D., Helen

Chan, Pd.D., Volkmar Dierolf, Ph.D.; Yujie Ding,

Ph.D.; James Hwang, Ph.D.; Miltiadis Hatalis, Ph.D.;

Himanshu Jain, Ph.D.; Thomas Koch, Ph.D.; Tiffany Li,

Ph.D., Alastair McAulay, Ph.D., Herman Nied, Ph.D.,

Boon-Siew Ooi, Ph.D.; Daniel Ou-Yang, Ph.D.; Sibel

Pamukcu, Ph.D., Raymond Pearson, Ph.D.; Slava

Rotkin, Ph.D., Michael Stavola, Ph.D., Nelson Tansu,

Ph.D.; Svetlana Tatic-Lucic, Ph.D., Jean Toulouse,

Ph.D., Richard Vinci, Ph.D., Marvin White, Ph.D.

Launched in 2001, the Center for Optical Technologies

(COT) is a multi-institutional initiative based at Lehigh

University with a charter to advance research, applica-

tions, and regional economic development opportunities

for optical and optoelectronic technologies. (See

www.lehigh.edu/optics.) Lehigh partners with

Pennsylvania State University in research and education,

with Northampton Community College and Lehigh

Carbon Community College in education and outreach

programs, and with Ben Franklin Technology Partners of

Northeastern Pennsylvania in business development. The

COT has joint research and business development activi-

ties with a growing list of local and national companies

administered through the Center’s industrial liaison pro-

gram, as well as major research funding from the

78 Lehigh University Course Catalog 2009-2010

commonwealth of Pennsylvania and federal sources

administered by the Offices of Sponsored Research at

both Lehigh and Penn State.

Pennsylvania, and the Lehigh Valley in particular, has an

enviable infrastructure in optical and optoelectronic

technologies, advanced optical, electronic and optoelec-

tronic materials, and a host of related advanced

nanocharacterization and nanotechnologies. The COT

vision and goal is to provide a sustainable university

hub and partnership to accelerate the innovative and

economic development potential of these resources, to

transform the economic trajectory of the region, and

develop the next generation optics technology and appli-

cations. COT has structured its research thrusts and

industrial partnerships to maximize our success on these

key elements. The COT mission statement is: “To gen-

erate advances in the science and application of optical

technologies, and to forge partnerships that drive

growth and diversity in the industry.” In addition to the

initial vision of advancing optical communications tech-

nologies, COT has expanded its research and application

studies into new fertile high-value areas in life sciences,

sensors, and displays, with significant interest from large

and small corporate partners, from all corners of the

globe.

The Center was initiated with a July 2000 Phase I grant

of $1M from the Pennsylvania Department of

Community and Economic Development (PDCED),

beginning actual operations with funding availability in

April 2001. This was followed in July 2001 with a major

five-year PDCED Phase II commitment of $15M

through a Ben Franklin Technology Development

Authority Contract, with matching financial commit-

ments by Lehigh University and goals for major

leveraged funding from federal, industry, and private

sources. Since 2006 COT has received substantial addi-

tional annual funding totaling over $4M through

PDCED programs in university research and the

Pennsylvania Initiative on Nanotechnology. COT pro-

grams have also successfully focused on federal

Department of Defense needs, and joint activities with

the Army Research Laboratory have alone already yielded

over $14M of research funding. With additional gener-

ous private donations, growing competitively-awarded

research grants and industrial participation, COT is pro-

gressing well towards the targeted vision discussed above.

COT Facilities & Research Activities:

In addition to the existing COT expertise at the program

launch, there have been 12 faculty added in COT-related

research areas at Lehigh alone leading to over 25 partici-

pants, with 20 more at Penn State. The additions include

7 new professors in Electrical and Computer

Engineering, 3 new professors in Physics, and two pro-

fessors in Mechanical Engineering and Biology,

respectively, participating in the new Bioengineering

activity. These additions have also led to a significant

expansion of course offerings in optical technologies at

both the undergraduate and graduate levels, a new

Masters in Photonics degree, and significant growth in

funded graduate Ph.D. research programs.

COT has provided for dramatic enhancements of the

existing individual faculty laboratories at both Lehigh

and Penn State, including a wide assortment of special-

ized optical testing and evaluation equipment. These

include ultra-high-speed femtosecond pulse laser systems

for advanced materials and device analysis, unique 50

GHz microwave characterization apparatus for highly

accurate, unmounted, pulsed device prototype evalua-

tions, 12.5 Gb/s BER test apparatus and 40 Gb/s optical

communications oscilloscopes, and extensive optical

amplification, tunable and fiber mode-locked lasers, and

optical spectrum analyzers for WDM and nonlinear fiber

test and evaluation systems, and unique sources for THz

wave generation. Unique capabilities have been installed

for confocal microscopy and spectroscopy, both for

advanced optoelectronic and electro-optic materials

analysis as well as for biological sample evaluation. These

include a new near-field scanning optical microscope

with operation extending into the UV for high-spatial-

resolution imaging of photoluminescence from new

GaN-based materials. Optics labs and incubator partner

labs at Lehigh have been enhanced with over 30 special-

ized vibration-isolation tables for research or product

development. COT also benefits from the extensive opti-

cal programs in the Sherman Fairchild Center for

Solid-State Studies, which include a flexible electronics

lab pursuing flexible OLED displays on metal film sub-

strates, and CMOS processing capabilities currently

contributing to research in silicon photonics.

Several major facilities investments have also been made,

including new building wings. The new Smith Family

Laboratory for Optical Technologies, made possible in

large part due to a private donation from the family of

Lehigh alumnus Daniel E. Smith, Jr., has provided infra-

structure to pursue multidisciplinary research targeting

new optical and optoelectronic materials and device

structures. This facility houses two new epitaxial growth

systems for GaN-based high bandgap UV materials, and

GaAs-based and InP-based optoelectronic and electronic

materials, and a full open-access shared clean room with

lithography, wet and dry processing capability for fabri-

cating research devices. Complementing existing facilities

at Lehigh and Penn State, this provides for a critically-

needed capability to bring faculty together from

Electrical and Computer Engineering, Physics, Materials

Science and Engineering, and other disciplines including

Biology, Chemistry, Chemical Engineering, and

Mechanical Engineering, to pursue as a coordinated

team new device and materials functionality. Lehigh has

also invested in a new fiber draw tower, making it one of

the few universities with the capability to make its own

optical fibers for research. Current focus is on new mate-

rials such as tellurite fibers and possibly future

chalcogenide glass fibers, as well as new photonic crystal

fibers with micro- and nanopatterned internal structure

for unique dispersive and nonlinear optical properties.

The latter has been recently enhanced with addition of a

new extrusion fiber preform apparatus.

The key areas of continuing COT research focus and

activity are:

1. Advanced Optical Functionality in Glasses,

Dielectrics, and Ferroelectrics Leaders: Dr. Ivan

Biaggio & Dr. Himanshu Jain

2. Semiconductor and Organic Optoelectronic

Devices and Materials Leaders: Dr. Jim Hwang &

Dr. Volkmar Dierolf

3. Biophotonics Leaders: Dr. Daniel Ou-Yang & Dr.

Ahmed Heikal (PSU)

For more information, contact Thomas L. Koch,

Director, Center for Optical Technologies, 205 Sinclair,

Lehigh University, 7 Asa Drive, Bethlehem, PA 18015.

Research Centers and Institutes 79

Martindale Center for the Study of

Private Enterprise

621 Taylor Street; 758-4771

J. Richard Aronson, Ph.D., director; Robert J.

Thornton, Ph.D., associate director; Todd Watkins,

Ph.D., associate director and director of the Institute for

the Study of Regional Political Economy; Judith

McDonald, Ph.D., associate director and director,

Canadian Studies Institute; Robert Kuchta, assistant

director for marketing; Anne M. Anderson, Ph.D.;

Henri Barkey, Ph.D.; Michael Baylor, Ph.D.; Stephen H.

Cutcliffe, Ph.D.; James Dearden, Ph.D.; Mary Beth

Deily, Ph.D.; Thomas Hyclak, Ph.D.; Arthur E. King,

Ph.D.; Janet M. Laible, Ph.D.; Vincent Munley, Ph.D.;

David H. Myers, Ph.D.; David Pankenier, Ph.D.; James

Saeger, Ph.D.; Paul Salerni, Ph.D.; Roger Simon, Ph.D.;

Stephen E. Snyder, Ph.D.;; Richard Weisman, Ph.D.

Faculty Emeriti: Richard W. Barsness, Ph.D.; Carl R.

Beidleman, Ph.D.; Raymond Bell, Ph.D.; Oles M.

Smolansky, Ph.D.; Howard R. Whitcomb, Ph.D.

Staff: Sharon P. Bernstein, Administrative Coordinator;

Rosemary H. Krauss, Coordinator; Karen M. Hicks,

Ph.D., Microfinance Program Coordinator.

The Martindale Center for the Study of Private

Enterprise, part of the College of Business and

Economics, was established in 1980 by a gift from Harry

and Elizabeth Martindale. The primary purpose of the

center is to contribute through scholarship to the

advancement of public understanding of the structure

and performance of our economic system.

Attention is focused on the private sector of the econo-

my and on public policies as they influence the private

sector. To achieve this end, the center activities include

the sponsorship of lectures and conferences, support of

faculty research, and administration of the visiting schol-

ar and executive-in-residence programs. The center

sponsors and administers the Martindale Students

Associates Program (for undergraduates) and the publica-

tion of their journal, Perspectives on Business and

Economics. The center has established the Canadian

Studies Institute which encourages scholarship dealing

with the business and economic environment of Canada

and with U.S./Canadian business and economic rela-

tions; and the Institute for the Study of Regional

Political Economy which focuses attention on the busi-

ness and economic environment of the Lehigh Valley

and other regions throughout the U.S. The Center

recently established a Microfinance Program, and along

with the Department of International Relations, partners

with the U.S. Department of State to offer a lecture

series on Global Political Economy.

For more information, write to Dr. J. Richard Aronson,

Director, Martindale Center for the Study of Private

Enterprise, Rauch Business Center, Lehigh University,

621 Taylor Street, Bethlehem, PA 18015.

www.lehigh.edu/martindale.

Murray H. Goodman Center for Real

Estate Studies

621 Taylor Street; 610-758-4788

Stephen F. Thode, DBA, director

The Murray H. Goodman Center for Real Estate Studies

was established in 1988 through a major gift from

Murray H. Goodman, ‘48. The center is a self-support-

ing, interdisciplinary unit of the College of Business and

Economics. The center provides financial support and

other assistance for courses in real estate and real estate

finance, supports scholarly research in real estate, and

sponsors joint activities with practitioners in the real

estate field.

Educational Opportunities. The center provides

resources for the teaching of graduate and undergraduate

courses in real estate, real estate finance, and ire@l

(Integrated Real Estate at Lehigh). ire@l is a three- to

four-year course of study open to all undergraduate stu-

dents at Lehigh. The ire@l curriculum consists of five

core courses, IPRE 001, IPRE 002, IPRE 301, BUS 347

and BUS 348, and a mandatory summer internship. Two

optional courses, IPRE 101 and IPRE 102, are also part

of the curriculum. Additional courses offered include

FIN 336- Real Estate Finance, and GBUS 425 - Real

Estate Financing and Investing. In addition, the center

sponsors a continuing series of seminars and presenta-

tions by real estate executives and practitioners through

the ire@l program. As part of the ire@l program, the

center also serves as a clearinghouse for students seeking

internships with real estate firms and related companies.

Research Activities. Consistent with the university’s

encouragement of scholarly research, the center provides

funding for faculty research in the real estate area.

Funding possibilities include: summer faculty research

grants; travel, telephone and administrative support; and

grants for part-time graduate assistants. The center also

maintains a file of sponsored research opportunities avail-

able through private foundations, government agencies

and practitioner organizations and provides administra-

tive support to faculty applying for such funding.

Practitioner Interaction. The third aspect of the center’s

activities is its interaction with practitioners in the real

estate field. The increased emphasis on continuing edu-

cation and research among real estate practitioner

organizations, as well as Lehigh’s proximity to major real

estate markets, enable the center to engage the practi-

tioner community in a variety of joint projects. These

joint projects include: 1) sponsored research projects; 2)

continuing education programs and short courses; 3)

special conferences and events of national and/or region-

al interest; and, 4) center-sponsored databases and

continuing activities of interest to the practitioner com-

munity.

For more information, write to Dr. Stephen F. Thode,

Director, Murray H. Goodman Center for Real Estate

Studies, Rauch Business Center, Lehigh University, 621

Taylor Street, Bethlehem, PA 18015, or call (610) 758-

4788 or email [email protected].

Philip and Muriel Berman Center for

Jewish Studies

9 W. Packer Avenue; 610-758-4869, fax 610-758-4858

Laurence J. Silberstein, Ph.D., director; Chava Weissler,

Ph.D.; Robert L. Cohn, Ph.D. (Lafayette College); Ruth

Knafo Setton, Ph.D., Writer-in-Residence. Associated

faculty: David C. Amidon, Jr., M.A.; Bunnie Piltch,

M.A.; Roslyn Weiss, Ph.D.; Benjamin G. Wright III,

Ph.D.

The Philip and Muriel Berman Center for Jewish

Studies, established in 1984, develops, administers, and

coordinates a comprehensive program in Jewish studies

at Lehigh University. The center is directed by Laurence

J. Silberstein, Philip and Muriel Berman professor of

Jewish Studies.

80 Lehigh University Course Catalog 2009-2010

Eight faculty members, including three Philip and

Muriel Berman professors, teach Jewish studies classes at

Lehigh. In 2001, as the result of a gift from Susan

Ballenzweig Beckerman, the center established the posi-

tion of Writer-in-Residence in cooperation with the

department of English. In 2007, the Helene and Allen

Apter Chair of Holocaust Studies and Ethical Values was

created with the generous support of Helene and Allen

Apter ‘61 and Lehigh’s College of Arts & Sciences. The

center also coordinates the Richard and Susan Master

Visiting Professorship in Jewish Studies at the Pontifical

Gregorian University in Rome, a program initiated by

Philip and Muriel Berman of Allentown, Pa.

Other activities of the center include designing and

implementing new courses and seminars, an annual lec-

ture series, scholarly colloquia, and academic

conferences. Conditions permitting, the center organizes

the “Lehigh in Israel” summer program taught by Lehigh

faculty and provides financial awards to Lehigh under-

graduates for study in Israel through the Howard

Ballenzweig Memorial Fund. In addition, the center

publishes a book series with New York University Press

titled New Perspectives on Jewish Studies.

For more information on the Berman Center and its

programs, write to Dr. Laurence J. Silberstein, Director,

Philip and Muriel Berman Center for Jewish Studies,

Lehigh University, 9 W. Packer Avenue, Bethlehem, PA

18015, or call 610 758-4869 ([email protected]).

Polymer Science and Engineering

(Center for)

111 Research Drive; 610-758-3590

Manoj K. Chaudhury, Ph.D.; John Coulter, Ph.D.;

Gregory Ferguson, Ph.D.; Natalie Foster, Ph.D.; Ned

Heindel, Ph.D.; Andrew Klein, Ph.D.; H. Daniel Ou-

Yang, Ph.D.; Ray Pearson, Ph.D, director; Steven L.

Regen, Ph.D.; James Roberts, Ph.D.; Cesar A. Silebi,

Ph.D.; Gary Simmons, Ph.D.; Arkady S. Voloshin,

Ph.D.

The Center for Polymer Science and Engineering

(CPSE) was formally established at Lehigh University in

July 1988. The center provides a unique opportunity for

faculty and students from the traditional departments of

chemistry, chemical engineering, materials science and

engineering, mechanical engineering and mechanics, and

physics to perform interdisciplinary research in polymers.

The center is an umbrella organization encompassing

polymers research and graduate studies at Lehigh

University. The center’s primary missions are preparation

of first rate scientists and engineers with proficiency in

polymers, fostering cross-disciplinary polymer research,

organizing and teaching continuing education short

courses in areas of interest to the polymer industry; and

organizing campus wide seminars.

The center’s Polymer Education Committee graduate

studies through the academic departments leads to the

Master of Science, Master of Engineering, and Doctor of

Philosophy in Polymer Science and Engineering.

Students may also elect to pursue studies towards a clas-

sical degree in their respective departments with an

emphasis in polymer courses and research. Both

advanced undergraduate and graduate courses in poly-

mer science and engineering are offered through the

participating departments. Current course offerings

include polymer synthesis and characterization laborato-

ry, physical polymer science, organic polymer science,

engineering behavior of polymers, rheology, polymer

processing, emulsion polymers, polymer blends and

composites, colloid science, and polymer interfaces.

Research Activities. The center has a wide range of

research activities covering the field of polymers. The fol-

lowing are the major research themes: emulsion

polymerization and latex characterization, surface/inter-

facial aspects of polymer colloids, adhesion, polymer

blends and composites, polymerization mechanisms and

kinetics, polymerization reactors modeling and control,

structure/property relationships of interpenetrating poly-

mer networks, macromolecular chemistry of biopolymers

and coal, polymer coatings for corrosion protection, and

microelectronic packaging.

Research Facilities. The following research instrumenta-

tion is available for the Center for Polymer Science and

Engineering: X-Ray Photoelectric Spectroscopy (ESCA),

Scanning Auger Electron Spectroscopy, Laser Raman

Spectroscopy, Mossbauer Spectroscopy, Nuclear

Magnetic Resonance Spectroscopy of both solids and

solutions (NMR) (3 instruments; 90 MHz, 300 MHz

and 500 MHz), Fourier Transform Infrared Spectroscopy

(FTIR) (both conventional and photo-acoustic), a vari-

ety of advanced transmission and scanning electron

microscopes, modulated differential scanning calorime-

try, hi-res-thermogravimetric analysis, instruments for

rheological studies (including a Rheometrics ARES sys-

tem), particle sizing instruments (Coulter N4M,

Joyce-Loebl Disc Centrifuge, Capillary Hydrodynamic

Fractionation, and Hydrodynamic Chromatrography),

Gel Permeation and Gas Chromatography units,

Electrophoretic Mobility apparatus, mechanical testing

devices such as the srcew-driven Instrons, several com-

puter-controlled servohydraulic fatigue test machines,

and Polymerization Reactors, including Bottle

Polymerizer, Tubular Reactor, Stirred Tank Reactors with

on-line sample analysis for residual monomer and inter

faced with computer for control operations.

Educational Opportunities. Programs of study for indi-

vidual students are designed to meet the student’s

interests, the requirements of the academic department,

and the student’s dissertation committee. Considerable

flexibility is permitted in the selection of courses and a

research topic. Lehigh University has been awarding

interdisciplinary M.S. and Ph.D. degrees in Polymer

Science and Engineering since 1975. Graduate students

conducting polymer research may also earn the M.S. and

Ph.D. degrees in the classical fields of chemistry, chemi-

cal engineering, materials science and engineering,

physics, or mechanical engineering and mechanics. For

further information please refer to the Polymer Science

and Engineering Program in the section:

Interdisciplinary Graduate Programs.

For more information about the center activities, admis-

sion to graduate school, or financial aid, contact; Dr.

Raymond A. Pearson, Director, Center for Polymer

Science and Engineering, 5 East Packer Avenue,

Bethlehem, PA 18015; (610) 758-3857. Dr. James E.

Roberts, Chairman, Polymer Education Committee,

Lehigh University, 6 East Packer Avenue, Bethlehem, PA

18015; (610) 758-4841, or Leanne Adamck, Secretary,

Iacocca Hall, Room D330, Lehigh University, 111

Research Drive, Bethlehem, PA 18015; (610) 758-3590.

Please address applications to one of the participating

departments. Please visit the web site:

Research Centers and Institutes 81

http://www.lehigh.edu/~esd0/cpse/home.html or e-mail

[email protected], [email protected], [email protected].

Promoting Research to Practice -

Schools, Families, Communities (Center

for)

L-111 Iacocca Hall, 111 Research Drive

610-758-3258

Edward S. Shapiro, Ph.D., Director, Linda Bambara,

Ph.D.; Mary J. Bishop, Ed.D.; George J. DuPaul, Ph.D.;

Lee Kern, Ph.D.; Patricia Manz, Ph.D.; Ageliki

Nicolopoulou, Ph.D., George White, Ph.D., Perry A.

Zirkel, Ph.D.

The Center for Promoting Research to Practice seeks to

develop practical solutions to real problems for those

individuals at-risk or who have disabilities. All too often

research that is created for these individuals remains at

the development level and is not disseminated into best

practices. Using an interdisciplinary approach and estab-

lishing a living laboratory through partnerships with

schools, parent and families, and community service and

support providers, the Center aspires to distinguish itself

as a leader at state, regional, and national levels in

addressing the need for the production of research to

reach the users and consumers of research. The mission

of the Center for Promoting Research to Practice

(CPRP) is to generate new knowledge that will favorably

impact the lives of individuals with or at risk for disabili-

ties and promote the use of evidence-based best practices

by schools, families, and community service providers.

The Center emphasizes the conducting of applied

research, partnership, and dissemination.

Applied Research Opportunities

The CPRP focuses on securing research projects that

emphasize bringing research findings from the field and

moving them into effective practice with evaluation of

outcomes. The projects secured by the CPRP faculty

focus on individuals who have identified areas of disabil-

ity or are considered at-risk for developing disabilities.

Currently, the Center has research projects examining

the most effective intervention strategies for improving

behavioral and academic outcomes for students with

behavior disorders. One project focuses on understand-

ing effective, scientifically-based interventions in

educating students who present severe challenges to the

schools. Another project is focused on implementation

and evaluation of progress monitoring within a Response

to Intervention model of schoolwide change in six high

need elementary schools in two diverse school districts.

Other current projects in the Center include evaluation

of the Philadelphia home-school visitor model for infants

and toddlers, and a project focused on the evaluation of

the Early Reading First initiative to improve early litera-

cy in Head Start preschool children.

Partnership

The Center forms and maintains partnerships at nation-

al, regional, and local levels. Several objectives are

established to accomplish this goal. The CPRP assists

with the development and implementation of research

projects designed in local school districts and intermedi-

ate units. Many school districts, particularly small and

rural districts, do not have the capacity to engage in

wide-scale research efforts. Yet, these districts often have

very significant needs for empirically-based decision

making. The CPRP will provide a cost-effective vehicle

for these districts to engage in such research efforts.

Another level of partnership for the CPRP is interdisci-

plinary research within the University community. This

objective will be met through facilitating cross-college

and cross-program proposals. Continuous efforts will be

made to invite colleagues from across departments and

colleges in the University to join with faculty in the

College of Education in pursuing research interests that

are within the mission of the Center. Efforts will also

continue to conduct research with colleagues across insti-

tutions. Currently, active projects in the Center are

linked to partner institutions including University of

California - Riverside, University of Missouri, University

of Pittsburgh, and the James Madison University, the

Institute for Learning and Literacy in Allentown, as well

as the Pennsylvania Training and Technical Assistance

Network.

Dissemination

The CPRP is a resource for distilling and bringing

research findings to the field. Investigators conducting

research have already begun to publish the outcomes of

findings in professional journals and outlets. In addition,

the CPRP plans to initiate dissemination to parents,

teachers, and other practitioners in a format that more

easily affects practice.

The Center’s mission, goals, current accomplishments, as

well as its future initiatives will be disseminated to

groups both on- and off campus. Included in its objec-

tives are the development of publicity about the Center

itself and outcomes of Center projects through varied

forms of communication across campus as well as insti-

tutions of higher education, local/state educational

agencies, community agencies, and parent groups.

For more information, contact Dr. Ed Shapiro, Director,

Center for Promoting Research to Practice, Lehigh

University, Room L111 Iacocca Hall, 111 Research

Drive, Bethlehem, PA 18015; (610-758-3258) or email

[email protected]; Web site: www.lehigh.edu/college-

ofeducation/cprp

Sherman Fairchild Center for Solid-State

Studies

16A Memorial Drive, East

Marvin H. White, Ph.D., Director and Sherman

Fairchild Professor of Solid-State Studies; W. Beall

Fowler, Ph.D. (Emeritus); Miltiadis Hatalis, Ph.D.;

James Hwang, Ph.D.; Ralph Jaccodine, Ph.D (Emeritus)

Sherman Fairchild Professor of Solid State Studies; H.

Daniel Ou-Yang, Ph.D.; Michael Stavola, Ph.D.,

Sherman Fairchild Professor of Solid-State Studies; Jean

Toulouse, Ph.D; George D. Watkins, Ph.D. (Emeritus),

Sherman Fairchild Professor of Solid-State Studies; Slade

Cargill, Ph.D. (Emeritus) Sherman Fairchild Professor of

Solid-State Studies; Svetlana Tatic-Lucic, Ph.D.; Volkmar

Dierolf, Ph.D.; Ivan Biaggo, Ph.D.

The Sherman Fairchild Center (SFC) is an endowed

Center, which was established through a major grant

from the Sherman Fairchild Foundation and opened in

the fall of 1976. The goal of the SFC is to strengthen

and further develop a program of excellence in

nanoscience and engineering through the integration of

research and education for both undergraduate and grad-

uate students – a partnership program between

engineering, the physical sciences, and the life sciences.

The laboratory houses an interdisciplinary staff consist-

82 Lehigh University Course Catalog 2009-2010

ing of faculty and students from the departments of elec-

trical and computer engineering, materials science and

physics. While work on various aspects of solid-state sci-

ence is carried out at many locations on the Lehigh

campus, the Sherman Fairchild Center provides the focal

point for studies of electronic materials and devices with

an emphasis on nanoscience and engineering. The SFC

has broadened its research scope in recent years to

include emerging areas, such as bioelectronics and bio-

photonics. The SFC, since its inception, has graduated

over 175 Ph.Ds.

Research Activities. The Sherman Fairchild Center’s fac-

ulty and students have a wide range of interests that

include experimental and theoretical studies of the

physics of defects in non-metallic solids and of disor-

dered materials; advanced semiconductor processing

technology, and semiconductor device, sensor and circuit

design, fabrication, and characterization. The materials

systems of interest are equally diverse and include silicon,

silicon dioxide, silicon nitride, compound semiconduc-

tors, wide bandgap semi-conductors (SiC, ZnSe, and

GaN), ferroelectrics and glasses.

The Sherman Fairchild Center houses several experimen-

tal laboratories. The Nanoelectronics Research

Laboratory provides processing facilities for the fabrica-

tion of advanced CMOS, SONOS nonvolatile memory

devices, sensors, and integrated circuits. Available tech-

nology includes low-pressure chemical vapor deposition,

RF and electron beam metallization, plasma chemistry,

e-beam nanolithography, photolithography, oxidation,

diffusion, and Deep Reactive Ion Etching. The Display

Research Laboratory provides research on polysilicon

thin-film transistors and thin-film materials for sensors

and large flat panel displays. The

Microelectromechanical Systems (MEMS) Research

Laboratory, in collaboration with the Nanoelectronics

and Display Research Laboratories, carries out research

on sensors and transducers with a focus on biological

applications. The Compound Semiconductor Research

Laboratory has facilities for characterizing high speed

devices and microwave integrated circuits.

Individual laboratories, within the Sherman Fairchild

Center, provide instrumentation for optical excitation

and luminescence, deep level transient spectroscopy

(DLTS), and Fourier transform infrared spectroscopy

(FTIR) for the study of defects in semiconductors. There

are also facilities for the study of Raman spectroscopy

ultrasonic attenuation. Theoretical work is facilitated by

the university’s extensive network of workstations.

Current research programs include work on 1)

Nanoelectronics, a study of the characterization of small-

geometry solid-state devices with emphasis on high k

dielectrics for CMOS transistors; 2) SONOS nonvolatile

semiconductor memories for a “semiconductor disk“; 3)

SiC materials for application in high temperature power

electronics; 4) Flexible electronics and active matrix dis-

plays for sensors and displays for applications in health

care, home-land security and infrastructure monitoring;

5) MEMS sensors for biological cell stiffness for the

study of osteoporosis; 6) the fundamental properties of

impurities and simple lattice defects in silicon and wide

bandgap compound semiconductors; a variety of meth-

ods (crystal growth, diffusion, electron irradiation) are

used to introduce defects which can then be studied by

spectroscopic techniques that include electron paramag-

netic resonance (both conventional and optically

detected), deep-level transient spectroscopy, and infrared

absorption spectroscopy; 7) the oxidation of Si1-xGex

alloys and SiC with emphasis on the very early stages of

oxidation and impurity enhanced oxidation; 8) quantum

mechanical calculations of the structural, vibrational,

and electronic properties of defects in SiO2 and wide

bandgap semiconductors, such as GaN; 8) the fabrica-

tion and characterization of high speed, compound

semiconductor integrated circuits; 9) the collective

dynamics of partially ordered and disordered ferro-

electrics and glasses;10) photoluminescence and

electroluminescience with optical excitation of defects

and site selective spectroscopy of defects in solids; 11)

nonlinear optics and carrier transport in photoconduc-

tors, organic thin-films and crystals with research into

improving the nonlinear optical response in small organ-

ic molecules, and 12) Bio-Physics with Optical Tweezers

for trapping and manipulation of biological cells to

study intracellular mechanical properties

Educational Opportunities. Graduate students associat-

ed with the Sherman Fairchild Center usually enroll for

the master of science or doctor of philosophy degree in

the traditional discipline of their choice, such as electri-

cal engineering, materials science, physics, etc., with

specific course requirements and research participation

coordinated through their advisor and the appropriate

department chairperson. Students are financially sup-

ported by graduate fellowships provided by the Sherman

Fairchild Foundation, government and industrial grants

obtained by researchers in the SFC, and/or by university

resources, which provides teaching assistantships and

research assistantships. These arrangements typically per-

mit graduate students in the general area of solid-state

studies to take 2-3 courses per semester in addition to

their teaching or research activities. There are numerous

opportunities for undergraduate students to participate

in the research activities of the center with the support

during the summer through the Fairchild Summer

Scholars Program.

For more information write to Marvin H. White,

Director of the Sherman Fairchild Center for Solid State

Studies, Lehigh University, 16A Memorial Drive E,

Bethlehem, PA 18015-3184.

Social Research (Center for)

The Center for Social Research is a multidisciplinary

organization designed to stimulate and conduct research

involving the social and behavioral sciences.

Several disciplines are involved in the activities of the

center: psychology, sociology, anthropology, and educa-

tion. The center also cooperates with the university’s

other research centers and with several science and engi-

neering departments.

Founded in 1965 as the Center for Business and

Economics, the focus of the center was later broadened,

and the name changed to the Center for Business,

Economics and Urban Studies. The center’s early activi-

ties included research on economics and business

forecasting, and on transportation problems. The change

to include urban studies broadened the center’s scope to

encompass the disciplines of political science, sociology,

and history. In 1972, the center’s scope was further

broadened to include behavioral science and internation-

al affairs, and the present name was selected to more

accurately reflect this broadened focus.

Interdisciplinary Research. The social perspective of the

Research Centers and Institutes 83

center’s research is interdisciplinary in nature and is rele-

vant to the community outside the university-local,

regional, national, and international. Many research

activities are based on a cooperative university-communi-

ty relationship through which the research goals of the

center are achieved and community needs met.

Interdisciplinary research activities of the center are cur-

rently being conducted in the following areas:

Health and Human Development. Members of the

departments of psychology, sociology/anthropology, and

education, participate in research on health and human

development. The program focuses on life from early

childhood to maturity. Research interests include the

effect of perinatal loss on families and family members;

the influence of family and community on health; man-

agement aspects of organizations that serve elderly

individuals; psychological aspects of aging; and, psycho-

logical aspects of late life physical disabilities such as

stroke and amputation.

Families and Children. Members of the departments of

psychology, sociology/anthropology, and education par-

ticipate in studies pertaining to families and children.

Research interests include family dynamics and child

rearing practices and the emphasis on families included

under the health and human development program.

Current research focuses on the effect of child rearing

practices on children’s development of competence.

Program Evaluation. Members of the departments of

psychology, sociology/anthropology, and economics, par-

ticipate in research to evaluate the effects of a variety of

programs. Particular emphasis is on improving program

evaluation methodology. Current research interests

include evaluation of several business, science and engi-

neering programs in the university. Research has recently

been conducted on the effect of compensatory education

and social service programs.

For more information, write to Diane Hyland, Director,

Center for Social Research, Lehigh University, 17

Memorial Drive East, Bethlehem, Pa. 18015.

Value Chain Research (Center for)

Rauch Business Center, 621 Taylor St.

Michael D. Santoro, Ph.D. and Lawrence V. Snyder,

Ph.D., co-directors; Ravi Chitturi, Ph.D.; Jim Dearden,

Ph.D.; Parveen P. Gupta, Ph.D.; Lin Lin, Ph.D; James

M. Maskulka, Ph.D; Eugene Perevalov, Ph.D; Ted K.

Ralphs, Ph.D; Catherine Ridings, Ph.D; Nada Sanders,

Ph.D; Michael D. Santoro, Ph.D; K. Sivakumar, Ph.D;

Robert H. Storer, Ph.D; Aurelie C. Thiele, Ph.D; Robert

J. Trent, Ph.D; Todd Watkins, Ph.D; George R. Wilson,

Ph.D; S. David Wu, Ph.D; Oliver Yao, Ph.D.

The Center for Value Chain Research (CVCR) is com-

mitted to promoting and conducting research and

information exchange through the integration of emerg-

ing theory and best practices. The center’s research

focuses primarily, but not limited to, value chain plan-

ning and development activities, which connects

corporate strategy with value chain execution.

Interdisciplinary Research. The CVCR is a joint venture

between Lehigh University’s P.C. Rossin College of

Engineering and Applied Sciences and the College of

Business and Economics. A core group of over 25 faculty

members from both colleges is affiliated with the center.

The center provides a unique, multidisciplinary

approach to research, offering exciting new opportunities

for innovation by integrating analytical and quantitative

engineering approaches with process-driven and field-

based business research.

Research Activities. CVCR faculty perform research in a

variety of topics, including logistics and operations, net-

work organization and technology, and value network

strategy. The research uses a wide range of tools and

methodologies, including network design and analysis,

financial engineering, mathematical programming and

optimization, advanced planning and scheduling (APS),

stochastic processes, auction and bidding algorithms,

game theory and economic analysis, parallel and distrib-

uted computing, field studies, surveys, case studies,

artificial intelligence, and data mining.

What the Center Does

• Provides a unique, multidisciplinary approach to

research, offering exciting new opportunities for inno-

vation by integrating analytical and quantitative

engineering approaches with process-driven and field-

based business research.

• Brings together scholars and practitioners to establish

a multi-disciplinary research agenda for information-

enabled inter- and intra-organizational networks.

• Conducts annual symposiums and members-only

roundtables, and develops customized on-site semi-

nars

• Disseminates research findings through professional

conferences, scholarly publications, and curriculum

development.

For more information, contact Prof. Michael Santoro,

Co-Director, Prof. Larry Snyder, Co-Director, or Joel

Sutherland, Managing Director, Center for Value Chain

Research, Lehigh University, Rauch Business Center, 621

Taylor Street, Bethlehem, PA 18015; (610-758-6428) or

email [email protected]; Web site:

www.lehigh.edu/cvcr

Other University Related

Centers

Ben Franklin Technology Partners of

Northeastern Pennsylvania

The Ben Franklin Technology Partners of Northeastern

Pennsylvania (BFTP/NEP) is based on the Murray H.

Goodman campus and is a wholly-owned subsidiary of

Lehigh. The Center is part of a four-member state-fund-

ed economic development system that brings together

Pennsylvania’s people, ideas, and technology and serves

as a catalyst for advancing the state’s technology econo-

my. Ben Franklin frequently utilizes the faculty, students,

and resources of Lehigh to accomplish its tasks.

BFTP/NEP fosters innovation to stimulate economic

growth and prosperity. The center collaborates with edu-

cational institutions, communities, other economic

development organizations, and government to help

companies succeed. By providing knowledge and invest-

ment resources, Ben Franklin facilitates the creation of

new products, sophisticated technologies, and fresh ideas

among entrepreneurs and established companies to help

them prosper. The result: the creation and retention of

high quality local jobs and a strong economic climate.

The goals of BFTP/NEP include helping early-stage

technology-oriented businesses to form and grow, help-

84 Lehigh University Course Catalog 2009-2010

ing established manufacturers to improve productivity

through the application of new technologies and prac-

tices, and promoting an innovative community-wide

infrastructure that fosters a favorable business environ-

ment for high-growth companies.

Founded in 1983, the Ben Franklin Technology Partners

of Northeastern Pennsylvania has:

• Created and retained 34,703 jobs.

• Established 398 new companies.

• Commercialized and developed 865 new products

and processes.

The Ben Franklin program is structured to help compa-

nies achieve sustainable competitive advantage.

BFTP/NEP is measured on the basis of the commercial

success achieved by its clients as a direct result of assis-

tance provided.

Assistance includes expertise, largely contributed in the

northeast by the center’s association with Lehigh

University and other leading research universities, and

funding, with investments ranging from $30,000 to

$150,000 per year for up to three years. Faculty and stu-

dents involved with Ben Franklin gain experience in

solving real issues for working businesses. Technical and

business assistance services are provided on a year-round

basis.

Ben Franklin operates Ben Franklin TechVentures, a

business incubator and post-incubator facility, on

Lehigh’s Mountaintop campus. Forty successful compa-

nies have graduated from the BFTP/NEP incubator,

grossing over $560,000,000 in annual revenue and creat-

ing more than 2,800 jobs.

For the 2008 funding year, the Northeast Center

received more than $6.9 million from the state

Department of Community and Economic

Development, with more than $19 million in matching

funds committed from private-sector businesses, educa-

tional institutions and other sources.

For more information, contact the Ben Franklin

Technology Partners of Northeastern Pennsylvania,

Lehigh University, 125 Goodman Drive, Bethlehem, PA

18015-3715; 610-758-5200; www.nep.benfranklin.org.

E-mail: [email protected].

Iacocca Institute

111 Research Drive; 758-6723

Dr. Mohamed S. El-Aasser, Provost & Vice President for

Academic Affairs; Richard Brandt, Director, Iacocca

Institute and Director, Global Village; Sherry L. Buss,

Curriculum Director, Global Village; Mary Frances

Schurtz-Leon, Candidate Manager, Global Village;

Elizabeth Simmons, Manager, Professional Education;

Trisha Alexy, Program Administrator, Pennsylvania

School for Global Entrepreneurship. Iacocca Professors:

S. David Wu, professor, industrial and systems engineer-

ing; Nada Sanders, professor, department of

management; Peter Zeitler, professor, earth and environ-

mental sciences; and Lee Kern, professor, education and

human services.

Over the years, Lehigh University has developed an

impressive ability to forge university-industry-govern-

ment partnerships. These partnerships are critical not

only to the future of universities but, also to improve

U.S. competitiveness. It is primarily through partner-

ships — with companies, schools, government agencies

and other universities — that the Iacocca Institute pur-

sues its mission of preparing current and future leaders

for a globally competitive marketplace. One of these

partnering activities is the Global Village for Future

Leaders of Business and Industry

(GV).

The Global Village provides young adults from around

the world the chance to experience a total-immersion

leadership program. Its purpose is to provide personal

and organizational change needed to thrive in the emerg-

ing global economy. During the GV program,

participants who share the dream of a leadership career

in business and industry focus on developing knowledge

of business and industry, enhancing leadership and

entrepreneurial skills, and establishing a powerful global

network. To date, more than 1050 interns representing

110 countries have graduated from the program and are

now part of the growing list of GV alumni. GV partici-

pants are diverse in culture and background. They

represent students of undergraduate and graduate insti-

tutions, and managers from global corporations and

family-owned businesses.

Global Village on the Move was established through a

growing interest among our partner institutions to deliv-

er the Global Village in their own countries, regions and

territories. While GV is not a mobile program, the

Iacocca Institute determined that shorter seven-to-ten

day versions could be delivered in collaboration with

existing recruitment partners outside of North America.

Qualified partners will have visited and provided atten-

dees to the GV flagship program. The opportunity to

provide a collaborative immersion learning experience,

cultural experience, and similar curriculum pattern in

other countries has allowed us to work with partners in

Peru 2000, Spain 2003, Australia 2005 and United Arab

Emirates 2006. Future programs are scheduled for

Germany 2010 and Peru 2011.

The Iacocca Institute fulfills its mission for leadership

development in two other program areas, Iacocca

Institute Professional Education and the Pennsylvania

School for Global Entrepreneurship. The Institute estab-

lished and maintains a professional training arm that

serves managers and leaders in business and government.

Appropriate seminar-style courses are selected to serve

the markets in the tri-state area with workshops, cus-

tomized training and leadership programs that enhance

strategic skills and networking opportunities.

Professional Education programs are designed for maxi-

mum impact through dynamic, short-term learning

experiences focused on the needs of busy professionals.

To date, Professional Education programs have trained

more than 1700 participants from over 270 companies.

The Iacocca Institute has the privilege of hosting the

Pennsylvania School for Global Entrepreneurship

(PSGE). PSGE is designed as a unique learning program

to educate top high school students from Pennsylvania

and around the world on global entrepreneurship. The

five-week residential program focuses on challenging stu-

dents as they develop greater cultural awareness and

learn business practices with other students, faculty, and

entrepreneurs. To date, PSGE has trained over 485 stu-

dents from 39 countries.

The Iacocca Institute was established in 1987 with the

support of Lee A. Iacocca, former chairman and chief

executive officer, Chrysler Corporation, and a member

of Lehigh’s Class of 1945.

Research Centers and Institutes 85

For more information, contact Richard M. Brandt,

Director, Iacocca Institute

, and Director, Global Village

for Future Leaders of Business and Industry

, Iacocca

Hall, Lehigh University, 111 Research Drive, Bethlehem,

PA 18015.

Manufacturers Resource Center (MRC)

Founded in 1988, MRC is one of seven statewide

Industrial Resource Centers (IRCs) established to help

small and mid-size manufacturers grow and remain com-

petitive. In 1994, MRC joined the National Institute of

Standards and Technology (NIST) Manufacturing

Extension Partnership (MEP) which is comprised of 59

nationwide centers. MRC works with manufacturing

companies by leveraging its own staff of experienced

Business Solutions Advisors with public and private sec-

tor resources. Through our assistance and work with

manufacturers, we help raise the economic level of the

region by creating high impact, cost-competitive manu-

facturers.

With its main office located on Lehigh’s Goodman

Campus, MRC serves all of Lehigh, Northampton,

Berks, Carbon and Schuylkill counties. MRC offers serv-

ices in four broad areas:

• Strategic Business Growth Services to help companies

grow through strategic development, sales, marketing

and product development, innovation and strategy

development;

• Lean6® Transformation to help companies transform

their operations through the implementation of both

Lean Manufacturing and Six Sigma tools;

• Business Performance and Technology Services to help

mentor companies in financial analysis and strategies,

capital sourcing and management, mergers and acqui-

sitions, establishing visual business intelligence

systems, technology and innovation strategies,

“Green” and Sustainability transformations, tax credit

opportunities, and other related services; and

• Workforce Training/Human Capital Growth to help

companies develop an efficient, well-trained work-

force that is so vital to any company’s successful

future growth.

For further information or assistance, please contact Jack

Pfunder, MRC Executive Director at 610-758-5596 or

800-343-6732. Please visit our website at

www.mrcpa.org.

Manufacturing Systems Engineering

(Center for)

200 W. Packer Avenue; (610) 758-5157

Keith M. Gardiner, Ph.D., director; John P. Coulter,

Ph.D.; Steven L. Goldman, Ph.D.; Mikell P. Groover,

Ph.D.,; Parveen P. Gupta, Ph.D.; Jacoby Y. Kazakia,

Ph.D.; Roger N. Nagel, Ph.D.; John B. Ochs, Ph.D.;

Raymond Pearson, Ph.D.; Theodore Schlie, Ph.D.;

Robert J. Trent, Ph.D.; George R. Wilson, Ph.D.

The Center for Manufacturing Systems Engineering was

created in response to the expressed needs of industry for

educational and research services which were distinctive-

ly cross-disciplinary. A primary responsibility of the

center is the administration of an award winning educa-

tional program leading to a Master of Science degree in

Manufacturing Systems Engineering. This world-

renowned program started in January of 1984 as a result

of a major initiation grant from the IBM Corporation. It

now has 369 alumni who are working as managers and

technical leaders in industry around the world. The cen-

ter has four major thrusts: 1) A graduate program which

offers a curriculum leading to the master of science

degree in MSE. 2) Research directed at solving problems

of manufacturing; this also serves to maintain faculty

currency and provides a vehicle for student project and

thesis studies. 3) Technology transfer to sustain the free

flow of knowledge from the research laboratories to

industrial applications, and from leading-edge member

industries back into the classrooms. 4) The provision of

services by supporting conferences, clinics, workshops

and other means for communicating and disseminating

the advantages of sound manufacturing systems engi-

neering practice.

Graduate Education. The 30-credit master’s degree MSE

program is cross-disciplinary, administered through the

College of Engineering and Applied Science, with addi-

tional courses provided by the College of Business and

Economics. Four core courses, 4-5 graduate level elective

courses (at least one elective must be an MSE-numbered

course) and a 3-or 6-credit research project or thesis are

requirements of all candidates for the M.S. degree.

Courses are offered on campus and scheduled so that

part-time students can complete the degree in two years.

It is possible for distance students to earn the MS in

MSE degree remotely. Special activities in the program

are team intensive and include in depth studies of com-

panies, tours of industry, industry-related research and

internships. Additionally, an MSE option is available in

the MBA&E program.

Research Activities. Students in the MS in MSE pro-

gram undertake research of interest either to their

employers, or to industry in general. Research activities

have included microelectronics packaging, design sys-

tems, thick film hybrids, the characterization of coatings

and package interfaces, and the use of lead free solders.

There are investigations into activity-based costing,

design management, application of financial information

systems, and injection molding. There is collaboration

with other centers, departments and laboratories in the

preparation and planning of research proposals and pro-

grams which aim to improve the understanding of

manufacturing.

For more information, contact: Keith M. Gardiner,

[email protected], Director, Center for Manufacturing

Systems Engineering, H. S. Mohler Laboratory, Lehigh

University, 200 W. Packer Avenue, Bethlehem, PA

18015, or call (610) 758-5157 or visit our website at

www.lehigh.edu/~inmse/gradprogram/

Philip Rauch Center for Business

Communications (The)

621 Taylor Street; 758-4863

Kathleen L. Clayton, Ph.D., associate director

The role of the Center is:

• To recognize and communicate to students the skills

needed to function in business today;

• To support and develop curricular initiatives for the

academic programs of the CBE;

• To leverage technology, where appropriate, to advance

the goals of the CBE.

The Rauch Center for Business Communications is ded-

icated to providing students and faculty with an

accessible, diversified, and up-to-date range of services,

86 Lehigh University Course Catalog 2009-2010

designed to most effectively meet current, and anticipate

future business communication needs.

The Center also administers the Excel Competency

Program.

For more information, write to Kathleen Clayton,

Associate Director, The Philip Rauch Center for Business

Communications, Lehigh University, 621 Taylor Street,

Bethlehem, PA 18015-3117, or email [email protected]

or phone 610-758-4863.

Science, Technology and Society

Program and Technology Studies

Resource Center

9 W. Packer Avenue; 758-3350

Stephen H. Cutcliffe, director; Henri J. Barkey, interna-

tional relations; Mark Bickard, philosophy; Chad Briggs,

international relations; Derrick Brown, civil and environ-

mental engineering; Gail Cooper, history; Robin Dillon,

philosophy; Edward B. Evenson, geological sciences;

Sharon M. Friedman, journalism; Edward J. Gallagher,

English; John Gillroy, international relations; Norman J.

Girardot, religion studies; Steven L. Goldman, philoso-

phy and history; Ned D. Heindel, chemistry; Breena

Holland, political science; Sharon Kalafut, computer sci-

ence and engineering; Chaim D. Kaufmann,

international relations; Kenneth L. Kraft, religion stud-

ies; Judith N. Lasker, sociology; Jeffrey Milet, speech and

theater; Vincent G. Munley, economics; Roger N. Nagel,

electrical engineering and computer science; Anthony

O’Brien; economics; Michael Raposa, religion studies;

Robert E. Rosenwein, sociology and anthropology; Dork

Sahagian, earth and environmental science; Roger D.

Simon, history; David Small, sociology and classical

studies; John K. Smith, history; Bruce Thomas, art and

architecture; Ricardo Viera, art and architecture; Todd

Watkins, economics; Albert H. Wurth, political science;

Ivan Zaknic, art and architecture; Peter K. Zeitler, earth

and environmental sciences.

Small Business Development Center

Sandra F. Holsonback, Ph.D., director; Mary Beth

Zingone, A.C.A.S.; associate director; Kim Edwards,

B.S.Ed., program director, financing assistance program;

Christopher Jones, B.S., program director, government

marketing assistance program; Cora Landis, program

director, Lexnet.

Established in 1978, the SBDC provides general man-

agement assistance to over 1,000 entrepreneurs and small

businesses per year in the Lehigh Valley and surrounding

areas. Primary funding for this program comes from

major grants from the U.S. Small Business

Administration and the Commonwealth of Pennsylvania.

Specialized Programs. The Management Assistance

Program delivers general management consulting to

existing small firms and start-up ventures. Services are

offered to retail, service, wholesale, construction and

manufacturing firms. Support is offered through elec-

tronic data base research. Seminars are offered on many

topics of interest to growing firms.

The International Trade Development Program (ITDP)

is a specialized outreach effort of the Small Business

Development Center. The ITDP helps companies with

exportable products to develop export marketing plans

and establish direct contacts with international markets.

Seminars, trade missions and research projects support

the efforts of this program.

The Government Marketing Assistance Program assists

potential suppliers to government in identifying and

developing procedures. Clients are handled on a one-to-

one basis. Trade fairs and seminars are also offered.

The Financing Assistance Program provides assistance in

loan packaging and financial planning and helps clients

identify appropriate financing sources. The program

administers the Lehigh Valley Small Business Loan Pool

and the Lehigh Valley Chapter of the Northeastern

Pennsylvania Angel Network, a partnership program

with the Ben Franklin Technology Partners of

Northeastern PA. Contracts with the

Lehigh/Northampton Revolving Loan Fund, the Lehigh

Valley Economic Development Corporation and other

funding agencies provide resources for this assistance.

The Lehigh Valley Export Network (LEXNET) is the

regional office of the Team Pennsylvania Export

Network. Throughout the year LEXNET brings PA for-

eign office representatives to the Lehigh Valley to meet

with SBDC clients and discuss in-country export assis-

tance needs. LEXNET also assists with export finance

programs such as Market Access Grants allowing small

and mid-sized manufacturing or service companies to

participate in international trade events. Specialized

training events and seminars are also held throughout

the year.

Technology Business Development Program (TBDP) -

The TBDP provides assistance to companies in the areas

of technology, product development, patent searches,

trademarks, copyright, Internet strategies, commercial

potential, business socio-economic certifications and

defense conversion. Special assistance with SBIR/STTR

research funding opportunities is available. Clients are

handled on a one-to-one basis. Seminars and workshops

are also available.

Business Education and Training Program (BETP) - The

Business Education and Training Program of the Small

Business Development Center provides specialized work-

shops, seminars and customized training for the small

business community.

LUMAC. The Lehigh University Management

Assistance Counseling program (a graded three-credit

course) was established in 1972 on the initiative of

undergraduate students. Through support from the

SBDC, approximately 150 students per year gain practi-

cal experience by providing counseling to sixty

businesses.

For more information, write to Sandra Holsonback,

Director, Small Business Development Center, Rauch

Business Center, 621 Taylor Street, Bethlehem, PA

18015.

Research Centers and Institutes 87

Technology Studies Resource Center

The Technology Studies Resource Center, based in the

College of Arts and Sciences, creates and disseminates

materials and programming that will lead a wide range

of people to an understanding of the mutual interaction

of technology and social institutions and values.

Through the center, academics from all disciplines can

collaborate on research and develop educational oppor-

tunities in technology studies with academic colleagues

and with nonacademic sponsors.

The Technology Studies Resource Center’s activities

embrace the needs of academics, pre-college and college

students, and industrial, political, and public audiences,

who seek information about technology as a force in

contemporary society. Four principal areas of activities

are the development and dissemination of resource mate-

rials, professional development programming,

educational programming, and stimulation and coordi-

nation of technology studies and research projects.

Specific activities include: collecting and distributing col-

lege-level course syllabi in technology studies; publishing

bibliographies in specific areas of technology studies;

publishing the Science, Technology and Society

Curriculum Development Newsletter; maintenance of a

data base of personnel, curricula, and materials resources

in technology studies; sponsoring conferences, work-

shops, seminars, and institutes in technology studies; and

integrating technology studies material with existing

high school curricula and developing better courses in

science and mathematics in cooperation with regional

administrators and faculty. For more information write

to Stephen H. Cutcliffe, Director, Technology Studies

Resource Center, Maginnes Hall, Lehigh University, 9

W. Packer Avenue, Bethlehem, Pa. 18015.

88 Lehigh University Course Catalog 2009-2010

Courses, Programs and Curricula 89

This section includes listings of undergraduate and grad-

uate courses offered by Lehigh University. For purposes

of record, all approved courses are listed. It must be

understood, however, that the offerings in any given

semester are contingent upon a number of factors,

including student needs as determined at the time of

early registration.

All academic departments and programs are listed in

alphabetical order.

Credit Hours

The number in parentheses following each course title

indicates the credit value of the course in terms of semes-

ter hours (“credit hours”).

Course Numbering

The course numbering system specifies which courses

can be applied to the program of study as the student

progresses toward the undergraduate or graduate degree.

In general, the numbering series is as follows:

0-99. Courses primarily for freshmen or sophomores.

Not available for graduate credit.

100-199. Intermediate-level undergraduate courses. Not

open to freshmen except on petition. Not available for

graduate credit.

200-299. Advanced undergraduate courses. Courses in

the College of Business and Economics and specific

departments as noted in the listings are open to fresh-

men and sophomores only on petition. Not available for

graduate credit in the major field.

300-399. Advanced undergraduate courses. Same as

200-299, but available for graduate credit in major field.

400-499. Graduate-level courses, open to undergradu-

ates only by petition.

Provisional Courses

Each instructional department is authorized to offer pro-

visional courses, or those offered on a trial basis, as well

as special opportunities courses. Such courses can

become a permanent part of the university curriculum.

These courses are numbered, as is appropriate, 95-98 . . .

195-198, . . . 295-298, . . . 395-398, for a maximum of

two semesters.

Apprentice Teaching and Cooperative

Undergraduate Education

For details of these programs, see descriptions under

“Apprentice Teaching” and “Cooperative Undergraduate

Education,” in section III.

Prerequisites

Academic preparation required for admission to courses

is indicated under “prerequisites” included at the end of

each course description. Prerequisites are stated in most

cases for purposes of convenience in terms of Lehigh

courses. Academic status required for admission, where

numbering does not fully describe this status, is also

indicated under “prerequisites.”

A student who does not have the status (e.g., sophomore

standing) or the academic preparation set forth as pre-

requisites must in order to be admitted to a course either

obtain on line permission from the designated college or

department officer or, file with the registrar at the time

of registration and on a standard form provided, a waiver

of prerequisites signed by the course instructor, the

teaching department chair and either the chair of the

student’s major department or the associate dean.

Academic work completed elsewhere must be attested in

this manner as being substantially equivalent to prerequi-

sites listed, unless the student’s records in the Office of

the Registrar show that the proper officers have so evalu-

ated this preparation previously.

In a few cases, corequisites are indicated. In such

instances the corequisite course is taken in the same

semester.

Information Limits

The course descriptions are intended to guide the stu-

dent in selecting appropriate courses. For reasons of

space, descriptions are brief. In most cases, courses will

have a significantly broader scope than the topics listed

in the description. In some courses, material may change

from what is described. If there is doubt concerning the

appropriateness of any course for the individual’s educa-

tional objectives, it is suggested that the student confer

with the adviser.

Abbreviations

Whenever possible, course listings contain information

indicating what requirements the course satisfies, the

semester or semesters in which it is offered, and the

name of the scheduled instructor or instructors.

While all information herein is subject to change, the

information is included to serve as a guide in the selec-

tion of appropriate courses that best fulfill the student’s

academic requirements and personal goals.

The symbols following course descriptions for some

College of Arts and Sciences courses include:

GC. Courses that meet the Global Citizenship program

requirements.

HU. Courses that meet the Humanities distribution

requirements.

NS. Courses that meet the Science distribution require-

ments.

SS. Courses that meet the Social Science distribution

requirements.

MA. Courses that meet the Mathematical distribution

requirements.

ND. Not designated to meet distribution requirements.

The symbols following course descriptions for some

College of Engineering and Applied Science courses

include:

ES. This code plus the following number indicates that

the course satisfies a number of hours of engineering sci-

ence requirements for ABET accreditation.

ED. This code plus the following number indicates that

the course satisfies a number of hours of engineering

design requirements for ABET accreditation.

V. Courses, Programs and Curricula

90 Lehigh University Course Catalog 2009-2010

Accounting

Professors: Paul R. Brown, Ph.D. (Texas-Austin), C.P.A.;

Parveen P. Gupta, Ph.D. (Penn State), chair; Gopal V.

Krishnan, Ph.D. (University of North Texas), C.P.A.;

James A. Largay, III, Ph.D. (Cornell), C.P.A.; John W.

Paul, Ph.D. (Lehigh), C.P.A.; Heibatollah Sami, Ph.D.

(Louisiana State University), Kenneth P. Sinclair, Ph.D.

(Massachusetts).

Associate Professors: Karen M. Collins, Ph.D. (VPI),

C.P.A.; James A. Hall, Ph.D. (Oklahoma State).

Assistant Professors: Marietta Peytcheva, Ph.D. (Rutgers

University), C.P.A.; Wei (Vicky) Yu, Ph.D. (Georgia

Institute of Technology).

Professor of Practice: Jay D. Brodish, B.S. (Lehigh

University), C.P.A.

Lecturers: David J. Hinrichs, M.B.A. (Lehigh).

The Department of Accounting provides a variety of

courses to support College of Business and Economics

(CBE) core requirements and to provide an undergradu-

ate major in accounting and a M.S. degree in

accounting.

The mission of the Accounting Department is to provide

rigorous accounting education that prepares high quality

undergraduate and graduate students with diverse back-

grounds for life-long learning and positions of leadership

in the business community, and to emphasize faculty

research efforts that contribute to the body of knowledge

in accounting. Consistent with the missions of Lehigh

University and the College of Business and Economics,

the Accounting Department continuously seeks to be

recognized as one of a select group of programs in the

United States where an educational experience of the

highest possible quality is obtainable.

Within the accounting major, there is an opportunity to

explore the various career opportunities within the broad

field of accounting: Public Accounting Assurance and

Tax Services, Financial Services and Corporate

Accounting, and Information Systems. In addition to the

undergraduate program, the Master of Science in

Accounting and Information Analysis degree (see Master

of Science in Accounting and Information Analysis pro-

gram under Graduate Studies) offers an outstanding

opportunity to prepare graduate students for a career in

today’s demanding field of accounting. Lehigh’s unique

program recognizes the impact of technology on business

processes and the value chain while paying respect to the

time honored usefulness of accounting information. The

Accounting Program recognizes the learning objectives

set forth by the College of Business and Economics as an

integral part of the curriculum, as well as the importance

of providing students with a strong foundation in liberal

arts, humanities, and science as set out in the CBE core

curriculum. In addition to the CBE core curriculum, the

accounting curriculum is designed to foster the following

learning objectives:

1. Preparing and understanding general purpose finan-

cial statements for parties outside the firm.

2. Using accounting information for decision-making

inside the firm.

3. Understanding the information systems governing

the flow of and control over financial information

inside the firm.

To the extent that the above objectives are achieved,

Accounting graduates will be well-prepared for positions

in public accounting, industry, not-for-profit organiza-

tions, and graduate school. Although preparation for

professional examinations is not a primary objective,

graduates will have the background to take professional

examinations in accounting.

The Accounting Major

The undergraduate program in accounting is accredited

by AACSB-The International Association for

Management Education. This achievement places the

program within a small group of schools which have sat-

isfied a rigorous examination of the program, faculty,

and students that extend beyond the accreditation stan-

dards applied to the entire College of Business and

Economics undergraduate and graduate programs.

In addition to the existing sophomore prerequisites,

Introduction to Financial Accounting (ACC 151) and

Introduction to Managerial Accounting (ACC 152),

accounting majors are required to take four junior-level,

accounting core requirements (12 credits) and one con-

centration (9 credits):

Core Requirements (typically taken junior year)

Credits

Financial I and II (ACC 315 and 316) 6

Accounting Information Systems (ACC 311) 3

Cost Accounting (ACC 324) 3

Concentration (typically taken senior year)–three

courses, one of which is accounting 9

The following three concentrations are available:

1. Public Accounting Assurance and Tax Services

This concentration is suited for students interested

in entering public accounting. This concentration

requires the core and the following 9-credit concen-

tration:

• Fundamentals of Federal Income Taxation (ACC

307)

• Fundamentals of Auditing (ACC 320)

• Advanced Financial Accounting (ACC 317)

2. Financial Services and Corporate Accounting

This concentration may appeal to students seeking

accounting positions at financial services firms and

industrial corporations. For some time representa-

tives from these companies have sought Lehigh

students with a strong accounting background.

External constituencies suggest that a dose of finance

will strengthen these students and make them even

more attractive.

Because Lehigh’s finance faculty determined that

two courses, Investments (FIN 323), and Corporate

Financial Policy (FIN 328), are both needed to have

a core understanding of finance, this second concen-

tration requires these two courses. Also, Analysis of

Financial Statements, ACC 318, is positioned at the

interface of accounting and finance.

• Investments (FIN 323)

• Corporate Financial Policy (FIN 328)

• Analysis of Financial Statements (ACC 318)

Accounting 91

3. Information Systems

Public accounting firms seek graduates for the rapid-

ly growing area of global risk management (GRM).

Students entering GRM will be responsible for

assessing accounting system and computer risks that

impact the financial statements of the organization

and for evaluating internal controls in place to mini-

mize such risks. Their findings become an important

element in the conduct of the financial audit. This

new career path thus requires students who possess

strong systems skills and an understanding of finan-

cial accounting, management accounting, and

auditing. Taxes and advanced financial accounting

topics are less important in this setting. Therefore,

the following courses comprise this concentration.

• Fundamentals of Auditing (ACC 320)

• Systems Analysis and Design (BIS 311)

• Electronic Commerce (BIS 331) or E-Business

Systems (BIS 342) or Internship in Prague (BIS

360)

The description and requirements of the Master of

Science in Accounting and Information Analysis

Program are found under Graduate Study and Research.

Undergraduate Courses

ACCT 108. Fundamentals of Accounting (3)

A one-semester survey of accounting principles and prac-

tices designed for those students which includes an

introduction to industrial cost systems designed for those

non-CBE students planning to take only one accounting

course. Other students should take the Acct 151-152

sequence.

ACCT 151. Introduction to Financial

Accounting (3)

The organization, measurement and interpretation of

economic information. Introduction to accounting theo-

ry, concepts and principles, the accounting cycle,

information processing, and financial statements.

Exposure to controversial issues concerning income

determination and valuation. Prerequisite: sophomore

standing and successful completion of Excel competency

exam.

ACCT 152. Introduction to Managerial

Accounting (3)

An introduction to internal accounting information for

all levels of management. Topics include cost flow in a

manufacturing operation; planning, evaluating and con-

trolling through budgeting and standard costing; and

decision-making using cost-volume-profit analysis, direct

costing, and relevant costs. Prerequisite: Acct 151.

For Advanced Undergraduates and Graduate

Students

Courses numbered 200 and above in the College of

Business and Economics are open to sophomores only

on petition.

ACCT 307. Fundamentals of Federal Income

Taxation (3)

An introductory study of the principles and concepts of

federal income taxation of individuals, corporations,

partnerships, and fiduciaries; and federal gift and estate

taxes. Determination of tax liabilities and opportunities

for planning are emphasized. Problem-solving using the

source materials of tax law and tax research are impor-

tant components of the course. Prerequisite: Acct 151.

ACCT 309. Advanced Federal Income Taxation (3)

An advanced study of the taxation of business organiza-

tions, estates, trust, and wealth transfer taxes. Planning

and research are the basic components of the course.

Problem-solving and written research are emphasized.

Prerequisite: Acct 307.

ACCT 311. Accounting Information Systems (3)

An introduction to the concepts underlying information

systems as they relate to organizational structure, manageri-

al decision making and accounting. The course acquaints

students with the reports and documents generated by

information systems, as well as procedures and controls

employed in a variety of business applications. Students

apply these concepts, techniques and procedures to the

planning, analysis and design of manual and computer-

based information systems. Prerequisite: Acct 152 and BIS

111.

ACCT 315. Financial Accounting I (3)

Intensive study of the basic concepts and principles of

financial accounting, emphasizing the problems of fair

presentation of an entity’s financial position and operat-

ing results. Consideration of the conceptual framework

of accounting, review of the accounting process, and

measurement and valuation of current assets, current lia-

bilities, plant assets, intangibles, investments, and

long-term debt. Problem-solving skills and critical analy-

sis are stressed. Prerequisite: Acct 152.

ACCT 316. Financial Accounting II (3)

The sequel to Accounting 315, this course continues

with intensive study of such topics as stockholders’ equi-

ty, valuation and disclosure of leases and pensions,

income tax allocation, changing prices, revenue issues,

earnings per share, and complexities related to the state-

ment of changes in financial position. Analysis and

interpretation of financial statements and problem-solv-

ing skills are integral parts of the course. Prerequisite:

Acct 315.

ACCT 317. Advanced Financial Accounting (3)

A study of specialized topics in financial accounting,

including partnership accounting, business combinations

and consolidated financial statements, segment and inter-

im reporting, foreign currency transactions and

translation, and accounting and reporting for governmen-

tal and other nonprofit organizations. Involves

considerable problem-solving and critical evaluation of

controversial theoretical issues. Prerequisite: Acct 315 or

316.

ACCT 318. Analysis of Financial Statements (3)

This course uses financial statement information to ana-

lyze companies’ profitability and risk. Understanding the

form, content and relationships among the financial

statements is integrated with the use of ratios and analyt-

ic adjustments to augment the information in published

financial reports. Current developments, business strate-

gies and off-balance-sheet financing are linked to

assessments of companies, performance. Case studies,

team projects and presentations involve actual compa-

nies, financial statements. Prerequisite: Acct 316 (may be

taken concurrently); open only to graduating seniors.

ACCT 320. Fundamentals of Auditing (3)

An introduction to auditing theory, objectives, and prac-

tices related largely to the responsibilities of independent

92 Lehigh University Course Catalog 2009-2010

professional accountants. The auditing environment,

generally accepted auditing standards, internal control

theory, and reporting alternatives are considered.

Exposure to operational auditing is provided.

Prerequisites: Acct 311 and 315.

ACCT 324. Cost Accounting (3)

An in-depth study of cost concepts appropriate for prod-

uct costing in a manufacturing operation, planning and

controlling routine operations, and nonroutine decision-

making. Topics include job order and process costing,

joint and by-products, cost allocation, budgeting, stan-

dard costing, direct costing, cost-volume-profit analysis,

and relevant costs for decisions. Prerequisite: Acct 152.

ACCT 371. Directed Readings (1-3)

Readings and research in various fields of accounting;

designed for superior students who have a special interest

in some topic or topics not covered by the regularly ros-

tered courses. Written term paper(s) required.

Prerequisite: preparation acceptable to the department

chair.

ACCT 372. Special Topics (1-3)

Special problems and issues in accounting for which no

regularly scheduled course work exists. When offered as

group study, coverage varies according to interests of the

instructor and students. Prerequisite: preparation in

accounting acceptable to the program coordinator.

Graduate Courses

Course descriptions for the College of Business and

Economics graduate courses can be found in this section

(Section V) under the heading of Business and

Economics Graduate Courses.

Africana Studies

Professors. William R. Scott, Ph.D. (Princeton),

Professor of History, program director; Elizabeth N.

Fifer, Ph.D. (Michigan), Professor of English.

Associate Professors. Kashi Johnson, MFA (University of

Pittsburgh); Seth Moglen, Associate Professor of English,

Ph.D. (UC Berkeley).

Assistant Professors. Heather Johnson, Ph.D.

(Northeastern University); Assistant Professor of

Sociology and Anthropology.

Adjunct Professors. Yaba A. Blay, Ph.D. (Temple);

Andrew L. Kaye, Ph.D. (Columbia)

The purpose of the Africana Studies Program is to

engender in Lehigh students an intellectual appreciation

of the life and culture of peoples of sub-Saharan Africa

and the worldwide diaspora, especially in the Americas

(the United States and Canada, the Caribbean, Central

and South America), thereby enriching the Lehigh cur-

riculum and increasing its relevance to a culturally

diverse society and world. In the best tradition of a liber-

al arts education, Africana Studies expands all Lehigh

students’ critical understanding of their own heritage in

interaction with other cultures.

The major and minor in Africana Studies constitute an

interdepartmental and comparative program of study for

undergraduates who wish to integrate the insights and

methods of several disciplines to understand the history,

culture, social, and political experience of people of

African descent globally.

The Major

The major in Africana Studies consists of a minimum of

ten (10) courses, constituting at least 30 credit hours and

no less than four (4) upper level courses. It entails train-

ing across disciplinary lines as well as concentrated study

in a single discipline:

Introductory Course (1)

Humanities (3)

Social Sciences (3)

Disciplinary Concentration (3)

In addition, students are encouraged to pursue inde-

pendent study opportunities to enhance their knowledge

of specific aspects of Africana Studies.

The Minor

The minor consists of a minimum of five (5) courses,

constituting at least 15 hours of study that includes the

introductory course and no less than two upper level

courses in the field.

Core Courses: Core courses concentrate on subject

material directly relevant to the study of past and present

experiences of people of African descent.

AAS 3. Introduction to Africana Studies (4)

An interdisciplinary examination of the roots, culture,

and politics of the modern black world through study of

classic works in Africana Studies with emphasis on the

continuities among African peoples worldwide and the

social forces that have shaped contemporary black life in

Africa and the Americas. W. Scott, Y. Blay (SS)

AAS 5. (HIST 5) African Civilization (4)

Sub-Saharan Africa through the millennia of the ancient

world to the present. Human origins, state and non-state

systems, the external slave trade; colonialism, resistance

to European rule; independence movements; neocolo-

nialism. Staff (SS)

AAS 35 (THTR 35) Performance (2)

Performing in a department-approved production. May

be repeated for credit. (HU)

AAS 38. (ENGL 38) Introduction to African

Literature (3)

Sub-Saharan African literary themes and styles, historical

and social contexts, African folk tales, oral poetry, colo-

nial protest literature, postcolonial writing, films on

contemporary Africa. Staff (HU)

AAS 64. (ECO 64, HIST 64) Plantation to

Ghetto (2)

Examination of topics in the economic history of African

Americans from the 1500s to the present. Explores the

slave trade, slavery, post-Civil War South, the black fami-

ly, migration, urbanization, and race and poverty.

O’Brien, Scott (SS)

AAS 103. (SSP 103) Race and Ethnicity (4) fall

Examines race and ethnicity from a sociological perspec-

tive. Focus on the role of the major racial and ethnic

communities in modern American society. Explores the

roles of race and ethnicity in identity, social relations,

and social inequality. Topics include racial and ethnic

communities, minority/majority groups, assimilation,

prejudice/discrimination, identity and the social con-

struction of the concept of “race.” H. Johnson (SS)

AAS 117 (PHIL 117) Race and Philosophy (4)

An introduction to the philosophy born of struggle

Africana Studies 93

against racism and white supremacy. We will read the

work of philosophers, mostly European, who quietly

made modern racism possible by inventing the category

of race, but we will concentrate on the work of philoso-

phers, mostly of African descent, who for 200 years have

struggled to force a philosophical critique of the category

of race and the practice of white supremacy. (HU)

AAS 128 (MUSIC 128) Jazz History I (3) fall

A study of the roots of jazz. Starting in West Africa, the

course traces the synthesis of African and European ele-

ments to 1945. Musicians covered are Gottshalk,

Bolden, Morton, Armstrong, Hawkins, Basie, Ellington,

and others. Warfield (HU)

AAS 129 (MUSIC 129) Jazz History II (3) spring

A survey of modern jazz from 1945 to present.

Musicians covered include Parker, Gillespie, Monk,

Davis, Coltrane, Hancock, and Coleman. Can be taken

independently of Jazz History I, but the first course

would be helpful. Warfield (HU)

AAS 179. (HIST 179) Black Political Thought in

America (4)

Black leadership, organizations, and philosophy in

America from Reconstruction to the Civil Rights Era;

ideas and programs of Booker T. Washington, W.E.B.

DuBois, Marcus Garvey, Malcolm X and Martin Luther

King, Jr. Scott (SS)

AAS 130. (HIST 130) African American

History (4)

Blacks in America from the first importation of Africans

to the implementation of civil rights laws. West African

origins, slave trade, slavery, free blacks and emancipation

and study of Reconstruction, segregation, urbanization,

and the struggle for racial equality. Staff (SS)

AAS 138. Introduction to African American

Literature (4)

Survey of African American prose narrative and poetry

from the 18th century to the present. Features writers

from the Harlem Renaissance, the Black Arts Movement,

and the post-Black Power era. Staff (HU)

AAS 140. (THTR 140) African American

Theatre (4)

Foundations of African American theater: historical, lit-

erary, and practical. K. Johnson (HU)

AAS 145. (WS 145) African American Women

Writers (4)

Literature by African American women writers with a

focus on the experiences and images of black women in

the U.S. Explores the written portraits and voices of

20th century black female novelists and poets, including

Hurston, Petry, Morrison, Angelou, and Walker. Staff

(HU)

AAS 148. Cultural Diversity in the Caribbean (4)

Cultural diversity in the Caribbean islands and the

Guyanas, with emphasis on the African, Amerindian,

and Indian influences. The sociological and cultural

implications of the region’s diversity, with special empha-

sis on ethnicity, slavery and indenture, emancipation and

independence, modernization, immigration, the impact

of tourism and the development of Creole cultures.

Lecture and discussion. Staff (SS)

AAS 166. (SSP 166) Wealth and Poverty in the

United States (4)

Examines the sociology of wealth and poverty - affluence

and disadvantage, “rags and riches” - in American

Society. Focus is a critical analysis of the wealth gap, its

causes, consequences and social context. We will consid-

er the roles of wealth and poverty in determining life

chances and structuring opportunity, as well as their

roles in the perpetuation of social inequality across gen-

erations. We will address contemporary debates

surrounding public policy, tax laws, anti-poverty pro-

grams and other reform efforts aimed at decreasing the

gap between the “Haves” and the “Have-Nots.” H.

Johnson (SS)

AAS 183 (ANTH 183) Peoples and Cultures of

Africa (4)

Studies African modernity through a close reading of

ethnographies, social stories, novels, and African feature

films. Staff (SS)

AAS 263. Caribbean Artistic and Cultural

Traditions (4)

Representation of contemporary popular culture in the

Caribbean in literature, music, painting and other artis-

tic expressions. Major attention is devoted to the

influences on tradition, folklore and religion in modern

Caribbean life. Staff (HU)

AAS 310. (SSP 310, WS 310) Gender, Race and

Sexuality: The Social Construction of

Differences (4)

This course will provide the student with an opportunity

to engage current debates about the meaning and use of

racial and sexual classification systems in society. Using a

multidisciplinary and critical approach, we will examine

the historical and sociological contexts in which specific

theories of racial and sexual differences emerged in the U

S. Prerequisite: SSP 103, or department permission. H.

Johnson (SS)

AAS 318 (ENGL 318) Topics in African-American

Literature and Culture (4)

Speical Topics in African American culture and/or the

cultures of the African diaspora. Topics may be focused

by period, genre, thematic interest or interdisciplinary

method including, for example, “Nineteenth-century

African American Literature and Politics”, “African-

American Folklore”, “Black Atlantic Literature”, “The

Harlem Renaissance”, “African-American Women

Writers”. May be repeated for credit as title varies.

AAS 331. (HIST 331) United States and Africa (4)

Reciprocal relationships between North America and the

African continent from the slave trade in the seventeenth

century to the twentieth century Afrocentric movement;

impact of Americans on shaping of modern Africa, Pan-

African relations; influence of African Americans on U.S.

policies toward Africa. Scott (SS)

AAS 332. (HIST 332) Slavery and the American

South (4)

The emergence and demise of the “peculiar institution”

of African American slavery in British North America

and the Old South. African background, colonial begin-

nings, 19th century slave community, the ruling race

and proslavery ideology, the death of slavery and its

aftermath, slavery and freedom in a comparative context.

Staff (SS)

94 Lehigh University Course Catalog 2009-2010

AAS 352 (POLS 352) Civil Rights and

Liberties (4)

A survey of Supreme Court policymaking pursuant to

the Bill of Rights, the Fourteenth Amendment, and fed-

eral civil rights statues. Among the covered topics are

changing Supreme Court doctrine concerning freedom

of speech and press, religious liberty, criminal procedure,

and the due process and equal protection clauses. Pinaire

(ND)

AAS 359. (HIST 359) History of South Africa (4)

South Africa’s history from its earliest human settlement

to its emergence as a racist political order and transition

to a non-racial democratic state. Includes comparisons

with political thought and practices in the U.S. Scott

(SS)

AAS 371, 372. Independent Study (1-3)

Independent study in advanced areas of Africana Studies.

Independent research with an individual faculty member

in the Africana Studies program. Consent of director

(ND)

AAS 379. (SSP 379) Race and Class in America (4)

The ways in which race and class intersect in the social,

economic, and political structures of American society.

Through sociological literature, fiction, non-fiction, film,

and other media we will explore the place of race and

class in American society. We will examine how race and

class operate on a personal, “micro” level, while at the

same time operating on a large-scale, “macro” level. H.

Johnson (SS)

AAS 381. Special Topics. (ND)

AAS 382. Seminar on a topic in Africana

Studies. (ND)

Collateral Courses

ANTH 12 Human Evolution and Prehistory

HIST 334 American City in the 20th Century

POLS 330 Movements and Legacies of the 1960s

POLS 352 Civil Rights

POLS 322 Politics of Developing Nations

American Studies

American Studies Faculty. John Pettegrew, Ph.D.

(Wisconsin), associate professor of history, Director of the

American Studies Program; Gail A. Cooper, Ph.D. (UC.,

Santa Barbara), associate professor of history; Berrisford

Booth, M.F.A. associate professor (Maryland Institute

College of Art); Stephen H. Cutcliffe, Ph.D. (Lehigh),

professor of history; Edward J. Gallagher, Ph.D. (Notre

Dame), professor of English; Norman J. Girardot, Ph.D.

(Chicago), professor of religion studies; Heather Johnson,

Ph.D. (Northeastern), associate professor of sociology;

Dawn Keetley, Ph.D. (Wisconsin), associate professor of

English; Judith N. Lasker, Ph.D. (Harvard), professor of

sociology; Michelle LeMaster, Ph.D. (Johns Hopkins),

assistant professor of history; Jack Lule, Ph.D. (Georgia),

professor of journalism; James R. McIntosh, Ph.D.

(Syracuse), professor of sociology; Richard K. Mathews,

Ph.D. (Toronto), distinguished professor of political science;

Kim Meltzer, Ph.D. (Pennsylvania), assistant professor of

journalism; Seth Moglen, Ph.D. (U.C., Berkeley), associ-

ate professor of English; Edward T. Morgan, Ph.D.

(Brandeis), professor of political science; Zlad W. Munson,

Ph.D. (Harvard), Frank Hook assistant professor of sociolo-

gy and anthropology; Monica Najar, Ph.D. (Wisconsin),

associate professor of history; Kathleen K. Olson, Ph.D.

(North Carolina), associate professor of journalism and

communications; Brian Pinaire, Ph.D. (Rutgers), assistant

professor of political science; Michael L. Raposa, Ph.D.

(Pennsylvania), professor of religion studies; William R.

Scott, Ph.D. (Princeton), professor of history; Roger D.

Simon, Ph.D. (Wisconsin), professor of history; John K.

Smith, Ph.D. (Delaware), associate professor of history;

Edward Whitley, Ph.D. (Maryland), assistant professor of

English; Albert Wurth, Ph.D. (North Carolina), associate

professor of political science.

American Studies is the interdisciplinary study of

American thought, literature, and culture–both past and

present. Born in the early years of the Cold War and

with an implied commitment to American exceptional-

ism, American Studies has since transformed itself into a

multi-faceted critical examination of United States socie-

ty. Comparative frameworks along with close attention

to applying cultural and literary theory to such matters

as violence, citizenship, democracy, community, poverty

and prosperity, politics, race, and gender in the United

States make American Studies an intellectually sophisti-

cated yet practical course of undergraduate study.

American Studies is an excellent major for those seeking

a general education in the liberal arts and social sciences.

Students have found it a particularly good major for

careers in journalism, law, and teaching.

Lehigh in New York Summer Program

The American Studies Program hosts a six-week summer

academic session in New York City. Several professors of

History, Sociology and Anthropology, Art and Architecture,

English, and other departments contribute their teaching

and research expertise on New York City to the program.

Lehigh in New York combines course work on New York

culture, art, and history with experiential learning in the

city itself. Walking tours, theatre, art museums, and just

hanging out deepen students’ classroom study of one of

the world’s great cities.

Students stay in a New York University dormitory in

Greenwich Village and attend classes within easy walking

distance. The program cost includes eight Lehigh

University undergraduate credits, dormitory room, meal

plan, and special events.

Each student selects two courses out of three or four that

are normally offered. Courses offered usually include

The History of New York City’s Built Environment

(HIST 96) and TV in New York and Beyond

(COMM/HIST/SSP 197).

Requirements for the major:

The American Studies major consists of a minimum of

35 credit hours, normally ten courses. The major must

complete the following three groups of courses:

I. Four Required Courses

AMST 101 Introduction to American Studies (4)

AMST 372 Special Topics Seminar in American

Studies (4)

AMST 391 Senior Thesis or Project (2)

AMST 392 Senior Thesis or Project (4)

II. Three Courses Split between the Departments of

English and History (a minimum of nine credits)–at

least one course must be at the 200 level or higher

American Studies 95

III. Three Further Courses on a Topical or Chronological

Focus (a minimum of nine credits), one of which must

be outside English and History. At least one course must

be at the 200-level or higher.

In close consultation with his/her adviser, majors will

select a topical focus (e.g., ethnicity and race, film and

electronic media, art and literature, popular culture, gen-

der, cross-cultural studies, legal and political thought) or

a chronological focus (e.g., antebellum America, the

twentieth century), which they will explore in at least

three courses plus their senior thesis or project.

American Studies Courses include:

AAS 138 Introduction to African American

Literature

AAS 140 African American Theater

AAS 145 African American Writers

AAS 150 Africans in the New World

ARCH 107 History of American Art

ART 150 Africans in the New World

ENGL 123 American Literature I

ENGL 124 American Literature II

ENGL 163 Topics in Film Studies

ENGL 316 Native American Literature

ENGL 376 Early American Literature

ENGL 377 American Romanticism

ENGL 378 American Realism

ENGL 379 Twentieth-Century American

Literature

ENGL 380 Contemporary American Literature

ENGL 387 Film History, Theory and Criticism

HIST 41 United States to 1865

HIST 42 United States, 1865-1941

HIST 43 United States Since 1939

HIST 64 Plantation to Ghetto

HIST 124 Women in America

HIST 129 Black Political Thought in America

HIST 130 African American History

HIST 315 American Environmental History

HIST 323 American Cultural History Since 1900

HIST 325 History of Sexuality and the Family in

the U.S.

HIST 328 American Intellectual History since

1900

HIST 331 United States and Africa

HIST 332 Slavery and the American South

HIST 360 American Legal History

PHIL 239 Figures/Themes in Contemporary

Philosophy

POLS 227 Socialization and the Political System

POLS 229 Propaganda, media, and American

Politics

POLS 230 Movements and Legacies of the 1960s

POLS 251 Constitutional Law

POLS 252 Civil Rights and Civil Liberties

POLS 267 American Political Thought

POLS 271 U.S. Politics and the Environment

REL 152 American Judaism

REL 180 Religion and the American Experience

SSP 103 Sociological Perspectives on Racial and

Ethnic Communities

SSP 310 Gender, Race, and Sexuality: The

Social Construction of Differences

SSP 379 Race and Class in America

SSP 394 Historical Sociology: Identity and the

Social Problems of Generations

This is not a comprehensive list. New courses may be

offered each semester. Students should check with the

director for an updated list.

Courses:

AMST 101. Introduction to American Studies (4)

An introduction to the methods, concerns, and practices

of American Studies through the examination of a criti-

cal decade of cultural transformation (e.g. the 1770s,

1850s, 1890s, 1930s or 1970s). Will draw on literature ,

philosophy, painting, architecture, landscape design,

social thought and cultural criticism, crime, reform

movements, sports, and popular culture to explore such

topics as responses to economic change, ideas of nature

and culture, the meaning of work and leisure, law and

politics, race, construction of gender, family structure,

population dynamics, science and technology, sexuality,

class, urban experience, and the American polity.

AMST 372. Special Topics in American Studies (4)

Focused interdisciplinary study of one particular subject

area in American culture.

AMST 391. Senior Thesis or Project (2)

Independent work with an individual faculty member on

a research thesis or other project approved by faculty

member and adviser.

AMST 392. Senior Thesis or Project (4)

Continuation of AMST 391.

Graduate Work in American Studies

A Master of Arts degree in American Studies is offered

jointly by the departments of English and History. Can-

didates for the master’s degree must complete at least 30

credit hours. In addition to the Theory and Method

course, students must choose two courses in American

history and two courses in American literature and film

from those offered by the history department and the

English department. Students must also take one special

topics seminar. The other four courses for the master’s

degree will be divided between thesis or “thesis paper”

credits and American Studies courses not in history or

literature/film. To fulfill the thesis requirement, students

will write one longer thesis or two thesis papers that are

aimed at conference presentation and/or publication.

Courses:

AMST 400. American Studies: Theory and

Method

An introduction to the theoretical orientations and

methodological strategies of American Studies. Seminar

involves extensive reading as well as application of theory

and method to students’ research.

AMST 401. Special Topics in American Studies

Graduate seminar focused on one particular subject area

in American Culture.

AMST 490. Master’s Thesis

Independent work with a faculty member on master’s

thesis. Topic approved by individual faculty member.

Typically taken in the last semester of course work.

96 Lehigh University Course Catalog 2009-2010

Applied Mathematics and

Statistics

Professors. Bennett Eisenberg, Ph.D. (M.I.T); Wei-Min

Huang, Ph.D. (Rochester); Garth Isaak, Ph.D. (Rutgers);

Eric P. Salathe, Ph.D. (Brown); Joseph E. Yukich, Ph.D.

(M.I.T.).

Associate Professors. Ramamirthan Venkataraman,

Ph.D. (Brown); Linghai Zhang, Ph.D. (Ohio).

Assistant Professor. Ping-Shi Wu, Ph.D. (U.C. Davis).

The Division of Applied Mathematics and Statistics was

established within the Department of Mathematics to

promote and administer undergraduate and graduate

education in applied mathematics and statistics, and to

foster interdisciplinary research in the mathematical sci-

ences at Lehigh. Courses and programs offered by the

division may be found under the departmental listing.

Applied Science

Director, associate dean of the P.C. Rossin College of

Engineering and Applied Science

The Applied Science Program enables students to create

interdisciplinary specialties that prepare them for careers

in a world that increasingly bridges academic disciplines.

Students pursue subject-area concentrations that repre-

sent academic interests they wish to integrate into a

meaningful program. The core offers students the intel-

lectual tools to identify connections between the

concentrations and engage in interdisciplinary problem-

solving and critical thinking.

The program leads to the Bachelor of Science in Applied

Science. Each student’s curriculum combines a general

engineering education with a carefully customized con-

centration in engineering and/or science as well as

another area of emphasis, which may include courses

taken inside the P.C. Rossin College of Engineering &

Applied Science and may also include courses taken in

one or more of the other three Colleges within the

University.

In order to ensure the success of this individualized

approach to education, Applied Science places primary

emphasis on advisement. Each student is teamed with an

advisor who helps the student plan the course of study

and who supervises independent study and internships.

The advisor remains the student’s advisor throughout his

or her undergraduate career.

Unlike students in the traditional college programs, stu-

dents in the Applied Science program of individualized

study do not declare a major in a particular academic

department. Instead, they develop a concentration that

may combine study in several areas. Students are encour-

aged by their advisor to develop the concentration in

such a way that the student will be well prepared for fur-

ther study in graduate school or for pursuing a particular

career path. While the chosen concentration can be

highly customized in consultation with the advisor,

examples of concentrations include: Technical

Communications, Digital Media, Entertainment

Science, Technology/Science and Education,

Technology/Science and Pre-law, Technology/Science

and Pre-Medicine, Technology Management, Technology

Marketing, and Engineering and Architecture. Many

other combinations are possible.

The College of Engineering & Applied Science require-

ments in math and basic sciences, as well as the

humanities and social science requirements must also be

satisfied.

Recommended Sequence of Courses

first engineering year (see Section III)

sophomore year, first semester (16 credits)

EES 31 Introduction to Environmental and

Organic Biology (4) or

EES 21 Introduction to Earth Materials and

Processes and Laboratory (4)

CHM 51, 53 Organic Chemistry and Laboratory (4)

MATH 23 Analytic Geometry and Calculus III (4)

ECO 1 Principles of Economics (4)

sophomore year, second semester (17 credits)

MATH 205 Linear Methods (3)

PHYS 21, 22 Introductory Physics II and

Laboratory (5)

major subject (3)

approved elective (3)

HSS elective (3)

junior year, first semester (17 credits)

EES 21 Introduction to Earth Materials and

Processes and Laboratory (4) or

EES 31, 32 Introduction to Environmental/

Organismal Biology and

Laboratory (4)

PSYC 1 Introduction to Psychology (4)

MATH 231 Probability and Statistics (3)

major (3)

HSS elective (3)

junior year, second semester (15 credits)

approved electives (6)

major (6)

elective (3)

senior year, first semester (18 credit hours)

approved electives (6)

major (6)

HSS elective (3)

free elective (3)

senior year, second semester (18 credits)

PHIL 128: Philosophy of Science (3)

approved elective (3)

major (6)

HSS elective (3)

free elective (3)

Apprentice Teaching

300. Apprentice Teaching (1-4)

Supervised participation in various aspects of the teach-

ing of a course. Transcript will identify department in

which apprentice teaching was performed. Prerequisite:

consent of department chairperson. The transcript will

reflect the subject area in which the teaching was done.

Art, Architecture, and Design

Professors. Lucy Gans, M.F.A. (Pratt); Ricardo Viera,

M.F.A. (R.I.S.D.), director of Lehigh University Art

Galleries); Anthony Viscardi, M.ARCH (Georgia

Institute of Technology).

Art, Architecture, and Design 97

Associate Professors. Berrisford W. Boothe, M.F.A.

(Maryland Institute College of Art); Anna M. Chupa,

M.F.A. (University of Delaware); Amy Forsyth,

M.ARCH (Princeton); Bruce Thomas, Ph.D. (University

of Calif., Berkeley).

Assistant Professors. Marilyn Jones, M.F.A.

(Marywood): Nicholas Sawicki, Ph.D. (University of

Pennsylvania);

Professors of Practice. B. Wesley Heiss, M.ARCH (Rice

University); Christine Ussler, M.ARCH (Columbia

University).

Lecturer. Jason Travers, M.F.A. (University of

Pennsylvania).

The department of art, architecture, and design offers

five major programs:

The architecture major is a multidisciplinary major

based in a department that draws on the resources of all

Lehigh’s colleges. Although architectural design is the

primary concern of this major, other courses in architec-

tural history, art studio and technology are also required.

The architecture major leads to the liberal arts B.A.

(Bachelor of Arts), a pre-professional four-year degree.

This degree is satisfactory for admission to graduate

study in architecture and candidacy for the M.ARCH.

professional degree.

In recent years students have gone on to graduate study

in architecture at Yale, Harvard, Columbia, University of

Pennsylvania, Maryland and Washington University,

among other schools, or to entry-level employment in

the profession.

The Arts/Engineering five-year degree, in which the stu-

dent earns both B.A. (architecture) and B.S. (civil

engineering), is available for those interested in both

fields.

A major in art introduces the student to the basic media

of art such as drawing, sculpture, painting, and photog-

raphy. For those interested in becoming creative artists,

intensive study at Lehigh as well as the other Lehigh

Valley colleges is recommended; such students can expect

to take more than the required number of credits for the

major. A major in art may also focus on museum studies

or graphic design.

A major in art can also be combined with psychology for

those who seek a career in art therapy. It may also be

combined with theater for those interested in costume

design or with architecture and theater for those interest-

ed in set design. A major in art and minor in education

is available for students interested in becoming public

school art teachers.

The resources of the Lehigh University art collection and

the Zoellner Art Center are made available to many stu-

dents taking classes in art.

The Lehigh University Art Galleries maintain and devel-

op the university’s permanent art collection. LUAG

presents temporary exhibitions, designed to provide visual

literacy as part of the university learning experience.

Exhibitions and gallery events supplement formal class-

room study across the disciplines and create educational

opportunities for the student body, enriching the cultural

life of the campus and community at large. The universi-

ty’s public collection of outdoor sculpture, in a variety of

sizes and materials such as steel, aluminum, bronze, slate

and wood, can be found on all three campuses.

Approximately 20 exhibitions a year introduce contem-

porary topics in art and culture. The exhibition schedule

includes gallery talks, lectures and workshops, as well as

opportunities for research in the permanent collection.

Experts in various fields serve as guest curators of special

projects.

Minor programs are available in art, with an emphasis

on studio art, art/architectural history, graphic design,

and museum studies. Course requirements are specified,

and a list of courses acceptable for the minor is available

in the department.

An art history major introduces students to the study of

works of art as they relate to the historical and cultural

contexts in which they are produced. Students will be

exposed to a broad range of artistic production, from

antiquity through the present, and to the varied intellec-

tual concerns and methodological approaches that

characterize the discipline. Because the discipline of art

history approaches the study of works of art from diverse

concerns and interests, students will also learn to use evi-

dence from the study of history, religion, economics,

politics, literature, and gender studies. The art history

major trains students in critical thinking and analytical

skills that provide an excellent foundation for careers or

further study in the field of art history, as well as for a

wide range of other professional and educational

options. Many students of art history at Lehigh have

gone on to jobs in art galleries, museums, and other cul-

tural institutions, or to graduate study in art history.

Others have gone on to successful careers in such fields

of law, business, and medicine.

Art history majors have a wealth of resources at Lehigh

University. Majors are encouraged to make use of the

original works of art in the collection of the Lehigh

University Art Gallery, and the Special Collections of the

Lehigh’s library. Students are also able to study abroad

through programs offered by the department, as well as a

number of semester abroad programs available to Lehigh

students. Proximity to major art museums in New York

and Philadelphia provide superb opportunities for study-

ing first-rate, original works of art. Field trips to these

cities are organized regularly through the Department of

Art and Architecture.

An architectural history major introduces students to

the study of architecture as an academic discipline not

centered in the studio. Rather, architecture will be pre-

sented as the means of understanding the broad range of

ideas, issues and events traditionally associated with

study in the humanities. This includes the study of his-

tory, art, religion, economics, politics, industrial

development, business practices, etc. - all addressed by

examination of the unique qualities inherent in the tan-

gible artifacts that are buildings, and in the disparate

ideas associated with the production of those buildings.

Students in architectural history may gravitate toward

jobs in historic preservation, in municipal and state gov-

ernment in capacities related to growth and

development, in museum and cultural institutions, or

may pursue graduate study in the academic discipline.

Or they may even go into archival and research work as

part of an architectural practice.

An architectural history major at Lehigh has numerous

resources available. The Special Collections of the library

and the permanent collection of the Lehigh University

Art Galleries contain a wealth of material. The summer

98 Lehigh University Course Catalog 2009-2010

foreign study programs of the Dept. of Art &

Architecture as well as numerous semester-abroad pro-

grams are obvious valuable resources for the architectural

historian. The proximity to New York and Philadelphia

expand further the range of resources, and provide great

urban repositories of building to study first-hand.

Indeed, a wide area rich in architectural history sur-

rounds the Lehigh student interested in focusing on the

built environment.

A major in design provides a broad understanding of

design across disciplines, cultures, styles, and media, to

encourage students to embrace new technologies and

materials, develop creativity and critical thinking so as to

address the myriad of issues confronting the modern

designer.

Design engages students with a forward-thinking art and

design curriculum emphasizing innovation as well as an

understanding and appreciation of art and design histo-

ry, art making, and traditional processes and skills, while

engaging students in creative work that focuses on visual

communication design through digital media. Design

emphasizes the creation of art and design using digital

and advanced technologies.

Design provides a firm foundation in traditional studio

work. Foundation courses enhance all concentrations

within the design major and provide a common back-

ground of experience and knowledge.

Students may choose one of three concentrations within

the Design major. The Graphic Design concentration

introduces students to the tools and media related to

print applications, web based media, exhibition design,

publishing and advertising. Product Design students

study the creation of objects for use in, for example,

industrial applications, art objects, furniture, toys, exhib-

it and trade design, electronic products, household items,

and recreational equipment. In addition, a

Comprehensive Design concentration can combine vari-

ous elements of graphic design, product design,

photography and video.

Minor programs are available in Graphic Design,

Product Design and Comprehensive Design.

Many Design courses require department permission.

Those interested in majoring or minoring in Design

should contact the program coordinator to schedule an

appointment with an advisor early so that these courses

can be rostered at an appropriate time. Registration pref-

erence is given to majors and minors who have declared

before pre-registration advising begins.

Note: A student must achieve a 2.0 or higher in each major

course.

Departmental Honors:

Exceptional students in art or architecture may apply for

departmental honors at the end of their junior year or

beginning of their senior year. To be eligible, a student

must have attained a 3.5 GPA in her/his major program

and a minimum overall GPA of 3.0. Candidates should

submit to the department chair a written proposal, pre-

pared in consultation with a faculty advisor. The project

could result in a research paper, design project, or exhibi-

tion, accompanied by an oral presentation. Successful

completion of the project and presentation would result

in the “Departmental Honors” designation being affixed

to the student’s transcript.

Art Major

Forty-three credit hours are required.

Required courses (22 credit hours)

ART 1 or ARCH 1 Art History: Ancient and

Medieval or Architectural History

I (3)

ART 2 Art History: Renaissance to

Present (3)

ART 3/DES 3 Design Foundations I (3)

ART 4/DES 4 Design Foundations II (3)

ART 13 Sculpture I (3)

ART 15 Figure I (3)

ART 120 20th-Century Art (4)

plus one of the following (3 credit hours)

ART 121/WS 121 Women in Art (4)

ART 175 Introduction to Museum

Work (4)

ART 206/ARCH 206 Medieval Art and Architecture (3)

ART 207/ARCH 207 Renaissance Art and

Architecture (3)

ARCH 210 20th-Century Architecture (3)

ART 222 Seminar in Contemporary Art (3)

plus six studio major courses (18 credit hours)

Art studio; six courses, two at the advanced level.

A typical first semester schedule might include ART 1:

Art History: Ancient & Medieval [required for the

major], or ARCH 1: Architectural History I, ART/DES

3, Design Foundations I [required for the major], or an

available art studio offering such as ART 13, Sculpture I,

[required for the major], ART 11, Drawing I, or ART

77, Photography.

A typical second semester schedule might include ART

2: Art History: Renaissance to Present [required for the

major], ART/DES 4, Design Foundations II [required

for the major], or an available art studio offering such as

ART 13, Sculpture I, [required for the major], ART 15,

Figure I, [required for the major], ART 11, Drawing I,

or ART 77, Photography.

Art History Major

Forty credit hours are required.

Required Courses: (20 credit hours)

ART 1 Art History: Ancient and

Medieval

or ARCH 1 Architectural History I (3)

ART 2 Art History: Renaissance to

present (3)

ART 3/DES 3 Design Foundations I

or ART/DES 4 Design Foundations II (3)

ART 120 20th-Century Art (4)

ART 175 Introduction to Museum

Work (4)

ART 356 Historiography and Research

Seminar (3)

Distribution requirements: (15 credit hours)

One art studio course (in addition to Art 3 or Art 4): (3

credits)

One course from ancient art (3 credits):

ART 174/ARCH 174/CLSS 174/ANTH 174

Greek Archaeology (3)

ART 176/ARCH 176/ CLSS 176/ ANTH 176

Roman Archaeology (3)

Art, Architecture, and Design 99

One course from medieval/renaissance art (3-6 credits):

ART 206/ARCH 206 Medieval Art and Architecture (3)

ART 207/ARCH 207 Renaissance Art and

Architecture (3)

Two courses in the history of architecture (6 credits):

ARCH 2 Architectural History II (3)

ARCH 107 History of American

Architecture (3)

ART 206/ARCH 206 Medieval Art and Architecture (3)

ART 207/ARCH 207 Renaissance Art and

Architecture (3)

ARCH 209 Architecture and Ideas (3)

ARCH 210 20th-Century Architecture (3)

ARCH 212 The Architecture of Carlo

Scarpa (3)

ARCH 213 The City (3)

ARCH 253 Paris, the Planning of a

Metropolis (3)

ARCH 254 Modern Architecture in France:

New Directions (3)

ARCH 367 Modernism to Postmodernism (3)

Elective Courses (6-8 credits)

Any of the courses listed above, as well as:

DES 66 Design History (3)

ART 121/WS 121 Women in Art (4)

Art 144/REL144 Raw Visions: Creativity and

Ecstasy in the Work of Shamans,

Mystics, and Artist Outsiders (4)

ART 222 Seminar in Contemporary Art (3)

ART 269 Special Topics in Art History (1-

ART 275 Museography and Museology (4)

ART 370 Special Topics in Museum

Studies (1-4)

ART 375 Museum Internship (1-4)

HIST 339 Managing Nonprofit

Organizations (4)

PHIL 123 Aesthetics (4)

REL 189 Religion and the Visual Arts (4)

Architecture Major

Fifty-two credit hours are required.

Design Sequence (22 credit hours)

ARCH 43 Architectural Design I (4)

ARCH 143 Architectural Design II (6)

ARCH 243 Architectural Design III (6)

ARCH 343 Architectural Design IV (6)

Art Studio (12 credit hours)

ART 3/DES 3 Design Foundations I (3)

ART 4/DES 4 Design Foundations II (3)

plus two other studios (various choices) (6)

Architectural History (9 credit hours)

ART 1 or ARCH 1 Art History 1: Ancient and

Medieval or Architectural History

1 (3)

ARCH 2 Architectural History II (3)

ARCH 210 20th Century Architecture (3)

Materials and Building Systems (3)

ARCH 147 Building Materials and

Methods (3)

Architecture and its intellectual context (6 credit hours)

(including Architecture and Technology courses)

ARCH 107 History of American

Architecture (3)

ARCH 206/ART 206 Medieval Art and Architecture (3)

ARCH 207/ART 207 Renaissance Art and

Architecture (3)

ARCH 209 Architecture and Ideas (3)

ARCH 213 The City (3)

ARCH 212 The Architecture of Carlos

Scarpa/Theory and Practice (3)

ARCH 253 Paris, The Planning of a

Metropolis (3)

ARCH 254 Modern Architecture in France:

New Directions (3)

ARCH 342 Theory of Architecture (3)

ARCH 367 Modernism to Post-

Modernism (3)

ANTH 335 Religion, Witchcraft and

Magic (4)

ECO 311 Environmental Economics (3)

ECO 312 Urban Economics (3)

HIST 334 American City in the Twentieth

Century (3-4)

PHIL 123 Aesthetics (4)

PSYC 373 Sensation and Perception (4)

Architecture and Technology

ARCH 10/CEE 10 Engineering/Architectural

Graphics and Design (3)

For the architecture major, students must fulfill the

mathematics requirement with MATH 21 & 22 or

MATH 51 & 52 or MATH 75/76 and MATH 22 or

MATH 52; the physical science requirement must be

filled with PHYS 10 or 11 and 12.

ARCH 5 Introduction to Architecture (2) and ARCH 6

Introduction to Architectural Drawing (2) are recom-

mended for first-year students. A typical first semester

schedule might include ART /ARCH 1, ART

/Architectural History I [required for major], ART

3/DES 3 Design Foundations I [required for major] and

ARCH 5 Introduction to Architecture [recommended

for major]. A typical second semester schedule might

include ARCH 2 Architectural History II [required for

major], and ART 4/DES 4 Design Foundations II

[required for major].

For students contemplating graduate studies in architec-

ture, MECH 2 is recommended.

Architectural History Major

Thirty-nine to forty-four credit hours are required.

Required Courses (21 credits)

ARCH 1 or ART 1 Architectural History I; Art

History: Ancient and

Medieval (3)

ARCH 2 Architectural History II (3)

ART 3/DES 3 or Design Foundations I

ART/DES 4 Design Foundations II (3)

ARCH 107 American Architecture (3)

ARCH 210 20th-Century Architecture (3)

ARCH 147 Building Materials and

Methods (3)

ART 356 or Historiography and Research

Seminar (3)

ARCH 271 Special Topics in Architecture (1-4)

100 Lehigh University Course Catalog 2009-2010

Distribution requirements (9-11 credits)

One course from the ancient world (3 credits)

ARCH 174/ART 174/ CLSS 174/ ANTH 174

Greek Archaeology (3)

ARCH 176/ART 176/ CLSS 176/ ANTH 176

Roman Archaeology (3)

HIST 21/CLSS 21 Greek History (4)

HIST 22/CLSS 22 Roman History (4)

One course from the medieval / renaissance world (3-4

credits)

ART 206/ARCH 206 Medieval Art and Architecture (3)

ART 207/ARCH 207 Renaissance Art and

Architecture (3)

HIST 150 Medieval Civilization (4)

HIST 156 The Late Middle Ages and the

Renaissance (4)

One course from technology (4 credits)

HIST 107 Technology and World

History (4)

HIST 111 Engineering in the Modern

World (4)

Elective Courses (9-12 credits)

Three courses: any of the courses listed above as well

as:

ARCH 209 Architecture and Ideas (3)

ARCH 213 The City (3)

ARCH 212 The Architecture of Carlo

Scarpa (3)

ARCH 253 Paris, the Planning of a

Metropolis (3)

ARCH 254 Modern Architecture in France:

New Directions (3)

ARCH 367 Modernism to Postmodernism (3)

ART 175 Introduction to Museum

Work (4)

HIST 333 American City to 1900 (3-4)

HIST 334 American City in the Twentieth

Century (3-4)

Design Major

Required Courses (12-13 credits)

DES 60 Design Process (3)

DES/ART 3 Design Foundations I (3)

ART/DES 4 Design Foundations II (3)

ART STUDIO Choose one in consultation with

the major advisor:

ART 11: Drawing I (3)

ART 13: Sculpture I (3)

ART 15 Figure I (3)

ART 35: Painting I (3)

DES/THTR 87: Scenography I (4)

History/Theory Requirements (13-14 credits)

ART 2 Art History: Renaissance to

Present (3)

ART 120 20th Century Art (4)

DES 66

or Design History (3)

DES 266 History of Contemporary Design

(3)

History /Theory class (3 or 4) credits In consultation

with major advisor

Concentration Studio Requirements (12 credits)

Four required concentration studios

Graphic Design concentration studios

ART/DES 53 Intro to Graphic Design (3)

ART/DES 153 Graphic Design Word and Image

(3)

ART/DES 253 Graphic Design Brand Experience

(3)

Choose one other studio in consultation with major

adviser

Product Design concentration includes

DES 40 Product Design I: Form, Process

and Concept (3)

DES 140 Product Design II: Designing for

Others (3)

DES 240 Product Design III: Materials to

Market (3)

Choose one other studio in consultation with major

adviser

Comprehensive Design concentration includes four of

the following:

DES 40 Product Design I: Form, Process

and Concept (3)

ART 77 Photography I (3)

ART/DES 53 Intro to Graphic Design (3)

DES 140 Product Design II: Designing for

Others (3)

ART/DES 153 Graphic Design Word and Image

(3)

ART 177 Digital Photography (3)

DES 182 Experimental Video and

Animation (3)

DES 240 Product Design III: Materials to

Market (3)

ART/DES 253 Graphic Design Brand Experience

(3)

Studio requirements (9 credits)

Three elective art or design studios.

Design Minor

Graphic Design minor (18-19 credits)

Foundations (6 credits)

DES 60 Design Process (3)

DES/ART 3 Design Foundations I (3)

History/Theory Requirements (3-4 credits) Choose

one from the following:

ART 2 Art History: Renaissance to

Present (3)

ART 120 20th Century Art (4)

DES 66 Design History (3)

DES 266 History of Contemporary

Design (3)

Concentration (9 credits)

ART/DES 53 Intro to Graphic Design (3)

ART/DES 153 Graphic Design Word and

Image (3)

ART/DES 253 Graphic Design: Brand

Experience (3)

Product Design minor (18-19 credits)

Foundation (6 credits) Choose two from the following:

DES 60 Design Process (3)

DES/ART 3 Design Foundations I (3)

DES/ART 4 Design Foundations II (3)

Art, Architecture, and Design 101

History/Theory Requirements (3-4 credits) Choose

one from the following:

ART 2 Art History: Renaissance to

Present (3)

ART 120 20th Century Art (4)

DES 66 Design History (3)

DES 266 History of Contemporary Design

(3)

Concentration (9 credits)

DES 40 Product Design I: Form, Process

and Concept (3)

DES 140 Product Design II: Designing for

Others (3)

DES 240 Product Design III: Materials to

Market (3) or IPD class in

consultation with advisor.

Comprehensive Design minor (18-19 credits)

Foundation (6 credits) Choose two from the following:

DES 60 Design Process (3)

DES/ART 3 Design Foundations I (3)

DES/ART 4 Design Foundations II (3)

History/Theory Requirements (3-4 credits)

Choose one from the following:

ART 2 Art History: Renaissance to

Present (3)

ART 120 20th Century Art (4)

DES 66 Design History (3)

DES 266 History of Contemporary Design

(3)

Concentration (9 credits)

Courses chosen in consultation with advisor.

Undergraduate Courses in Art

ART 1. Art History: Ancient and Medieval (3) fall

Survey of major monuments of art and architecture from

the prehistoric caves of Lascaux and Altamira through

the Gothic cathedrals of Chartres and Notre-Dame of

Paris, along with highlights of art and architecture of the

non-Western civilizations of Africa, India, and China.

Work seen in the context of cultural, historical, and

technological developments. Staff (HU)

ART 2. Art History: Renaissance to Present (3)

spring

Survey of Western painting and sculpture from

Renaissance to present. Staff (HU)

ART 3. (DES 3) Design Foundations I (3)

An introduction to the basic elements and principles of

design. Course involves use of various materials to solve

2-D design problems in studio and computer lab.

Required for all majors in department. Staff (HU)

ART 4. (DES 4) Design Foundations II (3)

An introduction to the basic elements and principles of

design. Course involves use of various materials to solve

3-D design problems in studio and computer lab.

Problem solving in variety of materials for 3-D design

including assemblages, models, constructions, and con-

ceptual forms. Required for all majors in department.

Staff (HU)

ART 11. Drawing I (3)

Concepts and practice of drawing, both traditional and

contemporary. Includes drawing from life and an intro-

duction to materials and techniques. Staff (HU)

ART 13. Sculpture I (3)

Projects directed toward developing design in sculpture.

Exploration of materials and their application. Emphasis

on sculptural form as it relates to techniques. Gans (HU)

ART 15. Figure I (3)

Drawing and modeling in clay from direct observation

of the human figure. Fundamental principles of drawing,

and two- and three- dimensional design through analysis

of the human form. In-class exercises cover basic scale,

proportion, structure, drawing media and techniques,

and clay modeling. Emphasis on personal expression, the

human figure as vehicle for narrative, abstract or formal

drawings or sculpture. Gans (HU)

ART 35. Painting I (3)

Painting in oil beginning with color mixing and basic

layering techniques. Students learn the basic mechanisms

for creative expression. Emphasis on understanding the

physical nature of the materials. Studio prerequisite:

ART 3, 4, 11 or consent of instructor. Boothe (HU)

ART 37. Survey of Printmaking I (3) fall

Introduction to various techniques in relief and intaglio

printing: monoprints, woodcuts, linocuts, drypoint,

etching grounds, aquatint, and other intaglio techniques.

Includes an historical survey through slides and actual

examples. Viera (HU)

ART 38. Survey of Printmaking II (3) spring

Introduction to the fundamentals of stone and metal

lithography and the basics of screen printing as a fine art

print medium: various screen stencils, blockouts, and

color transparencies; drawing methods and transfer.

Includes an historical survey through slides and actual

examples. Viera (HU)

Art 42. (REL 42) Representing the Sacred: Art and

Religious Experience in Italy (6) alternate sum-

mers in Rome and Florence

This course explores the interaction between artistic

expression and religious experience from the earliest

traces of Christian art in the catacombs to the sensual

and theatrical churches of the Baroque. All classes are

conducted on site: in museums, churches, and in the

streets of Rome, Florence, and Assisi. No prerequisites.

Wright (HU)

ART 53. (DES 53) Introduction to Graphic

Design (3) fall and spring

This course serves as an introduction to the graphic

design process, with a primary focus on concept develop-

ment and craft. Students examine how to identify and

resolve visual problems and learn the basics of design

and typography. Creative solutions will be encouraged

for projects with practical applications. Topics include

logo development and execution, professional typogra-

phy, image basics and resolution, print production,

studio skills and professional practices. Digital applica-

tions include Photoshop, Illustrator and Indesign.

Prerequisite: ART 3/DES 3. Staff (HU)

ART 68. (DES 68) Color Theory (3)

Application of color in design. Color in graphics, prod-

uct, digital imaging, and all related fields of design.

(HU)

ART 69. Special Topics in Art History (1-3)

Directed projects for students in the history of art or

architecture. Prerequisites: consent of instructor. May be

repeated for credit. (HU)

102 Lehigh University Course Catalog 2009-2010

ART 73. Introductory Studio Practice (1-3)

An introduction to the methods and techniques of stu-

dio art. Designed to acquaint the student with general

studio practice, covering topics not covered in other spe-

cific studio course listings. May be repeated for credit.

Staff (ND)

ART 77. Photography I (3)

Introduction to photography as a fine art. Emphasis on

interaction of technique, perception and communication

in making and responding to photographic image.

Lectures, demonstrations, critiques. Students must pro-

vide own hand camera. Staff (HU)

ART 111. Drawing II (3)

Projects in creative drawing designed to build on con-

cepts and practices initiated in basic drawing and life

drawing. Prerequisite: ART 11. Staff (HU)

ART 113. Sculpture II (3)

Development of principles and techniques in Sculpture

I. Modeling, casting, fabrication and carving.

Emphasizes an approach to sculptural form and an

exploration of the evolution of modern sculpture.

Prerequisite: ART 13. Gans (HU)

ART 115. Figure II (3)

Projects in figure modeling and drawing from direct

observation of the human figure, designed to build on

concepts and practices initiated in Figure I. Students

may elect to concentrate in one particular medium,

although the primary investigation of form will always

incorporate both two- and three-dimensional work.

Prerequisite: ART 15. Gans (HU)

ART 120. 20th-Century Art (4)

A survey of the major movements of 20th century art

including Cubism, Expressionism, Surrealism, Abstract

Expressionism, Pop, Minimalism, Conceptual Art,

Feminism and Post-Modernism. Staff (HU)

ART 121. (GC 121, WS 121) Women in Art (4)

Women artists from Renaissance to present. Attitudes

toward women artists and their work; changing role of

women in the art world. Visits to museums and artists’

studios. May be repeated for credit as topic varies. Gans

(HU)

ART 135. Painting II (3)

A sustained exploration of paint media. Students con-

centrate on developing a body of related images using

various media and approaches. Prerequisite: ART 35.

Boothe (HU)

ART 144. (REL 144) Raw Vision: Creativity and

Ecstasy in the Work of Shamans, Mystics, and

Artist Outsiders (4)

Comparative exploration of the nature and meaning of

religious and artistic experience as reflected in shaman-

ism (both prehistoric and tribal), mystic traditions

(especially Taoism and Christianity), and contemporary

self-taught artistic visionaries (e.g. Jean Dubuffet,

Howard Finster, Mr. Imagination, Lonnie Holley,

Norbert Kox). Various disciplinary perspectives will be

employed including comparative religions, anthropology,

art history, and psychology. Girardot (HU)

ART 148. (DES 148) Furniture Design 1 (3)

Design methodology, fabrication techniques, and meth-

ods of design presentation. Prerequisite: ART/DES 4.

Forsyth (HU)

ART 153. (DES 153) Graphic Design: Word and

Image (3) spring

This course explores techniques of image making in rela-

tion to analyzing and creating meaning in graphic and

typographic messages. Students solve visual communica-

tion problems with visual, conceptual and social impact.

Assignments may include book covers, posters, music

packaging, and promotional materials. Students will

work in both traditional and digital media. Prerequisite:

Art/Des 3, ART 53/DES 53. Staff (HU)

ART 169. Special Topics in Art History (1-3)

Directed projects for students in the history of art or

architecture. Prerequisites: consent of instructor. May be

repeated for credit. Staff (HU)

ART 174. (ARCH 174, CLSS 174, ANTH 174)

Greek Archaeology (3)

Ancient Greek cultures from the neolithic to hellenistic

periods. Reconstructions of Greek social dynamics from

study of artifacts. Small (SS)

ART 176. (ARCH 176, CLSS 176, ANTH 176)

Roman Archaeology (3)

Cultures of the Roman Empire. Reconstructions of

social, political, and economic dynamics of the imperial

system from study of artifacts. Small (SS)

ART 177. Digital Photography (3)

Intensive work in photography as fine art using digital

input and output. Lectures, demonstrations, critiques.

Staff (HU)

ART 179. History of Photography (1)

Photography as fine art from earliest images to present

day. Problems in contemporary photography. Staff (HU)

ART 206. (ARCH 206) Medieval Art and

Architecture (3)

Focus on art and architecture in Western Europe from

313 A.D. until ca. 1500 A.D. Topics include: the emer-

gence of Christian art and architecture; the art of

barbarian migrations; the Carolingian Renaissance;

monasticism, pilgrimage and the Romanesque; the

Gothic cathedral; and medieval manuscript illumination.

Staff (HU)

ART 207. (ARCH 207) Renaissance Art and

Architecture (3)

Survey of the art and architecture of the Italian

Renaissance from its beginnings in 13th and 14th centu-

ry Tuscany and its first flowering in 15th century

Florence through the brilliant achievements of the mas-

ters of the High Renaissance and later 16th century. Staff

(HU)

ART 211. Drawing III (3)

Projects in traditional and contemporary drawing.

Oriented toward developing an individual portfolio.

Drawing as a vehicle for ideas, creative expression, and

image making. Students investigate a broad range of

materials, forms and traditions. Prerequisite: ART 111.

Boothe or Gans (HU)

ART 213. Sculpture III (4)

Development of principles and techniques in Sculpture

II for advanced students. Modeling, casting, fabrication

and carving. Prerequisite: ART 113. Gans (HU)

ART 215. Figure III (3)

Further exploration of the human figure as the subject of

art. More advanced students may elect to concentrate in

Art, Architecture, and Design 103

either two- or three- dimensional representations in any

media. The emphasis will be on personal interpretation

and independent work with the instructor. Prerequisite:

ART 115. Gans (HU)

ART 222. Seminar in Contemporary Art (3)

Recent aspects, developments in contemporary art.

Exploring ideas and consequences of today’s image-mak-

ing. Studio workshops, readings, discussions and

museum visits. Prerequisite: ART 2. Staff (HU)

ART 235. Painting III (3)

Emphasis on identifying an individual creative style or

direction with the media. Students are encouraged to

develop a body of painted work ready for professional

exhibitions. Outside critics invited to final reviews.

Prerequisite: ART 135 or consent of instructor. May be

repeated for credit. Staff (HU)

ART 248. (DES 248) Furniture Design II (3)

Advanced fabrication. Contemporary art issues and fur-

niture history. Prerequisite: ART/DES 148. Forsyth

(HU)

ART 253. (DES 253) Graphic Design: Brand

Experience (3) fall

In this course, students examine the basic principles of

corporate identity and develop a clear understanding of

the process of creating brands. Projects will offer a

framework for looking at business strategy as it relates to

the creative process of design. Emphasis will be placed

on creating visual elements that support a brand and the

steps a designer takes to create a consistent brand. In

addition, students will develop self-promotion materials

and identity systems. Prerequisite: Art/Des 3, Art/Des

53. Staff (HU)

ART 269. Special Topics in Art History (1-3)

Directed projects for advanced students in the history of

art or architecture. Prerequisite: consent of instructor.

May be repeated for credit. Staff (ND)

ART 273. Special Topics in Studio Practice (1-4)

Individually directed projects for advanced students

capable of undertaking independent creative work in stu-

dio art. Prerequisite: consent of instructor. May be

repeated for credit. Staff (ND)

ART 277. Special Topics in Photography (1-4)

Individually directed projects in photography for

advanced students capable of undertaking creative work

in photography. Prerequisites: ART 177 and consent of

instructor. May be repeated for credit. Staff (ND)

ART 311. Art Portfolio (1-4)

The concept, layout, and preparation of a portfolio for

graduate school application or employment search,

including graphic techniques and reproduction method.

Student must contact sponsoring professor. Prerequisite:

ART 111 or consent of instructor. (ND)

ART 337. Multimedia Workshop (3)

A workshop emphasizing individual instruction and

allowing students to explore all art mediums and/or

combinations while developing a relationship between

ideas and materials. May be repeated for credit.

Prerequisite: consent of professor. Viera (HU)

ART 350. Special Topics in Graphic Design and

Theory Seminar (1-4)

Current topics in graphic communication theory and

practice. Course will cover preparation, production, and

formulation of individual portfolio. Selected readings

and discussions in professional ethics as well as legal

issues in the field will be covered. May be repeated for

credit. Prerequisites: ART/DES 253. Staff (ND)

ART 352. Advanced Studio Practice (1-4)

Advanced studio for art or architecture majors under

guidance of faculty. Oral and written critiques. Variable

media. May be repeated for credit. Prerequisites: Third-

level (200-numbered) course of a studio art discipline

and permission of instructor. Staff (HU)

ART 353. Graphic Design Internship (1-4)

Practical in-field experience in a communication design

field. Preapproved a semester in advance by instructor

and host organization. A minimum of 15 hours per

week. Prerequisite: Art/Des 253. Staff (ND)

ART 356. Historiography and Research

Seminar (3)

This seminar introduces students to the tradition of art

history, from Winckelmann to the present day, and to

various art historical methodologies, including formalism

and connoisseurship, iconology, Marxism, the social his-

tory of art, and semiology. Students will be trained in

advanced research methods, culminating in a major

research paper. Prerequisites: Art 1, 2, and 120, or per-

mission of the instructor. Staff (HU)

ART 373. Studio Art Internship (1-4)

Practical in-field experience in an artist’s studio or art-

related apprenticeship opportunity. Requires approval a

semester in advance by instructor and host organization.

Staff (ND)

Undergraduate Courses in Museum Studies

ART 175. Introduction to Museum Work (4)

Introduction to the world of museums, surveying theory

and practice through readings and class discussions in all

aspects of museums (A to Z), art galleries and art/histori-

cal management. The course combines in situ

(LUAG/Museum Operation) instruction, conversations

with museum professionals and hands-on experience.

Students complete several interactive (P-B & CL) exer-

cises/projects. Viera. (ND)

ART 275. Museums: Research, Collections &

Exhibition Issues (4)

Theory and practice in contemporary museums and gal-

leries through readings and class discussion. Practicum at

the LUAG/Museum Operation dealing with care of

museum collections, collection management, intellectual

and practical tasks of preparing and communicating

through exhibitions, and the professional responsibilities

of the curator and curatorial staff. Students will complete

a number of exercises and a research report or equiva-

lent. Prerequisite: Art 175. Viera. (ND)

ART 276: Museums: Education, Communication

and Organization Issues (4)

Theory and practice in contemporary museums and gal-

leries through readings and class discussions. Practicum

in the LUAG/Museum Operation dealing with design

and installation of exhibitions; educational programming

and the community; organization, principles of manage-

ment and strategic planning; museum advocacy.

Students complete a number of exercises and a research

report or equivalent. Pre-requisite: Art 275. Viera (ND)

104 Lehigh University Course Catalog 2009-2010

ART 370. Special Topics in Museum and

Curatorial Studies (1-4)

Special project and/or internship for graduate and

advanced undergraduates. May be repeated for credit.

Prerequisite: Art 275/276 or equivalent course in anthro-

pology, public history or education technology. Viera

(ND)

ART 375. Museum Internship (1-4)

Internship under professional supervision in all areas of

museums and/or related organizations, regionally,

nationally or abroad in well established or accredited

institutions. Students must initiate contact/application.

A contractual agreement or letter of acceptance is

required. Prerequisite: Art 275/276 or departmental per-

mission. Viera. (ND)

Undergraduate Courses in Architecture

ARCH 1. Architectural History I (3) fall

Survey of architecture from earliest building to the

Renaissance, examined in the context of culture forma-

tion, design concepts, and the built environment.

Thomas (HU)

ARCH 2. Architectural History II (3) spring

Survey of architecture from the Renaissance to the pres-

ent, examined in the context of culture formation,

design concepts, and the built environment. Thomas

(HU)

ARCH 5. Introduction to Architecture (2) fall

An introduction to the discipline of architecture for first-

year probable architecture majors. Covers basic

principles, aspects of the profession, how to understand

building, etc. Staff. Freshman Year Class. (HU; FYC)

ARCH 6. Introduction to Architectural

Drawing (2) spring

An introduction to basic architectural drawing skills for

first-year probable architecture majors. Covers sketching

techniques, orthographic drawing, axonometric, etc.

Staff (ND)

ARCH 10. (CEE 10) Engineering/Architectural

Graphics and Design (3)

Graphical communication of civil engineering or archi-

tectural projects using manual techniques and

commercial state-of-the-art computer software. Topics

include visualization and sketching; orthographic, iso-

metric and other drawings; points, lines and planes in

descriptive geometry; site design; overview of geographi-

cal information systems and 3-D applications. Teamwork

on design projects with oral and graphical presentations.

Open to a limited number of architecture, design arts or

other students with project roles consistent with stu-

dents’ background. Not available to students who have

taken MECH 10.

ARCH 43. Architectural Design I (4)

Fundamental design studio for architecture majors.

Composition, spatial concepts; precedent; materials and

detail; light and color in architecture. Instruction in

basic communication techniques. Prerequisite:

ART/DES 3 and ART/DES 4. Reserved for declared

Architecture majors. Viscardi or Ussler (ND)

ARCH 107. History of American Architecture (3)

spring

Survey of American building from European coloniza-

tion to the present. Prerequisite: ART/ARCH 1 and

ARCH 2 or permission of instructor. Thomas. (HU)

ARCH 143. Architectural Design II (6)

Studio format, introductory course in architectural

design which introduces students to new ways of think-

ing about architecture and the perception of space,

three-dimensional composition, drawing, and model-

making. Previous or concurrent courses in studio art

and/or architectural history are recommended.

Prerequisite: ARCH 43. Staff (ND)

ARCH 147. Building Materials and Methods (3)

The primary structural material block, wood, steel and

reinforced concrete are examined in their relationship to

architectural design. Peters. Prerequisite: ARCH 43 or

consent of professor. Staff. (ND)

ARCH 161. (THTR 161) Theatre Design and

Technology (4)

Theatre environments, equipment systems and acoustics.

Functions and ethics. (HU)

ARCH 171. Special Topics in Architecture (1-4)

Directed projects for students in architecture. Student

must initiate contact with sponsoring professor.

Prerequisite: Major standing in department and/or per-

mission of instructor. Staff (ND)

ARCH 174. (ART 174, CLSS 174, ANTH 174)

Greek Archaeology (3)

Ancient Greek cultures from the neolithic to hellenistic

periods. Reconstructions of Greek social dynamics from

study of artifacts. Small (SS)

ARCH 176. (ART 176, CLSS 176, ANTH 176)

Roman Archaeology (3)

Cultures of the Roman Empire. Reconstructions of

social, political, and economic dynamics of the imperial

system from study of artifacts. Small (SS)

ARCH 206. (ART 206) Medieval Art and

Architecture (3)

Focus on art and architecture in Western Europe from

313 A.D. until ca. 1500 A.D. Topics include: the emer-

gence of Christian art and architecture; the art of

barbarian migrations; the Carolingian Renaissance;

monasticism, pilgrimage and the Romanesque; the

Gothic cathedral; and medieval manuscript illumination.

Staff (HU)

ARCH 207. (ART 207) Renaissance Art and

Architecture (3)

Survey of the art and architecture of the Italian

Renaissance from its beginnings in 13th and 14th centu-

ry Tuscany and its first flowering in 15th century

Florence through the brilliant achievements of the mas-

ters of the High Renaissance and later 16th century. Staff

(HU)

ARCH 209. Architecture and Ideas (3)

Examination of philosophical, technological, and cultur-

al forces shaping Western architecture and urbanism.

Prerequisites: ART/ARCH 1 and ARCH 2 or permission

of instructor. Writing intensive. Thomas (HU)

ARCH 210. 20th-Century Architecture (3)

History and theory of modern architecture. Analysis of

buildings and architects, theories and manifestoes, from

industrial revolution to avant-garde movements.

Prerequisite: Art 1 or ARCH 1 and another course in

architectural history is recommended. Staff(HU)

Art, Architecture, and Design 105

ARCH 211. Architectural Drawing/Analysis and

Expressions (3) alternate summers in Italy

This studio course is part of the Lehigh in Italy summer

program and will utilize several different architectural

drawing techniques to study aspects of architecture from

analysis of a piazza to architecture in detail. It will

employ pencil sketching, charcoal drawing, and water-

color. These drawings will act as a way of seeing the

Italian urban landscape and supplement the study and

analysis of the Italian architects’ contemporary work.

Fulfills an art studio elective requirement. Viscardi (ND)

ARCH 212. The Architecture of Carlos

Scarpa/Theory and Practice (3) alternate summers

in Italy

This course which is part of the Lehigh in Italy summer

program will survey several of the Venetian architect’s

most famous works. Meet with architects who worked

with Scarpa and completed his unfinished projects.

Explore thematic principles behind Scarpa’s work, their

origin and roll in his unique process of design. Viscardi

(HU)

ARCH 213. The City (3)

Historical development of the modern city.

Philosophical, technological, and cultural forces shaping

urban experience. Western culture beginning with the

Enlightenment. Prerequisites: Art 1 or ARCH 1 and

ARCH 2 or permission of instructor. Thomas (HU)

ARCH 243. Architectural Design III (6)

Continuation of ARCH 143. Design principles of space

and form stressed in earlier studios to issues of “material-

ity,” “structure,” “modes of representation” and the

“process of making.” Prerequisites: ARCH 1, 143 and

one art studio. Viscardi (ND)

ARCH 253. Paris, the Planning of a

Metropolis (3) alternate summers in Paris

The splendor of modern Paris is due in large part to

bold, large-scale modernization and changes in the city’s

patterns during the 19th century. This course, which is

part of the Lehigh in Paris summer program, will cover a

century of change and focus on the major accomplish-

ments of its visionary planners. Zaknic (HU)

ARCH 254. Modern Architecture in France: New

Directions (3) alternate summers in Paris

The course, which is part of the Lehigh in Paris summer

program, will cover the most important contributions to

modern architecture in the Paris region including Centre

Pompidou, Musee d’Orsay, Le Grand Louvre, Parc de la

Villette, La Defense, and the new satellite towns around

Paris. Zaknic (HU)

ARCH 271. Special Topics in Architecture (1-4)

Directed projects for advanced students in architecture

or architectural criticism. Prerequisites: ARCH 1 and

143. Major standing in the department or consent of

instructor. Student must contact sponsoring professor

and complete a contract sheet at pre-registration. May be

repeated for credit. Staff (ND)

ARCH 311. Portfolio (1)

The concept, layout, and preparation of a portfolio for

graduate school application or employment search,

including graphic techniques and reproduction method.

Student must contact sponsoring professor. Prerequisite:

ARCH 243. Staff (ND)

ARCH 321. Architectural Internship (1-3)

Supervised internship in architectural firm, planning or

preservation office. Internship plan must be approved in

writing before it is pursued. Staff (ND)

ARCH 328. Architectural Representation (3)

Studio format, instruction in rendering media such as

graphite, charcoal, color pencil, water color and pastel

and a variety of three-dimensional drawing techniques.

Intended for architectural students who have mastered

orthographic drawing (plan, elevation, section). The ori-

gin, history, and theory of three-dimensional drawing

techniques will also be studied. Prerequisite: ARCH 243.

Ussler (ND)

ARCH 342. Theory of Architecture (3)

Study of the genesis of form, its representation and its

interrelationship to related artistic disciplines. Formal

notions will be studied, compared and manipulated

through the role of time, scale, perceptual analysis and

material transformation. Permission of instructor

required. Viscardi (ND)

ARCH 343. Architectural Design IV (6)

Continuation of ARCH 243. The design of buildings

and building groups, with the emphasis on urban design

and the city. Prerequisite: ARCH 1/ART 1, 243, one art

studio, and a 200-level Architecture History class recom-

mended. Ussler (ND)

ARCH 345. Architectural Design V (3)

Undergraduate thesis. An individual design project

exploring, with faculty approval, some aspect of architec-

ture of interest to the student. Prerequisite: Architectural

Design I-IV; all other courses required for major, previ-

ously or concurrently. Staff (ND)

ARCH 367. Modernism to Postmodernism (3)

Re-examine the central issues facing the great masters of

twentieth-century architecture: how they formulated

their principles, how they applied them, and how those

who inherited the legacy have interpreted it. The major

attention will focus on either the great master builders

such as Le Corbusier, Mies vander Rohe, Frank Lloyd

Wright and Walter Gropius, or on second generation

including the transitional figures such as Philip Johnson

and other groups: The Whites, Greys, High-Tech, etc.

Prerequisite: Art I/ARCH I or Art 2/ARCH 2 and

ARCH 210. Staff (HU)

ARCH 388. Advanced Architectural Design (3)

spring

Intensive design projects under a sequence of visiting

design instructors. Prerequisites: ARCH 210, 243 and

consent of the instructor. Staff (ND)

Undergraduate Courses in Design

DES 3. (ART 3) Design Foundations I (3)

An introduction to the basic elements and principles of

design. Course involves use of various materials to solve

2-D design problems in studio and computer lab.

Required for all majors in department. Staff (HU)

DES 4. (ART 4) Design Foundations II (3)

An introduction to the basic elements and principles of

design. Course involves use of various materials to solve

3-D design problems in studio and computer lab.

Problem solving in variety of materials for 3-D design

including assemblages, models, constructions, and con-

106 Lehigh University Course Catalog 2009-2010

ceptual forms. Required for all majors in department.

Staff (HU)

DES 5. Digital Foundation (3)

Introduction to a variety of 2-D and 3-D software appli-

cations for digital design. Students will acquire a basic

understanding of digital image manipulation, graphic

layout tools, 2-D CAD techniques, and 3-D rendering.

(ND)

DES 40. Product Design I: Form, Process and

Concept (3)

Introduction to the field of Industrial Design. Through

research, analysis, drawing and prototyping, students will

acquire an understanding of the various aesthetic, tech-

nological, and business issues a designer must consider

when creating a product. Prerequisite: DES/ART 3 or

ART 11, and ART/DES 4, and DES 5 or department

permission. (HU)

DES 50. (THTR 50) Stage Lighting (4)

An introduction to the art and practice of lighting

design for the stage. History of theatrical lighting design.

(HU)

DES 53. (ART 53) Intro to Graphic Design (3)

This course serves as an introduction to the graphic

design process, with a primary focus on concept develop-

ment and craft. Students examine how to identify and

resolve visual problems and learn the basics of design

and typography. Creative solutions will be encouraged

for projects with practical applications. Topics include

logo development and execution, professional typogra-

phy, image basics and resolution, print production,

studio skills and professional practices. Digital applica-

tions include Photoshop, Illustrator and Indesign.

Prerequisites: ART/DES 3.(HU)

DES 60. Design Process (3)

Students will study how an idea becomes a final design

by analyzing their own actions and role designers play in

the development of products, graphic design (online and

print), and time-based media. (HU)

DES 66. Design History (3)

History of product design, graphic design and time-

based media in artistic, cultural, technological, and

business contexts. (HU)

DES 68. (ART 68) Color Theory (3)

Application of color in design. Color in graphics, prod-

uct, digital imaging, and all related fields of design.

(HU)

DES 70. Web Design I (3)

Introduction to the design and fabrication of web pages.

Students will learn how to create pages using HTML

and web fabrication software, with an emphasis on aes-

thetic and structure. (ND)

DES 80. Computer Imaging I (3)

Introduction to 3-D computer modeling, animation,

and rendering, commonly used in the entertainment

industry. Students create and edit an original 3-D ani-

mated movie. Students will also learn about 2-D and

3-D visualization techniques, used in the creation of sto-

ryboards and the narrative of the movie. Prerequisite:

DES/ART 3, ART 11 or 15, and DES 5 or department

permission. (HU)

DES 87. (THTR 87) Scenography I (4)

Introduction to the process of creating integrated designs

in theatre production. The study and practice of the

principles of visual representation, historical and concep-

tual research and the study of theatrical styles. (HU)

DES 111. (THTR 111) Sound Design (4)

Techniques, materials, and methods of designing sound

for theatrical production. (HU)

DES 140. Product Design II: Designing for

Others (3)

This course will expose students to client based projects

and issues of branding relevant to the product designer.

Special emphasis will be given to functionality from a

user centered perspective. Projects will also include the

use of 3D digital prototyping software and computer

based fabrication techniques. Prerequisite: DES 40.

(ND)

DES 148. (ART 148) Furniture Design I (3)

Design methodology, fabrication techniques, and meth-

ods of design presentation. Prerequisite: DES/ART 4.

(HU)

DES 153. (ART 153) Graphic Design: Word and

Image (3)

This course explores techniques of image making in rela-

tion to analyzing and creating meaning in graphic and

typographic messages. Students solve visual communica-

tion problems with visual, conceptual and social impact.

Assignments may include book covers, posters, music

packaging, and promotional materials. Students will

work in both traditional and digital media. Prerequisite:

ART/DES 53. (HU)

DES 154. (THTR 154) Scene Painting (4)

Study and practice of basic and advanced methods of

painting for the theatre. Includes basic elements and

principles of design, color theory, the influence of light,

atmosphere and aesthetics for the theatre. (HU)

DES 164. Ergonomics (3)

Introduction to physical, emotional, and psychological

ways design interacts with people. Analyze real design

problems and create solutions. (HU)

DES 170. Web Design II (3)

Creation of dynamic content in web design. Various 2-D

animation software applications and simple scripting will

be explored. Prerequisite: DES 70. (ND)

DES 180. Computer Imaging II (3)

Creation of original 3-D models, renderings, and anima-

tions, while learning advanced modeling techniques,

character animation, particles, and compositing.

Prerequisite: DES 80. (ND)

DES 182. Experimental Animation and Video (3)

An exploration of time, motion and interactivity in a

series of conceptual and technical projects dealing with

advanced digital imaging and non-linear video editing.

We will consider the interaction of image, sequence,

motion, animation, and audio with video. Prerequisites:

ART/DES 3. Department Permission. Anna Chupa.

(HU)

DES 187. (THTR 187) Scenography II (4)

Includes beginning scene design, lighting design, and

costume design principles and techniques. Introduction

to design history. Significant texts, scenographic design

and media techniques in graphic and three-dimensional

solutions. Introduction to drafting and mechanical per-

spective. Pre-req. DES/THRT 87 or permission. (HU)

Arts-Engineering 107

DES 211. (BUS 211, ENGR 211, ME 211)

Integrated Product Development (IPD) 1 (3)

spring

Business, engineering, and design arts students work in

cross-disciplinary teams of 4-6 students on conceptual

design including marketing, financial and economic

planning, economic and technical feasibility of new

product concepts. Teams work on industrial projects

with faculty advisers. Oral presentations and written

reports. Prerequisite: junior standing in business, eco-

nomics, arts, design or engineering. Mechanical

Engineering students must register for ME 211. (ND)

DES 212. (BUS 212, ENGR 212, ME 212)

Integrated Product Development (IPD) 2 (2) fall

Business, engineering, and design arts students work in

cross-disciplinary teams of 4-6 students on the detailed

design including fabrication and testing of a prototype of

the new product designed in the IPD course 1.

Additional deliverables include a detailed production

plan, marketing plan, detailed base-case financial models,

project and product portfolio. Teams work on industrial

projects with faculty advisors. Oral presentations and

written reports. Prerequisite: BUS/DES/ENGR/ME 211.

(ND)

DES 240. Product Design III: Materials to Market

(3)

In this advanced level studio students will research fabri-

cation techniques and materials, develop ideas into

prototypes, outsource production and sell their designs

in a competitive retail market. This course confronts the

financial realities of being an independent designer while

offering an opportunity to create innovative and desir-

able domestic products. Prerequisite: DES 40. (ND).

DES 248. (ART 248) Furniture Design II (3)

Advanced fabrication. Contemporary art issues and fur-

niture history. Prerequisite DES/ART 148. (HU)

DES 253. (ART 253) Graphic Design: Brand

Experience (3)

In this course, students examine the basic principles of

corporate identity and develop a clear understanding of

the process of creating brands. Projects will offer a

framework for looking at business strategy as it relates to

the creative process of design. Emphasis will be placed

on creating visual elements that support a brand and the

steps a designer takes to create a consistent brand. In

addition, students will develop self-promotion materials

and identity systems. Prerequisite: ART/DES 53. (HU)

DES 260. Exhibit Design (3)

Team projects in development of exhibits for museums,

conferences, or educational centers. Project work is sup-

plemented by lectures and demonstrations. Teams will

produce real and virtual exhibit prototypes and will

design and maintain an exhibit website. (HU)

DES 266. History of Contemporary Design (3)

History of modern design from mid-19

century to the

present. Studies and discussion of contemporary issues

and technology in Design Arts. Topics will include green

design, digital technology, current legal and ethical prin-

ciples, and other issues. (HU)

DES 268. Advanced Design Projects (1-4)

Advanced projects or studies applying Design Arts practices

or theories. Prerequisite: consent of instructor. May be

repeated for credit. Department permission required. (ND)

DES 280. Computer Imaging III (3)

Advanced animation with emphasis on experimental

techniques and new technologies in animation and

motion graphics. Emphasis on effects, compositing, and

the use of digital technology in the post-production

process. Students will work on various assignments to

gain a first-hand understanding of how various tools and

techniques are used to create realistic effects.

Prerequisite: DES 180. (ND)

DES 287. (THTR 287) Scenography III (4)

Includes advanced scene design, lighting design, and cos-

tume design principles and techniques. Design history

projects in specific periods. Complex design problems of

traditional texts. Emphasis on color and color theory.

Pre-req. DES/THTR 187 or permission. (HU)

DES 311. Design Portfolio (1-4)

The concept, layout, and preparation of a portfolio for

graduate school application or employment search,

including graphic techniques and reproduction method.

Student must contact sponsoring professor. Prerequisite:

DES 253, DES 240 or DES 280.

DES 366. Case Studies in Design History (3)

History of design. Study of specific products in context

with regard to their impact on art, culture, and technolo-

gy. (HU)

DES 370. Special Topics in Design (1-4)

Current topics in design, with selected readings, discus-

sions, and studio work as required. May be repeated for

credit. Prerequisite: two 100-level Design courses.

Department permission. (ND)

DES 375. Design Internship (1-4)

Practical experience following apprenticeship model.

Requires approval of instructor and host prior to begin-

ning of the term, with a memorandum of understanding

outlining student work responsibilities and educational

objectives for the experience. (ND)

DES 376. Design Thesis (3)

Project or presentation in a selected area of design.

Intended for senior majors in design. Prerequisite: con-

sent of the director in conjunction with advisor. (ND)

DES 387. (THTR 387) Sceonography IV (4)

Advanced problem solving of non-traditional design

problems, experimental approaches and solutions, con-

temporary issues in environmental design. Design

history focus on contemporary design trends and non-

traditional history. Pre-req DES/THTR 287 or

permission. (HU)

Arts-Engineering

The Arts-Engineering program provides the student with

an opportunity to experience the breadth of an arts edu-

cation and simultaneously follow the more focused

curriculum of an engineering major. This is a five-year,

dual-degree program administered by the College of Arts

and Sciences. An Arts-Engineering graduate is awarded

two bachelors degrees, one from the College of Arts and

Sciences and another from the College of Engineering

and Applied Science.

A typical freshman year class schedule for an Arts-

Engineer is shown below. Note that the

Arts-Bioengineering program has a different freshman

year class schedule.

108 Lehigh University Course Catalog 2009-2010

freshman year, first semester (14-16 credit hours)

ENGL 1 Composition/Literature I 3

MATH 21 Calculus I 4

PHY 11 Intro Physics I 4

PHY 12 Intro Physics Lab I 1

(Dept) 90 College Seminar or FYC 2-4

freshman year, second semester (17 credit hours)

ENGL 2 Composition/Literature II 3

MATH 22 Calculus II 4

CHM 25 Intro Chemical Principles 4

ENGR 1 Engineering Computations 3

ENGR 5 First-Year Design Experience 3

Selection of a major in the College of Engineering and

Applied Science occurs prior to beginning the sopho-

more year. A major leading to a degree in the College of

Arts and Sciences should be chosen prior to beginning

the junior year.

Basic Arts-Engineering programs leading to a bachelor of

arts degree from the College of Arts and Sciences and a

Bachelor of Science degree in an area of engineering are

suggested below. The listed courses may be taken in any

order if prerequisites are met. Arts-Engineering candi-

dates should recognize that pursuit of a bachelor of

science degree (e.g., biology, chemistry, biochemistry,

earth and environmental sciences, mathematics, and

physics) or a bachelor of arts program with larger than

average credit requirements (e.g., art, architecture, physi-

cal sciences, cognitive science, international careers,

among others) will severely restrict choices of free elec-

tives. For these students, very careful planning of the

academic program is necessary to guarantee completion

of all major, distribution and total credit requirements

for the two degrees in five years.

The designation AS-courses/electives refers to those

courses which meet the major and distribution require-

ments for the degree in the College of Arts and Sciences

while other types of electives meet major requirements in

the College of Engineering. When selected properly,

courses which meet distribution requirements in the

College of Arts and Sciences will also satisfy most distri-

bution requirements of the College of Engineering and

Applied Science. Note that the bookkeeping used to

arrive at the total credits for each dual degree program

assumes 31-33 credit hours were earned in the freshman

year.

Arts-Bioengineering

A total of 158-162 credit hours is needed for the bache-

lor of arts and the bachelor of science degrees depending

on the bioengineering track selected.

freshman year, first semester (15 credit hours)

BIOE 1 Intro to Bioengr I 1

ENGR 1 Engineering Computations 3

ENGL 1 Composition/Literature 3

MATH 21 Calculus I 4

CHM 25 Intro Chemical Principles 4

freshman year, second semester (17 credit hours)

BIOE 2 Intro to Bioengr II 1

ENGL to be selected 3

MATH 22 Calculus II 4

PHY 11 Intro Physics I 4

PHY 12 Intro Physics Lab I 1

BIOS 41 Biology Core I: Cellular and

Molecular 3

BIOS 42 Biology Core I: Cellular and

Molecular Lab 1

sophomore-fifth year (125-129 credit hours)

Please read the section of the catalog referring to B.S. in

Bioengineering. Then contact either Professor Jagota or

Professor Ou-Yang for further advice on which of the 3

tracks to select and the courses that should be taken.

Arts-Chemical Engineering

A total of 161-163 credit hours is needed for the bache-

lor of arts and the bachelor of science degrees.

See electives (1) through (5) for the chemical engineering

program in Section III. Careful planning is required so

that these may be scheduled during the senior year and

fifth year of the program. Any order that does not violate

prerequisites is acceptable.

sophomore year, first semester (18 credit hours)

CHE 31 Material and Energy Balances of

Chemical Processes (3)

CHM 31 Chemical Equilibria in Aqueous

Solutions (4)

MATH 23 Calculus III (4)

ECO 1 Principles of Economics (4)

AS course/elective (3)

sophomore year, second semester (17 credit hours)

CHE 44 Fluid Mechanics (3)

PHY 21 Introductory Physics II (4)

PHY 22 Introductory Physics Lab II (1)

BIOS 41 Biology Core I: Cell and Molecular

Biology (3)

MATH 205 Linear Methods (3)

AS courses/electives (3)

junior year, first semester (17 credit hours)

CHE 151 Introduction to Heat Transfer (3)

CHM 51 Organic Chemistry I (3)

CHM 53 Organic Chemistry Laboratory I (1)

CHM 192 Physical Chemistry Laboratory (2)

AS courses/electives (8)

junior year, second semester (17 credit hours)

CHE 244 Mass Transfer and Separation Processes

(3)

CHE 210 Chemical Engineering

Thermodynamics (4)

CHE 179 Professional Development (1)

CHM 52 Organic Chemistry II (3)

AS courses/electives (6)

senior year, first semester (15 credit hours)

CHE 201 Methods of Analysis in Chemical

Engineering (3)

CHM 189 Physical Chemistry II (3)

electives for engineering major* (6)

AS courses/electives (3)

senior year, second semester (15 credit hours)

CHE 211 Chemical Reactor Design (3)

CHE 242 Introduction to Process Control and

Simulation (3)

electives for engineering major* (6)

AS courses/electives (3)

fifth year (31 credit hours)

See program description for senior year of Chemical

Engineering.

*These electives are chosen with the chemical engineering

adviser.

Arts-Engineering 109

Arts-Civil Engineering

A total of 157-168 credit hours is needed for the bache-

lor of arts and the bachelor of science degrees. This total

may differ depending on selection of the A&S program

and the electives that satisfy requirements for both

degrees.

sophomore year, first semester (16 credit hours)

MATH 23 Calculus III (4)

MECH 3 Elementary Engineering Mechanics (3)

CEE 10 Engineering/Architectural Graphics

and Design (3)

AS courses/electives (6)

sophomore year, second semester (18 credit hours)

MATH 205 Linear Methods (3)

MECH 12 Strength of Materials (3)

PHY 21 Introductory Physics II (4)

PHY 22 Introductory Physics Lab II (1)

CEE 170 Introduction to Environmental

Engineering (4)

AS course/elective (3)

junior year, first semester (16-17 credit hours)

MAT 33 Engineering Materials and

Processes (3)

CEE 123 Civil Engineering Materials (1)

CEE 11 Surveying (1)

CEE 12 Civil Engineering Statistics (2)

CEE 121 Mechanics of Fluids (3)

Engineering Science Elective* (3)

AS course/elective (3-4)

junior year, second semester (15-18 credit hours)

CEE 117 Numerical Methods in Civil

Engineering (2)

CEE 222 Hydraulic Engineering (3)

ECO 1 Principles of Economics (4)

AS courses/electives (6-9)

senior year, first semester (15-16 credit hours)

CEE 142 Fundamentals of Soil Mechanics (3)

CEE 159 Structural Analysis I (4)

AS courses/electives (8-9)

senior year, second semester (15-18 credit hours)

CEE 262 Fundamentals of Steel Structural

Design (3)

or CEE 264 Fundamentals of Concrete Structural

Design (3)

CEE 242 Principles and Practice of Geotechnical

Engineering (3)

Civil Engineering Approved

electives** (3)

AS courses/electives (6)

fifth year, first semester (16-17 credit hours)

CEE 202 Civil Engineering Planning and

Engineering Economics (3)

CEE 203 Professional Development (2)

Civil Engineering Approved electives**

(6)

AS courses/electives (5-6)

fifth year, second semester (15 credit hours)

CEE 290 Civil Engineering Capstone Design***

(3)

Civil Engineering Approved elective**

(6)

AS courses/electives (6)

*The A&S college requires a junior writing intensive course.

This can be fulfilled by an appropriate choice of intellectual

context election.

**Of seventeen CEE elective credits, three credits are satis-

fied by a 300 level course in the major AS department; a

list of CEAE is available from the CEE department.

***Multidisciplinary teaming versions of CEE 205 or

CEEE 381 can be substituted with departmental permis-

sion.

Arts-Computer Engineering

A total of 163-165 credit hours is needed for the bache-

lor of arts and bachelor of science degrees.

sophomore year, first semester (16 credit hours)

MATH 23 Calculus III (4)

PHY 21 Introductory Physics (4)

PHY 22 Introductory Physics Lab (1)

ECE 33 Introduction to Computer Engineering

(4)

AS course/elective (3)

sophomore year, second semester (16 credit hours)

CSE 17 Structured Programming and Data

Structures (3)

MATH 205 Linear Methods (3)

ECO 1 Principles of Economics (4)

AS courses/electives (6)

junior year, first semester (16 credit hours)

ECE 81 Principles of Electrical Engineering (4)

MATH 231 Probability and Statistics (3) or

MATH 309 Theory of Probability (3)

AS courses/electives (9)

junior year, second semester (16 credit hours)

ECE 82 Sophomore Laboratory (1)

ECE 108 Signals and Systems (4)

AS courses/electives (11)

senior year, first semester (17 credit hours)

ECE 121 Electronic Circuits Laboratory (2)

ECE 123 Electronic Circuits (3)

CSE 109 Systems Programming (4)

approved technical elective* (3)

AS courses/electives (5)

senior year, second semester (16 credit hours)

ECE 138 Digital Systems Laboratory (2)

ECE 201 Computer Architecture (3)

CSC 216 Software Engineering (3)

CSC 261 Discrete Structures (3)

AS courses/electives (5)

fifth year (35 credit hours)

fifth year, first semester (18 credit hours)

ECE 257 Senior Lab Project I (3)

ECE 319 Digital System Design (3)

CSE 303 Operating System Design (3)

HSS elective (6)

free elective (3)

fifth year, second semester (17 credit hours)

ECE 258 Senior Lab Project II (2)

approved technical electives* (9)

HSS elective (3)

free elective (3)

*Approved technical electives (15 credits) are subjects in the

area of science and technology. They are not restricted to

offerings in the department of Computer Science and Engi-

110 Lehigh University Course Catalog 2009-2010

neering. One elective must be an engineering science elective

from another department. CSE 252 is not an approved

technical elective.

Arts-Computer Science

A total of 156-158 credit hours is needed for the bache-

lor of arts and the bachelor of science degrees.

sophomore year, first semester (15 credit hours)

MATH 23 Calculus III (4)

PHY 21 Introductory Physics II (4)

PHY 22 Introductory Physics Lab II (1)

CSE 17 Structured Programming and Data

Structures (3)

AS course/ special elective* (3)

sophomore year, second semester (17 credit hours)

MATH 205 Linear Methods (3)

CSE 109 Systems Programming (4)

ECO 1 Principles of Economics (4)

AS courses/ special electives* (6)

junior year, first semester (16 credit hours)

CSE 261 Discrete Structures (3)

ECE 33 Introduction to Computer Engineering

(4)

MATH 231 Probability and Statistics (3)

AS courses/special electives* (6)

junior year, second semester (18 credit hours)

CSE 216 Software Engineering (3)

CSE 262 Programming Languages (3)

CSE 340 Design and Analysis of Algorithms (3)

AS courses/special electives* (9)

senior year, first semester (15 credit hours)

CSE 318 Automatic and Formal Grammars (3)

AS courses/special electives* (12)

senior year, second semester (15 credit hours)

ECE 201 Computer Architecture (3)

CSE 252 Computers, the Internet, and Society

(3)

AS courses /special electives* (9)

fifth year, first semester (15 credit hours)

CSE 303 Operating System Design (3)

CSE 379 Senior Project (3)

AS courses/special electives* (9)

fifth year, second semester (14 credit hours)

AS courses/special electives* (4)

*Special electives [technical electives (12 credit hours of CSE

courses) and professional electives (6 credit hours)] are

required and are chosen with the approval of the major

advisor. See the catalog listing for B.S. in Computer Science

in the P. C. Rossin College of Engineering for further

details.

Arts-Electrical Engineering

A total of 162-164 credit hours is needed for the bache-

lor of arts and bachelor of science degrees.

sophomore year, first semester (15 credit hours)

MATH 23 Calculus III (4)

PHY 21 Introductory Physics II (4)

PHY 22 Introductory Physics Lab II (1)

AS courses/electives (6)

sophomore year, second semester (15 credit hours)

MATH 205 Linear Methods (3)

approved elective* (3)

AS courses/electives (9)

junior year, first semester (15 credit hours)

ECE 33 Introduction to Computer Engineering

(4)

ECE 83 Introduction to Electrical Engineering

(3)

MATH 208 Complex Variables (3)

AS courses/electives (5)

junior year, second semester (16 credit hours)

ECE 82 Sophomore Laboratory (1)

ECE 108 Signals and Systems (4)

ECE 126 Fundamentals of Semiconductor

Devices (3)

MATH 231 Probability and Statistics (3)

AS courses/electives (5)

senior year, first semester (18 credit hours)

ECE 121 Electronic Circuits Laboratory (2)

ECE 123 Electronic Circuits (3)

ECE 202 Introduction to Electromagnetics (3)

ECO 1 Principles of Economics (4)

approved elective* (3)

AS courses/electives (3)

senior year, second semester (16 credit hours)

ECE 125 Circuits and Systems (3)

ECE 138 Digital Systems Laboratory (2)

ECE 203 Introduction to Electromagnetic Waves

(3)

approved technical elective* (3)

AS courses/elective (5)

fifth year (36 credit hours)

See program description for senior year of electrical engi-

neering, under Electrical Engineering.

*Approved technical electives are subjects in the areas of sci-

ence and technology. Students must select a minimum of

four courses from the ECE or CSC course listings, with a

minimum of two courses in one of the technical areas

described in the following list. Students must also choose at

least one engineering elective in either materials, mechanics,

thermodynamics, fluid mechanics or physical chemistry, and

at least one science elective in physics, chemistry or biology.

For students interested in solid state electronics, quantum

mechanics is recommended for the science elective.

Arts-Engineering Physics

A total of 159-161 credit hours is needed for the bache-

lor of arts and bachelor of science degrees.

sophomore year, first semester (17 credit hours)

PHY 21 Introductory Physics II (4)

PHY 22 Introductory Physics Lab II (1)

MATH 23 Calculus III (4)

ECO 1 Principles of Economics (4)

ECE 81 Principles of Electrical Engineering (4)

sophomore year, second semester (16 credit hours)

PHY 31 Introduction to Quantum Mechanics

(3)

PHY 190 Electronics (3)

MATH 205 Linear Methods (3)

MATH 208 Complex Variables (3)

ECE 108 Signals and Systems (4)

The student must choose either the Solid State

Electronics or the Optical Sciences concentration, listed

below.

Arts-Engineering 111

Solid State Electronics Concentration

junior year, first semester (16 credit hours)

PHY 212 Electricity and Magnetism I (3)

ECE 33 Introduction to Computer Engineering

(4)

ECE 123 Electronic Circuits (3)

MATH 322 Methods of Applied Analysis I (3)

AS courses/electives (3)

junior year, second semester (18 credit hours)

PHY 213 Electricity and Magnetism II (3)

PHY 262 Advanced Laboratory (2)

PHY 215 Classical Mechanics I (4)

ECE 126 Fundamentals of Semiconductors

Devices (3)

AS courses/electives (6)

senior year, first semester (15 credit hours)

PHY 362 Atomic and Molecular Structure (3)

PHY 363 Physics of Solids (3)

SSE Elective* (3)

SSE Elective* or AS courses/electives

(3)

AS courses/electives (3)

senior year, second semester (15 credit hours)

SSE Electives* (5)

AS courses/elective or SSE elective (3)

AS courses/electives (7)

fifth year, first semester (15 credit hours)

PHY 340 Thermal Physics (3) or

ME 104 Thermodynamics I (3)

SSE Elective* (3)

AS courses/electives (9)

fifth year, second semester (16 credit hours)

AS courses/electives (16)

*The 14 credit hours of SSE electives must include ECE

251 or 252 or PHY 273 (must be a design project with an

engineer co-advisor). Advisor has list of approved SSE elec-

tives. Must include at least 30 credits taught by engineers

and sufficient engineering design and engineering science

credits to satisfy ABET guidelines.

Optical Sciences Concentration

junior year, first semester (15 credit hours)

PHY 212 Electricity and Magnetism I (3)

PHY 362 Atomic and Molecular Structure (3)

MATH 322 Methods of Applied Analysis I (3)

OE Elective** (3)

AS courses/electives (3)

junior year, second semester (18 credit hours)

PHY 213 Electricity and Magnetism II (3)

PHY 262 Advanced Laboratory (2)

PHY 215 Classical Mechanics (4)

OE Elective** (3)

AS courses/electives (6)

senior year, first semester (17 credit hours)

PHY 352 Modern Optics (3)

OE Elective** (9)

AS courses/electives (5)

senior year, second semester (15 credit hours)

PHY 355 Lasers and Non-linear Optics (3)

OE Elective** (6)

AS courses/electives (6)

fifth year, first semester (15 credit hours)

PHY 340 Thermal Physics (3) or

ME 104 Thermodynamics I (3)

AS courses/electives (12)

fifth year, second semester (15 credit hours)

AS courses/electives (15)

**The 18 credit hours of Optical Engineering electives must

include ECE 257 or 258 or PHY 273 (must be a design

project with an engineer co-advisor). Must include at least

two of ECE 347, 348, 371, and 372. Advisor has list of

approved OE electives. Must include at least 30 credits

taught by engineers and sufficient engineering design and

engineering science credits to satisfy ABET guidelines.

Arts-Environmental Engineering

A total of 160-162 credit hours is needed for the bache-

lor of arts and the bachelor of science degrees. This total

may differ depending on the selection of electives that

satisfy the requirements for both degrees, Some CAS

requirements may be satisfied by taking courses such as

CEE/EES cross-listed courses that can reduce this total.

sophomore year, first semester (17 credit hours)

MATH 23 Calculus III (4)

MECH 2 Elementary Engineering Mechanics (3)

CHM 51 Organic CHEM I (3)

CHM 53 Organic CHEM Lab I (1)

AS courses/electives* (6)

sophomore year, second semester (17 credit hours)

MATH 205 Linear Methods (3)

PHY 21 Introductory Physics II (4)

PHY 22 Introductory Physics Lab II (1)

CEE 170 Introduction to Environmental

Engineering (4)

CEE 272 Environmental Risk Assessment (2)

AS course/elective* (3)

junior year, first semester (17 credit hours)

CEE 12 Civil Engineering Statistics (2)

CEE 121 Mechanics of Fluids (3)

CEE 276 Env. Engineering Processes (3)

CHE 31 MAT. & Energy Bal. Of CHE Process

(3)

AS course/elective* (6)

junior year, second semester (17 credit hours)

CEE 222 Hydraulic Engineering (3)

CEE 274 Environmental Water Chemistry (3)

CHE 60 Unit Ops Survey (3)

ECO 1 Principles of Economics (4)

AS courses/electives* (4)

senior year, first semester (16 credit hours)

CEE 142 Fundamentals of Soil Mechanics (3)

CEE 378 Solid & Haz. Waste Management (3)

EES 31 Intro. Env./Organismal Biology (4)

AS courses/electives* (6)

senior year, second semester (16 credit hours)

CEE 275 Enviro-Geo-Hydraulics Lab (2)

EES 22 Exploring Earth (3)

Earth Science Elective* (3)

Technical electives** (3)

AS courses/electives* (5)

fifth year, first semester (14 credit hours)

CEE 202 Planning and ENGR. Economics (3)

CEE 203 Professional Development (2)

112 Lehigh University Course Catalog 2009-2010

CEE/EES 379 Env. Case Studies (3)

Technical electives** (3)

AS courses/electives* (3)

fifth year, second semester (15 credit hours)

CEE 377 Environmental Engineering Design***

(3)

Technical elective** (3)

AS courses/electives* (6)

Free elective (3)

*Earth Science Elective; list of approved courses available

from CEE department.

**9 technical (approved) elective credits approved by the

academic advisor to satisfy proficiency in three focus areas of

water supply and resources, environmental chemistry, and

hazardous waste management; approved list available from

CEE department.

***CE 290 acceptable substitute when offered as a multidis-

ciplinary course that includes environmental engineering as

a major focus

Arts-Industrial Engineering

A total of 160-162 credit hours is needed for the bache-

lor of arts and bachelor of science degrees.

sophomore year, first semester (17 credit hours)

MATH 23 Calculus III (4)

PHY 21 Introductory Physics II (4)

PHY 22 Introductory Physics Lab II (1)

IE 111 Engineering Probability and Statistics

(3)

IE 112 Computer Graphics (1)

ECO 1 Principles of Economics (4)

sophomore year, second semester (16 credit hours)

IE 121 Applied Engineering Statistics (3)

IE 131 Work Systems and Facilities Planning

(3)

IE 132 Work Systems and Facilities Planning

Lab (1)

MATH 205 Linear Methods (3)

AS courses/electives (6)

junior year, first semester (15 credit hours)

ACCT 108 Fundamentals of Accounting (3)

MAT 33 Engineering Materials and

Processes (3)

AS courses/electives (9)

junior year, second semester (16 credit hours)

IE 122 Software Tools (1)

IE 220 Introduction to Operations Research

(3)

ECE 83 Introduction to Electrical Engineering

(3)

IE 224 Information Systems Analysis and

Design (3)

AS courses/electives (6)

senior year, first semester (16 credit hours)

IE 215 Fundamentals of Modern

Manufacturing (3)

IE 216 Manufacturing Laboratory (1)

MECH 2 Elementary Engineering Mechanics (3)

AS courses/electives (9)

senior year, second semester (15 credit hours)

IE 226 Engineering Economy and Decision

Analysis (3)

ME 104 Thermodynamics I (3)

IE Elective (See IE Program for Possible Electives)

(3)

AS courses/electives (6)

summer

IE 100 Industrial Employment (0)

fifth year (34 credit hours)

See program description for senior year of Industrial

Engineering.

Arts-Information and Systems

Engineering

A total of 158-160 credit hours is needed for the bache-

lor of arts and bachelor of science degrees.

sophomore year, first semester (16 credit hours)

IE 111 Engineering Probability and

Statistics (3)

MATH 23 Calculus III (4)

CSE 17 Structured Programming and Data

Structures (3)

AS courses /electives (6)

sophomore year, second semester (17 credit hours)

IE 121 Applied Engineering Statistics (3)

MATH 205 Linear Methods (3)

ACCT 108 Fundamentals of Accounting (3)

PHY 21, 22 Introductory Physics II and

Laboratory (5)

AS course /elective (3)

junior year, first semester (16 credit hours)

IE 122 Software Tools (1)

IE 220 Introduction to Operations

Research (3)

BIS 211 Management Information Systems (3)

MECH 2 Elementary Engineering

Mechanics (3), or

ME 104 Thermodynamics I (3), or

MAT 33 Engineering Materials and

Processes (3)

AS courses /electives (6)

junior year, second semester (16 credit hours)

IE 170 Algorithms in Systems Engineering (3)

IE 171 Algorithms in Systems Engineering

Laboratory (1)

IE 275 Fundamentals of Web Applications (3)

ECE 83 Introduction to Electrical

Engineering (3)

AS courses /electives (6)

senior year, first semester (16 credit hours)

IE 224 Information Systems Analysis and

Design (3)

ECO 1 Principles of Economics (4)

TE Technical Elective (6)*

AS course /elective (3)

senior year, second semester (16 credit hours)

IE 226 Engineering Economy (3)

IE 305 Simulation (3)

IE 339 Stochastic Models (3)

TE Technical Elective (3)*

AS courses /electives (4)

summer

IE 100 Industrial Employment (0)

Arts-Engineering 113

fifth year, first semester (15 credit hours)

IE 316 Advanced Operations Research

Techniques (3)

IE 372 Systems Engineering Design (3)

TE Technical Elective (3)*

AS courses /electives (6)

fifth year, second semester (15 credit hours)

IE 154 Senior Project (3)

IE 341 Data Communication Systems

Analysis and Design (3)

TE Technical Elective (3)*

AS courses /electives (6)

*Technical Electives from approved list

Arts-Materials Science and Engineering

A total of 160-162 credit hours is needed for the bache-

lor of arts and bachelor of science degrees.

sophomore year, first semester (16 credit hours)

MAT 33 Engineering Materials and Processes

(3)

MATH 23 Calculus III (4)

PHY 21 Introductory Physics II (4)

PHY 22 Introductory Physics Lab II (1)

MAT 10 Materials Laboratory (1)

AS courses/elective (3)

sophomore year, second semester (17 credit hours)

MECH 2 Elementary Engineering Mechanics (3)

MATH 205 Linear Methods (3)

MAT 20 Computational Methods in Materials

Science (2)

MAT 203 Materials Structure at the Nanoscale

(3)

MAT 205 Thermodynamics of Macro/Nanoscale

Materials (3)

AS courses/electives (3)

junior year, first semester (15 credit hours)

MAT 201 Physical Properties of Materials (3)

MAT 216 Diffusion and Phase Transformations

(3)

MAT 218 Mechanical Behavior of

Macro/Nanoscale Materials (3)

ECO 1 Principles of Economics (4)

MAT 101 Professional Development (2)

junior year, second semester (15 credit hours)

ENGR 211 Integrated Product Development

Projects I (3)

MAT 204 Processing and Properties of Polymeric

Materials (3)

MAT 206 Processing and Properties of Metals (3)

MAT 210 Macro, Micro and Nanoscale Materials

Processing Laboratory (2)

MAT 214 Processing and Properties of Ceramic

Materials (3)

MAT 226 Materials Selection in Design (1)

senior year, first semester (17 credit hours)

ENGR 212 Integrated Product Development

Projects II (2)

AS courses/electives (15)

senior year, second semester (15 credit hours)

CHE 60 Unit Operations Survey (3)

AS courses/electives (12)

fifth year (34 credit hours)

See program description for senior year of Materials

Science and Engineering, except replace ENGR 212 (2)

with AS course (3) and CHE 60 (3) with AS course (3).

Note: Students interested in the industrial or research

options should consult with the department chairperson

prior to their fourth year. Students selecting the research

option should elect MAT 240, Research Techniques, in

the first semester of the senior year. Students selecting

the industrial option should elect MAT 327 & MAT

329, Industrial Project.

Arts-Mechanical Engineering

A total of 161-163 credit hours is needed for the bache-

lor of arts and the bachelor of science degrees.

sophomore year, first semester (16 credit hours)

ME 10 Graphics for Engineering Design (3)

MECH 3 Fundamentals of Engineering

Mechanics (3)

MAT 33 Engineering Materials and

Processes (3)

MATH 23 Analytical Geometry & Calculus III

(4)

AS courses/elective (3)

sophomore year, second semester (17 credit hours)

ME 104 Thermodynamics I (3)

MECH 12 Strength of Materials (3)

PHY 21, 22 Introductory Physics II and Laboratory

(5)

MATH 205 Linear Methods (3)

AS courses/electives (9)

junior year, first semester (17 credit hours)

ME 21 Mechanical Engineering Lab (1)

ME 231 Fluid Mechanics (3)

MECH 102 Dynamics (3)

ME 215 Engineering Reliability (3) or

MATH 208 Complex Variables (3) or

MATH 230 Numerical Methods (3) or

MATH 231 Probability and Statistics (3)

AS courses/electives (6)

junior year, second semester (15 credit hours)

ME 121 Mechanical Engineering Lab II (1)

ME 211 Mechanical Engineering Design I (3)

ME 240 Manufacturing (3)

ME 242 Mechanical Engineering Systems (3) or

ME 245 Engineering Vibrations (3)

ME 252 Mechanical Elements (3)

ECE 83 Fundamentals of Electrical Engineering

(3)

ECE 162 Electrical Laboratory (1)

senior year (34 credit hours)

ME 111 Professional Development (1) [Fall

only]

ME 212 Mechanical Engineering Design II (2)

[Fall only]

ME 207 Senior Laboratory (2)

ME 321 Heat Transfer (3)

AS courses/electives (26)

fifth year (30 credit hours)

See program description for senior year of Mechanical

Engineering & Mechanics.

114 Lehigh University Course Catalog 2009-2010

Asian Studies

Professors. Constance Cook, Ph.D. (U.C., Berkeley)

Program Director, Modern Languages and Literature;

Norman Girardot, Ph.D. (Chicago), Religion Studies;

Kenneth Kraft, Ph.D. (Princeton), Religion Studies;

David Pankenier, Ph.D. (Stanford), Modern Languages

and Literature; Nicola Tannenbaum, Ph.D. (Iowa),

Sociology and Anthropology; Raymond Wylie, Ph.D.

(London, England), International Relations.

Associate Professors. Gail Cooper, Ph.D. (U.C., Santa

Barbara), History; Vera Leigh Fennel, Ph.D. (Chicago);

Michael Mendelson Ph.D. (San Diego), Philosophy; Kiri

Lee, Ph.D. (Harvard), Modern Languages and

Literature; Amardeep Singh, Ph.D. (Duke), English.

Assistant Professors. Nandini Deo, Ph.D. (Yale); John

Jirik, Ph.D. (Texas at Austin); Robert Rozehnal, Ph.D.

(Duke), Religion Studies; Yuping Zhang, Ph.D.

The Asian Studies program provides undergraduates an

opportunity to acquire a systematic knowledge of East

Asia with growing foci on Southeast Asia and South

Asia. The program focuses on the rich historical and cul-

tural heritage of the countries of Asia, as well as their

growing importance in world affairs.

The overall program is administered by the Asian Studies

Committee, an interdisciplinary body of faculty with

special interests in the region. This committee oversees

both the formal academic work within the program as

well as extracurricular activities. It also cooperates with

the Asian Cultural Society and other student organiza-

tions involved in Asian Studies.

The courses listed are regularly offered in the program

and new ones are currently under development in several

subject areas. (Consult the Registrar’s Schedule of Classes

for specific offerings in any particular semester.)

Courses offered at other LVAIC institutions may be

taken for credit by Lehigh students. Students are encour-

aged to participate in a variety of extracurricular

activities that are offered by the Asian Studies Program,

such as special lectures and seminars, films, performanc-

es, and exhibits.

For further information, interested students should con-

sult Dr. Constance Cook, Director, Asian Studies

Program, Maginnes Hall, 9 W. Packer Ave, 758-3091

(cac8), or any of the Asian Studies faculty listed above

(www.lehigh.edu/~inasp/).

Major in Asian Studies

The Asian Studies major is designed to accomplish three

goals: to ground the student in a regional language and

culture, to survey various disciplines in Asian Studies

more broadly, and to provide advanced research opportu-

nities. The program, when successfully completed,

prepares the student for further graduate work, profes-

sional education, or employment in the public or private

sector. There is an increasing demand for graduates who

combine a major in a disciplinary field (e.g., business,

economics, international relations) with a second major

(or minor) in Asian Studies, including Chinese or Japan-

ese language competence.

The major in Asian Studies may have a Chinese studies

or a Japanese studies concentration, each requiring a

minimum of 9 courses (36 credits). The distribution of

credits is as follows:

I. A. 2 years (or 16 credits) of an Asian language which

is not the student’s native language;

B. 3 courses (or 10 credits) of humanities and social

science courses under the 200 level (see list below);

II. 2 courses from either:

A. Advanced language and culture, or

B. Humanities and social sciences. At lease one course

must be at the 300 level.

The academic advisor is Dr. Constance Cook, Director,

Asian Studies Program, Maginnes Hall, 9 W. Packer Ave,

758-3091 (cac8). Students may also request an advisor

from among the Asian Studies faculty above.

Minor in Asian Studies

The minor in Asian Studies is intended to complement a

student’s major field of study and it is flexible according

to individual needs. Students are free to survey the field

broadly or concentrate in a specific area such as Chinese

or Japanese studies. The minor comprises a minimum of

4 courses (16 credits) in Asian studies, chosen from an

approved list in consultation with the minor advisor, Dr.

Constance Cook, Director, Asian Studies Program, Mag-

innes Hall, 9 W. Packer Ave, 758-3091 (cac8).

While students minoring in Asian Studies are encour-

aged to study languages, only 8 credits of language study

count towards the Asian Studies minor. Students inter-

ested only in language study are encouraged to minor in

Chinese or Japanese language (see MLL).

Study Abroad Programs

Students are encouraged to spend a summer, semester, or

year in an approved study program in China, Japan,

Korea, Thailand, India, or elsewhere in Asia. Students

who wish to study abroad, and who wish to have the

academic work taken in that program count toward a

Lehigh degree, must have a GPA of 3.0 or higher. Any

student with a lower GPA may petition the Committee

on the Standing of Students for an exception to this rule

before applying to an approved study abroad program.

These programs are open to all LVAIC students subject

to the regulations of their home institutions. For details

on all programs, consult Neil McGurty, Director, Study

Abroad Office, Coxe Hall, 32 Sayre Dr, 610-758-3351,

(www.lehigh.edu/studyabroad). A limited number of

Asian Studies study abroad scholarships are available.

I. Core Requirements

A. Language and Culture: Chinese or Japanese or other

approved Asian languages to intermediate level (2 years);

or 4 courses (16 credits), based on placement, chosen

from the following *:

ASIA 91 Elementary Asian Language and

Culture Abroad (1-8)

ASIA 191 Intermediate Asian Language and

Culture Abroad (1-8)

CHIN, JPNS 91 Language and Culture Abroad I (1-8)

CHIN, JPNS 191 Language and Culture Abroad II (1-8)

CHIN 001 Beginning Chinese Reading &

Writing I (2)

CHIN 002 Beginning Chinese Reading &

Writing II (2)

CHIN 003 Beginning Spoken Chinese I (2)

CHIN 004 Beginning Spoken Chinese II (2)

CHIN 011 Intermediate Chinese Reading &

Writing I (2)

Asian Studies 115

CHIN 012 Intermediate Chinese Reading &

Writing II (2)

CHIN 013 Intermediate Spoken Chinese I (2)

CHIN 014 Intermediate Spoken Chinese II (2)

CHIN 111. Advanced Chinese Reading &

Writing I (2)

CHIN 112 Advanced Chinese Reading &

Writing II (2)

CHIN 113 Advanced Spoken Chinese I (2)

CHIN 114 Advanced Spoken Chinese II (2)

JPNS 1 Elementary Japanese I (4) fall

JPNS 2. Elementary Japanese II (4) spring

JPNS 11 Intermediate Japanese I (4) fall

JPNS 12 Intermediate Japanese II (4) spring

JPNS 141 Advanced Japanese I (4) fall

JPNS 142 Advanced Japanese II (4) spring

JPNS 145 Advanced Japanese Conversation and

Culture I (4)

JPNS 146 Advanced Japanese Conversation and

Culture II (4)

*Note 1. Students with prior knowledge of Chinese or

Japanese will be placed on the basis of a competence test.

Native speakers placing out of one Asian language will be

required to study another Asian language.

B. Humanities and Social Science: 3 courses (minimum

10 credits) chosen from the following:

ASIA 60 (REL 60) Religions of South Asia (4)

ASIA 61 (IR 61) Pacific Asian International

Relations (4)

ASIA 64 (REL 64) Religions of China (4)

ASIA 65 (REL 65) Religions of Japan (4)

ASIA 67 (REL 67) Japanese Civilization (4)

ASIA 68 (MLL 68) Japanese Language: Past and

Present (4)

ASIA 73 (GCP 73, MLL 73, WS 73) Film,

Fiction, and Gender in Modern China

(4)

ASIA 74 (MLL 74) Chinese Cultural Program

(1-8)

ASIA 75 (HIST 75, MLL 75) Chinese

Civilization (4)

ASIA 76 (HIST 76, MLL 76) Understanding

Contemporary China (4)

ASIA 77 (REL 77) The Islamic Tradition (4)

ASIA 78 (MLL 78) Asian-American Studies (4)

ASIA 100 Seminar in Asian Studies (1-4)

ASIA 125 (MLL 125) Immortal Images:

Traditional Chinese Literature in

Translation (4)

ASIA 127 (MLL 127) ORIENTations:

Approaches to Modern Asia (4)

ASIA 140 (PHIL 140) Eastern Philosophy (4)

ASIA 145 (REL 145) Islam and the Modern

World (4)

ASIA 146 (REL 146) Islam in South Asia (4)

ASIA 160 (REL 160) The Taoist Tradition (4)

ASIA 161 (IR 161) China in World Affairs (4)

ASIA 162 (REL 162) Zen Buddhism (4)

ASIA 163 (IR 163) Japan in World Affairs (4)

ASIA 164 (REL 164, IR 164) Japan’s Response to

the West (4)

ASIA 165 (GCP 165, MLL 165) Love and

Revolution in Shanghai (4)

ASIA 167 (REL 167) Engaged Buddhism (4)

ASIA 168 (REL 168) Buddhism in the Modern

World (4)

ASIA 169 (REL 169) Classics of Asian Religion

(4)

ASIA 170 (HIST 170) Japan’s Meiji Restoration

(4)

ASIA 184 (ANTH 184) Cultures of the Pacific

(4)

ASIA 187 (ANTH 187) Peoples of Southeast

Asia (4)

ASIA 188 (ANTH 188) Southeast Asians in

Southeast Asia and America (4)

II. Advanced Electives

Two courses (7 or 8 credits) chosen from the following,

1 course of which must be at the 300 level:

A. Language and Culture:

CHIN 251 Special Topics (1-4)

CHIN 252 Business Chinese (1-2)

CHIN 253 Chinese Fiction (1-2)

CHIN 254 Intensive Conversation (1-2)

CHIN 255 Newspaper Readings in Chinese (1-2)

JPNS 290 Special Topics (1-4)

ASIA 291 Advanced Asian Language and Culture

Abroad (1-8)

CHIN, JPNS 291 Language and Culture

Abroad III (1-8)

CHIN 371 Special Topics (1-4)

JPNS 390 Special Topics (1-4)

B. Humanities and Social Sciences:

ASIA 221 (REL 221) Topics in Asian

Religions (4)

ASIA 240 (PHIL 240) Figures/Themes in Eastern

Philosophy (4)

ASIA 247 (REL 247) Islamic Mysticism (4)

ASIA 254 (REL 254) Buddhism and Ecology (4)

ASIA 340 (HIST 340) History of Japanese

Industrialization Since 1800 (3-4)

ASIA 361 Internship in Asian Studies (1-4)

ASIA 364. (IR 364) International Relations of

Pacific Asia (4)

ASIA 371. Advanced Readings in Asian Studies

(1-4)

ASIA 381. Special Topics in Asian Studies (1-4)

ASIA 386 (GCP 386) Chinese Culture in a

Multinational Workplace (3)

ASIA 391. Senior Seminar in Asian Studies (1-4)

ASIA 399. Senior Thesis in Asian Studies (1-4)

C. Other suitable courses at LVAIC or other approved insti-

tutions in the United States.

D. Other suitable courses in approved study abroad pro-

grams in Asia.

I. Core Courses

A. Language and Culture:

ASIA 91. Elementary Asian Language and Culture

Abroad (1-8)

Elementary language and culture abroad other than

Chinese or Japanese. (HU)

116 Lehigh University Course Catalog 2009-2010

ASIA 191. Intermediate Asian Language and

Culture Abroad (1-8)

Intermediate language and culture abroad other than

Chinese and Japanese. (HU)

CHIN, JPNS 91. Language and Culture Abroad

I (1-8)

Intensive study of conversation in the language of the

country; reading, development of writing skills and

selected aspects of the culture. (HU)

CHIN, JPNS 191. Language and Culture Abroad

II (1-8)

Intensive study of conversation in the language of the

country; rapid review of basic grammar, the reading and

analysis of moderately difficult texts, development of

rudimentary writing skills, supplemented study of select-

ed aspects of contemporary civilization. Prerequisites:

consent of chair and proficiency examination in the tar-

get country. (HU)

CHIN 001. Beginning Chinese Reading &

Writing I (2)

Introduction to the Chinese writing system and begin-

ning character acquisition; reading practice with pinyin

transcription system. (Fall) Co-requisite: Chin 003 or

permission of the instructor. Staff. (HU)

CHIN 002. Beginning Chinese Reading &

Writing II (2)

Continuation of Chin 001: continued character acquisi-

tion, reading practice in pinyin and simple character

texts. (Spring) Prerequisites: Chin 003, Chin 004 or per-

mission of the instructor. Staff. (HU)

CHIN 003. Beginning Spoken Chinese I (2)

Introduction to Mandarin Chinese pronunciation, the

pinyin transcription system, and modern colloquial

Chinese; emphasis on oral proficiency. Not open to

native speakers. (Fall) Co-requisite: Chin 001 or permis-

sion of the instructor. Staff. (HU)

CHIN 004. Beginning Spoken Chinese II (2)

Continuation of Chin 003: further practice with text-

based dialogues in modern colloquial Chinese; emphasis

on oral proficiency. Not open to native speakers.

(Spring) Prerequisite: Chin 002 or permission of the

instructor. Staff. (HU)

CHIN 011. Intermediate Chinese Reading &

Writing I (2)

Continued focus on vocabulary/character acquisition

and text-based reading and writing exercises using

Chinese characters. (Fall) Prerequisites: Chin 013 or per-

mission of the instructor. Staff. (HU)

CHIN 012. Intermediate Chinese Reading &

Writing II (2)

Continuation of Chin 011: vocabulary/character acquisi-

tion and text-based reading and writing exercises using

Chinese characters. (Spring). Prerequisites: Chin 013,

Chin 014, or permission of the instructor. Staff. (HU)

CHIN 013. Intermediate Spoken Chinese I (2)

Further development of communicative skills in Chinese

using situational dialogues and class discussion; emphasis

on oral proficiency. Not open to native speakers. (Fall)

Prerequisite: Chin 004, Chin 011, or permission of the

instructor. Staff. (HU)

CHIN 014. Intermediate Spoken Chinese II (2)

Continuation of Chin 013: further development of com-

municative skills in Chinese using situational dialogues

and class discussion; emphasis on oral proficiency. Not

open to native speakers. (Fall) Prerequisite: Chin 012,

Chin 013, or permission of the instructor. Staff. (HU)

CHIN 111. Advanced Chinese Reading & Writing

I (2)

Reading, translation, and writing practice using text-

based exercises, short stories, essays, and other selected

materials. (Fall). Prerequisites: Chin 014, Chin 113 or

permission of the instructor. Staff. (HU)

CHIN 112. Advanced Chinese Reading & Writing

II (2)

Continuation of Chin 111: reading, translation, writing

exercises using text-based exercises, short stories, essays,

and other selected materials. (Spring). Prerequisites:

Chin 111, Chin 113, or permission of the instructor.

Staff. (HU)

CHIN 113. Advanced Spoken Chinese I (2)

Topical discussions and oral presentations in Chinese.

(Fall) Prerequisite: Chin 014, Chin 111, or permission

of the instructor. Staff. (HU)

CHIN 114. Advanced Spoken Chinese II (2)

Continuation of Chin 113: topical discussions and oral

presentations in Chinese. (Fall) Prerequisite: Chin 112,

Chin 113, or permission of the instructor. Staff. (HU)

JPNS 1. Elementary Japanese I (4) fall

Introduction to the oral and written language with

emphasis on spoken Japanese and syllabaries. Language

laboratory. (HU)

JPNS 2. Elementary Japanese II (4) spring

Continuation of Japanese 1. Prerequisite: Japanese 1 or

equivalent. (HU)

JPNS 11. Intermediate Japanese I (4) fall

Continuation of Japanese 2. Structural patterns in both

spoken and written languages. 150 kanji (Chinese char-

acters). Prerequisite: JPNS 2 or equivalent. (HU)

JPNS 12. Intermediate Japanese II (4) spring

Continuation of Japanese 11. Prerequisite: Japanese 11

or equivalent. (HU)

JPNS 141. Advanced Japanese I (4) fall

Advanced reading and oral comprehension.

Conversation and writing practice. Prerequisite: JPNS 12

or equivalent. (HU)

JPNS 142. Advanced Japanese II (4) spring

Continuation of JPNS 141. Prerequisite: JPNS 141 or

equivalent. (HU)

JPNS 145. Advanced Japanese Conversation and

Culture I (4)

This course emphasizes oral skills and culture by dis-

cussing topics related to modern Japan. Advanced

writing skills, especially the knowledge of Kanji, are

introduced individually. Prerequisite: Jpns 12 or consent

of instructor. (HU)

JPNS 146. Advanced Japanese Conversation and

Culture II (4)

Continuation of Jpns 145. Emphasis on advanced oral

and writing skills, and knowledge of the culture.

Prerequisite: Jpns 145 or consent of instructor. (HU)

Asian Studies 117

B. Humanities and Social Science:

ASIA 60. (REL 60) Religions of South Asia (4)

A thematic introduction to the foundational religious

traditions of South Asia: Hinduism, Jainism, Buddhism,

Sikhism and Islam. Students explore the social and spiri-

tual dimensions of these religious worlds through

scripture, ritual practices, narrative and teaching tradi-

tions, music and art. Rozehnal. (HU)

ASIA 61. (IR 61) Pacific Asian International

Relations (4)

Introduction to Pacific Asian international relations,

with emphasis on post-1945 period: historical back-

ground; Cold War conflicts; China’s rise to power;

Japan’s growing role; Korea and the NIC’s; Southeast

Asia; U.S. and Russian policies; current and future

issues. Wylie (SS)

ASIA 64. (REL 64) Religions of China (4)

History and meaning of the major forms of Chinese reli-

gion- especially Confucianism and Neo-Confucianism,

Taoist mysticism, Buddhism (Ch’an/Zen), and popular

religion. Girardot. (HU)

ASIA 65. (REL 65) Religions of Japan (4)

A survey of Japan’s diverse religious heritage and its

impact on contemporary culture. Japanese approaches to

the self, the world, and the sacred are considered in com-

parative perspective. Topics covered include: Shinto,

Buddhism, Zen, Confucianism, the way of the warrior,

folklore, and postwar movements. Kraft. (HU)

ASIA 67. (REL 67) Japanese Civilization (4)

The history and culture of Japan from its origins to the

present. Special consideration will be given to the rise

and fall of the warrior class, developments in art and reli-

gion, the dynamics of family life, and Japan’s “economic

miracle.” Kraft. (H/S)

ASIA 68. (MLL 68) Japanese Language: Past and

Present (4)

Historical and contemporary aspects of the Japanese lan-

guage, including the origins of Japanese in relation to

Korean, the influence of Chinese, syntactic features

which reflect the hierarchical character of Japanese socie-

ty, differences in female and male speech, and use of

foreign loan words. Prerequisite JPNS 1. Lee (HU)

ASIA 73. (GCP 73, MLL73, WS 73) Film, Fiction,

and Gender in Modern China (4)

Study of the struggle for an individual “modern” identity

out of traditionally defined roles for men and women as

depicted by Chinese writers and filmmakers. Class, texts,

and films in English. Students interested in setting up a

corollary Chinese language component for credit as Chin

251, may discuss this possibility with the professor.

Cook (HU)

ASIA 74. (MLL 74) Chinese Cultural Program (1-8)

A summer program in China, taught in English. (HU)

ASIA 75. (HIST 75, MLL 75) Chinese

Civilization (4)

The development of traditional Chinese thought, beliefs,

technology, and institutions from a historical perspective,

from earliest times to China’s encounter with the West.

Pankenier (H/S)

ASIA 76. (HIST 76, MLL 76) Understanding

Contemporary China (4)

An overview of recent history, politics, economy, reli-

gion, problems of modernization, popular culture, and

attitudes. Contemporary Chinese society viewed against

the backdrop of tradition and the tumultuous history of

twentieth-century China. Pankenier (SS)

ASIA 77. (REL 77) The Islamic Tradition (4)

A thematic introduction to Islamic history, doctrine and

practice. Topics include: Qur’an; prophecy and sacred

history; ritual practices; community life; legal interpreta-

tion; art and aesthetics; mysticism; politics and polemics.

Rozehnal. (HU)

ASIA 78. (MLL 78) Asian-American Studies (4)

A survey of issues concerning Asians living in the United

States from the perspectives of history, language, litera-

ture, and film. (HU)

ASIA 100. Seminar in Asian Studies (1-4)

Topics in Asian Studies. May be repeated for credit.

(HU/SS depending on topic)

ASIA 125. (MLL 125) Immortal Images:

Traditional Chinese Literature in Translation (4)

Explore age-old themes in literature as diverse as pre-

modern novels, ghost stories, poetry, divination manuals,

and medical texts. Students interested in setting up a

corollary Chinese language component for credit as

CHIN 251, may discuss this possibility with the profes-

sor. Cook (HU)

ASIA 127. (MLL 127) ORIENTations: Approaches

to Modern Asia (4)

A survey of the rapid economic, political, and social

changes occurring in East, South, and Southeast Asian

countries. How do the contemporary societies and his-

torical traditions of Asian countries differ from the West?

What distinguishes our perspectives on politics, individ-

ual liberties, civic responsibility, religious faith, the

“pursuit of happiness”? How are Asians represented (or

misrepresented) in the West, and how will the ongoing

process of globalization change, and be changed by,

Asian cultures? Pankenier. (H/S)

ASIA 140. (PHIL 140) Eastern Philosophy (4)

Survey of selected texts and issues in the eastern philo-

sophical traditions. Attention will be given to the

development and interrelations of these traditions as well

as a comparison of western and eastern treatments of

selected issues. Areas of focus may include

Confucianism, Taoism, and Zen Buddhism. (HU)

ASIA 145. (GCP 145, REL 145) Islam and the

Modern World (4)

Examines how numerous Muslim thinkers-religious

scholars, modernists, and Islamists-have responded to the

changes and challenges of the colonial and post-colonial

eras. Special emphasis is placed on the public debates

over Islamic authority and authenticity in contemporary

South Asia. Rozehnal. (HU)

ASIA 146. (REL 146) Islam in South Asia (4)

A survey of the dynamic encounter between Islamic and

Indic civilizations. Topics include: Islamic identity, piety

and practice; art and aesthetic traditions; inter-commu-

nal exchange and conflict; the colonial legacy; and the

politics of contemporary religious nationalism. Rozehnal.

(HU)

118 Lehigh University Course Catalog 2009-2010

ASIA 160. (REL 160) The Taoist Tradition (4)

Consideration of the religious and cultural significance

of Taoism in its various historical forms. Primary atten-

tion will be given to a close reading of some of the most

important texts of the early philosophical tradition (e.g.

Tao Te Ching, Chuang Tzu) and of the later religious

tradition (e.g. Pao P’u Tzu and other selections from the

Tao Tsang). Contemporary implications of Taoist

thought will also be considered (e.g. “The Tao of

Physics”, “a Taoist on Wall Street”, and “the Tao of

Japanese Management”). Girardot. (HU)

ASIA 161. (IR 161) China in World Affairs (4)

China in world affairs, emphasizing role in Pacific Rim:

historical background; domestic politics; foreign and

security policies; relations with regional and global pow-

ers; policies toward Asia and Third World; current and

future issues. Wylie. (SS)

ASIA 162. (REL 162) Zen Buddhism (4)

History, doctrines, and practices of Zen Buddhism in

China, Japan, and the West. Monastic life, notable Zen

masters, Zen’s cultural impact, and enlightenment.

Current aspects of the Zen tradition. (Optional medita-

tion workshop.) Kraft. (HU)

ASIA 163. (IR 163) Japan in World Affairs (4)

Japan in world affairs, emphasizing role in Pacific Rim:

historical background; domestic politics; foreign and

security policies; relations with regional and global pow-

ers; policies toward Asia and Third World; current and

future issues. Wylie. (SS)

ASIA 164. (REL 164, IR 164) Japan’s Response to

the West (4)

A survey of Japanese history and culture from 1500 to

the present, following the theme of Japan’s contact with

the West. What enabled Japan to modernize and

Westernize so successfully? Topics covered include: the

expulsion of Christianity, the first samurai mission to the

U.S., the postwar American occupation, and contempo-

rary issues. Readings include Japanese novels and short

stories (in translation). Kraft. (H/S)

ASIA 165. (GCP 165, MLL 165) Love and

Revolution in Shanghai (4)

This project-based course will examine human relation-

ships and political-economic changes in Shanghai

through the lens of literature, film, and a selection of

other readings. Students will discuss the conflicts

between and influences of pre-communist, communist,

and capitalist systems as played out in the Shanghai area.

Students will write research papers on aspects of histori-

cal or modern Shanghai, and present their results to the

class. They will also be responsible for blackboard and

in-class discussions of assigned readings and films. Cook.

(HU)

ASIA 167. (REL 167) Engaged Buddhism (4)

Examines a contemporary international movement that

applies Buddhist teachings and practices to social, politi-

cal, and environmental issues. Topics include: important

thinkers, forms of engagement, and areas of controversy.

Kraft. (HU)

ASIA 168. (REL 168) Buddhism in the Modern

World (4)

Explores contemporary Buddhism in Asia, America, and

Europe. Topics include the plight of Tibet, Buddhist

environmentalism, and the emergence of a socially

engaged Buddhism. How are Westerners adapting this

ancient tradition to address present-day concerns? Kraft.

(HU)

ASIA 169. (REL 169) Classics of Asian

Religion (4)

Sacred scriptures of Asia and an introduction to the reli-

gions they represent. What do these texts teach about

reality, humanity, divinity, and society? How is the path

of spiritual practice presented in the different traditions?

Prerequisite: one prior course in Religion or Asian

Studies. Kraft, Girardot. (HU)

ASIA 170. (HIST 170) Japan’s Meiji

Restoration (4)

Explores the revolutionary character of the political

upheaval in 1868 that led to the fall of the ruling shogun

and the dissolution of the elite samurai class. Examines

both the causes of these major political and social

changes and their continuing impact upon Japanese cul-

ture and society. Cooper. (HU)

ASIA 184. (ANTH 184) Cultures of the Pacific (4)

Cultures of the Pacific Islanders prior to substantial dis-

ruption by European influences. Culture histories,

language families, social organizations, and religions of

Australian, Melanesian, Polynesian, and Micronesian

peoples. Gatewood. (SS)

ASIA 187. (ANTH 187) Peoples of Southeast

Asia (4)

Peoples and cultures of Burma, Laos, Cambodia,

Thailand, Malaysia, Singapore, Indonesia, and the

Philippines. World view, religion, economy, politics, and

social organization. Tannenbaum. (SS)

ASIA 188. (ANTH 188) Southeast Asians in

Southeast Asia and America (4)

In this course we explore the ways in which different

peoples lived in Southeast Asia, why they moved to

America, and the ways in which this move affected their

cultures. Topics explored include: aspects of their culture,

particularly religion and social organizations, motivations

for migrating (including war, political, and economic

reasons), and their adaptations to America and American

responses to their presences. No prerequisites.

Tannenbaum. (H/S)

II. Advanced Electives

A. Language and Culture:

CHIN 251. Special Topics (1-4)

Literary and linguistics topics not covered in regular

courses. May be repeated for credit. Prerequisite: consent

of the instructor. (HU)

CHIN 252. Business Chinese (1-2)

Directed readings on the Chinese business environment

and business terminology. Emphasis on reading compre-

hension and translation. May be repeated for credit.

Prerequisite: CHIN 112, CHIN 114, or permission of

the instructor. Staff. (HU)

CHIN 253. Chinese Fiction (1-2)

Students read modern Chinese short stories or a novel.

Emphasis on reading comprehension and translation.

May be repeated for credit. Prerequisite: CHIN 112,

CHIN 114, or permission of instructor. Staff. (HU)

CHIN 254. Intensive Conversation (1-2)

Conversational practice based on topical readings. For

Asian Studies 119

advanced speakers only. May be repeated for credit.

Prerequisite: CHIN 112, CHIN 114, or permission of

the instructor. Staff. (HU)

CHIN 255. Newspaper Readings in Chinese (1-2)

Newspaper readings in Chinese. Emphasis on reading

comprehension and translation. May be repeated for

credit. Prerequisite: CHIN 112, CHIN 114, or permis-

sion of the instructor. Staff. (HU)

JPNS 290. Special Topics (1-4)

Literary or linguistics topics not covered in regular cours-

es. May be repeated for credit. Prerequisite: consent of

instructor. (HU)

ASIA 291. Advanced Asian Language and Culture

Abroad (1-8)

Advanced language and culture abroad other than

Chinese and Japanese. (HU)

CHIN, JPNS 291. Language and Culture Abroad

III (1-8)

Intensive practice of speaking and writing in the lan-

guage of the country aimed at providing the student

with extensive proficiency of expression and the ability

to discriminate linguistic usage. Idiomatic expressions

and an introduction to stylistics. Reading and analysis of

more difficult texts, supplemented by in-depth study of

selected aspects of contemporary civilization.

Prerequisites: consent of MLL chair and proficiency

examination in the target country.(HU)

CHIN 371. Special Topics (1-4)

Directed study of an author, genre, or period not covered

in regular courses. May be repeated once for credit.

Prerequisite: consent of the instructor. (HU)

JPNS 390. Special Topics (1-4)

B. Humanities and Social Sciences:

ASIA 221. (REL 221) Topics in Asian

Religions (4)

Selected thematic and comparative issues in different

Asian religious traditions. May include Buddhism and

Christianity, religion and martial arts, Asian religions in

America, Taoist meditation, Zen and Japanese business,

Buddhist ethics. May be repeated for credit. Girardot,

Kraft. (H/S)

ASIA 240. (PHIL 240) Figures/Themes in Eastern

Philosophy (4)

This seminar course will involve in-depth focus upon a

major figure in Eastern thought or upon the Eastern

treatment of a particular theme or set of themes.

Content varies. May be repeated more than once for

credit. (HU)

ASIA 247. (REL 247) Islamic Mysticism (4)

Sufism, the inner or ‘mystical’ dimension of Islam, has

deep historical roots and diverse expressions throughout

the Muslim world. Students examine Sufi doctrine and

ritual, the master-disciple relationship, and the tradition’s

impact on art and music, poetry and prose. Rozehnal.

(HU)

ASIA 254. (REL 254, ES 254) Buddhism and

Ecology (4)

Buddhism’s intellectual, ethical, and spiritual resources

are reexamined in light of contemporary environmental

problems. Is Buddhism the most green of the major

world religions? What are the moral implications of

actions that affect the environment? Prerequisite: One

prior course in religion, environmental studies, or Asian

studies. Kraft. (HU)

ASIA 340. (HIST 340) History of Japanese

Industrialization Since 1800 (3-4)

He late Tokugawa economic development, rise of an

entrepreneurial class, importation of western technology,

and the rise of social, political and economic which sup-

port industrial growth. Cooper. (SS)

ASIA 361. Internship in Asian Studies (1-4)

Internship in public or private agency involved in some

aspect of Asian studies. Individual faculty mentor.

Written report required. May be repeated for credit.

Program permission required. (HU/SS depending on

topic)

ASIA 364. (IR 364) International Relations of

Pacific Asia (4)

Research-oriented seminar on contemporary internation-

al relations of Pacific Asia. Special emphasis on China,

Japan and regional and global powers. Substantial

research paper on topic of student’s own choice is

required. Prerequisite: IR 61 or 161 or 163 or 164.

Wylie. (SS)

ASIA 371. Advanced Readings in Asian Studies (1-

Directed course of reading and writing in advanced topic

not covered in regular Asian Studies course offerings.

May be repeated for credit. Program permission

required. (HU/SS depending on topic)

ASIA 381. Special Topics in Asian Studies (1-4)

Advanced study of aspects of Asian studies not covered

in regular course offerings. Individual faculty supervi-

sion. Research paper required. May be repeated for

credit. Program permission required. (HU/SS depending

on topic)

ASIA 386. (GCP 386) Chinese Culture in a

Multinational Workplace (3)

Students explore the interaction between Chinese and

non-Chinese cultures at a variety of work sites in the city

of Shanghai, a port city that has involved people of

many nationalities since its birth in the 1840s. This proj-

ect-based course involves a faculty mentored practicum

at one or more specific sites related to the student’s own

field or major, assigned readings, weekly electronic black-

board discussions, and a written summary of the

experience. (H/S)

ASIA 391. Senior Seminar in Asian Studies (1-4)

Advanced seminar focusing on discussion and research

on specialized subjects in Asian studies. Variable subject

matter. Offered by faculty on rotating basis. May be

repeated for credit. Program permission required.

(HU/SS depending on topic)

ASIA 399. Senior Thesis in Asian Studies (1-4)

Advanced, individual research project on topic agreed

between faculty and student. Research paper and oral

defense required. May be repeated for credit. Open to

Asian studies majors only. Program permission required.

(HU/SS depending on topic)

120 Lehigh University Course Catalog 2009-2010

Astronomy and Astrophysics

Professors. George E. McCluskey, Jr., Ph.D.

(Pennsylvania), head; Gary G. DeLeo,

Ph.D.(Connecticut).

Assistant Professors. M. Virginia McSwain, Ph.D.

(Georgia State).

Astronomy and Astrophysics are offered in the depart-

ment of Physics.

Astrophysicists apply physics and mathematics to the

study of planets, stars, galaxies, pulsars, black holes,

quasars and the universe, among many other fascinating

objects in order to understand their origin, evolution

and ultimate fate. Students who major in astronomy or

astrophysics usually have very inquisitive minds and a

good aptitude for physics and mathematics. The bache-

lor degree programs in astronomy and astrophysics

provide the student with a solid background in laborato-

ry and theoretical astrophysics as well as in the

fundamentals of physics and mathematics. Research

opportunities are available to supplement classroom

instruction.

The bachelor of science degree in astrophysics is

designed for students who wish to go on to graduate

studies in astrophysics with the goal of becoming profes-

sional astronomers. Professional astronomers generally

find positions at colleges, and universities, national labs,

NASA or its contractors and in various space industries.

This degree also prepares you for many jobs in related

fields such as computer science, mathematics or physics.

The bachelor of arts degree in astronomy is intended for

students who desire a broad background in astronomy,

mathematics and physics but do not plan to do graduate

work in astrophysics. With this broad background, the

student is well prepared in many fields of endeavor,

including planetarium and museum work, teaching

astronomy at colleges and universities, secondary educa-

tion, science writing, or, in fact, in many professions in

which the ability to learn is critical.

Both of these degrees can be profitably combined with

physics, mathematics, and other sciences producing

excellent double majors or double degrees.

A minor program in astronomy is also available for stu-

dents who wish to enlarge their potential for a career

choice or who may be eager to learn more about astro-

physics than an introductory course can provide.

Astronomy and Astrophysics Degree

Programs

Requirements for the Bachelor of Arts degree in astrono-

my:

Mathematics

MATH 21, 22, 23, and 205 [15]

Basic and Intermediate-Level Science

ASTR 7/8 (4)

PHY 11/12 or 10/12 (5)

PHY 21/22 or 13/14 (4-5)

PHY 31, 262 (5)

CHM 21/22 or 75/76 (5-8)

EES 21, 22 (4)

2-4 cr. hr. at 100 level or above (2-4)

[29-35]

Intermediate - Advanced Astronomy/Astrophysics

ASTR/PHY/EES 105 (4)

ASTR/PHY 110 (1)

ASTR/PHY 201 or 202 (4)

[9]

Approved Electives

Two additional physics/astronomy courses at the 200

level or above (6)

Two additional science or mathematics courses at the

200 level or above (6)

[12]

Approved Electives are subject to the approval of the stu-

dent’s advisor, and should be chosen to provide a

coherent program.

Recommended courses are MATH 12, PHY 212, EES

31, BIOS 31.

A total of 120 credit hours are required for the Bachelor

of Arts in Astronomy.

Requirements for the Bachelor of Science degree in

Astrophysics

Mathematics

MATH 21, 22, 23, 205, (320 or 332) [18]

Basic and Intermediate-Level Science

PHY 11/12 or 10/12 (5)

PHY 21/22 or 13/14 (4-5)

PHY 31, 212, 215, (262 or 352) (12-13)

CHM 30 or 40/41 (5-8)

EES 21 (4)

2-4 cr. hr. at 100 level or above (2-4)

[32-39]

Intermediate - Advanced Astronomy/Astrophysics

ASTR/PHY/EES 105 (4)

ASTR/PHY 110 (1)

ASTR/PHY 201, 202 (8)

ASTR/PHY (332 or 342 or 350) (3)

[16]

Approved Electives

Three additional physics/astronomy courses at the 200

level or above (9)

One additional science course (not physics or astrono-

my) at the 100 level or above (3)

[12]

A total of 123 credit hours are required for the Bachelor

of Science in Astrophysics.

Recommended sequence of courses for the first two years

B.A. Astronomy B.S. Physics

Fall Spring Fall Spring

Freshman Year

ENGL 1 (3) ENGL 2,4 (3) ENGL 1 (3) ENGL 2, 4. (3)

EES 21 (4) PHY 11 (4) PHY 11 (4) EES 21 (4)

MATH 21 (4) PHY 12 (1) PHY 12 (1) MATH 22 (4)

ASTR 7/8 (4) MATH 22 (4) MATH 21 (4) Col Sem

and/or Dist

Req (3-6)

Col Sem (3-4) Col Sem or*

Dist req (3-4)

Astronomy and Astrophysics 121

Sophomore Year

PHY 21 (4) PHY 31 (3) PHY 21 (4) PHY 31 (3)

PHY 22 (1)

MATH 205 (3)

PHY 22 (1)

MATH 205(3)

MATH 23 (4) ASTR 110 (1) MATH 23 (4) ASTR 110 (1)

STR 105 (4) CHM 30 (3) ASTR 105 (4) CHM 30 (3)

HM22 (1) CHM 22 (1)

ist req (3-4) Dist req (3-4) Dist req (3-4) Distr req (3-4)

(1) If the College Seminar is deferred until spring, students

may choose to select ASTR 7 by deferring a distribution

requirement.

Departmental Honors in Astronomy or Astrophysics.

Students receiving a BA in Astronomy or a BS in

Astrophysics may earn Departmental Honors by satisfy-

ing the following requirements:

1. Academic Performance: Minimum grade point aver-

age of 3.50 in astronomy and physics courses used

to satisfy the major degree requirements.

2. Research or Project-Based/Creative Activity: comple-

tion of approved* special topics courses in

astronomy that include written reports, or comple-

tion of 6 credits of PHY 273 (research) or

equivalent, or completion of a summer research

project with written report and oral presentation

3. Additional Course Work: Completion of at least one

approved* 300-level course in either physics or

astronomy beyond those required in the student’s

degree program. This course may not be selected

from special topics or research courses such as

ASTR/PHY 350 or PHY 372.

*specific approvals are granted by the Program Director

The minor program in Astronomy. The requirements

for a minor in astronomy are:

PHY 11/12 and 21/22

ASTR 105, 201, and 202

One ASTR course at the 300 level

Two courses (minimum of 6 credit hours) selected from

the following:

Any ASTR course (except ASTR 7 or 8) CSC 17,

MATH 208, 231, PHY 31, 213, 215, 348, 362.

The minor program must be designed in consultation

with the program director.

Undergraduate Courses in

Astronomy/Astrophysics

ASTR 7. (PHY 7) Introduction to Astronomy (3)

fall

Introduction to planetary, stellar, galactic, and extragalac-

tic astronomy. An examination of the surface

characteristics, atmospheres, and motions of planets and

other bodies in our solar system. Properties of the sun,

stars, and galaxies, including the birth and death of stars,

stellar explosions, and the formation of stellar remnants

such as white dwarfs, neutron stars, pulsars, and black

holes. Quasars, cosmology, and the evolution of the uni-

verse. May not be taken by students who have previously

completed ASTR/PHY 105, 201, or 202. (NS)

ASTR 8. (PHY 8) Introduction to Astronomy

Laboratory (1) fall

Laboratory to accompany ASTR/PHY 7. (NS)

ASTR 105. (PHY 105, EES 105) Planetary

Astronomy (4) fall

Structure and dynamics of planetary interiors, surfaces,

and atmospheres. Models for the formation of the solar

system and planetary evolution. Internal structure, sur-

face topology, and composition of planets and other

bodies in our solar system. Comparative study of plane-

tary atmospheres. Organic materials in the solar system.

Properties of the interplanetary medium, including dust

and meteoroids. Orbital dynamics. Extrasolar planetary

systems. (NS)

ASTR 110. (PHY 110) Methods of Observational

Astronomy (1)

Techniques of astronomical observation, data reduction,

and analysis. Photometry, spectroscopy, CCD imaging,

and interferometry. Computational analysis. Examination

of ground-based and spacecraft instrumentation, and data

transmission, reduction, and analysis. (NS)

For Advanced Undergraduates and Graduate

Students

ASTR 201. (PHY 201) Modern Astrophysics I (4)

fall

Physics of stellar atmospheres and interiors, and the for-

mation, evolution, and death of stars. Variable stars. The

evolution of binary star systems. Novae, supernovae,

white dwarfs, neutron stars, pulsars, and black holes.

Stellar spectra, chemical compositions, and thermody-

namic processes. Thermonuclear reactions. Interstellar

medium. Prerequisites: PHY 10 and 13, or PHY 11 and

21, MATH 22 or 52. (NS)

ASTR 202. (PHY 202) Modern Astrophysics II (4)

spring

The Milky Way Galaxy, galactic morphology, and evolu-

tionary processes. Active galaxies and quasars. Observed

properties of the universe. Relativistic cosmology, and

the origin, evolution and fate of the universe. Elements

of General Relativity and associated phenomena.

Prerequisites: PHY 10 and 13, or PHY 11 and 21,

MATH 22 or 52. (NS)

ASTR 332. (PHY 332) High-Energy

Astrophysics (3) spring, odd-numbered years

Observation and theory of X-ray and gamma-ray

sources, quasars, pulsars, radio galaxies, neutron stars,

black holes. Results from ultraviolet, X-ray and gamma

ray satellites. Prerequisites: MATH 23 or 33 previously

or concurrently, and PHYS 21. McCluskey (NS)

ASTR 342. (PHY 342) Relativity and

Cosmology (3) spring, even-numbered years

Special and general relativity. Schwarzschild and Kerr

black holes. Supermassive stars. Relativistic theories of

the origin and evolution of the universe. Prerequisites:

MATH 23 or 33 previously or concurrently, and PHY

21. McCluskey (NS)

ASTR 350. Topics in Astrophysics (3) fall-spring

For science or engineering majors who desire to study an

active area of research in astrophysics. Individual supervi-

sion. Prerequisites: ASTR 201, and MATH 23 or 33 and

PHY 21. May be repeated for credit with the consent of

the program director. (NS)

122 Lehigh University Course Catalog 2009-2010

Biochemistry

An interdepartmental B.S. biochemistry major is offered

in the College of Arts and Sciences. The B.S. in bio-

chemistry degree is managed by an interdepartmental

committee composed of biochemists, bioorganic

chemists, and molecular/cellular biologists. The commit-

tee administers the degree, monitors the academic

program, provides research possibilities, and advises stu-

dent majors. The director of the program is currently

Linda J. Lowe-Krentz. Faculty in both Biological

Sciences (Lowe-Krentz and Iovine) and Chemistry

(Schray) serve as advisors. Majors should be declared in

Biological Sciences.

Bachelor of Science Degree in

Biochemistry

I. College and University Requirements (25)

a. ENGL 1, 2 (6)

b. First Year Seminar (3)

c. Non-science electives: 16 hours to be broadly dis-

tributed in fields of thought other than natural

science and mathematics, including at least 8

hours each in humanities and social sciences.

II. Collateral Science Requirements (at least 24)

a. Physics 10, 12, 13, 22 (or 11, 12, 21, 22) (9 or

10)

b. Mathematics 51, 52, 43 (or 21, 22, 23) and a sta-

tistics course (at least 12)

c. Survey of Computer Science 12 or Engineering 1

(3)

III. Required Chemistry Courses (25)

a. Introductory Chemistry 40, 41 (8*)

b. Organic Chemistry 110, 111, 112, 113 (8)

c. Inorganic Chemistry 307 (3)

d. Physical Chemistry 194 (3)

e. Analytical Chemistry 332 (3)

*The Chemistry 30/31 sequence may be substituted.

IV. Required Biological Science courses (25 minimum)

a. Biology Core I: Cellular and Molecular and

Laboratory 41, 42 (4)

b. Biology Core II: Genetics 115 (3)

c. Biochemistry 371, 372, 377 (9)

d. Advanced Laboratory (4)

e. Electives in Biological Sciences (3 hours mini-

mum*)

f. Technical Writing (2 hours minimum)

*The three credit hours of biological sciences electives are

chosen with the approval of the adviser.

Model Pattern Roster

Freshman year

CHM 40, 41 Concepts, Models, and Experiments I

and II (8)

BIOS 41, 42 Biology Core I: Cell and Molecular

and Laboratory (4)

MATH 51, 52 orSurvey of Calculus I and II (7)

MATH 21, 22 Calculus I and II (8)

Dept 90 College Seminar (3)

ENGL 1,2 Composition and Literature (6)

PHY 10, 12 or General Physics I and Laboratory (5)

PHY 11, 12 Introductory Physics I and Laboratory

(5)

Sophomore year

CHM 110, 111, 112, 113 Organic Chemistry

and Laboratory (8)

PHY 13, 22 or General Physics II and Laboratory (4)

PHY 21, 22 Introductory Phys. II and Laboratory

MATH 43 or Linear Algebra (3)

MATH 23 Calculus III

BIOS 130 Biostatistics*

BIOS 115 Biology Core II: Genetics

*A statistics course from the MATH department could also

fulfill the statistics requirement

Junior year

CHM 194 Physical Chemistry for Biological

Sciences (3)

CHM 332 Analytical Chemistry (3)

BIOS 371, 372 Elem. of Biochemistry I and II (6)

BIOS 377 Biochem. Lab (3)

CSE 12 Survey of Computer Science (3)

Technical Writing (2)

Senior year

BIOS Advanced laboratory course(s)

BIOS elective

CHM 307 Advanced Inorganic Chemistry (3)

Bioengineering Program

Professor Anand Jagota, Director, Department of

Chemical Engineering at 610-758-4396 or

[email protected]

Professor H.D. Ou-Yang, Associate Director,

Department of Physics at 610-758-3920 or

[email protected]

Program Associated Professors: Derick Brown, Ph.D.

(Princeton) Civil and Environmental Engineering;

Xuanhong Cheng, Ph.D. (U. of Washington) Materials

Science and Engineering; James T. Hsu, Ph.D.

(Northwestern) Chemical Engineering; Sabrina Jedlicka

Ph.D. (Purdue) Materials Science and Engineering; Ian

Laurenzi, Ph.D. (University of Pennsylvania) Chemical

Engineering; Mary Kathryn Iovine, Ph.D. (Washington,

St. Louis) Biological Sciences; Anand Jagota, Ph.D.

(Cornell) Chemical Engineering; Himanshu Jain,

Eng.Sc.D. (Columbia), Materials Science and

Engineering; Daniel Lopresti, Ph.D. (Princeton)

Computer Science; Linda Lowe-Krentz, Ph.D.

(Northwestern) Biological Sciences; A.J. McHugh, Ph.D.

(Delaware) Chemical Engineering; Wojciech Z.

Misiolek, Ph.D. (Poland) Materials Science and

Engineering; John Ochs, Ph.D. (Pennsylvania State)

Mechanical Engineering and Mechanics; Boon-Siew

Ooi, Ph.D. (Glasgow, United Kingdom) Electrical and

Computer Engineering; H. Daniel Ou-Yang, Ph.D.

(UCLA) Physics; Eric P. Salathe, Ph.D., (Brown)

Mathematics; Neal G. Simon, Ph.D. (Rutgers) Biological

Sciences; Svetlana Tatic-Lucic, Ph.D. (California

Institute of Technology) Electrical and Computer

Engineering; Arkady S. Voloshin, Ph.D. (Tel-Aviv

University, Israel), Mechanical Engineering and

Mechanics

Bioengineering Program 123

Professor of Practice: Lori E. Herz, Ph.D. (Rutgers)

Chemical Engineering; R. Sam Niedbala, Ph.D. (Lehigh

University) Chemistry; Susan F. Perry, Ph.D.

(Pennsylvania State University) Chemical Engineering

The mission of the Bioengineering Program is to prepare

undergraduate students to be critical thinkers, problem

solvers, innovators, leaders, and life-long learners who

can make a positive impact at the interfaces among the

physical and life sciences, and engineering.

To achieve its educational mission, the Bioengineering

Program has established the following set of Program

Educational Objectives. Three to five years after gradua-

tion, we expect our students will:

1. formulate and synthesize innovative solutions to bio-

medical and biotechnology problems using modern

engineering methodologies;

2. incorporate physical and life sciences, and mathe-

matics as part of their problem solving processes;

3. contribute and function well in the collaborative

and interdisciplinary environments required to solve

complex biomedical and biotechnology problems;

4. incorporate contemporary and ethical issues in the

solution of bioengineering problems;

5. communicate effectively in both oral and written

forms;

6. engage in life-long learning processes during their

professional careers.

The B.S. in Bioengineering degree provides a structured

curriculum comprised of three tracks.

Biopharmaceutical Engineering is for students whose

interests lie in genomics, proteomics, bioinformatics,

recombinant DNA, protein engineering, bioprocessing,

drug synthesis and delivery. The Bioelectronics/photon-

ics track covers education and research dealing with

signal processing, biosensors, MEMs, biochips for DNA

sequencing, laser and fiber based optical technology for

biomedical applications. Cell and Tissue Engineering

encompasses biomaterials and biomechanics, from cells

and tissue to organs and systems.

The B.S. in Bioengineering will prepare students for

careers in established and emerging fields that require

combining engineering principles with the life sciences.

Potential paths open to students include the health care,

biomedical, pharmaceutical, biomaterials, and other

biotechnology-related industries through careers in medi-

cine or graduate studies.

The program strongly encourages experiential learning,

including two summers of internships, required partici-

pation in Lehigh’s Integrated Product Development

(IPD) program, and opportunities for undergraduate

research for credit.

Requirement of the major - 132 credit hours are

required for graduation with a degree of bachelor of sci-

ence in bioengineering.

Bioengineering Core Requirements

General Requirements (23 credits)

Engl 1 Composition and Literature (3)

Engl 2 Composition and literature: Fiction,

Drama, Poetry (3)

Phil 116 Bioethics (4)

Engr 1 Engineering Computations (3)

Eco 1 Principles of Economics (4)

Sufficient electives to satisfy HSS

requirements

Free Electives (10)

Mathematics (18 credits)

Math 21 Calculus I (4)

Math 22 Calculus II (4)

Math 23 Calculus III (4)

Math 205 Linear Methods (3)

Math 231 Probability and Statistics (3)

Chemistry (12 credits)

Chem 30 Intro. Chemical Principles and

Laboratory (4)

Chem 31 Chemical Equilibria in Aqueous

Systems (4)

Chem 110, 111 Organic Chemistry I and Lab (4)

Physics (10 credits)

Physics 11,12 Intro. Physics I and Lab (5)

Physics 21,22 Intro. Physics II and Lab (5)

Biological Sciences (8 credits)

BioS 41 and 42 Biology Core I: Cellular and Molecular

and Lab (4)

BioS 115/116 Biology Core II: Genetics and Lab (4)

Integrated Bioengineering (16 credits)

Required by all Three Tracks

BioE 01 Freshman Seminar I, Introduction to

Bioengineering I: Philosophy to

Practice (Pass/Fail) (1)

BioE 02 Freshman Seminar 2, Introduction to

Bioengineering II: Current Topics

(Pass/Fail) (1)

BioE 110 Elements of Bioengineering (4)

BioE 210 Bioengineering Physiology (4)

Engr 211 Integrated Product Development I

(IPD) (3)

Engr 212 Integrated Product Development II

(IPD) (2)

BioE 225 cGMP Good manufacturing practice

and regulatory affairs for bioengineers

(1)

Engineering Requirement by Track

Biopharmaceutical Engineering Track – (23 credits)

Chem 112 Organic Chemistry II (3)

BioE 343 Integrated Biotechnology Laboratory

(3)

Mat 33 Engineering Materials and Processes

(3)

ChE 31 Material and Energy Balance (3)

ChE 210 Chemical Engineering

Thermodynamics (4)

ChE 211 Chemical Reactor Design (3)*

ChE 44 Fluid Mechanics (4)

*Note: ChE 344 (Molecular Bioengineering) or BioE/ChE

397 (Metabolic Engineering) may be taken in lieu of ChE

211.

Bioelectronic/Biophotonics Track – (22 credits)

ECE 108 Signals and Systems (4)

BioE 331 Integrated Bioelectronics/Photonics

Laboratory (2)

ECE 81 Principles of Electrical Engineering (4)

ECE 123 Electronic Circuits (3) or

Phy 190 Electronics (3)

124 Lehigh University Course Catalog 2009-2010

ECE 202 Introduction to Electromagnetics (3)

Phy 212 Electricity and Magnetism I (3)

Mech 3 Elementary Engineering Mechanics (3)

Mat 33 Engineering Materials and Processes

(3)

Cell and Tissue Engineering Track – (21 credits)

BioE 120,121 Biomechanics and Laboratory (4)

BioE 357 Biostructural Mechanics Laboratory

(2)

Mech 3 Elementary Engineering Mechanics (3)

Mech 12 Strength of Materials (3)

Mat 33 Engineering Materials and Processes

(3)

ME 104 Thermodynamics (3) or

Phy 340 Thermal Physics (3)

ME 231 Fluid Mechanics (3)

Bioengineering Electives

Students must take three (3) credits from the following:

ChE 341 Biotechnology I (3)

ChE 344 Molecular Bioengineering (3)

BioE 321 (Phy 321) Biomolecular & Cellular

Mechanics (3)

BioE 335 BioFluid Mechanics of Physiological

Systems (3)

Students must take nine (9) credits from approved elec-

tives; no more than six (6) can be from BioE 132, BioE

142, BioE 242, and BioE 290. Approved electives –

BioE 132, BioE 142, BioE 242, BioE 290, BioE 321,

BioE 335, BioE 324, BioE 350, BioS 177, BioS 345-

346, BioS 367, BioS 371, BioS 277, ChE 341, ChE

342, ChE 343, ChE 344, ChE 388, ChE 391, Chm

332, CSE 408, ECE 202, ECE 333, Phy 212, Phy 352.

Other upper level classes may also qualify.

Typical four-year course schedule for BS in

Bioengineering

Freshman year, first semester (same for all three tracks) (14

credits)

BioE 1 Freshman Seminar (1) (Pass/Fail)

Chm 30 Introductory Chemical Principles and

lab (4)

Math 21 Calculus I (4)

Engr 1 Engineering Computations (3)

English 1 Composition and Literature (3)

Freshman year, second semester (same for the three tracks)

(15 credits)

BioE 2 Freshman Seminar 2 (1) (Pass/Fail)

BioS 41/42 Biology Core I: Cellular and Molecular

and Lab (4)

Math 22 Calculus II (4)

Phy 11/12 Introductory Physics I and Lab (5)

Engl 2 Composition and Literature II (3)

Biopharmaceutical Engineering Track

Sophomore year first semester (18 credits)

BioE 110 Elements of Bioengineering (4)

Mat 33 Engineering Materials and Processing

(3)

Math 23 Calculus III (4)

ChE 31 Material and Energy Balances of

Chemical Processes (3)

Eco 1 Principles of Economics (4)

Sophomore year second semester (16) credits)

BioE 210 Introduction to Engineering

Physiology (4)

Chm 31 Chemical Equilibria in Aqueous

Systems (4)

Phy 21/22 Introductory Physics II and Lab (5)

ChE 210 Chemical Engineering

Thermodynamics (4)

Junior year, first semester (17 credits)

Math 205 Linear Methods (3)

Chm 110, 111 Organic Chemistry I and Lab (4)

BioS 115/116 Biology Core II: Genetics and Lab (4)

ChE 341 Biotechnology I (3)

Elective (3)

Junior year, second semester (16 credits)

Math 231 Probability and Statistics (3)

ENG 211 Integrated Product Development I (3)

ChE 44 Fluid Mechanics (4)

ChE 211 Chemical Reactor Design (3)

Chm 112 Organic Chemistry II (3)

Senior year, first semester (16 credits)

ENG 212 Integrated Product Development II (2)

BIOE 225 cGMP Good manufacturing practice

and regulatory affairs for bioengineers

(1)

BioE 343 Integrated Biotechnology Laboratory (3)

Electives (10)

Senior year, second semester (15) credits

Phil 116 Bioethics (4)

Electives (11)

Bioelectronics/Biophotonics Track

Sophomore year, first semester (17 credits)

BioE 110 Elements of Bioengineering (4)

Math 23 Calculus II (4)

ECE 81 Principles of Electrical Engineering (4)

Phy 21/22 Introductory Physics II and Lab (5)

Sophomore year, second semester (18 credits)

BioE 210 Introduction to Engineering

Physiology (4)

Math 205 Linear Methods (3)

Mech 3 Fundamentals of Engineering

Mechanics (3)

Chm 31 Chemical Equilibria of Aqueous

Systems (4)

ECE 121/123 Electronic Circuits and Lab (5)

Junior year, first semester (16 credits)

BioS 115/116 Biology Core II: Genetics and Lab (4)

Chm 110, 111 Organic Chemistry I and Lab (4)

Mat 33 Engineering Materials and Processes

(3)

ECE 108 Signals and Systems (4)

Junior year, second semester (15 credits)

Math 231 Probability and Statistics (3)

ENG 211 Integrated Product Development I (3)

BioE 331 Integrated Bioelectronics/Photonics

Laboratory (2)

Eco 1 Principles of Economics (4)

Elective (3)

Senior year, first semester 16 credits)

ENG 212 Integrated Product Development II (2)

BioE 225 cGMP Good manufacturing practice

Bioengineering Program 125

and regulatory affairs for bioengineers

(1)

ECE 202 Introduction to Electromagnetics (3)

Phy 212 Electricity and Magnetism I (3)

Electives (10)

Senior year, second semester (15 credits)

Phil 116 Bioethics (4)

Electives (11)

Cell and Tissue Engineering Track

Sophomore year, first semester (16 credits)

BioE 110 Elements of Bioengineering (4)

Mech 3 Engineering Materials and Processes

(3)

Math 23 Calculus III (4)

Phy 21/22 Introductory Physics II and Lab (5)

Sophomore year, second semester (17 credits)

BioE 210 Introduction to Engineering

Physiology (4)

Math 205 Linear Methods (3)

Chm 31 Chemical Equilibria in Aqueous

Systems (4)

Mech 12 Strengths of Materials (3)

Mat 33 Engineering Materials and Processes

(3)

Junior year, first semester (17 credits)

BioE 120/121 Biomechanics and Biomechanics

Laboratory (4)

Chm 110, 111 Organic Chemistry I and Lab (4)

BioE 357 Integrated Biostructural

Mechanics Laboratory (2)

BioS 115/116 Biology Core II: Genetics and Lab (4)

Elective (3)

Junior year, second semester (16 credits)

Math 231 Probability and Statistics (3)

ENG 211 Integrated Product Development I (3)

ME 104 Thermodynamics I (3)

Eco 1 Principles of Economics (4)

Electives (3)

Senior year, first semester (16 credits)

ENG 212 Integrated Product Development II (2)

BioE 225 cGMP Good manufacturing practice

and regulatory affairs for bioengineers

(1)

ME 231 Thermodynamics I (3)

Electives (10)

Senior year, second semester (15)

Phil 116 Bioethics (4)

Electives (11)

BioE 1. Freshman Seminar 1, Introduction to

Bioengineering 1: Philosophy to Practice (1) fall

Overview of the bioengineering field, the advancements

of related topics in sciences, technology, engineering and

applications for health care and medicine. Humanity and

ethical issues. Pass/Fail

BioE 2. Freshman Seminar 2, Introduction to

Bioengineering II: Current Topics spring (1)

Overview of a broad spectrum of current topical areas in

biotechnology and bioengineering and their applications

in health care and medicine. Pass/Fail

BioE 10. Bioengineering Sophomore Seminar I:

Literature Research (1) fall

Literature research on current bioengineering and

biotechnology topics to assemble information for pro-

ducing a written research proposal.

BioE 20. Bioengineering Sophomore Seminar II:

Research Proposal (1) spring

Prepare written research proposals for research projects.

Define research topics, objectives of the research, specific

goals, methodology, research plans and expected impact

of the research.

BioE 110. Elements of Bioengineering (4) fall

An introduction to the fields of biotechnology and bio-

medical engineering. The areas include biomechanics,

biomaterials, bioinstrumentation, medical imaging, reha-

bilitation engineering, biosensors, biotechnology and

tissue engineering. Prerequisites BioS 41 and 42.

BioE 120/121- Biomechanics and Biomechanics

Laboratory (3/1) fall

Applications of mechanics to study behavior of anatomi-

cal structures and biological tissues of the

musculoskeletal system. Specific topics include structure

and function of biological tissues, mechanical properties

of biological tissues, and analysis of specific tissues (i.e.

bone, muscle, and soft connective tissues) Co-prerequi-

site MECH 3.

BioE 132. Bioengineering Research 1 (2) fall

Research on a topic chosen by students, with the help of

a faculty advisor from among the three bioengineering

tracks (biopharmaceutical engineering, bioelectronic/bio-

photonics or cell and tissue engineering). Independent

meetings with advising professor will track progress.

Includes written report and oral presentation.

Prerequisite junior standing and permission of instructor.

BioE 142 – Bioengineering Research 2 (2) spring

Continuation of research initiated in BioE 132, Research

1. Topic chosen by student, with the help of a faculty

advisor from among the three bioengineering tracks (bio-

pharmaceutical engineering, bioelectronic/biophotonics

or cell and tissue engineering). Independent meetings

with advising professor will track progress. Includes writ-

ten report and oral presentation. Prerequisite BioE 132

or permission of instructor.

BioE 210. Introduction to Engineering

Physiology (4) spring

Mammalian physiology for bioengineering students,

with an emphasis on control mechanisms and engineer-

ing principles. Basic cell function; biological control

systems; muscle; neural; endocrine, circulatory, digestive,

respiratory, renal, and reproductive systems; regulation of

metabolism and defense mechanisms. Includes laborato-

ry work. Prerequisite BioE 110, BioS 41 and 42.

BioE 225. GMP Good manufacturing practice and

regulatory affairs for bioengineers (1) fall

Review of the principles of the Food and Drug

Administration including its history, mission and applied

regulations. Understanding of how the FDA works with

industry and is integral to the development of new prod-

ucts and technologies. Review and critique of case

studies in various parts of the biomedical industry to see

how FDA regulations are applied. Validation and analy-

sis of products using failure mode analysis.

126 Lehigh University Course Catalog 2009-2010

BioE 242. Bioengineering Research 3 (2) fall

Continuation of research initiated in BioE 132 and 142.

Topic chosen by student, with a faculty advisor from

among the three bioengineering tracks (biopharmaceuti-

cal engineering, bioelectronic/biophotonics or cell and

tissue engineering). Written and oral reports approved by

research advising professor will track progress.

Prerequisite BioE 142 or permission of instructor.

BioE 290 – Bioengineering Thesis (1-3) spring

Thesis, guided by a faculty advisor, based on work con-

ducted in BioE 132, 142, 242, or in ENG 211, 212.

Includes written report and oral presentation.

Prerequisite BioE 242 or ENG 212 or permission of

instructor.

BioE 331 – Integrated

Bioelectronics/Biophotonics Laboratory (2) spring

Experiments in design and analysis of bioelectronics cir-

cuits, micropattering of biological cells,

micromanipulation of biological cells using electric

fields, analysis of pacemakers, instrumentation and com-

puter interfaces, ultrasound, optic, laser tweezers and

advanced imaging and optical microscopy techniques for

biological applications, Prerequisites Phy 13/22 or Phy

21/22 and ECE 81 or Phy 190, or permission of instruc-

tor.

BioE 321 (Phy 321) – Biomolecular & Cellular

Mechanics (3)

Mechanics and physics of the components of the cell,

ranging in length scale from fundamental biomolecules

to the entire cell. The course covers the mechanics of

proteins and other biopolymers in 1-D, 2-D, and 3-D

structures, cell membrane structure and dynamics, and

the mechanics of the whole cell. Prerequisites Math 205,

Math 231, and Phy 13/22 or 21/22, or permission of

the instructor.

BioE 324 (MAT 324) – Introduction to Organic

Biomaterials (3) spring

Overview of the field of biomaterials, covering basic con-

cepts in biomaterials, biological response and biomaterial

applications.

BioE 325 (MAT 325) – Inorganic Biomaterials (3)

Fall

Fabrication methods for biomedical implants and

devices. Selection of metals and ceramics with specific

bulk and surface physical as well as chemical properties.

The role of materials chemistry and microstructure.

Biocompatibility. Case studies (dental and orthopedic

implants, stents, nonporous ceramic filters for kidney

dialysis). Prerequisites BioE 110 or MAT 33, or consent

of instructor. Misiolek

BioE 335 – BioFluid Mechanics of Physiological

Systems (3)

Application of advanced fluid dynamic principles to

physiological systems with emphasis on micron sized

structures such as pulmonary airway/alveoli, small blood

vessels and biological cells. Introduction to advanced

topics relevant to the human body including a) oscillato-

ry and transient flows in the cardiovascular and

pulmonary systems b) non-Newtonian flows, c) surface

tension driven flows, d) fluid-structure interactions, and

e) cellular fluid mechanics. Prerequisites Math 205,

Math 231, and ME 231 or an equivalent introductory

fluid mechanics course, or instructor permission.

BioE 343 – Integrated Biotechnology

Laboratory (3) fall and spring

Biosafety, sterilization, media formulation, biochemical

and enzyme assays, recombinant DNA technique, pro-

tein and DNA isolation and purification, for microbial

fermentation and animal cell culture. Integration of

biotechnology techniques for biopharmaceutical produc-

tion. Prerequisite BioE 110, ChE 341, and permission of

instructor.

BioE 350 – Special Topics (1-4) spring

Special topics of study in bioengineering. Permission of

Instructor.

BioE 357 – Integrated Biostructural Mechanics

Laboratory (2) fall and spring

Basic concepts of bioengineering design through experi-

mental designs and procedures involving cells and tissues

and their interface with synthetic implants. Experimental

techniques include surface characterization and interac-

tions, spectroscopy, and advanced techniques in

microscopy. Nerve action, electrocardiography, mechan-

ics of muscle, membranes and other model systems in

vitro. Prerequisite BioE 110, and permission of instruc-

tor.

Biological Sciences

Professors. Murray Itzkowitz, Ph.D. (Maryland), Chair;

Barry Bean, Ph.D. (Rockefeller); Michael J. Behe, Ph.D.

(Pennsylvania); Lynne Cassimeris, Ph.D. (North

Carolina); David Cundall, Ph.D. (Arkansas); Linda J.

Lowe-Krentz, Ph.D. (Northwestern); John Nyby, Ph.D.

(Texas); Jeffrey A. Sands, Ph.D. (Penn State); Jill

Schneider, Ph.D. (Wesleyan); Neal Simon, Ph.D.

(Rutgers); Jennifer Swann, Ph.D. (Northwestern).

Associate Professors. Michael R. Kuchka, Ph.D.

(Carnegie Mellon); Colin Saldanha, Ph.D. (Columbia);

Robert V. Skibbens, Ph.D. (North Carolina); Vassie C.

Ware, Ph.D. (Yale).

Assistant Professors. Michael Burger, Ph.D. (Texas);

Matthias Falk, Ph.D. (Heidelberg); Mary Kathryn

Iovine, Ph.D. (Washington); Stefan Maas, Ph.D.

(Heidelberg); Sean P. Mullen, Ph.D. (Cornell)

Professor of Practice. Jutta Marzillier, Ph.D.

(Heidelberg).

The biological sciences include the study of living sys-

tems at levels ranging from the structure and function of

molecules to the behavior and evolution of communities

of organisms. The department offers four different routes

to mastering skills and knowledge in this broad area. The

B.A. and B.S. programs in biology provide a broad intro-

duction to biology with opportunities for students to

create a program of study suited to their specific inter-

ests. Programs of study focused on particular aspects of

biology are the B.A. and B.S. degree in the areas of

behavioral neuroscience and molecular biology. For pro-

grams in biochemistry and bioengineering, see those

separate sections in the catalog.

The Department of Biological Sciences strongly supports

the positions of both the American Association for the

Advancement of Science and the National Academy of

Sciences that intelligent design is not scientific and

should not be presented as science in science classes.

The requirements for the B.A. and B.S. in biology,

behavioral neuroscience, and molecular biology are listed

Biological Sciences 127

below. Research interests of the faculty and instrumenta-

tion are described in the section on graduate education.

B.A. with Major in Biology

College and university requirements for all majors (25

credit hours)

ENGL 1, 2 Composition and Literature (6)

First Year Seminar (3)

Social Sciences (8)

Humanities (8)

Major Program (49-50 credit hours)

Biology (30 credit hours)

BIOS 41 Biology Core I: Cellular and Molecular

(3)

BIOS 42 Biology Core I: Cellular and Molecular

Laboratory (1)

BIOS 115 Biology Core II: Genetics (3)

BIOS 116 Biology Core II: Genetics Laboratory

(1)

BIOS 120 Biology Core III: Integrative and

Comparative (4)

Electives *Biology electives

*Approved electives (18 credit hours, no more than 3 cr.

from the following courses: 161, 261, 262, 391, 393, Col-

lege scholar project, not BIOS 130).

Mathematics (7-8 credit hours)

MATH 51 Survey of Calculus I (4)

MATH 52 or Survey of Calculus II (3)

MATH 12 or Basic Statistics (4)

BIOS 130 Biostatistics (4)

Collateral Sciences (12 credit hours)

CHM 30 Introduction to Chemical Principles

(4)

CHM 110, 111 Organic Chemistry I and lab (3,1)

CHM 112, 113 Organic Chemistry II and lab (3,1)

The B.S. in Biology

The Bachelor of Science in biology offers broad scientific

preparation in biology to facilitate advanced work in the

life sciences. Progression through the program is best

served through early commitment.

Requirements for the B.S. in Biology

College and university requirements as above (25 credit

hours)

Major Program (73-74 credit hours)

Biology (37 credit hours)

BIOS 41 Biology Core I: Cellular and Molecular

(3)

BIOS 42 Biology Core I: Cellular and Molecular

Lab (1)

BIOS 115 Biology Core II: Genetics (3)

BIOS 116 Biology Core II: Genetics Laboratory

(1)

BIOS 120 Biology Core III: Integrative and

Comparative (4)

BIOS 317 Evolution (3)

Electives* Biology electives (22)

*Biology electives must include one course from list A, one

course from list B and at least four credits of laboratory

experience (e.g. two 2 credit laboratory courses). These will

be chosen in consultation with the major advisor.

List A

BIOS 276 Behavioral Neuroscience II (3)

BIOS 313 Vertebrate Histology (4)

BIOS 314 Vertebrate Development (3)

BIOS 335 Animal Behavior (3)

BIOS 337 Behavioral Ecology (3)

BIOS 382 Endocrinology of Behavior (3)

List B

BIOS 324 Bacteriology (3)

BIOS 345 Molecular Genetics (3)

BIOS 353 Virology (3)

BIOS 356 Human Genetics and Reproduction (3)

BIOS 367 Cell Biology (3)

BIOS 371 Elements of Biochemistry I (3)

Mathematics (11-12 credit hours minimum)

MATH 21, 22 orCalculus I, II (8)

MATH 51, 52 Survey of Calculus I, II (7)

BIOS 130 Biostatistics (4)

Collateral Sciences (25 credit hours)

CHM 30, 31 or 40, 41 Introductory

Chemistry I, II (8)

CHM 110, 112 Organic Chemistry I, II (6)

CHM 111, 113 Organic Chemistry Laboratory I, II (2)

PHY 10 or General Physics I (4)

PHY 11 Introductory Physics I (4)

PHY 12 Introductory Physics Laboratory I (1)

PHY 13 General Physics II (3)

PHY 22 Physics Lab II (1)

Recommended B.S. Biology Sequence

Freshman year

BIOS 41 Biology Core I: Cellular and Molecular

(3)

BIOS 42 Biology Core I: Cellular and Molecular

Laboratory (1)

MATH 51, 52 Survey of Calculus I, II (7)

CHM 30, 31 Introductory Chemistry I, II (8)

Dept 90 First Year Seminar (3)

Sophomore year

BIOS 115 Biology Core II: Genetics (3)

BIOS 116 Biology Core II: Genetics Laboratory

(1)

CHM 110, 111, 112, 113 Organic Chemistry and

Laboratory (8)

BIOS 120 Biology Core III: Integrative and

Comparative (4)

BIOS 130 Biostatistics (4)

Junior year

PHY 10, 12 General Physics I and Laboratory (5)

PHY 13, 22 General Physics II and Laboratory (4)

Approved biology electives including one from list A and

one from list B (9-12)

Senior year

BIOS 317 Evolution (3)

Electives Biology electives including at least 4

credits of laboratory (10-14)

Minor in Biology

A minor in biology may be achieved by completing the

following requirements (21-22 credits):

BIOS 41, 42 Biology Core I: Cellular and Molecular

and Laboratory (4)

BIOS 115, 116 Biology Core II: Genetics and

128 Lehigh University Course Catalog 2009-2010

Laboratory (4)

BIOS 120 or Biology Core III: Integrative and

Comparative (4)

BIOS 177 Behavioral Neuroscience I (3)

CHM 110 Organic Chemistry (3)

Elective Biology electives at the 200 or 300

level (3 or 4)

B.A. with major in Behavioral

Neuroscience

The B.A. in Behavioral Neuroscience is a natural science

major for B.A. distribution purposes.

Required Major Courses

BIOS 41 Biology Core I: Cellular and Molecular

(3)

BIOS 42 Biology Core I: Cellular and Molecular

Laboratory (1)

BIOS 115 Biology Core II: Genetics (3)

BIOS 116 Biology Core II: Genetics Laboratory

(1)

BIOS 120 Biology Core III: Integrative and

Comparative (4)

BIOS 130 Biostatistics (4)

BIOS 177 Behavioral Neuroscience I (3)

BIOS 276 Behavioral Neuroscience II (3)

BIOS 277 Experimental Neuroscience Laboratory

(2)

BIOS 382 Endocrinology of Behavior (3)

Major Electives (6 credits)

BIOS 234 Comparative Vertebrate Anatomy (4)

BIOS 307 Male Reproductive Biology (3)

BIOS 313 Vertebrate Histology (4)

BIOS 314 Vertebrate Development (3)

BIOS 317 Evolution (3)

BIOS 324 Bacteriology (3)

BIOS 328 Immunology (3)

BIOS 335 Animal Behavior (3)

BIOS 337 Behavioral Ecology (3)

BIOS 345 Molecular Genetics (3)

BIOS 353 Virology (3)

BIOS 356 Human Genetics and Reproduction (3)

BIOS 365 Neurobiology of Sensory Systems (3)

BIOS 367 Cell Biology (3)

BIOS 368 Cell Biology Laboratory (2)

BIOS 369 Comparative Physiology of Vertebrate

Systems (3)

BIOS 371 Elements of Biochemistry I (3)

BIOS 372 Elements of Biochemistry II (3)

BIOS 376 Classical and Molecular Embryology

(3)

BIOS 377 Biochemistry Laboratory (3)

BIOS 384 Eukaryotic Signal Transduction (3)

PSYC 117 Cognitive Psychology (3)

PSYC 153 Personality (4)

PSYC 154 Introduction to Clinical Psychology (3)

PSYC 176 Mind and Brain (4)

PSYC 305 Abnormal Psychology (4)

PSYC 307 Seminar in Cognition (4)

Required Collateral Courses

MATH 21, 22 orCalculus I, II (8)

MATH 51, 52 Survey of Calculus I, II (7)

CHM 30 Introduction to Chemical Principles

(4)

CHM 110, 112 Organic Chemistry (6)

CHM 111, 113 Organic Chemistry Laboratory I, II (2)

PSYC 1 Introduction to Psychology (4)

Other Options

The B.A. in Behavioral Neuroscience can be structured

for a wide variety of possibilities (see listing of recom-

mended elective courses). By using free electives to take

additional science, the B.A. also can serve as a preprofes-

sional degree for many graduate and professional schools.

Students interested in a particular career-based program

should consult their advisor or the program director,

Professor John Nyby.

B.S. in Behavioral Neuroscience

B.S. majors are required to take the required major

courses of the B.A. program and to fulfill the elective

requirements of the B.A. program. An early commitment

to the B.S. is desirable to meet all the requirements of

this program. Additional requirements are shown below.

Additional Biological Sciences Requirements for the

B.S.

BIOS 371, 372 Elements of Biochemistry I & II (6)

BIOS 365 or Neurobiology of Sensory Systems (3)

BIOS 234 or Comparative Vertebrate Anatomy (4)

BIOS 377 or Biochemistry Laboratory (3)

BIOS 368 Cell Biology Laboratory (2). If this

course is elected, Cell Biology BIOS 367

must be taken as an elective

Math and Science Requirements for the B.S.

MATH 21, 22 orCalculus I, II (8)

MATH 51, 52 Survey of Calculus I, II (7)

CHM 30 Introduction to Chemical Principles (4)

CHM 31 Chemical Equilibria in Aqueous

Systems (4)

CHM 110, 112 Organic Chemistry I, II (6)

CHM 111, 113 Organic Chemistry Laboratory (2)

PHY 10, 12 or General Physics I and Laboratory (5)

PHY 11, 12 Introductory Physics I and Laboratory

(5)

PHY 13, 22 or General Physics II and Laboratory (4)

PHY 21, 22 Introductory Physics II and Laboratory

(5)

PSYC 1 Introduction Psychology (4)

B.A. with Major in Molecular Biology

Requirements for the B.A. in Molecular Biology

College and university requirements (see above).

Biology (34-35 credit hours)

BIOS 41, 42 Biology Core I: Cellular and Molecular

(3) and Lab (1)

BIOS 115, 116 Biology Core II: Genetics (3) and Lab

(1)

BIOS 120 Biology Core III: Integrative and

Comparative (4)

BIOS 324 or Bacteriology (3)

BIOS 328 or Immunology (3)

BIOS 353 Virology (3)

BIOS 325 or Bacteriology Lab (2)

BIOS 368 or Cell Biology Lab (2)

BIOS 377 Biochemistry Lab (3)

BIOS 371 Elements of Biochemistry I (3)

BIOS 345, 346 Molecular Genetics (3) and Lab (2)

BIOS 367 Cell Biology (3)

Biological Sciences 129

BIOS approved electives (6 credit hours)

Mathematics (7-8 credit hours)

MATH 21, 22 orCalculus I, II (8)

MATH 51, 52 Survey of Calculus I, II (7)

Chemistry (16 credit hours)

CHM 30 Introduction to Chemical Principles

(4)

CHM 31 Chemical Equilibria in Aqueous

Systems (4)

CHM 110, 111, 112, 113 Organic Chemistry I, II and

Lab I, II (8)

Physics (9 credit hours)

PHY 10, 12 or General Physics I and Lab I (5)

PHY 11, 12 Introductory Physics I and Lab (5)

PHY 13, 22 General Physics II and Lab (4)

The B.S. in Molecular Biology

Requirements for the B.S. in Molecular Biology

Major Program (82-85 credit hours)

Mathematics (11-12 credit hours)

MATH 21, 22 orCalculus I, II (8)

MATH 51, 52 Survey of Calculus I, II (7)

BIOS 130 Biostatistics (4)

Chemistry (16 credit hours)

CHM 30 Introduction to Chemical Principles (4)

CHM 31 Chemical Equilibria in Aqueous

Systems (4)

CHM 110, 112 Organic Chemistry I, II (6)

CHM 111, 113 Organic Chemistry Laboratory (2)

Physics (9-10 credit hours)

PHY 10 (or 11) General Physics I (4)

PHY 12 Introductory Physics Laboratory I (1)

PHY 13 (or 21) General Physics II (3 or 4)

PHY 22 Physics Lab II (1)

Molecular Biology (46-47 credit hours)

BIOS 41 Biology Core I: Cellular and Molecular

(3)

BIOS 42 Biology Core I: Cellular and Molecular

Lab (1)

BIOS 115 Biology Core II: Genetics (3)

BIOS 116 Biology Core II: Genetics Laboratory

(1)

BIOS 120 Biology Core III: Integrative and

Comparative (4)

BIOS 324 or Bacteriology (3)

BIOS 328 or Immunology (3)

BIOS 353 Virology (3)

BIOS 325 or Bacteriology Laboratory (2)

BIOS 368 or Cell Biology Laboratory (2)

BIOS 377 Biochemistry Laboratory (3)

BIOS 345 Molecular Genetics (3)

BIOS 346 Molecular Genetics Laboratory (2)

BIOS 367 Cell Biology (3)

BIOS 371 Elements of Biochemistry I (3)

BIOS 372 Elements of Biochemistry II (3)

BIOS 381 Physical Biochemistry (3)

BIOS Approved Molecular Biology Electives

(12)

Recommended sequence for the B.S. in Molecular

Biology

Freshman year

BIOS 41 Biology Core I: Cellular and Molecular

(3)

BIOS 42 Biology Core I: Cellular and Molecular

Laboratory (1)

MATH 21, 22 Calculus I, II (8)

CHM 30 Introduction to Chemical Principles (4)

CHM 31 Chemical Equilibria in Aqueous

Systems (4)

Sophomore year

BIOS 115 Biology Core II: Genetics (3)

BIOS 116 Biology Core II: Genetics Laboratory (1)

BIOS 120 Biology Core III: Integrative and

Comparative (4)

CHM 110, 112 Organic Chemistry I,II (6)

CHM 111, 113 Organic Chemistry Laboratory (2)

PHY 10, 12 General Physics I and Lab (5)

PHY 13, 22 General Physics II and Laboratory (4)

Junior year and Senior year

BIOS 324 or Bacteriology (3)

BIOS 328 or Immunology (3)

BIOS 353 Virology (3)

BIOS 325 or Bacteriology Laboratory (2)

BIOS 368 or Cell Biology Laboratory (2)

BIOS 377 Biochemistry Laboratory (3)

BIOS 345 Molecular Genetics (3)

BIOS 346 Molecular Genetics Laboratory (2)

BIOS 371, 372 Elements of Biochemistry I, II (6)

BIOS 367 Cell Biology (3)

BIOS 381 Physical Biochemistry (3)

BIOS Approved Molecular Biology Electives

(12)

Molecular Biology Minor

The molecular biology minor program consists of BIOS

41 (3), 42 (1), 115 (3), 116 (1), 345 (3), 346 (2), and a

minimum of 4 additional credits of BIOS coursework at

the 200 or 300 level. Collateral coursework must

include: MATH 51 or 21 (4), CHM 30 (4), and CHM

110 (3).

Departmental Honors

A student may apply for admission to the departmental

honors program through a potential thesis advisor.

Requirements for Departmental Honors include a major

GPA of 3.25 and at least 2 semesters of research for a

minimum of 6 cr. The student must write a research

proposal for their project and a thesis at the conclusion

of their research. This work must be presented in a sym-

posium at the end of the project. Students must meet

regularly to discuss their research progress in BIOS 387

and BIOS 388 to facilitate progress in the research proj-

ect.

Undergraduate Courses in Biological

Sciences

Courses with numbers below 010 are intended for non-

majors and may not be used to satisfy any life science

major or minor requirement.

BIOS 1. Biology for Non-Majors (3 or 4)

Basic and applied biology for non-science majors. May

not be used in satisfaction of life science major or minor

130 Lehigh University Course Catalog 2009-2010

programs. Focus of topics at the discretion of the

instructor. May be taught with (4 credits) or without (3

credits) a laboratory. (NS)

BIOS 7. Human Reproduction (3)

Basic and applied human reproductive biology for non-

science majors. May not be used in life science major or

minor programs. (NS)

BIOS 8. Drugs and Behavior (3)

Basic principles of drug action in the central nervous sys-

tem. Effects of stimulants, depressants, intoxicants and

drug abuse on behavioral function. Clinical use of drugs

in the treatment of various psychological and psychiatric

disorders. (NS)

BIOS 10. Bioscience in the 21

Century (4)

A multidisciplinary survey of advances in bioscience.

Exploration of theme-based topics (e.g., infectious dis-

eases, cancer, genome-base medicine, engineered

biomedical systems) coupled with social/ethical consider-

ations. Three lectures per week. Participation in on-line

multidisciplinary discussion, writing assignments, field

trips, and/or other activities. (NS)

BIOS 41. Biology Core I: Cellular and

Molecular (3)

Basic building blocks and higher-order structures

required for cellular processes. Topics include the charac-

ter of membranes, the molecular/cellular basis of energy

production, cell cycle progression, DNA replication,

gene expression, signal transduction, and cell division.

Pre- or corequisite: CHM 30 or 40. (NS)

BIOS 42. Biology Core I: Cellular and Molecular

Lab (3)

Experiments, observations, and discussions related to the

principal topics covered in BIOS 41. Corequisite: BIOS

41.

BIOS 115. Biology Core II: Genetics (3)

The structure, function, and continuity of hereditary

information. Classical genetic analysis. Molecular biolo-

gy of genes and genomes. Population genetics and

evolution. Genetics of complex traits. Prerequisite: BIOS

41. (NS)

BIOS 116. Biology Core II: Genetics

Laboratory (1)

Laboratory work that demonstrates major principles of

genetics: included are experiments on microorganisms

and the common fruit fly, Drosophila melanogaster.

Prerequisite: BIOS 115, preferably concurrently.

BIOS 120. Biology Core III: Integrative and

Comparative (4)

Experimental and historical approaches to the analysis of

structural and functional properties in organisms. Use of

scientific method to study species diversity. Introduction

to the analysis of organismal attributes that explain

behavioral repertoire and ecological relationships.

Prerequisites: BIOS 115, 116 (NS).

BIOS 130. Biostatistics (4)

Elements of statistics and probability theory with

emphasis on biological applications. Statistical analysis of

experimental and observational data. Prerequisite: BIOS

41 and MATH 52 or MATH 22 (ND)

BIOS 161. Supervised Research (1-3) fall-spring

Apprenticeship in ongoing faculty research program.

Literature review, experimental design, data collection

and analysis, and professional writing under faculty

sponsor supervision. May be repeated but only 3 credits

can be counted toward any life science major.

Prerequisite: BIOS 41 and consent of instructor. (ND)

BIOS 177. Behavioral Neuroscience I (3)

Nervous system functioning with varying emphasis on

neurophysiology, neuroanatomy, behavior genetics, infor-

mation transmission, research techniques, sensory and

motor functions. Prerequisite: BIOS 41. (NS)

BIOS 202. Biomedical Externship (1-3)

Analysis of individualized experiences at external bio-

medical clinical or research sites. Limited enrollment.

May not be taken for pass-fail grading. May be taken

only once and may not be used to satisfy any life science

major or minor requirement. Prerequisite: Consent of

department chair required. (NS)

BIOS 233. Invertebrate Zoology (4)

Survey of representative invertebrates. Structure and

behavior of selected types and concepts of evolutionary

relationships among the major groups. Two lectures and

two laboratory periods. Prerequisite: BIOS 120. (NS)

BIOS 234. Comparative Vertebrate Anatomy (4)

A course in vertebrate zoology with emphasis on the

study of homologous body structures in the various ver-

tebrate classes and their relationship to the functional

demands of habit and environment in each class.

Detailed dissections of representative vertebrates are

made in the laboratory. Two lectures and two laboratory

periods. Prerequisite: BIOS 120. (NS)

BIOS 235. Human Physiology (4)

Movement, digestion, respiration, circulation and excre-

tion. Sensory systems, hormonal and electrical signal

transduction, reproduction. Writing intensive.

Prerequisite: BIOS 120 (NS)

BIOS 241. Vertebrate Natural History (4)

An introduction to the ecology, behavior, distribution

and evolution of vertebrates, with emphasis on the

North American fauna. Two lectures, one tutorial and

one laboratory and field trip. This course may be used to

fulfill junior writing requirements with the permission of

the instructor. Prerequisite: BIOS 120. (NS)

BIOS 251. Writing and Biological Sciences (3)

A course designed to acquaint students with some of the

intellectual foundations of science, with attention to the

distinctiveness of the biological sciences. Format includes

readings, intensive writing, extemporaneous speaking,

and discussion. May not be used to fulfill Biology B.A.

elective requirements. Prerequisite: Major status and con-

sent of department. (NS)

BIOS 261. Special Topics in Biological

Sciences (1-3)

Research, conferences and reports on selected topics not

covered in the general undergraduate offerings. May be

taken more than once for credit. Prerequisite: Major sta-

tus and consent of instructor. (NS)

BIOS 262. Research Proposal (3)

Literature and methods of research in area of department

faculty expertise. Requires development of detailed pro-

posal for research to be performed in senior year.

Prerequisites: Major in any biological sciences degree

program; junior standing; GPA of 3.0 in major; and

consent of department. (NS)

Biological Sciences 131

BIOS 276. Behavioral Neuroscience II (3)

Neuronanatomy and neurophysiology of animal and

human behavior. Feeding, thirst, sleep, emotions, learn-

ing, and psychopathology. Prerequisite: BIOS 177. (ND)

BIOS 277. Experimental Neuroscience

Laboratory (2)

Structure and function of the mammalian brain with

special attention to cellular morphology and organiza-

tion. Standard, cutting edge techniques to determine

how the shape and function of the nervous system regu-

lates behavior. Experimental design, hypothesis testing,

statistical analysis, reading and writing of scientific

papers, basic histology and imaging. Prerequisites: BIOS

177. (NS)

For Advanced Undergraduates and Graduate

Students

BIOS 307. Male Reproductive Biology (1-3)

Molecular, cellular, and genetic aspects of the mam-

malian male reproductive system. Prerequisites: BIOS

120 and consent of instructor (NS).

BIOS 313. Vertebrate Histology (3)

Microstructural and ultrastructural properties of verte-

brate cells and tissues. Techniques of tissue preparation.

One lecture and two labs. Prerequisite: BIOS 120 (ND)

BIOS 314. Vertebrate Development (3)

Germ cell formation, fertilization, early development,

and the origin of the principal organ systems. Location,

structure, and regulation of information from molecular

to organismal levels of organization. Prerequisite: BIOS

120 (NS)

BIOS 317. Evolution (3)

Mechanisms of evolution, emphasizing genetic structure

and variation of populations, and isolation. Origin of

species and higher taxa. Rates of evolution, extinction.

Prerequisite: BIOS 120 (NS)

BIOS 320. The Business of Life Science (3)

An examination of business process in start-up, early

stage and developing bioscience companies. Technology

assessment, business plan and proposal preparation,

financial strategies, resource management, intellectual

property, and legal as well as regulatory issues. Cannot

be used to fulfill major requirements in Biological

Sciences. Prerequisite: BIOS 120 or consent of instruc-

tor. (ND)

BIOS 324. Bacteriology (3)

The structure, physiology, growth, genetics and taxono-

my of prokaryotes. Prerequisites: CHM 110 and BIOS

120. (NS)

BIOS 325. Bacteriology Laboratory (2)

Standard procedures and metabolic tests used in determi-

native bacteriology; aseptic technique, sterilization,

enumeration, and control of bacterial growth; other

selected topics. Corequisite: BIOS 324.

BIOS 328. Immunology (3)

Distinction of “self” and “non-self” through humoral

and cellular mechanisms. Antigens; biochemical struc-

tures, cellular mechanisms, genetic control and

processing, phylogenetic distribution, diseased states.

Prerequisite: BIOS 120. (NS)

BIOS 329. Herpetology (3)

Biology of amphibians and reptiles. Two lectures, one

laboratory or field trip per week. Prerequisite: BIOS 120.

(ND)

BIOS 334. Species and Speciation (3)

Consideration of the origin of species. Discussion of a

variety of “species” definitions and exploration of the

evolutionary mechanisms by which new species arise.

Alternation between lecture and discussion, drawing on

the textbook and on current and classical literature.

Prerequisite: BIOS 317.

BIOS 335. (PSYC 335) Animal Behavior (3)

Discussion of the behavior of invertebrates and verte-

brates and analysis of the physiological mechanisms

responsible for behavioral stimuli, and adaptive value of

specific behavior patterns. Prerequisite: BIOS 120. (NS)

BIOS 336. Animal Behavior Laboratory (2)

Experiments and field observations illustrating principles

discussed in BIOS 335. Emphasis on observing animals,

performing experiments, collecting and analyzing data,

and individual research. Six hours of laboratory per

week. Corequisite: BIOS 335 or 337.

BIOS 337. Behavioral Ecology (3)

Social systems of vertebrate and invertebrate groups.

Emphasis on ecological and evolutionary factors that

influence social behavior. Prerequisite: BIOS 120. (NS)

BIOS 340. Molecular Basis of Disease (3)

Lectures and student projects on molecular mechanisms

of human disease. Physiology of disease, molecular

mechanisms, therapeutic approaches, ongoing research.

Topics include: neurodegenerative diseases, cancer,

autoimmune diseases, infectious diseases. Prerequisite:

BIOS 120 (NS)

BIOS 345. Molecular Genetics (3)

The organization and replication of genetic material;

mutagenesis; mechanisms of regulation; mechanisms of

gene transmission involving prokaryotes and eukaryotes

and their viruses; techniques for intervention into genet-

ic organization and expression. Prerequisite: BIOS 120.

(NS)

BIOS 346. Molecular Genetics Laboratory (2)

Laboratory experiments related to the topics covered in

BIOS 345. Emphasis is on molecular characterization of

DNA and the principles of gene isolation and transfer.

Corequisite: BIOS 345.

BIOS 347. Advanced Topics in Genetics (3)

Lectures and student projects on selected aspects of

genetics such as the genetics and evolution of particular

organisms, regulation of gene expression and transmis-

sion, human genetics, gene therapy, etc. Prerequisites:

BIOS 345 or consent of department chair. (NS)

BIOS 353. Virology (3)

Structure and replication of viruses. Emphasis on the

organization, replication, and regulation of expression of

viral genomes; the mechanisms of virus assembly and

release; and on virus-host interactions. Special attention

given to human pathogenic viruses. Prerequisite: BIOS

120 and CHM 112. (NS)

BIOS 356. Human Genetics and Reproduction (3)

Frontiers in human genetics, including simple and com-

plex genetic diseases, cancers. Emphasis on genes and

structures that enable reproductive processes; genetic

functions of mammalian germ lines. Analysis of current

publications. Prerequisite: BIOS 120. (NS)

132 Lehigh University Course Catalog 2009-2010

BIOS 365. Neurobiology of Sensory Systems (3)

The fundamental features of sensory systems in a diverse

array of animals. Focus on how nervous systems detect,

compute, and internally represent aspects of the environ-

ment from the single cell to whole system level. Special

attention to the way sensory processing influences how

we think about the biological basis of perception and

possible mechanisms for consciousness. Prerequisites:

BIOS 177 and 120.

BIOS 367. Cell Biology (3)

Molecular aspects of cell biology. Emphasis on mem-

brane structure and function, organelle biogenesis, cell

motility, the cytoskeleton, and extracellular matrix.

Prerequisite: BIOS 120. (NS)

BIOS 368. Cell Biology Laboratory (2)

Basic methods used in cell biology laboratories around

the world and the opportunity to carry out an independ-

ent research project. Techniques include histology and

microscopy (both white and fluorescent light), tissue cul-

ture and sterile procedures, cellular fractionation, nuclear

import assays, and immunological probing. Co- or pre-

requisite: BIOS 367. Consent of Department. (NS)

BIOS 369. Comparative Physiology of Vertebrate

Systems (3-4)

Functional analysis of energy balance in vertebrate ani-

mal models. Digestion, respiration, circulation, and

excretion, across aquatic and terrestrial vertebrates.

Homeostatic mechanisms of salt, water, and gas

exchange. Ionotropic and metabetropic signal transduc-

tion. Hormonal and electrical cellular communication

among muscles, glands, and neurons. Sensory systems,

movement and reproduction. Physiological adaptations

to extreme environments. When offered for 4 credits, the

course includes one laboratory meeting per week.

Prerequisite: BIOS 120. (NS)

BIOS 371. (CHM 371) Elements of Biochemistry

I (3) fall

A general study of carbohydrates, proteins, lipids, nucleic

acids and other biological substances and their impor-

tance in life processes. Protein and enzyme chemistry are

emphasized. Prerequisite: one year of organic chemistry.

(NS)

BIOS 372. (CHM 372) Elements of Biochemistry

II (3) spring

Dynamic aspects of biochemistry; enzyme reactions

including energetics, kinetics and mechanisms; metabo-

lism of carbohydrates, lipids, proteins and nucleic acids;

photosynthesis, electron transport mechanisms, coupled

reactions, phosphorylations, and the synthesis of biologi-

cal macromolecules. Prerequisite: BIOS 371 and BIOS

41 or consent of the instructor. (NS)

BIOS 376. Classical & Molecular Embryology (3)

Differentiation of multicellular organisms from a single

cell. Axis determination; gradients; induction and pat-

tern formation viewed through modern analysis of

regulated gene expression. Prerequisite: BIOS 345 (previ-

ously or concurrently). (NS)

BIOS 377. (CHM 377) Biochemistry

Laboratory (3) fall

Laboratory studies of the properties of chemicals of bio-

logical origin and the influence of chemical and physical

factors on these properties. Laboratory techniques used

for the isolation and identification of biochemicals.

Prerequisite: BIOS/CHM 371 previously or concurrently

and BIOS 41 or consent of instructor. (ND)

BIOS 378. (CHM 378) Biochemical

Preparations (1-3) spring

A laboratory course involving the preparation or isola-

tion, purification and identification of chemicals of

biological origin. Prerequisites: BIOS/CHM 377 and

372, previously or concurrently. (ND)

BIOS 381. Physical Biochemistry (3)

Topics include: thermodynamics of biological systems;

Forces acting on and between biological molecules;

Principles of macromolecular structure; Physical methods

used to characterize biomolecules; and other topics to be

determined. Prerequisite BIOS/CHM 371 and BIOS 41.

(NS)

BIOS 382. (PSYC 382) Endocrinology of

Behavior (3)

Hormonal effects upon animal and human behavior.

Emphasis on neuroendocrinology of steroid hormone

involvement in reproductive behaviors. Prerequisite:

BIOS 177 or BIOS 120. (NS)

BIOS 383. Biological Sciences Colloquia (1)

Analysis of weekly colloquia in the biological sciences.

For senior majors in the biological sciences. May be

taken twice for credit. (ND)

BIOS 384. Eukaryotic Signal Transduction (3)

Signal transduction between cells of multi-cellular

eukaryotic organisms examined in the context of special-

ized functions that include: nutrition, hormones and

neurotransmitters, vision, muscle contraction, adhesion,

and the immune system. The evolution of cancer based

on mutations in these signaling systems. Prerequisite

BIOS 367 or 372.

BIOS 387. Biological Sciences Honors Seminar (1)

Development, presentation and implementation of

research proposals, and discussions of research. Required

for senior biology and molecular biology majors pursu-

ing departmental honors. Departmental permission

required. (ND)

BIOS 388. Biological Sciences Honors Seminar (1)

Continuation and extension of BIOS 387. Departmental

permission required. (ND)

BIOS 391. Undergraduate Research (1-3)

Laboratory research under tutorial with a faculty mem-

ber. May be taken more than once for credit.

Prerequisites: junior standing, and consent of instructor.

(ND)

BIOS 393. Thesis (3)

Literature review and design of project in selected area,

execution of the project, final report and presentation.

Departmental permission. Intended for senior majors in

BIOS only. May be repeated one time for additional

credit. Prerequisite: Consent of instructor. (ND)

Special Health Professions Programs

Students may apply for admission to an accelerated B.A.-

Doctor of Medicine program and a B.A.-Doctor of

Medical Dentistry program. A seven-year B.A.-M.D.

program is offered in conjunction with Drexel University

College of Medicine, and a seven-year B.A.-D.M.D. pro-

gram is offered in conjunction with the University of

Pennsylvania School of Dental Medicine. Students in

these programs receive a B.A. from Lehigh and a gradu-

Biological Sciences 133

ate degree from the designated professional school within

a seven-year period. For details concerning admission to

these programs, see Health Professions, Section III.

Graduate Study in the Biological

Sciences

Rigorous, research-oriented graduate programs leading to

a Doctor of Philosophy are offered in three divisions of

the Department of Biological Sciences: biochemistry,

integrative biology and neuroscience, and molecular

biology. To complete the program students must success-

fully complete core courses, pass a qualifying exam,

prepare, submit, and successfully defend a written

research proposal, complete the research described in the

proposal, and submit a written dissertation and defend

the completed research to the department.

Once students enter the department, their progress is

monitored by the graduate committee until they are

admitted to candidacy. Members of the committee meet

with the student each semester to assess the student’s

progress towards the degree and to assist students in

choosing the appropriate courses to provide a solid scien-

tific foundation and an up-to-date understanding of the

discipline. This will be assessed by the qualifying exam.

The qualifying exam generally should be taken after the

third semester and no later than the fourth semester of

course work. It will be prepared, administered and grad-

ed by the faculty associated with the specific graduate

program in which the student is enrolled. It consists of a

two-day written exam and an oral examination. The

exam can be repeated once. Admission to candidacy is

granted after successful completion of the qualifying

exam and the thesis proposal. The proposal is a written

description of an original research project developed

under the guidance of a faculty member chosen by the

student to be his/her advisor. The proposal will be pre-

sented orally to the thesis committee, typically after the

fifth semester. Following the presentation of the propos-

al, an oral examination will take place in which the

thesis committee will question the student about general

science related to the project. This will constitute the

general examination.

Core requirements for each division are listed below. The

graduate school requires students to register for at least

72-post baccalaureate credits to earn the Ph.D. In addi-

tion, all students must take BIOS 408 (0 credits)

Responsible Conduct of Science within their first year of

graduate study. All students must also attend departmen-

tal seminars and enroll in BIOS 406 (1 credit) Biological

Sciences Seminar at least twice in the first four semesters.

A minimum of 24 course credits may be chosen from

upper level courses in biochemistry, molecular biology,

cell biology, behavioral biology and evolutionary biology,

and neuroscience. At least 12 of these credits must be at

the 400 level.

In the biochemistry program, research areas include

DNA structure and function, regulation of protein syn-

thesis, and signal transduction. Students admitted to

graduate study in biochemistry will typically have an

undergraduate degree in chemistry or biochemistry.

Students with an undergraduate degree in a related disci-

pline will be expected to have the following

undergraduate preparation for graduate study beyond

introductory chemistry and a year of organic chemistry:

at least one semester of analytical chemistry and one

semester of physical chemistry - thermodynamics and

kinetics, with appropriate math. Students without that

background will be expected to take courses to fulfill

those requirements as part of their graduate study.

Required courses: BIOS 371, 372 Elements of

Biochemistry I and II, BIOS 469, 470 Biochemical

Problem Solving I and II, CHM 423 Bio-Organic

Chemistry, BIOS 345 Molecular Genetics, and a semi-

nar course. BIOS 408 or CHM 400 must also be

completed before beginning research.

The graduate program in integrative biology and neuro-

science is designed to train students in advanced

organismal biology with the emphasis on behavioral

ecology, evolution, functional morphology, endocrinolo-

gy, and neurobiology of animals. The mission of the

program is to create students who are broadly trained

and uniquely capable of asking questions and solving

problems at the interface of these traditionally defined

fields. Students admitted to the program should have a

basic knowledge of evolution, anatomy, physiology,

behavioral neuroscience, and/or behavioral ecology.

Students will begin by taking core courses providing a

broad foundation in integrative biology at the graduate

level and work toward a Ph.D. with a concentration in

either behavioral neuroscience or behavioral and evolu-

tionary biology. Regardless of concentration, all students

in the program develop an appreciation for the fact that

all aspects of biology, whether cellular, physiological,

anatomical, behavioral, evolutionary, or social, are inex-

tricably linked and cannot be fully understood as

separate, parallel systems of knowledge. The integrative

program consists of two tracts: (I) Animal Behavior and

Evolution, and (II) Neuroscience. The Animal Behavior

and Evolution tract requires that students take 4 core

courses with at least one course taken from each of the

following three core areas: (1) Animal

Behavior/Evolution (courses include BIOS 409, 439,

334). (2) Behavior/Neuroanatomy (BIOS 453, 475) and

(3) Development/Neurophysiology (BIOS 416, 450).

The Neuroscience tract requires that students take both

BIOS 453 and 416, and one course from each of the fol-

lowing core areas: (1) Developmental/Endocrinology

(BIOS 450, 457), (2) Animal Behavior/Evolution (BIOS

409, 439, 334), (3) Cell/Molecular Neuroscience (411,

421, 422, 431, 432). BIOS 401 and two semesters of

BIOS 406 are required. Depending on the student’s

background, additional courses may be required.

In the molecular biology program, research areas include

microbial evolution and genetics, plant and animal

molecular genetics, eukaryotic cell biology, and regula-

tion of gene expression. Required core courses include

BIOS 345 Molecular Genetics, BIOS 371 Elements of

Biochemistry I, BIOS 372 Elements of Biochemistry II,

BIOS 411 Advanced Cell Biology, BIOS 421 Molecular

Cell Biology I, and BIOS 422 Molecular Cell Biology II.

Additional courses to reach 24 credits are chosen from

upper level electives in molecular biology, cell biology,

and biochemistry.

Facilities available for research in the biological sciences

include core facilities with equipment (for example, for

DNA synthesis, confocal microscopy, digital imaging,

chromatography, cell culture, centrifugation, controlled

environments, gamma and scintillation counting, flow

cytometry, and rodent surgery). Individual research labo-

ratories and advanced teaching laboratories contain a

variety of additional equipment. Ongoing interactions

134 Lehigh University Course Catalog 2009-2010

with a variety of private companies contribute additional

opportunities for student experiences.

Graduate Courses in the Biological

Sciences

BIOS 401. Professional Skills for Biological

Sciences Graduate Students (3)

Students learn expectations and fundamental skills relat-

ed to success in the biological sciences. The course is

designed to help students make the most out of their

graduate education. Students learn the principles under-

lying fundable, publishable research, and how these

general principles can be applied to their specific

research area. They learn to write and review manu-

scripts and grant proposals by serving on a mock

editorial board and scientific review panel. They gain

experience in giving oral presentations. Readings are

from texts on scientific writing and research styles, and

from original journal articles and grant proposals written

by the faculty. No prerequisites. Required of all

Integrative Biology graduate students.

BIOS 404. (PSYC 404) Behavioral

Neuroscience (3)

Theoretical and empirical issues in biopsychology.

Prerequisite: Graduate standing or consent of instructor.

BIOS 405. Special Topics in Molecular Biology (1-

Research, conferences, and reports on selected topics not

covered in the general graduate offerings. May be taken

more than once for credit.

BIOS 406. Biological Sciences Seminar (1)

An advanced seminar in current developments including

departmental research. Required for candidates for grad-

uate degrees in molecular biology. May be taken more

than once for credit.

BIOS 407. Research in Biological Science (1-9)

Laboratory investigations in one of the department’s

research areas.

BIOS 408. Responsible Conduct of Science (0)

Responsible practice in research. Training in general lab-

oratory methods; human subjects concerns; radiation

safety; chemical hazards; aseptic technique; physical,

mechanical, biological, and fire hazards; animal welfare.

Occupational and workplace considerations.

Recombinant DNA guidelines; patent and proprietary

rights; controversies over applications of science.

Appropriate aspects required of investigators in all

departmental research projects.

BIOS 409. Evolutionary and Functional

Morphology (3)

Readings in the current literature, demonstrations and

laboratory exercises exploring the applications of com-

parative methods to the analysis of evolutionary patterns

at a range of morphological levels (molecular and macro-

scopic). Students will also learn experimental approaches

to testing relationships between form and function in

vertebrates. Emphasis will be on the musculoskeletal and

nervous systems. Prerequisite BIOS 234, BIOS 317, or

permission of instructor.

BIOS 410. Special Topics in Behavioral and

Evolutionary Bioscience (1-3)

Readings and discussions on selected topics not covered

in the general graduate offerings. May be taken more

than once for credit.

BIOS 411. Advanced Cell Biology (3)

Cell structure and biochemistry, as related to specialized

cell functions.

BIOS 412. Metabolic Influences on Behavior (3)

Sensory systems that detect metabolic energy availability

and affect the behavior of humans and other animals:

food intake and body weight regulation, sexual and

parental behavior, aggression, learning, and body temper-

ature regulation. Prerequisite: BIOS 404 and consent of

instructor.

BIOS 414. Sexual Differentiation (3)

Genetic and hormonal events mediating the develop-

ment and expression of sexual dimorphisms in

physiology and behavior. Current theoretical models;

emphasis on biochemical, neuroanatomical and molecu-

lar biological considerations. Prerequisite: BIOS 404 and

consent of instructor.

BIOS 415. Neuropharmacology (3)

Mechanism of drug action in the central nervous system,

including cell surface receptors and second messenger

systems. Drug use/abuse and cellular changes mediating

behavioral effects. Drug use in clinical therapy.

Prerequisite: BIOS 404 and consent of instructor.

BIOS 418. Analysis of Reproduction and Mating

Systems (3)

Study of reproduction and sexuality in plants and ani-

mals with emphasis on current hypotheses as reported in

the literature. Topics include hermaphroditism, neoteny,

larval forms, parental investment, complex life cycles,

population structure. Readings from primary source

material and review articles. One review paper and one

research proposal are required, and together with read-

ings forms the basis for discussion sections and

examinations. Prerequisite: Consent of the department.

BIOS 420. Pheromonal Communication (3)

Mechanisms of pheromone synthesis, biochemistry, sen-

sory transduction, neuroanatomy/neuroendocrinology,

and adaptive significance. Prerequisite: BIOS 404 and

consent of instructor.

BIOS 421. Molecular Cell Biology I (3)

Molecular aspects of cell structure, cell motility, intracel-

lular transport; and biomembrane dynamics.

Prerequisite: BIOS 411 or equivalent.

BIOS 422. Molecular Cell Biology II (3)

Molecular aspects of gene expression, including genome

structure and replication, RNA synthesis/processing, and

protein synthesis. Prerequisite: BIOS 345 or equivalent.

BIOS 424. Advanced Neurobiology of Sensory

Systems (3)

This course is designed to provide an overview of core

principles of neuroscience through exploration of sensory

systems. The course will provide an intensive review of

fundamental neural signaling followed by a broad intro-

duction to the major sensory pathways. Focus will be on

major organizing principles of neural systems, and infor-

mation processing. Student discussions and presentations

will incorporate current literature and concepts.

BIOS 425. Male Reproductive Biology (1-3)

Molecular, cellular, and genetic aspects of the mam-

Biological Sciences 135

malian male reproductive system. Prerequisite:

Permission of instructor.

BIOS 427. Techniques in Cell and Molecular

Biology (3)

Laboratory experiences in three or more cell and molecu-

lar biological techniques: gel electrophoresis of nucleic

acids/proteins; polymerase chain reaction; DNA/RNA

sequencing; molecular hybridization techniques; fluores-

cence microscopy; confocal microscopy; flow cytometry;

electron microscopy tissue preparation; immunological

detection methods; molecular cloning techniques; oocyte

microinjection techniques; tissue culture methods; and

autoradiography.

BIOS 429. Advances in Herpetology (3)

Lectures and readings from the primary literature on

current research in amphibian and reptilian biology. Two

lectures, one discussion session and one laboratory or

field trip. Not open to students who have received credit

for BIOS 329.

BIOS 431. Advanced Topics in Cell Biology (3)

Current research problems in cell biology. May be

repeated when a different topic is offered. Prerequisite:

BIOS 367 or equivalent.

BIOS 432. Advanced Topics in Molecular

Genetics (3)

Current research in molecular genetics. May be repeated

when a different topic is offered. Prerequisite: BIOS 345

or equivalent.

BIOS 433. Advanced Topics in Developmental

Biology (3)

Current research problems in developmental biology.

May be repeated when a different topic is offered.

Prerequisite: BIOS 345 or equivalent.

BIOS 437. (CHM 437) Pathophysiological

Chemistry (3)

Biochemical basis of human diseases involving abnormal

metabolism of proteins, nucleic acids, carbohydrates, and

lipids. Emphasis on the correlation of the clinical presen-

tation of disease processes seen as physiological

dysfunctions with clinical laboratory methods. Lectures,

student presentations, and clinical case discussions.

Prerequisite: consent of the department.

BIOS 439. Advanced Behavioral Ecology (3)

Critical evaluation of the theoretical foundation in socio-

biology. Emphasis placed on kinship, altruism, mate

choice, parental investment, parent-offspring conflict,

etc. Lectures and seminars. Prerequisite: BIOS 317 or

equivalent. Not open to students who have taken BIOS

337.

BIOS 445. Systematics and Evolution (3)

Theoretical, philosophical and methodological founda-

tions of the classification of eukaryotic organisms and

the manner in which systematic theory and method

relate to evolutionary theory. Two lectures and one lab-

recitation-discussion session. Prerequisite: BIOS 317.

BIOS 450. Developmental Neurobiology (3)

Fundamental mechanisms underlying neural develop-

ment. Early events leading to the induction of the

neuroectoderm and the reorganization of the vertebrate

central nervous system during adulthood and aging.

Major developmental events such as phenotype commit-

ment, cell migration, differentiation and growth cone

guidance. Emphasis on the interplay between concepts

emerging from organismal and molecular levels of analy-

ses.

BIOS 453. General Neuroanatomy (3)

Graduate level study of the neuroanatomy and neuro-

chemistry of systems that underlie behavior in

vertebrates. Emphasis will be on the traditional and

novel methodologies used to reveal neuroanatomical

pathways as well as the function of these pathways.

Prerequisites: Permission of instructor.

BIOS 456. Human Genetics and

Preproduction (3)

Frontiers in human genetics, including simple and com-

plex genetic diseases, cancers. Emphasis on genes and

structures that enable reproductive processes; genetic

functions of mammalian germ lines. Analysis of current

publications.

BIOS 457. Advanced Behavioral

Neuroendocrinology (3)

A seminar course that covers current primary literature

on the hormone-nervous system interactions that under-

lie physiology and behavior. The course covers the

neuroendocrinology of reproduction, sex behavior,

parental behavior, social behavior, agonistic and territori-

al behavior, learning and memory, homeostasis (caloric,

nutritional, water and salt balance, temperature regula-

tion), circadian rhythms and seasonality in a variety of

vertebrates. Prerequisite: BIOS 382 or permission of

instructor.

BIOS 464. Molecular Biology of Eukaryotic

Organisms (3)

Comparative analysis of several eukaryotes as model sys-

tems in cell biology, developmental biology, genetics, and

molecular biology. Prerequisite: BIOS 345 or equivalent.

BIOS 466. Structure and Function of RNAs and

Ribonucleoprotein Complexes (3)

Biochemistry and function of small nuclear RNPs,

RNase P, ribosomes, self-splicing introns, signal recogni-

tion particle, RNA viruses. Functions of RNA in DNA

replication, in regulation, as an enzyme, and as a repres-

sor. Prerequisite: BIOS 345 or equivalent.

BIOS 467. (CHM 467) Principles of Nucleic Acid

Structure (3)

An examination of the principles underlying nucleic acid

structure including stereochemistry, electrostatics, hydra-

tion, torsional constraints, sequence specific effects, and

interaction with nuclear proteins. Special emphasis will

be placed on DNA structure. Prerequisites: one year of

biochemistry and one year of physical chemistry or per-

mission of the department.

BIOS 468. (CHM 468) Principles of Protein

Structure (3)

An examination of the principles underlying protein

structure including stereochemistry, preferred tertiary

structures, protein homology, excluded volume effects,

time dependent structural fluctuations, and prediction of

protein structure from sequence information.

Prerequisites: one year of biochemistry and one year of

physical chemistry or permission of the department.

BIOS 469. (CHM 469) Biochemical Problem

Solving I (1)

Applications of material covered in BIOS/CHM 371

136 Lehigh University Course Catalog 2009-2010

including techniques used in research. Prerequisite:

BIOS/CHM 371 previously or concurrently.

BIOS 470. (CHM 470) Biochemical Problem

Solving II (1)

Applications of concepts covered in BIOS/CHM 372

including techniques used in research. Prerequisite:

BIOS/CHM 372 previously or concurrently.

BIOS 471. (CHM 471) Eukaryotic Signal

Transduction (3)

Signal transduction between and within cells of multi-

cellular organisms examined in the context of specialized

functions that include: nutrition, hormones and neuro-

transmitters, vision, muscle contraction, adhesion and

the immune system. The evolution of cancer based on

mutations in these signaling systems. Lecture, discussion,

and student presentations. Prerequisite: BIOS/CHM 372

or BIOS 411.

BIOS 472. (CHM 472) Lipids and Membranes (3)

Structure, physical properties and functions of lipids and

their biological aggregates. Techniques for studying lipid

assemblies, enzymes which act on lipids, membrane pro-

teins and lipoproteins will also be discussed. Prerequisite:

BIOS/CHM 372 or consent of department.

BIOS 473. (CHM 473) Biochemistry of Complex

Carbohydrates (3)

Consideration of the structure, function and metabolism

of complex carbohydrates (glycolipids, glycoproteins and

proteoglycans) with particular emphasis on glycopro-

teins. The first part of the course will consist of lectures

to familiarize the student with basic terms, concepts and

processes. The second part will involve critical readings,

presentation and discussion of the current primary

research literature by class participants.

BIOS 479. (CHM 479) Biochemical Techniques (3)

Laboratory studies of the techniques and principles

involved in the isolation, identification, and biochemical

transformation of carbohydrates, lipids, nucleic acids and

proteins. Prerequisite: BIOS 371 or its equivalent previ-

ously or concurrently.

BIOS 480. (CHM 480) Advanced Biochemical

Preparations (1-3)

An advanced laboratory course in the preparation, isola-

tion, purification, and identification of biochemically

produced materials. Emphasis is placed on materials and

procedures of current interest in biochemistry.

Prerequisite: consent of the department.

BIOS 483. Special Topics in Behavioral

Neuroscience (3)

Examination of the biological substrates of behavior.

Topics may include animal communication, sociobiolo-

gy, behavioral endocrinology, or behavior genetics. May

be repeated for credit. Prerequisite: BIOS 404 or consent

of department.

BIOS 488. Seminar in Neuroscience, Behavior,

and Evolution (1)

Advanced seminar in current research developments.

May be taken more than once for credit.

Biology

Biology, life science, and related courses at Lehigh

University are offered in a variety of settings that reflect

the various levels of organization in life science and dif-

ferent orientations relating to areas of application. The

College of Arts and Sciences offers degree programs in

Behavioral Neuroscience, Biochemistry, Biology, Earth

and Environmental Science, and Molecular Biology. The

P. C. Rossin College of Engineering and Applied Science

offers a degree program in Bioengineering. Refer to the

catalog entries below for complete descriptions.

Major and minor Catalog entry

programs

Behavioral Neuroscience Biological Sciences

(BA or

BS)

Biochemistry Biochemistry (BS only)

Bioengineering (BS only) Bioengineering

Biology (BA or BS) Biological Sciences

Earth and Environmental Earth and Environmental

Science Sciences

Molecular Biology (BA or BS) Biological Sciences

Courses related to life science interest can be found

under the catalog entries above as well as in other

departments, including Chemical Engineering,

Chemistry, Mathematics, Physics, Psychology, and

Sociology and Anthropology.

Business

The designation of “business” refers to general business

courses.

Undergraduate Courses

BUS 1. Introduction to Business (3)

An introduction to business, emphasizing critical issues

impacting the business world, such as globalization,

technology, ethics, and diversity. Provides an overview of

the various functional areas of business and how they fit

together. Stresses experiential learning and develops

team-building skills. Strengthens written and oral com-

munications skills. Provides an introduction to career

opportunities and curriculum choices in business and

economics. Course is offered only in the fall and is open

only to College of Business and Economics freshmen.

BUS 05. Values Based Decision Making for

Business (1)

An introduction to the foundations of business integrity.

The role of individual decisions and ethics in business is

explored. Students evaluate cases and ethical issues they

are likely to face in business. Covers fundamentals of

corporate governance and cases in governance failures

such as WorldCom and Tyco. Social responsibility, ethi-

cal business leaders, and current topics in business ethics

are addressed. Class dialog is emphasized along with

reflective writing. Open only to CBE first year students.

Prerequisite: BUS 01.

BUS 173. Non-Major Summer Internship (1)

CBE internships expose students to the business world,

enriching their understanding of ideas and problems

encountered in their business courses. This course is

available summers and open to students in the College

of Business & Economics and those in the following

Business 137

programs: CSB, IBE, and Business Minor. Students are

evaluated on a directed writing assignment and on a

detailed evaluation provided by the work supervisor. A

minimum of 150 hours of work must be completed in

the internship, and verified by work supervisor. Course

registration and related arrangements must be made in

advance of the work experience. This course does not

satisfy any major requirements. Prerequisite: completion

of a minimum of 24 college credits.

BUS 211. Integrated Product Development (IPD)

1 (3) spring

Business, engineering and design art students work in

cross-disciplinary teams of 4-6 students on conceptual

design including marketing, financial and economic

planning, economic and technical feasibility of new

product concepts. Teams work on industrial projects

with faculty advisors. Oral presentations and written

reports. Prerequisite: Junior standing in business, eco-

nomics, arts or engineering.

BUS 212. Integrated Product Development (IPD)

2 (2) fall

Business, engineering, and design arts students work in

cross disciplinary teams of 4-6 students on the detailed

design including fabrication and testing of a prototype of

the new product designed in IPD course 1. Additional

deliverables include a detailed production plan, market-

ing plan, detailed base-case financial models, project and

product portfolio. Teams work on industrial projects

with faculty advisors. Oral presentations and written

reports. Prerequisite: Bus 211/ENGR 211.

Bus 347. Practicum in Real Estate I (2) fall

This course is an interdisciplinary study of the creation

of value in commercial real estate. Organized into

groups, with each group assigned a different subject

commercial real property, the class engages in the study

of the physical and locational characteristics of commer-

cial real estate as they relate to value including: property

history; architecture; physical attributes that add to or

detract from value; tenant mix; the immediate neighbor-

hood environment; and, the specific market in which the

real property competes for tenants. Each group submits a

written report of their findings and produces a 10-

minute video documentary on their subject property.

Prerequisites: Permission of the instructor. Students

enrolling in this course must also commit to enrolling in

the follow-on course – Bus 348 – Practicum in Real

Estate II.

Bus 348. Practicum in Real Estate II (2) spring

This course is a continuation of the interdisciplinary

study of the creation of value in commercial real estate

begun in Bus 347 – Practicum in Real Estate I.

Organized into groups, with each group continuing with

the subject commercial real property assigned to them in

Bus 347, the class engages in the study of the market

and financial characteristics of commercial real estate as

they relate to value through: a financial analysis of the

market in which their property is located to include mar-

ket rents, market vacancy rates and market absorption

rates; and, financial analysis of the subject property to

include both historical results, and pro forma estimates

of revenues, expenses, cash flow and residual value. Each

group also studies the financial characteristics of compa-

rable properties. The course culminates in an

end-of-semester written and oral presentation by each

group before a panel of academic and practitioner

judges. The group judged to have performed the most

outstanding analysis is awarded a cash prize.

Prerequisites: Bus 347–Practicum in Real Estate I.

Business Minor

Program Admission Requirements: Each spring, 80 stu-

dents will be accepted into the business minor program

for the following fall. Applications to the program will

be made by students and submitted to the program

director by the first Monday in March. An admissions

committee comprised of the business minor program

director, associate dean for the undergraduate CBE pro-

grams, and the business minor curriculum committee

will make admission decisions based on G.P.A., experi-

ence, and interest in pursuing business opportunities

upon graduation from Lehigh (to be evaluated on the

basis of a written essay). Students will be notified of

admissions decisions prior to registration for the fall

semester. Entrance into business minor classes will be

controlled by restricted overrides by the director of busi-

ness minor program. The Director of the Business Minor

program is Geraldo M. Vasconcellos, Allen DuBois

Distinguished Professor of Finance & Economics

([email protected]). Professor Vasconcellos’ office is in

the Rauch Business Center, Room 320.

Business Minor Courses

BUS 125. Behavioral Skills Workshop (1) fall

BUS 125 is a course that will have as its aim to equip

students to work with others in a business setting in

making business decisions. The focus of the class will be

on effective decision making and will include such topics

as group and team decision making, conflict resolution

and negotiation, ethical decision making, and creative

problem solving. This course will be offered as a series of

intensive workshops in the fall semester and will heavily

focus on experiential learning. Prerequisite: ECO 1. Co-

requisite: BUS 126.

BUS 126. Information Analysis and Financial

Decision Making I (3) fall

An integrated introduction to business, accounting and

finance. Students are introduced to the goals, people and

activities of business, before focusing on the fundamental

elements of accounting and finance, including financial

statement construction and analysis, time value of

money, financing and investing with equity and debt,

and the impact of various operating decisions on busi-

ness. Experiential learning, and development of

team/communication skills, are encouraged through

portfolio simulation and financial analysis projects.

Prerequisite: ECO 1. Co-requisite: BUS 125.

BUS 127. Information Analysis and Financial

Decision Making II (3) spring

This course builds upon the foundational teachings of

BUS 126 through examination of topics in portfolio

management, capital investment decision making, busi-

ness planning, analysis and reporting, and various

specialized topics such as: entrepreneurship, business law,

ethics, internal control systems, and E-business.

Experiential learning, and development of team/commu-

nication skills, are encouraged through group projects

and guest speakers. Prerequisite: BUS 126.

BUS 225. Developing, Producing, and Marketing

Products and Services I (3) fall

Introduction to the key elements in the marketing

138 Lehigh University Course Catalog 2009-2010

framework of a corporation. Focus on defining market-

ing, analyzing the market and competitors, developing

effective marketing strategies, segmenting the market,

creating customer value, satisfaction, and loyalty, analyz-

ing consumer and business markets, creating brand

equity, and managing an effective marketing program to

deliver the right products and services to the right audi-

ence at the right place at the right price and the right

time. Emphasis on business writing skills. Experiential

learning through the development of a product or service

marketing plan. Prerequisite: BUS 127.

BUS 226. Developing, Producing, and Marketing

Products and Services II (3) spring

This course extends the marketing management princi-

ples initiated in BUS 225 with the creation,

development, and delivery of new product ideas to the

marketplace. Comprehensive overview of the new prod-

uct development process, including how to develop an

effective development strategy, manage cross-functional

teams across the organization, generate and evaluate con-

cepts, manage the technical development of a product,

develop the marketing plan, and manage the financial

aspects of a project. As product innovation is a multi-dis-

ciplinary field, this course, while focusing on marketing’s

role in product innovation, relies heavily on techniques

that encompass engineering, research and development,

management, production, and design. Emphasis on busi-

ness writing skills and creativity. Experiential learning

through the implementation of a new product idea and

the performance assessment of both the supporting mar-

keting and business plan. Prerequisite: BUS 225.

BUS 326. Business Strategy (1 credit hour.

Spring.)

Business Strategy is a capstone course covering total

enterprise problems in determination, execution, and

control within a global setting. The course integrates the

theories of production, marketing, finance and organiza-

tion and provides an opportunity to study the function

of higher level management as related to the total busi-

ness environment through a team-based business

simulation. Students will develop a business strategy and

make decisions that impact performance metrics of the

firm. Co-requisite: BUS 226.

Business Information Systems

Program director. Catherine M. Ridings, Ph.D.

(Drexel), associate professor management

Program faculty. Susan A. Sherer, Ph.D. (Pennsylvania)

Kenan professor of information technology management and

chair management; James A. Hall, Ph.D. (Oklahoma

State), associate professor accounting; Lin Lin, Ph.D.

(Arizona), assistant professor management; Yuliang Yao,

Ph.D. (Maryland), assistant professor management; Chitra

Nayar, M.B.A. (Iowa), lecturer; Dennis S. Praedin, B.A.

(Muhlenberg); adjunct professor

Business information systems serve as a conduit for busi-

ness change and they are the heart of today’s business

model. Our diverse faculty and contemporary curricu-

lum is targeted at preparing our students to play a vital,

value-added role in today’s rapidly changing business

information environment.

Beyond understanding the key prerequisite technical

skills, students will learn how businesses can leverage

information technology and business information sys-

tems in conjunction with various management

techniques in order to meet corporate tactical and strate-

gic goals. By being introduced to the spectrum of today’s

leading technologies, students will understand the busi-

ness implications and opportunities addressed in today’s

global economy.

The business information systems field is vibrant and

exciting. There are a broad range of employment oppor-

tunities. Successful completion of the BIS program

would invite students to pursue a wide range of career

opportunities, including careers as a systems

analyst/designer, information systems manager, informa-

tion systems project manager, and information systems

consultant.

The Business Information Systems major requires five

(5) courses and two (2) electives beyond the core

requirements of the College of Business and Economics.

Students are required to take BIS 111, Introduction to

Information Systems, as part of the business and eco-

nomics core. Other courses are as follows:

Required Courses (5):

BIS 15 Business Application Programming (4)

or CSE 17 Structured Programming and Data

Structures (4)

BIS 311 Managing Information Systems

Analysis and Design (3)

BIS 324 Business Data Management (3)

BIS 333 Business Data Communications (3)

BIS 350 Project Management in IS (3)

Elective Courses (Choose 2):

ACCT 311 Accounting Information Systems (3)

BIS 331 Electronic Commerce (3)

BIS 342 E-business Enterprise Applications (3)

BIS 372* Special Topics in Information Systems

(3)

BIS 360 BIS Practicum (3)

or CSB 312 Design of Integrated Business

Applications I (3)

*Courses focusing on different applications of IS in business,

including: Data Warehousing and Mining, HR Applications

in IS, Numerical Methods of Business Decisions, etc. Con-

sult Professor Ridings for other related courses.

Undergraduate Courses

BIS 15. Business Application Programming (4)

Design, coding, and testing of business applications in a

high level, object-oriented computer programming lan-

guage. The course focuses on developing competence in

the computer language by writing programs to solve

business focused problems. Methods, classes, objects,

control structures, arrays, string manipulation, graphics,

graphical user interfaces, and web-based applets will be

covered. Some previous experience with programming

helpful but not required. Hands-on exercises will be

included, taught in the computer lab.

BIS 111. Introduction to Information Systems (3)

This course examines the fundamental role of informa-

tion systems in supporting and managing all business

functions and enabling firms to compete effectively.

Both technical and managerial aspects of information

systems are introduced. The course integrates technical

infrastructure, database concepts, management decision-

making, and business process issues critical to the

Business Information Systems 139

understanding of operational and strategic information

systems. It introduces business applications that support

accounting, finance, supply chain management, and

marketing. Prerequisite: Excel competency.

BIS 311. Managing Information Systems Analysis

and Design (3)

This course focuses on managing the requirements

analysis and system design methodology and techniques

for business information systems. Students learn current

methods and techniques for system requirement analysis

as well as system design, and apply them to real world

projects. It covers cost benefit analysis and risk manage-

ment of business systems development, JAD and

structured walkthroughs, structured and object oriented

methodologies, and software package evaluation. It

emphasizes the factors for effective communication and

integration with users and user systems and encourages

interpersonal skill development with client users, team

members, and others associated with development, oper-

ation, and maintenance of the system. Prerequisite: BIS

111 or consent of instructor.

BIS 324. Business Data Management (3)

This course covers the fundamentals of database manage-

ment systems (DBMS), including database development,

processing, logical and physical design, access, imple-

mentation and administration. Students will gain

extensive experience in developing data models, creating

relational databases, and formulating and executing com-

plex queries. The focus in the course will be on analyzing

the connections between data and business organization-

al information needs and decisions, and understanding

the principles of managing organizational data. The

course includes a project with hands-on experience with

a large scale database and SQL. Prerequisite: BIS 311.

BIS 331. (MKT 331) Electronic Commerce (3)

This course covers how businesses and consumers use the

Internet to exchange information and complete transac-

tions. Both theoretical concepts and practical skills will

be addressed with the scope of the class. Topics include

advertising and marketing, ecommerce business and rev-

enue models, online consumer behavior, web site design

issues, Internet security, electronic payments, infrastruc-

ture issues, privacy issues, and overall electronic

commerce strategy. Students will get hands-on experi-

ence designing ecommerce web-sites using web

authoring software. Prerequisite: BIS 111, MKT 111 or

consent of instructor.

BIS 333. Business Data Communications (3)

This course covers modern data communication tech-

nologies and how they are used in business. It provides

an exposure to current and emerging networking and

telecommunications technologies, introduces software

and hardware fundamentals for various computer/net-

work architectures, and provides an understanding of the

business context of these technologies. Students will

learn how to evaluate, select, and implement different

communication options within an organization. The

course emphasizes the business context of data commu-

nication technologies. Prerequisite: BIS 311.

BIS 342. (SCM 342) e-Business Enterprise

Applications (3)

Introduction to the implications of key information

technologies used within and across businesses to con-

duct e-business. The course covers the functionality of

various enterprise applications and their integration: cus-

tomer relationship management, enterprise resource

planning, supply chain management, supplier relation-

ship management, data warehousing and mining,

business intelligence, and product lifecycle management.

Prerequisites: BIS 111 or consent of the instructor.

BIS 350. Project Management (3)

Key processes and tenets of project management includ-

ing scope, time, cost, quality, human resources,

communications, risk, procurement, and integration

management. Both technical and behavioral aspects of

project management are applied within the context of

either IS management, HR management, Supply Chain

Process Management, Small Business Management.

Topics include: expectations management, change man-

agement and consulting engagement management.

Introduces both software project monitoring tools and

project team collaboration techniques and tools.

Prerequisites: completion of all other courses in either

BIS or Management major.

BIS 360. Business Information Systems

Practicum (3)

The business information systems practicum provides an

opportunity for students to work on an intensive con-

sulting engagement with a business. Students work with

client firms on individual or team projects, which focus

on information systems activities such as developing

requirements, designing, and implementing systems.

Students complete written reports and make formal pre-

sentations to clients. May not be taken concurrently with

MGT 311. Prerequisites: Junior standing in the College

of Business and Economics.

BIS 371. Directed Readings (1-3)

Readings and research information systems; designed for

superior students who have special interest in some

topic(s) not covered by the regularly scheduled courses.

Written term paper(s) required. May be repeated.

Prerequisite: preparation in information systems accept-

able to program coordinator.

BIS 372. Special Topics in Information

Systems (1-3)

Special problems and issues in information systems for

which no regularly scheduled course work exists. When

offered as group study, coverage varies according to inter-

ests of the instructor and students. May be repeated.

Prerequisite: preparation in information systems accept-

able to program coordinator.

BIS 373. Business Information Systems

Internship (1-3)

Based on a student’s work experience, a sponsoring facul-

ty member shall direct readings, projects, and other

assignments-including a “capstone report.” It should be

noted that the work experience (at least 80 hours per

credit), by itself, is not the basis for academic credit. The

faculty directed activity must be provided concurrent

with the work. Course registration and related arrange-

ments, including designating a sponsoring faculty

member, must be made in advance of the work engage-

ment. This course must be taken Pass/Fail, is not

repeatable and cannot be used to satisfy BIS major or

minor requirements. Prerequisites: BIS 311, declaration

of a BIS major or minor, junior standing, and depart-

ment approval.

140 Lehigh University Course Catalog 2009-2010

Course descriptions for the College of Business and

Economics graduate courses can be found in this section

(Section V) under the heading of Business and

Economics Graduate Courses.

Business Information Systems Minor

This minor provides an overview of the major technical

functions in IS, such as design of systems and the devel-

opment and management of databases. In addition, the

student explores the applications of IS to business prob-

lems in either the e-commerce or e-business context.

This minor is available only to students with a declared

major in the College of Business and Economics.

Program of Studies: The BIS minor consists of 3 courses

equaling 9 credit hours. These credit hours consist of the

following courses:

Required Courses:

• BIS 311 Managing Information Systems Analysis and

Design (3)

• BIS 324 Business Data Management (3)

Choice of either:

• BIS 331 Electronic Commerce (3)

-or-

• BIS 342 E-Business Enterprise Applications (3)

Business and Economics

Graduate Courses

MBA Prerequisites

GBUS 401. Financial Reporting for Managers and

Investors (3)

Corporate financial reporting under Generally Accepted

Accounting Principles. Analysis and interpretation of

financial statements: accrual accounting, balance sheet

valuation, income determination and cash flow analysis.

Profit manipulation, window dressing and “creative

accounting” through accounting policy choices.

Fraudulent financial reporting, uses and limitations of

accounting information. Accounting information as a

tool for strategic decision making.

ECO 401. Basic Statistics for Business and

Economics (3)

Descriptive statistics, probability and probability distri-

butions, estimation, hypothesis testing, correlation and

regression, chi-square analysis and analysis of variance.

Computer applications.

MBA Program Core Courses

MBA 401. Introduction to the Organization and

its Environment (2)

An MBA core course designed to provide a thorough

understanding of business organizations by examining

strategies middle and senior managers use to create and

sustain organizational competitive advantage. The course

examines the organization from an overall perspective

within the context of the firm’s internal and external

environment. The second aspect of this course deals with

the ability to communicate effectively in today’s business

and professional environment. Students will examine

and practice the written and verbal communications

strategies and skills that are essential to their success in

business.

MBA 402. Managing Financial and Physical

Resources (4)

An MBA core course designed to integrate financial and

managerial concepts into operations decisions.

Disciplines of accounting, finance and economics are

combined to provide substantive foundations for dis-

cussing and analyzing data. Implications of analysis are

applied to facilitate decision-making in other areas such

as marketing, operations (manufacturing, logistics and

engineering), human resources, information technology

and general management. The major learning objectives

will be applied through a series of “living” cases that are

centered on analyzing historical financial performance,

preparing a business plan, and valuing a business.

Prerequisites: MBA 401, GBUS 401 or equivalent.

MBA 403. Managing Information (4)

An MBA core course dealing with concepts and methods

involved in the collection, organization and dissemina-

tion of information that helps managers make

operational and strategic decisions. The course also deals

with attributes of information and examines enterprise-

wide impacts of local decisions. Revenue, cost, time and

quality-based information are accorded equal emphasis,

while students are exposed to alternative evaluation

methods for decisions related to different parts of the

value chain. Topics include: activity-based costing; activi-

ty-based management; transaction analysis; operational

and strategic decisions such as outsourcing, design part-

nerships, etc; investment analysis for short life-cycle

investments; evaluation of uncertainty, risk and ambigui-

ty; metrics development; compensation policies; segment

evaluation methods; target costing and functional analy-

sis; quality function deployment; total cost of ownership;

and transfer pricing. In addition, the course deals with:

information technology enablers which allow firms to

improve value delivered to customers; and evaluation

and management of emerging forms of cooperation,

such as joint ventures and project based strategic

alliances. Prerequisites: MBA 401, GBUS 401 and ECO

401 or equivalents.

MBA 404. Managing Products and Services (4)

An MBA core course focusing on the management of

products and services within a firm’s value chain. The

course addresses exceeding customer expectations, estab-

lishing total quality as the core foundation, developing a

strong customer focus, creating value through supply

chain management, developing new products for com-

petitive advantage, matching aggregate supply with

customer demand, and designing market channels and

influencing customers. Prerequisite: MBA 401.

MBA 405. Managing People (4)

An MBA core course that examines how effective organi-

zations are created, maintained, and improved. The

course will focus on how good people are attracted to an

organization and how to make them productive. Topics

include: organizational design, job design, staffing, train-

ing and development, performance, teams, influence,

diversity, change, ethical decision-making and current

people issues facing today’s organizations. The course

includes a comprehensive simulation (to be conducted

on a Saturday during the semester) and a group project

which allows students to apply the principles and con-

cepts covered in the course. Prerequisite: MBA 401.

Business and Economics Graduate Courses 141

MBA 406. Integrative Experience (3)

An MBA course where students apply the body of

knowledge acquired in MBA 401 through 405 through a

simulation, case presentations and the cross core project.

This course places an emphasis on strategic management

and takes the point of view of the general manager to

view the organization from an overall perspective in the

context of the firm’s internal and external environment.

In doing so, students examine historical perspectives,

contemporary theories, and practical applications all in

the spirit of helping them develop a broad understanding

of strategic management issues and solutions. By com-

bining high-level class discussions, case analyses, a

computer simulation competition and the cross-core

project this course exposes students to rigorous theoreti-

cal analysis while providing hands-on, simulated real

world business experiences. Prerequisites: MBA 401,

MBA 402, MBA 403, MBA 404, MBA 405.

Accounting Electives

GBUS 413. Advanced Management

Accounting (3)

Issues in management accounting including activity-

based costing, activity-based management, strategic cost

management, theory of constraints, advanced manufac-

turing technologies, cost of quality and life-cycle costing.

Readings and cases. Prerequisite: MBA 403 or a course

in cost accounting.

GBUS 414. Financial Statement Analysis and

Interpretation (3)

This course focuses on analysis of financial statements. It

develops the skills necessary to interpret and use finan-

cial statement information effectively to assess

profitability and risk and is intended for individuals like-

ly to become intensive users of financial accounting

information. Requirements include readings, case stud-

ies, presentations, and written analysis of actual financial

statements. Prerequisite: GBUS 401 and MBA 402 or

permission of the instructor.

GBUS 437. Federal Taxation and Business

Decisions (3)

Impact of federal taxation on the structure and timing of

business decisions. Problem-solving methods and

research techniques from a managerial perspective.

Prerequisite: ACCT 307.

Finance Electives

GBUS 419. Financial Management (3)

An intermediate level course in corporate finance.

Coverage includes capital budgeting techniques includ-

ing real options, decision tree analysis, risk analysis,

advanced cost of capital theories, capital structure theory,

dividend policy, working capital management, mergers

and acquisitions, restructuring, and bankruptcies. The

course emphasizes both theory and practice through lec-

tures, cases, and financial modeling exercises.

Prerequisite: MBA 402 or equivalent background.

Students not possessing the relevant prerequisites must

obtain waivers from the designated finance faculty repre-

sentative.

GBUS 420. Investments (3)

A survey course in investments. Overview of financial

institutions and markets involved in the issuance and

trading of securities. Emphasis on valuation and risk

assessment of fixed income and equity securities.

Construction of optimal portfolios and examination of

performance measures. Prerequisite: MBA 402 or equiva-

lent background. Students not possessing the relevant

prerequisites must obtain waivers from the designated

finance faculty representative.

GBUS 421. Advanced Investments (3)

Advanced topics relating to valuation/security analysis

and portfolio/risk management. Prerequisites: GBUS

420 or designated finance faculty representative

approval.

GBUS 422. Derivatives and Risk Management (3)

The theory and application of a variety of derivative

instruments (options, futures contracts, etc.) used in cor-

poration finance and the financial services industry. The

focus is on the risk management application vs. a rigor-

ous development of option pricing theory and similar

topics. Prerequisites: GBUS 420, or Designated Finance

Faculty Representative Approval.

GBUS 424. Advanced Topics in Financial

Management: (description to change each time

course is offered) (3)

Advanced topics relating to specific areas of corporate

finance such as: theoretical and empirical examination of

recent developments in financial management; asset val-

uation and capital budgeting including the role of

uncertainty, imprecise forecasts, risk preferences, infla-

tion, market conditions, and the global marketplace;

working capital management, leasing, mergers, and

financing. The course content may vary between instruc-

tors and over time. Prerequisite: GBUS 419 or

designated finance faculty representative approval.

GBUS 425. Real Estate Financing and

Investing (3)

An upper-level course in modern real estate financing

techniques from the perspectives of both the borrower

and the lender. Subject matter encompasses the follow-

ing areas: The principles of financing decisions;

financing methods and techniques; institutional sources

of funds for real estate; and real estate financing deci-

sions. Prerequisites: GBUS 420, or designated finance

faculty representative approval.

GBUS 426. Financial Markets and Institutions (3)

Functions and portfolios of financial intermediaries.

Sectional demand and supply of funds, nature and role

of interest rates, term structure and forecasting, impact

of inflation and regulations on financial intermediaries

and markets, and current developments in the financial

system. Management of assets and liabilities within the

U.S. financial institution’s legal and economic con-

straints. Prerequisite: GBUS 420, or designated finance

faculty representative approval.

GBUS 431. Quantitative Finance (3)

Relationship of quantitative models to financial theory

and applications. Capital budgeting, portfolio selection,

security evaluation, cash management, inventory policy

and credit analysis. Prerequisite: GBUS 419 or designat-

ed finance faculty approval.

Management Electives

GBUS 440. Human Resource Management (3)

A survey of personnel management activities in organiza-

tions. Topics include human resource planning,

recruitment, selection, equal employment opportunity,

142 Lehigh University Course Catalog 2009-2010

performance appraisal, compensation, career planning,

safety and health, and quality of work life issues. Course

consists of lectures, discussion, and case analysis.

GBUS 442. Seminar in Management

Consulting (3)

A study of consulting practices in general and their

application to small business. Processes include a field

study/counseling service to a local business. Emphasis is

on the identification and analysis of multidisciplinary

problems and opportunities and the implementation of

recommendations. Prerequisites: completion of MBA

background courses (or equivalent) and permission of

the instructor.

GBUS 444. Managerial Communication Skills (3)

Organization, style and strategy of language to inform,

direct and persuade. Application of writing, reading,

speaking and listening skills to managerial problems.

Case studies.

GBUS 445. Labor-Management

Administration (3)

A study of the U.S. system of industrial relations, includ-

ing the evolution and present status of labor law; union

organizing efforts; the strategy of negotiations; the sub-

stantive provisions of collective bargaining and the

administration of collective agreements. Also considered

is the role of unions in the implementation of programs

for employee self-management and other workplace

innovations.

GBUS 446. Commercial Potential Assessment (3)

A study of the process of bringing an invention to mar-

ket with emphasis on commercial potential. Industrial

analysis, competitor intelligence and strategic issues will

be emphasized along with the development of market

strategy and an overall business plan. Extensive research

including data base searches will be included. Instructor

permission required.

GBUS 447. Negotiation (3 credits)

The class examines the behavioral foundations of the

negotiation process. Topics include: The negotiation

process, negotiation planning, power in negotiations,

communications in negotiations, tactics, concepts of

win-win and win-lose, social styles, individual and team

negotiations, ethical considerations, cultural differences,

negotiating in sole source (customer) situations, using

third parties. The concepts will be exposed through both

lectures and simulations.

GBUS 450. Strategic Supply Management (3)

A survey course designed to introduce the MBA/MSE

student to the vital role played by supply management in

achieving overall effectiveness for the firm in today’s

global economy. The course starts by examining the tra-

ditional purchasing process and then moves on to an

examination of the evolution of purchasing into supply

management and, finally, to the role purchasing plays in

improving effectiveness of the entire value chain. Course

consists of lectures, discussion and case analysis.

GBUS 451. Analytical Methods in

Management (3)

Application of management science methods to industri-

al and commercial problems. Scientific method, decision

theory, linear programming, inventory control, regres-

sion analysis, forecasting, simulation, and related areas

are examined in the context of accounting, finance, mar-

keting and manufacturing.

GBUS 453. Transportation and Logistics

Management (3)

The control of physical distribution and inventories; the

flow of information, products and cash through the inte-

grated supply chain.

GBUS 454. E-Commerce and Marketing

Strategy (3)

Impact of e-commerce technologies on firms, industries,

and markets. Covers the technologies used in e-com-

merce, changes in organization structure, industry and

behavior, and sales and marketing strategies such as

attracting visitors to websites, promotion, distribution,

service, pricing, branding, advertising, consumer behav-

ior, measuring effectiveness, societal effects,

disintermediation, reintermediation, and strategy imple-

mentation. Prerequisite: MBA 403.

GBUS 455. E-Business Enterprise Applications (3)

Implications of key information technologies used with-

in and across businesses to conduct e-business, including

customer relationship management, enterprise resource

planning, on-line ordering and inventory management,

supply chain management, and e-procurement systems,

data warehousing, data mining, intra-extranets, and

knowledge management. Prerequisite: MBA 403.

GBUS 456. Business Process Redesign with

Information Systems (3)

Current topics on the principles, implementation and

critical success factors of deploying information systems

enabled quality management and process innovation

within organizations. Techniques and tools used in

implementing quality and process innovation from a

managerial and practical perspective. Prerequisite: MBA

403.

GBUS 457. Managing the IS Resource (3)

The issues and management techniques involved in

administering the information systems/resource activities

in the organization. Management of IS professionals,

development and management of project teams, user

client relationships, managing vendors, emerging tech-

nologies and planning processes. Prerequisite: MBA 403.

GBUS 458. Strategic Information Systems (3)

Understanding the various types of computer based

information systems and developing an ability to identify

and exploit information technologies to gain competitive

advantage, at the individual, group and organizational

levels. Prerequisite: MBA 403.

GBUS 459. Survey of Project Management (3)

Provides an overview of the project management frame-

work and knowledge areas. Covers the day-to-day,

hands-on problems of managing a project (defined as a

temporary structure within a permanent organization,

set up to achieve a specific objective). Areas covered will

include: project integration, project scope, project plan-

ning and implementation, project control and

evaluation, project cost and risk management, project

resource management and organization, and project

communication. Cases will be used to illustrate problems

and the techniques to solves them. A basic project man-

agement software tool will be introduced and utilized in

this course. This course is designed for MBA students

who want a general exposure to project management

Business and Economics Graduate Courses 143

concepts. This course may not be used in the Project

Management Certificate Program.

Marketing Electives

GBUS 460. Strategic Marketing Management (3)

The course studies the management of contemporary

organizations from the perspective of a marketing man-

ager. While the course content addresses the activities

required to maintain a strategic fit between an organiza-

tion’s environment and its particular set of objectives and

resources, the central focus is on designing strategic mar-

keting actions for various types of organizations. The

course pedagogy emphasizes the application of marketing

and other business principles through seminars, simula-

tions, or case discussion.

GBUS 462. Pharmaceutical Marketing

The course provides an introduction and overview of the

various healthcare system components as they relate to

the pharmaceutical industry. This course will (1) focus

on product decisions of the firm, requiring an occasional

shift in focus from that of corporate management to that

of operating managers of new product activities or estab-

lished brands;A0(2) recognize the importance of

marketing research as input to product decisions; (3)

take a managerial orientation; (4) recognize the need to

tailor product policy approaches to the characteristics of

the decision-maker and the firm. The course will be a

mixture of lectures, discussions, case analyses, and group

exercises. Prerequisites: Graduate students only.

GBUS 464. Business-to-Business Marketing (3)

This course focuses on marketing strategies and tactics in

firms whose customers are other institutions, not indi-

viduals. Topics covered include organizational buying

behavior, managing strategic buyer-seller relationships,

sales force deployment, communication strategies, and so

on. Specific attention is given to the impact of informa-

tion technology and globalization in the

business-to-business context.

GBUS 465. Creating Breakthrough Innovations (3)

Most products and services either fail or do average busi-

ness, but some are phenomenally successful. Such

products and services that provide phenomenal financial

returns and become market leaders can be called

“Breakthrough Products and Services”. The main objec-

tive of the course is to improve our understanding of the

process of creating breakthrough products and services.

It is accomplished by in-class discussions of cases, assign-

ments, and the state-of-the-art research work in

academia and industry. The course concludes with a

term paper that integrates the concepts learned from

class discussions, reference books, and research papers

and applies them to a real product. Prerequisites:

Graduate student status plus two years of post-graduate

work experience.

GBUS 466. Marketing Research and Analysis (3)

This course focuses on procedures for collecting and ana-

lyzing relevant information for informed decision

making by managers. The process of identifying research

questions, developing instruments for collecting infor-

mation, appropriate interpretation of information, and

appropriateness of research methods are some of the top-

ics discussed in this course. The course focuses on the

process of doing marketing research as well as the tech-

niques for analyzing information. Discussion of concepts

and cases, developing data collection instruments, and

doing actual marketing research projects will form the

key elements of this course.

GBUS 470. Marketing Communications

Strategies (3)

This course focuses on how various elements of commu-

nications are integrated to achieve various organizational

objectives. In addition to the traditional communication

media such as advertising and point of purchase media,

emphasis will also be placed on new media and strategies

made possible due to the advances in technology. The

course will involve discussion of concepts, case analysis

and discussion, insights from practitioners, and group

projects.

GBUS 471. Strategic Brand Management (3)

This course will focus on theories, models, and other

tools to manage brands, products, and product lines.

Specific attention will be focused on building, measur-

ing, and managing brand equity. The course will be a

mixture of lectures, discussions, case analyses, and group

exercises. Prerequisite: MBA 404.

GBUS 472. Strategies for Services Marketing (3)

The course focuses on the challenges of marketing and

managing services (whether in a manufacturing or serv-

ice business) and discusses the development of strategies

for addressing these challenges. The need for cross-func-

tional integration to provide effective service is stressed.

Illustrative topics include service quality gap analysis,

relationship between superior service and profitability,

service encounter analysis, customer lifetime value analy-

sis, services guarantees, and service demand and capacity

management.

International Business Electives

GBUS 473 International Finance (3)

Consideration of problems arising from the risks associ-

ated with international investing and multinational

corporation finance (currency, political, etc.). Focus is on

(a) investing in international market given the institu-

tional constraints and differences between domestic

markets, and (b) managerial issues relating to corpora-

tions, investors, and financial institutions. Prerequisites:

GBUS 419, or designated finance faculty representative

approval.

GBUS 474. Legal Aspects of International

Business (3)

Various legal problems of engaging in business abroad,

including contracts, technology transfer, property owner-

ship, business organizations and labor, using a case and

problem-solving approach.

GBUS 475. Global Marketing Strategies

The course is designed to provide a framework within

which global marketing operation can be analyzed,

understood, and undertaken. The course focuses on the

issues that are being faced by firms in today’s global mar-

ketplace, particularly those that are related to strategy

formulation and implementation. The learning experi-

ence in this course is placed on global business

decision-making, through the use of case studies, proj-

ects, and lectures.

GBUS 476. Globalization and Management of

Technology (3)

Management of science and technology in the context of

international business and the globalization of markets,

competition and corporations. Management of global

144 Lehigh University Course Catalog 2009-2010

industrial R & D; technology–based global strategic

alliances; global external technology sourcing, complex

human resources and cross-cultural issues; etc. Develops

an appreciation of the scientific and technical capabilities

available globally and the potential for global cooperative

and/or competition in this regard.

Management of Technology Electives

GBUS 481. Technology, Operations and

Competitive Strategy (3)

Develops an understanding and appreciation of the

interrelationships among technology, operations and the

competitive strategy of the firm. Industry analysis and

competitiveness; competitive strategy formulation and

implementation; value chain analysis; operations strategy

and technology strategy; operation’s contributions to

competitive advantages in cost, quality and variety and

new product introduction.

GBUS 482. R, D & E Project Management (3)

Management of cross-functional project teams for intro-

ducing technological innovations in the manufacturing

and marketing of new products and services in a variety

of industries.

GBUS 483. R & D Management (3)

Developing R&D programs to achieve strategic business

objectives; selecting, staffing and managing R&D proj-

ects; and transferring research results to commercial

functions.

GBUS 484. Science and Technology Policies and

Institutions (3)

The science and technology institutional infrastructure

and its relationships with management decision-making,

including private, public (government) and quasi-public

institutions; R&D, regulatory, and policy institutions;

and U.S., foreign and international institutions.

GBUS 485. Diffusion and Implementations of

Technology (3)

Classical macro-study of adoption and diffusion of inno-

vation, and managing the implementation/utilization/

application of new technology in the organization/corpo-

rate culture.

GBUS 486. Qualitative Research Methodology (3)

Study of techniques that describe, decode and translate

social phenomena. Explores how interpretive researchers

plan and conduct studies and present findings. Studies

investigators’ roles, data sources, observation methods,

data-analysis methods and trustworthiness of findings. A

field research project is required.

GBUS 494. Field Projects (1-4)

The field projects course will provide MBA students

with an opportunity to apply MBA concepts with an

employer, corporate partner or other suitable organiza-

tion. Students will work with a supervising professor and

a corporate representative on a project designed by the

student. Students must prepare a written proposal for

the project including the expected outcomes and an esti-

mate of the hours required for completion. Students will

present their proposal to a faculty member of their

choice for approval. The academic rigor and time

required to complete the project will determine the

number of credits earned.

VentureSeries (Corporate Entrepreneurship)

GBEN 401. The Business Plan I: Strategic

Considerations (2)

This course is first of a two-part sequence that focuses

on the initial steps necessary to design and build a high-

impact business plan for the start-up company or new

enterprise within an existing firm. The development

process is integrative, complex, and time-consuming for

the entrepreneur. Foundation or strategic-level issues that

impact the formation and growth of the new enterprise

are addressed. The goal in this first phase is to complete

various sections of the business plan that deal with mar-

ket opportunity, industry trends and developments,

company positioning, competitive advantage, and core

competencies. This course is project-oriented and makes

extensive use of one-on-one instruction between class

meetings. Students identify a market opportunity, devel-

op the product/service offering, target potential

customers and users, assess market demand, analyze mar-

ket penetration, and determine the revenue potential of

the new venture. 2 Credits

GBEN 402. The Business Plan II: Operating

Strategies and Implementation (2)

This course is the second of a two-part sequence that

focuses on the final steps necessary to complete the busi-

ness plan. This phase concentrates on designing the

appropriate operational framework and business process-

es, including technology and infrastructure, which are

required to successfully launch the new enterprise. The

business plan must also demonstrate that the venture will

have strong leadership and a capable management team

to deal with uncertainty and drive results. Finally, the

business plan must incorporate detailed financial fore-

casts and financing methods, and should address equity

valuation and investor exit strategies. Like its predeces-

sor, this course is project-oriented and makes extensive

use of one-on-one instruction between class meetings.

Additional emphasis is placed on developing an effective

format and packaging of the written document. 2

Credits

GBEN 403. Anatomy of Entrepreneurship: Start-

ups and Established Companies (1)

This interactive seminar focuses on understanding the

true meaning of entrepreneurship. The new venture

opportunity is profiled from the perspective of the indi-

vidual entrepreneur who is starting a business and

embarking on a new career path involving high risk and

reward. Different entrepreneurial management styles are

analyzed and highlighted. Course emphasis is also placed

on managing innovation and creativity in a corporate

environment. Successful implementation of entrepre-

neurial activities for the large company makes special

demands on management to promote discovery and cre-

ate internal stakeholders. Both start-ups and established

companies are placed under the microscope through

guest speakers, panel discussion, selected readings, and

case analysis. 1 Credit

GBEN 404. Market Opportunity: Targeting

Strategies and Selling Tactics (1)

The focal point of any business plan is identifying and

understanding the target customer that will be served.

The product/service offering must have strong buyer

appeal and capture immediate attention in the market-

place. The need to rapidly penetrate a market demands

Business and Economics Graduate Courses 145

that a marketing mix be designed, built, and implement-

ed in a manner that leads to differentiation and superior

positioning. Maximizing marketing firepower with

severely limited financial and organizational resources is

a major challenge that confronts today’s entrepreneurs.

Market segmentation strategies, the target marketing

process, forming market alliances, and managing the sell-

ing process are viewed from the perspective of seed and

early stage ventures. 1 Credit

GBEN 405. Intellectual Property: Management

and Valuation (1)

New technologies create new markets and new venture

possibilities. Their discovery and success rate, along with

the ability of an enterprise to leverage these assets in

markets, depends on how the firm views and manages its

investment in intellectual property. Obtaining the neces-

sary legal protection of intellectual property can also

serve as an effective barrier to entry and may be a source

of competitive advantage. This seminar focuses on the

strategic management of intellectual property as a com-

mercial enterprise, covers methods of valuation, and

examines various accounting and legal issues that must

be considered in strategic-level decision making. 1 Credit

GBEN 406. Performing a Business Enterprise

Audit: Developing an Industry Perspective (1)

New ventures must position themselves for long-term

growth and market development. Entrepreneurs create

enterprises, define their organizations, and build business

models based on changes in technology, government reg-

ulation, demographics, and shifts in other exogenous

variables. A strategy must be crafted that is sustainable

over the long run. Success or failure is often predicated

on market cycles, market saturation, supply/demand

imbalances and other forces that are not controllable.

This seminar places emphasis on assessing the market

potential and valuation of start-ups from an industry or

macro-perspective, particularly from the view of an out-

side investor. It also focuses on how to gather and make

effective use of competitive intelligence. 1 Credit

GBEN 407. Processes and Infrastructure: Creating

Production and Delivery (1)

This course provides an overview of the internal capabili-

ties and the process and technology platform required to

fully operationalize the business plan. Critical business

activities and functions are dissected, such as establishing

needed back-end procurement, production, and distribu-

tion services that focus on supply chain dynamics and

management; determining the scope of front-end call

center and e-commerce activities; managing logistics;

and utilizing information systems and web-based solu-

tions that effectively link customers, elements of the

supply chain, and employees. These topics are explored

from the perspective of the start-up and emerging com-

pany as well as the large corporation engaged in new

venture creation. 1 Credit

GBEN 408. The New Venture Organization:

Management, Design, and Governance (1)

Managing a new enterprise presents unique and difficult

challenges for its leadership. Expanding workloads and

the increased complexity of tasks resulting from the

rapid and sustained growth of the business create the

need for a smooth transition from entrepreneurial-style

management to professional management. Timing is

critical, and for many start-ups it is not an easy bridge to

cross. This course dissects the design and characteristics

of small organizations, and the need to correctly align

structure with strategy. It also considers how entrepre-

neurial activities should be seeded, managed, organized,

and executed within the context of an established com-

pany. Under scrutiny are the heavy demands placed

upon entrepreneurs and corporate managers to effective-

ly lead and manage under highly uncertain conditions

where change is a constant. Additional course emphasis

is placed on comprehending the critical role that boards

of directors play for start-up companies. 1 Credit

GBEN 409. Financial Forecasting: Developing Pro

Forma Financial Statements (1)

No business plan would be complete without providing

detailed financial projections and identifying the key

assumptions that help shape the numbers. The financial

translation of business models is expressed through pro

forma income statements, balance sheets, and sources

and uses of funds. Having this information allows man-

agement, investors, and lenders to measure and evaluate

future financial performance. This exercise also establish-

es the capitalization required to launch the venture,

support operations, and meet interim goals as the enter-

prise progresses through the beginning stages of its

development. Course emphasis is placed on the use of

forecasting methods and breakeven analysis, working

capital and cash flow management, and identification of

accounting and financial issues that impact on profit

measurement and financial risk. 1 Credit

GBEN 410. Financing Start-Ups: Seeking Outside

Venture Capital (1)

This course provides an overview of the venture capital

market, examines the nature and role of the venture cap-

italist, and analyzes whether and how venture capital

financing may be the preferred approach in raising out-

side capital. Venture deals are closely examined in terms

of types of equity instrument, methods of valuation,

milestones and staged release of funds, special provisions

that may include antidilution measures and other protec-

tive arrangements, and developing term sheets. Emphasis

is also given to dissecting the process and criteria used to

seek and attract venture capitalists, including angel

investors. Various scenarios and trade-offs are covered in

this intensive course. 1 Credit

GBEN 411. Establishing Credit Facilities: Asset-

Based and Cash Flow Financing (1)

Borrowing from a commercial bank or a credit interme-

diary can provide outside funding for working capital

and equipment purchases in many situations. For seed

and early stage firms, attention is often given to asset-

based lending programs that make use of first liens on

accounts receivable and inventory or fixed assets to pro-

vide added legal protection to creditors. For later stage

firms, traditional line-of-credit financing may be feasible

and desirable from a cash flow standpoint. Various bor-

rowing alternatives, including leasing, are covered in this

course along with covenants and restrictions that often

apply. Government loan programs, especially those of

the Small Business Administration, are also given empha-

sis.1 Credit

GBEN 412. Developing Exit Strategies: Concepts

and Approaches (1)

Sophisticated equity investors require that an exit or har-

vest plan be developed and that it be viable and capable

of being executed within the foreseeable future. Venture

146 Lehigh University Course Catalog 2009-2010

capitalists and angel investors anticipate their future

departure and a positive financial outcome at the very

point the deal is struck in the present. Various planned

and unplanned exit strategies are analyzed in this course

which include: an initial public offering, offering the

business for sale, merging with another company, fran-

chising, acquisition of shares by some investors, or

liquidation of the business. Valuation methods, financial

and tax implications, and due diligence are also exam-

ined. 1 Credit

GBEN 413. Integrative Experience/New Venture

Internship (1-4)

Only students enrolled in the Entrepreneurial concentra-

tion may elect one of these hands-on, project-orientated

courses. Integrative Experience must meet the require-

ments of formal independent study and involve a new

venture situation with a start-up or existing company.

Students employed in a New Venture Internship may

also qualify for course credit if the same requirements are

satisfied.

Project Management Electives

Must be taken as sequenced courses and may not be taken

individually.

PMGT 401. Project Management: Course

Framework & Project Leader Assessment (1)

Introduction to the Project Management Certification

Course; syllabus, requirements and deliverables. Students

will become acquainted with: the terminology, nine

knowledge areas, relationships to other disciplines, proj-

ect management context and processes. Introduction to

the logistical vehicles for course delivery and the tools to

be used. Students will also assess themselves as project

leaders and explore project leader competencies, roles,

responsibilities and stakeholder relationships.

PMGT 402. Project Management: Skills and

Abilities for Effective Leadership of Teams (1)

Students will enhance project team leadership skills,

define the work environment of project teams, team

selection, develop a team charter, clearly define the roles

and responsibilities of all project team members, set

team guidelines, learn methods to promote teamwork,

understand the stages of development, and manage team

dynamics. Additional skills covered: delegation, manag-

ing accountability without direct authority over project

team members, managing dysfunctional teams, perform-

ance improvement, input to performance appraisals,

rewards, recognitions, celebrations. Prerequisite: PMGT

401.

PMGT 403. Project Management: Initiating the

Project and Planning Scope and Schedule (2)

Students will learn techniques for deciding whether to

undertake a project and for planning project outcomes

and schedules. The relationship of projects to organiza-

tional planning and budgeting, information and

performance appraisals systems will be discussed.

Approaches will be shared for identifying and classifying

project stakeholders and designing and conducting a cost

benefit analysis. How to define desired project outcomes

clearly and completely and how to determine project

work to be performed using decomposition and tem-

plates will be addressed. Students will learn how to

develop a project charter, a scope statement, a Work

Breakdown Structure, a WBS dictionary and a Linear

Responsibility Chart. How to create a network diagram

and analyze schedule possibilities using the Critical Path

Method (CPM) and the Program Evaluation and Review

Technique (PERT) will be explained. Fast tracking and

crashing a schedule will also be explored. Displaying a

schedule with a Gantt Chart, key events list and activi-

ties will be illustrated. How to support these activities

using MS Project will be demonstrated. Prerequisites:

PMGT 401, PMGT 402

PMGT 404. Project Management: Planning

Resources, Communication, Quality and Risk

Management (2)

In this course, students will learn how to estimate the

needs for personnel and other types of projects resources,

to develop a project budget and to plan for additional

project support activities. Determining the type, amount

and timing of resource needs will be emphasized.

Approaches to resource leveling will be discussed. The

different types of project costs will be explained. The use

of analogous estimating, parametric modeling, bottom-

up estimating and computerized tools to estimate costs

will be explored. Planning to ensure project quality and

coordinate project communications will be will be

addressed. Identifying, assessing, and preparing a plan to

manage project risks will also be discussed. Planning for

project procurement and associated solicitations will be

explained. Students will learn how to develop resource

matrices, loading charts and grafts and a project budget.

How to support these activities using MS Project will be

demonstrated. Prerequisites: PMGT 401, PMGT 402,

PMGT 403

PMGT 405. Project Management: Project Leader

Communications Expertise and Evaluating Team

Performance (1)

The purpose of this weekend seminar is to strengthen

the project leader’s communication skills, change-man-

agement skills, conflict resolutions skills, and team

evaluation skills. Focus areas will also include the follow-

ing: understanding the art and science of effective

listening, managing multiple expectations, communicat-

ing “bad news,” and learning tools and techniques for

project team evaluation. Prerequisites: PMGT 401,

PMGT 402, PMGT 403, PMGT 404

PMGT 406. Project Management: Implementing

and Managing Projects (2).

Students will learn techniques and processes to start and

perform the actual project work. Suggestions for working

successfully in a matrix management environment will

be discussed. Information systems to track schedule per-

formance, labor charges and project expenditures will be

expressed. Developing escalation procedures to address

project conflicts issues will be emphasized. Procedures

for controlling labor and fund charges to a project will

be introduced. Key project review and decision meetings

will be identified. Planning and implementing quality

assurance activities will be addressed. Planning for,

awarding and administering contracts will be discussed.

How to support these activities using MS Project will be

demonstrated. Prerequisites: PMGT 401, PMGT 402,

PMGT 403, PMGT 404, PMGT 405

PMGT 407. Project Management: Controlling

Performance and Assessing Outcomes (2)

Students will learn how to monitor and control project

activities in progress and how to bring a project to clo-

Business and Economics Graduate Courses 147

sure. Approaches for assessing project products and serv-

ices produced will be explored. Techniques for evaluating

schedule and cost performance will be introduced.

Variance analysis and earned value analysis will be

explained. Quality control and risk monitoring and con-

trol will be discussed. Change control systems and

procedures will be explained. How to prepare focused

progress reports and conduct effective project meetings

will be discussed. Requirements for closing out contracts

and procurements will be detailed. Obtaining user

acceptance, closing labor and fund charge accounts and

other administrative activities will be discussed.

Designing and conducting a post-project review will be

explored. How to support these activities using MS

Project will be demonstrated. Prerequisites: PMGT 401,

PMGT 402, PMGT 403, PMGT 404, PMGT 405,

PMGT 406

PMGT 408. Project Management: Problem

Solving, Decision Making and Ethics (1)

This 2-day seminar focuses on developing problem solv-

ing and ethical decision-making skills. Students will

learn to recognize project problems, frame the problem,

assess risk, manage risk, plan contingencies, recognize

the escalation points, and apply alternate methods.

Students will also participate in ethical exercises to

strengthen their ability to recognize ethical dilemmas

and evaluate decisions. Prerequisites: PMGT 401,

PMGT 402, PMGT 403, PMGT 404, PMGT 405,

PMGT 406, PMGT 407

Accounting

M. S. Core Courses

MACC 401. Professional Issues in Accounting–

Negotiation (1)

This course examines the behavioral foundations of the

negotiation process. Topics include planning, tactics,

power, integrative and distributive bargaining, behavioral

styles and individual and team negotiations. MACC

401, 402 and 403 are prerequisites to the balance of the

MSAIA core course sequence. Open only to MSAIA stu-

dents.

MACC 402. Professional Issues in Accounting–

Case Analysis (1)

Introduces business case analysis. Cases will be dissected,

analyzed and discussed. A range of business topics will

be used to demonstrate the case method. MACC 401,

402 and 403 are prerequisites to the balance of the

MSAIA core course sequence. Open only to MSAIA stu-

dents.

MACC 403. Professional Issues in Accounting-

Ethics (1)

Examines ethical issues as they relate to business.

Through debate and case studies, students will be chal-

lenged to determine what are acceptable and ethical

business practices, primarily in an international environ-

ment, and how these practices relate to the highly diverse

elements that comprise today’s complex, global enterpris-

es. MACC 401, 402 and 403 are prerequisites to the

balance of the MSAIA core course sequence. Open only

to MSAIA students.

MACC 412. Information Systems Auditing (3)

Modern information technology auditing and impact of

computer controls on operational efficiency and external

auditing under Sarbanes-Oxley Act. Focuses on key

threats and audit procedures relating to operating sys-

tems, data management, systems development, electronic

commerce, organization structure, computer center oper-

ations, Enterprise Resource Planning (ERP) systems, and

revenue and expenditure cycles. Issues in fraud preven-

tion and detection. Emphasizes data extraction software

for auditing and integrates ACL and SAP into auditing

scenarios. Prerequisites: Accounting 311, Acounting 320,

MACC 401, 402 and 403.

MACC 413.The Corporate Financial Reporting

Environment (3)

Uses theory and research results to study financial

reporting’s role in providing decision-useful information

to capital market participants. Topics include the finan-

cial reporting revolution, efficient markets theory and

research, economic consequences and Positive

Accounting Theory, conflict between owners and man-

agers, executive compensation, earnings management,

standard-setting, the FASB’s conceptual framework, and

International Financial Reporting Standards.

Prerequisites: Accounting 316, MACC 401, 402 and

403.

MACC 420. Consulting Process and Practice in

Professional Accounting (3)

Consulting and advisory processes relates to accounting

firms and internal consultation in industry. Focuses on

consulting process life cycle: gaining and retaining

clients, developing proposals and engagement letters,

defining client needs and diagnosing problems, collect-

ing and analyzing data, documenting findings,

developing solutions and recommendations, and manag-

ing projects. Uses case studies and outside speakers.

Students complete a real life consulting project and pres-

ent findings orally and in writing. Prerequisites: MACC

401, 402 and 403.

MACC 424. Corporate Governance and Business

Risk (3)

Focuses on assurance and risk management services

offered by public accounting firms. Integrating topics

from accounting, auditing, ethics, economics, risk man-

agement, internal control, and business strategy, the

course develops an in-depth understanding of how cor-

porate governance and business risk issues relate to

assurance practice in today’s post-Sarbanes-Oxley envi-

ronment. Students complete an assurance and risk

management engagement for a “real-life” small-to-medi-

um size client. Prerequisite: MACC 401, 402 and 403,

and MACC 412 or concurrent.

MACC 427. Analyzing Accounting Information

for Management and Business Solutions (3)

Examines the interaction of accounting information,

business models, financial analysis and information tech-

nology to resolve complex business problems. Topics

include using control systems to guide business strate-

gies, creating performance measurement systems,

evaluating strategic profit performance, linking internal

operations to external markets, and balancing profit,

growth, management attention, earnings quality analysis

and business valuation. Prerequisite: MACC core or con-

current; taken during the last semester of the program.

148 Lehigh University Course Catalog 2009-2010

Economics

M.S. And Ph.D. Core Courses

ECO 402. Managerial Economics (3)

Application of economic and statistical analysis to mana-

gerial decision-making. Business and economics

forecasting. Empirical estimation of demand, production

and cost functions. Resource allocations and pricing

strategies in various market structures. Decisions under

risk and uncertainty. Government regulations of busi-

ness. Cases. Prerequisite: Calculus and ECO 401 or

equivalent.

ECO 411. History of Economic Thought (3)

Selected topics in the history of economic thought, with

special attention to the origins of modern economic the-

ory. Prerequisite: a graduate course in economic theory.

ECO 412. Mathematical Economics (3)

Applications of various mathematical techniques in the

formation and development of economic concepts and

theories. Prerequisite: consent of the chair.

ECO 413. Advanced Microeconomics Analysis (3)

A survey of methods of decision-making at the micro-

economic level; price theory and econometric

applications. Prerequisite: ECO 402 or equivalent.

ECO 414. Advanced Topics in

Microeconomics (3)

Resource allocation and price determination. Theories of

choice of consumers, firms, and resource owners under

various market forms. Prerequisites: ECO 401 and ECO

413 or equivalents.

ECO 415. Econometrics I (3)

Computer applications of standard econometric tech-

niques using regression analysis in a single-equation

context. Discussion of problems of multicollinearity, het-

eroscedasticity and autocorrelation. An introduction to

simultaneous equation models, identification and estima-

tion problems. Prerequisite: ECO 401 or equivalent.

ECO 416. Econometric Theory (3)

Mathematical and statistical specification of economic

models. Statistical estimation and tests of parameters in

single and multiple equation models. Prediction and

tests of structural changes. Prerequisites: ECO 401 (or

equivalent) and calculus.

ECO 417. Advanced Macroeconomic Analysis (3)

Macroeconomic theory and policy. Emphasis on theoret-

ical models and policy implications.

ECO 418. Advanced Topics in

Macroeconomics (3)

Models of employment, income and growth in monetary

economies. Policies for economic stability and growth.

Prerequisite: ECO 417 or equivalent.

ECO 423 Real Options (3)

This is an introductory graduate level course in financial

economics. It is intended for students with strong tech-

nical backgrounds who are comfortable with

mathematical arguments. The course is divided into

three main parts: deterministic finance, single-period

uncertainty finance and options theory and its applica-

tions. Prerequisite: GBUS 420.

ECO 424 Advanced Numerical Methods (3)

This course focuses on techniques that apply directly to

economic analysis. A particular emphasis is on problems

in finance. The course teaches students how to use

EXCEL macros and advanced VBA (the industry stan-

dard). It is designed for decision making in business

settings.

Economics Electives

ECO 404. Technology, Trade and Economic

Growth (1)

Overview of the role of technology in economic systems.

Productivity and growth effects, relationships to industry

structure, impacts on international trade and competi-

tiveness. Prerequisite: intended to be taken concurrently

with ECO 402.

ECO 423. Real Options (3)

This is an introductory graduate level course in financial

economics, intended for students with strong technical

backgrounds who are comfortable with mathematical

arguments. The course is divided into three main parts:

deterministic finance, single-period uncertainty finance

and options theory and its applications. Prerequisite:

GBUS 420.

ECO 424. Advanced Numerical Methods (3)

This course focuses on techniques that apply directly to

economic analysis. A particular emphasis is on problems

in finance. The course teaches students how to use

EXCEL macros and advanced VBA (the industry stan-

dard). It is designed for decision-making in business

settings.

ECO 425. Cost-Benefit Analysis (3)

Theory and methods of cost-benefit analysis; efficiency

and equity as criteria in program evaluation; proper

measurement of market and non-market costs and bene-

fits; consideration of risk, uncertainty, appropriate

discounting techniques and distributional consequences;

applications include the evaluation of health care policies

and therapies. Prerequisites: ECO 401 and ECO 402 or

equivalent; ECO 357 or 415; statistical software beyond

Excel; or instructor permission.

ECO 428. (GBUS 428) Capital and Interest

Theory (3)

Theories of interest and capital. Annuities; applications

of present value theory; investment valuation under

uncertainty and risk; term structure of interest rates; the

theory of savings, cost of capital, and capital formation.

Prerequisite: MBA 402 or equivalent.

ECO 429. (GBUS 429) Monetary Theory (3)

The role of money in the economy from theoretical and

empirical perspectives. The influence of money and

prices, interest rates, output, and employment.

ECO 430. (GBUS 430) Public Finance (3)

The economics of public spending and taxation; princi-

ples of government debt management; theories of

budgeting and cost-benefit analysis and public choice.

ECO 436. Economic History of the United

States (3)

Analysis of the colonial economy, transition to industri-

alization, and the role of trade and transportation in

America’s development. A consideration of the impor-

tance of slavery to the 19th-century American economy

and other New World economies. Origin and develop-

ment of banking and financial markets. Prerequisites:

ECO 401 and ECO 402 or equivalents.

Business and Economics Graduate Courses 149

ECO 440. Labor Economics (3)

The economics of labor markets and various labor-mar-

ket institutions with emphasis on current theoretical and

empirical research. Prerequisites: ECO 401 and ECO

402 or equivalents.

ECO 447. Economic Analysis of Market

Competition (3)

Mathematical models based on game theory and indus-

trial organization. Cases are used to analyze the strategic

interaction of firms and governments as competitors and

partners. Prerequisites: ECO 401 and ECO 402 or

equivalent; 2 semesters calculus; or instructor permis-

sion.

ECO 451. Urban Economics (3)

The application of traditional and spatial economics to

the location of economic activity focusing on the urban

economic problems of business location, housing, land

value, land use, and intra-urban transportation.

ECO 453. Government Regulation of Business (3)

Analysis of the economic justification for government

regulation of private enterprise. Topics include antitrust

policy, utilities, and health, safety and environmental

regulation. Prerequisite: ECO 402 or equivalent.

ECO 454. Economics of Environmental

Management (3)

Economic theory of natural resources. Optimal policies

for the development of renewable and nonrenewable

resources and environmental quality. Prerequisite: ECO

402 or equivalent.

ECO 455. Health Economics (3)

Economic theory of health care delivery systems.

Financing health care services. Case studies of specific

economic-financing problems and/or international com-

parisons of health care delivery. Prerequisite: ECO 401

and ECO 402 or equivalents or permission of the

instructor.

ECO 456. Industrial Organization (3)

The goal of the course is to review theoretical and

empirical attempts by economists to understand market

structures lying between the extremes of perfect competi-

tion and monopoly. The course will focus first on

describing the current U.S. industrial structure and

reviewing models of imperfect competition. The course

then shifts to a closer study of individual firm behavior.

The final segment of the course is an overview of two

significant relationships between government and indus-

try caused by the existence of imperfect competition.

ECO 457. Bio-Pharmaceutical Economics (3)

Characteristics of the market for pharmaceuticals; barri-

ers to entry, competitions and innovation’ pricing and

regulation; physician prescribing behavior; commercial-

ization and financing of biotech startups; international

comparisons of public policy. Prerequisites: ECO 401

and ECO 402 or equivalents or instructor permission.

ECO 460. Time Series Analysis (3)

Classical decomposition of time series, trend analysis,

exponential smoothing, spectral analysis and Box-Jenkins

autoregressive and moving average methods.

ECO 461. Forecasting (3)

Methods of economic and business forecasting.

ECO 462. Advanced Statistics for Business and

Economics (3)

An expanded development of statistical concepts neces-

sary for business and economic research. Topics include

probability theory, sets, density functions and distribu-

tions, sampling distributions, point estimation, moment

generating functions, maximum likelihood, classical sta-

tistical inference, power functions, likelihood ratio tests,

and non-parametric tests. Prerequisite: calculus.

ECO 463 (IE 458). Topics in Game Theory (3)

A mathematical analysis of how people interact in strate-

gic situations. Topics include normal-form and

extensive-form representations of games, various types of

equilibrium requirements, the existence and characteriza-

tion of equilibria, and mechanism design. The analysis is

applied to micro-economic problems including industrial

organization, inter-national trade, and finance.

Prerequisites: Two semesters of calculus, ECO 414 and

ECO 412 , or permission of the instructor.

ECO 472 Special Topics in Economics (1-3)

Extended Study of an approved topic not covered in

scheduled courses. May be repeated for credit.

ECO 471. International Economic

Development (3)

An introduction to the basic theoretical concepts in

international economic development and an evaluation

of their application by means of a representative sample

of the literature.

ECO 472. International Trade Theory (3)

Theories of comparative advantage, factor price equaliza-

tion, trade and welfare, tariffs, trade and factor

movements. Prerequisite: ECO 413 or consent of the

chair.

ECO 473. International Monetary Economics (3)

Theory of the balance of payments, the microeconomics

of international finance, various approaches to balance-

of-payments adjustments, theories of foreign

exchange-rate determination, and macroeconomic policy

under fixed and flexible exchange rates. Prerequisite:

ECO 417 or consent of the chair.

ECO 475. Special Topics in Economics (1-3)

Extended study of an approved topic not covered in

scheduled courses. May be repeated for credit.

ECO 480. Economics of Technological Change (3)

Explores theoretical models and empirical evidence on

the economics of innovation and technical change.

Includes examination of: the role of technology in com-

petitiveness, industrial structure, and economic growth;

alternative models of the innovative process; incentives

for and other conditions affecting research and develop-

ment; the evaluation of the justifications for government

support of R&D. Prerequisite: ECO 402 or equivalent.

ECO 490 Master’s Thesis

ECO 499 Dissertation

150 Lehigh University Course Catalog 2009-2010

Chemical Engineering

http://www.che.lehigh.edu/blog/

Professors. Philip A. Blythe, Ph.D. (Manchester,

England); Hugo S. Caram, Ph.D. (Minnesota); Manoj

K. Chaudhury, Ph.D. (SUNY-Buffalo), Franklin J.

Howes Jr. Professor; Mohamed S. El-Aasser, Ph.D.

(McGill), Provost; Alice P. Gast, PhD. (Princeton),

President; James T. Hsu, Ph.D. (Northwestern); Anand

Jagota (Cornell), Director of Bioengineering; Andrew

Klein, Ph.D. (North Carolina State); Mayuresh V.

Kothare, Ph.D. (California Institute of Technology) R.

L. McCann Professor; William L. Luyben, Ph.D.

(Delaware); Anthony J. McHugh, Ph.D. (Delaware),

Ruth H. and Sam Madrid Professor, Chair; Arup K.

Sengupta, Ph.D. (Houston); Cesar A. Silebi, Ph.D.

(Lehigh); Israel E. Wachs, Ph.D. (Stanford), G. Whitney

Snyder Professor.

Assistant Professors. James F. Gilchrist, Ph.D.

(Northwestern); Ian Laurenzi, Ph.D. (UPenn); Jeetain

Mittal - Ph.D. (UT-Austin); Mark A. Snyder, Ph.D.

(Delaware), P.C. Rossin Assistant Professor.

Professor of Practice. Lori Herz, Ph.D. (Rutgers); Susan

F. Perry, Ph.D. (Penn State); Kemal Tuzla, Ph.D.

(Istanbul Technical), Associate Chair.

Adjunct Professor. Vincent G. Grassi, Ph.D. (Lehigh);

Shivaji Sircar, Ph.D. (Pennsylvania).

Principal Research Scientists. Eric S. Daniels, Ph.D.

(Lehigh); E. David Sudol, Ph.D. (Lehigh).

Emeritus Professors. Marvin Charles, Ph.D. (Brooklyn

Polytechnic); John C. Chen, Ph.D. (Michigan), Dean

emeritus; Arthur E. Humphrey, Ph.D. (Columbia),

provost emeritus; William E. Schiesser, Ph.D.

(Princeton); Leslie H. Sperling, Ph.D. (Duke); Fred P.

Stein, Ph.D. (Michigan)

The mission of the undergraduate program is “to educate

students in the scientific principles of chemical engineer-

ing and provide opportunities to explore their

applications in the context of a humanistic education

that prepares them to address technological and societal

challenges.”

Modern chemical engineering is built around the funda-

mentals enabling sciences of biology, chemistry, physics,

and mathematics. Its curriculum encompasses three basic

organizing principles: Molecular Transformations, Multi-

scale Analysis, and System Approaches. Chemical

engineers serve a wide variety of technical and manageri-

al functions within the chemical processing industry. For

a lifetime of effectiveness they need a sound background

in the fundamental sciences of chemistry and physics; a

working capability with mathematics, numerical meth-

ods, and application of computer solutions; and a broad

education in humanities, social sciences, and managerial

techniques. These bases are applied in a sequence of

chemical engineering courses in which logic and mathe-

matical manipulation are applied to chemical processing

problems. With the resulting habits of precise thought

coupled to a broad base in scientific and general educa-

tion, Lehigh graduates have been effective throughout

industry and in advanced professional education. No

effort is made toward any specific industry, but adapta-

tion is rapid and the fundamental understanding forms

the base for an expanding career.

The program is also designed to prepare a student for

graduate study in chemical engineering. Further study at

the graduate level leading to advanced degrees is highly

desirable if an individual wishes to participate in the tech-

nical development of the field. The increasing complexity

of modern manufacturing methods requires superior edu-

cation for men and women working in research,

development, and the design fields or for teaching.

To achieve its educational mission, the Department of

Chemical Engineering has established the following set

of Program Educational Objectives:

1. apply their broad education in chemical engineering

to pursue careers in industry, government agencies,

consulting firms, educational institutions, financial

institutions, business, law, and medicine.

2. engage in lifelong learning through graduate studies,

research, and continuing education.

3. be successful practitioners, innovators and leaders

addressing technological and societal challenges.

4. be sensitive to the social, ethical, and technical

implications of their work as it affects the environ-

ment, safety, and health of citizens worldwide.

Minor in Biotechnology

The department of Chemical Engineering encourages

engineering students to broaden their education by tak-

ing a minor. In this regard, a Biotechnology Minor is

offered to students majoring in Engineering College.

The Biotechnology minor requires 15 credit hours. A

detailed listing of the required courses for the Biotech-

nology Minor can be obtained from the Chemical

Engineering Department.

Minor in Chemical Engineering

Minor in Chemical Engineering provides students

Chemical Engineering knowledge that they do not

acquire in their major, such as knowledge of bio-chemi-

cal systems, transport phenomena, reaction engineering.

This will widen their skills and help to increase the

cooperation between the disciplines, which will lead to

increased possibilities for employment.

Physical Facilities

The chemical engineering department is the only engi-

neering department located on Lehigh’s 780-acre

Mountaintop Campus. Here the department occupies

approximately one-third of Iacocca Hall, the 200,000-

square-foot flagship building that contains offices,

classrooms, and laboratories. Additional plant facilities,

and the undergraduate chemical processing laboratory

occupy approximately 10,000-square-feet in the nearby

Imbt building.

These facilities provide excellent support for a wide

range of general laboratory equipment for undergraduate

and graduate studies of the behavior of typical chemical

processing units; special equipment for bioengineering

research; special equipment for biochemical engineering

and for the study of polymers; digital computation for

process dynamics study; and special equipment for the

study of thermodynamics, kinetics, heat transfer, and

mass transfer.

The chemical engineering department has established a

senior design laboratory in Iacocca Hall featuring 20

PCs. In addition, a 10-PC university-maintained com-

puting laboratory is available nearby.

Chemical Engineering 151

Career Opportunities

Chemical engineers play important roles in all activities

bearing on the chemical process industry. These include

the functions of research, development, design, plant

construction, plant operation and management, corpo-

rate planning, technical sales, and market analysis.

The industries that produce chemical and/or certain

physical changes in fluids, including petroleum and

petrochemicals, rubbers and polymers, pharmaceuticals,

bioengineering, metals, industrial and fine chemicals,

foods, and industrial gases, have found chemical engi-

neers to be vital to their success. Chemical engineers are

also important participants in pollution abatement, ener-

gy resources, national defense programs, and more

recently in the manufacture of microelectronic devices

and integrated circuits.

Special Programs and Opportunities

Co-op Program: The department, in conjunction with

the College of Engineering and Applied Science, oper-

ates a cooperative program that is optional for specially

selected students who are entering their junior year. This

program affords early exposure to industry and an

opportunity to integrate an academic background with

significant periods of engineering practice. Our program

is unique in offering two work experiences and still

allowing the co-op students to graduate in four years

with their class.

OSI Program: The Opportunities for Student

Innovation (OSI) program seeks to develop students’

propensities for critical assessment and innovative solu-

tion of meaningful problems. The OSI program affords

selected seniors an opportunity to experience team

research leading toward technological benefits. Each

project is hosted by a company and carried out under

the supervision of a Lehigh faculty member.

Minors and Specializations: Technical minors are avail-

able in biotechnology, computer science, environmental

engineering, manufacturing systems, materials science

and engineering, and polymer science and engineering.

Chemical Engineering also offers specialization certifi-

cates in polymer science, biotechnology, and process

modeling and control. Minors are also available from the

Business College and the College of Arts and Sciences.

Overseas: Study abroad is available in exchange pro-

grams that have been established by the department for

the junior year at the University of Nottingham (United

Kingdom) and for the summer following the junior year

at the University of Dortmund (Germany). Please visit

http://www.che.lehigh.edu/blog/2007/01/undergraduate_pro

gram.html#more

Requirements of the Major - 131 credit hours are

required for graduation with the degree of bachelor of

science in chemical engineering.

freshman year (see Recommended Freshman Year)

sophomore year, first semester (16 credit hours)

CHE 31 Material and Energy Balances of

Chemical Processes (3)

CHM 31 Chemical Equilibria in Aqueous

Systems (4)

PHY 21 Introductory Physics II (4)

PHY 22 Introductory Physics Laboratory II (1)

MATH 23 Calculus III (4)

sophomore year, second semester (17 credit hours)

CHE 44 Fluid Mechanics (3)

CHE 210 Chemical Engineering

Thermodynamics (4)

CHE 179 Professional Development (1)

BIOS 41 Introduction to Cell and Molecular

Biology (3)

MATH 205 Linear Methods (3)

elective (3)

junior year, first semester (17 credit hours)

CHE 151 Introduction to Heat Transfer (3)

CHE 201 Methods of Analysis in Chemical

Engineering (3)

CHM 51 Organic Chemistry I (3)

CHM 53 Organic Chemistry Laboratory I (1)

CHM 343 Physical Chemistry Laboratory (1)

electives (6)

junior year, second semester (18 credit hours)

CHE 244 Mass Transfer and Separation Processes

(3)

CHE 211 Chemical Reactor Design (3)

CHM 52 Organic Chemistry II (3)

electives (9)

senior year, first semester (18 credit hours)

CHM 341 Molecular Structure, Bonding and

Dynamics (4)

CHE 202 Chemical Engineering Laboratory I (2)

CHE 233 Process Design I (3)

CHE 242 Introduction to Process Control and

Simulation (3)

electives (6)

senior year, second semester (16 credit hours)

CHE 203 Chemical Engineering Laboratory II

(2)

ECE 83 Principles of Electrical Engineering (3)

CHE 234 Process Design II (3)

electives (8)

There are five types of electives:

1. Humanities/Social Sciences: See the requirements set

by the P.C. Rossin College of Engineering and

Applied Science (Section 3). Note that ECO 1 is

required, as well as Freshman English.

2. Three credit hours from approved courses in other

engineering departments (BioE, CEE, EECS, IMSE,

MEM, MSE).

3. Chemistry: 3 credit hours of CHM 300-level or

higher, or CHE 380.

4. Chemical Engineering: 3 credit hours of CHE 300

level or higher.

5. Free electives: 6 credit hours in any subject area.

Electives in (2) to (5) above can be combined with any

technical minor in RCEAS.

Undergraduate Courses

CHE 31. Material and Energy Balances of

Chemical Processes (3) fall

Material and energy balances with and without chemical

reaction. Introduction to phase equilibrium calculations.

Applications in chemical process calculations and in

design of staged separations: binary distillation, liquid-

liquid extraction. Plant trips and special lectures

152 Lehigh University Course Catalog 2009-2010

introducing the profession. Prerequisite: CHEM 25 or

equivalent and ENG 1 previously or concurrently.

CHE 44. Fluid Mechanics (4) spring

Fluid mechanics and its applications to chemical process-

es. Momentum and energy balances in fluid flow.

Dimensional analysis. Fluid flow in pipes, packed and

fluidized beds. Mixing and agitation. Filtration and sedi-

mentation.

CHE 60. Unit Operations Survey (3) spring

The theory of heat, mass and momentum transport.

Laminar and turbulent flow of real fluids. Heat transfer

by conduction, convection, and radiation. Application to

a wide range of operations in the chemical and metallur-

gical process industries.

CHE 85. Undergraduate Research (1)

Independent study of a problem involving laboratory

investigation, design, or theoretical studies under the

guidance of a faculty. Consent of the department chair.

The course may be repeated for up to 3 credits.

CHE 151. Introduction to Heat Transfer (3) fall

Fundamental principles of heat transfer. Fourier’s law.

Conduction, convection and radiation. Analysis of

steady and unsteady state heat transfer. Evaporation and

condensation. Applications to the analysis and design of

chemical processing units involving heat transfer.

Prerequisite: CHE 44.

CHE 171 (CEE 171, EMC 171, ES171)

Fundamentals of Environmental Technology (4)

Introduction to water and air quality, water, air and soil

pollution. Chemistry of common pollutants.

Technologies for water purification, wastewater treat-

ment, solid and hazardous waste management,

environmental remediation, and air quality control.

Global changes, energy and environment. Constraints of

environmental protection on technology development

and applications. Constraints of economic development

on environmental quality. Environmental life cycle

analysis and environmental policy. Prerequisite: EES (ES)

002, or one advanced science course or permission of

instructor. Not available to students in RCEAS.

CHE 179. Professional Development (1) spring

Elements of professional growth, registration, ethics, and

the responsibilities of engineers both as employees and as

independent practitioners. Proprietary information and its

handling. Patents and their importance. Discussions with

the staff and with visiting Lecturers. A few plant trips.

CHE 185. Undergraduate Research I (3)

Independent study of a problem involving laboratory

investigation, design, or theoretical studies under the

guidance of a senior faculty member.

CHE 186. Undergraduate Research II (3)

A continuation of the project begun under CHE 185.

Prerequisite: CHE 185 or consent of the department

chair.

CHE 201. Methods of Analysis in Chemical

Engineering (3) fall

Analytical and numerical methods of solution applied to

dynamic, discrete and continuous chemical engineering

processes. Laplace Transforms. Methods of analysis

applied to equilibrium, characteristic value and non-lin-

ear chemical engineering problems. Prerequisite: MATH

23 and CHE 44.

CHE 202. Chemical Engineering Laboratory I (2)

fall

The laboratory study of chemical engineering unit oper-

ations and the reporting of technical results. One

three-hour laboratory and one lecture period per week.

Independent study and both group and individual

reporting. Prerequisite: CHE 151.

CHE 203. Chemical Engineering Laboratory

II (2) spring

Laboratory experience with more complex chemical pro-

cessing situations including processes involving chemical

reactions and those controlled automatically.

Prerequisite: CHE 244 and CHE 210.

CHE 210. Chemical Engineering

Thermodynamics (4) spring

Energy relations and their application to chemical engi-

neering. Consideration of flow and nonflow processes.

Evaluation of the effects of temperature and pressure on

the thermodynamic properties of fluids. Heat effects

accompanying phase changes and chemical reactions.

Determination of chemical and physical equilibrium.

Prerequisite: CHE 31.

CHE 211. Chemical Reactor Design (3) spring

The theory of chemical kinetics to the design and opera-

tion of chemical reactors. Plug flow and continuous

stirred tank reactors. Homogeneous and heterogeneous

reaction kinetics. Design of isothermal and adiabatic

reactors. Prerequisite: CHE 151, CHE 210 or equiva-

lent.

CHE 233. Process Design I (3) fall

Design of chemical plants incorporating traditional ele-

ments of engineering economics and synthesis of

steady-state flowsheets with (1) both heuristic and rigor-

ous optimization methods and (2) consideration of

dynamic controllability of the process. Economic princi-

ples involved in the selection of process alternatives and

determination of process capital, operating costs, and

venture profitability. Energy conservation, pinch tech-

niques, heat-exchanger networks, and separation

sequences. Considerations of market limitations, envi-

ronmental and regulatory restrictions, and process safety.

Use of modern computer-aided software for steady-state

and dynamic simulation and optimization. Group design

projects. Prerequisites: CHE 211, CHE 242 and CHE

244.

CHE 234. Process Design II (3) spring

Continuation of CHE 233. Prerequisite CHE 233.

CHE 242. Introduction to Process Control and

Simulation (3) fall

Dynamic simulation of chemical processes. Transfer

functions and block diagrams. Introduction to process

control equipment. Open-loop and closed-loop stability

analysis using root locus and Nyquist techniques. Design

of control systems. Prerequisites: CHE 201, CHE 151,

and ENGR 1.

CHE 244. Mass Transfer and Separation

Processes (3) spring

Diffusion, fluxes, and component conservation equa-

tions. Fick’s law. Unsteady state diffusion. Convective

mass transfer. Interphase mass transport coefficients.

Design of multicomponent-distillation, absorption,

extraction, and fixed-bed processes. Prerequisites: CHE

31 and CHE 44.

Chemical Engineering 153

CHE 281. Chemical Engineering Fundamentals

I (4) fall

Fundamentals of material balances, fluid mechanics and

heat transfer. Prerequisites: Undergraduate degree in a

scientific or engineering discipline or one semester

undergraduate level general chemistry, one semester

undergraduate level physics (statics and dynamics), and

two semesters undergraduate calculus and department

permission.

CHE 282. Chemical Engineering Fundamentals

II (4) spring

Fundamentals of heat and mass transfer, process energy

balances and unit operations. Prerequisites: CHE 281, or

equivalent, and department permission.

CHE 283. Chemical Engineering Fundamentals

III (4) fall

Fundamentals of thermodynamics, reaction kinetics and

reactor analysis, and applied mathematics. Prerequisites:

CHE 281 and 282 and department permission.

For Advanced Undergraduates and Graduate

Students

CHE 306 (MATH 306) Introduction to

Biomedical Engineering and Mathematical

Biology (3)

Study of human physiology, including the cardiovascular,

nervous and respiratory systems, and renal physiology.

Mathematical analysis of physiological processes, including

transport phenomena. Mathematical models of excitation

and propagation in nerve. Biomechanics of the skeletal

muscle system. Mathematical models in population

dynamics and epidemiology. Independent study projects.

Prerequisite: MATH 205.

CHE 331. Separation Processes (3) fall, every

other year

Industrial separation chemistry and processes. Computer

solutions for simple and complex multicomponent distil-

lation columns. Azeotropic and extractive distillation.

Adsorption, ion exchange and chromatography in

packed beds, moving beds and cyclic operation.

Synthesis of polymer membrane and its applications to

industrial separation processes.

CHE 334. (MAT 334, EES 338) Electron

Microscopy and Microanalysis (4) fall

Fundamentals and experimental methods in electron

optical techniques including scanning electron

microscopy (SEM) conventional transmission (TEM)

and scanning transmission (STEM) electron microscopy.

Specific topics covered will include electron optics, elec-

tron beam interactions with solids, electron diffraction

and chemical microanalysis. Applications to the study of

the structure of materials are given. Prerequisite: consent

of the department chair.

CHE 341. Biotechnology I (3) fall

Applications of material and energy balances; heat, mass,

and momentum transfer; enzyme and microbial kinetics;

and mathematical modeling to the engineering design

and scale-up of bio-reactor systems. Prerequisites: BioS

41, ChE31, and CHM 31; the consent of the instructor.

Closed to students who have taken CHE 441.

CHE 342. Biotechnology II (3) spring

Engineering design and analysis of the unit operations

used in the recovery and purification of products manu-

factured by the biotechnology industries. Requirements

for product finishing and waste handling will be

addressed. Prerequisite: ChE 31 and CHM 31; and the

consent of the instructor. Closed to students who have

taken CHE 442.

CHE 344. Molecular Bioengineering (3)

Kinetics in small systems, stochastic simulation of bio-

chemical processes, receptor-mediated adhesion, dynamics

of ion-channels, ligand binding, biochemical transport,

surface Plasmon resonance, DNA microarray design, and

chemical approaches to systems biology. Prerequisites:

Math 205 and Math 231, or senior standing in ChE.

CHE 346. Biochemical Engineering

Laboratory (3) spring

Laboratory and pilot-scale experiments in fermentation

and enzyme technology, tissue culture, and separations

techniques. Prerequisites: CHE 341, previously or con-

currently; and the consent of the instructor. Closed to

students who have taken CHE 446.

CHE 350. Special Topics (1-3)

A study of areas in chemical engineering not covered in

courses presently listed in the catalog. May be repeated

for credit if different material is presented.

CHE 364. Numerical Methods in Engineering (3)

Survey of the principal numerical algorithms for: (1)

functional approximation, (2) linear and nonlinear alge-

braic equations, (3) initial and boundary-value ordinary

differential equations and (4) elliptic, hyperbolic and

parabolic partial differential equations. Analysis of the

computational characteristics of numerical algorithms,

including algorithm structure, accuracy, convergence,

stability and the effect of computer characteristics, e.g.,

the machine epsilon and dynamic range. Applications of

mathematical software in science and engineering.

CHE 373. (CE 373) Fundamentals of Air

Pollution (3)

Introduction to the problems of air pollution including

such topics as: sources and dispersion of pollutants; sam-

pling and analysis; technology of economics and control

processes; legislation and standards. Prerequisite: senior

standing in the College of Engineering and Applied

Science.

CHE 374 Environmental Catalysis (3)

Pollution emissions in the USA (NOx, SOx, NH

, CO,

VOCs, PM, heavy metals and persistent bioaccumulative

chemicals) and their sources and fate. Fundamental con-

cepts of catalysis (surface and their characterization,

physical adsorption, surface reaction mechanisms and

their kinetics). Application of catalysis to a wide range of

environmental issues (catalytic combustion of VOCs,

automotive catalytic converter, selective catalytic conver-

sion of NOx, etc.) Prerequisite: Senior standing and

instructor approval

ChE 375 (CEE 375) Environmental Engineering

Processes (3) Fall

Processes applied in environmental engineering for air

pollution control, treatment of drinking water, munici-

pal wastewater, industrial wastes, hazardous/toxic wastes,

and enviroinmental remediation. Kinetics, reactor theo-

ry, mass balances, application of fundamental physical,

chemical and biological principles to analysis and design.

Prerequisite: CEE 170 or equivalent.

154 Lehigh University Course Catalog 2009-2010

CHE 376 (ME 37) Energy: Issues &

Technology (3)

Energy usage and supply, fossil fuel technologies, renew-

able energy alternatives and environmental impacts. The

scope will be broad to give some perspective of the prob-

lems, but in-depth technical analysis of many aspects will

also be developed. Prerequisites: college-level introducto-

ry courses in chemistry, physics and mathematics and

instructor approval.

CHE 380. Design Projects (1-6) fall-spring

Design project work as a member of a team preferably

including students from different disciplines. The project

attacks a problem which, when possible, involves one of

the local communities or industries. Specific projects are

normally guided by faculty from several departments

with consultants from off-campus. The course may be

repeated for credit.

CHE 386. Process Control (3) fall

Open-loop and closed-loop stability analysis using root

locus and Nyquist techniques, design of feedback con-

trollers with time and frequency domain specifications.

Experimental process identification. Control of multi-

variable processes. Introduction to sampled-data control

theory. Prerequisite: CHE 242 or equivalent.

CHE 387. (ECE 387, ME 387) Digital

Control (3) spring

Sampled-data systems; z-transforms; pulse transfer func-

tions; stability in the z-plane; root locus and frequency

response design methods; minimal prototype design; dig-

ital control hardware; discrete state variables; state

transition matrix; Liapunov stability state feedback con-

trol (2 lectures and one laboratory per week).

Prerequisite: CHE 386 or ECE 212 or ME 343 or con-

sent of instructor.

CHE 388. (CHEM 388, MAT 388) Polymer

Synthesis and Characterization Laboratory (3)

spring

Techniques include: free radical and condensation poly-

merization; molecular weight distribution by gel

chromatography; crystallinity and order by differential

scanning calorimetry; pyrolysis and gas chromatography;

dynamic mechanical and dielectric behavior; morpholo-

gy and microscopy; surface properties. Prerequisite:

senior level standing in CHE, CHM or MAT, or permis-

sion of the instructor. (ES 2), (ED 1)

CHE 389. (ECE 389, ME 389) Control Systems

Lab (2) spring

Experiments on a variety of mechanical, electrical and

chemical dynamic control systems. Exposure to state-of-

the-art control instrumentation: sensors, transmitters,

control valves, analog and digital controllers. Emphasis

on comparison of theoretical computer simulation pre-

dictions with actual experimental data. Lab teams will be

interdisciplinary. Prerequisite: CHE 242, ECE 212, or

ME 343. (ES 1), (ED 1)

CHE 391. (CHEM 391) Colloid and Surface

Chemistry (3)

Physical chemistry of everyday phenomena.

Intermolecular forces and electrostatic phenomena at

interfaces, boundary tensions and films at interfaces,

mass and charge transport in colloidal suspensions, elec-

trostatic and London forces in disperse systems, gas

adsorption and heterogeneous catalysis. Prerequisite:

Permission of the instructor.

CHE 392. (CHM 392) Introduction to Polymer

Science (3) fall

Introduction to concepts of polymer science. Kinetics

and mechanism of polymerization, synthesis and process-

ing of polymers, characterization. Relationship of

molecular conformation, structure and morphology to

physical and mechanical properties. Prerequisite: CHM

187 or equivalent.

CHE 393. (CHM 393, MAT 393) Physical

Polymer Science (3) fall

Structural and physical aspects of polymers (organic,

inorganic, natural). Molecular and atomic basis for poly-

mer properties and behavior. Characteristics of glassy,

crystalline, and paracrystal-line states (including vis-

coelastic and relaxation behavior) for single-and

multi-component systems. Thermodynamics and kinet-

ics of transition phenomena. Structure, morphology, and

behavior. Prerequisite: senior level standing in CHE,

CHEM, or MAT, or permission of the instructor.

CHE 394. (CHM 394) Organic Polymer Science

I (3) spring

Organic chemistry of synthetic high polymers. Polymer

nomenclature, properties, and applications. Functionality

and reactivity or monomers and polymers. Mechanism

and kinetics of step-growth and chain-growth polymer-

ization in homogenous and heterogenous media. Brief

description of emulsion polymerization, ionic polymer-

ization, and copolymerization. Prerequisites: one year of

physical chemistry and one year of organic chemistry.

(NS)

Graduate Programs

The department of chemical engineering offers graduate

programs leading to the master of science, master of engi-

neering, and doctor of philosophy degrees. The programs

are all custom tailored for individual student needs and

professional goals. These individual programs are made

possible by a diversity of faculty interests that are broad-

ened and reinforced by cooperation between the

department and several research centers on the campus.

A free flow of personnel and ideas between the centers

and academic departments ensures that the student will

have the widest choice of research activities. The student

is also exposed to a wide range of ideas and information

through courses and seminars to which both faculty and

center personnel contribute. In addition, strong relation-

ships with industry are maintained by the department

and the research centers, some of which operate industri-

ally-sponsored liaison programs whereby fundamental

nonproprietary research is performed in areas of specific

interest to participating sponsors.

While the department has interacted with most of the

centers on campus, it has had unusually strong and con-

tinuing liaisons with Emulsion Polymers Institute,

Process Modeling and Control Research Center, and

Materials Research Center. The Department also has a

strong relation with the Bioengineering Program.

In addition to interacting with the centers, the depart-

ment originates and encourages programs that range

from those that are classical chemical engineering to

those that are distinctly interdisciplinary. The depart-

ment offers active and growing programs in adhesion

Chemical Engineering 155

and tribology; emulsion polymerization and latex tech-

nology; bulk polymer systems; process control; process

improvement studies; rheology; computer applications;

environmental engineering; thermodynamics; kinetics

and catalysis; enzyme technology; and biochemical engi-

neering.

Career Opportunities

Master of science, master of engineering, and doctor of

philosophy graduates in the chemical engineering area

are sought by industry for activities in the more technical

aspects of their operations, especially design, process and

product development, and research. Many of these grad-

uates also find opportunities in research or project work

in government agencies and in university teaching and

research.

Physical Facilities

The department is well equipped for research in colloids

and surface science, adhesion and tribology, polymer sci-

ence and engineering, catalysis and reaction kinetics,

thermodynamic property studies, fluid dynamics, heat

and mass transfer, process dynamics and control, and

enzyme engineering and biochemical engineering.

The departmental and university computing facilities

include PCs and workstations, connected by a universi-

ty-wide high speed network, which in turn provides

worldwide networking via the Internet/WWW.

All of these facilities can access a wide variety of general-

purpose, and scientific and engineering software via the

university and local networks, including software specifi-

cally for the steady state and dynamic simulation of

chemical engineering systems. The networks are extended

as needed to ensure the chemical engineering department

has access to the latest computing technology.

Special Programs

Polymer Science and Engineering. The polymers activity

includes work done in the Department of Chemical

Engineering as well as the Departments of Chemistry,

Materials Science, and Physics, the Materials Research

Center, the Center for Polymer Science and Engineering,

the Emulsion Polymers Institute, and the Polymer Inter-

faces Center. More than 20 faculty members from these

organizations or areas have major interests in polymers

and cooperate on a wide range of research projects. For

students with deep interest in the area, degree programs

are available leading to the master of science, master of

engineering, and doctor of philosophy degrees in poly-

mer science and engineering.

There are three major polymer research thrusts in which

chemical engineering students and faculty are involved.

These are polymer colloids (latexes), polymer interfaces,

and polymer materials. The Emulsion Polymers Institute,

with strong industrial support, sponsors projects in the

preparation of monosize polymer particles, in mecha-

nisms and kinetics of emulsion, miniemulsion and

dispersion polymerization, in latex particle morphology

and film-formation, and in rheological properties of

latexes and thickeners. The Polymer Interfaces Center

has programs in adsorption/characterization,

wetting/adhesion, and mechanical behavior. The

Engineering Polymers Laboratory investigates the behav-

ior of bulk polymer materials, focusing on

multicomponent polymers and composites.

Distance Education

The Department offers some of its regular credit courses

each semester via satellite and the World Wide Web for

engineers in industry and government. These offerings,

which are administered by the Distance Education

Office, can lead to the Master of Engineering degree in

Chemical Engineering or in Biological Chemical Engi-

neering.

Major Requirements

All candidates for the Master of Science degree are

required to complete a research report or thesis for which

six hours of graduate credit are earned. Course selection

is done individually for each student, although CHE

400, CHE 410, CHE 415 and CHE 452 are required.

Candidates for the Master of Engineering degree do not

do research; all 30 credit hours are fulfilled by course

work. Course selection is done individually for each stu-

dent within the University requirements for a master’s

degree.

In addition to an approved course and thesis program,

the Ph.D. student must pass a qualification examination

given during the second year of residence.

Advanced Courses in Chemical

Engineering

CHE 400. Chemical Engineering

Thermodynamics (3) fall

Applications of thermodynamics in chemical engineer-

ing. Topics include energy and entropy, heat effects

accompanying solution, flow of compressible fluids,

refrigeration including solution cycles, vaporization and

condensation processes, and chemical equilibria.

Prerequisite: an introductory course in thermodynamics.

CHE 401. Chemical Engineering

Thermodynamics II (3) spring, every other year

A detailed study of the uses of thermodynamics in pre-

dicting phase equilibria in solid, liquid, and gaseous

systems. Fugacities of gas mixtures, liquid mixtures, and

solids. Solution theories; uses of equations of state; high-

pressure equilibria.

CHE 410. Chemical Reaction Engineering (3)

spring

The application of chemical kinetics to the engineering

design and operation of reactors. Non-isothermal and

adiabatic reactions. Homogeneous and heterogeneous

catalysis. Residence time distribution in reactors.

Prerequisite: CHE 211.

CHE 413. Heterogeneous Catalysis and Surface

Characterization (3) fall, every other year

History and concepts of heterogeneous catalysis. Surface

characterization techniques, and atomic structure of sur-

faces and adsorbed monolayers. Kinetics of elementary

steps (adsorption, desorption, and surface reaction) and

overall reactions. Catalysis by metals, metal oxides, and

sulfides. Industrial applications of catalysis: selective oxi-

dation, pollution control, ammonia synthesis,

hydrogenation of carbon monoxide to synthetic fuels

and chemicals, polymerization, hydrotreating, and crack-

ing.

CHE 415. Transport Processes (4) spring

A combined study of the fundamentals of momentum

transport, energy transport and mass transport and the

analogies between them. Evaluation of transport coeffi-

156 Lehigh University Course Catalog 2009-2010

cients for single and multicomponent systems. Analysis

of transport phenomena through the equations of conti-

nuity, motion, and energy. Prerequisite: CHE 452 or

equivalent.

CHE 419. (MECH 419) Asymptotic Methods in

the Engineering Sciences (3)

Introductory level course with emphasis on practical

applications. Material covered includes: Asymptotic

expansions. Regular and singular perturbations; algebraic

problems. Asymptotic matching. Boundary value prob-

lems; distinguished limits. Multiple scale expansion.

W.K.B. Theory. Non-linear wave equations.

CHE 428. Rheology (3)

An intensive study of momentum transfer in elastic vis-

cous liquids. Rheological behavior of solution and bulk

phase polymers with emphasis on the effect of molecular

weight, molecular weight distribution and branching.

Derivation of constitutive equations based on both

molecular theories and continuum mechanics principles.

Application of the momentum equation and selected

constitutive equations to geometries associated with vis-

cometric flows. Prerequisite: Permission of the instructor.

CHE 430. Mass Transfer (3) fall, every other year

Theory and developments of the basic diffusion and

mass transfer equations and transfer coefficients includ-

ing simultaneous heat and mass transfer, chemical

reaction and dispersion effects. Applications to various

industrially important operations including continuous

contact mass transfer, absorption, humidification, etc.

Brief coverage of equilibrium stage operations as applied

to absorption and to binary and multicomponent distil-

lation.

CHE 433. (ECE 433, ME 433) State Space

Control (3) fall

State-space methods of feedback control system design

and design optimization for invariant and time-varying

deterministic, continuous systems; pole positioning,

observability, controllability, modal control, observer

design, the theory of optimal processes and Pontryagin’s

Maximum Principle, the linear quadratic optimal regula-

tor problem, Lyapunov functions and stability theorems,

linear optimal open-loop control; introduction to the

calculus of variations; introduction to the control of dis-

tributed parameter systems. Intended for engineers with

a variety of backgrounds. Examples will be drawn from

mechanical, electrical and chemical engineering applica-

tions. Prerequisite: ME 343 or ECE 212 or CHE 386 or

consent of instructor.

CHE 434. (ECE 434, ME 434) Multivariable

Process Control (3)

A state-of-the-art review of multivariable methods of

interest to process control applications. Design tech-

niques examined include loop interaction analysis,

frequency domain methods (Inverse Nyquist Array,

Characteristic Loci and Singular Value Decomposition)

feed forward control, internal model control and dynam-

ic matrix control. Special attention is placed on the

interaction of process design and process control. Most

of the above methods are used to compare the relative

performance of intensive and extensive variable control

structures. Prerequisite: CHE 433 or ME 433 or ECE

433 or consent of instructor.

CHE 436. (ECE 436, ME 436) Systems

Identification (3)

The determination of model parameters from time-his-

tory and frequency response data by graphical,

deterministic and stochastic methods. Examples and

exercises taken from process industries, communications

and aerospace testing. Regression, quasilinearization and

invariant-imbedding techniques for nonlinear system

parameter identification included. Prerequisite: CHE

433 or ME 433 or ECE 433 or consent of instructor.

CHE 437. (ECE 437, ME 437) Stochastic

Control (3)

Linear and nonlinear models for stochastic systems.

Controllability and observability. Minimum variance

state estimation. Linear quadratic Gausian control prob-

lem. Computational considerations. Nonlinear control

problem in stochastic systems. Prerequisite: CHE 433 or

ME 433 or ECE 433 or consent of instructor.

CHE 438. Process Modeling and Control

Seminar (1) fall-spring

Presentations and discussions on current methods,

approaches, and applications. Credit cannot be used for

the M.S. degree.

CHE 440. Chemical Engineering in the Life

Sciences (3)

Introduction of important topics in life sciences to

chemical engineers. Topics include protein and biomole-

cule structures and characterization, recombinant DNA

technology, immunoaffinity technology, combinatorial

chemistry, metabolic engineering, bioinformatics.

Prerequisite: Bachelor’s degree in science or engineering.

CHE 441. Biotechnology I (3) fall

See the course description listed for CHE 341. In order

to receive 400-level credits, the student must do an addi-

tional, more advanced term project, as defined by the

instructor at the beginning of the course. Closed to stu-

dents who have taken CHE 341.

CHE 442. Biotechnology II (3) spring

See the course description listed for CHE 342. In order

to receive 400-level credits, the student must do an addi-

tional, more advanced term project, as defined by the

instructor at the beginning of the course. Closed to stu-

dents who have taken CHE 342.

CHE 444. Bioseparations (3)

Separation techniques for biomolecule isolation and

purification. Theory and problems of bioaffinity chro-

matography, electromigration processes, and aqueous

two-phase polymer extraction systems. Engineering prin-

ciples for scaling-up bioseparation processes. Prerequisite:

Consent of the instructor.

CHE 446. Biochemical Engineering

Laboratory (3)

Laboratory and pilot-scale experiments in fermentation

and enzyme technology, tissue culture, and separations

techniques. Prerequisites: CHE 341 and CHE 444 or

CHE 342 previously or concurrently. Closed to students

who have taken CHE 346.

CHE 448. Topics in Biochemical Engineering (3)

Analysis, discussion, and review of current literature for a

topical area of biotechnology. Course may be repeated

for credit with the consent of the instructor. Prerequisite:

Consent of the instructor.

Chemistry 157

CHE 450. Special Topics (1-12)

An intensive study of some field of chemical engineering

not covered in the more general courses. Credit above

three hours is granted only when different material is

covered.

CHE 451. Problems in Research (1)

Study and discussion of optimal planning of experiments

and analysis of experimental data. Discussion of more

common and more difficult techniques in the execution

of chemical engineering research.

CHE 452 (ME/ENGR 452). Mathematical

Methods in Eng. I (3) Fall

Analytical techniques relevant to the engineering sciences

are described. Vector spaces; eigenvalues; eigenvectors.

Linear ordinary differential equations; diagonalizable and

non- diagonalizable systems. Inhomogeneous linear sys-

tems; variation of parameters. Non-linear systems;

stability; phase plane. Series solutions of linear ordinary

differential equations; special functions. Laplace and

Fourier transforms; application to partial differential

equations and integral equations. Sturm-Liouville theory.

Finite Fourier transforms; planar, cylindrical, and spheri-

cal geometries.

CHE 453 Apprentice Teaching (1)

Students will work under the guidance of individual

Faculty instructors to participate in some of the follow-

ing teaching tasks: Development of the course syllabus,

preparation and grading of homework and exams, hold-

ing a recitation and/or lecture section. Prerequisites:

Graduate student in ChE department. Course may be

repeated for up to three credits.

CHE 455. Seminar (1-3) fall-spring

Critical discussion of recent advances in chemical engi-

neering. Credit above one hour is granted only when

different material is covered.

CHE 460. Chemical Engineering Project (1-6)

An intensive study of one or more areas of chemical

engineering, with emphasis on engineering design and

applications. A written report is required. May be repeat-

ed for credit.

CHE 464. Numerical Methods in Engineering (3)

See the course description listed for CHE 364. In order

to receive 400-level credits the student must do an addi-

tional, more advanced term project, as defined by the

instructor at the beginning of the course.

CHE 473. (CE 473) Environmental Separation

and Control (3)

Theory and application of adsorption, ion exchange,

reverse osmosis, air stripping and chemical oxidation in

water and wastewater treatment. Modeling engineered

treatment processes. Prerequisite: CE 470 or consent of

the instructor.

CHE 480. Research (3)

Investigation of a problem in chemical engineering.

CHE 481. Research (3)

Continuation of CHE 480.

CHE 482. (CHM 482, MAT 482) Engineering

Behavior of Polymers (3)

A treatment of the mechanical behavior of polymers.

Characterization of experimentally observed viscoelastic

response of polymeric solids with the aid of mechanical

model analogs. Topics include time-temperature super-

position, experimental characterization of large deforma-

tion and fracture processes, polymer adhesion, and the

effects of fillers, plasticizers, moisture and aging on

mechanical behavior.

CHE 483. (CHM 483) Emulsion Polymers (3) fall

Examination of fundamental concepts important in the

manufacture, characterization, and application of poly-

mer latexes. Topics to be covered will include colloidal

stability, polymerization mechanisms and kinetics, reac-

tor design, characterization of particle surfaces, latex

rheology, morphology considerations, polymerization

with functional groups, film formation and various

application problems.

CHE 485. (CHM 485, MAT 485) Polymer Blends

and Composites (3) spring, every other year

Synthesis, morphology, and mechanical behavior of poly-

mer blends and composites. Mechanical blends, block

and graft copolymers, interpenetrating polymer net-

works, polymer impregnated concrete, and fiber and

particulate reinforced polymers are emphasized.

Prerequisite: any introductory course in polymers.

CHE 486. Polymer Processing (3)

Application of fundamental principles of mechanics,

fluid dynamics and heat transfer to the analysis of a wide

variety of polymer flow processes. A brief survey of the

rheological behavior of polymers is also included. Topics

include pressurization, pumping, die forming, calender-

ing, coating, molding, fiber spinning and elastic

phenomena. Prerequisite: CHE 392 or equivalent.

CHE 487. Polymer Interfaces (3) spring, every

other year

An intensive study of polymer surfaces and interfaces,

with special emphasis on thermodynamics, kinetics, and

techniques for characterization. Chemistry and physics

of adsorbed polymer chains. Diffusion and adhesion at

polymer-polymer interfaces, especially as related to

mechanical properties such as fracture and toughness will

be described. Prerequisite: Introductory polymer course.

CHE 492. (CHM 492) Topics in Polymer

Science (3)

Intensive study of topic selected from areas of current

research interest such as morphology and mechanical

behavior, thermodynamics and kinetics of crystallization,

new analytical techniques, molecular weight distribution,

non-Newtonian flow behavior, second-order transition

phenomena, novel polymer structures. Credit above

three hours is granted only when different material is

covered. Prerequisite: CHEM 392 or equivalent.

Chemistry

Professors. Robert A. Flowers, II, Ph.D. (Lehigh), chair;

Jack A. Alhadeff, Ph.D. (Oregon Medical School); Ned

D. Heindel, Ph.D. (Delaware), Howard S. Bunn Professor

of Chemistry; Kamil Klier, Ph.D. (Czechoslovak Academy

of Science, Prague), University Distinguished Professor;

Bruce E. Koel, Ph.D. (Texas-Austin); Steven L. Regen,

Ph.D. (M.I.T.), University Distinguished Professor; Keith

J. Schray, Ph.D. (Penn State).

Associate professors. Gregory S. Ferguson, Ph.D.

(Cornell); Natalie Foster, Ph.D. (Lehigh); James E.

Roberts, Ph.D. (Northwestern).

158 Lehigh University Course Catalog 2009-2010

Assistant professors. K. Jebrell Glover, Ph.D.

(California-San Diego); Kai Landskron, Ph.D. (Ludwig

Maximillians-Munich); Tianbo Liu, Ph.D. (SUNY at

Stony Brook); David T. Moore, Ph.D. (UNC-Chapel

Hill); Dmitri V. Vezenov, Ph.D. (Harvard).

Professors of Practice. Rebecca S. Miller, Ph.D. (Duke),

faculty graduate administrator; R. Sam Niedbala, Ph.D.

(Lehigh).

CESAR fellows. James J. Bohning, Ph.D.

(Northeastern); Robert D. Rapp, Ph.D. (Lehigh); Tibor

Sipos, Ph.D. (Lehigh).

Active emeriti. John W. Larsen, Ph.D. (Purdue); Gary

W. Simmons, Ph.D. (Virginia); James E. Sturm, Ph.D.

(Notre Dame); Daniel Zeroka, Ph.D. (Pennsylvania).

Chemistry is a versatile subject area and the pursuit of a

career in chemistry can be a most intellectually satisfying

experience. No other basic science touches and shapes as

many aspects of modern society as does chemistry. The

study of chemistry has provided solutions to complex

problems and has improved the quality of all phases of

human life from soft contact lenses and synthetic blood

to longer-lasting paint and alternative fuels. A particular

strength of this department is in surface and interface

chemistry, which bridges many areas of modern science

and technology.

Chemists at all levels of education find a market for their

skills and knowledge in many employment areas.

Chemists provide the technical backbone for the manu-

facturing industries (pharmaceuticals, plastics, paper,

semiconductor electronics technology, and agriculture),

for service industries (clinical and forensic laboratories,

academe, environmental protection, and information sci-

ence) and for governmental positions in regulatory

agencies and in science policy analyses. Many chemists

are employed in nontraditional areas, such as patent law,

insurance underwriting, sales, product management,

journalism, and even banking.

The alluring challenge of chemistry inspires many bache-

lor degree recipients to study for advanced degrees

within the discipline of chemistry and in other areas, as

well. Chemistry or biochemistry is the strongest prepara-

tion for graduate studies or for professional school in the

health-related disciplines (medicine, pharmacology, and

biochemistry), and for other science programs (materials

science, polymers, biotechnology, environmental studies,

and mineralogy).

The study of chemistry opens doors to satisfying careers,

to a stimulating view of the world, and to a professional

life in which one’s natural tendency to ask “Why?” can

lead to personally rewarding endeavors. The undergradu-

ate curriculum in chemistry contains many of the

prerequisites for biology, earth and environmental sci-

ences, materials science, molecular biology, physics, and

chemical engineering, allowing students to transfer the

majority of credits through the sophomore year.

Chemistry students have the opportunity to design their

undergraduate curricula for specialization in a variety of

fields through the ChemFlex curriculum.

The ChemFlex Curriculum

The Department of Chemistry offers three degrees in the

College of Arts and Sciences: the B.S. in Chemistry, the

B.A. in Chemistry and the B.S. in Pharmaceutical

Chemistry and an interdepartmental B.S. Biochemistry

degree with the Department of Biological Sciences; in

the College of Engineering and Applied Science the

degree of B.S. in Chemistry is offered. In the College of

Arts and Sciences the B.S. in Chemistry and B.A. in

Chemistry programs have a flexibility in the curricula,

called ChemFlex, which allows a student to concentrate

in a specific area if he/she wishes to do so. The concen-

trations possible for the B.S. are Physical/Analytical,

Polymers, and Materials, whereas for the B.A. areas of

possible concentration are Business and Health

Professions. The alternate concentrations share a

Common Chemistry Core and one of two paths of the

collateral coursework, Path A or Path B. The traditional

American Chemical Society certified B.S. degree is also

offered. The B.S. degree in the College of Engineering is

closest to the traditional ACS approved degree in the

College of Arts and Sciences. All B.S. chemistry pro-

grams have a Common Chemistry Core and similar

collateral science requirements and are pre-professional

in nature. Students planning to attend graduate school

in chemistry or an allied science should elect the B.S.

program in whichever college they have been admitted.

The B.A. program in the College of Arts and Sciences is

not a pre-professional program and may be elected by

students who do not plan to do graduate work in chem-

istry or allied sciences but wish a stronger background in

chemistry than is provided in the chemistry minor pro-

gram. The B.A. program also affords a useful tie-in with

business and health professions options. Students may

transfer from the B.S. to B.A. programs easily but the

reverse is somewhat more difficult to arrange. Students

who are in the B.A. program and make a late decision to

attend graduate school in chemistry or allied sciences

will have minimal chemistry preparation for this by

electing Chemistry 307, Advanced Inorganic Chemistry.

Department Modern Language and Literature

Requirement.

The modern foreign language requirement is met by one

of three options: 1. Completion of the second semester

of a modern foreign language; 2. Certification of lan-

guage equivalent to this level taken in high school; 3.

Substitution of six credits of science electives. If science

electives are chosen, the non-science distribution require-

ment must still be met.

Degrees in the College of Arts and

Sciences

In the College of Arts and Sciences the Chemistry

Department offers three degrees: a B.S. in Chemistry, a

B.A. in Chemistry and a B.S. in Pharmaceutical

Chemistry with an interdepartmental B.S. Biochemistry

degree with the Department of Biological Sciences. The

ChemFlex Curriculum allows the flexibility for a student

to develop a concentration in a specific area if he/she

wishes to do so. The specific concentrations are noted in

the following Table.

Table: ChemFlex Curriculum Overview

Specialization Requirements

B.S. Chemistry (ACS)

B.S. Chemistry - Analytical/Physical

B.S. Chemistry - Polymers

B.S. Chemistry - Materials {*, a, **}

B.A. Chemistry

B.A. Chemistry - Business

Chemistry 159

B.A. Chemistry - Health Professions {*, a or b, **}

B.S. Pharmaceutical Chemistry {*, a or b, **}

B.S. Biochemistry

(interdepartmental degree) {*, a or b, **}

* Common Chemistry Core

** Courses required for specific concentration

a Path A

b Path B

With regard to the B.S. in Pharmaceutical Chemistry the

pharmaceutical industry is focused on exploring the bio-

chemistry of disease and designing or finding drugs to

cure or ameliorate disease. Biochemists, organic

chemists, biologists, and chemical engineers collaborate

to achieve this end. The majority of chemists hired today

go into the pharmaceutical industry. The B.S. in

Pharmaceutical Chemistry is a chemistry degree option

which focuses on core chemistry, biochemistry, and

molecular biology to prepare students for careers in this

field. Since it is a highly interdisciplinary field it requires

the breadth of knowledge offered by this degree pro-

gram.

Freshman chemistry courses

The freshman courses CHM 30 and CHM 40 have simi-

lar course content. If both courses are taken, only credit

for CHM 40, the more advanced course, will be awarded.

Common Chemistry Core

CHM 40,41 (or CHM 30/31)

8 credits Introductory chemistry

CHM 110,111,112,113

8 credits Organic Chemistry

CHM 332 3 credits Analytical chemistry

See Concentrations Physical chemistry

CHM 201* 2 credits Technical writing

CHM 301** 1 credit Undergraduate seminar

CHM 307 3 credits Advanced inorganic

chemistry

Total = 25 credits

*Other writing intensive courses may be substituted with the

approval of the advisor but any substitute course should

have a science focus.

**CHM 301 may be substituted by any course having a

major presentation component with the approval of the

major advisor.

Collateral requirements

Path A

Math 21 4 credits Calculus I

Math 22 4 credits Calculus II

Math 23 4 credits Calculus III

Math 205 3 credits Linear methods

Phy 11,12 5 credits Introductory Physics I

and lab

Phy 21,22 5 credits Introductory Physics II

and lab

Engr 1 or

CSE 12 3 credits Survey of Computer

Science

Total=28 credits

Path B

Math 51 4 credits Survey of Calculus I

Math 52 3 credits Survey of Calculus II

Math 43 3 credits Survey of Linear

Methods

Phy 10,12 5 credits General Physics I and lab

Phy 13,22 4 credits General Physics II and

lab

Total=19 credits

Specializations

B.S. Chemistry (ACS certified Degree)

Common core, Path A, and the following

CHM 334 3 credits Advanced chemistry

laboratory I

CHM 335 3 credits Advanced chemistry

laboratory II

CHM 341 4 credits Molecular Structure,

Bonding and Dynamics

CHM 342 4 credits Thermodynamics and

Kinetics

CHM 343 1 credit Physical chemistry

laboratory

CHM 371 3 credits Elements of

biochemistry I

CHM 3** 3 credits Adv. Chem. elective ***

Total = 21 credits

***See list of choices which follows.

Advanced Chemistry Elective Requirement

One 3-credit course selected from the following:

CHM 358 Advanced Organic Chemistry

CHM 372 Elements of Biochemistry II

CHM 376 Advanced Chemistry Research Lab

CHM 391 Colloid and Surface Chemistry

CHM 392 Introduction to Polymer Science

CHM 393 Physical Polymer Science

CHM 394 Organic Polymer Science

PHY 363 Physics of Solids

B.S. Chemistry - Analytical/Physical

Concentration

Common core, Path A, and the following

CHM 334 3 credits Advanced chemistry

laboratory I

CHM 335 3 credits Advanced chemistry

laboratory II

CHM 341 4 credits Molecular Structure,

Bonding and Dynamics

CHM 342 4 credits Thermodynamics and

Kinetics

CHM 343 1 credit Physical chemistry

laboratory

Total = 15 credits

B.S. Chemistry - Polymers Concentration

Common core, Path A, and the following

CHM 341 4 credits Molecular Structure,

Bonding and Dynamics

CHM 342 4 credits Thermodynamics and

Kinetics

CHM 343 1 credit Physical chemistry

laboratory

CHM 388 3 credits Polymer synthesis and

characterization lab

160 Lehigh University Course Catalog 2009-2010

CHM 393 3 credits Physical polymer science

CHM 394 3 credits Organic polymer science

Total = 18 credits

B.S. Chemistry - Materials Concentration

CHM 334 3 credits Advanced chemistry

laboratory I

CHM 335 3 credits Advanced chemistry

laboratory II

CHM 341 4 credits Molecular Structure,

Bonding and Dynamics

CHM 342 4 credits Thermodynamics and

Kinetics

CHM 343 1 credit Physical chemistry

laboratory

MAT 33 3 credits Engineering materials

and processing

Total = 18 credits

B.A. Chemistry

Common core, Path A or B and the following:

CHM 341, CHM 342 or CHM 194

3-4 credits Physical chemistry

CHM 343 1 credit Physical chemistry labo-

ratory

3 credits CHM elective

Total = 7-8 credits

B.A. Chemistry - Business Concentration

Common core, Path A or B, and the following:

CHM elective 3 credits

CHM 341, CHM 342, or CHM 194

3-4 credits Physical chemistry

CHM 343 1 credit Physical chemistry labo-

ratory

ECO 1 4 credits Principles of economics

BUS 125 1 credit Behavioral skills work-

shop

BUS 126 3 credits Information analysis and

financial decision mak-

ing I

BUS 127 3 credits Information analysis and

financial decision mak-

ing II

BUS 225 3 credits Developing, producing,

and marketing products

and services I

BUS 226 3 credits Developing, producing,

and marketing products

and services II

BUS 326 1 credit Business strategy

MATH 12*** 4 credits Basic Statistics

Total = 29-30 credits

B.A. Chemistry - Health Professions Concentration

Common core, Path A or B, and the following:

CHM elective 3 credits

CHM 341, 342

or CHM 194 3-4 credits Physical chemistry

CHM 343 1 credit Physical chemistry labo-

ratory

EES 31, 22 4 credits Introduction to

Environmental and

Organismal Biology

BIOS 41,42 4 credits Biology Core I: Cellular

and Molecular Statistics

MATH 12*** 4 credits Statistics

Additional courses in BioS are recommended.

Total = 18-19 credits

B.S. Pharmaceutical Chemistry

Common core, Path A or B, and the following:

CHM 194 (or 341 or 342)

3 credits Physical Chemistry for

Biological Sciences

CHM 358 3 credits Advanced organic

CHM 371 3 credits Elements of biochem-

istry I

CHM 372 3 credits Elements of biochem-

istry II

CHM 3** 3 credits Advanced chemistry elec-

tive

BIOS 41,42 4 credits Biology Core I: Cellular

and Molecular

BIOS 115 3 credits Biology Core II:

Genetics

MATH 12*** 4 credits Basic Statistics

Total = 26 credits

***MATH 12 may be substituted by any statistics course.

Model Roster When Path A is Followed

freshman year (30 credits)

College Seminar (3)

Chm 40 Concepts, Models and Experiments

I (4)

Chm 41 Concepts, Models and Experiments

II (4)

Engl 1 Composition and Literature I (3)

Engl 2 Composition and Literature II (3)

Math 21 Calculus I (4)

Math 22 Calculus II (4)

Phy 10 General Phys. I (4)

Phy 12 Intro. Phys. Lab I (1)

sophomore year (32 credits)

Chm 110 Organic Chemistry I (3)

Chm 112 Organic Chemistry II (3)

Chm 111 Organic Chemistry Lab I (1)

Chm 113 Organic Chemistry Lab II (1)

Phy 21 Intro. Phys. (4)

Phy 22 Intro. Phys. Lab (1)

Math 23 Calculus III (4)

Math 43 Survey of Linear Methods (3)

Engr 1 or CSE 12 Engineering Computations (3) or

Survey of Computer Science (3)

distribution requirements - free

electives (9)

Note that some concentrations would insert courses such as

MATH 12, BIOS 41/42 (B.S. Pharmaceutical Chemistry),

ECO 1 (B.A.-Business), etc.

junior year/senior year (30-32 credits)

Student will need to meet with major advisor in order to

formulate courses to be taken.

Model Roster When Path B is Followed

freshman year (31 credits)

College Seminar (3)

Chemistry 161

Chm 40 Concepts, Models and Experiments

I (4)

Chm 41 Concepts, Models and Experiments

II (4)

Engl 1 Composition and Literature I (3)

Engl 2 Composition and Literature II (3)

Math 51 Survey of Calculus 1 (4)

Math 52 Survey of Calculus II (3)

Phy 10 Intro. Phys. I (4)

Phy 12 Intro. Phys. Lab I (1)

sophomore year (30 credits)

Chm 110 Organic Chemistry I (3)

Chm 112 Organic Chemistry II (3)

Chm 111 Organic Chemistry Lab I (1)

Chm 113 Organic Chemistry Lab II (1)

Phy 13 General Phys. (3)

Phy 22 General Phys. Lab (1)

Math 43 Survey of Linear Algebra (3)

distribution requirements - free

electives (15)

Note that some concentrations would insert courses such as

MATH 12, BIOS 41/42 (B.S. Pharmaceutical Chemistry),

ECO 1 (B.A.-Business), etc.

junior year/senior year (30-32 credits)

Student will need to meet with major advisor in order to

formulate courses to be taken.

B.S. Degree in Chemistry, College of

Engineering & Applied Science

Summary of Requirements

I. College distribution 24 credits

II. Physics, math, and computing 28 credits

III. Chemistry 46 credits

IV. Unrestricted electives 25 credits

Total credits 123 credits

Model Roster

freshman year (30-31 credits)

A student should follow the normal freshman year in the

College of Engineering and Applied Science and observe

the following note.

Note: It is recommended that, where possible, students plan-

ning to major in chemistry take Chemistry 40 in the fall

semester and Chemistry 41 in the spring semester of the

freshman year. For such students the elective in the spring

semester is displaced to a subsequent semester. The Chem-

istry 30/31 sequence may be substituted.

sophomore year, first semester (17 credits)

CHM 110 Organic Chemistry I (3)

CHM 111 Organic Chemistry Laboratory I (1)

PHY 21 Introductory Physics II (4)

PHY 22 Introductory Physics Laboratory II (1)

MATH 23 Calculus III (4)

modern foreign language

requirement (4)

(See details in introduction)

sophomore year, second semester (15 credits)

CHM 112 Organic Chemistry II (3)

CHM 113 Organic Chemistry Laboratory II (1)

MATH 205 Linear Methods (3)

Eco 1 Economics (4)

Humanities/Social Science

requirement (4)

junior year, first semester (16-17 credits)

CHM 201 Technical Writing (2) or approved

writing-intensive course (3)

CHM 332 Analytical Chemistry (3)

CHM 334 Advanced Chem. Lab 1 (3)

CHM 341 Molecular Structure, Bonding and

Dynamics (4)

Distribution requirement/elective (4)

modern foreign language

requirement (4)

(See details in introduction)

junior year, second semester (15 credits)

CHM 307 Advanced Inorganic Chem. (3)

CHM 335 Advanced Chem. Lab II (3)

CHM 342 Thermodynamics and Kinetics (4)

CHM 343 Physical Chemistry Laboratory (1)

modern foreign language

requirement (4)

free electives (4)

senior year, first semester (14 credits)

CHM 301 Chemistry Seminar (1)

CHM 371 Elements of Biochemistry I (3)

Advanced chemistry elective (3)

Distribution requirement (7)

senior year, second semester (14 credits)

Advanced chemistry elective (3)*,**

free electives (11)

*See list of choices for the advanced chemistry elective

requirement under the B.S. degree in chemistry/College of

Arts and Sciences.

**This becomes a free elective if the advanced chemistry

elective requirement was taken in the fall of the senior year.

Five-Year Bachelor’s/Master’s Programs

Five-year programs may be arranged for students to

receive B.S. or B.A. degrees and the M.S. degrees in

chemistry with a concentration in one of several fields of

chemistry (inorganic, organic, analytical, physical, poly-

mers, and biochemistry).

B.S. in Biochemistry

An interdepartmental B.S. in Biochemistry major is

offered in the College of Arts and Sciences. Faculty in

both Chemistry (Schray) and Biological Sciences (Lowe-

Krentz and Iovine) serve as advisors depending on

student interest. Majors should be declared in the

Department of Biological Sciences. Please see the section

on Biochemistry for details of the major.

Minor in Chemistry

A minor in chemistry may be achieved by completing

the following requirements:

CHM 31 Chemical Equilibria in Aqueous

Systems (4) or

CHM 41 Concepts Models, Exper. II (4)

CHM 110 Organic Chemistry I (3)

CHM 111 Organic Chemistry Laboratory I (1)

CHM 332 Analytical Chemistry (3)

CHM 341 Molecular Structure, Bonding and

Dynamics (4) or

CHM 342 Thermodynamics and Kinetics (4)

162 Lehigh University Course Catalog 2009-2010

CHM 343 Physical Chemistry Lab (1)

Total Credits (15 credits)

Necessary pre- or co-requisites for the above would be

CHM 30 or 40 and MATH 21.

Students who wish to minor in chemistry but whose

major program requires any of the above courses may

achieve the minor with substitutions approved by the

department chair.

CESAR

The Center for Emeritus Scientists in Academic

Research (CESAR) was established in 1999 and provides

a unique opportunity for Chemistry or Biology majors

to partner with retired scientists who have a desire to

continue their industrial research. Through the program,

CESAR Fellows mentor students, enhance student

opportunities to conduct research, and provide singular

insight into the world of industrial chemistry. In return,

Lehigh University provides administrative support,

research laboratories and equipment to specially selected

retired scientists from industry. Further details can be

found at the web site: http://www.lehigh.edu/chemistry .

Undergraduate Courses in Chemistry

CHM 5. Chemistry and National Issues (3) spring

For majors other than science and engineering.

Chemistry and current controversies. The atmosphere:

global warming, ozone depletion, pollution. Water pollu-

tion and treatment. Energy generation and side effects.

Health: chemicals of life, drugs, carcinogens, personal

care. Materials: natural and synthetic. Food: production

and preservation. Chemistry: benefits and liabilities.

(NS)

CHM 30. Introduction to Chemical Properties (4)

An introduction to important topics in chemistry: atom-

ic structure, properties of matter, chemical reactions,

energy, structure and bonding in organic and inorganic

compounds, chemical equilibrium. The course features a

lecture tightly linked to a three-hour studio experience

that combines laboratory work and recitation. (NS)

CHM 31. Chemical Equilibria in Aqueous

Systems (4) fall-spring

A study of the theoretical basis and practical applications

of equilibria in aqueous solutions, including acid-base,

precipitation-solubility, metal-ligand, oxidation-reduc-

tion and distribution equilibria. Introduction to

chemical thermodynamics, spectrophotometry, poten-

tiometry and chromatography. The laboratory work

emphasizes the qualitative and quantitative analysis of

equilibria in aqueous media. Prerequisite: CHM 30,

MATH 21, 31 or 51. Three lectures and one three-hour

laboratory period. (NS)

CHM 40. Concepts, Models and Experiments

I (4) fall

A first-semester course in chemistry for students plan-

ning to major in chemistry, biochemistry, chemical

engineering, materials science, or other chemistry-related

fields. Chemical and physical properties, structures,

bonding concepts, and quantitative analysis. Laboratory

includes synthesis, separation and analysis procedures;

computer applications to chemistry. Three lectures, one

laboratory. (NS)

CHM 41. Concepts, Models and Experiments

II (4) spring

Continuation of Chemistry 40. Three lectures, one labo-

ratory. Prerequisite: CHM 40 or departmental consent.

(NS)

CHM 110. Organic Chemistry I (3) fall

Systematic survey of the typical compounds of carbon,

their classification, and general relations; study of syn-

thetic reactions. Prerequisite: CHM 30 or 40. (NS)

CHM 111. Organic Chemistry Laboratory I (1)

fall

Preparation of pure organic compounds. Modern tech-

niques of characterization. Prerequisite: CHM 110

previously or concurrently. (NS)

CHM 112. Organic Chemistry II (3) spring

Continuation of CHM 110. Prerequisite: CHM 110.

(NS)

CHM 113. Organic Chemistry Laboratory II (1)

spring

Continuation of Organic Chemistry Laboratory I.

Prerequisite: CHM 111 previously; CHM 112 previous-

ly or concurrently. (NS)

CHM 177. Introduction to Research (1-2) fall-

spring

For advanced freshmen and sophomore chemistry

majors. May be repeated for credit. Prerequisite: Consent

of department chair. (NS)

CHM 194. Physical Chemistry for Biological

Sciences (3) spring

The principles and applications of physical chemical

concepts to systems of biological interest, including the

gas laws, thermodynamics of metabolic reactions, colliga-

tive properties, electrochemical equilibria, reaction

kinetics and enzyme catalysis, and transport of macro-

molecules and viruses. Prerequisite: CHM 31 or 41.

(NS)

CHM 201. Technical Writing (2)

Principal types of written communications used by pro-

fessional chemists including informative abstracts,

research proposals, progress reports, executive summaries

for nonchemist decision makers and proper written

experimental procedures, tables, schemes and figures.

Prerequisite: junior standing in chemistry major or con-

sent of the department chair. (ND)

CHM 250. Special Topics (1-3)

Selected topics in chemistry. May be repeated for credit

when different topics are offered. (NS)

CHM 301. Chemistry Seminar (1)

A course designed for seniors will involve the literature

research of a topic of the student’s choosing followed by

a 35 minute oral presentation to the class and professor.

Prerequisite: Senior standing. (NS)

CHM 307. Advanced Inorganic Chemistry (3)

spring

Introduction to transition metal complexes; theories of

bonding; kinetics and mechanisms of transition metal

complex reactions; selected aspects of organometallic

chemistry; bioinorganic chemistry. Prerequisite: CHM

341. (NS)

Chemistry 163

CHM 312. (CHE 312, MAT 312) Fundamentals

of Corrosion (3) fall

Corrosion phenomena and definitions. Electrochemical

aspects including reaction mechanisms, thermodynamics,

Pourbaix diagrams, kinetics of corrosion processes, polar-

ization and passivity. Non-electrochemical corrosion

including mechanisms, theories and quantitative descrip-

tions of atmospheric corrosion. Corrosion of metals

under stress. Cathodic and anodic protection, coatings

alloys, inhibitors, and passivators. Prerequisite: MAT 205

or CHM 342. (NS)

CHM 332. Analytical Chemistry (3) fall

Theory and practice of chemical analysis. Principles of

quantitative separations and determinations; theory and

application of selected optical and electrical instruments

in analytical chemistry; interpretation of numerical data,

design of experiments, solute distribution in separation

methods. Prerequisites: CHM 31 and 110. (NS)

CHM 334. Advanced Chemistry Laboratory I (3)

fall

Exploration of synthetic methods and analysis tech-

niques for inorganic and organic compounds.

Determination of product structures and quantitative

analysis using modern chemical analysis techniques,

including NMR, GC-MS, GC, HPLC, FT-IR, and XPS.

Prerequisites: one year of organic chemistry. Prerequisite:

CHM 110, 111, 112, 113 and pre- or co-requisite:

CHM 332 (NS)

CHM 335. Advanced Chemistry Laboratory II (3)

spring

Content related to CHM 334. Prerequisite: CHM 110,

111, 112, 113, 332 and 334.

CHM 336. Clinical Chemistry (3) spring

Applications of analytical chemistry to clinical problems.

Discussion of methods in common use and the bio-

chemical-medical significance of the results.

Prerequisites: CHM 332 and 112. Schray. (NS)

CHM 337. (MAT 333) X-ray Diffraction of

Materials (3) fall

Introduction to crystal symmetry, point groups, and space

groups. Emphasis on materials characterization by X-ray

diffraction and electron diffraction. Specific topics include

crystallographic notation, stereographic projections, orien-

tation of single crystals, textures, phase identification,

quantitative analysis, stress measurement, electron diffrac-

tion, ring and spot patterns, convergent beam electron

diffraction (CBED), and space group determination.

Applications in mineralogy, metallurgy, ceramics, micro-

electronics, polymers, and catalysts. Lectures and

laboratory work. Prerequisite: MAT 203 or EES 131 or

senior standing in chemistry. Lyman, Chan. (NS)

CHM 341. Molecular Structure, Bonding and

Dynamics (4)

Nature of chemical bonding as related to structure and

properties of molecules and extended systems. Quantum

chemistry of atoms and molecules applied to chemical

transformations and spectroscopic transitions. Symmetry

analysis and selections rules. Computational and spectro-

scopic lab involving acquisition and interpretation of

electronic, vibrational and rotational spectra.

Prerequisites: Phy 13 or 21, Math 205 or 43. (NS)

CHM 342. Thermodynamics and Kinetics (4)

Development of the principles of classical and statistical

thermodynamics and their application to chemical sys-

tems. In classical thermodynamics emphasis will be on

systems in which composition is of major concern: solu-

tions, chemical and phase equilibria, and

electrochemistry. Kinetic theory of gases; chemical reac-

tion kinetics; chemical reaction dynamics. Prerequisite:

Phy 13 or 21, Math 205 or 43. (NS)

CHM 343. Physical Chemistry Laboratory (1)

Laboratory studies that illustrate and extend the various

fields of study in experimental physical chemistry as dis-

cussed in CHM 341 and CHM 342. Prerequisite: CHM

194 or CHE 210 or {CHM 341 and co-requisite Chm

342}. (NS).

CHM 345. Thermodynamics and Kinetics (3)

Development of the principles of classical and statistical

thermodynamics and their application to chemical sys-

tems. In classical thermodynamics emphasis will be on

systems in which composition is of major concern: solu-

tions, chemical and phase equilibria, and

electrochemistry. Kinetic theory of gases; chemical reac-

tion kinetics; chemical reaction dynamics. Prerequisite:

Department permission required. This course is intended

as a course for graduate students achieving their profi-

ciency in physical chemistry and will consist of the

lectures only of CHM 342.

CHM 350. Special Topics (1-3)

Selected advanced topics in chemistry. May be repeated

for credit when different topics are offered. (NS)

CHM 358. Advanced Organic Chemistry (3) fall

Reaction mechanism types and supporting physical-

chemical data. Classes of mechanisms include

elimination, substitution, rearrangement, oxidation-

reduction, enolate alkylations, and others. Prerequisite:

one year of organic chemistry. (NS)

CHM 368. Advanced Organic Laboratory (2)

The synthesis and study of organic compounds illustrat-

ing the important techniques and special pieces of

apparatus commonly used in organic chemical research.

Prerequisite: one year of organic chemistry and laborato-

ry. (NS)

CHM 371. (BIOS 371) Elements of Biochemistry

I (3) fall

A general study of carbohydrates, proteins, lipids, nucleic

acids, and other biological substances and their impor-

tance in life processes. Protein and enzyme chemistry are

emphasized. Prerequisite: one year of organic chemistry.

(NS)

CHM 372. (BIOS 372) Elements of Biochemistry

II (3) spring

Dynamic aspects of biochemistry: enzyme reactions

including energetics, kinetics and mechanisms, metabo-

lism of carbohydrates, lipids, proteins and nucleic acids,

photosynthesis, electron transport mechanisms, coupled

reactions, phosphorylations, and the synthesis of biologi-

cal macromolecules. Prerequisite: CHM 371 and BIOS

41 or consent of the instructor. (NS)

CHM 375. Research Chemistry Laboratory (1-3)

fall-spring

An introduction to independent study or laboratory

investigation under faculty guidance. Prerequisite: con-

sent of faculty research supervisor. (NS)

164 Lehigh University Course Catalog 2009-2010

CHM 376. Advanced Research Chemistry

Laboratory (1-6) fall-spring

Advanced independent study or laboratory investigation

under faculty guidance. Prerequisite: 3 credits of CHM

375. Consent of faculty research supervisor. May be

repeated for credit. (NS)

CHM 377. (BIOS 377) Biochemistry

Laboratory (3) fall

Laboratory studies of the properties of chemicals of bio-

logical origin and the influence of chemical and physical

factors on these properties. Laboratory techniques used

for the isolation and identification of biochemicals.

Prerequisite: CHM 371, previously or concurrently, and

BIOS 41 or consent of the instructor. (NS)

CHM 378. (BIOS 378) Biochemical

Preparations (1-3) spring

A laboratory course involving the preparation or isola-

tion, purification and identification of chemicals of

biological origin. Prerequisites: CHM 377 and 372, pre-

viously or concurrently. (NS)

CHM 388. (CHE 388, MAT 388) Polymer

Synthesis and Characterization Laboratory (3)

spring

Techniques include: free radical and condensation poly-

merization; molecular weight distribution by gel

chromatography; crystallinity and order by differential

scanning calorimetry; pyrolysis and gas chromatography;

dynamic mechanical and dielectric behavior; morpholo-

gy and microscopy; surface properties. Prerequisites:

CHM 342 and 110. (NS)

CHM 391. (CHE 391) Colloid and Surface

Chemistry (3) fall

Physical chemistry of everyday phenomena.

Intermolecular forces and electrostatic phenomena at

interfaces, boundary tensions and films at interfaces,

mass and charge transport in colloidal suspensions, elec-

trostatic and London forces in disperse systems, gas

adsorption and heterogeneous catalysis. Prerequisite:

CHM 342 or equivalent. Chaudhury. (NS)

CHM 392. (CHE 392) Introduction to Polymer

Science (3) spring

Introduction to concepts of polymer science. Kinetics

and mechanisms of polymerization; synthesis and pro-

cessing of polymers, characterization. Relationship of

molecular conformation, structure and morphology to

physical and mechanical properties. Prerequisite: CHM

342 or equivalent. (NS)

CHM 393. (CHE 393, MAT 393) Physical

Polymer Science (3) fall

Structural and physical aspects of polymers (organic,

inorganic, natural). Molecular and atomic basis for poly-

mer properties and behavior. Characteristics of glassy,

crystalline and paracrystalline states (including viscoelas-

tic and relaxation behavior) for single- and

multi-component systems. Thermodynamics and kinet-

ics of transition phenomena. Structure, morphology and

behavior. Prerequisite: one year of physical chemistry.

(NS)

CHM 394. (CHE 394) Organic Polymer Science

I (3) spring

Organic chemistry of synthetic high polymers. Polymer

nomenclature, properties, and applications. Functionality

and reactivity or monomers and polymers. Mechanism

and kinetics of step-growth and chain-growth polymer-

ization in homogenous and heterogenous media. Brief

description of emulsion polymerization, ionic polymer-

ization, and copolymerization. Prerequisites: one year of

physical chemistry and one year of organic chemistry.

(NS)

Graduate Programs in Chemistry

The department of chemistry offers graduate studies

leading to several advanced degrees. Master of science

and doctor of philosophy degrees in chemistry may be

obtained by study and research in any appropriate area

of chemistry.

The following information on admissions, proficiency

examinations and other policies applies to both the mas-

ter of science and doctor of philosophy degrees in

chemistry.

Admission to graduate study in chemistry assumes that a

student has met, or is willing to meet though further

study, minimum undergraduate requirements for a bach-

elor’s degree in chemistry. This would include (beyond

two semesters of introductory chemistry) two semesters

of organic chemistry, two semesters of physical chem-

istry, two semesters of analytical chemistry and one

semester of inorganic chemistry. A promising student

whose degree is in a field related to chemistry (e.g., biol-

ogy, chemical engineering) may be admitted to graduate

study in chemistry provided that any deficiencies in basic

chemistry preparation are made up in the first year of

graduate study, noting that some of the courses required

for this may not carry graduate credit.

The chemistry department will administer proficiency

examinations at the advanced undergraduate level in

analytical, biochemistry, inorganic, organic and physical

chemistry to all regular graduate students at the time of

matriculation. Each student is required to take three

examinations. Information regarding material to be cov-

ered on these examinations will be sent to each student

several months in advance of matriculation. It is expect-

ed that each student will prepare diligently for these

tests. A student who performs well on one or more of

these tests has an opportunity to take advanced level and

special topics courses at an earlier than normal time and

may in fact begin graduate research during the first year.

A Ph.D. candidate must show proficiency in three areas

and an M.S. candidate in two areas within the first year

in residence. A student who fails one or more of the pro-

ficiency examinations will meet with Professor Miller,

faculty graduate administrator, to determine an appro-

priate course of action in light of the exam performance,

projected major and degree aspiration. Two optional

routes are available for demonstration of proficiency. (1)

The student through self-study and auditing of appropri-

ate courses may prepare for a retaking of a proficiency

examination at the beginning of the second semester in

residence. (2) Alternatively, the student may enroll in

appropriate 300 or 400 level courses during the first year

in residence. A grade of B- or better in an appropriate

300-400 level course will be considered equivalent to

passing the proficiency examination in that area. Courses

taken as a means of demonstrating proficiency will be

acceptable for the M.S. or Ph.D. graduate program.

The Master of Science in Chemistry degree requires a

total of 30 credits, and may be obtained by one of three

options: 1) a minimum of 30 course credits, 2) a mini-

Chemistry 165

mum of 27 course credits and a 3 credit literature review

paper (taken under CHM 421, Chemistry Research), or

3) a minimum of 24 course credits and 6 credits of

experimental research (CHM 421). Each option requires

a minimum of 18 credits at the 400 level (15 of which

must be in chemistry) and one credit of CHM 481

(Seminar). There are no other specifically required cours-

es for the M.S. degree, allowing each student to design a

curriculum that fits their needs and interests. Normally,

work for the master’s degree can be completed in 18 cal-

endar months of full-time study.

Completion of a doctor of philosophy degree program

normally requires a minimum of four years full-time

work after entrance with a bachelor’s degree. There are

few specific course credit requirements for the Ph.D.;

however, approved degree programs generally have at

least 24 hours of course work (including any applied

toward a master’s degree) and 6 credits of research. Thus,

the program consists of approximately one-third formal

course work and two-thirds independent study and

research. There is a two-credit seminar requirement

(CHM 481). After Ph.D. proficiency has been estab-

lished and the research advisor selected (this must be

done by the end of the first year in residence), the major

hurdles are the doctoral examination in the student’s area

of concentration. This exam must be passed by the end

of 2 1/2 years of residence. If this hurdle is surmounted,

the remaining time is spent completing (and ultimately

defending) the dissertation research under the guidance

of the research advisor and the dissertation committee.

Current Research Projects

Current research projects of interest are listed below.

Analytical Chemistry. NMR studies of organic solids

and polymers; electrochemical reduction and oxidation

mechanisms of organic compounds; clinical-biomedical

applications, mechanisms of electrode processes, adsorp-

tion; development of novel immunoassays; analysis of

biologically important molecules; analytical microde-

vices.

Biochemistry. Characterization of lysosomal glycosidases

and glycosyl transferases; functional role of carbohydrates

in glycoproteins; abnormal glycoprotein metabolism in

human diseases; development of in vitro evaluation tech-

niques for prescreening candidate pharmaceuticals;

membrane protein interactions; structural characteriza-

tion of transmembrane domains; small molecule assisted

protein folding; inter- and intra-molecular interactions

between biomolecules; and medicinal assay development.

Inorganic Chemistry. Synthesis, characterization and

catalytic chemistry of transition metal organometallic

complexes; applications of molecular mechanics and

molecular orbital theories in studies of inorganic and

organic derivatives of the representative main group ele-

ments and transition metals; synthesis of solid catalysts

including oxides, sulfides, zeolites and supported metals;

use of organometallic and coordination chemistry in the

synthesis of thin-film materials, and as a guiding princi-

ple in adhesion. Use of organometallic chemistry as a

vehicle for various catalytic transformations including

polymerization and small molecule synthesis; lanthanide

chemistry; solid state inorganic chemistry.

Materials and Polymer Chemistry. Inorganic and

organometallic chemistry in the synthesis of thin-film

materials; synthesis at and dynamics of polymer inter-

faces; acoustic, optical, permeability, dielectric and

mechanical behavior of thin films; laser light scattering

and small-angle X-ray scattering studies on polymer

solutions; polyelectrolytes and ion-containing solutions;

nanofabrications in polmer systems; organic-inorganic

hybrid solid state materials.

Organic Chemistry. Synthesis of medicinal agents, corre-

lation of molecular structure with pharmacological

behavior; chemical models for biochemical reactions;

biosynthesis involving indole intermediates; chemistry of

monolayers and organized molecule assemblages; drug

carriers; synthetic ion conductors; Langmuir-Blodgett

films; organometallic reaction mechanisms; organofluo-

rine chemistry; protein folding and renaturation;

molecular recognition; calorimetry; electrochemical stud-

ies of electron transfer reactions.

Physical Chemistry. Chemistry at surfaces and interfaces

of catalysts, coatings, structural alloys and microelectron-

ics using an array of surface sensitive methods; NMR

and XPS imaging, ARXPS and ARUPS, surface diffrac-

tion methods including XPD, surface dynamics in nano,

meso and macroscopic dimensions, theory including ab

initio FLAPW-DFT for periodic systems for interpreta-

tion of XPS, UPS, optical, QNMR, FTIR and Raman

spectra, as well as transition states both in thermal and

photochemical reactions; NMR studies of polymer

adsorption and polymer miscibility; applications of elec-

tronic structure theory to spectral simulation, reactivity,

transition states, and excited states; statistical mechanics

of order-disorder transitions; exploration of complex

solution systems by using scattering techniques; physical

chemistry of polymer solutions and colloidal suspen-

sions; novel solution behaviors and self-assembly of

nano-meter scaled hydrophilic macro-ions and bio-

macromolecules; intermolecular interactions in soft

matter; chemical force microscopy.

Major Instrumentation

Chemistry research spans all areas: analytical, biochem-

istry, inorganic, organic, and physical. Special equipment

available for graduate research in chemistry is as follows.

Research facilities—LC/MS/MS, MALDI-TOF-MS,

HPLCs, GCs, FPLC, ultracentrifuges, DNA synthesizer,

scintillation and gamma counters, cold rooms, cell disin-

tegrator, zone and disc electrophoresis apparatus, column

chromatograph, autoclave, ultra-low temperature freezers

(-90 and -135C), rotary vaporator, Milli-Q water purifi-

cation system, shaking heated water baths,

spectropolarimeter with circular dichroism capability.

Cell culture facilities—complete with optical micro-

scopes having fluorescent and photographic capabilities,

liquid scintillation equipment. Catalysis facility—fully

automated high pressure reactors with on-line gas chro-

matographs. Electron optical facilities—transmission

electron microscopy with x-ray fluorescence analysis

capability, scanning electron microscope, and scanning

electron microprobe. Gas chromatographs, including a

PE sigma 3 for inverse gas chromatography. Liquid chro-

matographs—high performance for analytical and

preparative work. NMR spectrometers—300 MHz solid

state, 360 MHz for solutions and imaging, 500 MHz

spectrometer for solutions. Photochemistry equipment—

lamps and filters for selected wavelength work.

Polarographs, chronopotentiometers, electrophoresis

apparatus, electrochemical impedance, electrochemical

scanning tunneling microscope, potentiostats, and rotat-

166 Lehigh University Course Catalog 2009-2010

ing disk electrode. Titration equipment (automated and

computer interfaced), portable data interface (8-channel

50 KHz), digital readout polarimeter, Vibron elastovis-

cometers, radio-tracer equipment, including a gamma

counter, differential refractometer, rheometer.

Spectrometers—uv/visible double beam automated,

uv/visible/nearir, Fourier transformir with diffuse

reflectance, photoacoustic and attenuated total

reflectance capability, laser Raman, and GC mass spec-

trometers. Mossbauer spectrometer, positron

annihilation spectrometer. Surface analysis facilities—

rotating anode high-sensitivity high-energy resolution

ESCA with imaging capability (ESCA is equipped with

automated angular data acquisition). Surface science

facility—Auger electron spectroscopy, low energy elec-

tron diffraction (LEED), high resolution electron energy

loss spectroscopy (HREELS), photocorrelation spec-

troscopy for submicron particle analysis. Ellipsometer,

contact angle capabilities, gas adsorption apparatus

(BET), temperature programmed desorption (TPD),

atomic force microscope, instructional scanning tunnel-

ing microscope, and light scattering. Microcalorimeter

(flowing with uv and refractive index detectors), differen-

tial scanning calorimeter (DSC).

Graduate Courses in Chemistry

CHM 400. Laboratory Safety (0) fall

Accident prevention; emergency response; government

regulations; facilities for handling and storage disposal of

hazardous materials; emergency facilities; liabilities.

Lectures, multi-media presentations, hands-on training

by practitioners.

CHM 402. Physical Inorganic Chemistry (3)

alternate years

Aufbau principle and coupling of angular momenta is

used to describe atomic and molecular term states.

Group theoretical principles will be utilized in studies of

molecular orbital and ligand field theories of bonding.

Prerequisite: CHM 341 or equivalent. Klier

CHM 403. Advanced Topics in Inorganic

Chemistry (1-3) alternate years

Topics of contemporary interest in inorganic chemistry.

This course may be repeated when a different topic is

offered. Prerequisite: CHM 307 or equivalent.

CHM 405. Organometallic Chemistry (3) alter-

nate years

The chemistry of compounds containing carbon to

metal bonds. Among topics covered are the following:

organic compounds of the representative elements from

Group I to IV; the chemistry of ferrocene and related pi-

bonded organometallic complexes; metal carbonyl and

nitrosyl complexes; dioxygen and dinitrogen complexes;

organic synthesis utilizing organometallic catalysts.

CHM 421. Chemistry Research (1-6)

Research in one of the following fields of chemistry: ana-

lytical, inorganic, organic, physical, polymer,

biochemistry.

CHM 423. Bio-organic Chemistry (3) alternate

years

An examination of biochemistry on the basis of organic

chemical principles. Emphasis on reaction mechanisms

of biochemical transformations and methods for elucida-

tion of these mechanisms, i.e., kinetics, isotope effects,

exchange techniques, inhibition studies, substrate analog

effects and organic model studies. Prerequisite: CHM

358. Schray

CHM 424. Medicinal and Pharmaceutical

Chemistry (3) alternate years

Principles of drug design, structure-activity relationships

in antibacterial, antimalarial, anti-inflammatory and psy-

choactive drugs; synthesis and modes of action of

pharmacologically active agents radioactive pharmaceuti-

cals. Prerequisite: one year of organic chemistry. Heindel

CHM 425. Pharmaceutical Regulatory Affairs 1:

Drug Discovery to Approval (3)

Coverage includes the stages of the drug approval process

and how these relate to the laboratory activities that pro-

vide the scientific basis of the New Drug Application

(NDA). Lectures treat drug discovery, chemical process

development of the active pharmaceutical ingredient

(API), and pharmaceutical process development of the

drug product. Regulatory issues in screening and testing,

the management of the preclinical trials, and the man-

agement of clinical trials will be covered.

CHM 428. Pharmaceutical Regulatory Affairs 2:

Medical Devices and Combination Technologies:

Concept to Commercialization (3)

This course will review the history of medical device law

and regulations in the United States. It will also define

current requirements of science needed to allow tech-

nologies to be developed according to regulations. Case

studies will be used to educate participants on Design

Controls, Quality System Regulations, Manufacturing

Requirements and International Harmonization.

Specifics may include Nucleic Acid Diagnostics,

Cardiovascular Stents, Drug Delivery, Cancer

Diagnostics, and Consumer Self-Testing.

CHM 430. Chemical and Biochemical

Separations (3) spring, alternate years

Theory and applications of equilibrium and nonequilib-

rium separation techniques at both the analytical and

preparative levels. Solvent and buffer extractions, chro-

matographic separations (e.g., thin layer, partition, gas

liquid, gel filtration, ion exchange, affinity, supercritical

fluid), electrophoretic separations (e.g., gel, capillary, iso-

electric focusing, immunoelectrophoresis), centrifugal

separations (e.g., differential, velocity sedimentation,

density gradient) and other separation methods (e.g.,

dialysis, ultrafiltration). Examples will focus on biologi-

cal applications. Alhadeff

CHM 431. Contemporary Topics in Analytical

Chemistry (1)

Discussion of the current literature in analytical chem-

istry, including spectroscopy, separations, and

electrochemistry. Students find current papers and lead

discussions. May be repeated for credit.

CHM 432. Chemometrics (3) fall, alternate years

Mathematical and statistical methods for experimental

design, calibration, signal resolution, and instrument

control and optimization.

CHM 433. Electroanalytical Chemistry (3) alter-

nate years

Theory and applications of selected electrochemical tech-

niques; solutions to mass transport problems, treatment

of electron transfer kinetics and kinetics of associated

chemical reactions, and critical evaluation of adsorption

Chemistry 167

and other factors associated with electrochemical

processes. Prerequisite: CHM 332 or equivalent.

CHM 434. Advanced Topics in Spectroscopy (3)

fall, alternate years

Fundamentals of interactions of electromagnetic radia-

tion with matter: electronic, vibrational, scattering based

spectroscopies, instrumentation and signal processing.

Advanced applications to the analysis of molecular struc-

ture and chemical processes including surface analysis,

time-resolved spectroscopies, and ultrasensitive spectro-

scopic techniques.

CHM 435. Advanced Topics in Clinical

Chemistry (3)

Selected areas of clinical chemistry such as chemical toxi-

cology, pathogenic microbial biochemistry in vivo

diagnostic methodology, therapeutic drug monitoring, or

other advanced topics. May be repeated for credit when

a different topic is offered.

CHM 436. Special Topics in Analytical

Chemistry (1-3)

Topics of contemporary interest in analytical chemistry.

May be repeated for credit when a different topic is

offered.

CHM 437. (BIOS 437) Pathophysiological

Chemistry (3) spring

Biochemical basis of human diseases involving abnormal

metabolism of proteins, nucleic acids, carbohydrates, and

lipids. Emphasis on the correlation of the clinical presen-

tation of disease processes seen as physiological

dysfunctions with clinical laboratory methods. Lectures,

student presentations, and clinical case discussions.

Prerequisite: consent of the department chair. Alhadeff

CHM 438. Advanced Topics in NMR (3) spring,

alternate years

Fundamental aspects of NMR analysis; instrumental

design; data acquisition and processing parameters;

nuclear spin relaxation; theory of spin dynamics; product

operator formalism; density matrix theory; multidimen-

sional methods; analysis strategies. Roberts

CHM 441. Chemical Kinetics (3) alternate years

A study of kinetic processes. Phenomenological chemical

kinetics; order, mechanism effect of external variables on

rate. Theories of the rate constant. Relation between

thermodynamics and kinetics. Applications to selected

systems such as unimolecular decompositions, molecular

beams and diffusion-limited processes. Prerequisite: one

year of physical chemistry.

CHM 442. Pharmaceutical Regulatory Affairs 3:

Analytical Methods, Validation, and Data

Manipulation (3)

A review of the FDA guidance and common industry

practices. A presentation of the more user-friendly and

higher accuracy analytical methods, which are supplanti-

ng traditional analyses. Lectures will cover the eight

fundamentals of analytical method validation: accuracy,

linearity, precision, limits of detection, selectivity, limits

of quantification, specificity, and ruggedness of method.

In addition, the student will be taught what to do when

the results do not meet the Acceptance Criteria. Lectures

also cover evaluation of data streams for supporting con-

clusions.

CHM 443. (MAT 443) Solid-State Chemistry (3)

alternate years

Crystal structure, diffraction in crystals and on surfaces,

bonding and energy spectra in solids dielectrics, surface

states and surface fields in crystals. Prerequisite: one

course in linear algebra and one course in quantum

mechanics. Klier

CHM 445. Elements of Physical Chemistry (4)

Quantum chemistry of simple systems, molecular struc-

ture and spectroscopy, statistical and classical

thermodynamics. Prerequisite: CHM 341 or its equiva-

lent.

CHM 451. Physical Organic Chemistry (3) alter-

nate years

An introduction to quantitative organic chemistry

including relationships between structure and reactivity,

medium effects on reactions, introduction to orbital

symmetry effects in organic reactions, and reaction

mechanisms. Prerequisite: CHM 358 or consent of

department chair.

CHM 453. Heterocyclic Compounds (3) alternate

years

An intensive study of the syntheses, reactions and prop-

erties of heteroaromatic compounds including derivatives

of thiophene, pyrrole, furan, indole, pyridine, quinoline,

the azoles and the diazines - all considered from the

viewpoint of modern theories of structure and reaction

mechanisms. Prerequisite: CHM 358.

CHM 455. Organic Reactions (3) alternate years

Intensive survey of modern synthetic organic chemistry

from a mechanistic standpoint. Classical Name-reac-

tions, olefin synthesis, organometallic reagents in

synthesis, Woodward-Hoffmann rules, electrocyclic

processes, enolate chemistry, and related reactions.

Prerequisite: CHM 358.

CHM 456. Spectral Analysis (3) spring

Use of data from nuclear magnetic resonance, infrared,

ultraviolet, and mass spectrometric techniques for the

determination of structure of organic compounds.

Emphasis on information from one- and two-dimension-

al proton and carbon NMR, and a mechanistic

interpretation of data from mass spectrometry. Foster

CHM 457. Organic Reaction Mechanisms (3)

Intensive in-class problem solving that involves the for-

mulation of reasonable reaction mechanisms for complex

multistep pathways, i.e. organic transformations that

proceed via highly energetic intermediates such as carbo-

cations, carbanions, free radicals, carbenes, and nitrenes.

CHM 458. Topics in Organic Chemistry (1-3)

An intensive study of limited areas in organic chemistry.

May be repeated when a different topic is offered.

CHM 463. Pharmaceutical Regulatory Afairs 4:

Commercial Production, Validation, and Process

Qualification (3)

This course covers the scientific principles and the reg-

istry requirements for polymeric implants,

controlled-release drug depot units, pumps, point-of care

testing kits, contrast media for MRI, x-ray, and ultra-

sound and all FDA controlled products not defined as

therapeutic pharmaceuticals.

168 Lehigh University Course Catalog 2009-2010

CHM 466. Advanced Organic Preparations (2-3)

A laboratory course of instruction in advanced tech-

niques of the preparation of organic compounds.

CHM 467. (BIOS 467) Principles of Nucleic Acid

Structure (3) alternate years

An examination of the principles underlying nucleic acid

structure including stereochemistry, electrostatics, hydra-

tion, torsional constraints, sequence specific effects, and

interaction with nuclear proteins. Special emphasis will

be placed on DNA structure. Prerequisite: one year of

biochemistry and one year of physical chemistry or per-

mission of the department chair. Behe

CHM 468. (BIOS 468) Principles of Protein

Structure (3) alternate years

An examination of the principles underlying protein

structure including stereochemistry, preferred tertiary

structures, protein homology, excluded volume effects,

time dependent structural fluctuations, and prediction of

protein structure from sequence information.

Prerequisites: one year of biochemistry and one year of

physical chemistry or permission of the department

chair. Behe

CHM 469. (BIOS 469) Biochemical Problem

Solving I (1) fall

Applications of material covered in BIOS/CHM 371

including techniques used in research. Prerequisite:

BIOS/CHM 371 previously or concurrently.

CHM 470. (BIOS 470) Biochemical Problem

Solving II (1) spring

Applications of concepts covered in BIOS/CHM 372

including techniques used in research. Prerequisite:

BIOS/CHM 372 previously or concurrently.

CHM 471. (BIOS 471) Eucaryotic

Biochemistry (3) alternate years

Biochemistry of selected eucaryotic processes including

hormone chemistry, blood clotting, immunochemistry,

vision chemistry, muscle chemistry and photosynthesis.

The second part of the course will involve presentation

and discussion of the current literature by class partici-

pants. Prerequisite: BIOS/CHM 372 or consent of

department chair. Lowe-Krentz

CHM 472. (BIOS 472) Lipids and Membranes (3)

alternate years

Structure, physical properties and functions of lipids and

their biological aggregates. Techniques for studying lipid

assemblies, enzymes which act on lipids, membrane pro-

teins and lipoproteins will also be discussed. Prerequisite:

BIOS/CHM 372 or consent of department chair.

CHM 473. (BIOS 473) Biochemistry of Complex

Carbohydrates (3) alternate years

Consideration of the structure, function and metabolism

of complex carbohydrates (glycolipids, glycoproteins and

proteoglycans) with particular emphasis on glycopro-

teins. The first part of the course will consist of lectures

to familiarize the student with basic terms, concepts and

processes. The second part will involve critical readings,

presentation and discussion of the current primary

research literature by class participants. Alhadeff

CHM 474. Pharmaceutical Regulatory Affairs 5:

Pharmaceutics (3)

This course covers the development of therapeutic prod-

ucts subsequent to the initial discovery of the active

pharmaceutical ingredient (API) through to the final

dosage form. Both small molecule drugs and biotechno-

logical pharmaceuticals will be included. Issues of API

formulation, choice of excipients, control of release, tar-

get specificity, mode of delivery, drug-drug interactions,

and product stabilization will be addressed with special

reference to the regulatory issues involved at that stage of

drug development. This course builds upon a foundation

in organic, analytical, and biochemistry. (NS)

CHM 475. Advanced Topics in Chemistry (1)

Audiovisual courses in topics such as acid-base theory,

NMR, chromatography, electroanalytical chemistry and

mass-spectroscopy interpretation; course material

obtained from the American Chemical Society. May be

repeated for credit.

CHM 477. Topics in Biochemistry (1-3)

Selected areas of biochemistry, such as mechanisms of

enzyme action, new developments in the chemistry of

lipids, nucleic acids, carbohydrates and proteins. May be

repeated for credit when different topics are offered.

Prerequisite: consent of the department chair.

CHM 479. (BIOS 479) Biochemical

Techniques (3)

Laboratory studies of the techniques and principles

involved in the isolation, identification, and biochemical

transformation of carbohydrates, lipids, nucleic acids and

proteins. Prerequisite: CHM 371 or its equivalent previ-

ously or concurrently.

CHM 480. (BIOS 480) Advanced Biochemical

Preparations (1-3)

An advanced laboratory course in the preparation, isola-

tion, purification, and identification of biochemically

produced materials. Emphasis is placed on materials and

procedures of current interest in biochemistry.

Prerequisite: consent of the department chair.

CHM 481. Chemistry Seminar (1)

Student presentations on current research topics in the

student’s discipline but not on subjects close to the the-

sis. A one-hour presentation and attendance at other

presentations are required for credit. May be repeated for

credit, up to six times.

CHM 482. (CHE 482, MAT 482) Engineering

Behavior of Polymers (3) spring

Mechanical behavior of polymers. Characterization of

experimentally observed viscoelastic response of polymer-

ic solids with the aid of mechanical model analogs.

Topics include time-temperature superposition, experi-

mental characterization of large deformation and fracture

processes, polymer adhesion, and the effects of fillers,

plasticizer, moisture, and aging on mechanical behavior.

CHM 483. (CHE 483) Emulsion Polymers (3) fall

Fundamental concepts important in manufacture, char-

acterization, and application of polymer latexes. Topics

include colloidal stability, polymerization mechanisms

and kinetics, reactor design, characterization of particle

surfaces, latex rheology, morphology considerations,

polymerization with functional groups, film formation

and various application problems. Prerequisite: previous

course in polymers.

CHM 484. (CHE 484) Crystalline Polymers (3)

spring

Morphology and behavior of both polymer single crys-

tals and bulk crystallized system. Relationship between

Civil and Environmental Engineering 169

basic crystal physics, thermal and annealing history, ori-

entation and resulting properties. Thermodynamics and

kinetics of transition phenomena and a brief treatment

of hydrodynamic properties and their relationship to

crystallization and processing properties.

CHM 485. (CHE 485, MAT 485) Polymer Blends

and Composites (3) fall

Synthesis, morphology and mechanical behavior of poly-

mer blends and composites. Mechanical blends block

and graft copolymers, interpenetrating polymer net-

works, polymer impregnated solids and fiber and

particulate-reinforce polymers are emphasized.

Prerequisite: any introductory course in polymers.

CHM 487. Topics in Colloid and Surface

Chemistry (3)

Applications of colloid chemistry; special topics in sur-

face chemistry. Lectures and seminar. May be repeated

for credit as different topics are covered. Prerequisite:

CHM 391.

CHM 488. Advanced Topics in Physical

Chemistry (1-3)

Advanced topics in physical chemistry, such as photo-

chemistry and molecular beam dynamics, Fourier

transform spectroscopy, kinetics of rapid reactions, theo-

ry of magnetic resonance, liquids and solutions. May be

repeated for credit when different topics are offered.

CHM 489. Organic Polymer Science II (3) alter-

nate years

Continuation of CHM 394. Theory and mechanism of

ionic vinyl-addition chain-growth polymerization. Chain

copolymerization by radical and ionic mechanism.

Mechanism of ring-opening polymerization, stereochem-

istry of polymerization including ionic, coordination,

and Ziegler-Natta mechanisms. Reactions of polymers,

including crosslinking, reaction of functional groups,

graft and block copolymers, and polymer carriers and

supports. Prerequisite: CHM 394 or equivalent.

CHM 491. Physical Chemistry of Organic

Polymer Coatings (3) alternate years

Pigment/bonder geometry. Oil absorption of pigments.

Critical Pigment Volume Concentration concept.

Pigment dispersion including surface tension, capillarity,

works of dispersion, transfer and flocculation, and dis-

persing-mixing equipment. Solubility parameter concept.

Coating viscosity and viscometers. Evaporation of sol-

vents including water. Coating rheology, mill base

letdown, and pigment settling. Film application includ-

ing leveling, sagging, slumping and draining.

Prerequisite: CHM 393 or 394 or equivalent.

CHM 492. (CHE 492) Topics in Polymer

Science (3)

Intensive study of topics selected from areas of current

research interest such as morphology and mechanical

behavior, thermodynamics and kinetics of crystallization,

new analytical techniques, molecular weight distribution,

non-Newtonian flow behavior, second-order transition

phenomena, novel polymer structures. Credit above

three hours is granted only when different material is

covered. Prerequisite: CHM 392 or equivalent

CHM 493. Organic Chemistry of Organic

Polymer Coatings (3) alternate years

Film information from solution and dispersion, and

application of coatings. Mechanism and kinetics of cur-

ing glyceride oils, varnishes and alkyd resins, unsaturated

polyesters, thermoplastics cellulose, acrylic and vinyl

resins, epoxy resins, polyurethanes, amine- and phenol-

formaldehyde resins, thermosetting vinyl and acrylic

copolymers, water-based systems, natural and synthetic

rubber, and silicone resins. New solutions coatings.

Prerequisite: CHM 393 and 394 or equivalent.

CHM 494. Quantum Chemistry (3) alternate

years

Principles and applications of quantum mechanics to

chemical problems. Applications to chemical bonding,

molecular structure, reactivity and spectroscopy.

Prerequisite: CHM 445 or consent of the department

chair.

CHM 495. Statistical Thermodynamics (3) alter-

nate years

Principles and applications of statistical mechanics to

chemical problems. A study of the techniques for evalu-

ating the properties of matter in bulk from the

properties of molecules and their interactions.

Prerequisite: CHM 445 or consent of the department

chair.

Civil and Environmental

Engineering

Professors. Stephen P. Pessiki (Cornell), chair and P.C.

Rossin Professor; Sibel Pamukcu, Ph.D. (L.S.U.), associ-

ate chair; John L. Wilson, Ph.D. (Pittsburgh), director of

graduate studies and research; Dan M. Frangopol, Sc. D.

(U. Liàge, Belgium), Fazlur R. Khan Endowed Chair of

Structural Engineering and Architecture; Gerard P.

Lennon, Ph.D. (Cornell), associate dean for undergradu-

ate studies of P.C. Rossin College of Engineering and

Applied Science; James Ricles, Ph.D. (U.C. Berkeley),

director of Real-Time Multidirectional Earthquake

Simulation Facility, and Bruce G. Johnston Professor;

Richard Sause, Ph.D. (U.C. Berkeley), director of Center

for Advanced Technology for Large Structural Systems

and Joseph T. Stuart Professor; Arup K. SenGupta,

Ph.D. (Houston), P.C. Rossin Professor; Richard N.

Weisman, Ph.D. (Cornell).

Associate professors. Derick Brown, Ph.D. (Princeton);

Peter Mueller, Dr. sc. techn. (ETH, Zurich); Clay Naito,

Ph.D. (U.C. Berkeley); Weixian Zhang, Ph.D. (Johns

Hopkins).

Assistant professors. Kristen L. Jellison, Ph.D. (M.I.T.);

Shamim N. Pakzad, Ph.D. (U.C. Berkeley); Tae Sup

Yun, Ph.D. (Georgia Institute of Technology).

Professor of Practice. Jennifer H. Gross, M.S. (U. of

Texas - Austin).

Active emeriti. John W. Fisher, Ph.D. (Lehigh); Le Wu

Lu, Ph.D. (Lehigh); Alexis Ostapenko, Sc.D. (M.I.T.);

Robert M. Sorensen, Ph.D. (U.C. Berkeley); David A.

VanHorn, Ph.D. (Iowa State); Ben-Tseng Yen, Ph.D.

(Lehigh).

Civil Engineering

Civil engineering occupies a prominent position as one

of the major fields in the engineering profession. Civil

engineers are concerned with all aspects of the concep-

tion, planning, design, construction, operation, and

maintenance of major physical works and facilities that

170 Lehigh University Course Catalog 2009-2010

are essential to modern life. Civil engineering projects

are typically characterized by extreme size, complexity,

durability, and cost. Examples include bridges, buildings,

transportation facilities, tunnels, coastal facilities, dams,

foundations, and waterways.

The Mission of our Civil Engineering Bachelor of

Science degree program is to educate students in the

principles and methods essential to the practice and

advancement of civil and environmental engineering.

Our goal is to prepare students to apply and continually

cultivate knowledge that will enable them to become

successful practitioners, innovators and leaders in serving

the needs of a complex society. The accredited Civil

Engineering Bachelor of Science degree Program

Educational Objectives are, Civil Engineering: (1) grad-

uates will develop careers in civil engineering and other

professionally related fields. (2) graduates will recognize

the need for life-long learning and will seek additional

professional training and personal development. (3)

graduates will be productive members of multi-discipli-

nary teams and will apply their skills to develop

innovative solutions and technologies. (4) graduates will

pursue professional licensure. (5) graduates will advance

in position to be leaders in their profession and will

become members of professional societies.

Environmental Engineering

Environmental Engineering is an interdisciplinary

branch of the engineering profession where science and

engineering principles are combined to provide healthy

soil, water and air; remediate contaminated sites; and to

improve the overall quality of the environment through

the development of sustainable processes. Example activ-

ities include design of water and wastewater treatment

facilities, detecting and modeling fate and transport of

contaminants in both natural and engineered environ-

ments; developing technology-based solutions for

restoring environmental quality; and developing and/or

modifying industrial processes for ecological preservation

and enhanced sustainability.

The Mission of our Environmental Engineering

Bachelor of Science degree program is to educate stu-

dents in the principles and methods essential to the

practice and advancement of the interdisciplinary field of

environmental engineering. The program is proactive

and continues to incorporate new and emerging para-

digms in all aspects of teaching and education while

maintaining rigorous standards in traditional approaches

to engineered solutions of environmental problems.

Graduates of the program possess technical expertise

required to maintain a healthy balance between societal

welfare, economic growth and the environment sur-

rounding us.

The Program Educational Objectives of our ABET

accredited Environmental Engineering Bachelor of

Science program are: (1) graduates will develop careers in

environmental engineering and other professionally relat-

ed fields. (2) graduates will recognize the need for

life-long learning and will seek additional professional

training and personal development. (3) graduates will be

productive members of multi-disciplinary teams and will

apply their skills to develop innovative solutions and

technologies. (4) graduates will pursue professional licen-

sure. (5) graduates will advance in position to be leaders

in their profession and will become members of profes-

sional societies.

A technical minor in Environmental Engineering, avail-

able for students outside the department, consists of a

prerequisite (CHM 31), three courses chosen from CEE

170, CEE 274, CEE 373 (CHE 373), and CEE 375

(CHE 375), and one additional course from the required

list or from CEE 222, CEE 323 (EES 323), CEE 327

(EES 327), CEE 345, CEE 274, CEE 276, CHE 321,

CHE 331, CHE 370, EES 353, and EES 376. At least

two of the courses must be from the CEE department.

Educational and Career Opportunities

Both undergraduate programs include a strong base of

mathematics, including calculus, probability and statis-

tics, and the physical sciences, followed by a course in

planning and engineering economics. A broad range of

required and elective courses in engineering science,

analysis and design in the areas listed above meet each

set of program objectives. In addition, the civil engineer-

ing program has an engineering science and a surveying

requirement and the environmental engineering program

has a course in risk, regulation, and policy. Both pro-

grams are enriched with a series of required and elective

courses in the humanities and social sciences. Elective

courses in both programs extend across the areas of

structural, geotechnical, hydraulic, environmental, con-

struction, project management, and transportation

engineering. Additional elective courses in the environ-

mental program are available from chemical engineering,

chemistry, biology, and earth and environmental science.

In each curriculum, emphasis is placed on the develop-

ment of a solid knowledge of civil or environmental

engineering fundamentals. Concomitantly, the program

is threaded with instruction and opportunities in com-

puter applications.

The civil and environmental engineering programs pre-

pare individuals for entry into the engineering profession

or for entry into high-quality programs of graduate

study. With proper selection of electives, students may

also prepare for entrance into schools of law or medicine,

or into master’s-level programs in engineering manage-

ment or business administration.

Five-year programs are available for students interested in

a second bachelor’s degree in a major in the College of

Arts and Sciences (see listings under Arts-Engineering;

Civil Engineering and Earth and Environmental

Sciences).

Recommended Sequence of Courses, B.S. in Civil

Engineering

The normal freshman engineering year is 29 credits (see

Section III). The HSS Advanced Requirement of 13

credits is shown below as three 3-credit courses and one

4-credit course. Other options are possible.

sophomore year, first semester (17 credit hours)

MATH 23 Calculus III (4)

MECH 3 Fundamentals of Engineering

Mechanics (3)

CEE 10 Engineering/Architectural Graphics

and Design (3)

CEE 11 Surveying (1)

CEE 12 Civil Engineering Statistics (2)

HSS Elective or ECO 1 Principles of

Economics (4)

sophomore year, second semester (18 credit hours)

MATH 205 Linear Methods (3)

Civil and Environmental Engineering 171

MECH 12 Strength of Materials (3)

CEE 170 Introduction to Environmental

Engineering (4)

PHY 21 Introductory Physics II (4)

PHY 22 Introductory Physics Lab II (1)

HSS Humanities/Social Sciences Elec. (3)

junior year, first semester (17 credit hours)

MAT 33 Engineering Materials and

Processes (3)

CEE 121 Mechanics of Fluids (3)

CEE 123 Civil Engineering Materials (1)

CEE 142 Soil Mechanics (3)

CEE 159 Structural Analysis I (4)

*Engineering Science Elective (3)

junior year, second semester (17 credit hours)

CEE 117 Numerical Methods in Civil

Engineering (2)

CEE 202 CEE Planning and Engineering

Economics (3)

CEE 262 Fund. of Structural Steel Design (3) or

CEE 264 Fund. of Structural Concrete

Design (3)

CEE 222 Hydraulic Engineering (3)

CEE 242 Geotechnical Engineering (3)

CEE **Approved Elective (3)

senior year, first semester (18 credit hours)

CEE 203 Professional Development (2)

HSS Humanities/Social Sciences Elec. (7)

CEE **Approved Electives (6)

Free Elective (3)

senior year, second semester (17 credit hours)

CEE 290 *** Capstone Design (3)

HSS Humanities/Social Science Elective (3)

CEE **Approved Electives (8)

Free Elective (3)

*MECH 102, ME 104, or ECE 83/81.

**Seventeen CEE elective credits approved by the CEE

department chairperson; list available from department.

***Students must have completed successfully at least one

CE approved elective related to the design project topic area.

Elective opportunities total 36 credit hours. The selec-

tion of elective courses is to be in consultation with

student’s academic adviser in the Department of Civil

and Environmental Engineering. A total of 133 credit

hours are required for the bachelor’s degree in civil engi-

neering.

Recommended Sequence of Courses, B.S. in

Environmental Engineering

The normal freshman engineering year is 29 credits (see

Section III). The HSS Advanced Requirement of 13

credits is shown below as three 3-credit courses and one

4-credit course. Other options are possible.

sophomore year, first semester (17 credit hours)

MATH 23 Calculus III (4)

CHM 110 Organic Chemistry I (3)

CHM 111 Organic Chem Lab (1)

MECH 2 or 3 Elementary Engineering Mechanics (3)

CEE 12 Civil Engineering Statistics (2)

ECO 1 Principles of Economics (4)

sophomore year, second semester (18 credit hours)

MATH 205 Linear Methods (3)

PHY 21 Intro Physics II (4)

PHY 22 Intro Physics II Laboratory (1)

CEE 170 Intro. Environmental Engr. (4)

CEE 272 Environmental Risk Assessment (2)

HSS *Humanities/Social Sciences

Elective (4)

junior year, first semester (16 credit hours)

CEE 121 Mechanics of Fluids (3)

CEE 142 Soil Mechanics (3)

CEE 375 Env. Engineering Processes (3)

CHE 31 Matl. & Energy Bal. of CHE

Process (3)

ESR ***Earth Science Requirement (3)

EES 22 Exploring Earth (1)

junior year, second semester (17 credit hours)

CEE 202 CEE Planning and Engineering

Economics (3)

CEE 222 Hydraulic Engineering (3)

CEE 274 Environmental Water Chemistry (3)

CHE 60 Unit Ops Survey (3)

CEE 275 Enviro-Geo-Hydraulics Lab (2)

EBR ****Environmental Biology

Requirement (3)

senior year, first semester (17 credit hours)

CEE 203 Professional Development (2)

CEE 378 Solid & Haz. Waste Management (3)

CEE 379 Environmental Case Studies (3)

AE **Approved Elective (3)

HSS *Humanities/Soc. Sciences Elective (3)

FE Free Elective (3)

senior year, second semester (18 credit hours)

CEE 377** Environmental Engineering Project (3)

AE **Approved Electives (6)

HSS *Humanities/Social Sci. Elective (6)

FE Free Elective (3)

*HSS Advanced requirement is 13 credits, four credits of

which must be an approved environmental studies course;

list of approved courses are available from CEE department.

**9 Approved elective credits to satisfy proficiency in four

focus areas of water supply and resources, environmental

chemistry, waste management and biological processes;

approved list available from CEE department.

***Earth Science Requirement, list of approved courses are

available from CEE department.

****Environmental Biology Requirement, list of approved

courses are available from CEE department.

A total of 132 credits are required for the bachelor’s

degree in Environmental Engineering.

Undergraduate Courses

CEE 10. (ARCH 10) Engineering/Architectural

Graphics and Design (3) fall

Graphical communication of civil engineering and archi-

tectural projects using manual techniques and

commercial state-of-the-art computer software. Topics

include visualization and sketching; orthographic, iso-

metric and other drawings; points, lines and planes in

descriptive geometry; site design; overview of geographi-

cal information systems and 3-D applications. Teamwork

172 Lehigh University Course Catalog 2009-2010

on design projects with oral and graphical presentations.

Not available to students who have taken ME 10.

CEE 11. Surveying (1) fall

Theory and practice of basic engineering surveying

measurements and analysis. Topics to include field note

taking, datums and measurement precision, equipment

and techniques for measuring distance, elevation and

angles, electronic distance measurement, topographic

surveys, GPS and hydrographic surveys. Hands on expe-

rience with the use of survey levels, transits/theodolites

and a total station will be provided.

CEE 12. Civil Engineering Statistics (2) fall

Basic engineering statistics with a civil engineering orien-

tation. Topics to include: random variables and

histograms; central tendency, dispersion and skew; prob-

ability density functions and cumulative distribution

functions, basic probability concepts and selected proba-

bility models, return period analysis, linear regression

and least squares, correlation analysis, propagation of

errors.

CEE 104. Readings in Civil Engineering (1-4)

Study of selected technical papers, with abstracts and

reports. May be repeated for credit. Prerequisite: consent

of the department chair.

CEE 117. Numerical Methods in Civil

Engineering (2) spring

Techniques for computer solution of linear and non-lin-

ear simultaneous equations; eigenvalue analysis; finite

differences; numerical integration; numerical solutions to

ordinary differential equations. Case studies in the vari-

ous branches of civil engineering. Prerequisites:

Engineering 1, MATH 205.

CEE 121. Mechanics of Fluids (3) fall

Fluid properties and statics; concepts and basic equations

for fluid dynamics. Forces caused by flowing fluids and

energy required to transport fluids. Dynamics similitude

and modeling of fluid flows. Includes laboratory experi-

ments to demonstrate basic concepts. Prerequisite:

MECH 2 or 3.

CEE 123. Civil Engineering Materials (1) spring

Properties of commonly used civil engineering materials

focusing on concrete. Concrete coverage includes cement

chemistry and manufacture; cement hydration and

microstructure; mixture design; mechanical properties;

admixtures; in-service performance and deterioration

mechanisms. Includes some laboratory work. (ES 1)

CEE 142. Soil Mechanics (3) Fall

Physical properties of soils; mineralogy, composition and

fabric. Phase and weight-volume relationships, consisten-

cy, gradation and classification of soils. Fluid flow

through porous media. Stress-strain behavior; stresses

within a soil mass, deformation behavior, measurement

of stress-strain properties, shear strength of soil. Volume

change in soils; compressibility, pore water pressure, con-

solidation and settlement. Laboratory experiments to

measure physical and mechanical properties of soils.

Prerequisite: MECH 3 or 2.

CEE 159. Structural Analysis I (4) fall

Elastic analysis of statically determinate beams, frames,

and trusses; deflections by the methods of virtual work

and moment area; influence lines for determinate struc-

tures; modeling for structural analysis; flexibility,

stiffness, and approximate methods of analysis of inde-

terminate structures. Prerequisite: MECH 12.

CEE 170. Introduction to Environmental

Engineering (4) spring

Characterization and evaluation of natural water

resources. Principles of basic water chemistry. Water and

wastewater treatment processes. Sludge treatment, air

pollution and multi-media transport. Pollutants mass

balance and oxygen transfer. Field trips to water and

wastewater process facilities. Laboratory experiments on

water and wastewater characterization. Prerequisites:

CHM 30.

CEE 171. (CHE 171, ES 171) Fundamentals of

Environmental Technology (4)

Introduction to water and air quality, water, air and soil

pollution. Chemistry of common pollutants.

Technologies for water purification, wastewater treat-

ment, solid hazardous waste management, environmental

remediation, and air quality control. Global changes,

energy and environment. Constraints of environmental

protection on technology development and applications.

Constraints of economic development on environmental

quality. Environmental life cycle analysis and environ-

mental policy. Prerequisites: EES (ES) 002, or one

advanced science course, or permission of instructor. Not

available to students in RCEAS.

CEE 202. CEE Planning and Engineering

Economics (3) fall

The planning and management of civil engineering proj-

ects. Modeling and optimization methods, project

management techniques. Financial decision-making

among alternatives. Present value and discounted cash

flow analysis; incremental analysis and rate-of-return cri-

teria.

CEE 203. Professional Development (2) fall

Elements of professionalism; professional ethics; engi-

neering registration; continuing education;

responsibilities of an engineer in industry, government,

private practice; role of professional and technical soci-

eties.

CEE 205. Design Problems (1-6)

Supervised individual design problems, with report.

Prerequisite: consent of the department chair.

CEE 207. Transportation Engineering (3) spring

Principles of the design of transportation facilities with

emphasis on highways and airports in the areas of geo-

metric, drainage, and pavement design. Design

problems. Prerequisites: CEE 11.

CEE 211. Research Problems (1-6)

Supervised individual research problems, with report.

Prerequisite: consent of the department chair.

CEE 222. Hydraulic Engineering (3) spring

Pipe and pump hydraulics, engineering hydrology,

ground water hydraulics, and open channel hydraulics.

Laboratory experiments in applied hydraulics.

Prerequisite CEE 121, ME 231, or equivalent.

CEE 242. Geotechnical Engineering (3) spring

The principles related to analysis and evaluation of

earthen infrastructure. Site characterization and in-situ

testing of soils. Advanced stress-strain behavior, failure

theories and stress path application. 2D fluid flow in

porous media, flow nets, uplift forces, and liquefaction.

Civil and Environmental Engineering 173

Stability of earthen structures; slopes, dams and levees.

Stability of retaining structures; lateral earth pressures.

Introduction to shallow foundations; bearing capacity

and settlement. Team design project. Prerequisite: CEE

142.

CEE 244. Foundation Engineering (3) fall

Application of theories and principles of soil mechanics

to geotechnical and structural foundation design. In-situ

soil testing, subsurface exploration and soil sampling.

Bearing capacity, settlement, lateral earth pressure princi-

ples. Design of shallow foundations: spread footings,

beams on elastic foundations, mat foundations. Design

of retaining walls: mechanically stabilized earth, concrete

and sheet pile walls, walls for excavations. Design of

deep foundations: single piles, pile foundations, drilled

piers and caissons. Prerequisite: CEE 242.

CEE 258. Structural Laboratory (3)

Experimental study of behavior of members and struc-

tures. Planning, executing, and reporting experimental

studies. Introduction to instrumentation and data acqui-

sition. Nondestructive testing of civil engineering

structures. Steel, rein-forced concrete, and other materi-

als. Prerequisite: CEE 262 and CEE 264.

CEE 259. Structural Analysis II (3) fall

Analysis of statically indeterminate structures, methods

of slope deflection and moment distribution; considera-

tion of side-sway and nonprismatic members. Influence

lines for determinate and indeterminate structures.

Flexibility and stiffness matrix methods for computerized

analysis. Use of computer library programs. Prerequisite:

CEE 159.

CEE 262. Fundamentals of Structural Steel

Design (3) spring

Introduction to steel structures. Behavior, strength and

design of structural members, including members sub-

jected to axial tension, axial compression, flexure and

combined compression and flexure. Basic methods of

joining members to form a structural system. Use of

design specifications. Prerequisite: CEE 159.

CEE 264. Fundamentals of Structural Concrete

Design (3) spring

Analysis, design, and detailing of reinforced concrete

members and simple systems for strength and servicea-

bility requirements, including beams, columns, and

slabs. Introduction to prestressed concrete. Prerequisite:

CEE 159.

CEE 266. Construction Management (3) spring

An overview of mangement and construction techniques

used in engineering ventures and projects. Scheduling,

estimation, construction methods, financial controls,

contracts, labor relations and organizational forms. Case

studies and lecturers from industry. Prerequisites CEE

159 and CEE 202, or instructor’s approval.

CEE 272. Environmental Risk Assessment (2)

spring

Effects of chemical releases on human health; ecological

risks. Application of risk assessment methodology,

including hazard identification, exposure assessment,

toxicity assessment, and risk characterization.

Accounting for uncertainty in data during risk manage-

ment, risk reduction and implementation of regulations

and environmental policy.

CEE 274. Environmental Water Chemistry (3)

spring

Chemical principles and applications of those principles

to the analysis and understanding of aqueous environ-

mental chemistry in natural waters and wastewaters. The

chemistry of ionic equilibria, redox reactions, precipita-

tion/dissolution, acid-base concepts, buffer capacity,

complexation, hydrolysis and biological reactions.

Prerequisite: CHM 31 or CEE 170.

CEE 275. Environmental, Geotechnics and

Hydraulics Laboratory (2) Spring

Applying fundamentals of soil properties, hydraulics and

environmental science through appropriate laboratory

experiments for solution of environmental engineering

problems. Experiments will include solute transport in

surface and subsurface medium; characterization of soils,

sludges and water; treatment of water and wastewater

including biological processes. Illustration of techniques

to generate design parameters for scale-up. Prerequisite:

CEE 170, previously or concurrently.

CEE 279. ( EES 358) Microbial Ecology (4)

The role of microorganisms in the environment. Topics

include: Survey of microbial classification, structure, and

metabolism; study of microbes at population, communi-

ty, and ecosystem levels of organization; the role of

microbes in biogeochemical cycles; application of

microbes to bioremediation and resource recovery prob-

lems. Prerequisite: EES 152, or consent of instructor.

CEE 281. Special Topics (1-6)

A study of selected topics in civil and environmental

engineering not included in other formal courses. A

design project or an interdisciplinary study of a problem

related to civil or environmental engineering may be

included. Civil and environmental engineering students

working on design projects involving students from

other departments or colleges working in cross-discipli-

nary teams may be included. A report is required.

Prerequisite: consent of the department chair.

CEE 290. CEE Design Project (3) spring

Supervised design projects. Multidisciplinary teams

applying the fundamentals of engineering science and

the concepts of planning and systems analysis in the

design of practical engineering works. The scope includes

needs analysis, formulation of the design problem state-

ment and evaluative criteria; analysis of alternative

solutions and the generation of specifications. Includes

most of the following considerations: economic, sustain-

ability, manufacturability, ethical, social, environmental,

aesthetic, political, health and safety. Practicing profes-

sional engineers are invited to serve as consultants.

Written and oral reports are required. Prerequisite:

Senior standing in CEE department or permission of

instructors.

CEE 316. (EES 316) Hydrogeology (4)

Interrelationships of geologic materials and processes

with water; entry, storage, interaction, and flow of water

through permeable earth materials; evaluation, develop-

ment, and management of ground-water resources.

Lectures and recitation/laboratory. Prerequisites: EES 21

or EES 101.

CEE 320. (EES 320) Engineering Hydrology (3)

fall

Rainfall-runoff analysis, overland flow, hydrograph theo-

ries, modeling. Frequency analysis of extreme events.

174 Lehigh University Course Catalog 2009-2010

Flood routing. Design storms. Floodplain hydraulics,

floodplain delineation. Prerequisite: CEE 222.

CEE 321. Open Channel Hydraulics (3) fall

Energy and momentum concepts, frictional resistance in

open channels. Rapidly and gradually varied flow in

open channels; unsteady flow in open channels; channel

and culvert design. Prerequisite: CEE 222.

CEE 323. (EES 323) Environmental Groundwater

Hydrology (3) spring

The study of subsurface water, its environment, distribu-

tion, and movement. Included are flow patterns, well

hydraulics, and an introduction to the movement of

contaminants. Design problems are included to simulate

flow with analytical and numerical models, and contami-

nant migration using analytical models. Prerequisites:

CEE 121 or CEE/EES 316 or permission of instructor.

CEE 327. (EES 327) Surface Water Quality

Modeling (3) spring

Fundamentals of modeling water quality parameters in

receiving water bodies, including rivers, lakes, and estu-

aries. Modeling of dissolved oxygen, nutrients,

temperature, and toxic substances. Emphasis on water

quality control decisions as well as mechanics and model

building. Prerequisites: CEE 121, CEE 222 and CEE

170 or permission of instructor.

CEE 335. Coastal Engineering (3) fall

Linear wave theory and wave characteristics; survey of

nonlinear theories; tides, tsunamis, storm surge and

basin resonance; wind-generated wave spectra, statistics

and forecasting; wave-structure interaction; nearshore

circulation and sediment transport; interaction of littoral

processes with structures. Prerequisite: CEE 121.

CEE 341. Ground Improvement and Site

Development (3)

Soil stabilization; grouting and injection methods; pre-

loading and dynamic consolidation; deep compaction;

drainage and dewatering; application of geotextiles and

geomembranes; soil nailing and reinforcement methods.

Use of in-situ test for soil properties and site characteri-

zation; procedures and calibration methods for the basic

in-situ tests - SPT, CPT, CPTU, DMT; theoretical,

experimental and empirical interpretive methods for in-

situ test results. Prerequisite: CEE 242.

CEE 342. Experimental Geotechnical

Engineering (3)

Experimental studies dealing with the measurement of

soil and other particulate materials properties, and

behavior in the laboratory. Test procedures, calibration,

data acquisition, interpretation of apparatus limitations

and potential error sources, specimen preparation, data

analysis and interpretation; designing experiments.

Prerequisites: CEE 242 and senior standing.

CEE 344. Behavior of Soils as Engineering

Materials (3)

Soil mineralogy, bondage, crystal structure and surface

characteristics; clay-water electrolyte system; soil fabric

and its measurement; soil structure and physical property

relationships; soil depositional and compositional charac-

teristics; engineering properties of soils as they relate to

soil mineralogy, fabric and composition: volume change

behavior, intergranular stresses, shear strength and defor-

mation behavior, conduction behavior, coupled and

direct flow phenomena. Prerequisite: CEE 242.

CEE 345. Geo-Environmental Engineering (3)

Principles of interaction of soil and rock with various envi-

ronmental cycles. Physical and chemical properties of soil.

Soil fabric and its measurement, clay-water electrolyte sys-

tem, electrical double layer and DLVO theory;

contaminated site characterization, groundwater flow and

contaminant transport; detection and quantification tech-

nologies; waste containment systems, landfills, liner systems,

leachate collection; soil and groundwater cleanup technolo-

gies. Prerequisite: CEE 242 or consent of the instructor.

CEE 346. Fundamentals of Designing with

Geosynthetics (3) spring

Fundamental and current theories of designing soil

structures with geosynthetics. Roads and highway appli-

cations; reinforced embankments; slope stabilization;

waste containment systems; erosion control; filtration

and drainage. Prerequisite: CEE 242.

CEE 352. Structural Dynamics (3) fall

Analysis of linear structural systems to time-dependent

loads. Free and forced vibration. Classical and numerical

methods of solution. Lumped-mass techniques, energy

methods, and introduction to matrix formulation of

dynamic problems. Application to design. Prerequisites:

MATH 205, CEE 159, and MECH 102.

CEE 361. Bridge Systems Design (3)

Introduction to bridge structural systems in steel and

concrete. Loads and specifications. Design and analysis

of bridge structural components. Prerequisites or co-req-

uisites: CEE 259, CEE 262, CEE 264.

CEE 363. Building Systems Design (3) spring

Building structural systems in steel, reinforced concrete

and composite steel and concrete. Design loads (dead,

live and environmental) and methodologies. Structural

systems behavior and design. Design of floor systems,

beam-columns, connections, walls, and overall frames.

Final design. Prerequisites or co-requisites: CEE 259,

CEE 262, and CEE 264.

CEE 365. Prestressed Concrete (3) fall

Principles of prestressing. Analysis and design of basic

flexural members. Instantaneous and time-dependent

properties of materials. Prestress losses. Additional topics

may include continuity, partial prestressing, compression

members, circular prestressing, etc. Prerequisite: CEE

264 or consent of the department chair.

CEE 366. Finite Element Method in Structural

Engineering (3) spring

The finite element method: fundamental concepts, theo-

ry, modeling, and computation for the analysis of

structures. One, two, and three-dimensional finite ele-

ments. Isoparametric formulation and implementation

for various kinds of elements. Applications to problems

in the behavior of structural elements and systems

including analysis of trusses, beams, plates, and frames

and bridge systems. Extensions to nonlinear analysis and

advanced topics. Use of contemporary commercial soft-

ware. Prerequisites: CEE 259.

CEE 371. Reaction Kinetics in Environmental

Engineering (3)

Theory of reaction kinetics and its application to the

design and operation of chemical, physico-chemical and

biological reactions in water, wastewater, and hazardous

waste treatment. Basic design equations for various types

of reactors and migration of pollutants in the environ-

Civil and Environmental Engineering 175

ment. CEE 471 is a graduate version of this course.

Prerequisite: CEE 375 (CHE 375).

CEE 373. (CHE 373) Fundamentals of Air

Pollution (3)

Introduction to the problems of air pollution including

such topics as: sources and dispersion of pollutants, sam-

pling and analysis; technology of economics and control

processes; legislation and standards. Prerequisite senior

standing in the College of Engineering and Applied

Science.

CEE 375. (CHE 375) Environmental Engineering

Processes (3) fall

Processes applied in environmental engineering for air

pollution control, treatment of drinking water, munici-

pal wastewater, industrial wastes, hazardous/toxic wastes,

and environmental remediation. Kinetics, reactor theory,

mass balances, application of fundamental physical,

chemical and biological principles to analysis and design.

Prerequisite: CEE 170 or equivalent.

CEE 376. Environmental Biotechnology (3)

Fundamentals of microbiology and biochemistry applied

to natural and engineered environmental systems.

Systems ecology, energetics and kinetics of microbial

growth, nutrition and toxicology, use of microorganisms

for pollution monitoring and control. Pathogenicity and

disease transmission, water quality using biological

indices. Prerequisites: CEE 375 (CHE 375) or consent

of instructor (ES 2, ED 1)

CEE 377. Environmental Engineering Design (3)

spring

Team-oriented course to develop design skills in the area

of environmental engineering. Project components typi-

cally include: air pollution, drinking water, municipal

wastewater, industrial wastes, hazardous/toxic wastes, and

environmental remediation. Project work typically

includes: a background report, a design report , and an

oral presentation. Tools used in the design process may

include simulation models. Prerequisite: CEE 170 and

CEE 375 (CHE 375).

CEE 378. Hazardous Waste Treatment and

Management (3)

Regulations for collection, transportation, disposal and

storage of hazardous wastes. Containment systems, moni-

toring, new and available technologies to minimize,

transform, destroy, detoxify and eliminate the hazardous

components of the wastes. Environmentally benign

processes and life cycle analysis. CEE 478 is a graduate

version of this course. Prerequisite: CEE 375 (CHE 375).

CEE 379. (EES 379) Environmental Case

Studies. (3 to 4)

Case studies will be used to explore the impact of poli-

tics, economics, society, technology, and ethics on

environmental projects and preferences. Environmental

issues in both affluent and developing countries will be

analyzed. Multidisciplinary student teams will investigate

site characterization; environmental remediation design;

environmental policy; and political, financial, social, and

ethical implications of environmental projects.

Prerequisites: EES 22 or CEE 375 (CHE 375) or per-

mission of the instructor.

CEE 381. Special Topics (1-3)

A study of selected topics in civil engineering, not

included in other formal courses. A report is required.

Prerequisite: consent of the department chair.

CEE 385. Research Procedures Seminar (1) fall

Planning and execution of research projects, survey of

current research, elements of proposals and budgets.

Literature search procedures. Presentation of data, and of

written and oral reports. Guidelines for visual aids.

Graduate Programs

The Department of Civil and Environmental

Engineering (CEE) has graduate degree programs leading

to Master’s and Ph.D. degrees in: Civil Engineering,

Structural Engineering, and Environmental Engineering.

The department offers advanced work in the specialty

areas of structural engineering, geotechnical engineering,

water resources engineering, and environmental engi-

neering, leading to the degrees of master of science,

master of engineering, and doctor of philosophy in civil

engineering or environmental engineering.

The programs educate students through coursework and

independent study and research. Graduates of these pro-

grams will be “full service engineers” with the knowledge

and analytical problem-solving capabilities needed to

lead and innovate within multi-disciplinary teams in

technologically-complex environments.

Graduate studies in civil and environmental engineering

enable the student to build upon the broad background

of undergraduate education in preparation for profes-

sional practice at an advanced level, for research and

development, or for teaching.

A graduate program leading to the M.S. normally is con-

centrated in one, or possibly two, of the technical

specialty areas, and consists of a number of courses

designed to fulfill the individual student’s program

objectives. Each candidate for the M.S. is required to

submit a thesis representing three to six credit hours

(CEE 491, listed below), or alternatively, a report based

on a research course of at least three credits (CEE 429,

439, 449, 479 or 481). The balance of the program will

consist of courses in the specialty area(s).

A graduate program leading to the M.Eng. degree stress-

es engineering applications and design. The courses may

extend across the various specialty areas in civil engineer-

ing. Each candidate for the M.Eng. may choose to

complete an individual engineering project representing

three to six credits (CEE 480) in place of the thesis or

research report required for the M.S. or to take a mini-

mum of 30 course credits without a research or design

project.

The doctoral program, which leads to the Ph.D., nor-

mally includes courses in the major field, courses in

minor fields, and a dissertation presenting results of orig-

inal research. Holders of master’s degrees planning to

become candidates for the Ph.D. take a qualifying exam-

ination at the first opportunity following one semester in

residence. After qualification, the candidate, the candi-

date’s departmental Ph.D. committee, and the

department chair formulate the program of work.

The laboratories of the department are located in the

Fritz Engineering Laboratory. The laboratory offers out-

standing facilities for research and instruction in

structural engineering, geotechnical engineering, water

resources engineering, coastal engineering, environmen-

tal engineering, and related fields. In particular, the

176 Lehigh University Course Catalog 2009-2010

structural testing equipment includes dynamic testing

machines, a five-million-pound universal hydraulic test-

ing machine, and other special loading apparatus.

Included in the latter are the facilities of the Center for

Advanced Technology for Large Structural Systems

(ATLSS center) located on the mountaintop section of

the campus. These include the largest 3-dimensional test

bed in the U.S.A. and specialized earthquake testing

facilities of the NSF George E. Brown, Jr. Network

Earthquake Engineering Simulation (NEES). The water

resources and costal engineering facilities include a wave

tank, several flumes, a 10-cfs recirculating flow system,

and two multipurpose tanks for model studies. The geot-

echnical facilities include state-of-art, fully automated

triaxial compression and permeability machines for mul-

tiple simultaneous tests. Brochures describing the

research facilities and programs are available on request.

In addition to departmental courses, a number of cours-

es offered by the departments of mechanical engineering

and mechanics, chemistry, chemical engineering, materi-

als science and engineering, earth and environmental

sciences, and biology may also be considered a part of

the major field in civil and environmental engineering. A

number of research and teaching assistantships are avail-

able to provide financial aid to students of outstanding

promise. The half-time research or teaching activities

required of holders of assistantships provides a valuable

educational experience that supplements the formal

course offerings. The graduate course offerings of the

department are programmed to fit the schedule of half-

time assistants, and to accommodate part-time students.

A very limited number of scholarships and fellowships

are available to provide financial aid for full-time study.

Graduate Courses in Civil Engineering

CEE 404 (Mech 404). Mechanics and Behavior of

Structural Members (3) fall

Behavior of structural members, under a variety of load-

ing conditions in the elastic and inelastic range.

Introduction to the theory of elasticity and plasticity.

Basics of linear elastic fracture mechanics and fatigue.

Analysis of structural member behavior in axial, bend-

ings, shear, and torsion. Stability analysis of

beam-columns. Beams on elastic foundations. Energy

concepts and their use in structural analysis.

Prerequisites: CEE 259 or equivalent.

CEE 405. Analytical and Numerical Methods I (3)

Analytical and numerical methods used in Civil

Engineering, with emphasis on ordinary and partial dif-

ferential equations. Analytical and numerical solutions of

ordinary and partial differential equations. Initial and

boundary value problems. Numerical integration, numer-

ical error, and approximations of functions and data

points. Finite differences, solution of systems of linear

equations, eigenvalue problems, and solution of nonlinear

equations. Prerequisite: MATH 205 or equivalent.

CEE 406. Structural Reliability of Components

and Systems (3)

Probabilistic time –invariant failure analysis of structural

components and systems. Statistics and probability; com-

ponent time-invariant reliability analysis; system

time-invariant reliability analysis; reliability-based struc-

tural design; and reliability of structural systems using

Monte-Carlo simulation. Solutions suitable for practical

computer implementation. Prerequisites: MATH 21,

MATH 205, and CEE 259.

CEE 409. Finite Element Method in Structural

Mechanics (3) spring

Basic principles and equations governing the finite ele-

ment method. Analysis of planar, axisymmetric, plate

and articulated structures, with emphasis on analytical

modeling. Accuracy and convergence studies, utilizing

different discretizations and various types of elements.

Case studies include application and extension to materi-

al nonlinearities, bridges, containment vessels, and

soil-structure interaction. Prerequisites: CEE 405 and

CEE 413 or equivalent.

CEE 412. Methodologies of Structural Design (2)

Probabilistic analysis of uncertainties associated with

structural design. Characterization of loads including

dead and live loads, wind, earthquake, and vehicular

loads. Variability of structural resistance based on

strength limit states as well as serviceability. Assessment

of safety and reliability. Deterministic and probabilistic

methodologies of design.

CEE 414. Analysis and Design of Steel and

Composite Structural Members (3)

Fundamentals of limit state design. Ultimate strength

analysis of steel and steel-and-concrete composite

columns, beams, beam-columns, and members subjected

to torsion and combined torsion and bending. Flexural

and torsional instability. Background and requirements

of current design codes.

CEE 415. Analysis and Design of Ductile Steel

Structural Systems (3)

Inelastic behavior of steel and steel structural members.

Plastic limit strength analysis of continuous beams and

frames. Effect of variable repeated loading. Methodology

and code requirements for design based on plastic

strength. Applications to seismic-resistant building struc-

tures. Current research. Prerequisites: CEE 261 or

equivalent.

CEE 420. Surface Wave Mechanics (3)

Elements of hydrodynamics and wave boundary condi-

tions; linear wave theory and wave characteristics;

nonlinear wave theories and application; wind wave gen-

eration, analysis and prediction; long waves; design wave

determination; laboratory investigation of surface waves.

Prerequisite: consent of instructor.

CEE 424. Surface Water Hydrology (3)

Advanced analysis and methods in surface water hydrolo-

gy. Linear and non-linear hydrograph methods. Kinematic

wave and other hydraulic routing techniques. Advanced

techniques for evaporation, infiltration, and snow melt.

Prerequisite: CEE 320 (EES 320) or equivalent.

CEE 425. Hydraulics of Sediment Transport (3)

Hydrodynamic forces on particles, settling velocity.

Sediment transport in open channel: tractive force theo-

ry, bed load and suspension theory, total load and wash

load. Bedform mechanics, cohesive channel hydraulics.

Sediment transport in closed conduits. Shore processes

and coastline hydraulics. Prerequisite: CEE 321 or equiv-

alent.

CEE 427. Transport of Contaminants in

Groundwater (3)

Theory of groundwater flow and transport of contami-

nants in the groundwater system. State-of-the-art

Civil and Environmental Engineering 177

groundwater flow and contaminant transport models

used to solve governing equations of groundwater flow

and transport of chemically reactive solutes. Selected case

studies will be analyzed. Prerequisite: CEE 323 (EES

323) or permission of instructor.

CEE 428. Advanced Topics in Hydraulics (1-3)

Recent developments in hydromechanics and hydraulics.

Topics to be selected from: wave mechanics, theory of

flow through porous media, dispersion, hydrodynamic

forces on structures, potential flow, free streamline theo-

ry, open channel hydraulics, computer methods.

Prerequisites: CEE 321 and consent of the department

chair. May be repeated for credit.

CEE 429. Hydraulic Research (1-6)

Individual research problems with reports. May be

repeated for credit.

CEE 431. Life-Cycle of Structural Systems (3)

Assessing the life-cycle performance of new and existing

structural systems, designing structures for lifetime per-

formance, and optimizing the remaining life of existing

structures, considering uncertainties in structural per-

formance, demands placed on structural systems,

structural maintenance and monitoring, and costs.

Prerequisites: MATH 205, CEE 259, a course in struc-

tural design, or consent of instructor.

CEE 432. Structural Safety and Risk (3)

Assessing safety and risk of structural systems during

their specified service life, designing structures for speci-

fied safety and risk criteria for a prescribed service life,

introducing Markov, queueing and availability models,

statistics of extremes, time-variant safety and structural

health monitoring, and optimal decision making under

uncertainty based on single objective or multiple objec-

tives. Prerequisites: MATH 205, CEE 259, a course in

structural design, or consent of instructor.

CEE 433. Structural Optimization (3)

Problem formulation, relative merit of various numerical

optimization techniques, possible difficulties in applica-

tions, and how alternative formulations and methods can

be combined to solve different design problems.

Numerical optimization techniques are in general terms

and their application to structural design. Prerequisites:

MATH 205, CEE 259, a course in structural design, or

consent of instructor.

CEE 436. Advanced Topics in Coastal

Engineering (1-3)

Advanced study of selected topics in coastal engineering

such as: non-linear wave theory, design of coastal struc-

tures, shore protection and stabilization, numerical

solution of coastal hydrodynamics. Selection of topics

will depend on particular qualifications of staff, as well as

on the interests of the students. Prerequisite: CEE 335.

May be repeated for credit.

CEE 439. Coastal Engineering Research (1-6)

Individual research problems with reports. May be

repeated for credit.

CEE 441. Dynamic Analysis in Geotechnical

Engineering (3)

Vibration of elementary systems, 1D wave propagation,

dynamic soil properties, analysis of response of shallow

and deep foundations to dynamic loads, soil liquefaction

and earthquake problems; laboratory tests, geophysical

methods and non-destructive tests of foundation sys-

tems; dynamic analysis of pile driving. Prerequisite: CEE

244 or consent of the department chair.

CEE 443. Advanced Soil Mechanics (3) fall

Characterization of particulate media; particle-fluid

interaction; load deformation, thermoelastic and vis-

coelastic behavior; elastic waves in particulate media;

electromagnetic properties; empirical and analytical

models. Prerequisite: a course in soil mechanics.

CEE 445. Advanced Foundation Engineering (3)

fall

Current theory and practice relating to the design of

shallow and deep foundations for buildings and other

structures. Analysis and limitation of settlements; bear-

ing capacity; flexible and rigid retaining structure design;

dynamic effects; anchor and other special foundations;

site investigations; load-resistance-factor design (LRFD)

criteria for foundations. Prerequisite: a course in soil

mechanics.

CEE 447. Advanced Topics in Geotechnical

Engineering (1-3)

Advanced studies in selected subjects related to geotech-

nical engineering. The general areas may include:

stress-strain-time relationships of soils, colloidal phe-

nomena in soils, ground water flow and see page, soil

dynamics, soil plasticity, numerical methods applied to

soil mechanics, earth dam design, theories of layered sys-

tems and their application to pavement design, rock

mechanics. The studies specifically undertaken in any

particular semester depend on the availability of staff and

the interest of students. Prerequisite: consent of the

department chair. May be repeated for credit.

CEE 448. Constitutive Laws in Soil Mechanics (3)

Basic methods and constitutive laws used for the analysis

of boundary value problems in soil mechanics. Linear

elasticity, nonlinear elastic, linear elastic-perfectly plastic

and non-linear elastoplastic models; critical state soil

mechanics; application of select computational models.

Prerequisite: consent of the instructor.

CEE 449. Geotechnical Research (1-6)

Individual research problems relating to soil engineering,

with report. Prerequisite: a course in soil mechanics.

CEE 450. Advanced Structural Analysis I (3)

Theory and methods of linear and second order structur-

al analysis. Linear theory and stiffness properties of

structural members and linear transformations of struc-

tural analysis. Application of virtual work principles and

development of displacement (stiffness) method of

analysis in matrix form. Introduction to second order

theory of structural members and second order equations

of structural analysis. Prerequisite: CEE 259 or equiva-

lent.

CEE 452. Fatigue and Fracture of Structures - An

Interdisciplinary View (3)

This course examines the fatigue and fracture character-

istics of steel structures from metallurgical, mechanical

and structural engineering views. Both theory and exper-

imental background are provided and applied to case

studies and code development.

CEE 453. Nonlinear Analysis of Structural

Components and Systems (3)

Nonlinear analysis of structural components and sys-

tems, considering the effects of material and geometric

nonlinearities. Solution strategies; material constitutive

178 Lehigh University Course Catalog 2009-2010

models; nonlinear membersection analysis; computation-

al plasticity; nonlinear beam-column element

formulations; second order analysis; structural stability;

and nonlinear time history analysis of structural dynamic

systems. Prerequisites: CEE 352, CEE 413, CEE 450.

CEE 455. Advanced Structural Dynamics (3)

Analysis and design of structures to resist wind, earth-

quake, and blast loading. Matrix methods and computer

applications. Non-linear and elasto-plastic response.

Damping characteristics of structures and structural

components, spectral analysis, dynamic instability.

Characteristics of aerodynamic and seismic forces and

explosions. Introduction to vibration of three-dimen-

sional structural systems. Prerequisites: CEE 352 or

MECH 406, CEE 405 and CEE 450 or equivalent.

CEE 456. Behavior and Design of Earthquake

Resistant Structures (3)

Characteristics of earthquakes, effects of earthquakes on

structures. Response of linear elastic structures to earth-

quakes. Response of inelastic structures to earthquakes.

Behavior of structural components under cyclic loading.

Principles of earthquake-resistant design. Seismic design

procedures and their implementation in codes.

Prerequisite: CEE 352 or equivalent.

CEE 459. Advanced Topics in Plastic Theory (3)

fall

Fundamentals of the mathematical theory of plasticity;

the general theorems of limit analysis and their applica-

tions to beams under combined loading, arches, space

frames, plates and shells. Limit analysis of two- and

three-dimensional problems in soil, concrete, rock, and

metal. Current developments. Prerequisite: CEE 413.

CEE 461. Advanced Bridge Engineering (3)

Students in CEE 461 cover the same topics described

under CEE 360, but in more depth. In addition each

student conducts an intensive study of a bridge-related

topic of his or her choice. A short written technical

report on the findings of this study is required.

Prerequisites: CEE 262 and CEE 264.

CEE 462. Stability of Structural Systems (3)

Stability analysis of structures systems, including

moment-resisting and braced frames, trusses, and plate

and box girders. Bracing requirements. Elastic and

inelastic second-order analysis. Design considerations.

Special topics. Prerequisites: CEE 413/404 or equivalent.

CEE 463. Advanced Mechanics of Reinforced

Concrete (3)

Consistent mechanics for the design of reinforced con-

crete with or without prestress. Limit theorems of the

theory of plasticity and their application to beams, slabs,

and disturbed regions. Applications may include beams

in flexure and combined flexure, axial load, and torsion;

slabs (strip method, yield line analysis); corbels, deep

beams, and other disturbed regions (truss models, strut-

and-tie models, and associated failure mechanisms).

Prerequisites: CEE 413 or equivalent.

CEE 467. Advanced Topics in Structural

Engineering (1-3)

Advanced study of selected topics in structural mechan-

ics and engineering, such as: finite element methods,

suspension system; space frames; stability of nonlinear

systems; coldformed and lightweight construction; opti-

mization and reliability; second-order phenomena in

structures; interaction of structures with the environ-

ment; structural use of plastics; composite construction,

etc. Selection of topics will depend on particular qualifi-

cations of the staff, as well as on the interests of the

students. Prerequisite: consent of the department chair.

May be repeated for credit.

CEE 468. (MECH 415) Stability of Elastic

Structures (3)

Basic concepts of instability of a structure; bifurcation,

energy increment, snap-through, dynamic instability.

Analytical and numerical methods of finding buckling

loads of columns. Postbuckling deformations of can-

tilever column. Dynamic buckling with nonconservative

forces. Effects of initial imperfections. Inelastic buckling.

Buckling by torsion and flexure. Variational methods.

Buckling of frames. Instability problems of thin plates

and shells. Prerequisite: MATH 205.

CEE 470. Reaction Kinetics in Environmental

Engineering (3)

Theory of reaction kinetics and its application to the

design and operation of chemical, physico-chemical and

biological reactors in water and wastewater treatment.

Basic design equations for various types of reactors and

migration of pollutants in the environment.

CEE 471. Environmental Risk Assessment (3)

Effects of chemical releases on human health; ecological

risks. Application of risk assessment methodology,

including hazard identification, exposure assessment,

toxicity assessment, and risk characterization.

Accounting for uncertainty in data during risk manage-

ment, risk reduction and implementation of regulations

and environmental policy. Term project.

CEE 472. Water and Wastewater Treatment

Facilities (3)

Theory and design of water and wastewater treatment

facilities. Physical, chemical, and biological treatment

processes for water and wastewater treatment.

Prerequisite: CEE 375 (CHE 375) or equivalent.

CEE 473. (CHE 473) Environmental Separation

and Control

Theory and application of adsorption, ion exchange,

reverse osmosis, air stripping and chemical oxidation in

water and wastewater treatment. Modeling engineered

treatment processes. Prerequisite: CEE 470 or consent of

the instructor.

CEE 474. Aquatic Chemistry (3)

Applying basic principles of aqueous chemistry for quan-

tifying complex, environmental systems. Specific

examples of air-water-soil interactions and consequent

effects. Heterogeneous equilibria with more than one

solid phase. Kinetics and thermodynamics of some

important ionic and biological reactions. Prerequisite:

CEE 274.

CEE 475. Advanced Topics in Environmental

Engineering (1-3)

Advanced concentrated study of a selected topic in envi-

ronmental engineering such as non-point source

pollution control, water reuse systems, new concepts in

treatment technology, toxic substance control, etc. The

instructor and student select topic. Courses may include

specialized laboratory research, literature review, and spe-

cialty conference attendance. Prerequisite: Department

chair approval.

Civil and Environmental Engineering and Earth and Environmental Sciences 179

CEE 476. Environmental Engineering

Microbiology (3)

Fundamentals of microbiology and biochemistry applied

to environmental systems and water quality control.

Systems ecology, energetics and kinetics of microbial

growth, nutrition and toxicology, use of microorganisms

for pollution monitoring and control. Pathogenicity and

disease transmission, water quality using biological

indices. Prerequisite: CEE 375 (CHE 375) or consent of

instructor.

CEE 477. Environmental Engineering

Processes (3)

Processed applied in environmental engineering for air

pollution control, treatment of drinking water, munici-

pal wastewater, industrial wastes and environmental

remediation. Kinetics, reactor theory, mass balances,

application of fundamental physical, chemical and bio-

logical principles to analysis and design. Prerequisite:

CEE 170 or consent of instructor.

CEE 478. Toxic and Hazardous Wastes (3)

Regulations for collection, transportation, disposal and

storage of hazardous wastes. Containment systems, mon-

itoring, types of liners, new and available technologies to

eliminate or recover the hazardous components of the

wastes. Prerequisite: CEE 274 or CEE 375 (CHE 375).

CEE 479. Environmental Engineering

Research (1-6)

Individual research problems in environmental engineer-

ing with report. May be repeated for credit.

CEE 480. Civil Engineering Project (1-6)

An intensive study of one or more areas of civil engineer-

ing, with emphasis on engineering design and

applications. A written report is required. May be repeat-

ed for credit.

CEE 481. Special Problems (1-6)

An intensive study, with report, of a special field of civil

engineering, which is not covered in the other courses. A

design project or an interdisciplinary study of a problem

related to civil engineering may also be included. May be

repeated for credit.

CEE 483. Graduate Seminar (1-3)

Study of current topics in civil engineering.

CEE 491. Thesis (1-6)

CEE 499. Dissertation (1-15)

Civil and Environmental

Engineering and Earth and

Environmental Sciences

This program is designed for students interested in com-

bining programs in two departments: Civil &

Environmental Engineering and Earth & Environmental

Science, leading to two bachelor of science degrees, one in

Civil Engineering or Environmental Engineering and the

other in Earth and Environmental Sciences. Both degrees

would be awarded at the end of the fifth year. This pro-

gram is one of the dual degree programs mentioned in the

Five-Year Programs section. The student will have a pri-

mary advisor in the P.C. Rossin College of Engineering

and Applied Sciences and a secondary advisor in the Arts

and Sciences College. The program provides alternatives

for students who may decide not to complete the dual-

degree program. Students who make this decision prior to

the beginning of the fourth year may qualify at the end of

that year for the bachelor of science in civil or environ-

mental engineering, as well as a minor in earth and

environmental sciences. Also, if a student decides after two

years to pursue only a bachelor of science degree in the

EES department, it is possible to complete the require-

ments in four years. If the decision to work toward this

degree is made during the fourth year, at least one addi-

tional semester is required to qualify for either B.S. degree.

Interested students should consult with the respective

departmental advisors to create a schedule of courses to

resolve conflicts or if a specified course is not offered that

semester. Required courses and major electives for the dif-

ferent EES B.S. degree programs are listed in the catalog

entry for EES. Cross-listed EES/CEE courses used to sat-

isfy Civil Engineering Approved Electives can reduce the

individual semester and total program credits when cho-

sen to satisfy EES program requirements. Additional

useful information can be found on the web sites

(www3.lehigh.edu/engineering/cee/ and www.ees.lehigh.edu ).

Suggested outline of courses for B.S. in

Environmental Science and B.S. in Civil

Engineering

The freshman engineering year (see Section III) is often

29 credits. The HSS Advanced Requirement of 13 cred-

its is shown below as three 3-credit courses and one

4-credit course. Other options are possible.

A total of 160-175 credit hours are needed for both

degrees depending on how many credits in the EES are

satisfied by taking CEE Approved Electives that are

cross-listed with EES courses**.

second year, first semester (18 credit hours)

MATH 23 Calculus III (4)

MECH 3 Fundamentals of Engineering

Mechanics (3)

CHM 31 **Chemical Equilibria in Aqueous

Systems (3)

EES Gateway Gateway Elective (3)

EES 22 Exploring Earth (1)

CEE 11 Surveying (1)

CEE 12 Civil Engineering Statistics (2)

second year, second semester (18 credit hours)

PHY 21 Introductory Physics II (4)

PHY 22 Introductory Physics Laboratory II (1)

MECH 12 Strength of Materials (3)

EES 100 Earth System Science (4)

MATH 205 Linear Methods (3)

MAT 33 Engineering Materials and

Processes (3)

third year, first semester ( 18 credit hours)

CEE 121 Mechanics of Fluids (3)

CEE 123 Civil Engineering Materials (1)

CEE 142 Soil Mechanics (3)

EES Course suggested as only 100 and 300

level (4)

EES Course suggested as only100 and 200

level (4)

CEE 10 Architectural/Engineering Graphics

and Design (3)

180 Lehigh University Course Catalog 2009-2010

third year, second semester ( 18 credit hours)

CEE 242 Geotechnical Engineering (3)

CEE 222 Hydraulic Engineering (3)

CEE 170 Introduction to Environmental

Engineering (4)

EES 200 Earth History (4)

ECO 1 Principles of Economics (4)

fourth year, first semester (18 credit hours)

CEE 117 Numerical Methods in Civil

Engineering (2)

CEE 159 Structural Analysis I (4)

EES Course 100 to 300 levels (4)

fourth year, second semester (16 credit hours)

CEE 202 Civil Engineering Planning and

Engineering Economics (3)

CEE 262 Fundamentals of Structural Steel

Design (3)

or CEE 264 Fundamentals of Structural Concrete

Design (3)

CEE **Civil Engineering Approved

Elective (3)

*Engineering Science Elective (3)

EES 100 to 300 levels (4)

year 4/5 summer (0-6 credit hours)

Optional 1 field course

EES 341 Field Camp in Earth and

Environmental Sciences (1-6)

fifth year, first semester (15-19 credit hours)

CEE 203 Professional Development (2)

CEE **Civil Engineering Approved

Elective (3)

HSS Humanities/Social Sciences AR

Elective (7)

Select 1, or 2 courses from below so the total here and

year 4/5 summer is 8 credits of Tier 3 courses:

EES Course 100 to 300 levels (4)

EES Course 100 to 300 levels, possibly EES

380 Senior Seminar (4)

fifth year, second semester (18 credit hours)

CEE **Civil Engineering Approved

Electives (7)

CEE 290 ***Civil Engineering Capstone Design

Project (3)

H/SS Humanities/Social Sciences AR

Electives (4)

EES Course 100 to 300 levels (4)

*MECH 102, ME 104, or ECE 83/81.

**CHM 31 plus thirteen additional credits of CEE

Approved Electives are required; see list on CEE web-site

that includes five CEE/EES cross-listed courses: CEE 279

(EES 259), CEE 316 (EES 316), CEE 320 (EES 320),

CEE 323 (EES 323), CEE 327 (EES 327), and CEE 379

(EES 379).

***Usually CEE 290, but can be a multidisciplinary team-

ing version of CEE 205, CEE 377 or CEE 381; student

must have completed successfully at least one CE approved

elective related to the design project topic area.

Suggested outline of courses for B.S. in

Environmental Science and B.S. in

Environmental Engineering

The freshman engineering year (see Section III) is often

29 credits. The HSS Advanced Requirement of 13 cred-

its is shown below as three 3-credit courses and one

4-credit course. Other options are possible.

A total of 158-167 credit hours are needed for both

degrees. Some EES requirements are simultaneously sat-

isfied by taking Environmental Engineering Technical

Electives that are cross-listed with EES courses.

second year, first semester (18 credit hours)

MATH 23 Calculus III (4)

MECH 2 or 3 Elementary Engineering Mechanics (3)

CHM 110 Organic CHEM I (3)

CHM 111 Organic Chem Lab I (1)

ESR ***Earth Science Requirement (3)

EES 22 Exploring Earth (1)

HSS Humanities/Social Sciences AR

Elective (3)

second year, second semester (15 credit hours)

MATH 205 Linear Methods (3)

PHY 21 Introductory Physics II (4)

PHY 22 Introductory Physics Lab II (1)

CEE 170 Introduction to Environmental

Engineering (4)

EBR ****Environmental Biology

Requirement (3)

third year, first semester (19 credit hours)

CEE 12 Civil Engineering Statistics (2)

CEE 375 Env. Engineering Processes (3)

EES Course suggested as only 100 and 200

level (4)

EES Course suggested as only 100 and 200

level (4)

HSS Humanities/Social Science Elective (3)

CHE 31 MAT. & Energy Bal. Of CHE

Process (3)

third year, second semester (18 credit hours)

CEE 274 Environmental Water Chemistry (3)

CHE 60 Unit Ops Survey (3)

ECO 1 Principles of Economics (4)

EES Course 100 to 200 level (4)

EES Course 100 to 300 levels (4)

fourth year, first semester (17 credit hours)

CEE 121 Mechanics of Fluids (3)

CEE 142 Fundamentals of Soil Mechanics (3)

CEE 378 Solid & Haz. Waste Management (3)

EES Course 100 to 300 levels (4)

fourth year, second semester (18 credit hours)

CEE 202 CEE Planning and Engineering

Economics (3)

CEE 222 Hydraulic Engineering (3)

CEE 272 Env. Risk Assessment (2)

CEE 275 Enviro-Geo-Hydraulics Lab (2)

EES Course 100 to 300 levels (4)

EES Course 100 to 300 levels, possibly senior

seminar (4)

year 4/5 summer (0-6 credit hours)

Optional field 1 course

Classical Studies 181

EES 341 Field Camp in Earth and

Environmental Sciences (1-6)

fifth year, first semester (16 credit hours)

CEE 203 Professional Development (2)

CEE 379 (EES 379) Env. Case Studies (4)

EES Course 100 to 300 levels, possibly senior

seminar (4)

Approved electives (2)

HSS Humanities/Social Sciences AR

Electives (4)

fifth year, second semester (16 credit hours)

CEE 377 Environmental Engineering Design (3)

HSS Humanities/Social Sciences AR

Electives (3)

*Approved electives (7)

FE Free Elective (3)

*9 approved elective credits to satisfy proficiency in three

focus areas of water supply and resources, environmental

chemistry, and hazardous waste management; approved list

available from CEE department.

***Earth Science Requirement, list of approved courses are

available from CEE department.

****Environmental Biology Requirement, list of approved

courses are available from CEE department.

Classical Studies

Professors. Charles Robert Phillips, III, Ph.D. (Brown);

David B. Small, Ph.D. (Cambridge)

Associate Professor. Barbara Pavlock, Ph.D. (Cornell),

head of program.

The study of Classics examines first the origins and

growth of Greek and Roman culture in the

Mediterranean area and second its impact on that area

(and others) until the present. This study is by nature

interdisciplinary: the study of language and literature,

history, philosophy and religion, archaeology, economics

and science all contribute to an appreciation of Greco-

Roman civilization.

Students in either major or minor programs may con-

centrate in various combinations of these and other

disciplines as they relate to ancient civilization. The

diversity of the program should encourage the student to

follow her or his special interests while simultaneously

gaining an overview of classical civilization.

Courses in ancient Greek and Latin lead to proficiency

in language while introducing the student to major liter-

ary texts. The Joseph A. Maurer Classics Prize is awarded

yearly, at the discretion of the program, to the senior(s)

who has demonstrated outstanding achievement in

Classics (ancient Greek or Latin) and/or classical civiliza-

tion. Courses in classical civilization require no

knowledge of the ancient languages; they offer introduc-

tions to various disciplines of Classics with frequent

reference to modern perspectives. Upper-level courses

tend to be small, fostering closeness between faculty and

students.

Petitions are required for freshmen to take 100-level or

higher courses and for sophomores to take 200-level or

higher courses.

Major Programs. Students may major either in classical

civilization or in Classics. The Classics major offers a

comprehensive view of language and culture; it is possi-

ble to begin an ancient language at Lehigh and to

complete the major program successfully. The classical

civilization major enables the student to gain a broad

perspective on Greek and Roman civilization. The pro-

gram welcomes double majors and the educational

perspectives to be derived from combining ancient and

modern studies.

Classics as a major has stood the test of time, offering

helpful preparation for careers in widely diverse fields in

the professions, business, and public service. Lehigh

Classics majors have gone on to law school, the ministry,

business school, with appropriate science courses to med-

ical school, graduate work in Classics, and to all kinds of

entry-level employment.

Departmental Honors. A student may be recommended

for program honors by vote of the program based on the

student’s course work.

Minor Program. The program has three minors:

Classics, Latin, and Classical Civilization. The minor in

Classics combines language study and civilization courses

(with a minimum of two courses in the languages). The

minor in Latin focuses exclusively on the study of Latin.

For the minor in Classical Civilization, students may

take any combination of courses in Classical Civilization

(any courses designated CLSS). All the minors require a

minimum of 15 credits. The program can arrange indi-

vidual courses of study. CLSS 121/ANTH 121 may not

be counted toward the minor in Classical Civilization or

Classics.

Study Abroad. Lehigh University is a cooperating insti-

tution of the Intercollegiate Center for Classical Studies

at Rome. Lehigh students are eligible for tuition grants

at Athens and Rome.

Major in Classical Civilization

This major allows the student to gain an overview of

Greco-Roman culture through the literature, archaeolo-

gy, and history along with basic language study. A

minimum of 30 to 33 credit hours, depending upon pre-

vious preparation in language study, is required for this

major.

Any four of the following:

CLSS 52 (ENGL 52) Classical Epic (3)

CLSS 54 (ENGL 54, THTR 54)

Greek Tragedy (3)

CLSS 56 (ENGL 56) Topics in Greek and Roman

Literature (3)

CLSS 58 (ENGL 58, THTR 58) Greek and Roman

Comedy (3)

CLSS 174 (ANTH 174, ART 174, ARCH 174).

Greek Archaeology (3)

CLSS 176 (ANTH 176, ART 176, ARCH 176).

Roman Archaeology (3)

Any two courses in ancient history

Any two electives from the remaining program offerings

(ANTH 178 may be included)

One course in either Latin or Greek on the intermediate

level (or LAT/GRK 1, 2, 11, or 12, depending on previ-

ous background)

Major in Classics

This major allows the student to concentrate in ancient

Greek, Latin or both. Specific programs for this major

182 Lehigh University Course Catalog 2009-2010

are worked out for each student with due consideration

for the individual’s particular previous study of the lan-

guage(s). Thus a student may begin ancient Greek or

Latin at Lehigh and successfully complete a major in it.

A minimum of 30 to 33 credit hours, depending upon

previous language study, is required for this major.

Required Major Courses

Latin 1 and 2 or Greek 1 and 2, depending on prior

preparation

Latin 11 and 12, or Greek 11 and 12, depending on

prior preparation

Three advanced courses in the major language mini-

mum, depending on prior preparation

Any two ancient history courses

At least two electives from the remaining program offerings

Courses in Classical Civilization (CLSS)

CLSS 21. (HIST 21) Greek History (4) fall

The development of civilization from palaeolithic times

to the world empire of Alexander the Great. The social,

economic, religious, philosophic, artistic and literary

development of the ancient world; the origin of political

institutions. Phillips (SS)

CLSS 22. (HIST 22) Roman History (4) spring

Rome from its origins to A.D. 476. Political, social and

religious developments. Transformation of the late

Roman Empire to the early medieval period. Phillips

(SS)

CLSS 50. Mythology (3) fall

Introduction to the study of the Greco-Roman myths in

their social, political, and historical contexts. Equal

emphasis on learning the myths and strategies for inter-

preting them as important evidence for studying classical

antiquity. (SS)

CLSS 52. (ENGL 52) Classical Epic (3)

Study of major epic poems from Greece and Rome.

Works include Homer’s Iliad and Odyssey, Apollonius’

Argonautica, Vergil’s Aeneid, and Ovid’s

Metamorphoses. Pavlock (HU)

CLSS 54. (ENGL 54, THTR 54) Greek

Tragedy (3)

Aspects of Greek theater and plays of Aeschylus,

Sophocles, and Euripides in their social and intellectual

contexts. Pavlock (HU)

CLSS 56. (ENGL 56) Topics in Greek and Roman

Literature (3)

Classical literature in translation, including themes or

specific periods in Greek or Roman literature. May be

repeated for credit, as topics vary. Pavlock (HU)

CLSS 58. (ENGL 58, THTR 58) Greek and

Roman Comedy (3)

Study of comedy as a social form through plays of

Aristophanes, Menander, Plautus, and Terence. Pavlock

(HU)

CLSS 91. Independent Study (1-4) (ND)

CLSS 112. (ANTH 112) Doing Archaeology (4)

Principles of archaeological method and theory.

Excavation and survey methods, artifact analysis, dating

techniques, and cultural reconstruction. Course includes

field project. Prerequisite: ANTH 1 or department per-

mission. Small (SS)

CLSS 114 (REL 114) Christian Origins: New

Testament and the Beginnings of Christianity (4)

Early Christianity from its beginnings until the end of

the second century. Coverage includes the Jewish and

Hellenistic matrices of Christianity, traditions about the

life of Jesus and his significance, and the variety of belief

and practice of early Christians. Emphasis on encounter-

ing primary texts. Wright (HU)

CLSS 121. (ANTH 121) Environment and

Culture (4)

Impact of environment upon cultural variability and

change. Comparative study of modern and past cultures

and their environments as well as current theories of

human/ environmental interaction. Prerequisite: ANTH

1 or department permission. Small (SS)

CLSS 127. (ANTH 127) Early Civilizations (4)

Introduction to early civilizations in the Near East,

Mediterranean, Africa, Europe, and the New World.

Similarities and differences in economics, politics, social

organization, and religion. Prerequisite: ANTH 1 or

department permission. Small (SS)

CLSS 131. (PHIL 131) Ancient Philosophy (4)

fall

Historical survey of selected texts and issues in the classi-

cal world, from the pre-Socratics through Aristotle, with

emphasis on the origins of the western philosophical tra-

ditions in ethics, metaphysics, and epistemology. (HU)

CLSS 132. (PHIL 132) Hellenistic Philosophy (4)

Historical survey of selected texts and issues in Post-

Aristotelian Greek and Roman philosophy from the

fourth century B.C. to the third century A.D. Areas of

focus may include epicureanism, stoicism, academic and

pyrrhonian scepticism, and neoplatonism. (HU)

CLSS 161. (HIST 161) Roman Law (4)

Examination of Roman legal systems from the Twelve

Tables to the Digest of Justinian. Emphasis on develop-

ment of legal concepts and their historical context.

Readings in primary sources; lectures; discussion. Phillips

(SS)

CLSS 171. Independent Study (1-4)

CLSS 174. (ANTH 174, Art 174, ARCH 174)

Greek Archaeology (3)

Ancient Greek culture from the neolithic to Hellenistic

periods. Reconstructions of Greek social dynamics from

the study of artifacts. Small (SS)

CLSS 176. (ANTH 176, Art 176, ARCH 176)

Roman Archaeology (3)

Cultures of the Roman Empire. Reconstructions of

social, political, and economic dynamics of the imperial

system from the study of artifacts. Small (SS)

CLSS 191 (1-4) Special Topics (ND)

CLSS 213. (HIST 213, REL 213) Ancient Roman

Religion (4)

Religious experience of the Roman people from prehisto-

ry to end of the empire. Nature of polytheism and its

interactions with monotheism (Christianity, Judaism).

Theories of religion. Emphasis on primary source mate-

rials. Phillips (SS)

Classical Studies 183

CLSS 231. (PHIL 231) Figures/Themes in Ancient

Philosophy (4)

This seminar course will involve in-depth focus upon a

major ancient thinker (e.g. Plato, Aristotle, Sextus

Empiricus, Plotinus, etc.) or the classical treatment of a

particular theme (e.g.,“human nature,” “the good life,”

ethical or political theory, etc.). Content varies. May be

repeated more than once for credit. (HU)

CLSS 251. (REL 251) Classical Mythology (3)

Myth, religion, and ritual in ancient Greece and Rome.

Emphasis on primary sources; introduction to ancient

and modern theories of religion. Cross-cultural material.

(SS)

CLSS 281. Readings (3) fall

Advanced study of a historical period or theme.

Emphasis on primary sources. Prerequisites: CLSS 21 or

22 and consent of the program head. (ND)

CLSS 282. Readings (3) spring

Advanced study of a historical period or theme.

Emphasis on primary sources. Prerequisites: CLSS 21 or

22 and consent of the program head. (ND)

CLSS 291. Independent Study (1-4)

CLSS 311 (HIST 311) Twins and Sins: The Rise

of Rome (3-4)

Rome from its origins to the mid-third century B.C.

Emphasis on foundation legends, the power of the

monarchy, and development of Roman political and reli-

gious institutions. Papers, quizzes, discussions. Phillips

(SS)

CLSS 312. (HIST 312) Decline and Fall of the

Roman Empire (3-4)

Political, social, and economic history of the Roman

Empire, A.D. 117-A.D. 565. Romanization of the

provinces, diffusion of Christianity, and special attention

to transformation to medieval period. Includes readings

in translation of primary sources. Phillips (SS)

CLSS 313. (HIST 313) Golden Age of Greek

Democracy (3-4)

Greek history of the seventh through fifth centuries B.C.

Emphasis on the contrasting political and social systems

of Athens and Sparta with consideration of related eco-

nomic and military history. Attention to art, gender,

literature, religion. Discussion and lectures; papers.

Phillips (SS)

CLSS 314. (HIST 314) Age of Caesar and

Christ (3-4) spring

Roman history of the first century A.D. Political, cultur-

al, and socio-economic changes; special attention to the

evolution of absolute power. Lectures, discussions,

papers. Phillips (SS)

CLSS 345. (ANTH 345) Evolution of the State (4)

Theories of state formation. Comparison of evolutionary

trajectories of early states in the Near East,

Mediterranean, and the New World. Small (SS)

Courses in Ancient Greek

GRK 1. Elementary Ancient Greek I (4) fall

Fundamentals of the Greek language. Grammatical exer-

cises and short passages of easy prose. Staff (HU)

GRK 2. Elementary Ancient Greek II (4) spring

Continued work in Greek vocabulary, forms, and syntax.

Selected readings in Greek. Students should have com-

pleted one semester of elementary ancient Greek or the

equivalent. Staff (HU)

GRK 11. Intermediate Ancient Greek (3) fall

Readings in Herodotus, Homer, or Xenophon. Grammar

review. Students should have completed two semesters of

elementary ancient Greek or the equivalent. (HU)

GRK 12. Intermediate Ancient Greek (3) spring

Plato: Euthyphro, Apology and Crito, or other dialogues.

Students should have completed two semesters of ele-

mentary Greek or the equivalent. (HU)

GRK 91. Independent Study (1-4) (HU)

GRK 111. Greek Drama (3)

Representative plays of Sophocles, Euripides and

Aristophanes. Literary study of the drama. Students

should have completed four semesters of ancient Greek

or the equivalent. (HU)

GRK 112. Readings in Ancient Greek (3)

Readings of Greek prose and poetry, authors will vary.

May be repeated for credit. Students should have com-

pleted four semesters of ancient Greek or the equivalent.

(HU)

GRK 113. Greek Historians (3)

Selections from Herodotus, Thucydides or Xenophon.

Study of Greek historiography. Students should have

completed four semesters of ancient Greek or the equiva-

lent. (HU)

GRK 171. Independent Study (1-4) (HU)

GRK 271. Readings (3) fall

Intensive readings in one author or in a selected genre.

Prerequisites: six credit hours at the 100 level and con-

sent of the program head. (HU)

GRK 272. Readings (3) spring

Intensive readings in one author or in a selected genre.

Prerequisites: six credit hours of courses at the 100 level

and consent of the program head. (HU)

GRK 291. Independent Study (1-4)

Courses in Latin

LAT 1. Elementary Latin I (4) fall

Fundamentals of grammar and syntax. Emphasis on lan-

guage structure and vocabulary building. Pavlock (HU)

LAT 2. Elementary Latin II (4) spring

Continuation of grammar, easy Latin prose and poetry.

Students should have completed one semester of elemen-

tary Latin or the equivalent. (HU)

LAT 11. Intermediate Latin (3) fall

Readings in Latin prose or poetry. Consolidation of

reading ability; introduction to literary analysis. Students

should have completed two semesters of elementary

Latin or the equivalent. Pavlock (HU)

LAT 12. Intermediate Latin (3) spring

Readings in Latin prose or poetry. Consolidation of

reading ability; introduction to literary analysis. Students

should have completed two semesters of elementary

Latin or the equivalent. Pavlock (HU)

LAT 91. Independent Study (1-4)

LAT 111. Catullus and Horace (3)

Translation and analysis of selected lyrics, focusing on

imagery systems. Introduction to metrics. May be

184 Lehigh University Course Catalog 2009-2010

repeated for credit. Students should have completed four

semesters of Latin or the equivalent. Pavlock (HU)

LAT 112. Latin Prose (3)

Readings from Latin prose literature of the late republic

and early empire; selections may include Cicero’s letters,

Sallust, Pliny’s letters. May be repeated for credit as con-

tent changes Students should have completed four

semesters of Latin or the equivalent. Pavlock (HU)

LAT 113. Vergil (3)

Selections from the Aeneid. Vergil’s creation of a Latin

epic and its complex perspective. Metrics. May be

repeated for credit. Students should have completed four

semesters of Latin or the equivalent. Pavlock (HU)

LAT 114. Livy (3)

Selections from the early books of Livy’s histories focus-

ing on his creation of a Roman mythos. Students should

have completed four semesters of Latin or the equiva-

lent. Pavlock (HU)

LAT 115. Ovid (3)

May include selections from the Ars Amatoria, Fasti, and

the Metamorphoses, with attention to the problem of the

ideology of Augustan Rome. May be repeated for credit.

Students should have completed four semesters of Latin

or the equivalent. Pavlock (HU)

LAT 116. Petronius (3)

Selections from the Satyricon, focusing on language usage

and epic parody. Students should have completed four

semesters of Latin or the equivalent. Pavlock (HU)

LAT. 171. Independent Study (1-4) (HU)

LAT 211. Readings (3) fall

Intensive readings in one author or in a selected genre.

Prerequisites: six hours of courses at the 100 level and

consent of the program head. (HU)

LAT 212. Readings (3) spring

Intensive reading in one author or in a selected genre.

Prerequisites: six hours of courses at the 100 level and

consent of the program head. (HU)

LAT 291. Independent Study (1-4) (HU)

Cognitive Science

Program Director

John B. Gatewood, 758-3814; [email protected]

Cognitive Science Faculty

Biological Sciences: John Nyby, Ph.D. (Texas); Colin J.

Saldanha, Ph.D. (Columbia); Jill Schneider, Ph.D.

(Wesleyan); Neal Simon, Ph.D. (Rutgers); Jennifer M.

Swann, Ph.D. (Northwestern)

Computer Science and Engineering: Henry S. Baird, Ph.D.

(Princeton); Glenn D. Blank, Ph.D. (Wisconsin); Jeffrey

D. Heflin, Ph.D. (Maryland); Edwin J. Kay, Ph.D.

(Lehigh); Hector Munoz-Avila, Ph.D. (U.

Kaiserslautern, Germany); Roger N. Nagel, Ph.D.

(Maryland); John R. Spletzer, Ph.D. (Pennsylvania)

Modern Languages and Literature: Kiri Lee, Ph.D.

(Harvard)

Philosophy: Gordon Bearn, Ph.D. (Yale); Mark H.

Bickhard, Ph.D. (Chicago); Steven L. Goldman, Ph.D.

(Boston); Aladdin M. Yaqub, Ph.D. (Wisconsin)

Psychology: Catherine M. Arrington, Ph.D. (Michigan

State); Susan Barrett, Ph.D. (Brown); Christopher T.

Burke, Ph.D. (NYU); Michael J. Gill, Ph.D. (Texas);

Laura M. Gonnerman, Ph.D. (Southern California);

Heidi Grant, Ph.D. (Columbia); Almut Hupbach, Ph.D.

(University of Trier); Barbara C. Malt, Ph.D. (Stanford);

Gordon B. Moskowitz, Ph.D. (NYU); Ageliki

Nicolopoulou, Ph.D. (UC-Berkeley); Dominic J. Packer,

Ph.D. (Toronto); Padraig O’Seaghdha, Ph.D. (Toronto)

Sociology and Anthropology: John B. Gatewood, Ph.D.

(Illinois); Robert E. Rosenwein, Ph.D. (Michigan)

Cognitive science is the interdisciplinary study of how

humans think and how machines think. How can our

understanding of the way humans think improve the

performance of machines that are meant to behave intel-

ligently? How can our understanding of the ways to

make machines behave intelligently improve our under-

standing of the way humans think?

The mission of the Cognitive Science Program is to

advance understanding of the process of thinking, in all

its aspects, through research and teaching. The interdisci-

plinary study of cognitive models in the fields of

psychology, linguistics, computer science, philosophy,

anthropology, and neuroscience enables students to

apply concepts in human and animal cognition to

improve computer-based reasoning, and to apply con-

cepts in computer-based reasoning to improve models in

human and animal cognition. Consistent with the mis-

sion of a liberal arts education, the program aims to

instill in students a solid grasp of the intellectual prob-

lems, frameworks, and methodologies currently available;

to provide experience exploring these through guided

research; and to foster the desire to create, develop, and

disseminate new knowledge. With this foundation, stu-

dents are well prepared for graduate or professional

studies or for a wide variety of careers with the bachelor’s

degree.

The College of Arts and Sciences offers an undergradu-

ate major and minor in Cognitive Science, as well as a

graduate minor and a graduate certificate. The courses

required for the major readily lend themselves to a dou-

ble major for those students in the humanities, natural

sciences, social sciences, or computer science who have

overlapping interests in cognitive science.

The B.A. with a major in Cognitive Science requires a

minimum of 13 courses: 11 within the major itself and 2

in collateral areas. All majors are required to take

COGS 7, an introduction to cognitive science. The

remainder of the major is built around a core of four sec-

ond-tier courses from cognitive psychology, philosophy,

artificial intelligence, and neuroscience. In addition,

majors must complete five major electives selected from

three tracks within cognitive science. The final integra-

tion of coursework occurs in the required senior thesis

(COGS 399), in which students focus on a topic of their

choice from a branch of cognitive science.

The collateral course requirements are: CSE 15 and

either MATH 21 or 51. Additional coursework in math-

ematics is strongly recommended (particularly

CSE/MATH 261), as are PSYC 1 and ANTH 1.

Students who are particularly interested in cognition and

neuroscience should also take CHEM 25 or 75 and

BIOS 41, with their associated laboratory courses, by the

end of their sophomore year.

Cognitive Science 185

Program Honors

Majors seeking to graduate with honors in cognitive sci-

ence must have a 3.30 GPA in the major, a 3.30 GPA

overall, and complete a high quality senior thesis. Theses

submitted for honors will be evaluated by a committee

of at least three cognitive science faculty.

B.A. in Cognitive Science

Collateral Requirements (8 credits)

CSE 15 Introduction to Computer Science (4)

and

MATH 21 Calculus I (4), or

MATH 51 Survey of Calculus I (4)

Introductory Course (4 credits)

COGS 7 Introduction to Cognitive Science (4)

spring

Disciplinary Core Courses (15 credits)

COGS 117 (PSYC 117) Cognitive Psychology (4)

COGS 176 (PSYC 176) Mind and Brain (4)

COGS 250 (PHIL 250) Philosophy of Mind (4)

COGS 327 (CSE 327) Artificial Intelligence

Theory and Applications (3)

Major Electives (minimum of 16 credits)

Students must complete a minimum of five major elec-

tives chosen from among the courses listed below, with

at least one course from each of the three tracks.

Artificial Intelligence and Formal Models:

CSE 17 Structured Programming and Data

Structures (3)

[prereq: CSE 15]

CSE 261 (MATH 261) Discrete Structures (3)

[prereq: MATH 21]

CSE 262 Programming Languages (3)

[prereq: CSE 17]

CSE 318. Automata and Formal Grammars (3)

[prereq: CSE/MATH 261]

CSE 326 Pattern Recognition (3)

[prereq: CSE 109, CSE/MATH 340,

MATH 205, MATH 231, or consent

of instructor]

CSE 335 Topics in Intelligent Decision Support

Systems (3)

[prereq: CSE 327 or 109]

CSE 348 AI Game Programming (3)

[prereq: CSE 327 or 109]

CSE 360 Introduction to Mobile Robotics (3)

[prereq: MATH 205 and CSE 109]

PHIL 114 Symbolic Logic (4)

PHIL 214 Topics in Philosophical Logic (4)

[prereq: permission of instructor]

PHIL 265 Philosophy of Mathematics (4)

MATH 303 (PHIL 303) Mathematical Logic (4)

[prereq: permission of instructor]

MATH 304 (PHIL 304) Axiomatic Set Theory (4)

[prereq: permission of instructor]

MATH 329 Computability Theory (4)

[prereq: permission of instructor]

And, for undergraduates who qualify:

CSE 431 Intelligent Agents (3)

[prereq: CSE 327 or equivalent]

Language, Culture, and Meaning:

COGS 140 (ANTH 140, PSYC 140, MLL 140)

Introduction to Linguistics (4)

ANTH 376 Culture and the Individual (4)

PHIL 139 Contemporary Philosophy (4)

PHIL 220 Theory of Knowledge (4)

PHIL 260 Philosophy of Language (4)

PSYC 307 Seminar in Cognition (4)

[prereq: PSYC 117 or 176 or

COGS 7]

PSYC 320 Psychology of Language (4)

[prereq: PSYC 117 or 176 or

COGS 7]

PSYC 321 Language Development (4)

[prereq: PSYC 107 or 117]

PSYC 322 Language in Atypical Populations (4)

[prereq: PSYC 117 or 176 or COGS 7

or 140]

PSYC 351 Cognitive Development in

Childhood (4)

[prereq: PSYC 107 or 117 or

COGS 7]

PSYC 362 Cognition in Practice and Policy (4)

[prereq: PSYC 117 or 176 or COGS 7]

PSYC 313 Person Perception (4)

PSYC 314 (SSP 314) Social Cognition and Social

Action (4)

[prereq: PSYC 110 or SR 111]

PSYC 365 Human Development in Cross-

Cultural

Perspective (4)

[prereq: PSYC 107 or 109 or

SSP/PSYC 121 or ANTH 1]

SSP 135 Human Communication (4)

SSP 302 The Sociology of Cyberspace (4)

Cognition and Neuroscience:

ANTH 145 Human Evolution (4)

[prereq: ANTH 1 or COGS7]

BIOS 177 Behavioral Neuroscience I (3)

[prereq: BIOS 41 and CHEM 25 or

75]

BIOS 276 Behavioral Neuroscience II (3)

[prereq: BIOS 177]

BIOS 277 Experimental Neuroscience Lab (2)

[concurrently with BIOS 276]

BIOS 382 Endocrinology of Behavior (3)

[prereq: BIOS 177]

BIOS 385 Neurophysiology of Memory (3)

[prereq: BIOS 177 and PHYS 13, or

consent of instructor]

PSYC 369 Memory (4)

[prereq: PSYC 117 or 176 or

COGS 7]

PSYC 373 Sensation and Perception (4)

[prereq: PSYC 117 or 176 or

COGS 7]

PSYC 377 Attention and Attentional Failure (4)

[prereq: PSYC 117 or 176 or COGS 7]

Senior Thesis (4 credits)

After completing the introductory and the core courses,

students pursue their own interests in their selections of

major electives. The required senior thesis (COGS 399)

provides students the opportunity to integrate what they

have learned in the guise of an independent project con-

ducted under the supervision of a cognitive science

faculty advisor. The thesis must integrate materials from

at least two cognitive science disciplines.

186 Lehigh University Course Catalog 2009-2010

Recommended Timing of Courses

Freshman Sophomore

COGS 7, spring COGS 117

CSE 15 COGS 176

MATH 21 or 51 1 major elective

[also, CHEM 25 or 75 and BIOS 41 by end of sopho-

more year for students especially interested in cognition

and neuroscience]

Junior Senior

COGS 250 2 major electives

COGS 327 COGS 399

2 major electives

Minor in Cognitive Science

The minor in Cognitive Science requires five courses:

COGS 7 and four additional courses selected from

among the major’s core courses and major electives, with

at least two of these being Disciplinary Core Courses.

Course Descriptions

COGS 7. Introduction to Cognitive Science (4)

spring

What is a mind? How is the mind related to the brain?

Could we make an artificial mind? Issues concerning

knowledge representation and intelligence in minds and

computers as investigated by psychologists, philosophers,

linguists, neuroscientists, and researchers in artificial

intelligence. (SS)

COGS 117 (PSYC 117). Cognitive Psychology (4)

The architecture and dynamics of the human mind:

How we acquire knowledge through perception, repre-

sent and activate it in memory, and use it to

communicate, make decisions, solve problems, and rea-

son creatively. Prerequisite: PSYC 1 or COGS 7. May

not be taken pass/fail. (SS)

COGS 140 (ANTH 140, PSYC 140, MLL 140).

Introduction to Linguistics (4)

Relationship between language and mind; formal proper-

ties of language; language and society; how languages

change over time. May not be taken pass/fail. (SS)

COGS 161. Supervised Research (2-4 credits)

Research under the direct supervision of a faculty mem-

ber in the cognitive science program. Students must

arrange the particular project with a faculty member

before enrolling. Prerequisite: consent of the program

director.

COGS 176 (PSYC 176). Mind and Brain (4)

Perception and cognitive neuroscience as the link

between mental processes and their biological bases.

Visual and auditory perception; the control of action;

neuropsychological syndromes of perception, language,

memory, and thought; neural network (connectionist)

models of mental processes. Prerequisite: PSYC 1 or

COGS 7. May not be taken pass/fail. (NS)

COGS 250 (PHIL 250). Philosophy of Mind (4)

An exploration of the mind-body problem. Are the body

and mind distinct substances (dualism); or is there only

body (materialism); or only mind (idealism)? Other

views to be considered include behaviorism (the view

that behavior can be explained without recourse to men-

tal states), and the view that the mind is a complex

computer. (HU)

COGS 327 (CSE 327). Artificial Intelligence

Theory and Applications (3)

Introduction to the field of artificial intelligence:

Problem solving, knowledge representation, reasoning,

planning and machine learning. Use of AI systems or

languages. Advanced topics such as natural language pro-

cessing, vision, robotics, and uncertainty. Prerequisite:

CSE 15 or 17.

COGS 301. Senior Seminar in Cognitive

Science (4) spring

Integration of the material from cognitive science via

topics chosen by the students. Prerequisite: consent of

program director.

COGS 361. Independent Research (2-4 credits)

Independent research in cognitive science with a faculty

advisor. Students must arrange the particular project

with a faculty advisor before enrolling. Prerequisite: con-

sent of the program director.

COGS 399. Thesis (2-4 credits)

Research during senior year culminating in senior thesis.

Required for majors seeking to graduate with honors in

cognitive science. Students must arrange the particular

project with a faculty thesis advisor before enrolling.

May be repeated for up to a total of 4 credits.

Prerequisite: consent of the program director.

COGS 423 (PSYC 423). Foundations of Cognitive

Science (3)

Survey of fundamental theory and methodologies from

artificial intelligence, linguistics, cognitive psychology,

philosophy, and neuroscience, as well as salient research

problems such as knowledge acquisition and representa-

tion, natural language processing, skill acquisition,

perception and action, and the philosophical question of

intentionality.

COGS 478 (PSYC 478). Ontological

Psychology (3)

Principles and constraints for modeling psychological phe-

nomena. Representation; perception; memory; knowing;

learning; emotions; consciousness; language; rationality.

For Graduate Students

There are two concentrations in Cognitive Science avail-

able for post-baccalaureate students: a Graduate Minor

and a Graduate Certificate. The minor is intended for

students currently enrolled in a degree-granting graduate

program at Lehigh University. By contrast, the certificate

is intended for non-degree students.

Graduate Minor in Cognitive Science

The minor gives graduate students who are enrolled in

Lehigh University degree programs, such as computer sci-

ence or psychology, an opportunity to develop expertise in

the interdisciplinary study of information processing by

humans as well as intelligent machines. Graduate students

investigating mental processes such as language processing,

reading, perception and action, planning, problem-solv-

ing, learning, category formation, or applications such as

artificial intelligence or educational technology are encour-

aged to participate, with the approval of an advisor in

their major program, by contacting the Director of the

Cognitive Science Program. On completion of the pro-

gram, the Director of the Cognitive Science Program will

issue a letter to the student certifying that he or she has

met the requirements of the minor.

Computer Engineering 187

The Graduate Minor requires five graduate level courses:

COGS 423, a graduate seminar, plus four electives from

the list below (or approved substitutions). At least two of

the four electives must be taken outside the student’s

home department. Special topics courses with a cognitive

science emphasis may also count toward the minor, with

the approval of the Cognitive Science Supervisory

Committee. Courses taken toward the minor may also

fulfill requirements of the student’s major program, with

the approval of the major department.

Contact person: John B. Gatewood (Director, Cognitive

Science Program) 758-3814; [email protected]

Graduate Certificate in Cognitive Science

This concentration is intended for people working in

technology-related businesses and other qualified indi-

viduals with an interest in cognitive science. The purpose

of the certificate program is to provide non-degree post-

baccalaureate students an interdisciplinary perspective on

human and machine intelligence.

The Graduate Certificate requires four graduate level

courses: COGS 423, a graduate seminar, plus three elec-

tives from the list below. At least two of the three

electives must be at the 400-level, and the three electives

must be spread over at least two departments.

Contact person: Teri Loew (Coordinator, Psychology

Department) 758-3630; [email protected]

Required Course

COGS 423 (PSYC 423) Foundations of Cognitive

Science

Approved Electives (for both concentrations)

Computer Science:

CSE 413 Robotics and Intelligent Machines

CSE 416 Advanced Issues in Knowledge-based

Systems

CSE 417 Topics in Information Retrieval

CSE 426 Pattern Recognition

CSE 429 Virtual Environments

CSE 431 Intelligent Agents

Psychology:

PSYC 402 Developmental Psychology

PSYC 403 Cognitive Psychology

PSYC 406 Social Cognition

PSYC 443 Seminar in Language Acquisition

PSYC 448 Seminar in Psychology of Language

PSYC 464 Naive Realism in Social Judgment

PSYC 476 Seminar in Cognition

PSYC 478 (COGS 478) Ontological Psychology

PSYC 480 Seminar in Cognitive Development

Philosophy:

(Note: 200-level courses may be taken by graduate stu-

dents if the courses are not in the student’s major.)

PHIL 250 Philosophy of Mind

Sociology and Anthropology:

SSP 402 The Sociology of Cyberspace

ANTH 376 Culture and the Individual

Additional Electives (Graduate Certificate only)

Computer Science:

CSE 326 Pattern Recognition

CSE 327 Artificial Intelligence Theory and

Applications

CSE 331 User Interface Systems and Techniques

CSE 332 Multimedia Design and Development

CSE 347 Data Mining

CSE 348 AI Game Programming

CSE 355 Topics in Intelligent Decision Support

Systems

CSE 360 Introduction to Mobile Robotics

Psychology:

PSYC 307 Seminar in Cognition

PSYC 313 Person Perception

PSYC 314 (SSP 314) Social Cognition and Social

Action

PSYC 317 Psychology of Emotions

PSYC 320 Psychology of Language

PSYC 321 Language Development

PSYC 322 Language in Atypical Populations

PSYC 351 Cognitive Development in Childhood

PSYC 362 Cognition in Practice and Policy

PSYC 365 Human Development in Cross-

Cultural Perspective

PSYC 369 Memory

PSYC 373 Sensation and Perception

PSYC 377 Attention and Attentional Failure

Communication

See listings under Minor Programs in the College of Arts

and Sciences and under Journalism and

Communication.

Computer Engineering

Professors. Henry Baird, Ph.D. (Princeton); Filbert J.

Bartoli, Ph.D. (Catholic University of America); Rick

Blum, Ph.D. (Pennsylvania); D. Richard Decker, Ph.D.

(Lehigh); Bruce D. Fritchman, Ph.D. (Lehigh); Edwin J.

Kay, Ph.D. (Lehigh); Henry F. Korth, Ph.D. (Princeton);

Daniel D. Lopresti, Ph.D. (Princeton); Alastair D.

McAulay, Ph.D. (Carnegie Mellon).

Associate Professors. Liang Cheng, Ph.D. (Rutgers);

Mooi Choo Chuah. Ph.D. (U. of California); Brian

Davison, Ph.D. (Rutgers); Tiffany Jing Li, Ph.D. (Texas

A&M); John R. Spletzer. Ph.D. (U. of Pennsylvania);

Meghanad D. Wagh, Ph.D. (I.I.T., Bombay).

Assistant Professors. Shalinee Kishore, Ph.D.

(Princeton); Zhiyuan Yan, Ph.D. (Illinois Urbana-

Champain).

Undergraduate Programs

Mission Statement for the Engineering Program

The mission of the computer engineering program is to

prepare computer engineers to meet the challenges of the

future; to promote a sense of scholarship, leadership and

service among our graduates; to instill in the students

the desire to create, develop, and disseminate new

knowledge; and to provide international leadership to

the computer engineering profession.

Program Educational Objectives in Computer

Engineering

The graduates of the Computer Engineering program will:

1. Solve technologically challenging problems in com-

puter engineering using their critical thinking skills,

and fundamental knowledge of mathematics, science

and engineering.

188 Lehigh University Course Catalog 2009-2010

2. Attain positions of responsibility in their chosen

careers, including industry, government, medicine,

business, law and academia by applying their comput-

er engineering skills, professional attitudes and ethics.

3. Have the ability to pursue diverse career paths, adapt

to dynamic changes in their chosen profession and

engage in life-long learning.

4. Apply their knowledge of global, societal and envi-

ronmental issues in solving engineering problems.

5. Function effectively on multidisciplinary teams

using their technical knowledge and effective com-

munication skills.

Bachelor of Science in Computer

Engineering

The required courses for this degree contain the funda-

mentals of electronic circuits, signal theory, logic design,

computer architecture, structured programming, data

structures, software engineering, and discrete mathemat-

ics. A strong foundation in the physical sciences and in

mathematics is required. Approved technical electives,

chosen with the advisor’s consent, are selected in prepa-

ration for graduate study or entry into industry

according to individual interests. The program totals 135

credit hours and is offered jointly by the CSE and ECE

departments. The Computer Engineering program is

accredited by the Engineering Accreditation Commission

of ABET, 111 Market Place, Suite 1050, Baltimore, MD

21202-4012 - telephone (410) 347-7700.

The recommended sequence of courses follows:

See Freshman Year Requirements, Section III.

sophomore year, first semester (17 credit hours)

ECE 81 Introduction to Electrical

Engineering (4)

ECE 33 Introduction to Computer

Engineering (4)

PHY 21, 22 Introductory Physics II and Laboratory

II (5)

MATH 23 Analytic Geometry and Calculus III (4)

Sophomore Year, Second Semester (18 credit hours)

CSE 17 Structured Programming and Data

Structures (3)

ECE 121 Electronic Circuits Laboratory (2)

ECE 123 Electronic Circuits (3)

ECO 1 Principles of Economics (4)

MATH 205 Linear Methods (3)

HSS Elective (3)

Junior Year, First Semester (18 credit hours)

ECE 82 Junior Lab (1)

ECE 108 Signals and Systems (4)

CSE 109 Systems Programming (4)

MATH 231 Probability and Statistics (3) OR

MATH 309 Theory of Probability (3)

approved technical elective * (3)

free elective (3)

junior year, second semester (17-18 credit hours)

CSE 216 Software Engineering (3)

ECE 138 Digital Systems Laboratory (2)

ECE 201 Computer Architecture (3)

CSE 261 Discrete Structures (3)

free elective (3)

HSS elective (3-4)

senior year, first semester (18 credit hours)

CREG 257 Senior Lab Project I (3)

ECE 319 Digital System Design (3)

CSE 303 Operating System Design (3)

HSS elective (6)

approved technical elective (3)

senior year, second semester (17-18 credit hours)

CREG 258 Senior Lab Project II (2)

approved technical electives* (9)

HSS elective (3-4)

free elective (3)

*Approved technical electives (15 credits) are subjects in the

area of science and technology. They are not restricted to

offerings in the department of Electrical and Computer

Engineering and the department of Computer Science and

Engineering. One elective must be an engineering science

elective from another department.CSE 42, CSE 130, and

CSE 252 are not an approved technical elective.

Graduate Programs

Graduate programs of study provide a balance between

formal classroom instruction and research and are tai-

lored to the individual student’s professional goals. The

programs appeal to individuals with backgrounds in

computer or information science, in computer engineer-

ing, in electrical engineering, in mathematics, or in the

physical science. Research is an essential part of the grad-

uate program. The research topics are listed in the

departmental descriptions for Computer Science and

Engineering (CSE) and Electrical and Computer

Engineering (ECE) which jointly administer the com-

puter engineering program. Individual courses are listed

in the catalog descriptions of the CSE and ECE depart-

ments.

The Master of Science degree requires the completion of

30 credit hours of work and may include a six credit

hour thesis for Computer Engineering degrees. A pro-

gram of study must be submitted in compliance with the

graduate school regulations. An oral presentation of the

thesis is required.

The Master of Engineering degree requires the comple-

tion of 30 credit hours of work, which includes

design-oriented courses and an engineering project. A

program of study must be submitted in compliance with

the college rules. An oral presentation of the project is

required.

The Ph.D. degree in computer engineering requires the

completion of 42 credit hours of work (including the

dissertation) beyond the master’s degree (48 hours if the

master’s degree is not from Lehigh), the passing of a

departmental qualifying examination appropriate to each

degree within one year after entrance into the degree

program, the passing of a general examination in the

candidate’s area of specialization, the admission into can-

didacy, and the writing and defense of a dissertation.

Competence in a foreign language is not required.

The program has a core curriculum requirement for

graduate students. The purpose of this requirement is to

guarantee that all students pursuing graduate studies in

the department acquire an appropriate breadth of knowl-

edge of their discipline. To satisfy the core curriculum

requirements in Computer Engineering, students need to

complete at least two courses in the computer hard-

ware/architecture area, at least two courses in a second

area, and at least one course in a third area. In each of

Computer Science and Business Program 189

the three areas at least one course must be at the 400

level. The areas are: computer software systems, signal

processing and communications, computer software

applications, and circuits and systems. See

www.cse.lehigh.edu for details about these areas.

Courses from other universities or undergraduate studies

may be used to satisfy these requirements, by petition, at

the discretion of the department faculty. Additional

graduate program information may be obtained from the

program’s graduate coordinator.

Undergraduate Courses

Most courses in the Computer Engineering curriculum

are listed in the CSE (Computer Science and

Engineering) and ECE (Electrical and Computer

Engineering) departments.

CREG 257. Senior Lab Project I (3)

With CREG 258, a complete design experience for

Computer Engineers. Research, planning, and comple-

tion of the initial design for a capstone project that

integrates the many facets of the undergraduate

Computer Engineering program. The project, carried

forward to completion in CREG 258, must involve the

integration of hardware and software within a single sys-

tem. Technical writing, product development, ethics and

professional engineering, and presentation of design and

research.

CREG 258. Senior Lab Project II (2)

Continuation of CREG 257 Complete design, construc-

tion, and testing of projects selected and developed in

CREG 257. Final design reviews and project presenta-

tions; final written report; development issues, including

manufacturability, patents, and ethics. Pre-requisite:

CREG 257 or department approval.

Computer Science and Business

Program

Program Directors. James A. Hall, Ph.D. (Oklahoma

State University) associate professor of accounting and

information systems; Edwin Kay, Ph.D. (Lehigh

University) professor of computer science and engineer-

ing.

The computer science and business (CSB) program is

offered jointly by the College of Business and Economics

and the Computer Science and Engineering department

in the P.C. Rossin College of Engineering and Applied

Science. This carefully crafted 136 credit hour program

integrates technology skills in software development with

a solid background in business and economics. Deep

immersion in both of these areas distinguishes CSB from

programs offered by other universities. At the same time

it is well balanced with approximately one third of the

courses in liberal arts, one-third in computer science,

and one-third in business.

Students enrolled in the CSB program obtain the skills

and training needed to understand business functions

and business related problems, to analyze business-user

information needs, to design computer based informa-

tion systems, and to implement systems solutions within

business organizations. Graduates of the program are

ideal candidates for placement within public accounting

firms, large consulting companies, and startup compa-

nies. This program also prepares students to become the

Chief Information Officers, decision makers, and general

managers of information age corporations.

The four year program constitutes a degree in Computer

Science and in Business, which is jointly awarded by the

College of Business and Economics and the P.C. Rossin

College of Engineering and Applied Science. The CSB

major is accredited in Business (AACSB) and is accredit-

ed by the Computer Accreditation Commission of

ABET, 111 Market Place, Suite 1050, Baltimore, MD

21202-4012 - telephone (410) 347-7700.

Mission for Program

The CSE department’s mission for its Computer Science

and Business program is to provide its students with a

strong education in mathematics, science, business, and

computer science fundamentals and to prepare them to

be able to adapt to future changes in the practice of

Computer Science.

Program Educational Objectives

1. Provide a strong foundation for further formal and

informal study and for adaptation to future changes

in Computer Science.

2. Provide a firm base of science and mathematics

3. Provide exposure to projects that have the elements of

those the students will encounter on the job.

4. Educate the students in the moral and ethical issues

that arise in computer science.

5. Integrate the computer science and business compo-

nents of the CSB program.

Degree Requirements:

The required courses for the CSB degree constitute the

fundamentals of structured programming, discrete math-

ematics, algorithms, computer architecture,

programming languages, software engineering, account-

ing, finance, marketing, management, and economics.

None of the program requirements for the CSB major

may be taken pass/fail.

The requirements are stated below. To view a number of

suggested sequences of courses for satisfying these

requirements see www.cse.lehigh.edu/CSBSEQUENCE.

Total required credit hours: 136

Required Computer Science courses (39-40 credit

hours):

CSE 15 Introduction to Computer Science (4)

CSE 17 Structured Programming and Data

Structures (3)

CSE 33 Introduction to Computer

Engineering (4)

CSE 109 Systems Programming (4)

CSE 201 Computer Architecture (3)

CSE 216 Software Engineering (3)

CSE 241 Database Systems and Applications (3)

CSE 341 Database Systems, Algorithms, and

Applications (3)

CSE 261 Discrete Structures and

Applications (3)

CSE 262 Programming Languages (3)

CSE 303 Operating System Design (3)

CSE 340 Design and Analysis of Algorithms (3)

190 Lehigh University Course Catalog 2009-2010

One 300-level course drawn from the list at

www.cse.lehigh.edu/CSBCHOICE

Required Business courses (34 credit hours):

BUS 1 Introduction to Business I (3)

ACCT 151 Introduction to Financial

Accounting (3)

ACCT 152 Introduction to Managerial

Accounting (3)

ECO 1 Principles of Economics (4)

ECO 29 Money and Banking (3)

ECO 146 Applied Microeconomics (3)

FIN 125 Business Finance (3)

LAW 201 Legal Environment for Business (3)

MGT 186 Supply Chain Operations

Management (3)

MGT 301 Business Management Policies (3)

MKT 211 Principles of Marketing (3)

Required Math and Science courses (26 credit hours):

MATH 21 Calculus I (4)

MATH 22 Calculus II (4)

MATH 205 Linear Methods (3)

MATH 231 Probability & Statistics (3) OR

ECO 45 Statistical Methods (3)

Twelve credits of natural science, such that one course

has an attached laboratory and such that two courses are

in a laboratory science with the first course a prerequisite

to the second course. Suggested sequences can be found

at www.cse.lehigh.edu/SCISEQ

Required CSB courses (9 credit hours):

CSB 311 Computer Applications in Business (3)

CSB 312 Design of Integrated Business

Applications I (3)

CSB 313 Design of Integrated Business

Applications II (3)

Required CSB electives (9 credit hours):

Courses approved by the student’s advisor. See “CSB

TRACKS” below

Humanities and Social Science requirements (18 credit

hours):

ENGL 1 Composition and Literature (3)

ENGL 2 Composition and Literature II (3)

CSE 252 Computers, Internet and Society (3)

An additional 6 credit hours in the humanities (HU).

An additional 3 credit hours in the social sciences (SS).

CSB Tracks

Students can use their CSB professional electives to

develop areas of concentrations or tracks from courses

offered within the CSE department or CBE. In certain

cases, the student’s advisor may also approve courses

from other departments. Some examples of CSB tracks

are presented at www.cse.lehigh.edu/CSBSEQUENCE

Course Descriptions

CSB 311. Computer Applications in Business (3)

fall

Application of computer technology to business prob-

lems. Transaction processing systems that support the

revenue, conversion, and expenditure cycles of manufac-

turing, service, and retail business organizations. Process

modeling, data modeling, internal control, corporate IT

governance, and systems development techniques.

Application of CASE technology to a hypothetical busi-

ness project. Prerequisites: ACCT 152 or ACCT 108,

and CSE 17 or equivalent. Not available to students who

have credit for ACCT 311.

CSB 312. Design of Integrated Business

Applications I (3) spring

Integrated Product Development (IPD) Capstone

Course I. Industry-based business information systems

design project. Information systems design methodology,

user needs analysis, project feasibility analysis of design

alternatives, and integrated product development

methodology. Formal oral and written presentations to

clients. Prerequisite: CSB 311.

CSB 313. Design of Integrated Business

Applications II (3) fall

Integrated Product Development (IPD) Capstone

Course II. This course extends the industry-based project

initiated in CSB 312 into its implementation phase.

Detailed design, in-house system construction and deliv-

ery, commercial software options, and systems

maintenance and support. The practical component of

the course is supplemented by several classroom-based

modules dealing with topics that lie at the boundary of

computer science and business. Formal oral and written

presentations to clients. Prerequisite: CSB 312

CSB 314. International Practicum (1-3)

A faculty led, foreign-based activity to provide students

the opportunity to work on consulting, assurance, or

other IT–related projects with business organizations,

consulting companies, and public accounting firms.

Typical projects: systems analysis and design, systems

configuration and implementation, database design, user

interface design, and internal control assessment.

Students complete written reports and make formal pre-

sentations to client firms. Prerequisites: ACCT 311, or

CSB 311, or permission of the instructor.

Computer Science and

Engineering

Professors. Henry F. Korth, Ph.D. (Princeton), chair;

Edwin J. Kay, Ph.D. (Lehigh), associate chair; Henry

Baird, Ph.D. (Princeton); Donald J. Hillman, Ph.D.

(Cambridge, England); Daniel P. Lopresti, Ph.D.

(Princeton); Roger N. Nagel, Ph.D. (Maryland), Harvey E.

Wagner professor of manufacturing systems engineering.

Associate Professors. Glenn D. Blank, Ph.D.

(Wisconsin-Madison); Liang Cheng, Ph.D. (Rutgers);

Mooi Cho Chuah, Ph.D. (U. of California); Brian D.

Davison, Ph.D. (Rutgers); Jeff Heflin, Ph.D. (U.

Maryland); Hector Munoz-Avila, Ph.D. (U. of

Kaiserslautern, Germany): John R. Spletzer, Ph.D. (U. of

Pennsylvania).

Assistant Professors. Xiaolei Huang, Ph.D. (Rutgers);

Gang Tan, Ph.D. (Princeton)

Adjunct Lecturer. Stephen G. Corbesero, M.S. (Lehigh).

The department of computer science and engineering

(CSE) offers undergraduate and graduate programs of

study in computer science, computer science and busi-

ness, and computer engineering, along with research

opportunities in these fields. Computer science is the

study of computer algorithms, software systems, and the

effective use of computers to solve real-world problems

Computer Science and Engineering 191

and to develop new applications. Computer engineering

is the study of how to develop new computer systems

and how to integrate computers with electronic devices.

Lehigh’s majors prepare students for graduate school or

for any of the different careers in computer science,

computer engineering or computer systems analysis.

Computer science and computer engineering and their

related careers represent, in the US workplace, the largest

field of engineering - larger than all others, including

electrical engineering, combined. More discussion on the

career potential, as well as the most up to date course

offerings can be found on our departmental web site,

www.cse.lehigh.edu.

Lehigh University offers a bachelor of science degree in

computer science from the P. C. Rossin College of

Engineering and Applied Science; the bachelor of science

degree in computer science, and the bachelor of arts

degree with a major in computer science, from the

College of Arts and Sciences; and a bachelor of science

in Computer Science and Business, jointly supported by

the P.C. Rossin College of Engineering and Applied

Science and the College of Business and Economics. A

minor in computer science is available except to students

majoring in computer engineering or electrical engineer-

ing. Graduate study in the department leads to the

degrees of master of science and doctor of philosophy

(Ph.D.) in computer science. In conjunction with the

department of Electrical and Computer Engineering

(ECE), a bachelor of science degree in computer engi-

neering and the master of science and Ph.D. degrees in

computer engineering are also offered in the P.C. Rossin

College of Engineering and Applied Science. In conjunc-

tion with the College of Business and Economics, the

CSE department also takes part in the masters of busi-

ness and engineering (MB&E) program and in the

integrated business and engineering major. Except for

the Bachelor of Arts degree, each of the above programs

is accredited by the Computer Accreditation

Commission of ABET, Inc. 111 Market Place, Suite

1050, Baltimore, MD 21202-4012 and telephone (410)

347-7700.

The undergraduate programs emphasize the fundamental

aspects of their respective areas, with extensive hands-on

experiences for the students. Electives permit students to

tailor their programs according to their interests and

goals, whether they be in preparation for graduate study

or entry into industry. The department highly recom-

mends that students give focus to their electives by

following one of the tracks listed in the department web-

site at www.cse.lehigh.edu/TRACKS. Students have the

opportunity to synthesize and apply their knowledge in a

senior design project. Students are encouraged to

become involved in the many research projects within

the department, and may use independent study courses

and their senior project as a way to participate while

receiving course credit.

The graduate programs enable students to deepen their

professional knowledge, understanding, and capability

within their subspecialties. Each graduate student devel-

ops a program of study in consultation with his or her

graduate advisor. Key thrust areas in the department

include:

Computer Systems Engineering: computer architecture,

computer arithmetic, DSP systems, sensor networks,

robotics, mobile and wearable computing, and network-

ing.

Software Systems Engineering: software architectures,

parallel and distributed computing, object-oriented soft-

ware, middleware, Web-based systems and networked

software systems.

Information Systems Engineering: database, data min-

ing, bioinformatics, computer graphics, optimization,

multimedia systems, expert systems, artificial intelli-

gence, and computer vision.

Both graduate and undergraduate research are encour-

aged.

The department maintains a number of computer labo-

ratories in support of computer science and computer

engineering and the ECE department maintains addi-

tional laboratories supporting the hardware aspects of

computer engineering. The department has research lab-

oratories in vision and software technology, computer

vision, robotics, graphics, computer architecture and

arithmetic, and software architecture. These laboratories

and their associated research activities are described more

completely in the departmental web site

(www.cse.lehigh.edu). While these laboratories are

research oriented, they are also used for undergraduate

projects.

Computer laboratory usage is an essential part of the stu-

dent’s education. The primary department resources

include a network of more than 60 Sun workstations,

file servers, and compute servers running the Unix oper-

ating system. These systems provide an array of software

tools for our students and researchers including pro-

gramming languages (C, C++, Java, Smalltalk, Perl, etc.),

software development tools, software and hardware sim-

ulators, and computer-aided design packages. In addition

to the workstations, the department maintains a collec-

tion of PC-compatible computers for CSE students,

including a set of machines that can be dedicated to

hardware/software projects. Many of these machines are

running Linux or FreeBSD. The department also pro-

vides various application-specific systems, including

multimedia stations with sound and video capture and

generation capabilities, and workstations for image pro-

cessing and visualization. The department’s computers

are connected via multiple high-speed Ethernet, fiber

optic, wireless, and ATM networks, which are in turn

connected to the university’s backbone network. The

university is connected through multiple T1 connections

to the internet. Students are not required by the depart-

ment nor the university to own a personal computer. In

addition to the departmental resources, the university, as

distinct from the department, provides a distributed net-

work of about 75 high-performance workstations, and

about 600 PC-compatible computers in public sites

throughout the campus, and about 80 classrooms

equipped with a PC and a PC-projection system.

A detailed description of the curricular programs follows

with a listing of the required courses and with a listing of

the departmental course offerings. The departmental

courses carry the prefixes CSE for computer science and

ECE for electrical and computer engineering. Students

should consult both listings for courses appropriate to

their career goals.

192 Lehigh University Course Catalog 2009-2010

Undergraduate Programs

Mission Statement for the Computer Science and

Engineering Programs

The mission of the computer science and computer

engineering programs is to prepare computer scientists

and computer engineers to meet the challenges of the

future; to promote a sense of scholarship, leadership and

service among our graduates; to instill in the students

the desire to create, develop, and disseminate new

knowledge; and to provide international leadership to

the computer science and engineering professions.

Program Educational Objectives in Computer

Science and Engineering

• Provide a strong foundation for further formal and

informal study in computer science.

• Provide a firm basis of science and mathematics.

• Provide exposure to projects that have the elements of

those the students will encounter on the job.

• Educate the students in the moral and ethical issues

that arise in computer science.

Bachelor of Science in Computer

Engineering

See catalog entry for Computer Engineering.

Bachelor of Science in Computer

Science and Business

See catalog entry for Computer Science and Business.

Bachelor of Science in Computer

Science

Bachelor of Science in Computer Science degree pro-

grams are available to students through either the

College of Arts and Sciences or the P. C. Rossin College

of Engineering and Applied Science. Both programs are

accredited by the Computing Accreditation Commission

of ABET, 111 Market Place, Suite 1050, Baltimore, MD

21202-4012 – telephone (410) 347-7700. The two pro-

grams are identical in the fundamental requirements in

mathematics and computer science, and the programs

are appropriate for entry into management or industrial

positions. They are also appropriate for continued gradu-

ate study, though students considering graduate study are

strongly encouraged to consider taking part in a research

project during their junior year. The two BS programs

differ in their non-computer science content in that the

students must fulfill the distribution requirements of the

respective college.

The required courses for the degrees contain the funda-

mentals of discrete mathematics, structured

programming, algorithms, computer architecture, com-

piler design, operating systems, and programming

languages. A strong foundation in mathematics is

required. Because many courses are frequently offered,

there are many sequences in which courses may be taken

to satisfy the requirements. Below are the requirements

for the B.S. degrees. See www.cse.lehigh.edu/COURSES

for links to sample sequences and for a list of all CSE

courses, their prerequisites, and when they are offered.

P. C. Rossin College of Engineering and Applied

Science:

Bachelor of Science in Computer

Science

Total required credit hours: 128

Required Computer Science courses (36 credit hours):

CSE 17 Structured Programming and Data

Structures (3)

CSE 33 Introduction to Computer

Engineering (4)

CSE 109 Systems Programming (4)

CSE 130 Technical Presentation (1)

CSE 201 Computer Architecture (3)

CSE 216 Software Engineering (3)

CSE 261 Discrete Structures (3)

CSE 262 Programming Languages (3)

CSE 303 Operating System Design (3)

CSE 318 Automata & Formal Grammars (3)

CSE 340 Design and Analysis of Algorithms (3)

CSE 379 Senior Project (3)

Required Math and Science courses (38 credit hours):

CHM 30 Introductory Chemical Principles and

Laboratory (4)

ENGR 1 Engineering Computations (3)

ENGR 5 Introduction to Engineering

Practice (3)

MATH 21 Calculus I (4)

MATH 22 Calculus II (4)

MATH 23 Calculus III (4)

MATH 205 Linear Methods (3)

MATH 231 Probability & Statistics (3)

PHY 11, 12 Introductory Physics I and Laboratory

I (5)

PHY 21, 22 Introductory Physics II and Laboratory

II (5)

Required approved electives (18 credit hours):

Twelve credit hours of CSE courses, not including CSE

42, and an additional 6 credit hours in areas of science

and technology, chosen by the student with the approval

of the student’s advisor. The department highly recom-

mends that students give focus to their approved

electives by following one of the tracks listed in the

department website at www.cse.lehigh.edu/TRACKS

Humanities and Social Science (HSS) requirements (30

credit hours):

ENGL 1 Composition and Literature (3)

ENGL 2 Composition and Literature II (3)

ECO 1 Principles of Economics (4)

CSE 252 Computers, Internet and Society (3)

An additional 17 credit hours of HSS courses that satisfy

the Engineering College “breadth and depth” require-

ments.

Free Electives (6 credit hours)

College of Arts and Sciences:

Bachelor of Science in Computer

Science

See the distribution requirements of the College of Arts

and Sciences, section III.

Total required credit hours: 126

Required Computer Science courses (40 credit hours):

CSE 15 Introduction to Computer Science (4)

Computer Science and Engineering 193

CSE 17 Structured Programming and Data

Structures (3)

CSE 33 Introduction to Computer

Engineering (4)

CSE 109 Systems Programming (4)

CSE 130 Technical Presentation (1)

CSE 201 Computer Architecture (3)

CSE 216 Software Engineering (3)

CSE 261 Discrete Structures (3)

CSE 262 Programming Languages (3)

CSE 303 Operating System Design (3)

CSE 318 Automata & Formal Grammars (3)

CSE 340 Design and Analysis of Algorithms (3)

CSE 379 Senior Project (3)

Required Math and Science courses (30 credit hours):

MATH 21 Calculus I (4)

MATH 22 Calculus II (4)

MATH 23 Calculus III (4)

MATH 205 Linear Methods (3)

MATH 231 Probability & Statistics (3)

Twelve credit hours of natural science, such that one

course has an attached laboratory and such that two

courses are in a laboratory science with the first course a

prerequisite to the second course.

Required approved electives (18 credit hours):

Twelve credit hours of CSE courses, not including CSE

42, and an additional 6 credit hours in areas of science

and technology, chosen by the student with the approval

of the student’s advisor. The department highly recom-

mends that students give focus to their approved

electives by following one of the tracks listed in the

department website at www.cse.lehigh.edu/TRACKS

Humanities and Social Science (HSS) requirements (30

credit hours):

ENGL 1 Composition and Literature (3)

ENGL 2 Composition and Literature II (3)

CSE 252 Computers, Internet and Society (3)

An additional 21 credit hours of HSS courses that satisfy

the Arts and Sciences College distribution requirements.

Free electives (9 credit hours)

College of Arts and Sciences:

Bachelor of Arts in Computer Science

This program of 120 credit hours is intended for stu-

dents who desire a strong liberal arts program with a

concentration in computer science. The program con-

tains the fundamentals of computer science, including

discrete mathematics, structured programming, data

structures, programming languages, computer organiza-

tion, compiler design, and operating systems.

See the distribution requirements of the College of Arts

and Sciences, section III.

The requirements are listed below. For a suggested

sequence of courses to satisfy this major and for a list of

all CSE courses, their prerequisites, and when they are

offered see www.cse.lehigh.edu/COURSES

Total required credit hours: 120

Required Computer Science courses (36 credit hours):

CSE 15 Introduction to Computer Science (4)

CSE 17 Structured Programming and Data

Structures (3)

CSE 33 Introduction to Computer

Engineering (4)

CSE 109 Systems Programming (4)

CSE 201 Computer Architecture (3)

CSE 216 Software Engineering (3)

CSE 261 Discrete Structures (3) OR

MATH 243 Algebra (3)

CSE 262 Programming Languages (3)

CSE 303 Operating System Design (3)

CSE 318 Automata & Formal Grammars (3)

CSE 340 Design and Analysis of Algorithms (3)

Required Math and Science courses (9 credit hours):

MATH 21 Calculus I (4)

MATH 22 Calculus II (4)

MATH 43 Survey of Linear Algebra (3)

Minor in Computer Science

The minor in computer science provides a basic familiar-

ity with software development and programming,

computer organization, and essential elements of com-

puter science. This minor is not available to students of

the CSE or ECE departments. Engineering students

should note that ENGR 1 plus CSE 16 is a substitute

for CSE 15. The minor requires 16 credit hours, consist-

ing of the following:

CSE 15 Introduction to Computing (4)

CSE 17 Structured Programming and Data

Structures (3)

Plus any three CSE courses, EXCEPT CSE 42,

Principles of Computer Game Design, CSE 130,

Technical Presentation, and CSE 252, Computers, the

Internet, and Society.

P. C. Rossin College of Engineering and Applied

Science

Graduate Programs

Note: For information about graduate degrees in Computer

Engineering, see the catalog entry for Computer Engineer-

ing.

Graduate programs of study provide a balance between

formal classroom instruction and research and are tai-

lored to the individual student’s professional goals. The

programs appeal to individuals with backgrounds in

computer or information science, in computer engineer-

ing, in electrical engineering, in mathematics, or in the

physical sciences. Research is an essential part of the

graduate program. The research topics were listed earlier

in the departmental description.

The Master of Science degree requires the completion of

30 credit hours of work and may include a three credit

hour thesis. A program of study must be submitted in

compliance with the graduate school regulations. An oral

presentation of the thesis is required.

The Master of Engineering degree requires the comple-

tion of 30 credit hours of work, which includes

design-oriented courses and an engineering project. A

program of study must be submitted in compliance with

the college rules. An oral presentation of the project is

required.

The Ph.D. degree in computer science requires the com-

pletion of 42 credit hours of work (including the

dissertation) beyond the master’s degree (48 hours if the

master’s degree is not from Lehigh), the passing of

194 Lehigh University Course Catalog 2009-2010

departmental qualifying requirements appropriate to

each degree within one year after entrance into the

degree program, the admission into candidacy, the pass-

ing of a general examination in the candidate’s area of

specialization, and the writing and defense of a disserta-

tion. Competence in a foreign language is not required.

The CSE department has a core curriculum requirement

for graduate students in each of the degree programs. The

purpose of this requirement is to guarantee that all stu-

dents pursuing graduate studies in the department acquire

an appropriate breadth of knowledge of their discipline.

Computer Science: To satisfy the comprehensives/core,

students need to complete at least two (2) courses in

each of the following four areas, with at least one (1)

400 level course in three (3) of the four areas: Systems;

Compilers/Languages/Software Systems; Theory; and

Computer Applications. Masters students must complete

at least one (1) 400 level course in three (3) of the four

areas. For Ph.D. students, courses eligible to satisfy this

requirement are limited to 400 level courses (excluding

CSE 411) and advanced 300 level courses. For details on

these requirements, see the department’s web site

www.cse.lehigh.edu.

Courses from other universities or undergraduate studies

may be used to satisfy these requirements, by petition, at

the discretion of the department faculty. Additional

graduate program information may be obtained from the

department’s graduate coordinator.

Departmental Courses

Departmental courses are listed under the prefix CSE.

Students should also consult the ECE department listing

because electives can be chosen from either department.

Computer Science (CSE)

For Undergraduate Students

CSE 12. Survey of Computer Science (3)

Topics in computer science, Java programming and web

page design. Includes multimedia laboratory. Not available

to students who have taken CSE 15, 16, or ENGR 1.

CSE 15. Introduction to Computer Science (4)

Introduction to topics in computer science and program-

ming skills in Java and C++. Prerequisite for CSE 17.

Includes multimedia laboratory. No prerequisites. Not

available to students who have taken CSE 12, 16, or

ENGR 1.

CSE 16. Multimedia laboratory of Computer

Science (1)

An introduction to the breadth of computer science

using multimedia: the history of the idea of computing,

problem solving with computers, object-oriented pro-

gramming and software engineering, computer

architecture, operating systems, networks, user interface

design, HTML, Flash, social and ethical issues of com-

puting and artificial intelligence.

CSE 17. Structured Programming and Data

Structures (3)

Algorithmic design and implementation in a high level,

object-oriented language such as JAVA. Recursion, lexical

programs, pointers, data structures, and their applica-

tions. Prerequisites: CSE 15, or ENGR 1, or permission

of the instructor.

CSE 33 (ECE 33). Introduction to Computer

Engineering (4) fall

Analysis, design and implementation of small digital cir-

cuits. Boolean algebra. minimization techniques,

synchronous sequential circuit design, number systems

and arithmetic. Microcomputer architecture and assem-

bly level programming. Prerequisite: Engr 1 or CSE 17.

CSE 42. Principles of Computer Game Design (3)

Modern topics in game design: Finite State Machines,

iterative design process, systems and interactivity, design-

ing rules for digital games, emergence in games, games as

Schemas of Uncertainty, games as Information Theory

Schemas, games as Information Systems, games as

Cybernetic Systems. The course does not count as a

technical elective for majors in Computer Science,

Computer Science and Business, or Computer

Engineering. Prerequisites: none.

CSE 109. Systems Software (4)

Advanced programming and data structures, including

dynamic structures, memory allocation, data organiza-

tion, symbol tables, hash tables, B-trees, data files.

Object-oriented design and implementation of simple

assemblers, loaders, interpreters, compilers, and transla-

tors. Practical methods for implementing medium-scale

programs. Prerequisite: CSE 17.

CSE 130. Technical Presentation (1)

Oral and written communication of information in

computer science. Technical writing; structure, style, and

delivery of oral presentations; use of visual aids.

Presentation topics chosen from the content of CSE 109.

Corequisite: CSE 109.

CSE 190. Special Topics (1-3)

Supervised reading and research. Prerequisite: consent of

the department head.

CSE 201 (ECE 201). Computer Architecture (3)

Structure and function of digital computers. Computer

components and their operations. Computer intercon-

nection structures. Memory system and cache memory.

Interrupt driven input/output and direct memory access.

Instruction sets and addressing modes. Instruction

pipelining. Floating-point representation and arithmetic.

Alternative architectures: RISC vs. CISC and introduc-

tion to parallel architectures. Prerequisite: CSE/ECE 33.

CSE 209. Assembly Language Programming (3)

Design and development of assembly language programs

for computer systems. Interactive input-output, handling

interrupts, system architecture, hardware-software trade-

offs. Evaluation of program efficiency. Prerequisite: CSE

109.

CSE 216. Software Engineering (3)

The software life-cycle; life-cycle models; software plan-

ning; testing; specification methods; maintenance.

Emphasis on team work and large-scale software systems,

including oral presentations and written reports.

Prerequisite: CSE 109.

CSE 241. Database Systems and Applications (3)

Design of large databases: Integration of databases and

applications using SQL and JDBC; transaction process-

ing; performance tuning; data mining and data

warehouses. Not available to students who have credit

for CSE 341 or IE 224. Prerequisite: CSE 17, or consent

of Instructor.

Computer Science and Engineering 195

CSE 252 (STS 252). Computers, the Internet, and

Society (3)

An interactive exploration of the current and future role

of computers, the Internet, and related technologies in

changing the standard of living, work environments,

society and its ethical values. Privacy, security, deperson-

alization, responsibility, and professional ethics; the role

of computer and Internet technologies in changing edu-

cation, business modalities, collaboration mechanisms,

and everyday life. (SS)

CSE 261 (MATH 261). Discrete Structures (3) fall

and spring

Topics in discrete structures chosen for their applicability

to computer science and engineering. Sets, propositions,

induction, recursion; combinatorics; binary relations and

functions; ordering, lattices and Boolean algebra; graphs

and trees; groups and homomorphisms. Various applica-

tions. Prerequisite: MATH 21.

CSE 262. Programming Languages (3)

Use, structure and implementation of several program-

ming languages. Prerequisite: CSE 17.

CSE 265. System and Network Administration (3)

Overview of systems and network administration in a

networked UNIX-like environment. System installation,

configuration, administration, and maintenance; security

principles; ethics; network, host, and user management;

standard services such as electronic mail, DNS, and

WWW; file systems; backups and disaster recovery plan-

ning; troubleshooting and support services; automation,

scripting; infrastructure planning. Prerequisite: CSE17.

CSE 271. Programming in C and the Unix

Environment (3)

C language syntax and structure. C programming tech-

niques. Emphasis on structured design for medium to

large programs. Unix operating system fundamentals.

Unix utilities for program development, text processing,

and communications. Prerequisite: CSE 109.

CSE 302. Compiler Design (3) spring (3)

Principles of artificial language description and design.

Sentence parsing techniques, including operator prece-

dence, bounded-context, and syntax-directed recognizer

schemes. The semantic problem as it relates to inter-

preters and compilers. Dynamic storage allocation, table

grammars, code optimization, compiler-writing lan-

guages. Prerequisites: CSE 109 and CSE 318.

CSE 303. Operating System Design (3)

Process and thread programming models, management,

and scheduling. Resource sharing and deadlocks.

Memory management, including virtual memory and

page replacement strategies. I/O issues in the operating

system. File system implementation. Multiprocessing.

Computer security as it impacts the operating system.

Prerequisites: ECE 201 and CSE 109.

CSE 308. Bioinformatics: Issues and

Algorithms (3)

Computational problems and their associated algorithms

arising from the creation, analysis, and management of

bioinformatics data. Genetic sequence comparison and

alignment, physical mapping, genome sequencing and

assembly, clustering of DNA microarray results in gene

expression studies, computation of genomic rearrange-

ments and evolutionary trees. Credit will not be given

for both CSE 308 and CSE 408. No prior background

in biology is assumed. Prerequisites: CSE 17 or permis-

sion of the instructor.

CSE 313. Computer Graphics (3)

Computer graphics for animation, visualization, and

production of special effects: displays, methods of inter-

action, images, image processing, color, transformations,

modeling (primitives, hierarchies, polygon meshes,

curves and surfaces, procedural), animation (keyframing,

dynamic simulation), rendering and realism (shading,

texturing, shadows, visibility, ray tracing), and program-

mable graphics hardware. Prerequisite: CSE 109 or

consent of the instructor.

CSE 318. Automata and Formal Grammars (3) fall

Formal languages, finite automata, context-free gram-

mars, Turing machines, complexity theory,

undecidability. Prerequisite: CSE 261 or MATH 243.

CSE 319. Image Analysis and Graphics (3)

State-of-the-art techniques for fundamental image analy-

sis tasks: feature extraction, segmentation, registration,

tracking, recognition, search (indexing and retrieval).

Related computer graphics techniques: modeling (geom-

etry, physically-based, statistical), simulation

(data-driven, interactive), animation, 3D image visualiza-

tion, and rendering. Credit will not be given for both

CSE 319 and CSE 419. Prerequisite: CSE 313 or con-

sent of the instructor.

CSE 326. Pattern Recognition (3)

Bayesian decision theory and the design of parametric

and nonparametric classifiers: linear (perceptrons), quad-

ratic, nearest-neighbors, neural nets. Machine learning

techniques: boosting, bagging. High-performance

machine vision systems: segmentation, contextual analy-

sis, adaptation. Students carry out projects, e.g. on

digital libraries and vision-based Turing tests. Credit will

not be given for both CSE 326 and CSE 426.

Prerequisites: CSE 109, CSE 340, Math 205, and Math

231, or consent of instructor.

CSE 327 (COGS 327). Artificial Intelligence

Theory and Practice (3)

Introduction to the field of artificial intelligence:

Problem solving, knowledge representation, reasoning,

planning and machine learning. Use of AI systems or

languages. Advanced topics such as natural language pro-

cessing, vision, robotics, and uncertainty. Prerequisite:

CSE 15 or 17.

CSE 331. User Interface Systems and

Techniques (3)

Principles and practice of creating effective human-com-

puter interfaces. Design and user evaluation of user

interfaces; design and use of interface building tools.

Programming projects using a variety of interface build-

ing tools to construct and evaluate interfaces.

Prerequisite: CSE 17 or consent of the instructor.

CSE 332. Multimedia Design and

Development (3)

Analysis, design and implementation of multimedia soft-

ware, primarily for e-learning courses or training.

Projects emphasize user interface design, content design

with storyboards or scripts, creation of graphics, anima-

tion, audio and video materials, and software

development using high level authoring tools.

Prerequisite: CSE 12 or CSE 15 or ENGR 1 or consent

of instructor.

196 Lehigh University Course Catalog 2009-2010

CSE 335. Topics on Intelligent Decision Support

Systems (3)

Intelligent decision support systems (IDSSs). AI tech-

niques that are used to build IDSSs: case-based

reasoning, decision trees and knowledge representation.

Applications of these techniques: help-desk systems, e-

commerce, and knowledge management. Credit will not

be given for both CSE 335 and CSE 435. Prerequisite:

CSE 327 or CSE 109.

CSE 336 (ECE 336). Embedded Systems (3)

Use of small computers embedded as part of other

machines. Limited-resource microcontrollers and state

machines from high description language. Embedded

hardware: RAM, ROM, flash, timers, UARTs, PWM,

A/D, multiplexing, debouncing. Development and

debugging tools running on host computers. Real-Time

Operating System (RTOS) semaphores, mailboxes,

queues. Task priorities and rate monotonic scheduling.

Software architectures for embedded systems.

Prerequisite: CSE 17.

CSE 340 (MATH 340). Design and Analysis of

Algorithms (3) spring

Algorithms for searching, sorting, counting, graph and

tree manipulation, matrix multiplication, scheduling,

pattern matching, fast Fourier transform. Minimum

time and space requirements are established, leading to

the notion of abstract complexity measures and the

intrinsic complexity of algorithms and problems, in

terms of asymptotic behavior. The question of the cor-

rectness of algorithms is also treated. Prerequisites:

MATH 22 and CSE 261 (MATH 261).

CSE 341. Database Systems, Algorithms, and

Applications (3)

Design of large databases; normalization; query lan-

guages (including SQL); Transaction-processing

protocols; Query optimization; performance tuning; dis-

tributed systems. Not available to students who have

credit for CSE 241 or IE 224. Prerequisites: CSE 17 or

consent of the instructor.

CSE 342. Fundamentals of Internetworking (4)

Architecture and protocols of computer networks.

Protocol layers; network topology; data-communication

principles, including circuit switching, packet switching

and error control techniques; sliding window protocols,

protocol analysis and verification; routing and flow con-

trol; local and wide area networks; network

interconnection; client-server interaction; emerging net-

working trends and technologies; topics in security and

privacy. Prerequisite: CSE 109.

CSE 343. Network Security (3)

Overview of network security threats and vulnerabilities.

Techniques and tools for detecting, responding to and

recovering from security incidents. Fundamentals of

cryptography. Hands-on experience with programming

techniques for security protocols. Credit will not be

given for both CSE 343 and CSE 443. Prerequisite: CSE

342 or CSE 303 or CSE 265

CSE 345. WWW Search Engines (3)

Study of algorithms, architectures, and implementations

of WWW search engines; Information retrieval (IR)

models; performance evaluation; properties of hypertext

crawling, indexing, searching and ranking; link analysis;

parallel and distributed IR; user interfaces. Credit will

not be given for both 345 and 445. Prerequisite: CSE

109.

CSE 347. Data Mining (3)

Overview of modern data mining techniques: data clean-

ing; attribute and subset selection; model construction,

evaluation and application. Fundamental mathematics

and algorithms for decision trees, covering algorithms,

association mining, statistical modeling, linear models,

neural networks, instance-based learning and clustering

covered. Practical design, implementation, application

and evaluation of data mining techniques in class proj-

ects. Credit will not be given for both CSE 347 and CSE

447. Prerequisites: Either CSE 17 and MATH 231, or

BIS 15 and ECO 145.

CSE 348. AI Game Programming (3)

Contemporary computer games: techniques for imple-

menting the program controlling the computer

component; using Artificial Intelligence in contemporary

computer games to enhance the gaming experience:

pathfinding and navigation systems; group movement

and tactics; adaptive games, game genres, machine script-

ing language for game designers, and player modeling.

Credit will not be given for both CSE 348 and CSE

448. Prerequisites: CSE 327 or CSE 109.

CSE 350. Special Topics (3)

Selected topics in the field of computer science not

included in other courses. May be repeated for credit.

CSE 352. Information Technology for

Commerce (3)

Digitization and information integration for business

applications: enterprise resource planning, (ERP); cus-

tomer relationship management (CRM) and supply

chain management (SCM); information innovation

strategies and their dependence on a common technolo-

gy architecture; technical, logistical and cultural

implications of building and operation information inte-

gration systems applications. Consent of instructor.

CSE 360. Introduction to Mobile Robotics (3)

Algorithms employed in mobile robotics for navigation,

sensing, and estimation. Common sensor systems,

motion planning, robust estimation, bayesian estimation

techniques, Kalman and Particle filters, localization and

mapping. Credit will not be given for both CSE 360 and

CSE 460. Prerequisites: Math 205 and CSE 109

CSE 363. Network Systems Design (3)

Design principles and issues of network systems.

Traditional protocol processing systems and latest net-

work processor/processing technologies. Packet

processing, protocol processing, classification and for-

warding, switching fabrics, network processors, and

network systems design tradeoffs. Prerequisite: CSE 342,

or CSE 404, or instructor’s permission.

CSE 366. Object-Oriented Programming (3)

The implementation of object orientation in languages

such as Smalltalk and Java. Objects, classes, inheritance,

graphical interfaces, applets, exception-handling, and

multi-threading. Prerequisite: CSE 17.

CSE 375. Hardware & Software Topics in Parallel

Computing (3)

Introduction to parallel computing, covering both hard-

ware and software topics such as interconnection

networks, SIMD, MIMD, and hybrid parallel architec-

tures, parallel languages, parallelizing compiler

Computer Science and Engineering 197

techniques and operating systems for parallel computers.

Prerequisites: ECE 201 and CSE 303 previously or con-

currently, or consent of the instructor.

CSE 376. Parallel Algorithms (3)

Parallel algorithms for searching, sorting, matrix process-

ing, network optimization, and selected graph problems.

Implementation and efficiency measures of parallel algo-

rithms also considered. Prerequisite: CSE 375 or CSE

340 or consent of instructor.

CSE 379. Senior Project (3)

Design, implementation, and evaluation of a computer

science capstone project conducted by student teams

working from problem definition to testing and imple-

mentation; written progress reports supplemented by

oral presentations. Prerequisite: senior standing.

CSE 392. Independent Study (1-3)

An intensive study, with report, of a topic in computer

science which is not treated in other courses. May be

repeated for credit. Prerequisite: Consent of instructor.

For Graduate Students

CSE 401 (ECE 401). Advanced Computer

Architecture (3)

Design, analysis and performance of computer architec-

tures; high-speed memory systems; cache design and

analysis; modeling cache performance; principle of

pipeline processing, performance of pipelined computers;

scheduling and control of a pipeline; classification of

parallel architectures; systolic and data flow architectures;

multiprocessor performance; multiprocessor interconnec-

tions and cache coherence. Prerequisite: CSE 201 or

equivalent.

CSE 403. Theory of Operating Systems (3)

Principles of operating systems with emphasis on hard-

ware and software requirements and design

methodologies for multi-programming systems. Global

topics include the related areas of process management,

resource management, and file systems. Prerequisite:

CSE 303 or equivalent.

CSE 404 (ECE 404). Computer Networks (3)

Study of architecture and protocols of computer net-

works. The ISO model; network topology;

data-communication principles, including circuit switch-

ing, packet switching and error control techniques;

sliding window protocols, protocol analysis and verifica-

tion; routing and flow control; local area networks;

network interconnection; topics in security and privacy.

CSE 408. Bioinformatics: Issues and

Algorithms (3)

Computational problems and their associated algorithms

arising from the creation, analysis, and management of

bioinformatics data. Genetic sequence comparison and

alignment, physical mapping, genome sequencing and

assembly, clustering of DNA microarray results in gene

expression studies, computation of genomic rearrange-

ments and evolutionary trees. This course, a version of

308 for graduate students requires advanced assignments.

Credit will not be given for both CSE 308 and CSE

408. No prior background in biology is assumed.

Prerequisites: CSE 340 or IE 170 or permission of the

instructor

CSE 409. Theory of Automata and Formal

Grammars (3)

Finite automata. Pushdown automata. Relationship to

definition and parsing of formal grammars. Prerequisite:

CSE 318.

CSE 411. Advanced Programming Techniques (3)

Deeper study of programming techniques, data struc-

tures, backtracking, recursion. Applications of basic

theoretical disciplines such as automata theory and for-

mal language theory. Assignments using a contemporary

programming language. Prerequisite: CSE 17 or consent

of department head. Credit will not be given for both

CSE 109 and CSE 411.

CSE 412. Object-Oriented Programming (3)

Objects, messages, classes and inheritance; the model-

view-controller paradigm. Prototyping the user interface.

CSE 416. Advanced Issues in Knowledge-based

Systems (3)

Advanced techniques and current applications of knowl-

edge-based systems. Emphasis on knowledge engineering

techniques through the development of a substantial sys-

tem. Prerequisite: CSE 414.

CSE 417. Topics in Information Retrieval (3)

Selected topics in the design of advanced retrieval sys-

tems. Prerequisite: CSE 241 or equivalent.

CSE 419. Image Analysis and Graphics (3)

State-of-the-art techniques for fundamental image analy-

sis tasks; feature extraction, segmentation, registration,

tracking, recognition, search (indexing and retrieval).

Related computer graphics techniques: modeling (geom-

etry, physically-based, statistical), simulation

(data-driven, interactive), animation, 3D image visualiza-

tion, and rendering. This course, a graduate version of

CSE 319, requires additional advanced assignments.

Credit will not be given for both CSE 319 and CSE

419. Prerequisite: CSE 313 or consent of the instructor.

CSE 424. Advanced Communication Networks (3)

Current and emerging research topics in communication

networks: network protocols, network measurement,

internet routing, network security, adhoc and sensor net-

works, disruption tolerant networks. Lecture, readings,

and discussion, plus a project. Prerequisites: CSE 342 or

CSE 404, and Math 231, or permission of instructor.

CSE 426. Pattern Recognition (3)

Bayesian decision theory and the design of parametric

and nonparametric classifiers: linear (perceptrons), quad-

ratic, nearest-neighbors, neural nets. Machine learning

techniques: boosting, bagging. High-performance

machine vision systems: segmentation, contextual analy-

sis, adaptation. Students carry out projects, e.g. on

digital libraries and vision-based Turing tests. This

course, a version of 326 for graduate students requires

advanced assignments. Credit will not be given for both

CSE 326 and CSE 426. Prerequisites: CSE 109, CSE

340, Math 205, Math 231, or consent of instructor.

CSE 428. Semantic Web Topics (3)

Theory, architecture and applications of the Semantic

Web. Issues in designing distributed knowledge represen-

tation languages, ontology development, knowledge

acquisition, scalable reasoning, integrating heterogeneous

data sources, and web-based agents.

198 Lehigh University Course Catalog 2009-2010

CSE 429. Virtual Environments (3)

Software and technology of virtual environment systems.

Current research in virtual environments. User tracking,

display, and view rendering hardware. VE application

programming libraries, real-time rendering techniques,

3D model representations, networking systems for dis-

tributed and multi-user environments, 3D user

interaction techniques.

CSE 430. Textual Data Mining (3)

Theory and algorithms for topics in textual data mining

and statistical natural language processing (NLP).

Fundamental mathematics and linguistics of statistical

NLP; probability theory and information theory. Text

mining algorithms and applications. Practical design,

implementation, application and evaluation of statistical

NLP and textual data mining techniques in class proj-

ects. Prerequisite: CSE 347

CSE 431. Intelligent Agents (3)

Principles of rational autonomous software systems.

Agent theory; agent architectures, including logic-based,

utility-based, practical reasoning, and reactive; multia-

gent systems; communication languages; coordination

methods including negotiation and distributed problem

solving; applications. Prerequisite: CSE 327 or equiva-

lent.

CSE 432. Object-Oriented Software

Engineering (3)

Design and construction of modular, reusable, extensible

and portable software using statically typed object-ori-

ented programming languages (Eiffel, C++, Objective

C). Abstract data types; genericity; multiple inheritance;

use and design of soft-ware libraries; persistence and

object-oriented databases; impact of object-oriented pro-

gramming on the software life cycle.

CSE 435. Topics on Intelligent Decision Support

Systems (3)

AI techniques used to build IDSSs: case-based reasoning,

decision trees and knowledge representation.

Applications: help-desk systems, e-commerce, and

knowledge management. This course, a version of 335

for graduate students, requires research projects and

advanced assignments. Credit will not be given for both

CSE 335 and CSE 435.

CSE 438. Software Architecture (3)

Design and description of software architecture for large

systems. Current research topics in software architecture.

Individual projects are a significant part of this course.

Projects may include the design of a new architecture,

reverse engineering the architecture of an existing system,

or investigation of a research topic in software architec-

ture. Prerequisite: CSE 216 or CSE 432 or consent of

the instructor.

CSE 440. Graph Theory and Application (3)

Fundamental concepts of and algorithms for graphs,

including: connectivity, planarity, network flows, match-

ings, colorings, traversals, duality, intractability and

applications. Prerequisite: CSE 340 or consent of

instructor.

CSE 443. Network Security (3)

Overview of network security threats and vulnerabilities.

Techniques and tools for detecting, responding to and

recovering from security incidents. Fundamentals of

cryptography. Hands-on experience with programming

techniques for security protocols. This course, a version

of CSE 343 for graduate students, requires research proj-

ects and advanced assignments. Credit will not be given

for both CSE 343 and CSE 443. Prerequisite: CSE 342

or CSE 303 or CSE 403 or CSE/ECE 404.

CSE 445. WWW Search Engines (3)

Study of algorithms, architectures, and implementations

of WWW search engines. Information retrieval (IR)

models; performance evaluation; properties of hypertext

crawling, indexing, searching and ranking; link analysis;

parallel and distributed IR; user interfaces. This course, a

version of 345 for graduate students, requires research

projects and advanced assignments. Credit will not be

given for both CSE 345 and CSE 445.

CSE 447. Data Mining (3)

Modern data mining techniques: data cleaning; attribute

and subset selection; model construction, evaluation and

application. Algorithms for decision trees, covering algo-

rithms, association rule mining, statistical modeling,

model and regression trees, neural networks, instance-

based learning and clustering covered. This course, a

version of CSE 347 for graduate students, requires

research projects and advanced assignments. Credit will

not be given for both CSE 347 and CSE 447.

Prerequisites: Math 231 or permission of the instructor

CSE 448. AI Game Programming (3)

Contemporary computer games: techniques for imple-

menting the program controlling the computer

opponent; using Artificial Intelligence in contemporary

computer games to enhance the gaming experience:

pathfinding and navigation systems; group movement

and tactics; adaptive games, game genres, machine script-

ing language for game designers, and player modeling.

This course, a version of 348 for graduate students

requires advanced assignments. Credit will not be given

for both CSE 348 and CSE 448.

CSE 450. Special Topics (3)

Selected topics in computer science not included in

other courses. May be repeated for credit.

CSE 460. Mobile Robotics (3)

Algorithms employed in mobile robotics for navigation,

sensing, and estimation. Common sensor systems,

motion planning, robust estimation, Bayesian estimation

techniques, Kalman and particle filters, localization and

mapping. This course, a version of CSE 360 for graduate

students will require an independent project to be pre-

sented in class. Credit will not be given for both CSE

360 and CSE 460. Prerequisites: Math 205 and CSE

109 or their equivalents.

CSE 491. Research Seminar (1-3)

Regular meetings focused on specific topics related to the

research interests of department faculty. Current research

will be discussed. Students may be required to present

and review relevant publications. May be repeated for

credit up to a maximum of three (3) credits. Prerequisite:

Consent of instructor.

CSE 492. Independent Study (1-3)

An intensive study, with report of a topic in computer

science that is not treated in other courses. May be

repeated for credit. Prerequisite: Consent of instructor.

Cooperative Graduate Education 199

Cooperative Graduate

Education

The P.C. Rossin College of Engineering and Applied

Science permits graduate students to spend part of their

research experience in industry, business, or a govern-

ment agency. In general, the external research experience

should be complementary to their graduate studies at

Lehigh University and can count towards their degree

program through ENGR 400 (Engineering Co-op for

Graduate Students) and through thesis/dissertation cred-

its (see below).

Subject to university/federal regulations, when enrolled

in courses at Lehigh University, a student can work for a

maximum of 20 hours at the company/laboratory (co-op

partner). If not enrolled in courses other than ENGR

400 and for thesis (490) or dissertation (499) credits, a

student will be permitted to work full time at the co-op

partner. Full time employment over the summer will also

be permitted. Maintenance of full-time status, however,

requires that during the semester students must be regis-

tered for the minimum number of credit hours as listed

in R&P.

MS/MEng Co-op programs

• ENGR 400 can be taken for a maximum of 6 credits,

with at most 3 credits in any registration period.

• A further 6 credits for thesis/project/independent

study can be part of the industrial experience.

• Minimum of 18 course credit hours, excluding

ENGR 400 and Thesis (490) must be obtained

through Lehigh University

Ph.D. program

• Beyond the master’s program, ENGR 400 can be

taken for a maximum of 9 credits, with at most 3

credits in any registration period.

• In addition to ENGR 400 credits, a maximum of 9

dissertation credits ( 499) can also be obtained as part

of the co-op experience.

ENGR 400. Engineering Co-op for Graduate

Students (3)

Supervised cooperative work assignment to obtain practi-

cal experience in field of study. Requires consent of

department chairperson. When on a cooperative assign-

ment, the student must register for this course to

maintain continuous student status. Limit to at most

three credits per registration period. No more than six

credits can be applied towards a master’s degree and no

more than an additional nine credits towards a Ph.D.

The credits must be taken P/F.

ENGR 452. (CHE 461, ME 442) Mathematical

Methods in Engineering (3) fall

Analytical techniques are developed for the solution of

engineering problems described by algebraic systems, and

by ordinary and partial differential equations. Topics

covered include: linear vector spaces; eigenvalues, eigen-

vectors, and eigenfunctions. First and higher-order linear

differential equations with initial and boundary condi-

tions; Sturm-Louiville problems; Green’s functions.

Special functions; Bessel, etc. Qualitative and quantita-

tive methods for nonlinear ordinary differential

equations; phase plane. Solutions of classical partial dif-

ferential equations from the physical sciences; transform

techniques; method of characteristics.

ENGR 475. Research (1)

Projects conducted under the supervision of a faculty

advisor. Includes analytical, computational or experimen-

tal work, literature searches, assigned readings. Regular

meetings with the advisor to consider progress made and

future direction are required. The course is open only to

graduate students and may be repeated for credit.

Prerequisite: Graduate standing and departmental

approval.

Cooperative (Undergraduate)

Education

See the P.C. Rossin College of Engineering and Applied

Science entry in Section III.

Earth and Environmental

Sciences

Professors. David J. Anastasio, Ph.D. (Johns Hopkins);

Gray E. Bebout, Ph.D. (U.C., Los Angeles); Edward B.

Evenson, Ph.D. (Michigan); Kenneth P. Kodama, Ph.D.

(Stanford); Anne S. Meltzer, Ph.D. (Rice); Frank J.

Pazzaglia, Ph.D. (Penn State); Dork L. Sahagian, Ph.D.

(Chicago); Peter K. Zeitler, Ph.D. (Dartmouth).

Associate Professors. Bruce R. Hargreaves, Ph.D. (U.C.,

Berkeley); Donald P. Morris, Ph.D. (Colorado); Carl O.

Moses, Ph.D. (Virginia); Zicheng Yu, Ph.D. (Toronto).

Assistant Professors. Stephen C. Peters, Ph.D.

(Michigan); Joan M. Ramage, Ph.D. (Cornell);

Benjamin S. Felzer, Ph.D. (Brown); Robert K. Booth,

Ph.D. (Wyoming)

Research Scientists. Bruce D. Idleman, Ph.D. (SUNY,

Albany); Eva Enkelmann, Ph.D. (TU Bergakademie

Freiberg, Germany).

Emeritus Professors. Paul B. Myers, Jr., Ph.D. (Lehigh);

Dale R. Simpson, Ph.D. (Caltech); Bobb Carson, Ph.D.

(Washington).

The Department of Earth and Environmental Sciences

(EES) is Lehigh’s home for teaching and research in the

areas of ecology, environmental science, and geological

sciences. Matters of environmental quality and natural

resources will increasingly impact people and society in

the years to come, and the EES department offers a

range of undergraduate and graduate programs that pro-

vide students with an understanding of Earth’s biosphere,

atmosphere, lithosphere, and hydrosphere, with an

emphasis on how these components function as an inte-

grated Earth system. Training in Earth and

Environmental Sciences can lead to technical and scien-

tific careers in research, environmental consulting,

conservation ecology, government agencies, and the

petroleum industry, and can also serve as an excellent

liberal arts degree that provides context and preparation

for careers such as law, policy, journalism and economics.

Faculty in the EES department have a wide range of

interests and strong reputations in the fields of geology,

ecology, and environmental sciences. In instruction at all

levels, the department emphasizes field experiences, labo-

ratory techniques, and experiential learning, as well as

200 Lehigh University Course Catalog 2009-2010

the development of quantitative and communication

skills. The EES department maintains a relaxed and per-

sonal atmosphere in which students can interact with

faculty in many ways, including seminars, special sym-

posia on topics of the students’ choice, field research,

and departmental field trips.

At the undergraduate level, students may choose from a

B.A. or a B.S. degree in Earth and Environmental

Sciences. The flexible B.A. program provides students an

opportunity to acquire breadth, design a specialized pro-

gram, or find room for a double major. A popular choice

is a double major in Earth and Environmental Sciences

and in Environmental Studies, a major offered through

the Environmental Initiative (http://www.ei.lehigh.edu).

This degree is well suited to students with career aspira-

tions in areas such as engineering, environmental law,

journalism, economics, government, among many other

possibilities. The B.S. degree, while still offering consid-

erable flexibility, provides the more in-depth technical

training required for graduate school and scientific

careers, and is well suited for students seeking science

graduate degrees or employment as professionals in the

earth and environmental sciences.

An accessible minor program is available for students

wishing to add Earth and Environmental Science insight

into any number of other technical or non-technical

degree programs, helping students distinguish themselves

as they prepare to enter today’s fast-evolving job markets

and graduate programs. The department also offers a

five-year program that combines a B.A. or B.S. degree

with an M.S. degree in Earth and Environmental

Sciences.

For students with strong interests in areas such as hydrol-

ogy, water and soil remediation, hazards and associated

geotechnical strategies, EES, in conjunction with the

Department of Civil and Environmental Engineering

(CEE), offers a five-year program leading to dual B.S.

degrees in EES and CEE (students having these interests

may also want to see the description of the B.S. in

Environmental Engineering in the catalog entry for the

Department of Civil and Environmental Engineering).

EES offers graduate training leading to either M.S. or

Ph.D. in Earth and Environmental Sciences. The EES

graduate program is marked by close faculty-student col-

laboration. Graduate students can take advantage of

strong externally funded faculty research programs and

the extensive analytical and computing facilities available

in the department; these facilities and specific EES

research programs are described in some detail on the

EES departmental web page at www.ees.lehigh.edu.

Field Work and Experiential Learning

The EES department offers its students diverse and

abundant field experiences. Supervised internships allow

students at all levels to become engaged in projects

involving cross-disciplinary research, assessment, and

consulting work. The Department runs a nationally-rec-

ognized 4-week long (6-credit) summer field camp in the

Rocky Mountains, which offers intense field training in

hydrology, ecology, geology, and field methods including

computer-based mapping. Students can participate in

the department’s long-standing research programs in lim-

nological and ecological research in the Pocono Lakes

region and in the Lehigh River watershed.

Undergraduate students can also become involved in

forefront research programs. In recent years, students

have played a role in research in the Himalaya, Alaska,

California, Idaho, Argentina, and Italy, in addition to

more nearby sites in the mid-Atlantic states. Most EES

undergraduate- and graduate-level courses include field

experiences in the form of one-day or weekend-long field

trips, and the department sponsors an annual field trip,

for all interested EES members (past destinations have

included Puerto Rico, Iceland, Scotland, Newfoundland,

Argentina, Virgin Islands, and the Grand Canyon).

Programs in Earth and Environmental

Sciences

The descriptions of the following programs in the

Department of Earth and Environmental Sciences are

organized as follows:

Minor in Earth and Environmental Sciences

Bachelor of Arts Degree in Earth and Environmental

Sciences

Bachelor of Sciences Degree in Earth and Environmental

Sciences

Combined B.A. or B.S. and M.S. Program in Earth and

Environmental Sciences

Department Honors in Earth and Environmental

Sciences

Civil and Environmental Engineering and Earth and

Environmental Sciences (Dual B.S. Degrees Program)

Graduate Studies

Requirements for a Minor in Earth and

Environmental Sciences

A minor is designed for students wishing to explore an

area of Earth or Environmental Sciences in conjunction

with a major program in another field for personal devel-

opment or career enhancement.

The Earth and Environmental Sciences minor program

consists of 1-credit integrated introductory laboratory

EES 22 (Exploring Earth), plus other EES courses to

bring the total earned in EES to a minimum of 15 cred-

its. At least 8 of the 15 credits must be satisfied by

taking EES courses at the 100 or higher levels. Natural

science (NS) designated EES College seminars (EES 90)

may be used to meet minor requirements.

Degree Requirements for a Bachelor of

Arts Degree in Earth and Environmental

Sciences

The B.A. degree is designed with flexibility in mind and

is recommended for students interested in a sound liber-

al arts degree that will permit them to bring a scientific

perspective to a wide variety of careers. The degree also

permits students to take a double major, or design a spe-

cialized program tailored to specific topics in the earth

and environmental sciences. Students who choose the

B.A. but are interested in attending graduate school

should talk to their faculty advisor and consult the B.S.

program descriptions to see the type of requirements that

may be required for graduate admission.

University and College Requirements (at least 25

credits)

College Seminar (3)

English Composition (2 courses for 6 credits)

Earth and Environmental Sciences 201

Distribution requirements (at least 2 humanities courses

for at least 8 credits, and at least 2 social science courses

for at least 8 credits)

Junior Writing Requirement:

The ability to express oneself clearly in writing is a criti-

cal skill for success in any chosen career. It is also integral

to the learning experience. Students are encouraged to

take courses that help develop written skills in their

major. To help ensure this, the College of Arts and Sci-

ences requires each student to complete at least one

writing intensive course and receive certification from

the instructor of that course. EES 223 (Structural Geolo-

gy and Tectonics) and EES 250 (Terrestrial Ecosystems)

are designated as writing intensive in EES and fulfill the

junior writing requirement. Students may also fulfill this

requirement by taking writing intensive courses in other

departments (although this is not encouraged).

MATH and Collateral Science Requirements (at

least 8 credits)

• 1 semester of math equivalent to MATH 12 or

above for at least 4 credits.

• 1 additional course from Chemistry, MATH, or

Physics, approved by advisor, for at least 4 credits.

Students interested in scientific careers or pursuing grad-

uate education in the sciences are recommended to take

at least two additional math and collateral science cours-

es chosen in consultation with an advisor.

Required courses for the major (at least 32 credits)

• Gateway Sequence (at least 4 credits):

• Any introductory course in EES (except EES 4

and EES 22)

• Integrated introductory laboratory course (EES

22 – Exploring Earth)

• Core sequence in EES major (12 credits):

• EES 100 – Earth Systems Science

• EES 200 – Earth History

• EES 380 – Senior Seminar in EES

• Writing-Intensive Requirement:

• Completion of a designated writing-intensive

during the Junior year, preferably within EES

(one designated 200-level course will be offered

each semester)

• Major electives (at least 4 courses for at least 16 cred-

its):

• Select from EES or cross-listed offerings at the

100 through 300 levels

• Up to 8 credits of EES internship (EES 93, 293)

and EES research (EES 393) may be used as

major electives (no more than 4 of which can be

EES 93/293).

Free electives

Courses chosen from anywhere in the University’s cur-

riculum, sufficient credits to bring the total to a

minimum of 120 credits.

Degree Requirements for Bachelor of

Sciences Degree in Earth and

Environmental Sciences

University and College Requirements (at least 25

credits)

College Seminar (3)

English Composition (2 courses for 6 credits)

Distribution requirements (at least 2 humanities courses

for at least 8 credits and at least 2 social science courses

for at least 8 credits).

Junior Writing Requirement:

The ability to express oneself clearly in writing is a criti-

cal skill for success in any chosen career. It is also integral

to the learning experience. Students are encouraged to

take courses that help develop written skills in their

major. To help ensure this, the College of Arts and Sci-

ences requires each student to complete at least one

writing intensive course and receive certification from

the instructor of that course. EES 223 (Structural Geolo-

gy and Tectonics) and EES 250 (Terrestrial Ecosystems)

are designated as writing intensive in EES and fulfill the

junior writing requirement. Students may also fulfill this

requirement by taking writing intensive courses in other

departments (although this is not encouraged).

MATH and Collateral Science Requirements (at

least 21 credits)

• Two courses in Mathematics for at least 7 credits

(one must be a course in Calculus)

• One specified course and lab in Chemistry: CHM

25 or CHM 75 (4 credits)

• One specified course and lab in Physics (PHY 10 or

11 and PHY 12) (4 credits)

• To bring total collateral credits to a minimum of 21,

at least two additional courses in Biology (BIOS 41

or above), Chemistry (CHM 31 or above), or

Physics (PHY 13 or above)

Required courses for the major (at least 48 credits)

• Gateway Sequence (at least 4 credits):

• Any introductory course in EES (except EES 4

and EES 22, but including EES 105)

• Integrated introductory laboratory course (EES

22 – Exploring Earth)

• Core sequence in EES major (12 credits):

• EES 100 – Earth Systems Science

• EES 200 – Earth History

• EES 380 – Senior Seminar in EES

• Field Requirement:

• Successful completion of EES 341, or other field

experience approved by EES Field Committee.

Four credits of EES 341 may be applied to major

electives; all 6 credits for this course apply to the

graduation requirement of 120 total credits.

• Writing-Intensive Requirement:

• Completion of a designated writing-intensive

during the Junior year, preferably within EES

(one designated 200-level course will be offered

each semester)

202 Lehigh University Course Catalog 2009-2010

• Major electives (at least 8 courses for at least 32

credits):

• Select from EES or cross-listed offerings at the

100 through 300 levels

• At least four of the courses must be at the 300

level

• Up to 8 credits of EES internship (EES 93, 293)

and EES research (EES 393) may be used as

major electives (no more than 4 of which can be

EES 93/293).

Free Electives:

Courses chosen from anywhere in the University’s cur-

riculum, sufficient credits to bring the total to a

minimum of 120.

Combined B.A. or B.S. and M.S.

Program in Earth and Environmental

Sciences

The Department of Earth and Environmental Sciences

offers a five-year combined B.A. or B.S. and M.S. pro-

gram. The department offers an M.S. degree in Earth

and Environmental Sciences (refer to the description of

Graduate Programs in EES following the listing of

undergraduate course descriptions). Students working

toward the BA or B.S. degrees who are enrolled in this

program complete the full requirements for either degree

and apply some 300- and 400-level course credits taken

as an undergraduate towards the M.S. degree without

additional undergraduate tuition cost. The program is

designed for those students who (1) will have at least

nine credits of appropriate M.S. course credits in excess

of undergraduate requirements completed by the end of

the senior year, including one EES graduate core course

(EES 411, 415, 426, or 484), (2) have completed a min-

imum of three credits of EES 393 (Supervised Research)

as part of the baccalaureate program, and (3) have

demonstrated superior academic achievement.

Application for admission to the program should be

made no later than the beginning of the first semester of

the senior year and must be approved by the depart-

ment’s Graduate Instruction Committee. The application

must include (1) a current baccalaureate degree audit,

(2) the proposed M.S. course program, and (3) a letter

of recommendation from the proposed M.S. thesis advis-

er. Students enrolled in this program should make

application for admission to full-time graduate status

during the first semester of the senior year.

After receiving the bachelor’s degree and becoming

enrolled in the graduate program students in the dual-

degree program become eligible for financial aid

including appointment to a teaching or research assist-

antship or graduate fellowship. Admission to the

program does not guarantee financial aid.

Department Honors in Earth and

Environmental Sciences

Students in either the B.A. or B.S. degree programs may

undertake a program that leads to graduation with

department honors. To participate, the student must (1)

have a minimum major GPA of 3.25 and an overall

cumulative GPA of 3.0 expected at graduation, (2) com-

plete at least four credits of EES 393 (Supervised

Research in Earth and Environmental Sciences), and (3)

prepare a written honors thesis on the EES 393 research

project. To graduate with honors students should (1) file

a written request with the EES undergraduate instruc-

tion coordinator no later than the beginning of the

senior year (preferably during the junior year), (2) con-

stitute an advisory committee of two EES faculty plus

the student’s research supervisor to guide the research,

(3) prepare a research proposal for committee’s approval,

and (4) give an oral presentation of research results and

conclusions at a department seminar before the last day

of classes in the second semester of the senior year. The

committee should approve the research proposal and the

honors thesis by signing the required form and cover

sheet, which will be filed with the Department.

Civil and Environmental Engineering

and Earth and Environmental Sciences

This program is designed for students interested in com-

bining programs in two departments: Civil &

Environmental Engineering and Earth & Environmental

Sciences, leading to two bachelor of science degrees, civil

engineering and B.S. degree in earth and environmental

sciences. Both degrees would be awarded at the end of

the fifth year. This program is one of the dual degree

programs mentioned in the Five-Year Programs section.

The student will have a primary advisor in the P.C.

Rossin College of Engineering and Applied Sciences and

a secondary advisor in the College of Arts and Sciences.

The program provides alternatives for students who may

decide not to complete the dual-degree program.

Students who make this decision prior to the beginning

of the fourth year may qualify at the end of that year for

the bachelor of science in civil or environmental engi-

neering, as well as a minor in earth and environmental

sciences. Also, if a student decides after two years to pur-

sue only a bachelor of science degree in the EES

department, it is possible to complete the requirements

in four years. If the decision to work toward this degree

is made during the fourth year, at least one additional

semester is required to qualify for either B.S. degree.

Interested students should consult with the respective

departmental advisors to create a schedule of courses to

resolve conflicts or if a specified course is not offered

that semester. Required courses and major electives for

the EES B.S. degree are listed in the catalog entry for

EES. Cross-listed EES/CEE courses used to satisfy Civil

Engineering Approved Electives can reduce the individ-

ual semester and total program credits when chosen to

satisfy EES program requirements. Additional useful

information can be found on the web sites

(www.lehigh.edu/~incee/incee.html and

www.ees.lehigh.edu).

Suggested outline of courses for Dual

B.S. in CEE & EES

The freshman engineering year (see Section III) is often

29 credits. The H/SS Advanced Requirement of 13 cred-

its is shown below as two 3-credit courses and one

4-credit course. Other options are possible.

second year, first semester (18 credit hours)

MATH 23 Calculus III (4)

MECH 3 Elementary Engineering Mechanics (3)

CHM 31 **Chemical Equilibria in Aqueous

Systems (4)

EES Gateway Gateway Elective (3)

EES 22 Exploring Earth (1)

CEE 11 Surveying (1)

CEE 12 Civil Engineering Statistics (2)

Earth and Environmental Sciences 203

second year, second semester (18 credit hours)

PHY 21 Introductory Physics II (4)

PHY 22 Introductory Physics Laboratory II (1)

MECH 12 Strength of Materials (3)

EES 100 Earth System Science (4)

MATH 205 Linear Methods (3)

MAT 33 Engineering Materials and

Processes (3)

third year, first semester (17 credit hours)

CEE 121 Mechanics of Fluids (3)

CEE 142 Fundamentals of Soil Mechanics (3)

EES 100-300 level elective (4)

EES 100 - 200 level elective (4)

CEE 10 Architectural/Engineering Graphics

and Design (3)

third year, second semester (18 credit hours)

CEE 242 Principles and Practices of

Geotechnical Engineering (3)

CEE 222 Hydraulic Engineering (3)

CEE 170 Introduction to Environmental

Engineering (4)

EES 200 Earth History (4)

ECO 1 Principles of Economics (4)

fourth year, first semester (18 credit hours)

CEE 117 Numerical Methods in Civil

Engineering (2)

CEE 159 Structural Analysis I (4)

EES 100 to 300 level elective (4)

fourth year, second semester (16 credit hours)

CEE 202 Civil Engineering Planning and

Engineering Economics (3)

CEE 262 Fundamentals of Structural Steel

Design (3) or

CEE 264 Fundamentals of Structural Concrete

Design (3)

CEE **Civil Engineering Approved

Elective (4)

Engineering Course *Engineering Science Elective (3)

EES 100 to 300 level elective (4)

year 4/5 summer (0-6 credit hours)

Optional 1 field course

EES 341 Field Camp in Earth and

Environmental Sciences (6)

fifth year, first semester (15-19 credit hours)

CEE 203 Professional Development (2)

CEE **Civil Engineering Approved

Electives (3)

H/SS Humanities/Social Sciences AR

Electives (7)

Select 1, or 2 courses from below so the total here and

year 4/5 summer is at least 8 credits:

EES Course EES 380 Senior Seminar in EES

EES Course 100 to 300 level elective (4)

fifth year, second semester (18 credit hours)

CEE **Civil Engineering Approved

Electives (8)

CEE ***Civil Engineering Capstone Design

Project Elective (3)

H/SS Humanities/Social Sciences AR

Electives (3)

EES Course (4) 100 to 300 level elective, possibly EES

380 Senior Seminar in EES

*MECH 102, ME 104, or ECE 81.

**CHEM 31 plus thirteen additional credits of CEE

Approved Electives are required; see list on CEE web-site

that includes five CEE/EES cross-listed courses: CEE 279

(EES 259), CEE 316 (EES 316), CEE 320 (EES 320),

CEE 323 (EES 323), CEE 327 (EES 327), and CEE 379

(EES 379).

***Usually CEE 290, but can be a multidisciplinary team-

ing version of CEE 205, CEE 377

In addition to EES 100, EES 200, and EES 380, 8 addi-

tional EES courses, at least 4 at the 300-level are required

for the BS EES degree, including a Field requirement and

Writing-Intensive requirement. Please see elsewhere in the

catalog for details.

A total of 159 to 174 credit hours is needed for both

degrees depending on how many credits in the EES are

satisfied by taking CEE Approved Electives that are

cross-listed with EES courses**.

Undergraduate Courses

EES 002 (ES 002, GCP 002). Introduction to

Environmental Science (3)

Focuses on natural and human-induced drivers and con-

sequences of environmental change. Exploring options

for mitigating and adapting to environmental change in

ecosystems, physical and social systems, we will examine

such topics as biogeochemical cycles, population pres-

sure, ecosystem diversity, productivity and food security,

energy, water resources, climate change, pollution,

ozone, urban issues and sustainability. Stresses interac-

tions and inter-relationships, using a series of case

studies. Intended for any student with an interest in the

environment. Prerequisites: none. (NS)

EES 004. The Science of Environmental Issues (1)

Analysis of current environmental issues from a scientific

perspective. The focus on the course will be weekly dis-

cussions based on assigned readings. Pre- or co-requisite:

3-credit introductory-level (000-level) course in EES (or

the cross-listed EES 105/ASTR 105/PHY 105). Staff.

(NS)

EES 11. Environmental Geology (3)

Analysis of the dynamic interaction of geologic processes

and human activities. Catastrophic geologic processes

(earthquakes, volcanoes, landslides), pollution of geolog-

ic systems, and engineering case studies. Evenson (NS)

EES 012. Ice Age Earth (3)

An investigation of how cold climates and the associated

processes of glaciation and periglacial activity have left

their imprint on the Earth. Prerequisites: none. Evenson.

(NS)

EES 014. Lands of the Midnight Sun (3)

Investigations of polar exploration and science, the envi-

ronment at high latitudes, and cultures of the Arctic, as

well as discussion of issues related to understanding

interactions among extreme environments, global

change, pollution, and indigenous cultures. Lecture, dis-

cussion, classroom activities. Prerequisites: none.

Ramage. (NS)

EES 015. Volcanoes and the Ring of Fire (3)

Volcanoes are a tangible, often breathtaking, reminder of

the inner workings of our restless planet. In this course,

204 Lehigh University Course Catalog 2009-2010

we consider the processes leading to volcanic eruptions,

the significance of volcanism for long-term Earth evolu-

tion, and the hazards volcanoes create for humans,

particularly those living in the circum-Pacific (the Ring

of Fire). Prerequisites: none. Bebout. (NS)

EES 016. Geology of War (3)

Introduction to Earth and Environmental Sciences

through a study of the geologic underpinnings of human

conflict, the geologic influences over the outcomes of

great battles, and the long-term environmental impacts

of war. Instructional format includes lectures, discus-

sions, student projects, and a field trip to Gettysburg

National Military Park. Prerequisites: none. Pazzaglia.

(NS)

EES 021. Introduction to Planet Earth (3)

Processes within the Earth and dynamic interactions

between the solid earth, the atmosphere, and the oceans.

Lectures. Prerequisites: none. Anastasio, Kodama. (NS)

EES 022. Exploring Earth (1)

Laboratory course in methods, data acquisition, data

analyses and scientific communication relevant to Earth

and Environmental Sciences. Case study of anthro-

pogenic change in the Lehigh River watershed. Required

fieldtrips. Pre- or co-requisite: 3-credit introductory-level

(000-level) course in EES (or the cross-listed EES

105/ASTR 105/PHY 105). Anastasio, Yu. (NS)

EES 023. Weather and Climate: Past, Present, and

Future (3)

Introduction to the basic principles of meteorology, as

they pertain to past, present, and future climates. Earth’s

energy balance; cloud formation and precipitation; winds

and atmospheric circulation; regional climatologies; past

warm periods and ice ages in Earth’s history; the latest

ideas about future climate change and global warming.

Students will maintain a weather notebook to enable

them to relate theory to observations from real weather

data. Prerequisites: none. Felzer (NS)

EES 024. Climate Change (3)

Examination and discussion of Earth’s climate history

and the multiple interactions among components of the

climate system, including ice, water, air, land, and vege-

tation; review of the causes of climate change at various

time scales. Assessment of historical and future climate

change and the role of humans in causing climate

change, including global warming. Prerequisites: none.

Yu. (NS)

EES 025. The Environment and Living Systems (3)

The course will provide an introduction to the role of

the environment in regulating living systems at a variety

of scales and levels of organization. The role of the envi-

ronment in regulating and shaping populations,

communities, and ecosystems will be explored. In addi-

tion, the role of the environment will be discussed as it

relates to the origin, evolution, and diversity of life on

earth. Whenever possible, the role of anthropogenic

environmental change will be discussed as it relates to

the above topics. Prerequisites: none. Morris. (NS)

EES 026 (GCP 026). Energy – Origins, Impacts,

and Options (3)

Critical assessment of current and predicted energy

resources used by humans, including their origins, distri-

bution, environmental impacts, and feasibility. Lectures,

discussion, field trips. Prerequisites: none. Zeitler. (NS)

EES 027 (GCP 027). Natural Hazards: Impacts

and Consequences (3)

Earthquakes, volcanoes, tsunamis, floods, and hurricanes

are a natural part of the Earth and our environment.

These events have violent consequences for our lives and

significant economic implications. This course examines

the causes, predictability, and risk mitigation for these

events. We will also consider how natural disasters are

represented by popular media and whether this helps or

hurts public understanding of our dynamic planet and

our relationship to it. Prerequisites: none. Meltzer. (NS)

EES 028. Conservation and Biodiversity (3)

An introduction to the science of conservation biology.

We examine the evolution of biodiversity on earth, spa-

tial patterns of biodiversity, the impact of human

activities on biodiversity, and assess strategies for the

management and conservation of biodiversity. You will

gain the scientific literacy necessary to make informed

decisions about topics such as wilderness preservation,

species conservation, and land use. Prerequisites: none.

Booth. (NS)

EES 031. Introduction to Environmental and

Organismal Biology (3)

Introduction to the structure, function, and evolution of

living systems, with emphasis at the levels of organism,

population, community, and ecosystem. Lectures.

Hargreaves. (NS)

EES 042. The Natural History of Costa Rica (3)

The interaction of ecology, geology, and climate shaping

the natural history of Costa Rica. Population, communi-

ty, and ecosystem ecology; evolution and natural

selection; biodiversity and conservation biology. Offered

during the winter inter-term through Lehigh Study

Abroad, and involving lectures, electronic media, obser-

vations, and field experiences. Prerequisite: Consent of

instructor (applications through the Study Abroad

Office). Limited enrollment. Requires payment of addi-

tional program fee and transportation to Costa Rica.

Morris (NS)

EES 89 [GCP 089]. Geographic Analysis of our

Changing World (3)

This course will introduce students to maps, spatial data,

and electronic tools for geographic analysis.

Fundamental geographic and database concepts will

include map types, spatial referencing systems, map pro-

jection systems, map scale, and database characteristics.

Tools including ArcGIS Desktop software and Global

Positioning System receivers will be used to acquire and

analyze spatially referenced data sets drawn from diverse

sources and disciplines relating to the environment.

Students will use their new skills in geographic analysis

to develop an electronic portfolio, including a question-

based map project. This course will prepare students for

more advanced geographic analysis within the arts,

humanities, social sciences, natural sciences, or engineer-

ing. Lecture-demonstrations. Prerequisites: none.

Hargreaves (NS)

EES 90. Freshman Seminar (3)

EES 93. Freshman Supervised Internship in Earth

and Environmental Sciences (1-2)

Experiential learning opportunities supervised by EES

faculty, including fieldwork, data collection or analysis,

literature review, and information management. A maxi-

Earth and Environmental Sciences 205

mum of two credits is allowed. Prerequisite: consent of

supervising faculty.

EES 100. (GCP 100, ES 100) Earth Systems

Science (4)

Examination of the Earth as an integrated system. Study

of interactions and feedbacks between key components

such as the atmosphere, biosphere, geosphere, and

hydrosphere to permit better understanding of the

behavior of the system as a whole. Response of the Earth

system to human perturbations such as land use and

emissions are explored in the context of predictions of

future environmental conditions and their projected

impacts back on human systems. Lectures, class discus-

sions, and lab. Prerequisites: EES 22. Felzer. (NS)

EES 105. (ASTR 105, PHY 105) Planetary

Astronomy (4)

Structure and dynamics of planetary interiors, surfaces

and atmospheres. Models for the formation of the solar

system and planetary evolution. Internal structure, sur-

face topology, and composition of planets and other

bodies in our solar system. Comparative study of plane-

tary atmospheres. Organic materials in the solar system.

Properties of the interplanetary medium, including dust

and meteoroids. Orbital dynamics. Planets orbiting other

stars. (NS)

EES 115. Surficial Processes (4)

An introduction to process geomorphology and sedi-

mentology that emphasizes the dynamic interactions of

climate, tectonics, and watershed hydrology on the ero-

sional, transportational, depositional, and biological

processes that shape landscapes. Includes a field and

computer-intensive lab. Prerequisites: EES 22. Pazzaglia.

(NS)

EES 131. Introduction to Rocks and Minerals (4)

Hand-specimen identification of the major mineral

groups and rock types. Atomic structure of minerals;

relationship of mineral structure to chemical and physi-

cal properties. Placement of igneous, sedimentary, and

metamorphic rocks into a plate tectonics context.

Introduction to optical mineralogy and x-ray diffraction

techniques. Lectures, laboratories, field trips.

Prerequisite: EES 22. Bebout (NS)

EES 152. Ecology (4)

Basic principles and applications of ecological interrela-

tionships. Examination of ecological phenomena at the

individual, population, community, and ecosystem lev-

els. Impact of human activities on global ecosystems.

Prerequisite: EES 22. Booth (NS)

EES 200. Earth History (4)

Review of the co-evolution of Earth, life, climate, and

the environment, and introduction to the records used

to constrain this history. The course addresses environ-

mental changes at both geologic and human time spans.

Includes laboratory exercises and field trips. Prerequisite:

EES 100. Ramage and Hargreaves. (NS)

EES 223. Structural Geology and Tectonics (4)

Material behavior of rocks and the architecture of the

Earth’s crust. Plate tectonic processes and plate margin

deformation. Introduction to geologic maps and field

techniques. Lectures, laboratories, and one or two week-

end fieldtrips. Prerequisite: EES 115 or EES 131.

Anastasio. (NS)

EES 250. Terrestrial Ecosystems (4)

Ecosystem ecology in the context of the Earth system;

discussion of mechanisms by which terrestrial ecosystems

function, including the flow of water and energy and the

cycling of carbon and nutrients; characterization of tem-

poral and spatial patterns in ecosystem processes and

their sensitivity to environmental and biotic changes;

integration of global scale effects of these processes.

Includes lectures, field trips and laboratories.

Prerequisite: EES 115 or EES 152. Yu. (NS)

EES 293. Supervised Internship in Earth and

Environmental Sciences (1-4)

Experiential learning opportunities supervised by EES

faculty, including data collection or analysis, literature

review, and information management most likely as part

of a long-term, continued project. The student should

submit a work plan that describes activities involved and

credits requested. A maximum of four credits of EES

293 and no more than eight credits combined from EES

93, EES 293 and 393 may be applied to EES B.A. and

B.S. degrees (additional credits apply to free electives).

Prerequisite: consent of supervising faculty.

Advanced Undergraduates and Graduate Students

EES 301. Seismology: Images and Dynamics of the

Earth’s Interior (4) [3 for graduate registration]

An examination of how earthquakes and active source

seismology are used to image subsurface structure and

stratigraphy and to understand tectonic processes.

Fundamentals of seismic wave propagation in the Earth.

Study of earthquakes, reflection, and refraction tech-

niques at crustal, lithospheric, and whole Earth scales.

Practical applications, experiment design, data collection,

processing, analysis, and interpretation. Field and labora-

tory projects. Prerequisites: EES 100, or consent of the

instructor. Meltzer (NS)

EES 306. Geologic Records of Environmental

Change (4) [3 for graduate registration]

This course provides an overview of high-resolution geo-

logic records of environmental and global change, how

they are analyzed, and how they can be used in a variety

of disciplines. Time series analysis, age control, com-

pleteness of sequences, and correlation of records will be

covered. A class project will use acquisition and analysis

of environmental magnetic data to demonstrate how

records of global and environmental change are con-

structed. Prerequisite: EES 100. Kodama. (NS)

EES 316. (CEE 316) Hydrogeology (4) [3 for

graduate registration]

Water plays a critical role in the physical, chemical, and

biological processes that occur at the Earth’s surface. This

course is an introduction to surface and groundwater

hydrology in natural systems, providing fundamental

concepts and a process-level understanding using the

hydrologic cycle as a framework. Geochemistry will be

integrated to address natural variations and the human

impact on the environment. Topics covered include:

watershed hydrology, regional and local groundwater

flow, water chemistry, and management of water

resources. Lectures and recitation/laboratory. EES 22, or

consent of instructor. Peters (NS)

EES 320. (CEE 320) Engineering Hydrology (3)

Rainfall-runoff analysis, overland flow, hydrograph theo-

ries, modeling. Frequency analysis of extreme events.

206 Lehigh University Course Catalog 2009-2010

Flood routing. Design storms. Floodplain hydraulics,

floodplain delineation. Prerequisite: CEE 222. (ES 2),

(ED 1), (NS)

EES 323. (CEE 323) Environmental Groundwater

Hydrology (3) spring

The study of subsurface water, its environment, distribu-

tion, and movement. Included are flow patterns, well

hydraulics, and an introduction to the movement of

contaminants. Design problems are included to simulate

flow with analytical and numerical models, and contami-

nant migration using analytical models. Prerequisites:

CE 121 or CEE/EES 316 or permission of instructor.

(ES 2, ED 1), (NS)

EES 325. Remote Sensing of Terrestrial and

Aquatic Environments (4) [3 for graduate

registration]

Techniques of observing the Earth from air- and space-

borne instruments, including issues of geometry and

scale associated with making measurements, electromag-

netic properties of Earth surface materials, the range of

instruments used to observe the Earth, image interpreta-

tion, and applications of satellite remote sensing to

geological, ecological, and environmental questions.

Lecture and lab. Prerequisites: EES 22, or EES 89, or

consent of instructor. Ramage. (NS)

EES 327. (CEE 327) Surface Water Quality

Modeling (3)

Fundamentals of modeling water quality parameters in

receiving water bodies, including rivers, lakes, and estu-

aries. Modeling of dissolved oxygen, nutrients,

temperature, and toxic substances. Emphasis on water

quality control decisions as well as mechanics and model

building. Prerequisites: CEE 121, CEE 222 and CEE

270. (ES 3), (ED 3)

EES 334. Geosphere Structure and Evolution (4)

[3 for graduate registration]

Synthesis of the state of knowledge of Earth structure

and long-term evolution, with emphasis on the crust and

mantle, and integrating petrologic, geophysical, and geo-

chemical perspectives. Mass and energy transfer through

time among the crust, mantle, hydrosphere, biosphere,

and atmosphere. Petrographic study of selected rock

suites, and introduction to geophysical observations of

the deep structure of the solid Earth. Lectures, discus-

sion, laboratories, field trip. Prerequisites: EES 131 or

consent of instructors. Bebout and Kodama. (NS)

EES 341. Field Camp in Earth and Environmental

Sciences (6) summer.

Integrated, capstone, geological, hydrological, and eco-

logical field experiences using the diverse natural settings

of the Rocky Mountains as the classroom. Major projects

are completed in northwestern Wyoming and southeast-

ern Idaho where the student is challenged to synthesize

field data in solving real geologic and environmental sci-

ence problems. A cross country trip is used to build a

common knowledge base and introduce the student to

the western landscape. Focus is on specific skills that are

difficult to convey in the traditional classroom setting,

among them integrated GIS/GPS computer-based geo-

logic mapping, section measuring, structural analysis,

field geophysics, stream hydrology, landscape ecology,

limnology, and plant identification and physiology. Four

weeks in the field; summer session. Prerequisites:

Consent of Field Camp Director Pazzaglia (students

must apply through the Lehigh Field Camp Program);

declared major in EES; EES 22, and at least four EES

courses at the 100-level or above. Pazzaglia (NS).

EES 352. Limnology (4) [3 for graduate

registration]

Study of inland waters, incorporating physical, chemical,

and biological aspects of the environment. The origin

and morphology of lakes; light, heat, carbon, salinity,

nutrients (N+P), dissolved gases, primary production,

and secondary production. Emphasis is on lakes, but

watersheds, streams and wetlands are also considered.

Relies heavily on laboratory exercises and data analysis to

underscore critical principles in limnology. Prerequisite:

EES 200 or permission of instructor. Morris (NS)

EES 357. Paleoecology and Landscape History (4)

[3 for graduate registration]

Principles and methodologies of paleoecology, with

emphasis on palynology. Applications of paleo-records in

tracing flora, vegetation, climate and landscape history.

Long-term ecological interactions and ecosystem

responses to past environmental change. Field and labo-

ratory experiences in collecting and characterizing

sediments and in processing and interpreting fossil

pollen and other proxy data. Students will explore

regional vegetation, climate and landscape history by

coring and analyzing sediments from lakes and wetlands.

Course requires one or more weekend day-long field

trips. Prerequisite: EES 100, or consent of course

instructors. Yu (NS)

EES 358. Microbial Ecology (4) [3 for graduate

registration]

The role of microorganisms in the environment. Topics

include: Survey of microbial classification, structure, and

metabolism; study of microbes at population, communi-

ty, and ecosystem levels of organization; the role of

microbes in biogeochemical cycles; application of

microbes to bioremediation and resource recovery prob-

lems. Fall (alternate (even) years). Prerequisite: EES 152,

or consent of instructor. Morris (NS)

EES 365. Ecophysiology (4) [3 for graduate

registration]

Properties and processes of organisms for effective acqui-

sition of energy and exchange of heat, water, minerals,

and gases via atmosphere, soil, and water, including

response to extreme environments. Special emphasis on

the role of solar radiation and factors influencing its

interactions with the organisms and the abiotic environ-

ment. Lecture, demonstration, laboratory. Prerequisite:

EES 152 and either EES 200 or BIOS 120. Hargreaves.

(NS)

EES 379. (CEE 379) Environmental Case

Studies (3 to 4)

Case studies will be used to explore the impact of poli-

tics, economics, society, technology, and ethics on

environmental projects and preferences. Environmental

issues in both affluent and developing countries.

Multidisciplinary student teams investigate site charac-

terization; environmental remediation design;

environmental policy; and political, financial, social, and

ethical implications of environmental projects.

Prerequisites: EES 22 or CEE 276 (CHE 276) or per-

mission of the instructor. (NS)

Earth and Environmental Sciences 207

EES 380. Senior Seminar in Earth and

Environmental Sciences (4)

Multidisciplinary capstone seminar in the Earth and

Environmental Sciences. The seminar will emphasize

review of the scientific literature, synthesis, and skills in

written and oral communication. Topics vary with offer-

ing. May be repeated for credit for use as a free elective

that counts towards graduation requirements. Not open

to graduate students. Prerequisites: EES 200, and senior

standing. Staff. (NS)

EES 386. Wetland Science (4) [3 for graduate

registration]

Biophysical structure of wetlands and factors controlling

wetland structure and function. Responses and feedbacks

of wetlands to natural and human-induced environmen-

tal variability. Wetland classification and delineation,

origin and development of wetlands; biotic adaptations

to the wetland environment; wetland hydrology and bio-

geochemistry; wetland vegetation dynamics; and wetland

restoration. Integrated activities with ES 461 (Wetland

Policy and Valuation) provide an interdisciplinary explo-

ration of science and policy issues. Lectures, laboratories,

applied activities, and field trips. Prerequisite: EES 152

or consent of instructor. Not available to students who

have taken ES 461, Wetland Policy and Valuation.

Booth (NS)

EES 393. Supervised Research in Earth and

Environmental Sciences (1-4)

Research opportunities supervised by EES faculty to

carry out a well-defined project, including exposure to

problem definition, selection of research approach, and

communication of results. The student should prepare a

proposal and, if taking 3 or more credits, should present

the results at Undergraduate Research Symposium and

write a research thesis. Both proposal and thesis are filed

with EES Department. No more than eight credits may

be applied to EES B.A. and B.S. degrees (additional

credits apply to free electives). Prerequisite: consent of

supervising faculty. (NS)

Graduate Studies

The Department of Earth & Environmental Sciences

offers graduate programs leading to the M.S. and Ph.D.

in Earth and Environmental Sciences. We offer one

degree to emphasize and reinforce what we feel is an

important and growing trend in ecology, environmental

science, and geology, namely the blending of expertise

and perspectives from many disciplines. Research is an

integral component of all EES graduate programs and

leads to an M.S. thesis or Ph.D. dissertation prepared

under a research supervisory committee and chaired by a

departmental faculty research advisor. An advising com-

mitment by one or more faculty members is required for

graduate admission.

The University has outlined the general academic

requirements for M.S. and Ph.D. students in its

Graduate Student Handbook, and EES has additional

Departmental requirements that must also be fulfilled. It

is the student’s responsibility to insure that all graduation

requirements are met. All graduate students work with

an advisor who chairs the student’s research supervisory

committee. Graduate students make annual presenta-

tions of their research to the Department. All graduate

students are required to take one of the Department’s

four graduate core courses (EES 411, 415, 426, and

484) and five additional courses (15 credits) at the 400-

level. M.S. students complete 30 credits of coursework

and thesis research and orally defend a written thesis that

encompasses the findings and conclusions of their

research. Candidates for the Ph.D. must first pass a

Qualifying Exam, then defend their dissertation proposal

in the General Exam, and finally, orally defend a disser-

tation. For more details beyond this brief summary,

please see the graduate handbook online at:

www.ees.lehigh.edu/graduate/grad_handbook.html.

Research Facilities

Our Department is well equipped for a broad range of

field and laboratory investigations in the Environmental,

Ecological, and Geological Sciences. Our laboratories

and equipment include:

• Petrographic microscopy facilities, rock-crusher, ball

mill, rock saws, and cathodoluminescence and cam-

era lucida digitizing capabilities;

• Laboratory for Ar-Ar, U-Th/He, and fission-track

geochronology including dual UV and CO2 lasers,

VG 3600 noble-gas mass spectrometer, Balzers

quadrupole mass spectrometer, dedicated He and Ar

extraction lines with low-blank furnaces, all under

full LabVIEW automation;

• A stable isotope geochemistry laboratory equipped

with a Finnigan MAT model 252 mass spectrometer

(with dual-inlet and carrier gas capabilities), on-line

peripherals, and off-line vacuum extraction lines, for

O, H, C, and N isotope analyses of silicate minerals

and rocks, carbonates, fluid inclusions, and organic

matter;

• Equipment for sampling groundwater wells as well

as automated samplers for surficial water systems;

• A microbial ecology laboratory (fluorescence and

phase contrast microscopy, bioreactors, UV pho-

totron, walk-in controlled environment chambers);

• Field instruments to characterize solar radiation (UV

bands, PAR, broadband, and high resolution spectral

irradiance with automated shadowband options for

diffuse and direct spectral irradiance), water quality

& optical properties (Biospherical PUV profilers,

YSI datasondes, SCUFA CDOM fluorometers),

weather parameters, and hydrology (precise water

level, precipitation, wind, humidity, atmospheric

pressure, water temperature thermistor chains) plus

automated ISCO rain-triggered samplers for applica-

tions in aquatic and terrestrial ecosystem studies;

• Aquatic ecology laboratory instruments to character-

ize water quality and optical properties (pH, specific

conductance, dissolved oxygen, UV-VIS spectropho-

tometers, scanning fluorometer, Turner

CDOM/Chlorophyll fluorometer, N & P nutrient

analyzer, automated Shimadzu TOC/TN analyzer,

CHN analyzer, scintillation counter, photobleaching

laboratory, low-carbon water purification system);

• An aqueous geochemistry laboratory with a

ThermoElectron X-Series inductively-coupled plasma

mass spectrometer with collision cell, and hydride

generation apparatus that can be coupled to an

HPLC system for species analysis, a Dionex ion

chromatograph for simultaneous analysis of anions

and cations, a Mercury analyzer for analysis of

gaseous and liquid samples, and a Class 100 clean

room for ultra trace sample preparation; additional

208 Lehigh University Course Catalog 2009-2010

instruments including a Waters computer-assisted

ion chromatograph, an ARL 34000 inductively-cou-

pled plasma atomic emission spectrometer, a Netzsch

DTA/TGA instrument, and a high-pressure core-

holder/column reactor for flow-through experiments;

• A sedimentation and soils analysis laboratory includ-

ing equipment for particle size analysis;

• A paleomagnetism laboratory with a magnetically

shielded room, a 2G superconducting magnetometer

and built-in af demagnetizer, Molspin spinner mag-

netometer, a Schonstedt AF demagnetizer modified

to apply pARMs, and an ASC thermal demagnetizer,

and a KLY-3S Kappabridge magnetic susceptibility

system, and an ASC impulse magnetizer;

• A reflection seismology laboratory has equipment

including broadband seismometer linked to global

networks; computer workstations for seismic pro-

cessing, Bison DIFP multi-channel seismograph,

various seismic energy sources, and ground-penetrat-

ing radar;

• Field geophysical equipment includes a Worden

Master gravimeter, and a Geometrics portable pro-

ton precession magnetometer;

• Geomorphology lab including a Topcon total sta-

tion, flow gages, LASCI digitizer, complete airphoto

analysis facility, and a flume facility in the CEE

hydraulics lab. We also maintain several PC and

UNIX computer labs devoted to GIS (ArcGIS) and

large spatial digital topographic databases;

• Paleoecological laboratories with facilities for the

analysis and photo documentation of tree rings,

pollen, macrofossils, and other biological and physi-

cal parameters of environmental archives, including

lake and peatland sediments.

• A sediment core laboratory with facilities for initial

core preparation and core storage, including a walk-

in cold room, a GeoTek MultiSensor Core Logger, a

VirTis AdVantage Freezer Dryer and various corers

(Livingstone, Mackereth, Glew Gravity, Russian peat

Corers);

• A remote sensing laboratory with image processing

software, extensive spatial data collections, as well as

equipment for measuring field characteristics of

important remotely sensed parameters.

Graduate Courses

EES 402 (ES 402) Environmental Scientific

Foundations for Policy Design (3)

This course explores the science behind the environmen-

tal issues that bear on policy process at local, national

and global scales. Scientific concepts will be explored

with the goal of understanding ways in which they can

better inform the policy process at all scales. The course

delves into the science of selected environmental issues

that have either arisen from anthropogenic activities, or

that impact social systems. The course will consist of

readings and discussions of timely topics and one major

class-wide project. Sahagian (NS)

EES 403. Earth System Modeling

The concepts behind computer modeling, including

stocks and fluxes, finite differencing, initial boundary

conditions, feedbacks calibration, validation, data visuali-

zation, Monte Carlo, and sensitivity. We will apply these

ideas to radiative energy balance, atmosphere and ocean

dynamics, hydrological cycling, terrestrial carbon and

nitrogen dynamics, and vegetation biogeography.

Students will learn both agent-based and systems dynam-

ics modeling using NetLogo and Stella, simple box

modeling in Excel, and research-oriented models such as

the NCAR Community Climate System Model using

C++, Fortran and IDL. Felzer

EES 405. Paleo- and Environmental Magnetism (3)

Topics in paleomagnetism and environmental magnet-

ism. Class will design and conduct a research project,

read the relevant literature and write a research paper.

May be repeated for credit. Prerequisite: Consent of

course instructor. Kodama

EES 407. Seismology (3)

Seminar on advanced topics in seismology, review of

classic and current literature. Topics include but are not

limited to: wave propagation in ideal media and earth

materials, seismic imaging of complex structures, tomog-

raphy, modeling, and high-resolution seismic imaging.

May be repeated for credit. Prerequisite: an introductory

geophysics course. Meltzer

EES 411. Physical and Chemical Processes at the

Earth’s Surface (3)

An advanced treatment of physical and chemical process-

es and their interaction in the critical zone. Quantitative

methods, modeling, and process-oriented approaches are

presented in a systems context from the meter, to water-

shed, to continental scale.

Topics include weathering and soils, chemical and physi-

cal fluxes from watersheds, and global hydrology and

erosion. (NS) Peters and Pazzaglia

EES 412. Advanced Fluvial and Tectonic

Geomorphology (3)

Lecture, seminar, lab, and field-based investigation of the

classic and contemporary geomorphologic literature

using the processes and evolution of a watershed and its

dynamic interaction with tectonics as a integrative com-

mon theme. Topics change according to student interest

but typically include active tectonics, fluvial processes,

landscape response to climate, and biogeomorphology.

Include ArcGIS training, field trips, flume analogue

modeling, and class projects with the goal of a published

paper. Prerequisite: EES 21, 25, 115, or consent of

instructor. Pazzaglia.

EES 414. Glacial and Quaternary Geology (3)

Study of the origin, distribution, and movement of pres-

ent and past glaciers. Special emphasis on glacial land

forms and deposits, Quaternary stratigraphy and dating

techniques, periglacial phenomena, and Pleistocene envi-

ronments. Lectures and required field trips. Prerequisite:

Consent of instructor. Evenson

EES 415. Paleoclimatology (3)

Overview of climate system, including energy budget,

feedbacks, atmospheric and ocean circulations, and their

interactions. Earth’s climate history and mechanisms of

past climate variations at various time scales, with

emphasis on late Quaternary. Lectures, presentations and

discussion of recent literature, especially on approaches

to studying climate change and paleo-perspectives on

ongoing climate change. Prerequisite: graduate standing

in EES, or consent of course instructor. Yu.

EES 426. Tectonic Processes (3)

Current models of tectonic processes in intraplate set-

Earth and Environmental Sciences 209

tings and at plate boundaries. Critical evaluations by the

class of the geological, geochemical and geophysical data

sets which gave rise to these models. Prerequisites: gradu-

ate standing in EES, or consent of department

chairperson. Staff

EES 427. Orogenic Belts (3)

Geometry, kinematics, and mechanics of orogenic belts.

Course will explore current paradigms of depositional,

deformational, and metamorphic processes in the Earth’s

crust. Lectures, seminars, and field trips. Topically vari-

able may be repeated for credit. Prerequisite: Consent of

instructor. Anastasio

EES 429. Methods and Applications of

Geochronology (3)

Examination of isotopic techniques used to measure geo-

logic time, and their applications. Lectures, laboratories,

research projects, field trips. Prerequisite: graduate stand-

ing in EES. May be repeated for credit. Zeitler

EES 438. Petrogenetic Processes (3)

Metamorphism, melting, and magmatism in the Earth’s

crust and mantle. Tectonic evolution, crust-mantle heat

and mass transfer, fluid-rock interactions, and rate

processes. Varying combinations of lecture and seminar

formats. May be repeated for credit when topics differ.

May include laboratory and field experience and compu-

tational exercises. Prerequisite: consent of course

instructor. Bebout

EES 453. Advanced Microbial Ecology (3)

Lectures and seminars will focus on topics of current

interest in the microbial ecology of pelagic (freshwater

and marine), sediment, and/or soil environments.

Emphasis will be placed on the role of microbes in

ecosystems level processes such as energy transformations

and elemental cycling. May include laboratory and field

exercises. Prerequisite: graduate standing or consent of

course instructor. Morris

EES 457. Advanced Remote Sensing of the

Environment (3)

Seminars and hands-on, quantitative analysis of special-

ized satellite and aircraft data, including microwave and

hyperspectral sources, will be used to investigate signifi-

cant environmental questions. Students will refine visual

and technical skills for image interpretation, digital

image processing, change detection of environmental sys-

tems, and presentation of spatial data. Required research

project. Prerequisites: graduate standing in EES or per-

mission of the instructor. Ramage.

EES 459. Reconstructing Environmental

Change (3)

Lectures, seminars, and in-depth discussion on current

issues and selected topics in Quaternary paleoecology

and paleoclimatology. Survey of techniques in studying

and reconstructing environmental changes and biological

responses. Use of multiple proxy data from paleo-

archives (e.g., ice cores, lake sediments) to address nature

of past climate variability. Quantitative analyses of paleo-

records to test paleoecological hypothesis (e.g.,

multivariate analysis) and to infer possible causes and

forcing mechanisms of past climate change (e.g., time

series analysis). May include field and laboratory exercis-

es. Prerequisite: EES 415, or consent of course

instructor. Yu.

EES 471. Stable Isotope Chemistry - Theory,

Techniques, and Applications in the Earth and

Environmental Sciences (3)

Distributions of stable isotopes (primarily of O, H, C, S,

and N) in the lithosphere, hydrosphere, biosphere, and

atmosphere. Topics include mechanisms of fractionation

and mixing, advancements in techniques for extractions

and mass spectrometry, and recent applications of stable

isotopes in the earth and environmental sciences.

Lectures, seminars, laboratory sessions. Prerequisite: con-

sent of instructor. Bebout

EES 473. Aqueous Geochemistry (3)

Advanced study of the equilibria and kinetics of chemi-

cal reactions occurring at the earth’s surface. A review of

concepts in geochemistry including activity, solubility,

thermodynamics, kinetics, and oxidation-reduction reac-

tions is followed by readings from the literature. Topics

covered depend on student interest, and have included

chemical weathering, chemical evolution of surface and

groundwater, acid mine drainage, trace element chem-

istry, biogeochemical cycles, and ocean chemistry. May

be repeated for credit. Prerequisites: Graduate standing

in EES or permission of the instructor. Peters.

EES 484. Ecosystem Processes (3)

Theoretical and experimental approaches to understand-

ing physical and chemical influences in aquatic

environments on organisms and their community, popu-

lation, and systems ecology. Field trip. Prerequisite:

graduate standing in EES. Staff

EES 485. Advanced Topics in Geophysics (1-6)

Intensive study of topics in geophysics not covered in

more general courses. May be repeated for credit.

Prerequisites: MATH 21, EES 21, or permission of the

instructor.

EES 487. Bio-Optics (3)

Bio-optics includes the ecosystem role and fate of solar

radiation and the optical properties of biotic and abiotic

components of ecosystems. This course will explore

advanced topics through selected readings, data analysis,

and modeling. Topics will emphasize aquatic ecosystems

and may include optical models, atmospheric factors,

inherent and apparent optical properties, algal fluores-

cence, photoadaptation and photodamage, ultraviolet

radiation, and optical stratification. Prerequisite: EES

484 or consent of course instructor. Hargreaves

EES 490. Thesis Research (1-6)

Masters’ thesis research directed by research committee.

3-6 credits required for EES M.S. programs. May be

repeated for credit. Prerequisite: Permission of research

adviser.

EES 491. Investigations in Earth and

Environmental Sciences (1-3)

Research on a special problem; field, laboratory, or

library study; report required. Credit above three hours

granted only when a different problem is undertaken.

EES 492. Advanced Topics in Modern and

Quaternary Processes (1-3)

Intensive study of topics in Modern and Quaternary

geology not covered in more general courses. May be

repeated for credit.

EES 493. Advanced Topics in Tectonics (1-3)

Intensive study of tectonic processes and products not

210 Lehigh University Course Catalog 2009-2010

covered in more general courses. May be repeated for

credit.

EES 494. Advanced Topics in Ecosystem

Ecology (1-3)

Intensive study of ecosystem processes not covered in

more general courses. May be repeated for credit.

EES 496. Advanced Topics in Geochemistry (1-3)

Intensive study of geochemical processes not covered in

more general courses. May be repeated for credit.

EES 497. Advanced Topics in Paleoecology and

Paleoclimatology (1-3)

Intensive study of paleoecology and paleoclimatology not

covered in more general courses. May be repeated for

credit.

EES 499. Dissertation Research (1-9)

Ph.D. dissertation research directed by research commit-

tee. May be repeated for credit. Prerequisite: Permission

of research adviser.

Eckardt Scholars Program

Director. Ian Duffy, professor of history.

Advisory Council. Mark Bickhard, professor of psychol-

ogy; Gary DeLeo, professor of physics; Robin Dillon,

professor of philosophy; Elizabeth Fifer, professor of

English; Norman Girardot, professor of religion studies;

Michael Kuchka, professor of biological sciences.

For program requirements, see Eckardt Scholars Program,

section III.

389. Honors Project for Eckardt Scholars (1-8)

Opportunity for Eckardt Scholars to pursue an extended

project for senior honors. May be repeated for credit up

to a maximum 12 credit hours. Transcript will identify

department in which project was completed.

Prerequisite: consent of department chairperson.

ECK 81. Eckardt Scholars Seminar (4)

Seminar for first-year Eckardt Scholars. Prerequisite:

consent of program director (HU)

ECK 181. Eckardt Scholars Seminar (4)

Seminar for sophomore Eckardt Scholars. Prerequisite:

consent of program director (HU)

ECK 281. Eckardt Scholars Seminar (4)

Seminar for junior and senior Eckardt Scholars.

Prerequisite: consent of program director (HU)

ECK 282. Independent Study (2-4)

Directed readings for Eckardt Scholars. Pre-requisite:

consent of program director (HU)

Economics

Professors. J. Richard Aronson, Ph.D. (Clark); James

Dearden, Ph.D. (Penn State), chair, department of eco-

nomics; Mary E. Deily, Ph.D. (Harvard); Thomas J.

Hyclak, Ph.D. (Notre Dame); Arthur E. King, Ph.D.

(Ohio State); Vincent G. Munley, Ph.D. (S.U.N.Y.);

Anthony P. O’Brien, Ph.D. (Berkeley); Larry W. Taylor,

Ph.D. (North Carolina); Robert J. Thornton, Ph.D.

(Illinois).

Associate Professors. Shin-Yi Chou, Ph.D. (Duke),

Frank R. Gunter, Ph.D. (Johns Hopkins); Judith A.

McDonald, Ph.D. (Princeton); Todd A. Watkins, Ph.D.

(Harvard).

Assistant Professors. Youngsoo Bae, Ph.D. (Ohio State);

Ernest Kong Wah Lai, Ph.D. (Pittsburgh); Chad

Meyerhoeffer, Ph.D. (Cornell); Stephen Snyder, Ph.D.

(Maryland). Muzhe Yang, Ph.D. (Berkeley).

Active Emeriti. Nicholas W. Balabkins, Ph.D. (Rutgers);

Alvin Cohen, Ph.D. (Florida); Jon T. Innes, Ph.D.

(Oregon); Eli Schwartz, Ph.D. (Brown).

Though economics is variously defined, modern-day def-

initions generally suggest that it is the study of the

principles that govern the efficient allocation of

resources. One of the greatest of the 19th century econo-

mists who did much to uncover these principles

suggested a broader definition. Alfred Marshall described

economics as “a study of mankind in the ordinary busi-

ness of life and a part of the study of man.” This dual

nature of economics, technical and humanistic, is reflect-

ed in the fact that at Lehigh the economics major is

available to students in the College of Arts and Sciences

as well as in the College of Business and Economics.

College of Business and Economics

Major in Economics

Students in the College of Business and Economics elect-

ing to major in economics must take the college core

courses listed in the College of Business and Economics

section of this catalog. They must also take ECO 119

and at least 12 credit hours of 200- and 300-level eco-

nomics courses beyond the core requirements. These

courses may be chosen so as to form an area of special-

ization or to provide a broad exposure to the various

aspects of the discipline. In any case, students should

consult with the major advisor in forming their pro-

grams.

Major in Business Economics

The business economics major prepares students for

careers as business consultants or analysts by teaching the

application of microeconomic theory to the analysis of

critical business issues. The emphasis is on rigorous,

quantitative business analysis through the use of theoreti-

cal and mathematical models and econometric analysis

of data. Students electing the major in business econom-

ics must take the college core courses, ECO 245, ECO

322, ECO 333, two elective courses from an approved

list, and a course involving student research on a prob-

lem identified by an external client. Students should

consult with the major advisor in forming their program.

Minor in International Economics

The minor in International Economics aims to prepare

non-economics majors in the CBE, as a complement to

their major programs, with a fundamental understanding

of international trade, finance and economic develop-

ment, and to develop skills in applying economic

analysis to international economic issues and social prob-

lems. This minor is open to any CBE undergraduate

student not majoring in economics or business econom-

ics.

Minor Requirements: (12 credits)

• ECO 119 – Intermediate Macroeconomic Analysis

(3)

• ECO 339 – International Trade (3)

Economics 211

• ECO 340 – International Finance (3)

• One of the following:

• ECO 209 – Comparative Economic Systems

• ECO 240 – Ireland’s Public Sector

• ECO 303 – Economic Development

• ECO 342 – Economic Development in China

Minor in Public Policy Economics

This minor in Public Policy Economics aims to prepare

non-economics majors in the CBE, as a complement to

their major programs, with a fundamental understanding

of the main economic policy issues and the role of gov-

ernment in markets, and to develop skills in applying

economic analysis to the development of public policies

and potential solutions to social problems. This minor is

open to any CBE undergraduate student not majoring in

economics or business economics.

Minor Requirements: (12 credits)

• ECO 119 – Intermediate Macroeconomic Analysis

(3)

• ECO 353 – Public Finance: Federal (3)

• Two of the following:

• ECO 235 – Labor Economics

• ECO 311 – Environmental Economics

• ECO 312 – Urban Economics

• ECO 336 – Business and Government

• ECO 354 – Public Finance: State and Local

College of Arts and Sciences

Major in Economics

The B.A. major in economics is designed to prepare stu-

dents for graduate study in economics or law, and for

entry into careers in business, government or service

organizations. The requirements for the economics major

are:

1. The economics core (16 credits): ECO 1, ECO 105

or 146, ECO 119, ECO 029 and ECO 045.

2. Collateral calculus courses (7 or 8 credits): MATH

51 and 52 or MATH 21 and 22. MATH 51 and 52

are terminal math classes for students planning on

careers in fields that are primarily non-quantitative.

MATH 21 and 22 are for students considering

careers or graduate programs that require a stronger

math background.

3. Five elective courses in economics at the 200- or

300-level (15 credits). Students may count only two

200-level courses toward the completion of the eco-

nomics major.

4. To take economics courses numbered 100 or above,

students must pass the CBE’s Excel competency

exam; contact the Rauch Center for Business

Communications for more information.

Students are free to select any five economics courses to

meet their elective requirements. However, the faculty of

the economics department has developed recommended

course clusters to meet the differing needs of students.

These include course recommendations for those inter-

ested in:

• Graduate study in economics

• Careers in consulting and financial services

• International economics and global markets

• Political economy and public policy

Interested students are encouraged to consult with the

major advisors in the economics department to select

elective courses that match their needs and interests.

Honors in Economics

Economics majors who wish to be considered for depart-

mental honors must consult with their major advisor

and request such consideration by the beginning of their

senior year. The criteria for departmental honors are:

1. Completion of the major program with at least 33

credits of economics and a grade point average in

those courses of 3.5 or better.

2. Submission of an acceptable research paper to the

Departmental Honors committee. This paper must

report on original research conducted by the stu-

dent. An economics faculty member will direct the

honors paper. Students who successfully complete

the paper will receive independent study credit,

which can be applied to economics major require-

ments. The committee will notify students of

submission deadlines and other requirements for sat-

isfying this criterion.

Minor in Economics

A minor in economics consists of 12 credit hours

beyond ECO 1. Required courses in the minor are:

ECO 105 or 146, 119 or 029, and two elective courses.

Elective courses must be chosen from among the 200-

and 300-level economics offerings with at least one 300-

level elective. ECO 371 does not count towards the

minor. This minor is available only to students in the

College of Arts and Sciences and in the College of

Engineering and Applied Science. Interested students

should contact the minor advisor.

Undergraduate Courses

ECO 1. Principles of Economics (4)

A one-semester course in the principles of economics.

General topics covered are: supply and demand; pricing

and production decisions of firms; the role of govern-

ment in the economy; the determination of national

income; money and banking; monetary and fiscal policy;

and government finance. (SS)

ECO 029. Money, Banking, and Financial

Markets (3)

The nature and functions of money. Global money and

financial markets. The role of commercial and central

banks. Effects of the interest rate, exchange rate, and the

money supply on the economy. Examination and evalua-

tion of current and past monetary policies. Prerequisite:

ECO 1. (SS)

ECO 045. Statistical Methods (3)

Descriptive statistics, probability and probability distri-

butions, sampling, estimation, hypothesis testing,

chi-square tests, simple regression and correlation. (ND)

Note: CBE students may not take MATH 12 as a

replacement for ECO 045.

ECO 64. (AAS 64, HIST 64). Plantation to

Ghetto (2)

Examination of topics in the economic history of African

Americans from the 1500s to the present. Explores the

slave trade, slavery, the post-Civil War South, the black

212 Lehigh University Course Catalog 2009-2010

family, migration, urbanization, and race and poverty.

Prerequisites: ECO 1 recommended. (SS)

ECO 105. Intermediate Microeconomic Analysis (3)

Determination of prices in terms of the equilibrium of

the business enterprise and consumer choice in markets

of varying degrees of competition; analysis of market

structures; determination of wages, rent, interest and

profits. Prerequisite: ECO 1 and MATH 51 or 21 or

their equivalents. Not available for credit to students

who have taken ECO 146. (SS)

ECO 111. (ES 111). Introduction to

Environmental Economics (4)

An examination of the interactions between our eco-

nomic systems and the environment. Pollution as a

consequence of human activity within a framework for

analyzing the relationships between environmental quali-

ty, scarcity of resources and economic growth. How to

develop appropriate policies to deal with these issues.

Prerequisite: ECO 1. (SS)

ECO 119. Intermediate Macroeconomic Analysis (3)

Macroeconomic measurement, theory and policy. The

use of alternative macroeconomic models to analyze the

level of national income, inflation, unemployment, eco-

nomic growth; the balance of payments, and exchange

rate determination. Prerequisite: ECO 1. (SS)

ECO 130. (WS 130) Economics of Race and

Gender (2)

The question of the role of race and gender in economic

decision-making is explored. Various types of discrimina-

tion are discussed in an economic framework and

possible remedies are evaluated. The historical role of

race and gender in the economy is also discussed.

Prerequisite: ECO 1. (SS)

ECO 131. The Canadian Economy (2)

This course analyzes the economic challenges facing the

Canadian economy. Some of the issues include: Canada’s

record on inflation and unemployment; the distribution

of income; the role of natural resources; and Canada’s

health-care and educational systems. Canada’s monetary

and fiscal policies, and Canada’s performance in the

international economy will also be examined.

Prerequisite: ECO 1. (SS)

ECO 134. Evolution of the Automobile Industry (2)

This course traces the development of the automobile

industry from its origin at the turn of the century to the

present. Topics include: the Model T and mass produc-

tion; the development of installment purchases;

dealer-company relations; worker-company relations; the

rise of imports; and the decline of traditional mass pro-

duction. Prerequisite: ECO 1. (SS)

ECO 146. Applied Microeconomic Analysis (3)

The application of economic analysis to managerial and

public policy decision-making. Prerequisites: ECO 1,

MATH 21 or equivalent course, and ECO 045. Not

available for credit to students who have taken ECO

105. (SS) Note: MATH 12 does not serve as a pre-requi-

site for ECO 146.

For Advanced Undergraduates and Graduate

Students

ECO 209. Comparative Economic Systems (3)

An analysis of the micro- and macro-economic, institu-

tion and political dimensions of various economic

systems, with particular emphasis on former centrally

planned economies in their transition to a market orien-

tation. Prerequisite: ECO 1. (SS)

ECO 210. Economic Evolution (3)

Structural changes, social transformation, and sources of

the long-term growth of the U.S. economy. Prerequisite:

ECO 1. (SS)

ECO 231. Business History (3)

The historical context of the development of the modern

business firm in the United States. The roles of entrepre-

neurship, economic structure, technology, and

government policy in the shaping of current business

practices. Prerequisite: ECO 1. (SS)

ECO 234. Labor-Management Relations (3)

An analytical study of the U.S. system of industrial rela-

tions, including the evolution of the labor movement,

worker choice on the issue of union representation, the

process of collective bargaining, and the impact of collec-

tive bargaining on the management of the firm.

Prerequisite: ECO 1. (SS)

ECO 235. Labor Economics (3)

The economic analysis of labor markets, with emphasis

on labor supply and demand, wage and employment

theory, and the economics of unionism and other labor

market institutions. Prerequisite: ECO 1. (SS)

ECO 237. Transportation Economics (3)

The principles of transportation in theory and practice.

Transport models and their relationship to economic

activity. Analysis and evaluation of transportation poli-

cies, industry structure and performance. Prerequisite:

ECO 1. (SS)

ECO 240. Ireland’s Public Sector (3)

This course focuses on public sector programs—and the

method used to finance them—in Ireland and compares

their structure to that found in both the United States

and other countries of Western Europe. Topics include:

the policy of neutrality and military (peace-keeping)

operations; environmental protection; social welfare pro-

grams; health care; education at the primary, secondary

and tertiary levels; and key infrastructure areas such as

urban planning and transportation systems. Special

attention is devoted to how membership in the

European Union has impacted the evolution of these

programs in Ireland. Prerequisite: ECO 1. (Offered only

through Lehigh in Ireland Study Abroad Program). (SS)

ECO 245. Statistical Methods II (3)

This course is a continuation of Economics 045, and

gives broader coverage of linear regression and the con-

struction of empirical models. Topics include the analysis

of variance, simple and multiple regression, index num-

bers, forecasting, nonparametric methods, and statistical

methods for quality control. Prerequisites: Economics

045, or a comparable course in introductory statistics.

(ND)

ECO 246. Business Cycles and Forecasting (3)

A study of short-term business fluctuations, growth,

forecasting and stabilization. Prerequisites: ECO 1 and a

course in statistics. (ND)

ECO 259. Athletic Complex Design (3)

This course is for students to participate in cross disci-

pline Integrated Learning Experience (ILE) research

projects. The twin purposes of the course are to provide

real-world, team-oriented learning experiences and to

Economics 213

apply economic analysis in evaluating the costs and ben-

efits of newly proposed, or renovations and expansions

of, existing athletic facilities. Prerequisite: ECO 105 or

ECO 146. (SS)

ECO 273. Community Consulting Practicum (3)

This course involves teams of students in community-

oriented research projects. The twin purposes of the

course are to provide real-world, team-oriented learning

experiences and to provide a resource for local govern-

ments and community organizations that would allow

them to draw upon the expertise of our students as con-

sultants in analyzing problems and formulating policy.

Prerequisite: ECO 1. (SS)

ECO 303. Economic Development (3)

Economic development, economic growth and their

political environment are discussed in detail. The princi-

pal economic development theories are examined. These

theories are used to examine a variety of development

issues including planning, poverty, rural-urban relation-

ships, physical and human capital accumulation,

international trade, and the environment. Emphasis on

institutions and development policy. Prerequisite: ECO

105 or 146. (SS)

ECO 311. Environmental Economics (3)

Resource allocation implications of environmental degra-

dation. Analysis of the benefits and costs associated with

alternative pollution control programs and strategies.

Prerequisite: ECO 105 or 146. (SS)

ECO 312. Urban Economics (3)

The analysis of economic problems related to urban

areas; the nature and function of cities; the economic

and spatial characteristics of urban activity. Prerequisite:

ECO 105 or 146. (SS)

ECO 313. History of Economic Thought (3)

A survey of the important historical writings that form

the foundation of today’s mainstream economic theory.

Emphasis is on the period from 1750 to 1950 and on

such notable economists as Smith, Ricardo, Walras,

Marshall, and Keynes. Prerequisite: ECO 105 or 146 or

119. (SS)

ECO 314. Energy Economics (3)

The economic theory of natural resource allocation over

time. Economics of exhaustible and renewable resources.

Environmental effects of energy production and con-

sumption. Government regulation of the energy

industry. Computer models for energy system forecasting

and planning. Prerequisite: ECO 105 or 146. (SS)

ECO 315. Industrial Organization (3)

Structure of American industry. Development of eco-

nomic models to describe behavior in markets with

varying degrees of competition. Technological innova-

tion, relationship between industry concentration and

rates of return on capital, role of information and adver-

tising, dynamics of monopoly and oligopoly pricing.

Prerequisite: ECO 105 or 146. (SS)

ECO 322. Competitor and Market Analysis (3)

Competitors, partners, and firms and governments

strategically interact. This course uses game theory to

analyze issues like pricing by competitors, vertical inte-

gration and contracting issues in supplier-buyer

relationships, collective actions and joint ventures, and

research and development programs. Students use both

mathematical models and cases to analyze these interac-

tions. Prerequisites: ECO 105 or 146, ECO 045 and

MATH 21, 31 or 51. (SS)

ECO 323. Evolution of Business Strategy (3)

Analyzes how business firms have adapted to changes in

technology, relative factor prices, globalization, and the

extent of government intervention in the market.

Material will be presented through discussion of case

studies from the nineteenth and twentieth centuries.

Prerequisite: ECO 1. (SS)

ECO 324. The Economics of the Sports

Industry (3)

This course analyzes the role of basic economic forces in

shaping today’s sports industry. Topics include: competi-

tion in the market for professional franchises; public

subsidies for stadiums and arenas; compensation of pro-

fessional athletes; the NCAA as an economic enterprise;

and the impact of athletics on a university’s budget.

Prerequisite: ECO 105 or 146. (SS)

ECO 325 (MKT 325). Quantitative Marketing

Analysis (3)

This course explores economics and management science

approaches to improve marketing decision making and

marketing interactions in such areas as strategic market-

ing, e-marketing, advertising, pricing, sales force

management, sales promotions, new products, and direct

marketing. The development, implementation, and use

of quantitative models are emphasized. Cases are used to

illustrate how these models can be applied. Students

have the opportunity to learn how to use and evaluate

models through spreadsheet-based assignments.

Prerequisites: MKT 211, ECO 045, ECO 105 or 146,

and MATH 21, 31 or 51. (SS)

ECO 327. Real Options and Investment

Strategy (3)

This is an introductory course in financial economics. It

focuses on the principles underlying financial decision-

making, with applications to stocks, bonds, and real

estate. It is intended for students with strong technical

backgrounds who are comfortable with mathematical

arguments. The course is divided into three main parts:

deterministic finance, single-period uncertainty finance,

and options theory. Prerequisite: FIN 323. (ND)

ECO 332. Monetary-Fiscal Policy (3)

Monetary, credit and fiscal policies of governments and

central banks with particular reference to the policies of

the United States Treasury and the Federal Reserve

System. Prerequisite: ECO 119 or 029. (SS)

ECO 333. The Economics of Business

Decisions (3)

Students analyze business problems using economic logic

and techniques like mathematical programming, margin-

al analysis, and decision making under risk and

uncertainty. New topics like asymmetric information and

the analysis of organizations are introduced. Case studies

are emphasized. Prerequisites: ECO 105 or 146, ECO

045, ECO 245, and MATH 21, 31 or 51. (SS)

ECO 336. Business and Government (3)

Analysis of government involvement in the private sec-

tor. The problems of monopoly, oligopoly, and

externalities in production and consumption. Optimum

responses to market failure and analysis of the perform-

ance of actual government policies. Prerequisite: ECO

105 or 146. (SS)

214 Lehigh University Course Catalog 2009-2010

ECO 339. International Trade (3)

The theory of international trade; the theory of tariffs;

United States commercial policies; the impact of growth

and development of the world economy. Prerequisite:

ECO 105 or 146. (SS)

ECO 340. International Finance (3)

Analysis of balance of payments and disturbances and

adjustment in the international economy; international

monetary policies. Prerequisite: ECO 119 or 029. (SS)

ECO 342. Economic Development in China (3)

An examination of the economic, political and social

forces at work in the development process in China since

1949. Special emphasis on post-1978 market reforms,

the rural-urban divergence, the role of foreign trade and

investment, the accumulation of human capital, and the

deterioration of the physical environment. Course con-

cludes with a detailed discussion of possible futures of

the Chinese economy. (SS)

ECO 343. European Economic Integration (3)

Study of the problems of economic integration through-

out Europe, especially in the Post-Cold War era among

Western, Central and Eastern European nations.

Prerequisite: ECO 209 (may be taken concurrently with

permission of instructor). (SS)

ECO 346. Numerical Methods for Business

Decisions (3)

This course provides a connection between textbook eco-

nomics/finance and the problems of real world business.

It emphasizes practical numerical methods rather than

mathematical proofs. Problems in finance are empha-

sized. The course teaches students how to use EXCEL

macros and advanced VBA (the industry standard) pro-

gramming techniques to model and manipulate financial

data. Prerequisite: FIN 323. (ND)

ECO 351. Introduction to Mathematical

Economics (3)

Application of mathematical techniques to economic

problems of optimization and to economic models.

Prerequisites: ECO 105 or 146 and 119 and MATH 21,

31 or 51. (ND)

ECO 352. Advanced Statistical Methods (3)

Advanced probability theory, probability and sampling

distributions, and classical statistical inference. Index

numbers, multiple regression, correlation, and analysis of

variance. Spectral analysis, Box-Jenkins auto-regressive

and moving average stochastic processes. Prerequisites:

ECO 105 or 146 and a course in statistics. (ND)

ECO 353. Public Finance: Federal (3)

A course dealing with the expenditures and revenues of

the federal government. Major topics include public

choice theory, benefit-cost analysis, the theory of public

goods, the economics of taxation, and the design of tax

structures. Prerequisite: ECO 105 or 146. (SS)

ECO 354. Public Finance: State and Local (3)

A course dealing with the expenditures and revenues of

state and local governments. Major topics include the

theory of fiscal federalism, intergovernmental fiscal trans-

fers, the design of state and local tax structures, capital

budgeting and debt finance, pension funds, and school

finance. Prerequisite: ECO 105 or 146. (SS)

ECO 357. Econometrics (3)

Problems in construction, evaluation and use of econo-

metric models. Applications based on research and case

studies. Prerequisites: ECO 105 or 146 or 119, ECO

045 or equivalent course in statistics, and ECO 245.

(ND)

ECO 358 (IE 358). Game Theory (3)

A mathematical analysis of how people interact in strate-

gic situations. Applications include strategic pricing,

negotiations, voting, contracts and economic incentives,

and environmental issues. Prerequisites: ECO 105 or

146 and MATH 21, 31 or 51. (SS)

ECO 362. Martindale Research Seminar (1-3)

This course prepares students to undertake research on

various topics in business and/or economics. Admission

to this course is limited to student associates of the

Martindale Center for the Study of Private Enterprise.

Consent of the instructor is required. Course may be

repeated for credit up to a maximum total number of 3

hours credit. This course does not count towards an

Economics major or minor. (ND)

ECO 368. Health Economics (3)

Supply and demand in the health service markets for the

U.S. and Canada. Unique features of health care which

interfere with competitive market allocation and pricing.

Overview of insurance systems and other payment meth-

ods. Prerequisites: ECO 105 or 146 and a course in

statistics. (SS)

ECO 371. Special Topics in Economics (3)

Study in various fields of economics, designed for the

student who has a special interest in a subject not

included in the regular course schedule or for the stu-

dent interested in pursuing a significant supervised

research project in economics. Students interested in

enrolling in this course must submit a written proposal

to a member of the faculty with expertise in the pro-

posed subject area and to the department chair prior to

the registration period for the relevant semester.

Prerequisite: ECO 105 or 146 or 119. This course may

count towards the ECO major only once; it does not

count towards the ECO minor. (ND)

ECO 401. Basic Statistics for Business and

Economics (3)

Descriptive statistics, probability and probability distri-

butions, estimation, hypothesis testing, correlation and

regression, chi-square analysis, and analysis of variance.

Computer applications.

ECO 402. Managerial Economics (3)

Application of economic and statistical analysis to mana-

gerial decision-making. Business and economic

forecasting. Empirical estimation of demand, produc-

tion, and cost functions. Resource allocation and pricing

strategies in various market structures. Decisions under

risk and uncertainty. Government regulation of business.

Cases. Prerequisite: Calculus and ECO 401 or equiva-

lent.

ECO 404. Technology, Trade and Growth (1)

Overview of the role of technology in economic systems.

Productivity and growth effects, relationships to industry

structure, impacts on international trade and competi-

tiveness. Prerequisite: intended to be taken concurrently

with ECO 402.

ECO 411. History of Economic Thought (3)

Selected topics in the history of economic thought, with

Economics 215

special attention to the origins of modern economic the-

ory. Prerequisite: a graduate course in economic theory.

ECO 412. Mathematical Economics (3)

Applications of various mathematical techniques in the

formation and development of economic concepts and

theories. Prerequisite: consent of the instructor.

ECO 413. Advanced Microeconomic Analysis (3)

A survey of methods of decision-making at the micro-

economic level; price theory and econometric

applications. Prerequisite: ECO 402 or equivalent.

ECO 414. Advanced Topics in Microeconomics (3)

Resource allocation and price determination. Theories of

choice of consumers, firms, and resource owners under

various market forms. Prerequisites: ECO 401 and ECO

413 or equivalents.

ECO 415. Econometrics (3)

Computer applications of standard econometric tech-

niques using regression analysis in a single-equation

context. Discussion of problems of multicollinearity, het-

eroscedasticity and autocorrelation. An introduction to

simultaneous equation models, identification and estima-

tion problems. Prerequisite: ECO 401 or equivalent.

ECO 416. Econometric Theory (3)

Mathematical and statistical specification of economic

models. Statistical estimation and tests of parameters in

single and multiple equation models. Prediction and

tests of structural changes. Prerequisites: ECO 401 (or

equivalent) and calculus.

ECO 417. Advanced Macroeconomic Analysis (3)

Macroeconomic theory and policy. Emphasis on theoret-

ical models and policy implications.

ECO 418. Advanced Topics in Macroeconomics (3)

Models of employment, income and growth in monetary

economies. Policies for economic stability and growth.

Prerequisite: ECO 417 or equivalent.

ECO 423. Real Options (3)

This is an introductory graduate level course in financial

economics. It is intended for students with strong tech-

nical backgrounds who are comfortable with

mathematical arguments. The course is divided into

three major parts: deterministic finance, single-period

uncertainty finance, and options theory and its applica-

tions. Prerequisite: GBUS 420

ECO 424. Advanced Numerical Methods (3)

This course focuses on techniques that apply directly to

economic analyses. A particular emphasis on problems in

finance. The course teaches students how to use EXCEL

macros and advanced VBA (the industry standard). It is

designed for decision-making in business settings.

Prerequisite: GBUS 420.

ECO 425. Cost-Benefit Analysis (3)

Theory and methods of cost-benefit analysis; efficiency

and equity as criteria in program evaluation; proper

measurement of market and non-market costs and bene-

fits; consideration of risk, uncertainty, appropriate

discounting techniques, and distributional consequences;

applications to the evaluation of health care policies and

therapies.

ECO 428. Capital and Interest Theory (3)

Theories of interest and capital. Annuities; applications

of present value theory; investment valuation under

uncertainty and risk; term structure of interest rates; the

theory of savings, cost of capital, and capital formation.

Prerequisite: GBUS 406/MBA 402 or equivalent.

ECO 429. Monetary Theory (3)

The role of money in the economy from theoretical and

empirical perspectives. The influence of money and

prices, interest rates, output, and employment.

ECO 430. Public Finance (3)

The economics of public spending and taxation; princi-

ples of government debt management; theories of

budgeting and cost-benefit analysis and public choice.

ECO 436. Economic History of the United States (3)

Analysis of the colonial economy, transition to industri-

alization, and the role of trade and transportation in

America’s development. A consideration of the impor-

tance of slavery to the 19th-century American economy

and other New World economies. Origin and develop-

ment of banking and financial markets. Prerequisites:

ECO 401 and ECO 402 or equivalents.

ECO 440. Labor Economics (3)

The economics of labor markets and various labor-mar-

ket institutions with emphasis on current theoretical and

empirical research. Prerequisites: ECO 401 and ECO

402 or equivalents.

ECO 447. Economic Analysis of Market

Competition (3)

Mathematical models based on game theory and indus-

trial organization. Cases are used to analyze the strategic

interaction of firms and governments as competitors and

partners.

ECO 451. Urban Economics (3)

The application of traditional and spatial economics to

the location of economic activity focusing on the urban

economic problems of business location, housing, land

value, land use, and intra-urban transportation.

ECO 453. Government Regulation of Business (3)

Analysis of the economic justification for government

regulation of private enterprise. Topics include antitrust

policy, utilities, and health, safety, and environmental

regulation. Prerequisite: ECO 402 or equivalent.

ECO 454. Economics of Environmental

Management (3)

Economic theory of natural resources. Optimal policies

for the development of renewable and nonrenewable

resources and environmental quality. Prerequisite: ECO

402 or equivalent.

ECO 455. Health Economics (3)

Economic theory of health care delivery systems.

Financing health care services. Case studies of specific

economic-financing problems and/or international com-

parisons of health care delivery.

Prerequisite: ECO 401 or ECO 402 or equivalents or

permission of the instructor.

ECO 456. Industrial Organization (3)

The goal of the course is to review theoretical and

empirical attempts by economists to understand market

structures lying between the extremes of perfect competi-

tion and monopoly. The course will focus first on

describing the current U.S. industrial structure and

reviewing models of imperfect competition. The course

then shifts to a closer study of individual firm behavior.

The final segment of the course is an overview of two

216 Lehigh University Course Catalog 2009-2010

significant relationships between government and indus-

try caused by the existence of imperfect competition.

ECO 457. Bio-Pharmaceutical Economics (3)

Characteristics of the market for pharmaceuticals; barri-

ers to entry, competition and innovation; pricing and

regulation; physician prescribing behavior; commercial-

ization and financing of biotech startups; international

comparisons of public policy.

ECO 460. Time Series Analysis (3)

Classical decomposition of time series, trend analysis,

exponential smoothing, spectral analysis and Box-Jenkins

autoregressive and moving average methods.

ECO 461. Forecasting (3)

Methods of economic and business forecasting.

ECO 462. Advanced Statistics for Business and

Economics (3)

An expanded development of statistical concepts neces-

sary for business and economic research. Topics include

probability theory, sets, density functions and distribu-

tions, sampling distributions, point estimation, moment

generating functions, maximum likelihood, classical sta-

tistical inference, power functions, likelihood ratio tests,

and non-parametric tests. Prerequisite: calculus.

ECO 463 (IE 458). Topics in Game Theory (3)

A mathematical analysis of how people interact in strate-

gic situations. Topics include normal-form and

extensive-form representations of games, various types of

equilibrium requirements, the existence and characteriza-

tion of equilibria, and mechanism design. The analysis is

applied to micro-economic problems including industrial

organization, inter-national trade, and finance.

Prerequisites: Two semesters of calculus, ECO 414 and

ECO 412, or permission of the instructor.

ECO 471. International Economic Development (3)

An introduction to the basic theoretical concepts in

international economic development and an evaluation

of their application by means of a representative sample

of the literature.

ECO 472. International Trade Theory (3)

Theories of comparative advantage, factor price equaliza-

tion, trade and welfare, tariffs, trade, and factor

movements. Prerequisite: ECO 413 or consent of the

chair.

ECO 473. International Monetary Economics (3)

Theory of the balance of payments, the microeconomics

of international finance, various approaches to balance-

of-payments adjustments, theories of foreign

exchange-rate determination, and macroeconomic policy

under fixed and flexible exchange rates. Prerequisite:

ECO 417 or consent of the chair.

ECO 475. Special Topics in Economics (1-3)

Extended study of an approved topic not covered in

scheduled courses. May be repeated for credit.

ECO 480. Economics of Technological Change (3)

Explores theoretical models and empirical evidence on

the economics of innovation and technical change.

Includes examination of: the role of technology in com-

petitiveness, industrial structure, and economic growth;

alternative models of the innovative process; incentives

for and other conditions affecting research and develop-

ment; the evaluation of the justifications for government

support of R&D. Prerequisite: ECO 402 or equivalent.

ECO 491. Master’s Thesis

ECO 499. Dissertation

Education, College of

The College of Education has one academic department,

the Department of Education and Human Services. The

department faculty and program offerings are listed

below followed by descriptions of course offerings. More

details on specific degree requirements and on university

graduate school regulations can be found in section IV,

Graduate Study and Research.

Department of Education and Human

Services

Professors. Gary M. Sasso, Ph.D. (Univ. of Kansas),

dean; Ward M. Cates, Ed.D. (Duke) associate dean;

George J. DuPaul, Ph.D. (Rhode Island) chairperson;

Linda M. Bambara, Ed.D. (Vanderbilt) associate chairper-

son; Christine L. Cole, Ph.D. (Wisconsin-Madison);

Nicholas Ladany, Ph.D. (SUNY-Albany); Lee Kern,

Ph.D. (Univ. of South Florida), Iacocca Professor of

Education; J. Gary Lutz, Ed.D. (Lehigh); Edward S.

Shapiro, Ph.D. (Univ. of Pittsburgh); Arnold R.

Spokane, Ph.D. (Ohio State); George P. White, Ed.D.

(Vanderbilt); Roland K. Yoshida, Ph.D. (Univ. of

Southern California); Perry A. Zirkel, J.D., Ph.D.

(Connecticut), LL.M. (Yale).

Associate Professors. Floyd D. Beachum, Ed.D.

(Bowling Green State) endowed Bennett professor of urban

school leadership; Mary Jean Bishop, Ed.D. (Lehigh); Alec

M. Bodzin, Ph.D. (North Carolina State); H. Lynn

Columba, Ed.D. (Louisville); Judith A. Duffield, Ph.D.

(Florida State); Arpana G. Inman, Ph.D. (Temple); Tina

Q. Richardson, Ph.D. (Maryland); Alexander W.

Wiseman, Ph.D. (Pennsylvania State).

Assistant Professors. Margaret E. Barber, M.A.

(Columbia Univ. Teacher’s College); Grace I.L. Caskie,

Ph.D. (Univ. of North Carolina); Cirleen DeBlaere,

M.A. (New York); Kathryn Ann DiPietro, Ph.D.

(Tennessee); Nanette S. Fritschmann, Ph.D. (Univ. of

Kansas); Thomas C. Hammond, Ph.D. (Virginia);

Robin L. Hojnoski, Ph.D. (Univ. of Massachusetts);

Patricia H. Manz, Ph.D. (Univ. of Pennsylvania); Iveta

McGurty Silova, Ph.D. (Columbia); Jill Sperandio,

Ph.D. (University of Chicago); Brenna K. Wood, M.Ed.

(Vanderbilt).

Professors of Practice. Brad K. Cressman,

Ed.D.(Lehigh); Timothy R. Lucas, M.A. (William

Patterson College); Lanette Waddell, Ed.D. (Univ. of

Pennsylvania); Christine G. Novak, Ph.D. (Univ. of

Iowa).

Adjunct Faculty. Tonya B. Amankwatia, Ph.D. (Lehigh);

Donald J. Anticoli, Ed.D. (Temple); Ian T. Birky, Ph.D.

(Oklahoma State); Raymond J. Boccuti, Ed.D. (Lehigh);

Timothy E. Bonner, M.Ed. (Kutztown); Carol S.

Derham, Ed.D. (Lehigh); Roger J. Douglas, Ed.D.

(Lehigh); Todd A. Fay, D.Ed. (Penn State); Heidi J.

Faust, M.Ed. (Penn State/Univ. of Turabo); William P.

Feigley, Ed.D. (Lehigh); Diane E. Flisser, Ed.D. (Lehigh);

Susan N. Fuller, Ph.D. (Univ. of Nebraska); Deborah L.

Gardner, Ph.D. (New Mexico State); Scott R. Garrigan,

Ed.D. (Lehigh); Michael P. George, Ed.D. (Univ. of

Missouri-Columbia); Nancy L. George, Ed.D. (Univ. of

Missouri-Columbia); Ronald Goldberg, Ph.D. (Lehigh);

Education, College of 217

Beth R. Golden, Ph.D. (Virginia Commonwealth); Mary

R. Goodman, Ed.D. (Lehigh); Virginia R. Hampton,

Ph.D. (Univ. of Pennsylvania); Clarissa Henry, Ph.D.

(Lehigh); Roberta A. Heydenberk, Ed.D. (Lehigh);

Warren R. Heydenberk, Ed.D. (Colorado); Daphne

Pappas Hobson, Ed.D. (Columbia University Teacher’s

College); Rachel A. Holler, Ed.D. (Lehigh); William D.

Hunter, Ed.D. (Lehigh); Kevin Kelly, Ph.D. (Lehigh);

Joseph P. Kender, Ed.D. (Pennsylvania); Lisa A.W.

Kensler, Ed.D. (Lehigh); Eric M. Klein, Ph.D. (Univ of

So, Carolina); Mark J. Klein, J.D. (Rutgers); Freya Koger,

Ph.D. (Lehigh); Judith F. Lewis, Ed.D. (Virginia Tech);

Christina K. Lutz-Doemling, Ed.D. (Lehigh); Beverly A.

Martin, Ed.D. (Lehigh); Constance B. Matthews, Ph.D.

(Pennsylvania State); Michael McAllister, Ph.D.

(Oregon); Kelly Kates McElrath, Ph.D. (Temple); John

McGovern, Ed.D. (Temple); James R. Newcomer, Ed.D.

(Lehigh); Stacy L. Nonnemacher, Ph.D. (Lehigh); Bridget

O’Connell, Ed.D. (Lehigh); Jacqueline S. Phillips, Ed.D.

(Univ. of Northern Colorado); Rosalyn P. Pitts, Ph.D.

(Lehigh); Thomas J. Power, Ph.D. (Univ. of

Pennsylvania); Ralph H. Pruitt, Ed.D. (Lehigh); Susan L.

Rarick, Ph.D. (Lehigh); Carol M. Richman, Ph.D.

(Virginia Commonwealth); Tina M. Roemersma, Ph.D.

(Lehigh); George W. Roesser, Ed.D. (Temple); Jeffrey

Rudski, Ph.D. (Univ. of Minnesota); Julie K. Santoro,

M.S.P. (Univ. of So. Carolina); Nasrin Shah, Ph.D.

(American); Bruce S. Sharkin, Ph.D. (Univ. of

Maryland); Timothy J. Silvestri, Ph.D. (Lehigh);

Elizabeth Sims-Pottle, Ed.D. (Lehigh); Carole S. Smith,

M.S. (Temple); David R. Snyder, Ed.D. (Lehigh); Natalie

G. Sokol, Ph.D. (Lehigh); Karen Evans Stout, Ph.D.

(Univ. of Minnesota); Thomas D. Sugalski, Ph.D.

(Farleigh Dickinson); Bruce M. Taggart, Ph.D.

(Connecticut); C. Lynn Tax, M.Ed. (Pennsylvania State);

Larry Upton, Ph.D. (Univ. of Minnesota); Glenn D.

Walters, Ph.D. (Texas Tech); Edmond A. Watters III,

Ed.D. (Lehigh); David R. Weiskotten, Ph.D. (Lehigh);

Kenneth K. Zellner, M.Ed. (Kutztown); Ethel Zilber,

Ed.D. (Lehigh).

Affiliated Faculty. Susan Barrett (Psychology); Mark H.

Bickhard (Psychology); Diane T. Hyland (Psychology);

Vincent G. Munley (Economics); Ageliki Nicolopoulou

(Psychology); John Nyby (Biological Sciences); Padraig

G. O’Seaghdha (Psychology); Neal G. Simon

(BiologicalSciences).

The department offers master’s degrees and/or profession-

al certification in counseling and human services,

educational leadership, elementary and secondary educa-

tion, globalization and educational change, instructional

technology, international counseling, school counseling,

and special education as well as the Ed.S. degree in school

psychology and professional certification in school psy-

chology and special education. The Ed.D. degree

program is offered in educational leadership. Ph.D.

degrees are offered in counseling psychology, learning sci-

ences and technology, school psychology, and special

education. While general courses are listed separately, the

courses pertinent to each program are listed below.

Education

EDUC 383. Supervised Research in Applied

Psychology (1-3)

Provides undergraduate junior and senior psychology

majors a formal supervised research experience in applied

psychology. Students are assigned for the semester to a

research team led by a participating faculty member in

the counseling psychology or school psychology programs

in the College of Education. (Repeatable up to 6 credits.)

EDUC 388. Statistical Computing (3)

Use of one or more major statistical software packages.

Principles of data coding, editing, integrity checking,

and management. Emphasis on link between personal

computers, mainframes, and other software. Prerequisite:

EDUC 408 or consent of instructor.

EDUC 402. Developmental Psychology (3)

Survey of theories and research concerning perceptual,

cognitive, social, and personality development through

infancy and childhood. Prerequisite: Graduate standing

or consent of instructor.

EDUC 403. Research (3)

Basic principles of research; techniques of gathering and

analyzing data; design of studies in education. Emphasis

on critical reviews of research reports representing vari-

ous methodologies. Research report required.

EDUC 405. Qualitative Research Methods (3)

Foundations of qualitative design as research methodolo-

gy for answering questions in education. Topics include

history, philosophy, types, methods, applications, and

critical reading of qualitative research reports. Emphasis

on developing key researcher skills of gaining entrance,

collecting, analyzing and interpreting data, establishing

credibility, and writing and publishing results.

EDUC 408. Introduction to Statistics (3)

Organization and description of data. Principles of statis-

tical inference including hypothesis testing, interval

estimation, and inferential error control. Emphasis on

application.

EDUC 409. Analysis of Experimental Data (3)

Emphasis on analysis of variance designs including one-

way, factorial, nested, and repeated measures designs.

Introduction to multiple regression and the analysis of

covariance. Prerequisite: EDUC 408 or consent of

instructor.

EDUC 410. Univariate Statistical Models (3)

The univariate general linear model. Principles of

expressing models and hypotheses about those models.

Emphasis on similarity among the analysis of variance,

multiple regression, and the analysis of covariance.

Examples of non-standard models and generalization to

complex designs. Prerequisite: EDUC 409 or consent of

the instructor.

EDUC 411. Multivariate Statistical Models (3)

The multivariate general linear model. Principles of

expressing multivariate models and hypotheses about

those models. Emphasis on similarity among the multi-

variate analysis of variance, multiple regression, and the

analysis of covariance. Examples of non-standard models

and generalization to complex designs. Prerequisite:

EDUC 410 or consent of the instructor.

EDUC 412. Advanced Applications of

Psychometric Principles (3)

Conceptual examination of exploratory and confirmato-

ry factor analysis, cluster analysis, latent-trait modeling,

and other advanced psychometric topics. Prerequisites:

EDUC 409 or equivalent or SCHP/CPSY 427.

218 Lehigh University Course Catalog 2009-2010

EDUC 416. (SSP 416) Quasi-Experimentation and

Program Evaluation (3)

Social science research methods for non-laboratory set-

tings. Detailed examination of a dozen

quasi-experimental research designs, three dozen threats

to validity, possible controls, and uses in social program

evaluation. Nonmathematical presentation.

EDUC 419. (MLL 419) Second Language

Acquisition (SLA) Theory (3)

This course introduces theories of second-language

acquisition, including issues of acquisition of English as

a second language as well as other languages. Various

theories of communication and language acquisition will

be covered.

EDUC 421. (MLL 421) Intercultural

Communication (3)

Language is ambiguous by nature, and discourse is inter-

preted in cultural and linguistic contexts. This course

covers different cultural and linguistic strategies individ-

uals use to communicate, essential concepts for

interacting with individuals from other cultural and lin-

guistic backgrounds, and different strategies of

communication as defined by specific cultures. Covering

the theory and practice of intercultural interaction, the

course examines assumptions about language and culture

and includes practical advice to help students develop

the cultural sensitivity essential for communication

today.

EDUC 422. (ESL 422) Theory and Practice for

Second Language Learning (3)

This course presents the application of second language

acquisition (SLA) theories in relationship to teaching,

and reviews methods and materials needed for ESL

instruction in a regular classroom and in a pullout pro-

gram. This course will demonstrate the knowledge of

fundamental concepts and practices of English as a sec-

ond language (ESL) instruction with an emphasis on

instructional materials and strategies. Participants will be

able to identify appropriate materials and resources to be

used with students at each level of English proficiency.

EDUC 423. (ESL 423) Second Language

Assessment (3)

This is a broad-spectrum course around the use of assess-

ment tools, and other evaluation measurements for

diagnosis, prescription, and evaluation of students in

English as a second language (ESL) programs. This

course will address part three: English Language Learners

(ELLs) Language Support Services Knowledge.

Participants will learn the effective assessment practices

and support services available to ELL students.

Participants will examine, explore and understand the

purposes for assessment, multiple assessment models, use

of evaluation techniques, scaffolding of assessments, and

formal/informal assessment tools. Finally, participants

will gain hands-on experience in test administration,

interpretation and reporting.

EDUC 451. Applied Principles of Cognitive

Psychology (3)

Basic principles and contemporary theories of cognitive

psychology will be covered, especially regarding the

application of these principles to education.

Experimental research relevant to contemporary theories

of cognitive psychology and the application of these the-

ories in educational settings will be reviewed.

EDUC 461. Single-Subject Research Design (3)

Experimental designs for use with small N’s. Topics

include design theory and application, experimental

validity (internal, external, statistical conclusions and

construct validity) and an overview of data analysis pro-

cedures.

EDUC 471. (CPSY 471) Diversity and

Multicultural Perspectives (3)

Examination of the influence of culture, gender, and dis-

abilities on behavior and attitudes. Historical and current

perspectives on race, culture, gender, and minority group

issues in education and psychology. Lecture/small group

discussion. Course is restricted to graduate students in

the College of Education only.

EDUC 473. (SR 473) Social Basis of Human

Behavior (3)

Development of human behavior from a social psycho-

logical perspective. Emphasis placed on the impact of

society upon school-age children and adolescents.

EDUC 486. Doctoral Qualifying Research

Project (1-3)

Design and implement research project under faculty

supervision to meet requirements for doctoral programs.

May be repeated for credit.

EDUC 491. Advanced Seminars: (with subtitle) (1-

Intensive study and discussion of a specialized area. Title

will vary. May be repeated for credit as title varies.

EDUC 493. Internship in: (with subtitle) (1-6)

Opportunity for students to apply theory to practice in a

variety of educational settings. Students will be super-

vised in the field and participate in seminars dedicated to

addressing specific concerns and issues encountered dur-

ing their experience. Prerequisite: consent of the program

director.

EDUC 494. Field Work in: (with subtitle) (3)

Identification of significant problems in an educational

environment, review of the literature, and development

of appropriate research plans.

EDUC 495. Independent Study in: (with

subtitle) (1-6)

Individual or small group study in the field of specializa-

tion. Approved and supervised by the major adviser. May

be repeated.

EDUC 496. Doctoral Research Seminar (3)

For doctoral students. Research design and application to

various kinds of educational problems; data collection

and analysis. Criticism and evaluation of student propos-

als. May be repeated for a maximum of nine credits.

PMGT 401. Project Management: Course

Framework & Project Leader Assessment (1)

Introduction to the Project Management Certification

Course; syllabus, requirements and deliverables. Students

will become acquainted with: the terminology, nine

knowledge areas, relationships to other disciplines, proj-

ect management context and processes. Introduction to

the logistical vehicles for course delivery and the tools to

be used. Students will also assess themselves as project

leaders and explore project leader competencies, roles,

responsibilities and stakeholder relationships.

Education, College of 219

PMGT 402. Project Management: Skills and

Abilities for Effective Leadership of Teams (1)

Students will enhance project team leadership skills,

define the work environment of project teams, team

selection, develop a team charter, clearly define the roles

and responsibilities of all project team members, set

team guidelines, learn methods to promote teamwork,

understand the stages of development, manage team

dynamics. Additional skills covered: delegation, manag-

ing accountability without direct authority over project

team members, managing dysfunctional teams, perform-

ance improvement, input to performance appraisals,

rewards, recognitions, celebrations. Prerequisite: PMGT

401.

PMGT 403. Project Management: Initiating the

Project and Planning Scope and Schedule (2)

Students will learn techniques for deciding whether to

undertake a project and for planning project outcomes

and schedules. The relationship of projects to organiza-

tional planning and budgeting, information and

performance appraisals systems will be discussed.

Approaches will be shared for identifying and classifying

project stakeholders and designing and conducting a cost

benefit analysis. How to define desired project outcomes

clearly and completely and how to determine project

work to be performed using decomposition and tem-

plates will be addressed. Students will learn how to

develop a project charter, a scope statement, a Work

Breakdown Structure, a WBS dictionary and a Linear

Responsibility Chart. How to create a network diagram

and analyze schedule possibilities using the Critical Path

Method (CPM) and the Program Evaluation and Review

Technique (PERT) will be explained. Fast tracking and

crashing a schedule will also be explored. Displaying a

schedule with a Gantt Chart, key events list and activi-

ties will be illustrated. How to support these activities

using MS Project will be demonstrated. Prerequisites:

PMGT 401, PMGT 402

PMGT 404. Project Management: Planning

Resources, Communication, Quality and Risk

Management (2)

In this course, students will learn how to estimate the

needs for personnel and other types of projects resources,

to develop a project budget and to plan for additional

project support activities. Determining the type, amount

and timing of resource needs will be emphasized.

Approaches to resource leveling will be discussed. The

different types of project costs will be explained. The use

of analogous estimating, parametric modeling, bottomup

estimating and computerized tools to estimate costs will

be explored. Planning to ensure project quality and coor-

dinate project communications will be will be addressed.

Identifying, assessing, and preparing a plan to manage

project risks will also be discussed. Planning for project

procurement and associated solicitations will be

explained. Students will learn how to develop resource

matrices, loading charts and grafts and a project budget.

How to support these activities using MS Project will be

demonstrated. Prerequisites: PMGT 401, PMGT 402,

PMGT 403

PMGT 405. Project Management: Project Leader

Communications Expertise and Evaluating Team

Performance (1)

The purpose of this weekend seminar is to strengthen

the project leader’s communication skills, change-man-

agement skills, conflict resolutions skills, and team

evaluation skills. Focus areas will also include the follow-

ing: understanding the art and science of effective

listening, managing multiple expectations, communicat-

ing “bad news,” and learning tools and techniques for

project team evaluation. Prerequisites: PMGT 401,

PMGT 402, PMGT 403, PMGT 404

PMGT 406. Project Management: Implementing

and Managing Projects (2)

Students will learn techniques and processes to start and

perform the actual project work. Suggestions for working

successfully in a matrix management environment will

be discussed. Information systems to track schedule per-

formance, labor charges and project expenditures will be

expressed. Developing escalation procedures to address

project conflicts issues will be emphasized. Procedures

for controlling labor and fund charges to a project will

be introduced. Key project review and decision meetings

will be identified. Planning and implementing quality

assurance activities will be addressed. Planning for,

awarding and administering contracts will be discussed.

How to support these activities using MS Project will be

demonstrated. Prerequisites: PMGT 401, PMGT 402,

PMGT 403, PMGT 404, PMGT 405

PMGT 407. Project Management: Controlling

Performance and Assessing Outcomes (2)

Students will learn how to monitor and control project

activities in progress and how to bring a project to clo-

sure. Approaches for assessing project products and

services produced will be explored. Techniques for evalu-

ating schedule and cost performance will be introduced.

Variance analysis and earned value analysis will be

explained. Quality control and risk monitoring and con-

trol will be discussed. Change control systems and

procedures will be explained. How to prepare focused

progress reports and conduct effective project meetings

will be discussed. Requirements for closing out contracts

and procurements will be detailed. Obtaining user

acceptance, closing labor and fund charge accounts and

other administrative activities will be discussed.

Designing and conducting a post-project review will be

explored. How to support these activities using MS

Project will be demonstrated. Prerequisites: PMGT 401,

PMGT 402, PMGT 403, PMGT 404, PMGT 405,

PMGT 406

PMGT 408. Project Management: Problem

Solving, Decision Making and Ethics (1)

This 2-day seminar focuses on developing problem solv-

ing and ethical decision-making skills. Students will

learn to recognize project problems, frame the problem,

assess risk, manage risk, plan contingencies, recognize

the escalation points, and apply alternate methods.

Students will also participate in ethical exercises to

strengthen their ability to recognize ethical dilemmas

and evaluate decisions. Prerequisites: PMGT 401,

PMGT 402, PMGT 403, PMGT 404, PMGT 405,

PMGT 406, PMGT 407

Comparative and International Education

CIE 400. Comparative and International

Education (3)

The goal of this course is to introduce students to the

origins and development of the field of international and

comparative education and to explore how both scholars

220 Lehigh University Course Catalog 2009-2010

and educational policymakers have engaged some of the

debates that characterize policy and research in education

around the world. Special attention is devoted to similar-

ities and differences in educational policy and practice

between advanced and developing capitalist, socialist and

“transitional” societies. At the end of this course, stu-

dents should be able to think about their school or

educational system within a global context, and have

some idea how to make meaningful comparisons.

CIE 401. Globalization & Contextualization (3)

The goal of the course is clarify what globalization is and

to consider the impact of globalizing ideas, structures,

and cultures on education, and how educators and other

stakeholders respond given their school’s or system’s

unique global context. Through case studies and discus-

sions with real-world school leaders, students explore

ways that policies are “borrowed” and both educational

cultures and structures are “institutionalized.”

CIE 402. Development and Evaluation of

International Educational Projects (3)

This course is an introductory exercise for students new

to educational research, program evaluation and related

areas (e.g., quality improvement, enhancing organiza-

tional performance, methods of social change,

management training). Students will develop and con-

duct a professional on-site project evaluation of existing

national and international projects, including initiatives

undertaken by different international organizations (e.g.,

UNICEF, UNESCO, USAID), educational institutions,

and schools (both public and private). Students will be

accompanied and supervised throughout all stages of the

research and evaluation process. No previous experience

with evaluation research and empirical or qualitative data

analysis is required.

CIE 403. Globalization and Curriculum

Implications (3)

This course investigates the impact of globalization on

curriculum. In particular, it discusses how curriculum

has historically been utilized in nation building; how

tensions between the global and the local are inherent in

curriculum; and how curriculum is a site of construction

of national as well as global/cosmopolitan identities.

Global citizenship is one of the major curricula themes

spanning this dynamic intersection between the global

and the local. This course will present several theoretical

perspectives on this phenomenon and compare curricula

across nations to understand how globalizing the curric-

ula differs according to culture and language.

CIE 404. Issues and Institutions in International

Educational Development (3)

Explores theoretical approaches to understanding the

role of education in international development by intro-

ducing students to institutions involved in international

educational development in diverse global settings (e.g.,

United Nations, World Bank, NGOs, and state agen-

cies). Discussions are framed by current debates in the

fields of international and comparative education.

CIE 405. Experiencing the United Nations: NGOs

in Education Policy and Practice (3)

Building on the Lehigh University/United Nations part-

nership initiative, this course provides a structured

practical experience for students to learn about the

dynamics of NGO/UN relationships by representing one

of the underrepresented international NGOs at the

United Nations. Equips students with necessary experi-

ence, understanding, and skills in international

education development such as policy brief writing and

education sector analysis.

CIE 406. International Education Policy (3)

Focuses on how policy is created, implemented, and

evaluated in schools and educational systems from a

comparative and international perspective. Provides a

framework for a comprehensive analysis of the education

“sector” in order to inform regional, national, or multi-

national educational policymaking. Students will apply

this understanding to an analysis of education policy in a

specific region or district (e.g., Pennsylvania) from a

global policymaking perspective.

CIE 407. Grant Writing and Fund Raising in

International Education Development (3)

Addresses NGO issues and needs and will develop lead-

ership, problem solving, and practical grant writing skills

focused on international education development. The

course is designed for individuals working in interna-

tional NGOs and schools and is designed to work in

conjunction with a local or international NGO. Teams

of students will develop a project proposal related to the

agency’s primary service mission, articulate a fund-raising

strategy, and raise capital on the basis of proposals devel-

oped in class.

CIE 408: Thesis Writing (3)

Capstone course requiring intensive research and writing

with the supervision of Comparative & International

Education program faculty. The result is a master’s-level

thesis reporting the investigation, analysis and results

related to a relevant topic in the field of comparative and

international education.

Counseling Psychology

CPSY 407. (SCHP 407) Crisis Management in the

Schools. (3)

This course is designed to provide students with knowl-

edge and skills related to crisis preparedness and

intervention in the schools. Relevant theories and

research literature will be explored as well as practical

elements of crisis response that are applicable to all

school systems. In addition, intervention strategies and

protocols will be examined and discussed. Permission of

instructor is required.

CPSY 427. (SCHP 427) Standardized Tests,

Measurement and Appraisal (3)

Principles of psychological measurement (e.g., tests con-

struction, technology, validity, reliability, functional

utility). Ethical, legal, and cultural issues in the adminis-

tration and interpretation of psychological tests. Case

conceptualization, reporting and presentation.

CPSY 430. Professional Seminar (3)

Professional, ethical, and legal issues in counseling.

Management and delivery of counseling services in a cul-

turally diverse society. Professional development,

certification, licensure, and role identification.

CPSY 436. Culture-Centered Career Intervention (3)

Examination of the career development process and

interventions for children, adolescents, and adults with a

culture-centered perspective. Study of theorists, voca-

tional assessment process, and occupational and

psychological information systems.

Education, College of 221

CPSY 439. Theory and Practice of Group

Counseling (3)

Introduction to the process of group counseling and

therapy. Selection of group members; group rules; group

procedures with children, adolescents and adults; ethical

considerations with groups. Study of research on group

processes, group therapy, and group leadership.

Prerequisites: permission of the program coordinator

required.

CPSY 440. Introduction to Family Counseling (3)

Research and current trends in the practice of family

counseling. Overview and analysis of major theoretical

approaches of family therapy.

CPSY 442. Counseling and Therapeutic

Approaches (3)

Theory, research, and technique of counseling within a

cultural context. Prerequisites: Admission to CPSY mas-

ter’s program or permission of counseling psychology

program coordinator.

CPSY 443. Counseling and Therapeutic

Approaches Laboratory (1)

One-credit laboratory will cover counseling skills used in

diverse theoretical approaches. Must take along with

CPSY 442.

CPSY 445. Elementary & Secondary School

Counseling - I (4)

Overview of the history, philosophy and current trends

in elementary and secondary school counseling.

Emphasis is placed on (a) professional, ethical, and legal

issues in counseling; (b) management and delivery of

counseling services in a school setting and culturally

diverse society; (c) professional development, certifica-

tion and role identification; (d) collaboration and

consultation with teachers, parents, and administrators.

Students will be involved in a pre-practicum observation

of school counselors in a K-12 setting.

CPSY 448. Elementary and Secondary School

Counseling - II (4)

Emphasis on the social and cultural context of elemen-

tary and secondary school counseling. Includes ethical,

legal, and cultural issues in the administration and inter-

pretation of psychological tests used in K-12 settings.

Focus on a special topic such as school violence or sub-

stance abuse prevention, school and community

interaction, and the social and cultural context of school

counseling, etc. The course will also include observations

in schools.

CPSY 449. Elementary and Secondary School

Counseling - III (4)

Theory and methods of consultation; development and

implementation of student assistance programs; intra-

and inter- agency collaborations. The course will also

include observations in schools.

CPSY 451. Helping Skills (3)

Helping Skills is a course designed to provide counselor

trainees with didactic and experiential learning opportu-

nities to facilitate and enhance beginning counseling

skills. Counselor trainees will begin to develop an under-

standing of the counselor’s role in assisting or inhibiting

client change. This course utilizes such techniques as

modeling, role-playing, audiotape feedback, as well as

other learning modalities. Particular emphasis is given to

theoretical frameworks, cultural competency, and self-

understanding.

CPSY 452. Counseling Issues and Skills:

Facilitating Healthy Adjustment (3)

Course assists counselors in developing proficiency in

helping skills and an understanding of the counselor’s

role in facilitating or inhibiting client change. Focus is

on gaining knowledge related to mental health issues for

third culture children and adolescents that include (a)

cultural adjustment, (b) eating disorders, (c) depression

and suicidality, (d) substance abuse, (e) anxiety, (f) fami-

ly dysfunction, and (h) career development.

CPSY 453. Counseling Issues and Skills: Building

Healthy Communities (3)

The objectives of this course are for students to develop

proficiency in counseling skills and gaining knowledge

related to constructing prevention programs for children

and adolescents that include (a) substance abuse, (b) sex-

ually transmitted disease and teen pregnancy, (c) eating

disorders, (d) violence prevention, and (e) resiliency and

competency promotion programs. Special focus will be

paid to understanding the components of an effective

crisis management plan.

CPSY 455. Counseling Issues and Skills: Advanced

Techniques in Counseling (3)

The objectives of this course are to help students expand

knowledge of traditional counseling theories and facili-

tate the development of basic counseling and assessment

skills. Specifically, the course is designed to: (1) Enhance

students’ understanding of the intersection of character-

istics of effective helping, stages of the helping

relationship, and the uses of counseling techniques; (2)

Expand students’ understanding of the difference

between foundational skills, commonly used helping

skills and techniques that require specialized training;

and (3) Provide students with training experiences that

expand conceptual understanding of the counseling

process from a multicultural perspective (i.e., from initial

intake interviews to integrating assessment information

to formulating and carrying out intervention plans to

termination).

CPSY 460. Foundations of Counseling

Psychology (3)

Knowledge in the core foundations of Counseling

Psychology, including the history of Counseling

Psychology, multicultural issues, career and vocational

counseling, counseling/psychotherapy process and out-

come, ethics, prevention and health promotion, social

justice and disaster intervention. Prerequisites: admission

to the Ph.D. program in counseling psychology or per-

mission of the counseling psychology program

coordinator.

CPSY 461. Assessment of Adult Intellectual

Functioning (3)

Administration and interpretation of individual tests/bat-

teries of adult intelligence and neuropsychological

functioning. Consideration of psychological and cross-

cultural issues in intellectual assessment. Preparation of

psychological reports. Prerequisite: CPSY 427 and per-

mission of the instructor.

CPSY 462. Assessment of Personality (3)

Consideration of issues and methods of personality assess-

ment, including ethical and legal issues, and cross-cultural

222 Lehigh University Course Catalog 2009-2010

issues. Practice in the administration of instruments used

for personality assessment. Supervised experience and

report writing. Prerequisites: CPSY 427 and admission to

the Ph.D. program in counseling psychology.

CPSY 466. Current Issues in Counseling and

Therapy (1-6)

Examination of an area of counseling or therapy that is

of topical interest to students and faculty. Permission of

program director required. May be repeated for credit.

CPSY 470. Independent Study and Research (1-6)

Individual or small group study in the field of counsel-

ing. Approved and supervised by the major adviser. May

be repeated for credit.

CPSY 471. (EDUC 471) Diversity and

Multicultural Perspectives (3)

Examination of the influence of culture, gender, and dis-

abilities on behavior and attitudes. Historical and current

perspectives on race, culture, gender, and Lehigh minori-

ty group issues in education and psychology.

Lecture/small group discussion. Course is restricted to

graduate students in the College of Education only.

CPSY 472. Human Development Across the

Lifespan (3)

An examination of prevailing theories of human growth

and development across the lifespan. Examination of the

interactive effect of various age groups upon one another.

Particular emphasis on the helping relationships.

CPSY 473. (SCHP 473) Advanced Research

Methods in Applied Psychology (1-3)

For doctoral students in applied psychology. Issues and

methods of research design, data collection and data

analysis. Advanced discussion of quantitative, qualitative

and single-case research design. Admission to the Ph.D.

program in counseling psychology or school psychology

or permission of the instructor.

CPSY 476. Supervision of Counseling (1-6)

For candidates for supervisor’s certificate or doctorate in

counseling. Observation and supervision of counseling

practicum students. Prerequisites: CPSY 480 and per-

mission of instructor.

CPSY 480. Practicum (1-4)

Twenty hours of weekly supervised practicum training

for advanced graduate students in individual, group, and

family counseling and therapy. Prerequisites: CPSY 442

and permission of instructor. May be repeated for credit.

CPSY 481. Advanced Multicultural Counseling (3)

This seminar covers models and theories of multicultural

counseling and intervention. Students should be actively

engaging in practice with multicultural clients in a

practicum or field site, and these cases will form part of

the basis of course discussions. Prerequisites: CPSY 471,

admission to the doctoral program in counseling psy-

chology, and permission of the counseling psychology

program coordinator.

CPSY 483. Field Work in Counseling (3-6)

Twenty hours of weekly supervised professional practice

in a school or agency setting as an extension of CPSY

480, Practicum. On-site supervision, audio and/or video

recordings and case presentations required. Prerequisites:

CPSY 480 and permission of the counseling psychology

program coordinator.

CPSY 484. (SCHP 484) History and Systems of

Psychology (3)

This doctoral level course is designed as an overview of the

history of psychology in the Western world. The historical

approaches to this task will include a historical develop-

mental approach to the origins and changes of ideas over

time, the study of great persons and schools of thought,

and a look at the Zeitgeist of each. This course will exam-

ine the nature of psychology as a whole, and the influence

of philosophical worldviews in areas such as epistemology,

ontology, teleology, and axiology. Part of this study regards

the nature of science, and its power and limitations as

applied to the understanding of human beings.

CPSY 485. Advanced Psychopathology (3)

This class will cover etiology, assessment, interviewing

techniques, establishing a therapeutic alliance, and treat-

ment planning in adult mental disorders. In depth

coverage will be given to Axis II disorders. The diagnosis

and classification of abnormal behavior using DSM-IV-R

medical model will be emphasized. Alternate theories of

abnormal psychology will also be discussed.

CPSY 486. Family Counseling Clinic (3-6)

Supervised practicum training for advanced graduate stu-

dents in family counseling and therapy. Techniques and

methods of conducting family counseling and therapy.

Prerequisites: CPSY 480 and CPSY 440.

CPSY 487. Advanced Doctoral Practicum I (3)

Supervised clinical experience for entry-level doctoral

students with emphasis on the development of intake

skills, assessment procedures and intervention skills.

Audio and video recording, individual and group super-

vision. Prerequisite: Admission to the doctoral program

in counseling psychology and permission of the counsel-

ing psychology practicum coordinator.

CPSY 488. Advanced Doctoral Practicum II (3)

Supervised clinical experience with emphasis on

advanced skills in interpretation, case conceptualization

from a theoretical perspective, termination and referral,

and in the broad array of professional activities normally

conducted by a counseling psychologist. Audio and

video recording, individual and group supervision.

Prerequisites: CPSY 487 and permission of the counsel-

ing psychology practicum coordinator.

CPSY 489. Advanced Doctoral Practicum III (1)

Supervised field experience in counseling and therapeutic

settings for doctoral students with specific populations.

In consultation with on-site supervisor, the student will

develop an area of focus for this practicum that will

include therapy experience, training and additional

assessment skills as needed. Repeatable for a total of 3

credits. Prerequisites: CPSY 488 and permission of the

counseling psychology practicum coordinator.

CPSY 491. Advanced Doctoral Practicum IV (1)

Supervised field experience in counseling and therapeutic

settings for doctoral students with specific populations.

In consultation with on-site supervisor, the student will

develop an area of focus for this practicum that will

include therapy experience, training and additional

assessment skills as needed. Repeatable for a total of 3

credits. Prerequisites: CPSY 489 and permission of the

counseling psychology practicum coordinator.

CPSY 492. Advanced Field Placement (1-3)

Students perform counseling in university and commu-

nity agencies under the supervision of the Ph.D.

Education, College of 223

psychologists at the field placement. Open only to stu-

dents in counseling psychology. Course may be repeated

for up to 6 credits. Prerequisites: CPSY 491 and permis-

sion of the counseling psychology practicum coordinator.

CPSY 498. Counseling Psychology Doctoral

Internship (1)

A one year full-time or two year half-time supervised

internship in professional psychology. Student functions

as regular staff member. Regular contact with academic

advisor required in addition to end-of-semester evaluation

by the internship site and the student. Prerequisite: CPSY

491 and permission of the counseling psychology pro-

gram coordinator. (Repeatable for a total of 3 credits).

Educational Leadership

EDL 400. Introduction to Organizational

Leadership: Theory and Practice (3)

Development of theories of administration and applica-

tions in educational institutions. Administrative behavior

in organizational settings; administrator’s leadership role

in decision-making, evaluation, and conflict resolution.

EDL 405. The Principalship (3)

Major problems of organization and administration of

schools, types of organization, pupil promotion, program

of studies, teaching staff, pupil personnel, contract man-

agement, time allotment, plant and equipment, and

community relations. Prerequisite: EDL 400.

EDL 406. School Principals Clinic (3-6)

Simulated materials workshop on administrative deci-

sion-making open to practicing and prospective

elementary and secondary school administrators.

EDL 407. Development and Leadership of Middle

Level Programs (3)

Exploration of the design of programs to meet the needs

of the pre and early adolescent learners with a focus on

organizational structure, instructional practices, curricu-

lum design, staffing, student assessment, and community

involvement.

EDL 420. Leading and Managing Curriculum and

Instruction Programs (3)

Exploration of the theory, research and practice associat-

ed with an effective curriculum and instruction program.

Topics include program planning, implementation and

evaluation, legal issues, contract management, and budg-

etary considerations. Emphasis on field-based research

and data-based decision making in program design and

evaluation.

EDL 422. Curriculum Management for the School

Executive (3)

A survey of the methods used to facilitate a curriculum

development process based on the theories and findings

from research and practice. Application of concepts to

practical problems in curriculum leadership to acquire

skills in the change process for instruction innovation.

Emphasis on current theory and research in standards,

technology, and curriculum integration.

EDL 428. Practicum in Supervision of Curriculum

and Instruction I (2)

Supervised field experience in all aspects of district-wide

curriculum and instructional activities. Requires monthly

seminar meetings.

EDL 429. Practicum in Supervision of Curriculum

and Instruction II (2)

Advanced supervised field experience in all aspects of dis-

trict-wide curriculum and instructional activities. Requires

monthly seminar meetings. Pre-requisite: EDL 428.

EDL 430. Development and Administration of

Special Education Programs (3)

Exploration of the research and practice of an effective

special education program. Emphasis on curriculum

development, field-based research, and data-based deci-

sion making program design and evaluation, and the

relationship of the special education program to the

pupil services program and the regular curriculum.

EDL 432. Special Education Law (3)

An overview of the relevant legislation, regulations, and

case law concerning the education of students with dis-

abilities in pre-k through secondary school.

EDL 434. Leadership and Management of Special

Education Programs (3)

Introduction to the management practices related to

effective leadership of special education programs includ-

ing budget development and management, staffing,

instructional practices, student assessment practices, and

parent involvement.

EDL 438. Practicum in Supervision of Special

Education and Pupil Services Programs I (2)

Supervised field experience in all aspects of district-wide

special education programs. Requires monthly seminar

meetings.

EDL 439. Practicum in Supervision of Special

Education and Pupil Services Programs II (2)

Supervised field experience in all aspects of district-wide

special education programs. Requires monthly seminar

meetings. Pre-requisite: EDL 438.

EDL 440. Development and Administration of

Pupil Services Programs (3)

Exploration of the research and practice of an effective

comprehensive pupil services program. Emphasis on

involvement of community agencies, field-based

research, and data-based decision-making, program

design and evaluation, and the relationship of the pupil

services program to the regular and special education

curriculum.

EDL 442. Leadership and Management of Pupil

Services Programs (3)

Overview of the management practices related to effec-

tive leadership of pupil services programs, including

budget development and management, staffing, instruc-

tional practices, community agency partnerships, student

assessment, legal issues, and parent involvement.

EDL 450. Curriculum Design in a Global

Society (3)

Exploration of global issues and their effects on what is

taught in schools, specifically in international schools.

Emphasis on the analysis of curriculum and the influ-

ence that culture plays in decision making.

EDL 452. Comparative Education (3)

Survey of education practices abroad. Systems of articu-

lation, social and legal foundations, and structure in

government. Emphasis on the nature and purpose

schools in various cultural contexts and the major prob-

lems and trends occurring throughout the world.

224 Lehigh University Course Catalog 2009-2010

EDL 461. Facilitating Organizational Inquiry (2)

Exploration into the use of reflective practice and

inquiry for professional development and school

improvement. Development of group facilitation skills

for collective inquiry. Reflection and inquiry will serve as

the foundation for development of an action research

project.

EDL 462. Transforming the Learner (2)

Exploration of the integration of social, personal, cogni-

tive, and knowledge-building dimensions to support

learning and literacy. Focusing on the metacognitive con-

versations with self and others essential for developing

learning and leadership.

EDL 463. Designing Systems of Action (3)

Implementation of action research project. Building

understanding of how the project impacts and is influ-

enced by school and community systems. Explores the

application of learning theory as related to leadership.

Continued development of leadership concept and tools.

EDL 464. Sustaining Learning Communities (2)

Completion of action research. Design and facilitation of

a symposium of inquiry results. Review the behaviors of

leadership that sustain learning in the classroom, school,

and community.

EDL 466. Supervision of Instruction (3)

Analysis of the principles underlying the organization

and supervision of instruction; application to specific

teaching situations K-12.

EDL 467. Supervision and Professional

Development (3)

Emphasis on establishing skills in human resource man-

agement and supervision, including staff selection,

supervision models, assessment and feedback methods,

managing a diverse workforce, and adult development

related to professional growth options. This course is

designed specifically for individuals enrolled in a supervi-

sory certification program.

EDL 468. Applied Learning Theory for School

Leadership (3)

Overview of the foundations, principles, and theories of

curriculum, teaching, and learning. Emphasis on histori-

cal perspectives, teaching and learning for

understanding, and schools as professional organizations.

The purpose is to provide prospective administrators

with the background for developing a balanced and chal-

lenging school-wide curriculum, for supervising

instruction, and for supporting school improvement.

EDL 469. Advanced Instructional Supervision (3)

A staff development approach to supervision designed to

extend the supervisor’s knowledge of and skills in apply-

ing clinical techniques to instructional supervision.

EDL 470. Special Topics in Educational

Leadership: (with subtitle) (1-6)

Intensive study and discussion of a specialized area. Title

will vary. May be repeated for credit as title varies.

EDL 473. Human Resources Management (3)

Overview of the effective utilization of the human

resources of educational organizations. Trends in human

resource planning, recruitment, selection, development,

evaluation, compensation and contract administration.

EDL 476. School Financial Management (3)

Theoretical and practical foundation in financial man-

agement emphasizing the economics of education,

financing and distribution of funds, and the manage-

ment of funds at the school and district level.

EDL 477. Seminar in School-Community

Relations (3)

Analysis and development of the communication and

public relations skills needed by educators in dealing

with the public.

EDL 479. School Law (3)

Effect of school law on administration of public school

systems; analysis and synthesis of judicial interpretations

of the constitutions, statutes, rules, regulations, and

common law relating to educational issues.

EDL 481. Policy and Politics in Public

Education (3)

Analysis of the forces, factors, agencies, formal govern-

mental systems and informal subsystems that influence

educational policy in local districts and state and nation-

al governments.

EDL 485. The Superintendency (3)

A theoretical and historical examination of superintend-

ents’ leadership, school board/superintendent relations,

and the array of duties and demands upon the superin-

tendency.

EDL 486. Superintendency Clinic (3)

Practical experiences in meeting the challenges inherent

in the position of superintendent and associated central

office positions. Emphasis on the five basic functional

roles of the superintendent: CEO to school board,

human resources manager, instructional leader, financial

manager, and director of community relations.

EDL 488. Program Evaluation (3)

The historical background, theory, methodology, and

current practices of program evaluation in the human

services area. Emphasis on conducting evaluations of

educational programs and gathering data to make effec-

tive program decisions. Participants are required to

design a program evaluation research plan.

EDL 489. Doctoral Seminar in School

Administration (3)

Analysis of the theoretical, empirical, and conceptual

aspects of contemporary issues in educational adminis-

tration and their implications for policy formulation and

implementation in educational institutions. Prerequisite:

Official standing as a doctoral student in educational

leadership.

School Psychology

SCHP 402. (SPED 402) Applied Behavior

Analysis (3)

Theory and application of behavior modification meth-

ods in classroom and clinical settings. Topics include

behavior analysis, outcome research, task utilization, and

single case research.

SCHP 404. Historical and Contemporary Issues in

School Psychology (3)

History of psychology, education, and school psychology.

Roles and function of school psychologist; legal and ethi-

cal aspects of school psychology.

SCHP 406. Research Methods and Design (3)

This course is designed to provide skills in the use and

application of research methodologies and in the concep-

Education, College of 225

tualizing and writing of research proposals. Specifically,

the course is focused on developing conceptual knowl-

edge of specific research methods, interpreting data using

specific methods of analysis, and developing independent

research skills focused around one’s own research project.

The course is primarily designed for doctoral students in

School Psychology and Special Education. Permission of

instructor is required.

SCHP 407. (CPSY 407) Crisis Management in the

Schools (3)

This course is designed to provide students with knowl-

edge and skills related to crisis preparedness and

intervention in the schools. Relevant theories and

research literature will be explored as well as practical

elements of crisis response that are applicable to all

school systems. In addition, intervention strategies and

protocols will be examined and discussed. Permission of

instructor is required.

SCHP 408. Dissertation Proposal Seminar

The primary purpose of this course is to guide students

in their independent research endeavors. Students will

learn about the complexities of planning and initiating

independent research, focusing on the writing process,

methodological issues, and the management of time and

data. Knowledge and competencies obtained in this sem-

inar will be applied as students prepare their dissertation

proposals.

SCHP 412. Consultation Procedures (2)

Observational methodology utilized in consultation;

rationale, theory and methods of consultation; individ-

ual, group and parent consulting. Study of research on

the consultation process. Students must also register for

one credit of SCHP 431.

SCHP 422. Assessment of Intelligence (3)

Administration and interpretation of individual tests of

intelligence used in school evaluation and preparation of

psychological reports. Prerequisite: permission of instruc-

tor.

SCHP 423. Behavioral Assessment (3)

Techniques of behavioral assessment including direct

observation, interviews, checklists, rating scales, self-

monitoring and role-play tests. Prerequisite: permission

of instructor.

SCHP 425. Assessment and Intervention in

Educational Consultation (3)

Collection and use of data in designing classroom inter-

ventions. Curriculum based assessment, direct behavioral

assessment, and structured interviews, and the interrela-

tionship with diagnoses are emphasized within the

behavioral consultation model. Utilization of data from

actual case studies. Prerequisites: SCHP 402, SCHP

423.

SCHP 426. Advanced School and Family

Interventions (3)

Overview of school-based and family-based intervention

strategies for children and adolescents presenting inter-

personal, emotional, developmental or behavioral

challenges. Examples of topics covered include crisis

intervention, peer-mediated interventions, self-manage-

ment interventions, behavioral parent training,

interventions for child abuse/neglect and computer-

assisted instruction. Prerequisite: SCHP 402 or

permission of instructor.

SCHP 427. (CPSY 427) Standardized Tests,

Measurement and Appraisal (3)

Principles of psychological measurement (e.g., tests con-

struction, technology, validity, reliability, functional

utility). Ethical, legal, and cultural issues in the adminis-

tration and interpretation of psychological tests. Case

conceptualization, reporting and presentation.

SCHP 429. Special Topics in School

Psychology (with subtitle) (1-3)

SCHP 431. Practicum in Consultation

Procedures (1-3)

Supervised experience in conducting school-based con-

sultations. Co-requisite, SCHP 412.

SCHP 432. Practicum in Assessment of

Intelligence (1-3)

Supervised experience in the administration and inter-

pretation of intelligence tests. Co-requisite, SCHP 422.

SCHP 433. Practicum in Behavioral

Assessment (1-3)

Supervised experience in conducting behavioral assess-

ments in school settings. Co-requisite, SCHP 423.

SCHP 434. (SPED 434) Applied Research

Practicum (1-3)

Designing and conducting research projects in applied

settings.

SCHP 435. Practicum in Assessment &

Intervention in Educational Consultation (1-3)

Supervised experience in conducting curriculum-based

assessments and designing intervention strategies for

educational problems. Co-requisite, SCHP 425.

SCHP 436. Specialized Practicum in School

Psychology (with subtitle) (1-3)

Supervised field experience in school psychology with a

specific population or setting. May be repeated for cred-

it. Permission of instructor required.

SCHP 437. Advanced Child Psychopathology (3)

Advanced training in the definition, classification, etiolo-

gy, long-term outcome, and treatment of children and

adolescents with various psychopathological disorders.

Emphasis is placed upon the assessment and treatment

of child and adolescent psychopathology in school set-

tings. Prerequisites: admission to doctoral program or by

permission of instructor.

SCHP 438. Health/Pediatric Psychology (3)

Introduction to training in the definition, etiology and

behavioral/academic characteristics of children and ado-

lescents with medical disorders. Emphasis is placed on

the assessment and treatment of educational and behav-

ioral sequelae of medical disorders in both school and

health settings. Prerequisites: admission to doctoral pro-

gram in school psychology or permission of instructor.

SCHP 439. Comprehensive School Health

Programs (3)

Examination of school-wide programs designed to

address health care needs of children and adolescents in

school settings. Focus is on development of primary pre-

vention and integration of educational, medical, social

and community resources. Permission of instructor

required.

226 Lehigh University Course Catalog 2009-2010

SCHP 440. Applications of Pediatric School

Psychology

Focus on further development of students’ knowledge

and application of pediatric school psychology. The etiol-

ogy and developmental course of pediatric medical

conditions will be examined, emphasizing the impact on

school, family and community environments.

Prerequisite: SCHP 438 or SCHP 439 or permission of

instructor.

SCHP 442. Doctoral Practicum in School

Psychology (1-6)

Field-based experience in providing psychological servic-

es in school and/or clinical settings. Prerequisite:

admission to doctoral program. May be repeated for

credit.

SCHP 443. Certification Internship (1-6)

Full-time experience in clinical/educational settings.

Student must complete a minimum of 1,200 clock hours

under joint supervision of faculty and field supervisor.

May be repeated for credit.

SCHP 444. Doctoral Internship (1-6)

Full-time experience in clinical/educational settings.

Student must complete a minimum of 1,500 clock hours

under joint supervision of faculty and field supervisor.

May be repeated for credit.

SCHP 473. (CPSY 473) Advanced Research

Methods in Applied Psychology (1-3)

For doctoral students in applied psychology. Issues and

methods of research design, data collection and data

analysis. Advanced discussion of quantitative, qualitative

and single-case research design. Admission to the Ph.D.

program in counseling psychology or school psychology

or permission of the instructor.

SCHP 484 (CPSY 484). History and Systems of

Psychology (3).

This doctoral level course is designed as an overview of

the history of psychology in the Western world. The his-

torical approaches to this task will include a historical

developmental approach to the origins and changes of

ideas over time, the study of great persons and schools of

thought, and a look at the Zeitgeist of each. This course

will examine the nature of psychology as a whole, and

the influence of philosophical worldviews in areas such

as epistemology, ontology, teleology, and axiology. Part of

this study regards the nature of science, and its power

and limitations as applied to the understanding of

human beings.

SCHP 496. Doctoral Seminar in School

Psychology (with subtitle) (3)

Selected topics in school psychology (titles will vary)

including professional issues, assessment and interven-

tion in school settings, and supervision of school

psychology services. May be repeated for credit.

Prerequisite: admission to doctoral program.

Special Education

SPED 330. Special Topics in Special

Education: (with subtitle) (1-3)

Current issues in the education of individuals with spe-

cial needs. Titles vary. May be repeated for credit as title

varies.

SPED 332. Education and Inclusion for

Individuals with Special Needs (3)

Legal, educational and social issues related to the special

education of individuals with mental retardation, physi-

cal disabilities, emotional/behavioral disorders, learning

disabilities, visual and hearing impairments, health

impairments and those who are intellectually gifted.

Emphasis will be on meeting the diverse needs of stu-

dents in general education classrooms and settings.

SPED 338. Emotional and Behavioral Disorders of

Children (3)

Definition, classification, etiology, treatment, and histor-

ical perspective of children and adolescent disorders.

SPED 402. (SCHP 402) Applied Behavior

Analysis (3)

Theory and application of behavior modification meth-

ods in classroom and clinical settings. Topics include

behavior analysis, outcome research, task utilization, and

single case research.

SPED 418. Life Skills and Transition Strategies (3)

Curriculum and methods for teaching skills of daily liv-

ing and preparing students with disabilities for transition

to adult living. Includes vocational training, community

skills, home and daily living, self-care, leisure, communi-

cation and functional academics. Emphasis on transition

planning for students with physical disabilities, emotion-

al disturbance, learning disabilities, developmental

disabilities, traumatic brain injury, autism, severe disabil-

ities and related challenges.

SPED 419. Academic and Curricular Strategies for

Individuals with Disabilities (3)

Methods course designed to increase knowledge of

instruction of reading, language arts, mathematics and

content area skills. Emphasis on instructional design and

strategies, evaluation of commercial textbooks and possi-

ble modifications needed for use with individuals with

disabilities.

SPED 420. Intern Teaching: Certification (2-3)

Competency-based practice in application of procedures

for teaching a broad spectrum of individuals with special

needs in preparation for Level I Certification as a

Teacher of the Mentally or Physically Handicapped.

Prerequisite: consent of program coordinator one semes-

ter before registering for this course.

SPED 428. Positive Behavior Support (3)

The design of comprehensive, multicomponent behavior

support plans for individuals with disabilities who

engage in challenging behaviors. Topics include func-

tional assessment strategies, antecedent and setting event

interventions, alternative skill training, consequence

strategies, lifestyle interventions and teaming strategies.

Taught from a noncategorical perspective. Prerequisite:

SPED 402 or permission of the instructor.

SPED 429. Professional Seminar (3)

Master’s seminar on current issues in the area of special

education and research design. Prerequisite is 18 gradu-

ate credits in special education.

SPED 430. Advanced Seminar in Special

Education (3)

Advanced issues relating to the field of special education.

Titles will vary.

Education, College of 227

SPED 434. (SCHP 434) Applied Research

Practicum (1-3)

Designing and conducting research projects in applied

settings.

SPED 440. Early Academic Intervention (3)

Explores the potential effectiveness of interventions to

prevent academic failure of children at risk for learning

difficulties. Emphasis on research-based interventions in

the areas of beginning reading, language and vocabulary,

writing and spelling, awareness of print and exposure to

print, and mathematics (number sense).

SPED 442. Learning Disabilities: Inclusion and

Issues (3)

Explores major topics, issues, and trends in the area of

learning disabilities. An overview of historical founda-

tions of learning disabilities, theoretical perspectives and

medical aspects, definition, etiology, characteristics,

assessment, service delivery models, educational

approaches, and instructional design. Emphasis on inclu-

sion strategies for adjusting and adapting to the

mainstream settings in preschool, school, and post

school environments.

SPED 444. Classroom Management (3)

Introduction to positive behavior support strategies to

improve student behavior. Topics include school-wide

and class-wide interventions and functional assessment

to develop individualized behavior support plans.

Prerequisite: Enrollment in special education program.

SPED 446. Practicum/Seminar in Academic

Interventions (3)

Supervised field work with emphasis on designing and

implementing academic interventions. Emphasis on col-

laboration with general education teachers and parents.

Requires one-hour monthly seminar meetings. This

course is restricted to students enrolled in the Academic

Intervention Specialist program.

SPED 448. Practicum/Seminar in Positive

Behavior Specialist 1 (3)

Introductory supervised field work with emphasis on

conducting functional assessments, designing positive

behavior support plans, and teaming with families and

professionals. Requires one-hour weekly meetings with

faculty and other practicum students. This course is

restricted to students enrolled in the Positive Behavior

Specialist program.

SPED 450. Practicum/Seminar in Positive

Behavior Specialist 2 (3)

Advanced field work with emphasis on resolving difficult

case problems in positive behavior support. Requires

one-hour weekly meetings with faculty and other

practicum students. This course is restricted to students

enrolled in the Positive Behavior Specialist program.

SPED 452. Assessment and Planning for

Individuals with Disabilities (3)

Educational assessment procedures for individuals with

special needs. Understanding and applying formal and

informal assessments. Emphasis on curriculum-based

assessment for placement and monitoring student

progress in instructional materials. Translating assessment

information to develop an individualized instructional

plan for a student with a disability.

SPED 465. Advanced Methods for Inclusion (3)

Advanced techniques for educating students with disabili-

ties in general education based on current research and

practice. Accommodations and planning for physical

inclusion. Instructional inclusion through embedded

instruction, adaptations, and curriculum overlapping.

Decision hierarchies for level of instructional adaptation.

Social inclusion methods through methods of social facil-

itation. Taught from a non-categorical perspective and

addresses students with all levels of disability (e.g., mild

and severe). Prerequisite: SPED 332, admission to the

special education program, or permission of instructor.

SPED 490. Doctoral Seminar in Special

Education (3)

Advanced knowledge of issues and research in the educa-

tion of individuals with special needs. Topics will vary.

May be repeated for credit. Prerequisite: admitted for

doctoral studies.

Teaching, Learning and Technology

LST 401. Overview of Learning Sciences and

Technology (3)

Foundations and key concepts in Learning Sciences and

Technology. Cognition and brain-based research with a

focus on technology’s role in learning.

LST 403. Designing Learning Environments (3)

Social, cognitive, and physical factors in teaching and

learning. Systems theory applied to learning settings.

Special emphasis on motivational theories. Prerequisite

LST 401 or permission of instructor.

LST 420. Critical Reading and Writing (3)

Using literature to build persuasive written arguments.

Searching and identifying promising sources, distilling

research findings, synthesizing literature to support an

argument, and organizing written materials to enhance

persuasiveness. Suited to those writing qualifying proj-

ects, dissertation proposals, dissertations, funding

proposals, conference proposals, and journal articles.

TLT 312. Classroom Practice (1-3)

Experience in elementary and secondary classrooms as

related to theories of child and adolescent development,

classroom didactics, and philosophies of education.

Problem-centered discussion and observations. May be

repeated for credit. Prerequisite: consent of the program

director.

TLT 314. Seminar in Elementary and Secondary

Education (3)

Critical analysis and discussion of classroom instruction-

al practices based on experiences of participants as they

engage in teaching experiences. Prerequisite: consent of

the program director.

TLT 367. (ES 367) Environmental Education (3)

Introductory environmental education course designed to

prepare students to implement environmental education

opportunities in formal and non-formal education set-

tings. Topics include history and philosophy of

environmental education, environmental laws and regula-

tions, GIS, environmental issues and decision making,

curriculum integration and environmental education

teaching methodologies. This is a Web enhanced course

containing both online and fieldwork components.

TLT 391. Workshops (1-3)

Cooperative study of current educational problems.

228 Lehigh University Course Catalog 2009-2010

Provides elementary, secondary, and special education

teachers an opportunity to work at their own teaching

levels and in their own fields. Limited to six credits dur-

ing a summer session but the student may register for

more than one workshop provided there is no duplica-

tion in subject matter.

TLT 394. Special Topics in Education: (with

subtitle) (1-3)

Examination of a topic of research or professional inter-

est in education. Subtitle will vary. May be repeated for

credit as subtitle varies.

TLT 405. Introduction to Testing and Evaluation (3)

Construction and evaluation of the teacher-made test.

Selection of published tests and interpretation of individ-

ual and group results. Use and misuse of tests in

assessing achievement.

TLT 406. Tools for Teaching and Learning (3)

Application of technology in school-based instructional

settings. This course addresses the use of technology

tools and resources to enhance and manage learning.

Students will demonstrate skills in design and develop-

ment of Web sites, evaluation and use of educational

software, production and integration of digital media,

and other key competencies.

TLT 407. Designing for Teaching and Learning (3)

Theoretical, philosophical and curricular foundations of

instruction. This course explores theories of learning and

their application, implications for the use of technology

and standards-based education. Special emphasis on

planning, developing and assessing instruction.

Prerequisite: Successful prior completion of TLT 406.

TLT 408. Development, Classroom Management

and Assessment: Elementary (3)

Classroom strategies and techniques to provide an effec-

tive elementary classroom setting are highlighted.

Emphasis on classroom organization to facilitate instruc-

tion, establishing rules and procedures, and conducting

formative and summative assessments in elementary

classrooms.

TLT 409. Development, Classroom Management

and Assessment: Secondary (3)

Classroom strategies and techniques to provide an effec-

tive secondary classroom setting are highlighted.

Emphasis on classroom organization to facilitate instruc-

tion, establishing rules and procedures, and conducting

formative and summative assessments in secondary class-

rooms.

TLT 410. The Writing Process (3)

Developmental characteristics of children’s writing and

relationships among writing, spelling and reading.

Predictors of writing achievement, teaching strategies

and activities, and evaluation schemes will be empha-

sized, K-12.

TLT 412. Social Studies in Elementary Education (3)

Elementary curriculum, content, teaching strategies, and

instructional materials of the social studies field.

Emphasis on organizing content, using appropriate

methods, testing and evaluation, and innovations for

social studies at the elementary level. Examines text-

books, courses of study, and teacher-made materials.

TLT 420. Reading in Elementary Education (3)

Principles of teaching reading in elementary schools.

Selection of appropriate materials, methods, and tech-

niques. Beginning reading instruction and the

development of strategies for teaching vocabulary and

comprehension in narrative and expository texts.

TLT 422. Language Arts in Elementary

Education (3)

Principles of language learning and the development of

communication skills in elementary schools. Methods of

teaching listening, speaking, handwriting, spelling, punc-

tuation, and grammar. Selection of appropriate materials

and textbooks.

TLT 424. Children’s Literature in Elementary

Education (3)

Role of literature in the instructional program of the ele-

mentary schools. Use of trade books for individualized

instruction in reading, language arts, mathematics, sci-

ence, and social studies.

TLT 426. Science in Elementary Education (3)

Principles of the elementary science program.

Demonstrations and discussions of appropriate materials

and techniques for teaching science concepts to elemen-

tary school students.

TLT 428. Mathematics in Elementary

Education (3)

Mathematical skills and concepts for the elementary

school program. Sets, systems of numeration, experience

with numbers, operations with numbers, number con-

cepts and numerals, and elements of geometry.

TLT 430. Programs for Gifted and Talented (3)

Characteristics of gifted children; teaching gifted chil-

dren; programs for the gifted in elementary and

secondary schools.

TLT 431. Social Studies in Middle Level and High

School Education (3)

Secondary curriculum, content, teaching strategies, and

instructional materials for the social studies field.

Emphasis on organizing content, using appropriate

methods, testing and evaluation, and innovations for

social studies at the secondary level. Explores textbooks,

courses of study, and teacher-made materials.

TLT 432. Reading and Critical Thinking in

Middle Level and High School Education (3)

Focuses on expository reading development in content

areas such as language arts, mathematics, science and

social studies. Practical teaching strategies in critical

areas, such as comprehension and study skills. Review of

research and methods for improving the reading develop-

ment of students.

TLT 434. English in Middle Level and High

School Education (3)

Curricula, philosophy, methods, strategies, and materials

in the teaching of English. Literature, genres, and the

nature of text and text differences. Critical analysis and

drawing inferences from narrative text and poetry.

Applications of technology and assessment principles.

TLT 436. Science in Middle Level and High

School Education (3)

Curricula, philosophy, methodology, strategies and safety

in the teaching of middle and high school science.

Emphasis on laboratory and instructional technology, at

risk and underrepresented students and current models

of science education.

Education, College of 229

TLT 438. Mathematics in Middle Level and High

School Education (3)

Curricula, instructional activities, and manipulative aids

applicable to mathematics courses in middle level and

high schools. Teaching strategies and materials appropri-

ate for teaching mathematics will be emphasized.

TLT 440. Pre-professional Seminar (3)

Study, directed observation of, and initial practice in the

various phases of teaching in a laboratory-demonstration

school or in area elementary and secondary schools.

Prerequisite: consent of the program director.

TLT 442. Intern Teaching (2-3)

Intensive practice in the application of principles of

teaching. Supervision is provided by the cooperating

school and by the university. Prerequisite: consent of the

program director.

TLT 444. Intern Teaching Seminar (3)

Critical analysis and discussion of classroom instruction-

al practices. Discussion and illustration based on

experience of participants as they engage in intern teach-

ing. Prerequisite: consent of the program director.

TLT 450. Technology in School Settings: (with

subtitle) (1-3)

Focused examination of problems, key issues, and

approaches to the use of technology in school settings.

Topics will vary (for example, Technology’s Role in

Facilitating School Restructuring; Teaching for Brain

based Learning; Enhancing Gifted Education Through

Technology). May be repeated for credit as topic varies.

TLT 452. The Systematic Design of Instruction (3)

Introductory exploration of instructional design models

and philosophies and their implications for teaching and

learning using technology. Heavy focus on instructional

message design. Applies perception theory, communica-

tion theory, and learning theory to the design of

instructional media. Students in this course design

instructional materials employing the theories and guide-

lines explored. Pre/co-requisite: LST 401.

TLT 454. Applied Instructional and Interface

Design Principles (3)

Exploration and application of design models for learn-

ing. Special emphasis on graphical user interfaces in

education and training. Prerequisite: TLT 452.

TLT 456. Advanced Instructional Design (3)

Advanced instructional design and interface issues.

Design of instructional environments, selection of

instructional metaphors, impact of the interface on the

user, and demands of designing for newer learning tech-

nologies. Prerequisite: TLT 454.

TLT 458. Website and Resource Development for

Learning (3)

Introduction to resource development and HTML edit-

ing tools used in the creation of eLearning Websites.

Covers fundamentals of: HTML and commercial Web

creation software packages; scanners and digital video

cameras; and use of digital resource creation-and-manip-

ulation programs. Prerequisite: TLT 406 or permission

of instructor.

TLT 460. Interactive Multimedia Programming for

Learning (3)

Introduction to creating educational applications utiliz-

ing sound, video, graphics and other digital resources.

Prerequisite: TLT 458.

TLT 462. Advanced Development of Instructional

Resources and Technologies [Subtitle] (3)

Focus on using more sophisticated Website and digital

resource development-and-manipulation tools to create

multimedia learning materials. Topics will vary (for

example, Database-Driven Web Development; Assistive

Devices for Special Populations; Programming Handheld

Devices; Audio Resource Development; Media

Production for Instructional Programming). May be

repeated for credit under different topic. Prerequisite:

TLT 460.

TLT 470. Integrating Technology in the

Classroom (3)

Planning for integration of instructional technology in

individual classrooms. Analysis of available technologies,

both hardware and software, and identification of tech-

nologies matched to instructional needs. Focus on

assessing the impact of technology on student outcomes

TLT 471. Planning for Implementing Technology

at the School or District Level (3)

Logistics of implementing technology for a school or

school district. Covers staffing, budgeting, facilities, staff

development, and proposal preparation. Students in the

course create complete technology plans.

TLT 474. Budgeting, Maintaining, and Evaluating

Technology (3)

Generating budgets for technology implementation,

planning for maintenance and continuity in technology

services, evaluating the effectiveness and impact of tech-

nology implementations.

TLT 476. Technology Program Evaluation (3)

Techniques for evaluating technology implementations.

Focus on instrumentation, data collection and analysis,

drawing conclusions from data sets, and preparing

reports for funders.

TLT 480. Curricular Design and Innovation (3)

Curricular models and their features, with a focus on

how curricular design promotes learning in K-12 set-

tings. Special emphasis on technology-enabled curricula,

designing for brain-based learning, and curriculum’s role

in innovation.

TLT 492. Classroom Research Methods (3)

Introduces students to classroom research design para-

digms and the assumptions behind them, use of the

literature, developing research questions, qualitative and

quantitative procedures, research design, sampling

design, data collection, data analysis, and reporting

research results using educational applications.

TLT 494. Culminating Research Project (3)

Designing and conducting research projects in classroom

settings.

230 Lehigh University Course Catalog 2009-2010

Electrical and Computer

Engineering

Professors. Filbert J. Bartoli, Ph.D. (Catholic University

of America), chair, and Chandler Weaver chair; Rick S.

Blum, Ph.D. (Pennsylvania), R. W. Wieseman chair of

electrical engineering; D. Richard Decker, Ph.D.

(Lehigh); Yujie Ding, Ph.D. (Johns Hopkins), Class of

‘61 professor; Douglas R. Frey, Ph.D. (Lehigh); Miltiadis

Hatalis, Ph.D. (Carnegie Mellon); James C. M. Hwang,

Ph.D. (Cornell); Thomas L. Koch, Ph.D. (Cal Tech),

Daniel E. and Patricia M. Smith professor, Director of

the Center for Optical Technologies; Alastair D.

McAulay, Ph.D. (Carnegie Mellon); Marvin H. White,

Ph.D. (Ohio State), Sherman Fairchild professor of elec-

trical engineering, Director of the Sherman-Fairchild

Center for Solid State Studies.

Associate Professors. Tiffany Jing Li, Ph.D. (Texas

A&M); Karl H. Norian, Ph.D. (Imperial College,

London); Boon Ooi, Ph.D. (Glasgow, UK); Svetlana

Tatic-Lucic, Ph.D. (Cal Tech.); Meghanad D. Wagh,

Ph.D. (I.I.T., Bombay).

Assistant Professors. Shalinee Kishore, Ph.D.

(Princeton), P. C. Rossin Assistant Professor; Nelson

Tansu, Ph.D. (Wisconsin-Madison); Zhiyuan Yan, Ph.D.

(Illinois Urbana-Champaign)

Professor of Practice. William A. Best, M.S. (Virginia

Tech), William Haller, M.S. (Lehigh), associate chair,

director of engineering minor program, and electrical

engineering minor.

The department of electrical and computer engineering

(ECE) offers undergraduate and graduate programs of

study along with supporting research for students inter-

ested in the field of electrical engineering. It also jointly

supports undergraduate and graduate programs in com-

puter engineering, and computer science with the

computer science and engineering (CSE) department.

Graduate study leads to the degrees master of science,

master of engineering, and doctor of philosophy in elec-

trical engineering, and the master of science and doctor

of philosophy in computer engineering.

The undergraduate programs emphasize the fundamental

aspects of their respective areas. Engineering design con-

cepts are introduced early in the curriculum, and required

instructional laboratories introduce design as a hands-on

activity. Electives permit students to tailor their programs

according to their interests and goals, whether they be in

preparation for graduate study or entry into industry.

Students are free to select courses offered by other depart-

ments and are encouraged to do so when appropriate. In

this way they can prepare themselves for activities which

straddle departmental boundaries or for entry into profes-

sional schools such as medicine or management. Students

have the opportunity to synthesize and apply their

knowledge in a senior design project. Students may use

the senior design project as a way to participate in the

various research projects in the department.

The department maintains a number of laboratories in

support of its curricular programs. These laboratories

include the sophomore laboratory, junior electronic cir-

cuits laboratory, microcomputer laboratory,

electromechanics laboratory, digital signal processing lab-

oratory, digital systems laboratory and senior projects

laboratories.

The department has research laboratories in computer

architectures, wireless communications, optoelectronics,

compound semiconductors, electron device physics,

microelectronics fabrication, signal processing, and com-

munications. These laboratories, among others, are

available for undergraduate projects.

The graduate programs allow students to deepen their

professional knowledge, understanding, and capability

within their subspecialties. Each graduate student devel-

ops a program of study in consultation with his or her

graduate advisor. Key research thrust areas in the depart-

ment include:

1. Microelectronics and Nanotechnology.

2. Wireless Communications and Networking.

3. Optoelectronics.

4. Bio-Engineering.

Graduate research is encouraged in these and other areas.

Computers and computer usage are an essential part of the

student’s environment. The university provides a distrib-

uted network of about 75 high-performance workstations

and over 300 PC-compatible microcomputers in public

sites throughout the campus. The ECE department, in

conjunction with the CSE department, has state-of-the-art

systems to augment and extend the generally available uni-

versity systems. A primary resource is a network of more

than 60 Sun workstations, file servers, and compute

servers, running the Unix operating system. In addition,

the ECE department has a 16 node cluster that is used for

high performance computing. Additional resources to facil-

itate learning are the approximately 90 workstations

running the Microsoft and Linux platforms, that are locat-

ed in the various ECE teaching labs. These systems provide

an array of software tools for students and researchers, such

as Cadence, Freescale, Agilent Data Systems software,

Silvaco, VPI, Matlab, and Labview. The workstations are

connected via multiple high-speed ethernet, fiber optic,

and ATM networks, which are in turn connected to the

university’s backbone network, and to the external world

through Internet 2. Students are not required by the

department, nor the university, to own a personal comput-

er, but many find such a tool a valuable asset.

A detailed description of the curricular programs follows

with a listing of the required courses and with a listing of

the departmental course offerings. The departmental

courses carry the prefix ECE for electrical and computer

engineering. Courses given by the Computer Science

and Engineering department have the prefix CSE.

Students are urged to search both listings for courses

appropriate to their career goals.

Undergraduate Programs

Mission Statement for the Electrical Engineering

and Computer Engineering Programs

The mission of the electrical engineering and computer

engineering programs is to prepare engineers to meet the

challenges of the future, to promote a sense of scholar-

ship, leadership, and service among our graduates, to

instill in the students the desire to create, develop, and

disseminate new knowledge, and to provide international

leadership to the electrical engineering and computer

engineering professions.

Electrical and Computer Engineering 231

Program Educational Objectives in Electrical

Engineering and Computer Engineering

The graduates of the electrical engineering program will:

1. Solve technologically challenging problems in elec-

trical engineering using their fundamental

knowledge of math, science and engineering.

2. Attain positions of responsibility in their chosen

careers, including industry, government, medicine,

business, law and academia by applying their electri-

cal engineering skills, professional attitudes and ethics.

3. Engage in lifelong learning through graduate studies,

research, and continuing education.

4. Apply their knowledge of global, societal and envi-

ronmental issues in solving engineering problems.

5. Function on multidisciplinary teams using their

technical knowledge and effective communication

skills.

Bachelor of Science in Electrical

Engineering

The required courses for this degree contain the fundamen-

tals of linear circuits, systems and control theory, electronic

circuits, signal theory, physical electronics, electromagnetic

theory, energy conversion, digital systems, and computing

techniques. A strong foundation in the physical sciences

and in mathematics is required. Approved electives, chosen

with the advisor’s consent, are selected in preparation for

graduate study or entry into industry according to individ-

ual interests. The program totals 135 credit hours. The

recommended sequence of courses follows:

See freshman year requirements, section III.

sophomore year, first semester (17 credit hours)

ECE 33 Introduction to Computer

Engineering (4)

ECE 81 Principles of Electrical Engineering (4)

PHY 21, 22 Introductory Physics II and Laboratory

II (5)

MATH 23 Analytic Geometry and Calculus

III (4)

sophomore year, second semester (18 credit hours)

ECE 121 Electronic Circuits Lab (2)

ECE 123 Electronic Circuits (3)

ECE 126 Fundamentals of Semiconductor

Devices (3)

MATH 205 Linear Methods (3)

ECO 1 Principles of Economics (4)

HSS elective (3)

junior year, first semester (17-18 credit hours)

ECE 82 Junior Lab (1)

ECE 108 Signals and Systems (4)

ECE 202 Introduction to Electromagnetics (3)

MATH 208 Complex Variables (3)

HSS elective (3-4)

free elective (3)

junior year, second semester (17 credit hours)

ECE 125 Circuits and Systems (3)

ECE 138 Digital Systems Laboratory (2)

ECE 203 Introduction to Electromagnetic

Waves (3)

MATH 231 Probability and Statistics (3)

approved technical elective* (3)

free elective (3)

senior year, first semester (18-19 credit hours)

ECE 136 Electromechanics (3)

ECE 257 Senior Lab I (3)

HSS elective (3-4)

approved technical electives* (6)

free elective (3)

senior year, second semester (17-18 credit hours)

ECE 258 Senior Lab II (2)

approved technical electives* (9)

HSS elective (3-4)

free elective (3)

*Approved technical electives are subjects in the area of sci-

ence and technology. Students must select a minimum of

four courses from the ECE or CSE course listings, with a

minimum of two courses in one of the technical areas

described in the following list. Students must also choose at

least one engineering elective in either materials, mechanics,

thermodynamics, fluid mechanics or physical chemistry, and

at least one science elective in physics, chemistry or biology.

For students interested in solid-state electronics, quantum

mechanics is recommended for the science elective.

Approved Technical Electives for Electrical

Engineering

Breadth Requirement: Minimum of 4 ECE or CSE elec-

tive courses.

Depth Requirement: Minimum of 2 courses in one of

the technical areas described below.

A. Solid-State Circuits

ECE 308 Physics and Models of Electronic

Devices (3)

ECE 332 Design of Linear Electronic

Circuits (3)

ECE 333 Medical Electronics (3)

ECE 337 Intro to Micro- and Nano-

fabrication (3)

ECE 351 Microelectronics Technology (3)

ECE 355 Applied Integrated Circuits (3)

ECE 361 Introduction to VLSI Circuits (3)

ECE 362 Introduction to VLSI System

Design (3)

B. Signal Processing and Communications

ECE 337 Intro to Micro-and

Nanofabrication (3)

ECE 212 Control Theory (3)

ECE 339 Graphical Signal Processing (3)

ECE 341 Fundamentals of Wireless

Communications (3)

ECE 342 Communication Theory (3)

ECE 343 Digital Signal Processing (3)

ECE 344 Statistical Signal Processing (3)

ECE 345 Speech Synthesis and Recognition (3)

ECE 364 Introduction to Cryptography and

Network Security (3)

ECE 387 Digital Control (3)

ECE 389 Control Systems Laboratory (2)

ME 342 Control Systems (3)

C. Microwaves and Lightwaves

ECE 310 Wireless Circuits (3)

ECE 325 Semiconductor Lasers I (3)

ECE 326 Semiconductor Lasers II (3)

232 Lehigh University Course Catalog 2009-2010

ECE 338 Quantum Electronics (3)

ECE 347 Introduction to Integrated Optics (3)

ECE 348 Lightwave Technology (3)

ECE 371 Optical Information Processing (3)

ECE 372 Optical Networks (3)

D. Computers

CSE *** Any CSE course except CSE 12, CSE

15, or CSE 252

ECE 201 Computer Architecture (3)

ECE 316 Microcomputer System Design (3)

ECE 319 Digital System Design (3)

ECE 320 Logic Design (3)

ECE 324 Microprocessors (3)

ECE/CSE 336 Embedded Systems (3)

Note: ECE 350 Special Topics (3) (The area of each course

must be evaluated individually)

Minor in Electrical Engineering

Minor Program Director: William R. Haller, Associate

Chair

The purpose of the Electrical Engineering minor is to

enable students to supplement their major with knowl-

edge and skills that increase their ability to realize their

multi-disciplinary goals and/or make them more mar-

ketable upon graduation.

Required courses:

ECE 81 Principles of Electrical Engineering (4)

OR ECE 83 and ECE 162 plus

departmental approval

ECE 108 Signals and Systems (4 credit hours)

ECE 121 Electrical Circuits Laboratory (2 credit

hours)

ECE 123 Electronic Circuits (3 credit hours)

One of the following Electrical and Computer

Engineering options:

ECE 33 Introduction to Computer Engineering

ECE 125 Circuits and Systems

ECE 126 Fundamentals of Semiconductor

Devices

ECE 136 Electromechanics

ECE 339 Graphical Signal Processing

ECE 341 Fundamentals of Wireless

Communications

ECE 343 Digital Signal Processing

ECE 371 Optical Information Processing

ECE 372 Optical Networks

Bachelor of Science in Computer

Engineering

See catalog entry for Computer Engineering.

Graduate Programs

Graduate programs of study provide a balance between

formal classroom instruction and research and are tai-

lored to the individual student’s professional goals. The

programs appeal to individuals with backgrounds in elec-

trical or computer engineering, mathematics, or the

physical sciences. Research is an essential part of the

graduate program. Major research areas include:

Wireless Communications and Networking

Signal design (CDMA, OFDM, etc), near-far communi-

cation strategies, space-time diversity coding, channel

and interference modeling, digital audio and video com-

pression, digital signal processing, novel devices,

communication networks, image processing, data fusion,

and compound semiconductor devices.

Microelectronics Devices, Integrated Circuits,

VLSI Design

Mixed Signal design, Silicon integrated circuit technolo-

gy, processing, fabrication and testing. Semiconductor

device physics, nano scale devices, CMOS VLSI logic

design and verification, computer-aided design (CAD),

VLSI chip architectures, computer architecture including

embedded systems and systems-on-a-chip. New sensors,

actuators and novel microsystems, ranging from micro-

electromechanical-systems (MEMS) to chemical

microreactors and Biochips.

Optoelectronics and Photonics

Fiber optic communications and networks, nonlinear

optics and solitons, optical switching, novel devices, and

optical computing. Free-space optical communication

systems.

The Master of Science degree requires the completion of

30 credit hours of work that may include a six credit

hours thesis for the EE and CompE degrees. A program

of study must be submitted in compliance with the grad-

uate school regulations. An oral presentation of the thesis

is required.

The Master of Engineering degree requires the comple-

tion of 30 credit hours of work, which includes

design-oriented courses and an engineering project. A

program of study must be submitted in compliance with

the college rules. An oral presentation of the project is

required.

The Ph.D. degree in electrical engineering requires the

completion of 42 credit hours of work (including the

dissertation) beyond the master’s degree (48 hours if the

master’s degree is non-Lehigh), the passing of a depart-

mental qualifying examination appropriate to each

degree within one year after entrance into the degree

program, the passing of a general examination in the

candidate’s area of specialization, the admission into can-

didacy, and the writing and defense of a dissertation.

Competence in a foreign language is not required.

The ECE Department has a core curriculum require-

ment for graduate students in each of the degree

programs. The purpose of this requirement is to guaran-

tee that all students pursuing graduate studies in the

department acquire an appropriate breadth of knowledge

of their discipline.

Electrical Engineering: To satisfy the core curriculum

requirements in Electrical Engineering, students must

select three (3) courses from the following five (5) differ-

ent areas: ECE 343 Digital Signal Processing; ECE 401

Advanced Computer Architecture; ECE 402 Advanced

Electromagnetic Theory; ECE 420 Advanced Circuits

and Systems; ECE 451 Physics of Semiconductor

Devices.

Computer Engineering: see catalog entry for Computer

Engineering.

M.S. in Photonics

The Masters of Science degree in Photonics is an inter-

disciplinary degree that is designed to provide students

with a broad training experience in the various aspects of

photonics, including topics in Physics, Electrical

Electrical and Computer Engineering 233

Engineering and Materials Science and Engineering. It

covers both theoretical and practical topics in areas such

as fiber optics, integrated optics, lasers, nonlinear optics

and optical materials to prepare the students to work in

industry directly after graduation. The program is also

designed so as to make it possible for students who wish

to continue on for a Ph.D. to still satisfy the require-

ments of their individual departments for the more

advanced degree. For details on this program, see the

separate catalog section under Interdisciplinary Graduate

Study and Research.

M. S. in Wireless Communications and

Network Engineering

The Master of Science degree in Wireless

Communications and Network Engineering at Lehigh

University is designed to prepare the next generation of

engineers for the communications and networking

industries. The curriculum aims to produce graduates

that can contribute to the design and analysis of com-

munication systems in the broadest context. To

accommodate the student’s study of various aspects of

wireless communications and networking, we have limit-

ed the number of required core courses to allow

maximum flexibility in pursuing specific interests. The

required core courses are: Communication Theory (ECE

342), Fundamentals of Wireless Communications (ECE

441), and Computer Networks (ECE 404). In addition

to the core courses, the students will take advanced

courses that are aimed to furnish the student with a

deeper knowledge of more specific types and aspects of

information networks. ECE 342 must be the first course

taken and the core courses should precede advanced

courses.

Departmental Courses

Courses are listed under the prefixes ECE and CSE.

Generally, electrical engineering courses carry the ECE

prefix and appear in the following listing. Computer sci-

ence courses carry the CSE prefix. Computer

engineering courses are found under either prefix. The

CSE courses are listed in the Computer Science and

Engineering department section in this catalog. The

reader should consult both listings.

Electrical and Computer Engineering (ECE)

For Undergraduate Students

ECE 33. (CSE 33) Introduction to Computer

Engineering (4) fall

Analysis, design and implementation of small digital cir-

cuits. Boolean algebra. Minimization techniques,

synchronous sequential circuit design, number systems

and arithmetic. Microcomputer architecture and assem-

bly level programming. Prerequisite: ENGR 1 or CSE

17.

ECE 81. Principles of Electrical Engineering (4)

fall

Circuit elements and laws. Behavior of simple linear net-

works, include equivalent circuits and solution

techniques. Solution of DC circuits and AC circuits

using phasor techniques. Introduction to operational

amplifiers. Steady state and transient response of simple

circuits. Includes a weekly session for review and discus-

sion. May not be taken with ECE 83 for credit.

Prerequisite: MATH 22. Co-requisite: Phys 21.

ECE 82. Junior Lab (1) fall

An introduction to the fundamental laboratory instru-

mentation and measurement techniques of electrical and

computer engineering. Five or six experiments based on

the fundamental concepts discussed in the prerequisite

courses. Introduction to PSPICE and application of vari-

ous computer aids to design and documentation.

Discussions of electrical components and laboratory safe-

ty. Use of an engineering notebook and report writing.

One three-hour laboratory per week. Prerequisites: ECE

33 and ECE 81, previously.

ECE 83. Introduction to Electrical Engineering (3)

spring

Circuit elements and laws. Behavior of simple linear net-

works. Characteristics of electronic circuits and

modeling. Introduction to functional circuits, such as

operational amplifiers, instrumentation amplifiers, and

power systems. Introduction to basic filters and data

converters. May not be taken with ECE 81 for credit.

Prerequisite: Math 22, Co-requisite: Phys 21.

ECE 108. Signals and Systems (4) fall

Continuous and discrete signal and system descriptions

using signal space and transform representations.

Includes Fourier series, continuous and discrete Fourier

transforms, Laplace transforms, and z-transforms.

Introduction to sampling. Prerequisite: ECE 81.

ECE 121. Electronic Circuits Laboratory (2)

spring

One lecture and one laboratory per week. Experiments

illustrating the principles of operation of electronic

devices and their circuit applications. Basic electronic

instrumentation and measurement techniques.

Prerequisite: ECE 81.

ECE 123. Electronic Circuits (3) spring

Methods for analyzing and designing circuits containing

electronic devices. Topics include device models, basic

amplifier configurations, operating point stabilization,

frequency response analysis, and computer-aided analysis

of active circuits. Prerequisite: ECE 81.

ECE 125. Circuits and Systems (3) spring

Formulation of linear circuit equations in the time and

frequency domain. Complete solutions of difference and

differential equations. Network theorems. Basic stability

and feedback concepts. Modulation theory, sampling

theory and basic digital signal processing ideas.

Prerequisite: ECE 108.

ECE 126. Fundamentals of Semiconductor

Devices (3) spring

Introduction to the physics of semiconductors in terms

of atomic bonding and electron energy bands in solids.

Charge carriers in semiconductors and carrier concentra-

tion at thermal equilibrium. Principles of electron and

hole transport, drift and diffusion currents, generation

and recombination processes, continuity. Treatment of

semiconductor devices including p-n junctions, bipolar

junction transistors and field effect transistors.

Prerequisite: ECE 81.

ECE 136. Electromechanics (3) fall

Two lectures and one laboratory per week. An experi-

mental introduction to electromechanical energy

conversion. Basic concepts of magnetic fields and forces

and their application to electrical apparatus including

234 Lehigh University Course Catalog 2009-2010

electromechanical transducers, transformers, AC and DC

machines. Prerequisite: ECE 81.

ECE 138. Digital Systems Laboratory (2) spring

Implementation issues and techniques for digital logic

design. Combinational and sequential logic design using

standard integrated circuits. I/O and interrupt process-

ing. Design and implementation of real-time complex

digital logic using microprocessor systems. Prerequisite:

ECE 33.

ECE 162. Electrical Laboratory (1) spring

Experiments on circuits, machines, and electronic

devices. Elementary network theory. Survey laboratory

for students not majoring in electrical or computer engi-

neering. Prerequisite: ECE 81, or ECE 83.

ECE 201. (CSE 201) Computer Architecture (3)

spring

Structure and function of digital computers. Computer

components and their operations. Computer intercon-

nection structures. Memory system and cache memory.

Interrupt driven input/output and direct memory access.

Instruction sets and addressing modes. Instruction

pipelining. Floating-point representation and arithmetic.

Alternative architectures: RISC vs. CISC and introduc-

tion to parallel architectures. Prerequisite: ECE 33.

ECE 202. Introduction to Electromagnetics (3) fall

Elements of vector analysis, Coulomb’s law, Biot-Savart’s

and Ampere’s laws, Lorentz Forces, Laplace’s, and

Maxwell’s equations, boundary conditions, methods of

solution in static electric and magnetic fields, including

finite element numerical approach. Quasistationary

fields, inductance. Prerequisites: MATH 205, Phys. 21.

ECE 203. Introduction to Electromagnetic

Waves (3) spring

Uniform plane waves in free space and in materials, skin

effect. Waves in transmission lines and waveguides,

including optical fibers. Energy and power flow,

Poynting’s theorem. Reflection and refraction.

Resonators. Radiation and diffraction. Prerequisite: ECE

202.

ECE 212. Control Theory (3)

Introduction to feedback control. Dynamic analysis of

linear feedback systems in the time and frequency

domain, with emphasis on stability and steady-state

accuracy. Major analytical tools: signal-flow graphs, root-

locus methods. Nyquist plot, Bode analysis. Cascade

compensation techniques. Prerequisite: ECE 125.

ECE 256. Honors Project (1) spring

Open by invitation only to students who have completed

ECE 257, Senior Project. Selection is based upon the

quality of the senior project with regard to ingenuity,

design approach and completeness. The objective of this

course is to carry the successful senior projects forward

to completion of a technical paper suitable for publica-

tion or submission to a technical conference. A written

paper and oral presentation are required by mid-semes-

ter. Oral presentations will be made before an

appropriate public forum. Enrollment limited.

ECE 257. Senior Lab I (3)

With ECE 258, provides a complete design experience

for Electrical and Computer Engineers. Research, plan-

ning, and completion of the initial design for a project

involving hardware and/or software, integrating the

many facets of their undergraduate program. Instruction

in technical writing, product development, ethics and

professional engineering, and presentation of design and

research. Two three hour sessions and one additional two

hour session per week. Prerequisite: Senior status or

departmental approval

ECE 258. Senior Lab II (2)

Continuation of ECE 257. Complete design, construc-

tion, and testing of projects selected and developed in

ECE 257. Present final design reviews and project pre-

sentations. Submit a final written report. Discuss

development issues, including manufacturability, patents,

and ethics. Two three-hour sessions per week.

Prerequisite: ECE 257 or departmental approval.

ECE 308. Physics and Models of Electronic

Devices (3)

Physics of metal-semiconductor junction, p-n junctions,

and MOS capacitors. Models of Schottky barrier and p-

n junction diodes, JFET, MOSFET, and bipolar

transistors. Prerequisite: ECE 126. Hatalis or White.

ECE 310. Wireless Circuits (3) spring

Theory and design of high-frequency circuits for wireless

communications. Transmission lines and microwave net-

works. Types of circuits explored include filters,

amplifiers, mixers, voltage controlled oscillators (VCOs),

phase locked loops (PLLs), synthesizers, modulators and

demodulators, and antennae. Design using scattering

parameters, Smith chart and RF/microwave CAD pro-

grams for simulation. System performance analysis based

on noise figure, antenna gain and the Friis equation will

be developed. Modulation techniques of AM, FM, PM,

and QPSK systems will be compared based on bit error

rates (BER) calculated from system parameters.

Prerequisite: ECE203

ECE 319. Digital System Design (3) fall

Design techniques at the register transfer level. Control

strategies for hardware architectures. Implementation of

microprogramming, intersystem communication and

peripheral interfacing. Hardware design languages and

their use in design specification, verification and simula-

tion. Prerequisite: ECE 138.

ECE 320. Logic Design (3)

Review of basic switching theory, vector boolean algebra,

canonical implementations of medium size circuits,

threshold logic, fault detection in combinational and

sequential logic, Multivalued and Fuzzy logic, regular

expressions, nondeterministic sequential machines.

Prerequisite: ECE 33. Wagh

ECE 324. Microprocessors (3) spring

Microprocessor architectures with focus on Motorola 8,

16, and 32-bit microprocessors (68HC11, 9S12DP256

and Coldfire MCF5XXX series). Chip features, program-

ming model, instruction set, use of programming tools,

flash memory programming, interrupt programming and

interfacing to external devices and memory.

Programming primarily in C-language with some assem-

bly. (two lectures and one laboratory per week)

Prerequisite: ECE 33

ECE 325. Semiconductor Lasers I (3)

Review of elementary solid-state physics. Relationships

between Fermi energy and carrier density and leakage.

Introduction to optical waveguiding in simple double-

heterostructures. Density of optical modes, Blackbody

radiation and the spontaneous emission factor. Modal

gain, modal loss, and confinement factors. Einstein’s

Electrical and Computer Engineering 235

approach to gain and spontaneous emission. Periodic

structures and the transmission matrix. Ingredients. A

phenomenological approach to diode lasers. Mirrors and

resonators for diode lasers. Gain and current relations.

Credit will not be given for both ECE 325 and ECE

425. Prerequisite: ECE 203.

ECE 326. Semiconductor Lasers II (3)

Continuation of Semiconductor Lasers I. Topics covered

include: Gain and current relations; dynamic effects; per-

turbation and coupled-mode theory; dielectric

waveguides; and photonic integrated circuits. Credit will

not be given for both ECE 326 and ECE 426.

Prerequisite: ECE 325

ECE 332. Design of Linear Electronic Circuits (3)

Introduction to a variety of linear design concepts and

topologies, with contemporary audio networks providing

many of the concrete examples. Topics include low- and

high-level preamps; equalizers and filters; mixers; volt-

age-controlled amplifiers; input and output stage

modifications; power amplifiers; analog switching and

digital interface circuitry. Prerequisites: ECE 123 and

ECE 125. Frey.

ECE 333. Medical Electronics (3)

Bioelectric events and electrical methods used to study

and influence them in medicine, electrically excitable

membranes, action potentials, electrical activity of mus-

cle, the heart and brain, bioamplifiers, pulse circuits and

their applications. Prerequisite: ECE 123 or equivalent.

Norian.

ECE 336. (CSE 336) Embedded Systems (3)

Use of small computers embedded as part of other

machines. Limited-resource microcontrollers and state

machines from high level description language.

Embedded hardware: RAM, ROM, flash, timers,

UARTs, PWM, A/D, multiplexing, debouncing.

Development and debugging tools running on host

computers. Real-Time Operating System (RTOS) sema-

phores, mailboxes, queues. Task priorities and rate

monotonic scheduling. Software architectures for embed-

ded systems. Prerequisite: CSE 17.

ECE 337. Introduction to Micro- and

Nanofabrication (3)

Survey of the standard IC fabrication processes, such as

photolithography, dry and wet etching, oxidation, thin-

film deposition and chemical mechanical polishing.

In-depth analysis of MEMS-specific processes such as

wafer bonding, wet anisotropic etching, photolithogra-

phy using thick photoresist, and deep reactive ion

etching of silicon. The basics of nanofabrication tech-

niques. The fundamentals of MEMS design will be

outlined. A wide variety of MEMS and NEMS devices

will be discussed. Prerequisite: Mat33 or ECE351 or

consent of the instructor.

ECE 338. Quantum Electronics (3)

Electromagnetic fields and their quantization. propaga-

tion of optical beams in homogeneous and lens-like

media. Modulation of optical radiation. Coherent inter-

actions of radiation fields and atomic systems.

Introduction to nonlinear optics-second-harmonic gener-

ation. Parametric amplification, oscillation, and

fluorescence. Third-order optical nonlinearities. Credit

will not be given for both ECE 338 and ECE 438.

Prerequisite: ECE 203.

ECE 339. Graphical Signal Processing (3)

Application of graphical programming to mathematical

principles in data analysis and signal processing. Review

of digital signal processing, use of structures, arrays,

charts, building virtual instruments, graphical program-

ming for linear algebra, curve fitting, solving differential

and difference equations, signal generation, DFT and

FFT analysis, windowing and filtering. Prerequisite: ECE

108.

ECE 341. Fundamentals of Wireless

Communications (3)

Overview of wireless communication systems basics.

Cellular concept and other wireless systems. System

design fundamentals. Mobile Radio Propagation

Modeling: Flat, Frequency Selective, Fast, Slow fading

channels, Path Loss Models. Multiple access. Modulation

Techniques for wireless. Introduction to wireless net-

working. Wireless systems and standards. Future wireless

systems. Prerequisite: ECE 108 or permission of instruc-

tor.

ECE 342. Communication Theory (3)

Theory and application of analog and digital modula-

tion. Sampling theory with application to

analog-to-digital and digital-to-analog conversion tech-

niques. Time and frequency division multiplexing.

Introduction to random processes including filtering and

noise problems. Introduction to statistical communica-

tion theory with primary emphasis on optimum receiver

principles. Prerequisites: ECE 125 and MATH 309 or

MATH 231.

ECE 343. Digital Signal Processing (3)

Study of orthogonal signal expansions and their discrete

representations, including the Discrete Fourier

Transform and Walsh-Hadamard Transform.

Development of fast algorithms to compute these, with

applications to speech processing and communication.

Introduction to the z-transform representation of numer-

ical sequences with applications to input/output analysis

of discrete systems and the design of digital filters.

Analysis of the internal behavior of discrete systems

using state variables for the study of stability, observabili-

ty and controllability. Prerequisite: ECE 108.

ECE 344. Statistical Signal Processing (3)

Introduction to random processes, covariance and spec-

tral density, time average, stationarity, and ergodicity.

Response of systems to random inputs. Sampling and

quantization of random signals. Optimum filtering, esti-

mation, and hypothesis testing. Prerequisites: MATH

231 or MATH 309, and ECE 108. Blum.

ECE 347. Introduction to Integrated Optics (3)

Theory of dielectric waveguides (ray and wave

approach). Modes in planar slab optical guides and in

waveguides with graded index profiles. Coupled-mode

formalism and periodic structures. Coupling of optical

beams to planar structures. Switching and modulation of

light in dielectric guides: phase, frequency and polariza-

tion modulators; electro-optic, acousto-optic and

magneto-optic modulators. Semiconductor lasers.

Fabrication of semiconductor components. Recent

advances. Prerequisites: ECE 202 and ECE 203.

ECE 348. Lightwave Technology (3)

Overview of optical fiber communications. Optical

fibers, structures and waveguiding fundamentals. Signal

degradation in fibers arising from attenuation,

236 Lehigh University Course Catalog 2009-2010

intramodal and intermodal dispersion. Optical sources,

semiconductor lasers and LEDs. Rate equations and fre-

quency characteristics of a semiconductor laser. Coupling

efficiency of laser diodes and LEDs to single-mode and

multimode fibers. PIN and avalanche photodetectors.

Optical receiver design. Transmission link analysis.

Prerequisite: ECE 203.

ECE 350. Special Topics (3)

Selected topics in the field of electrical and computer

engineering not included in other courses. May be

repeated for credit.

ECE 351. Microelectronics Technology (3)

Technology of semiconductor devices and of integrated

circuits, including crystal growth and doping, phase dia-

grams, diffusion, epitaxy, thermal oxidation and oxide

masking, lithography. The major emphasis will be on sil-

icon technology, with additional lectures on GaAs

technology. Prerequisite: ECE 126.

ECE 355. Applied Integrated Circuits (3)

Emphasis on understanding of terminal characteristics of

integrated circuits with excursion into internal structure

only as necessary to assure proper utilization in system

design. Classes of devices studied include operational

amplifiers, digital-to-analog and analog-to-digital con-

verters, linear multipliers, modulators, and phase-locked

loops. Prerequisites: ECE 108 and 123. Frey.

ECE 361. Introduction to VLSI Circuits (3)

The design of Very Large Scale Integrated (VLSI)

Circuits, with emphasis on CMOS Standard Cell design.

Topics include MOS transistor physics, device behavior

and device modeling, MOS technology and physical lay-

out, design of combinational and sequential circuits,

static and dynamic memories, and VLSI chip organiza-

tion. The course includes a design project using CAE

tools for layout, design rule checking, parameter extrac-

tion, and SPICE simulations for performance prediction.

Two one-hour lectures and three hours of laboratory per

week. Prerequisite: ECE 123.

ECE 362. Introduction to VLSI System Design (3)

Structured hierarchical approach to the design of digital

VLSI circuits and systems. Use of CAE tools for design

and verification. Topics include: systems aspects of VLSI

design, design methodologies, schematic capture, func-

tional verification, timing simulation, use of a CMOS

standard cell library and of a silicon compiler. The

course includes a semester-long design project, with the

design to be fabricated by a foundry. Two one-hour lec-

tures and three hours of design laboratory per week.

Prerequisite: ECE 138.

ECE 364. Introduction to Cryptography and

Network Security

Introduction to cryptography, classical cipher systems,

cryptanalysis, perfect secrecy and the one time pad, DES

and AES, public key cryptography covering systems

based on discrete logarithms, the RSA and the knapsack

systems, and various applications of cryptography. May

not be taken with ECE 464 for credit. Prerequisite:

Junior or Senior standing.

ECE 371. Optical Information Processing (3)

Introduction to optical information processing and

applications. Interference and diffraction of optical

waves. 2D optical matched filters that use lenses for

Fourier transforms. Methods and devices for modulating

light beams for information processing, communica-

tions, and optical computing. Construction and

application of holograms for optical memory and inter-

connections. Prerequisite: ECE 108, ECE 202. McAulay.

ECE 372. Optical Networks (3)

Study the design of optical fiber local, metropolitan, and

wide area networks. Topics include: passive and active

photonic components for optical switching, tuning,

modulation and amplification; optical interconnection

switches and buffering; hardware and software architec-

tures for packet switching and wavelength division

multiaccess systems. The class is supported with a labora-

tory. Prerequisite: ECE 81, ECE 202. McAulay.

ECE 387 (CHE 387, ME 387). Digital Control (3)

Sampled-data systems; z-transforms; pulse transfer func-

tions; stability in the z-plane; root locus and frequency

response design methods; minimal prototype design; dig-

ital control hardware; discrete state variables; state

transition matrix; Liapunov stability; state feedback con-

trol. Prerequisite: CHE 386 or ECE 212 or ME 342 or

consent of instructor.

ECE 389 (CHE 389, ME 389). Control Systems

Laboratory (2)

Experiments on a variety of mechanical, electrical and

chemical dynamic control systems. Exposure to state of

the art control instrumentation: sensors, transmitters,

control valves, analog and digital controllers. Emphasis

on comparison of theoretical computer simulation pre-

dictions with actual experimental data. Lab teams will be

interdisciplinary. Prerequisites: CHE 386, ME 343, ECE

212.

ECE 392. Independent Study (1-3)

An intensive study, with report of a topic in electrical

and computer engineering which is not treated in other

courses. May be repeated for credit. Prerequisite:

Consent of instructor.

For Graduate Students

ECE 401 (CSE 401). Advanced Computer

Architecture (3)

Design, analysis and performance of computer architec-

tures; high-speed memory systems; cache design and

analysis; modeling cache performance; principle of

pipeline processing, performance of pipelined computers;

scheduling and control of a pipeline; classification of

parallel architectures; systolic and data flow architectures;

multiprocessor performance; multiprocessor interconnec-

tions and cache coherence. Prerequisite: ECE 201 or

equivalent.

ECE 402. Advanced Electromagnetics (3)

Maxwell’s equations for various media and boundary

geometries. Electromagnetic wave propagation through

anisotropic and nonlinear media. Guided waves, layered

media and resonators. Radiation, antennas, strong and

weak scattering. Scalar and vector diffraction, and peri-

odic structures. Numerical solutions for boundary value

problems. Prerequisites: ECE 202 and ECE 203.

ECE 404 (CSE 404). Computer Networks (3)

Study of architecture and protocols of computer net-

works. The ISO model; network topology;

data-communication principles, including circuit switch-

ing, packet switching and error control techniques;

sliding window protocols, protocol analysis and verifica-

Electrical and Computer Engineering 237

tion; routing and flow control; local area networks; net-

work interconnection; topics in security and privacy.

ECE 407. Linear and Nonlinear Optics (3)

Diffraction theory, Gaussian beams. Optical resonators

and waveguides. Crystal optics, second harmonic genera-

tion, parametric amplification. Third order nonlinearities

and associated phenomena such as phase conjugation,

optical bistability, self-focusing, optical switching, solu-

tions, etc. Photorefractive effect. Brillouin and Raman

scattering.

ECE 410. Digital Communication Systems (3)

Unified description of digital communication systems

based on signal space concepts. Analysis of system per-

formance in the presence of channel noise and

bandwidth limitations. Comparison of many different

types of digital-modulation techniques, combined with

error correction, against theoretical limits. Both bandpass

and baseband systems are considered. Optimum meth-

ods of detection are considered for all systems.

Suboptimum techniques such as adaptive equalization

are considered for baseband systems. Basic spread-spec-

trum concepts are introduced. Prerequisites: ECE 108

and either MATH 231 or MATH 309 or equivalents.

ECE 411. Information Theory (3)

Introduction to information theory. Topics covered

include: development of information measures for dis-

crete and continuous spaces study of discrete-stochastic

information courses, derivation of noiseless coding theo-

rems, investigation of discrete and continuous

memoryless channels, development of noisy channel

coding theorems. Fritchman

ECE 412. Advanced Digital Signal Processing (3)

Design and analysis of signal processing algorithms,

number theoretic foundations of algorithm design, bilin-

ear algorithms, computational techniques for digital

filtering and convolution, Fourier transform and its algo-

rithms, number theoretic transforms and applications to

digital filtering, general and special purpose signal

processor designs, application specific techniques in sig-

nal processing. Prerequisite: ECE 343 or consent of the

department chairman. Wagh

ECE 414. Signal Detection and Estimation (3)

Brief review of probability and random process theory.

Hypothesis Testing as applied to signal detection.

Various optimality criterion including Bayes and

Neyman-Pearson and their applications in digital com-

munications, radar, and sonar systems. Optimum and

locally optimum detection schemes for Gaussian and

non-Gaussian noise. Estimation of unknown signal

parameters. Topics of current interest including, distrib-

uted signal detection, robust signal detections and

quantization for detection as time permits. Prerequisites:

ECE 108 and MATH 231 or MATH 309. Blum

ECE 415. Numerical Processors (3)

Design strategies for numerical processors, cellular array

adders and multipliers, conditional sum and carry-save

asynchronous processors, data recoding and Booth’s algo-

rithms, use of alternate numerical bases, CORDIC

trigonometric calculator, accumulator orientations, bit

slice and bit-sequential processors, pipelining and paral-

lel processing considerations. Prerequisite: ECE 201.

Wagh

ECE 416. VLSI Signal Processing (3)

The fundamentals of performance-driven VLSI systems

for signal processing. Analysis of signal processing algo-

rithms and architectures in terms of VLSI

implementation. VLSI design methodology. Includes a

design project which requires use of a set of tools

installed on SUN workstations for behavioral simulation,

structural simulation, circuit simulation, layout, func-

tional simulation, timing and critical path analysis,

functional testing, and performance measurement.

Prerequisite: ECE 361, ECE 343, or equivalent.

ECE 417. Pattern Recognition (3)

Decision-theoretic, structural, and neural network

approaches to pattern recognition. Pattern vectors and fea-

ture extraction. Classifiers, decision regions, boundaries

and discriminant functions. Clustering and data analysis.

Statistical pattern recognition, parametric and nonpara-

metric approaches. Syntactic pattern recognition.

Introduction to neural networks, with examples of back

propagation and self-organization algorithms.

Prerequisites: MATH 205 and MATH 231, or equivalent.

ECE 420. Advanced Circuits and Systems (3)

Review of the fundamentals of Circuits and Systems the-

ory, including the time and frequency domain response

of linear time-invariant circuits. Equation formulation

for general lumped circuits, including node voltage and

loop current analysis. Basic graph theoretic properties of

circuits including Tellegen’s Theorem. Discussion of pas-

sivity and reciprocity including multiport network

properties. State space formulation and solution of gen-

eral circuits (and systems). Modern filter concepts,

including synthesis techniques for active filters and exter-

nally linear filters, such as Log Domain filters.

Techniques for the analysis of weakly nonlinear systems,

as time permits. Prerequisites: Graduate standing, ECE

125 or equivalent.

ECE 423. Digital Image Processing (3)

Fundamentals of imaging acquisition and geometry.

Fourier, Hadamard, Walsh and Wavelet Transforms and

their usage in image segmentation and understanding.

High-pass and low-pass filtering in frequency and spatial

domains. Multiresolution analysis and spatial scale filter-

ing. Shape and texture representation and recognition.

Prerequisite: ECE 343 or equivalent.

ECE 425. Semiconductor Lasers I (3)

Review of elementary solid-state physics. Relationships

between Fermi energy and carrier density and leakage.

Introduction to optical waveguiding in simple double-

heterostructures. Density of optical modes, Blackbody

radiation and the spontaneous emission factor. Modal

gain, modal loss, and confinement factors. Einstein’s

approach to gain and spontaneous emission. Periodic

structures and the transmission matrix. Ingredients. A

phenomenological approach to diode lasers. Mirrors and

resonators for diode lasers. Gain and current relations.

This course, a version of ECE 325 for graduate students,

requires research projects and advanced assignments.

Credit will not be given for both ECE 325 and ECE

425. Prerequisite: ECE 203.

ECE 426. Semiconductor Lasers II (3)

Continuation of Semiconductor Lasers I. Topics covered

include: Gain and current relations; dynamic effects; per-

turbation and coupled-mode theory; dielectric

waveguides; and photonic integrated circuits. This

238 Lehigh University Course Catalog 2009-2010

course, a version of ECE326 for graduate students,

requires research projects and advanced assignments.

Credit will not be given for both ECE 326 and ECE

426.

ECE 431. Topics in Switching Theory (3)

Emphasis on structural concepts motivated by recent

advances in integrated circuit technology. Major topics

include: logical completeness, decomposition techniques,

synthesis with assumed network forms, systolic architec-

tures, systolic lemma and its applications, bit serial

architectures. Prerequisite: ECE 320 or equivalent. Wagh

ECE 432. Spread Spectrum and CDMA (3)

Fading and dispersive channel model, direct sequence

spread spectrum, frequency hopping spread spectrum,

DS-CDMA, FH-CDMA, spread sequences and their

properties, multi-user detection, PN code acquisition,

wireless communication systems, industrial standards

(IS-95, WCDMA, CDMA2000). Prerequisite: ECE341

or ECE342 or ECE410 or consent of instructor.

ECE 433 (CHE 433, ME 433). State Space

Control (3)

State-space methods of feedback control system design

and design optimization for invariant and time-varying

deterministic, continuous systems; pole positioning,

observability, controllability, modal control, observer

design, the theory of optimal processes and Pontryagin’s

Maximum Principle, the linear quadratic optimal regula-

tor problem, Lyapunov functions and stability theorems,

linear optimal open loop control; introduction to the

calculus of variations; introduction to the control of dis-

tributed parameter systems. Intended for engineers with

a variety of backgrounds. Examples will be drawn from

mechanical electrical and chemical engineering applica-

tions. Prerequisite: ME 343 or ECE 212 or CHE 386 or

consent of instructor.

ECE 434 (CHE 434, ME 434). Multivariable

Process Control (3)

A state-of-the-art review of multivariable methods of

interest to process control applications. Design tech-

niques examined include loop interaction analysis,

frequency domain methods (Inverse Nyquist Array,

Characteristic Loci and Singular Value Decomposition)

feed forward control, internal model control and dynam-

ic matrix control. Special attention is placed on the

interaction of process design and process control. Most

of the above methods are used to compare the relative

performance of intensive and extensive variable control

structures. Prerequisite: CHE 433 or ME 433 or ECE

433 or consent of instructor.

ECE 435. Error-Correcting Codes (3)

Error-correcting codes for digital computer and commu-

nication systems. Review of modern algebra

concentrating on groups and finite fields. Structure and

properties of linear and cyclic codes for random or burst

error correction covering Hamming, Golay, Reed-Muller,

BCH and Reed-Solomon codes. Decoding algorithms

and implementation of decoders. Prerequisite: CSE 261

or equivalent.

ECE 436 (CHE 436, ME 436). Systems

Identification (3)

The determination of model parameters from time-his-

tory and frequency response data by graphical,

deterministic and stochastic methods. Examples and

exercises taken from process industries, communications

and aerospace testing. Regression, quasilinearization and

invariant-imbedding techniques for nonlinear system

parameter identification included. Prerequisite: CHE

433 or ME 433 or ECE 433 or consent of instructor.

ECE 437 (CHE 437, ME 437). Stochastic

Control (3)

Linear and nonlinear models for stochastic systems.

Controllability and observability. Minimum variance

state estimation. Linear quadratic Gaussian control prob-

lem. Computational considerations. Nonlinear control

problem in stochastic systems. Prerequisite: CHE 433 or

ME 433 or ECE 433 or consent of instructor.

ECE 438. Quantum Electronics (3)

Electromagnetic fields and their quantization. propaga-

tion of optical beams in homogeneous and lens-like

media. Modulation of optical radiation. Coherent inter-

actions of radiation fields and atomic systems.

Introduction to nonlinear optics-second-harmonic gener-

ation. Parametric amplification, oscillation, and

fluorescence. Third-order optical nonlinearities. This

course, a version of ECE 338 for graduate students,

requires research projects and advanced assignments.

Credit will not be given for both ECE 338 and ECE

438. Prerequisite: ECE 203.

ECE 441. Fundamentals of Wireless

Communications (3)

Characterization of mobile radio channels. Wireless

information transmission: modulation/demodulation,

equalization, diversity combining, coding/decoding,

multiple access methods. Overview of cellular concepts

and wireless networking. This course, a version of

ECE341 for graduate students, requires research projects

and advanced assignments. Credit will not be given for

both ECE 341 and ECE 441. Prerequisite: ECE 342 or

equiv.

ECE 443. RF Power Amplifiers for Wireless

Communications (3)

Review of linear power amplifier design. Discussion of

major nonlinear effects, such as high-efficiency amplifiers

modes, matching network design for reduced conduction

angle, overdrive and limiting effects, and switching mode

amplifiers. Discussion of other nonlinear effects, efficien-

cy enhancement and linearization techniques.

Companion course to ECE463. Prerequisite: ECE 346

or equivalent.

ECE 447. Introduction to Integrated Optics (3)

Theory of dielectric waveguides (ray and wave

approach). Modes in planar slab optical guides and in

waveguides with graded index profiles. Coupled-mode

formalism and periodic structures. Coupling of optical

beams to planar structures. Switching and modulation of

light in dielectric guides: phase, frequency and polariza-

tion modulators; electro-optic, acousto-optic and

magneto-optic modulators. Semiconductor lasers.

Fabrication of semiconductor components. Recent

advances. The course is an extension of ECE 347 for

graduate students and it will include research projects

and advanced assignments. Prerequisites: ECE 202 and

ECE 203.

ECE 448. Lightwave Technology (3)

Overview of optical fiber communications. Optical

fibers, structures and waveguiding fundamentals. Signal

degradation in fibers arising from attenuation,

Electrical and Computer Engineering 239

intramodal and intermodal dispersion. Optical sources,

semiconductor lasers and LEDs. Rate equations and fre-

quency characteristics of a semiconductor laser. Coupling

efficiency of laser diodes and LEDs to single-mode and

multimode fibers. PIN and avalanche photodetectors.

Optical receiver design. Transmission link analysis. The

course is an extension of ECE 348 for graduate students

and it will include research projects and advanced assign-

ments. Prerequisite: ECE 203.

ECE 450. Special Topics (3)

Selected topics in electrical and computer engineering

not covered in other courses. May be repeated for credit.

ECE 451. Physics of Semiconductor Devices (3)

Crystal structure and space lattices, crystal binding, lat-

tice waves and vibrations, electrons and atoms in crystal

lattices. Quantum mechanics and energy band theory,

carrier statistics, Boltzmann transport theory, interaction

of carriers with scattering centers, electronic and thermal

conduction. Magnetic effects. Generation and recombi-

nation theory. Application to p-n junctions. Prerequisite:

ECE 126 or equivalent. Decker, Hatalis or White

ECE 452. Advanced Semiconductor Diode and

Transport Theory (3)

Properties of metal-semiconductor contacts, Schottky

barriers, ohmic contacts, hot electrons, intervalley scat-

tering, velocity saturation, secondary ionization,

avalanche breakdown. Applications to microwave devices

such as avalanche and Gunn diodes, Schottky barrier

diodes, tunnel diodes and PIN diodes. Prerequisite: ECE

451. Decker

ECE 454. Turbo Codes and Iterative Decoding (3)

Capacity-approaching error correcting codes. Soft-in

soft-out iterative decoding. Parallel/serial/hybrid concate-

nated convolutional codes—and turbo-like codes.

Iterative decoding algorithms and performance analysis

of parallel/serial turbo codes. Low density parity check

(LDPC) codes and product codes. Code graph and mes-

sage passing decoding algorithms. Turbo and LDPC

code design and construction. Performance analysis

using density evolution and extrinsic information trans-

fer charts. Applications of turbo and LDPC codes.

Prerequisite: ECE 435 or instructor’s approval

ECE 455. Theory of Metal Semiconductor and

Heterojunction Transistors (3)

Physics of metal semiconductor and heterojunction field

effect transistors (MESFET and HEMT). Theory of

semiconductor heterojunctions. Properties of heterojunc-

tion bipolar transistors (HBT): Equivalent circuits,

applications to microwave amplifiers, oscillators, and

switching circuits. Prerequisite: ECE 451. Decker

ECE 460. Engineering Project (3-6)

Project work in an area of student and faculty interest.

Selection and direction of the project may involve inter-

action with industry. Prerequisite: consent of department

chairperson.

ECE 461. Theory of Electrical Noise (3)

Definitions: noise temperature, spectral density. Noise

sources: quantum, thermal, shot, generation-recombina-

tion, flicker noise. Representation and optimization of

noisy networks. Prerequisites: Phys 31 and ECE 126.

Decker

ECE 463. Design of Microwave Solid State

Circuits (3)

Equivalent circuit modeling and characterization of

microwave semiconductor devices, principles of imped-

ance matching, noise properties and circuit interaction,

introduction to the design of high power and non-linear

circuits. Decker

ECE 464. Introduction to Cryptography and

Network Security (3)

Introduction to cryptography, classical cipher systems,

cryptanalysis, perfect secrecy and the one time pad, DES

and AES, public key cryptography covering systems

based on discrete logarithms, the RSA and the knapsack

systems, and various applications of cryptography. This

graduate version of ECE 364 requires additional work.

May not be taken with ECE 364 for credit. Prerequisite:

Graduate student status.

ECE 467. Semiconductor Material and Device

Characterization (3)

This course covers the main characterization techniques

used in semiconductor industry. Emphasis is given to the

electrical characterization methods although some opti-

cal, and physical analytical techniques are reviewed. The

principles and the experimental set up for measuring the

following parameters are covered: resistivity; carrier and

doping concentration; contact resistance and Schottky

barrier height; device series resistance; MOSFET’s chan-

nel length and threshold voltage; carrier mobility; oxide

and interface trapped charge; and carrier lifetime.

Laboratory sessions provide hands-on experience on

some of the above methods. Prerequisites: ECE 126 and

ECE 308, or equivalent. Hatalis

ECE 469. Process Modeling for Semiconductor

Devices (3)

Students will design and “manufacture” a Si or GaAs

transistor through process simulation of ion implanta-

tion, epitaxial growth, diffusion and contact formation,

etc. I-V characteristics and small signal parameters, suit-

able for digital and microwave circuit simulation

programs, will be derived. Complimentary to ECE 463

and 471. Prerequisite: ECE 308 or 351. Hwang

ECE 471. Optical Information Processing (3)

Introduction to optical information processing and

applications. Interference and diffraction of optical

waves. 2D optical matched filters that use lenses for

Fourier transforms. Methods and devices for modulating

light beams for information processing, communica-

tions, and optical computing. Construction and

application of holograms for optical memory and inter-

connections. The course is an extension of ECE 371 for

graduate students and it will include research projects

and advanced assignments. Prerequisite: ECE 108.

ECE 472. Optical Networks (3)

Study the design of optical fiber local, metropolitan, and

wide area networks. Topics include: passive and active

photonic components for optical switching, tuning,

modulation and amplification; optical interconnection

switches and buffering; hardware and software architec-

tures for packet switching and wavelength division

multiaccess systems. This class is supported with a labo-

ratory. The course is an extension of ECE 372 for

graduate students and it will include research projects

and advanced assignments. Prerequisite: ECE 81.

240 Lehigh University Course Catalog 2009-2010

ECE 474. Analog CMOS VLSI Design (3)

The fundamentals of analog circuit design with CMOS

linear IC techniques. Discrete Analog Signal Processing

(DASP) is accomplished with switched-capacitor CMOS

circuits. Analog building blocks include operational

amplifiers, S/H circuits, comparators and voltage refer-

ences, oscillators, filters, modulators, phase

detectors/shifters, charge transfer devices, etc. Analog

sub-system applications are phase-locked loops (PLL’s),

A/D and D/A converters, modems, sensors, adaptive fil-

ters and equalizers, etc. The emphasis is on the physical

operation of analog CMOS integration circuits and the

design process. Prerequisite: ECE 355 or equivalent.

White

ECE 476. Analysis and Design of Analog

Integrated Circuits (3)

Device and circuit models of bipolar and field effect

transistors; bipolar and MOS integrated circuit technolo-

gy; passive components; parasitic and distributed

elements; amplifier gain stages; subthreshold gain stages;

current sources and active loads; temperature and supply

independent biasing; output stage design; frequency

response and slew rate limitation; operational amplifier

and analog multiplier design. Circuit simulation using

SPICE. Prerequisite: ECE 308 or equivalent.

ECE 478. Analysis and Design of Digital

Integrated Circuits (3)

Large signal models and transient behavior of MOS and

bipolar transistors. Basic inverter and logic gate circuits.

Noise margins, operating speed, and power consumption

of various logic families, including MOS, CMOS, satu-

rated logic TTL, ECL, and IIL. Regenerative logic

circuits and digital memories. Circuit design and com-

puter- aided circuit analysis for LSI and VLSI circuits.

Prerequisite: ECE 308 or equivalent.

ECE 479. Advanced MOS VLSI Design (3)

The design of very large scale NMOS and CMOS inte-

grated circuits. Strong emphasis on device physics, and

on novel circuit design approaches for VLSI implementa-

tion. Examination of second-order effects involved in

designing high performance MOS digital integrated cir-

cuits, with the goal of pushing the design process to the

limits determined by our current understanding of semi-

conductor device physics and of the currently available

technologies. The topics include device physics (sub-

threshold conduction, short channel effects), important

circuit innovations (substrate bias generators, sense ampli-

fiers), systems aspects (clocking, timing, array structures),

as well as static and dynamic circuit implementations.

Design project, using VLSI design automation tools.

Prerequisites: ECE 308 (or equivalent) and ECE 361.

ECE 483. Advanced Semiconductor Devices for

VLSI Circuits (3)

Theory of small geometry devices for VLSI circuits.

Emphasis of MOS bipolar device static and dynamic

electrical characteristics. Carrier injection, transport,

storage, and detection in bulk and interfacial regions.

Limitations of physical scaling theory for VLSI submi-

cron device structures. MOS physics and technology, test

pattern device structures, charge-coupled devices,

MNOS nonvolatile memory devices, and measurement

techniques for device and process characterization. The

influence of defects on device electrical properties.

Prerequisite: ECE 451. White

ECE 485. Heterojunction Materials and Devices (3)

Material properties of compound semiconductor hetero-

junctions, quantum wells and superlattices. Strained

layer epitaxy and band-gap engineering. Theory and per-

formance of novel devices such as quantum well lasers,

resonant tunneling diodes, high electron mobility tran-

sistors, and heterojunction bipolar transistors.

Complementary to ECE 452. Prerequisite: ECE 451.

Hwang

ECE 486. Integrated Solid-State Sensors (3)

The physical operation of sensor-based, custom integrated

circuits. Emphasis on the integration of sensors, analog,

and digital circuits on a silicon chip with CMOS technol-

ogy. Sensors include photocells, electrochemical

transducers, strain gauges, temperature detectors, vibration

and velocity sensors, etc. Analysis of sensor-circuit per-

formance limits including signal-to-noise, frequency

response, temperature sensitivity, etc. Examples of sensor-

based, custom I.C.’s are discussed and analyzed with CAD

modeling and layout. Prerequisite: ECE 451. White

ECE 491. Research Seminar (1-3)

Regular meetings focused on specific topics related to the

research interests of department faculty. Current research

will be discussed. Students may be required to present

and review relevant publications. May be repeated for

credit up to a maximum of three (3) credits. Prerequisite:

Consent of instructor.

ECE 492. Independent Study (1-3)

An intensive study, with report, of a topic in electrical

and computer engineering which is not treated in other

courses. May be repeated for credit. Prerequisite:

Consent of instructor.

ECE 493. Solid-State Electronics Seminar (3)

Discussion of current topics in solid-state electronics.

Topics selected depend upon the interests of the staff

and students and are allied to the research programs of

the Sherman Fairchild Laboratory for Solid State Studies.

Student participation via presentation of current research

papers and experimental work. Prerequisite: consent of

instructor. May be repeated for credit.

Electrical Engineering

See listings under Electrical and Computer Engineering.

Electrical Engineering and

Engineering Physics

This dual-degree curriculum is particularly well suited

for students seeking thorough preparation in the field of

electronic device physics. It is a combination of the basic

electrical engineering and engineering physics curricu-

lums and requires 162 credit hours, distributed over five

years. The student will earn two degrees: B.S. in electri-

cal engineering and B.S. in engineering physics.

Two alternative course sequences are listed below.

Students who follow the course sequence in the column

on the left will complete 133 credit hours, including all

of the required electrical engineering courses, by the end

of the fourth year and the rest of 163 credit hours at the

end of the fifth year. Since the electrical engineering

degree requires 136 credit hours, students normally will

complete the requirements for that degree at the end of

Engineering 241

the ninth semester. It is possible for a student to earn the

electrical engineering degree at the end of the eighth

semester by accumulating the extra credit hour through

advanced placement and/or overload credits.

In the alternate course sequence in the column on the

right, the student completes 132 credit hours by the end

of the fourth year, including all the required physics

courses, and the rest of the 163 credits at the end of the

fifth year. Since 131 credit hours are required for the

engineering physics degree, the student will complete the

requirements for that degree at the end of the fourth

year, and the requirements for the electrical engineering

degree at the end of the fifth year.

Students interested in a dual-degree program combining

physics (rather than engineering physics) and electrical

engineering should consult the Physics section of this

catalog. That program allows the student to earn the

B.S. in physics and the B.S. in electrical engineering.

Students interested in either dual-degree program should

contact Prof. Gary G. DeLeo, Department of Physics.

The recommended sequences of courses for the two dif-

ferent EEEP sequences are:

EE-EP EP-EE

Freshman year (see Section III)

Sophomore year, first semester

PHY 21 (4) PHY 21 (4)

PHY 22 (1) PHY 22 (1)

ECE 33 (4) ECE 33 (4)

ECE 81 (4) ECE 81 (4)

MATH 23 (4) MATH 23 (4)

[17] [17]

Sophomore year, second semester

PHY 31 (3) PHY 31 (3)

ECE 108 (4) ECE 108 (4)

ECE 82 (1) ECE 82 (1)

MATH 205 (3) MATH 205 (3)

MATH 208 (3) MATH 208 (3)

ECO 1 (4) ECO 1 (4)

[18] [18]

Junior year, first semester

ECE 121 (2) ECE 121 (2)

ECE 123 (3) ECE 123 (3)

PHY 212 (3) PHY 212 (3)

MATH 231 (3) EP- Ap.Elec. (3)

MATH 322 (3) MATH 322 (3)

HSS (3) HSS (3)

[17] [17]

Junior year, second semester

PHY 213 (3) PHY 213 (3)

PHY 215 (4) PHY 215 (4)

ECE 125 (3) ECE 125 (3)

ECE 126 (3) ECE 126 (3)

ECE 138 (2) PHY 262 (2)

HSS (3) HSS (3)

[18] [18]

Senior year, first semester

ECE 257 (3) PHY 340 or (3)

ME 104

PHY 362 (3) PHY 362 (3)

PHY 363 (3) PHY 363 (3)

ECE-Ap.Elec. (3) EP-Ap.Elec. (3)

HSS (6) HSS (3)

[18] [15]

Senior year, second semester

ECE 136 (3) ECE 138 (2)

ECE-Ap.Elec. (9) EP-Ap.Elec. (5)

Elective (4) HSS (3)

Electives (8)

[16] [18]

Fifth year, first semester

EP-Ap.Elec. (6) ECE-Ap.Elec. (3)

Electives (6) MATH 231 (3)

PHY 340 or (3) ECE 257 (3)

ME 104 Electives (6)

[15] [15]

Fifth year, second semester

PHY 262 (2) ECE 136 (3)

EP-Ap.Elec. (6) ECE-Ap.Elec. (9)

Electives (7) Elective (4)

[15] [16]

Total Credits [163] Total Credits [163]

Credits in 4 yrs [133] Credits in 4 yrs [132]

The 23 credits of EP-approved electives must include at

least three courses from the following: PHY 363, 369,

(352 or 355), (348 or 365), and 380. The 24 credits of

ECE-approved electives must be approved by the stu-

dent’s advisor.

Engineering

See Section III for additional information on the P.C.

Rossin College of Engineering and Applied Science.

Undergraduate students who are officially enrolled in the

college’s co-op program are eligible for 1-6 credits of free

electives of ENGR 200, taken as P/F, typically 3 credits

for the fall semester of junior year work experience and

another 3 credits the following summer.

ENGR 1. Engineering Computations (3) fall-

spring

An introductory survey of computing for students in

engineering and the sciences. Basic programming con-

cepts, structures and algorithms. Applications to solving

scientific problems. Case studies from utilization of com-

puters in various engineering disciplines. Prerequisite:

none. Mandatory for and open only for first year

RCEAS students.

ENGR 5. Introduction to Engineering Practice (3)

First year practical engineering experience; introduction

to concepts, methods and principles of engineering prac-

tice. Problem solving, design, project planning,

communication, teamwork, ethics and professionalism;

innovative solution development and implementation.

Introduction to various engineering disciplines and

degree programs. Mandatory for and open only for first

year RCEAS students.

ENGR 130: Engineering Communications (1)

summer

Experience and theory in oral and written communica-

tions preparing students for their first Co-Op work

assignments. Required of all Engineering Co-Op stu-

dents. Prerequisite: ENGR 200, Concurrently.

ENGR 160. Engineering Internship (1-3)

Offers students who have attained at least Jr2 standing

242 Lehigh University Course Catalog 2009-2010

an opportunity to complement coursework with a work

experience. Detailed rules can be obtained from the

Associate Dean of Engineering. Report required. P/F

grading.

ENGR 200. Engineering Co-op (3)

Supervised cooperative work assignment to obtain practi-

cal experience. Prerequisite: acceptance into the program.

P/F grading.

ENGR 211 (BUS 211). Integrated Product

Development (IPD) I (3) spring

Business, engineering, and design arts students work in

cross disciplinary teams of 4-6 students on conceptual

design including marketing, financial and economic

planning, economic and technical feasibility of new

product concepts. Teams work on industrial projects

with faculty advisors. Oral presentations and written

reports. Prerequisite: junior standing in engineering,

business or arts and science. (Mechanical Engineering

students must register for ME 211).

ENGR 212. (BUS 212) Integrated Product

Development II (2) fall

Business, engineering and design arts students work in

cross disciplinary teams of 4-6 students on the detailed

design including fabrication and testing of a prototype of

the new product designed in the IPD course 1.

Additional deliverables include a detailed production

plan, marketing plan, detailed base-case financial models,

project and product portfolio. Teams work on industrial

projects with faculty advisors. Oral presentations and

written reports. Prerequisite: ENGR 211

ENGR 400. Engineering Co-op for Graduate

Students (3)

Supervised cooperative work assignment to obtain practi-

cal experience in field of study. Requires consent of

department chairperson. When on a cooperative assign-

ment, the student must register for this course to

maintain continuous student status. Limit to at most

three credits per registration period. No more than six

credits can be applied towards a master’s degree and no

more than an additional nine credits towards a Ph.D.

The credits must be taken P/F.

ENGR 452. (CHE 452, ME 452) Mathematical

Methods in Engineering (3) fall

Analytical techniques are developed for the solution of

engineering problems described by algebraic systems, and

by ordinary and partial differential equations. Topics

covered include: linear vector spaces; eigenvalues, eigen-

vectors, and eigenfunctions. First and higher-order linear

differential equations with initial and boundary condi-

tions; Sturm-Louiville problems; Green’s functions.

Special functions; Bessel, etc. Qualitative and quantita-

tive methods for nonlinear ordinary differential

equations; phase plane. Solutions of classical partial dif-

ferential equations from the physical sciences; transform

techniques; method of characteristics.

ENGR 475. Research (1)

Projects conducted under the supervision of a faculty

advisor. Includes analytical, computational or experimen-

tal work, literature searches, assigned readings. Regular

meetings with the advisor to consider progress made and

future direction are required. The course is open only to

graduate students and may be repeated for credit.

Prerequisite: Graduate standing and departmental

approval.

Engineering Minor

See Section III for additional information on the

Engineering Minor under the heading of the P.C. Rossin

College of Engineering and Applied Science.

Core Prerequisites to begin the program: Math 51 (or

equivalent) and Physics 5 (or equivalent). May be taken

concurrently with EMC1 and EMC2.

Required Courses: EMC1 and EMC2.

Electives: Three electives are required and must include

one from the Engineering Fundamentals course group

and one from the Integrated Engineering course group.

The student is free to choose the third elective from

either group.

Number of credits to fulfill minor is 15 credits

Note: The Minor in Engineering is not open to

RCEAS students.

Group A: Engineering Fundamentals

EMC 105 Engineering Structures & Motion

EMC 110 Energy Engineering

EMC 115 Engineering Materials & Electronics

EMC 120 Systems Engineering

Group B: Integrated Engineering

EMC 42 (CSE 42) Game Design

EMC 150 Information & Knowledge Engineering

EMC 155 Enterprise Engineering

EMC 156 Embedded Systems

EMC 160 Computer Aided Engineering & Control

Systems

EMC 168 (IE 168) Production Analysis

EMC 170 Software Engineering & Collaborative

Environments

EMC 171 (CHE 171, CEE 171, ES 171)

Fundamentals of Environmental Technology

EMC 174 Process Engineering

EMC 1 Macro and micro view of engineering (3)

A course designed to be exciting and stimulate a stu-

dent’s further interest in the engineering minor.

Hands-on experience with engineering problem solving,

modeling, simulation, and analysis tools. Macro view of

what engineering is and what engineers do. Interaction

with practicing engineers; visits to local engineering facil-

ities. Prerequisite: Math 51 (or equivalent); may be taken

concurrently.

EMC 2 Engineering Practicum (3)

Techniques and processes used in the creation of engi-

neered products. Exposure to engineering tasks and

processes in a hands-on laboratory; mechanical and elec-

tronic manufacturing and fabrication techniques.

Disassembly and reassembly of common engineered

products to assess how they work and are manufactured.

Prerequisites: Math 51 (or equivalent) and Physics 5 (or

equivalent); may be taken concurrently.

EMC 42 (CSE 42) Game Design (3)

From the early text-based, one-player computer games to

the modern 3D games with thousands of gamers sharing

the same virtual gaming world simultaneously, computer

games have gone through a remarkable evolution.

Engineering 243

Despite this evolution, principles of computer game

design are not well understood. In this course we will

study the broad issue of game design, particularly tai-

lored towards video games. We will present an

experimental model for game design and analyze various

modern computer games from the perspective of this

model. Prerequisite: None

EMC 105 Engineering Structures and Motion (3)

Practical limits imposed on stationary or moving struc-

tures; why exceeding these limits can lead to failure.

Basic principles governing both stationary structures; e.g.

buildings and bridges, and things that move, e.g. cars

and satellites, and how these principles apply in engi-

neering practice. How a stationary structure effectively

supports both its own weight and the weight of its users

and why a structure will undergo deflections and defor-

mations during use. How forces and energy are

associated with a moving structure and how these affect

the motion of the structure. Prerequisite: EMC 1 or

EMC 2; may be taken concurrently.

EMC 110 Energy Engineering (3)

The amount of energy used by a modern society is quite

staggering, and a clear understanding of energy processes

and constraints is essential knowledge for every citizen. The

basics of energy, its measurement, principles governing its

use and conversion, methods of production, and the asso-

ciated consequences on the environment. Fossil, nuclear,

and renewable, energy sources. Energy utilization devel-

oped in a simple form and employed to examine the use of

energy in large and small engineering systems and prod-

ucts, from power plants to air conditioners. Prerequisite:

EMC 1 or EMC 2; may be taken concurrently.

EMC 115 Engineering Materials and Electronics (3)

“Materials” are the “stuff” from which we build TV’s,

cell phones, cars, skyscrapers, etc., and affect design, per-

formance, costs, and environmental impacts. How

electronics, communications, and structures depend on

advances in materials engineering: materials behavior,

modeling and simulation of materials properties and per-

formance; methods and databases for materials selection;

and engineering processes to control material composi-

tion and structure. Prerequisite: EMC 1 or EMC 2; may

be taken concurrently.

EMC 120 Systems Engineering (3)

Systems approach to problem solving in fields such as

environmental planning, large-scale infrastructure sys-

tems, manufacturing, telecommunication, and delivery

of services. Systems analysis concepts and their relation

to the determination of preferred plans and designs of

complex, large-scale engineering systems. Performance

and cost in project engineering decisions that balance

resource investments across the major stages of life of an

engineering system. Development of functional require-

ments and satisfactory designs. Prerequisite: EMC 1 or

EMC 2; may be taken concurrently.

EMC 150 Information and Knowledge

Engineering (3)

How computers manage information for making deci-

sions automatically or for advising decision makers.

Characterization of database systems, of web technolo-

gies, of multimedia, and of the relationships among

them. Representations of knowledge and the use of artifi-

cial intelligence techniques. Automated help-desk systems

and computer generation of project plans. Prerequisite:

EMC 1 or EMC 2; may be taken concurrently.

EMC 155 Enterprise engineering (3)

The key elements of modeling and engineering the cor-

poration. Enterprise engineering, decision analysis,

application of quantitative methods to facilities plan-

ning, engineering economy, production planning and

control, forecasting, material requirements planning, and

agile business practices. Prerequisite: EMC 1 or EMC 2;

may be taken concurrently.

EMC 156 Embedded Systems (3)

Use of small computers embedded as part of other

machines. Limited resource microcontrollers and state

machines from high-level description language.

Embedded hardware: RAM, ROM, flash, timers,

UARTs, PWM, A/D, multiplexing, debouching.

Development and debugging tools running on host

computers. Real-Time Operating System (RTOS) sema-

phores, mailboxes, queues. Task priorities and rate

monotonic scheduling. Software architectures for embed-

ded systems. Prerequisite: EMC 1 or EMC 2; may be

taken concurrently.

EMC 160 Computer aided engineering and

control systems (3)

Use of computer-based technologies to design and man-

ufacture products. The design cycle to create product

concepts. Analysis of product design. Specifications for

the control of manufacturing processes. How control sys-

tems are used in creating agile manufacturing

environments: discrete and analog signals, analog to digi-

tal conversion, and application case studies. Hands-on

application(s) and sample exercises from real world

examples. Prerequisite: EMC 1 or EMC 2; may be taken

concurrently.

EMC 168 (IE 168) Production Analysis (3)

A course for students not majoring in industrial engi-

neering. Engineering economy; application of

quantitative methods to facilities analysis and planning,

operations planning and control, work measurement,

and scheduling. Prerequisite: Math 21 OR Math 51

EMC 170 Software Engineering & Collaborative

Environments (3)

Discover why building large software systems is very dif-

ferent from using large databases, or designing products

such as automobiles with CAD, etc. Design and imple-

mentation of a large team project involving complex data

management in a collaborative environment. Learn why

and how collaborative environments are becoming essen-

tial to modern engineering projects and require the tools

and techniques of software engineering to succeed.

Prerequisite: EMC 1 or EMC 2; may be taken concur-

rently.

EMC 171 (CHE 171, CEE 171, ES 171)

Fundamentals of Environmental Technology (4)

Water and air quality; water, air, and soil pollution.

Chemistry of common pollutants. Water purification,

wastewater treatment, solid and hazardous waste man-

agement, environmental remediation, and air quality

control. Global changes, energy, and the environment.

Constraints of environmental protection on technology

development and applications. Constraints of economic

development on environmental quality. Environmental

life cycle analysis and environmental policy. Prerequisite:

One advanced science course or permission of instructor.

244 Lehigh University Course Catalog 2009-2010

EMC 174 Process Engineering (3)

Semiconductor process engineering, including technolo-

gy to process raw silicon wafer to electronics integrated

circuits (ICs). Crystal growth, thin film deposition, pho-

tolithography, doping technology. Prerequisite: EMC 1

or EMC 2; may be taken concurrently.

Engineering Mathematics

Professors. D. Gary Harlow, Ph.D. (Cornell) chair;

Philip A. Blythe, Ph.D. (Manchester, England); Terry J.

Delph, Ph.D. (Stanford); Jacob Y. Kazakia, Ph.D.

(Lehigh); Alistair K. Macpherson, Ph.D. (Sydney);

Herman F. Nied (Lehigh); Eric Varley, Ph.D. (Brown).

Associate professor. Alparslan Öztekin (Illinois).

Emeritus professors. Dominic G.B. Edelen, Ph.D.

(Johns Hopkins); Fazil Erdogan, Ph.D. (Lehigh); Stanley

H. Johnson, Ph.D. (Berkeley); Arturs Kalnins, Ph.D.

(Michigan); Kenneth N. Sawyers, Ph.D. (Brown);

Gerald F. Smith, Ph.D. (Brown).

The Division of Engineering Mathematics was estab-

lished within the Department of Mechanical

Engineering and Mechanics to foster interdisciplinary

research in the application of mathematics to the engi-

neering and physical sciences. Interaction with industry

is actively encouraged, and appropriate programs are

designed for part-time students. Program content for all

students is developed through close consultation with

division faculty.

For a description of the graduate programs in applied

mathematics see the discussion under Interdisciplinary

Graduate Programs. Engineering mathematics courses

are listed under mechanical engineering and mechanics.

English

Professors. Barry M. Kroll, Ph.D. (Michigan) Robert D.

Rodale Professor of Writing, chairperson; Elizabeth N.

Fifer, Ph.D. (Michigan); Edward J. Gallagher, Ph.D.

(Notre Dame); Scott Paul Gordon, Ph.D. (Harvard);

Rosemary J. Mundhenk, Ph.D. (U.C.L.A.), Barbara H.

Traister, Ph.D. (Yale)

Associate Professors. Beth Dolan, Ph.D. (North

Carolina); Dawn Keetley, Ph.D. (Wisconsin); Edward E.

Lotto, Ph.D. (Indiana) director, Center for Writing,

Math and Study Skills; Seth Moglen, Ph.D. (U.C.

Berkeley); Barbara Pavlock, Ph.D. (Cornell); Amardeep

Singh, Ph.D. (Duke).

Assistant Professors. Kate Crassons, Ph.D. (Duke);

Suzanne Edwards, Ph.D. (University of Chicago); Bob

Watts, Ph.D. (Missouri); Stephanie Watts, Ph.D.

(Missouri); Edward Whitley, Ph.D. (Maryland).

Professor of Practice, Writer-in-Residence, Berman

Center. Ruth K. Setton, Ph.D. (Rice)

Undergraduate Major in English

The major in English is designed to give students experi-

ence in reading, analyzing, and formulating thoughts

about people and ideas that matter; an understanding of

how literary artists find the appropriate words to express

their thoughts and feelings; and a basic knowledge of the

historical development of British, American and world

literature.

Students who major in English go on to careers in teach-

ing, writing, law, business, science, medicine,

engineering—and many others. The analytical and com-

munication skills acquired in the study of literature and

writing will be of use in almost any profession or human

activity. Depending on their interests, abilities, and

career plans, students who major in English are encour-

aged to consider double majors or one or two minors in

other fields. The major in English is flexible enough to

allow cross-disciplinary study with ease.

The student majoring in English chooses from an exten-

sive list of courses. To ensure breadth of coverage each

English major is required to take the following courses:

English 100 Working with Texts (4)

English 290 Senior Seminar (4)

Four 300-level courses distributed over the following

periods (British or American survey may substitute for

one 300 level course):

• British to 1660 (ENGL. 125, 327, 328, 360, 362,

364)

• British 1660-1900 (ENGL. 125,126, 331, 366, 367,

369, 371, 372)

• American to 1900 (ENGL. 123, 374, 376, 377, 378)

• 20th C American, British, World, Film, Popular

Culture (Engl124, 126, 379, 380, 383, 384, 385,

386, 387)

In addition, each English major elects at least three more

courses in literature or film with the following qualifica-

tions:

• at least one at the 300-level if a survey fulfills one of

the period requirements

These nine courses are the minimum for the major.

Many of our students will elect to take more, depending

on their career plans, their other majors and minors,

their plans to study abroad, and so on. Each major has a

departmental advisor to assist in selecting courses and to

offer counsel about career plans.

The department strongly recommends that any student

contemplating the possibility of advanced study of litera-

ture at the graduate level should work toward

departmental honors.

English Major with Concentration in

Creative Writing

Minimum number of hours: 16 (4 courses)

To have entered on the transcript Concentration in

Creative Writing, the students must take: ENGL 142,

143, or 144. They must also take: ENGL 342, 343 or

344, and at least 4 credit hours of elective courses chosen

from: ENGL 142, 143, 144, 170, 201, 281, 342, 343,

344 or 483. Note: the same course cannot fulfill both

the core requirement except in the case of courses that

can be repeated for credit—201, 342, 343 and 344—

which can be taken twice, once for core credit and once

as an elective. And must take both: ENGL 305 and 306.

Departmental Honors in English

In order to receive departmental honors the English

major must attain a 3.5 grade-point average in courses

presented for the major and must complete at least 44

credit hours of course work in English (beyond English 1

and 2). For the additional credits beyond the 36 required

of all English majors, honors students must take the fol-

lowing courses:

English 245

ENGL 309 Interpretation: Critical Theory &

Practice, or

ENGL 312 Studies in Literary and Cultural

Theory and

ENGL 307 Thesis Proposal, and

ENGL 308 Thesis

Because most graduate schools require language exami-

nations, the department also strongly recommends that

students going for honors achieve at least second-year

college competency in at least one foreign language.

Students who complete the courses required for depart-

mental honors but who do not achieve the necessary

grade-point average will receive the bachelor of arts

degree with a major in English.

Presidential Scholars

Students who anticipate becoming Presidential Scholars

should speak to the Director of Graduate Studies in their

junior year.

Minors in English

The Department of English offers three minors, each

requiring 16 hours of course work beyond English 1 and

2. Students’ major advisors monitor the minor programs,

but students should consult the minor advisor in the

Department of English when setting up a minor pro-

gram.

To minor in English students take 4 courses in literature

or film, one at the 300 level.

To minor in creative writing, students take ENGL 142,

143, or 144 and a literature course at the100- or 300-

level. They must also take ENGL 342, 343, or 344 and

a 4 credit elective taken from the following ENGL 142,

143, 144, 170, 201, 281, 342, 343, 344, or 483. Note:

the same course cannot fulfill both the core requirements

except in the case of a course that can be repeated for

credit—201, 342, 343, and 344—which can be taken

twice, once for core credit and once as an elective.

To minor in writing, students take ENGL142, 143, 144,

or 171, and ENGL 201, 342, 343 or 344. They must

also take two more courses chosen from: ENGL 142,

143, 144, 171, 201, 281, 342, 343, 344, JOUR 11,

111, 123, 212. Note: the same course cannot fulfill both

the core requirements except in the case of a course that

can be repeated for credit —201, 342, 343, and 344—

which can be taken twice, once for core credit and once

as an elective.

Graduate Work in English

We prepare our students to meet contemporary demands

for faculty who value excellence in teaching and scholar-

ship.

The Master of Arts Program

Applicants for the M.A. program should have an under-

graduate English major. Students who did not major in

English may be admitted but will need to supplement

their undergraduate training in English.

Candidates for the master’s degree must complete at least

33 credit hours. Students take at least seven of the

required courses (including Thesis) at the 400 level but

may select the balance of their curricula from 300-level

course offerings. Course work for the M.A. must include

one course in medieval British or early American litera-

ture (origins through 1776); two courses in British

literature, origins through 1660, or American literature,

origins through 1820, in addition to the one fulfilling

the previous requirement; two courses in British litera-

ture, 1660 through 1900, or American literature, 1820

through 1900; two courses, British, American, or world

literature, 1900 to present; and one theory course, in lit-

erature, writing, or film. At least two of the courses must

be in American literature, at least four in British litera-

ture. This distribution allows for some concentrated

study at the master’s level. English 485 and 486, the

required courses for new teaching fellows, are not count-

ed in the 33 credits toward the M.A. but will be counted

later toward the Ph.D., even if rostered during the M.A.

program.

M.A. candidates write a Thesis Paper, certified by a fac-

ulty advisor as ready for submission to a session

organizer as a conference presentation or to a profession-

al journal for possible publication, and present a short

talk on the thesis paper in a public forum.

The Doctor of Philosophy Program

The department admits to its doctoral program only stu-

dents of proven competence and scholarly promise. An

average of 3.5 in M.A. course work and strong endorse-

ments from graduate instructors are minimum

requirements for acceptance.

Doctoral candidates with a Lehigh master’s degree are

required to take eight courses and register for 42 credit

hours beyond the M.A. Those entering the doctoral pro-

gram with a master’s from another institution are

required to take nine courses and register for 48 credit

hours.

Candidates must also demonstrate a reading knowledge

of one or two foreign languages after having agreed on

choices with the director of graduate studies.

No later than six months after completing their course

work, candidates will take written and oral examinations

in one major field and two minor fields.

Candidates write their dissertations after having their

dissertation proposals approved by the department and

being admitted to candidacy by the appropriate college.

Freshman Composition Requirement

With the two exceptions noted below, all undergraduate

students take six credit hours of freshman English cours-

es: English 1 and English 2 (or one of the alternatives to

ENGL 2 such as 4, 6, 8 or 10. The exceptions are:

• Students who receive Advanced Placement or

received 700 or higher on the writing section of the

SAT.

• Students with English as a Second Language.

Categories include students on non-immigrant visas,

students on immigrant visas, registered aliens, and

citizens either by birth or by naturalization.

Students in all these categories for whom English is not

the first language may petition for special instruction

through the program in English as a Second Language.

At matriculation, all foreign students take an English

language competence test to determine the kind of

instruction best suited to their needs. Matriculating

freshmen judged to be qualified will roster ENGL 1, fol-

lowed by ENGL 2, 4, 6, 8, or 10. Others will be

enrolled in ENGL 3, followed by ENGL 5 (or 2, 4, 6, 8,

or 10).

246 Lehigh University Course Catalog 2009-2010

Students enrolled in the English as a Second Language

program are expected to reach a level of competence

comparable to those in the usual freshman program. The

form of instruction, however, will differ in the ESL pro-

gram by taking into account the special language and

cultural needs of non-native speakers.

Matriculating students in all the above categories who

are entering at a level above the freshman year, but who

need composition credit, should consult the department

for advice.

Freshman Courses

ENGL 1. Composition and Literature (3) fall

Emphasis on the writing process, especially on revising

for cogency and clarity. Topics drawn mainly from every-

day life and culture. Students must receive a grade of C-

or higher to advance to English 2.

ENGL 2. Composition and Literature II (3) spring

Continuation of ENGL 1. Emphasis on making

informed, thoughtful, and well-supported claims about

issues of broad public concern. Topics vary by section.

Texts include both expository and literary selections, as

well as films and other media. Prerequisite: a grade of C-

or higher in ENGL 1.

ENGL 3. Composition and Literature I for

International Writers (3) fall

Idiomatic English both oral and written, with a strong

emphasis on producing well-organized, coherent essays.

Enrollment limited to non-native speakers; placement is

determined by placement testing or ESL director’s rec-

ommendation.

ENGL 4. Composition and Literature II: Special

Topic A (3) spring

Continuation of ENGL I. Similar to ENGL 2, except

that the topic will be announced in advance. Topics vary

from year to year. Students must register through the

English department. Prerequisites: ENGL 1 and consent

of department.

ENGL 5. Composition and Literature II for

International Writers (3) spring

Continuation of English 3.

ENGL 6. Composition and Literature: Special

Topic B (3) spring

Continuation of ENGL I. Similar to ENGL 2, except

that the topic will be announced in advance. Topics vary

from year to year. Students must register through the

English department. Prerequisites: ENGL 1 and consent

of department.

ENGL 007 (GC 007). Global Literature (3)

This multidisciplinary seminar asks students to develop

informed opinions about what it means to be a global

citizen, using rhetorical and persuasive techniques to

address issues in economics, exile, and the environment.

Additional narrative and expository reflections on stu-

dents’ intersession trip are required. Open only to

students in the Global Citizenship program. Fulfills the

English 2 requirement where needed. (HU)

ENGL 8. Composition and Literature: Special

Topic C (3) spring

Continuation of ENGL I. Similar to ENGL 2, except

that the topic will be announced in advance. Topics vary

from year to year. Students must register through the

English department. Prerequisites: ENGL 1 and consent

of department.

ENGL 10. Composition and Literature: Special

Topic D (3) spring

Continuation of ENGL I. Similar to ENGL 2, except

that the topic will be announced in advance. Topics vary

from year to year. Students must register through the

English department. Prerequisites: ENGL 1 and consent

of department.

ENGL 11. Literature Seminar for Freshmen (3)

fall, spring

Alternative to Composition and Literature for freshmen

who have earned exemption from English 1 and qualify

for a seminar in literature. Recommended especially for

qualified students who are considering a major in the

humanities. Topics vary by section. Prerequisite: score of

4 on Advanced Placement Test in English or 700-749 or

higher on the writing section of the SAT.

Undergraduate Courses

English 52, 54, 56, and 58 are open to all undergradu-

ates, including first-year students also taking freshman

English. Courses numbered at the 100-level are open to

students who have completed or who are exempt from

the required six hours of freshman English. First-year

students who have completed English 1 with a grade of

A or A– may roster one of the 100-level courses as a sec-

ond English course to be taken concurrently with the

second-semester English composition requirement.

Prerequisites: Each course is a self-contained unit. None

has any other prerequisite than two semesters of fresh-

man English. Thus, students may roster English 126

whether or not they have had, or ever plan to take,

English 125. For all courses above 200, it is understood

that students will have completed six hours of freshman

English, even though that is not specified in the course

description.

ENGL 38. (AAS 38) Introduction to African

Literature (3)

Sub-Saharan African literary themes and styles; historical

and social contexts, African folktales, oral poetry, colo-

nial protest literature, postcolonial writing, and films on

contemporary Africa. (HU)

ENGL 52. (CLSS 52) Classical Epic (3)

Study of major epic poems from Greece and Rome.

Works include Homer’s Illiad and Odyssey, Apollonius’

Argonautica, Vergil’s Aeneid, and Ovid’s

Metamorphoses. (HU)

ENGL 54. (CLSS 54, THTR 54) Greek Tragedy (3)

Aspects of Greek theater and plays of Aechylus,

Sophocles, and Euripides in their social and intellectual

contexts. (HU)

ENGL 56. (CLSS 56) The Ancient Novel (3)

Examination of the origins of the novel in Greece and

Rome. Includes the picaresque novel. (HU)

ENGL 58. (CLSS 58, THTR 58) Greek and

Roman Comedy (3)

Study of comedy as a social form through plays of

Aristophanes, Menander, Plautus, and Terence. (HU)

ENGL 60. (THTR 60) Dramatic Action (4)

How plays are put together; how they work and what

they accomplish. Examination of how plot, character,

aural and visual elements of production combine to form

English 247

a unified work across genre, styles and periods.

Recommended as a foundation for further studies in

design, literature of performance. (HU)

ENGL 91. Special Topics (1-4)

A topic, genre, or approach in literature or writing not

covered in other courses. (HU)

ENGL 100. Working with Texts (4)

A course to help students to become, through intense

practice, independent readers of literary and other kinds

of texts; to discern and describe the devices and process

by which texts establish meaning; to gain an awareness

of the various methods and strategies for reading and

interpreting texts; to construct and argue original inter-

pretations; to examine and judge the interpretations of

other readers; to write the interpretive essay that sup-

ports a distinct position on some literary topic of

importance; and to learn to find and assimilate into their

own writing appropriate information from university

library resources. To be rostered as early as possible in

the English major’s program. Departmental approval

required. (HU)

ENGL 115. (HMS 115) Topics in Literature,

Medicine, and Health (4)

Largely focused on narratives about health, illness and

disability, this course will examine individual experiences

with attention to social context. Topics may include the

physician/patient relationship, illness and deviance,

plague literature, gender and medicine, autism, AIDS,

mental illness, aging. (HU)

ENGL 120. Literature from Developing Nations (4)

Contemporary literature from Africa, Central and South

America, and Asia. Prerequisite: six hours of freshman

English. (HU) Cannot be taken pass/fail.

ENGL 121. Topics in African-American Literature (4)

Selected works of African American literature and/or the

literatures of the African diaspora. May be repeated for

credit as title varies. Prerequisite: six hours of first-year

English. (HU) Cannot be taken pass/fail.

ENGL 123. American Literature I (4)

American literary works through the mid-19th century.

Prerequisite: six hours of freshman English. (HU)

Cannot be taken pass/fail.

ENGL 124. American Literature II (4)

American literature from the middle of the 19th century

to the present. Prerequisite: six hours of freshman

English. (HU) Cannot be taken pass/fail.

ENGL 125. British Literature I (4)

British literature and literary history from Beowulf

through the Pre-Romantics. Prerequisite: six hours of

freshman English. (HU) Cannot be taken pass/fail.

ENGL 126. British Literature II (4)

British literature and literary history from the Romantic

period into the 20th century. Prerequisite: six hours of

freshman English. (HU) Cannot be taken pass/fail.

ENGL 127. (THTR 127) The Development of

Theatre and Drama I (4)

Historical survey of western theatre and dramatic litera-

ture from their origins to the Renaissance. (HU)

ENGL 128. (THTR 128) The Development of

Theatre and Drama II (4)

Historical survey of western theatre and dramatic litera-

ture from the Renaissance to the modern era. (HU)

ENGL 142. Introduction to Writing Poetry (4)

Instruction in the craft of writing poetry, with a focus on

prosody. Practice in and classroom criticism of poems

written by students taking the course. Prerequisite: six

hours of freshman English. (ND)

ENGL 143. Introduction to Writing Creative Non-

Fiction (4)

Practice in writing non-fiction from immediate experi-

ence, with emphasis on accurate, persuasive description

writing. Prerequisite: six hours of freshman English.

(ND)

ENGL 144. Introduction to Writing Fiction (4)

Instruction in the craft of writing fiction. Practice in and

classroom criticism of stories written by students taking

the course. Prerequisite: six hours of freshman English.

(ND)

ENGL 155. The Novel (4)

Selected novels, with attention to such matters as narra-

tive, characterization, and cultural context. Prerequisite:

six hours of freshman English. (HU) Cannot be taken

pass/fail.

ENGL 157. Poetry (4)

Selected traditional and modern poetry, with attention

to voice, form, and cultural context. Prerequisite: six

hours of freshman English. (HU) Cannot be taken

pass/fail.

ENGL 163. Topics in Film Studies (4)

History and aesthetics of narrative film. May be repeated

for credit as subject varies. Prerequisite: six hours of

freshman English. (HU) Cannot be taken pass/fail.

ENGL 170. Amaranth (1)

Amaranth editorial staff. Students can earn one credit by

serving as editors (literary, production, or art) of Lehigh’s

literary magazine. Work includes soliciting and reviewing

manuscripts, planning a winter supplement and spring

issue, and guiding the magazine through all phases of

production. Editors attend weekly meetings with the fac-

ulty advisor. Prerequisite: consent of the department

chairperson. May be repeated for credit. (ND)

ENGL 171. Writing for Audiences (4)

Practice in writing in a variety of discourse modes for

different audiences. Consideration of the role of style,

clarity, and careful observation in writing. Prerequisite:

six hours of freshman English. (ND)

ENGL 175. Individual Authors (4)

Intensive study of the works of one or more literary

artists, such as Austen, Hemingway, and Kerouac. May

be repeated for credit as artists and works vary.

Prerequisite: six hours of freshman English. (HU)

Cannot be taken pass/fail.

ENGL 177. Individual Works (4)

Intensive study of one or more literary works, such as

Moby Dick, and study of other major texts such as the

Bible with attention to literary form. May be repeated

for credit as works vary. Prerequisite: six hours of fresh-

man English. (HU) Cannot be taken pass/fail.

ENGL 183. Independent Study (1-4)

Individually supervised study of a topic in literature,

248 Lehigh University Course Catalog 2009-2010

film, or writing not covered in regularly listed courses.

Prerequisite: consent of the department chairperson.

(HU)

ENGL 187. Themes in Literature (4)

Study of a theme as it appears in several works of litera-

ture, such as Love in the Middle Ages. May be repeated

for credit as titles and themes vary. Prerequisite: six hours

of freshman English. (HU) Cannot be taken pass/fail.

ENGL 189. Popular Literature (4)

The form of literature that has been designated in one

way or another as “popular,” such as folklore and detec-

tive fiction. May be repeated for credit as titles vary.

Prerequisite: six hours of freshman English. (HU)

Cannot be taken pass/fail.

ENGL 191. Special Topics (1-4)

A topic, genre, or approach in literature or writing not

covered in other courses. Prerequisite: six hours of fresh-

man English. (HU)

ENGL 201. Special Topics in Writing (1-4)

Approaches not covered in other writing courses.

Individual projects. May be repeated for credit. (ND)

ENGL 281. Writing Internship (1-4)

Projects on- or off-campus in professional, governmental,

or service organizations. Experience must include exten-

sive writing that can be submitted for review. Enrollment

limited to juniors or seniors with a major or minor in

English. May be repeated for credit. Prerequisite:

approval of department internship adviser or department

chair. (ND)

ENGL 282. Professional Internship (2-4)

Supervised projects, on- or off-campus, in professional,

government, or service organizations. An interested stu-

dent must submit a proposal, demonstrating the project’s

relevance to the study of language, texts, or communica-

tion, to the department’s internship adviser. May be

repeated for credit. Internship credits do not count

toward major in English. Prerequisite: junior or senior

standing and approval by department internship adviser.

(ND)

ENGL 290. Senior Seminar (4)

In-depth study of a problem, issue, question, or contro-

versy. Enrollment limited to 15 students. Required

writing intensive course for English majors. May be

repeated for credit, space permitting, as title varies.

Department Approval Required. Prerequisite: senior

English major standing. (HU)

ENGL 291. Special Topics (1-4)

A topic, genre, or approach in literature or writing not

covered in other courses. (HU)

Graduate Students taking 300-level courses receive

3 credits; undergraduates receive 4 credits.

ENGL 301. Topics in Literature (4)

A theme, topic, or genre in literature, such as autobiog-

raphy as literature and the gothic novel. May be repeated

for credit as titles vary. (HU)

ENGL 305. Creative Writing Thesis Proposal (fall

only) (1)

Preparation to write creative thesis. Requirements

include writing a proposal and bibliography. (ND)

ENGL 306. Creative Writing Thesis (spring

only) (3)

Portfolio of original creative work in poetry, fiction, or

creative non-fiction, plus introductory researched essay.

Required for concentration in creative writing. (ND)

ENGL 307. Undergraduate Thesis Proposal (1)

Course to be enrolled by senior honors students prepar-

ing to write honors thesis. Course requirements include

conducting preliminary research for the thesis and writ-

ing a detailed thesis proposal and bibliography. May not

be rostered concurrently with English 308. (HU)

ENGL 308. Undergraduate Thesis (3)

Open to advanced undergraduates who wish to submit

theses in English. Prerequisite: consent of department

chairperson. (HU)

ENGL 309. Interpretation: Critical Theory and

Practice (4)

Introduction to recent literary and cultural theory, such

as New Criticism, Structuralism, Marxism,

Psychoanalytic approaches, Reader-response Criticism,

Deconstruction, Feminist Theory, New Historicism, and

Cultural Criticism. (HU)

ENGL 310. Introduction to Methods of English as

a Second Language Instruction (4)

An introduction to teaching English as a second lan-

guage including the theory and principles of second

language acquisition, ESL methods, materials, and cur-

rent trends such as computer assisted language

instruction. With sufficient effort, students will learn to

plan and teach an ESL/EFL class in the four areas of

Writing, Reading, Speaking and Listening, choose appro-

priate materials for varying age and proficiency levels,

and most importantly, have a concrete approach to

teaching ESL/EFL. Required classroom observing and

tutoring hours that can be completed in Lehigh’s ESL

classes, in Lehigh’s ELLC language lab, or in the local

public school ESL classes. Course restricted to upperclass

and graduate students.

ENGL 311. (WS 311) Literature of Women (4)

Constructions of gender in literature from different his-

torical periods, traditions, and nationalities, with a focus

on the ways that women writers imagine their own liter-

ary authority. Content changes each semester. (HU)

ENGL 312. Studies in Literary and Cultural

Theory (4)

Study of a particular contemporary theoretical approach

to literature, film, or other cultural texts. May be repeat-

ed for credit as the topic changes. (HU)

ENGL 314. Teaching English as a Second

Language: A Practicum (3)

Companion course to English 310 (Intro to Methods of

English as a Second Language). This course will include

class meetings that focus on guided discussions of the

practical application of principles and practices of ESL

pedagogy in a real-world environment. Supervised ESL

classroom student teaching required. Prerequisite:

English 310.

ENGL 315. (HMS 315) Topics in Literature,

Medicine, and Health (4)

Analyzing the stories people tell about health, illness and

disability, this course engages cultural studies approaches

in order to explore the way those stories are told. Topics

may include: illness and the graphic novel, the changing

English 249

image of the healer in literature, collaborative storytelling

with Alzheimer’s patients, end of life narratives, tales

from the ER, narrative ethics. (HU)

ENGL 316. Native American Literature (4)

This course is a survey of the literary texts written by the

indigenous inhabitants of what is now the United States,

beginning with the myths and legends of the era before

European contact and ending with the novels, poems,

and films produced by Native Americans in the twenti-

eth- and twenty-first centuries. (HU)

ENGL 318. Topics in African-American Literature

and Culture (4)

Special Topics in African-American culture and/or the

cultures of the African diaspora. Topics may be focused

by period, genre, thematic interest or interdisciplinary

method including, for example, “Nineteenth-century

African-American Literature and Politics”, “African-

American Folklore”, “Black Atlantic Literature”, “The

Harlem Renaissance”, “African-American Women

Writers”. May be repeated for credit as title varies. (HU)

ENGL 321. History of the English Language (4)

The phonology, grammar, and lexicon of English from

its Anglo-Saxon beginnings to current World dialects,

with a focus on the expressive literary effects of linguistic

change. (HU)

ENGL 323. Anglo-Saxon Language and

Literature (4)

An introduction to Anglo-Saxon language and culture,

through Anglo-Saxon prose and short poetry, with spe-

cial attention to the range of Anglo-Saxon genres and the

problems of translation and interpretation. (HU)

ENGL 324. Anglo-Saxon Poetry (4)

A study of Anglo-Saxon poetry, including discussion of

the critical tradition and manuscript production. Special

attention to the epic poem Beowulf. Open only to stu-

dents who have completed ENGL 323 or who show

proficiency in Anglo-Saxon. (HU)

ENGL 327. Major Medieval Writers (4)

Study of major medieval writers. Titles include The

Canterbury Tales; Early Chaucer and the Continental

Tradition, and Langland’s Piers Plowman. May be

repeated for credit as title varies. (HU)

ENGL 328. (THTR 328) Shakespeare (4)

An introduction to Shakespearean drama including

comedies, histories, tragedies, and romances. Emphasis

on textual study, cultural contexts, and performance

strategies. (HU)

ENGL 331. Milton (4)

The poetry and prose of John Milton in the context of

the English Revolution. Particular attention to the inter-

section of theology and philosophy, and of the personal

with the political. (HU)

ENGL 342. Advanced Poetry Writing (4)

An intensive writing workshop in which student poems

and related literary texts receive close reading and analy-

sis. Prerequisite: ENGL 142 or permission of writing

minor advisor. May be repeated for credit. (ND)

ENGL 343. Advanced Creative Non-Fiction (4)

Practice of the essay, including such forms as the person-

al, academic, or argumentative essay. Emphasis on

developing a strong personal voice and learning to use

other voices. Intensive revision. May be repeated for

credit. Prerequisite: ENGL 143, or permission of writing

minor advisor. (ND)

ENGL 344. Advanced Fiction Writing (4)

An intensive writing workshop in which student stories

and related literary texts receive close reading and analy-

sis. May be repeated for credit. Prerequisite: ENGL 144,

or permission of writing minor advisor. (ND)

ENGL 360. Middle English Literature (4)

Major literary works of the Middle English period by

authors other than Chaucer. Emphasis on Piers

Plowman, the Gawain/ Pearl Poet, and the metrical

romances. (HU)

ENGL 362. The Sixteenth Century (4)

Humanist, Petrarchan and dramatic traditions in the lit-

erature of renaissance England. Readings from such

authors as Erasmus, More, Wyatt, Sidney, Spenser, and

Marlowe. (HU)

ENGL 364. The Seventeenth Century (4)

Literature of the seventeenth century, by such writers as

Donne, Herbert, Jonson, Browne, Burton, Milton,

Hobbes, Bunyan, and Locke, chronicling the unprece-

dented variety of aesthetic, political, and social

innovations in this “century of revolution.” (HU)

ENGL 366. The Restoration and Early Eighteenth

Century (4)

Restoration and early eighteenth-century literature, with

attention to the cultural forces that shaped the writers

and their works. Readings will include Dryden, Behn,

Rochester, Wycherley, Congreve, Swift, Finch, Pope,

Addison and Steele. (HU)

ENGL 367. The Eighteenth Century (4)

Poetry, drama and prose of the eighteenth century, with

attention to cultural forces that shaped the writers, their

works, and their position in the canon. Readings of

Montagu, Burney, Wollstonecraft, Austen, Fielding,

Richardson, Johnson, Sheridan, Sterne, in addition to a

few earlier writers. (HU)

ENGL 369. British Romantic Literature (4)

Poetry and prose of Wordsworth, Coleridge, Byron,

Shelley, and Keats within the contemporary, political,

religious, and social context. (HU)

ENGL 371. British Victorian Literature: Prose and

Poetry (4)

Poetry and prose of Tennyson, Browning, Arnold,

Swinburne, Carlyle, Mill, Newman, and Ruskin within

the contemporary political, religious, and social contexts.

(HU)

ENGL 372. British Victorian Literature:

Fiction (4)

Major fiction of the Victorian era by such writers as

Dickens, Eliot, Thackeray, and Hardy within historical,

social, and aesthetic contexts. (HU)

ENGL 374. Early National Literature (4)

United States literature from the Revolution until 1820,

emphasizing fiction, poetry and non-fiction that was

engaged in forming, and contesting, a national literature

and a new national consciousness. Writing will include

Franklin, Jefferson, the Federalist writers, Crevecoeur,

Occum, Wheatley, Brown, Rowson, Foster, Irving,

Cooper, and Rush. (HU)

250 Lehigh University Course Catalog 2009-2010

ENGL 375. Major Authors (1-4)

The works of one or more major literary figures studied

in depth. May be repeated for credit as titles and authors

vary. (HU)

ENGL 376. Early American Literature (4)

The literature of New England, the Middle Colonies, the

South, and the Southwest from Columbus to the close of

the eighteenth century, emphasizing our cultural and

artistic diversity. (HU)

ENGL 377. American Romanticism (4)

Emerson, Thoreau, Whitman, Hawthorne, Melville,

Dickinson, Poe, and their contemporaries. Philosophical,

historical, and social background, as well as the aesthetic

study of romantic literary works. (HU)

ENGL 378. American Realism (4)

Theory and practice of realistic and naturalistic fiction

from the Civil War to the early twentieth-century:

Twain, Howells, James, Norris, Crane, Dreiser, Wharton,

and regionalists. (HU)

ENGL 379. Modern American Literature (4)

American literature before World War II. Lectures and

class discussion of major fiction and poetry. (HU)

ENGL 380. Contemporary American

Literature (4)

American literature since World War II. Lectures and

class discussions of new writers and of recent works of

established writers. (HU)

ENGL 382. Themes in American Literature (4)

Intensive study of one topic in American literature.

Readings from the colonial period to the present. May

be repeated for credit as title varies. (HU)

ENGL 383. Modernism and Post-Modernism in

Fiction (4)

The “anti-realistic’ novel; time/space, point of view, nar-

rative voice, structure as meaning. Kafka, Woolf, Beckett,

Nabokov, Robbe-Grillet, Faulkner, Borges, Hawkes,

Stein. (HU)

ENGL 384. Twentieth-Century World

Literature (4)

World literature (Europe, Asia, South America, Africa)

from 1900 to present. (HU)

ENGL 385. Modern British and Continental

Literature (4)

World English literature and continental literature before

World War II. Lectures and class discussion of major fic-

tion. (HU)

ENGL 386. Contemporary British and Post-

Colonial Literature (4)

World English literature and continental literature after

World War II. (HU)

ENGL 387. Film History, Theory, and

Criticism (4)

Study of film with the focus on particular genres, direc-

tors, theories, periods, or topics. Weekly film screenings.

May be repeated for credit as title varies. (HU) Cannot

be taken pass/fail.

ENGL 388. Independent Study (1-4)

Individually supervised study of a topic in literature,

film, or writing not covered in regularly listed courses.

Prerequisite: consent of department chairperson. (HU)

ENGL 391. Special Topics (1-4)

A topic, genre, or approach in literature or writing not

covered in other courses. (HU)

Graduate Courses in English

The following courses are seminars, ordinarily limited to

no more than twelve graduate students, but undergradu-

ate English majors who are planning to go on to

graduate school in English and who have shown profi-

ciency in the study of literature may petition to take one

of these seminars in their senior year.

ENGL 400. Supervised Teaching (1)

Practical experience in teaching through assisting a facul-

ty teacher in conduct of a regularly scheduled

undergraduate course. Open only to graduate students

with at least one semester of graduate course work at

Lehigh University and a GPA of at least 3.5 Usually ros-

tered in conjunction with 485. Prerequisite: Consent of

the department chairperson.

ENGL 433. Medieval Genres and Authors (3)

This course, which may be repeated for credit as the title

varies, examines major Middle English authors (Chaucer,

Langland, the Pearl-poet) or genres of Middle English

writing (romance, dream vision, drama) in their histori-

cal and literary contexts. Individual titles include:

Medieval Drama, Chaucer’s Literary Circles, Langland:

Tradition and Afterlife, and Dream Visions and

Revelations.

ENGL 435. Topics in Medieval Literature (3)

This course, which may be repeated for credit as the title

varies, explores a thematic topic in medieval literature.

Typically, this course challenges traditional conceptions

of literary historical periods by spanning Anglo-Saxon

and late-medieval texts or late-medieval and early mod-

ern texts. Individual titles include: Writing, Rebellion,

and Reform: Medieval Literature of Dissent; Poverty and

Property, 1350-1650; Sex, Gender, and Sexuality in the

Middle Ages; Imagining this Island: Nation and Identity,

800-1400.

ENGL 439. Sixteenth-Century British Literature (3)

Course may be repeated for credit as title varies. Possible

offerings:

Love and Politics: Poetry of the English Renaissance.

Study of sonnet sequences, Ovidian lyrics, and the epyl-

lion with an eye to both their sexual politics and their

political valence in the Tudor court. Works by Wyatt,

Surrey, Marlowe, Sidney, Fulke, Greville, Spenser,

Donne, and Shakespeare.

London Unmasked: Representations of the City in

Renaissance Literature. An exploration of the love/hate

relationship of early modern writers with London.

Poetry, pamphlets, sermons, and especially city comedy

from Jonson, Dekker, Shakespeare, Donne, and others.

ENGL 441. Seventeenth-Century British

Literature (3)

Course may be repeated for credit as title varies. Possible

offerings:

Satan in Literature. When we think of Satan, we tend to

imagine a ruddy fellow with a widow’s peak and goatee.

But this figure is the traditional symbol of Satan, not the

reality. In fact, to imagine Satan in this way is to commit

a precisely Satanic error. Properly understood, the term

‘Satan’ refers to a quite specific tendency of human

thought: the tendency to take signs for the reality to

English 251

which they refer. This error can take many forms. To

religion, it is known as ‘idolatry.’ To science, it is known

as ‘magic.’ And to economics, it is known as ‘capitalism.’

Satan can certainly also manifest himself outside the

human mind, but these external manifestations may not

be the most appropriate site for studying his nature. The

Hebrew word ‘Satan’ means both enemy and accuser,

and we ought to contemplate the effects of this alien and

hostile element in human psychology. In this course we

will investigate the nature of Satan as described in a vari-

ety of literary texts drawn from a wide range of historical

and cultural situations. The authors studied will include

Johann Spies, Christopher Marlowe, John Milton, Lord

Byron, Edgar Allen Poe, Fyodor Dostoevsky, Thomas

Mann, and Ngugi Wa Thiongo.

Magic in Renaissance Poetry. The late-sixteenth and

early seventeenth-centuries saw a precipitous rise of

interest in and practice of magic throughout Europe.

Magicians such as Cornelius Aggrippa, Paracelsus,

Giordano Bruno and John Dee achieved unprecedented

influence in popular and intellectual milieux alike. This

course will look for the influence of magical thinking on

the literature of the period, with special attention to the

theories of representation. Magic presupposes a perfor-

mative view of the sign, it assumes that words can do

things. Similar beliefs appear to animate the poetry of

Donne, Traherne, Herbert, Marvell and Vaughan. We

will read these and other poets, alongside some of the

periods most influential texts of theoretical and practical

magic.

ENGL 442: British Literature of the Restoration (3)

Course may be repeated for credit as title varies. Possible

offerings:

Cultural Fictions and Public Lying. The English Civil

War taught many thinkers that stable cultures require

subjects to agree not to see certain “truths,” that public

life depends on necessary fictions about which all must

deceive themselves. Primary texts by Hobbes, Cavendish,

Behn, Wycherley, Swift, and Mandeville; recent writing

by Goffman, Bourdieu, Keller, and Haraway.

Witchcraft and History. Eighteenth-century texts con-

tinue to use the contradictory “logic” of witchcraft to

police women’s behavior. Primary texts (Shakespeare,

Behn, Defoe, Haywood, Pope, Davys) and recent theo-

retical writings (Bourdieu, Foucault) will help us think

through how we make claims about the past that the

participants themselves may have been unaware of or

unable to articulate.

ENGL 443: Eighteenth-century British Literature (3)

Course may be repeated for credit as title varies. Possible

offerings:

Austen, Burney, Edgeworth and the 1790s. This course

emphasizes these women’s writers’ complex relation to

the rebellious and conservative 1790s and will include

not only their fiction from the period (including novels

Austen drafted then: Pride and Prejudice, Sense and

Sensibility, and Northanger Abbey) but also that of some

representative gothic novelists (especially Radcliffe) as

well as some radical writers (Hays, Wollstonecraft) along

with conservative ones (More, Burke).

Literature in the Marketplace. Novels, magazines, chil-

dren’s books and other new forms of prose fiction took

shape in eighteenth-century England. The course focuses

on ways in which these forms are now being re-read

against evidence about the eighteenth-century market-

place, where readers and writers (consumers and

producers) intersect with each other and with develop-

ments in the book trade (issues of copyright, the

professionalization of authorship, etc.) as studied in the

relatively new discipline of book history. We will consid-

er archival materials as well as canonical and uncanonical

literature.

ENGL 445: British Romantic Literature (3)

Course may be repeated for credit as title varies. Possible

offerings:

Romanticism and the Cult of Childhood. Investigating

the gender, class, and race issues raised by idealizing par-

ticular kinds of childhood in the Romantic era, we will

read works that feature children by Rousseau,

Wordsworth, Coleridge, Robinson, and Blake. We will

also contextualize children’s literature by Edgeworth,

Smith, Trimmer, Barbauld, the Lambs, etc., within the

heated debate about the relative value of moralistic, utili-

tarian, and imaginative works for children.

ENGL 447: British Victorian Literature (3)

Course may be repeated for credit as title varies. Possible

offerings:

Nineteenth-century Narrative and the Making of

Selves. This course investigates the intersection of narra-

tive and the construction of interiority and subjectivity

in nineteenth-century British novels, poetry, and autobi-

ography. Our study will interrogate notions of the “self,”

psychic or moral growth, the un- or sub-conscious. We

will examine the ways in which narratives construct

“selves,” in the context of nineteenth-century theories of

the mind as well as more recent Psychoanalytical,

Gender, and Cultural Theory.

The Problem of Knowledge in the Victorian Age:

Nineteenth-century Britain was haunted by the problem

of knowledge. “We have but faith; we cannot know,”

wrote Tennyson in In Memoriam, echoing the common

quandary concerning the status of spiritual experience.

Earlier Thomas Love Peacock had rejected poetry’s claim

to be a serious pursuit: such a way of grasping the world

is obsolete; the new and the only reliable mode of know-

ing is science. Readings—drawn from the work of Mill,

Tennyson, Browning, Arnold, Clough, Pater, Wilde,

Darwin, and Huxley—will reveal the intensity of this

debate and the striking formulations it produced in

poetry, scientific writing, and social critique.

ENGL 449: Modern British Literature (3)

Course may be repeated for credit as title varies. Possible

offerings:

Virginia Woolf and the Limits of Biography. Where is

the line between diagnosis and interpretation? To what

purpose do scholars studying Woolf’s work invoke her

biography? How does Woolf herself play with and inter-

rogate biography as a genre? Reading Woolf’s novels and

essays, we will examine the achievements and limits of

“psychiatric criticism,” interrogate our culture’s desire to

“know” a writer, and discuss Woolf’s own complex ren-

dering of the biographical impulse in her fiction.

Topics in British Modernism. Survey course featuring

several major British writers between 1900 and 1945.

The course explores different critical and methodological

perspectives on writers like James Joyce, Virginia Woolf,

T.S. Eliot, D.H. Lawrence, W.B. Yeats, and E.M. Forster.

252 Lehigh University Course Catalog 2009-2010

ENGL 451: Contemporary British Literature (3)

Course may be repeated for credit as title varies. Possible

offerings:

Contemporary British and Postcolonial Literature.

Survey course featuring British, South Asian, African,

and Caribbean writers, between 1945 and the present.

The course is organized around themes which vary at the

discretion of the instructor.

Contemporary Literature from the United Kingdom

and the Commonwealth. The course includes authors

such as Rushdie, Munro, O’Brien, Phillips, and Carter

among others. Themes include political and social

change, race, gender and ethnicity, cultural and historical

conflict.

ENGL 471. Early American Literature (3)

Course may be repeated as title varies. Possible offerings:

First Contact: Then and Now. When worlds collide.

Voices from and about various frontiers, borderlands,

and liminal spaces, from Canada to the Caribbean, from

New England to New Spain. Imagining, discovering,

exploring, conquering, domesticating, and inventing

“America” in original accounts and modern film repre-

sentations.

The Literature of Justification. How did the European

nations justify making war on and taking lands from

Native Americans? What were the philosophical and

legal justifications of imperial and colonial expansion?

Study of the discourse of conquest, of language as the

perfect instrument of empire.

ENGL 473: Antebellum American Literature (3)

Course may be repeated for credit as title varies. Possible

offerings:

Class in Antebellum American Literature. The category

“class” has been under-explored, often invisible, within

U.S. culture. Reading primarily sentimental and sensa-

tional fiction (from Cummins’ The Lamplighter to

Lippard’s Quaker City), we will ask: where and how is

class rendered visible?

The Global Nineteenth Century. An exploration of

internationalism in antebellum U.S. literature and cul-

ture. We will examine the ways that nineteenth-century

Americans laid the political, economic, technological,

and cultural groundwork for our current U.S.-dominat-

ed era of globalization. In addition to reading what

recent scholars have to say about the history of globaliza-

tion, we will read such nineteenth-century American

authors as Whitman, Melville, John Rollin Ridge, and

Martin Delany, and study such phenomena as the

transatlantic telegraph and the Crystal Palace Exhibition.

ENGL 475. Late Nineteenth-century American

Literature (3)

Course may be repeated for credit as title varies. Possible

offerings:

Realism and Romanticism in Urban and Regional Turn

of the Century Novels. This course takes as its starting

point two assumptions about U.S. social history and

American literary history: by the turn of the twentieth

century the United States had become an overwhelming-

ly urban rather than rural culture; and by the

late-nineteenth century the major focus of American lit-

erature had shifted from romanticism to realism. This

course will test those assumptions by reading four “urban

realist” novels and four romances.”

Realism and Naturalism in American Literature. This

course will explore realist and naturalist writing as an

evolving effort to represent the powerful social forces

shaping American life in an era of rapid industrializa-

tion—and to assess the possibility of individual and

collective agency in such a society. The role of realist and

naturalist idioms in shaping the theoretical narratives of

Marxism and psychoanalysis will also be considered.

ENGL 477. Modern American Literature (3)

Course may be repeated for credit as title varies. Possible

offerings:

Modernism and Mourning. Combining psychoanalytic

theory and social history, this course will explore major

modernist works as efforts to grieve for systemic social

injuries such as racism, misogyny, and the alienations

produced by monopoly capitalism. Writers studied will

include Eliot, Hemingway, Cather, Toomer, Faulkner,

Hughes, H.D., Hurston, and Dos Passos.

The Harlem Renaissance. This interdisciplinary and his-

torically grounded seminar will explore the explosion of

African-American literary, artistic and political life that

took place in and around Harlem in the opening decades

of the twentieth century. The course will include politi-

cal writings, fiction and poetry, and music.

ENGL 478. Contemporary American

Literature (3)

Course may be repeated for credit as title varies. Possible

offerings:

Contemporary Native American Fiction. Fiction by

American Indian writers since the 1970s. We will read

works by Leslie Marmon Silko, James Welch, Michael

Dorris, Susan Power, and Sherman Alexie. The course

will have a mini-focus on the growth of an Ojibwe nov-

elist named Louise Erdrich through three of her novels.

We will pay attention in our discussions to ways to pres-

ent Indian fiction to non-Indian undergraduate students.

Late Twentieth-century American Literature. Masters of

poetry, drama, or fiction of the second half of the twen-

tieth century. Poets might include Stone, Ashbery,

Merrill, Clifton, Bell, and others. Dramatists might

include Norman, A. Wilson, L. Wilson, Foote, Mamet,

and others. Fiction might include Boyle, Carver, Baxter,

Ford, Oates, and others. Past themes have included the

small town in American drama, the double, experimen-

tation, and tradition.

ENGL 479. Twentieth-century World Literature (3)

Course may be repeated for credit as title varies. Possible

offerings:

Terror, Rebellion, and Revolution in Contemporary

World Literature. This course traces the sources, process-

es, and outcomes of violent revolutions in contemporary

fiction and film, establishing the historical context and

examining themes like community conflict, the role of

difference, and the use and abuse of power. Possible

authors include Mafouz, Naipaul, Chamoiseau,

Sembene, Conde, and Phillips; possible films include

State of Siege, Ararat, Asama, and Kandahor.

Writing, the Body, and the Other. This course explores

the representation of writing in modern literary texts,

specifically the power of writing to inscribe both “identi-

ty” and “difference.” We begin with the premise that the

self-constituting power of writing (expressed through

rhetorics of authorship) is closely tied to writing’s role in

the construction of various concepts of the “other.”

English 253

Primary texts by twentieth-century British and postcolo-

nial writers and the introduction of the post-structuralist

tradition in literary theory.

ENGL 480. Composition and Rhetoric (3)

Course may be repeated for credit as title varies. Possible

offerings:

Ethics and the Teaching of College English. What does

it mean to be a good teacher of college English? In this

seminar we’re going to consider this basic question, with

a twist: while good usually means “effective” in this ques-

tion, we are going to take it suggest “ethical.” My hope is

that we can find ways to deploy “ethics” to explore some

concerns at the heart of college teaching, opening a space

to talk about why the teaching of English matters.

The Subject in Cultural Studies: The Criticism of

Agency. Cultural Studies takes as its founding gesture a

concern for subjectivity, the ways in which the individual

human subject is shaped by culture. After making this

gesture, various branches of the discipline divide accord-

ing to a particular subject matter, feminism, colonialism,

historicism, popular culture, and so on. In this course we

will pay particular attention to the founding gesture and

the tricks that it can play on us. We will read literary

criticism and rhetorical criticism in order to understand

the often hidden assumptions and beliefs behind cultural

studies in all its forms. We will consider works by

Bourdieu, Cixous, Burke, Butler, Bakhtin, Paul Smith,

Said, Kristeva, Foucault, and others.

ENGL 481. Theory and Criticism (3)

Course may be repeated for credit as title varies. Possible

offerings:

Theories of Gender and Feminism. In this course we will

study the critical works of some of the most important

feminist theorists. We will be interrogating foundational

concepts such as: woman, gender, sex, love, pleasure,

desire, the body, the unconscious, oppression, agency,

patriarchy, equality, difference, the local and the global.

Theorists will include: Simone de Beauvoir, Diana Fuss,

Judith Butler, Julia Kristeva, Denise Riley, Chandra

Talpade Mohanty, Gayle Rubin, Joan Scott, Teresa de

Lauretis, Eve Kosofsky Sedgwick, Gayatri Chakravorty

Spivak, Donna Haraway, bell hooks, Pierre Bourdieu,

Rosi Braidotti, Jessica Benjamin, and Chela Sandoval.

Queer Film Theory and Criticism. In the early 1990s a

cycle of films dubbed “New Queer Cinema” emerged

along with a “new queer” film theory—both influenced

by political activism and by academic work by figures

like Michel Foucault, Eve Sedgwick, and Judith Butler.

Questions arose about this queer film and film theory.

How were they different from the gay and lesbian films

and film theory that came before? Was “queer” being

used to erase specific lesbian, gay, bisexual, and trans

approaches to film? What did “queer” mean, exactly?

This course will address these questions, and many oth-

ers, that were provoked by Queer 90s films and film

theory. Topics and issues covered in the course will

include the history of representation, audience/spectator-

ship, production contexts and sub-textual coding. Also

examined will be the intersection of queerness with race,

class, and gender.

The New Economic Criticism. Over the last few years, a

long-standing tendency among some literary critics to

draw analogies between their discipline and economics

seems to have coalesced into something resembling a

“school”. Recent anthologies, conferences and articles

have made reference to it as the “new economic criti-

cism”. The course will ask whether we are justified in

speaking of such a movement, and if so, what are its dis-

tinguishing characteristics, and why has it emerged at the

present historical juncture. We will read theoretical texts

(Derrida, Lyotard, Jameson), secondary studies (Hans-

Christophe Binswanger, Marc Shell, Jean-Joseph Goux),

and also some of the primary studies to which these refer

(Goethe, Mallarme, Shakespeare).

How to Read Deconstructively. Deconstruction aims to

produce a way of thinking that weakens the scope of

authority itself – any authority – through creative skepti-

cism. This course will begin by directly engaging some of

the key theoretical texts by writers such as Friedrich

Nietzsche, Martin Heidigger, Jacques Derrida, Gayatri

Chakravorty Spivak. But the real goals of the course are

to show how deconstruction is used and, crucially, how

it is useful.

ENGL 483. Creative Writing and Literary Studies (3)

Course may be repeated for credit as title varies. Possible

offerings:

From the Inside: Creative Writing and Reading. A com-

bination of seminar and workshop, this course uses

instruction and practice in the techniques and genres of

creative writing (prosody, narratology, characterization,

etc.) to develop tools for studying literary texts.

Prerequisite: consent of instructor.

ENGL 485. Introduction to Writing Theory (2)

Survey of major approaches and theoretical issues in the

field of composition and rhetoric. Required of all new

teaching assistants in the department. Usually rostered in

conjunction with 400 or 486.

ENGL 486. Teaching Composition: A Practicum (1)

Introduction to teaching writing at Lehigh. Bi-weekly

discussions of practical issues and problems in the teach-

ing of freshman composition. Required of all new

teaching assistants in the department. Usually rostered in

conjunction with English 485.

ENGL 487. Teaching with Technology: A

Practicum (1)

Hands-on introduction to the tools and skills necessary

to teach with the computer, along with some attention

to appropriate pedagogy. Prerequisite: consent of gradu-

ate program coordinator.

ENGL 490. Master’s Thesis (3)

Writing master’s thesis papers.

ENGL 491. Special Topics (1-3)

A topic, genre, or approach in literature or writing not

covered in other courses. May be repeated for credit as

title varies. Prerequisite: consent of the graduate program

coordinator.

ENGL 493. Graduate Seminar (3)

Intensive study of the works of one or more authors, or

of a type of literature. May be repeated for credit as title

varies.

ENGL 495. Independent Study (3)

Individually supervised course in an area of literature, film

or writing not covered in regularly listed courses.

Prerequisite: consent of the graduate program coordinator.

ENGL 499. Dissertation (1-9)

Research and study for comprehension exams.

254 Lehigh University Course Catalog 2009-2010

English as a Second Language

Program Director: Timothy Bonner

Credit Instruction: English as a Second Language (ESL)

credit courses are offered to both undergraduates and

graduates who wish to increase English proficiency in the

areas of writing, reading, speaking, and presentation

skills. All credit courses are at an advanced level of

English study. For undergraduates, English 3 and 5 are

designed to supplement English department required

courses, English 1 and 2. Graduate students should con-

tact their departments regarding acceptance of credit

towards residency requirements. ESLP courses may be

repeated for credit with a maximum of three repetitions.

ESL credit courses are open to regularly enrolled stu-

dents or General College Division students with

placement or permission by ESL Director.

StepUp Intensive English Program. A non-credit inten-

sive ESL program called StepUp is offered to

intermediate to advanced ESL students who wish to

study university/academic English in a challenging envi-

ronment. This program is open to the general public.

Contact the ESL program for information and a

brochure or refer to our website, www.lehigh.edu/~inesl

International English Language Center. Private tutoring

and computer-assisted language learning for students,

staff, faculty and their families.

English Testing. English language proficiency testing is

required for all incoming undergraduate and graduate

students whose first language is not English during stu-

dent orientations in August and January. Placement in

courses will be determined based on the results. New

Teaching Assistants must take the SPEAK test prior to

the beginning of their teaching semester (A TSE score of

55-60 is acceptable). Students who do not pass the

SPEAK are not eligible for a TA position. Contact the

ESL Office for an appointment upon arrival to campus.

Refer to our website for additional information.

The Freshman Composition Requirement. The courses

English 3 and English 5 (Composition and Literature for

International Writers I and II,) may be applied towards

the composition requirement for undergraduates. See the

English department course listings for additional infor-

mation.

ESL Teacher Training. In conjunction with the English

Department, ESL offers English 310 (Introduction to

Theories and Methods of ESL Instruction) and English

314 (ESL Teaching Practicum). See the Department

course listings for descriptions. (These teaching courses

can also be taken for graduate credit.)

For more information about English as a Second

Language at Lehigh, refer to our web site at

www.lehigh.edu/~inesl.

Courses:

ESLP 1 ESL Academic Writing and Grammar (1)

Instruction in understanding and using advanced

English sentence structures in writing. Advanced aca-

demic vocabulary and grammar development to improve

writing sophistication and accuracy. Required for gradu-

ate students who do not achieve a sufficient score on the

Lehigh ESL Writing Sample and/or for students needing

additional writing proficiency. 4 hours per week.

ESLP 2 ESL Academic Writing and Reading (1)

The writing process and composing skills, editing skills,

vocabulary development and reading fluency for ESL

students. Required for graduate students who do not

achieve a sufficient score on the Lehigh ESL Writing

Sample and/or for students needing additional writing

proficiency. 4 hours per week.

ESLP 3 ESL Clear Speech and Conversation (1)

Conversational English, colloquial language and idioms,

pronunciation and accent reduction and practice in basic

listening skills for an academic setting. 4 hours per week.

ESLP 4 ESL Academic Speaking (1)

Correct use of grammatical structures in oral English and

practice in accurate pronunciation. ESL students will

explore the functions of American English in an academ-

ic setting. 4 hours per week.

ESLP 11 ESL Technical Writing and

Composition (1)

Formal composition and technical writing including

general technical vocabulary, technical sentence struc-

ture, and research skills for the advanced ESL student.

Prerequisite: successful completion of ESLP 1 or 2 (ESL

Academic Writing and Reading) or ENGL 5, or with

permission of ESL Director. 4 hours per week.

ESLP 12 ESL Advanced Speech and Presentation

Skills (1)

Development of advanced speaking skills and presenta-

tion techniques through a study of formal spoken

rhetoric, accent improvement, and presentation skills.

For the undergraduate or graduate student seeking for-

mal speech skills and/or for teaching assistants.

Prerequisite: successful completion of ESLP 3 or 4 , or

SPEAK score 200+, or permission of ESL Director. 4

hours per week.

ENGL 3. Composition and Literature I for

International Writers (3) fall

Idiomatic English both oral and written, with a strong

emphasis on producing well-organized, coherent essays.

Enrollment limited to non-native speakers; placement is

determined by placement testing or ESL director’s rec-

ommendation.

ENGL 5. Composition and Literature II for

International Writers (3) spring

Continuation of English 3.

ENGL 310. Introduction to Methods of English as

a Second Language Instruction (4)

An introduction to teaching English as a second lan-

guage including the theory and principles of second

language acquisition, ESL methods, materials, and cur-

rent trends such as computer assisted language

instruction. With sufficient effort, students will learn to

plan and teach an ESL/EFL class in the four areas of

Writing, Reading, Speaking and Listening, choose appro-

priate materials for varying age and proficiency levels,

and most importantly, have a concrete approach to

teaching ESL/EFL. Required classroom observing and

tutoring hours that can be completed in Lehigh’s ESL

classes, in Lehigh’s ELLC language lab, or in the local

public school ESL classes.

ENGL 314. Teaching English as a Second

Language: A Practicum (3)

Companion course to English 310 (Intro to Methods of

English as a Second Language). This course will include

Entrepreneurship 255

class meetings that focus on guided discussions of the

practical application of principles and practices of ESL

pedagogy in a real-world environment. Supervised ESL

classroom student teaching required. Prerequisite:

English 310.

Entrepreneurship

Program Management: CBE and RCEAS faculty

committee.

Minor Program Director: Graham Mitchell

Minor in Entrepreneurship

The purpose of the entrepreneurship minor is to enable

students to supplement their major with knowledge and

skills that increase their ability to realize their entrepre-

neurial goal and/or make them more marketable upon

graduation. It will also work to create an environment

and campus center of gravity that fosters an entrepre-

neurial spirit and mindset among students and also serve

as a locus for community building among entrepreneur-

ial students, faculty, and alumni. This minor is available

for students at Lehigh University.

Required pre-requisite course:

• ECO 1 Principles of Economics (4 credit hours)

ECO 1 must be completed prior to entering the

entrepreneurship minor program.

Required Courses:

• ENTP 101: Entrepreneurship I (3 credit hours) Pre-

requisite ECO 1.

• ENTP 201: Entrepreneurship and Enterprise (3

credit hours) Pre-requisite ENTP 101 or permission

of minor program director.

• One of the following ILE options (3 credit hours)

• ENTP 311: Entrepreneurship Practicum (3)

• IBE 395: Capstone Projects 1 (3)

• MGT 311: LUMAC Management Assistance

Counseling (3)

• Or other independent experiential project

approved by the minor program director.

• ENTP 312: Launching Entrepreneurial Ventures (3

credit hours) Pre-requisite: Junior standing, ENTP

311, or equivalent ILE option, or permission of

minor program director.

Recommended Additional Courses:

• ACCT 108 or 151/152

• Law 201 and 202

• MGT 306

• MKT 211 and 319

• SCM 309

• Excel Competency Course/Exam

Students must complete the minor sequence with an

average GPA of at least 2.0 in those courses in order to

qualify for the minor. Courses in the Entrepreneurship

minor cannot be used towards wither the Engineering

Minor or the Business minor.

Entrepeneurship Courses:

ENTP 101. Entrepreneurship (3 credit hours)

Introduction to the nature and process of entrepreneur-

ship. Emphasizes entrepreneurial opportunities,

creativity, innovation and vision, and pursuit of opportu-

nities beyond resources. Topics include: concepts of

entrepreneurship; attributes of entrepreneurs; new ven-

ture creation; introduction to entrepreneurial finance

and marketing in resource-constrained environments;

intellectual property; new venture business planning for

both emerging and existing enterprises.

ENTP 201. Entrepreneurship and Enterprise

(3 credit hours)

Investigates skills and steps for entrepreneurial success:

mindset; opportunity scanning and screening; informal

networking; finding and managing external resources;

managing risk; developing marketing plans; sales;

investors; debt and venture capital; horizontal manage-

ment; developing a leadership team and creative culture;

technology cycles; structuring; managing change; ethics;

exit strategies. Cross-functional team-based experiential

practice and discussions with entrepreneurs. Prerequisite:

ENTP 101 or permission of minor program director.

ENTP 311. Entrepreneurship Practicum

(3 credit hours)

Cross-disciplinary teams of 4-6 students with faculty and

alumni: marketing and financial planning; business and

technical feasibility of products or service. Students may

work on projects related to LU intellectual property, or

ideas from outside entrepreneurs, or on their own proj-

ects. Oral and written presentations and discussions with

guest speakers are integral parts of the course.

Prerequisite: Junior standing and ENTP 201, or permis-

sion of minor program director.

ENTP 312. Entrepreneurship IV: Launching

Entrepreneurial Ventures (3 credit hours)

Investigates in detail the critical steps and activities nec-

essary when entrepreneurs seriously consider starting

their own businesses. Organizational structure, gover-

nance and legal forms of business. Advisory boards.

Business and product liability. Intellectual property pro-

tection. Sources of capital, establishing credit, seeking

angel investors and venture capital. Writing and circulat-

ing the Venture Profile. Generating and defending

financial projections, revenue streams and expense cate-

gories, cost and price estimates, pro-forma financial

statements. Negotiating contracts. Licensing. Methods of

valuation. Exit strategies. Discussions with successful

entrepreneurs are integral to the course. Prerequisites:

Junior standing and ENTP 311, or equivalent ILE

option, or permission of minor program director.

Environmental Initiative

Professors: David J. Anastasio, PH.D. (Johns Hopkins),

Professor of Earth and Environmental Sciences; Gray E.

Bebout, Ph.D. (U.C., Los Angeles), Professor of Earth

and Environmental Sciences; David Cundall, Ph.D.

(Arkansas), Professor of Biological Sciences; Stephen H.

Cutcliffe, Ph.D. (Lehigh), Professor of Science,

Technology and Society and History and Director of

Science, Technology and Society program; Edward B.

Evenson, Ph.D. (Michigan), Professor of Earth and

256 Lehigh University Course Catalog 2009-2010

Environmental Sciences; Sharon M. Friedman, M.A.

(Penn State), Professor of Journalism and

Communication and Director of Science and

Environmental Writing Program; John B. Gatewood,

Ph.D. (Illinois), Professor of Sociology and

Anthropology; John Martin Gillroy, Ph.D. (Chicago),

Professor of Environmental Studies and International

Relations; Kenneth P. Kodama, Ph.D. (Stanford),

Professor of Earth and Environmental Sciences; Kenneth

L. Kraft, Ph.D. (Princeton), Professor of Religion

Studies; Gerard P. Lennon, Ph.D. (Cornell), Professor of

Civil Engineering; Anne S. Meltzer, Ph.D. (Rice), Dean

and Professor of Earth and Environmental Sciences;

Sibel Pamukcu, Ph.D. (L.S.U.), Associate Chairperson of

Civil and Environmental Engineering; Frank J. Pazzaglia,

Ph.D. (Penn State), Professor of Earth and

Environmental Sciences; Stephen P. Pessiki, (Cornell),

Chairperson and P.C. Rossin Professor of Civil and

Environmental Engineering; Dork Sahagian, Ph.D.

(Chicago), Director of the Environmental Initiative and

Professor of Earth and Environmental Sciences; Arup K.

Sengupta, Ph.D. (Houston), Professor of Chemical

Engineering; Richard N. Weisman, Ph.D. (Cornell),

Professor of Civil and Environmental Engineering; Peter

K. Zeitler, Ph.D. (Dartmouth), Chairperson and

Professor of Earth and Environmental Sciences.

Associate Professors: Alec M. Bodzin, Ph.D. (North

Carolina State), Associate Professor of Education; Frank

L. Davis, Ph.D. (North Carolina); Bruce R. Hargreaves,

Ph.D. (U.C. Berkley), Associate Professor of Earth and

Environmental Sciences; Donald P. Morris, Ph.D.

(Colorado), Associate Professor of Earth and

Environmental Sciences; Albert H. Wurth, Jr., Ph.D.

(North Carolina), Associate Professor of Political

Science; Weixian Zhang, Ph.D. (Johns Hopkins),

Associate Professor of Civil and Environmental

Engineering;

Assistant Professors: Robert K. Booth, Ph.D.

(Wyoming), Assistant Professor of Earth and

Environmental Sciences; Chad Briggs, Ph.D. (Carleton),

Assistant Professor of Environmental Studies and

International Relations; Derick G. Brown, Ph.D.

(Princeton), Assistant Professor of Civil and

Environmental Engineering; Benjamin S. Felzer, Ph. D.

(Brown) Assistant Professor Earth and Environmental

Sciences; Thomas C. Hammond, Ph. D (Virginia),

Breena Holland, Ph.D. (Chicago), Assistant Professor of

Environmental Studies and Political Science; Kristen L.

Jellison, Ph.D. (MIT), Assistant Professor of Civil and

Environmental Engineering, Edward E. Lotto, Ph.D.

(Indiana) director, Center for Writing, Math and Study

Skills, Associate Professor English, Stephen C. Peters,

Ph.D. (Michigan), Assistant Professor of Earth and

Environmental Sciences; Joan M. Ramage, Ph.D.

(Cornell), Assistant Professor of Earth and

Environmental Sciences; Zicheng Yu, Ph.D. (Toronto),

Assistant Professor of Earth and Environmental Sciences,

Tae Sup Yun, Ph. D. (Georgia Institute of Technology),

Assistant Professor of Civil and Environmental

Engineering.

Principal Research Scientist: Stephen J. Reid, Ph.D.

(University of Wales, Aberystwyth), Director, Earth

System Atlas

Undergraduate Committee Chair: Sharon Friedman

Graduate Committee Chair: John Martin Gillroy,

Environmental Studies and Department of International

Relations.

Environmental Initiative Director: Dork Sahagian

The Environmental Initiative is a broadly interdiscipli-

nary program of education, research, and outreach. The

curricula include courses in 4 colleges and 10 different

departments in social sciences, humanities, education,

science, mathematics and engineering.

Undergraduate Studies

The Environmental Studies BA program examines the

cultural, economic, historical, political and social factors

that influence local, national, international and global

environmental issues and policies. Investigating a wide

range of perspectives, it includes a broad exposure to

many factors confronting humans as they struggle with

complex problems and possible solutions to environmen-

tal questions.

The program has been designed so students will develop

a broad understanding of social science environmental

concerns, along with a basic familiarity with environ-

mental science, statistics and research methods. Of

benefit to all students interested in environmental issues,

this B.A. degree complements existing B.A. and B.S.

programs in Earth and Environmental Sciences and the

B.S. program in Environmental Engineering.

The B.A. program is intended for students who are

interested in environmental affairs from the perspective

of the social sciences and humanities. This degree will

prepare students for a variety of career options including

positions in policy agencies at the federal, state and local

government levels, corporate management, non-profit

organizations, environmental journalism, environmental

education or environmental law. It also will prepare stu-

dents for graduate studies in a number of environmental

policy and social science fields.

The B.A. is specifically designed to be broadly inclusive

yet flexible enough to allow for double majors and

minors in other fields. Double majors or minors in social

science fields such as anthropology, communication, his-

tory, international relations, journalism, political science,

psychology, science and environmental writing or sociol-

ogy could easily be accomplished. Minors in the

sciences, such as Earth and Environmental Sciences, also

can be completed. If students are not pursuing a double

major, a minor in another field to complement the

Environmental Studies major is highly recommended

but not required.

The major consists of four required and three core cours-

es, plus three elective courses chosen from a list that

follows. The B.A. is considered a social science major

and most of its courses fulfill college social science distri-

bution requirements. Its collateral requirements, which

include a social science research methods course, one

course in statistics and two science courses, can be used

to fulfill college math and science distribution require-

ments.

Honors: To graduate with honors, a major in

Environmental Studies must maintain a 3.2 overall aver-

age, attain a 3.5 average in the courses constituting the

major program, and complete an honors thesis in the

senior year.

Environmental Initiative 257

Environmental Studies Major

Required and Core Courses (28 credits)

Required Courses:

ES 1 Introduction to Environmental

Studies (4)

ES 2 (EES 2) Introduction to Environmental

Science (3)

ES 4 (EES 4) The Science of Environmental

Issues (1)

ES 105 (POLS 105) Environmental Policy and

Planning (4)

ES 381 Senior Seminar: Issues in

Environmental Studies (4)

Core Courses: At Least 3 of the 7 following courses:

ES 10 Environment and the Consumer

Society (4)

ES 106 (POLS 106) Environmental Values and

Ethics (4)

ES 111 (ECO 111) Introduction to Environmental

Economics (4)

ES 121 (ANTH 121) Environment and Culture (4)

ES 125 (JOUR 125) Environment, the Public and

Mass Media (4)

ES 171 (CEE 171) Fundamentals of Environmental

Technology (4)

ES 315 (HIST 315) American Environmental

History (4)

Major Electives (12 credits including 1 course at the 200

level or above. Additional core courses can be used to

fulfill this requirement):

ANTH 145 Human Evolution (4)

ANTH 305 Anthropology of Fishing (4)

CEE 272 Risk Assessment (2)

CEE 379 (EES 379) Environmental Case Studies (3-4)

ECO 311 Environmental Economics (3)

ENGL 201-11 The Environmental Imagination

(4)

EES 89 Geographical Analysis of our

Changing World (4)

ES 093 Lehigh Earth Observatory

Field/Laboratory Internship(1-4)

ES 100 (GCP 100, EES 100) Earth System Science (4)

ES 107 (POLS 107) Politics of the Environment (4)

ES 115 (JOUR 115) Communicating about the

Environment

ES 116 (JOUR 116) Risky Business (4)

ES 122 Sustainable Development: The

Costa Rican Experience (3)

ES 131 Internship (1-2)

ES 181 Independent Study (1-4)

ES 254 (REL 254, ASIA 254)

Buddhism and Ecology (4)

ES 293 Advanced Lehigh Earth

Observatory Field/Laboratory

Internship (1-4)

ES 328 (POLS 328) U.S. Politics and

Environment (4)

ES 331 U.S. Environmental Law I:

Pollution & Risk Abatement (4)

ES 333 (IR 333) International Environmental Law

& Policy (4)

ES 338 Environmental Risk: Perception

& Communication (4)

POLS 338 Markets, Politics and the Law (4)

ES 339 (IR 339) Global Security and the

Environment (4)

ES 343 (IR 343) Comparative Environmental Law

& Policy (4)

ES 355 (POLS 355) Environmental Justice & the

Law (4)

ES 367 (TLT 367) Environmental Education (3)

ES 371 Special Topics (1-4)

ES 375 (POLS 375) Seminar: Green Polity (4)

ES 391 Honors Thesis (4)

IR 344 Politics of Oil (4)

JOUR 123 Basic Science and Technical

Writing (4)

JOUR 323 (STS 323) Controversies (4)

REL 6 Religion and the Ecological

Crisis (4)

In addition, new courses may be offered annually.

Students should check with the program director for an

updated list.

Collateral Requirements (14-16 credits)

Required (8 credits)

MATH 12. Basic Statistics (4)

A calculus course may be substituted with permission of

the program director.

SR 111 Research Methods and Data

Analysis (4)

Science Electives: At least one EES and one other sci-

ence course (6-8) credits OR a minor in EES (see EES

program descriptions).

Minor in Environmental Studies

A minor in Environmental Studies consists of four 4-

credit courses, for a total of 16 credits. These should

include ES 1, one course from the core set for the major,

and two courses from either the core or elective courses

for the major. At least course must be at the 300-level.

Environmental Studies Undergraduate

Courses

ES 1 Introduction to Environmental Studies (4)

Gateway to the field of Environmental Studies, the

course surveys central issues and themes confronting

humanity in the natural world on a national and global

basis. Topics include humankind’s role in environmental

change; society’s response to the dynamism of nature;

cultural evaluations of nature; population dynamics;

resource availability and pollution sinks; land use pat-

terns; sustainability and consumerism; environmental

justice and ethics; policy and planning. This course ful-

fills a social science credit requirement (SS) please select

ES 2 to fulfill the natural science (NS) requirement.

Gillroy (SS)

ES 2 (EES 2) Introduction to Environmental

Science (3)

Focuses on natural and human-induced drivers and con-

sequences of environmental change. Exploring options

for mitigating and adapting to environmental change in

ecosystems, physical and social systems, we will examine

such topics as biogeochemical cycles, population pres-

sure, ecosystem diversity, productivity and food security,

energy, water resources, climate change, pollution,

258 Lehigh University Course Catalog 2009-2010

ozone, urban issues and sustainability. Stresses interac-

tions and inter-relationships, using a series of case

studies. Intended for any student with an interest in the

environment. Sahagian (NS/GC)

ES 4 (EES 4). The Science of Environmental

Issues (1)

Analysis of current environmental issues from a scientific

perspective. The focus of the course will be weekly dis-

cussions based on assigned readings. Kodama, Zeitler

(NS)

ES 10. Environment and the Consumer Society (4)

Is there such a thing as sustainable consumption, or will

life on Earth become increasingly imbalanced? Will our

grandchildren accuse us of “devouring” their future? This

multidisciplinary course investigates these issues, both

locally and globally from the perspectives of anthropolo-

gy, history, communication and politics. Topics include

cultural causes of and responses to past environmental

disasters; biological and cultural limits to growth; over-

fishing the commons; resources and land use issues;

communication in a consumer culture; and politics and

governmental regulations. Team projects researching the

environmental impacts of campus consumption will be

included. Cutcliffe, Friedman, Gatewood and Wurth

(SS)

ES 093 Lehigh Earth Observatory

Field/Laboratory Internship (1-4)

The Lehigh Earth Observatory (LEO) is a distributed,

multidisciplinary program that focuses study on the

environment with a particular emphasis on understand-

ing the science of environmental systems and the

relationship between these systems and society. LEO has

a focus on environmental systems, drawing students

from a variety of disciplines including policy, manage-

ment, economics, journalism, business, art, and

philosophy in addition to science and engineering. Field

projects contribute to an overall theme of post-industrial

land use and development as it impacts the natural envi-

ronment of the Lehigh Valley, and may include

long-term monitoring programs, or individually

designed projects that contribute to the overall mission

that includes science, engineering, policy, communica-

tions, ethics, social dynamics, and other environmentally

pertinent aspects of the region. Students work with a fac-

ulty advisor on individually designed projects. Projects

may involve technical, social, educational, or other out-

reach activities, and NS, SS, or HU credits are

designated as appropriate. This course is intended for

first time participant and is not repeatable for credit.

Past projects and more details about LEO are available at

http://www.leo.lehigh.edu. Students should contact the

Environmental Initiative for departmental permission to

ES 100 (GCP 100, EES 100). Earth System

Science (4)

Examination of the Earth as an integrated system. Study

of interactions and feedbacks between key components

such as the atmosphere, geosphere, and hydrosphere to

permit better understanding of the behavior of the sys-

tem as a whole. Response of the Earth system to human

perturbations such as land use and emissions are

explored in the context of predictions of future environ-

mental conditions and their projected impacts back on

human systems. Lectures, class discussions, and recita-

tion. Prerequisites: EES 22. Ramage, Sahagian (NS)

ES 105 (POLS 105. Environmental Policy and

Planning (4) Fall

Analysis of the framework that has been established to

protect the environment and promote sustainable

growth. Focus on the roles of the different branches of

the U.S. government and the relative responsibilities of

state and local governments within this framework.

Consideration of the political nature of environmental

issues and the social forces influencing environmental

protection in different areas of domestic environmental

policy, such as climate change, toxic waste disposal, and

natural resources conservation. Holland (SS)

ES 106 (POLS 106). Environmental Values and

Ethics (4) Spring

An introduction to the ethical perspectives and values

that shape human relationships to the natural environ-

ment in contemporary society. What are the moral

implications of these relationships for justice and human

collective action? Given these implications, what policy

responses to environmental problems are morally or

politically justifiable? In answering these questions, the

course explores ethical ideas developed in different

schools of environmental thought, such as deep ecology

and ecofeminism, in addition to ideas that emerge from

social movements, such as environmental justice and

bioregionalism. Holland (SS)

ES 107 (POLS 107). The Politics of the

Environment (4)

A survey of the major environmental, resource, energy

and population problems of modern society, focusing on

the United States. The politics of people’s relationship

with nature, the political problems of ecological scarcity

and public goods, and the response of the American

political system to environmental issues. Wurth (SS)

ES 111 (ECO 111). Introduction to

Environmental Economics (4)

An examination of the interactions between our eco-

nomic systems and the environment. Pollution as a

consequence of human activity within a framework for

analyzing the relationships between environmental quali-

ty, scarcity of resources and economic growth. How to

develop appropriate public policies to deal with these

issues. Prerequisite: ECO. 1. (SS)

ES 115 (JOUR 115). Communicating about the

Environment (4)

Introduction to the need for and ways to communicate

about environmental issues to laypersons, government

officials, journalists, members of the judiciary and tech-

nical experts. Explores case studies of good and bad

communication about environmental issues. Internet

communication, including the efficacy of placing gov-

ernmental reports and databases on the Web for public

consumption, will be evaluated. (SS)

ES 116 (JOUR 116). Risky Business (4) Summer

This course explores the risks and effects of environmen-

tal contamination on human health and behavior as well

as the role of the mass media in alerting citizens to

potential environmental health risks. Environmental top-

ics vary but usually include air and water pollution,

endocrine disrupters and radioactive waste. Friedman

(SS)

Environmental Initiative 259

ES 122. Sustainable Development: The Costa

Rican Experience (3)

Investigation of the concept of sustainable development

as currently being practiced in Costa Rica. Case studies

in diverse areas (e.g. agriculture, bioprospecting, eco-

tourism, energy, and land use) demonstrate how current

approaches to sustainable development are influenced by

the history and ecology of Costa Rica, as well as the

structure of its political, social, and economic systems.

Attention to theories of sustainable development and of

consumption help to frame the Costa Rican experience.

Students maintain individual “sustainability” journals

based on their experiences from which they draw for

team-based research and writing projects. The course is

offered through Lehigh Abroad and consists of 5 evening

classes during the fall semester and required course travel

to Costa Rica between the fall and winter semesters

(approximately 18 days). Final course projects are due

early in the spring semester. Course participation will

require additional fees as described by Lehigh Abroad

(airfare and program fee). Cutcliffe, Morris, & Weisman

(SS)

ES 125 (JOUR 125). Environment, the Public and

the Mass Media (4)

Extensive exploration of local, national and international

environmental problems and their social, political and

economic impacts. Analysis of mass media coverage of

complex environmental issues and the media’s effects on

public opinion and government environmental policies.

Examination of environmental journalism principles and

practices in the United States and around the world.

Friedman (SS)

ES 131. Internship (1-2)

Practical experience in the application of environmental

studies for both on- and off-campus organizations.

Course is designed to provide credit for supervised expe-

riential learning experiences. May be repeated for credit

up to four credits. Prerequisite: consent of the program

director. (ND)

ES 171 (CEE 171). Fundamentals of

Environmental Technology (4)

Pollution control technologies and how they work for

water, air and solid wastes. Assessment and management

of risk as applied to remediation of contaminated wastes.

Role of life cycle analysis of products in risk reduction.

Emphasis on technologies leading to sustainable environ-

ment. Government policies and regulations, including

litigation and Best Engineering Practices. Prerequisite: A

course designated NS. Not available to students in

RCEAS. (ND)

ES 181. Independent Study (1-4)

Directed readings or research on an Environmental

Studies topic. May be repeated for credit up to four

credits. Prerequisite: consent of the program director.

(HU or SS)

ES 254 (REL 254, ASIA 254). Buddhism and

Ecology (4)

Buddhism’s intellectual, ethical, and spiritual resources

are reexamined in light of contemporary environmental

problems. Is Buddhism the most green of the major

world religions? What are the moral implications of

actions that affect the environment? Prerequisite: One

prior course in religion, environmental studies, or Asian

studies. Kraft (HU)

ES 293. Advanced Lehigh Earth Observatory

Field/Laboratory Internship (1-4)

A continuation of LEO Internship 093, this course will

entail further development of supervised projects and

leadership opportunities. Past projects and more details

about LEO are available at http://www.leo.lehigh.edu.

Students should contact the Environmental Initiative for

departmental permission to register. Prerequisite: ES

093. NS, SS, or HU.

ES 315 (HIST 315) American Environmental

History (4)

Relationship between Americans and their natural envi-

ronment from the colonial period to the present: impact

of European settlement, attributes toward wilderness,

role of technological development, rise of preservation

and conservation movements, establishment of national

parks, recent environmental protection legislation. (SS)

Cutcliffe

ES 328. (POLS 328) U.S. Politics and the

Environment (4)

An examination of contemporary American politics and

policy dealing with environmental issues. Current con-

troversies in the legislative and regulatory areas will be

covered to examine environmental issues and the politi-

cal process. Significant portions of the course readings

will be taken from government publications. Wurth (SS)

ES 331. U.S. Environmental Law I: Pollution &

Risk Abatement (4)

This course studies the practical reality of environmental

regulation as codified law. It also aims at understanding

the law’s foundation in argument and justification as

both existing law and proposed policy through the use of

cases, statutes, and regulations on air, water, risk, waste

and environmental impact. Utilizing two legal paradigms

for charting the relationship between humanity and

nature, it examines a wide range of environmental law as

well as ethical, political, economic, scientific, and policy

dimensions. Gillroy (SS)

ES 333 (IR 333). International Environmental

Law & Policy (4)

[This course examines the basic international legal set-

ting for the protection and management of the global

environment. It examines how international law con-

cerning nature is made and applied, the role of

international environmental regimes or institutions,

enforcement strategies, and compliance mechanisms.

Emphasis will be placed on a review of various regulatory

regimes for the protection of the global commons,

including the history and legal sources of the Global

Climate Change Convention. Gillroy (SS)

ES 338. Environmental Risk: Perception &

Communication (4)

Starting with the distinction between traditional pollu-

tion problems and environmental risk, this course will

focus on risk as it is perceived from outside the institu-

tional policy process and how risk dilemmas are

communicated from that institutional structure to

experts and the public at large. This course will examine

perception and communication experiences within the

United States and abroad. Briggs (SS)

ES 339 (IR 339). Global Security and the

Environment (4)

This course examines the links between international

260 Lehigh University Course Catalog 2009-2010

security and the environment. Topics include the effects

of military actions on the environment; the environment

contributing to international conflict; environmental

conditions as security issues; the relationship between

public health and security; bioterrorism, ecoterrorism,

and biological threats; environmental remediation and

conflict resolution. Briggs (SS)

ES 340 ( IR 340/ STS 340) International

Environmental and Science Policy (3)

The politics of science behind global climate change,

transboundary environmental pollution, international

regulatory standards, and environmental risk assessment.

How international/global science communities operate,

how to communicate scientific research across cultures,

and how to translate scientific data into international

policy. Case studies include climate change, the ozone

hole, avian influenza, and HIV/AIDS. Briggs (SS)

ES 343 (IR 343). Comparative Environmental Law

& Policy (4)

This course studies the different ways in which domestic

legal systems handle the regulation of humanity’s rela-

tionship to the natural world. The first part of the course

concentrates on comparative law that examines the evo-

lution of distinct types of legal systems from their origins

in the ancient world. The second part of the course

specifically and comparatively examines environmental

law as it has developed in Canada, China, the European

Union and the United States. Ranges of alternatives for

environmental law and policy as practiced in various

parts of the world will be explored. Gillroy (SS)

ES 355 (POLS 355). Environmental Justice & The

Law (4)

This course is an in-depth exploration of the various

ways in which environmental law and policy can have

discriminatory effects. It examines the rise and evolution

of the environmental justice movement, and the impact

of environmental justice claims on administrative rule-

making at both the state and federal level. Reviewing the

history of case law concerning environmental justice

suits filed under the 1964 Civil Rights Act, it also exam-

ines the future of environmental justice in environmental

law and policy. Holland (SS)

ES 367 (TLT 367). Environmental Education (3)

Introductory environmental education course designed

to prepare students to implement environmental educa-

tion opportunities in formal and non-formal education

settings. Topics include history and philosophy of envi-

ronmental education, environmental laws and

regulations, GIS, environmental issues and decision

making, curriculum integration and environmental edu-

cation teaching methodologies. This is a Web enhanced

course containing both online and fieldwork compo-

nents.

ES 371. Special Topics (1-4)

Intensive, research-oriented study of a subject or issue in

Environmental Studies not covered in other courses. For

students of demonstrated ability and adequate prepara-

tion. May be repeated for credit up to four credits.

Prerequisite: consent of the program director. (HU or

SS)

ES 381. Senior Seminar: Issues in Environmental

Studies (4)

Advanced seminar focusing on discussion and research

on specialized subjects in Environmental Studies. Subject

matter varies from semester to semester. Intended for

Environmental Studies majors and minors but open to

others. Prerequisites: ES 1, 2 or another EES course, and

one core course or consent of the program director. (SS)

ES 391. Honors Thesis (1-4)

Directed undergraduate research thesis required of stu-

dents who apply and qualify for graduation with

program honors. Prerequisite: consent of the program

director. (HU or SS)

Graduate Studies

Graduate Certificate in Environmental

Law and Policy

This graduate certificate offers a credential in environ-

mental law and policy for individuals with a background

in various science, engineering, social science and

humanities fields who wish to understand the theory and

practice of environmental and natural resource law at the

national, comparative or international level. It is especial-

ly valuable for those in various environmental fields who

come in contact with the law in the course of their work,

to policy makers at all levels of government who routine-

ly handle legal affairs, to lawyers without specific

training in environmental law, and to business people

who want to know what the law says about the legality

of their business’ impact on the natural environment.

The certificate also can be preparation for further studies

in law, policy, or politics or for professional positions in

the private or public sector. Certificate courses can be

counted toward MA in Environmental Policy Design, as

appropriate.

Requirements

The certificate program requires 4 courses with 1 course

from each of the 2 core groups and 2 other courses from

either the core groups or electives selected in consulta-

tion with the program advisor. No more than 6 credits

can be taken at the 300 level and the certificate must be

completed in a maximum of 3 years.

Core Courses In Environmental Law:

ES 331/431 U.S. Environmental Law I: Pollution

& Rish Abatement (3)

ES 432 U.S. Environmental Law II: Natural

Resources & Public Lands (3)

ES 333/433 International Environmental Law &

Policy (3)

ES 343/443 Comparative Environmental Law &

Policy (3)

Core Courses in Policy Analysis, Valuation & The Law:

ES 401 Philosophical Politics and

Environmental Policy Design (3)

ES 435 Environmental Valuation For Policy

Design & Legal Analysis (3)

ES 336/436 Environmental Justice & The Law (3)

ES 338/438 Environmental Risk: Perception &

Communication (3)

Elective Courses:

Elective courses will be chosen from existing

Environmental Studies, Environmental Science or

Environmental Engineering courses (ES, EES or CEE) at

the 300/400 level in consultation with the program advi-

sor. Students are encouraged to choose their elective

Environmental Initiative 261

courses from ES core offerings; however, they can select a

specific elective pertinent to their studies or background

in consultation with their advisor.

M.A. Environmental Policy Design

The M.A. in Environmental Policy Design trains schol-

ars and practitioners alike for the demanding task of

designing environmental policy that can protect or

restore an increasingly degraded natural environment

while sustaining the benefits of economic growth and

providing for the needs of an ever more vulnerable (and

growing) human population. Achieving this goal will

require policy professionals to understand and analyze

environmental problems amidst multiple systems and

levels of law and in the context of rapidly globalizing

governance structures, institutions, and regimes that cut

across geographical and political boundaries. Specifically,

the M.A. program seeks to prepare policy professionals

to address questions that fall along two axes. First, how

are legal institutions, regulations, and public manage-

ment responding to the political, social, and economic

dynamics affecting the natural environment at the local,

regional, national, and international level? Second, how

should legal institutions, regulations, and public manage-

ment respond to the impact of these various dynamics in

order to ensure a sustainable natural environment? By

preparing students to integrate answers to the former,

descriptive question, with answers to the latter, norma-

tive question, we seek to build a generation of policy

practitioners that can (1) critically assess and analyze the

multiple conditions that create environmental problems,

(2) arrive at novel solutions to those problems, and (3)

justify those solutions as persuasive public policy.

Required Courses: (2)

ES 401 Philosophical Politics and

Environmental Policy Design (3)

ES 402 Scientific Foundations for

Environmental Policy Design (3)

Core Courses: (at least 4 of 7)

ES 431 U.S. Environmental Law I: Pollution

& Rish Abatement (3)

ES 432 U.S. Environmental Law II: Natural

Resources & Public Lands (3)

ES 433 International Environmental Law &

Policy (3)

ES 438 Environmental Risk: Perception &

Communication (3)

ES 439 Global Security and the Environment (3)

ES 443 Comparative Environmental Law &

Policy (3)

ES 455 Environmental Justice and the Law (3)

ES 461 Wetland Policy and Valuation (3)

Electives (3) Including at least one Foundation Course,

except that one or more Core Courses may be substitut-

ed for foundation or Context Courses

Foundation

ES 440 International Environmental and

Science Policy (3)

EES 358 Microbial Ecology (3) or

EES 365 Eco-physiology (3) or

CEE/EED 379 Environmental Case Studies

POLS 448 Markets, Justice and Law (3)

Context

HIST 315 American Environmental History (3)

POLS 416 American Public Policy

POLS 475 Green Polities (3)

POLS 448 Land Use, Growth Management and

the Politics of Sprawl Methods (1)

POLS 421 Methods for Public Policy analysis (3)

EES 325 Remote Sensing of Terrestrial and

Aquatic Environments (3)

CEE 475 Environmental Risk Management

THESIS: A six credit thesis (ES 490) can be taken in

lieu of two Foundation/Context Courses with the

approval of the EI Graduate Curriculum Committee.

The student must find a thesis supervisor and a second

reader and produce a five page thesis proposal to the

specifications of the program format. This proposal,

signed by the student and the primary and second read-

ers, must then be submitted to the committee six weeks

before the beginning of the term in which the first thesis

credit is to be taken. If the proposal fails to be approved,

the student will be required to fill out his/her program

with courses.

Graduate Courses

ES 401 Philosophical Politics and Environmental

Policy Design (3)

A basic class for graduate students on the idea of policy

design, as opposed to standard economic analysis of pub-

lic policy and its application to various domestic and

international environmental dilemmas. The course will

also introduce the idea of Philosophical-Politics, or the

use of integrated philosophical systems to justify specific

policy design arguments, through the use of two distinct

theoretical paradigms that focus on, specifically, the

integrity of the natural environment and the capabilities

of humans in relation to ecosystems. (Gillroy/ Holland)

ES 402 (EES 402) Scientific Foundations for

Environmental Policy Design (3)

This course explores the science behind the environmental

issues that bear on the policy process at local, national and

global scales. Scientific concepts will be explored with the

goal of understanding ways in which they can better

inform the policy process at all scales. The course delves

into the science of selected environmental issues that have

either arisen from anthropogenic activities, or that impact

social systems. The course will consist of readings and dis-

cussions of several timely topics and one major class-wide

project to be selected each semester. Sahagian (NS)

ES 431 (POLS 431) Public Management (3)

The study of bureaucracy and problems of public and

nonprofit organization and management; executive lead-

ership; personnel management systems and regulatory

administration.

ES 432. U.S. Environmental Law II: Natural

Resources & Public Lands (3)

This course combines a study of natural resources law

with an understanding of the politics and legal processes

that create, change, and regulate the economic use of

nature. It studies extraction law from two models of reg-

ulation: the Market Sector Approach and the Ecosystem

Approach. Using these two standards for charting the

relationship between humanity and nature, students will

analyze timber, water, mineral extraction, public lands

regulations, wildlife, wilderness and federal planning and

environmental impact assessment in terms of their ethi-

cal, political, economic and policy components. Gillroy

262 Lehigh University Course Catalog 2009-2010

ES 433 International Environmental Law &

Policy (3)

This course examines the basic international legal setting

for the protection and management of the global envi-

ronment. It examines how international law concerning

nature is made and applied, the role of international

environmental regimes or institutions, enforcement

strategies, and compliance mechanisms. Emphasis will be

placed on a review of various regulatory regimes for the

protection of the global commons, including the history

and legal sources of the Global Climate Change

Convention. Gillroy (SS)

ES 435. Environmental Valuation For Policy

Design & Legal Analysis (3)

Reviewing the history and legal context that gave rise to

the current use of the “contingent valuation method” for

pricing environmental resources, this course assesses

empirical and normative strengths of this method, as

well as the weaknesses that challenge its effectiveness and

political legitimacy. Students will evaluate the recent turn

to “deliberative” methods of resource valuation and con-

sider empirical and normative problems that deliberative

methods address. Holland

ES 438. Environmental Risk: Perception &

Communication (3)

Starting with the distinction between traditional pollu-

tion problems and environmental risk, this course will

focus on risk as it is perceived from outside the institu-

tional policy process and how risk dilemmas are

communicated from that institutional structure to

experts and the public at large. This course will examine

perception and communication experiences within the

United States and abroad. Briggs (SS)

ES 439. Global Security and the Environment (3)

This course examines the links between international

security and the environment. Topics include the effects

of military actions on the environment; the environment

contributing to international conflict; environmental

conditions as security issues; the relationship between

public health and security; bioterrorism, ecoterrorism,

and biological threats; environmental remediation and

conflict resolution. Briggs (SS)

ES 440 (IR 340/ ES 340) International

Environmental and Science Policy (3)

The politics of science behind global climate change,

transboundary environmental pollution, international

regulatory standards, and environmental risk assessment.

How international/global science communities operate,

how to communicate scientific research across cultures,

and how to translate scientific data into international

policy. Case studies include climate change, the ozone

hole, avian influenza, and HIV/AIDS. Briggs (SS)

ES 443 Comparative Environmental Law &

Policy (3)

This course studies the different ways in which domestic

legal systems handle the regulation of humanity’s rela-

tionship to the natural world. The first part of the course

concentrates on comparative law that examines the evo-

lution of distinct types of legal systems from their origins

in the ancient world. The second part of the course

specifically and comparatively examines environmental

law as it has developed in Canada, China, the European

Union and the United States. Ranges of alternatives for

environmental law and policy as practiced in various

parts of the world will be explored. Gillroy (SS)

ES 455 (POLS 455). Environmental Justice & The

Law (3)

This course is an in-depth exploration of the various

ways in which environmental law and policy can have

discriminatory effects. It examines the rise and evolution

of the environmental justice movement, and the impact

of environmental justice claims on administrative rule-

making at both the state and federal level. Reviewing the

history of case law concerning environmental justice

suits filed under the 1964 Civil Rights Act, it also exam-

ines the future of environmental justice in environmental

law and policy. Holland (SS)

ES 461 (EES461) Wetland Policy and Valuation (3)

An interdisciplinary exploration of the laws, political

context, and administrative issues shaping wetlands poli-

cy. Legal component will review the statutory and case

law relevant to legislative and judicial decisions about

wetlands. Valuation component will consider instrumen-

tal and non-instrumental approaches to valuation of

wetland ecosystems, and how these approaches bear on

the prospects for wetland restoration in light of global

climate change. Managerial component will explore the

science of wetland structure and function, and how sci-

ence-based decisions about wetland protection are

complicated by conflicting levels – local, state, and feder-

al – of regulatory authority. Integrated activities with

EES 386, Wetland Science (Booth). Not available for

students who have taken EES386.

Finance

Professors. Paul Brockman, Ph.D. (LSU), Joseph R.

Perella and Amy M. Perella, chair; Stephen G. Buell,

Ph.D. (Lehigh); Richard J. Kish, Ph.D. (Florida), chair-

man, Perella Department of Finance; Nandu Nayar,

Ph.D. (Iowa), Hans Baer Chair in International Finance;

Geraldo M. Vasconcellos, Ph.D. (Illinois).

Associate Professors. Anne-Marie Anderson, Ph.D.

(Arizona); Stephen F. Thode, D.B.A. (Indiana).

Assistant Professors. Yung-Yu Ma, Ph.D. (Utah); Jesus

M. Salas, Ph.D. (Oklahoma); Ke Yang, Ph.D. (Iowa).

Professors of Practice. David H. Myers, Ph.D.

(Washington); Samuel C. Weaver, Ph.D. (Lehigh).

Active Emeriti. James A. Greenleaf, Ph.D. (N.Y.U.)

In the era of a growing competitive global economy,

finance has become increasingly important and complex.

This has led to an expansion of career opportunities

within corporations, investment firms, and financial

institutions worldwide. These opportunities are varied

and often overlap with other disciplines such as account-

ing, information systems, and marketing. It is also

important that students engage in extracurricular activi-

ties that might complement their academic studies.

The domestic financial services industry has been at the

forefront of global finance and will remain as one of our

relative strengths within a global economy. Lehigh, in

turn, enjoys a relative advantage in this regard as Lehigh

alumni are well respected in all areas of finance. Our

program has also been able to take advantage of our

proximity to many financial institutions.

Finance 263

The finance major offered by the Perella Department of

Finance requires at least 18 credit hours beyond the core

requirements. Each finance major must successfully com-

plete the 2-course foundation requirement; the 2-course

depth requirement; and a minimum 2-course breadth

requirement as outlined below.

2-Course Foundation Requirement

FIN 323 Investments

FIN 328 Corporate Financial Policy

2-Course Depth Requirement

Choose 2 depth electives from the following list of

finance offerings.

FIN 324 Security Analysis and Portfolio

Management

FIN 330 Financial Markets and Institutions

FIN 333 Global Finance

FIN 334 Derivatives and Management of Risk

FIN 335 Advanced Topics-Financial

Management

FIN 336 Real Estate Finance

2-Course Breadth Requirement

Choose at least 2 breadth electives within one of the fol-

lowing six breadth tracks.

Track 1: Analytical Finance –Must take all three (3) courses

IE 316 Optimization Models and Applications

IE 339 Stochastic Models and Applications

Math 310 Random Processes and Applications

Track 2: Financial Analysis

ACCT 315 Financial Accounting I

ACCT 316 Financial Accounting II

Track 3: Financial Economics (choose 1 from each pair)

ECO 322 Competitor and Market Analysis OR

ECO 333 Economics of Business Decisions

ECO 339 International Trade OR

ECO 340 International Finance

Track 4: Financial Marketing (choose 2)

MKT 312 Marketing Research

MKT 319 Development and Marketing of New

Products

MKT 320 Global Marketing

MKT 325/ECO 325 Quantitative Marketing Analysis

Track 5: Financial Mathematics (choose 1 from each pair)

MATH 205 Linear Methods OR

MATH 242 Linear Algebra

MATH 231 Probability and Statistics OR

MATH 309 Theory of Probability

Track 6: Real Estate Valuation – Must take all 3 courses

IPRE 301 Case Studies in Real Estate Value

Creation

Bus 347 Practicum in Real Estate I

Bus 348 Practicum in Real Estate II

Undergraduate Courses

For Advanced Undergraduates and Graduate Students

Courses numbered 200 and above in the College of Business

and Economics are open to sophomores only on petition.

FIN 125. Introduction to Finance (3)

An introductory finance course stressing the links

between corporate finance and investments. Major topic

areas will include financial statement analysis, time value

of money, risk and return valuation of stocks and bonds,

capital budgeting, and cost of capital. Prerequisites:

ECO 029, ECO 045, MATH 21, ACCT 151.

Finance Foundation Courses:

FIN 323. Investments (3)

The nature of risk and the form of returns on financial

assets from the viewpoint of various constituents.

Investor objectives, attitudes, and constraints are consid-

ered within the risk-return matrix within the context of

valuation. Prerequisites: FIN 125 and ECO 146.

FIN 328. Corporate Financial Policy (3)

The study of management issues related to capital budg-

eting, working capital, leasing, mergers, and financing.

Prerequisites: FIN 125 and ECO 146.

Finance Depth Requirement Courses:

FIN 324. Security Analysis and Portfolio

Management (3)

Valuation of equity and debt instruments factoring in

the influence earnings forecasts and expectations, uncer-

tainty, required returns, supply and demand for securities

and funds, and investor attitudes. Portfolio management

concepts include the implications of market factors,

technical analysis, timing, and screening of securities.

Prerequisites: FIN 323 and FIN 328.

FIN 330. Financial Markets and Institutions (3)

Functions and portfolios of financial intermediaries.

Sectional demand and supply of funds, nature and role

of interest rates, term structure and forecasting, impact

of inflation and regulation on financial intermediaries

and markets, and current developments in the financial

system. Management of assets and liabilities within the

U.S. financial institution’s legal and economic con-

straints. Prerequisites: FIN 323 and FIN 328.

FIN 333. Global Finance (3)

Issues that underlie the investment, financing, and divi-

dend decisions of multinational firms from both the

buyer’s and seller’s viewpoints. Current transactions in

foreign currencies, direct and portfolio investment and

associated risk management when dealing in foreign

countries. Prerequisite: FIN 323 and FIN 328.

FIN 334. Derivatives and Management of Risk (3)

Theoretical and practical aspects of various instruments

and markets that involve financial derivative instru-

ments. Emphasis on the management of risk for

corporate managers and portfolio managers. Prerequisite:

FIN 323 and FIN 328.

FIN 335. Advanced Topics – Financial

Management (3)

Advanced topics relating to specific areas of corporate

finance such as: bond refunding, asset valuation and cap-

ital budgeting including the role of uncertainty,

imprecise forecasts, risk preferences, inflation, market

conditions, and the global marketplace; working capital

management, leasing, mergers, and financing. The

course content may vary between instructors and over

time, therefore, the course descriptor is subject to change

each time the course is offered. May be repeated.

Prerequisite: FIN 323 and FIN 328.

FIN 336. Real Estate Finance (3)

An advanced survey of modern residential and commer-

cial real estate financing techniques from the perspective

of the borrower and the lender. Topics include: the prin-

264 Lehigh University Course Catalog 2009-2010

ciples of financing decisions; financing methods and

techniques, institutional sources of funds for real estate,

and real estate financing decision-making. The course

includes lectures, demonstrations, spreadsheet software

exercises, and guest speakers. Prerequisite: FIN 323 and

FIN 328.

Additional finance offerings that cannot be used to fulfill

the finance depth requirement:

FIN 371. Directed Readings (3)

Readings in various fields of finance designed for the stu-

dent with a special interest in some field of finance not

covered in scheduled courses. May be repeated.

Prerequisite: consent of sponsoring instructor.

FIN 372. Special Topics (1-3)

Special problems and issues in finance for which no reg-

ularly scheduled course work exists. When offered as

group study, coverage varies according to interests of

instructor and students. May be repeated. Prerequisite:

consent of sponsoring instructor.

FIN 273. Finance Internship I (1 credit)

Based on a student’s work experience, a sponsoring facul-

ty member shall direct readings, projects, and other

assignments—including a “capstone report.” It should be

noted that the work experience (at least 80 hours), by

itself, is not the basis for academic credit. The faculty

directed activity must be provided concurrent with the

work. Course registration and related arrangements must

be made in advance of the work engagement. This

course must be taken Pass/Fail and cannot be used to

satisfy finance major requirements. Prerequisites: ECO

029, ECO 045, MATH 21, ACCT 151, declaration of a

finance major, and department approval.

FIN 373. Finance Internship II (1 credit)

Based on a student’s work experience, a sponsoring facul-

ty member shall direct readings, projects, and other

assignments—including a “capstone report.” It should be

noted that the work experience (at least 80 hours), by

itself, is not the basis for academic credit. The faculty

directed activity must be provided concurrent with the

work. Course content and work experience should have

added rigor from Finance Internship I due to the satis-

factory completion of the finance core (FIN 323 and

FIN 328). Course registration and related arrangements

must be made in advance of the work engagement. This

course must be taken Pass/Fail and cannot be used to

satisfy finance major requirements. Prerequisites: FIN

323, FIN 328, declaration of a finance major, and

department approval.

FIN 374. Portfolio Management Practicum (1-3)

Readings, projects and papers designed to complement

the leadership and analytical activities associated with the

management of the Student Investment Club or

Thompson portfolios and similar activities. May be

repeated. Prerequisites: FIN 323 and permission of

instructor.

Graduate Courses

Course descriptions for the College of Business and

Economics graduate courses can be found in this section

(Section V) under the heading of Business and

Economics Graduate Courses.

Fine Arts

See listings under Art and Architecture.

Five-Year Programs

Several ways exist for students to obtain two degrees in

five years of study. See listings under ARTS-Engineering;

ARTS-Master of Business Administration; Civil

Engineering and Earth and Environmental Sciences;

Electrical Engineering and Engineering Physics;

Engineering-Master of Business Administration; and

College of Education.

Foreign Culture and

Civilization

See listings under Modern Languages and Literature.

Foreign Literature

See listings under Classics and under Modern Languages

and Literature.

French

See listings under Modern Languages and Literature.

Geology

See listings under Earth and Environmental Sciences.

German

See listings under Modern Languages and Literature.

Global Citizenship

Global Citizenship Program

Gisella Gisolo, Ph.D., director

As the world becomes more interdependent in com-

merce, technology, and popular culture, people of

different cultures must reconcile diametrically opposed

views of fairness, equity, and conduct—often construct-

ed through theological and cultural traditions. Religious

extremism, trade policies, human rights, and gender

equity are but a few examples of controversies born out

of belief systems colliding on the global stage. How will

individuals from different national, religious, and cultur-

al traditions understand their personal responsibilities in

a world increasingly strained by increasing nationalism

and the pressures of globalization?

Students planning any major can apply to join the

Global Citizenship Program during the matriculation

process prior to the beginning of the first year. The first–

year experience in Global Citizenship includes a

writing-intensive fall and spring course sequence in addi-

tion to travel during the intersemester break. The

first-year experience leads students to explore what it

means to be not only a citizen of one’s community or

nation but of the world. In addition to the curricular

elements of the program, students are required to take

Global Studies 265

advantage of co–curricular opportunities like speaker

programs, alternative spring break activities, and Lehigh’s

status as a United Nations non–governmental organiza-

tion.

The Certificate program in Global Citizenship is selec-

tive and will admit about 30 students in each entering

class, but all Lehigh students will benefit from the pro-

gram.

Certificate in Global Citizenship

Year 1 fall: GC 098 Introduction to Global

Citizenship (3)

GC 085 Practicum (1)

Year 1 intersemester: Global Citizenship intersession

trip (0 credits)

Year 1 spring: GC/ENGL 007 Global Literature

(3)

Years 2 and 3: one GC-designated introductory

course (see list below)

three additional GC-designated

courses (9 to 12 credits)

study abroad (see note below)

Year 4: GC 385 Global Citizenship

Capstone (4)

GC-designated introductory courses. IR/GS 10,

GC/ANTH 111 (additional courses will be added in due

time)

Study abroad in year 2 or 3. The student may transfer

credits back to Lehigh from the Study Abroad experience

but credits are not required for the GC program.

Acceptable Study Abroad experiences must be at least 5

weeks in length, take place in a non-English-speaking

country, and include language instruction. Home-stay is

encouraged. Students are encouraged to spend at least a

semester abroad, but summer programs are acceptable.

Courses in Global Citizenship

GC 098. Introduction to Global Citizenship (3)

This course is a reflection on the processes of globaliza-

tion and their consequences, both good and bad, on the

world’s societies and on our concepts of culture and

identity. It provides a multidisciplinary examination of

what cultures gain and lose from their interaction with

the rest of the world and what it means to be a citizen of

a globalized yet diverse world. (HU/GC)

GC 007 (ENGL 007). Global Literature (3)

This multidisciplinary seminar asks students to develop

informed opinions about what it means to be a global

citizen, using rhetorical and persuasive techniques to

address issues in economics, exile, and the environment.

Additional narrative and expository reflections on stu-

dents’ intersession trip are required. Open only to

students in the Global Citizenship program. Fulfills the

English 2 requirement where needed. (HU)

GC 085. Practicum (1)

Preparation for first year Global Citizenship inter-session

trip. Focus on the country of travel will include culture,

politics, economics, art, religion, trade and technology.

Taught by the faculty leader of the inter-session trip.

(ND)

GC 385. Global Citizenship Capstone Course (4)

Students are required to complete a senior project or

paper that reflects on their personal concept of global

citizenship as it relates to a specific topic in their individ-

ual disciplines. Students meet weekly in a seminar for-

mat to discuss their projects and peer review each other’s

work. Global Citizenship projects can be wrapped into

other senior projects that are required for students’

majors or programs. Seminar is taught by the Director of

Global Citizenship, who will work closely with students

and their faculty advisors. (ND)

Global Studies

Professor and Director. Jack Lule, Ph.D. (Georgia)

Director, Globalization and Social Change Initiative and

Joseph B. McFadden Distinguished Professor of

Journalism

Professors. Marie-Helene Chabut, Ph.D. (U.C. San

Diego), Chair and Professor of Modern Languages and

Literature; Rajan Menon, Ph.D. (Illinois) Professor of

International Relations; Bruce E. Moon, Ph.D. (Ohio

State) Professor of International Relations

Associate professors. Janice Bially Mattern, Ph.D. (Yale),

Associate Professor of International Relations; Rob

Rozehnal, Ph.D. (Duke) Associate Professor of Religion

Studies; John Savage, Ph.D. (NYU), Associate Professor

of History

Assistant professors. Nandini Deo, Ph.D. (Yale),

Assistant Professor of Political Science; Vera Fennel

(Chicago), Assistant Professor of Political Science and

Global Studies; John Jirik (Texas), Assistant Professor of

Journalism and Communication and Global Studies;

Janet Laible, Ph.D. (Yale) Assistant Professor of Political

Science; Matthew Sanderson, Ph.D. (Utah), Assistant

Professor of Global Studies and Sociology; Bruce

Whitehouse (Brown), Assistant Professor of Sociology

and Anthropology and Global Studies.

Global Studies. Terrorism. Poverty. The dollar. Global

warming. The World Cup. Immigration. MTV

International. The United Nations. Ethnic cleansing.

McDonald’s.

Almost every aspect of human existence has been

touched by the dynamic of globalization, which may be

the defining characteristic of the 21st Century.

Yet, the origins, history, evolution, and impact of global-

ization – even its very definition – are subject to intense

debate. We can surely say, however, that every student

leaving college and entering the workforce – the world –

should have a fundamental understanding of globaliza-

tion.

Such understanding will give students crucial knowledge

and skills that will set them apart in this new world and

help them succeed in an increasingly globalized context.

It will help them anticipate the social, cultural, economic

and political changes brought about by globalization —

and the resistance to globalization. It will better prepare

students to draw connections in an interdependent and

interconnected world.

Global Studies is a relatively new and increasingly popu-

lar major at universities worldwide, including Yale,

UCLA, the London School of Economics and others.

Different from study in an individual department,

Global Studies is emphatically interdisciplinary, with

professors from anthropology, journalism, sociology,

modern languages and literature, religion studies, politi-

cal science, history, international relations, and others.

Increasingly, the most important questions cannot be

266 Lehigh University Course Catalog 2009-2010

answered by one discipline but by the combined efforts

of multiple disciplines.

Although study of globalization has gone on at Lehigh

for years, the University formally created the

Globalization and Social Change Initiative in Fall 2006,

and the major in Global Studies followed soon after.

The Initiative’s three main areas of focus are Global

Communication, Culture and Identity, and Politics and

Social Structures. Rooted in these areas of interest, the

major examines how the forces of globalization shape

and are shaped by history, culture, economics, politics,

communication, and other fundamental aspects of the

human condition.

In many Global Studies programs, students choose from

a sprawling array of courses tied together loosely by

virtue only of international content. Global Studies at

Lehigh directs students in a more focused manner to

core courses that confront, from the perspectives of mul-

tiple disciplines, perhaps the single, central force shaping

the world today – globalization.

The program requires a total of 40 credits, intermediate

language proficiency, a semester of study abroad, and a

global studies research project undertaken as part of a

capstone seminar.

The program also takes advantage of Lehigh’s NGO

(non-government organization) status at the United

Nations and requires a United Nations workshop, which

includes a seminar and visit to the UN. Some students

actually become delegates to the UN for international

NGOs.

Careers in Global Studies. Career opportunities are

numerous for graduates of Global Studies. Professions in

the 21

century increasingly are demanding global

understanding and expertise as well as the ability to take

on interdisciplinary work across boundaries. People

trained in the interdisciplinary field of Global Studies

have increasing advantages over those trained in a single

discipline.

Through the Global Studies major, students acquire a

strong grounding in global affairs and an understanding

of the complex phenomenon of globalization. They

engage in problem-solving across boundaries and cul-

tures. They are able to critically and analytically evaluate

information from a comparative perspective. They learn

to be effective communicators and learn to argue and

defend complex views in writing, such as policy papers,

and public speaking, such as individual and group pre-

sentations, to a variety of global audiences. Careers paths

include work with:

Global culture industries music, film, sports, –

MTV, Disney, the NBA,

Coca Cola

Global environment World Wildlife Fund,

Greenpeace, Sierra

International

Global health World Health Org

(WHO), Ctr for Disease

Control (CDC)

Global marketing agencies BBDO, DDB, J. Walter

Thompson, Leo Burnett

Human justice organizations Amnesty International,

Human Rights Watch

Global governing agencies UN, World Bank,

International Monetary

Fund (IMF)

Global service agencies Red Cross, CARE,

UNICEF, Peace Corps

Global development agencies U.S. Agency for

International

Development, relief

funds

International businesses Sony, Microsoft, Apple,

medicine and pharma-

ceuticals

Mass communication CNN, ESPN, Rodale

International, foreign

correspondence

Travel and tourism travel agencies, global

tours, cruise lines

U.S. govt offices and agencies Foreign Service, State

Department, political

staffs

Global Studies Major

Introductory Course

GS/COM 1 Introduction to Global Studies (4)

Core Courses (4 courses; 16 credits): One course from

each core area that explores how globalization shapes

and is shaped by:

History

GS/HIS 101 Histories of Globalization (4)

Culture

GS/MLL 6 Globalization and Culture (3) or

GS/ANTH 106 Cultural Studies and Globalization (4)

Political Economy

GS/IR 125 International Political Economy (4) or

GS/SSP 126 The Political Economy of

Globalization (4)

Politics

GS/IR 10 Introduction to World Politics (4) or

GS/POLS 3 Comparative Politics (4)

Advanced Coursework (2 courses; 8 credits): Two

courses from the following list or other GS courses

at the 200-level or above:

GS/COM 248 Global Communication (4)

GS/COM 318 Seminar in Globalization &

Communication (4)

GS/SSP 317 Seminar in Globalization and

Social Issues (4)

GS/ANTH 315 Seminar in Globalization and

Culture (4)

GS/ANTH 320 Global Capitalism (4)

GS/POLS 325 Nationalism in Comparative

Perspective (4)

GS/POLS 342 Gender and Third World

Development (4)

GS/IR 245 International Organizations (4)

GS/IR 347 Non-State Actors in a Globalized

World (4)

GS/MLL 321 Intercultural Communication (4)

GS/REL 244 Globalization and Religion (4)

One advanced course can be replaced by an approved,

overseas internship or relevant, supervised experiential

learning in the United States. The program will work to

develop a network of global internships.

Global Studies 267

Area Studies (2 courses; 8 credits): Two courses from

one Area Studies program, one at the 200 level or

above:

Africana Studies

Asian Studies

Latin American Studies

European Studies

Senior Seminar (1 course; 4 credits):

GS 375 Senior Seminar in Global Studies (4)

Collateral Requirements:

Intermediate language proficiency: (Intermediate II or

equivalent) in a language taught at Lehigh, other than

the student’s native language

Study abroad: 12 credits of study abroad, taken in one

semester, or two, 6-credit summer sessions (coursework

can be substituted, with the guidance of an adviser, if

student is financially or academically unable to study

abroad)

UN Workshop: seminar and trip to United

Nations

Global Studies Minor

A minor in Global Studies consists of four courses,

including GS 1 and three courses from the list of core

and advanced classes, with one class at the 200 level or

above. The UN Workshop, study abroad or Lehigh

Abroad are strongly recommended.

Course Listings

GS 1 (COMM 1) Introduction to Global Studies (4)

MTVInternational. Islam. Yao. The UN. Global warm-

ing. Terrorism. McDonald’s. Almost every aspect of

human existence has been touched in some way by the

dynamic of globalization. The historical and continuing

integration of peoples, cultures, markets and nations,

globalization may become the defining characteristic of

the 21st Century. It has been a Janus-like force of two

faces, with advantages and disadvantages, surfeit and suf-

fering. In this emphatically interdisciplinary course, the

foundation class for the Global Studies major and

intended for freshmen and sophomores, students will be

introduced to a variety of historical, critical and analyti-

cal perspectives, methods and vocabularies for continued

study of globalization and social change. Lule (SS/GCP)

GS 3 (POLS 3) Comparative Politics (4)

The political systems of foreign countries; approaches to

the study of comparative politics. (SS)

GS 6 (MLL6) Globalization and Cultures (3)

This course is a reflection on the processes of globaliza-

tion and their consequences, both good and bad, on the

world’s societies and on our concepts of culture and

identity. It provides a multidisciplinary examination of

what cultures gain and lose from their interaction with

the rest of the world and what it means to be a citizen of

a globalized yet diverse world. (HU)

GS 10 (IR 10) International Politics (4)

Introduction to the major principles, concepts, and theo-

ries of international relations, along with historical

background focusing on the 19th and 20th centuries.

Topics to be covered include the nature of power, bal-

ance of power theories, national interest,

decision-making in foreign policy, theories of war and

expansion, patterns of cooperation, and international

political economy. Menon (SS)

GS 101 (HIST 101) Histories of Globalization (4)

Critical historical perspectives on current debates around

“globalization” and the varied paths and responses to

modernity, using recent scholarship associated with the

New Global History. The “Rise of the West” paradigm,

Industrial Revolution and modernization theory; cre-

ation of global financial markets, nation-building and

New Imperialism; Great Depression and World Wars as

global historical events; postwar decolonization, Cold

War and emergence of North-South relations; impact of

consumerism, movements for women’s rights, ethnic

nationalism and religious fundamentalist movements in

tradition-bound societies. Savage (HU)

GS 106 (ANTH 106) Cultural Studies and

Globalization (4)

This course closely examines the complex relationship

between culture and globalization. The impact of global-

ization on local culture is an essential topic. But the

interaction of globalization and culture is not a one-way

process. People around the world adapt globalization to

their own uses, merging global cultural flows with local

practices in transformative ways. The course will study

the interaction of local culture with globalizing forces;

immigration and culture; the localizing of mass culture;

cultures of diasporic and migratory groups, and global-

ization, gender and identity. Whitehouse. (SS)

GS 125 (IR 125, POLS 125) International

Political Economy (4)

Principles governing the interaction between the eco-

nomic and political components of international

phenomena. Political causes and consequences of trade

and investment. Foreign economic policy and its rela-

tionship to domestic economic policy and other aspects

of foreign policy. Determinants of foreign economic pol-

icy. Prerequisites: Eco 1 and IR 10. Moon (SS)

GS 126 (SSP 126) The Political Economy of

Globalization (4)

This course studies the relationship among economic,

political and cultural forces in an era of globalization.

Focus is on how global capitalism, the world market and

local economics shape and are shaped by social, cultural

and historical forces. Topics include political and cultural

determinants of trade and investment; culture and the

global economy; global capitalism, especially studied

through the lens of culture; globalization and patterns of

economic growth; cross-cultural study of consumerism;

poverty and inequality; the interplay of foreign and

domestic economic policy; international economic

organizations, such as the World Trade Organization, the

International Monetary Fund, and the World Bank, and

globalization and national development. Sanderson. (SS)

GS 244 (REL 244) Globalization and Religion (4)

See description under Religion Studies

GS 245 (IR 245) International Organization (4)

Examines how cooperation is achieved and sustained in

world politics. Under what circumstances does coopera-

tion take place? What role do formal international

organizations (such as the UN) play? What roles do

norms, values, and ethics play? Can cooperation last?

Questions pursued theoretically and in practical terms

across topical issues (e.g., human rights, poverty, the

268 Lehigh University Course Catalog 2009-2010

environment, international law). Prerequisite: IR 10.

Bially Mattern (SS)

GS 248 (COM 248) Global Communication (4)

This class studies, from an historical and cultural per-

spective, how globalization shapes and is shaped by

communication and media structures and processes, with

special emphasis on transnational media corporations

and their interaction with cultures around the globe.

Topics include: globalization, media and culture; mass

media and development; the flow of entertainment pro-

grams and debates on cultural imperialism; media and

migration; the imbalanced flow of information in the

world; the debate on the New World Information Order;

and forms of resistance to transnational media from

world governance institutions, such as UNESCO, state

regulatory responses, and alternative media, such as citi-

zen blogs and pirate radio. Jirik. SS

GS 315 (ANTH 315) Seminar in Globalization

and Culture (4)

Advanced seminar that focuses on research and discus-

sion of specialized topics in globalization and culture.

Subjects vary by semester. May be repeated for credit.

Junior or senior standing and departmental permission

required. Whitehouse. SS

GS 317 (SSP 317) Seminar in Globalization and

Social Issues (4)

Advanced seminar that focuses on research and discus-

sion of specialized topics in globalization and social

issues. Subjects vary by semester. May be repeated for

credit. Junior or senior standing and departmental per-

mission required. Sanderson. SS

GS 318 (COM 318) Seminar in Globalization and

Communication (4)

Advanced seminar that focuses on research and discus-

sion of specialized topics in globalization and

communication. Subjects vary by semester. May be

repeated for credit. Junior or senior standing and depart-

mental permission required. (SS)

GS 321 (MLL 321, MLL 421) Intercultural

Communication (4)

Language is ambiguous by nature and discourse is inter-

preted in cultural and linguistic contexts. This course

covers different cultural and linguistic strategies individ-

uals use to communicate with each other, essential

concepts for interacting with individuals from other cul-

tural and linguistic backgrounds, and different strategies

of communication as defined by specific cultures.

Covering the theory and practice of intercultural interac-

tion, this course examines assumptions about language

and culture, and includes practical advice to help stu-

dents develop the cultural sensitivity essential for

communication today. (HU/ED)

GS 322. (GC 322, HMS 322, SSP 322) Global

Health Issues (4)

Sociological dimensions of health, illness, and healing as

they appear in different parts of the world. Focus on pat-

terns of disease and mortality around the world, with

special emphasis on major epidemics such as HIV/AIDS,

and malaria; the relative importance of ‘traditional’ and

‘modern’ beliefs and practices with regard to disease and

treatment in different societies; the organization of

national health care systems in different countries; and

the role of international organizations and social move-

ments in promoting health. Lasker (SS)

GS 325 (POLS 325) Nationalism in Comparative

Perspective (4)

Examination of major theoretical and policy debates in

contemporary studies of nationalism. Focus on the emer-

gence and endurance of nationalist movements in the

modern era. Discussion of efforts to evaluate the legiti-

macy of nationalist claims and to resolve nationalist

conflict. Prerequisite: POLS 3. Laible

GS 342 (POLS 342, WS 342) Gender and Third

World Development (4)

Focus on gender implications of contemporary strategies

for Third World economic growth, neo-liberalism. How

do economic theories affect ‘real people?’ How do eco-

nomic theories affect men vs. women? What is the role

of people who want to ‘help?’ Some background in eco-

nomic theories and/or Third World politics desired, but

not required. Prerequisite: POLS 1 or WS 1.

GS 347 (IR 347) Non-State Actors in a Globalized

World (4)

Role of non-state political groups (e.g. international

advocacy organizations, multinational corporations, news

media, terrorists, etc.) in world affairs. Thematic focus

on globalization, the relationship between non-state and

state actors, and the implications of non-state actors for

the future of world order. Themes explored through past

and current events (e.g., the WTO demonstrations, 9-

11, the CNN effect, AIDs, anti-sweatshop campaigns.)

Prerequisite: IR 10. Bially Mattern (SS)

GS 390 Readings in Global Studies (1-4)

Directed course of readings for students with interests in

Global Studies not fully explored in regular course offer-

ings. Junior or senior standing required. May be repeated

for credit. Departmental permission required. (SS)

GS 391 Special Topics in Global Studies (1-4)

Research and study for students with interests in Global

Studies not fully explored in regular course offerings.

Junior or senior standing required. May be repeated for

credit. Departmental permission required. (SS)

GS 392 Internship in Global Studies (1-4)

Supervised work relevant to global studies, including

internships at the United Nations, non-government

organizations (NGOs), government organizations, and

other public and private agencies. May be repeated for

credit. Department permission required. Lule (SS)

GS 394 Honors Thesis in Global Studies (1-4)

To graduate with honors in Global Studies, students

need to attain a 3.5 grade point average in Global

Studies classes; a 3.5 grade point average overall, and

complete 4 credits of GS 399 Honors Thesis at the time

of graduation. The four credits may be taken in one

semester or split over two semesters. The honors thesis is

an intensive project of original research, undertaken

under the direct supervision of a faculty adviser. Senior

standing required. May be repeated for credit.

Departmental permission required. (SS)

Government

See listings under Political Science.

Health, Medicine, and Society 269

Greek

See listings under Classics.

Health, Medicine, and Society

An interdisciplinary Health, Medicine, and Society

minor is offered in the College of Arts and Sciences. An

interdepartmental committee composed of faculty from

several departments across the college developed and par-

ticipate in the program. The director of the program is

currently Elizabeth Dolan (English) who advises students

with the Health, Medicine, and Society minor. Minors

should be declared with Professor Dolan in English.

The challenge of meeting the increasingly complex

health needs of growing and aging populations is moving

to the forefront of national and international concerns in

the 21

century. The Health, Medicine, and Society field

focuses on the social scientific and humanistic dimen-

sions of health and medical care to develop an

understanding of the impact of health, illness, and med-

ical care on individuals, families, and societies. This

minor is intended to serve students who wish to be

involved in some aspect of the health care industry or

health policy and also students who are interested in

communications, the pharmaceutical industry, law, busi-

ness, agency work, and other careers where

understanding health care is essential.

Minor in Health, Medicine, and Society

Required Core Course

HMS/SSP 160 Medicine and Society

Course Requirements (at least three additional courses

from the list below or other courses designated HMS)

HMS/ENGL 115 Topics in Literature, Medicine,

and Health

HMS/JOUR 116 Risky Business

HMS/SSP 152 Alcohol, Science, and Society

HMS/SSP 162 AIDS and Society

HMS/REL 226 From Black Death to AIDS:

Plague, Pandemic, Ethics and

Religion

HMS 291 Independent Study

HMS/PSYC 305 Abnormal Psychology

HMS/ENGL 315 Topics in Literature, Medicine,

and Health

HMS/SSP/GS 322 Global Health Issues

HMS/JOUR/STS 323 Controversies in Science, Health,

and Environment

HMS/PSYC 327 Health Psychology

HMS/SSP/WS 341 Women and Health

HMS 354/POLSCI 354

U.S. Health Care Politics

HMS/PSYC 386 Psychological Perspectives on

Health and Illness in Children

and Adolescents

ANTH 160 Health, Illness, and Healing

PHIL/REL 116 Bioethics

ECO 368 Health Economics

Undergraduate Courses in Health,

Medicine, and Society

HMS 115 (ENGL 115). Topics in Literature,

Medicine, and Health (4)

Largely focused on narratives about health, illness and

disability, this course will examine individual experiences

with attention to social context. Topics may include the

physician/patient relationship, illness and deviance,

plague literature, gender and medicine, autism, AIDS,

mental illness, aging. (HU)

HMS 116 (JOUR 116). Risky Business (4)

This course explores the risks and effects of environmen-

tal contamination on human health and behavior as well

as the role of the mass media in alerting citizens to

potential environmental health risks. Environmental top-

ics vary but usually include air and water pollution,

endocrine disrupters and radioactive waste. (SS)

HMS 152 (SSP 152). Alcohol, Science, and

Society (4)

Alcohol use and abuse, its historical function in society,

moral entrepreneurship, status struggles and conflict over

alcohol. Current problems with attention to special pop-

ulation groups and strategies for prevention of alcohol

abuse. (SS)

HMS 160 (SSP 160). Medicine and Society (4)

Health, illness, and the health professions from the soci-

ological perspective. Social epidemiology, social

psychology of illness, socialization of health profession-

als, organization of health care, patient-professional

relationships and ethical issues in medical care. (SS)

HMS 162 (SSP 162). AIDS and Society (4)

Impact of the AIDS epidemic on individuals and on

social institutions (medicine, religion, education, politics,

etc.); social and health policy responses; international

experience; effect on public attitudes and policy on peo-

ple affected directly by AIDS. (SS)

HMS 226 (REL 226). From Black Death to AIDS:

Plague, Pandemic, Ethics and Religion (4)

An investigation of the role of religion and ethical analy-

sis in constructing meaning around the idea of plague

and pandemic. The role of religion in the European

bubonic plague epidemic, the influenza pandemic of

1918, and the AIDS crisis will be examined, with atten-

tion give to ethical analysis of the institutional response

to pandemic disease as distortions have occurred for

political, social, and religious reasons. (HU)

HMS 291 Independent Study (4)

Independent research and reading with a faculty mem-

ber. After receiving initial approval from the HMS

director, the student must prepare an independent study

proposal, with readings and assignments, in consultation

with a professor who agrees to direct the independent

study. Open only to declared HMS minors who have

complete HMS/SSP 160 in a previous term. (SS or

HU).

HMS 305 (PSYC 305). Abnormal Psychology (4)

Examines research and theory on the patterns, causes,

and treatment of various forms of abnormal behavior.

Prerequisite PSYC 153 or consent of instructor. (SS)

HMS 315 (ENGL 315). Topics in Literature,

Medicine, and Health (3-4)

Analyzing the stories people tell about health, illness and

270 Lehigh University Course Catalog 2009-2010

disability, this course engages cultural studies approaches

in order to explore the way those stories are told. Topics

may include: illness and the graphic novel, the changing

image of the healer in literature, collaborative storytelling

with Alzheimer’s patients, end of life narratives, tales

from the ER, narrative ethics. (HU)

HMS 322 (SSP/GS 322). Global Health Issues (4)

Examines the sociological dimensions of health, illness,

and healing as they appear in different parts of the

world. Focuses on patterns of disease and mortality

around the world, with special emphasis on major epi-

demics such as HIV/AIDS, and malaria; the relative

importance of ‘traditional’ and ‘modern’ beliefs and prac-

tices with regard to disease and treatment in different

societies; the organization of national health care systems

in different countries; and the role of international

organizations and social movements in promoting

health. (SS)

HMS 323 (JOUR/STS 323). Controversies in

Science, Health, and Environment (4)

Exploration of science, health and environmental contro-

versies from the dual perspectives of scientific

uncertainty and mass media coverage. Examines genetic

engineering and biotechnology, environmental health

risks, and human behavior research. Includes discussion

of ethical and social responsibilities and interactions of

scientists, journalists and the public. (SS)

HMS 327 (PSYC 327). Health Psychology (4)

An overview of the topic of health psychology. The

course presupposes a preventative intervention approach

to the problem of assisting healthy individuals to under-

stand the relationship between behavior and health, and

to engage those behaviors that promote health. This

course will be underpinned with basic science and

research on health psychology, but will include an appli-

cation focus. Prerequisite: PSYC 110. (SS)

HMS 341 (SSP 341/WS 341). Women and

Health (4)

Relationships of women to the medical system. Influence

of medicine on women’s lives and the impact of the

women’s movement on health care. (SS)

HMS 354 (POLSCI 354). U.S. Health Care

Politics (4)

Explores a range of health care programs and policies

and their impacts on American society. Topics include

the development of the U.S. approach to health care;

public sector plans (Medicare and Medicaid); the role of

managed care; the employer-sponsored system; the situa-

tion of the medically uninsured; the health care vested

interests and lobbyists; movements for national health

care; and options for change. (SS)

HMS 386 (PSYC 386). Psychological Perspectives

on Health and Illness in Children and

Adolescents (4)

Focuses on developmental research and theory related to

health and wellness issues in children and adolescents.

Topics include children’s understanding of biology and

disease, disease management, medical consent, education

and policy efforts to promote children’s health. Psych

department permission required. (Advanced Psychology

Seminar) (SS)

Hebrew

Modern Hebrew is taught in the Department of Modern

Languages and Literature. Biblical Hebrew is taught in

the Department of Religion Studies.

History

Professors. Michael G. Baylor, Ph.D. (Stanford); Stephen

H. Cutcliffe, Ph.D. (Lehigh), chairperson History and

STS; Ian P.H. Duffy, D.PHIL. (Oxford, England);

Steven L. Goldman, Ph.D. (Boston), Andrew W. Mellon

Distinguished Professor in the Humanities; C. Robert

Phillips, Ph.D. (Brown); James S. Saeger, Ph.D. (Ohio

State); William R. Scott, Ph.D. (Princeton); Roger D.

Simon, Ph.D. (Wisconsin); Jean R. Soderlund, Ph.D.

(Temple).

Associate Professors. Gail A. Cooper, Ph.D. (U.C.,

Santa Barbara); Monica Najar, Ph.D (Wisconsin); John

Pettegrew, Ph.D. (Wisconsin); John Savage, Ph.D.

(N.Y.U.); John K. Smith, Ph.D. (Delaware).

Assistant Professors. Michelle LeMaster, Ph.D. (Johns

Hopkins)

Professor of Practice. Kimberley Carrell-Smith, Ph.D.

(Delaware).

The history major introduces students to the study of the

causes and consequences of change through an examina-

tion of political, economic, social, cultural, and

intellectual developments and institutions over time. The

department’s goal is to train its majors to think critically

about the events and forces that have shaped the modern

world, to analyze and interpret sources and evidence, and

to view issues from a variety of perspectives. Those skills

have served students well in a wide range of careers.

Lehigh history majors have frequently gone on to law

school or to work in various areas of education, journal-

ism, public affairs, and business. The major also provides

an excellent basis for graduate training in a wide range of

public policy fields. The department offers a program of

independent research under the direction of an individual

faculty member (History 391, 392). A maximum of six

credits may be used toward this project. Normally stu-

dents pursue their research in the second semester of the

junior year and the first semester of their senior year; the

project may also be undertaken during the senior year.

Students who do well on their research project will gradu-

ate with department honors. The writing intensive

requirement must be filled by a course in the history

department. For advanced placement, please see Section I.

The department recommends that students intending to

major in history take MATH 12, Basic Statistics, to ful-

fill their college math requirement.

Department Major Requirements

A history major consists of 35 hours, normally nine

courses, as follows:

HIST 11 Survey of Europe to 1648.

HIST 12 Survey of Europe Since 1648.

HIST 201 Historical Perspectives, or

HIST. 202 Historical Research

One course in the history of Asia, Africa, or Latin

America: HIST 5, 49, 50, 75, 76, 177, 340, 341, 342,

359, 368.

History 271

HIST 104, 300, 303, 331, 371, 391, 392, or provisional

courses may be used to fulfill this requirement in accor-

dance with their contents and emphases.

Minimum of 12 hours of courses numbered 303 or

higher (except HIST 306).

To graduate with a history major, a minimum 24 hours

must be graded course work taken at Lehigh.

Requirements for Honors

Students wishing to graduate with honors must have a

minimum GPA of 3.40 in history, 39 credits and must

have completed History 391.

History Minor Requirements

Each student’s minor program is prepared in consulta-

tion with the advisor of minors in the history

department. Advanced placement credit may not be used

for the minor program.

• 15 credits

• at least 4 credits at 200 or 300 level

• maximum of one course (4 credits) of transfer or

cross-listed courses may count toward minor.

Concentration in Public History

History majors may earn a concentration in Public

History by completing a total of 16 hours in the follow-

ing courses:

HIST 305 Public History (4), required

HIST 306 Internship in Public History (4),

required

ART 175, 275, 370, or 375

Museology (3)

EDT 405 Website and Resource

Development (3)

(seniors by petition)

HIST 336 Bethlehem and the Lehigh

Valley (4)

HIST 338 Techniques in Public History

(2-4 credits, may be repeated for

up to 8 credits)

HIST 339 Managing Nonprofit

Organizations (4)

HIST/ANTH 370 Historical Archeology (4)

Undergraduate Courses in History

Petitions are required for first-year students to take 100-

level or higher courses, and for sophomores to take

200-level or higher courses. HU - fills humanities distri-

bution requirements; SS - fills social science

requirements; ND - not designated.

HIST 5. (AAS 5) African Civilization (4)

Sub-Saharan Africa through the millennia of the ancient

world to the present. Human origins, state and non-state

systems, the external slave trade, colonialism, resistance

to European rule, independence movements, and neo-

colonialism. (SS) Keim, Scott

HIST 7. Technology in America’s Industrial

Age (4)

Traces the development of American technology from

the pre-industrial colonial era until America’s emergence

as the world’s leading industrial power. The interactions

between technology and culture, society, politics, and the

economy will also be addressed. (SS) Smith

HIST 8. Technology in Modern America (4)

Traces the evolution of modern American technology,

including automobiles, aircraft, computers, nuclear

weapons, television, space, pharmaceuticals, and biotech-

nology. Includes critiques of technology such as

environmentalism. The interactions of technology and

culture, society, politics, and the economy will also be

addressed. (SS) Smith

HIST 11. Survey of Europe to 1648 (4)

Development of European history from Rome to the

17th century. End of the ancient world, origins and

growth of medieval civilization, the Renaissance and

Reformation. (HU) Baylor

HIST 12. ( GCP 012) Survey of Europe Since

1648 (4)

The rise of modern nation states; the scientific and

industrial revolutions; social movements and the French

and Russian revolutions; impact of Enlightenment phi-

losophy, nationalism, liberalism, imperialism and

fascism; the development of modern class structure and

transformations in gender relations, art, popular culture

and society. (HU) Savage

HIST 15. English History (4)

The history of England to 1688. The origins of represen-

tative government, the development of English social

institutions, the unification of England, and the

Renaissance and Reformation in England. (HU) Duffy

HIST 16. English History (4)

English political and social institutions from 1688 to the

present. The evolution of parliamentary government, the

rise of modern parties, the industrial revolution, and

recent social philosophies. (HU) Duffy

HIST 21. (CLSS 21) Greek History (4)

The development of civilization from paleolithic times to

the world empire of Alexander the Great. The social,

economic, religious, philosophic, artistic, and literary

development of the ancient world; the origin of political

institutions. (SS) Phillips

HIST 22. (CLSS 22) Roman History (4)

Rome from its origins to A.D. 476. Political, social and

religious developments. Transformation of the late

Roman Empire to the early medieval period. (SS) Phillips

HIST 41. United States to 1865 (4)

Native American cultures; European settlement; develop-

ment of slavery and free labor systems; the Revolution;

founding of the new nation; 19th century social, eco-

nomic, cultural, and political development; Civil War.

(SS) Najar, Soderlund

HIST 42. United States, 1865-1941 (4)

America’s transformation into an industrial and global

power from Reconstruction after the Civil War to the

Great Depression; includes social, political, and cultural

developments. (SS) Carrell-Smith, Najar, LeMaster

HIST 43. United States Since 1939 (4)

World War II; Cold War at home and abroad; Civil

Rights movement; the 1960s: Vietnam, the welfare state

and social upheavals; new forms of cultural expression;

feminism; rise of neo-conservatism. (HU) Pettegrew

HIST 49. History of Latin America (4)

Spanish and Portuguese colonization of America and the

struggles for independence, preceded by a brief view of

272 Lehigh University Course Catalog 2009-2010

the ancient American civilizations and Iberian back-

grounds. (SS) Saeger

HIST 50. History of Latin America (4)

Continuation of HIST 49. The development of the

Latin American nations in the 19th and 20th centuries.

(SS) Saeger

HIST 64. (AAS 64, ECO 64) Plantation to

Ghetto (2)

Examination of topics in the economic history of African

Americans from the 1500s to the present. Explores the

slave trade, slavery, post-Civil War South, the black fami-

ly, migration, urbanization, and race and poverty. (SS)

O’Brien, Scott

HIST 75. (MLL 75, Asia 75) Chinese

Civilization (4)

The development of traditional Chinese thought, beliefs,

technology, and institutions from a historical perspective,

from earliest times to China’s encounter with the West.

(HU or SS) Pankenier

HIST 76 (Asia 76, MLL 76) Understanding

Contemporary China (4)

An overview of recent history, politics, economy, reli-

gion, problems of modernization, popular culture, and

attitudes. Contemporary Chinese society viewed against

the backdrop of tradition and the tumultuous history of

twentieth-century China. (SS)

HIST 90. First-Year Seminar in History (4)

Seminar for first-year students on a particular theme or

topic. (HU or SS depending on topic of seminar).

HIST 101 (GS 101) Histories of Globalization (4)

Critical historical perspectives on current debates around

“globalization” and the varied paths and responses to

modernity, using recent scholarship associated with the

New Global History. The “Rise of the West” paradigm,

Industrial Revolution and modernization theory; cre-

ation of global financial markets, nation-building and

New Imperialism; Great Depression and World Wars as

global historical events; postwar decolonization, Cold

War and emergence of North-South relations; impact of

consumerism, movements for women’s rights, ethnic

nationalism and religious fundamentalist movements in

tradition-bound societies. (HU) Savage

HIST 104. Themes in History (2 - 4)

Seminar on a particular theme or topic not covered by a

currently listed offering. (HU or SS depending on topic

of seminar).

HIST 105. Sports in Modern America (4)

Surveys the social, cultural, and political role of sports in

America since the Civil War. By addressing the develop-

ment of sports and its relationship with race, class,

ethnicity, gender, the media, popular culture, and gov-

ernment, this class will examine the impact of sports in

making the America and Americans of the twentieth

century. (HU)

HIST 107. Technology and World History (4)

Development of technology and its relationship to politi-

cal, economic, military and cultural aspects of world

civilization from pyramids to the present. (SS) Smith

HIST 108. Bethlehem and the Lehigh Valley (4)

Local history focusing on Native American communities,

Moravian settlement, natural resources, industrial firms,

immigration and ethnic communities, organized labor,

housing patterns and urban sprawl, high-tech industry,

and tourism. Includes an analysis of techniques used in

presenting these topics to the public. (SS) Smith

HIST 109. The Built Environment of New York:

1624-2001 (4)

How the physical environment of New York City, partic-

ularly Manhattan, came to be. Course themes include

the evolution of land use, housing, changing economic

functions of the city, immigration, cultural life, social

communities, and changing technology. Topics include:

settlement of lower Manhattan, the street system, immi-

grant neighborhoods and the Lower East Side,

Greenwich Village, Central Village, Central Park, the

elevated trains and the subways, the Brooklyn Bridge,

apartment living, specialized shopping and entertain-

ment districts, skyscrapers, Harlem, Rockefeller Center,

the automobile and highway system, public housing, the

World Trade Center. Usually taught in the summer in

New York with walking tours to many of the locations

listed above. (HU) Simon

HIST 110. American Military History (4)

The American military tradition from colonial times to

the present. America’s wars and the development and

operation of military institutions within the political,

economic, ideological, and technological milieu of

American society. (SS) Saeger

HIST 111. Engineering in the Modern World (4)

Roles played by engineers and engineering in the mod-

ern world, focusing on major achievements and failures,

prominent engineers, and evolution of the profession.

(SS) Smith

HIST 117. (STS 117/WS117) Women, Science and

Technology (4)

Explores the impact of technology and science on

women’s social roles and the contribution of women

engineers and scientists to their disciplines. Will focus on

the American experience. Among the topics discussed are

invention, design, laboratory research, education, engi-

neering, professionalism, labor force participation, office

mechanization, household appliances, virtual spaces,

childcare and reproduction. (SS) Cooper

HIST 120. Revolutionary America (4)

Origins and development of the American republic from

1750 through the adoption of the Federal Constitution.

(SS) LeMaster, Najar, Soderlund

HIST 124. (WS 124) Women in America (4)

Roles of women in American society from colonial to

present times: attitudes toward women, female sexuality,

women’s work, and feminism. (SS) Cooper, Najar

HIST 130. (AAS 130) African American History (4)

Blacks in America from the first importation of Africans

to the implementation of civil rights laws. West African

origins, slave trade, slavery, free blacks and emancipation

and study of Reconstruction, segregation, urbanization,

and the struggle for racial equality. (SS) Scott

HIST 135. Era of Jefferson and Jackson (4)

Colonial beginnings; the Articles of Confederation and

the Constitution; the creation of a new nation; the

development of American political parties; the antebel-

lum American state. (SS) Najar

History 273

HIST 136. Era of the Civil War and

Reconstruction (4)

American abolitionism and the origins of the Civil War;

the Second American Revolution; Reconstruction and its

sequel. (SS) Najar

HIST 145. (STS 145) Introduction to the History

of Science (4)

The history of modern science, primarily physical and

biological, with emphasis on the development of major

theoretical models since the 17th century. (SS) Goldman

HIST 150. Medieval Civilization (4)

Formation and development of western culture to about

1400. Rise of universities and towns, legal development

and origins of representative government, origins of

nation-states, scholasticism and decline of the medieval

church. (HU) Savage

HIST 153. (WS 153) Women in European History,

1500-Present (4)

Examines the position of women in Europe since the

Renaissance. Particular attention is given to changing

conceptions of women and their roles in society, the evo-

lution of women’s work, the origins, growth and impact

of feminism, and gender distinctions as reflected in law,

politics, popular culture and leisure. (SS)

HIST 154. (REL 154) The Holocaust: History and

Meaning (4)

The Nazi Holocaust in its historical, political and reli-

gious setting. Emphasis upon the moral, cultural and

theological issues raised by the Holocaust. (HU)

HIST 156. The Late Middle Ages and the

Renaissance (4)

The transition from medieval to early modern society

from the fourteenth to the early sixteenth centuries. The

general crisis of European civilization in the late Middle

Ages; the rise and development of the Italian

Renaissance; the spread of Renaissance culture from Italy

to northern Europe. (HU) Baylor

HIST 157. (REL 157) Europe in the Age of the

Reformation (4)

The breakup of the religious culture of medieval

Christian Europe in the reformation movements of the

sixteenth century. The origins and varieties of

Protestantism; the intersection of religious ideas and pol-

itics in Germany, Switzerland, Britain, France, and the

Netherlands; the “wars of religion” and the emergence of

the European state system. (HU) Baylor

HIST 158. Europe in the 17th and 18th

Centuries (4)

Transformation of European civilization from the 30

Years War to the outbreak of the French Revolution.

Origins and development of the European state system;

absolutism; commercial expansion and competition for

empire; science; the Enlightenment and its impact on

European culture and politics. (HU) Baylor

HIST 159. Revolutionary Europe, 1789-1870 (4)

Revolutions and reactions; the rise and spread of liberal-

ism, nationalism, and socialism. (HU) Duffy

HIST 160. Europe in the Age of Total War, 1870-

1945 (4)

Origins of two world wars; revolutionary governments in

Germany, Italy, and Russia. (HU) Duffy

HIST 161. (CLSS 161) Roman LAW (4)

Examination of Roman legal systems from the Twelve

Tables to the Digest of Justinian. Emphasis on develop-

ment of legal concepts and their historical context.

Readings in primary sources; lectures; discussion. (SS)

Phillips

HIST 162. Contemporary Europe (4)

Development of European States since 1945; European

Community; Soviet influence and collapse. (HU) Savage

HIST 163. France Since 1789 (4)

France’s tumultuous transformation from an absolutist

monarchy to a modern democratic republic. Explores

major cultural, social and economic changes, with partic-

ular attention given to industrialization and

urbanization, gender and class, church and state rela-

tions, the French Left and France’s unique contribution

to modern philosophy, art and culture. (SS) Savage

HIST 170. (ASIA 170) Japan’s Meiji Restoration (4)

Explores the revolutionary character of the political

upheaval in 1868 that led to the fall of the ruling shogan

and the dissolution of the elite samurai class. Examines

both the causes of these major political and social

changes, and their continuing impact upon Japanese cul-

ture and society. (HU) Cooper

HIST 177. (Asia 177, MLL 177) China Enters the

Modern Age (4)

The collapse of the imperial order and China’s agonizing

transformation into a modern nation over the past 150

years. The impact of imperialism, war, radical social

change, and protracted revolution on Chinese beliefs,

values, and institutions. (HU or SS) Pankenier

HIST 179. (AAS 179) Black Political Thought in

America (4)

Black leadership, organizations, and philosophy in

America from Reconstruction to the Civil Rights Era;

ideas and programs of Booker T. Washington, W.E.B.

DuBois, Marcus Garvey, Malcolm X and Martin Luther

King, Jr. (SS) Scott

HIST 180. (REL 180) Religion and the American

Experience (4)

The historical development of major religious groups in

this country from colonial times to the present. Their

place in social and political life, and the impact of the

national experience upon them. Emphasis on religious

freedom and pluralism, and the church-state relation-

ship. (HU)

For Advanced Undergraduates And Graduate

Students

Graduate students may take 300 level courses, for which

they receive 3 credits. Undergraduates must take them

for 4 credits.

HIST 201. Historical Perspectives (4)

Methodologies and interpretations of Western historians

from ancient times to the present. (HU) Baylor

HIST 202. Historical Research (4)

An introduction to historical interpretation, research

design, and methodology. Students will research and

write a paper on a historical topic using secondary and

primary sources. (SS)

274 Lehigh University Course Catalog 2009-2010

HIST 213. (CLSS 213, REL 213) Ancient Roman

Religion (4)

Religious experience of the Roman people from prehisto-

ry to end of the empire. Nature of polytheism and its

interactions with monotheism (Christianity, Judaism).

Theories of religion. Emphasis on primary source mate-

rials. (SS) Phillips

HIST 303. Topics in History (2 - 4)

Intensive study in a particular area of history for

advanced students. Topics may vary; may be repeated for

credit with consent of advisor. (HU or SS depending on

topic of seminar)

HIST 305. Public History (3-4)

An examination of the public role of history in modern

society, with focus on issues facing historians in muse-

ums, historical societies, archives, historic preservation,

the federal government, and other organizations in the

public sphere. (SS) Carrell-Smith

HIST 306. Internship in Public History (2-4)

Professionally supervised work in a museum, historical

society, archive, or other historical agency. Written jour-

nal or report evaluating the experience is required.

Permission of department chair required. May be repeat-

ed for a maximum of six credits. May not be counted

toward the major requirement of 12 hours of courses

numbered 303 or higher. (ND) Carrell-Smith

HIST 308. Industrial America Since 1945 (3-4)

Explores efforts to achieve both prosperity and security

in the postwar era. Among the topics discussed: new

technologies, consumer culture, disposable products,

advertising, defense spending, technical assistance, and

multinational corporations. (SS) Cooper

HIST 311. (CLSS 311) Twins and Sins: The Rise

of Rome (3-4)

Rome from its origins to the mid-third century B.C.

Emphasis on foundation legends, the power of the

monarchy, and development of Roman political and reli-

gious institutions. Papers, quizzes, discussions. (SS)

Phillips

HIST 312. (CLSS 312) Decline and Fall of the

Roman Empire (3-4)

Political, social, and economic history of the Roman

Empire, A.D. 117-A.D. 565. Romanization of the

provinces, diffusion of Christianity, and special attention

to transformation to medieval period. Includes readings

in translation of primary sources. (SS) Phillips

HIST 313. (CLSS 313) Golden Age of Greek

Democracy (3-4)

Greek history of the seventh through fifth centuries B.C.

Emphasis on the contrasting political and social systems

of Athens and Sparta with consideration of related eco-

nomic and military history. Attention to art, gender,

literature, religion. Discussion and lectures; papers. (SS)

Phillips

HIST 314. (CLSS 314) Age of Caesar and

Christ (3-4)

Roman history of the first century A.D. Political, cultur-

al, and socio-economic changes; special attention to the

evolution of absolute power. Lectures, discussions,

papers. (SS) Phillips

HIST 315. (ES 315) American Environmental

History (3-4)

Relationship between Americans and their natural envi-

ronment from the colonial period to the present: impact

of European settlement, attitudes toward wilderness, role

of technological development, rise of preservation and

conservation movements, establishment of national

parks, recent environmental protection legislation. (SS)

Cutcliffe

HIST 318. History of North American Indians (3-

The history of American Indians from before European

contact to the present. Emphasis will be placed on the

diversity of native peoples of eastern North America and

how patterns of interaction between native Americans

and Euro-Americans have changed over time. Discussion

format, research paper. (SS) LeMaster, Soderlund

HIST 319. Colonial America (3-4)

Founding and growth of colonies in North America

through 1763. Emphasis on motives for settlement,

Native American-European relations, and the economic,

social, and political development of the British West

Indies and mainland provinces. (SS) LeMaster,

Soderlund

HIST 323. American Cultural History Since

1900 (3-4)

Development of American popular culture and media:

popular press, Hollywood, radio, television, sports, and

advertising, and the meanings these institutions have cre-

ated in 20th-century United States. (HU) Pettegrew

HIST 325. (SSP 325, WS 325) History of

Sexuality and the Family in the U.S. (3-4)

Changing conceptions of sexuality and the role of

women, men, and children in the family and society

from the colonial to the post-World War II era.

Emphasis on the significance of socio-economic class and

cultural background. Topics include family structure,

birth control, legal constraints, marriage, divorce, and

prostitution. (SS) Najar

HIST 326. (SSP 326) Social Class in American

History (3-4)

Emphasis on the 19th and 20th century, focusing on:

emergence of a white-collar middle class; condition and

treatment of the poor and growth of the welfare state;

conditions of industrial workers, struggle to organize

unions and their later decline; indicators of social status

and exclusion among the rich; changing distribution of

income and wealth over time and extent of social mobili-

ty. (SS) Simon

HIST 328. American Intellectual History Since

1900 (3-4)

Social, literary, and political thought in the 20th-century

with emphasis on pragmatism and progressivism, matu-

ration of American literary culture, ideas of American

exceptionalism at mid-century, civil rights movement

and feminism, neo-conservatism and recent trends.

(HU) Pettegrew

HIST 331. (AAS 331) United States and Africa (3-

Reciprocal relationships between North America and the

African continent from the slave trade in the 17th centu-

ry to the 20th century Afrocentric movement; impact of

Americans on the shaping of modern Africa, Pan-African

History 275

relations; influence of African Americans on US policies

toward Africa. (SS) Scott

HIST 332. (AAS 332) Slavery and the American

South (3-4)

The emergence and demise of the “peculiar institution” of

African American slavery in British North America and

the Old South. African background; colonial beginnings;

19th century slave community; the ruling race and

proslavery ideology; the death of slavery and its after-

math; slavery and freedom in a comparative context. (SS)

HIST 333. American City to 1900 (3-4)

Settlement and planning of colonial towns; role of towns

in the revolutionary era; industrialization and relation-

ship of economic and technological change to

urbanization; establishment of urban institutions; Irish

and German immigration; beginnings of suburbaniza-

tion; downtowns and the creation of a civic culture.

Required field trip. (SS) Simon

HIST 334. American City in the Twentieth

Century (3-4)

Immigration; Progressive “reforms;” urban planning and

zoning; impact of automobile and suburbanization;

Depression and New Deal; public housing and racial

ghettoes; urban decline and “renewal.” Required field

trip. (SS) Simon

HIST 337 History and Community Memory (3-4)

This public history course provides students with the

opportunity to research the history of a community. The

community focus of the course will change each year.

We will explore what constitutes community, what his-

torical memory means, and how history functions to

build or divide a community. Students will use both

documents and oral history methods, and practice will

be a major component of this course. (SS) Carrell-Smith.

HIST 338 Techniques in Public History (2 or 4)

Designed to introduce students to a variety of public his-

tory techniques. Instructor will focus on one of the

following topics each term: archives, documentary film,

exhibit design, historical editing, material culture, oral

history. May be repeated to a maximum of 8 credits.

(HU)

HIST 339. Managing Nonprofit

Organizations (3-4)

Addresses the effective management of nonprofit organi-

zations, focusing on operations, administration, legal,

marketing, finance and accounting issues in the nonprof-

it environment and emphasizing organizations such as

museums and preservation organizations. (SS)

HIST 340. (Asia 340) History of Japanese

Industrialization since 1800 (3-4)

The late Tokugawa economic development, rise of an

entrepreneurial class, importation of western technology,

and the rise of social, political, and economic institutions

which support industrial growth. (SS) Cooper

HIST 341. Mexico and Central America (3-4)

Emphasis on Mexico and Guatemala from the era of the

Aztec through the wars of independence to the 20th cen-

tury revolutions. (SS) Saeger

HIST 342. Argentina, Brazil and Chile (3-4)

Eighteenth-century Spanish imperial readjustments,

independence, the emergence of new societies, 20th-cen-

tury extremist movements, and the problems of develop-

ing nations. (SS) Saeger

HIST 345. Victorian Britain (3-4)

Development of democracy, liberalism, religious ferment,

industrialization, class conflict, socialism, and empire in

Victorian Britain. (HU) Duffy

HIST 346. Great Britain in the 20th Century (3-4)

Effects of world wars, loss of great power status, eco-

nomic decline, social conflict, welfare state, modern

political parties, Irish problem in 20th century Britain.

(HU) Duffy

HIST 349. Revolutions in Modern European

History (3-4)

Explores the origins, meanings, and impact of European

revolutions from a theoretical and comparative perspec-

tive. Focuses on the English (1642-1660), the French

(1789-1799), and the Russian Revolution (1917-1929),

and how they reflected and shaped new ideologies and

policies related to human rights, economic development,

popular sovereignty, nationalism, class and gender poli-

tics, and State and society relations. (SS) Savage

HIST 350. (GCP 350) 19th Century Paris and the

Invention of Modernity (3-4)

This course considers the dramatic destruction and

rebuilding of the city of Paris in the decades after 1850

and how changes in the built environment shaped social

relations, political authority and cultural expression.

Topics include the politics of city planning and architec-

tural design; the history of the engineering profession,

technology and the building trades; reactions to crime,

disease and prostitution in the modern city; the 1848

Revolution, Paris Commune and political theory; the

origins of photography, Impressionist painting and cine-

ma; and the creation of mass consumer society. (HU)

Savage

HIST 351. “The Gangs of New York” (4)

The course will use the Martin Scorcese film “The

Gangs of New York” as a window to examine the social

and economic transformations of New York City in the

middle of the nineteenth century. Emphasis will be on

immigration, slum conditions, nativism, workingclass

culture, gangs and street violence, politics, the Draft Riot

of 1863, and the Tweed Ring. A recurrent theme will be

to compare the historical record with the film’s depiction

of those events. There will be a required evening showing

the film. NOT AVAILABLE FOR PASS/FAIL. (HU)

Simon

HIST 355. The Destruction and Reconstruction of

Europe, 1870-1950 (3)

An analysis of the decline and disintegration of

European civilization through two world wars and

Europe’s reintegration in the era of the European Union.

Emphasis on the development of the European state sys-

tem, international conflict, and political thought. (SS)

Baylor

HIST 356. European Cultural History (3-4)

Transformation of European culture from the 18th cen-

tury to the present. The Enlightenment, cultural impact

of the French and industrial revolutions, romanticism

and ideologies of the 19th century, contemporary

European thought. (HU) Savage

HIST 357. Early Modern Germany, 1500-1850 (3-4)

The emphasis will be on one or more of the following

276 Lehigh University Course Catalog 2009-2010

topics: the Reformation, the Thirty Years’ War and its

impact, absolutism, the rise of Prussia, the failure of

German liberalism. (HU) Baylor

HIST 358. Modern Germany, 1850 to Present (3-4)

Focus on one or more of the following topics: national-

ism and unification, the Second Empire, World War I,

the Weimar republic, the Nazi movement, the Third

Reich, and post-war Germany. (HU) Baylor

HIST 359. (AAS 359) History of South

Africa (3-4)

South Africa’s history from its earliest human settlement

to its emergence as a racist political order and transition

to a non-racial democratic state. Includes comparisons

with political thought and practices in the U.S. (SS)

Scott

HIST 360. American Legal History (3-4)

The interrelationship between law and social develop-

ment with emphasis on modern period. Founding of

constitutional government and balance of power within

the federal system, the problem of slavery, legal support

and regulation of business, and the use of law in various

reform and civil rights movements. (SS) Pettegrew

HIST 367. Rise and Fall of the Old South (3-4)

Explores the American South as a region from the era

before European contact to the end of the Civil War.

Emphasis will be placed on exploration and settlement,

Native American-European relations, the pre-

Revolutionarry contest for empire, and the rise and

development of the plantation complex and slavery. (SS)

LeMaster

HIST 368. Seminar in Latin American

History (3-4)

Readings and individual investigation of selected topics.

(SS) Saeger

HIST 370. (ANTH 370) Historical

Archeology (3-4)

This course examines the unique nature of historical

archaeology of post-contact America. Topics include

reconstructing the past through the archaeological and

historical record, exhibiting past culture, and capturing

the real or imagined past. Course includes fieldwork and

visits to famous archaeological sites. (SS) Small

HIST 371. Independent Study (1-4)

Directed readings in a topic or area of history not cov-

ered by current course offerings. For students of

demonstrated ability and adequate preparation.

Prerequisite: consent of department chair. May be

repeated for credit with permission up to a maximum of

six credits. (ND)

HIST 373. The French Revolution and

Napoleon (3-4)

Breakdown of Absolute Monarchy; rise of

Enlightenment culture and decadence of the court;

storming of the Bastille and creation of republican gov-

ernment; daily life and “Great Fear” in rural areas;

invention of modern nationalism and Napoleonic mili-

tary culture; role of women in political life; uses of mass

propaganda, public festivals and transformation of the

arts; political violence in the “Terror,” Napoleon’s impe-

rial system and warfare with Europe; impact on

revolutionary movements abroad and geopolitical

realignment of the Atlantic World. (HU) Savage

HIST 391. Honors Thesis in History (4)

Opportunity for undergraduate majors in history to pur-

sue an extended project for senior honors. By invitation

and department permission only. (ND)

HIST 392. Honors Thesis in History (2)

Continuation of History 391 available under exceptional

circumstances where additional credit for honors project

is warranted. Department permission only. (ND)

Graduate Work in History

Lehigh University has been granting advanced degrees in

history for more than seventy years. Its graduates have

become university and college professors, secondary

school teachers and administrators, museum directors,

and public servants. The graduate program focuses pri-

marily on the areas in which the department is

particularly strong in faculty and resources, notably

Colonial America and the history of technology and sci-

ence. The department works closely with the Lawrence

Henry Gipson Institute for Eighteenth Century Studies

which sponsors yearly symposia and provides research

support for both faculty and students. The history of

technology program is closely tied to Lehigh’s Science,

Technology, and Society program.

Lehigh’s libraries are especially rich in materials for grad-

uate research in history, particularly in the fields listed

above. They have an extensive collection of scholarly

periodicals and monographs. Graduate programs provide

intensive and specialized study, and the policy of limited

enrollment permits close relations between faculty and

students.

Admission to graduate study in history is competitive

and dependent upon the applicant’s undergraduate

preparation and record, recommendations, and Graduate

Record Examination scores. Besides general requirements

for College of Arts and Sciences graduate programs, the

following special requirements apply to graduate study in

history.

Master of Arts

There are two masters programs. Under Plan I, a candi-

date may earn the degree by successfully completing 27

hours of approved course work and submitting a thesis

of the length and quality that would make it suitable for

publication as a scholarly article. The paper may build

on work presented in a graduate research seminar in the

program. Candidates continuing toward a doctorate

should select Plan I. Candidates declaring Plan II take

30 hours of approved course work and pass examinations

in two fields chosen from American, British, European,

and Latin American history, and History of Technology.

Candidates in either plan are required to maintain a 3.3

average in all graduate work and to take History 401 and

History 404 or 405.

M.A. in History with Concentration in Public

History

Students may earn through either Plan I or Plan II (see

above), an M.A. in History with a concentration in Pub-

lic History by completing a total of 36 hours of

approved course work, including a minimum of 10 cred-

its and maximum of 12 credits in approved Public

History 277

History courses.

HIST 305 Public History (3), required

HIST 306 Internship in Public History (3),

required but may be waived for equiva-

lent experience

ART 370 Special Topics in Museum

Studies (1-4)

EDT 405 Website and Resource

Development (3)

HIST 336 Bethlehem and the Lehigh Valley (3)

HIST 339 Managing Nonprofit Organizations(3)

HIST/ANTH 370

Historical Archeology (3)

HIST 438 Techniques in Public History (2 or 3

credits; may be repeated for up to 8

credits)

Doctor of Philosophy

Students in the Ph.D. program in history must maintain

a 3.50 average after two semesters of study. During the

second semester, doctoral students select one major and

three minor fields in which to take comprehensive writ-

ten and oral examinations. The dissertation will be in the

major field. The dissertation advisor will chair a special

committee that will oversee the student’s graduate pro-

gram. The other members of the special committee will

be those faculty who are examiners in the selected fields

and one professor from another department relevant to

the candidate’s major field. No professor may direct

more than one field, but the direction of a field may

involve two professors. An original dissertation is

required, and it must be successfully defended to the

examining committee.

All Ph.D. students must meet the University

Concentrated Learning Requirement. They must take

Historical Research (401). Students who enter the Ph.D.

program with an M.A. from another university must also

take either Readings in the History of the Atlantic World

(404) or Readings in the History of Industrial America

(405). Students are encouraged to take both seminars if

appropriate to their course of study. All Ph.D. students

must take at least 18 hours of directed readings courses

(400 series) beyond the M.A.

Major Fields. Major fields are Technology, Modern

Britain, Colonial America, Nineteenth Century United

States, Twentieth Century United States. (The

Nineteenth and Twentieth century fields may be divided

topically rather than chronologically; for example, a stu-

dent may be examined in labor/social history

1800-present, and in political history 1800-present.)

Minor Fields. Any of the major fields listed above may

also be minor fields. Examples of other minor fields are

American Studies; Ancient History; Early Modern

Europe; Modern Europe; Latin America; Environmental

History; Japan; Public History; Science, Technology and

Society studies.

Language Requirements. The student’s special commit-

tee determines whether proficiency in a foreign language

or proficiency in statistical methods will be required for

the doctoral degree.

More detailed regulations are given in the Handbook for

Graduate Work in History, available in the history

department office.

Graduate Courses in History

HIST 401. Historical Research (3)

Techniques of research in history: training in the critical

handling of documentary materials, in measuring the

value of evidence, and in formal presentation of the

results of research. Students will write an original

research paper using primary materials. Required of all

graduate students in history.

HIST 404. Readings in the History of the Atlantic

World, 1500-1900 (3)

Core readings offering a comparative and integrative

approach to studying the development of nations, eco-

nomic systems and trade, colonization, and cultural

encounters among the people of Europe, Africa, and the

Americas.

HIST 405. Readings in the History of Industrial

America (3)

Core readings in the history of technology and the larger

framework of intellectual, social, economic, and political

history. Includes comparative studies in the history of

industrializing Europe and Japan.

HIST 407. Seminar in the History of American

Industrial Technology (3)

Origin and evolution of American technology and indus-

try from the 19th century to the present. Investigates

dynamics of major industries in national and interna-

tional context. Not open to students who have taken

HIST 307. Smith

HIST 421. Readings in Topics in the Atlantic

World (3)

Study in small groups under the guidance of a faculty

member on a particular topic in the history of the

Atlantic World. May be repeated for credit with the per-

mission of the instructor.

HIST 426. Readings in Topics in American

History (3)

Study in small groups under the guidance of a faculty

member on a particular topic in U.S. history across sev-

eral centuries. May be repeated for credit with

permission of the instructor.

HIST 438. Techniques in Public History (2 or 3)

Designed to introduce students to a variety of public his-

tory techniques. Instructor will focus on one of the

following topics each term: archives, documentary film,

exhibit design, historical editing, material culture, oral

history. May be repeated to a maximum of 8 credits.

HIST 440. Readings in Colonial American

History (3)

Study in small groups under the guidance of a faculty

member of the literature of the 17th and 18th centuries.

May be repeated for credit with the permission of the

faculty advisor.

HIST 441. Readings in Nineteenth Century

American History (3)

Study in small groups under the guidance of a faculty

member of the literature of the 19th century. May be

repeated for credit with the permission of the faculty

advisor.

HIST 442. Readings in Twentieth Century

American History (3)

Study in small groups under the guidance of a faculty

278 Lehigh University Course Catalog 2009-2010

member of the literature of the 20th century. May be

repeated for credit with permission of the faculty advisor.

HIST 443. Readings in English History (3)

Study in small groups, under the guidance of a faculty

member, of the literature of a particular period, problem,

or area of English history. May be repeated for credit

with permission of the faculty advisor.

HIST 444. Readings in Latin American

History (3)

Study in small groups, under the guidance of a faculty

member, of the literature of a particular period, problem,

or area of Latin American history. May be repeated for

credit with permission of the faculty advisor.

HIST 445. Readings in the History of Science (3)

Study in small groups under the guidance of a faculty

member on the history of science. May be repeated for

credit with permission of the faculty advisor.

HIST 446. Readings in the History of

Technology (3)

Study in small groups under the guidance of a faculty

member of the history of technology. May be repeated

for credit with the permission of the faculty advisor.

HIST 447. Readings in European History (3)

Study in small groups, under the guidance of a faculty

member, of the literature of a particular period, problem

or aspect of European history. May be repeated for credit

with permission of the faculty advisor.

HIST 451. Readings in Topics in American

History (3)

Study in small groups under the guidance of a faculty

member on a particular topic in U.S. history across sev-

eral centuries. May be repeated for credit with

permission of the instructor.

HIST 452. Research in American History (3)

An intensive research seminar on a phase of American

history. May be repeated for credit with permission of

the department chair.

HIST 453. Research in English History (3)

An intensive research seminar on a phase of English his-

tory. May be repeated for credit with permission of the

department chair.

HIST 454. Research in Latin American History (3)

An intensive research seminar on a phase of Latin

American history. May be repeated for credit with per-

mission of the department chair.

HIST 455. Research in History of Science and

Technology (3)

An intensive research seminar on a phase or aspect of the

history of science and technology. May be repeated for

credit with permission of the department chair.

HIST 457. Research in European History (3)

An intensive research seminar on a phase of European

history. May be repeated for credit with permission of

the department chair.

HIST 460. Readings in Topics in the Atlantic

World (3)

Study in small groups under the guidance of a faculty

member on a particular topic in the history of the

Atlantic World. May be repeated for credit with the per-

mission of the instructor.

HIST 471. Special Topics in History (1-3)

Individual study under the direction of a faculty member

of a topic in history. May be repeated for credit.

HIST 472. Special Topics in History (1-3)

Individual study under the direction of a faculty member

of a topic in history. May be repeated for credit.

HIST 473. Special Topics in History (1-3)

Individual study under the direction of a faculty member

of a topic in history. May be repeated for credit.

HIST 481. Teaching History (1)

Focuses on the practical aspects of college teaching,

including teaching methods, preparation of syllabi and

exams, grading papers and exams, and dealing with

problems such as plagiarism. Required for teaching assis-

tants, teaching fellows, and Ph.D. students in the

Department of History.

Humanities

Eccentral Committee: M. Edurne Portela, Ph.D. (North

Carolina), MLL – Spanish and Director Humanities

Center; Gordon C.F. Bearn, Ph.D. (Yale), Philosophy;

Seth Moglen, Ph.D. (California at Berkeley), English;

Beth Dolan, Ph.D. (North Carolina), English; John

Pettegrew, Ph.D. (Wisconsin at Madison), History;

Michael L. Raposa, Ph.D. (Pennsylvania), Religion; Vera

S. Stegmann, Ph.D. (Indiana), MLL – German; John

Savage, Ph.D. (NYU), History; Bob Watts, Ph.D.

(Missouri-Columbia), English.

The Humanities Program is devoted to freeing faculty

and students from the discipline of the disciplines, to

finding a way to the space between the disciplines, the

space where the sparks of intellectual excitement fly,

sparks that ignite the pleasures and passions that charac-

terize the best of university life.

The humanities are construed so broadly that they will

include any aspect of intellectual investigation which is

relevant to understanding whatever humans are or have

been, whatever humans have produced or are producing.

It remains an open question whether any discipline at all

is irrelevant to the understanding of human life and

work. Even such apparently far-flung investigations as

the thermodynamics of far from equilibrium systems are

already being used to understand the evolution of forms

of human society, and both Goedel’s work on the foun-

dations of mathematical logic and Bohm’s ontological

interpretation of quantum mechanics have already been

used at some distance from their original homes.

Although “humanities” is the name of this program,

“inclusion” is its watchword.

Intellectual work always faces a trade-off between the

intensities of connection and the intensities of concen-

tration: between the power of an analysis which excludes

every concern and every method of investigation save

one and the power of an analysis which reveals the amaz-

ing ways an inert site of investigation can be aroused by

bringing out the myriad connections that reach out from

that site in all directions at once. Divided by department

and by college, by discipline and sub-discipline, universi-

ties are disposed to accentuate the centripetal powers of

concentration at the expense of the centrifugal powers of

connection. It is important, therefore, that there be ele-

ments within the university that draw people and

Humanities 279

disciplines out of the center of their fields. This is the

eccentral mission of the Humanities Program.

Humanities Minor Programs

The Humanities Minor Programs provide homes for the

homeless interdisciplines, interdisciplinary areas of con-

centration that do not have official departmental or

interdepartmental homes. There are currently three

minors in the humanities, and there may be more in the

future.

a) Medieval Studies Minor in Humanities

Advisors, Michael Mendelson, Associate Professor of

Philosophy and Kate Crassons, Assistant Professor of

English.

The Medieval Studies Minor requires that a student take

4 courses (16 credits) from the following list. At the dis-

cretion of the Advisor for the Medieval Studies Minor, a

student may count any other course (not on this list)

towards the minor.

ART 1 Art History: Ancient and Medieval

ART 206/ARCH 206

Medieval Art and Architecture

CLSS 52 Classical Epic

LAT 113 Virgil

LAT 115 Ovid

ENGL 327 Chaucer

ENGL 360 Middle English Literature

HIST 15 English History to 1688

HIST 150 Medieval Civilization

MUS 233 Medieval and Renaissance Music

PHIL 133 Medieval Philosophy

PHIL 233 Figures and Themes in Medieval

Philosophy

ANTH 312 The Anthropological Signature of the

Past

THTR 127 The Development of Theatre and

Drama from Ritual to Renaissance.

b) Ethics Minor in Humanities

Advisor Lloyd H. Steffen, Professor of Religion Studies.

The Ethics Minor construes ethics more broadly than as

the subject of philosophical treatises. The Ethics Minor

is especially concerned with the way ethical challenges

arise outside the semi-technical philosophical field of

ethics itself, that is, in the pursuit of the various profes-

sions and in the conduct of life, generally.

The Ethics Minor consists of 4 courses (16 credits) from

the following list. At least one course must come from

the first five italicized members of the list. At the discre-

tion of an Advisor for the Ethics Minor, a student may

count any other course (not on this list) towards the

minor.

PHIL105 Ethics

PHIL 116 Bioethics

REL 3 Religion Ethics and Society

HUM 126 Professional Ethics

HUM 137 Ethics in Practice

AAS 103 (SSP 103) Sociological Perspectives on

Racial and Ethnic Communities

AAS 166 (SSP 166) Who Gets What?: The Social

Problems of Wealth and

Inequality

AAS 310 (SSP 310/WS 310)

Gender, Race and Sexuality: The

Social Construction of

Differences

AAS 379 (SSP 379) Race and Class in America

ECO 130 (WS 130) Economics of Race and Gender

ECO 368 Health Economics

E & S 1 Environment and the Consumer

Society

HIST 154 (REL 154) The Holocaust: History and

Meaning

HUM 126 Professional Ethics

HUM 137 Ethics in Practice

HUM 373 Independent Ethics Project

IR 23 Alternative World Futures

JOUR 122. Media Ethics and LAW

COMM 252 Interpersonal Relationships

Private and Public

PHIL 1 The Examined Life

PHIL 3 (REL 3) Religion Ethics and Society

PHIL 105 Ethics

PHIL 116 Bioethics

PHIL 117 Race and Philosophy

PHIL 122 Philosophy of LAW

PHIL 124 (REL 124) Reason and Religious Experience

PHIL 127 Existentialism

PHIL 140 (AS 140) Eastern Philosophy

PHIL 205 Contemporary Ethics

PHIL 217 Figures/Themes in Race and

Philosophy

PHIL 240 (AS 240) Figures and Themes in Eastern

Philosophy

PHIL 364 (POLS 364) Issues in Contemporary Political

Thought

POLS 111 The Politics of the Environment

POLS 179 (WS 179) Politics of Women

POLS 329 Propaganda, Media, and

American Politics

POLS 330 Movements and Legacies of the

1960’s

PSYC 314 (SSP) Social Cognition and Social Action

REL 6 Religion and the Ecological Crisis

REL 68 Practical Justice: From Social

Systems to Responsible

Community

REL 158 (WS 158) Sex and Gender in Judaism: The

Feminist Critique

REL 167 Engaged Buddhism

REL 184 (WS184) Religion, Gender, and Power

REL. 225 Topics in Religion and Ethics

STS 11 Technology and Human Values

c) Peace Studies Minor in Humanities.

Advisors. Addison Bross (English) and Chaim

Kaufmann (International Relations).

The Minor in Peace Studies aims to educate students

about the history, theory, and practice of peace advocacy,

social justice movements, and nonviolent direct action as

employed by such leaders as Gandhi and King among

many others. It also investigates the political structures

and processes which peace advocates must confront in

order to be politically effective, including those that pro-

duce armed conflict as well as those that contribute to

de-escalation of hostilities. A central course (Humanities

280 Lehigh University Course Catalog 2009-2010

180) introduces key concepts by which practitioners,

using both these approaches, seek to create peace in a

violent world. Guest lectures dealing with the second

component will be offered by the program’s Co-Advisor

(Chaim Kaufmann, International Relations) as well as by

other social science and humanities faculty who con-

tribute on a volunteer basis.

Requirements for Completion of the Minor

Four 4-credit courses, including

- HUM 180. Introduction to Peace Advocacy.

- 3 courses from the two lists below, including at least

one from the non-violence/peace advocacy list and

at least one from the conflict/policy process list

below;

Non-violence/peace advocacy/practice of advocacy

History 339 Managing Nonprofit Organizations.

Hum 182 Internship in Peace Studies.*

IR 346 Ethics in International Relations.

IR 391 U.N. or other IGO/NGO internship

approved by program advisor.*

MLL 124 Negotiating Across Cultures.

Religion 3 (Philosophy 3) Religion, Ethics and Society.

Religion 68 Practical Justice: From Social Systems

to Responsible Community.

Religion 167 Engaged Buddhism.

POLS 100 Introduction to Political Thought

POLS 108 Global Citizenship and its

Discontents.

POLS 230 Movements and Legacies of the 1960s.

POLS 326 Democracy Workshop.

POLS 370 The Citizen Versus the Administrative

State.

Conflict/policy process/foreign policy

History 349 Revolutions in Modern European

History.

IR 34 Society, Technology and War.

IR 36 International Terrorism.

IR 74 American Foreign Policy.

IR 120 Globalization.

IR 132 Nationalism and Ethnic Conflict.

IR. 235 International Security.

IR 242 International Law.

IR 334 Prospects for Peace in the 21st Century.

IR 347 Non-state Actors in a Globalizing

World.

POLS 306 Public Policy Process.

POLS 329 Propaganda, Media, and American

Politics.

POLS 331 Community Politics Internship.*

SSP 105 Social Origins of Terrorism.

*No more than one internship can be counted toward the

minor.

Honors in Humanities

The honors program in Humanities is designed to facili-

tate research beyond the disciplinary frame of a student’s

major. In order to earn Honors in Humanities students

must (1) have a GPA of at least 3.5 and (2) apply to the

director of the Humanities Center detailing how they

intend to complete the rest of these requirements, name-

ly, (3) completing 3 courses (9-12 credits) from at least 2

different departments that have been selected with the

help of the director so as to prepare the student to (4)

complete a year long thesis under the guidance of two

faculty members representing two different departments.

Successful completion of the honors thesis in humanities

will be decided by two faculty advisors for the thesis.

The thesis will count for honors in the two home

departments of the advisors only if the home depart-

ments also certify that the thesis has been satisfactorily

completed.

Applications to the director should be completed by the

beginning of the second semester of the student’s Junior

year. The application should describe the anticipated

project and show how the three preparatory courses con-

stitute appropriate preparation for the thesis. If the final

thesis does not meet with the approval of the two advi-

sors then the student will not receive honors in

humanities but he or she will receive grades and credit

for the courses taken and the thesis written.

Course Offerings

HUM 126. (PHIL 126, REL 126) Professional

Ethics (4)

An examination of the moral rules and action guides

that govern various professions. Professions to be exam-

ined will include health (physician and nursing); legal;

counseling and psychiatry; engineering; military; clergy;

teaching. Attention will be given to modes of ethical rea-

soning and how those modes are practically applied in

professional life and activity. Among issues to be dis-

cussed will be the limits of confidentiality; employer

authority; power relationships; obligations to the public;

professional rights; sexual boundaries; whistle-blowing;

safety and risk; computer ethics; weapons development;

discrimination; professional review of ethical infractions.

Course will include guest lectures and case studies.

Steffen (HU)

HUM 137. (PHIL 137, REL 137) Ethics in

Practice (1-4)

A variable content course focusing on ethical issues aris-

ing in a particular profession, such as law, health,

business, engineering, military. Variable credit. May be

taken more than once. Steffen (HU)

HUM 150. Humanities Seminar (4)

Variable Content. An opportunity for humanities faculty

to involve students in the exciting and accessible aspects

of their research. May be taken more than once for cred-

it. Staff (HU)

HUM 180. Introduction to Peace Studies (4)

Required for students minoring in Peace Studies. Offers

an overview of the field from the perspective of various

disciplines in the humanities and social sciences. Among

issues to be explored are the contested concepts of “peace,”

“war,” and “violence” (overt and systemic); methods for

establishing “negative” and “positive” peace; the theory

and evolution of “direct action” as a means to nonviolent

social change as practiced by Gandhi, King, and others;

the causes of international conflict; methods for reducing,

through diplomacy, the tensions that lead to war, for de-

escalating hostilities and restoring peace; the validity of

Just War theory and challenges to it. Since any attempt to

establish peace must take into account the political and

social environment in which advocates must operate, guest

lectures by faculty from International Relations and other

departments will be included. Bross (HU)

Industrial and Systems Engineering 281

HUM 182. Internship in Peace Studies (4)

Supervised practical work with Lehigh-Pocono

Committee of Concern (LEPOCO), a volunteer peace-

&-justice organization located in Bethlehem, PA, or with

another peace- or justice-focused organization. Practical

work will be combined with a sequence of supervised

readings in the history and theory of nonviolent meth-

ods of resolving conflict. Requirements include

journal-keeping, periodic consultations with the advisor,

and a final essay on the student’s response to the readings

and his or her practical work. Bross or Kaufmann. (HU)

HUM 224. Lehigh Review (1-4)

Students will produce the annual edition of the Lehigh

Review, the journal of undergraduate academic (non-fic-

tion) writing. The production tasks are divided into one

4 credit editorial board and three 1 credit pass-fail mod-

ules (reviewing, distribution, images). Students may

enroll in either the 4 credit editorial board or in one or

more of the 1 credit modules. Admission is by applica-

tion at the Humanities Center. (HU)

HUM 250. Intermediate Humanities Seminar. (4)

Interdisciplinary Seminar. Normally a team taught semi-

nar bringing various disciplines to bear on a specific

topic which will change from semester to semester. May

be taken more than once for credit. Staff (HU)

HUM 271. Humanities Independent Study (1-4)

Individual investigation of an author, book or topic

designed in collaboration with a faculty sponsor. Tutorial

meetings; substantial written work. May be repeated

more than once for credit. Consent of faculty sponsor

required. (HU)

HUM 350. Advanced Humanities Seminar. (4)

Interdisciplinary Seminar. Normally a team taught semi-

nar bringing various disciplines to bear on a specific

topic which will change from semester to semester. May

be taken more than once for credit. Staff (HU)

HUM 371. Humanities Advanced Independent

Study (1-4)

Advanced individual investigation of an author, book, or

topic designed in collaboration with a faculty sponsor.

Tutorial meetings; substantial written work. May be

repeated more than once for credit. Consent of faculty

sponsor required. (HU)

HUM 373. (PHIL 373, REL 373) Independent

Ethics Project (4)

Supervised ethics research into a topic approved by the

advisor for the Humanities Minor in Ethics. An option

for completing the ethics minor. For ethics minors only.

(HU)

HUM 390. Humanities Honors Thesis, first

semester (4)

An opportunity for students admitted to the humanities

honors program to pursue independent research under

the guidance of two faculty members representing two

different departments. If the student’s work does not sat-

isfy the two advisors, the student will receive a grade for

the course but will not receive honors. (HU)

HUM 391. Humanities Honors Thesis, second

semester (4)

Continuation of HUM 390. If the student’s work does

not satisfy the two advisors, the student will receive a

grade for the course but will not receive honors. (HU)

HUM 450. Theory Seminar (1-3)

Sustained investigation of a single theorist or theoretical

problem relevant to research in the humanities. Theorists

studied could come from this list or beyond: Butler,

Harraway, Irigaray, Derrida, Foucault, Freud, Deleuze,

Bhabha, Baudrillard, Kristeva, Eliade, Freud, Marx,

Lacan, Barthes, Gramsci, Guattari, West, Cixous, Wittig,

Hall, Gilroy, Bataille, Blanchot, Rorty, Fish, and so on.

Problems studied could come from this list or beyond:

Power, Identity, Race, Sexuality, Writing as a Woman,

Essentialism, Gender, Jouissance, Nomadism, Social

Constructivism, Popular Culture, and so on. May be

taken more than once for credit. (HU)

Industrial and Systems

Engineering

Professors. Keith M. Gardiner, Ph.D. (Manchester);

Mikell P. Groover, Ph.D. (Lehigh); Nicholas G. Odrey,

Ph.D. (Penn State); Robert H. Storer, Ph.D. (Georgia

Tech); Tamás Terlaky, Ph.D. (Loránd Eötvös Univ.)

chair; S. David Wu, Ph.D. (Penn State); Emory W.

Zimmers, Jr., Ph.D. (Lehigh).

Associate Professors. Eugene Perevalov, Ph.D. (Texas-

Austin); Louis J. Plebani, Ph.D. (Lehigh); Theodore K.

Ralphs, Ph.D. (Cornell); Gregory L. Tonkay, Ph.D.

(Penn State) associate chair; George R. Wilson, Ph.D.

(Penn State).

Assistant Professors. Lawrence V. Snyder

(Northwestern); Aurelie Thiele, Ph.D. (MIT).

Emeritus Professor. John W. Adams, Ph.D. (North

Carolina).

Mission Statement

To pursue excellence and national prominence in the

areas of manufacturing, operations research, information

technology and related fields of industrial engineering

through innovative teaching, distinguished research and

scholarship, and active professional leadership. Building

on its unique strength and national reputation in under-

graduate education and industrial research, the

department strives for leadership in educational innova-

tion, multidisciplinary research, and industrial

partnership. Our ultimate mission is to produce leaders

who have learned to think critically and analytically, have

the skills and techniques to comprehend and create new

knowledge, and are willing to serve and inspire others.

Physical Facilities

The industrial and systems engineering department is

located in the Harold S. Mohler Laboratory at 200 West

Packer Avenue at the northwest corner of the Lehigh

University Asa Packer campus. The Mohler Lab building

contains the classrooms, laboratories, and faculty offices

of the department. Labs in the Mohler Laboratory build-

ing include:

Computational Optimization Research @ Lehigh

(COR@L) Lab. The COR@L lab consists of high-per-

formance computer workstations, each equipped with

state-of-the-art commercial and non-commercial soft-

ware for large-scale numerical optimization. COR@L is

used for both research and instruction.

Enterprise Systems Center Laboratories. The ESC

Laboratories contain a variety of computer systems and

282 Lehigh University Course Catalog 2009-2010

software in support of agility in Computer Integrated

Manufacturing (CIM) and in engineering logistics and

distribution problem solving, including: Computer

Aided Design (CAD) and Engineering (CAE), discrete

event simulation, linear and non-linear optimization,

Finite Element Analysis (FEA), facilities design, process

design, and process control.

Manufacturing Technology Laboratory (MTL). The

MTL contains equipment for instruction and research in

manufacturing processes, numerical control (NC), NC

part programming, material handling and storage, indus-

trial control systems, and metrology.

Automation and Robotics Laboratory. This lab contains

a variety of industrial robots and other automated sys-

tems to provide students with hands-on experience in

the planning and use of this kind of equipment.

Work Systems Laboratory. This classroom-laboratory

affords the opportunity for undergraduate students to

analyze and plan human work activities for individual

workstations and worker team situations. A full-scale

manual assembly line is available for study.

Considerable use is made of university computer facili-

ties in IE coursework. An IE/computing center PC

laboratory containing 16 PCs is located in the Mohler

Laboratory building.

B.S. in Industrial Engineering

Industrial Engineering (IE) is concerned with the analy-

sis, design, and implementation of integrated systems of

people, materials, information, and equipment to

accomplish useful work. The discipline of industrial

engineering is applicable in nearly all industries, whether

the industry involves manufacturing of a product or

delivery of a service. Job functions performed by IEs

include: systems analysis, cost estimation, capital equip-

ment selection, engineering economy, facilities planning,

production planning and scheduling, inventory control,

quality control, information systems, project manage-

ment, operations management, engineering

management, as well as methods analysis and work

measurement. Manufacturing systems engineering

(MSE) is a specialty field associated with industrial engi-

neering that emphasizes functions and technologies such

as process planning, plant layout design, manufacturing

resource planning, production management, production

line design, automation, robotics, flexible manufacturing

systems, and computer integrated manufacturing.

Career Opportunities

IE graduates are sought by nearly all industrial corpora-

tions as well as government agencies and other service

institutions. Major employers of our graduates include

management consulting firms, manufacturing compa-

nies, banks, hospitals, railroads, the postal service, and

transportation/logistics services. A typical career path of

an industrial engineer is to start in an entry-level engi-

neering position or as a technical analyst and to progress

through various management positions in the firm or

institution. Significant numbers of industrial engineers

ultimately become chief executive officers, chief operat-

ing officers, and chief technology officers in their

respective organizations.

Program Educational Objectives

Industrial Engineering graduates will:

1. recognize and analyze problems, design innovative

solutions, and lead their implementation

2. excel as industrial and systems engineering profes-

sionals who are able to operate effectively in a

global, culturally diverse society

3. communicate effectively using written, oral, and

electronic media

4. pursue life-long learning and professional growth as

ethical and responsible members of society

5. form, lead, and participate on multi-disciplinary

teams that solve problems in engineering and busi-

ness

IE Curriculum

The IE curriculum is designed to provide graduates with

the skills and knowledge that employers expect of young

industrial engineers beginning their professional careers,

and to instill the ability for life-time learning. It includes

the basic mathematical, physical, and social sciences,

together with the principles and methods of engineering

analysis and design that are specific to industrial engi-

neering. These principles and methods include

probability and statistics, engineering economy, cost

accounting, operations research, computer simulation,

work methods and measurement, manufacturing

processes, production and inventory control, and infor-

mation technology.

Specialized industrial engineering electives in the senior

year include: advanced optimization models, stochastic

models, operations research, operations management,

organization planning and control, statistical quality

control, database design, web technologies, and data

communications technologies. Electives related to manu-

facturing systems engineering include: industrial

robotics, facilities planning and material handling, logis-

tics and supply chain, production engineering, and metal

machining analysis. The ISE department website con-

tains a list of optional tracks and course suggestions for

IE majors interested in specific fields (

http://www.lehigh.edu/ise ). The IE degree requires a

minimum of 131 credit hours.

IE Major Requirements

See freshman year requirements, section III.

sophomore year, first semester (16 credit hours)

IE 111 Engineering Probability (3)

IE 112 Computer Graphics (1)

MATH 23 Calculus III (4)

PHY 21, 22 Introductory Physics II and

Laboratory (5)

MAT 33 Engineering Materials and Processes (3)

sophomore year, second semester (17-18 credit hours)

IE 121 Applied Engineering Statistics (3)

IE 131 Work Systems and Operations

Management (3)

IE 132 Work Systems Laboratory (1)

ME 104 Thermodynamics I (3)

MATH 205 Linear Methods (3)

HSS Humanities/Social Sciences

elective (3-4)*

junior year, first semester (17-18 credit hours)

IE 215 Fundamentals of Modern

Manufacturing (3)

IE 216 Manufacturing Laboratory (1)

Industrial and Systems Engineering 283

HSS Humanities/Social Science

Elective (3-4)*

ACCT 108 Fundamentals of Accounting (3)

MECH 2 Elementary Engineering Mechanics (3)

ECO 1 Principles of Economics (4)

junior year, second semester (16 credit hours)

IE 122 Software Tools (1)

IE 226 Engineering Economy and Decision

Analysis (3)

IE 220 Introduction to Operations

Research (3)

IE 224 Information Systems Analysis and

Design (3)

ECE 83 Introduction to Electrical

Engineering (3)

IE 305 Simulation (3)

summer

IE 100 Industrial Employment (0)

senior year, first semester (18 credit hours)

IE 251 Production and Inventory Control (3)

IE elective (3)**

IEOR elective (IE 316 or IE 339) (3)***

HSS Humanities/Social Sciences elec-

tive (3)*

FE free elective (3)

senior year, second semester (18 credit hours)

IE 154 Senior Project (3)

HSS Humanities/Social Sciences elec-

tive (3)*

IE elective (3)**

FE free elective (6)

Notes:

*HSS elective credit totals must satisfy the college HSS pro-

gram

**IE elective courses are chosen from the current offering of

300-level IE courses

***IEOR elective is either IE 316 or IE 339 (could be fall

or spring).

Special Opportunities for IE students

The following special opportunities are available to

majors in industrial engineering and information & sys-

tems engineering:

Nontechnical Minor. Students may choose to pursue a

nontechnical minor in an area of the humanities, social

sciences, business, or entrepreneurship. Students in the

business minor can satisfy the ACCT 108 requirement

by completing BUS 127.

Technical Minor. Technical minors such as engineering

leadership, materials science, environmental engineering,

and computer science are available through departments

in the P. C. Rossin College of Engineering and Applied

Science. Consult the specific department for more

details.

Graduate Courses. Seniors in industrial and systems

engineering can petition to take up to two graduate IE

courses (400-level) to satisfy two of their four 300-level

elective IE course requirements. The petitioning senior

must have a good scholastic record (generally above a 3.0

GPA).

Senior Thesis Option. Students interested in continuing

on to graduate school or performing research are encour-

aged to take the senior thesis option. In this option a

student takes IE 155 as an engineering or free elective.

After IE 155, IE 156 is taken as the thesis is written. The

sequence of these 2 courses can replace IE 154.

Technical Minor in Engineering

Leadership

The minor in engineering leadership provides students

with the background and practice to become more effec-

tive leaders. The minor consists of 5 courses that explore

different aspects of leadership. Additional details can be

found on the Engineering Leadership Minor website

(http://www.lehigh.edu/~inleader/).

Technical Minor in Manufacturing

Systems Engineering

The minor in manufacturing systems engineering pro-

vides a concentration of courses in the manufacturing

and production areas. This minor is not available to stu-

dents majoring in industrial engineering. It requires 16

credits.

5th Year Master of Management Science

Option

Students enrolled in the IE or ISE curricula can pursue a

fifth-year Master of Management Science program.

Students in the management science program take a

mixture of engineering and business courses. Admission

is not guaranteed. For details see the management sci-

ence section of the catalog or contact the ISE

department.

5th Year Master of Information and

Systems Engineering Option

Students enrolled in the IE or ISE curricula can pursue a

fifth year Master of Information and Systems

Engineering program. Students in the Master of I&SE

program take a mixture of engineering, computer sci-

ence, and business courses. Admission is not guaranteed.

For details see the M.S. and M.Eng. of Information and

Systems Engineering section of the catalog or contact the

ISE department.

Undergraduate Courses

IE 100. Industrial Employment (0)

Usually following the junior year, students in the indus-

trial engineering curriculum are required to do a

minimum of eight weeks of practical work, preferably in

the field they plan to follow after graduation. A report is

required. Prerequisite: Sophomore standing.

IE 111. Engineering Probability (3) fall and spring

Random variables, probability models and distributions.

Poisson processes. Expected values and variance. Joint

distributions, covariance and correlation. Prerequisite:

MATH 22.

IE 112. Computer Graphics (1) fall

Introduction to interactive graphics and construction of

multi-view representations in two- and three-dimension-

al space. Applications in industrial engineering.

Prerequisites: Sophomore standing in industrial engi-

neering, ENGR 1.

IE 121. Applied Engineering Statistics (3) spring

The application of statistical techniques to solve industri-

284 Lehigh University Course Catalog 2009-2010

al problems. Regression and correlation, analysis of vari-

ance, quality control, and reliability. Prerequisite: IE 111

or MATH 231.

IE 122. Software Tools (1) spring

Introduction to application software tools used to solve

stochastic and deterministic problems. Problem design

and solution will be drawn from IE 220. Co-requisite:

IE 220.

IE 131 Work Systems and Operations

Management (3) spring

Worker-machine systems, work flow, assembly lines,

logistics and service operations, and project manage-

ment. Operations analysis, methods engineering, work

measurement, lean production, and six sigma. Workplace

ergonomics, plant layout design, and work management.

Prerequisite: IE 111 or equivalent, either previously or

concurrently.

IE 132. Work Systems Laboratory (1) spring

Laboratory exercises, case studies, and projects in opera-

tions analysis, methods engineering, work measurement,

and plant layout design. Co-requisite: IE 131.

IE 154. Senior Project (3) fall and spring

The use of industrial engineering techniques to solve a

major problem in either a manufacturing or service envi-

ronment. Problems are sufficiently broad to require the

design of a system. Human factors in system design.

Laboratory. Prerequisite: Senior standing in industrial

engineering.

IE 155. Senior Thesis I (3)

In depth study of a research topic in industrial engineer-

ing supervised by an ISE department faculty member.

Requires completion of a formal research proposal and a

public presentation of the proposal at the end of the

semester. Prerequisite: Senior standing.

IE 156. Senior Thesis II (3)

Continued in depth study of a research topic in industri-

al engineering supervised by an ISE department faculty

member. Requires a formal thesis and public presenta-

tion of the results. IE 156 can be substituted for IE 154

in the IE curriculum when taken in sequence after IE

155. Prerequisite: IE 155.

IE 168. Production Analysis (3) spring

A course for students not majoring in industrial engi-

neering. Engineering economy; application of

quantitative methods to facilities analysis and planning,

operations planning and control, work measurement,

and scheduling. Prerequisites: MATH 21 or 51.

IE 172. Algorithms in Systems Engineering (4)

spring

Use of computers to solve problems arising in systems

engineering. Design and implementation of algorithms

for systems modeling, systems design, systems analysis,

and systems optimization. Computer systems, basic data

structures, the design and implementation of efficient

algorithms, and application of algorithms to the design

and optimization of complex systems such as those aris-

ing in transportation, telecommunications, and

manufacturing. Weekly laboratory with exercises and

projects. Prerequisite: CSE 17.

IE 185. ISELP Honors Seminar (1)

Study of problem solving, principles of enterprise sys-

tems, and creative use of information technology in

controlled environments. Emphasis on teamwork, self

knowledge, and communication skills. Department per-

mission required. May be repeated for credit.

For Advanced Undergraduates and Graduate

Students

IE 215. Fundamentals of Modern

Manufacturing (3) fall

Manufacturing processes and systems. Metal machining

and forming, polymer shape processes, powder metallur-

gy, assembly and electronics manufacturing.

Introduction to automation, numerical control, and

industrial robots. Prerequisite: MAT 33.

IE 216. Manufacturing Laboratory (1) fall

Laboratory exercises and experiments in manufacturing

processes and systems. Prerequisite or concurrent: IE

215.

IE 220. Introduction to Operations Research (3)

spring

Introduction to deterministic and stochastic methods in

operations research. Mathematical programming, queu-

ing theory, and other modeling techniques. Emphasis on

formulation, analysis and solution of operations prob-

lems. Prerequisites: IE 111 or MATH 231 and MATH

205, Corequisite: IE 122.

IE 224. Information Systems Analysis and

Design (3) spring

An introduction to the technological as well as method-

ological aspects of computer information systems.

Content of the course stresses basic knowledge in data-

base systems. Database design and evaluation, query

languages and software implementation. Students that

take CSE 241 cannot receive credit for this course.

IE 226. Engineering Economy and Decision

Analysis (3) spring

Economic analysis of engineering projects; interest rate

factors, methods of evaluation, depreciation, replace-

ment, break-even analysis, after-tax analysis.

Decision-making under certainty and risk. Prerequisite:

IE 111 or MATH 231, either previously or concurrently.

IE 251. Production and Inventory Control (3) fall

Techniques used in the planning and control of produc-

tion and inventory systems. Forecasting, inventory

models, operations planning, and scheduling.

Prerequisites: IE 121 and IE 220.

IE 275. Fundamentals of Web Applications (3)

Introduction to web technologies required to support the

development of client side and server side components of

Internet based applications. Students will be exposed to

the problems of design, implementation, and manage-

ment by way of assigned readings, class discussion, and

project implementation. Term project. Prerequisites:

either IE 224 or CSE 241 previously or concurrently.

IE 281. Leadership Project (1-3)

Application of leadership principles through team proj-

ects with industry. Written report required. (Prerequisite:

IE 382 or permission of instructor).

IE 305. Simulation (3)

Applications of discrete and continuous simulation tech-

niques in modeling industrial systems. Simulation using

a high-level simulation language. Design of simulation

experiments. Prerequisite: IE 121.

Industrial and Systems Engineering 285

IE 316. Optimization Models and Applications (3)

Modeling and analysis of operations research problems

using techniques from mathematical programming.

Linear programming, integer programming, multi-crite-

ria optimization, stochastic programming, and nonlinear

programming using an algebraic modeling language.

Prerequisite: IE 220 or equivalent.

IE 319. Facilities Planning and Material

Handling (3)

Facilities planning including plant layout design and

facility location. Material handling analysis including

transport systems, storage systems, and automatic identi-

fication and data capture. Prerequisite: IE 131 or consent

of department chair.

IE 321. Experimental Industrial Engineering (1-3)

Experimental projects in selected fields of industrial

engineering, approved by the instructor. A written report

is required. May be repeated for academic credit.

IE 324. Industrial Automation and Robotics (3)

Introduction to robotics technology and applications.

Robot anatomy, controls, sensors, programming, work

cell design, part handling, welding, and assembly.

Laboratory exercises. Prerequisites: MECH 2, MATH

205.

IE 328. Engineering Statistics (3)

Random variables, probability functions, expected val-

ues, statistical inference, hypothesis testing, regression

and correlation, analysis of variance, introduction to

design of experiments, and fundamentals of quality con-

trol. Prerequisite: MATH 23 or equivalent. This course

cannot be taken by IE undergraduates.

IE 332. Product Quality (3)

Introduction to engineering methods for monitoring,

control, and improvement of quality. Statistical models

of quality measurements, statistical process control,

acceptance sampling, and quality management princi-

ples. Some laboratory exercises. Prerequisite: IE 121.

IE 334. Organizational Planning and Control (3)

fall

Design of organization and procedures for managing

functions of industrial engineering. Analysis and design

of resources planning and control, including introduc-

tion of change in man-machine systems; manpower

management and wage administration. Prerequisite:

Junior Standing.

IE 339. Stochastic Models and Applications (3)

Introduction to stochastic process modeling and analysis

techniques and applications. Generalizations of the

Poisson process; renewal theory and applications to

inventory theory, queuing, and reliability; Brownian

motion and stationary processes. Prerequisite: IE 220 or

equivalent.

IE 340. Production Engineering (3) fall

Development of process plans for manufacturing of dis-

crete parts. Emphasis on machining processes planning

and design manufacturing interface. Economic analysis

of process design alternatives. Concurrent engineering

topics. Introduction to mechanization, automation, and

flexible manufacturing systems. Fundamentals of group

technology and cellular manufacturing Term project.

Laboratory. Prerequisite: IE 215.

IE 341. Data Communication Systems Analysis

and Design (3)

An introduction to the hardware as well as performance

evaluation of data communication networks. Emphasis

on data transmission, encoding, data link control, com-

munication networking techniques, and

queuing/simulation analysis of network performance.

Prerequisite: IE 224 and IE 220 or equivalent.

IE 344. (MAT 344/ME 344) Metal Machining

Analysis (3) spring

Intensive study of metal cutting emphasizing forces,

energy, temperature, tool materials, tool life, and surface

integrity. Abrasive processes. Laboratory and project

work. Prerequisite: IE 215 or ME 240 or Mat 206.

IE 345. Manufacturing Information Systems (3)

A study of contemporary Information Technology solu-

tions used to support the manufacturing function from

product concept and design through production plan-

ning, manufacture, and delivery. Emphasis will be placed

on information exchange protocol standards used to

improve the overall integration of manufacturing sys-

tems. Prerequisites: IE275.

IE 358. (ECO 358). Game Theory (3)

A mathematical analysis of how people interact in strate-

gic situations. Applications include strategic pricing,

negotiations, voting, contracts and economic incentives,

and environmental issues. Prerequisites: ECO 105 or

115 and MATH 21, 31 or 51.

IE 362. (MSE 362). Logistics and Supply Chain

Management (3)

Modeling and analysis of supply chain design, opera-

tions, and management. Analytical framework for

logistics and supply chains, demand and supply plan-

ning, inventory control and warehouse management,

transportation, logistics network design, supply chain

coordination, and financial factors. Students complete

case studies and a comprehensive final project.

Prerequisite: IE 220 and IE 251 or equivalents, or

instructor approval.

IE 372. Systems Engineering Design (3)

Analysis, design, and implementation of solutions to

problems in manufacturing and service sectors using

information technology. Emphasis on problem identifi-

cation and the evaluation of proposed solutions and

implementations. Term Project. Prerequisites: IE 220,

275.

IE 382. Leadership Development (3) spring

Exploration and critical analysis of theories, principles,

and processes of effective leadership. Managing diverse

teams, communication, and ethics associated with lead-

ership. Application of knowledge to personal and

professional life through projects and team assignments.

(Junior or Senior)

IE 385. ISELP Honors Project Seminar (1)

Application of problem solving to real enterprise systems

projects. Emphasis on leadership, teamwork, design, and

communication skills. Requires a written honors project

report. Department permission required. Senior stand-

ing. May be repeated for credit.

Graduate Programs

Several programs leading to master’s and doctoral degrees

are offered by the Department of Industrial and Systems

286 Lehigh University Course Catalog 2009-2010

Engineering. Each program has core requirements. Core

requirements can be satisfied by previous coursework

upon petition of the ISE graduate committee. All core

course prerequisites must also be satisfied. Prerequisites

may be satisfied by (1) previous course work, (2) com-

pleting the prerequisite course without graduate credit,

or (3) passing the final examination of the prerequisite

course with a grade of B or better.

A Ph.D. student is required to complete core require-

ments with grades of B or better before being formally

admitted to Ph.D. candidacy.

Further information about graduate programs is con-

tained in an ISE graduate brochure available from the

department. In addition, documents are available from

the department that describe the requirements of each

graduate program.

M.S. in Industrial Engineering

The minimum program for the master of science degree

in IE consists of 24 credit hours of approved coursework

and completion of a satisfactory thesis. Courses in other

departments for which the student has the prerequisites

may be integrated into the MSIE program. Subject to

advisor approval, up to nine credit hours of 300 and

400-level courses from other departments may be includ-

ed in the IE masters program. The other department

courses usually include other engineering disciplines,

mathematics, computer science, and business and eco-

nomics.

M.Eng. in Industrial Engineering

This program of study is for those students whose inter-

ests are toward engineering design rather than research.

The program provides opportunity to gain greater

breadth of field through 27 credit hours of coursework

and a 3-credit hour project.

M.S. in Information and Systems Engineering

See separate catalog listing under Information and Sys-

tems Engineering.

M.Eng. in Information and Systems Engineering

See separate catalog listing under Information and Sys-

tems Engineering.

M.S. in Management Science

See separate catalog listing under Management Science.

M.S. in Manufacturing Systems Engineering

This is an interdisciplinary graduate program leading to

the master of science degree in manufacturing systems

engineering. See separate catalog listing under Manufac-

turing Systems Engineering.

M.S. in Quality Engineering

See separate catalog listing under Quality Engineering.

Ph.D. in Industrial Engineering

The graduate program leading to the doctor of philoso-

phy (Ph.D.) degree is organized to meet the individual

goals and interests of graduate students whose profes-

sional plans include teaching, consulting, or research in

an educational, governmental, or industrial environment.

Each doctoral candidate is required to demonstrate: (1) a

high level of proficiency in one or more fields of indus-

trial and systems engineering, and (2) a capacity for

independent research through the preparation of a dis-

sertation related to his/her field of specialization.

This is to be facilitated as follows. A student must

declare a primary and secondary field of study within

ISE. The fields of study are:

1. Financial Engineering

2. Information Systems

3. Manufacturing, Production and Logistics

4. Optimization

5. Stochastic Processes and Applied Statistics

Each field is defined by a set of core courses maintained

by the department. A student must take at least four

courses in his/her declared primary field, and at least two

in his/her declared secondary field.

Additionally, a student must declare a minor field of

study outside the ISE department. Minor fields of study

are subject to approval and may include Computer

Science, Electrical Engineering, Economics, Finance,

Marketing, Materials Science, Mathematics, and

Mechanical Engineering. At least two 400-level courses

in the minor department are required to satisfy the

minor requirement (these may be included in primary/

secondary fields of study declared above).

All Ph.D. students must complete the following core

courses, taken in the first year of study: IE 406, IE 429,

Math 301, and Math 338 or ECO 416. They must also

successfully pass a first year review, consisting of faculty

evaluation, classroom performance, and a qualifier exam.

IE 404. Simulation (3)

Applications of discrete and continuous simulation tech-

niques in modeling industrial systems. Simulation using

a high-level simulation language. Design of simulation

experiments. This course is a version of IE 305 for grad-

uate students, with research projects and advanced

assignments. Prerequisites: IE 121 or IE 328 and IE 220

or equivalent.

IE 405. Special Topics in Industrial

Engineering (3)

An intensive study of some field of industrial engineer-

ing.

IE 406. Introduction to Mathematical

Programming (3)

Techniques for the solution and analysis of deterministic

linear models used in operations research. Linear pro-

gramming, network flow, and integer linear

programming. Emphasis on modeling techniques, alge-

braic modeling languages and commercial solvers.

IE 408. Management of Information Systems (3)

Philosophies and methods for systematic planning,

development, and implementation of management infor-

mation systems. Concepts of information resource

management, and strategic and long-range planning of

information systems and services. Prerequisite: IE 224 or

ACCT 311 or equivalent.

IE 409. Time Series Analysis (3)

Theory and applications of an approach to process mod-

eling, analysis, prediction, and control based on an

ordered sequence of observed data. Single or multiple

time series are used to obtain scalar or vector difference/

differential equations describing a variety of physical and

economic systems. Prerequisite: IE 121 or equivalent.

IE 410. Design of Experiments (3)

Experimental procedures for sorting out important

causal variables, finding optimum conditions, continu-

Industrial and Systems Engineering 287

ously improving processes, and trouble shooting.

Applications to laboratory, pilot plant and factory.

Prerequisite: Some statistical background and experimen-

tation in prospect, IE 121 or equivalent.

IE 411. Networks and Graphs (3)

This course examines the theory and applications of net-

works and graphs. Content of the course stresses on the

modeling, analysis and computational issues of network

and graph algorithms. Complexity theory, trees and

arborescences, path algorithms, network flows, matching

and assignment, primal-dual algorithms, Eulerian and

Hamiltonian walks and various applications of network

models. Prerequisite: IE 406 or equivalent.

IE 412. Quantitative Models of Supply Chain

Management (3)

Analytical models for logistics and supply chain coordi-

nation. Modeling, analysis, and computational issues of

production, transportation, and other planning and deci-

sion models. Logistics network configuration, risk

pooling, stochastic decision-making, information propa-

gation, supply chain contracting, and electronic

commerce implication. Prerequisite: IE 316 and IE 339,

or equivalent.

IE 413. Advanced Engineering Economy and

Replacement Analysis (3)

Measuring economic worth, economic optimization

under constraints, analysis of economic risk and uncer-

tainty. Emphasis on analytical methods to evaluate the

economic desirability of replacement and retirement

options in capital investment. Prerequisites: IE 220 and

IE 226, or equivalent.

IE 414. Heuristic Methods in Combinatorial

Optimization (3)

Heuristic methods for solving combinatorial and discrete

optimization problems such as routing, scheduling, par-

titioning and layout. Introduction to NP-completeness

theory, exact and inexact methods, performance analysis,

fast and greedy heuristics, Lagrangean heuristics, and

various search techniques including simulated annealing,

genetic algorithms, Tabu search and iterative constructive

heuristics.

IE 416. Dynamic Programming (3)

The principle of optimality and recursive solution struc-

ture; multidimensional problems; reduction of

dimensionality and approximation; stochastic control;

non-serial systems; relationship to calculus of variation;

applications. Prerequisite: IE 316 or equivalent.

IE 417. Nonlinear Programming (3)

Advanced topics in mathematical programming with

emphasis on modeling and analysis of non-linear opti-

mization problems. Convex analysis, unconstrained and

constrained optimization, duality theory, Lagrangian

relaxation, and methods for solving non-linear programs,

including descent methods, Newton methods, conjugate

gradient methods, and penalty and barrier methods.

Prerequisite: IE 406 or equivalent.

IE 418. Integer Programming (3)

Advanced topics in mathematical programming with

emphasis on modeling and analysis of optimization

problems with integer variables. Polyhedral theory, theo-

ry of valid inequalities, duality and relaxation,

computational complexity, and methods for solving inte-

ger programs, such as branch and bound. Prerequisite:

IE 406 or equivalent.

IE 419. Sequencing and Scheduling (3)

Systematic analysis of models for the planning and

scheduling of systems that produce goods or services.

Resource planning techniques, static and dynamic sched-

uling methods and algorithms. Prerequisites: IE 316 or

equivalent.

IE 422. Measurement and Inspection Systems (3)

Study of measurement instruments and sensors for man-

ufactured products. Metrology standards, performance

characteristics of measuring devices, calibration, error

analysis, and gaging. Mechanical, optical, and other

techniques. On-line monitoring and control for product

quality, and sensor integration and fusion. Prerequisite:

IE 328 or equivalent.

IE 424. Robotic Systems and Applications (3)

Detailed analysis for robotic systems in manufacturing

and service industries. Task planning and decomposition,

motion trajectory analysis, conveyor tracking, error

detection and recovery, end effector design, and systems

integration. Prerequisite: IE 324 or consent of instructor.

IE 425. Inventory Management and Production

Planning (3)

Advanced study of heuristic, algorithmic, and analytical

methods for inventory, production planning, and distri-

bution models and systems. Forecasting, scheduling of

production facilities, single stage and multi-echelon

inventory control, and facility location- production allo-

cation models. Prerequisites: IE 316 and IE 339, or

equivalent.

IE 426. Optimization Models and Applications (3)

Modeling and analysis of operations research problems

using techniques form mathematical programming.

Linear programming, integer programming, multi-crite-

ria optimization, stochastic programming and nonlinear

programming using an algebraic modeling language.

This course is a version of IE 316 for graduate students,

with research projects and advanced assignments. Closed

to students who have taken IE 316. Prerequisite: IE 220

or equivalent background.

IE 429. Stochastic Models and Applications (3)

Introduction to stochastic process modeling and analysis

techniques and applications. Generalization of the Poisson

process; renewal theory, queueing, and reliability; Brownian

motion and stationary processes. This course is a version of

IE 39 for graduate students, with research projects and

advanced assignments. Closed to students who have taken

IE 339. Prerequisite: IE 220 or equivalent background.

IE 430. Management Science Project (3)

Analysis of a management problem and design of its

solution incorporating management science techniques.

An individual written report is required. Recommended

to be taken in the last semester of the program.

IE 431. Operations Research Seminar (3)

Extensive study of selected topics in techniques and

models of operations research.

IE 433. Manufacturing Engineering Seminar (3)

Extensive study of selected topics in the research and

development of manufacturing engineering techniques.

288 Lehigh University Course Catalog 2009-2010

IE 437. Advanced Database Analysis and

Design (3)

Intensive treatment of design and application of modern

database technology, including information modeling

and logical design of databases. Emphasis on applications

to the manufacturing environment. Prerequisite: IE 310

or equivalent.

IE 438. Advanced Data Communication Systems

Analysis and Design (3)

Study of technological development, operational algo-

rithms and performance analysis in data networks.

Emphasis on recent developments in communication

technologies, modeling and simulation of large-scale net-

works, routing models and algorithms, and flow control

issues. Prerequisite: IE 341 and IE 316, or equivalent.

IE 439. Queueing Systems (3)

Queueing theory and analysis of manufacturing, distri-

bution, telecommunications, and other systems subject

to congestion. Design and analysis of queueing net-

works; approximation methods such as mean value

analysis, uniformization, fluid and diffusion interpreta-

tions; numerical solution approaches. Prerequisite: IE

339 or consent of instructor.

IE 441. Financial Engineering Projects (3)

Analysis, design and implementation of solutions to

problems in financial services using information technol-

ogy, mathematical modeling, and other financial

engineering techniques. Emphasis on real-world problem

solving, problem definition, implementation and solu-

tion evaluation.

IE 442. Manufacturing Management (3)

Study of factors affecting the development of a manufac-

turing management philosophy; decision-making process

in areas of organization, planning, and control of manu-

facturing. The principles and techniques of TQM,

Deming and others; metrics, costs, benchmarking, quali-

ty circles, and continuous improvement. Influence of the

social, technical, and economic environment upon man-

ufacturing management decisions. Case studies.

IE 443. (MSE 427) Automation and Production

Systems (3)

Principles and analysis of manual and automated pro-

duction systems for discrete parts and products. Cellular

manufacturing, flexible manufacturing systems, transfer

lines, manual and automated assembly systems, and

quality control systems. Prerequisite: IE 215 or equiva-

lent.

IE 445. Assembly Processes and Systems (3)

Joining processes including welding, brazing, soldering,

and adhesive bonding. Mechanical assembly methods.

Manual assembly lines and line balancing. Automated

assembly. Product design considerations including

Design for Assembly. Prerequisite: IE 215 or equivalent.

IE 446. Discrete Event Dynamic Systems (3)

Modeling of Discrete Event Dynamic systems (DEDS)

particularly as applied to industrial systems. Modeling

procedures with focus on Petri Nets. Hierarchical Petri

Net modeling, performance analysis, behavioral and

structural properties, and various synthesis and analytical

techniques. Relationships to state space concepts, simula-

tion, and finite state automata are introduced. Emphasis

on use of such nets for the control of industrial systems.

Prerequisites: Consent of instructor.

IE 447. Financial Optimization (3)

Making optimal financial decisions under uncertainty.

Financial topics include asset/liability management,

option pricing and hedging, risk management, and port-

folio optimization. Optimization techniques covered

include linear and nonlinear programming, integer pro-

gramming, dynamic programming, and stochastic

programming. Emphasis on use of modeling languages

and solvers in financial applications. Requires basic

knowledge of linear programming and probability.

Prerequisite: IE 426 or equivalent.

IE 448. Industrial Control Systems for

Manufacturing (3)

Techniques used to control manufacturing systems:

numerical control, digital control, programmable logic

controllers, and sensors.

IE 449. Advanced Computer-Aided

Manufacturing (3)

Numerical control in manufacturing; CAD/CAM sys-

tems; computer monitoring and control of

manufacturing operations; adaptive control of manufac-

turing operations. Manufacturing resource planning,

computer-aided process planning, and shop floor con-

trol. Prerequisite: IE 340 or consent of instructor.

IE 451. Intelligent Manufacturing Systems (3)

Informational and control structures, architectures, and

analysis techniques for autonomous and semiau-

tonomous manufacturing systems. System architectures

and techniques, knowledge based systems in production,

and techniques based on fuzzy systems and neural net-

works. Applications in manufacturing systems control,

process planning, and design and management problems

in newly developing manufacturing and production sys-

tems. Prerequisite: Consent of instructor.

IE 458 (ECO 463). Topics in Game Theory (3)

A mathematical analysis of how people interact in strate-

gic situations. Topics include normal-form and

extensive-form representations of games, various types of

equilibrium requirements, the existence and characteriza-

tion of equilibria, and mechanism design. The analysis is

applied to microeconomic problems including industrial

organization, international trade, and finance.

Prerequisites: Two semesters of calculus, ECO 412 and

ECO 414, or permission of the instructor.

IE 460. Engineering Project (1-3)

Intensive study of an area of industrial engineering with

emphasis upon design and application. A written report

is required.

IE 461. Readings (1-3)

Intensive study of some area of industrial engineering

that is not covered in general courses.

IE 490. Thesis (1-6)

IE 499. Dissertation (1-15)

Information and Systems Engineering 289

Information and Systems

Engineering

B.S. in Information and Systems

Engineering

Information and systems engineering (I&SE) is a bachelor

of science degree program that produces graduates who

understand the complex facets of modern information sys-

tems, and the integration of these systems in industrial,

service and financial organization. The degree program,

offered through the Department of Industrial and Systems

Engineering, constitutes a broad based curriculum focusing

on three core areas: (1) Information Economics, (2)

Quantitative Systems Analysis, and (3) Information

Technology. The core areas are coupled with general engi-

neering and business background courses. Information

economics studies the formulation, structure, and opera-

tional dynamics of information-centric systems in the

context of industrial organizations, service sector econom-

ics, and financial institutions. Topic areas range from

fundamental theory and methodologies in systems science

and engineering, to issues in complex supply networks, e-

Business, electronic marketplaces, and financial

engineering. Quantitative systems analysis studies opera-

tions research and computational tools for analyzing

complex systems and their information components. Topic

areas include mathematical programming, optimization,

decision analysis, large-scale modeling and simulation,

decentralized decision processes, stochastic processes,

sequencing and scheduling, parallel and distributed algo-

rithms, and algorithm design. Information technology and

applications studies computer and communication tech-

nologies needed to design and implement information

system applications. Topic areas include the applications of

information technology in manufacturing and business

environments, including electronic commerce, supply

chain and enterprise information systems, manufacturing

information systems, and intelligent manufacturing con-

trol. The ISE department website contains a list of optional

tracks and course suggestions for I&SE majors interested

in specific fields ( http://www.lehigh.edu/ise ). The I&SE

degree requires 129 credit hours.

Program Educational Objectives

Information and Systems Engineering graduates will:

1. recognize and analyze problems, design innovative

solutions, and lead their implementation

2. excel as information and systems engineering profes-

sionals who are able to operate effectively in a

global, culturally diverse society

3. communicate effectively using written, oral, and

electronic media

4. pursue life-long learning and professional growth as

ethical and responsible members of society

5. form, lead, and participate on multi-disciplinary

teams that solve problems in engineering and busi-

ness

I & SE Major Requirements

See freshman year requirements, section III.

sophomore year, first semester (15 credit hours)

IE 111 Engineering Probability and Statistics (3)

MATH 23 Calculus III (4)

PHY 21, 22 Introductory Physics II and

Laboratory (5)

CSE 17 Structured Programming and Data

Structures (3)

sophomore year, second semester (16 credit hours)

IE 121 Applied Engineering Statistics (3)

IE 172 Algorithms in Systems Engineering (4)

MATH 205 Linear Methods (3)

ACCT 108 Fundamentals of Accounting (3)

ECE 83 Introduction to Electrical

Engineering (3)

junior year, first semester (17 credit hours)

IE 122 Software Tools (1)

IE 220 Introduction to Operations Research (3)

IE 224 Information Systems Analysis and

Design (3)

ECO 1 Principles of Economics (4)

MECH 2 Elementary Engineering Mechanics (3)

or ME 104 Thermodynamics I (3)

or MAT 33 Engineering Materials Processing (3)

FE Free Elective (3)

junior year, second semester (18-19 credit hours)

IE 226 Engineering Economy and Decision

Analysis (3)

IE 275 Fundamentals of Web Applications (3)

IE 305 Simulation (3)

HSS Humanities/Social Science

Elective (6-7)*

FE Free Elective (3)

summer

IE 100 Industrial Employment (0)

senior year, first semester (15-16 credit hours)

IE 316 Optimization Models and

Applications (3)

IE 372 Systems Engineering Design (3)

TE Technical Elective (6)**

HSS Humanities/Social Sciences

elective (3-4)*

senior year, second semester (18 credit hours)

IE 154 Senior Project (3)

IE 339 Stochastic Models and Applications (3)

TE Technical Elective (6)**

HSS Humanities/Social Sciences

elective (3)*

FE Free Elective (3)

Notes:

*HSS elective credit totals must satisfy the college HSS pro-

gram

**Technical Electives from approved list

Special Opportunities for I&SE students

The following special opportunities are available to

majors in information systems and engineering:

Nontechnical Minor. Students may choose to pursue a

nontechnical minor in an area of the humanities, social

sciences, business, or entrepreneurship. Students in the

business minor can satisfy the ACCT 108 requirement

by completing BUS 127. The minors program section of

this catalog should be consulted for details.

Technical Minor. Technical minors such as engineering

leadership, materials science, environmental engineering,

290 Lehigh University Course Catalog 2009-2010

and computer science are available through departments

in the P. C. Rossin College of Engineering and Applied

Science. Consult the specific department for more details.

Graduate Courses. Seniors in the Department of

Industrial and Systems Engineering can petition to take

up to two graduate IE courses (400-level) to satisfy two

of their five 300-level elective IE course requirements.

The petitioning senior must have a good scholastic

record (generally above a 3.0 GPA).

Senior Thesis Option. Students interested in continuing

on to graduate school or performing research are encour-

aged to take the senior thesis option. In this option a

student takes IE 155 as an engineering or free elective.

After IE 155, IE 156 is taken as the thesis is written. The

sequence of these 2 courses can replace IE 154.

5th Year Master of Management Science

Option

Students enrolled in the ISE curricula can pursue a fifth-

year Master of Management Science program. Students

in the management science program take a mixture of

engineering and business courses. Admission is not guar-

anteed. For details see the management science section of

the catalog or contact the ISE department.

5th Year Master of Information and

Systems Engineering Option

Students enrolled in the ISE curricula can pursue a fifth

year Master of Information and Systems Engineering

program. Students in the Master of I&SE program take

a mixture of engineering, computer science, and business

courses. Admission is not guaranteed. For details see the

M.S. and M.Eng. of Information and Systems

Engineering section of the catalog or contact the ISE

department.

Master’s Programs in Information and

Systems Engineering

The goal of the M.S. in Information and Systems

Engineering (I&SE) program is to provide advanced

educational and research opportunities related to opera-

tions research, quantitative and computational analysis,

large scale optimization, system simulation, information-

centric systems, and the integration of information

systems in industrial, service and financial organizations.

Graduates of the program will be operations research

analysts, systems engineers and information technology

specialists who are employed by virtually all organiza-

tions, especially in consulting, multi-national operations,

transportation, logistics, financial institutions, and

telecommunications.

New communications technologies, the web, and recent

advances in computing are profoundly changing the

operations of business and industry. The increasingly

complex intertwining of organizations coupled with con-

tinued automation of business processes creates new and

complex large-scale systems of enterprises, people, capital

equipment, and information. With these changes comes

the need for engineers capable of understanding and

integrating these emerging systems. The needs extend far

beyond the micro level details of computer hardware and

software, instead requiring systems integration, large-

scale optimization and control, and knowledge of the

operations of industry. It is the combination of the sys-

tems perspective, the analytical focus, and development

of computing skills that sets the I&SE education apart.

The program is comprised of three core areas:

Information Economics: The formulation, structure,

and operational dynamics of information-centric systems

in the context of industrial organizations, service sector

economics, and financial institutions. Topic areas range

from fundamental theory and methodologies in systems

science and engineering, to issues in complex supply net-

works, e-Business, electronic marketplaces, and financial

engineering. This area of concentration is based on the

solid foundations of science and economics through

which we envision the long-term development of mod-

ern information systems.

Quantitative Systems Analysis: Operations research and

computational tools for analyzing complex systems and

their information components. Topic areas include

mathematical programming, optimization, decision

analysis, large-scale modeling and simulation, decentral-

ized decision processes, stochastic processes, sequencing

and scheduling, parallel and distributed algorithms, and

algorithm design. This area of concentration forms the

methodological base for the design, integration, imple-

mentation, and management of information systems in

large-scale organizations.

Information Technology and Applications: Computer

and communication technologies needed to design and

implement information system applications. Of specific

focus will be the applications of information technology

in manufacturing and business environments, including

electronic commerce, supply chain and enterprise infor-

mation systems, manufacturing information systems, and

intelligent manufacturing control. This area concentrates

on the technological aspects of modern information sys-

tems such as database systems, software development,

and web-based systems.

Program Requirements

M.S. in Information and Systems Engineering

The master of science program in I&SE requires a mini-

mum of 24 credit hours of approved coursework and

completion of a satisfactory thesis or 27 credit hours of

approved coursework and completion of a 3 credit hour

project. Three core courses are required: IE 362, IE 404,

and IE 426. In addition, 5 courses are chosen from a list

of approved courses that covers the areas of information

economics, quantitative systems analysis, and informa-

tion technology and applications.

M.Eng. in Information and Systems Engineering

The master of engineering program in I&SE requires a

minimum of 30 credit hours of approved coursework.

No thesis or project is required. Three core courses are

required: IE 362, IE 404, and IE 426. In addition, 5

courses are chosen from a list of approved courses that

covers the areas of information economics, quantitative

systems analysis, and information technology and appli-

cations.

Program Prerequisites:

(1) A candidate embarking on the master’s program must

possess a Bachelors degree in engineering or the mathe-

matical or physical sciences. (2) The candidate must

satisfy the following incoming course prerequisites: CSE

17, IE 220, and IE 224, or equivalents.

Integrated Business and Engineering Honors Program 291

Core Courses (Three courses required of all I&SE

students):

IE 362 Logistics and Supply Chain

Management (3)

IE 404 Simulation (3)

IE 426 Optimization Models and

Applications (3)

ISE Electives (select at least five from the following

courses, organized into three groups corresponding to

the three information and systems engineering areas

identified above.):

1. Information Economics

BIS 311 Managing Information Systems

Development (3)*

BIS 331 Electronic Commerce and

Security (3)*

ECO 412 Mathematical Economics (3)

ECO 413 Advanced Microeconomic Analysis (3)

ECO 415 Econometrics (3)

ECO 447 Economic Analysis of Market

Competition (3)

IE 334 Organizational Planning and

Control (3)

IE 442 Manufacturing Management (3)

2. Quantitative Systems Analysis

IE 328 Engineering Statistics (3)

IE 406 Introduction to Mathematical

Programming

IE 409 Time Series Analysis (3)

IE 410 Design of Experiments (3)

IE 411 Networks and Graphs (3)

IE 413 Advanced Engineering Economy and

Replacement Analysis (3)

IE 414 Heuristic Methods in Combinatorial

Optimization (3)

IE 416 Dynamic Programming (3)

IE 417 Nonlinear Programming (3)

IE 418 Integer Programming (3)

IE 419 Sequencing and Scheduling (3)

IE 429 Stochastic Models and Applications (3)

IE 439 Queueing Systems (3)

IE 446 Discrete Event Dynamic Systems (3)

IE 447 Financial Optimization (3)

IE 458 (ECO 463) Game Theory (3)

3. Information Technology and Applications

CSE 313 Computer Graphics (3)*

CSE 330 Advanced Software Engineering

Tools (3)*

CSE 340 Design and Analysis of Algorithms (3)*

CSE 366 Object-Oriented Programming (3)

CSE 403 Theory of Operating Systems (3)*

CSE 411 Advanced Programming

Techniques (3)

CSE 412 Object-Oriented Programming (3)

CSE 414 Expert Systems (3)*

CSE 415 Database Topics (3)*

CSE 416 Advanced Issues in Knowledge-based

Systems (3)*

CSE 432 Object-Oriented Software

Engineering (3)

ECE 401 Advanced Computer Architecture (3)*

ECE 404 Computer Networks (3)

IE 324 Industrial Automation and

Robotics (3)

IE 332 Product Quality (3)

IE 341 Data Communication Systems

Analysis and Design (3)

IE 345 Manufacturing Information

Technology (3)

IE 424 Robotic Systems and Applications (3)

IE 437 Advanced Database Analysis and

Design (3)

IE 438 Advanced Data Communication

Systems Analysis and Design (3)

IE 443 Automation and Production

Systems (3)

IE 449 Advanced Computer-Aided

Manufacturing (3)

IE 451 Intelligent Manufacturing Systems (3)

*Prerequisites may pose difficulties.

Free Electives (for M.Eng. select any two graduate cours-

es subject to approval of graduate coordinator).

Integrated Business and

Engineering Honors Program

The Integrated Business and Engineering Program (IBE)

is offered jointly by the College of Business and

Economics and the P. C. Rossin College of Engineering

and Applied Science. The mission of the Integrated

Business and Engineering Honors program is to produce

graduates with a unique set of skills and competencies:

In addition to the mastery of the concepts and proce-

dures taught in individual courses in each college, the

IBE Honors Program develops competencies that require

an integrated knowledge from both engineering and

business. This program recognizes the need for today’s

leaders in business and industry to have a sound founda-

tion in both commerce and technology.

After four years and a minimum of 137 credits, students

will receive a single Bachelor of Science Degree in

Business and Engineering. The program meets the

accreditation standards of AACSB International.

Students are required to maintain a minimum GPA of

3.25 in order to remain in the program.

Students in the IBE Honors Program can major in any

area of business or engineering that Lehigh offers. After

freshman year, each student will elect a major in either

the College of Business and Economics or the P. C.

Rossin College of Engineering and Applied Science.

Students wanting to major in an area of business can

select from: accounting, business information systems,

economics, finance, marketing, management or supply

chain management.

Admission to the Integrated Business and Engineering

Honors Program is highly selective, with annual admis-

sion limited to approximately 50 students. The

University’s Office of Admissions (610-758-3100) can

explain the procedure for applying to the program.

It is possible that a small number of exceptional students

may be admitted to the program following the completion

of their freshman year. Admission at this point would be

highly competitive and based upon freshman year GPA,

faculty recommendations, and space availability.

292 Lehigh University Course Catalog 2009-2010

The co-directors of the IBE Honors Program are

Stephen G. Buell, Professor of Finance and Business

Information Systems ([email protected]) and Robert H.

Storer, Professor of Industrial and Manufacturing

Systems Engineering ([email protected]). For additional

information, see the IBE Honors Program entry in

Section V of this catalog or visit the IBE web site at

www.lehigh.edu/inibep/inibep.html.

IBE 10 Integrated Business and Engineering

Freshman Seminar (1) fall

Introduction to the various business and engineering

professions through a series of presentations and demon-

strations offered by faculty and business and industry

leaders. Emphasis is on the diversity of business and

engineering career opportunities and the associated cur-

ricular choices. Other topics include leadership, team

building and career planning. Students are required to

create their web page and post their four-year curriculum

plan and an updated resume. Open only to first-year stu-

dents in the Integrated Business and Engineering Honors

Program.

IBE 50 Integrated Business and Engineering

Freshman Workshop (3) spring

Introduction to how business and engineering activities

create value with a focus on innovation, design and the

business value chain. Introduction to analytical tools,

modeling and simulation techniques used in business

and engineering applications. By taking apart products

and the companies that make them, students develop

skills in such areas as competitive strategy, marketing

mix, financial modeling, organization of the supply

chain, virtual (computer) modeling, engineering draw-

ing, development of technical specifications, testing and

measurement. Open only to students in the Integrated

Business and Engineering Honors Program.

IBE 150 Integrated Business and Engineering

Sophomore Laboratory (1) fall

A series of cases that integrate elements of business and

engineering. Example topics include, but are not limited

to, introduction to cost benefit analysis, introduction to

modeling and optimization, team dynamics, and interna-

tional negotiation and joint ventures. Oral presentations

and written reports. Open only to students in the

Integrated Business and Engineering Honors Program.

IBE 250 Integrated Business and Engineering

Junior Laboratory (1) fall

A semester-long simulation game in which interdiscipli-

nary teams of IBE students compete against each other.

Topics include market analysis, working capital manage-

ment, capital budgeting, raising long-term capital, plant

location, and inventory control. Oral presentations and

written reports. Open only to students in the Integrated

Business and Engineering Honors Program.

IBE 380 Integrated Business and Engineering

Capstone Project I (3) spring

IBE students work in cross-disciplinary teams of 5 to 6

business and engineering majors with a faculty mentor

on the marketing, financial and economic planning, and

technical and economic feasibility of actual new product

concepts initiated by the course’s corporate sponsors.

These sponsors are incubator start-up firms to ensure

that the projects have both business and engineering ele-

ments. Written reports and oral presentations to

sponsors and invited venture capitalists are required.

Open only to students in the Integrated Business and

Engineering Honors Program.

IBE 385 Integrated Business and Engineering

Capstone Project II (3) fall

IBE students continue to work with the detailed design

including the fabrication and testing of working proto-

types of their new products designed in IBE Capstone

Project I course. In addition to the technical design of

the products, detailed financial and marketing plans are

required. Written reports and oral presentations to spon-

sors and invited venture capitalists are required. Open

only to students in the Integrated Business and

Engineering Honors Program.

IDEAS: Integrated Degree in

Engineering, Arts and Sciences

Co-Directors: Jeffrey Milet, Professor, College of Arts

and Sciences; Terry Hart Professor of Practice, P.C.

Rossin College of Engineering and Applied Science

IDEAS is a four-year honors program resulting in a

Bachelor of Science (BS) Degree—Integrated Degree in

Engineering, Arts, & Sciences (IDEAS)—jointly

administered by the College of Arts and Sciences and the

P.C. Rossin College of Engineering and Applied Science.

Interdisciplinary education in the arts and sciences and

engineering is of significant value to students who will

pursue a wide variety of careers. The complex challenges

and problems confronting us in the 21st century dramat-

ically underscore the importance of liberally educated

and technologically sophisticated individuals whose

habits of thought are thoroughly and comfortably inter-

disciplinary. Moreover, Lehigh is one of a small number

of universities with the resources necessary to provide

such an education. The students in this program will

benefit from the integrated strategic leveraging of

strengths across college boundaries.

This new program, now entering its second year, culti-

vates a new breed of cross-disciplinary innovators. It

provides an education that produces students well versed

in dual focus areas; one in engineering and one in the

arts, humanities, social sciences, mathematics or natural

sciences. This educational environment also cultivates a

multitude of thinking styles. It is renaissance thinking

for the technological era.

Entry Requirements:

1. Admitted students in the Class of 2012, who have

expressed an interest when applying, will be consid-

ered for the IDEAS program. Only a limited

number of students will be accepted. Students are

invited to join this honors program by invitation.

2. To remain in the IDEAS program students must

maintain a 3.25 GPA. At the end of the first year, a

student with a GPA below 3.25 is given two semes-

ters to achieve a GPA of 3.25; otherwise the student

will be asked to transfer to a regular degree program.

3. Students may transfer into the IDEAS program at

the end of their first semester or year if space

becomes available. A formal application to the pro-

gram must be filed and approval, from the

co-directors, must be obtained.

IDEAS: Integrated Degree in Engineering, Arts and Sciences 293

4. Students who are interested in the IDEAS program

should indicate that interest when applying and con-

tact one of the co-directors.

The IDEAS program is designed so that students who

transfer out of the program at the completion of the first

year will still be able to complete an arts and sciences or

engineering degree in four years. The four year IDEAS

program does not lead to an ABET accreted engineering

degree. It is possible for students to complete a BS

degree in IDEAS and an ABET accredited BS engineer-

ing degree (dual degrees) in one or two additional

semesters.

Program Components:

The IDEAS degree requires a minimum of 136 credits in

the program components shown below:

Program Component Minimum Credits Required Courses

IDEAS core 1 12 credits IDEA 11, 12, 111, 112,

150, 151, 210, 211

Math/Science core 2 36 credits Math 21, 22, 23, 205;

hem 25; Physics 11, 12

plus (see #2 below)

Engineering concentration 3 36 credits Specified by the college

Arts & Science concentration 4 36 credits Specified by the college

&S distribution requirements 5 16 credits As defined by the college

Total 136 credits

1. The writing intensive IDEAS core courses consist of

a first year course in which students develop their

interests, two stepping-stone courses in the middle

years where their interests are integrated with others

and a senior thesis course in the fourth year.

2. The math/science core consists of 24 credits of

required courses (see table above) plus 12 elective

credits drawn from: Bios 41, 42; Chem 51, 53; EES

gateway courses; Physics 21, 22; Math 231. All stu-

dents in the IDEAS program will automatically

fulfill the CAS math and natural science distribution

requirements.

3. The engineering concentration consists of a selection

of engineering courses drawn either from one of the

traditional engineering disciplines or from an

approved interdisciplinary engineering program.

Some engineering programs are designed to coordi-

nate with specific arts and sciences themes.

4. The arts and sciences concentration is either a cur-

riculum specific one or an interdisciplinary one such

as Science, Technology and Society (STS).

5. The elective block may be used for a minor, another

program, or to fulfill Arts and Sciences College dis-

tribution requirements.

Curriculum Details:

Additional details on the main curricular components of

the program include:

1. IDEAS Core Courses: Four IDEAS core courses,

one each semester for the first two years and one in

the fall of the junior and senior years.

a. These courses replace Engineering 5, English 1 &

2, the CAS college seminar, and the CAS junior

year writing intensive requirement. All four

IDEAS courses are writing intensive.

b. IDEA 11 and 12: the first year IDEAS core cours-

es will emphasize intensive faculty mentoring

within a small seminar environment where stu-

dents develop, write, and present their individual

interest areas and select their concentrations.

c. IDEA 111 and 112: a continuation of IDEA 10

where interest areas are integrated into themes as

individual concentrations are pursued.

d. IDEA 150 and 151: the junior year courses have

students working on team based projects and

preparing for the senior year thesis work.

e. IDEA 250 and 251: the senior year honors thesis

courses.

2. Math/Science Core: All students are required to ful-

fill the 36 credit math/science requirement,

regardless of their choice of concentrations.

3. Engineering Majors: Engineering majors are divided

into two different categories, as follows:

a. Interdisciplinary Theme: an approved interdis-

ciplinary theme in engineering that can be

coordinated with a liberal arts concentration.

b. Engineering Discipline: a defined engineering

discipline, e.g., mechanical engineering. Students

will follow a concentration in the curriculum

defined by the chosen area.

4. Arts and Sciences Majors:

a. Interdisciplinary Theme: an approved interdis-

ciplinary theme (e.g. STS) in arts and sciences

that can be coordinated with an engineering con-

centration.

b. Liberal Arts Discipline: a defined liberal arts dis-

cipline, e.g., English. Students will follow the

curriculum defined by the chosen concentration.

A minimum of 36 credits is required in the liber-

al arts concentration. If students choose a

concentration that requires less than 36 credits, in

addition to those taken as part of the math/sci-

ence core, the additional credits must be selected

in the CAS.

Students may select mathematics or science as the

liberal arts discipline. However, the humanities

and social science distribution requirement (8

credits of humanities and 8 credits of social sci-

ence) must be satisfied using the 16 credit elective

core which is also be accepted for distribution in

the RCEAS.

5. Combining the Engineering and Liberal Arts

Concentrations: You may combine your particular

interests in engineering and in arts and sciences and

customize your academic experience at Lehigh in

one of the following ways:

a. by combining an Engineering Discipline with an

Arts and Sciences Discipline (e.g., Electrical

Engineering and International Relations)

b. by combining an Engineering Discipline with an

Arts and Sciences Theme (e.g., Chemical

Engineering and STS)

c. by combining an Engineering Theme with an

Arts and Sciences Theme (e.g., Product Liability

and Legal Studies)

d. by combining an Engineering Theme with an

Arts and Sciences Discipline (e.g., Product

Liability and Chemistry)

e. or custom design your own combination between

Engineering and Arts and Sciences with your advisors

294 Lehigh University Course Catalog 2009-2010

Academic Advising:

1. The program is jointly administered by co-directors

from the College of Arts and Sciences and the P.C.

Rossin College of Engineering and Applied Science.

They, after the first year, become the secondary aca-

demic advisors for all IDEAS students.

2. Primary faculty advisors from appropriate disciplines

provide quality curriculum advising in each of the

student’s chosen concentrations. Careful advising is

required because of the greater flexibility of IDEAS.

3. Students who wish to earn an accredited engineering

degree in one additional year should inform their

advisors.

For general information visit the IDEAS web site at:

www.lehigh.edu/IDEAS

IDEAS Courses:

IDEA 11 IDEAS Seminar I (2 credits)

IDEA 12 IDEAS Seminar II (2 credits)

IDEA 111 IDEAS Seminar III (2 credits)

IDEA 112 IDEAS Seminar IV (2 credits)

IDEA 150 IDEAS Seminar V (1 credit)

IDEA 151 IDEAS Seminar VI (1 credit)

IDEA 250 IDEAS Seminar VII (1 credit)

IDEA 251 IDEAS Seminar VIII (1 credit)

Integrated Real Estate at Lehigh

Program

Integrated Real Estate At Lehigh (ire@l) is a three or

four year course of study designed to complement a wide

range of majors, from art and architecture to civil engi-

neering to environmental science to finance to marketing

to economics. The mission of the ire@l program is to

prepare the next generation of real estate leaders.

Students completing the ire@l program will earn a minor

in real estate.

Required Courses comprising the minor include:

• IPRE 001 Introductory Seminar in Real Estate (3

credit hours)

• IPRE 002 Field Laboratory (2 credit hours)

• IPRE 301 Case Studies in Real Estate Value

Creation (3 credit hours)

• IPRE 302 Summer IPRE Internship (0 - 1 credit

hour)

• Bus 347 Practicum in Real Estate I (2 credit hours)

• Bus 348 Practicum in Real Estate II (2 credit hours)

Recommended Courses:

• IPRE 101 Real Estate Practicum Clerkship I (1

credit hour)

• IPRE 102 Real Estate Practicum Clerkship II (1

credit hour)

The director of the Goodman Center for Real Estate

Studies and the ire@l program is Associate Professor

Stephen Thode ([email protected]).

ire@l Minor Courses:

IPRE 001 Introductory Seminar in Real Estate (3

credit hours)

Required of all entering ire@l students, this seminar

explores a variety of issues related to real estate, entrepre-

neurship and leadership. Topics include: the relationship

of real estate to finance, architecture, environmental

issues, government, engineering, urban planning and

economic development; the role of the entrepreneur in

real estate and real estate development; ethical considera-

tions in real estate; and, models of leadership. The

seminar will consist of lectures and presentations by a

variety of Lehigh faculty, entrepreneurs, and real estate

professionals. Prerequisite: Freshman standing OR

Sophomore standing and permission of the instructor.

IPRE 002 Field Laboratory (2 credit hours)

An introduction to the real estate development process.

Using an actual, planned commercial real estate develop-

ment, the class will engage in an extensive inquiry into

the breadth and depth of the real estate development

process. Topics include: the sequence of events in the

development process; parallel and sequential activities;

impediments to highest and best use; strategies for over-

coming impediments; managing relationships with

various constituents; sources of capital; and, market

analysis. Each class member will submit a final report

detailing his or her findings with respect to these topics.

Prerequisite: IPRE 001 and permission of the instructor.

IPRE 301 Case Studies in Real Estate Value

Creation (3 credit hours)

An investigation into ways in which the entrepreneur is

able to create value through the development or redevel-

opment of real estate. Issues: establishing a real property’s

highest and best use; the entrepreneurial thought

process; zoning, planning and land use regulations and

their effects on real estate development; real and poten-

tial environmental impacts and their effects on real estate

development; the role of government in stimulating (or

destimulating) real estate development; overcoming bar-

riers to real estate development; negotiation techniques;

and, application of alternative strategies in the develop-

ment process. The course is taught using the case

method with the majority of the cases from previous

Real Estate Practica. The course is a combination of lec-

tures, presentations by entrepreneurs, and site visits to

(re)developed properties as well as properties in the plan-

ning phase. Prerequisite: Permission of the instructor.

IPRE 302 Summer IPRE Internship (0 - 1 credit

hour)

This course is available summers and open to students in

the Integrated Real Estate At Lehigh (ire@l) Program

The student will be evaluated on a directed writing

assignment of no fewer than 9 pages and on a detailed

evaluation provided by his or her work supervisor. A

minimum of 150 hours of work must be completed in

the internship, and verified by work supervisor. It should

be noted that the work experience itself is not the basis

for academic credit. Course registration and related

arrangements must be made in advance of the work

experience. This course cannot be used to satisfy any

major requirements. Prerequisite: permission of the pro-

gram director. In extraordinary circumstances and with

the approval of the program director this requirement

can be altered according to the director’s stipulations.

International Relations 295

Bus 347 Practicum in Real Estate I (2 credit hours)

Organized into teams, with each team assigned a differ-

ent subject commercial real property, the class engages in

the study of the physical and locational characteristics of

commercial real estate as they relate to value including:

property history; architecture; physical attributes that

add to or detract from value; tenant mix; the immediate

neighborhood environment; and, the specific market in

which the real property competes for tenants.

Each team meets with the property owner and conducts

a thorough review of the property’s development process

including, where applicable, previous attempts to devel-

op the property, prior uses for the property, and

significant phase points in the development process (for

example, “deal killing” impediments that were over-

come).

Each team submits a written report of their findings and

produces a 10-minute video documentary on their sub-

ject property. Prerequisite: Permission of the instructor.

Bus 348 Practicum in Real Estate II (2 credit

hours)

A continuation of the study of the creation of value in

commercial real estate begun in the Practicum in Real

Estate I. Each student team continues with the subject

commercial real property assigned to them in Practicum I.

The class engages in the study of the market and finan-

cial characteristics of commercial real estate as they relate

to value through: a financial analysis of the market in

which their property is located to include market rents,

market vacancy rates and market absorption rates; and,

financial analysis of the subject property to include both

historical results, and pro forma estimates of revenues,

expenses, cash flow and residual value. Each team also

studies the financial characteristics of comparable prop-

erties.

The grand finale of the Real Estate Practicum (and the

IPRE curriculum) is the Collins Family Scholarship

Competition. Held at the conclusion of the spring

semester, this competition is the public vehicle for the

Practicum teams to present the results of their property

studies. Prerequisite: Permission of the instructor.

IPRE 101 Real Estate Practicum Clerkship I

(1 credit hour)

Just as medical school and law school students serve

clerkships as a key part of their academic preparation,

ire@l students may serve clerkships in the Real Estate

Practicum. Clerkship students will rotate among all of

the groups engaged in the Real Estate Practicum -

accompanying Practicum groups on site visits, observing

those groups’ interactions with various faculty and real

estate professionals, and assisting those groups in the

completion of numerous tasks.

During the fall semester, the focus of these rotations be

on the physical characteristics of the Practicum proper-

ties including design considerations, structural integrity,

floor plans, building systems and tenant improvements.

Students will also develop an understanding of the prop-

erty’s location, and how that location affects the use(s) of

the property. Finally, students will gauge the area in

which the property is located.

Concurrent with these rotations, these students will ref-

erence their Field Laboratory property that is in an

earlier stage of development, drawing a contrast between

a completed property and a property under develop-

ment. Prerequisite: Permission of the instructor

IPRE 102 Real Estate Practicum Clerkship II

(1 credit hour)

A continuation of the fall semester, the spring semester

rotations focus on the real estate markets in which the

Practicum properties are located, and on the financial

analysis (valuation) of the Practicum properties. As in

the fall, at the conclusion of each rotation, the clerkship

student will receive evaluations from faculty, practition-

ers and Practicum group members on their performance.

Likewise, clerkship students will reference their Field

Laboratory property to contrast the difference between

the demonstrated value created (in a completed property)

and the value that is expected to be created (in a property

under development). Prerequisite: IPERE 101 and permis-

sion of the instructor.

Interdisciplinary Technology

See listings under Science, Technology and Society.

International Relations

Professor and Chair. Rajan Menon, Ph.D. (Illinois),

Monroe J. Rathbone Professor

Professors. Henri J. Barkey, Ph.D. (Pennsylvania),

Bernard L. and Bertha F. Cohen Professor; John Martin

Gillroy, Ph.D. (Chicago); Bruce E. Moon, Ph.D. (Ohio

State).

Associate professors. Chaim D. Kaufmann, Ph.D.

(Columbia); Janice Bially Mattern, Ph.D. (Yale).

Assistant professors. Chad Briggs, Ph.D. (Carleton);

Kevin Narizny, Ph.D. (Princeton)

Emeritus professors. Zdenek J. Slouka, Ph.D.

(Columbia), Oles M. Smolansky, Ph.D. (Columbia).

Today’s world is more interconnected than ever before:

what happens “here” affects what happens “there,” and

vice versa. The economic fortunes of countries, firms,

and individuals have become so sensitive to trade, mone-

tary, and investment decisions made elsewhere that

economic policy that is purely national has become all

but impossible. Nuclear weapons, which can kill thou-

sands in minutes, do not respect international

boundaries; neither do the consequences of ethnic and

communal conflicts. Non-state actors, from terrorists to

human rights activists, also act across boundaries. The

Internet has made it easier than ever to form networks

and political movements that span borders. Climate

everywhere is affected by environmental decisions any-

where. In the 21

century, no state – not even the

United States, though it has become the first sole super-

power in the history of the modern international system

– and no citizen can make important choices in a sound

manner without understanding how their decisions are

shaped by what happens outside the boundaries of their

homeland; moreover, their decisions often affect people

who live far beyond those borders.

International Relations (IR) is the study of world politics

in all of its aspects: International security covers issues

related to war and peace, among and within societies.

International political economy focuses on the political

dimensions of trade, investment, development, and

296 Lehigh University Course Catalog 2009-2010

poverty. International law, organizations, and ethics and

norms involve the study of how legal principles and

agreements and moral values contribute to the creation

of order, create the basis for stable expectations, and reg-

ulate transactions among states and other participants in

world affairs. IR theory exposes students to the major

explanatory frameworks that have been developed for the

study of international relations.

IR investigates the gamut of economic, technological,

social, and cultural and military forces that create the

increasing interdependence that we call “globalization.”

IR examines the ways in which globalization and other

factors have sometimes contributed to creation of order

but also often to breakdown of order, violence among

and within states, and the assertions of particularity,

whether based on ethnicity, nationalism, or differences in

culture, or wealth. Much of IR is devoted to explaining

the behavior of states, but IR also encompasses many

entities besides sovereign states. These include interna-

tional organizations (such as the United Nations and its

affiliate organizations); non-governmental organizations;

and inter-governmental organizations, such as the World

Trade Organization, the European Union, the African

Union, or Mercosur, the Latin American trading bloc.

Lehigh University has one of the few Departments of

International Relations in the United States. At Lehigh,

world politics is not considered simply a division of the

discipline of political science. The IR Department is

therefore able to offer a concentrated and multifaceted

program, and one that is truly interdisciplinary. Some IR

faculty study world politics as scholars of particular geo-

graphic regions, others as theorists seeking to explain the

major processes of world politics regardless of where and

when they occur: for instance, the causes and conse-

quences of different forms of warfare; the rise and

decline of empires; the challenges posed by environmen-

tal degradation; and the forces that create both wealth

and poverty. What we share is the dedication to teaching

and scholarship and the commitment to encouraging our

students to engage new ideas and to subject familiar ones

to thorough scrutiny.

Judging by the number of students who choose IR as

their major, it is one of the most popular disciplines at

Lehigh. Moreover, as befits a field that cuts across so

many disciplines, we draw students who also pursue

coursework, or minors, or “double majors” in fields rang-

ing from Religion Studies, Modern Languages and

Literatures, Economics, and History, to Computer

Science, Biology, Engineering, and Environmental

Policy.

The Curriculum: Students considering course work in

international relations are strongly encouraged to visit

the International Relations web site

(http://cas.lehigh.edu/ir). Prospective International

Relations majors should enroll in IR 10 and ECO 1 as

early as possible. We recommend that IR majors fulfill

the mathematics portion of their college distribution

requirement with Math 12 (Basic Statistics), although

this course is not required for the major.

Major in International Relations

The major consists of eleven courses for a total of 44

credits. This is the minimum requirement, however, and

we strongly urge students to enrich their educations by

going further. The courses required are:

Introductory courses (two courses, 8 credits)

IR 10 Introduction to World Politics (4)

Eco 1 Principles of Economics (4)

Core courses (four courses, one from each function-

al group, 16 credits)

Functional Group Approved Course(s)

International Relations IR 105. Theories of

Theory International Relations (4)

International Political IR 125. International Political

Economy Economy (4)

International Security IR 234. Great Power

Studies Politics (4) or

IR 235. International

Security (4)

International Governance IR 142. International

Law (4) or

IR 245. International

Organization (4)

Advanced courses (two courses, 8 credits)

Any IR courses numbered 301-387 or 393.

Electives (12 credits)

Any IR courses other than IR 19, 90, 300, 388 or 391.

Core or advanced courses beyond the minimum require-

ments may be counted as electives. Certain courses

offered by other departments may also qualify. See the

Department of International Relations for a complete

list.

Departmental Honors

To graduate with Departmental honors, a major in inter-

national relations must:

1. successfully complete a two semester honors thesis

(IR 388) in the senior year;

2. attain a GPA of at least 3.5 in the courses constitut-

ing the IR major program at the time of graduation.

See department website for additional information.

Minor in International Relations

The minor consists of 16 credits: IR 10, one advanced

IR elective numbered 301-387 or 393, and 8 credits of

free IR electives other than IR 19, 90, 300 or 391.

Joint International Relations/Modern

Languages and Literatures Major

Program directors. Chair of IR Department, Rajan

Menon, Ph.D. (Illinois), Monroe J. Rathbone Professor;

Chair of MLL Department, Marie-Helene Chabut,

Ph.D. (U.C., San Diego), Professor of French.

The multidisciplinary Joint IR/MLL Major is offered

jointly by the Department of International Relations

(IR) and the Department of Modern Languages and

Literatures (MLL). The program, which offers a Bachelor

of Arts, incorporates courses from both IR and MLL, as

well as electives from a broad cross-section of other

departments, for a challenging program that requires

overseas study, language facility, and undergraduate

research.

The Joint IR/MLL Major recognizes that Lehigh gradu-

ates must be adequately prepared to play and active role

in the world of the 21

century. For that, they will need

an acute understanding of essential issues of global poli-

tics, broad linguistic and cultural skills, significant

International Relations 297

overseas experience, and both intellectual and cultural

sophistication. The Joint IR/MLL Major meets those

requirements with courses in economics, international

relations, language, and culture. Extended study abroad

and undergraduate research in more than one language

are also required. The program will help students devel-

op a deeper and richer understanding of cultural,

linguistic, and political diversity around the world.

The program requires a total of 16 courses for 60-64

credits. At least one semester of study abroad in an

approved Lehigh program is required, as is undergradu-

ate research that uses sources in at least one language

other than English. Each student will have two major

advisors, one each from IR and MLL.

Required courses (50-52 credits), as follows:

• 6 courses in International Relations (24 credits), as

follows:

IR 10

IR 105

IR 125

Two IR advanced courses numbered 301-387 or 393

Eco 1

• 6 courses in Modern Languages and Literatures (22-

24 credits), as follows:

Four courses (16 credits) in one language, either

Arabic, Chinese, Hebrew, Japanese, Russian, French

(above the level of Spanish 2)

Two culture courses (6-8 credits) from an approved

list or in consultation with the MLL advisor

• 1 independent study (4 credits). The course will

include original research in at least one foreign lan-

guage.

• Study abroad. 1 semester or more in an approved

Lehigh program.

• Electives (10-12 credits), as follows:

3 electives from an approved list, including courses

from the departments of Sociology and

Anthropology, Economics, English, International

Relations, Journalism, Modern Languages and

Literatures, Political Science, History, Religion,

and/or programs in Africana Studies, Asian Studies,

Global Citizenship, Latin American Studies,

Sociology and Social Psychology, Science,

Technology and Society, Women’s Studies, or other

courses as approved by IR and MLL advisors.

(Courses must be chosen from at least two depart-

ments.)

Minor in International Environmental

Policy

The Minor consists of 20 credits: IR 10, one advanced

IR elective numbered 301-387 and 393, and 16 credits

of electives (including one advanced course) to be taken

from a list of approved eligible courses within the

Department of International Relations.

Minor in Peace Studies

This interdisciplinary minor is listed under Humanities.

IR majors are eligible.

Beyond the IR Curriculum: In close cooperation with

the international education office, the department assists

students interested in study abroad programs. In addi-

tion, Lehigh has an array of summer programs, which

involve course work and/or internships in such countries

as China, the Czech Republic and the United Kingdom.

Every semester speakers with expertise on various aspects

of world affairs visit Lehigh. Some of the featured speak-

ers in the past were Dr. Shashi Tharoor, the U.N.

Under-Secretary-General for Communications and

Public Information; Dr. Ernesto Zedillo, Former presi-

dent of Mexico and Director of the Yale Center for the

Study of Globalization; and Retired General Anthony

Zinni, 40 Year Marine Corps Veteran and U.S. Peace

Envoy to the Middle East.

The student-run World Affairs Club sponsors a number

of activities each year, including student-faculty socials,

guest speakers and related programs. It organizes the

Model United Nations program to which Lehigh sends a

delegation each year. From time to time, delegations are

also sent to other student conferences, including West

Point and the U.S. Naval Academy.

The department has an active program in conjunction

with Career Services to help place students in intern-

ships. We strongly encourage students to obtain an

internship. Most of these internships are likely to be in

New York or Washington, D.C.

Upon Graduating: While a degree in international rela-

tions does not lead to a specific career in the way that,

for example, accounting or engineering does, a major in

international relations, by emphasizing clarity in speech

and writing, analytical skills, and a detailed knowledge of

world politics prepares students for careers in govern-

ment, journalism, law, non-governmental organizations,

international business, and teaching and research. Recent

IR graduates currently work in all of these fields. Some

have gone directly into careers upon graduating; others

have enrolled in graduate school prior to employment.

Undergraduate Courses

IR 10 (GS 10). Introduction to World Politics (4)

Introduction to the major principles, concepts, and theo-

ries of international relations, along with a historical

background focusing on the 19th and 20th centuries.

Topics to be covered include the nature of power, bal-

ance of power theories, national interest,

decision-making in foreign policy, theories of war and

expansion, patterns of cooperation, and international

political economy. Menon (SS)

IR 19. Current Issues in World Affairs (3)

This is a survey course designed primarily for non-IR

majors or minors. The purpose is to acquaint students

with some of the concepts and historical facts behind

current global issues. The content of this course will, in

part, be dictated by international events as they unfold.

Staff (SS)

IR 34. Society, Technology and War (4)

This course explores the links between war and society in

both directions: the impact of social, economic, and

technological change on how wars are fought and the

purposes for which they can be fought; as well as the

impact of war mobilization needs and of war itself on

how societies develop, including the rise of capitalism,

democratization, economic planning and other modern

institutions, and emancipation of disadvantaged groups

in society, such as blacks and women in the United

States. The American and French revolutions; the Civil

War; World Wars I and II; Vietnam; Afghanistan and

298 Lehigh University Course Catalog 2009-2010

Iraq; the law of war; war propaganda; atrocities; the

nuclear and information revolutions; the ongoing “revo-

lution in military affairs;” and current trends in the

status of military institutions in advanced societies.

Kaufmann (SS)

IR 36. International Terrorism (4)

Have we seen the peak of global terrorism, or is the

worst still to come? This course examines psychological,

religious, and political explanations of terrorism; legal

and moral statuses of terrorism; explanations for the

increasing scale of terrorism and the more frequent tar-

geting of Americans; major terrorist organizations,

structures, and means of operation; suicide terrorism;

threats and vulnerabilities facing the United States and

Western countries today; means of coping with terrorism

as an individual and through national policy; possible

future developments. Kaufmann (SS)

IR 56. European International Relations (4)

Examines the evolution of the modern states system in

Europe. Conceptual, theoretical and historical topics

include the transition from feudalism to the Westphalian

system, nationalism, imperialism, the causes of war and

attempted peace settlements, the Cold War, the

European Union, and the impact of the collapse of the

USSR on the political and strategic structure of Europe.

Bially Mattern, Briggs (SS)

IR 61. (ASIA 61) Pacific Asian International

Relations (4)

Introduction to Pacific Asian international relations,

with emphasis on post-1945 period: historical back-

ground; Cold War conflicts; China’s rise to power;

Japan’s growing role; Korea and the NIC’s; Southeast

Asia; U.S. and Russian policies; current and future

issues. Staff (SS)

IR 72. The United States in the Global Economy (4)

Political problems and policy issues arising out of the

economic relations between the U.S. and the rest of the

world. U.S. foreign economic policy. Decision-making

processes and political influences on policy. Economic

diplomacy. Declining U.S. economic pre-eminence.

Moon (SS)

IR 74. United States Foreign Policy (4)

Major themes and trends in U.S. foreign policy, includ-

ing the historical evolution of current issues and

institutions. Emphasis on critical examination of the

interests and values that underlie the goals of policy and

the beliefs that shape decisions on how to achieve those

goals. Also addresses the constitutional division of

authority, bureaucratic politics and processes, civil-mili-

tary relations, and public opinion. Narizny (SS)

IR 82. Middle East in World Affairs Since 1945 (4)

Rise of Turkish, Iranian, and Arab nationalism; creation

of Israel; decline of British and French power; growth of

U.S. and Soviet influence; Middle East as the world’s

major oil producer. Staff (SS)

IR 104 (ES 104). Political and Environmental

Geography (4)

Geographic foundations of political phenomena and

human impacts on the environment. Global focus on

geographic influences on growth and development of

states and empires, the nature and impacts of borders,

how people have altered patterns of climate, hydrology,

land forms, soils, and biota. Briggs (SS)

IR 105. Theories of International Relations (4)

The role of theory in historical explanation, prediction,

and policy. Issues of theory design and testing.

Important theoretical approaches to international rela-

tions, including Realism; the Democratic Peace; the

domestic politics of foreign policy; history and myth-

making; psychological explanations. Prerequisite: IR 10.

Bially Mattern (SS)

IR 118. Issues in International Relations (1-4)

Readings on selected themes in world politics, with

theme to change each semester. Offered on an occasional

basis only. Staff (SS)

IR 119. Issues in International Relations (1-4)

Readings on selected themes in world politics, with

theme to change each semester. Offered on an occasional

basis only. Staff (SS)

IR 120. Globalization and World Politics (4)

An exploration of the economic, political, cultural, and

military manifestations of globalization and the effects

on the internal order of states and the relations among

them. Prerequisite: IR 10. Menon, Moon (SS)

IR 123. Evolution of International Order (4)

Evaluates competing explanations for the origins of the

modern states system, the development of capitalism, the

rise of the West, and the nature of international order in

non-Western subsystems. Narizny (SS)

IR 125. (GS 125, POLS 125) International

Political Economy (4)

Principles governing the interaction between the eco-

nomic and political components of international

phenomena. Political causes and consequences of trade

and investment. Foreign economic policy and its rela-

tionship to domestic economic policy and other aspects

of foreign policy. Determinants of foreign economic pol-

icy. Prerequisites: Eco 1 and IR 10. Moon (SS)

IR 127. Research in International Relations (4)

Research skills in international relations. The role of the-

ory, models and evidence in the explanation of

international phenomena. Literature review; problem

formulation; theory construction; research design, meth-

ods and measures; collection, analysis and interpretation

of data; principles of hypothesis testing. Professional

writing, either through individual research projects

under faculty supervision or an apprenticeship in ongo-

ing faculty research projects. Prerequisite: Consent of the

instructor. Moon (SS)

IR 132. Nationalism and Ethnic Conflict (4)

The ideal of nationalism exerts a powerful pull on almost

all people everywhere. This course investigates the

sources, spread, and possible future decline of national-

ism and national identity, the manipulation of

nationalist feelings for political purposes, and the sources

of national and ethnic conflict. We will also consider

proposals for managing ethnic conflicts and their records

of success (or failure). We will study recent and current

cases, such as the Israeli-Palestinian conflict, ethnic rela-

tions in Iraq and Afghanistan, the Balkans, or others as

current events demand. Prospects for the futures of

nationalism, ethnic conflict, and ethnic conflict manage-

ment. Simulations of decision-making of groups

involved in ethnic conflicts. Kaufmann (SS)

IR 142. International Law (4)

This course deals with the nature and sources of interna-

International Relations 299

tional law and the major theoretical and historical devel-

opments that have created the legal system of states as it

now stands. Topics include: armed conflict, international

trade, human rights and international environmental

law. Prerequisite: IR 10. Gillroy (SS)

IR 143. (ES 143). Comparative Environmental

Law & Policy (4)

This course will analyze both comparative legal systems

and comparative domestic schemes of environmental

regulation exploring the range of alternatives for envi-

ronmental law and policy as practiced in various parts of

the world. Gillroy (SS)

IR 161. (ASIA 161) China in World Affairs (4)

China in world affairs, emphasizing role in Pacific Rim:

historical background; domestic politics; foreign and

security policies; relations with regional and global pow-

ers; policies toward Asia and Third World; current and

future issues. Staff (SS)

IR 163. (ASIA 163) Japan in World Affairs (4)

Japan in world affairs, emphasizing role in Pacific Rim:

historical background; domestic politics; foreign and

security policies; relations with regional and global pow-

ers; policies toward Asia and Third World; current and

future issues. Staff (SS)

IR 164. (ASIA 164, REL 164) Japan’s Response to

the West (4)

A survey of Japanese history and culture from 1500 to

the present, following the theme of Japan’s contact with

the West. What enabled Japan to modernize and

Westernize so successfully? Topics covered include: the

expulsion of Christianity, the first samurai mission to the

U.S., the postwar American occupation, and contempo-

rary issues. Readings include Japanese novels and short

stories (in translation). Kraft (SS)

IR 169. International Relations of Russia and

Eastern Europe (4)

The Soviet collapse and the emergence of Russia. Russia’s

relations with the other newly-independent states that

emerged following the disintegration of the Soviet

Union. The international relations of Eastern Europe

(including the Balkans). Menon (SS)

IR 177. International Relations of Latin America (4)

Survey of major international and domestic crises facing

Central and South America. Examines factors affecting

Latin American system of states such as international

debt, involvement of foreign powers, and social and

political instabilities. Barkey (SS)

IR 181. (Rel 181). Israel: Religion, Culture and

National Identity (4)

Silberstein (HU). See description under Religion Studies.

IR 222. Political Economy of North-South

Relations (4)

Political economy of relations between developed and

less developed countries. Issues arising from trade,

investment, and foreign aid. Consequences of North-

South transactions. Controversies over system structure

and reform proposals for international institutions

(e.g.World Bank, IMF, WTO). Prerequisite: IR 125 or

permission of instructor. Moon (SS)

IR 234. Great Power Politics (4)

Overview of the dynamics of strategic interaction

between great powers, including the causes of conflict,

origins of alliances, logic of coercion, sources of order,

and definition of national interests. Focus on the inter-

war period (multipolarity), the Cold War (biopolarity),

and the post-Cold War period (unipolarity). Prerequisite:

IR 10. Narizny (SS)

IR 235. International Security (4)

Explanations of international wars, civil wars, genocides,

and terrorism. Arms races, escalation, and conflict reso-

lution. The nuclear revolution and ballistic missile

defense. Tools of national grand strategy, including

alliances, deterrence, coercion, and institutions and

norms. Current issues and near future prospects. Case

studies. Prerequisite: IR 10. Kaufmann (SS)

IR 245. International Organization (4)

Examines how cooperation is achieved and sustained in

world politics. Under what circumstances does coopera-

tion take place? What role do formal international

organizations (such as the UN) play? What roles do

norms, values, and ethics play? Can cooperation last?

Questions pursued theoretically and in practical terms

across topical issues (e.g., human rights, poverty, the

environment, international law). Prerequisite: IR 10.

Bially Mattern (SS)

IR 246. (JOUR 246) International

Communication (4)

Lule (SS) See description under Journalism.

IR 302. Rise and Decline of Empires (4)

An overview of the expansion, over-extension, and col-

lapse of empires. Focus on alternative theories of empires

as well as historical cases. Prerequisite: IR 10. Menon

(SS)

IR 321. Economic Relations of Advanced

Industrial Societies (4)

Foreign economic policies of advanced industrial

nations. Bilateral and multilateral economic relations;

international economic regimes and institutions; interde-

pendence and cooperation; managing conflict.

Prerequisite: IR 125. Moon (SS)

IR 322. Poverty and Development (4)

Patterns and causes of poverty in poor countries.

Diagnosis of development problems and evaluation of

development planning. Explanations for choices of

development policy, especially issues of trade, foreign

aid, and foreign direct investment. Written and oral pres-

entation of individual country research. Corequisite: IR

222. Moon (SS)

IR 323. Political Economy of Newly

Industrializing Countries (4)

Issues of development, debt and adjustment in newly

industrializing countries. Analysis of the differences

between the development strategies adopted in Latin

America and East Asia. Explanations for patterns of suc-

cess and failure. Origins of underdevelopment; the

politics of failed development strategies; the challenge of

the increasingly competitive world economy and rela-

tions with the U.S. and other developed nations.

Prerequisite: IR 125. Barkey (SS)

IR 333 (ES 333/433). International Environmental

Law and Policy (4)

Gillroy (SS) See description under Environmental Studies

IR 334. Prospects for Peace in the 21st Century (4)

Will the 21st century be more or less peaceful than the

300 Lehigh University Course Catalog 2009-2010

“terrible 20th?” This course examines: globalization as a

force both for and against peace, the proliferation of

weapons of mass destruction, terrorism, nationalism and

communal conflict, humanitarian intervention and

peacekeeping, climate change and other issues affecting

prospects for peace in the near future. We will also con-

sider the special situation of American as the world’s sole

superpower, choices in U.S. policy between unilateral

and multilateral approaches to preserving global and

regional peace, and decision-making processes of the

U.S. and other important actors. Prerequisites: IR 10

and department permission. Kaufmann (SS)

IR 339 (ES 339/ES 439) Global Security and the

Environment (4)

Briggs (SS) See description under Environmental Studies

IR 340 (ES 340/ES 440). International

Environmental and Science Policy (4)

The politics of science behind global climate change,

transboundary environmental pollution, international

regulatory standards, and environmental risk assessment.

How international/global science communities operate,

how to communicate scientific research across cultures,

and how to translate scientific data into international

policy. Case studies include climate change, the ozone

hole, avian influenza, and HIV/AIDS. Briggs (SS)

IR 344. International Politics of Oil (4)

Historical influence of oil in international politics and

the role it plays today. Focus on differing views of pro-

ducers, such as Middle Eastern and Latin American

states, and consuming nations, largely the economically

developed Western states. Instructor permission required.

Barkey (SS)

IR 345. External Dimensions of Democratization (4)

Interdisciplinary analysis of international and transna-

tional influences on regime transitions. Addresses the

role of war, trade, colonial legacies, waves of democrati-

zation, socializations, demonstration effects, and

international law; the policies of the United States, EU,

OAS, UN, World Bank, and NGOs; and the efficacy of

different instruments of democracy promotion.

Prerequisite: IR 10. Narizny. (SS)

IR 346. Contemporary Ethical Dilemmas in World

Politics (4)

This course is designed to explore, challenge, and re-con-

ceptualize the boundaries of moral community and

ethical responsibility through such current dilemmas in

world politics as famine, terrorism, torture, genocide,

weapons of mass destruction, organized crime and

more. Prerequisite: IR 10. Bially Mattern (SS)

IR 347. Non-State Actors in a Globalized World (4)

Role of non-state political groups (e.g. international

advocacy organizations, multinational corporations, news

media, terrorists, etc.) in world affairs. Thematic focus

on globalization, the relationship between non-state and

state actors, and the implications of non-state actors for

the future of world order. Themes explored through past

and current events (e.g., the WTO demonstrations, 9-

11, the CNN effect, AIDs, anti-sweatshop campaigns.)

Prerequisite: IR 10. Bially Mattern (SS)

IR 354. International Relations of the Middle

East (4)

Importance of the Middle East in contemporary world

politics; strategic location and natural resources as factors

affecting interests of the great powers. Interplay of inter-

national, regional and internal forces. Prerequisite: IR 10

or 82. Staff (SS)

IR 364. (ASIA 364) International Relations of

Pacific Asia (4)

Research-oriented seminar on contemporary internation-

al relations of Pacific Asia. Special emphasis on China,

Japan and regional and global powers. Substantial

research paper on topic of student’s own choice is

required. Prerequisite: IR 61 or 161 or 163 or 164. Staff

(SS)

IR 367. Seminar in the International Relations of

Russia and other Post-Soviet States (4)

Analysis of foreign relations of Russia and the other four-

teen states that emerged after the collapse of the USSR.

Staff (SS)

IR 388. Honors Thesis in International Relations (4)

International relations majors with senior standing may

undertake an intensive, two-semester project under the

direct guidance of a faculty member in the student’s spe-

cial area of interest. Students who successfully complete

the thesis and whose GPA in the major at the time of

graduation is 3.5 or higher receive Departmental

Honors. Department permission required. May be

repeated for credit. See the Department or IR website

http://cas.lehigh.edu/ir for additional information. Staff.

(SS)

IR 390. Readings in International Relations (1-4)

Directed course of readings intended for students with

special competence or interest in fields of international

relations not fully covered by regular course offerings.

May be repeated for credit. Departmental permission

required. Staff (SS)

IR 391. Internship in International Relations (1-4)

Internship in public or private agency. May be repeated

for credit. Departmental permission required. Staff (SS)

IR 392. Independent Study (1-4)

This course enables students to work with faculty on

individual projects and material not covered by the cur-

rent course offerings. Department permission required.

Staff (SS)

IR 393. Seminar in International Relations (4)

Advanced seminar, comparable to other 300-level semi-

nars, that focuses on discussion and research on

specialized subjects in international relations. Variable

subject matter. May be repeated for credit. Junior stand-

ing and departmental permission required. Staff. (SS)

IR 394. Special Topics in International

Relations (1-4)

Intensive, research-oriented study for students with a

special competence or interest in fields of international

relations not fully covered by regular course offerings.

May be repeated for credit. Departmental permission

required. Staff (SS)

Japanese

See Listings under Modern Languages and Literature.

Jewish Studies 301

Jewish Studies

The Jewish studies minor, coordinated by the Philip and

Muriel Berman Center for Jewish Studies, provides stu-

dents with the opportunity to explore the history,

literature, religion, and social institutions of the Jewish

people from its inception to the present. The diverse

selection of courses highlights the interaction of Judaism

with other cultures and societies in Europe, the Middle

East, and the United States. The program is designed to

appeal to students with varied interests and fields of con-

centration. Students of psychology and sociology often

discover that courses in Jewish studies enhance their

understanding of such topics as individual and group

identity, prejudice and anti-Semitism, assimilation, and

religious-cultural pluralism. Students of history will find

that the study of Jewish society and culture enhances

their understanding of European and American culture.

Through the study of Jewish religion and philosophy, stu-

dents engage such issues as God, religious faith and doubt,

spirituality, moral responsibility, evil, and human suffer-

ing. By studying Judaism comparatively with another

religious tradition, students heighten their understanding

of each tradition. Studying Jewish literature introduces

students to a broad spectrum of literary forms and themes

from diverse periods and cultural settings.

The Berman Center for Jewish Studies supplements for-

mal course offerings through an extensive program of

lectures, colloquia, films, field trips, and other cultural

events. Lehigh professors conduct a “Lehigh in Israel”

summer program, conditions permitting. Students seek-

ing further information on programs in Israel and

available financial awards may contact Shirley Ratushny

at the Berman Center. Students should coordinate their

minor program in Jewish studies with the director of the

Center, Dr. Laurence J. Silberstein, Maginnes Hall.

Students pursuing a minor in Jewish studies must fulfill

16 credit hours from the following courses. (A maximum

of eight credit hours of Hebrew may be counted.)

Updated lists of courses are available from the Berman

Center, Maginnes 324.

HEBR 1 Elementary Modern Hebrew I (4)

HEBR 2 Elementary Modern Hebrew II (4)

HEBR 11 Intermediate Modern Hebrew I (4)

HEBR 12 Intermediate Modern Hebrew II (4)

HEBR 151 Hebrew Special Topics I (4)

HEBR 152 Hebrew Special Topics II (4)

IR 82 Middle East in World Affairs Since

1945 (4)

PHIL/REL 129 Jewish Philosophy (4)

PHIL 133 Medieval Philosophy (4)

REL 73 The Jewish Tradition (4)

REL 111 Jewish Scriptures/Old Testament (4)

REL 112 The Beginnings of Judaism and Jewish

Origins: Jewish Diversity in the Greco-

Roman World (4)

REL 121 Sources for the Life of Jesus: Jewish

and Christian Context (4)

REL 132 Hasidic Tales (4)

REL/WS 138 Women in Jewish History (4)

REL/ANTH 139 Jewish Folklore (4)

REL 150 Judaism in the Modern World (4)

REL 152 American Judaism (4)

REL 153 The Spiritual Quest in Contemporary

Jewish Life (4)

REL/HIST 154 The Holocaust: History and

Meaning (4)

REL 155 Responses to the Holocaust (4)

REL 156 Israel, Zionism, and the Renewal of

Judaism (4)

REL/WS 158 Sex and Gender in Judaism (4)

REL 174 Contemporary Theology (4)

REL/IR 181 Israel: Religion, Culture, National

Identity (4)

REL 186 Judaism in Israel and the United

States (4)

REL 230 Kabbalah: The Jewish Mystical

Tradition (4)

REL 231 Classic Jewish Texts (4)

REL 371 Directed Readings (1-4)

Journalism and Communication

Professors. Sharon M. Friedman, M.A. (Penn State),

director of science and environmental writing program; Jack

Lule, Ph.D. (Georgia)

Associate Professors. Walter W. Trimble, M.A. (Ohio

State) chair; Kathy Olson, Ph.D. (University of North

Carolina)

Assistant Professor. John Jirik, Ph.D (University of

Texas); Jeremy Littau, Ph.D. (University of Missouri)

Lecturer. Nancy S. Ross, M.A.T. (Cincinnati).

Adjunct Professors. Kenneth Friedman, Ph.D. (Penn

State); Glenn Kranzley, B.A. (Penn State); Robert

Rosenwein, Ph.D. (Michigan); William White, M.A.

(Ohio State).

The Department of Journalism and Communication

offers major and minor programs in journalism and sci-

ence and environmental writing, and an interdisciplinary

communication minor.

Journalism is crucial to the public life of a democracy. At

its best, journalism serves as a watchdog to government,

offers a voice for the powerless at home and abroad,

entertains and instructs the public, represents the views

of varied constituencies, monitors and protects the envi-

ronment and public resources, and provides a common

memory for a people.

The purpose of the journalism program is to provide stu-

dents with the knowledge and skills to fulfill such roles.

The program emphasizes research, writing, editing, and

critical thinking and analysis. Students integrate online

technology with legal and ethical thinking and a global

perspective that will prepare them for numerous oppor-

tunities in and out of journalism.

In the journalism major, students take courses in news

and feature writing, editing and design, a professional

internship, and varied courses in online journalism.

Supported by the endowed Rodale Online

Communication Program, the department has a national

reputation in online journalism. All courses have online

research and writing components.

A second major available to students is the science and

environmental writing program. Students learn to write

about pure and applied scientific research, technology,

engineering, the environment and medicine and health

for a variety of audiences ranging from the general pub-

302 Lehigh University Course Catalog 2009-2010

lic to scientists and engineers in industry and govern-

ment. Students can also gain experience in the science

and environmental writing field research program. A

minor in science and environmental writing is available

that may be valuable for students with majors in science

or engineering.

An interdisciplinary minor in communication is offered

for students interested in developing oral communica-

tion skills and a better understanding of how people

share meaning through persuasive use of rhetoric, logic

and symbols in public, one-to-one and small group com-

munication.

Career opportunities are numerous for graduates of the

department.

Students find work in traditional journalism organiza-

tions, such as newspapers, wire services, magazines,

cable, television and radio stations, and other media out-

lets. Students find work too in new media, such as web

sites and other digital production activities.

Students also find work in public relations positions,

with responsibilities in government, corporations, hospi-

tals, health care organizations, universities, sports

information, nonprofit agencies and other groups.

A background in journalism, with its emphasis on

research and writing, also proves to be excellent prepara-

tion for many other fields and provides a fine basis for

the study and practice of law, graduate study in a variety

of disciplines, government service, teaching and business

management.

Students in science and environmental writing can

expect to pursue careers in science, health and environ-

mental journalism in both the traditional and online

media; public relations for scientific societies, environ-

mental organizations, government agencies, universities

or hospitals; technical writing for industry and govern-

ment agencies, and other areas, such as management,

administration and teaching. The program also prepares

students for graduate study in science or environmental

writing, journalism and other disciplines.

The interdisciplinary minor in communication will be

useful to students interested in organizational and writ-

ten communication, law, business, philosophy,

government, marketing, teaching, telecommunication or

other careers where successful communication is impor-

tant.

Required Math Course. Understanding statistical infor-

mation has become extremely important in modern

society. MATH 12, Basic Statistics, is required for stu-

dents taking a journalism or science and environmental

writing major. Students should take MATH 12 to fulfill

the college’s distribution requirement. ECO 145,

Statistical Methods, is an acceptable alternative. For sci-

ence/science writing double majors, calculus will be

considered as a substitute for statistics.

Journalism Major

Core Courses

JOUR 1 Brown & White (1)

JOUR 2 Brown & White (1)

JOUR 3 Brown & White (1)

JOUR 4 Brown & White (1)

JOUR 11 News Writing (4)

JOUR 13 Editing (4)

JOUR 14 Publication Design (2)

JOUR 122 Media Ethics & Law (4)

Advanced Courses

JOUR 211 Reporting (4) *

Or JOUR 212 Feature Writing (4)*

Or JOUR 218 Freelance Writing (4)*

JOUR 361 Internship (4)

Senior Seminar: Journalism or Communication course at

300 level (4)

* (JOUR 211, JOUR 212 and JOUR 218 fulfill junior

writing intensive requirement)

Required Electives

Two additional Journalism or Communication courses;

one of them at the 200 level or above (8)

Total credits: (38)

Collateral Requirements

Students must also complete a second major, OR a

minor outside of the Department of Journalism and

Communication with a minimum of 15 credits.

Journalism/Science and Environmental

Writing Major

Core Courses

JOUR 1 Brown and White (1)

JOUR 2 Brown and White (1) or

JOUR 231 Science Writing Practicum (1)

JOUR 123 or 311 Basic Science and Technical

Writing (4) or

JOUR 11 News Writing (4)

JOUR 13 Editing (4)

JOUR 14 Publication Design (2)

JOUR 211 Reporting (4)

Advanced Courses

JOUR/STS 124 Politics of Science (4)

JOUR 125 Environment, the Public and the

MassMedia (4)

JOUR/STS 323 Controversies (4)

JOUR 361 Internship (4)

Required Electives

One additional Journalism or Communication course. (4)

Total credits: (36)

Collateral Requirements

Students must also complete 15-16 credits in science for

the journalism/science and environmental writing major.

Required science courses. A minimum of 15-16 credits

in the physical, biological, environmental or social sci-

ences or engineering is required. These hours can be

concentrated in any one area or distributed among all

five areas, although an area concentration is recommend-

ed. Dual majors in journalism/science and

environmental writing and a science are encouraged.

Science courses should be chosen in consultation with

the major adviser.

Science and environmental writing field research pro-

gram. Available to science, environmental and technical

writing students at the junior or senior level, this pro-

gram provides practical experience in scientific research

and science writing for students who work on and write

about research projects directed by university scientists

and engineers. Another segment of the program allows

students to attend major scientific meetings as fully

accredited science reporters. Students observe profession-

Journalism and Communication 303

al science writers in action and write their own stories

about the scientific sessions and press conferences held at

the meetings.

Journalism Minor

Students who wish to declare a minor program in jour-

nalism must be majors in another discipline and take the

following:

JOUR 1-2 Brown & White (2)

JOUR 11 News Writing (4)

JOUR 13 Editing (4)

JOUR 211 Reporting (4)

Or JOUR 212 Feature Writing (4)

Or JOUR 218 Freelance Writing (4)

One other Journalism course at or above the 100 level (4)

Total credits: (18)

Science and Environmental Writing

Minor

JOUR 1 Brown and White (1) or

JOUR 231 Science Writing Practicum (1)

JOUR 11 News Writing (4) or

JOUR 123 Basic Science and Technical Writing (4)

JOUR 124 Politics of Science (4)

JOUR 125 Environment, the Public and the Mass

Media (4)

JOUR 323 Controversies (4)

Total credits: (17)

Mass Communication Minor

Purpose: Mass communication plays a major role in how

information is disseminated and how societies are

shaped. As traditional forms of mass communication

change rapidly and new forms of communication arise,

it is more important than ever to understand the way

that media work, and to learn to evaluate the messages.

This minor will focus on the roles that mass communi-

cation and the media play, how they are changing, and

their impact on society. Students will learn to evaluate

and interpret media messages so that they can under-

stand and participate in this increasingly complicated

world. The minor requires 15-16 credit hours, with a

minimum of four courses. The required course is

COMM 100, Media and Society. Three other courses

will be chosen from the list below in consultation with

the minor adviser.

Required course:

COMM 100 Media and Society (4)

Plus three of the following:

COMM 102 How to Watch TV (4)

COMM 112 Children and Television (4)

COMM 135 Human Communication (4)

COMM 143 Persuasion and Influence (4)

COMM 220 Public Relations (4) *

COMM 248 Global Communication (4)

COMM 326 Seminar in Communication Issues (4)*

COMM 327 Mass Communication and Society (4)*

JOUR 116 Risky Business (4)

JOUR 122 Media Ethics and Law (4)

JOUR 125 Environment, the Public and the Mass

Media (4)

JOUR 246 International Communication (4)

JOUR 323 Controversies in Science, Health and

Environment (4)

MKT 313 Integrated Marketing

Communication (3) *

POLS 329 Propaganda, Media and American

Politics (4)

SSP 302 The Sociology of Cyberspace (4)

* Some of the courses listed above require prerequisites.

In addition to this list, new courses may be offered from

time to time. Students should check with the program

director for an updated list.

Prerequisites for Journalism Courses

NOTE: Journalism and Communication courses build

on one another. Some courses thus require prerequisites

before students can register for the class. Check the

course schedule each semester.

Media Internships

All majors in journalism and journalism/science and

environmental writing take professional internships dur-

ing their senior year or the preceding summer. The

internships provide real-world experience with newspa-

pers, magazines, cable, television or radio stations, web

sites or in public relations settings. Science writing

minors may take an internship instead of working on

The Brown and White.

Course Listings

JOUR 1. Brown and White (1) every semester

This course is a student’s first semester on the staff of the

semi-weekly undergraduate newspaper. Students register

for this course, attend a meeting on the first Wednesday

of the semester, and are placed on the staff. Because this

is an introductory training class, JOUR 1 is for students

with freshman or sophomore standing; juniors only with

consent of department chair. Lule/Trimble (ND)

JOUR 2-8. Brown and White (1) every semester

Enrollment constitutes continued membership on the

staff of the semi-weekly undergraduate newspaper. These

courses are taken consecutively after a student has com-

pleted JOUR 1. For a second semester on the newspaper,

a student registers for JOUR 2. For a third semester,

JOUR 3. For a fourth semester, JOUR 4. And so on.

Prerequisite: JOUR 1. Lule/Trimble (ND)

JOUR 9. Brown and White photography (1) every

semester

Enrollment constitutes membership on the photography

staff of the semi-weekly undergraduate newspaper.

Students should have basic camera skills and knowledge

of digital photography. Classes will include review of

these subjects and more advanced techniques in digital

darkroom techniques. Members of the class work on a

series of assignments for the newspaper. Students should

have their own digital SLR camera equipment and will

be expected to provide examples of their work for admis-

sion to the class. Repeatable up to 8 credits. Trimble

(ND)

JOUR 10 Brown and White (1-2) every semester

Enrollment constitutes an editorial position on the staff

of the semi-weekly undergraduate newspaper. Editors are

chosen by the instructors and the newspaper’s editorial

board. May be repeated for a maximum of eight credits.

Prerequisites: JOUR 1 and permission of the department

chair. Lule/Trimble

304 Lehigh University Course Catalog 2009-2010

JOUR 11. News Writing (4) every semester

Preparation and practice in gathering and writing news;

definition and components of news; structure and style

of the news story; introduction to interviewing and edit-

ing. Jour 11 is for students with freshman or sophomore

standing; juniors and seniors only with consent of

department chair. (ND)

JOUR 13. Editing (2-4) every semester

Study of and practice in editing and rewriting stories for

newspapers and magazines; fact-checking; headline writ-

ing; ethics. Prerequisite: Jour 11 or Jour 123. Trimble,

Olson (ND)

JOUR 14. Publication Design (2) every semester

Study of and practice in techniques of newspaper and

magazine design, including typography, grids, and use of

photographs and other artwork; microcomputer-based

desktop publishing. Prerequisite: Jour 11 or Jour 123.

Trimble, Olson (ND)

JOUR 101. Media, Sports and Society (4) summer

Analysis of social, political and economic implications of

media sports coverage; emphasis placed on media cover-

age of events of international scope, such as the World

Cup, World Series and the Olympics; special attention

paid to the role of the sports press in coverage of issues

such as AIDS, racism, sexism, drug use and terrorism.

Lule (SS)

JOUR 111. Sportswriting (4) summer

Principles and practice of writing about sports for gener-

al print and specialized publications; emphasis placed on

instruction in reporting, writing and editing; topics cov-

ered include the history of sports journalism; recent

trends in the field; ethical considerations, and the explo-

ration of social and political issues through sportswriting.

Lule (ND)

JOUR 114. Technical Communication (4) summer

This online course covers basic tools needed to write

about all kinds of science and technical information for

academic papers, term papers, proposals, reports, theses

and dissertations. Involves practice with feedback on def-

initions, descriptions, cause and effect relationships,

process writing, concept maps, graphics, classification,

comparison and more. K Friedman (ND)

JOUR 115 (ES 115). Communicating About the

Environment (4)

Introduction to the need for and ways to communicate

about environmental issues to laypersons, government

officials, journalists, members of the judiciary and tech-

nical experts. Explores case studies of good and bad

communication about environmental issues. Internet

communication, including the efficacy of placing gov-

ernmental reports and databases on the Web for public

consumption, will be evaluated. (SS)

JOUR 116 (ES 116) (HMS 116). Risky

Business (4) summer

This course explores the risks and effects of environmen-

tal contamination on human health and behavior as well

as the role of the mass media in alerting citizens to

potential environmental health risks. Environmental top-

ics vary but usually include air and water pollution,

endocrine disrupters and radioactive waste. S. Friedman

(SS)

JOUR 122. Media Ethics and Law (4) fall

First Amendment theory and history; ethical and legal

issues involving libel, privacy, obscenity, newsgathering,

access, and fair trials; national and international concerns

over censorship, prior restraint and manipulation and

control of information. Lule, Olson (SS)

JOUR 123. Basic Science and Technical

Writing (4) every semester

Study of and practice in writing about scientific and

technical subjects for audiences ranging from the general

public to scientists and engineers. Starts with basic sci-

ence writing for lay audiences, emphasizing organization

and clear writing techniques. As the course progresses,

material becomes more technical, concentrating on how

to write effective technical reports, descriptions, papers

and memoranda. Also explores problems of conveying

highly complex technical information to multiple audi-

ences, factors that influence science communication to

the public, and interactions between scientists and jour-

nalists. K. Friedman (SS)

JOUR 124. (STS 124) Politics of Science (4) fall

Analysis of the multi-dimensional interaction between

the federal government and the scientific community.

Explores historical growth of the science-government

connection, the scientific establishment both past and

present, and the role of scientific advice to the White

House and Congress. Also examines scientific ethics,

public attitudes toward science, science-society interac-

tions and case studies of scientific controversies. S.

Friedman (SS)

JOUR 125 (ES125). Environment, the Public and

the Mass Media (4) fall

Extensive exploration of local, national and international

environmental problems and their social, political and

economic impacts. Analysis of mass media coverage of

complex environmental issues and the media’s effects on

public opinion and government environmental policies.

Examination of environmental journalism principles and

practices in the United States and around the world. S.

Friedman (SS)

JOUR 141. Photojournalism (4)

Ethics and history of photojournalism; instruction and

practice in basic camera techniques; scanning and digital

manipulation of black and white and color photographs

using Adobe PhotoShop; cropping and sizing photo-

graphs and production of layouts using Quark Express.

Trimble (ND)

JOUR 166. Beyond Google – Internet Research:

Principles and Practice (4)

Students often turn first to the Internet for research. Yet

they often are unaware of the promise and pitfalls of

Internet research. This course has three objectives: 1)

Students will learn methods of identifying and locating

resources on the Internet, including resources not

reached by traditional search engines; 2) Students will be

introduced to steps for the assessment and evaluation of

information gathered from the Internet; 3) Students will

explore issues of access, privacy and other legal and ethi-

cal questions that arise in Internet research. Lule (SS)

JOUR 211 Reporting (4) every semester

Principles and practice of news reporting; techniques for

gathering, organizing and writing news; emphasis placed

on story conception, interviewing methods, library skills,

Internet research, news style and clear, concise writing.

Students will develop, report and write numerous stories.

Students will also gain greater understanding of funda-

Journalism and Communication 305

mental reporting concepts in relation to the use of

sources, accuracy, fairness, privacy and other issues of

professional responsibility. Prerequisites: JOUR 11 or

JOUR 123 and JOUR 13. Lule (SS)

JOUR 212. Feature Writing (4) every semester

Conceiving and developing feature stories for newspapers

and magazines; interviewing techniques; writing non-fic-

tion using the techniques of the novelist; marketing

free-lance projects. Prerequisite: JOUR 11, 123 and

JOUR 13. Trimble (ND)

JOUR 218. Freelance Writing (4)

Study of and practice in reporting and writing for maga-

zines, newspapers and other literary and technical

publications. Learning to find the right approach for a

particular publication and to write in that publication’s

style. Practice in analyzing publication content and audi-

ences, and in writing queries that will catch an editor’s

attention. Learn research and interviewing skills and read

works by well-known writers. Prerequisite: JOUR 11 or

JOUR 123, and JOUR 13. Staff. (ND)

JOUR 220. Reporting on Business and

Economics (3)

The principles behind the economy, the markets and

companies and how to report on them; the role of busi-

ness reporting in the media; the use of computer

technology in business reporting. Prerequisite: JOUR 11

or JOUR 123 and ECO 1. (SS)

JOUR 231. Science Writing Practicum (1-4) spring

On-site experience as accredited science reporter at

major scientific meetings, or writing and research in uni-

versity laboratories as part of science writing field

research program. May be repeated for a maximum of

eight credits. Prerequisites: JOUR 11 or JOUR 123 or

JOUR 311, junior standing, and consent of the depart-

ment chair. S. Friedman (ND)

JOUR 232. Journalism Practicum (1-4) every

semester

Practical application of journalism principles and skills in

semester-long projects, as well as various on- and off-

campus work experiences. Course is designed to provide

credit for supervised experience, particularly through

study abroad programs, that does not meet the more rig-

orous, required internship. May be repeated for

maximum of eight credits. Prerequisites: consent of

department chair. Lule (ND)

JOUR 240. Writing for Broadcasting (4) spring

Basic writing style for radio and television news, and

scripting newscasts in a variety of formats, including

electronic news gathering and voiceovers. Scripting and

storyboarding for commercials and public service

announcements. A three-hour writing lab is included. A

portion of the course is devoted to study and discussion

of issues related to television news coverage. Staff (ND)

JOUR 242 Web Writing & Design (4)

This course examines the ways in which writing and

design are influenced by online technology. Students will

learn principles and practice of hypertext, Web writing

and Web design and will plan and create Web sites that

tell stories using the unique features of online technolo-

gy. Prerequisites: JOUR 11 or JOUR 123 or JOUR 228.

Olson (ND)

JOUR 246. (IR 246) International

Communication (4)

The subject matter is crucial to understanding modern

life: the role of international news media in world affairs.

The class studies the social, political and economic con-

texts that frame the reporting of international events by

U.S. news media, such as politics, war, disasters, and

other crises, as well as U.S. reporting on international

issues, such as poverty, disease, and environmental

change. The course also surveys reporting practices in

nations around the world, including the varying systems

of journalism and mass media and the brutal censorship

and repression facing many foreign journalists. (SS) Lule

JOUR 311. Science and Technical Writing (3-4)

every semester

Study of and practice in writing about scientific and

technical issues for multiple audiences. Emphasis on

developing effective writing and organizational skills and

translating scientific information for a wide range of

audiences. Similar in content to JOUR 123, but should

be taken instead by upperclassmen (3-4 credits) and

graduate students (3-4 credits). K. Friedman (SS) 4 cred-

its for upperclassmen and 3 for graduate students

JOUR 312. Advanced Science Writing (3-4)

Further practice, on individual basis, in science writing

techniques. Prerequisite: JOUR 123 or 311. S. Friedman

(ND)

JOUR 313. Special Topics in Science

Communication (1-4)

Research or writing involving a topic, medium or issue

in science, environmental or technical communication

not covered in other courses. Prerequisite: Eight hours in

science or environmental writing or consent of the

department chair. S. Friedman (SS)

JOUR 314. Technical Communication (3-4)

summer

This online course covers basic tools needed to write

about all kinds of science and technical information for

academic papers, term papers, proposals, reports, theses

and dissertations. Involves practice with feedback on def-

initions, descriptions, cause-and-effect relationships,

process writing, concept maps, graphics, classification,

comparison and more. Taken by seniors for 4 credits and

graduate students for 3 credits. K. Friedman (ND)

JOUR 320. Journalism Proseminar (3) spring

Intensive research and writing on contemporary issues

and problems facing the mass media; methods and

approaches for studying the mass media; course culmi-

nates with a seminar thesis based on original and

comprehensive research. Prerequisite: nine hours in jour-

nalism, public relations or communication or consent of

the department chair. Lule (SS)

JOUR 323. (STS 323) (HMS 323)

Controversies (4) spring

Exploration of science, health and environmental contro-

versies from the dual perspectives of scientific

uncertainty and mass media coverage. Examines genetic

engineering and biotechnology, environmental health

risks, and human behavior research. Includes discussion

of ethical and social responsibilities and interactions of

scientists, journalists and the public. S. Friedman (SS)

306 Lehigh University Course Catalog 2009-2010

JOUR 324 (SSP 324). Health Communication and

the Internet (4) spring

This interdisciplinary class examines the role of the

Internet in changing the way lay people, the mass media

and medical organizations think and behave regarding

health and medical care. It explores the nature of tradi-

tional and online health communication, and highlights

online health issues such as access, quality of informa-

tion, economics, privacy, and ethics. S. Friedman and J.

Lasker (SS)

JOUR 325. Seminar in Journalism and

Communication Issues (3-4)

A seminar focusing on contemporary issues and prob-

lems facing the mass media. Topics vary. Taken by

seniors for 4 credits and graduate students for 3 credits.

Prerequisite: nine hours in journalism or communication

or consent of the department chair. (ND)

JOUR 330 Critical Studies in Journalism (4)

This course will make students into critical news con-

sumers by giving them the tools to better understand

how journalism works. It combines theoretical perspec-

tives on news with primary source material produced by

and about journalists. Students will analyze theoretical

material on journalism alongside articles and broadcasts

appearing in the media, interviews with journalists, trade

articles, and professional reviews about crises and turning

points in journalism. Topics include models of journalis-

tic practice, journalistic values and norms, gatekeeping

and sourcing practices, storytelling formats in news, and

challenges to journalism such as ethical problems and

celebrity. Prerequisites: Jour 11 and Jour 13 or consent

of the department chair. Meltzer (ND)

JOUR 361. Internship (4)

Professionally supervised work on newspapers, maga-

zines, Web sites radio and television stations, or with

public relations organizations. Some internships involve

science writing. May be repeated for a maximum of

eight credits. Prerequisite: Senior standing and declared

major in journalism or science writing. S. Friedman

(ND)

JOUR 365. Advanced Research and Reporting (4)

fall

Planning, researching and writing comprehensive news

projects; special attention paid to computer-assisted

research, online resources, investigative techniques, inter-

viewing skills, reporting on local, county, state and

federal governments and courts; emphasis also given to

organizing and writing in-depth articles. Prerequisites:

eight hours in journalism and senior standing or permis-

sion of department chair. Lule, Trimble (ND)

JOUR 366. Online Journalism (3-4) spring

The course examines the social, cultural, political, legal

and economic influence of online technology on journal-

ism and the role of journalism in society. Emphasizing

critical thinking and analysis, the course studies the ways

in which digital technology has changed the way journal-

ists research, write, edit and design. Taken by seniors for

4 credits and graduate students for 3 credits.

Prerequisite: JOUR 11 or JOUR 123, JOUR 122, or

consent of department chair. Lule, Olson (SS).

JOUR 389. College Scholar Project (1-8)

Opportunity for college scholars to pursue an extended

project. May be repeated for credit. College-wide course

designation. Transcript will identify department in which

project was completed. Prerequisite: consent of depart-

ment chair. Staff (ND)

JOUR 390. Honors Thesis (1-4)

Directed undergraduate research thesis required of stu-

dents who apply for and qualify for graduation with

departmental honors. Staff (ND)

JOUR 391. Special Topics in Journalism (1-4)

Directed research or writing involving a subject or issue

in journalism not covered in other courses. May be

repeated for credit. Prerequisite: 12 hours in journalism

or consent of the department chair. Staff (ND)

Communication Courses

COMM 100: Media and Society (4)

This is an introduction to the roles of mass media in

U.S. and global society, exploring the forces that shape

newspapers, magazines, television, radio, and the

Internet. Students will gain an understanding of the way

mass media operate, discuss the controversies surround-

ing their activities, learn the vocabulary of media

businesses, understand social consequences of media

behavior, and consider theoretical and conceptual frame-

works for understanding the present and the future of

mass communication. (SS)

COMM 102. How to Watch TV (4) summer

Analysis and discussion of television programming from

the standpoint of its potential effects on audience per-

ceptions, public opinion, social issues and values,

individual learning, and behavior. Programming viewed

both inside and outside the classroom includes news pro-

grams, news magazines, talk shows, sitcoms, dramas,

cartoons, soap operas, commercials, and infomercials. To

help focus discussions, students are assigned appropriate

readings from the popular media and social science

research. Staff. (ND)

COMM 112. Children and Television (4) summer

The course examines the many social science research

issues surrounding television for children, including

questions about cartoon and program violence, unethical

advertising, the role of the FCC and stereotypes. The

course will also examine television about children, such

as media coverage of homelessness, health care, poverty,

hunger and famine, which take their biggest toll on chil-

dren. Lule. (SS)

COMM 130. Public Speaking (4) every semester

Applying the principles of public speaking to making

informative and persuasive presentations effectively.

Emphasis on speech composition and effective oral com-

munication skills. Ross (HU)

COMM 135 (SSP 135). Human

Communication (4)

Processes and functions of human communication in

relationships and groups. Rosenwein. (SS)

COMM 143. Persuasion and Influence (4)

The social, symbolic, and rhetorical means of persuasion

and how this persuasive influence is expressed in politics,

advertising, and the mass media. Students will gain expe-

rience in evaluating and creating persuasive

communication messages and campaigns. Meltzer. (SS)

COMM 160. Public Speaking (for IBE

Students) (4) every semester

Applying the principles of public speaking to making

Latin American Studies 307

informative and persuasive presentations effectively.

Emphasis on speech composition and effective oral com-

munication skills. This class is limited to students in the

Integrated Business and Engineering Honors Program.

Ross (HU)

COMM 220 Public Relations (4)

Study of public relations principles and writing strate-

gies. Analysis of the ethical, legal and public opinion

environments for public relations as well as development

of problem solving and communication strategies for a

variety of audiences, including the mass media.

Preparation of publicity materials; planning and con-

ducting news conferences; writing brochures, newsletters

and reports, and informational and persuasive speeches

for others. Prerequisites: JOUR 11 or JOUR 123, and

JOUR 13. Staff. (ND)

COMM 248 (GS 248) Global Communication (4)

This class studies, from an historical and cultural per-

spective, how globalization shapes and is shaped by

communication and media structures and processes, with

special emphasis on transnational media corporations

and their interaction with cultures around the globe.

Topics include: globalization, media and culture; mass

media and development; the flow of entertainment pro-

grams and debates on cultural imperialism; media and

migration; the imbalanced flow of information in the

world; the debate on the New World Information Order;

and forms of resistance to transnational media from

world governance institutions, such as UNESCO, state

regulatory responses, and alternative media, such as citi-

zen blogs and pirate radio. Staff. SS

COMM 325. Special Topics in Communication (1-4)

Research and writing or performance involving a topic,

medium or issue in journalism, speech or communica-

tion theory not covered in other courses. Prerequisite:

nine hours in journalism, or communication and con-

sent of department chair. (SS)

COMM 326 Seminar in Communication Issues (3-4)

A seminar focusing on contemporary issues in communi-

cation. Topics vary. Taken by seniors for 4 credits and

graduate students for 3 credits. Prerequisite: nine hours

in journalism or communication or consent of the

department chair. (ND)

COMM 327 (SSP 327). Mass Communication and

Society (4)

A review of theories and research on the relationship of

mass communication to social processes. Intensive analy-

sis of selected media products (e.g., TV news, dramas,

and sitcoms; films; print; music videos, etc.).

Prerequisites: Anth 1 or SSP 5 or SSP 21 or Anth 11 or

Anth 12. Rosenwein. (SS)

COMM 331. Business and Professional

Speaking (4) fall

The principles of oral communication as applied to busi-

ness and professional situations. Professional

presentations, small group interaction and interpersonal

communication in the business setting. Prerequisite: jun-

ior or senior standing. Ross (ND)

Languages

Courses are listed alphabetically under Modern

Languages and Literature and Classical Studies.

Latin American Studies

The minor in Latin American studies is designed for stu-

dents who wish to develop an understanding of a

neighboring region that is of vital importance to the

United States. Courses in archeology, foreign policy, his-

tory, language and literature, and politics, along with

independent studies in the visual arts and museum stud-

ies, allow students to explore various aspects of Latin

American cultures and societies from different discipli-

nary perspectives. The minor contributes to a liberal arts

education by offering students an international vantage

point from which they can examine their own society

and prepares them to meet the challenges of an increas-

ingly interdependent world. Additionally, the

unprecedented movement of peoples and ideas between

the American continents in recent decades makes the

study of this region of the world an essential component

for understanding the history and culture of the expand-

ing U.S. Latino population. The minor in Latin

American Studies complements, therefore, major con-

centrations in disciplines that have either an

international or a domestic focus, and it enhances the

relevance of a Lehigh education by preparing students to

be citizens of a culturally diverse society and, more gen-

erally, of the Americas.

The minor program requires 15 to 16 credit hours of

coursework. In addition to regular Lehigh offerings, stu-

dents may receive minor credit for appropriate courses at

other LVAIC institutions, study abroad programs in

Latin America, and various Lehigh-faculty-led programs,

such as “Lehigh in Martinique” and “Lehigh in Costa

Rica” (both offered during the winter term). Students are

encouraged to take advantage of extracurricular activities

sponsored by the Latin American Studies Program,

which include guest speakers, exhibits, films, etc.

For further information or to coordinate their minor

program, students should contact Dr. Antonio Prieto,

Director, Latin American Studies Program, 529

Maginnes Hall. For minor declaration forms, please go

to the Area Studies office, 537 Maginnes Hall.

Requirements (8 credits).

A. History/Culture (4 credits).

Choose one of the following:

HIST 49 History of Latin America (4)

HIST 50 History of Latin America (4)

SPAN 152 The Cultural Evolution of Latin

America (taught in Spanish) (4)

B. Language (4 credits).

SPAN 12 Intermediate Spanish II (4)

Elective courses (7-8 credits) chosen from the fol-

lowing courses.

Choose courses from the following list. Credit may be

received for other courses, in consultation with the Pro-

gram Director.

ART 269 Special Topics in Art History (1-3)

ART 273 Special Topics in Studio Practice (1-3)

ART 370 Special Topics in Museum Studies (1-4)

ART 375 Museum Internship (3)

ARTS 196 Sustainable Development: The Costa

Rican Experience (3-4)

AAS 148 Cultural Diversity in the Caribbean (4)

ANTH 178 Mesoamerican Archeology (3)

308 Lehigh University Course Catalog 2009-2010

ANTH 394 Field School in Anthropology (4-8)

HIST 49 History of Latin America (4)

HIST 50 History of Latin America (4)

HIST 341 Mexico and Central America (3-4)

HIST 342 Argentina, Brazil, and Chile (3-4)

HIST 368 Seminar in Latin American History (4)

IR 177 International Relations of Latin

America (4)

IR 222 Political Economy of North-South

Relations (4)

IR 323 Political Economy of Newly

Industrializing Countries (4)

MLL 51 Contemporary Hispanic-American

Literature (4)

MLL 53 The Hispanic World and Its

Culture (4)

POLS 222 Politics of Developing Nations (4)

POLS 335 Latin American Political Systems (4)

POLS 336 US Foreign Policy and Latin

America (4)

POLS 337 Religion and Politics in Latin

America (4)

POLS 342 (WS 342) Gender and Third World

Development (4)

SPAN 152 Cultural Evolution of Latin

America (4)

SPAN 211 Business Spanish (4)

SPAN 213 Approaches to Reading Cultural

Productions in Spanish (4)

SPAN 263 The Spanish American Short Story (4)

SPAN 265 Spanish and Latin American

Cinema (4)

SPAN 275 (WS 275) Introduction to Hispanic Women

Writers (4)

SPAN 276 Contemporary Literature of the

Southern Cone (4)

SPAN 320 Literature of the Spanish Caribbean (4)

SPAN 321 Children and Adolescents in

Contemporary Spanish American

Literature (4)

SPAN 322 The Short Novel in Contemporary

Spanish American Literature (4)

SPAN 323 Literature and Revolution in

Contemporary Cuba (4)

SPAN 325 Hispanic Literature of the United

States (4)

SPAN 326 (WS 326) Tradition and Resistance: Women

Writers of Latin America (4)

SPAN 342 The New Narrative in Spanish

American Literature (4)

SPAN 345 Testimonial Writing in the Hispanic

World (4)

SPAN 346 (WS 346) Contemporary Hispanic Women

Writers: The Novelists (4)

Law

Professors. Matthew A. Melone, J.D. (Pennsylvania),

C.P.A.; George A. Nation III, J.D. (Villanova).

Adjunct professors. Jeanne M. Liedtka, J.D. (Virginia);

Patrick F. McCormick, J.D. (Ohio Northern); Nancy

Schneiderman, J.D. (Harvard).

The following undergraduate law courses are offered

through the Perella Department of Finance:

Undergraduate Courses

LAW 101. Introduction to Law (3)

A study of the nature and function of law and the legal

system, the study of legal reasoning through the use of

the case method.

LAW 201. Legal Environment of Business (3)

The study of the legal relationships of business and gov-

ernment, business and society and the individual and

society. The case method is used to develop analytical

skills. Introduction to contract law and the law of sales

underlying the free market system. Prerequisite: ECO 1

LAW 202. Business Law (3)

The law of agency, business organizations, secured trans-

actions, bankruptcy and negotiable instruments.

Prerequisite: LAW 201.

LAW 371. Directed Readings (1-3)

Readings in various fields of law, designed for students

who have a special interest in a field of law. Prerequisite:

consent of sponsoring instructor.

LAW 372. Special Topics (3)

Special problems and issues in commercial law.

Course descriptions for the College of Business and

Economics graduate courses can be found in this section

(Section V) under the heading of Business and

Economics Graduate Courses. Prerequisite: consent of

sponsoring instructor.

Management

Professors. Nada Sanders, Ph.D. (Ohio State) Iacocca

Chair; Susan A. Sherer, Ph.D. (Pennsylvania), Kenan

Professor of Information Technology Management,

chair; Robert J. Trent, Ph.D. (Michigan State).

Associate professors. Catherine Ridings, Ph.D. (Drexel);

Michael D. Santoro, Ph.D. (Rutgers); Theodore W.

Schlie, Ph.D. (Northwestern).

Assistant professors. Luiba Belkin, Ph.D. (Rutgers); Jill

Brown, Ph.D. (University of Georgia); William Forster,

Ph.D. (University of Virginia); Lin Lin, Ph.D. (Arizona);

Robert C. Giambatista, Ph.D. (Wisconsin); Douglas

Mahony, Ph.D. (Rutgers); Corinne Post, Ph.D.

(Rutgers); Yuliang Yao, Ph.D. (Maryland); Zachary

Zacharia, Ph.D. (Tennessee).

Adjunct professors. Sandra Holsonbach, Ph.D. (Lehigh);

Dennis Praedin, B.A. (Muhlenberg); Joel Sutherland,

M.B.A. (Pepperdine).

Professors of practice. Dale F. Falcinelli, M.B.A.

(Lehigh); Robert Kuchta, M.S. (New Jersey Institute of

Technology); Graham Mitchell, Ph.D. (Westminster)

Active emeriti. Richard W. Barsness, Ph.D. (Minnesota)

The Management major introduces management prac-

tices to students who may desire to work in management

consulting (with specialties in supply chain processes or

systems management), human resource management,

and small businesses or non profit organizations. There

are four distinct tracks to the major.

• Managing People: This track prepares students to

work as human resource professionals or in manage-

ment consulting organizations or to broaden their

interpersonal skills.

Management 309

• Systems Management Consulting: This track pre-

pares students to work as management consultants

with a focus on information systems projects.

• Supply Chain Process Management: This track pre-

pares students to work as management consultants

with a special emphasis on supply chain projects.

• Small Business and Non Profit Management: This

track prepares students specifically to work in small

businesses including family owned businesses, non-

profit organizations, startups, and in rapid growth

environments.

The management major is comprised of 5 courses (15

credits). All management majors will be required to take

an Organizational Dynamics Workshop as well as a cap-

stone Project Management course. Additionally each

track will require 3 additional courses as indicated below.

All Management majors will take the following two

courses.

MGT 321 Organizational Dynamics Workshop

MGT 350 Project Management

In addition Management majors will choose one of the

following four tracks.

Managing People

MGT 333 Human Resource Management

Plus 2 courses chosen from the following:

PSYC 121 Social Psychology

WS/SSP 128 Race, Gender, Work

ECO 234 Labor-Management Relations

ECO 235 Labor Economics

MGT/SCM 328 Negotiations and Conflict

Management

Systems Management Consulting

BIS 311 Managing Information Systems

Analysis and Design

BIS 324 Business Data Management

Plus 1 from the following IS application courses:

BIS 331 Electronic Commerce

BIS 342 e-Business Enterprise Applications

Supply Chain Processes Management

Choose 3 from the following courses:

MGT/SCM 328 Negotiations and Conflict

Management

SCM 342 e-Business Enterprise Applications

SCM 309 Supply and Cost Management

SCM 354 Integrated Transportation and Logistics

Systems

SCM 340 Demand and Supply Chain Planning

Small Business and Non-Profit Management

Mgt. 311 LUMAC Management Assistance

Counseling

Mgt. 306 Decision Making in Small Business

and Non-Profits

Plus 1 of the following courses:

MGT/SCM 328 Negotiations and Conflict

Management

FIN 328 Corporate Financial Policy

MGT 333 Human Resource Management

BIS 331 Electronic Commerce

MKT 319 Development and Marketing of New

Products

Management Courses

For Advanced Undergraduates and Graduate

Students

MGT 186. Supply Chain Operations

Management (3)

Introduction to managing global supply chains and oper-

ations within the context of an integrated value chain.

Topics include purchasing and supplier management,

demand forecasting, aggregate planning and inventory

management, collaborative planning, forecasting, and

replenishment processes, capacity planning, ERP, quality

management, distribution, transportation management,

service operations logistics, and performance measure-

ment. Prerequisites: Math 21 or 75/76, Eco 145.

MGT 243. Management of Organizations (3)

Introduction to the principles of management and

human behavior in organizations. Survey of organiza-

tional design structure, strategy, planning, control,

human resource management, and project management.

Conceptual and applied introduction to organizational

behavior topics such as individual differences, percep-

tion/judgment/decision-making, motivation,

communication, teams/groups, leadership, conflict,

ethics, social response-bility, diversity, and culture.

Prerequisite: junior standing in the College of Business

and Economics.

MGT 301. Strategic Management (3) fall, spring

The capstone business class, integrating concepts and

practices from the core business classes, utilizing an

organization-wide strategic perspective and examining

the relationship among firm strategy, structure and envi-

ronment. The course emphasizes strategic analysis

strategy formulation, and strategy implementation so as

to achieve sustainable competitive advantage. Corporate

governance, corporate social responsibility and business

ethics are incorporated into the strategic perspective.

Case analyses and competitive simulation game are the

central learning components. Prerequisites: Senior stand-

ing in the College of Business and Economics, and

completion of the college core.

MGT 306. Decision Making in Small Business and

Non Profit Enterprises (3)

Formulation of strategies, policies and decisions unique

to family owned businesses, non profit organizations,

start up ventures, and organizations experiencing rapid

growth. Lectures and case studies. Prerequisites: Fin 125;

Mkt 111

MGT 311. LUMAC Management Assistance

Counseling (3) fall, spring

A field studies course providing management assistance

to small businesses in the Lehigh Valley. Students work

in small groups under faculty supervision on a direct

basis with owners. Problem solving and experience in

applying marketing, accounting, finance, and/or man-

agement concepts to business. Prerequisites: junior

standing in the College of Business and Economics.

MGT 321. Organizational Dynamics Workshop (3)

Individual and group dynamics explored through role

playing, problem solving, group simulations, and case

analysis. Topics include decision making, communica-

310 Lehigh University Course Catalog 2009-2010

tions, teams, diversity, negotiation, ethics, consensus,

conflict, creativity, and leadership. Prerequisite: Mgt. 243

or equivalent or consent of instructor.

MGT. 328. Negotiations and Conflict

Management (3) (cross list with SCM 328)

This course covers the theory and processes of negotia-

tion in a variety of settings including face-to-face, virtual

and cross-cultural business environments. Students will

learn negotiating skills by preparing and simulating a

broad mixture of negotiations, ranging from one-on-one,

to three-person, to multiparty and team negotiations.

They will learn to analyze outcomes and strategies dur-

ing the debriefing sessions and will have an opportunity

to compare results of their negotiations to the results of

other people in class.

MGT 333. Human Resource Management (3)

Analysis and resolution of personnel problems in organi-

zations. Human resource planning, recruitment,

selection, orientation, training, appraisal, compensation,

and development. Prerequisite: Mgt. 243 or equivalent

or consent of instructor.

MGT 350. Project Management (3)

Key processes and tenets of project management includ-

ing scope, time, cost, quality, human resources,

communications, risk, procurement, and integration

management. Both technical and behavioral aspects of

project management are applied within the context of

either IS management, HR management, Supply Chain

Process Management, Small Business Management.

Topics include: expectations management, change man-

agement and consulting engagement management.

Introduces both software project monitoring tools and

project team collaboration techniques and tools.

Prerequisites: completion of all other courses in either

BIS or Management major.

MGT 371. Directed Readings (1-3)

Readings in various fields of management designed for

the student who has a special interest in some field of

management not covered by the regularly scheduled

courses. Prerequisite: consent of the department chair.

May be repeated.

MGT 372. Special Topics (1-3)

Special problems and issues in management for which no

regularly scheduled course work exists. When offered as

group study, coverage varies according to interests of

instructor and students. Prerequisite: consent of the

department chair. May be repeated.

MGT 373. Management Internship (1-3) summer

A sponsoring faculty member shall direct readings, proj-

ects, and other assignments including a comprehensive

final report in conjunction with an industry-sponsored

internship. The work experience itself, whether paid or

unpaid, is not the basis for academic credit. Intellectual

development in the context of a field study learning

experience will be the determining factor in awarding

academic credit. This course cannot be used to satisfy

requirements of the Management major. Consent of

department chair. Prerequisite: junior standing in the

College of Business and Economics and Management

major declaration.

Course descriptions for the College of Business and

Economics graduate courses can be found in this section

(Section V) under the heading of Business and

Economics Graduate Courses.

Management Science

The management science program is directed toward

integrating scientific methods with the functional aspects

of organizations by investigating the application of quan-

titative methodology and systems analysis in the context

of decision making, risk analysis, economics and cost

analysis, production management, and supply chain

logistics. This integration provides the students with a

broader perspective toward managerial decision-making

in both private enterprise and public administration.

Mid-career professionals and recent graduates with a

background in engineering, mathematics, and physical

sciences who intend to seek managerial, consulting or

systems analyst positions are appropriate candidates. In

particular, those candidates who intend to seek positions

demanding both technical and management skills find

the management science background advantageous in

dealing with the complex problems of industrial, com-

mercial, and public service organizations.

The Industrial and Systems Engineering Department

administers the management science program. To be

admitted to the program a candidate must demonstrate

basic competence in calculus, statistics, linear algebra,

introductory operations research, accounting, production

and economics. A candidate lacking a certain background

may be required to take background courses. The mini-

mum program consists of 30 credit hours of course work,

of which at least 18 credit hours must be in the 400-level.

The ISE graduate faculty coordinator must approve all

course work. Upon entering the program, the student

must declare an area of concentration listed as follows:

• Operations Research

• Decision and Risk Analysis

• Economics and Cost Analysis

• Production and Operations Management

• Logistics and Supply Chain Management

Each student is required to complete 15 credit hours of

core courses, 12 credit hours of courses in the declared

area of concentration, and 3-credit hours of approved

free elective or completing a management science proj-

ect. No more than 9 credit hours may be taken from the

College of Business and Economics.

Core Courses (at least 15 credit hours)

IE 328 Engineering Statistics (3), Prerequisite:

MATH 23 or equivalent

IE 358 (ECO 358)

Game Theory (3), Prerequisite: ECO

105 or 115 and MATH 21, 31or

51(ECO 105 or 146 and MATH 21,

31or 51)

IE 362 (MSE 362) Logistics and Supply Chain

Management (3), Prerequisite: IE 251

or equivalent or instructor approval

IE 404 Simulation (graduate version of IE

305)(3), Prerequisite: IE 121or IE 328

and IE 220 or equivalent

IE 410 Design of Experiments (3),

Prerequisite: IE 121 or equivalent

Manufacturing Systems Engineering 311

IE 426 Optimization Models and

Applications (graduate version of IE

316) (3), Prerequisite: IE 220 or equiv-

alent

IE 429 Stochastic Models and

Applications (graduate version of IE

339) (3), Prerequisite: IE 220 or equiv-

alent

IE 447 Financial Optimization (3),

Prerequisite: IE 426 or equivalent

IE 458 (ECO 463) Topics in Game Theory (3),

Prerequisite:2semesters of calculus,

ECO 412 and ECO 414, or permis-

sion of instructor

MATH 334 Mathematical Statistics (3-4),

Prerequisite MATH 231 or 309

Note: Students who satisfy one or more of the core

requirements from previous coursework (e.g., IE

305/404, 316/426, 339/429) may substitute the core

requirement by taking additional courses from his/her

declared area of concentration. Up to 9 credit hours may

be substituted.

Areas of Concentration (at least 12 credit hours)

Each student must declare an area of concentration. No

more than 3 credit hours may be taken outside the

declared area of concentration.

Area Qualified Courses

Operations Research IE 406, 411, 412, 414,

416, 417, 418, 419, 439,

ECO 402, 412, 423

MATH 312, 338, 340

Decision and IE 358,458, 409, 410,

Risk Analysis 416, 419, 422, 439, 442,

446, 447, 451, MATH

312, 338, ECO 416, 423,

460, 461

Economics and IE 358, 458, 413, 447,

Cost Analysis GBUS 413, 414, 419*,

420*, 422, MATH 467,

468

Production and IE 319, 324, 332, 340, 409

Operations 410, 413, 419

Management 424, 425, 442, 443,445,

448, 449, 451; GBUS 413,

450, 481, 483, 485, ECO

447, MSE 438, 446

Logistics and Supply IE 319, 341, 358,

Chain Management 408, 409, 412, 414, 416,

419, 425, 438, 442, 443,

458, MKT 321, 325,

GBUS 450, 481, ECO

416, 447, 460, 461

*Daytime section only for students without work experience

Approved Free Elective or Management Science

Project (3 credit hours)

Each student is to complete either an approved free elec-

tive relevant to the student’s career interest, or complete

a project through IE 430 Management Science Project.

A faculty member must supervise the project.

Manufacturing Systems

Engineering

Program director. Keith M. Gardiner, Ph.D.

(Manchester, England), professor of industrial and systems

engineering.

Program faculty. John P. Coulter, Ph.D. (Delaware),

associate professor of mechanical engineering and mechanics;

Steven L. Goldman, Ph.D. (Boston), Andrew W. Mellon

distinguished professor in the humanities; Mikell P.

Groover, Ph.D. (Lehigh), professor of industrial and sys-

tems engineering; Parveen P. Gupta, Ph.D. (Penn State),

associate professor of accounting; Jacob Y. Kazakia, Ph.D.

(Lehigh), professor of engineering mathematics; Roger N.

Nagel, Ph.D. (Maryland), Harvey Wagner Professor of

computer science and engineering; John B. Ochs, Ph.D.

(Penn State), professor of mechanical engineering and

mechanics; Theodore Schlie, Ph.D. (Northwestern), asso-

ciate professor of management of technology; Robert J.

Trent, Ph.D. (Michigan State), Eugene Mercy Professor of

management; George R. Wilson, Ph.D. (Penn State),

associate professor of industrial and systems engineering.

The manufacturing systems engineering program devel-

ops engineers who can design, install, operate, and

modify systems involving materials, processes, equip-

ment, facilities, logistics and people using leading edge

technologies. It integrates systems perspectives with

interdisciplinary course offerings from Lehigh’s colleges

of engineering and applied science, and business and

economics.

Complete requirements are listed under Interdisciplinary

Graduate Study and Research.

Graduate Courses

MSE 362. (IE 362) Logistics and Supply Chain

Management (3)

Modeling and analysis of supply chain design, opera-

tions, and management. Analytical framework for

logistics and supply chains, demand and supply plan-

ning, inventory control and warehouse management,

transportation, logistics network design, supply chain

coordination, and financial factors. Industry case studies

and a comprehensive final project. Prerequisite: IE 220

and IE 251 or equivalent, or instructor approval.

MSE 401. (ME 401) Integrated Product

Development (3)

An integrated and interdisciplinary approach to engi-

neering design, concurrent engineering, design for

manufacturing, industrial design and business of product

development. Design methods, philosophy and practice,

the role of modeling and simulation, decision making,

risk, cost, materials and manufacturing process selection,

platform and modular design, mass customization, quali-

ty, planning and scheduling, business issues, teamwork,

group dynamics, creativity and innovation. Case studies

and team projects with geographically dispersed team

members. Ochs.

MSE 431. Marketing & the Invention to

Innovation Process (3)

Organizational issues and decision-making for capital

investments in new technologies. The commercialization

process is traced from research and development and

marketing activities through the implementation phase

involving the manufacturing function. Term project is a

312 Lehigh University Course Catalog 2009-2010

commercialization plan for a new manufacturing tech-

nology.

MSE 433. Technology and the Factory of the

Future (3)

Engineering and technological issues affecting future

developments in manufacturing. Flexible automation

systems, integration of design and production through

the factory data network, intelligent machines, the man-

machine interface, and the manufacturing management

information system.

MSE 438. Agile Organizations & Manufacturing

Systems (3)

Analysis of the factors contributing to the success of

manufacturing enterprises in an environment character-

ized by continuous and unpredictable change.

Fundamentals of lean production: aspects of systems

design, value stream analysis, flow, set-up and cycle time

reduction, kaizen, elimination of waste. Fundamentals of

agility: global enterprises, virtual organizations, adapting

to change, mass customization, manufacturing flexibility,

activity-based management.

MSE 443. (IE 443) Automation and Production

Systems (3)

Principles and analysis of manual and automated pro-

duction systems for discrete parts and products. Cellular

manufacturing, flexible manufacturing systems, transfer

lines, manual and automated assembly systems, and

quality control systems.

MSE 446. International Supply Chain

Management (3)

Financial and managerial issues. Evaluation, selection,

development and management of suppliers; business

models, financial reporting strategies, earnings, quality,

risk assessment and internal control, team based new

product development. Selected readings, case studies,

discussions, lectures, group projects, and presentations.

MSE 456/MSE 356. Micromanufacturing Systems

& Technologies (3)

Manufacturing engineering in microelectronics, micro-

electromechanical, nano-, opto- and micro-scale

manufacturing. Examination of systems design, equip-

ment, process and operational issues and linkages to

business strategies. Crystal growth, thin film deposition

processes and patterning, removal processes, vacuum

engineering, contamination control, clean room practices

etc. Individual research assignments. Pre-requisite

MAT33 or equivalent, instructor permission. note: 300

level course may not be repeated at the 400 level for credit.

MSE 481. (GBUS 481) Technology, Operations &

Competitive Strategy (3)

Interrelationships among advanced manufacturing man-

agement, technology and competitive strategy of the

firm. Industry analysis and competitiveness; competitive

strategy formulation and implementation; value chain

analysis; manufacturing and technology strategy; manu-

facturing’s contribution to competitive advantage in

quality, cost, variety and new product availability; seg-

mentation and substitution; vertical integration.

MSE 482 – Aspects of Sustainable Systems Design

Design of sustainable systems for manufacturing that ful-

fill human needs and generate wealth. Demographic,

ecological, economic, environmental, ergonomic, health

and global or local socio-political impacts on design and

operation of future systems. Conservation of resources in

the design, manufacture and use of products, processes,

and implementation systems; life cycle engineering,

reclamation, recycling, remanufacture. Research-based

term paper.

MSE 451. Manufacturing Systems Engineering

Project (1-3)

MSE 490. Manufacturing Systems Engineering

Thesis (1-6)

Marketing

Marketing Department Web page: www.lehigh.edu/cbe-

marketing

Professors: K. Sivakumar, Ph.D. (Syracuse), Arthur C.

Tauck Jr. Professor of International Marketing and

Logistics and Chairperson, Department of Marketing.

Associate Professors: James M. Maskulka, D.B.A. (Kent

State).

Assistant Professors: Deepa Chandrasekaran, Ph.D.

(Southern California); Ravindra Chitturi, Ph.D. (Texas);

Reetika Gupta, Ph.D. (CUNY), Nevena Koukova, Ph.D.

(Maryland).

Adjunct Lecturer: R. Gregory Surovcik, M.B.A. (Lehigh)

Visiting Lecturer: Beth Gallant, MBA (Columbia).

Marketing is a critical success factor in any business.

Marketing is more than just selling or advertising. It is

understanding a product. It is focusing on the needs of

the consumers. It encompasses new product develop-

ment, pricing, promotion and distribution

considerations. Marketing influences virtually all strate-

gic business plans and decisions and its scope ranges

from government and not-for-profit organizations to free

enterprise. Marketing plays a major role in the manage-

ment of any business.

Lehigh’s marketing major is a rigorous and highly rele-

vant curriculum of instruction. Students are taught to

recognize the strong linkage between theory and practice

and to appreciate the need for teamwork, leadership, and

communication skills. Activities that encourage students

to acquire professional-level competency throughout the

curriculum include: developing integrated advertising

campaigns, designing and implementing marketing

research projects, conducting customer analyses, partici-

pating in business-to-business negotiation simulations as

well as a wide variety of practice-based projects.

Students are encouraged to explore the potential

enhancement of their educational experience through

study abroad programs, internships with business, and

research projects with faculty members.

Participation in the Marketing Club student organiza-

tion is an extracurricular activity that offers a

professional orientation program and the enjoyment of

socializing with other students from across the campus.

The marketing major offered by the Department of

Marketing consists of 18 credit hours from the following

courses:

Required courses

MKT 311 Consumer Behavior

MKT 312 Marketing Research

MKT 387 Marketing Strategy

Marketing 313

Elective courses

Two courses (6 credit hours) from the following list of

courses, and one additional marketing elective course (3

credit hours) required, either from the following, or any

course approved by the academic advisor.

MKT 313 Integrated Marketing Communications

MKT 319 Development & Marketing of New

Products

MKT 320 Global Marketing Strategies

MKT 321 Business-to-Business Marketing

MKT 325 Quantitative Marketing Analysis

MKT 331 Electronic Commerce

MKT 332 Sales Management

MKT 348 Management of Marketing Channels

MKT 360 Marketing Practicum

MKT 366 Marketing of Services

MKT 371 Directed Readings

MKT 372 Special Topics

Undergraduate Courses

MKT 111. Principles of Marketing (3)

The purpose of this course is to give an overview of the

entire marketing function. The objective is to take a

broad-based approach to expose students to the meaning

of marketing, the terminology of marketing, the activi-

ties involved in marketing, how managers make and

implement decisions in marketing, and how they evalu-

ate the results. The role of marketing in the broader

society will also be discussed. At the end of this course,

students will be able to understand the meaning of the

marketing concept, various marketing terminologies,

how firms develop and evaluate marketing strategies

related to product, place, price, and promotions, how

marketing strategies are related to other strategies of the

firm, and what internal and external factors influence the

marketing decisions. The outcome of the course will be

assessed by a series of multiple choice and short essay

questions, and other suitable assignments decided by the

instructor. Prerequisite: ECO 1.

MKT 311. Consumer Behavior (3)

This course focuses on the theory and tools necessary to

analyze and understand consumer buyers and business

buyers, as well as other organizational and governmental

buyers, in the context of the global information age. The

topics covered include, but are not limited to, diffusion

of innovations; market segmentation and product posi-

tioning; the multiattribute model and the theory of

reasoned action; group and individual decision making

processes of buyers; and buyer conditioning and learning

processes. Throughout the course, the relevance of the

covered theory and tools will be illustrated by using cut-

ting edge examples of what businesses and consumers are

doing today. At the end of this class, students will be

able to demonstrate an understanding of the theories

and tools of buyer behavior. In addition, they will be

able to analyze buyers and develop appropriate market-

ing strategies. The achievement of course objectives will

be measured through the use of examinations, as well as

a variety of application level tools, including in-class

projects, case analyses, and a term project. Prerequisite:

MKT 111 or MKT 211.

MKT 312. Marketing Research (3)

The objective of this course is to offer a managerial

approach toward conducting and using research for mar-

keting decisions. The focus will be on the relevance and

usefulness of systematic research for decision making, the

process and steps involved in conducting effective mar-

keting research, analysis and interpretation of the

information for decision making, and the presentation of

research results to help managers arrive at sound market-

ing decisions. Particular emphasis will be placed on the

context of technological advances in the collection, dis-

semination, and use of marketing information, the

applicability of marketing research principles for a wide

variety of organizations and individuals in the global

context, and ethical issues involved in marketing

research. At the end of this course, students will have an

understanding of the costs and benefits of marketing

research, be able to conduct marketing research using a

systematic set of procedures, know how to develop

research instruments such as questionnaires, have the

knowledge to analyze the data, and present the conclu-

sions to other managers. In addition to periodic testing

of their knowledge of marketing research by means of

examinations (multiple choice, short essay questions, and

hands-on problems), the course will involve a marketing

research project from problem formulation to presenta-

tion of findings. Prerequisites: ECO 045 and MKT 111

or MKT 211.

MKT 313. Integrated Marketing

Communications (3)

This course focuses on the wide range of areas included

in marketing communications and the tools and tech-

niques needed to create an integrated approach. Students

are introduced to the broad spectrum of communication

messages and the sources that produce them, and then

showed how they can be used for maximum efficiency

through a coordinated planning process. Lectures and

assignments develop an understanding for the factors

found in all integrated marketing communications plans,

their interactions, strengths and weaknesses, and their

effect on the overall marketing message. The course con-

cludes with the students creating and presenting an

integrated marketing communications plan and its sup-

porting tactics. Prerequisite: MKT 211 or MKT 111.

MKT 319. Development and Marketing of New

Products (3)

This course adopts the marketing philosophy that new

products and services will be profitable if the extended

product provides customers with highly valued benefits.

The goal is to help students learn how to use state-of-

the-art management techniques to identify markets,

develop new product ideas, measure customer benefits,

and design profitable new products. The course provides

techniques to interface the marketing function with the

functions of R&D, design engineering, and manufactur-

ing. Prerequisite: MKT 211 or MKT 111.

MKT 320. Global Marketing (3)

This course focuses on understanding the process of

globalization and its impact on the firm’s marketing

activities. Whether an organization operates in the

domestic market or in the global market place, it cannot

ignore competitive pressures and market opportunities at

the global level. This course will focus on topics such as

the changes in global environment (e.g., financial, cul-

tural, political, and legal) and their impact on marketing

activities, development of global marketing strategies

based on sound marketing research (e.g., global segmen-

tation and positioning, global market entry strategies,

developing products for the global market place, pricing,

314 Lehigh University Course Catalog 2009-2010

communication, and distribution strategies, and so on),

and the role of technology in global marketing strategies.

Prerequisite: MKT 211 or MKT 111.

MKT 321. Business-to-Business Marketing (3)

This course introduces students to the elements neces-

sary to market a product, service, idea, event,

organization, place, information, property, experience, or

personality to another business. Students develop the

knowledge and thinking skills needed to create, develop,

and present a complete, integrated Business-To-Business

(B2B) marketing plan. Lecture and assignments focus on

B2B marketing, a process that begins with researching

the relevant marketplace to understand its dynamics.

Students learn how to identify opportunities to meet

existing needs, segment the market, and select those seg-

ments that a company can satisfy in a superior way. In

addition, students learn how to formulate a broad strate-

gy, refine it into a detailed marketing mix and action

plan, carry out the plan, evaluate the results, and make

further improvements. Prerequisite: MKT 211 or MKT

111.

MKT 325 (ECO 325). Quantitative Marketing

Analysis (3)

Explores economics and management science approaches

to improve marketing decision making and marketing

interactions in such areas as strategic marketing, e-mar-

keting, advertising, pricing, sales force management, sales

promotions, new products, and direct marketing. The

development, implementation, and use of quantitative

models are emphasized. Cases are used to illustrate how

these models can be applied. Students have the opportu-

nity to learn how to use and evaluate models through

spreadsheet-based assignments. Prerequisites: MKT 211

or MKT 111, ECO 045, ECO 105 or ECO 146, and

MATH 21, 31, 51.

MKT 331 (BIS 331). Electronic Commerce (3)

This course covers how businesses and consumers use the

Internet to exchange information and complete transac-

tions. Both theoretical concepts and practical skills will

be addressed within the scope of the class. Topics include

advertising and marketing, ecommerce business and rev-

enue models, online consumer behavior, web site design

issues, Internet security, electronic payments, infrastruc-

ture issues, privacy issues, and overall electronic

commerce strategy. Students will get hands-on experi-

ence designing ecommerce web-sites using web

authoring software. Prerequisites: BIS 111. MKT 211 or

MKT 111, or consent of the instructor.

MKT 332. Sales Management (3)

This course is an integrative approach to sales manage-

ment including formulation of strategically sound sales

programs, implementation of sales programs, and evalua-

tion and control of the organization’s sales activities.

Illustrative topics include the role of the sales manager in

the divergent demands of multiple constituencies; the

development of effective sales organizations; salesperson’s

motivations and the development of flexible motivation-

al plans; the variety of financial and non-financial

rewards used by sales managers; forecasting sales costs

and evaluating performance by person, territory, cus-

tomer, market, and industry; and coordination of the

sales activities with other elements in a firm’s marketing

program. Prerequisite: MKT 211 or MKT 111.

MKT 348. Management of Marketing Channels (3)

This course focuses on the design, elements, and man-

agement of marketing channels. For our purposes, a

marketing channel is viewed as an interdependent,

interorganizational system involved in the task of making

goods, services, and concepts available for consumption.

The main emphasis of this course is on the initial design

of such systems and the on-going management of rela-

tionships between system participants. Economic, social,

and structural aspects of channels will be analyzed.

Illustrative topics include how channel systems should be

formed; an investigation of a variety of channel interme-

diaries, including franchise systems, distributors,

retailers, intermediary “market makers,” and gray chan-

nels; the role of technology in channel relationships; the

interpersonal dimensions of channel relationship man-

agement such as conflict management, minority issues,

and ethics; and sales-force management, including selec-

tion, motivation, and compensation. Prerequisite: MKT

211 or MKT 111.

MKT 360. Marketing Practicum (3)

The marketing practicum combines formal class work on

marketing problem formulation and business communi-

cations with an intensive internship or consulting

engagement with a business. Students work with client

firms to develop individual or team projects, which focus

on marketing activities such as market research, strategy

development, sales management, and promotion man-

agement. Upon completion of the project, students

submit a written report and make a formal presentation

to clients. Prerequisites: MKT 211 or MKT 111, MKT

311 and MKT 312.

MKT 366. Marketing of Services (3)

This course focuses on service quality issues and strate-

gies from a customer-focused business perspective. The

course gives students an appreciation of the challenges of

marketing and managing services (whether in a manufac-

turing or service business) and develops strategies for

addressing these challenges. The need for integration

across functions to provide effective service is stressed.

Illustrative topics include service quality gap analysis;

services triangle analysis; 7 P’s for services; service-profit

chain; service encounter analysis; customer lifetime value

analysis; new service development process; service quality

dimensions; services guarantees; and demand/ capacity

management. Prerequisite: MKT 211 or MKT 111.

MKT 371. Directed Readings (1-3)

Readings in various fields of marketing designed for the

student who has a special interest in some field of mar-

keting not covered in regularly scheduled courses.

Prerequisite: consent of the department chair. May be

repeated.

MKT 372. Special Topics (1-3)

Special problems and issues in marketing for which no

regularly scheduled course work exists. When offered as

group study or internship, coverage will vary according

to the interests of the instructor and students.

Prerequisite: consent of the department chair. May be

repeated.

MKT 373. Marketing Internship (1)

Based on a student’s work experience, a sponsoring facul-

ty member shall direct readings, projects, and other

assignments–including a “capstone report.” It should be

noted that the work experience (at least 80 hours), by

itself, is not the basis for academic credit. The faculty

Materials Science and Engineering 315

directed activity must be provided concurrent with the

work. Course registration and related arrangements must

be made in advance of the work engagement. This

course must be taken Pass/Fail and cannot be used to

satisfy marketing major requirements. Prerequisites:

MKT 211 or MKT 111, declaration of a marketing

major, junior standing, and department approval. May

be repeated once.

MKT 387. Marketing Strategy (3)

The objective of this capstone course is to synthesize the

marketing principles introduced in other marketing

courses and thus provide students an integrative frame-

work to marketing decision-making. Our review indicates

that this integrative closure for the marketing coursework

is a common practice at some of the better business

schools. It will focus on how marketing strategy supports

the overall corporate strategy. The course will emphasize

that Marketing does not operate in vacuum. What is

done in other functional areas will impact marketing

strategy profoundly, and vice versa. The course will

address traditional strategic issues such as identification of

organizational strengths, weaknesses and environmental

opportunities in the context of developing marketing

strategies, but will also emphasize the importance of

embracing a customer centric orientation throughout the

organization. Incorporating a customer centric orienta-

tion is an essential component of marketing strategy

today as it captures the dynamic and evolving nature of

marketing. Every company employee is important to the

marketing function, every employee contact with a cus-

tomer is a form of marketing communication, the

increasing number of customer- initiated contacts with

the firm are as important as firm-initiated contacts, and

customer relationships now take precedence over sales

transactions. Specific emphasis will be placed on applying

theoretical principles in realistic scenarios by means of

case studies of how marketing strategy is impacted by the

overall corporate strategy and other functional strategies.

Student performance will be evaluated by his/her ability

to prepare and present case analyses. Prerequisite: MKT

311, 312 and senior standing.

Graduate Courses

Course descriptions for the College of Business and

Economics graduate courses can be found in this section

(Section V) under the heading of Business and

Economics Graduate Courses.

Materials Science and

Engineering

Professors. Helen M. Chan, Ph.D. (Imperial College of

Science and Technology, England), chair and New Jersey

Zinc Professor; Charles E. Lyman, Ph.D. (M.I.T.), asso-

ciate chair; John N. DuPont, Ph.D. (Lehigh), Stout

Chair; Martin P. Harmer, Ph.D. (Leeds, England), Alcoa

Professor, director of Center for Advanced Materials and

Nanotechnology; Himanshu Jain, Sci. D. (Columbia),

Diamond Chair; Chris Kiely, Ph.D. (Bristol); Wojciech

Misiolek, Sc.D (U. of Mining and Metallurgy, Krakow,

Poland), Loewy Chair; Raymond A. Pearson, Ph.D.

(Michigan); Jeffrey M. Rickman, Ph.D. (Carnegie-

Mellon).

Associate Professors. Richard P. Vinci, Ph.D. (Stanford);

Masashi Watanabe, Ph.D. (Kyushu).

Assistant Professors. Xuanhong Cheng, Ph.D. (U. of

Washington); Sabrina S. Jedlicka, Ph.D. (Purdue).

Adjunct Professors. Walter L. Brown, Ph.D. (Harvard);

Alwyn Eades, Ph.D. (Cambridge); Lloyd Robeson,

Ph.D. (U. of Maryland); S. Kenneth Tarby, Ph.D.

(Carnegie- Mellon); William H. Van Geertruyden,

Ph.D. (Lehigh).

Emeritus Professors. Betzalel Avitzur, Ph.D. (Michigan);

Sidney R. Butler, Ph.D. (Penn State); G. Slade Cargill,

III, Ph.D. (Harvard); Ye T. Chou, Ph.D. (Carnegie

Mellon); Alwyn Eades, Ph.D. (Cambridge); Richard W.

Hertzberg, Ph.D. (Lehigh); Ralph J. Jaccodine, Ph.D.

(Notre Dame); Arnold R. Marder, Ph.D. (Lehigh);

Michael R. Notis, Ph.D. (Lehigh); Alan W. Pense, Ph.D.

(Lehigh); Donald M. Smyth, Ph.D. (M.I.T); Leslie H.

Sperling, Ph.D. (Duke); Robert D. Stout, Ph.D.

(Lehigh); S. Kenneth Tarby, Ph.D. (Carnegie-Mellon);

David A. Thomas, Sc.D. (M.I.T.); John D. Wood, Ph.D.

(Lehigh).

Research engineers and scientists. David W. Ackland,

Samuel J. Lawrence.

As science and technology advance in the 21st century,

progress in many fields will depend on the discovery and

development of new materials, processed in more com-

plex ways, and with new kinds of properties. It is widely

recognized that the progress of history has been divided

into periods characterized by the materials that mankind

has used, e.g., the stone age, the bronze age, the iron age.

Today, materials science and engineering is critical to all

other fields of engineering, and advances in other fields

are often limited by advances in materials.

Interest in new materials for solid-state devices, space

technology, and superconductivity, as well as a better

understanding of the behavior of materials in the design

of structures, automobiles and aircraft, plant processing

equipment, electrical machinery, etc., have increased the

need for people trained in science and technology of

materials.

Education for this field of engineering requires basic

studies in mathematics, chemistry, physics and mechan-

ics, plus a general background in engineering principles,

followed by intensive training in the application of these

principles to the development and use of materials in a

technological society.

B.S. in Materials Science and

Engineering

The undergraduate program is designed to train gradu-

ates for research, development, operations, management,

and sales careers in industry or for graduate study in var-

ious specialties of the field, including the manufacture

and application of metals, ceramics, polymers, compos-

ites, and electronic materials. While some graduates go

directly into materials-producing companies, most serve

as engineers in the transportation, electronics, chemical,

communications, space, and other industries. A number

of students pursue graduate study leading to careers in

research and teaching, medicine, or the law.

Materials Science and Engineering majors have opportu-

nities to gain valuable experience in other, related fields,

including other areas of engineering or science, by

choosing to concentrate elective courses in one of these

areas. Requirements for adding a Minor include at least

15 course credits in that area, which may be taken as

technical or free electives in the student’s major. It is par-

316 Lehigh University Course Catalog 2009-2010

ticularly straightforward for students to obtain a minor

in Chemical Engineering, in Manufacturing

Engineering, in Nanotechnology, or in Polymer Science

and Engineering.

Materials Science and Engineering majors can also par-

ticipate in undergraduate research at universities in Great

Britain and elsewhere during the summer between Junior

and Senior years. The Materials Science and Engineering

Industrial Option program enables students to gain work

experience during the Senior Year. The Materials Science

and Engineering Research Option program provides sen-

ior undergraduates with research experience.

Five-year programs are available to broaden the Materials

Science and Engineering undergraduate experience. One

such program is the Arts-Engineering Program, in which

students can earn both the Bachelor of Science degree in

Materials Science and Engineering and the Bachelor of Arts

degree in some area within the College of Arts and Sciences,

such as biology, physics, chemistry, or history. Another is

the B.S./M.Ed. Program, which leads (in five years of study

and internships) to the B.S. degree in Materials Science and

Engineering and a masters degree (M.Ed.) in Education,

with elementary or secondary teacher certification.

Minor in Materials Science and

Engineering

The Department of Materials Science and Engineering

offers minors to students majoring in other subjects. The

Department is enthusiastic in its support of students

who wish to broaden their education by taking a minor.

To obtain a minor in Materials Science and Engineering,

a student must complete one required course (MAT 33,

3 credits) and four other three-credit courses for a total

of 15 credit hours. The four courses may be chosen from

a long list of 200 and 300 level courses relevant to vari-

ous engineering disciplines.

Minor in Nanotechnology

Materials for nanotechnology applications have new

properties unavailable in bulk materials. The synthesis,

processing, and characterization of these materials

require facility with concepts beyond those needed for

typical engineering materials. This minor requires MAT

355 Materials for Nanotechnology (3 credits), a course

on crystallography and band theory, and additional elec-

tives for a total of 15 credits.

Educational Mission and Program

Objectives

The Materials Science and Engineering undergraduate

program’s mission is to provide its students an excellent

education in a scholarly environment.

Our Educational Objectives are that graduates have the

knowledge and experience needed to advance to success-

ful careers and, where appropriate, for graduate study, in

materials-related fields. Successful careers will be reflect-

ed in continuing employment, personal satisfaction,

professional recognition, and advancement in responsi-

bilities. Success in graduate studies will be indicated by

admission to highly ranked graduate programs, timely

completion of degree requirements, and recognition by

competitive fellowships and other awards.

Program Outcomes

The MS&E undergraduate Program Outcomes declare

that graduates should:

1. have a firm base of knowledge in areas of mathemat-

ics, physics, and chemistry relevant to materials

science and engineering, and be able to apply and

extend this knowledge;

2. understand relationships among materials structure,

properties, processing, and performance for metals,

ceramics, polymers, composites, and electronic mate-

rials; be able to extend this knowledge; and be able to

apply it in materials analysis, development, selection,

and design;

3. be able to function effectively on problem-solving

teams and to coordinate and provide leadership for

teams, including multi-disciplinary teams;

4. be knowledgeable and experienced in using basic lab-

oratory tools, computers, and databases for materials

analysis, development, and selection;

5. be able to define and solve materials-related problems,

including design problems, within economic, environ-

mental, and time deadline constraints;

6. develop skills in writing, speaking, reading, and listen-

ing, needed to communicate logically and effectively;

7. understand and accept professional and ethical

responsibilities, including responsibilities for public

safety and workplace safety;

8. gain background in history, economics, world cul-

tures, and current events to provide a realistic context

for their professional activities.

Major Requirements

The recommended sequence of courses is shown below.

The standard freshman engineering year is shown in sec-

tion III. A total of 132 credits or more is required to

graduate.

sophomore year, first semester (18 credits)

MAT 33 Engineering Materials and

Processes (3)*

MAT 10 Materials Laboratory (2)

MATH 23 Analytic Geometry & Calculus III (4)

PHY 21, 22 Introductory Physics and

Laboratory (5)

ECO 1 Economics (4)

sophomore year, second semester (18 –19 credits)

MAT 20 Computational Methods in Materials

Science (3)

MAT 203 Materials Structure at the Nanoscale (3)

MAT 205 Thermodynamics of Macro/Nanoscale

Materials (3)

MATH 205 Linear Methods (3)

MECH 3 Fundamentals of Engineering

Mechanics (3)

HSS Humanities/Social Sciences

Elective (3 or 4)

junior year, first semester (18 credits)

MAT 201 Physical Properties of Materials (3)

MAT 216 Diffusion and Phase

Transformations (3)

MAT 218 Mechanical Behavior of

Macro/Nanoscale Materials (3)

MAT 101 Professional Development (2)

HSS Humanities/Social Sciences Elective (4)

Elect Free Elective (3)

Materials Science and Engineering 317

junior year, second semester (18-19 credits)

MAT 204 Processing and Properties of Polymeric

Materials (3)

MAT 206 Processing and Properties of Metals (3)

MAT 211 (ENG 211) Integrated Product Development

Projects I (3)

MAT 214 Processing and Properties of Ceramic

Materials (3)

HSS Humanities/Social Sciences Elective (3

or 4)

Elect Free Elective (3)

senior year, first semester (15 credits)

MAT 212 (ENG 212) Integrated Product Development

Projects II (2)

MAT 302 Electronic Properties of Materials (3)

Engr Sci Elect Engineering Science Elective (3)

HSS Humanitites/Social Sciences

Elective (4)

senior year, second semester (16 credits)

MAT 338 Materials Selection and Failure

Analysis (3)

CHE 60 Unit Operations Survey (3)

ECE 83 Introduction to Electrical

Engineering (3)

ECE 162 Electrical Laboratory (1)

Appr Elect Approved Elective (3)

Elect Free Elective (3)

*MAT 33 is taught in both the fall and spring semesters

Electives for the sophomore, junior and senior years

must be distributed as follows:

Humanities and Social Sciences: 13-15 credit hours. Free

Electives: 9 credit hours in any department. Approved

Elective (3 credit hours) and Engineering Science

Electives (6 credit hours) must be selected from a specific

list supplied by the Materials Science and Engineering

Department. The list includes the Industrial Option and

the Research Option.

Industrial Option

MAT 327 Industrial Project (4)

MAT 329 Industrial Project (4)

Research Option

MAT 240 Research Techniques (3)

MAT 291 Undergraduate Research (3)

The Industrial Option introduces students to the work

of materials engineers in industry. The emphasis is a

team approach to the solution of actual plant problems.

The courses are conducted in cooperation with local

industries. Three days per week are spent at the plant of

the cooperating industry on investigations of selected

problems. The option is limited to a small group of sen-

iors, selected by the Department from those who apply.

Summer employment is provided when possible for

those who elect to initiate the program during the sum-

mer preceding the senior year.

The Research Option is offered for students interested in

research and development. Financial support may be

available for students who elect to initiate a research pro-

gram during the summer preceding the senior year. The

option is limited to a small group of students, selected

by the Department from those who apply.

Undergraduate Courses

MAT 10. Materials Laboratory (2) fall

Introduction to experimental methods used to fabricate

and measure the structure and properties of materials.

Thermal and mechanical processing and properties are

emphasized. Specimen preparation and examination by

light optical microscopy. Prerequisite: MAT 33 previous-

ly or concurrently. DuPont

MAT 20. Computational Methods in Materials

Science (3) spring

The use of computers and computational methods to

solve problems in materials science and engineering.

Students will employ both commercial packages and

their own code in order to complete assignments.

Students will utilize word processing and display pack-

ages to present results of projects. Prerequisite: ENGR. 1

or equivalent. Rickman

MAT 33. Engineering Materials and Processes (3)

fall-spring

Application of physical and chemical principles to

understanding, selection, and fabrication of engineering

materials. Materials considered include metals, polymers,

ceramics, composites and electronic materials. Case stud-

ies of materials used range from transportation systems

to microelectronic devices. Kiely or Chan and Staff

MAT 101. Professional Development (2) fall

Seminar on the role and purpose of engineering in socie-

ty; the meaning of being a professional; engineering

ethics, communications and decision-making in the

engineering process; expectations and problems of young

engineers; personal goals; choosing a career. Required

reading. Written reports based on library research.

Prerequisite: junior standing. Lyman

MAT 107. Special Topics in Materials (1-3)

A study of selected topics in materials science and engi-

neering not covered in other formal courses.

MAT 196. Education Option (3)

Selected students may create and use educational mod-

ules for disseminating concepts in materials science and

engineering.

For Advanced Undergraduates and Graduate

Students

MAT 201. Physical Properties of Materials (3) fall

Basic concepts of modern physics and quantum mechan-

ics needed for an understanding of electrons in solids.

The experimental development leading to wave mechan-

ics is emphasized. Uses of the Schrodinger equation as

the basis for the free electron theory of metals and band

theory. Optical properties are developed leading to a dis-

cussion of lasers. Prerequisites: Phys 21, MAT 33,

MATH 205. Jain

MAT 203. Materials Structure at the Nanoscale (3)

spring

The structure of metals, ceramics, semiconductors and

polymers at the atomic scale. Materials structures at the

nanoscale and macroscale. Crystalline, semicrystalline,

liquid crystalline, and amorphous (glassy) states. Crystal

structures and fundamental aspects of formal crystallog-

raphy. Point, line, and planar crystal defects. Materials

characterization by x-ray diffraction, light and electron

microscopy, and other techniques. Prerequisites: CHEM

318 Lehigh University Course Catalog 2009-2010

25; MAT 33 previously or concurrently; MAT 10 or per-

mission of instructor. Lyman

MAT 204. Processing and Properties of Polymeric

Materials (3) spring

The structure-property relationships in polymers will be

developed, emphasizing the glass transition, rubber elas-

ticity, crystallinity, and mechanical behavior. Elements of

polymer processing. Extrusion of plastics and films, and

fiber spinning operations. Prerequisite: MAT 33. Pearson

MAT 205. Thermodynamics of Macro/Nanoscale

Materials (3) spring

The three laws of thermodynamics. Gibbs free energy

and conditions of equilibrium. Effects of scale on materi-

al behavior. Binary and ternary equilibrium phase

diagrams. Application of thermodynamics to materials

problems, with examples from nanotechnology, biotech-

nology, and structural materials. Prerequisites: MATH

23 and MAT 33, previously or concurrently. Vinci

MAT 206. Processing and Properties of Metals (3)

spring

The production and purification of metals, their fabrica-

tion, and control of their properties. Includes topics such

as precipitation hardening, hot and cold working, and

casting. Prerequisites: MAT 216, MAT 218. Misiolek

MAT 214. Processing and Properties of Ceramic

Materials (3) spring

General overview of the compositions, properties and

applications of ceramic materials. The theory and prac-

tice of fabrication methods for ceramics and glasses.

Methods of characterization. Selected properties of

ceramic materials. Prerequisite: MAT 33. Harmer

MAT 216. Diffusion and Phase

Transformations (3) fall

Fundamental diffusion equations; liquid-solid transfor-

mations; solid-solid transformations; transformation

kinetics; metastable transformations; diffusionless trans-

formations; examples of various transformations in

different materials and their effect on properties.

Prerequisites: MAT 203, MAT 205. DuPont

MAT 218. Mechanical Behavior of

Macro/Nanoscale Materials (3) fall

Elasticity, plasticity, and fracture of metals, ceramics,

polymers, and composites. The roles of defects and size

scale on mechanical response. Strengthening and tough-

ening mechanisms in solids. Statics and time-dependent

failures from microstructural and fracture mechanics

viewpoints. Lectures and laboratories. Prerequisites:

MECH 3, MAT 33; MAT 10 or permission of instruc-

tor. Vinci

MAT 221. (STS 221) Materials in the

Development of Man (3) fall

Development of materials technology and engineering

from the stone age to atomic age as an example of the

interaction between technology and society. In-class

demonstration laboratories on composition and structure

of materials. Term projects using archaeological materials

and alloys. Course intended for, but not limited to, stu-

dents in the humanities and secondary science

education. Engineering students may not use this course

for engineering science or technical elective credit.

MAT 240. Research Techniques (3) fall

Study and application of research techniques in materials

science and engineering. Research opportunities, design

of experimental programs, analysis of data, presentation

of results. Selection of research topic and preparation

and defense of research proposal. Restricted to a small

number of students selected by the department from

those who apply.

MAT 291. Undergraduate Research (3) spring

Application of research techniques to a project in materi-

als science and engineering selected in consultation with

the faculty. Normally preceded by MAT 240.

MAT 302. Electronic Properties of Materials (3)

fall

The electronic structure of materials, i.e., band and zone

theory, is presented from a physical point of view.

Electrical conductivity in metals, semiconductors, insula-

tors and superconductors is discussed. Simple

semiconductor devices reviewed. Magnetic properties are

examined in the context of domain theory and applica-

tions are discussed. Optical and dielectric properties of

semiconductors and ferroelectrics are considered.

Prerequisites: MAT 201, MAT 203. Cheng

MAT 309 (ME 309). Composite Materials (3)

The principles and technology of composite materials.

Processing, properties, and structural applications of

composites, with emphasis on fiber-reinforced polymers.

Lectures and some field trips or laboratories.

Prerequisite: MAT 33 or equivalent, MECH 3. Pearson

MAT 310. Independent Study in Materials (1-3)

Provides an opportunity for advanced, independent

study of selected topics in materials science and engi-

neering not covered in other formal courses.

MAT 312. (CHE 312, CHEM 312) Fundamentals

of Corrosion (3)

Corrosion phenomena and definitions. Electrochemical

aspects including reaction mechanisms, thermodynamics,

Pourbaix diagrams, kinetics of corrosion processes, polar-

ization, and passivity. Non-electrochemical corrosion

including mechanisms, theories, and quantitative

descriptions of atmospheric corrosion. Corrosion of met-

als under stress. Cathodic and anodic protection,

coatings, alloys, inhibitors, and passivators. Prerequisite:

MAT 205, CHEM 187, or equivalent of either.

MAT 314. Metal Forming Processes (3)

Mechanical metallurgy and mechanics of metal forming

processes. Yield criteria. Workability. Friction and lubri-

cation. Engineering analysis of forging, extrusion, wire

and tube drawing, rolling, sheet forming and other

processes. Recent developments in metal forming.

Prerequisite: MAT 206 or consent of instructor. Misiolek

MAT 315. Physical Properties of Structural and

Electronic Ceramics (3)

Structure-property relationships in ceramics. Mechanical

behavior including plasticity, hardness, elasticity, strength

and toughening mechanisms. Thermal behavior includ-

ing specific heat, thermal expansion, thermal conduction

and thermal shock. Electrical behavior including applica-

tion of tensors and crystal physics to electroceramics.

Prerequisites: MAT 214 or consent of instructor. Harmer

MAT 317. Imperfections in Crystals (3)

The major types of crystal defects and their role in con-

trolling the properties of materials. Point, line and planar

defects, their atomic configurations and experimental

techniques to study their characteristics. Emphasis on

Materials Science and Engineering 319

the role of dislocations and grain boundaries in the con-

trol of mechanical properties. Prerequisite: MAT 203 or

consent of instructor. Rickman

MAT 319. Current Topics in Materials Science (3)

Selected topics of current interest in the field of materials

engineering but not covered in the regular courses. May

be repeated for credit with consent of the department

chair. Prerequisite: Consent of department chair.

MAT 320. Analytical Methods in Materials

Science (3)

Selected topics in modern analysis and their application

to materials problems in such areas as thermodynamics,

crystallography, deformation and fracture, diffusion.

Prerequisite: MATH 231 or 205. Rickman

MAT 324 (BioE 324). Introduction to Organic

Biomaterials

Property, characterization, fabrication and modification

of organic materials for biomedical and biological appli-

cations; host responses to biomaterials on the molecular,

cellular and system level; general introduction to biosen-

sors, drug delivery devices and tissue engineering.

Prerequisites: BioE 110 or consent of instructor. Cheng

MAT 325 (BioE 325). Inorganic Biomaterials (3)

Fabrication methods for biomedical implants and

devices. Selection of metals and ceramics with specific

bulk and surface physical as well as chemical properties.

The role of materials chemistry and microstructure.

Biocompatibility. Case studies (dental and orthopedic

implants, stents, nanoporous ceramic filters for kidney

dialysis). Prerequisites BioE 110 or MAT 33, or consent

of instructor. Misiolek

MAT 327. Industrial Project (4)

Restricted to a small group of seniors and graduate stu-

dents selected by the department from those who apply.

Three full days per week are spent on development proj-

ects at the plant of an area industry, under the direction

of a plant engineer and with faculty supervision.

Misiolek

MAT 329. Industrial Project (4)

To be taken concurrently with MAT 327. Course mate-

rial is the same as MAT 327. Misiolek

MAT 332. Basics of Materials Science and

Engineering (3) fall

Physical and chemical principles applied to understand-

ing the structure, properties, selection, fabrication, and

use of engineering materials: metals, polymers, ceramics,

composites and electronic materials. Case studies of

materials used ranged from transportation systems to

microelectronic devices. Lectures and individual study

assigned by graduate advisor. Prerequisites: Graduate stu-

dent status and permission of department chair. Not

available to students who have taken MAT 33 or equiva-

lent.

MAT 333. (EES 337, CHM 337) Crystallography

and Diffraction (3)

Introduction to crystal symmetry, point groups, and

space groups. Emphasis on materials characterization by

x-ray diffraction and electron diffraction. Specific topics

include crystallographic notation, stereographic projec-

tions, orientation of single crystal, textures, phase

identification, quantitative analysis, stress measurement,

electron diffraction, ring and spot patterns, convergent

beam electron diffraction (CBED), and space group

determination. Applications in mineralogy, metallurgy,

ceramics, microelectronics, polymers, and catalysts.

Lectures and laboratory work. Prerequisites: MAT 203 or

EES 133 or senior standing in chemistry.

MAT 334. (EES 338, CHE 334) Electron

Microscopy and Microanalysis (4) fall

Fundamentals and experimental methods in electron

optical techniques including scanning electron

microscopy (SEM), conventional transmission (TEM)

and scanning transmission (STEM) electron microscopy.

Specific topics covered will include electron optics, elec-

tron beam interactions with solids, electron diffraction

and chemical microanalysis. Applications to the study of

the structure of materials are given. Prerequisite: consent

of the department chair. Lyman and Kiely

MAT 335. (CHE 335) Principles of

Semiconductor Materials Processing (3)

Description and analysis of the processing steps involved

in microelectronic material fabrication. Emphasis will be

placed on the chemistry of the fabrication steps, mathe-

matical modeling of the transport and chemical reaction

phenomena, and interpretation of experimental methods

and data. Prerequisite: a course in thermodynamics and

senior standing.

MAT 338. Failure Analysis Reports (3) spring

Application of chemical and mechanical failure concepts,

microstructural analysis, and fracture surface characteri-

zation to the analysis and prevention of engineering

component failures. Conduct laboratory investigations

on component failures with written and oral presenta-

tions of the results. Prerequisites: Senior standing and

MAT 204, MAT 206, MAT 210, MAT 214, and MAT

302.

MAT 339 Light Metals (3)

Designing mechanical properties of light metals such as

aluminum, beryllium, magnesium and titanium through

alloying and processing. In depth analysis of strengthen-

ing mechanisms and resulting physical properties.

Review of typical casting, deformation, powder metallur-

gy and machining processes applied to these materials.

Recent commercial applications in the construction,

packaging, aerospace and automotive industries.

Prerequisite: MAT 206 or consent of the instructor.

Misiolek

MAT 342. Inorganic Glasses (3)

Definition, formation and structure of glass; common

glass systems; manufacturing processes; optical, mechani-

cal, electrical and dielectric properties; chemical

durability; glass fibers and glass ceramics. Lectures and

laboratories. Prerequisite: MAT 33. Jain

MAT 344. (IE 344) Metal Machining Analysis (3)

spring

Intensive study of metal cutting emphasizing forces,

energy, temperature, tool materials, tool life, and surface

integrity. Abrasive processes. Laboratory and project

work. Prerequisite: IE 115 or ME 240 or MAT 206.

Misiolek

MAT 345 Powder Metallurgy (3)

Metal powder fabrication and characterization methods.

Powder processing including powder compaction, theory

of compacting, press and die design, sintering, and hot

consolidation. Microstructure and properties of sintered

320 Lehigh University Course Catalog 2009-2010

materials and their relationship to processing conditions.

Industrial applications. Emerging powder metallurgy

technologies. Prerequisite: MAT 206 or consent of

instructor. Misiolek

MAT 346. Physical Metallurgy of Welding (3)

Operational characteristics of welding processes.

Application of solidification and solid state transforma-

tion theory to understanding microstructural

development in welds, and influence of welding on

properties. Metallurgical defects in welds.

Computational techniques for predicting heat flow and

phase transformations in welds of complex engineering

alloys. Laboratory demonstrations. Prerequisites: MAT

216. DuPont

MAT 348. Materials Science for Electronic

Applications (3)

Materials technology for integrated circuit packaging sys-

tems. Dielectric, thermal and mechanical considerations;

joining methods; resistor and ceramic capacitor materials

and incorporation of active devices into packaging sys-

tems; multilayer package design and processing.

Individualized semester project involving forensic exami-

nation of failures using scanning electron microscopy

and microprobe analysis. Prerequisite: MAT 201, and

MAT 33.

MAT 355. Materials for Nanotechnology (3)

An introduction to the nanoworld and how we observe

the nanoworld through transmission electron

microscopy. Other topics include: probing nanosurfaces,

carbon as a nanomaterial, fullerenes, carbon nanotubes,

metal clusters, metal nanoparticle preparation, and

directed self-assembly of nanoparticles. Also discussed are

the thermal, chemical, electronic, optical, and magnetic

properties of metal nanoparticles, nanowires, semicon-

ductor nanoparticles, and inorganic nanoparticles. Kiely

MAT 356. Strategies for Nanocharacterization (3)

Lectures describe various nanocharacterization tech-

niques in terms of which technique is best for specific

measurements on nanostructures less than 100 nm in

extent. Special attention is paid to spatial resolution and

detection limits for SEM, TEM, X-ray analysis, diffrac-

tion analysis, ion beam techniques, surface techniques,

AFM and other SPMs, and light microscopies and spec-

troscopies. Lyman and Jedlicka

MAT 359. Thin Film Processing and Mechanical

Behavior (3)

Metallic, ceramic and glassy films, with thickness less

than approximately 1 B5m, formed by gas phase deposi-

tion. Thin film applications, vacuum fundamentals,

PVD and CVD, models for general thin film growth,

epitaxial growth, sources of stress, deformation mecha-

nisms, and mechanical characterization techniques such

as substrate curvature and nanoindentation. Prerequisite:

MAT 33. Also recommended, but not required, is some

experience with mechanics of materials. Vinci

MAT 367. (CHE 367) Metal Films and Coatings:

Processing, Structure, and Properties (3)

Focus will be on the processing, structure, and properties

of metal films and coatings. Processing methods will

include evaporation, sputtering, chemical vapor deposi-

tion (CVD), plasma-assisted CVD, ion implantation,

electrodeposition, metal bath solidification, weld overlay,

thermal spraying, and diffusion. Characterization of thin

films and coatings will be done with the use of sophisti-

cated analytical instrumentation, including spectroscopic

methods, microscopy and diffraction techniques.

Characterization methods are explored in conjunction

with processing techniques and film/coating properties

via class assignments that are designed to introduce stu-

dents to the archival scientific literature. Prerequisite:

Senior standing in Chemical Engineering or Materials

Science and Engineering, or permission of the instruc-

tor(s).

MAT 388. (CHE 388, CHM 388) Polymer

Synthesis and Characterization Laboratory (3)

Techniques include: free radical and condensation poly-

merization; molecular weight distribution by gel

chromatography; crystallinity and order by differential

scanning calorimetry; pyrolysis and gas chromatography;

dynamic mechanical and dielectric behavior; morpholo-

gy and microscopy; surface properties. Prerequisite:

Senior level standing in chemical engineering, chemistry,

or materials science and engineering, or permission of

the instructor.

MAT 393. (CHE 393, CHM 393) Physical

Polymer Science (3)

Structural and physical aspects of polymers (organic,

inorganic, natural). Molecular and atomic basis for poly-

mer properties and behavior. Characteristics of glassy,

crystalline states (including viscoelastic and relaxation

behavior) for single-/ and multi-component systems.

Thermodynamics and kinetics of transition phenomena.

Structure, morphology and behavior. Prerequisite: Senior

level standing in Chemical Engineering, Chemistry, or

Materials Science and Engineering, or permission of the

instructor.

MAT 396. (CHEM 396) Chemistry of

Nonmetallic Solids (3)

Chemistry of ionic and electronic defects in nonmetallic

solids and their influence on chemical and physical prop-

erties. Intrinsic and impurity-controlled defects,

nonstoichiometric compounds, defect interactions.

Properties to be discussed include: diffusion, sintering,

ionic and electronic conductivity, solid-state reactions,

and photoconductivity. Prerequisite: CHEM 187 or

MAT 205 or equivalent.

For Graduate Students

The department offers graduate degrees in Materials

Science and Engineering at both masters (M.S. and M.

Eng.) and doctoral levels (Ph.D.). Specialized masters

degree programs are also available, in Photonics, in

Polymers, and in Business Administration and

Engineering (MBA&E). The M.S. Degree in Photonics

is an interdisciplinary degree for broad training in such

topics as fiber optics, lightwave communications, and

optical materials, to prepare students for work in indus-

try or for further graduate research at the Ph.D. level.

The program requires a total of 30 credits of graduate

work, including a 15-credit core of courses in materials,

electrical engineering, and physics. The Polymer Science

and Engineering Program offers interdisciplinary M.S.

and Ph.D. degrees through several departments, includ-

ing Materials Science and Engineering. The program

includes courses in materials, chemical engineering,

chemistry, physics, and mechanical engineering. The

MBA&E is an interdisciplinary degree program in busi-

ness and engineering designed primarily for students

Materials Science and Engineering 321

with an undergraduate degree in engineering and two

years or more of relevant work experience. The curricu-

lum consists of an MBA core and electives (23 credits)

and engineering core and electives (18 credits), plus

other electives and a project which integrates business

and engineering (4 credits). Students wishing to have the

engineering core in Materials Science and Engineering

may enter this program through the Materials Science

and Engineering Department.

Special Programs and Opportunities

The department has established specific recommended

programs for the M.S., the M.Eng., and the Ph.D.,

emphasizing the following areas: metals processing and

performance, ceramics and glass processing and proper-

ties, electronic and photonic materials and packaging,

electron microscopy and microstructural characteriza-

tion, and archaeometallurgy.

These programs are flexible and often interdisciplinary.

Major Requirements

The requirements are explained in section IV. A candi-

date for the M.S. completes a thesis, unless fully funded

by industry, in which case a thesis is not required. M.S.

thesis research normally represents six of the 30 semester

hours required for this degree. Candidates for the

M.Eng. complete a three-credit engineering project.

A candidate for the Ph.D. prepares a preliminary pro-

gram of courses and research, providing for specialization

in some field (largely through research) in consultation

with the adviser. Prior to formal establishment of the

doctoral program by the special committee and its

approval by the college, the student passes a qualifying

examination that must be taken in the first or second

year of doctoral work. The department does not require

a foreign language. It does require preparation and

defense of a research proposal as a portion of the general

examination.

Of the courses listed above only those in the 300 series

are available for graduate credit. There are many addi-

tional offerings in materials under the listings of other

departments.

Most graduate students receive some form of financial

aid. Several kinds of fellowships and assistantships are

available. This type of aid generally provides for tuition,

and a stipend. For details of graduate scholarships, fel-

lowships and assistantships, please refer to section IV.

Research Activities

Graduate students conduct their research in facilities

located in the Department or the Center for Advanced

Materials and Nanotechnology, or other centers and

institutes. The following list describes current Materials

Science and Engineering research activities:

Metals Processing and Performance: joining of metals

and alloys, laser engineered net shaping, solidification

modeling, corrosion and coatings, deformation process-

ing, grain boundary cohesion, bulk metallic glasses.

Ceramics and Glass Processing and Properties: funda-

mental studies of sintering and grain growth, novel

reaction-based processing for bulk and thin film ceram-

ics, microstructure and properties of oxides for

environmental coatings, growth of single crystal piezo-

electric ceramics, creep and grain boundary chemistry of

alumina, dielectric and electrical properties of glasses,

corrosion of glass.

Electronic and Photonic Materials and Packaging: elec-

tromigration, degradation processes in light-emitting

semiconductors, mechanical behavior of thin metal

films, reliability of MEMS materials, processing and per-

formance of advanced solder alloys, polymer packaging

materials, glass nanostructure and chemistry, glasses for

nonlinear optical applications, transparent glass-ceramics,

photoinduced phenomena.

Microstructural Characterization: transmission electron

microscopy, scanning electron microscopy, nanoscale

compositional mapping, cathodoluminescence

microscopy and spectroscopy, x-ray microbeam diffrac-

tion and fluorescence, x-ray microanalysis, electron-loss

spectrometry, extended x-ray absorption and electron

energy loss fine structure (EXAFS and EXELFS).

Archaeometallurgy: reconstruction of ancient smelting

and fabrication processes, artifact analysis using modern

analytical methods, history of materials.

Graduate-Level Courses

MAT 401. Thermodynamics and Kinetics (4) fall

Integrated treatment of the fundamentals of thermody-

namics, diffusion and kinetics, as related to materials

processes including both hard and soft materials. Laws of

thermodynamics, conditions of equilibrium, free ener-

gies, statistical thermodynamics, thermodynamics of

surfaces, bulk and grain-boundary diffusion, nucleation,

spinodal decomposition, and reaction kinetics.

MAT 402 (ME 402). Advanced Manufacturing

Science (3) spring

Application of the fundamental science-base underlying

manufacturing processes to develop knowledge and tools

suitable for industrial utilization. Selected manufacturing

processes representing the general classes of material

removal, material deformation, material phase change,

material flow, and material joining are addressed.

Students create computer-based process simulation tools

independently as well as utilize leading commercial

process simulation packages. Laboratory experiences are

included throughout the course. Coulter/Nied

MAT 403. Structure/Property Relations (4) spring

Structure of materials and relationship to properties.

Crystal structures and crystalline defects, structure in

biological systems, amorphous materials, microstructure,

and relationships to mechanical and other properties.

MAT 406. Solidification (3)

Structure, theory and properties of liquids.

Homogeneous and heterogeneous nucleation theory and

experimental results. Solidification phenomena in pure,

single and multiphase materials including the nature of

the freezing interface, segregation, constitutional super-

cooling, dendritic growth, crystallographic effects, the

origin of defects, crystal growing, zone processes.

Prerequisite: consent of the department chair. DuPont

MAT 408. Transformations (3) fall

The thermodynamic, kinetic and phenomenological

aspects of a wide spectrum of solid-state phase transfor-

mations. Theories of nucleation, growth and coarsening

of second-phase precipitates. Application of the theories

to continuous and discontinuous reactions, massive,

martensitic and bainitic transformations in metals.

322 Lehigh University Course Catalog 2009-2010

Transformations in nonmetallics. Prerequisite: MAT 205

and 216 or equivalent.

MAT 409. Current Topics in Materials (3)

Recent practical and theoretical developments in materi-

als. This course may be repeated for credit if new

material is covered. Prerequisite: consent of the depart-

ment chair.

MAT 410. Physical Chemistry of Metals (3)

Discussions of reactions involving gases and reactions

involving pure condensed phases and a gaseous phase.

Ellingham diagrams and equilibria in metal-oxygen-car-

bon systems. Consideration of the behavior of solutions

and methods for determining thermodynamic properties

of solutions by experimentation and computation.

Prerequisite: MAT 205 or equivalent.

MAT 411. Modern Joining Methods (3)

The foundations upon which the joining processes rest;

the present limitations of the various processes; the

trends in new developments; the engineering and struc-

tural aspects of joining. Prerequisite: MAT 216 and 218

or equivalent.

MAT 412. Magnetic Properties of Materials (3)

Fundamental concepts of magnetism and magnetic prop-

erties of ferro- and ferrimagnetic materials. Metallic and

nonmetallic materials. Current application areas consid-

ered as examples. Prerequisite: Phys 31 or 363 or

equivalent.

MAT 413. Formability of Metals (3)

Formability concept. Analysis of the microstructure

response to deformation processing parameters including

state of stress, state of strain, stain rate, temperature, and

friction. Analysis of formability in metal forming

processes. Defects. Seminar/discussion format.

Prerequisite: MAT 314 or consent of instructor. Misiolek

MAT 415. Mechanical Behavior of Ceramic

Solids (3)

Strength, elasticity, creep, thermal stress fracture, hard-

ness, abrasion and high-temperature deformation

characteristics of single- and multi-component brittle

ceramic solids. Statistical theories of strength, static and

cyclic fatigue, crack propagation, fracture toughness.

Correlation of mechanical behavior, microstructure, and

processing parameters. Prerequisite: MAT 218 or consent

of the department chair.

MAT 416. Atom Movements (3)

Phenomenological and atomistic development of the

laws of diffusion and their solution. Influence of gradi-

ents of concentration, potential, temperature and

pressure. Effects of structural defects on diffusion in

metals and nonmetals. Prerequisite: MATH 23 and

MAT 205 or the equivalent.

MAT 417. Deformation and Strength of Solids (3)

Topics related to deformation of solids including creep,

strengthening mechanisms, annealing of deformed solids,

preferred orientation. Primary emphasis is on crystalline

materials. May be repeated for credit if different material

is covered. Prerequisite: MAT 218 or equivalent.

MAT 418. Fatigue and Fracture of Engineering

Materials (3)

Application of fracture mechanics concepts to the fatigue

and fracture of crystalline and amorphous solids.

Fracture control design philosophies. Metallurgical

aspects of fracture toughness and embrittlement suscepti-

bility. Environment-enhanced cracking. Fatigue crack

propagation in metals and polymers. Electron fractogra-

phy. Failure analysis case histories. Prerequisite: MAT

218 or equivalent.

MAT 419. Advanced Physical Metallurgy (3)

Application of physical metallurgy principles to materials

systems. Transformation structures and the influence of

morphology on properties. Alloy design and heat treat-

ment for improved strength, toughness, creep, corrosion

resistance, electrical and magnetic properties.

Prerequisite: MAT 325 or equivalent.

MAT 421. Fracture Analysis (3)

Application of fracture mechanics concepts, microstruc-

tural analysis, and fracture surface characterization to the

analysis and prevention of engineering component fail-

ures. Extensive use of case histories. Introduction to legal

aspects of product liability. Prerequisite: MAT 218 or

MECH 313 or equivalent.

MAT 423. Advanced Transmission Electron

Microscopy (4)

The theory and practice of operation of the transmission

and scanning transmission electron microscope.

Techniques covered include bright field, high resolution

and weak-beam dark field, lattice imaging, diffraction

pattern indexing and Kikuchi line analysis. The theory

of diffraction contrast is applied to the interpretation of

electron micrographs. Specimen preparation techniques.

Prerequisite: MAT 334 or equivalent. Kiely, Watanabe

MAT 425. Topics in Materials Processing (3)

Topics such as: ceramics, metal, and polymer synthesis

and compaction phenomena. Theories of sintering and

grain growth. Physical behavior of sintered compacts.

Techniques of fiber and crystal growth. Vapor deposition

and ultra-high-purity materials preparation. Desirable

preparation: MAT 204 or 206 or 214, and MAT 218.

Prerequisite: consent of the department chair.

MAT 427. Advanced Scanning Electron

Microscopy (4)

The theory and practice of operation of the scanning

electron microscope and electron microprobe.

Techniques covered will include high-resolution scan-

ning, quantitative electron probe microanalysis. Electron

beam sample interactions, X-ray spectrometry, and elec-

tron optics will be discussed in detail. Prerequisite: MAT

334 or equivalent. Lyman

MAT 429. Dielectric and Electrical Properties of

Ceramics (3)

Basic concepts of dielectric and electrical phenomena in

ceramics including dielectric loss, dielectric breakdown,

ferroelectricity, piezoelectricity, mixed conduction, and

interfacial effects. Physical and materials aspects of tech-

nologically important ceramics such as thermistors,

varistors, boundary layer capacitors, solid electrolytes, gas

sensors, glasses, etc. Prerequisite: MAT 201 or equiva-

lent. Jain

MAT 430. Glass Science (3)

Definition and formation of glass. Structure of common

inorganic (including metallic) and polymeric glass sys-

tems. Methods of glass making. Phase separation of

devitrification. Physical properties including diffusion,

electrical conductivity, chemical durability, and optical

and mechanical properties. Special products including

Mathematics 323

glass ceramics, optical fibers, photosensitive glasses, etc.

Visit to a glass manufacturing plant may also be includ-

ed. Prerequisite: MAT 315 or equivalent. Jain

MAT 431. Sintering Theory and Practice (3)

Science and technology of the sintering of solid-state

materials. Driving force and variables. Critical review of

the sintering models. Coverage of single phase, multi-

phase and composite systems. Special sintering

techniques such as fast firing, rate controlled sintering,

hot pressing and transient second-phase sintering.

Sintering of specific ceramic and metal systems.

Prerequisite: MAT 214 or equivalent. Harmer

MAT 432. Theories of Silicon Oxidation (3)

A critical review is given of advanced theories of silicon

oxidation. Present accepted theory (Deal-Grove) is inad-

equate for explaining thin (state-of-the-art) oxides.

Course will consider most recent approaches to theory of

thin gate insulators. It will also include new experimental

approaches that use “impurity gaseous doping” and halo-

gen additions.

MAT 435 Photonic Materials (3)

Scope of photonics, especially in communications.

Characteristics of light. Optical properties of metals,

semiconductors and insulators. Nonlinear optical proper-

ties. Materials for fibers, lasers, detectors, modulators,

amplifiers and other components. Prerequisites: MAT

302 or consent of instructor. Jain

MAT 437. (MECH 437) Dislocations and

Strength in Crystals (3)

Theory and application of dislocations. Geometrical

interpretation; elastic properties; force on a dislocation;

dislocation interactions and reactions; multiplication.

Dislocations in crystal structures. Selected topics in

strengthening, plastic flow, creep, fatigue and fracture are

discussed. Prerequisite: MATH 205 or 231, or MAT

320; MAT 317, or consent of the department chair. Wei

MAT 443. (CHEM 443) Solid-State Chemistry (3)

Crystal structure, diffraction in crystals and on surfaces,

bonding and energy spectra in solids, dielectrics, surface

states and surface fields in crystals. Prerequisites: one

course in linear algebra and one course in quantum

mechanics. Klier

MAT 455. Materials for Nanotechnology (3)

An introduction to the nanoworld and how we observe

the nanoworld through transmission electron

microscopy. Other topics include: probing nanosurfaces,

carbon as a nanomaterial, fullerenes, carbon nanotubes,

metal clusters, metal nanoparticle preparation, and

directed self-assembly of nanoparticles. Also discussed are

the thermal, chemical, electronic, optical, and magnetic

properties of metal nanoparticles, nanowires, semicon-

ductor nanoparticles, and inorganic nanoparticles. Kiely

MAT 456. Strategies for Nanocharacterization (3)

Lectures describe various nanocharacterization tech-

niques in terms of which technique is best for specific

measurements on nanostructures less than 100 nm in

extent. Special attention is paid to spatial resolution and

detection limits for SEM, TEM, X-ray analysis, diffrac-

tion analysis, ion beam techniques, surface techniques,

AFM and other SPMs, and light microscopies and spec-

troscopies. Lyman and Jedlicka

MAT 458. Materials Design (3)

Analysis of design requirements for materials compo-

nents. Selection of materials and processes. Study of fail-

ures in process and service and application of recent

metallurgical and materials engineering knowledge for

improved design. Solution and discussion of industrial

problems, and outline of experimental approach.

Prerequisite: consent of the chair.

MAT 460. Engineering Project (1-3)

In-depth study of a problem in the area of materials

engineering or design. The study is to lead to specific

conclusions and be embodied in a written report.

Intended for candidates for the M.Eng. May be repeated

for a total of three credit hours.

MAT 461. Advanced Materials Research

Techniques (3)

Study of the theory and application of selected advanced

techniques for investigating the structure and properties

of materials. May be repeated for credit with the

approval of the department chair.

MAT 482. (CHM 482, CHE 482) Engineering

Behavior of Polymers (3) spring

A treatment of the mechanical behavior of polymers.

Characterization of experimentally observed viscoelastic

response of polymeric solids with the aid of mechanical

model analogs. Topics include time-temperature super-

position, experimental characterization of large

deformation and fracture processes, polymer adhesion,

and the effects of fillers, plasticizers, moisture and aging

on mechanical behavior. Pearson

MAT 485. (CHM 485, CHE 485) Polymer Blends

and Composites (3) fall

Synthesis, morphology, and mechanical behavior of poly-

mer blends and composites. Mechanical blends, block

and graft copolymers, interpenetrating polymer net-

works, polymer impregnated concrete, and fiber and

particulate reinforced polymers are emphasized.

Prerequisite: any introductory polymer course or equiva-

lent. Sperling

MAT 490. Thesis. (1-6)

MAT 493. (CHE 493, CHM 493) Physical

Polymer Science (3)

Structural and physical aspects of polymers (organic,

inorganic, natural). Molecular and atomic basis for poly-

mer properties and behavior. Characteristics of glassy,

crystalline states (including viscoelastic and relaxation

behavior) for single- and multi-component systems.

Thermodynamics and kinetics of transition phenomena.

Structure, morphology and behavior.

MAT 499. Dissertation (1-15)

Mathematics

Professors. Huai-Dong Cao, Ph.D. (Princeton), A.

Everett Pitcher Professor; Donald M. Davis, Ph.D.

(Stanford); Vladimir Dobric, Ph.D. (Zagreb, Croatia);

Bennett Eisenberg, Ph.D. (M.I.T); Wei-Min Huang,

Ph.D. (Rochester), chair; Garth Isaak, Ph.D. (Rutgers);

Terrence Napier, Ph.D. (Chicago); Eric P. Salathe, Ph.D.

(Brown), director of the Institute for Biomedical

Engineering and Mathematical Biology; Lee J. Stanley,

Ph.D. (Berkeley); Steven H. Weintraub, Ph.D.

(Princeton); Joseph E. Yukich, Ph.D. (M.I.T.).

324 Lehigh University Course Catalog 2009-2010

Associate professors. Bruce A. Dodson, Ph.D. (S.U.N.Y.

at Stony Brook); David L. Johnson, Ph.D. (M.I.T.);

Clifford S. Queen, Ph.D. (Ohio State); Susan

Szczepanski, Ph.D. (Rutgers); Ramamirthan

Venkataraman, Ph.D. (Brown); Linghai Zhang, Ph.D.

(Ohio State).

Assistant professors. Mark A. Skandera, Ph.D. (M.I.T.);

Xiaofeng Sun, Ph.D. (Stanford); Ping-Shi Wu, Ph.D.

(Davis).

Adjunct professor. Howard Fegan, Ph.D. (Oxford).

Mathematics is a subject of great intrinsic power and

beauty. It is the universal language of science, and is

essential for a clear and complete understanding of virtu-

ally all phenomena. Mathematical training prepares a

student to express and analyze problems and relation-

ships in a logical manner in a wide variety of disciplines

including the physical, engineering, social, biological,

and medical sciences, business, and pure mathematics

itself. This is a principal reason behind the perpetual

need and demand for mathematicians in education,

research centers, government, and industry.

The department offers three major programs leading to

the degrees of bachelor of arts in mathematics, bachelor

of science in mathematics (with a general mathematics

and an applied mathematics option), and bachelor of sci-

ence in statistics. It also offers several minor programs

for undergraduates.

At the graduate level, it offers programs leading to the

degrees of master of science in mathematics, master of

science in applied mathematics, master of science in sta-

tistics, doctor of philosophy in mathematics, and doctor

of philosophy in applied mathematics.

The Division of Applied Mathematics and Statistics is a

part of the Department of Mathematics.

Calculus Sequences

Many degree programs throughout the university include

a mathematics requirement consisting of a sequence in

calculus. The Department of Mathematics offers three

calculus sequences: MATH 21, 22, 23; MATH 31, 32,

33; MATH 51, 52.

The MATH 21, 22, 23 sequence is a systematic develop-

ment of calculus. Most students of mathematics, science,

engineering, and business will take some or all of this

sequence.

As an honors sequence, the MATH 31, 32, 33 sequence

covers essentially the same material but in greater depth

and with more attention to rigor and proof. This

sequence should be considered by students who have

demonstrated exceptional ability in mathematics.

Students who are contemplating a major in mathematics

are strongly encouraged to consider this sequence.

The MATH 51, 52 sequence is a survey of calculus. This

sequence is not sufficient preparation for most subse-

quent mathematics courses. Students contemplating

further study in mathematics should consider MATH

21, 22 instead.

MATH 75, 76 is a two-semester sequence that substi-

tutes for MATH 21, covering the same material but at a

slower pace.

The MATH 31, 32, 33 sequence will be accepted in

place of the other two sequences. MATH 21, 22 will be

accepted in place of MATH 51, 52. Credit will be

awarded for only one course in each of the following

groups: 21, 75/76, 31, and 51; 22, 32, and 52; 23 and

33. If two courses in the same group are taken, credit

will be awarded for the more advanced course; 3x is the

most advanced, while 5x is the least advanced.

Undergraduate Degree Programs

The Department of Mathematics offers degree programs

in Mathematics and Statistics. These programs have the

flexibility and versatility needed to prepare students for a

wide variety of careers in government, industry, research

and education.

Students in the degree programs in mathematics must

satisfy three types of requirements beyond those required

by the college: Core Mathematics Requirements, Major

Requirements and General Electives. The Core

Mathematics Requirement ensures a common core of

knowledge appropriate for students in each program.

The Major Program Electives consist of courses with spe-

cific mathematical or statistical content chosen by the

student in consultation with the major advisor to com-

plement the student’s interest and career aspirations.

With these further breadth and greater depth of knowl-

edge are achieved. The General Electives consist of

additional courses chosen from among those offered by

the university faculty. Students can use these electives to

pursue interests beyond the major, or may use these to

expand upon the basic requirements of the degree pro-

gram. Students are strongly encouraged to use some of

these electives to earn a minor in another discipline.

Students in the degree program in statistics must satisfy

four types of requirements beyond those required by the

college: Required Major Courses, Major Electives,

Professional Electives and Free Electives.

Each student is provided a faculty advisor to guide an

individual program and supervise the selection of elec-

tives.

B.A. in Mathematics

The B.A. program in mathematics emphasizes funda-

mental principles as well as the mastery of techniques

required for the effective use of mathematics. The pro-

gram provides a solid foundation for those who want to

pursue a mathematically oriented career or advanced

study in any mathematically oriented field.

Requirements:

College Distribution Requirements (31-34 credits)

Core Mathematics Requirements (32-35 credits)

Calculus (12 cr) MATH 21, 22,

23 or MATH

31, 32, 33

Calculus (12 cr) MATH 21, 22,

23 or MATH

31, 32, 33

Introductory Seminar (3 cr) MATH 163

Statistics/Probability (3-4 cr) MATH 12 or

MATH 231

Linear Algebra (4 cr) MATH 242

Differential Equations (3-4 cr) MATH 205 or

MATH 320

Analysis (4 cr) MATH 301

Complex Analysis (3-4 cr) MATH 208 or

MATH 316

Major Requirements (10 credits)

Algebra (4 cr) MATH 243

Mathematics 325

Electives (6 cr) Two courses (at

least 6 credits)

at or above

the200-level

chosen in con-

sultation with

the major advi-

sor. At most one

course may be

taken outside

the department.

General Electives (41-47 credits)

Chosen in consultation with faculty advisor.

This program requires a total of 120 credit hours.

A student must achieve an average of 2.0 or higher in

major courses.

BS in Mathematics

The BS in Mathematics program provides a more exten-

sive and intensive study of mathematics and its

applications. Students can pursue the General

Mathematics Option or the Applied Mathematics

Option. These programs are especially recommended for

students intending to pursue advanced study in mathe-

matics or applied mathematics. The General

Mathematics Option is recommended for students who

wish to pursue mathematics either by itself or in combi-

nation with a related field (e.g., physics, computer

science or economics). The Applied Mathematics Option

provides a broad background in the major areas of appli-

cable mathematics.

General Mathematics Option

Requirements:

College Distribution Requirements (31-34 credits)

Core Mathematics Requirements (32-34 credits)

Calculus (12 cr) MATH 21, 22,

23, or MATH

31, 32, 33

Introductory Seminar (3 cr) MATH 163

Statistics/Probability (3 cr) MATH 231 or

MATH 309

Linear Algebra (4 cr) MATH 242

Differential Equations (3-4 cr) MATH 205 or

MATH 320

Analysis (4 cr) MATH 301

Complex Analysis (3-4 cr) MATH 208 or

MATH 316

Major Requirements (24-25 cr)

Algebra (4 cr) MATH 243

Electives (14 cr) Four courses (at

least 14 credits)

at or above the

200 level. At

most two cours-

es may be taken

outside the

department.

Computer Science (6-7 cr) Two courses:

ENGR 1 and

one approved

CSE course or

two approved

CSE courses.

General Electives (27-33 cr) Chosen in con-

sultation with

faculty advisor.

This program requires a total of 120 credit hours.

A student must achieve an average of 2.0 or higher in

major courses.

Applied Mathematics Option

Requirements:

College Distribution Requirements (31-34 credits)

Core Mathematics Requirements (33-34 credits)

Calculus (12 cr) MATH 21,

22,23 or

MATH 31, 32,

Introductory Seminar (3 cr) MATH 163

Statistics/Probability (3 cr) MATH 231 or

MATH 309

Linear Algebra (4 cr) MATH 242

Differential Equations (4 cr) MATH 205 or

MATH 320

Analysis (4 cr) MATH 301

Complex Analysis (3-4 cr) MATH 208 or

MATH 316

Major Requirements (23-24 credits)

Electives (17 cr) Five courses (at

least 17 credits)

at or above the

200 level chosen

in consultation

with the major

advisor to estab-

lish a

concentration

asdescribed

below. At most

two courses

maybe taken

outsidethe

department.

Computer Science (6-7 cr) Two courses:

ENGR 1 and

one approved

CSE course or

two approved

CSE courses.

General Electives (28-33 cr) Chosen in con-

sultation with

faculty advisor

In consultation with the major advisor, a student must

establish a concentration in a particular area of applied

mathematics. The courses chosen must have specific

mathematical or statistical content and together consti-

tute a coherent program. At most two courses may be

taken outside the Department of Mathematics. Students,

in consultation with the major advisor, can design a con-

centration which reflects a particular area of interest or

choose to pursue one of the following:

Concentration in Applied Analysis:

Electives must include MATH 230, MATH 322 and

MATH 341

326 Lehigh University Course Catalog 2009-2010

Concentration in Discrete Mathematics and

Theoretical Computer Science:

Electives must include at least three courses selected

from MATH 305, MATH 311, MATH 329, MATH

340

Concentration in Probability and Statistics:

Electives must include at least three courses selected

from MATH 309, MATH 310, MATH 312, MATH

334, MATH 338

This program requires a total of 120 credit hours.

A student must achieve an average of 2.0 or higher in

major courses.

B.S. in Statistics

Statistics provides a body of principles for designing the

process of data collection, for summarizing and inter-

preting data, and for drawing valid conclusions from

data. It thus forms a fundamental tool in the natural and

social sciences as well as business, medicine, and other

areas of research. Mathematical principles, especially

probability theory, underlie all statistical analyses.

College and university requirements excluding

Mathematics (31-34 credit hours)

Required Major courses (45-47 credit hours)

MATH 21, 22, 23/ Calculus I, II, III (12) or

31, 32, 33 Honors Calculus I, II, III (12)

MATH 12/231 Basic Statistics (4) or

Probability and Statistics (3)

MATH 43/205/242 Survey of Linear Algebra (3) or

Linear Methods (3) or

Linear Algebra (4)

MATH 309 Theory of Probability (3)

MATH 310 Random Processes and

Applications (3)

MATH 312 Statistical Computing and

Applications (3)

MATH 334 Mathematical Statistics (4)

MATH 338 Linear Models in Statistics

with Applications(4)

MATH 374 Statistical Project (3)

Two approved computing science courses or one

approved computer science course and Engineering 1 (6)

or (7).

Major Electives (12 credit hours)

At least three courses with specific mathematical or sta-

tistical content chosen with the approval of the faculty

advisor.

Professional Electives (21 credit hours)

Courses selected from two or three fields of application

of statistics and probability.

Free Electives (6-11 credits)

This program requires a total of 120 credit hours.

A student must achieve an average of 2.0 or higher in

major courses.

Departmental Honors

Students may earn departmental honors by writing a

thesis during their senior year. Students are accepted into

the program during their junior year by the department

chairperson. This acceptance is based upon the student’s

grades and a thesis proposal, which the student must

prepare in conjunction with a thesis advisor selected by

the student. An oral presentation as well as a written the-

sis are required for completion of the program.

Minor Programs

The department offers minor programs in different

branches of the mathematical sciences. Each program

requires 16 credits of courses. The requirement consists

of MATH 23 or 33 and four additional courses shown

below for each of the programs. At most one of these

five courses in the minor program may also be required

in the major program. For substitutions, the student

should consult the chairperson.

Minor in Pure Mathematics

MATH 242, 243, 301

MATH 302 or 303 or 307 or 316 or 342

Minor in Applied Mathematics

Three of MATH 205, 208, 230, 231, 242, 320, 322,

323

MATH 341

Minor in Probability and Statistics

MATH 12 or 231

MATH 309

Two of MATH 310, 312, 334, 338

Minor in Actuarial Science

MATH 202, 309 and 310

ECON 129

ACCT 108 or 151

For information on examinations of actuarial societies,

students may consult their minor advisor.

Undergraduate Courses

MATH 0. Preparation for Calculus (2) summer-

fall

Intensive review of fundamental concepts in mathemat-

ics utilized in calculus, including functions and graphs,

exponentials and logarithms, and trigonometry. This

course is for students who need to take MATH 51 or 21,

but who require remediation in precalculus. In particu-

lar, students who fail the MATH 51 Readiness Exam

must pass MATH 0 before being admitted to MATH

51. The credits for this course do not count toward grad-

uation, but do count toward GPA and current credit

count. Prerequisite: department permission.

MATH 5. Introduction to Mathematical

Thought (3) spring

Meaning, content, and methods of mathematical

thought illustrated by topics that may be chosen from

number theory, abstract algebra, combinatorics, finite or

non-Euclidean geometries, game theory, mathematical

logic, set theory, topology. (MA)

MATH 9. Introduction to Finite Mathematics (4)

fall

Systems of linear equations, matrices, introduction to

linear programming. Sets, counting methods, probabili-

ty, random variables, introduction to Markov chains.

(MA)

MATH 12. Basic Statistics (4) fall-spring

A first course in the basic concepts and methods of sta-

tistics with illustrations from the social, behavioral, and

biological sciences. Descriptive statistics; frequency dis-

Mathematics 327

tributions, mean and standard deviation, two-way tables,

correlation and regression; random sampling, rules of

probability, probability distributions and parameters,

parameter estimation, confidence intervals, hypothesis

testing, statistical significance. (MA)

Note: Students may not receive credit for both MATH 12 &

ECO 145.

MATH 21. Calculus I (4) fall-spring

Functions and graphs; limits and continuity; derivative,

differential, and applications; indefinite and definite

integrals; trigonometric, logarithmic, exponential, and

hyperbolic functions. (MA)

MATH 22. Calculus II (4) fall-spring

Applications of integration; techniques of integration;

separable differential equations; infinite sequences and

series; Taylor’s Theorem and other approximations;

curves and vectors in the plane. Prerequisite: MATH 21

or MATH 31. (MA)

MATH 23. Calculus III (4) fall-spring

Vectors in space; partial derivatives; Lagrange multipliers;

multiple integrals; vector analysis; line integrals; Green’s

Theorem, Gauss’s Theorem. Prerequisite: MATH 22 or

MATH 32. (MA)

MATH 31. Honors Calculus I (4) fall

Same topics as in MATH 21, but taught from a more

thorough and rigorous point of view. (MA)

MATH 32. Honors Calculus II (4) fall-spring

Same topics as in MATH 22, but taught from a more

thorough and rigorous point of view. Prerequisite:

MATH 31. (MA)

MATH 33. Honors Calculus III (4) fall-spring

Same topics as in MATH 23, but taught from a more

thorough and rigorous point of view. Prerequisite:

MATH 32. (MA)

MATH 43. Survey of Linear Algebra (3) fall

Matrices, vectors, vector spaces and mathematical sys-

tems, special kinds of matrices, elementary matrix

transformations, systems of linear equations, convex sets,

introduction to linear programming. (MA).

MATH 51. Survey of Calculus I (4) fall

Limits. The derivative and applications to extrema,

approximation, and related rates. Exponential and loga-

rithm functions, growth and decay. Integration.

Trigonometric functions and related derivatives and inte-

grals. (MA)

MATH 52. Survey of Calculus II (3) spring

Techniques of integration. Differential equations.

Probability and calculus. Partial derivatives and extrema.

Multiple integrals and applications. Prerequisite: MATH

21 or 31 or 51. (MA)

MATH 75. Calculus I, Part A (2) fall

Covers the same material as the first half of MATH 21.

Meets three hours per week, allowing more class time for

each topic than does MATH 21. (MA)

MATH 76. Calculus I, Part B (2) spring

Continuation of MATH 75, covering the second half of

MATH 21. Meets three hours per week. Final exam for

this course is similar to the MATH 21 final. Prerequisite:

MATH 75. (MA)

MATH 163. Introductory Seminar (3) spring

An introduction to the discipline of mathematics

designed for students considering a major in mathemat-

ics. The course will provide an introduction to rigorous

mathematical reasoning and will survey some area of

mathematics. Topics covered will vary. Satisfies the

Introductory Seminar requirement. (MA)

MATH 171. Readings (1-3) fall-spring

Study of a topic in mathematics under individual super-

vision. Intended for students with specific interests in

areas not covered in the listed courses. Prerequisite: con-

sent of the department chair. (MA)

For Advanced Undergraduates and Graduate

Students

Courses listed as (3-4) are 3 credits for graduate students

and 4 credits for undergraduates. The extra credit will

frequently involve some extra workshops or projects.

MATH 201. Problem Solving (1) fall

Practice in solving problems from mathematical contests

using a variety of elementary techniques. (MA)

MATH 202. Actuarial Exam I (1) spring

Practice in solving problems from the first actuarial

exam; problems in calculus and probability with insur-

ance applications. Prerequisites: MATH 23 and 231.

(MA)

MATH 205. Linear Methods (3) fall-spring

Linear differential equations and applications; matrices

and systems of linear equations; vector spaces; eigenval-

ues and application to linear systems of differential

equations. Prerequisite: MATH 22 or 32. (MA)

MATH 207. (CHE 207) Introduction to

Biomedical Engineering and Mathematical

Physiology (3) fall

Topics in human physiology and mathematical analysis

of physiological phenomena, including the cardiovascu-

lar and respiratory systems, biomechanics, and renal

physiology; broad survey of bioengineering. Independent

study projects. Prerequisite: MATH 205. (MA)

MATH 208. Complex Variables (3) fall-spring

Functions of a complex variable; calculus of residues;

contour integration; applications to conformal mapping

and Laplace transforms. Prerequisite: MATH 23 or

MATH 33. (MA)

MATH 214 (PHIL 214). Topics in Philosophical

Logic (4)

The course materials are drawn from the many topics

and figures in philosophical logic, widely construed, that

are not covered by the other logic courses. Examples of

such topics are the many systems of non-classical logic,

truth theory, the impact of incompleteness and undecid-

ability results on philosophy, and the foundational

projects of many philosophers/mathematicians. The

topic may also concern the work of a certain important

figure in the history of philosophical logic. Prerequisite:

Permission of the instructor. (MA)

MATH 229. Geometry (3-4)

Discussion of geometry as an axiomatic system. Euclid’s

postulates. History of and equivalent versions of Euclid’s

fifth postulate. Finite projective geometries. Non-

Euclidean geometries based upon negation of the fifth

postulate: Geometry on the sphere; Hyperbolic and

elliptic geometries. Examination of the concepts of

“straight”, angle, parallel, symmetry and duality in each

of these geometries. Applications of the different geome-

328 Lehigh University Course Catalog 2009-2010

tries will be considered. Prerequisite: Math 205 or Math

242 or consent of instructor. (MA)

MATH 230. Numerical Methods (3) fall

Representation of numbers and rounding error; numeri-

cal solution of equations; quadrature; polynomial and

spline interpolation; numerical solution of initial and

boundary value problems. Prerequisites: MATH 205

(previously or concurrently) and knowledge of either

FORTRAN or PASCAL. (MA)

MATH 231. Probability and Statistics (3) fall-spring

Probability and distribution of random variables; popula-

tions and random sampling; chi-square and t

distributions; estimation and tests of hypotheses; correla-

tion and regression theory of two variables. Prerequisite:

MATH 22 or MATH 32 or MATH 52. (MA)

MATH 234. Fractal Geometry (3-4)

Metric spaces and iterated function systems; various

types of fractal dimension; Julia and Mandelbrot sets.

Other topics such as chaos may be included. Small

amount of computer use. Prerequisite: MATH 23 or

MATH 33. (MA)

MATH 242. Linear Algebra (3-4) fall

Thorough treatment of the solution of simultaneous lin-

ear equations in n unknowns, including a discussion of

the computational complexity of the calculation. Vector

spaces, linear dependence, bases, orthogonality, eigenval-

ues. Applications as time permits. Prerequisite: MATH

23 or 33 or 52. (MA)

MATH 243. Algebra (3-4) spring

Introduction to basic concepts of modern algebra:

groups, rings, and fields. (MA)

MATH 251. Combinatorics (3-4)

Topics selected from enumeration, graphs and networks,

Ramsey theory, ordered sets, min-max duality, and

designs. Theory will be motivated by applications from

operations research and computer science. Prerequisite:

MATH 22 or consent of instructor. (MA)

MATH 261. (CSE 261) Discrete Structures (3)

Topics in discrete mathematical structures chosen for

their applicability to computer science and engineering.

Sets, propositions, induction, recursion; combinatorics;

binary relations and functions; ordering, lattices and

Boolean algebra; graphs and trees; groups and homomor-

phisms. Prerequisites: MATH 21. (MA)

MATH 271. Readings (1-3) fall-spring

Study of a topic in mathematics under individual super-

vision. Intended for students with specific interests in

areas not covered in the listed courses. Prerequisite:

Consent of the department chair. May be repeated for

credit. (MA)

MATH 3xx. Enumerative Combinatorics (3)

An introduction to basic theoretical results and tech-

niques of enumerative combinatorics such as

combinatorial identities, generating functions, inclusion-

exclusion, recurrence relations, bijective proofs and

permutations. Additional topics will be covered as time

permits. Prerequisite: MATH 163 or MATH/CSE 261

or MATH 205 or consent of instructor. (MA)

MATH 3xx. Introduction to Biomedical

Engineering and Mathematical Biology (3)

Study of human physiology, including the cardiovascular,

nervous and respiratory systems, and renal physiology.

Mathematical analysis of physiological processes, includ-

ing transport phenomena. Mathematical models of

excitation and propagation in nerve. Biomechanics of the

skeletal muscle system. Mathematical models in popula-

tion dynamics and epidemiology. Independent study

projects. Prerequisite: MATH 205.

MATH 3xx. Topics in Discrete Mathematics (3)

Selected topics in areas of discrete mathematics. May be

repeated for credit. Prerequisite: consent of instructor.

(MA)

MATH 301. Principles of Analysis I (3-4) fall

Existence of limits, continuity and uniform continuity;

Heine-Borel Theorem; existence of extreme values; mean

value theorem and applications; conditions for the exis-

tence of the Riemann integral; absolute and uniform

convergence; emphasis on theoretical material from the

calculus of one variable. Prerequisite: MATH 23 or

MATH 33. (MA)

MATH 302. Principles of Analysis II (3-4) spring

Continuation of MATH 301. Functions of several vari-

ables; the implicit function theorem, and further topics

with applications to analysis and geometry. Prerequisite:

MATH 301. (MA)

MATH 303. (Phil 303) Mathematical Logic (3-4)

fall

Detailed proofs are given for the basic mathematical

results relating the syntax and semantics of first-order

logic (predicate logic): the Soundness and Completeness

(and Compactness) Theorems, followed by a brief expo-

sition of the celebrated limitative results of Gödel,

Turing, and Church on incompleteness and undecidabil-

ity. The material is conceptually rigorous and

mathematically mature; the necessary background is a

certain degree of mathematical sophistication or a basic

knowledge of symbolic logic. Prerequisite: Permission of

the instructor. (MA)

MATH 304 (PHIL 304). Axiomatic Set Theory (3-

4) fall

A development of set theory from axioms; relations and

functions; ordinal and cardinal arithmetic; recursion the-

orem; axiom of choice; independence questions.

Prerequisite: Permission of instructor. (MA)

MATH 307. General Topology I (3-4) fall

An introductory study of topological spaces, including

metric spaces, separation and countability axioms, con-

nectedness, compactness, product spaces, quotient

spaces, function spaces. Prerequisite: MATH 301. (MA)

MATH 309. Theory of Probability (3) fall

Probabilities of events on discrete and continuous sample

spaces; random variables and probability distributions;

expectations; transformations; simplest kind of law of

large numbers and central limit theorem. The theory is

applied to problems in physical and biological sciences.

Prerequisite: MATH 23 or MATH 33 or MATH 52.

(MA)

MATH 310. Random Processes and

Applications (3-4) spring

Theory and applications of stochastic processes. Limit

theorems, introduction to random walks, Markov chains,

Poisson processes, birth and death processes, and

Brownian motion. Applications to financial mathemat-

ics, biology, business and engineering. Prerequisites:

MATH 309 or MATH 231. (MA)

Mathematics 329

MATH 311. Graph Theory (3)

An introduction to basic theoretical results and tech-

niques of graph theory such as trees, connectivity,

matchings, coloring, planar graphs and Hamiltonicity.

Additional topics will be covered as time permits.

Prerequisite: MATH 163 or MATH/CSE 261 or MATH

205 or consent of instructor. (MA)

MATH 312. Statistical Computing and

Applications (3-4)

Use of statistical computing packages; exploratory data

analysis; Monte Carlo methods; randomization and

resampling, application and interpretation of a variety of

statistical methods in real world problems. Prerequisite:

MATH 12 or 231. (MA)

MATH 316. Complex Analysis (3-4) spring

Concept of analytic function from the points of view of

the Cauchy-Riemann equations, power series, complex

integration, and conformal mapping. Prerequisite:

MATH 301. (MA)

MATH 320. Ordinary Differential Equations (3-4)

spring

The analytical and geometric theory of ordinary differen-

tial equations, including such topics as linear systems,

systems in the complex plane, oscillation theory, stability

theory, geometric theory of nonlinear systems, finite dif-

ference methods, general dynamical systems.

Prerequisite: MATH 205, or both MATH 23, 33 and

MATH 242. (MA)

MATH 322. Methods of Applied Analysis I (3) fall

Fourier series, eigenfunction expansions, Sturm-Liouville

problems, Fourier integrals and their application to par-

tial differential equations; special functions. Emphasis is

on a wide variety of formal applications rather than logi-

cal development. Prerequisite: MATH 205 or consent of

the department chair. (MA)

MATH 323. Methods of Applied Analysis II (3)

spring

Green’s functions; integral equations; variational meth-

ods; asymptotic expansions, method of saddle points;

calculus of vector fields, exterior differential calculus.

Prerequisite: MATH 322. (MA)

MATH 327. Groups and Rings (3-4) fall

An intensive study of the concepts of group theory

including the Sylow theorems, and of ring theory includ-

ing unique factorization domains and polynomial rings.

Prerequisite: MATH 243 or consent of the department

chair. (MA)

MATH 329. Computability Theory (3-4) spring

Core development of classical computability theory: enu-

meration, index and recursion theorems, various models

of computation and Church’s Thesis, uncomputability

results, introduction to reducibilities and their degrees

(in particular, Turing degrees, or degrees of uncom-

putability), computable operators and their fixed points.

(MA)

MATH 331. Differential Geometry of Curves and

Surfaces (3)

Local and global differential geometry of curves and

sufaces in Euclidean 3-space. Frenet formulas for curves,

isoperimetric inequality, 4-vertex theorem; regular sur-

faces, first fundamental form, Gauss map, second

fundamental form; curvatures for curves and surfaces

and their relations; The Gauss-Bonnet theorem.

Prerequisites: MATH 23 or MATH 33 and MATH 205,

or consent of instructor. (MA)

MATH 334. Mathematical Statistics (3-4) spring

Populations and random sampling; sampling distribu-

tions; theory of statistical estimation; criteria and

methods of point and interval estimation; theory of test-

ing statistical hypotheses. Prerequisite: MATH 231 or

MATH 309. (MA)

MATH 338 (Stat 438). Linear Models in Statistics

with Applications (3-4) spring

Least square principles in multiple regression and their

interpretations; estimation, hypotheses testing, confi-

dence and prediction intervals, modeling, regression

diagnostic, multicollinearity, model selection, analysis of

variance and covariance; logistic regression. Introduction

to topics in time series analysis such as ARMA, ARCH,

and GARCH models. Applications to natural sciences,

finance and economics. Use of computer packages.

Prerequisite: MATH 12 or 231. (MA)

MATH 340. (CSE 340) Design and Analysis of

Algorithms (3) spring

Algorithms for searching, sorting, counting, graph and

tree manipulation, matrix multiplication, scheduling,

pattern matching and fast Fourier transforms. Abstract

complexity measures and the intrinsic complexity of

algorithms and problems in terms of asymptotic behav-

ior; correctness of algorithms. Prerequisites: MATH 22

and MATH 261, or consent of the department chairper-

son. (MA)

MATH 341. Mathematical Models and Their

Formulation (3) spring

Mathematical modeling of engineering and physical sys-

tems with examples drawn from diverse disciplines.

Emphasis is on building models of real world problems

rather than learning mathematical techniques.

Prerequisite: MATH 205. (MA)

MATH 342. Number Theory (3-4)

A survey of elementary and nonelementary algebraic and

analytic methods in the theory of numbers. Includes the

Euclidean algorithm, Diophantine equations congru-

ences, quadratic residues, primitive roots,

number-theoretic functions as well as one or more of the

following topics: distribution of primes, Pell’s equation,

Fermat’s theorem, partitions. Prerequisite: MATH 301

or consent of the department chair. (MA)

MATH 343. Introduction to Cryptography (3-4)

Classical elementary cryptography: Caesar cipher, other

substitution ciphers, block ciphers, general linear ciphers.

Fast random encryption (DES and AES: Advanced

Encryption Standard). Public key systems (RSA and dis-

crete logs). Congruences, modular arithmetic, fast

exponentiation, polynomials, matrices. Distinction

between polynomial time (primality), Subexponential

time (factoring) and fully Exponential computation

(elliptic curves). Introduction to sieving and distributed

computation. Prerequisite: Permission of instructor.

(MA)

MATH 350. Special Topics (3) fall-spring

A course covering special topics not sufficiently covered

in listed courses. Prerequisite: consent of the department

chair. May be repeated for credit. (MA)

330 Lehigh University Course Catalog 2009-2010

MATH 371. Readings (1-3) fall-spring

The study of a topic in mathematics under appropriate

supervision, designed for the individual student who has

studied extensively and whose interests lie in areas not

covered in the listed courses. Prerequisite: consent of the

department chair. May be repeated for credit (MA)

MATH 374. Statistical Project (3)

Supervised field project or independent reading in statis-

tics or probability. Prerequisite: consent of the

department chair. (MA)

MATH 391. Senior Honors Thesis (3) fall-spring

Independent research under faculty supervision, culmi-

nating in a thesis presented for departmental honors.

May be repeated once for credit. Prerequisite: consent of

chair (MA)

Graduate Programs in Mathematics

The department offers graduate programs leading to the

degrees of master of science in mathematics, applied

mathematics, or statistics, and the doctor of philosophy

in mathematics or applied mathematics.

To begin graduate work in mathematics a student must

present evidence of adequate undergraduate preparation.

The undergraduate program should have included a year

of advanced calculus, a semester of linear algebra, and a

semester of abstract algebra.

M.S. in Mathematics or Applied Mathematics

The master’s program demands 30 credit hours of gradu-

ate courses with at least 18 hours at the 400 level. With

the permission of the chairperson, up to six hours of

these courses can be replaced by a thesis. All students in

the master’s program must also pass a comprehensive

examination. The M.S. degree can serve both as a final

degree in mathematics or as an appropriate background

for the Ph.D. degree.

M.S. in Statistics

This program requires 30 credit hours of graduate cours-

es with at least 18 hours of 400-level STAT or MATH

courses. The choice of courses must be approved by the

graduate advisor, and up to six hours of coursework may

be replaced with a thesis. All students in the program

must also pass a comprehensive examination.

The M.S. program in statistics has two tracks. The statis-

tics track has recommended courses MATH 309, STAT

412, 434, and 462; electives STAT 410, 438, and 461;

and other possible electives STAT 408 and 409, EDUC

411, I.E. 332, 409, and 410, ECO 455 and 463, CSE

411, and MECH 405. The stochastic modeling track has

recommended courses MATH 309 and 401, and STAT

410 and 463; electives MATH 341 and STAT 434, 438,

and 464; and other possible electives STAT 408 and 409,

MATH 402, 430, 467, and 468, ECO 453, CSE 411,

MECH 405, and I.E. 316, 339, 409, 416, and 439.

Ph.D. in Mathematics

The plan of work toward the doctor of philosophy

degree will include a comprehensive examination and a

qualifying examination. The latter tests the student’s

command of three areas. The combination of areas must

be approved by the department. Recent exam areas

include algebra, analysis, differential equations, differen-

tial geometry, discrete structures, functional analysis,

logic and set theory, numerical analysis, probability, sta-

tistics, and topology. Other areas of mathematics may be

proposed by the candidate and approved by the depart-

ment. A general examination, a foreign language

examination, and the doctoral dissertation and its

defense complete the work for the Ph.D. degree.

Each candidate’s plan of work must be approved by a spe-

cial committee of the department. A Ph.D. student is

required to have 18 credits of approved graduate level

course work beyond the master’s level. After completion of

18 credits a student is required to take at least one course

per academic year other than Math 409, 410, and 499.

Ph.D. in Applied Mathematics

The plan of work toward the doctor of philosophy

degree will include a comprehensive examination and a

qualifying examination. The latter tests the student’s

command of three areas. The combination of areas must

be approved by the department. Recent exam areas

include analysis, applied probability, differential equa-

tions, discrete structures, financial mathematics, linear

algebra and linear programming, mathematical biology,

mathematical statistics, numerical methods, and statisti-

cal methods. Other areas of mathematical and physical

sciences may be proposed by the candidate and approved

by the department. A general examination, a foreign lan-

guage examination, and the doctoral dissertation and its

defense complete the work for the Ph.D. degree.

Each candidate’s plan of work must be approved by a spe-

cial committee of the department. A Ph.D. student is

required to have 18 credits of approved graduate level

course work beyond the master’s level. After completion of

18 credits a student is required to take at least one course

per academic year other than Math 409, 410, and 499.

Graduate Courses

MATH 401. Real Analysis I (3) fall

Set theory, real numbers; introduction to measures,

Lebesgue measure; integration, general convergence the-

orems; differentiation, functions of bounded variation,

absolute continuity; Lp spaces. Prerequisites: MATH

302 or consent of department chair.

MATH 402. Real Analysis II (3) spring

Metric spaces; introduction to Banach and Hilbert space

theory; Fourier series and Fejer operators; general meas-

ure and integration theory, Radon-Nikodym and Riesz

representation and theorems; Lebesgue-Stieljtes integral.

Prerequisites: MATH 307 and MATH 401.

MATH 403. Topics in Real Analysis (3)

Intensive study of topics in analysis with emphasis on

recent developments. Prerequisite: consent of the depart-

ment chair. May be repeated for credit.

MATH 404. Topics in Mathematical Logic (3)

Intensive study of topics in mathematical logic.

Prerequisite: Consent of the department chair. May be

repeated for credit.

MATH 405. Partial Differential Equations I (3)

fall

Classification of partial differential equations; methods

of characteristics for first order equations; methods for

representing solutions of the potential, heat, and wave

equations, and properties of the solutions of these equa-

tions; maximum principles. Prerequisite: MATH 302 or

its equivalent.

Mathematics 331

MATH 406. Partial Differential Equations II (3)

spring

Continuation of MATH 405. Emphasis on second order

equations with variable coefficients and systems of first

order partial differential equations. Prerequisite: MATH

405.

MATH 408. Algebraic Topology I (3)

Polyhedra; fundamental groups; simplicial and singular

homology.

MATH 409. (STAT 409) Mathematics Seminar

(1-6) fall

An intensive study of some field of mathematics not

offered in another course. Prerequisite: consent of the

department chair.

MATH 410. (STAT 408) Mathematics Seminar

(1-6) spring

Continuation of the field of study in MATH 409 or the

intensive study of a different field. Prerequisite: consent

of the department chair.

MATH 416. Complex Function Theory (3) fall

Continuation of MATH 316. Prerequisite: MATH 316

or consent of the department chair.

MATH 421. Introduction to Wavelets (3)

Continuous and discrete signals; review of Fourier analy-

sis; discrete wavelets; time-frequency spaces; Haar and

Walsh systems; multiresolution analysis; Hilbert spaces;

quadratic mirror filters; fast wavelet transforms; comput-

er code; applications to filtering, compression, and

imaging. Prerequisite: ECE 108, MATH 205, or consent

of instructor.

MATH 423. Differential Geometry I (3)

Differential manifolds, tangent vectors and differentials,

submanifolds and the implicit function theorem. Lie

groups and Lie algebras, homogeneous spaces. Tensor

and exterior algebras, tensor fields and differential forms,

de Rham cohomology, Stokes’ theorem, the Hodge theo-

rem. Prerequisite: MATH 301, 302, or MATH 243 or

MATH 205 with consent of instructor.

MATH 424. Differential Geometry II (3)

Curves and surfaces in Euclidean space; mean and

Gaussian curvatures, covariant differentiation, paral-

lelism, geodesics, Gauss-Bonnet formula. Riemannian

metrics, connections, sectional curvature, generalized

Gauss-Bonnet theorem. Further topics. Prerequisite:

MATH 423.

MATH 428. Fields and Modules (3) spring

Field theory, including an introduction to Galois theory;

the theory of modules, including tensor products and

classical algebras. Prerequisite: MATH 327.

MATH 430. Numerical Analysis (3) spring

Multistep methods for ordinary differential equations;

finite difference methods for partial differential equa-

tions; numerical approximation of functions. Use of

computer required. Prerequisite: MATH 230 or consent

of the department chair.

MATH 431. Calculus of Variations (3)

Existence of a relative minimum for single and multiple

integral problems; variational inequalities of elliptic and

parabolic types and methods of approximating a solu-

tion. Prerequisite: MATH 302 or its equivalent.

MATH 435. Functional Analysis I (3) fall

Banach spaces and linear operators; separation and exten-

sion theorems; open mapping and uniform boundedness

principles; weak topologies; local convexity and duality;

Banach algebras; spectral theory of operators; and com-

pact operators. Prerequisites: MATH 307 and MATH

401.

MATH 444. Algebraic Topology II (3)

Continuation of MATH 408. Cohomology theory,

products, duality. Prerequisite: MATH 408.

MATH 445. Topics in Algebraic Topology (3)

Selected topics reflecting the interests of the professor

and the students. Prerequisite: MATH 444.

MATH 449. Topics in Algebra (3)

Intensive study of topics in algebra with emphasis on

recent developments. Prerequisite: consent of the depart-

ment chairman. May be repeated for credit with the

consent of the department chair.

MATH 450. Special Topics (3) fall-spring

Intensive study of some field of the mathematical sci-

ences not covered in listed courses. Prerequisite: consent

of the department chair. May be repeated for credit with

the consent of the department chair.

MATH 455. Topics in Number Theory (3)

Selected topics in algebraic and analytic number theory.

Prerequisites: MATH 316 and MATH 327. May be

repeated for credit with consent of the department chair.

MATH 461. (STAT 461) Topics in Mathematical

Statistics (3)

An intensive study of one or more topics such as theory

of statistical tests, statistical estimation, regression, analy-

sis of variance, nonparametric methods, stochastic

approximation, and decision theory. Prerequisites:

MATH 334 and MATH 401. May be repeated for credit

with consent of the department chair.

MATH 462. (STAT 462) Modern Nonparametric

Methods in Statistics (3)

Classical and modern methods of nonparametric statis-

tics; order and rank statistics; tests based on runs, signs,

ranks, and order statistics; distribution free statistical

procedures for means, variances, correlations, and trends;

relative efficiency; Kolmogorov-Smirnov statistics; statis-

tical applications of Brownian process; modern

techniques such as robust methods, non-parametric

smoothing, and bootstrapping; additional topics such as

nonparametric regression and dimension reduction.

Prerequisites: MATH 334 (STAT 334) and MATH 338

(STAT 338) or equivalent classes or consent of instruc-

tor.

MATH 463. (STAT 463) Advanced Probability (3)

Measure theoretic foundations; random variables, inte-

gration in a measure space, expectations; convergence of

random variables and probability measures; conditional

expectations; characteristic functions; sums of random

variables, limit theorems. Prerequisites: MATH 309 and

MATH 401.

MATH 464. (STAT 464) Advanced Stochastic

Processes (3)

Theory of stochastic processes; stopping times; martin-

gales; Markov processes; Brownian motion; stochastic

calculus; Brownian bridge, laws of suprema; Gaussian

processes. Prerequisites: MATH 309 and MATH 401.

332 Lehigh University Course Catalog 2009-2010

MATH 467. Financial Calculus I (3) fall

Basic mathematical concepts behind derivative pricing

and portfolio management of derivative securities.

Development of hedging and pricing by arbitrage in the

discrete time setting of binary trees and Black-Scholes

model. Introduction to the theory of Stochastic

Calculus, Martingale representation theorem, and change

of measure. Applications of the developed theory to a

variety of actual financial instruments. Prerequisites:

Math 231 or Math 309 or consent of instructor.

MATH 468. Financial Calculus II (3) spring

Models and mathematical concepts behind the interest

rates markets. Heath-Jarrow-Morton model for random

evolution of the term structure of interest rates and short

rate models. Applications of the theory to a variety of

interest rates contracts including swaps, caps, floors,

swap-options. Development of multidimensional sto-

chastic calculus and applications to multiple stock

models, quantos, and foreign currency interest-rate mod-

els. Prerequisites: Math 467.

MATH 470. Proseminar (3) spring

Preparation for entering the mathematics profession.

Seminar will concentrate on methods of teaching mathe-

matics, and will include other topics such as duties of a

professor and searching for a job. Prerequisite: consent of

mathematics graduate advisor.

MATH 471. Homological Algebra (3)

Modules, tensor products, categories and functors,

homology functors, projective and injective modules.

Prerequisite: MATH 428.

MATH 472. Group Representations (3)

Linear representations and character theory with empha-

sis on the finite and compact cases. Prerequisite: MATH

428 or consent of the department chairperson.

MATH 490. Thesis

MATH 499. Dissertation

Statistics

STAT 408. (MATH 410) Seminar in Statistics and

Probability (1-6) spring

Intensive study of some field of statistics or probability

not offered in another course. Prerequisite: consent of

the graduate advisor.

STAT 409 (MATH 409) Seminar in Statistics and

Probability (1-6) fall

Intensive study of some field of statistics or probability

not offered in another course. Prerequisite: consent of

the graduate advisor.

STAT 410. Random Processes and

Applications (3) spring

See MATH 310.

STAT 412. Statistical Computing and

Applications (3)

See MATH 312.

STAT 434. Mathematical Statistics (3) spring

See MATH 334.

STAT 438 (MATH 338). Linear Models in

Statistics with Applications (3) spring

See MATH 338

STAT 461 (MATH 461). Topics in Mathematical

Statistics (3)

See MATH 461.

STAT 462 (MATH 462). Nonparametric

Statistics (3)

See MATH 462.

STAT 463 (MATH 463). Advanced Probability (3)

See MATH 463.

STAT 464 (MATH 464). Advanced Stochastic

Processes (3)

See MATH 464.

Mechanical Engineering and

Mechanics

Professors. D. Gary Harlow, Ph.D. (Cornell), chair;

Philip A. Blythe, Ph.D. (Manchester, England); John P.

Coulter, Ph.D. (Delaware); Terry J. Delph, Ph.D.

(Stanford); John N. DuPont, Ph.D. (Lehigh); Joachim L.

Grenestedt, Ph.D. (KTH, Royal Inst. of Tech.,

Stockholm, Sweden), Class of ‘61 Professor; Jacob Y.

Kazakia, Ph.D. (Lehigh); Edward K. Levy, Sc.D.

(M.I.T.), director, Energy Research Center; Alistair K.

Macpherson, Ph.D. (Sydney, Australia); Wojciech

Misiolek, Sc.D. (U. of Mining and Metallurgy, Krakow,

Poland), Loewy Chair;; Sudhakar Neti, Ph.D.

(Kentucky); Herman F. Nied, Ph.D. (Lehigh); John

Ochs, Ph.D. (Penn State); Tulga M. Ozsoy, Ph.D.

(Istanbul, Turkey); Donald O. Rockwell, Ph.D.

(Lehigh), Paul B. Reinhold Professor; Charles R. Smith,

Ph.D. (Stanford); Eric Varley, Ph.D. (Brown); Arkady

Voloshin, Ph.D. (Tel- Aviv, Israel).

Associate professors. Robert A. Lucas, Ph.D. (Lehigh),

associate chair; Meng-Sang Chew, Ph.D. (Columbia);;

Alparslan Öztekin, Ph.D. (Illinois); N. Duke Perreira,

Ph.D. (California, Los Angeles).

Assistant Professor. Eugenio Schuster, Ph.D. (California,

San Diego).

Professors of Practice. David C. Angstadt, Ph.D.

(Lehigh);Terry J. Hart, D.Engr.-Honorary (Lehigh);

Graham Mitchell, Ph.D. (Westminster); Murat Öztürk,

Ph.D. (Lehigh)

Emeritus professors. Russell E. Benner, Ph.D. (Lehigh);

Forbes T. Brown, Sc.D. (M.I.T.); Fazil Erdogan, Ph.D.

(Lehigh); Ronald J. Hartranft, Ph.D. (Lehigh); Stanley

H. Johnson, Ph.D. (Berkeley); Arturs Kalnins, Ph.D.

(Michigan); Jerzy A. Owczarek, Ph.D. (London,

England); Richard Roberts, Ph.D. (Lehigh); Robert G.

Sarubbi, Ph.D. (Lehigh); Kenneth N. Sawyers, Ph.D.

(Brown); George C.M. Sih, Ph.D. (Lehigh); Gerald F.

Smith, Ph.D. (Brown); Theodore A. Terry, Ph.D.

(Lehigh); Dean P. Updike, Ph.D. (Brown); Robert P.

Wei, Ph.D. (Princeton), Paul B. Reinhold Professor.

Educational Mission

The Department of Mechanical Engineering and

Mechanics prepares our students to be learners, and

agents in both the application and development of tech-

nology to better serve the needs of society.

Program Educational Objectives

Mechanical engineering is one of the core disciplines in

the P.C. Rossin College of Engineering and Applied

Mechanical Engineering and Mechanics 333

Science (RCEAS). The department is committed to serv-

ing the overall mission of the RCEAS, and of the

University, by providing education and training to

undergraduate and graduate students, by developing new

knowledge and engineering methodology, and by provid-

ing service to industry and society at large. To achieve

our Educational Mission, the Department of Mechanical

Engineering has established a set of Program Educational

Objectives, which are to educate engineers who:

• Model, formulate and creatively synthesize (i.e.

design) realistic and practical systems, products, and

environments;

• Naturally incorporate basic sciences and the art of

mathematics as part of their thinking and problem-

solving processes;

• Design, conduct, and analyze experimental tests of

practical systems and products;

• Understand and appreciate the technical diversity

required to develop new products/processes, and use

this understanding to work effectively in multi-disci-

plinary teams;

• Develop an appreciation of the contemporary world,

and be able to contribute to it in a professional and

ethical manner;

• Learn how to learn, so that life-long learning becomes

second nature.

The undergraduate program in mechanical engineering

focuses principally on the first five of these objectives,

and is configured to prepare our students for employ-

ment, and continued professional development and

growth. The program provides students with the basic

education they will need to function in an engineering

environment, pursue graduate studies, continue their

professional development and growth, and develop an

awareness of the culture and society in which we live.

Because of technological innovations and the long-term

demands of global competition, the program also seeks

to prepare students to adapt to rapid advances and

changes in technology, and to provide leadership in

effecting these changes, consistent with the sixth educa-

tional objective for life-long learning.

Achievement of the six educational objectives is served

first through a sound education in mathematics and

those physical and engineering sciences that are of great-

est relevance to the design and analysis of mechanical

systems; second, by exposure to the engineering process

(creation, innovation, analysis and judgment) through

design courses, projects, laboratories, and a choice of

technical electives that permits a degree of specialization;

and third, by the development of cultural awareness

through courses in humanities and social sciences.

Students may take elective courses that transcend tradi-

tional disciplinary lines, while satisfying the basic

requirements for mechanical engineering.

Design and engineering practices are integrated with the

engineering science aspects of the program. Through a

broadening of the design sequence to include hands-on

manufacturing and multi-disciplinary collaborations, the

program seeks to emphasize the integration of design,

manufacturing, business, and aesthetics in modern tech-

nological enterprises, and to prepare our students to

function in an increasingly interdisciplinary environ-

ment. Through a comprehensive set of laboratory

courses, which ultimately focus on the design and plan-

ning of laboratory experiences by the students (rather

than carrying out rote experiments), opportunities are

provided for students to learn and employ the processes

and skills for solving hands-on engineering problems.

B.S. in Mechanical Engineering

Mechanical engineering is one of the broadest of the

engineering professions, dealing generally with systems

for energy conversion, material transport and the control

of motions and forces.

Mechanical engineers may choose from among many

different activities in their careers, according to their

interests and the changing needs of society. Some con-

centrate on the conversion of thermal, nuclear, solar,

chemical and electrical energy, or on the problems of air,

water, and noise pollution. Some concentrate on the

design of mechanical systems used in transportation,

manufacturing or health care industries or by individual

consumers. Some will be working, a decade from now, in

fields that do not yet exist. Most will be engaged with

concepts involving all four dimensions of space and

time.

The curriculum leading toward the bachelor of science

in mechanical engineering combines a broad base in

mathematics, physical sciences, and the engineering sci-

ences (mechanics of solids, materials, dynamics and

fluid, thermal and electrical sciences), including labora-

tory. Special emphasis is placed on the practice of

modern Integrated Product Development, combining

state-of-the-art computer-aided design and manufactur-

ing methods in a business-oriented framework. Several

specific application fields are chosen toward the end of

the program in the form of four or more courses elected

from a wide variety of 300-level offerings. Courses in

mechanical engineering and engineering mechanics are

equally available.

The course requirements for a B.S. degree in mechanical

engineering are listed below. In addition to required

mathematics, physics, chemistry and basic engineering

courses, the program includes a minimum of seven

courses in humanities and social sciences (see humani-

ties/social sciences), two free electives and five approved

electives. The total graduation requirement is 129 cred-

its.

Undergraduate Curriculum in Mechanical

Engineering

freshman year (see Engineering, freshman year,

Section III)

sophomore year, first semester (16 - 17 credit hours)

ME 10 Graphics for Engineering Design (3)

MECH 3 Fundamentals of Engineering

Mechanics (3)

MAT 33 Engineering Materials and Processes (3)

MATH 23 Analytical Geometry & Calculus III (4)

elective (3 - 4)

sophomore year, second semester (17 - 18 credit

hours)*

ME 104 Thermodynamics I (3)

MECH 12 Strength of Materials (3)

PHY 21,22 Introductory Physics II and

Laboratory (5)

MATH 205 Linear Methods (3)

elective (3 - 4)

334 Lehigh University Course Catalog 2009-2010

*Co-op students must take ME 21 sophomore year, second

semester (18-19 credit hours). Co-op students will take a

MATH elective (3), ME 231 (3), MECH 102(3), and a

HSS elective (3-4) during the summer after the sophomore

year (12-13 credit hrs.). See co-op program for details

junior year, first semester (16 - 18 credit hours)

ME 21 Mechanical Engineering Lab I (1)

ME 231 Fluid Mechanics (3)

MECH 102 Dynamics (3)

ME 215 Engineering Reliability (3) or

MATH 208 Complex Variables (3) or

MATH 230 Numerical Methods (3) or

MATH 231 Probability and Statistics (3)

elective (6-8)

junior year, second semester (17 credit hours)

ME 121 Mechanical Engineering Lab II (1)

ME 211 Mechanical Engineering Design I (3)

ME 240 Manufacturing (3)

ME 242 Mechanical Engineering Systems (3) or

ME 245 Engineering Vibrations (3)

ME 252 Mechanical Elements (3)

ECE 83 Fundamentals of Electrical

Engineering (3)

ECE 162 Electrical Laboratory (1)

Senior Year (30-34 credit hours)

ME 111 Professional Development (1)

[Fall only]

ME 212 Integrated Product Development II (2)

[Fall only]

ME 207 Mechanical Engineering

Laboratory III (2)

ME 321 Introduction to Heat Transfer (3)

electives (22-26)

The total number of credits required for graduation is

129. A total of 38 credits in electives must be taken.

These electives are of five types:

Mechanical Engineering Electives

a) Humanities/Social Sciences: A total of 17 credits of

electives in humanities and social science, which must

include ECO 1. (Note that these electives are in addi-

tion to the 6 hours of required freshman English.) See

description of HSS in Section III of this catalog.

b) ENGR. Elective A: One, 3-credit course selected from

the following: MECH 302, MECH 305, ME 304,

ME 322, ME 331, or ME 343

c) ENGR. Elective B: One, 3-credit course selected from

any ME 300 or MECH 300-level course, excluding

ME 310

d) ENGR. Elective C: Three, 3-credit courses selected

from any ME 300/MECH 300-level course or an

engineering/science/ mathematics course, as approved

by the department chair. ME 310 may be taken once

to satisfy this requirement.

e) Free electives: 6 credit hours in any subject area are

required.

Co-op Program

To participate in the Co-op program you must rank in

the top third of the engineering class after three semes-

ters of study and attend a summer program between the

sophomore and junior years. See your advisor or contact

the Co-op Faculty Liaison for further details.

B.S. in Engineering Mechanics

The curriculum in engineering mechanics is designed to

prepare students for careers in engineering research and

development, and is especially appropriate for students

wishing to specialize in the analysis of engineering systems.

In many industries and governmental laboratories there is a

demand for men and women with broad training in the

fundamentals of engineering in which engineering mechan-

ics and applied mathematics play an important role.

The first two years of the curriculum is the same as that

in mechanical engineering. One of the advantages of the

curriculum is the flexibility it offers through 18 credits

of technical and six credits of personal electives in the

junior and senior years. Beyond the sophomore year

there are required courses in dynamics, solid mechanics,

fluid mechanics, heat transfer, principles of electrical

engineering, mathematics, vibrations, and senior labora-

tories or projects. It is recommended that the electives be

chosen either to concentrate in areas such as applied

mathematics and computational mechanics, solid

mechanics, engineering materials, and fluid mechanics or

to obtain further depth in all areas. The academic advi-

sor for the engineering mechanics program will provide

guidance in formulating the student’s goals and choosing

electives.

In addition to the required and elective courses in math-

ematics, sciences and engineering, the B.S. degree

program in engineering mechanics includes a minimum

of seven courses in humanities and social sciences (see

humanities/social sciences). The total graduation require-

ment is 127 credits.

Undergraduate Curriculum in Engineering

Mechanics

freshman year (see Engineering, freshman year,

Section III)

sophomore year, first semester (16-17 credit hours)

ME 10 Graphics for Engineering Design (3)

MECH 3 Fundamentals of Engineering

Mechanics (3)

MAT 33 Engineering Materials and

Processes (3)

MATH 23 Analytical geometry & Calculus III (4)

elective (3-4)

sophomore year, second semester (17-18 credit hours)*

ME 104 Thermodynamics I (3)

MECH 12 Strength of Materials (3)

PHY 21, 22 Introductory Physics II and

Laboratory (5)

MATH 205 Linear Methods (3)

elective (3-4)

*Co-op students must take ME 21 sophomore year, second

semester (18-19 credit hours). Co-op students will take ME

231 (3), MECH 102(3), and two HSS electives (6-8) dur-

ing the summer after the sophomore year (12-14 credit

hours). See Co-op program for details.

junior year, first semester (16 - 18 credit hours)

ME 21 Mechanical Engineering Lab I (1)

ME 231 Fluid Mechanics (3)

MECH 102 Dynamics (3)

MATH 230 Numerical Methods (3)

elective (6-8)

Mechanical Engineering and Mechanics 335

junior year, second semester (17 - 18 credit hours)

ME 121 Mechanical Engineering Lab II (1)

ME 240 Manufacturing (3)

ME 242 Mechanical Engineering Systems (3) or

ME 245 Engineering Vibrations (3)

MATH 208 Complex Variables (3)

ECE 83 Fundamentals of Electrical

Engineering (3)

ECE 162 Electrical Laboratory (1)

electives (3-4)

senior year (27-32 credit hours)

ME 111 Professional Development (1)

[Fall only]

ME 207 Mechanical Engineering

Laboratory III (2)

ME 321 Introduction to Heat Transfer (3)

electives (21-26)

The total number of credits required for graduation is

127. A total of 41 credits in electives must be taken.

These electives are of four types:

Engineering Mechanics Electives

a) Humanities/Social Sciences: A total of 17 credits of

electives in humanities and social science, which must

include ECO 1. (Note that these electives are in addi-

tion to the 6 hours of required freshman English.) See

description of HSS in Section III of this catalog.

b) ENGR. Elective A: Two, 3-credit courses selected

from the following: MECH 302, MECH 305, ME

304, ME 322, ME 331, or ME 343

c) ENGR. Elective B: Four, 3-credit courses selected

from any ME 300/MECH 300-level course or an

engineering/science/ mathematics course, as approved

by the Department Chair, excluding ME 310.

d) Free electives: 6 credit hours of any subject area are

required.

Typical recommended options:

Applied Mathematics and Computational Mechanics

MECH 305 Advanced Mechanics of Materials (3)

MECH 312 Finite Element Analysis (3)

MATH 309 Theory of Probability (3)

MATH 322 Methods of Applied Analysis I (3)

MATH 323 Methods of Applied Analysis II (3)

Solid Mechanics

MECH 305 Advanced Mechanics of Materials (3)

MECH 307 Mechanics of Continua (3)

MECH 312 Finite Element Analysis (3)

MECH 313 Fracture Mechanics (3)

MATH 322 Methods of Applied Analysis I (3)

Engineering Materials

MECH 305 Advanced Mechanics of Materials (3)

MECH 313 Fracture Mechanics (3)

MAT 218 Mechanical Behavior of Materials (3)

PHY 31 Introduction to Quantum

Mechanics (3)

PHY 363 Physics of Solids (3)

Fluid Mechanics

ME 331 Advanced Fluid Mechanics (3)

ME 322 Gas Dynamics (3)

MECH 326 Aerodynamics (3)

MATH 322 Methods of Applied Analysis I (3)

Minor in Aerospace Engineering

The minor in aerospace engineering provides a founda-

tion for students who intend to pursue a career in the

aerospace industry. This minor will also provide suffi-

cient technical background in aerospace studies for

undergraduates who plan to enter graduate programs in

this field. The minor requires a minimum of 15 credits

from the following course selection:

Required Courses

ME 255 Introduction to Aerospace Eng. (3)

MECH 326 Aerodynamics (3)

MECH 328 Fundamentals of Aircraft Design (3)

Elective Courses

ME 309 Composite Materials (3)

ME 322 Gas Dynamics (3)

ME 331 Advanced Fluid Mechanics (3)

ME 333 Propulsion Systems (3)

ME 343 Control Systems (3)

ME 348 Computer-Aided Design (3)

MECH 305 Advanced Mechanics of Materials (3)

MECH 312 Finite Element Analysis (3)

Minor in Energy Engineering

The minor in energy engineering touches upon the tech-

nologies associated with the transformation and use of

energy in various forms. Since every sector of engineering

and the economy require energies of one form or another,

the courses included in this minor program will permit

student exposure to fossil, nuclear and renewable energy

technologies. The mechanical engineering curriculum

provides the fundamental knowledge in thermodynamics,

fluid mechanics and other related areas leading up to the

courses for the energy engineering minor. The courses

offer a wide variety of topics including fundamental, ana-

lytical and design aspects of energy conservation as well as

various forms of energy used in power generation, trans-

portation and industry. The minor in energy engineering

requires a minimum of 15 credits, which must be taken

from MEM offerings. The minor in energy is primarily

intended for ME Majors but students with other majors,

particularly Chemical engineering will be able to take

some or all the related courses. Four courses are required

with some degree of choice and an additional course

must be selected from a broader set.

Required course:

ME 304 Thermodynamics II (3)

Elective Energy Courses:

Choose at least three courses from the below four

ME 360 Nuclear Energy (3)

ME 362 Nuclear Fusion and Radiation

Protection (3)

ME 364 Renewable Energy (3)

ME 366 Engineering Principles of Clean Coal

Technology (3)

Additional Electives:

ChE 373 Fundamentals of Air Pollution (3)

ChE/ME 376 Energy: Issues and Technology (3)

ME 322 Gas Dynamics (3)

ME 331 Advanced Fluid Mechanics (3)

ME 343 Control System (3)

336 Lehigh University Course Catalog 2009-2010

OR other Energy related 300 level courses with the

approval of the ME Dept. Chair.

Minor in Mechanics of Materials

The minor in mechanics of materials provides a view of

mechanical strength and behavior of materials based on

understanding a few basic concepts and using simplified

material models. Courses selected for the minor empha-

size concepts such as superposition of loadings; relation

between external loads and internal stresses; factor of

safety; safe design based on allowable stress or allowable

loads; allowable deformation; and reliability of struc-

tures. Courses offer a wide variety of topics including

analytical and numerical methods for solving mechanics

problems; manufacturing and polymer processing. The

mechanics of materials minor requires a minimum of 15

credits, which must be taken from MEM offerings. Two

courses are required; and three additional electives must

be selected. The minor is not available for students hav-

ing a major in the Department of Mechanical

Engineering and Mechanics.

Required courses

MECH 3 Fundamentals of Engineering

Mechanics (3)

MECH 12 Strength of Materials (3)

Electives

ME 10 Graphics for Engineering Design (3)

ME 215 Engineering Reliability (3)

ME 240 Manufacturing (3)

ME 252 Mechanical Elements (3)

ME 344/MAT 344/IE 344

Metal Machining Analysis (3)

ME 385 Polymer Product Manufacturing (3)

MECH 102 Dynamics (3)

MECH 305 Advanced Mechanics of Materials (3)

MECH 312 Finite Element Analysis (3)

MECH 313 Fracture Mechanics (3)

*This cross-listed course ME 344 counts as an elective.

Undergraduate Courses in Mechanical

Engineering

ME 10. Graphics for Engineering Design (3) fall

Graphical description of mechanical engineering design

for visualization and communication by freehand sketch-

ing, production drawings, and 3-D solid geometric

representations. Introduction to creation, storage, and

manipulation of such graphical descriptions through an

integrated design project using state-of-the art, commer-

cially available computer-aided engineering software.

Lectures and laboratory. (ES 1), (ED 2)

ME 21. Mechanical Engineering Laboratory I (1)

fall

Experimental methods in mechanical engineering and

mechanics. Analysis of experimental error and error

propagation. Introduction to elementary instrumenta-

tion. Introduction to digital data acquisition.

Prerequisite: MECH 12, previously or concurrently. (ES

1), (ED 0)

ME 104. Thermodynamics I (3) spring

Basic concepts and principles of thermodynamics with

emphasis on simple compressible substances. First and

second law development, energy equations, reversibility,

entropy and efficiency. Properties of pure substances and

thermodynamic cycles. Co-requisite: MATH 23 and

PHY 11. (ES 3), (ED 0)

ME 111. Professional Development (1) fall

Examination of ethical and professional choices facing

mechanical engineers. Written and oral communications.

Prerequisite: senior standing in Mechanical Engineering

and Mechanics

ME 121. Mechanical Engineering Laboratory

II (1) spring

A continuation of ME 21 including use of transducers,

advanced instrumentation, and data acquisition.

Emphasis on experimental exercises that illustrate,

and/or introduce material from thermodynamics, and

fluid mechanics. Includes proposal writing and interpre-

tation of results. Prerequisites: ME 21, ME 104, and

co-requisite: ME 231. (ES 1), (ED 0)

ME 207. Mechanical Engineering Laboratory

III (2) fall,spring

Formulation of laboratory experiments through open-

ended planning, including decision criteria for laboratory

techniques and approaches. Execution of experiments

based on individual plans, followed by assessment of

experimental results. Prerequisite: ME 121.

ME 211. Integrated Product Development I (3)

spring

Business, engineering and design arts students work in

cross disciplinary teams of 4-6 students on conceptual

design including marketing, financial and economic plan-

ning, economic and technical feasibility of new product

concepts. Teams work on industrial projects with faculty

advisors. Oral presentations and written reports.

Prerequisites: ME 10, MECH 12, ME 104. (ES 0), (ED

ME 212. Integrated Product Development II (2)

fall

Business, engineering and design arts students work in

cross disciplinary teams of 4-6 students on the detailed

design including fabrication and testing of a prototype of

the new product designed in the IPD course 1.

Additional deliverables include a detailed production

plan, marketing plan, detailed base-case financial models,

project and product portfolio. Teams work on industrial

projects with faculty advisors. Oral presentations and

written reports. Prerequisites: ME 211, ME 252, (ME

252 may be taken concurrently). (ES 0) (ED 2)

ME 215. Engineering Reliability (3) fall

Applications of reliability methods to engineering prob-

lems. Modeling and analysis of engineered components

and systems subjected to environmental and loading

conditions. Modeling content encompasses mechanisti-

cally based probability and experientially based statistical

approaches. Concepts needed for design with uncertain-

ty are developed. Principles are illustrated through case

studies and projects. Engineering applications software

will be extensively utilized for the projects. Prerequisites:

MATH 23 or 33; MECH 12, previously or concurrently.

ME 231. Fluid Mechanics (3) fall

Kinematics of fluid flow and similarity concepts. Equations

of incompressible fluid flow with inviscid and viscous

applications. Turbulence. One-dimensional compressible

flow, shock waves. Boundary layers, separation, wakes and

drag. Prerequisite: MATH 205. (ES 2.5), (ED 0.5)

Mechanical Engineering and Mechanics 337

ME 240. Manufacturing (3) spring

Analytical and technological base for several manufactur-

ing processes and common engineering materials.

Processes include metal cutting, metal deformation,

injection molding, thermoforming, and composites.

Process planning, computer-aided manufacturing, manu-

facturing system engineering, and quality measurements.

Design project. Weekly laboratory. Prerequisites: ME 10,

MECH 12. (ES 1.5), (ED 1.5)

ME 242. Mechanical Engineering Systems (3) fall

or spring

The modeling and analysis of mechanical, fluid, electri-

cal and hybrid systems, with emphasis on lumped

models and dynamic behavior, including vibrations.

Source-load synthesis. Analysis in temporal and frequen-

cy domains. Computer simulation of nonlinear models,

and computer implementation of the superposition

property of linear models. Prerequisites: MECH 102 and

MATH 205; ME 231 previously or concurrently.

ME 245. Engineering Vibrations (3) fall or spring

Physical modeling of vibrating systems. Free and forced

single and multiple degree of freedom systems.

Computer simulations. Engineering applications.

Prerequisites: MECH 102 and Math 205. (ES2), (ED1).

ME 252. Mechanical Elements (3) spring

Methods for the analysis and design of machine elements

such as springs, gears, clutches, brakes, and bearings.

Motion analysis of cams and selected mechanisms.

Projects requiring the design of simple mechanisms of

mechanical sub-assemblies. Prerequisites: MECH 12,

ME 10 and MECH 102. (ES 1.5), (ED 1.5)

ME 255 – Introduction to Aerospace

Engineering (3)

Properties of the atmosphere, aircraft design and per-

formance basics including estimation of lift and drag of

aerodynamic bodies. Concepts of stall and service ceiling

of aircraft along with propulsive forces, stability and con-

trol. Prerequisites: PHY 11 and ME 104, and

Co-requisite or Prerequisite ME 231.

For Advanced Undergraduates and Graduate

Students

ME 304. Thermodynamics II (3)

Availability and Second Law Analysis. Design of gas and

vapor power cycles, and refrigeration systems.

Generalized property relations for gases and gas-vapor.

Combustion and chemical equilibrium. Design of engi-

neering systems and processes incorporating

thermodynamic concepts and analysis. Prerequisite: ME

104. (ES 2), (ED 1)

ME 309 (Mat 309) – Composite Materials (3)

Principles and technology of composite materials.

Processing, properties, and structural applications of

composites, with emphasis on fiber-reinforced polymers.

Prerequisites: MAT 33 or equivalent, MECH 3.

ME 310. Directed Study (1-3) fall, spring

Project work on any aspect of engineering, performed

either individually or as a member of a team made up of

students, possibly from other disciplines. Project progress

is reported in the form of several planning and project

reports. Direction of the projects may be provided by

faculty from several departments and could include

interaction with outside consultants and local communi-

ties and industries. Prerequisite: Department permission

required. (ES 1), (ED 2)

ME 312. Analysis and Synthesis of

Mechanisms (3) fall

Types of motion. Degrees of freedom of motion.

Position, velocity and acceleration analysis of linkage

mechanisms. Systematic approach to the design of link-

age mechanisms. Motion generation, path synthesis and

function synthesis. Structural synthesis of planar and

spatial mechanisms. Static force analysis of mechanisms

using virtual work. Prerequisite: MECH 102. Chew.

(ES1), (ED2)

ME 321. Introduction to Heat Transfer (3)

Analytical and numerical solutions to steady and tran-

sient one- and two-dimensional conduction problems.

Forced and natural convection in internal and external

flows. Thermal radiation. Thermal design of engineering

processes and systems. Prerequisites: ME 104, ME 231.

Neti, Blythe, MacPherson. (ES 2), (ED 1)

ME 322. Gas Dynamics (3)

Flow equations for compressible fluids; thermodynamic

properties of gases. Normal shock waves. Steady one-

dimensional flows with heat addition and friction.

Oblique shock waves. Expansion waves. Nozzle flows.

Shock tubes; performance calculations and design.

Supersonic wind tunnels; diffuser design. Real gas

effects. Prerequisites: ME 231, ME 104, MATH 205.

Blythe. (ES 2.5), (ED 0.5)

ME 323. Reciprocating and Centrifugal Engines (3)

Thermal analysis and design of internal combustion

engines (conventional and unconventional), gas turbine

engines, air breathing jet engines, and rockets.

Components such as jet nozzles, compressors, turbines,

and combustion chambers are chosen to exemplify the

theory and development of different types of compo-

nents. Both ideal fluid and real fluid approaches are

considered. Prerequisite: ME 104. (ES 2.5), (ED 0.5)

ME 331. Advanced Fluid Mechanics (3)

Kinematics of fluid flow. Conservation equations for

inviscid and viscous flows; integral forms of equations.

Two-dimensional potential flow theory of incompressible

fluids with applications. Boundary layers. Introduction

to free shear layer and boundary layer stability and struc-

ture of turbulence. Transition from laminar to turbulent

boundary layers. Separation of flow. Steady and unsteady

stall. Secondary flows. Hydrodynamic lubrication.

Measurement techniques. Prerequisite: ME 231 or

equivalent. Varley. (ES 2.5), (ED 0.5)

ME 333. Propulsion Systems (3)

Review of jet and rocket engine technologies. Jet and

rocket engine thermodynamic and aerodynamic princi-

ples. Performance of turbojet, turbofan, and turboprop

jet engines. Rocket engines include liquid, cryogenic,

solid, and electric propulsion. Prerequisite: ME 104

Thermodynamics and either MECH 326 Aerodynamics

or ME 322 Gas Dynamics.

ME 340. Advanced Mechanical Design (3)

Probabilistic design of mechanical components and sys-

tems. Reliability functions, hazard models and product

life prediction. Theoretical stress-strength-time models.

Static and dynamic reliability models. Optimum design

of mechanical systems for reliability objectives or con-

straints. Prerequisite: MATH 231 or consent of

instructor. Harlow. (ES 2), (ED 1)

338 Lehigh University Course Catalog 2009-2010

ME 341. Mechanical Systems (3)

Advanced topics in mechanical systems design.

Kinematics and dynamics of planar machinery. Shock

and vibration control in machine elements. Balancing of

rotating and reciprocating machines. Design projects

using commercial computer-aided-engineering software

for the design and evaluation of typical machine systems.

Prerequisite: ME 252. Lucas. (ES 1.5), (ED 1.5)

ME 342. Dynamics of Engineering Systems (3)

Dynamic analysis of mechanical, electro-mechanical,

fluid and hybrid engineering systems with emphasis on

the modeling process. Lumped and distributed-parame-

ter models. Use of computer tools for modeling, design

and simulation. Design projects. Prerequisite: ME 242.

(ES 2), (ED 1)

ME 343. Control Systems (3)

Linear analyses of mechanical, hydraulic and electrical

feedback control systems by root locus and frequency

response techniques. A design project provides experi-

ence with practical issues and tradeoffs. Prerequisite: ME

242, or ME 245, or ECE 125. (ES 2), (ED 1)

ME 344 (IE 344, MAT 344) Metal Machining

Analysis (3)

Intensive study of metal cutting emphasizing forces,

energy, temperature, tool materials, tool life, and surface

integrity. Abrasive processes. Laboratory and project

work. Prerequisite: ME 240 or IE 215 or MAT 206.

ME 348. Computer-Aided Design (3)

Impact of computer-aided engineering tools on mechani-

cal design and analysis. Part geometry modeling and

assembly modeling using solid representations. Analysis

for mass properties, interference, kinematics, displace-

ments, stresses and system dynamics by using

state-of-the-art commercially available computer-aided-

engineering software. Integrated design projects.

Prerequisites: MATH 205, ME 10, MECH 12, MECH

102.

ME 350. Special Topics (1-4)

A study of some field of mechanical engineering not cov-

ered elsewhere. Prerequisite: consent of the department

chair. (ES 1), (ED 2)

ME 360. (CHE 360) Nuclear Reactor

Engineering (3)

A consideration of the engineering problems related to

nuclear reactor design and operation. Topics include fun-

damental properties of atomic and nuclear radiation,

reactor fuels and materials, reactor design and operation,

thermal aspects, safety and shielding, instrumentation

and control. Course includes several design projects

stressing the major topics in the course. Prerequisite:

Senior standing in engineering or physical science. Neti.

(ES 2), (ED 1)

ME 362. Nuclear Fusion and Radiation

Protection (3)

Structure of the nucleus. Quantum theory. Nuclear ener-

gy release: Fission vs. Fusion. Plasma for fusion. Power

balances in fusion plasmas. Magnetic and inertial con-

finement fusion concepts. Magnetic equilibrium

configurations and limitations. The Tokamak. Emerging

and alternative concepts. Fusion reactor economics.

Radiation sources and Radioactive decay. Interactions of

radiation with matter, detectors and protection from

radiation. Energy deposition and dose calculations.

Applications in dosimetry, imaging and spectroscopy.

Prerequisites: Senior standing in engineering or physical

science.

ME 364. Renewable Energy (3)

Fundamentals and design aspects of Renewable Energy

(RE) technologies; bio-fuels, hydropower, solar photo-

voltaic, solar thermal, wind, geothermal energies. Details

and difficulties in implementing RE. Prerequisites: Math

205, ME 104, ME 231 and/or senior standing in

Engineering .

ME 366. Engineering Principles of Clean Coal

Technology (3)

Effect of coal properties on plant performance. Design

and performance of coal-based electric power generation

systems. Technologies to control emissions. Carbon cap-

ture and sequestration methods for coal-fired power

plants and analysis of CCS options. Prerequisites: ME

104 or equivalent and Junior standing in engineering or

physical science.

ME 373. Mechatronics (3)

Synergistic integration of mechanical engineering with

electronics and intelligent computer control in designing

and manufacturing machines, products and processes;

semiconductor electronics, analog signal processing, with

op amps, digital circuits, Boolean algebra, logic network

designs, Karnaugh map, flip-flops and applications, data

acquisition, A/D and D/A, interfacing to personal com-

puters, sensors and actuators, microcontroller

programming and interfacing. Prerequisites: ECE 83 or

equivalent; ME 374 concurrently.

ME 374. Mechatronics Laboratory (3)

Experiments and applications utilizing combinations of

mechanical, electrical, and microprocessor components.

Theory and application of electronic and electro-

mechanical equipment, operation and control of

mechatronic systems. Projects integrating mechanical,

electronic and microcontrollers. Prerequisites: ECE 83 or

equivalent; ME 373 concurrently.

ME 376 (ChE 376) Energy: Issues & Technology (3)

Energy usage and supply, fossil fuel technologies, renew-

able energy alternatives and environmental impacts. The

scope will be broad to give some perspective of the prob-

lems, but in-depth technical analysis of many aspects will

also be developed. Prerequisites: college-level introducto-

ry courses in chemistry, physics and mathematics and

instructor approval.

ME 385. Polymer Product Manufacturing (3)

Polymer processes such as injection molding through a

combination of theory development, practical analysis,

and utilization of commercial software. Polymer chem-

istry and structure, material rheological behavior,

processing kinetics, molecular orientation development,

process simulation software development, manufacturing

defects, manufacturing window establishment, manufac-

turing process design, manufacturing process

optimization. Prerequisites: Senior level standing in engi-

neering or science. Credit not given for both ME 385

and ME 485.

ME 387. (CHE 387, ECE 387) Digital Control (3)

Sampled-data systems; z-transforms; pulse transfer func-

tions; stability in the z-plane; root locus and frequency

response design methods; minimal prototype design; dig-

ital control hardware; discrete state variables; state

transition matrix; Liapunov stability state feedback con-

Mechanical Engineering and Mechanics 339

trol (two lectures and one laboratory per week).

Prerequisite: CHE 386 or ECE 212 or ME 343 or con-

sent of instructor. Luyben.(ES 3), (ED 0)

ME 389. (ECE 389, CHE 389) Control Systems

Laboratory (2)

Experiments on a variety of mechanical, electrical and

chemical dynamic control systems. Exposure to state-of-

the-art control instrumentation: sensors, transmitters,

control valves, analog and digital controllers. Emphasis

on design of feedback controllers and comparison of the-

oretical computer simulation predictions with actual

experimental data. Lab teams will be interdisciplinary.

Prerequisites: Either CHE 386, ME 343, or ECE 212.

(ES 1), (ED 1)

Undergraduate Courses in Engineering Mechanics

MECH 2. Elementary Engineering Mechanics (3)

fall

Static equilibrium of particles and rigid bodies.

Elementary analysis of simple truss and frame structures,

internal forces, stress, and strain. Prerequisites: Phys. 11;

MATH 22 previously or concurrently.

MECH 3. Fundamentals of Engineering

Mechanics (3) fall, spring

Static equilibrium of particles and rigid bodies. Analysis

of simple truss and frame structures, internal forces,

stress, strain, and Hooke’s Law, torsion of circular shafts;

pure bending of beams. Prerequisites: Phys. 11; MATH

22 previously or concurrently. Course is intended as a

prerequisite for MECH 12. Credit not given for both

Mech 2 and Mech 3. (ES 2.5, ED 0.5)

MECH 12. Strength of Materials (3) spring

Transverse shear in beams. Mohr’s circle for stress. Plastic

yield criteria. Deflection of beams. Introduction to

numerical analysis of simple structures. Fatigue and frac-

ture. Column buckling. Stresses in thick-walled

cylinders. Prerequisites: MECH 3; MATH 23 may be

taken previously or concurrently. (ES 2), (ED 1)

MECH 102. Dynamics (3) fall

Particle dynamics, work-energy, impulse-momentum,

impact, systems of particles; kinematics of rigid bodies,

kinetics of rigid bodies in plane motion, energy, momen-

tum, eccentric impact. Prerequisites: MECH 2 or

MECH 3, and MATH 23. (ES 3), (ED 0)

MECH 103. Principles of Mechanics (4)

Composition and resolution of forces; equivalent force

systems; equilibrium of particles and rigid bodies; fric-

tion. Kinematics and kinetics of particles and rigid

bodies; relative motion; work and energy; impulse and

momentum. Prerequisites: MATH 23 and Phys 11. (ES

4), (ED 0)

For Advanced Undergraduates and Graduate

Students

MECH 302. Advanced Dynamics (3)

Fundamental dynamic theorems and their application to

the study of the motion of particles and rigid bodies,

with particular emphasis on three-dimensional motion.

Use of generalized coordinates; Lagrange’s equations and

their applications. Prerequisites: MECH 102 or 103;

MATH 205. Perreira (ES 3), (ED 0)

MECH 305. Advanced Mechanics of Materials (3)

Strength, stiffness, and stability of mechanical compo-

nents and structures. Fundamental principles of stress

analysis: three-dimensional stress and strain transforma-

tions, two-dimensional elasticity, contact stresses, stress

concentrations, energy and variational methods. Stresses

and deformations for rotating shafts, thermal stresses in

thick-walled cylinders, curved beams, torsion of prismat-

ic bars, and bending of plates. Projects relate analysis to

engineering design. Prerequisites: MECH 12, MATH

205. Nied. (ES 2.5), (ED 0.5)

MECH 307. Mechanics of Continua (3)

Fundamental principles of the mechanics of deformable

bodies. Study of stress, velocity and acceleration fields.

Compatibility equations, conservation laws. Applications

to two-dimensional problems in finite elasticity, plastici-

ty, and viscous flows. Prerequisite: MECH 305. Varley.

(ES 3), (ED 0)

MECH 312. Finite Element Analysis (3)

Basic concepts of analyzing general media (solids, fluids,

heat transfer, etc.) with complicated boundaries.

Emphasis on mechanical elements and structures.

Element stiffness matrices by minimum potential energy.

Isoparametric elements. Commercial software packages

(ABAQUS, NISA) are used. In addition, students devel-

op and use their own finite element codes. Applications

to design. Prerequisite: MECH 12. (ES 1.5), (ED 1.5)

MECH 313. Fracture Mechanics (3)

Fracture mechanics as a foundation for design against or

facilitation of fracture. Fracture behavior of solids; frac-

ture criteria; stress analysis of cracks; subcritical crack

growth, including chemical and thermal effects; fracture

design and control, and life prediction methodologies.

Prerequisites: MECH 12, MATH 205, or approval of

department. Nied, Wei. (ES 2), (ED 1)

MECH 326. Aerodynamics (3)

Application of fluid dynamics to flows past lifting surfaces.

Normal force calculations in inviscid flows. Use of confor-

mal mappings in two-dimensional airfoil theory. Kutta

condition at a trailing edge; physical basis. Viscous bound-

ary layers. Thin airfoil theory. Section design; pressure

profiles and separation. Lifting line theory. Compressible

subsonic flows; Prandtl-Glauert Rule. Airfoil performance

at supersonic speeds. Prerequisites: ME 231 and MATH

208. Blythe, Varley. (ES 2.5), (ED 0.5)

MECH 328. Fundamentals of Aircraft Design (3)

Review of aerodynamics; Weight and balance, stability,

loads; Basics of propellers; Power and performance;

International Standard Atmosphere; Introduction to

aerospace composites; Introduction to FAA regulations.

Prerequisite: MECH 12. Grenestedt.

MECH 350. Special Topics (3)

A study of some field of engineering mechanics not cov-

ered elsewhere. Prerequisite: consent of the department

chair.

Graduate Programs

The department offers programs of study leading to the

degrees of master of science, master of engineering, and

doctor of philosophy in mechanical engineering and

computational and engineering mechanics.

Subject to approval, courses from other engineering cur-

ricula, such as materials science and engineering, and

chemical, electrical, and industrial engineering, together

with courses in mathematics and engineering mathemat-

ics, may be included in the degree program.

340 Lehigh University Course Catalog 2009-2010

Master of Science in Mechanical Engineering

The M.S. in mechanical engineering requires 24 credit

hours of courses and six credit hours of research, which

culminates in a thesis. Core courses that must be taken

are: ME 452, Mathematical Methods in Engineering I;

and either ME 453, Mathematical Methods in Engineer-

ing II or ME 413, Numerical Methods in Mechanical

Engineering. In addition, three of the following courses

must be taken: ME 423, Heat and Mass Transfer; ME

430, Advanced Fluid Mechanics; MECH 406 Funda-

mentals of Solid Mechanics; MECH 425, Analytical

Methods in Dynamics and Vibrations; and either ME

401, Product Development, or ME 402, Manufacturing.

Master of Engineering in Mechanical Engineering

The M.Eng. requires 30 credit hours of graduate work.

Audit credits may not be used toward the degree. At least

18 credit hours of courses must be at the 400-level, and

15 of these must be in mechanical engineering and

mechanics. At least 18 credit hours of courses must be in

mechanical engineering and mechanics, and at least 24

credit hours must be at the 300- or 400-level. No course

in mechanical engineering and mechanics below the

300-level may be used towards the M.Eng., but two

courses (6 credits) outside the department that are below

the 300-level may apply, with approval from a student’s

advisor and the departmental Graduate Committee.

Master of Science in Computational and

Engineering Mechanics

All students pursuing a master’s degree in computational

and engineering mechanics must take a minimum of 30

credit hours of graduate level work, with not less than 24

of these hours being at the 400 level. Their program

must include the following three required courses:

Mathematical Methods I & II PHYS 428 & 429 or

ME 452 & ME 453

Numerical Methods ME 413

In addition they must take two of the four MEM core

courses:

Heat and Mass Transfer ME 423

Advanced Fluid Mechanics ME 430

Fundamentals of Solid Mechanics MECH 406

Analyt. Meth. In Dynamics & Vibs.MECH 425

The remaining 15 credits may be taken from any of the

graduate courses in MEM and other approved electives.

Both thesis and non-thesis options are available.

Doctor of Philosophy in Mechanical Engineering

The Ph.D. program in Mechanical Engineering requires

innovative research in collaboration with one or more

faculty members, along with the completion of 72 credit

hours beyond the bachelor’s degree (if graduate study is

carried out entirely at Lehigh University), or 48 beyond

the master’s degree (obtained at another university). Stu-

dents are admitted to Ph.D. candidacy in mechanical

engineering upon attainment of a minimum GPA of

3.35 in five core courses (see core course requirements

for Master of Science in Mechanical Engineering) and

completion of a General Examination, which is based on

assessment and presentation of a research topic. Formal

University candidacy for the Ph.D. is granted upon rec-

ommendation of the doctoral committee and approval

by the engineering college. Course work for the Ph.D. is

determined in consultation with the student’s advisor

and doctoral committee. To complete the Ph.D. degree,

the student must present and defend a dissertation

before the doctoral committee.

Doctor of Philosophy in Computational and

Engineering Mechanics

Students wishing to pursue a Ph.D. in computational

and engineering mechanics must take the required core

courses:

Mathematical Methods I & II PHYS 428 & 429 or

ME 452 & 453

Numerical Methods ME 413

They must also take two core courses from the supple-

mental list given below:

Asymptotic Methods MECH 419

Finite Element Methods MECH 418

Non-deterministic Models in Engr.

MECH 445

Mechanical Reliability ME 446

Heat and Mass Transfer ME 423*

Advanced Fluid Mechanics ME 430*

Fundamentals of Solid Mechanics MECH 406*

Analyt. Meth. in Dynamics & Vibs.MECH 425*

A student must attain a GPA of 3.35 for the five

required courses taken. All students who satisfy the GPA

requirement will be required to take a three-hour written

examination in an area (special topic) of the student’s

choice. This topic is subject to approval by the computa-

tional and engineering mechanics graduate committee.

For students who start in the program following their

bachelor’s degree, the written examination must be taken

no later than the beginning of the fourth semester after

entry. A student who fails the written examination will

be allowed a single retake. The retake examination will

be given at the end of the semester in which the exami-

nation was first attempted.

In addition, before completion of the degree, a student

must have received graduate credit for at least two of the

four MEM core courses which are designated by a * in

the above list. If desired, these starred courses may be

used as part of the Computational and engineering

mechanics core, and hence count towards the core GPA

requirement.

Research Facilities

The department has a wide range of computational,

computer graphics and experimental systems. The

department’s CAD Lab has over 50 computers that

include high-end engineering workstations. The universi-

ty supports networks of hundreds of PCs as well as links

to the Internet with thousands of on-line services.

Experimental facilities include 11 pulsed and continuous

laser units for laser diagnostics in the areas of fluid and

solid mechanics, four image processing systems, and a

number of unique facilities for observing and controlling

flow past surfaces and through machines. There are well-

equipped laboratories for multi-disciplinary studies of

crack growth in deleterious environments and at elevated

temperatures of up to 700C, in conjunction with a num-

ber of surface analysis and electron microscopy facilities

on campus.

Extensively equipped, interdepartmental robotics, con-

trols, and manufacturing laboratories are also available.

Mechanical Engineering and Mechanics 341

Other facilities include the latest mechanical, electrody-

namic and servocontrolled hydraulic testing machines,

photoelastic equipment, and Moire strain measuring

instruments.

Recent Research Activities

Continuum and Solid Mechanics. Formulation of field

equations and constitutive equations in non-linear elas-

ticity theories; mechanics of viscoelastic solids and fluids,

plasticity theory; generalized continuum mechanics;

thermomechanical and electromechanical interactions;

analyses and modeling of manufacturing processes; free

vibration and dynamic response of elastic shells, elastic-

plastic deformation of shells upon cyclic thermal loading,

and applications of shell analysis to nuclear power plant

components; optical stress analysis; biomechanics of gait;

wave propagation; finite amplitude wave propagation.

Fracture Mechanics. Stress analysis of materials contain-

ing defects, including viscoelastic, non-homogeneous,

and anisotropic materials; analytical and experimental

studies and modeling of crack growth under static, peri-

odic, and random loadings and environmental effects;

optimizations of fracture control; crack propagation the-

ories for nonlinear material; influence of cracks on the

strength of structural members and of interfaces;

hydraulic fracture; applications to reliability and durabil-

ity of composites, structural and microelectronic

components, and to processes for resource recovery.

Thermofluids. Structure of turbulent boundary layers,

wakes and jets; vortex-solid boundary interactions;

boundary layers in compressible flow, including hyper-

sonic regimes; vortex breakdown in internal machinery

and in flow past wings; drag reduction in turbulent

flows; flow-induced noise and vibration; flutter of blades

in axial-flow turbomachinery and of tails and fins on air-

craft; unsteady aerodynamic flows past three-dimensional

wings and bodies; flow structure and heat transfer at

end-wall junctions in rotating machinery and on surfaces

of aircraft; flows in micro-hydro-electromechanical sys-

tems; convective heat transfer in systems of electronic

components; flows through complex components of

power generation systems; transport of coal particles;

flow and heat transfer in fluidized beds; cycle analysis

applied to coal gasifiers; control optimization of heat

pumps; laser-Doppler and particle image velocimetry;

liquid crystal sensors for heat transfer; Raman spectral

techniques applied to two-phase flow; laser diagnostics

and image processing of complex flow and heat transfer

systems.

Theoretical Fluid Mechanics. Vortex boundary layer

interaction, modeling of turbulent boundary layers; geo-

physical flows such as frontal systems and mountain

flows; statistical mechanics of plasmas, liquids and shock

waves; finite amplitude waves in stratified gases and liq-

uids; shock wave propagation; non-Newtonian flows in

flexible tubes with application to hemorheology; magne-

to-fluid mechanics; wing theory; thermally driven flows.

Design. Geometric modeling; tolerance analysis and syn-

thesis; assembly modeling; geometric dimensioning and

tolerancing; 3-D digitizing; data and information struc-

tures; design for manufacturing; design methodology,

tools and practices; expert systems in design; industry

projects with Integrated Product Development (IPD)

focus.

Manufacturing. Free-form surface machining; coordi-

nate measuring machine applications to geometric

dimensions and tolerances; Taguchi’s method; injection

molding; sheet metal fabrication; FEA/FEM applications

to plastic deformation of metals; rapid prototyping;

intelligent manufacturing incorporating process model-

ing, sensor subsystems for in situ product quality

monitoring, and knowledge-based control for real-time

process adaptation; blow molding; composites process-

ing; thermoforming; resin transfer molding; spin coating;

electronic packaging.

Systems Dynamics and Controls. Modeling, simulation

and control of dynamic systems including: control of

unstable processes, programmed logic control experience,

compensator design and construction, issues in digital

implementation, state-of-the-industrial art experimental

equipment, energy methods and bond graph modeling,

methods of model identification from experimental data;

application to various mechanisms, vehicles, chemical

processes, aircraft systems, chemical processes, hydraulic

systems, thermodynamic systems, microelectromechani-

cal actuators; application to mechatronics for the

integration of mechanical systems, computer control and

programming for the design of smart consumer products

and intelligent manufacturing machinery.

Stochastic Processes. Modeling of random behavior in

mechanical systems; static and time-dependent stochastic

fracture mechanics, with particular applications to assess-

ments of reliability and service life prediction.

Engineering Mathematics. General research areas within

the division include: Analytical and numerical methods

for the solution of ordinary and partial differential equa-

tions; industrial applications. Asymptotic methods.

Finite element techniques. Wavelets. Non-linear studies;

stability and bifurcation. Navier-Stokes equations;

boundary layer theory; turbulence modelling. Non-

Newtonian fluids; viscometric flows; materials

processing. Geophysical flows. Wave propagation; soli-

tons. Combustion phenomena. Continuum mechanics;

large deformation analyses; buckling; fracture mechanics.

Thermoelasticity. Applied probability and stochastic

processes; stochastic differential equations. Statistical

mechanics.

Graduate Courses in Mechanical

Engineering

Except for core courses, graduate courses are generally

offered every third semester. Several courses are offered

each year as ME 450 Special Topics. For details, contact

the graduate office of the department.

ME 401. Integrated Product

Development (IPD) (3) fall

An integrated and interdisciplinary approach to engi-

neering design, concurrent engineering, design for

manufacturing, industrial design and the business of new

product development. Topics include design methods,

philosophy and practice, the role of modeling and simu-

lation, decision making, risk, cost, material and

manufacturing process selection, platform and modular

design, mass customization, quality, planning and sched-

uling, business issues, teamwork, group dynamics,

creativity and innovation. The course uses case studies

and team projects with international partners. Ochs. ME

402.

342 Lehigh University Course Catalog 2009-2010

ME 402. Advanced Manufacturing Science (3)

spring

The course focuses on the fundamental science-base

underlying manufacturing processes, and applying that

science base to develop knowledge and tools suitable for

industrial utilization. Selected manufacturing processes

representing the general classes of material removal,

material deformation, material phase change, material

flow, and material joining are addressed. Students create

computer-based process simulation tools independently

as well as utilize leading commercial process simulation

packages. Laboratory experiences are included through-

out the course. Coulter/Nied

ME 411. Boundary-Layer Theory (3)

The course is intended as a first graduate course in vis-

cous flow. An introduction to boundary-layer theory,

thermodynamics and heat transfer at the undergraduate

level are assumed to have been completed. Topics include

the fundamental equation of continuum fluid mechan-

ics, the concept of asymptotic methods and low and high

Reynolds number flows, laminar boundary layers, gener-

alized similarity methods, two-and three-dimensional

flows, steady and unsteady flows and an introduction to

hydrodynamic stability. The material is covered in the

context of providing a logical basis as an introduction to

a further course in turbulent flows.

ME 413. Numerical Methods in Mechanical

Engineering (3)

Zeros of functions, difference tables, interpolation, inte-

gration, differentiation. Divided differences, numerical

solution of ordinary differential equations of the bound-

ary and initial value type. Eigen problems. Curve fitting,

matrix manipulation and solution of linear algebraic

equations. Partial differential equations of the hyperbol-

ic, elliptic and parabolic type. Application to problems

in mechanical engineering.

ME 415. Flow-Induced Vibrations (3)

Excitation of streamlined- and bluff-bodies by self-flut-

ter, vortex, turbulence, and gust-excitation mechanisms.

Analogous excitation of fluid (compressible- and free-

surface) systems having rigid boundaries. Extensive case

studies. Rockwell

ME 420. Advanced Thermodynamics (3)

Critical review of thermodynamics systems. Criteria for

equilibrium. Applications to electromagnetic systems.

Statistical thermodynamics. Irreversible thermodynamics.

Thermoelectric phenomena. Levy

ME 421. Topics in Thermodynamics (3)

Emphasis on theoretical and experimental treatment of

combustion processes including dissociation, flame tem-

perature calculations, diffusion flames, stability and

propagation; related problems in compressible flow

involving one-dimensional, oblique shock waves and det-

onation waves. Methods of measurement and

instrumentation. Staff

ME 423. Heat and Mass Transfer (3) spring

This course is a first graduate course in the basic con-

cepts of heat and mass transfer, providing a broad

coverage of key areas in diffusion, conduction, convec-

tion, heat and mass transfer, and radiation. Topics

covered include: the conservation equations, steady and

transient diffusion and conduction, periodic diffusion,

melting and solidification problems, numerical methods,

turbulent convection, transpiration and film cooling, free

convection, heat transfer with phase change, heat

exchanges, radiation, mixed mode heat and mass trans-

fer. Neti, Öztekin

ME 424. Unstable and Turbulent Flow (3)

Stability of laminar flow; transition to turbulence.

Navier-Stokes equations with turbulence. Bounded tur-

bulent shear flows; free shear flows; statistical description

of turbulence. Prerequisite: ME 331. Rockwell

ME 426. Radiative and Conductive Heat Transfer (3)

Principles of radiative transfer; thermal-radiative proper-

ties of diffuse and specular surfaces; radiative exchange

between bodies; radiative transport through absorbing,

emitting and scattering media. Advanced topics in

steady-state and transient conduction; analytical and

numerical solutions; problems of combined conductive

and radiative heat transfer. Prerequisite: ME 321 or

CHE 421. Varley

ME 428. Boundary Layers and Convective Heat

Transfer (3)

Navier-Stokes and energy equations, laminar boundary

layer theory, analysis of friction drag, transfer and separa-

tion. Transition from laminar to turbulent flow.

Turbulent boundary layer theory. Prandtl mixing length,

turbulent friction drag, and heat transfer. Integral meth-

ods. Flow in ducts, wakes and jets. Natural convection

heat transfer. Prerequisite: ME 331 or ME 321. Levy

ME 430. Advanced Fluid Mechanics (3) fall

This course is a first graduate course in incompressible

fluid mechanics, providing a broad coverage of key areas

of viscous and inviscid fluid mechanics. Topics covered

include: Flow kinematics, differential equations of

motion, viscous and inviscid solutions, vorticity dynam-

ics and circulation, vorticity equation, circulation

theorems, potential flow behavior, irrotational and rota-

tional flows, simple boundary layer flows and solutions,

and real fluid flows and consequences. Smith, Rockwell

ME 431. Advanced Gas Dynamics (3)

Method of characteristics. Unsteady continuous flow.

Unsteady flows with discontinuities. Shock tubes.

Detonation waves. Two-dimensional and axisymmetric

supersonic flows. Momentum and energy equation of

compressible viscous fluids. Prerequisite: ME 322. Blythe

ME 433. (CHE 433, ECE 433) State Space

Control (3)

State-space methods of feedback control system design

and design optimization for invariant and time-varying

deterministic, continuous systems; pole positioning,

observability, controllability, modal control, observer

design, the theory of optimal processes and Pontryagin’s

Maximum principle, the linear quadratic optimal regula-

tor problem, Lyapunov functions and stability theorems,

linear optimal open loop control; introduction to the

calculus of variations; introduction to the control of dis-

tributed parameter systems. Intended for engineers with

a variety of backgrounds. Examples will be drawn from

mechanical, electrical and chemical engineering applica-

tions. Prerequisite: ME 343 or ECE 212 or CHE 386 or

consent of instructor.

ME 434. (CHE 434, ECE 434) Multivariable

Process Control (3)

A state-of-the-art review of multivariable methods of

interest to process control applications. Design tech-

niques examined include loop interaction analysis,

Mechanical Engineering and Mechanics 343

frequency domain methods (Inverse Nyquist Array,

Characteristic Loci and Singular Value Decomposition)

feed forward control, internal model control and dynam-

ic matrix control. Special attention is placed on the

interaction of process design and process control. Most

of the above methods are used to compare the relative

performance of intensive and extensive variable control

structures. Prerequisite: CHE 433 or ME 433 or ECE

433 or consent of instructor.

ME 436. (CHE 436, ECE 436) Systems

Identification (3)

The determination of model parameters from time-his-

tory and frequency response data by graphical,

deterministic and stochastic methods. Examples and

exercises taken from process industries, communications

and aerospace testing. Regression, quasilinear-ization and

invariant-imbedding techniques for nonlinear system

parameter identification included. Prerequisite: CHE

433 or ME 433 or ECE 433 or consent of instructor.

ME 437. (CHE 437, ECE 437) Stochastic

Control (3)

Linear and nonlinear models for stochastic systems.

Controllability and observability. Minimum variance

state estimation. Linear quadratic Gausian control prob-

lem. Computational considerations. Nonlinear control

problem in stochastic systems. Prerequisite: CHE 433 or

ME 433 or ECE 433 or consent of instructor. Staff

ME 444. Experimental Stress Analysis in Design (3)

Fundamental concepts of strain measurements and appli-

cation of strain gages and strain gage circuits. Two- and

three-dimensional photoelasticity, stress separation tech-

niques, birefringent coatings, moiré methods, caustics.

Use of image analysis in data acquisition and interpreta-

tion. Selected laboratory experiments. Voloshin

ME 446. Mechanical Reliability (3)

Design of mechanical engineering systems to reliability

specifications. Probabilistic failure models for mechanical

components. Methods for the analysis and improvement

of system reliability. Effect of component tolerance and

parameter variation on system failure. Reliability testing.

Prerequisite: MATH 231 or MATH 309. Harlow

ME 450. Special Topics (3)

An intensive study of some field of mechanical engineer-

ing not covered in more general courses.

ME 451. Seminar (1-3)

Critical discussion of recent advances in mechanical

engineering.

ME 452 (CHE 452, ENGR 452). Mathematical

Methods in Engineering I (3) fall

Analytical techniques relevant to the engineering sciences

are described. Vector spaces; eigenvalues, eigenvectors.

Linear ordinary differential equations; diagonalizable and

non-diagonizable systems. Inhomogeneous linear sys-

tems; variation of parameters. Non-linear systems;

stability; phase plane. Series solutions of linear ordinary

differential equations; special functions. Laplace and

Fourier transforms; application to partial differential

equations and integral equations. Sturm-Liouville theory.

Finite Fournier transforms; planar, cylindrical, and

spherical geometries.

ME 453. Mathematical Methods in Engineering

II (3) spring

Theory of complex functions; Cauchy-Riemann rela-

tions. Integration in the complex plane, Cauchy’s

integral formula. Laurent series; singular points; contour

integrals; Fourier and Laplace transforms. Evaluation of

real integrals; Cauchy principal values. Laplace’s equa-

tion; conformal mappings; Poisson formulae. Singular

integral equations. Classification of partial differential

equations. Hyperbolic systems of partial differential

equations; uniqueness, shock formation. Non-linear par-

abolic equations; Burger’s equation.

ME 458. Modeling of Dynamic Systems (3)

Modeling of complex linear and nonlinear energetic

dynamic engineering systems. Emphasis on subdivision

into multiport elements and representation by the bond-

graph language using direct, energetic, and experimental

methods. Field lumping. Analytical and graphical reduc-

tions. Simulation and other numerical methods.

Examples including mechanisms, electromechanical

transducers, electric and fluid circuits, and thermal sys-

tems.

ME 460. Engineering Project (1-6)

Project work on some aspect of mechanical engineering

in an area of student and faculty interest. Selection and

direction of the project could involve interaction with

local communities or industries. Prerequisite: consent of

the department chair.

ME 461. IPD: Design (3)

Industry sponsored Integrated Product Development

Project (IPD) projects. The student works with an indus-

try sponsor to do a technical and economic feasibility

study of new product development. Selection and con-

tent of the project is determined by the faculty project

advisor in consultation with the industry sponsor.

Deliverables include progress and final reports, oral pre-

sentations and posters. Prerequisites: Consent of the

department chair and faculty project advisor.

ME 462. IPD: Manufacturing (3)

Industry sponsored Integrated Product Development

Project (IPD) projects. The student works with an indus-

try sponsor to create detailed design specifications,

fabricate and test a prototype new product and plan for

production. Selection and content of the project is deter-

mined by the faculty project advisor in consultation with

the industry sponsor. Deliverables include progress and

final reports, oral presentations, posters and a prototype.

Prerequisites: Consent of the department chair and fac-

ulty project advisor.

ME 464. Computer-Aided Geometric Modeling (3)

Representation schemes for geometric modeling, compu-

tational geometry for curve and surface design,

finite-element meshing and NC tool path generation,

interfacing different CAD/CAM databases, interactive

computer graphics programming. Prerequisite: ME 348

or consent of instructor. Ozsoy

ME 466. Fundamentals of Acoustics (3)

Vibration-induced acoustic radiation, wave equation in

planar, cylindrical and spherical coordinates. Sound in

tubes, pipes, wave guides, acoustic enclosures.

Impedance and source-media-receiver transmission con-

cepts. Noise and its measurements. Ochs

344 Lehigh University Course Catalog 2009-2010

ME 485. Polymer Product Manufacturing (3)

An exploration of the science underlying polymer

processes such as injection molding through a combina-

tion of theory development, practical analysis, and

utilization of commercial software. Polymer chemistry

and structure, material rheological behavior, processing

kinetics, molecular orientation development, process

simulation software development, manufacturing defects,

manufacturing window establishment, manufacturing

process design, manufacturing process optimization. This

course is a version of ME 385 for graduate students,

with research projects and advanced assignments. Closed

to students who have taken ME 385. Prerequisites:

Graduate level standing in engineering or science.

ME 490. Thesis

ME 499. Dissertation

Graduate Courses in Engineering Mechanics

Except for core courses, graduate courses are generally

offered every third semester.

MECH 404 (CEE 404). Mechanics and Behavior

of Structural Members (3)

Behavior of structural members under a variety of load-

ing conditions in the elastic and inelastic range.

Introduction to the theory of elasticity and plasticity.

Basics of linear elastic fracture mechanics and fatigue.

Analysis of structural member behavior in axial, bending,

shear, and torsion. Stability analysis of beam-columns.

Beams on elastic foundations. Energy concepts and their

use in structural analysis. Prerequisite: CEE 259 or

equivalent.

MECH 406 (CEE 406). Fundamentals of Solid

Mechanics (3)

An introductory graduate course in the mechanics of

solids. Topics to be addressed include: tensor analysis,

analysis of strain and nonlinear kinematics, stress, work

conjugate stress-strain measures, conservation laws and

energy theorems. Hamilton’s principle, variational calcu-

lus, isotropic and anistropic linear elasticity, boundary

value problems, beam and plate theories. Prerequisite:

MATH 205 or equivalent.

MECH 408. Introduction to Elasticity (3) fall

This course is a first graduate course in solid mechanics.

It addresses: kinematics and statics of deformable elastic

solids; compatibility, equilibrium and constitutive equa-

tions; problems in plane elasticity and torsion; energy

principles, approximate methods and applications. Staff

MECH 410. Theory of Elasticity II (3)

Advanced topics in the theory of elasticity. The subject

matter may vary from year to year and may include, the-

ory of potential functions, linear thermoelasticity,

dynamics of deformable media, integral transforms and

complex-variable methods in classical elasticity. Problems

of boundary layer type in elasticity; current develop-

ments on the micro-structure theory of elasticity.

Prerequisites: MECH 408, MATH 208, or consent of

the department chair.

MECH 411. (PHY 471) Continuum Mechanics (3)

An introduction to the continuum theories of the

mechanics of solids and fluids. This includes a discussion

of the mechanical and thermodynamical bases of the

subject, as well as the use of invariance principles in for-

mulating constitutive equations. Applications of the the-

ories to specific problems are given. Staff

MECH 413. Fracture Mechanics (3)

Elementary and advanced fracture mechanics concepts;

analytical modeling; fracture toughness concept; fracture

toughness testing; calculation of stress intensity factors;

elastic-plastic analysis; prediction of crack trajectory;

fatigue crack growth and environmental effects; compu-

tational methods in fracture mechanics; nonlinear

fracture mechanics; fracture of composite structures;

application of fracture mechanics to design.

Prerequisites: MATH 205, MECH 305 or equivalent

course in advanced mechanics of materials. Nied, Wei

MECH 415. (CE 468) Stability of Elastic

Structures (3)

Basic concepts of instability of a structure; bifurcation,

energy increment, snap-through, dynamic instability.

Analytical and numerical methods of finding buckling

loads of columns. Postbuckling deformations of can-

tilever columns. Dynamic buckling with nonconservative

forces. Effects of initial imperfections. Inelastic buckling.

Instability problems of thin plates and shells.

Prerequisite: MATH 205.

MECH 418. Finite Element Methods (3)

Finite element approximations to the solution of differ-

ential equations of engineering interest. Linear and

nonlinear examples from heat transfer, solid mechanics,

and fluid mechanics are used to illustrate applications of

the method. The course emphasizes the development of

computer programs to carry out the required calcula-

tions. Prerequisite: knowledge of a high-level

programming language. Delph

MECH 419. (CHE 419) Asymptotic Methods in

the Engineering Sciences (3)

Introductory-level course with emphasis on practical

applications. Material covered includes: Asymptotic

expansions. Regular and singular perturbations; algebraic

problems. Asymptotic matching. Boundary value prob-

lems; distinguished limits. Multiple scale expansions.

W.K.B. Theory. Non-linear wave equations. Blythe

MECH 424. Unsteady Fluid Flows (3)

Gas dynamics, finite amplitude disturbances in perfect

and real gases; channel flows; three-dimensional

acoustics; theories of the sonic boom. Motions in fluids

with a free surface; basic hydrodynamics, small ampli-

tude waves on deep water; ship waves; dispersive waves;

shallow water gravity waves and atmospheric waves.

Hemodynamics; pulsatile blood flow at high and low

Reynolds number. Models of the interaction of flow with

artery walls. Varley

MECH 425. Analytical Methods in Dynamics and

Vibrations (3) spring

This course is a first graduate course in dynamics and vibra-

tions. It treats three-dimensional rigid body motion by

vector methods and multidegree of freedom systems by

variational principles. Discrete modal analysis and continu-

ous modal analysis of one-dimensional systems plus

finite-element formulation of numerical problems consti-

tutes about one-third of the course. There is a brief

treatment of advanced impact. Use of symbolic computer

codes is encouraged.

Military Science 345

MECH 432 (CEE 432). Inelastic Behavior of

Materials (3)

Time-independent and dependent inelastic material

behavior. Time-independent plasticity. Yield criteria in

multi-dimensions, J2 incremental plasticity in multi-

dimensions with associated flow rule. Numerical

integration of plasticity equations by radial return and

other methods. Deformation theory of plasticity. Time

dependent behavior including linear viscoelasticity and

nonlinear creep behavior. Nonlinear material behavior at

elevated temperatures. Prerequisite: MECH 406. Delph.

MECH 445. Non-deterministic Models in

Engineering (3)

Application of probability and stochastic processes to

engineering problems for a variety of applications.

Modeling and analysis of common non-deterministic

processes. Topics are selected from the following: linear

and nonlinear models for random systems; random func-

tions; simulation; random loads and vibrations; Kalman

filtering, identification, estimation, and prediction; sto-

chastic fracture and fatigue; probabilistic design of

engineering systems; and spatial point processes.

Prerequisites: advanced calculus and some exposure to

probability and statistics. Harlow

MECH 450. Special Problems (3)

An intensive study of some field of applied mechanics

not covered in more general courses.

MECH 454. Mechanics and Design of

Composites (3)

Mechanics of anisotropic materials. Manufacturing and

measurements of mechanical properties. Stress analysis

for design of composite structures. Hygrothermal effects

and residual stresses. Laminate design, micromechanics

of lamina. Bolted and bonded joints. Impact and dam-

age in composites. Lectures and laboratory. Prerequisite:

MECH 305 or equivalent course in advanced mechanics

of materials. Voloshin

MECH 490. Thesis

MECH 499. Dissertation

Graduate Courses in Engineering Mathematics

Students in the applied mathematics program also have

access to the graduate courses listed under mechanical

engineering, engineering mechanics, and mathematics, as

well as other engineering departments.

EMA 425. Variational Methods in Science and

Engineering (3)

Variational problems with one independent variable;

Euler-Lagrange equations; methods of solution; space

and time dependent fields; null Lagrangians and inho-

mogeneous Dirichlet data; problems with constraints;

symmetries and conservation laws; variational approxi-

mation methods, Rayleigh-Ritz, Galerkin, finite element,

and collocation. Problems and examples will be drawn

from the mechanics of solids, fluids, and related fields.

Prerequisite: consent of chair. Staff

EMA 450. Special Topics (3)

An intensive study of some field of engineering mathe-

matics not covered in other courses.

EMA 490. Thesis

EMA 499. Dissertation

Military Science

Professor. LTC Erik J. Walker, M.A. Penn State

University, B.A. WV University

Instructors. MAJ James Rinier, MSG Donald Alford,

SFC Richard Boyer

The Department of Military Science, established in

1919, conducts the Army Reserve Officers Training

Corps (ROTC) program at Lehigh University. This is

one of the oldest ROTC programs in the nation. The

Army ROTC program provides a means for students to

qualify for a commission as an officer in the Active

Army, Army Reserve, or Army National Guard.

The objectives of the military science program are to

develop leadership and management ability in each stu-

dent; to provide a basic understanding of the Army’s

history, philosophy, organization, responsibilities, and

role in American society; and to develop fundamental

professional knowledge and skills associated with officer-

ship. These objectives are achieved through classroom

instruction, leadership laboratories, field trips, role play-

ing, leadership simulations, and individual assessment

and counseling. Army ROTC offers a four-year program

and a two-year program. The four-year program consists

of a two-year basic course and a two-year advanced

course. The two-year program consists of the two-year

advanced course offered to students with previous mili-

tary experience, and those who have successfully

completed the four-week ROTC Leaders Training

Course. Basic course students incur no obligation for

service in the Army as a result of taking these courses.

Basic Course. The basic course, normally taken in the

freshman and sophomore years, provides training and

instruction in leadership, public speaking, and basic mil-

itary subjects, such as the Army’s role and organizational

structure, history and philosophy of the Army, basic tac-

tics, land navigation, first aid, group dynamics, and

leadership traits and characteristics. Basic course students

incur no military obligation.

Advanced Course. The advanced course is normally

taken in the junior and senior years. The instruction

includes management, military skills, advanced leader-

ship and tactics, logistics, administration, military law,

ethics, and professionalism, and includes attendance at

the ROTC Leadership Development and Assessment

Course (LDAC). Students receive $450 per month sub-

sistence pay during the junior year and $500 per month

in their senior year.

To enroll in the advanced course, an applicant completes

either the basic course or the four-week Leaders Training

Course; or has received basic course credit for previous

military experience; or is a nursing student and is accept-

ed for enrollment by the university and the Department

of Military Science.

Uniforms and Equipment. All uniforms and equipment

needed by the student for military science courses are

supplied by the department. Students are charged only

for those items not returned when they leave the pro-

gram.

Transfers. Qualified students transferring from another

institution may enter the ROTC program at the appro-

346 Lehigh University Course Catalog 2009-2010

priate level and year, provided they have received the

necessary credits, the recommendation of their former

professor of military science (if applicable), and the

approval of the university.

Obligation After Graduation. Upon graduation a stu-

dent will receive a commission as a Second Lieutenant in

either the Active Army or the Reserve Forces. If offered

active duty, scholarship students serve four years while

non-scholarship students serve three. If offered reserve

duty, students normally serve six to eight years in a

Reserve or National Guard unit.

Graduate Studies. ROTC graduates may request to delay

their active service to pursue a full-time course of

instruction leading to an advanced degree. Delay does

not lengthen the active service obligation unless the

degree is obtained at government expense. The three

major areas of concentration are medical school, law

school, and all other categories.

Course Credit. Students in the College of Arts and

Sciences and the College of Business and Economics may

substitute military science advanced credits for six hours of

electives. In the College of Engineering and Applied

Science, six credits of advanced ROTC work are permissi-

ble within the normal program of each student,

irrespective of curriculum. For curricula that include more

than six hours of personal electives in the junior and sen-

ior years, inclusion of the more than six hours of ROTC

credit with normal programs can be effected only with the

approval of academic advisers. All military science credits,

including those in the basic course, apply toward the stu-

dent’s overall cumulative grade point average.

Career Opportunities

Individuals are commissioned as officers in the United

States Army after completion of the ROTC program

including LDAC, and the completion of their bachelors

degree requirements. They then qualify in branches (spe-

cialties) such as the Corps of Engineers, Infantry, Armor,

Aviation, Field Artillery, Air Defense Artillery, Signal

Corps, Military Intelligence, Chemical Corps, Ordnance

Corps, Finance, Transportation, Military Police, Adjutant

General, Quartermaster, Medical Service Corps, or

Nursing. Officers work as leaders/managers, specialists, or

combinations of the two depending on the assignment.

Programs and Opportunities

ROTC Scholarship Program

This program is designed to offer financial assistance to

outstanding young men and women entering the ROTC

program who are interested in an Army career. Scholar-

ships provide full annual tuition, a textbook and supplies

allowance, and laboratory fees; in addition to pay up to

$500 per month for the period the scholarship is in

effect. Three-year and two-year scholarships are available

to outstanding cadets who are currently enrolled in the

ROTC program and are completing their freshman or

sophomore year of college. This program is also open to

all qualified students who are not currently enrolled in

Army ROTC.

Four-year scholarships are open to all students entering

ROTC as freshmen. Applications for scholarship must be

made to Headquarters, U.S. Army Cadet Command,

Fort Monroe, VA by July 15th prior to the high school

senior year for early selection, but no later than

November 15th for normal application. Applications

may be obtained by calling 1-800-USA-ROTC.

Application booklets are also available from most high

school guidance offices, or may be obtained from the

military science department.

Two-Year Program

Students who want to enroll in ROTC after their sopho-

more year may apply. Applicants must successfully

complete a four-week Leaders Training Course (LTC)

and have two years of undergraduate or graduate studies

remaining. The student is paid for the four-week

encampment and receives transportation costs to and

from the camp. Additional scholarships are available at

this camp.

Physical Facilities

Army ROTC uses areas on and adjacent to the university

campus to conduct field training. These locations are

excellent for most outdoor activities such as orienteering,

patrolling, and survival training. Fort Indiantown Gap

Military Reservation, located east of Harrisburg, Pa., and

Fort Dix, NJ, located east of Philadelphia, Pa., are used

for field training exercises and weapons familiarization

during the two annual weekend field exercises. Gettys-

burg National Park is also visited each year.

Off-campus U.S. Army Training Schools

Cadets may be selected to attend the following U.S.

Army Schools: Airborne School (Fort Benning, Georgia),

Air Assault School (Fort Campbell, Kentucky), Moun-

tain Warfare School (Ethan Allen Training Center,

Vermont), and Northern Warfare School (Fort Greely,

Alaska). This off-campus program is fully funded by the

U.S. Army. Many other installations throughout the

world may be visited through the Cadet Troop Leader

Training program. Nursing students may choose to

attend the Nurse Summer Training Program at Army

hospitals located throughout the United States.

Minor in Military Science

A minor in military science is available in the College of

Arts and Sciences. A minor in military science consists of

a minimum of 28 credit hours beyond the basic Military

Science course and is designed to provide the student

with an academic foundation necessary to support con-

tinued intellectual growth and stimulate future inquiry

in the realm of civil military affairs and military science.

Credit hours required are distributed as follows:

Military Science (13)

MIL 101 Adaptive Team Leadership I (3)

MIL102 Adaptive Team Leadership II (3)

MIL 113 Developing Adaptive Leaders (3)

MIL 114 Leadership in a Complex World (3)

HIST 110 American Military History (3)

International Relations (3-4))

International Relations

Political Science

Written Communications (3)

(Select one course from one of the following categories)

Creative Writing

Scientific Writing

Writing for Mass Communications

English Composition

Modern Languages and Literatures 347

Human Behavior (3)

(Select one course from one of the following categories)

General Psychology

Sociology

Anthropology

Ethics

Computer Literacy (3)

Commissioning Requirements

Individuals must complete either the two- or four-year

programs, attend LDAC, receive a college degree, have a

cumulative GPA of 2.0, and complete all professional

military education requirements to become commis-

sioned officers in the United States Army.

Course Descriptions

Leadership Laboratory is conducted for all students on

three Saturdays or Sundays per semester. The Leadership

Laboratory provides students the opportunity to demon-

strate an understanding of the leadership process and

develop fundamental military skills.

Instruction at several levels on a variety of subjects with

military application provides the context within which

students are furnished opportunities to both teach and

lead in a group setting. Responsibility is expanded as the

student progresses through the program. In the senior

year, the students assume the responsibility for the plan-

ning, preparation and conduct of the laboratory.

Leadership Laboratory is mandatory for all students

enrolled in military science courses.

MIL 15. Foundation of Officership (MS101) (1)

fall

The American Army as an institution, its roots, history,

customs and traditions and philosophy of leadership.

Emphasis on development and role of a professional offi-

cer corps. Includes leadership laboratory.

MIL 16. Basic Leadership (MS102) (1) spring

Role of individual and leader within the group, leader-

ship skills and characteristics. Emphasis on problem

solving and application. Includes laboratory and FTX.

MIL 23. Individual Leadership

Studies (MS201) (2) fall

Maps as tools in basic terrain analysis and as navigational

aids and introduction to small unit tactics. Emphasis on

application and field exercises at individual and small

group levels. Includes leadership laboratory and FTX.

MIL 24. Leadership and Teamwork (MS202) (2)

spring

Contemporary theories, traits and principles and small

unit tactics development. Leadership philosophies, com-

munications, leader-follower relationships, and

leadership problem-solving. Leadership simulations.

Includes leadership laboratory and FTX.

MIL 101. Adaptive Team Leadership I (MS

301) (3) fall

Essential junior officer skills: advanced land navigation,

principles of war, small unit tactical planning, tactics and

techniques of the soldier, team leading techniques, oral

communications and trainer skills. Emphasizes applica-

tion and field experience. Includes leadership laboratory

and FTX. Prerequisite: permission of department chair.

MIL 102. Adaptive Team Leadership II (MS

302) (3) spring

Critical examination of leadership qualities, traits and

principles with emphasis on military environment. Self,

peer, and instructor leadership evaluation. Advanced mil-

itary skills reinforced. Includes leadership laboratory and

FTX. Prerequisite: permission of department chair.

MIL 113. Developing Adaptive Leaders (MS

401) (3) fall

Role, authority and responsibility of military command-

ers and staff in personnel, logistics and training

management. Staff procedures, problem solving, training

methods and oral and written communications skills

used in military organizations. Includes leadership labo-

ratory and FTX. Prerequisite: permission of department

chair.

MIL 114. Leadership in a Complex World (MS

402) (3) spring

Development of the Profession of Arms, its fundamental

values and institutions. Ethical responsibilities of military

professionals in contemporary American society. Just war

theory, international law of war, and American military

law. Also covered are current topics to assist cadets in

making the transition to the officer corps and service on

active duty or in the reserve forces. Includes leadership

laboratory and FTX. Prerequisite: permission of depart-

ment chair.

Leadership Development and Assessment

Course (LDAC)

This is a five-week training program normally conducted

at Fort Lewis, WA. Prerequisites are completion of the

basic military science courses or their equivalent and MS

101 and 102. The summer camp experience, in coordi-

nation with respective engineering curricula, may be

used to fulfill the industrial employment requirements of

the engineering courses, CE 100, IE 100, and MAT 100

Modern Languages and

Literatures

Professors. Marie Hélène Chabut, Ph.D. (U.C., San

Diego), Chair, French; Constance Cook, Ph.D.

(Berkeley), Chinese; David W. Pankenier, Ph.D.

(Stanford), Chinese.

Associate Professors. Marie-Sophie Armstrong, Ph.D.

(Oregon), French; Kiri Lee, Ph.D. (Harvard), Japanese;

Linda S. Lefkowitz, Ph.D. (Princeton), Spanish; Mary A.

Nicholas, Ph.D. (Pennsylvania), Russian; Miren Edurne

Portela, Ph.D. (North Carolina-Chapel Hill), Spanish;

Antonio Prieto, Ph.D. (Princeton), Spanish; Vera S.

Stegmann, Ph.D. (Indiana), German.

Assistant Professor. Matthew Bush, Ph.D. (Colorado-

Boulder), Spanish.

Knowledge of other languages opens the door to other

cultures, traditions, and perspectives on the world, and

promotes deeper insight into one’s own language and

culture. Proficiency in modern languages is indispensable

in a broad range of professions such as journalism, gov-

ernment, international affairs, law, the armed forces, and

business. A bachelor of arts degree with a major in lan-

guages provides excellent preparation for professional

careers in law, business, and the media. Language study

is required for graduate study in many disciplines, as well

348 Lehigh University Course Catalog 2009-2010

as for research in science and technology. International

experience is personally enriching and enhances career

prospects.

Languages offered

Lehigh offers Arabic, Mandarin Chinese, French,

German, Hebrew, Japanese, Russian, and Spanish.

Courses include oral, reading, and writing skills, litera-

ture, film, culture, civilization, and professional areas

such as business and health careers. A number of litera-

ture and culture courses are given in English, but most

offerings stress classroom use of the target language.

Facilities include an International Multimedia Resource

Center (IMRC). Within the IMRC in Maginnes Hall are

a state-of-the-art multimedia computer lab (Maginnes

470) dedicated primarily to foreign language multimedia

and World Wide Web applications and the World View

Room (Maginnes 490).

Language requirements

The Global Studies major, the Joint IR/MLL major, the

European Studies major, as well as the honors major in

international relations require language study. The col-

lege scholar program in the College of Arts and Sciences,

the major in Asian Studies, the minors in Latin

American Studies, and Asian Studies require language

study. Students taking the B.A. in international relations

are expected to study a language. Some doctoral pro-

grams also require competence in a language other than

English, usually assessed by the Department of Modern

Languages and Literatures.

Advising

Because of the sequential nature of language study and

the variety of specializations available, the department

pays special attention to student advising. Students

whose experience, skills, and placement scores (Advanced

Placement or College Board Achievement Test) do not

give them a clear indication of their level of placement

should consult with their instructor or the department

chair. Faculty members responsible for more advanced

advising are currently as follows: Asian studies major and

minor, Cook; Chinese minor, Pankenier; French major,

Chabut; French minor, Armstrong; German major and

minor, Stegmann; Russian minor, Nicholas; Spanish

major, Prieto; Spanish minor, Lefkowitz.

Major programs

The department offers major programs in Asian Studies,

French, German, and Spanish. The candidate for the

major is expected to demonstrate adequate written and

oral command of the language, as well as knowledge of

its literature and culture. A period of study abroad is

strongly recommended.

Double majors and arts-engineering majors including a

language component are well-received by employers.

Studies in the two areas are carefully coordinated by

major advisers.

Requirements for the major in French, German,

Spanish

A minimum of 32 credit hours is required beyond Inter-

mediate II, chosen from Groups A and B below:

Group A: one to four required courses (variable, depend-

ing on language major).

Group B: four to seven electives chosen from 100-300

level courses with emphasis on 300-level courses.

For specific course requirements, see each language

major adviser.

Language students may count one MLL course taught in

English toward the major in French, German, and

Spanish.

Requirements for the departmental honors major

Same as for the major plus eight additional hours of

advanced courses at the 300 level, dissertation or com-

prehensive examination (written or oral), and a 3.20

average in the major.

Joint IR/MLL Major

Program directors. Rajan Menon, Ph.D. (Illinois),

Monroe J. Rathbone Professor; Marie-Hélène Chabut,

Ph.D. (U.C., San Diego), Professor of French.

The multidisciplinary Joint IR/MLL Major is offered

jointly by the Department of International Relations

(IR) and the Department of Modern Languages and

Literatures (MLL). The program, which offers a Bachelor

of Arts, incorporates courses from both IR and MLL, as

well as electives from a broad cross-section of other

departments, for a challenging program that requires

overseas study, language facility, and undergraduate

research.

The Joint IR/MLL Major recognizes that Lehigh gradu-

ates must be adequately prepared to play an active role in

the world of the 21

century. For that, they will need an

acute understanding of essential issues of global politics,

broad linguistic and cultural skills, significant overseas

experience, and both intellectual and cultural sophistica-

tion. The Joint IR/MLL Major meets those requirements

with courses in economics, international relations, lan-

guage, and culture. Extended study abroad and

undergraduate research in more than one language are

also required. The program will help students develop a

deeper and richer understanding of cultural, linguistic,

and political diversity around the world.

The program requires a total of 16 courses for 60-64

credits. At least one semester of study abroad in an

approved Lehigh program is required, as is undergradu-

ate research that uses sources in a least one language

other than English. Each student will have two major

advisors, one each from IR and MLL.

Required courses (50-52 credits) as follows:

6 courses in International Relations (24 credits), as

follows:

IR 10

IR 125

IR 105

Two IR advanced courses number 300-387 or 393.

ECO 1

6 courses in Modern Languages and Literatures (22-24

credits), as follows:

Four courses (16 credits) in one language, either Arabic,

Chinese, Hebrew, Japanese, or Russian; French (above

the level of French 2), German (above the level of

German 2), or Spanish (above the level of Spanish 2)

Two culture courses (6-8 credits) from an approved list

or in consultation with the MLL advisor:

Modern Languages and Literatures 349

1 independent study (4 credits). The course will include

original research in at least one foreign language.

Study abroad. 1 semester or more in an approved Lehigh

program.

Electives (10-12 credits), as follows:

3 electives from an approved list, including courses from

the departments of Sociology and Anthropology,

Economics, English, International Relations, Journalism,

Modern Languages and Literatures, Political Science,

History, Religion, and/or programs in Africana Studies,

Asian Studies, Global Citizenship, Latin American

Studies, Sociology and Social Psychology, Science,

Technology and Society, Women’s Studies, or other

courses as approved by IR and MLL advisors. (Courses

must be chosen from at least two departments.)

Minor programs

The department offers minor programs in Asian Studies,

Chinese, French, German, International

Communication, International Film, Japanese, Latin

American Studies, Russian, and Spanish and coordinates

these studies with a student’s major requirements in any

college.

Requirements for the Minor

French, German, Spanish: Sixteen credit hours are

required above Intermediate II; one or two courses at the

200 level, one or two courses at the 300 level.

Chinese, Japanese, Russian: A minimum of 16 credit

hours.

See end of department section for International

Communication and International Film.

A maximum of 8 credits may be transferred for the minor.

Related programs

These are available in Asian Studies, European Studies,

Global Studies, Jewish Studies, Latin American Studies,

and Women’s Studies. Students are urged to take elective

courses on related subjects, either within or outside the

department, as approved by their adviser.

Preliminary Courses

These may be replaced by other courses when a student

qualifies for advanced standing.

Elementary I (4) Intermediate I (4)

Elementary II (4) Intermediate II (4)

Advanced courses

Except where otherwise noted, 200- or 300-level courses

are open to students having completed eight credit hours

beyond Intermediate II. Exceptions require the consent

of the instructor.

Language of instruction

All courses are taught in the target language except MLL

courses listed under “International Cultures and

Literatures Taught in English.” Students thereby become

accustomed to considering the language as an active

means of communication and not solely as an object of

study.

Courses in English

The department offers elective courses in English on lit-

erary, cultural, and social subjects listed under

“International Culture and Literature Taught in English”.

These courses may, in most cases, be taken to fulfill pre-

liminary distribution requirements. One of these courses

may be included in the major.

Study Abroad Awards

The department encourages students of languages to

spend a summer, a semester, or a full year on an

approved program of study abroad. Exchange agreements

with partner institutions are continually being devel-

oped. The department offers a limited number of travel

scholarships for study abroad to qualified students.

Applications should be submitted by the first week of

November for the spring and summer semesters and by

the first week of April for summer and fall. Applications

for Study Abroad in Asia are also reviewed by the Asian

Studies faculty when funds are available. For credit,

transfer students must consult in advance with their

major adviser, language adviser, other appropriate depart-

ments, the Office of International Education, and when

appropriate, the Office of Financial Aid.

Lehigh offers summer programs through the Lehigh in

Shanghai Internship Program. The Lehigh Valley

Association of Independent Colleges (LVAIC) offers pro-

grams in Bonn (Germany), Cuernavaca (Mexico), and

Seville (Spain) for eight credits each. A faculty member

acting as program director accompanies the students.

Courses are taught at intermediate and advanced levels

by qualified instructors from host institutions. Summer

programs sponsored by the Lehigh-LVAIC Center for

Jewish Studies include Hebrew in Israel.

Credits are fully transferable under normal LVAIC cross-

registration procedures. Interested students should

consult with the Department of Modern Languages and

Literatures, Maginnes Hall.

These courses are offered by Lehigh or under the cooper-

ation agreement with the Lehigh Valley Association of

Independent Colleges. Summer or semester study abroad

at approved programs may be incorporated into language

majors and minors with the permission of the appropri-

ate advisor to a maximum of 16 credits toward the major

and eight credits toward the minor.

CHIN, FREN, GERM, JPNS, RUSS, SPAN 91.

Language and Culture Abroad I (1-8)

Intensive study of conversation in the language of the

country; reading, development of writing skills and

selected aspects of the culture. (HU)

CHIN, FREN, GERM, JPNS, RUSS, SPAN 191.

Language and Culture Abroad II (1-8)

Intensive study of conversation in the language of the

country; rapid review of basic grammar, the reading and

analysis of moderately difficult texts, development of

rudimentary writing skills, supplemented study of select-

ed aspects of contemporary civilization. Prerequisites:

consent of chair and proficiency examination in the tar-

get country. (HU)

CHIN, FREN, GERM, JPNS, RUSS, SPAN 291.

Language and Culture Abroad III (1-8)

Intensive practice of speaking and writing in the lan-

guage of the country aimed at providing the student

with extensive proficiency of expression and the ability

to discriminate linguistic usage. Idiomatic expressions

and an introduction to stylistics. Reading and analysis of

more difficult texts, supplemented by in-depth study of

selected aspects of contemporary civilization.

350 Lehigh University Course Catalog 2009-2010

Prerequisites: consent of chair and proficiency examina-

tion in the target country. (HU)

No course under 100 level may be retaken for credit

once a higher course has been passed.

International Cultures and Literatures Taught in

English

These courses on international cultures and comparative

topics carry no prerequisites; knowledge of the language

is not required.

Language majors may count one MLL course taught in

English for credit toward a major requirement. Interested

students should consult their language major advisers.

For course descriptions, see under each language area

below.

MLL 006. (GCP 006, GS 006) Globalization and

Cultures (3)

This course is a reflection on the processes of globaliza-

tion and their consequences, both good and bad, on the

world’s societies and on our concepts of culture and

identity. It provides a multidisciplinary examination of

what cultures gain and lose from their interaction with

the rest of the world and what it means to be a citizen of

a globalized yet diverse world. (HU/GC)

MLL 023. Lehigh in Russia (1-8)

A summer program in Russia, taught in English. (HU)

MLL 027. Russian Classics (4)

Russian classics in translation. May be repeated for cred-

it. (HU)

MLL 051. Contemporary Hispanic-American

Literature (4)

Reading and discussion of distinguished Latin American

writers: Borges, García Márquez, Cortázar, and Vargas

Llosa. (HU)

MLL 053. This Hispanic World and its Culture (4)

Characteristics and values of the people of Spain and

Latin America in literary works and other material.

Hispanic cultural contributions to Western civilization.

(HU)

MLL 068. (ASIA 068) Japanese Language: Past

and Present (4)

Historical and contemporary aspects of the Japanese lan-

guage, including the origins of Japanese in relation to

Korean, the influence of Chinese, syntactic features

which reflect the hierarchical character of Japanese socie-

ty, differences in female and male speech, and use of

foreign loan words. Prerequisite JPNS 001. (HU)

MLL 073. (ASIA 073, GCP 073 WS 073) Film,

Fiction, and Gender in Modern China (4)

Study of the struggle for an individual “modern” entity

out of traditionally defined roles for men and women as

depicted by Chinese writers and filmmakers. Class, texts,

and films in English. Students interested in setting up a

corollary Chinese language component for credit as Chin

251, may discuss this possibility with the professor.

(HU)

MLL 074. (ASIA 074) Chinese Cultural

Program (1-8)

A summer program in China, taught in English. (HU)

MLL 075. (ASIA 075, HIST 075) Chinese

Civilization (4)

The development of traditional Chinese thought, beliefs,

technology, and institutions from a historical perspective,

from earliest times to China’s encounter with the West.

(H/S)

MLL 076. (ASIA 076, HIST 076) Understanding

Contemporary China (4)

An overview of recent history, politics, economy, reli-

gion, problems of modernization, popular culture.

Contemporary Chinese society viewed against the back-

drop of tradition and the tumultuous history of

twentieth-century China. (SS)

MLL 078. (ASIA 078) Asian American Studies (4)

A survey of issues concerning Asians living in the United

States from the perspectives of history, language, litera-

ture, and film. (HU)

MLL 100. Introduction to International Film (4)

An introduction to international film traditions and the-

ory. We look at the importance of cinema as both art

and entertainment and consider the social, political, and

economic role of film in national and global contexts.

(HU)

MLL 124. Negotiating Across Cultures (4)

The world is shrinking! Yet as geographical distances

between peoples collapse, our misunderstandings seem to

expand. Explore difference, erode barriers, and learn tac-

tics for successfully bridging cultural gaps. Learn the

ins-and-outs of cross-cultural communication from spe-

cialists in all walks of life and from a diverse array of

sources. (H/S)

MLL 125. (ASIA 125) Immortal Images:

Traditional Chinese Literature in Translation (4)

Explore age-old themes in literature as diverse as pre-

modern novels, ghost stories, poetry, divination manuals,

and medical texts. Students interested in setting up a

corollary Chinese language component for credit as

CHIN 251, may discuss this with the professor. (HU)

MLL 127. (ASIA 127, GCP 127) ORIENTations:

Approaches to Modern Asia (4)

An introduction to East, Southeast, and South Asia at

the beginning of the 21

century. How is globalization

transforming Asian societies? How are Asians represented

(or misrepresented) in the West? How do Asian peoples

view Western influences on them? What distinguishes

our perspectives on politics, individual liberty, civic

responsibility, religious faith and practice, work, etc?

How is the trend toward globalization in the coming

“Asian Century” likely to be affected by the growing

assertiveness of nations like China and India? (H/S)

MLL 140. (ANTH 140, COGS 140, PSYC 140)

Introduction to Linguistics (4)

Relationship between language and mind; formal proper-

ties of language; language and society; how languages

change over time. (SS)

MLL 165. (ASIA 165, GCP 165) Love and

Revolution in Shanghai (4)

Project-based course examines human relationships and

political-economic changes in Shanghai through the lens

of literature, film, and a selection of other readings.

Discussion of conflicts between and influences of pre-

communist, communist, and capitalist systems as played

out in the Shanghai area. Written research papers on

Modern Languages and Literatures 351

aspects of historical or modern Shanghai, and class pre-

sentations. Blackboard and in-class discussions of

assigned readings and films. (HU)

MLL 211. (GERM 211, THTR 211) German

Drama (4)

Drama as a literary genre; plays from various periods of

German literature. (HU)

MLL 218. (GERM 218, THTR 218) Goethe’s

“Faust” (4)

Study of Goethe’s play with an introduction to the Faust

tradition and Faustian themes in modern literature.

(HU)

MLL 231. (GERM 231, GCP 231) New German

Cinema (4)

Viewing, discussion, and written analysis of selected

German films. (HU)

MLL 260. (GERM 260, GCP 260) Multicultural

Germany (4)

A look at Germany from the perspective of its “others”-

the immigrants. Literary and cultural texts, and films on

ethnic diversity and integration. (HU)

MLL 303. (GERM 303, GCP 303, WS 303)

GRIMMS’ FAIRY TALES: FOLKLORE, FEMI-

NISM, FILM (4)

This intercultural history of the Grimms’ fairy tales

investigates how folktale types and gender stereotypes

developed and became models for children and adults.

The course covers the literary fairy tale in Germany as

well as Europe and America. Versions of “Little Red

Riding Hood”, “Cinderella”, or “Sleeping Beauty” exist

not only in the Grimms’ collection but in films and

many forms of world literature. Modern authors have

rewritten fairy tales in feminist ways, promoting social

change. Taught in English. German language students

may receive a German component. Stegmann (HU)

MLL 319. (4). Second Language

Acquisition (SLA) Theory

This course will introduce theories of second-language

acquisition of English as a second language as well as

other languages. Various theories of communication and

language acquisition will be covered. Prerequisite: con-

sent of instructor. (HU)

MLL 321. (GCP 321, GS 321) (4) Intercultural

Communication

Language is ambiguous by nature and discourse is inter-

preted in cultural and linguistic contexts. This course

covers different cultural and linguistic strategies individ-

uals use to communicate with each other, essential

concepts for interacting with individuals from other cul-

tural and linguistic backgrounds, and different strategies

of communication as defined by specific cultures.

Covering the theory and practice of intercultural interac-

tion, this course examines assumptions about language

and culture, and includes practical advice to help stu-

dents develop the cultural sensitivity essential for

communication today. (HU)

MLL 403. (WS 403) GRIMMS’ FAIRY TALES:

FOLKLORE, FEMINISM, FILM (3)

This intercultural history of the Grimms’ fairy tales

investigates how folktale types and gender stereotypes

developed and became models for children and adults.

The course covers the literary fairy tale in Germany as

well as Europe and America. Versions of “Little Red

Riding Hood”, “Cinderella”, or “Sleeping Beauty” exist

not only in the Grimms’ collection but in films and

many forms of world literature. Modern authors have

rewritten fairy tales in feminist ways, promoting social

change. Taught in English. German language students

may receive a German component. Stegmann (HU)

MLL 419. Second Language Acquisition (SLA)

Theory (3)

This course will introduce theories of second-language

acquisition of English as a second language as well as

other languages. Various theories of communication and

language acquisition will be covered. Prerequisite: con-

sent of instructor. (HU/ED)

MLL 421. Intercultural Communication (3)

Language is ambiguous by nature and discourse is inter-

preted in cultural and linguistic contexts. This course

covers different cultural and linguistic strategies individ-

uals use to communicate with each other, essential

concepts for interacting with individuals from other cul-

tural and linguistic backgrounds, and different strategies

of communication as defined by specific cultures.

Covering the theory and practice of intercultural interac-

tion, this course examines assumptions about language

and culture, and includes practical advice to help stu-

dents develop the cultural sensitivity essential for

communication today. (HU/ED)

Arabic

Undergraduate Courses

ARAB 001. Elementary Arabic I (4)

The general objective of this course is to familiarize stu-

dents with the sounds and the letters of Arabic, along

with basic communication skills. Students are required

to use Arabic in class discussion. Attendance and class

participation are necessary to achieve the above-stated

goals. Upon completion of this course, students will be

able to read, write, speak, and understand Arabic at the

elementary level. (HU)

ARAB 002. Elementary Arabic II (4)

Continuation of ARAB 001. Emphasis on communica-

tive ability in oral and writing skills and use of the

language. Students develop ability to communicate with

native speakers on a variety of every-day topics; intro-

ductions, descriptions of people and things,

disseminating information, stating preferences, describ-

ing locations, etc. Students will be able to read, write,

speak, and understand authentic materials on familiar

topics, as well as recognize and understand various gram-

matical rules and their application in context, and

expand their cultural awareness. Prerequisite: ARAB 001

or equivalent. (HU)

ARAB 011. Intermediate Arabic I (4)

Development of communication skills and cultural

awareness through reading materials and viewing films.

Grammar is presented in context. Emphasis on commu-

nicative ability in oral and writing skills, and on the use

and cultural aspects of the language through authentic

materials. Students learn how to communicate effectively

and appropriately while satisfying their intellectual

curiosity to learn about the civilization and culture, cur-

rent as well as historical dimensions. Prerequisite: ARAB

002 or equivalent. (HU)

352 Lehigh University Course Catalog 2009-2010

ARAB 012. Intermediate Arabic II (4)

Enhancement of communication skills, proficiency, com-

petence, and use of the language. Students will enhance

and develop their ability to understand the spoken word

and to converse on a variety of topics; discuss, narrate,

and read authentic materials that cover a variety of issues

and topics; e.g., educational, cultural, and factual; write

short paragraphs; recognize and use grammatical rules in

context; and expand cultural awareness through class dis-

cussion and reading materials. Frequently taught in the

target language to emphasize and reinforce classroom

use. Students will be able to read, write, speak, and

understand Arabic at the upper intermediate level.

Prerequisite: ARAB 011 or equivalent. (HU)

ARAB 190. Arabic Special Topics I (1-4)

Develop communication skills, emphasize and reinforce

classroom use. Translate articles from newspapers, write

short stories, and converse on a variety of topics.

Directed study, reading, and writing. Periodic consulta-

tions and reports. Prerequisite: ARAB 012 or equivalent.

(HU)

ARAB 191. Arabic Special Topics II (1-4)

Continuation of ARAB 190. Literary and linguistic top-

ics not covered in regular classes. Prerequisite: ARAB

190 or equivalent. (HU)

Chinese

Undergraduate Courses in Chinese

CHIN 001. Beginning Chinese Reading and

Writing I (2)

Introduction to the Chinese writing system and begin-

ning character acquisition; reading practice with pinyin

transcription system. (Fall) Non-heritage speakers are

strongly encouraged to take the Spoken course of the

same level during the same semester as this Reading and

Writing course or permission of the instructor. Staff.

(HU)

CHIN 002. Beginning Chinese Reading and

Writing II (2)

Continuation of CHIN 001: continued character acqui-

sition, reading practice in pinyin and simple character

texts. (Spring) Non-heritage speakers are strongly

encouraged to take the Spoken course of the same level

during the same semester as this Reading and Writing

course. Prerequisite: CHIN 001 or permission of the

instructor. Staff (HU)

CHIN 003. Beginning Spoken Chinese I (2)

Introduction to Mandarin Chinese pronunciation, the

pinyin transcription system, and modern colloquial

Chinese; emphasis on oral proficiency. Not open to

native speakers. (Fall) Students are strongly encouraged

to take Reading and Writing course of the same level

during the same semester as this Spoken course.

Prerequisite: CHIN 002 or permission of the instructor

CHIN 004. Beginning Spoken Chinese II (2)

Continuation of CHIN 003: further practice with text-

based dialogues in modern colloquial Chinese; emphasis

on oral proficiency. Not open to native speakers.

(Spring) Students are strongly encouraged to take

Reading and Writing course of the same level during the

same semester as this Spoken course. Prerequisite: CHIN

003 or permission of the instructor. Staff (HU)

CHIN 011. Intermediate Chinese Reading and

Writing I (2)

Continued focus on vocabulary/character acquisition

and text-based reading and writing exercises using

Chinese characters. (Fall) Non-heritage speakers are

strongly encouraged to take the Spoken course of the

same level during the same semester as this Reading and

Writing course. Prerequisite: CHIN 002 or permission

of the instructor. Staff (HU)

CHIN 012. Intermediate Chinese Reading and

Writing II (2)

Continuation of CHIN 011: vocabulary/character acqui-

sition and text-based reading and writing exercises using

Chinese characters. (Spring). Non-heritage speakers are

strongly encouraged to take the Spoken course of the

same level during the same semester as this Reading and

Writing course. Prerequisite: CHIN 011 or permission

of the instructor. Staff (HU)

CHIN 013. Intermediate Spoken Chinese I (2)

Further development of communicative skills in Chinese

using situational dialogues and class discussion; emphasis

on oral proficiency. Not open to native speakers. (Fall)

Students are strongly encouraged to take Reading and

Writing course of the same level during the same semes-

ter as this Spoken course. Prerequisite: CHIN 004 or

permission of the instructor. Staff. (HU)

CHIN 014. Intermediate Spoken Chinese II (2)

Continuation of CHIN 013: further development of

communicative skills in Chinese using situational dia-

logues and class discussion; emphasis on oral proficiency.

Not open to native speakers. (Fall) Students are strongly

encouraged to take Reading and Writing course of the

same level during the same semester as this Spoken

course. Prerequisite: CHIN 013, or permission of the

instructor. Staff. (HU)

CHIN 111. Advanced Chinese Reading & Writing

I (2)

Reading, translation, and writing practice using text-

based exercises, short stories, essays, and other selected

materials. (Fall) Non-heritage speakers are strongly

encouraged to take the Spoken course of the same level

during the same semester as this Reading and Writing

course. Prerequisite: CHIN 011 or permission of the

instructor. Staff. (HU)

CHIN 112. Advanced Chinese Reading & Writing

II (2)

Continuation of CHIN 111: reading, translation, writ-

ing exercises using text-based exercises, short stories,

essays, and other selected materials. (Spring) Non-her-

itage speakers are strongly encouraged to take the

Spoken course of the same level during the same semes-

ter as this Reading and Writing course. Prerequisite:

CHIN 111 or permission of the instructor. Staff. (HU)

CHIN 113. Advanced Spoken Chinese I (2)

Topical discussions and oral presentations in Chinese.

(Fall) Students are strongly encouraged to take Reading

and Writing course of the same level during the same

semester as this Spoken course. Prerequisite: CHIN 014

or permission of the instructor. Staff. (HU)

CHIN 114. Advanced Spoken Chinese II (2)

Continuation of CHIN 113: topical discussions and oral

presentations in Chinese. (Fall) Students are strongly

encouraged to take Reading and Writing course of the

Modern Languages and Literatures 353

same level during the same semester as this Spoken

course. Prerequisite: CHIN 113 or permission of the

instructor. Staff. (HU)

CHIN 251. Chinese Special Topics (1-4)

Literary and linguistics topics not covered in regular

courses. May be repeated for credit. Prerequisite: consent

of the instructor. (HU)

CHIN 252. Business Chinese (1-2)

Directed readings on the Chinese business environment

and business terminology. Emphasis on reading compre-

hension and translation. May be repeated for credit.

Prerequisite: CHIN 112, CHIN 114, or permission of

the instructor. Staff. (HU)

CHIN 253. Chinese Fiction (1-2)

Students read modern Chinese short stories or a novel.

Emphasis on reading comprehension and translation.

May be repeated for credit. Prerequisite: CHIN 112,

CHIN 114, or permission of instructor. Staff. (HU)

CHIN 254. Intensive Chinese Conversation (1-2)

Conversational practice based on topical readings. For

advanced speakers only. May be repeated for credit.

Prerequisite: CHIN 112, CHIN 114, or permission of

the instructor. Staff. (HU)

CHIN 255. Newspaper Readings in Chinese (1-2)

Newspaper readings in Chinese. Emphasis on reading

comprehension and translation. May be repeated for

credit. Prerequisite: CHIN 112, CHIN 114, or permis-

sion of the instructor. Staff. (HU)

CHIN 371. Advanced Readings in Chinese (1-4)

Directed study of an author, genre, or period not covered

in regular courses. May be repeated once for credit. Can

be combined with ASIA 371 to include readings in

English. Prerequisite: consent of the instructor. (HU)

Courses Taught in English (see descriptions under

MLL courses)

MLL 073. (ASIA 073, GCP 73, WS 073) Film,

Fiction, and Gender in Modern China (4)

MLL 074. (ASIA 074) Chinese Cultural

Program (1-8)

MLL 075. (ASIA 075, HIST 075) Chinese

Civilization (4)

MLL 076. (ASIA 076, HIST 076) Understanding

Contemporary China (4)

MLL 078. (ASIA 078) Asian-American Studies (4)

MLL 125. (ASIA 125) Immortal Images:

Traditional Chinese Literature in Translation (4)

MLL 127. (ASIA 127, GCP 127) ORIENTations:

Approaches to Modern Asia (4)

MLL 165. (Asia 165, GCP 165) Love and

Revolution in Shanghai (4)

French

Undergraduate Courses in French

FREN 1. Elementary French I (4) fall

Multimedia approach to the study of French.

Introduction to French conversation, grammar, and cul-

ture. (HU)

FREN 2. Elementary French II (4) spring

Continuation of FREN 1. Prerequisite: FREN 001 or

appropriate achievement test score before entrance, or

consent of instructor. (HU)

FREN 11. Intermediate French I (4) fall

Further acquisition of the fundamentals of French con-

versation, writing, and culture. Multimedia approach.

Prerequisite: FREN 002 or appropriate achievement test

score before entrance, or consent of instructor. (HU)

FREN 12. Intermediate French II (4) spring

Continuation of FREN 011. Prerequisite: FREN 011 or

appropriate achievement test score before entrance, or

consent of instructor. (HU)

FREN 143. Advanced Written French (4)

Intensive practice in written French and introduction to

literary criticism. Prerequisite: FREN 012, or achieve-

ment test score of 590, or consent of instructor. (HU)

FREN 144. Advanced Oral French (4)

Emphasis on comprehension and oral performance of

the French language. Student acquires confidence in

speaking French through discussions of current issues,

articles, novels, movies, and other topics. Required for

French majors. Prerequisite: FREN 143 or equivalent.

Staff. (HU)

FREN 252. From Romance to Post-Modernism (4)

Representative works from the Middle Ages to the

Twenty-First Century, including Marie de France,

Flaubert, Baudelaire, and Proust. Prerequisite: FREN

143, 144, or consent of instructor. (HU)

FREN 259. Getting in Touch with Today’s France (4)

How is France defining itself today as a European nation

in a global world? Issues to be explored include: family,

gender, race and religion, the education and social sys-

tems, immigration, and politics. Strongly recommended

for students who plan to study abroad in France.

Prerequisite: FREN 143, 144, or consent of instructor.

(HU)

FREN 271. French Readings (4)

Study of the works of some author or group of authors,

or of a period, or of a literary theme. May be repeated

once for credit. (HU)

FREN 272. French Culture of Business (4)

A course on the fundamentals of business in France. We

will learn about banking, marketing, advertising, the

stock market, and many other aspects of business in

France. We will learn about foreign ventures in France,

such as Disney and McDonald’s. We will learn how to

open a bank account, apply for a job, and what life is

like in a French company. Ideal for someone who wants

to intern or work for an international company or a

company with a French connection. Taught in French.

Prerequisite: FREN 143 or 144 or equivalent.

FREN 281. French Cultural Program (1-6)

A program in a French-speaking country offering formal

language courses and cultural opportunities. (HU)

FREN 311. French Classicism (4)

French classical theater, novel, and criticism, with

emphasis on Corneille, Racine, Moliere, Pascal,

Lafayette, Malherbe, and Boileau. Chabut. (HU)

FREN 313. The Age of Enlightenment (4)

The Philosophes and Encyclopédistes of the eighteenth

354 Lehigh University Course Catalog 2009-2010

century, with emphasis on Voltaire, Rousseau,

Montesquieu, and Diderot. Chabut. (HU)

FREN 316. Nineteenth Century French

Literature (4)

Study of major nineteenth century novelists and poets.

Armstrong. (HU)

FREN 318. (THTR 318) French Drama in the

Twentieth Century (4)

Contemporary French drama with an analysis of its ori-

gins and movements. Armstrong. (HU)

FREN 320. Contemporary French Fiction (4)

Reading and discussion of contemporary works of fiction

(post-1980). Study of how these works fit into the con-

text of French literature and relate more specifically to

major literary currents of the twentieth century.

Armstrong. (HU)

FREN 321. Twentieth-Century French Short

Fiction (4)

Examination, within the framework of short fiction, of

the major literary currents that have made up twentieth-

century literature. Works by Sartre, Camus,

Robbe-Grillet, Le Clézio, Echenoz, Sallenave, Toussaint,

Diebar, Ben Jelloun, and others. Armstrong (HU)

FREN 322. Contemporary French Films (4)

French Films from the late 1950s to the present.

Introduction to cinematograhic language and exploration

of the issues of gender, power, and madness. Films by

Truffaut, J-L Godard, C. Denis, A. Varda, J-J Beineix, E.

Rohmer, and others. Armstrong (HU)

FREN 324. The Outsider in French Fiction (4)

Focus on otherness/difference in French fiction from the

eighteenth to the twentieth century. Reading and discus-

sion of short stories and novels by Graffigny, Diderot,

Maupassant, Gide, Camus, Duras, Beauvoir, Le Clézio

and others. Chabut. (HU)

FREN 327. (WS 327) Women Writing in French (4)

Reading and discussion of works written by women in

French. The emphasis is on 19th- and 20th-century

writers, such as G. Sand, Colette S. de Beauvoir, M.

Duras, and Andrée Chédid. Chabut (HU)

FREN 369. French Readings (4)

Advanced study of an author, period, or theme. Topics

vary. May be repeated once for credit. Prerequisite: con-

sent of instructor. (HU)

FREN 370. French Internship (1-8)

Designed to give advanced qualified students the chance

to acquire field experience and training with selected

firms and governmental agencies in French-speaking

countries. Assigned readings, written reports, and

employer performance evaluations are required.

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. (HU)

FREN 371. French Independent Study (1-8)

Special topics under faculty guidance, including honors

thesis. May be repeated once for credit. Prerequisite:

consent of instructor. (HU)

German

Undergraduate Courses in German

GERM 001. Elementary German I (4)

Fundamentals of German; reading and simple texts; sim-

ple conversation and composition; vocabulary building.

Three class hours plus one laboratory or drill hour each

week. No previous German required. (HU)

GERM 002. Elementary German II (4)

Continuation of GERM 1, including reading of more

advanced texts. Three class hours plus one laboratory or

drill hour each week. Prerequisite: GERM 001 or equiv-

alent. (HU)

GERM 011. Intermediate German I (4)

Review of grammar, composition, reading of intermedi-

ate texts, vocabulary building. Prerequisite: GERM 002,

or four units of entrance German or consent of instruc-

tor. (HU)

GERM 012. Intermediate German II (4)

Continuation of GERM 011. Prerequisite: GERM 011

or consent of instructor; one hour of lab. (HU)

GERM 163. German Civilization and Culture (4)

Cultural, historical, and political evolution of Germany

and German-speaking countries in Europe. Prerequisite:

GERM 012 or equivalent, or consent of instructor.

(HU)

GERM 167. German Conversation and

Composition (4)

Intensive practice in spoken and written German.

Prerequisite: GERM 012 or equivalent, or consent of

instructor. (HU)

GERM 169. Business German (4)

German in business, the professions, international, and

social relations. Letter writing, comprehension of techni-

cal texts, specialized vocabulary, and grammar review.

Prerequisite: GERM 012 or equivalent, or consent of

instructor. (HU)

GERM 181. German Cultural Program (1-8)

Summer program abroad. Formal instruction in the lan-

guage and the culture of a German-speaking country. (HU)

GERM 211. (MLL 211, THTR 211) German

Drama (4)

Drama as a literary genre; plays from various periods of

German literature. (HU)

GERM 218. (MLL 218, THTR 218) Goethe’s

“Faust” (4)

Study of Goethe’s play with an introduction to the Faust

tradition and Faustian themes in modern literature.

(HU)

GERM 231. (GCP 231, MLL 231). New German

Cinema (4)

Viewing, discussion, and written analysis of selected

German films. (HU)

GERM 240. Contemporary Germany (4)

Readings and conversations in German about topics

including the social and natural sciences, technology, the

environment, politics, daily life, and sports. Practice in

spoken and written German. (HU)

GERM 250. German Special Topics (1-4)

Literary and linguistic topics not covered in regular

courses. May be repeated for credit. (HU)

GERM 260. (MLL 260, GCP 260) Multicultural

Germany (4)

A look at Germany from the perspective of its “others”-

the immigrants. Literary and cultural texts, and films on

ethnic diversity and integration. (HU)

Modern Languages and Literatures 355

GERM 267. Advanced German Conversation and

Composition (4)

A continuation of Germ 167. Practice of speaking and

writing skills in German through readings of more com-

plex texts. (HU)

GERM 269. Advanced Professional German (4)

A continuation of Business German with an emphasis on

specific economic issues affecting contemporary

Germany, Switzerland, and Austria. Preparation for the

national exam “Certificate for the Professions” and the

“International Business German Examination”. (HU)

GERM 281. German Cultural Program (1-8)

Study abroad. Formal instruction in German and direct

contact with the people and the culture during at least

one month in a German-speaking country. Prerequisites:

consent of German study abroad adviser. (HU)

GERM 301. Survey of German Literature (4)

An overview of German literary traditions through the

nineteenth century, focusing on the Middle Ages,

Renaissance, Reformation, Baroque, Enlightenment,

Classicism, Romanticism, Realism, and Naturalism.

(HU)

GERM 303. (MLL 303, GCP 303) Grimms’ Fairy

Tales: Folklore, Feminism, Film (4)

This intercultural history of the Grimms’ fairy tales

investigates how folktale types and gender stereotypes

developed and became models for children and adults.

The course covers the literary fairy tale in Germany as

well as Europe and America. Versions of “Little Red

Riding Hood”, “Cinderella”, or “Sleeping Beauty” exist

not only in the Grimms’ collection but in films and

many forms of world literature. Modern authors have

rewritten fairy tales in feminist ways, promoting social

change. Taught in English. German language students

may receive a German component. Stegmann (HU)

GERM 305. Modern German Literature (4)

Topics in German literature of the twentieth and twenty-

first century. (HU)

GERM 320. Berlin: Transformations of a

Metropolis (4)

A literary and cultural history of Berlin from its founda-

tion to the present. After a historical overview, we will

focus on the modern period that covers the Weimar

Republic, the Third Reich, the divided city of the post-

war era, the fall of the wall, and the continuing process

of redefining Berlin’s identity as Germany’s old and new

capital. (HU)

GERM 345. German Short Stories (4)

Readings of short prose texts in German. (HU)

GERM 350. German Special Topics (1-4)

Literary or linguistic topics not covered in regular cours-

es. May be repeated for credit. Prerequisite: consent of

instructor. (HU)

GERM 370. German Internship (1-8)

Designed to give advanced qualified students the chance

to acquire field experience and training with selected

firms and governmental agencies in German-speaking

countries. Assigned readings, written reports, and

employer performance evaluations are required.

Prerequisite: GERM 167 or consent of the instructor.

(HU)

Courses Taught in English (see descriptions under

MLL courses)

MLL 211 (GERM 211, THTR 211). German

Drama (4)

MLL 218. (GERM 218, THTR 218) Goethe’s

“Faust” (4)

MLL 231. (GCP 231, GERM 231). New German

Cinema (4)

MLL 260. (GERM 260, GCP 260) Multicultural

Germany (4)

MLL 303. (GERM 303, GCP 303) Grimms’ Fairy

Tales: Folklore, Feminism, Film (4)

MLL 403. (WS 403) Grimms’ Fairy Tales:

Folklore, Feminism, Film (3)

Hebrew

The department offers courses both separately and in the

context of the Jewish studies minor (Section III).

HEBR 001. Elementary Modern Hebrew I (4) fall

Classroom and laboratory instruction to develop hearing,

speaking, reading, and writing the language. Cultural,

ethnic, and religious dimensions of Israeli society. Tapes,

textural materials, short stories. No previous study of

Hebrew required. (HU)

HEBR 002. Elementary Modern Hebrew II (4)

spring

Continuation of Hebrew I utilizing the audio-lingual

approach. Fundamentals of the language, structure and

sounds; the Hebrew verb; reading and vocalized stories;

written exercises; tapes; short stories. Prerequisite: HEBR

001 or its equivalent. (HU)

HEBR 011. Intermediate Modern Hebrew I (4) fall

Classroom and laboratory instruction to develop funda-

mental patterns of conversation and grammar;

composition, reading of texts, laboratory work and sight

reading; comprehension, speaking, reading and writing

of unvocalized materials. Prerequisite: HEBR 002 or

consent of instructor. (HU)

HEBR 012. Intermediate Modern Hebrew II (4)

spring

Continuation of Hebrew 011. Reading of texts, includ-

ing selected short stories, outside reading and

supplementary material; increased emphasis on oral pres-

entation. Prerequisite: HEBR 011 or consent of

instructor. (HU)

HEBR 151 Hebrew Special Topics I (4)

Literary or linguistic topics not covered in regular cours-

es. May be repeated for credit. Prerequisite: consent of

instructor. Taught in Hebrew.

HEBR 152 Hebrew Special Topics II (4)

Continuation of HEBR 151. Literary or linguistic topics

not covered in regular courses. May be repeated for cred-

it. Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Taught in Hebrew.

Japanese

See Asian Studies major and minor.

JPNS 001. Elementary Japanese I (4) fall

This course introduces the basic grammatical structures

commonly found in daily situations in Japan. All four

aspects of language skills are introduced. Hirangana,

356 Lehigh University Course Catalog 2009-2010

Katakana, and approximately 50 Kanji are introduced.

(HU)

JPNS 002. Elementary Japanese II (4) spring

Continuation of JPNS 001. Approximately 100 Kanji

are introduced. Prerequisite: JPNS 001 or equivalent.

(HU)

JPNS 011. Intermediate Japanese I (4) fall

Continuation of JPNS 002. This course introduces more

complex grammatical structures and develops all four

aspects of language skills. Slightly more emphasis on

reading and writing. Approximately 100 Kanji are intro-

duced. Prerequisite: JPNS 002 or equivalent. (HU)

JPNS 012. Intermediate Japanese II (4) spring

Continuation of JPNS 011. Prerequisite: Japanese 011 or

equivalent. (HU)

JPNS 141. Advanced Japanese I (4) fall

This course emphasizes advanced reading comprehension

on topics related to Japan. Approximately 100 Kanji are

introduced. Prerequisite: JPNS 012 or equivalent. (HU)

JPNS 142. Advanced Japanese II (4) spring

Continuation of JPNS 141. Prerequisite: JPNS 141 or

equivalent. (HU)

JPNS 145. Advanced Japanese Conversation and

Culture I (4)

This course emphasizes oral skills and culture by dis-

cussing topics related to modern Japan. Advanced

writing skills, especially the knowledge of Kanji, are

introduced individually. Prerequisite: JPNS 012 or con-

sent of instructor. (HU)

JPNS 146. Advanced Japanese Conversation and

Culture II (4)

Continuation of JPNS 145. Emphasis on advanced oral

and writing skills, and knowledge of the culture.

Prerequisite: JPNS 145 or consent of instructor. (HU)

JPNS 290. Japanese Special Topics (1-4)

Literary or linguistics topics not covered in regular cours-

es. May be repeated for credit. Prerequisite: consent of

instructor. (HU)

JPNS 291. Advanced Japanese and Culture

Abroad (1-8)

JPNS 390. Japanese Special Topics (1-4)

Courses Taught in English (See descriptions under

MLL courses)

MLL 068. (ASIA 68) Japanese Language: Past and

Present (4)

Russian

RUSS 001. Elementary Russian I (4) fall

Classroom and laboratory, audio, and video introduction

to the fundamentals of conversational and grammatical

patterns; practice in pronunciation, simple conversation,

reading, and writing. (HU)

RUSS 002. Elementary Russian II (4) spring

Continuation of RUSS 001. Prerequisite: RUSS 1 or

equivalent. (HU)

RUSS 011. Intermediate Russian I (4) fall

Classroom and laboratory practice in conversation.

Development of reading and writing skills. Prerequisite:

RUSS 002 or equivalent. (HU)

RUSS 012. Intermediate Russian II (4) spring

Continuation of RUSS 011. Prerequisite: RUSS 002 or

011, or equivalent. (HU)

RUSS 141. Russian Conversation and

Composition I (4) fall

Intensive practice in oral and written Russian and oral

comprehension. Readings and discussions on Russian lit-

erature and culture. Prerequisite: RUSS 012 or

equivalent. (HU)

RUSS 142. Russian Conversation and

Composition II (4) spring

Continuation of RUSS 141. Prerequisite: RUSS 141 or

equivalent. (HU)

RUSS 215. Russian Classics: Russian Literature

with Variable Topic and Credit (1-4)

May be repeated for credit. (HU)

RUSS 231. Russian in the Real World I (4)

Readings and conversations about selected nonliterary

topics including the social and natural sciences, business,

economics, the environment, current political events in

Russia and throughout the former Soviet republics. (HU)

RUSS 232. Russian in the Real World II (4)

A continuation of RUSS 231. (HU)

RUSS 251. Russian Special Topics (1-4) fall

Intensive study of literary or linguistic topics.

Prerequisite: RUSS 142 or equivalent. May be repeated

for credit. Nicholas (HU)

RUSS 252. Russian Special Topics (1-4) spring

Intensive study of literary or linguistic topics.

Prerequisite: RUSS 142 or 251 or equivalent. May be

repeated for credit. Nicholas (HU)

RUSS 370. Russian Internship (1-8)

Designed to give advanced qualified students the chance

to acquire field experience and training with selected

firms and governmental agencies in Russian-speaking

countries. Assigned readings, written reports, and

employer performance evaluations are required.

Prerequisites: RUSS 141 or 142 and approval of faculty

committee on internship. (HU)

RUSS 391. Russian Special Topics (1-4)

Independent study of research under faculty guidance on

a literary, linguistic, or methodological topic. May be

repeated once for credit. May be used to satisfy the doc-

toral language requirement. Prerequisites: consent of

instructor. Nicholas (HU)

Courses Taught in English (see descriptions under

MLL courses)

MLL 023. Lehigh in Russia (1-8)

MLL 027. Russian Classics (4)

Spanish

Undergraduate Courses

SPAN 001. Elementary Spanish I (4)

Basic conversational Spanish illustrating essential gram-

matical principles. Reading of simple texts and writing.

Lab required. (HU)

SPAN 002. Elementary Spanish II (4)

Continuation of SPAN 1. Lab required. Prerequisite:

SPAN 001 or equivalent. (HU)

Modern Languages and Literatures 357

SPAN 011. Intermediate Spanish I (4)

Limited review of elementary grammar concepts and

introduction to more advanced grammar and vocabulary.

Emphasis on discussion, reading, and writing about short

literary works and current topics in the Spanish-speaking

world. Prerequisite: SPAN 002 or equivalent. (HU)

SPAN 012. Intermediate Spanish II (4)

Prerequisite: SPAN 011 or equivalent. (HU)

SPAN 133. Spanish Phonetics and

Pronunciation (4)

Comparison of Spanish and English sounds; descriptions

of Spanish vowels and consonants in their various posi-

tions. Oral practice with special emphasis on accent and

intonation patterns. Prerequisite: SPAN 002. (HU)

SPAN 141. Advanced Spanish Grammar (4)

Intensive review of Spanish grammar with stress on finer

points. Analysis of syntax and style. Improvement of

grammar through composition. Prerequisite: SPAN 012

or equivalent. (HU)

SPAN 142. Advanced Conversational Spanish (4)

Conversational practice stressing the building of vocabu-

lary based on literary texts and topics of general interest.

Designed to stimulate fluent and spontaneous use of

spoken Spanish. Course does not count toward comple-

tion of major. Prerequisite: SPAN 141 or equivalent.

(HU)

SPAN 151. Cultural Evolution of Spain (4)

The historical and cultural evolution of Spain.

Discussion of major literary works in their cultural and

historical contexts. Prerequisite: SPAN 141 or consent of

instructor. Lefkowitz. (HU)

SPAN 152. (LAS 152) Cultural Evolution of Latin

America (4)

The historical and cultural evolution of Latin America.

Discussion of representative literary works in their cul-

tural and historical contexts. Prerequisite: SPAN 141 or

consent of instructor. Prieto. (HU)

SPAN 199. Spanish Special Topics (3-4)

For students who take a course, not offered at Lehigh, at

another institution. May be repeated once for credit.

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. (HU)

SPAN 211. Business Spanish (4)

An introduction to business concepts and vocabulary in

Spanish. Letter writing, specialized professional vocabu-

lary, and review of grammar. Prerequisite: SPAN 141 or

equivalent. (HU)

SPAN 212. Spanish Writing Skills (4)

Improving writing proficiency through practice in com-

position and translation. Prerequisite: SPAN 141 or

equivalent. (HU)

SPAN 213. Approaches to Reading: Cultural

Productions in Spanish (4)

An introduction to the analysis of Latin American and

Spanish cultural productions (mainly literature and

film). Prerequisites: Span 151 or 152, Span 141. (HU)

SPAN 263. (LAS 263) The Spanish American

Short Story (4)

Comparative study of representative works by major

writers such as Quiroga, Borges, and Cortazar, among

others. Prerequisite: SPAN 152 or equivalent. Prieto.

(HU)

SPAN 265. (LAS 265) Spanish and Latin

American Cinema (4)

An introduction to cinema in the Spanish-speaking

world. Oral discussion and written analysis of selected

films. Students view films independently. Prerequisite:

SPAN 141 or equivalent. (HU)

SPAN 270. Communicating in Spanish for

Medical Personnel (4)

For prospective medical personnel communicating with

Spanish-speaking patients. Dialogues, health-care vocab-

ulary. Review of grammar. Prerequisite: SPAN 141 or

equivalent. Lefkowitz. (HU)

SPAN 275. (LAS 275, WS 275) Introduction to

Hispanic Women Writers (4)

The objective of this class is to introduce students to

Hispanic contemporary female authors from Latin

America, Spain, and the United States through the

analysis of all literary genres (novel, short story, poetry,

essay, and drama). This class provides students with a

solid introduction to Hispanic women’s writing from the

last years of the Nineteenth Century to the present, as

well as to feminist literary theory. Portela. (HU)

SPAN 276. (LAS 276) Contemporary Literature of

the Southern Cone (4)

This course focuses on the study of the literature of

Argentina, Chile, and Uruguay from the beginning of

the 20

Century to the present. The class is devoted

both to analyze the works of the most important authors

from the Southern Cone through different literary genres

(drama, novel, short story, and poetry) as well as to study

how these texts represent the cultural and historical par-

ticularities of the region. Special attention is paid to the

unique contexts in which this literature is produced, par-

ticularly the periods of political instability and state

violence and repression. Texts by Jorge Luis Borges,

Pablo Neruda, Manuel Puig, Griselda Gambaro, Cristina

Peri Rossi, and Antonio Skarmeta, among others, are

studied. Also, historical and theoretical readings, films,

and documentaries are used to supplement the literary

texts. Portela.

SPAN 290. Spanish Special Topics (2-4)

Study of an author or theme, or completion of a special

project. Topics may vary. May be repeated once for cred-

it. Prerequisites: SPAN 151 or 152, and consent of

instructor. (HU)

SPAN 303. Don Quixote (4)

Reading and critical analysis of the original text. Focus

on the place of the novel in World Literature and the

universality of the applications of the novel. Prerequisite:

SPAN 151 or equivalent. Lefkowitz. (HU)

SPAN 305. Spanish Literature of the Middle

Ages (4)

Reading and discussion of outstanding works such as El

Cid, El Libro de Buen Amor and La Celestina. Topics

vary. Prerequisite: SPAN 151. Lefkowitz. (HU)

SPAN 308. The Spanish Novel Since 1939 (4)

The evolution of the novel from post civil war to the

present. Reading of Cela, Laforet, Delibes, Rodoreda,

and Marsé, among others. Prerequisite: SPAN 151 or

equivalent. (HU)

358 Lehigh University Course Catalog 2009-2010

SPAN 320. (LAS 320) Literature of the Spanish

Caribbean (4)

Study of representative works with emphasis on Cuba

and Puerto Rico. Writers include Barnet, Carpentier,

Sánchez, and Rodriguez Juliá. Prerequisite: SPAN 152 or

equivalent. Prieto. (HU)

SPAN 321. (LAS 321) Children and Adolescents

in Contemporary Spanish American Literature (4)

Discussion of narrative techniques and the category of

the self as they relate to the images of adolescence and

childhood in works by such authors as Vargas Llosa,

Reinaldo Arenas, José Bianco, Silvina Ocampo.

Prerequisite: SPAN 152 or equivalent. Prieto. (HU)

SPAN 322. (LAS 322) The Short Novel in

Contemporary Spanish American Literature (4)

Reading and discussion of representative works by García

Márquez, Onetti, Rulfo, and Bioy Casares, among oth-

ers. Prerequisite: SPAN 152 or equivalent. Prieto. (HU)

SPAN 323. (LAS 323) Literature and Revolution

in Contemporary Cuba (4)

Study of works written after 1959 by dissident, non-dis-

sident, and exiled authors (Desnoes, Norberto Fuentes,

Benítez Rojo, and Pedro Juan Gutiérrez, among others).

Prerequisite: SPAN 152 or equivalent. Prieto. (HU)

SPAN 325. (LAS 325) Hispanic Literature of the

United States (4)

Discussion of fiction, poetry, drama, and film from the

main groups in the U.S. Hispanic population.

Discussion of Hispanic ethnic identity, bilingualism, and

minority issues. Prerequisite: SPAN 152 or equivalent.

Prieto. (HU)

SPAN 326. (WS 326) Tradition and Resistance:

Women Writers of Latin America (4)

Study of poetry and narrative works by Latin American

women writers. Authors include Rosario Ferré, Rosario

Castellanos, Elena Poniatowska, and Cristina Peri Rossi,

among others. Prerequisite: SPAN 152 or equivalent.

(HU)

SPAN 342. The New Narrative in Spanish

American Literature (4)

Critical evaluation of distinguished works of Spanish

American prose fiction of the 1960’s and 70’s. Readings

by Donoso, Fuentes, García Márquez, and Vargas Llosa,

among others. Prerequisite: SPAN 152 or equivalent.

(HU)

SPAN 345. (LAS 345) Testimonial Writing of the

Hispanic World (4)

This course explores the genre testimonio, which confronts

the official history of the Latin American and Spanish dic-

tatorships and portrays the experiences and struggles of

those who suffered political repression. The course focuses

on the analysis of both literary and visual testimonios from

the Hispanic world, as well as on theoretical issues con-

cerning discourses of truth. Portela. (HU)

SPAN 346. (LAS 346, WS 346) Contemporary

Hispanic Women Writers: The Novelists (4)

This course explores the works of Hispanic women writ-

ers who have been oppositional to hegemonic cultural

politics during the Twentieth Century in Latin America

and Spain. Grounding the readings in their particular

contexts, the class discusses the issues these writers define

as important in their work, the impact of their creations

in both the literary cannon as well as in the politics of

their countries, the use of literature as a weapon to

empower minority positions, and the effect of their nar-

ratives on the changing literary canon. Special attention

will be paid to issues related to interpretations of history,

exile, different forms of violence and repression, expres-

sions of desire, and sexuality. Portela. (HU)

SPAN 379. Spanish Internship (2-4)

Designed to give advanced qualified students the chance

to acquire field experience and training with selected

firms and governmental agencies in Spanish-speaking

countries or U.S. agencies serving the Hispanic commu-

nity. Assigned readings, written reports, and employer

performance evaluations are required. Prerequisites:

SPAN 141 and approval of faculty. (HU)

SPAN 390. Spanish Special Topics (2-4)

Study of an author, theme or period. Topics vary. May

be repeated once for credit. Prerequisites: SPAN 151 or

152 and consent of instructor. (HU)

Courses Taught in English (see descriptions under

MLL courses)

MLL 051. Contemporary Hispanic-American

Literature (4)

MLL 053. This Hispanic World and its

Culture (4)

Minor in International Film

Description

The minor in International Film affords students the

opportunity to examine a wide cross-section of world

cinema. It is designed to provide a critical understanding

of historical trends and current issues in film across vari-

ous regions of the world. Covering national cinemas

from ASIA, Europe, and Latin America, course offerings

will allow students to explore diverse approaches to film

that are rooted in the history, culture, and society of dif-

ferent countries in each region.

The minor consists of 16 credits. All students must take

a required core course (MLL 100), and the remaining

courses are to be chosen from the list of electives below,

in consultation with the minor advisor. (One course may

be taken outside of the MLL department with the minor

advisor’s approval.)

Core course

MLL 100 Introduction to International Film (4)

Elective courses

MLL/ASIA/WS/GCP 073 Film, Fiction, and Gender in

Modern China (4)

FREN 322 Contemporary French Films (4)

GERM/GCP/MLL 231 New German Cinema (4)

SPAN 265 Spanish and Latin American Cinema (4)

Minor in International Communication

Description:

The Minor in International Communication is designed

for students who have already reached the intermediate

level in their language studies and wish to develop inter-

national communication skills from a global perspective.

The minor consists of 16 credits. Students must take

MLL 90 or 124 as a core course, and one advanced lan-

guage course in their language (above 100 level), and

Music 359

two other courses from the list of electives below in con-

sultation with the minor advisor. These two courses must

be chosen from a region that is different from their lan-

guage area in order to broaden their communication

skills. (One course may be taken outside of the MLL

department with the minor advisor’s approval.)

Courses:

Required:

Negotiating across cultures (MLL 090 or 124) or

Globalization and Cultures (MLL/GC 006)

One advanced language course (above 100 level)

Electives:

MLL 027 Russian Classics (4)

MLL 053 This Hispanic World and its

Culture (4)

MLL/ASIA/HIST 075 Chinese Civilization (4)

MLL/ASIA/HIST 076 Understanding Contemporary

China (4)

MLL 195 Lehigh in Spain (4)

FREN 159 The French-speaking World and its

Culture (4)

GERM 163 German Civilization and Culture (4)

SPAN 151 Cultural Evolution of Spain (4)

SPAN 152 Cultural Evolution of Latin America (4)

and other courses pre-approved by the adviser.

Music

Professors. Paul Salerni, Ph.D. (Harvard) (NEH

Distinguished Chair in the Humanties); Steven Sametz,

D.M.A. (Wisconsin) (Ronald J. Ulrich Chair in Music);

Nadine Sine, Ph.D. (N.Y.U.), Chair.

Associate Professors. Eugene Albulescu, M.M. (Indiana)

(Ronald J. Ulrich Chair in Orchestral Studies); William

Warfield, M.M. (Manhattan).

Professors of Practice. Debra Field, M.M. (Temple);

Timothy Schwarz, D.M.A. (Temple).

Lecturer. David Diggs, M.M. (SUNY - Stony Brook)

Adjunct Professors: David Bakamjian, D.M.A. (SUNY

Stony Brook); Helen Beedle, M.M. (New England);

Linda Fiore, B.M. (Hartt); L. Scott Force, M.E. (Trenton

State); Linda Ganus, M.M. (Michigan), M.F.A. (Vermont

College of Fine Arts); Tim Harrison, M.M. (N.Texas

State); William Holmes (School for Recording Arts and

Sciences); Albert Neumeyer, M.M. (Trenton); Gene Perla,

B.A. (Thomas Edison); Dave Riekenberg, M.M.E. (N.

Texas State); Tim Sessions, M.M. (Manhattan School of

Music); James Thoma, M.M. (Juilliard).

Private Instructors: Bass: Dominick Fiore, Gene Perla;

Bassoon: Kim Seifert; Clarinet: Deborah Andrus; Flute:

Linda Ganus; Robin Kani; French Horn: Daniel Braden;

Guitar: (electric) Bob De Vos, Tom Guarna, Vic Juris;

Harp: Andrea Wittchen; Oboe: David Diggs; Organ:

Tim Harrell; Piano: Eugene Albulescu, Helen Beedle,

Tim Harrison (jazz), Donna McHugh, Pat O’Connell,

Irmgard Pursell; Percussion: Scott Neumann, James

Thoma; Saxophone: Dave Riekenberg; Trombone: Tim

Sessions; Trumpet: Joseph Mosello (jazz), Bill Warfield

(jazz), Lawrence Wright; Tuba: Scott Force; Viola and

Violin: James Finegan, Sandya Murthy, Kate Ransom,

Tim Schwarz; Violoncello: David Bakamjian; Voice:

Eduardo Azzati, Brian Chu, Debra Field, Jane Hagness;

Margaret Hanegraaf.

The study of music develops skills which will serve the

student well in any career: self-discipline, teamwork,

problem solving and leadership. A student graduating

with the B.A. degree in music will have a strong founda-

tion in music theory and substantial exposure to western

music from the Middle Ages to the present. This cur-

riculum will prepare a student for graduate studies in

musicology, music theory, composition, or performance.

A music major or minor taken in conjunction with a

business major may lead to a variety of careers in arts

management or in the recording and music publishing

industries. For some a double major or a minor in music

will not lead to a career but to a life-long involvement

with an art form that gives lasting satisfaction.

The music department also offers significant perform-

ance experiences in instrumental and vocal ensembles,

large and small, and in private instruction. The Zoellner

Arts Center facilities include a Listening Library, practice

rooms, a composition and digital class piano studio, a

fine recording studio, classrooms and rehearsal rooms.

Most importantly, the center boasts its concert facility,

Baker Hall. With its 1000-seat capacity and excellent

acoustics, it is flexible both on the stage (concert or the-

ater mode) and in seating arrangements. The fully

adjustable pit can serve opera or musical theatre, can

provide additional seating, or can become an extension

of the stage.

Major program

The music program offers two separate programs, each

earning the Bachelor of Arts degree, the B.A. in Music

and the B.A. in Music Composition.

The Bachelor of Arts in Music (36-credit minimum) is

for those students who wish to have double majors, who

might choose a related field (e.g., arts management, part-

time performance careers in orchestras) or who simply

want a concentrated exposure to music study. Students

choose between five different concentrations: perform-

ance; history and literature; theory and composition;

jazz; conducting. For those who intend to pursue gradu-

ate study in music or a performing career, the major

program should be viewed as the minimum requirement.

Such students should regularly seek the advice of depart-

ment faculty in expanding their program to suit their

particular needs and goals.

Performance Concentration.

Thirteen credits in theory and musicianship skills: MUS

11, 2, 82, 3, 7, 83, 4, 8. Nine credits of music history

(any 3 from MUS 233, 234, 235, 236) and eleven cred-

its in lessons, ensembles and recitals, and three credits in

music electives. The student must perform a half recital

in the junior year, a full recital in the senior year, and

juries during the sophomore and junior years. Jury

Requirement: see website at

http://www.lehigh.edu/~inmsc/

History Concentration.

Thirteen credits in theory and musicianship skills: MUS

11, 2, 82, 3, 7, 83, 4, 8. Twelve credits of music history

(MUS 233, 234, 235, 236) and eleven credits in elec-

tives, lessons, and ensembles, of which at least three

must be in performance. The students must produce a

major research project during the senior year.

360 Lehigh University Course Catalog 2009-2010

Composition and Theory Concentration.

Eighteen credits in theory: MUS 82, 3, 7, 83, 4, 8, 243,

245. Six credits in music history (MUS 336 plus any one

from MUS 233, 234, 235, 236) and eight in composi-

tion (MUS 253, 254), plus four in lessons or ensembles.

Students must produce a substantial composition or the-

oretical analysis under the direction of department

faculty during the senior year. A keyboard test is required

to enter composition class.

Jazz Concentration

Thirteen credits in music theory and musicianship skills:

MUS 11, 2, 82, 3, 7, 83, 4, 8 plus three credits in Jazz

Theory, MUS 139. Six credits in Jazz History: MUS

128, 129. A minimum of four credits in small jazz

groups, MUS 49 and six in jazz performance: MUS 24,

25. Four credits in music electives. The student must

undertake a senior project under faculty direction.

Conducting Concentration

Thirteen credits in music theory and musicianship skills:

MUS 11, 2, 82, 3, 7, 83, 4, 8. Nine credits in music his-

tory (choose from 233, 234, 235, 236). Four credits in

conducting: MUS 321, 322 plus at least two Conduct-

ing Internships (MUS 311), of which one must be in

orchestra. Six credits of performance electives (lessons

and ensembles). A piano proficiency exam must be com-

pleted before the end of the sophomore year. The

student must undertake a senior project under faculty

direction.

Bachelor of Arts in Music Composition

The Bachelor of Arts in Music Composition is designed

for students committed to pursuing music composition

beyond the undergraduate level. It is an intensive com-

position program with a 54-credit minimum.

Twenty-five credits in music theory: MUS 82, 3, 7, 83,

4, 8, 139, 243, 245, 331. Nine credits in music history:

MUS 236, MUS 336 plus one from MUS 129, 233,

234, 235. Fourteen credits in composition: MUS 253,

254, two semesters of MUS 353. One semester of con-

ducting, MUS 321 (2 credits) and four credits of music

electives. Students will have to pass a piano proficiency

exam by the end of the sophomore year. Students will

compile a composition portfolio by the end of the senior

year.

Minor programs

Minor in Music

The minor requires a minimum of 17 credits and may

include MUS 90. The program is designed to be flexible

but must include MUS 11, 2, 82, 3, and 7, one history

or literature course, and two performance courses (MUS

22-79). The student may choose the remaining four

credits from department offerings.

Minor in Music Industry

The music industry minor is intended to provide expo-

sure to basic information, issues and skills useful for

students who may want to pursue entry level positions in

the music business or to promote their own work. There

are six required courses: MUS 161, 164, 261, 11, 2,

plus MUS 361: Music Internship; and either Acct 108

or 151 for a minimum of 18 credits.

Music Option

Although Music and Engineering/Science is not a major

in itself, Lehigh attracts many engineering and science

students who wish to continue their active involvement

in music and the music department. For those students

who are interested in pursuing this option, music can be

taken as a dual major, minor or elective.

Concert Requirement

Majors and minors must enroll in MUS 100 and attend

concerts approved by the music department for a mini-

mum of three semesters.

Departmental Honors

A student must have a 3.5 average in courses in the

major to pursue honors. Candidates for departmental

honors should submit to the department chair a written

proposal, prepared in consultation with a faculty project

adviser by the end of the junior year. The project could

result in a research paper, a composition or a perform-

ance. Upon acceptance of the proposal by the

department faculty, the student should register for MUS

350 for one to six credits, which may be taken all at

once or over the senior year. The awarding of depart-

mental honors will be contingent on the quality of the

completed project. Students who complete two concen-

trations in the major may also petition for consideration.

Private lessons

Lessons in most instruments and voice may be taken for

one credit. They must be arranged through the depart-

ment at set fees that are not included in tuition. Please

note that registering for lessons cannot guarantee avail-

ability due to difficulties in scheduling.

Performing groups

Admission to performing ensembles is by audition

(except Choral Union, Symphonic Band and Marching

97), and students receive one credit per semester by reg-

istering for the appropriate course number. Although

there is no limit to the number of courses in this series

that may be taken, students should check with their

adviser to determine the number that may be applied

toward graduation.

Course Offerings

Please note that many upper level courses have no pre-

requisites beyond MUS 10 or 11 and are open to anyone

with basic knowledge of musical terminology.

MUS 2. Keyboard Harmony I (1) spring

For intended majors and minors only. Co-requisite:

MUS 11. Beginning piano skills designed to enable the

student to use the piano as a tool. Major and minor

scales in both hands, forming chords, elementary sight

reading. Students may test out upon examination. (HU)

MUS 3. Keyboard Harmony II (1) fall

Continuation of MUS 2. Diatonic progressions in major

and minor; more advanced sight reading. Students may

test out upon examination. Co-requisite: MUS 82.

Prerequisite: MUS 2. (HU)

MUS 4. Keyboard Harmony III (1) spring

Additional keyboard skills, including progressions with

secondary chords, modulations, and sight reading.

Students may test out upon examination. Co-requisite:

MUS 83. Prerequisite: MUS 3 (HU)

Music 361

MUS 7. Aural Skills (1) fall

Sight singing and ear training through dictation exercis-

es. Rhythm exercises. Co-requisite: MUS 82.

Prerequisite: MUS 11 or equivalent. (HU)

MUS 8. Aural Skills II (1) spring

Continuation of MUS 7. Co-requisite: MUS 83.

Prerequisite: MUS 7. (HU)

MUS 10. Basic Skills in Music (2) fall

Rudiments of musical notation, beginning skills in sight

singing, ear training, rhythm and keyboard. Intended for

anyone who does not plan to major or minor. (HU)

MUS 11. Basic Musicianship (2) spring

For intended majors and minors. Development of basic

skills in using notation, sight singing and ear training. .

Co-requisite: MUS 2. (HU)

MUS 12. Surveys in Music (3) fall or spring

Varied topics in music for the non-major such as Italian

opera, Keyboard Music, the Symphony. Emphasis on

developing listening skills and acquaintance with impor-

tant works in the genre. Staff (HU)

MUS 21-79.

Applied music and performance courses may be repeated

for graduation credit up to six times in CEAS and CBE.

Prerequisite: Admission to MUS 22-62 by audition.

MUS 64- 79,170 have fees.

MUS 21. Marching Band (1) fall. (ND)

MUS 22. Wind Ensemble (1) fall-spring (HU)

MUS 23. Symphonic Band (1) spring (HU)

MUS 24. Jazz Ensemble (1) fall-spring (HU)

MUS 25. Jazz Band (1) fall-spring (HU)

MUS 31. University Choir (1) fall-spring (HU)

MUS 32. Choral Union (1) fall-spring (HU)

MUS 33. Glee Club (1) fall-spring. Co-requisite:

MUS 31 (HU)

MUS 34 Freshman Lab Choir (0) fall. Co-requi-

site: MUS 31 (HU)

MU 35 Women’s Choir (1) fall-spring. Co-requi-

site: MUS 31 (HU)

MUS 48. Chamber Music Collegium (1) fall-

spring. Department Permission. (HU)

MUS 49. Small Jazz Ensembles (1) fall-spring.

Department Permission. (HU)

MUS 61. Lehigh University Philharmonic (1) fall-

spring (HU)

MUS 62. Lehigh University Chamber

Orchestra (1) fall-spring (HU)

MUS 65. Class Guitar for Beginners (1) fall-

spring

Beginning techniques and skills for guitar, either acoustic

or electric. For students with less than a year of guitar

instruction. Students supply their own instruments.

(HU)

MUS 66. Class Voice for Beginners (1) fall-spring

Group instruction for beginning students of voice,

including breathing and vocal production techniques;

diction; beginning solo pieces. (HU)

MUS 67. Class Drum Set for Beginners (1) fall-

spring

Rudiments of drum set playing for students with less

than a year of drum instruction. (HU)

MUS 68. Class Piano for Beginners I (1) fall-

spring

Instruction for beginning piano students, including rudi-

ments of musical notation in relation to the keyboard;

beginning pieces for solo piano and the group. (HU)

MUS 69. Class Piano for Beginners II (1) fall-

spring

A continuation of MUS 68. After a second semester of

class piano, the student should be ready to benefit from

private lesson instruction. (HU)

MUS 71. Private Piano Study (1) fall-spring (HU)

MUS 72. Private Vocal Study (1) fall-spring (HU)

MUS 73. Private String Study (1) fall-spring (HU)

MUS 74. Private Woodwind Study (1) fall-

spring (HU)

MUS 75. Private Brass Study (1) fall-spring (HU)

MUS 76. Private Percussion Study (1) fall-

spring (HU)

MUS 77. Private Organ Study (1) fall-spring (HU)

MUS 79. Private Electric Guitar Study (1) fall-

spring (HU)

MUS 82. Harmony I (3) fall

Exercises in writing in four-part chorale style. This

includes all diatonic chords and non-harmonic tones.

MUS 3 and 7 must be taken concurrently. Prerequisites:

MUS 11 or equivalent. Diggs (HU)

MUS 83. Harmony II (3) spring

Continuation of MUS 82 including modulation, chro-

matic chords, analysis. MUS 4 and 8 must be taken

concurrently. Prerequisites: MUS 82, and 7 or equiva-

lent. Diggs (HU)

MUS 84. Private Drumset Study (1) fall-spring

MUS 100. Concert Requirement (0) fall, spring

Concerts approved by the department (for majors and

minors)

MUS 128. Jazz History I (3) fall

A study of the roots of jazz. Starting in West Africa, the

course traces the synthesis of African and European ele-

ments to 1945. Musicians covered are Gottshalk,

Bolden, Morton, Armstrong, Hawkins, Basie, Ellington

and others. Warfield (HU)

MUS 129. Jazz History II (3) spring

A survey of modern jazz from 1945 to the present.

Musicians covered include Parker, Gillespie, Monk,

Davis, Coltrane, Hancock, and Coleman. Can be taken

independently of Jazz History I, but the first course

would be helpful. Warfield (HU)

MUS 132. Composer and Era (3) fall or spring

Life and development of a composer’s style viewed in

historical context. Title varies: Bach, Beethoven, Mozart,

etc. May be repeated for credit as title varies.

Prerequisite: MUS 10 or 11 or equivalent. Sine (HU)

MUS 139. Jazz Theory (3) spring

Study of the music theory that is the foundation of a

362 Lehigh University Course Catalog 2009-2010

good jazz solo, composition or arrangement. Study of

the modes of the major and melodic minor scale,

chord/scale theory using major, melodic minor, dimin-

ished, and whole-tone scales. Basic chord progressions,

functional analysis of jazz tunes, and ear training are also

included. Prerequisites: MUS 82. (HU)

MUS 151. Vocal Diction (1) fall or spring

Introduction to the use of the International Phonetic

Alphabet. Application to French, Italian, German and

English diction using art song repertoire. Preparation of

a song in each language. Field (HU)

MUS 161. Production and Marketing of Sound

Recordings (3) fall-spring

A one-semester course providing foundations for organ-

izing a recording project to be carried out by the class,

which works in teams. This course will focus especially

on artist negotiations, recording techniques, music pub-

lishing and manufacturing. Perla (ND)

MUS 164. Management of Careers in Performing

Arts (3) fall-spring

A one-semester course that provides an overview of what

performing artists and managers experience during cycles

of career development. Topics include recognition of tal-

ent, positioning in the marketplace, creating support

structures and attainment of personal goals. Students will

be required to apply practical techniques in furthering

the career of a chosen artist. Perla (ND)

MUS 170. Private Instruction for Performance

Concentrators (2)

Lesson fees apply. Repeatable for credit. Restricted to

music majors concentrating in performance. (HU)

MUS 171. Accompanying (1) fall-spring

Introduction to ensemble performance including sight-

reading techniques, application of chord progressions

and beginning improvisation techniques at the keyboard.

May be repeated for credit. (HU)

MUS 233. Medieval and Renaissance Music (3)

fall, odd

Development of musical style from early Christian chant

to the sacred and secular forms of the late 16th century,

viewed in cultural contexts. Prerequisite: MUS 11 or

equivalent. Sine (HU)

MUS 234. Baroque and Classical Music (3)

spring, even

The major genres and composers of the 17th and 18th

centuries studied in their cultural context. Prerequisite:

MUS 11 or equivalent. Sine (HU)

MUS 235. Romantic Music (3) fall, even

Study of the major composers and their works from late

Beethoven to Mahler and Strauss. Prerequisite: MUS 11

or equivalent. Sine (HU)

MUS 236. Twentieth-Century Music (3) spring,

odd

Beginning with the major trends at the turn of the cen-

tury, a study of the important composers and works of

the last century to the present. Prerequisite: MUS 11 or

equivalent. Sine (HU)

MUS 243. Counterpoint (4) fall

Writing and analyzing pieces in Renaissance and

Baroque contrapuntal styles. Prerequisites: MUS 83, 4,

and 8 or equivalent. Diggs (ND).

MUS 245. Classical and Romantic Forms (4)

spring

Analyzing and writing pieces in classical and romantic

forms. Exercises in chromatic harmony. Prerequisite:

MUS 243. (ND)

MUS 251. Special Topics (1-3)

Study of musical topics in history or composition not

covered in regular courses. May be repeated for credit as

title varies. Prerequisite: consent of the department chair.

Salerni (HU)

MUS 253. Composition I: Electronic and Acoustic

Techniques (4) fall

Writing for acoustic and electronic instruments based on

20th-century models. Acoustic orchestration, digital syn-

thesis, effects processing. Use of the computer for score

preparation and as a compositional tool. Prerequisite:

MUS 83, 4, and 8 or permission of instructor. Salerni

(ND)

MUS 254. Composition II (4) spring

Continuation of MUS 253. Prerequisite: 253. Salerni

(ND)

MUS 261. Recording Techniques I (3) fall

Recording music in various popular and classical styles

using state of the art studio equipment. Topics include

microphone choice, placement, mixing, effects process-

ing, digital editing and post production. (ND)

MUS 262. Recording Techniques II (3) spring

Continuation of Recording Techniques I. Prerequisite:

MUS 261(ND)

MUS 271. Repertoire (2) fall or spring

Survey of literature in a given medium: e.g., piano,

vocal, orchestral, choral repertoire. Particular emphasis

on performance issues. May be repeated for credit as title

varies. (HU)

MUS 291. Independent Study (1-3)

Individually supervised work in history or composition,

or continuation of projects begun in regular courses.

May be repeated for credit. Prerequisite: consent of

department chair. (HU)

MUS 300. Apprentice Teaching (1-3) (ND)

MUS 311. Conducting Internship (2)

Work under the direction of one of the faculty directors

to learn the organization and musical tasks required of

directors as they prepare ensembles for performance.

Prerequisites: MUS 322 or permission. Repeatable for

credit. Staff (HU)

MUS 312/412: Advanced Choral Composition (2)

Summer

Intensive, week-long seminar/workshop for individual

study with international faculty. Joint seminars and lab

choir rehearsals on choral literature; rehearsals and pre-

mieres of student works. New works and repertoire

presented in final concert conducted by faculty and par-

ticipants. Sametz

MUS 321. Conducting I (2) fall

Beginning study of conducting techniques, including

score reading and preparation, analysis, conducting pat-

terns and gestures. Prerequisite: MUS 83 or permission

of the instructor. (HU)

Philosophy 363

MUS 322. Conducting II (2) spring

Continuation of MUS 321. Prerequisite: MUS 321.

(HU)

MUS 331. Advanced Analysis (4) spring

In-depth analysis of music from the Western tradition.

Compositions studied to include at least one orchestral

piece, one piece with text (song cycle or opera) and one

piece using serial procedures. Introduction to

Schenkerian analysis. Prerequisites: MUS 243 and 245

or permission. Staff (HU)

MUS 336. Seminar in the History of Musical

Style (3) spring

Study and analysis of the development of musical lan-

guage and genre from the middle ages to the present.

Intended particularly for any student considering gradu-

ate school in music. May substitute for any one course in

the music history sequence. Prerequisite: MUS 83. Sine

(ND)

MUS 350. Senior Project (1-6) (ND)

MUS 353. Composition Seminar (3) fall-spring

Seminar review of original compositions alternating with

private lessons in composition. The seminar is intended

for students doing either independent work in composi-

tion or senior projects. Prerequisites: MUS 254. Salerni,

Sametz, Warfield. Repeatable for credit. Staff (HU)

MUS 361. Music Internship (3)

MUS 370. Recital (1-2) fall-spring

Department permission. (HU)

MUS 412/312. Advanced Choral Composition (2)

summer.

Same as MUS 312 description above.

Philosophy

Professors. Gordon Bearn, Ph.D. (Yale), William Wilson

Selfridge Professor of Philosophy; Mark H. Bickhard,

Ph.D. (Chicago), Henry R. Luce Professor in Cognitive

Robotics and the Philosophy of Knowledge; Robin Dillon,

Ph.D. (Pittsburgh); Steven Louis Goldman, Ph.D.

(Boston), Andrew W. Mellon Distinguished Professor in

the Humanities; Roslyn Weiss, Ph.D. (Columbia), chair

and Clara H. Stewardson Professor of Philosophy.

Associate Professors. Michael Mendelson, Ph.D. (San

Diego); Aladdin Yaqub, Ph.D. (University of Wisconsin,

Madison).

Philosophy is born of discomfort. Whether it is the need

to account for the tragedies of circumstance, the incon-

gruities between our assumptions about the world and

what experience and science reveal, or the shock of being

exposed to hitherto unimagined conceptual alternatives,

philosophy arises in those contexts in which serious

questions emerge about the adequacy of our most cher-

ished beliefs.

Philosophy is driven by the unsettling awareness that we

are not beings who act exclusively on instinct but are

instead able to choose from among a variety of ways of

thinking about ourselves, the world in which we find

ourselves, and our relations with others. Moreover, the

beliefs we hold are not merely incidental facts about us

like height or eye color. What we believe is often central

to our moral identity, the nature of our personal rela-

tionships, the manner in which we regard ourselves and

treat others, and the happiness and unhappiness that

form the emotional contours of our practical lives.

Philosophy is born out of our awareness that despite the

centrality of our beliefs to our identity as moral beings,

the truth of our beliefs can be uncertain, for on virtually

any topic there is a variety of possible viewpoints, not all

of which can be equally adequate.

In its attempt to ground our beliefs and justify them,

philosophy becomes a reflective and critical conceptual

activity concerned with foundational questions regarding

our deepest assumptions and intuitions about the nature

and extent of human knowledge (epistemology), about

the nature of reality and the distinction between appear-

ance and reality (metaphysics), about the nature, scope,

and grounds of moral value (ethics), and about the

nature and theoretical foundations of formal reasoning

and valid inference (logic).

The major program in philosophy is designed to provide

a broad exposure to all of these areas as well as a strong

grounding in the history of the western philosophical

tradition. The program emphasizes the close reading and

critical evaluation of classic texts from ancient times to

the present, and students can expect to develop sophisti-

cated analytic and expository skills that will enable them

to engage in original, critical reflection on their own. To

this end, the major program involves a combination of

required and elective coursework as well as the opportu-

nity to develop and pursue individual interests under

faculty supervision. In addition to its regular course

offerings, the department also sponsors a variety of activ-

ities (e.g. the annual Selfridge Lecture, the Philosophy

Forum, the Faculty Seminar, the Philosophy Club, and

the annual Reading Party), all of which are designed to

complement the course offerings and to promote a uni-

versity-wide philosophical community.

The major program provides excellent preparation for

graduate study in philosophy as well as a solid founda-

tion for any career that places a premium upon clear,

careful thinking and rigorous conceptual and expository

skills.

For additional information about the faculty, frequency

of course offerings, and departmental events, please con-

tact the department for a copy of its brochure.

The Minor Program

The minor in philosophy consists of four courses. The

courses must include at least one course at the 200-level

or above. Minor programs are planned in conjunction

with the departmental advisor who will help the student

plan a program compatible with his or her interests.

Minor programs may be, but do not have to be, focused

in a particular area such as ethics or the history of phi-

losophy or philosophy of mind.

The Major Program

The major program consists of ten courses (38 credit

minimum) planned in conjunction with the student’s

major advisor. In addition to a two semester (6 credits)

senior thesis, each major must satisfy the following dis-

tribution requirements:

Ethics

1 course from PHIL. 8, 105, 116, or 205

Logic

1 course from PHIL. 114, 214, 260, 265, or 303

364 Lehigh University Course Catalog 2009-2010

History of Philosophy

2 courses from PHIL. 131, 132, 133, 135, 139, 231,

232, 233, 235, 237, or 239

Three of the 10 courses (not including the senior thesis)

must be at the 200 level or above.

Majors planning to pursue graduate study in philosophy

are strongly encouraged to include the following specific

courses:

PHIL 105 Ethics

PHIL 114 Symbolic Logic

PHIL 131 Ancient Philosophy

PHIL 135 Modern Philosophy

Senior Thesis

The Senior Thesis (PHIL 390-1) is a year-long, inde-

pendent project during which philosophy majors, with

the consent and under the guidance of a faculty sponsor,

investigate a topic of special interest to them. The topic

may be historical or non-historical, pure or applied,

interdisciplinary or disciplinary; the only constraint is

that the student secure the cooperation of a faculty spon-

sor. During the fall (PHIL 390), the student’s energies

will be devoted to refining the topic under investigation,

working through the bulk of the essential literature, and

producing a paper roughly 20 pages in length. During

the spring semester (PHIL 391), the student will investi-

gate the same topic more intensively, expanding,

revising, and refining the fall paper into a substantial

senior thesis roughly 50 pages in length.

Honors

Departmental honors in Philosophy are awarded to those

graduating seniors who satisfy the following two criteria:

(a) at the time of graduation, their GPA in philosophy is

3.5 or higher, their overall GPA is 3.25 or higher, and

(b) their senior thesis is judged by two members of the

philosophy department to show sufficient imaginative

philosophical accomplishment to merit their receiving

Honors in Philosophy.

Undergraduate Courses

PHIL 1. The Examined Life: An Introduction to

Philosophy (4)

What makes a life meaningful, what makes it worth liv-

ing? In pursuit of an answer to this question this course

examines many of the basic questions of philosophy: eth-

ical questions about justice and virtue, epistemological

questions about the limits of human knowledge, meta-

physical questions about what there is. (HU)

PHIL 3 (REL 3). Global Religion, Global Ethics (4)

Introduction to philosophical and religious modes of

moral thinking, with attention given to ethical issues as

they arise cross-culturally in and through religious tradi-

tions. The course will reference the United Nations

Millennium Goals to consider family life and the role of

women, social justice, the environment, and ethical

ideals. Particular focus varies but may include one or

more of the following: abortion and reproductive health,

the death penalty, religiously motivated violence, and

problems of personal disorder (heavy drinking, anorexia,

vengeance). A Global Citizenship course. Steffen (HU)

PHIL 5. Contemporary Moral Problems (4)

An examination of contemporary issues that raise ques-

tions about right and wrong, good and bad, both for

individuals and for social policy, using the methods, the-

ories, and concepts of moral philosophy. Issues addressed

might include abortion, euthanasia, and physician-assist-

ed suicide for dying patients, punishment and the death

penalty, sexual orientation, world hunger and poverty,

welfare, the treatment of animals, terrorism and war,

racial and sexual discrimination, affirmative action,

pornography and hate speech, and the relation of

humans to the natural environment. Dillon (HU)

PHIL 8. (GCP 8) Ethics in Global Perspectives (4)

Economic, political, cultural, and ideological globaliza-

tion presents two ethical challenges: (1) Are there

universally justifiable moral standards, principles, and

values that would establish universally acceptable answers

to the question of how humans should live their lives?

That is, can there be a global ethics? (2) What are justifi-

able responses to the variety of moral issues facing the

peoples of the world as a result of current globalization?

This course addresses the first question by examining the

moral perspectives of a variety of different ethical out-

looks, including Euro-American, Hindu, Buddhist,

Confucian, African, and Islamic traditions. The second

question is addressed by examining a number of serious

moral problems arising from globalization, including the

increasing gap between the rich so-called First World

nations and the poor so-called Third World nations,

global environmental degradation, and war and terror-

ism. Dillon (HU)

PHIL 100. (POLS 100) Introduction to Political

Thought (4)

Some of the most significant ancient and modern politi-

cal theorists: Plato, Aristotle, Machiavelli, Hobbes, Marx,

and others. Matthews (ND)

PHIL 101. (POLS 101) Ancient Political

Heritage (4)

Important Political thinkers from the pre-Socratics to

early, modern political theorists like Machiavelli.

Matthews (SS)

PHIL 102. (POLS 102) Modern Political

Heritage (4)

Begins where POLS 101 ends; from early modern theo-

rists (e.g. Hobbes) up to contemporary thinkers (e.g.

Marcuse). (SS)

PHIL 105. Ethics (4)

Examination of right and wrong, good and bad, from

classic sources such as Plato, Aristotle, Hume, Kant, Mill

and Nietzsche. (HU)

PHIL 114. Symbolic Logic (4)

A first course in logical theory, introducing the notions

of logical consequence and proof, as well as related con-

cepts such as consistency and contingency. Formal

systems taught may include: term logic, sentence logic,

and predicate logic. (MA)

PHIL 116. (REL 116) Bioethics (4)

Moral issues that arise in the context of health care and

related biomedical fields in the United States today,

examined in the light of the nature and foundation of

moral rights and obligations. Topics include: confiden-

tiality, informed consent, euthanasia, medical research

and experimentation, genetics, the distribution of health

care, etc. (HU)

PHIL 117. (AMST 117) Race and Philosophy (4)

An introduction to the philosophy born of struggle

against racism and white supremacy. We will read the

Philosophy 365

work of philosophers, mostly European, who quietly

made modern racism possible by inventing the category

of race, but we will concentrate on the work of philoso-

phers, mostly of African descent, who for 200 years have

struggled to force a philosophical critique of the category

of race and the practice of white supremacy. (HU)

PHIL 121. Philosophy in Literature (4)

Exploration of philosophical themes through the study

of literature and film. Authors may include: Homer,

Euripides, Dante, Rimbaud, Sterne, George Eliot, Valery,

Joyce, Melville, T.S. Eliot, Rilke, Proust, Musil, Stevens,

Cummings, Camus, Sartre, Beckett, Morrison,

Barthelme. (HU)

PHIL 122. Philosophy of Law (4)

Analysis of the conceptual foundations of our legal sys-

tem. Special attention devoted to the nature of law and

legal obligation, liberty and privacy in constitutional liti-

gation, justice and contractual obligation, theories of

punishment in criminal law, and the nature and scope of

responsibility in criminal law. (HU)

PHIL 123. Aesthetics (4)

Theories, classical and modern, of the nature of beauty

and the aesthetic experience. Practical criticism of some

works of art, and examination of analogies between arts,

and between art and nature. (HU)

PHIL 124. (REL 124) Philosophy of Religion (4)

Critical examination, from a philosophical perspective,

of some fundamental problems of religion, the nature of

religious experience and belief, reason and revelation, the

existence and nature of God, the problem of evil, and

religious truth. (HU)

PHIL 125. Social and Political Philosophy (4)

Human beings are by nature sociable; with very few

exceptions, we live together in society. Sometimes we do

this well, sometimes badly. And so it is natural to ask:

what kind(s) of life is good for people who live among

people, and what is an (the) appropriate relationship

between a person and society? Social and political philos-

ophy seeks not to describe how humans have in fact

arranged social life, but to reflect on how best to arrange

our lives together. That is, it develops visions of good

social life and identifies values that should shape society

so that people are able to live good lives together. This

course will focus on social philosophy and will address

questions about the nature of a free and just society.

Issues covered may include the nature of freedom, how

the facts of gender, race, class, ethnic, and cultural differ-

ences should be taken into account in social and political

relations, the limits of religious tolerance, affirmative

action, parenting, the death penalty, privacy, violence,

world hunger, homosexuality, and abortion. (HU)

PHIL 126. (Hum 126, REL 126) Professional

Ethics (4)

An examination of the moral rules and action guides

that govern various professions. Professions to be exam-

ined will include health (physician and nursing); legal;

counseling and psychiatry; engineering; military; clergy;

teaching. Attention will be given to modes of ethical rea-

soning and how those modes are practically applied in

professional life and activity. Among issues to be dis-

cussed, will be the limits of confidentiality; employer

authority; power relationships; obligations to the public;

professional rights; sexual boundaries; whistle-blowing;

safety and risk; computer ethics; weapons development;

discrimination; professional review of ethical infractions.

Course will include guest lectures and case studies.

Steffen (HU)

PHIL 127. Existentialism (4)

Investigation of the historical development of existential-

ism from its origins in the 19th century (Kierkegaard,

Nietzsche) through its marriage to phenomenology in

the early 20th (Heidegger, Sartre, Merleau-Ponty), and

out the other side as a vigorous dimension of much liter-

ary, psychological, and artistic work produced in the last

50 years. (HU)

PHIL 128. Philosophy of Science (4)

Introduction to the structure and methods of scientific

investigation. The nature of explanation, confirmation,

and falsification. Scientific progress: What is it? Would it

be suffocated by obedience to completely rational meth-

ods? (HU)

PHIL 129. (REL 129) Jewish Philosophy (4)

Consideration of how major Jewish thinkers from the

first to 20th centuries confronted questions at the inter-

section of religion and philosophy: the existence and

nature of God, free will, evil, divine providence, mira-

cles, creation, revelation, and religious obligation. (HU)

PHIL 131. (CLSS 131) Ancient Philosophy (4)

Historical survey of selected texts and issues in the classi-

cal world, from the pre-Socratics through Aristotle, with

emphasis on the origins of the western philosophical tra-

ditions in ethics, metaphysics, and epistemology. (HU)

PHIL 132. (CLSS 132) Hellenistic Philosophy (4)

Historical survey of selected texts and issues in Post-

Aristotelian Greek and Roman philosophy from the

fourth century B.C. to the third century A.D. Areas of

focus may include epicureanism, stoicism, academic and

pyrrohnian scepticism, and neoplatonism. (HU)

PHIL 133. Medieval Philosophy (4)

Historical survey of selected texts and issues in western

philosophy from the fourth to 14th centuries. Attention

will be given to the relation between developments in

medieval philosophy and major currents in ancient and

modern thought. Figures may include Augustine,

Eriugena, Anselm, Aquinas, Ockham, and Nicholas of

Autrecourt. (HU)

PHIL 135. Modern Philosophy (4)

Historical survey of selected texts and issues in 17th and

18th century European philosophy with particular

emphasis on developments in epistemology and meta-

physics. Attention will be given to the relation of the

“modern period” to developments in late medieval phi-

losophy and the rise of the experimental sciences. Figures

may include Descartes, Leibniz, Locke, Hume, and

Kant. (HU)

PHIL 137. (Hum 137, REL 137) Ethics in

Practice (1-4)

A variable content course focusing on ethical issues aris-

ing in a particular profession, such as law health,

business, engineering, military. Variable credit. May be

taken more than once. Steffen (HU)

PHIL 139. Contemporary Philosophy (4)

Philosophical thought from the late-19th century to the

present; pragmatism, linguistic analysis, existentialism,

and Marxism. Truth and knowledge, values and moral

judgment, meaning, the place of the individual in the

366 Lehigh University Course Catalog 2009-2010

physical world and society, and the impact of the scien-

tific method upon all of these. (HU)

PHIL 140. (ASIA 140) Eastern Philosophy (4)

Survey of selected texts and issues in the eastern philo-

sophical traditions. Attention will be given to the

development and interrelations of these traditions as well

as a comparison of western and eastern treatments of

selected issues. Areas of focus may include

Confucianism, Taoism, and Zen Buddhism. (HU)

PHIL 141 (REL 141) Medieval Islamic

Philosophy (4)

An introduction to Islamic philosophy in the medieval

era, the Golden Age of Islamic civilization. The course

focuses on primary sources. Readings include both expo-

sitions and critiques of philosophical doctrines and

argument, selected from the writings of al-Farabi, Ibn

Sina (Avicenna), al-Ghazali, Ibn Tufayl, and ibn Rushd

(Averroes). (HU)

PHIL 205. Contemporary Ethics (4)

Examination of significant questions addressed by con-

temporary moral philosophers. Topics vary, but might

include: What is a good person? Can a woman be good

in the same way as a man? Is morality relative or

absolute? Is morality all that important? Prerequisite:

PHIL 105 or consent of the instructor. (HU)

PHIL 214. (MATH 214) Topics in Philosophical

Logic (4)

Topics may include the many systems of non-classical

logic, truth theory, the impact of incompleteness and

undecidability results on philosophy, and the founda-

tional projects of various philosopher/mathematicians.

Alternatively, the topic might be the work of an impor-

tant figure in the history of philosophical logic.

Prerequisite: Permission of instructor. (MA)

PHIL 217. (AMST 217) Figures/Themes in Race

and Philosophy (4)

An investigation of a significant figure in the philosophy

of race (e.g. David Walker, W.E.B. DuBois, Alain Locke,

Marcus Garvey, Jean-Paul Sartre, Franz Fanon, AimE9

CE9saire, Cornel West) and/or an investigation of a sig-

nificant theme in the philosophy of race (Racial

Exploitation, Colonialism, Negritude, Afrocentrism,

Black Nationalism, African Philosophy, Black Athena).

Content Varies. May be taken more than once for credit.

(HU)

PHIL 220. Theory of Knowledge (4)

Recent work in epistemology. Questions addressed

include: If you can’t know whether you are dreaming,

how can you know you have two hands? Does knowl-

edge require answers to all possible doubts or only all

reasonable doubts? How should we determine the hori-

zon of the reasonable—psychologically or

philosophically? (HU)

PHIL 221. Metaphysics (4)

A survey of contemporary literature in metaphysics.

Topics may include: the nature of existence, universals

and properties, identity and individuation, causation,

necessity and possibility, reduction and emergence, and

realism and anti-realism. (HU)

PHIL 223. Figures/Themes in Aesthetics (4)

An investigation of a significant figure in aesthetics (e.g.,

Burke, Kant, Hegel, Benjamin, Adorno, Goodman, Kivy,

Derrida, Deleuze) and/or an investigation of a significant

theme in aesthetics (e.g., sensuality, representation, poli-

tics, expressionism, cinematic gore, minimalism,

architecture, post-modernism). Content varies. May be

taken more than once for credit. (HU)

PHIL 224. (REL 224) Topics in the Philosophy of

Religion (4)

Selected problems and issues in the philosophy of reli-

gion. Content varies. May be repeated more than once

for credit. (HU)

PHIL 226. (WS 226) Feminism and Philosophy (4)

Analysis of the nature, sources, and consequences of the

oppression and exploitation of women and justification

of strategies for liberation. Topics include women’s

nature and human nature, sexism, femininity, sexuality,

reproduction, mothering. Prerequisite: At least one previ-

ous course in philosophy or women’s studies. (HU)

PHIL 228. Topics in the Philosophy of Science (4)

Themes in the natural, life and social sciences. May be

repeated for credit as topic varies. Prerequisite: PHIL

128 or consent of the department chair. (HU)

PHIL 231. (CLSS 231) Figures/Themes in Ancient

Philosophy (4)

This seminar course will involve in-depth focus upon a

major ancient thinker (e.g. Plato, Aristotle, Sextus

Empiricus, Plotinus, etc.) or the classical treatment of a

particular theme (e.g. “human nature,” “the good life,”

ethical or political theory, etc.). Content varies. May be

repeated more than once for credit. (HU)

PHIL 232 (CLSS 232) Figures/Themes in

Hellenistic Philosophy (4)

This seminar course will involve an in-depth focus upon

a major movement in Hellenistic Philosophy (roughly

4th century B.C.E. to the 2nd Century C.E.) such as

Epicureanism, Stoicism, Ancient Scepticism, or

Neoplatonism, or the Hellenistic treatment of a particu-

lar theme (e.g. freedom from anxiety, the nature of the

Cosmos and our place within it, or human nature).

Content varies. May be repeated more than once for

credit. Mendelson (HU)

PHIL 233. Figures/Themes in Medieval

Philosophy (4)

This seminar course will involve in-depth focus upon a

major medieval thinker (e.g. Augustine, Boethius,

Maimonides, Bonaventure, Dante, etc.) or the medieval

treatment of a particular theme (e.g. the relation of

“will” and “intellect,” the “problem of universals,” ethical

or political theory, etc.). Content varies. May be repeated

more than once for credit. (HU)

PHIL 235. Figures/Themes in Modern

Philosophy (4)

This seminar course will involve in-depth focus upon a

major 17th or 18th century thinker (e.g. Descartes,

Leibniz, Berkeley, Kant, etc.) or the modern treatment of

a particular theme (e.g. the nature of “ideas,” the roles of

experience, reason, and revelation, ethical or political

theory, etc.). Content varies. May be repeated more than

once for credit. (HU)

PHIL 237. Figures/Themes in Nineteenth Century

Philosophy (4)

This seminar course will involve in-depth focus upon a

major 19th century thinker (e.g. Hegel, Marx,

Kierkegaard, Mill, Peirce, Frege, Nietzsche, James, etc.)

or the 19th century treatment of a particular theme (e.g.

Philosophy 367

the end of history, revolution, nihilism, authenticity, ori-

gins of mathematical logic, infinity, etc.). Content varies.

May be repeated more than once for credit. (HU)

PHIL 239. Figures/Themes in Contemporary

Philosophy (4)

This seminar course will involve in-depth focus upon a

major contemporary thinker (e.g. Russell, Whitehead,

Husserl, Heidegger, Wittgenstein, Quine, Habermas,

Rawls, Rorty, Derrida, Davidson, Foucault, Deleuze,

Irigaray, etc.) or the contemporary treatment of a partic-

ular theme (e.g. logical positivism, naturalism,

non-foundationalism, existential phenomenology, return

to virtue, neo-pragmatism, hermeneutics, post-struc-

turalism, post-modernism, neo-kantian political theory,

the politics of identity, etc.). Content varies. May be

repeated more than once for credit. (HU)

PHIL 240. (ASIA 240) Figures/Themes in Eastern

Philosophy (4)

This seminar course will involve in-depth focus upon a

major figure in Eastern thought or upon the Eastern

treatment of a particular theme or set of themes.

Content varies. May be repeated more than once for

credit. (HU)

PHIL (REL 241) Critics of Philosophy (4)

In recent years, with the resurgence of religion as a sig-

nificant political force globally, the claims of religion

have been subjected to renewed scrutiny and critique. A

wide array of scientists, philosophers, and social critics

(e.g., Richard Dawkins, Daniel Dennet, Sam Harris,

Christopher Hitchens) have challenged religion’s basic

claims and provide alternative rational, scientifically

grounded explanations. However, in many instances,

these books fall short of the powerful critiques, previous-

ly formulated by philosophers such as Baruch Spinoza

and Friedrich Nietzsche, or those of contemporary

French philosophers Michel Foucault and Gilles

Deleuze. In this seminar, we shall explore in-depth the

critiques of religion contained in the writings of Spinoza,

Nietzsche, Sigmund Freud, Foucault and Deleuze.

Students will have an opportunity to examine one or

more of the recent critiques of religion in light of the

arguments of these philosophers. (HU)

PHIL 250. (CogS 250) Philosophy of Mind (4)

An exploration of the mind-body problem. Are the body

and mind distinct substances (dualism); or is there only

body (materialism); or only mind (idealism)? Other

views to be considered include behaviorism (the view

that behavior can be explained without recourse to men-

tal states), and the view that the mind is a complex

computer. (HU)

PHIL 260. Philosophy of Language (4)

Analysis of the nature of the correspondence between the

words we use and the world in which we live. Our unify-

ing theme is the quest for an understanding of truth,

conceived as a peculiar relation between language and

reality. We examine such central notions as meaning and

reference, as understood in historically influential philo-

sophical theories of language. (HU)

PHIL 265. Philosophy of Mathematics (4)

Survey of metaphysical and epistemological issues from

the philosophy of mathematics, with emphasis on the

arguments on behalf of mathematical platonism, conven-

tionalism, and psychologism. It is highly recommended

that students take PHIL 114 and a year of calculus, or

otherwise acquire comparable formal background, prior

to this course. (HU)

PHIL 273, Ariadne: Internship (2)

An internship devoted to the construction and mainte-

nance of Ariadne, an on-line, web-based, undergraduate

journal of philosophy. Responsibilities will include

research; publicizing the project nationally and locally;

reviewing, selecting, and formatting manuscripts for

publication; and various other administrative and edito-

rial activities. Some students may also be involved in the

initial states of constructing Dionysos, an externally ref-

ereed, on-line, web-based professional journal of the

history of philosophy. Prerequisite: Department permis-

sion required: previous coursework in philosophy

expected. May be repeated more than once for credit.

(ND)

PHIL 290. Independent Study (1-4)

Individual philosophical investigation of an author,

book, or topic designed in collaboration with a faculty

sponsor. Tutorial meetings; substantial written work.

May be repeated more than once for credit. Consent of

faculty sponsor required. (ND)

PHIL 303. (MATH 303) Mathematical Logic (3-4)

Detailed proofs for the basic mathematical results relat-

ing the syntax and semantics of first-order logic

(predicate logic): the Soundness and Completeness (and

Compactness) Theorems, followed by a brief exposition

of the celebrated limitative results of Gödel, Turing, and

Church on incompleteness and undecidability. The

material is conceptually rigorous and mathematically

mature; the necessary background is a certain degree of

mathematical sophistication or a basic knowledge of

symbolic logic. Prerequisite: Permission of instructor.

(MA)

PHIL 304 (MATH 304) Axiomatic Set Theory (3-4)

A development of set theory from axioms; relations and

functions; ordinal and cardinal arithmetic; recursion the

orem; axiom of choice; independence questions.

Prerequisite: MATH 301 or consent of the department

chair. (MA)

PHIL 329 (MATH 329) Computability

Theory (3-4)

Course development of classical computability theory;

enumeration, index and recursion theorems, various

models of computation and Church’s Thesis, uncom-

putability results, introduction to reducibilities and their

degrees (in particular, Turning degrees, or degrees of

uncomputability), computable operators and their fixed

points. (MA)

PHIL 347. (REL 347 and AMST 347) American

Religious Thinkers (4)

An examination of the writings of key figures in the his-

tory of American religious thought (such as Edwards,

Emerson, Bushnell, Peirce, James, Royce, Dewey and the

Niebuhrs). Attention will be directed both to the histori-

cal reception of these writings and to their contemporary

significance. Raposa (HU)

PHIL 364. (POLS 364) Issues in Contemporary

Political Philosophy (4)

Selected topics in contemporary political philosophy,

such as the Frankfurt school, existentialism, legitimation,

authenticity, participatory democracy, and the alleged

368 Lehigh University Course Catalog 2009-2010

decline of political philosophy. May be repeated for cred-

it with consent of the political science chair. (SS)

PHIL 367. (POLS 367) American Political

Thought (4)

Critical examination of American political thought from

the founding of the Republic to the present. Writings

from Madison, Hamilton, and Jefferson to Emma

Goldman, Mary Daly, Malcolm X, Henry Kariel, and

others will be discussed. (SS)

PHIL 371. Advanced Independent Study (1-4)

Individual philosophical investigation of an author,

book, or topic designed in collaboration with a faculty

sponsor. Tutorial meetings; substantial written work.

May be repeated more than once for credit. Consent of

faculty sponsor required. (ND)

PHIL 373. (Hum 373, REL 373) Independent

Ethics Project (4)

Supervised ethics research into a topic approved by the

advisor for the Humanities Minor in Ethics. An option

for completing the ethics minor. For ethics minors only.

(HU)

PHIL 390. Senior Thesis (2)

The first part of two semesters of intensive research and

writing guided by a faculty sponsor in anticipation of

completing a senior thesis in philosophy. Individual

tutorials; substantial written work. Senior standing as

philosophy major and consent of faculty sponsor

required. (ND)

PHIL 391. Senior Thesis (4)

Continuation and completion of PHIL 390 under the

guidance of a faculty sponsor. Prerequisites: PHIL 390;

consent of faculty sponsor required. (ND)

Physics

Professors. Michael Stavola, Ph.D. (Rochester), chairper-

son; Gary G. DeLeo, Ph.D. (Connecticut), associate

chairperson; Volkmar Dierolf, Ph.D. (Utah); Robert T.

Folk, Ph.D. (Lehigh); James D. Gunton, Ph.D.

(Stanford); A. Peet Hickman, Ph.D. (Rice); John P.

Huennekens, Ph.D. (Colorado); Alvin S. Kanofsky,

Ph.D. (Pennsylvania); Thomas L. Koch, Ph.D. (Cal.

Tech.), director, Center for Optical Technologies; Yong W.

Kim, Ph.D. (Michigan); Arnold H. Kritz, Ph.D. (Yale);

George E. McCluskey, Jr., Ph.D. (Pennsylvania); H.

Daniel Ou-Yang, Ph.D. (U.C.L.A.); Jeffrey M. Rickman,

Ph.D. (Carnegie-Mellon); Jean Toulouse, Ph.D.

(Columbia).

Associate professors. Ivan Biaggio, Ph.D. (ETH-

Zurich); Jerome C. Licini, Ph.D. (M.I.T.).

Assistant professor. M. Virginia McSwain, Ph.D.

(Georgia State); Slava V. Rotkin, Ph.D. (Ioffe Inst.-St.

Petersburg); Dimitrios Vavylonis, Ph.D. (Columbia).

Emeritus Professors. W. Beall Fowler, Ph.D.

(Rochester); Shelden H. Radin, Ph.D., (Yale); Russell A.

Shaffer, Ph.D. (Johns Hopkins).

Physics students study the basic laws of mechanics, heat

and thermodynamics, electricity and magnetism, optics,

relativity, quantum mechanics, and elementary particles.

Students also study applications of the basic theories to

the description of bulk matter, including the mechanical,

electric, magnetic, and thermal properties of solids, liq-

uids, gases, and plasmas, and to the description of the

structure of atoms and nuclei. In addition, students

develop the laboratory skills and techniques of the exper-

imental physicist, skills that can be applied in the

experimental search for new knowledge or in applica-

tions of the known theories.

A majority of physics graduates go to graduate school in

physics, often earning the Ph.D. degree. These graduates

take university or college faculty positions, or work on

research in a variety of university, government, or indus-

trial laboratories. Some students choose employment

immediately after the bachelor’s degree. They use their

many approved and free electives to supplement their

science background with applied courses, such as engi-

neering, to develop the skills needed for a position in a

particular area.

Because of the fundamental role of physics in all natural

sciences, students also use the physics major as an excel-

lent preparation for graduate study in many other

scientific areas, such as: optical engineering, applied

mathematics, computer science, biophysics, molecular

biology, astrophysics, geology and geophysics, materials

science and engineering, meteorology, or physical

oceanography. Attractive engineering areas with a high

science content include optical communications, aero-

nautical engineering, nuclear engineering, including both

fission and fusion devices; electrical engineering, includ-

ing instrumentation, electronics and solid-state devices,

electrical discharges and other plasma-related areas; and

mechanical engineering and mechanics, including fluids

and continuum mechanics. The broad scientific back-

ground developed in the physics curriculum is also an

excellent background for professional schools, such as

law (particularly patent law), medicine, and optometry.

Lehigh offers three undergraduate degrees in physics and

two undergraduate degrees in astronomy or astrophysics.

The three physics degrees are the bachelor of arts with a

major in physics and the bachelor of science in physics

in the College of Arts and Sciences, and the bachelor of

engineering physics in the College of Engineering and

Applied Science. The B.A. with a major in astronomy

and the B.S. in astrophysics are in the College of Arts

and Sciences and are described in the Astronomy and

Astrophysics section of this catalog.

In addition, there are several five-year, dual-degree pro-

grams involving physics: The arts-engineering program

(see the Arts-Engineering section of this catalog), the

combination of the bachelor of science program in the

College of Arts and Sciences with Electrical Engineering

(described below), and the combination of electrical

engineering and engineering physics (see the Electrical

Engineering and Engineering Physics section of this cata-

log).

The bachelor of science curriculum in the College of

Arts and Sciences requires somewhat more physics and

mathematics than the bachelor of arts major, while the

latter provides more free electives and three fewer hours

for graduation. By making good use of the electives in

these programs, either can prepare a student for graduate

work in physics or the physical aspects of other sciences

or engineering disciplines, or for technical careers requir-

ing a basic knowledge of physics. The bachelor of arts

curriculum is particularly useful for those planning

careers in areas where some knowledge of physics is

needed or useful, but is not the main subject, such as sci-

Physics 369

ence writing, secondary school teaching, patent law, or

medicine.

The bachelor of science in engineering physics curricu-

lum in the College of Engineering and Applied Science

requires an engineering concentration in either solid

state electronics or optical sciences, in addition to regular

physics and mathematics courses. This four-year pro-

gram prepares students to do engineering work in an

overlap area between physics and engineering, which

may be engineering in a forefront area in which it is

desirable to have more physics knowledge than the typi-

cal engineer has, or may be experimental physics which

either relies heavily on fore-front engineering or in which

the nature of the problem dictates that scientists and

engineers will accomplish more working together rather

than separately.

Requirements and recommended course sequences are

described below for programs in the College of Arts and

Sciences and in the P. C. Rossin College of Engineering

and Applied Science. Note that no more than 6 credits

of military science may be applied toward any degree

program.

College of Arts and Sciences

Bachelor of Arts Program Requirements:

PHY (10 or 11), (13 or 21), 12, 22, 31

MATH 21, 22, 23, 205

CHM 30

At least one of the two advanced physics laboratories

(PHY 190, PHY 262).

At least 18 credits of advanced physics courses must be

selected from the following list: PHY 201, 212, 213,

215, 332, 340, 342, 348, 352, 355, 362, 363, 364, 365,

369, 380.

A total of 120 credits are required for the BA in Physics

Bachelor of Science Program Requirements:

PHY (10 or 11), 21, 12, 22, 31

MATH 21, 22, 23, 205, 322

CHM 30

ENGR 1 or an equivalent course in scientific computing

PHY 190, 262

PHY 212, 213, 215, 362, 364, 340

At least 17 credits of approved electives in physics, physi-

cal sciences or technical areas must be selected in

consultation with the advisor. Included in this group

must be three of the following courses: PHY 363, 369,

(352 or 355), and (348 or 365) and 380. Students plan-

ning graduate work in physics are advised to include

PHY 273 and 369 among their electives.

A total of 123 credits are required for the BS in Physics

The recommended sequence of courses for the two

physics degree programs are indicated below. General

electives are not indicated, but they should be selected in

consultation with the advisor so that educational goals

and total credit hour requirements are satisfied.

Physics Degree Programs

College of Arts & Sciences

Bachelor of Arts Bachelor of Science

Fall Spring Fall Spring

Freshman Year

ENGL 1 (3) ENGL 2 (3) ENGL 1 (3) ENGL 2 (3)

PHY 10 or 11 (4) CHM 30 (4) PHY10 or 11(4) CHM 30 (4)

PHY 12 (1) PHY 12 (1)

MATH 21 (4) MATH 22 (4) MATH 21 (4) MATH 22 (4)

Col. Sem. Dist. Req. (4) Col.Sem *ENGR 1 (3)

Sophomore Year

PHY 13 or 21 (3-4) PHY 31 (3) PHY 21 (4) PHY 31 (3)

PHY 22 (1) PHY 190 or elective (3) PHY 22 (1) PHY

190 (3)

MATH 23 (4) MATH 205 (3) MATH 23 (4) MATH 205 (3)

Dist. Req. (8) Dist. Req. (4) Dist. Req. (8) Dist. Req. (4)

Appr.Elec. (4)

Junior Year

Adv. PHY. (6) Adv.PHY. (6) PHY 212 (3) PHY 213 (3)

PHY 262 or elective (2-3) PHY 362(3) PHY

262 (2)

Jr. Writing (3) MATH 322 (3) PHY 364 (3)

Jr. Writing (3) PHY 215 (4)

Senior Year

Adv. PHY. (6) PHY 340 (3) Appr. Elec. (6)

Appr. Elec (8) Dist.Req. (4)

*or an equivalent course in scientific computing

P.C. Rossin College of Engineering &

Applied Sciences

The tables below indicate both course requirements and

recommended enrollment sequences.

Bachelor of Engineering Physics

with a concentration in

Solid State Electronics Optical Sciences

Freshman Year

Fall Spring Fall Spring

ENGL 1 (3) ENGL 2 (3) ENGL 1 (3) ENGL 2 (3)

PHY 11 (4) CHM 30 (4) PHY 11 (4) CHM 30 (4)

PHY 12 (1) ENGR 5 (3) PHY 12 (1) ENGR 5 (3)

MATH 21 (4) MATH 22 (4) MATH 21 (4) MATH 22 (4)

ENGR 1 (3) ENGR 1 (3)

[15] [14] [15] [14]

Sophomore Year

PHY 21 (4) PHY 31 (3) PHY 21 (4) PHY 31 (3)

PHY 22 (1) PHY 190 (3) PHY 22 (1) PHY 190 (3)

MATH 23 (4) MATH 205 (3) MATH 23 (4) MATH 205 (3)

ECO 1 (4) MATH 208 (3) ECO 1 (4) MATH 208 (3)

ECE 81 (4) ECE 108 (4) ECE 81 (4) ECE 108 (4)

[17] [16] [17] [16]

Junior Year

PHY 212 (3) PHY 213 (3) PHY 212 (3) PHY 213 (3)

ECE 33 (4) PHY 262 (2) PHY 362 (3) PHY 262 (2)

ECE 123 (3) PHY 215 (4) OE - Elec (3) PHY 215 (4)

MATH 322 (3) ECE 126 (3) HSS (4) OE - Elec (3)

HSS (4) HSS (3) MATH 322 (3) HSS (3)

Elective (3) Elective (3)

[17] [18] [16] [18]

Senior Year

PHY 340 or (3) HSS (6) PHY 340 or (3) PHY 355 (3)

ME 104 ME 104

PHY 363 (3) SSE - Elec* (8) PHY 352 (3) Electives (3)

PHY 362 (3) Electives (4) OE - Elec (6) OE -Elec (6)

SSE - Elec (3) Electives (5) HSS (6)

Elective (4)

[16] [18] [17] [18]

[131] [131]

*The 11 credit hours of SSE (Solid State Engineering) elec-

tives must include ECE 257 or 258 or PHY 273.

**The 18 credit hours of OE (Optical Engineering) electives

must include ECE 257 or 258 or PHY 273. Must include

at least two of ECE 347, ECE 348, ECE 371, ECE 372.

Other advanced physics or engineering courses may be

included among the SSE or OE electives with the approval

of the student’s advisor.

370 Lehigh University Course Catalog 2009-2010

Combined B.S.(Physics)/B.S.(Electrical

Engineering)

The combined arts/engineering programs resulting in

bachelors degrees in both physics and electrical engineer-

ing may be arranged so that either of the two degrees is

completed within the first four years. The suggested cur-

ricula are:

Physics-Elec. Engr Elec. Engr-Physics

(Physics first) (Electrical Engineering First)

Fall Spring Fall Spring

Freshman Year

ENGL 1 (3) ENGL 2 (3) ENGL 1 (3) ENGL 2 (3)

PHY 11 (4) CHM 30 (4) PHY 11 (4) CHM 30 (4)

PHY 12 (1) ENGR 5 (3) PHY 12 (1) ENGR 5 (3)

MATH 21 (4) MATH 22 (4) MATH 21 (4) MATH 22 (4)

ENGR 1 (3) ENGR 1 (3)

[15] [14] [15] [14]

Sophomore Year

PHY 21 (4) PHY 31 (3) PHY 21 (4) PHY 31 (3)

PHY 22 (1) ECO 1 (4) PHY 22 (1) ECO 1 (4)

MATH 23 (4) MATH 205 (3) MATH 23 (4) MATH 205 (3)

ECE 33 (4) MATH 208 (3) ECE 33 (4) HSS (3)

ECE 81 (4) ECE 82 (1) ECE 81 (4) ECE 82 (1)

ECE 108 (4) ECE 108 (4)

[17] [18] [17] [18]

Junior Year

PHY 212 (3) PHY 213 (3) PHY 212 (3) PHY 213 (3)

PHY 362 (3) PHY 262 (2) ECE 121 (2) ECE 126 (3)

PHY Appr. (3) PHY 364 (3) ECE 123 (3) ECE 138 (2)

Elective

MATH 322 (3) PHY 215 (4) MATH 208 (3) ECE 136 (3)

HSS (4) HSS (3) MATH 231 (3) ECE 125 (3)

Jr. Writing (3) Jr. Writing (3) HSS (3)

[16] [18] [17] [17]

Senior Year

PHY 340 (3) Dist. Req. (4) PHY 362 (3) PHY 364 (3)

PHY Appr. (3) PHY Appr. (5) ECE Appr. (3) ECE Appr. (6)

Elective Elective Elective Elective

ECE 121 (2) ECE 126 (3) ECE 257 (3) PHY 215 (4)

ECE 123 (3) ECE 138 (2) Elective (4) HSS (2)

HSS (3) ECE 125 (3) HSS (4) ECE 258 (2)

Elective (3)

[17] [17] [17] [17]

Fifth Year

ECE 257 (2) ECE 136 (3) PHY 340 (3) PHY 262 (2)

ECE Appr (3) ECE Appr (9) PHY Appr (6) PHY Appr (5)

Elective Elective Elective Elective

Electives (5) Elective. (3) MATH 322 (3) Electives (3)

MATH 231 (3) Electives (3) HSS (3)

HSS (3) Dist. Req (3)

[16] [15] [15] [16]

[163] [163]

Physics approved electives: three courses selected from

PHY 363, 364, 369, (352 or 355), and (348 or 365) and

380.

Students must satisfy both the HSS requirements of the

College of Engineering and Applied Science and the dis-

tribution requirements, including the junior writing

intensive requirement, of the College of Arts and

Sciences. Courses appropriate for both may be counted

in both categories.

Approved electives are subject to the approval of the stu-

dent’s advisor. Students planning graduate work in

physics are advised to include PHY 273 and 369 among

their electives.

Astronomy/Astrophysics Degree Programs

(See the Astronomy section in this catalog.)

Research opportunities

A majority of physics, astronomy, and engineering

physics majors take advantage of opportunities to partic-

ipate in research under the direction of a faculty

member. Research areas available to undergraduates are

the same as those available to graduate students; they are

described below under the heading For Graduate

Students. Undergraduate student research is arranged

informally as early as the sophomore (or, occasionally,

freshman) year at the initiation of the student or formal-

ly as a senior research project. In addition, a number of

students receive financial support to do research during

the summer between their junior and senior years, either

as Physics Department Summer Research Participants or

as Sherman Fairchild Scholars.

The use of electives. The electives available in each of

the physics and astronomy curricula provide the student

with an opportunity to develop special interests and to

prepare for graduate work in various allied areas. In par-

ticular, the many available upper-level physics,

mathematics, and engineering courses can be used by

students in consultation with their faculty advisors to

structure programs with special emphasis in a variety of

areas such as optical communications, solid-state elec-

tronics, or biophysics.

Departmental Honors

Students may earn departmental honors by satisfying the

following requirements:

• Grade point average of at least 3.50 in physics courses.

• Complete 6 credits of Physics 272 (research), or sum-

mer REU project, submit a written report, and give

an oral presentation open to faculty and students.

• Complete three courses from the list: Physics (392 or

342 or 350)348, 363, (352 or 355), 369, 380, any

400 level Physics course.

For students majoring in astronomy or astrophysics, see

the Astronomy and Astrophysics section of this catalog.

Five-year combined bachelor/master’s

programs

Five-year programs that lead to successive bachelor and

master’s degrees are available. These programs satisfy all

of the requirements of one of the five bachelor’s degrees

in physics (B.A., B.S., B.S.E.P.) and astronomy/astro-

physics (B.A., B.S.), plus the requirements of the M.S. in

physics in the final year. Depending upon the under-

graduate degree received, one summer in residence may

be required. Interested students should contact the asso-

ciate chair of physics no later than the spring semester of

their junior year for further detail.

The minor program

The minor in physics consists of 15 credits of physics

courses, excluding Physics 5 and 7. No more than one

physics course required in a student’s major program

may be included in the minor program. The minor pro-

gram must be designed in consultation with the physics

department chair.

Undergraduate Courses in Physics and

Astronomy

PHY 5. Concepts in Physics (4) spring

Fundamental discoveries and concepts of physics and

their relevance to current issues and modern technology.

For students not intending to major in science or engi-

neering. Lectures, demonstrations, group activities, and

laboratories using modern instrumentation and comput-

ers. This is a non-calculus course; no previous

background in physics is assumed. Three class meetings

Physics 371

and one laboratory period per week. No prerequisites.

Staff (NS)

PHY 7. (ASTR 7) Introduction to Astronomy (3)

fall

Introduction to planetary, stellar, galactic, and extragalac-

tic astronomy. An examination of the surface

characteristics, atmospheres, and motions of planets and

other bodies in our solar system. Properties of the sun,

stars, and galaxies, including the birth and death of stars,

stellar explosions, and the formation of stellar remnants

such as white dwarfs, neutron stars, pulsars, and black

holes. Quasars, cosmology, and the evolution of the uni-

verse. May not be taken by students who have previously

completed ASTR/PHY 105, 201, or 202. (NS)

PHY 8. (ASTR 8) Introduction to Astronomy

Laboratory (1) fall

Laboratory to accompany PHY 7 (ASTR 7). (NS)

PHY 9. Introductory Physics I Completion (1-2)

For students who have Advanced Placement or transfer

credit for 2 or 3 credits of PHY 11. The student will be

scheduled for the appropriate part of PHY 11 to com-

plete the missing material. The subject matter and credit

hours will be determined by the Physics Department for

each student. Students with AP Physics C credit for

mechanics will take the thermodynamics and kinetic the-

ory part of PHY 11 for one credit. Prerequisite: MATH

21, 31, or 51 previously or concurrently; and consent of

the department. (NS)

PHY 10. General Physics I (4) fall

Statics, dynamics, conservation laws, thermodynamics,

kinetic theory of gases, fluids. Primarily for architecture,

biological science, earth and environmental science stu-

dents. Prerequisite: MATH 21, 31, or 51, previously or

concurrently. Dierolf (NS)

PHY 11. Introductory Physics I (4)

Kinematics, frames of reference, laws of motion in

Newtonian theory and in special relativity, conservation

laws, as applied to the mechanics of mass points; temper-

ature, heat and the laws of thermodynamics; kinetic

theory of gases. Two lectures and two recitations per

week. Prerequisite: MATH 21, 31 or 51, previously or

concurrently. Licini (NS)

PHY 12. Introductory Physics Laboratory I (1)

A laboratory course taken concurrently with PHY 11.

Experiments in mechanics, heat, and DC electrical cir-

cuits. One three-hour laboratory period per week.

Prerequisite: PHY 10 or 11, preferably concurrently.

Kanofsky (NS)

PHY 13. General Physics (3) spring

A continuation of PHY 10, primarily for biological sci-

ence and earth and environmental science students.

Electrostatics, electromagnetism, light, sound, atomic

physics, nuclear physics, and radioactivity. Prerequisites:

PHY 10 or 11 and MATH 21, 31, or 51. Staff (NS)

PHY 19. Introductory Physics II Completion (1-

For students who have Advanced Placement or transfer

credit for 2 or 3 credits of PHY 21. The student will be

scheduled for the appropriate part of PHY 21 to com-

plete the missing material. The subject matter and credit

hours will be determined by the Physics Department for

each student. Students with AP Physics C credit for elec-

tricity and magnetism will take the optics and modern

physics part of PHY 21 for one credit. Prerequisite: 4

credits of PHY 10 or 11, MATH 23, 32, or 52 previous-

ly or concurrently; and consent of the department. (NS)

PHY 21. Introductory Physics II (4)

A continuation of PHY 11. Electrostatics and magneto-

statics; DC circuits; Maxwell’s equations; waves; physical

and geometrical optics; introduction to modern physics.

Two lectures and two recitations per week. Prerequisite:

PHY 11; MATH 23, 32, or 52, previously or concur-

rently. Hickman/Kim (NS)

PHY 22. Introductory Physics Laboratory II (1)

A laboratory course to be taken concurrently with PHY

21. One three-hour laboratory period per week.

Prerequisite: PHY 12; PHY 21, preferably concurrently.

Licini (NS).

PHY 31. Introduction to Quantum Mechanics (3)

spring

Experimental basis and historical development of quan-

tum mechanics; the Schroedinger equation;

one-dimensional problems; angular momentum and the

hydrogen atom; many-electron systems; spectra; selected

applications. Three lectures per week. Prerequisite: PHY

13 or 21; MATH 205, previously or concurrently.

Hickman (NS)

PHY 91. Measurement and Transducers (1)

Computer-assisted laboratory course, dealing with physi-

cal phenomena in mechanics, electricity and magnetism,

optics, spectroscopy and thermodynamics. Measurement

strategies are developed and transducers devised.

Computer simulation, analysis software, digital data

acquisition. Prerequisites: PHY 21 and 22 or their equiv-

alent or consent of chairperson. Kim (NS)

PHY 105. (ASTR 105, EES 105) Planetary

Astronomy (4) fall

Structure and dynamics of planetary interiors, surfaces,

and atmospheres. Models for the formation of the solar

system and planetary evolution. Internal structure, sur-

face topology, and composition of planets and other

bodies in our solar system. Comparative study of plane-

tary atmospheres. Organic materials in the solar system.

Properties of the interplanetary medium, including dust

and meteoroids. Orbital dynamics. Extrasolar planetary

systems. McCluskey (NS)

PHY 110 (ASTR 110) Methods of Observational

Astronomy (1)

Techniques of astronomical observation, data reduction,

and analysis. Photometry, spectroscopy, CCD imaging,

and interferometry. Computational analysis.

Examination of ground- based and spacecraft instrumen-

tation, and data transmission, reduction, and analysis.

McCluskey (NS)

PHY 190. Electronics (3) spring

DC and AC circuits, diodes, transistors, operational

amplifiers, oscillators, and digital circuitry. Two laborato-

ries and one recitation per week. Prerequisites: PHY 21

and 22, or PHY 13 and 22. Stavola (NS)

For Advanced Undergraduates And Graduate

Students

PHY 201. (ASTR 201) Modern Astrophysics I (4)

fall

Physics of stellar atmospheres and interiors, and the for-

mation, evolution, and death of stars. Variable stars. The

372 Lehigh University Course Catalog 2009-2010

evolution of binary star systems. Novae, supernovae,

white dwarfs, neutron stars, pulsars, and black holes.

Stellar spectra, chemical compositions, and thermody-

namic processes. Thermonuclear reactions. Interstellar

medium. Prerequisites: PHY 10 and 13, or PHY 11 and

21, MATH 22 or 52. McSwain (NS)

PHY 202. (ASTR 202) Modern Astrophysics II (4)

spring

The Milky Way Galaxy, galactic morphology, and evolu-

tionary processes. Active galaxies and quasars. Observed

properties of the universe. Relativistic cosmology, and

the origin, evolution and fate of the universe. Elements

of General Relativity and associated phenomena.

Prerequisites: PHY 10 and 13, or PHY 11 and 21,

MATH 22 or 52. McCluskey (NS)

PHY 212. Electricity and Magnetism I (3) fall

Electrostatics, magnetostatics, and electromagnetic

induction. Prerequisites: PHY 21 or 13; MATH 205,

previously or concurrently. Rotkin (NS)

PHY 213. Electricity and Magnetism II (3) spring

Maxwell’s equations, Poynting’s theorem, potentials, the

wave equation, waves in vacuum and in materials, trans-

mission and reflection at boundaries, guided waves,

dispersion, electromagnetic field of moving charges, radi-

ation, Lorentz invariance and other symmetries of

Maxwell’s equations. Prerequisite: PHY 212. Toulouse

(NS)

PHY 215. Classical Mechanics I (4) spring

Kinematics and dynamics of point masses with various

force laws; conservation laws; systems of particles; rotat-

ing coordinate systems; rigid body motions; topics from

Lagrange’s and Hamilton’s formulations of mechanics;

continuum mechanics. Prerequisites: PHY 21 or 13 and

MATH 205, previously or concurrently. DeLeo (NS)

PHY 262. Advanced Physics Laboratory (2) spring

Laboratory practice, including machine shop, vacuum

systems, and computer interfacing. Experiment selected

from geometrical optics, interference and diffraction,

spectroscopy, lasers, fiber optics, and quantum phenome-

na. Prerequisites: PHY 21 and 22 or PHY 13 and 14.

Staff (NS)

PHY 273. Research (2-3)

Participation in current research projects being carried

out within the department. Intended for seniors major-

ing in the field. May be repeated for credit. (NS)

PHY 281. Basic Physics I (3)

A course designed especially for secondary-school teach-

ers in the master teacher program. Presupposing a

background of two semesters of college mathematics

through differential and integral calculus and of two

semesters of college physics, the principles of physics are

presented with emphasis on their fundamental nature

rather than on their applications. Open only to second-

ary-school teachers and those planning to undertake

teaching of secondary-school physics. (NS)

PHY 282. Basic Physics II (3)

Continuation of PHY 281. (NS)

PHY 332. (ASTR 332) High-Energy

Astrophysics (3) spring, odd numbered years.

Observation and theory of X-ray and gamma-ray

sources, quasars, pulsars, radio galaxies, neutron stars,

black holes. Results from ultraviolet, X-ray and gamma

ray satellites. Prerequisites: MATH 23 or 33, previously

or concurrently, and PHY 21. McCluskey (NS)

PHY 340. Thermal Physics (3) fall

Basic principles of thermodynamics, kinetic theory, and

statistical mechanics, with emphasis on applications to

classical and quantum mechanical physical systems.

Prerequisites: PHY 13 or 21, and MATH 23, 32 or 52.

Kim (NS)

PHY 342. (ASTR 342) Relativity and

Cosmology (3) spring, even numbered years.

Special and general relativity. Schwarzschild and Kerr

black holes. Super massive stars. Relativistic theories of

the origin and evolution of the universe. Prerequisites:

MATH 23 or 33, previously or concurrently, and PHY

21. McCluskey (NS)

PHY 348. Plasma Physics (3)

Single particle behavior in electric and magnetic fields,

plasmas as fluids, waves in plasmas, transport properties,

kinetic theory of plasmas, controlled thermonuclear

fusion devices. Prerequisites: PHY 21, MATH 205, and

senior standing or consent of the chairman of the

department. Kritz (NS)

PHY 352. Modern Optics (3)

Paraxial optics, wave and vectorial theory of light, coher-

ence and interference, diffraction, crystal optics, and

lasers. Prerequisites: MATH 205, and PHY 212 or ECE

202. Toulouse (NS)

PHY 355. Lasers and Non-linear Optics (3)

Basic principles and selected applications of lasers and

non- linear optics. Topics include electromagnetic theory

of optical beams, optical resonators, laser oscillation, non-

linear interaction of radiation with atomic systems,

electro- and acousto-optics, optical noise, optical wave-

guides, and laser devices. Prerequisites: PHY 31; PHY 213

or ECE 203, previously or concurrently. Biaggio (NS)

PHY 362. Atomic and Molecular Structure (3) fall

Review of quantum mechanical treatment of one-elec-

tron atoms, electron spin and fine structure,

multi-electron atoms, Pauli principle, Zeeman and Stark

effects, hyperfine structure, structure and spectra of sim-

ple molecules. Prerequisite: PHY 31 or CHM 341.

Biaggio. (NS)

PHY 363. Physics of Solids (3) fall

Introduction to the theory of solids with particular refer-

ence to the physics of metals and semiconductors.

Prerequisite: PHY 31 or Mat 316 or CHM 341, and

PHY 340 or equivalent, previously or concurrently.

Stavola (NS)

PHY 364. Nuclear and Elementary Particle

Physics (3) spring

Models, properties, and classification of nuclei and ele-

mentary particles; nuclear and elementary particle

reactions and decays; radiation and particle detectors;

accelerators; applications. Prerequisites: PHY 31 and

MATH 205. McCluskey (NS)

PHY 365. Physics of Fluids (3) spring

Concepts of fluid dynamics; continuum and molecular

approaches; waves, shocks and nozzle flows; nature of

turbulence; experimental methods of study. Prerequisites:

PHY 212 or ECE 202, and PHY 340 or ME 104 or

equivalent, previously or concurrently. Kim (NS)

Physics 373

PHY 369. Quantum Mechanics I (3) spring

Principles of quantum mechanics: Schroedinger,

Heisenberg, and Dirac formulations. Applications to

simple problems. Prerequisites: PHY 31, MATH 205;

PHY 215, previously or concurrently. Rotkin (NS)

PHY 372. Special Topics in Physics (1-3)

Special topics in physics not sufficiently covered in the gen-

eral courses. Lecture and recitations or conferences. (NS)

PHY 380. Introduction to Computational

Physics (3) spring

Numerical solution of physics and engineering problems

using computational techniques. Topics include linear

and nonlinear equations, interpolation, eigenvalues, ordi-

nary differential equations, partial differential equations,

statistical analysis of data, Monte Carlo, and molecular

dynamics methods. Prerequisite: MATH 205 previously

or concurrently. Vavylonis (NS)

For Graduate Students

The department of physics has concentrated its research

activities within several fields of physics, with the result

that a number of projects are available in each area.

Current departmental research activities include the fol-

lowing:

Condensed matter physics. Areas of interest include the

optical and electronic properties of defects in semicon-

ductors and insulators, quantum phenomena in

semiconductor devices, collective dynamics of disordered

solids, structural phase transitions in ferroelectrics and

superconducting crystals, theory of quantum charge

transport in nanotubes and single molecule systems,

physics of nano devices.

Atomic and molecular physics. Research topics include

atomic and molecular spectroscopy and collision process-

es. Recent work has addressed velocity-changing

collisions, diffusion, energy-pooling collisions, charge

exchange, fine structure mixing, light-induced drift and

radiation trapping.

Nonlinear Optics and Photonics. Research topics

include nonlinear light-matter interaction that enable the

control of light with light, four-wave mixing, phase con-

jugation, resonant Brillioun scattering, ferroelectric

domain patterning for quasi phase matching, wave-

guides, photonic crystals, holey and other specialty

fibers, and the application of photonics to biological sys-

tems.

Plasma physics. Computational studies of magnetically

confined toroidal plasmas address anomalous thermal

and particle transport, large scale instabilities, and

radiofrequency heating. Laboratory studies address colli-

sional and collisionless phenomena of supercritical

laser-produced plasmas.

Statistical physics. Investigation is underway of nonequi-

librium fluctuations in gases, chaotic transitions and 1/f

dynamics, light-scattering spectroscopy, colloidal suspen-

sions, the nonlinear dynamics of granular particles, and

pattern formation in nonequilibrium dissipative systems,

including the kinetics of phase transitions and spa-

tiotemporal chaos.

Soft Condensed Matter and Biological Physics. Current

research topics include both the experimental and theo-

retical studies of complex fluids including biological

polymers, colloids, and biological cells and tissues. Laser

tweezers, Raman scattering, photoluminescence and

advanced 3-D optical imaging techniques are integrated

for investigating the structures and dynamical properties

of these systems. Theoretical studies focus on the kinetics

of phase transitions, including the crystallization of glob-

ular and membrane proteins and also the modeling of

interactions of proteins and nanotubes.

Complex fluids. Polymers in aqueous solutions, colloidal

suspensions, and surfactant solutions are investigated

using techniques such as “laser tweezers,” video-

enhanced microscopy, and laser light scattering. Areas of

interest include the structures of polymers at liquid-solid

interfaces and micro-rheology of confined macromole-

cules. Recent work addresses systems of biological

significance.

Computational physics. Several of the above areas

involve the use of state-of-the-art computers to address

large-scale computational problems. Areas of interest

include atom-atom collisions, simulations of tokamak

plasmas, the statistical behavior of ensembles of many

particles, the calculation of electronic wave functions for

molecules and solids, and the multi-scale modeling of

nano-bio systems.

Candidates for advanced degrees normally will have

completed, before beginning their graduate studies, the

requirements for a bachelor’s degree with a major in

physics, including advanced mathematics beyond differ-

ential and integral calculus. Students lacking the

equivalent of this preparation will make up deficiencies

in addition to taking the specified work for the degree

sought.

At least eight semester hours of general college physics

using calculus are required for admission to all 200- and

300-level courses. Additional prerequisites for individual

courses are noted in the course descriptions. Admission

to 400-level courses generally is predicated on satisfacto-

ry completion of corresponding courses in the 200- and

300-level groups or their equivalent.

Facilities for Research

Research facilities are housed in the Sherman Fairchild

Center for the Physical Sciences, containing Lewis

Laboratory, the Sherman Fairchild Laboratory for Solid

State Studies, and a large connecting research wing.

Well-equipped laboratory facilities are available for

experimental investigations in research areas at the fron-

tiers of physics. Instruments used for experimental

studies include a wide variety of laser systems ranging

from femtosecond and picosecond pulsed lasers to stabi-

lized single-mode cw Ti-sapphire and dye lasers. There is

also a Fourier-transform spectrometer, cryogenic equip-

ment that achieves temperatures as low as 0.05K and

magnetic fields up to 9 Tesla, a facility for luminescence

microscopy, and a laser-tweezers system for studies of

complex fluids. A 3MeV van de Graaff accelerator is

used to study radiation-produced defects in solids. The

Fairchild Laboratory also contains a processing laborato-

ry where advanced Si devices can be fabricated and

studied. All laboratories are well furnished with electron-

ic instrumentation for data acquisition and analysis.

Several professors are members of the interdisciplinary

Center for Optical Technologies that offers a wide range

of state-of-the-art facilities including a fiber drawing

tower, waveguide and fiber characterization labs, and a

new epitaxy facility for the growth of III-V semiconduc-

tor structures and devices. Extensive up-to-date

374 Lehigh University Course Catalog 2009-2010

computer facilities are available on campus and in the

department. All computing resources can be accessed

directly from graduate student and faculty offices

through a high speed backbone. Researchers have access

to the national Research Internet (Internet 2) via a 155

Mbps gateway.

Graduate Courses in Physics

PHY 411. Survey of Nuclear and Elementary

Particle Physics (3)

Intended for non-specialists. Fundamentals and modern

advanced topics in nuclear and elementary particle

physics. Topics include: nuclear force, structure of nuclei,

nuclear models and reactions, scattering, elementary par-

ticle classification, SU(3), quarks, gluons, quark flavor

and color, leptons, gauge theories, GUT, the big bang.

Prerequisite: PHY 369. Staff

PHY 420. Mechanics (3) fall

Includes the variational methods of classical mechanics,

methods of Hamilton and Lagrange, canonical transfor-

mations, Hamilton-Jacobi Theory. Vavylonis

PHY 421. Electricity & Magnetism I (3) spring

Electrostatics, magnetostatics, Maxwell’s equations,

dynamics of charged particles, multipole fields. McSwain

PHY 422. Electricity & Magnetism II (3) fall

Electrodynamics, electromagnetic radiation, physical

optics, electrodynamics in anisotropic media. Special

theory of relativity. Prerequisite: PHY 421. Huennekens

PHY 424. Quantum Mechanics II (3) fall

General principles of quantum theory; approximation

methods; spectra; symmetry laws; theory of scattering.

Prerequisite: PHY 369 or equivalent. DeLeo

PHY 425. Quantum Mechanics III (3)

A continuation of Phys 424. Relativistic quantum theory

of the electron; theory of radiation. Staff

PHY 428. Methods of Mathematical Physics I (3)

fall

Analytical and numerical methods of solving the ordi-

nary and partial differential equations that occur in

physics and engineering. Includes treatments of complex

variables, special functions, product solutions and inte-

gral transforms. Gunton

PHY 429. Methods of Mathematical Physics II (3)

spring

Continuation of Physics 428 to include the use of inte-

gral equations. Green’s functions, group theory, and

more on numerical methods. Prerequisite: PHY 428.

Staff

PHY 431. Theory of Solids (3)

Advanced topics in the theory of the electronic structure

of solids. Many-electron theory. Theory of transport

phenomena. Magnetic properties, optical properties.

Superconductivity. Point imperfections. Prerequisites:

PHY 363 and PHY 424. Rickman

PHY 442. Statistical Mechanics (3) spring

General principles of statistical mechanics with applica-

tion to thermodynamics and the equilibrium properties

of matter. Prerequisites: PHY 340 and 369. Gunton

PHY 443. Nonequilibrium Statistical

Mechanics (3)

A continuation of PHY 442. Applications of kinetic the-

ory and statistical mechanics to nonequilibrium process-

es; non- equilibrium thermodynamics. Prerequisite: PHY

442. Staff

PHY 446. Atomic and Molecular Physics (3)

Advanced topics in the experimental and theoretical

study of atomic and molecular structure. Topics include

fine and hyperfine structure, Zeeman effect, interaction

of light with matter, multi-electron atoms, molecular

spectroscopy, spectral line broadening atom-atom and

electron-atom collisions and modern experimental tech-

niques. Prerequisite: PHY 424 or consent of the

department. Huennekens

PHY 455. Physics of Nonlinear Phenomena (3)

Basic concepts, theoretical methods of analysis and

experimental development in nonlinear phenomena and

chaos. Topics include nonlinear dynamics, including

period-multiplying routes to chaos and strange attrac-

tors, fractal geometry and devil’s staircase. Examples of

both dissipative and conservative systems will be drawn

from fluid flows, plasmas, nonlinear optics, mechanics

and waves in disordered media. Prerequisite: graduate

standing in science or engineering, or consent of the

chairman of the department. Staff

PHY 462. Theories of Elementary Particle

Interactions (3)

Relativistic quantum theory with applications to the

strong, electromagnetic and weak interactions of elemen-

tary particles. Prerequisite: PHY 425. Staff

PHY 467. Nuclear Theory (3)

Theory of low-energy nuclear phenomena within the

framework of nonrelativistic quantum mechanics. Staff

PHY 471. (MECH 411) Continuum Mechanics (3)

An introduction to the continuum theories of the

mechanics of solids and fluids. This includes a discussion

of the mechanical and thermodynamical bases of the

subject, as well as the use of invariance principles in for-

mulating constitutive equations. Applications of theories

to specific problems are given. Staff

PHY 472. Special Topics in Physics (1-3)

Selected topics not sufficiently covered in the more gen-

eral courses. May be repeated for credit.

PHY 474. Seminar in Modern Physics (3)

Discussion of important advances in experimental

physics. May be repeated for credit when a different

topic is offered.

PHY 475. Seminar in Modern Physics (3)

Discussion of important advances in theoretical physics.

May be repeated for credit when a different topic is

offered.

PHY 482. Applied Optics (3)

Review of ray and wave optics with extension to inho-

mogenous media, polarized optical waves, crystal optics,

beam optics in free space (Gaussian and other types of

beams) and transmission through various optical ele-

ments, guided wave propagation in planar waveguides

and fibers (modal analysis), incidence of chromatic and

polarization mode dispersion, guided propagation of

pulses, nonlinear effects in waveguides (solitons), period-

ic interactions in waveguides, acousto-optic and

electro-optics. Prerequisite: PHY 352 or equivalent.

Toulouse

Political Science 375

PHY 491. Research (3)

Research problems in experimental or theoretical

physics.

PHY 492. Research (3)

Continuation of PHY 491. May be repeated for credit.

Political Science

Professors. Richard K. Matthews, Ph.D. (Toronto),

NEH Distinguished University Professor, Chairperson;

Edward P. Morgan, Ph.D. (Brandeis), Distinguished

University Professor; Laura Katz Olson, Ph.D.

(Colorado).

Associate professors. Frank L. Davis, Ph.D. (North

Carolina); Vera Fennell, Ph.D. (U. of Chicago); Janet M.

Laible, Ph.D. (Yale); Brian K. Pinaire, Ph.D. (Rutgers);

Albert H. Wurth Jr., Ph.D. (North Carolina).

Assistant professors. Breena Holland, Ph.D. (U. of

Chicago); Nandini Deo, Ph.D. (Yale); Holona Ochs,

Ph.D. (U. of Kansas).

The major in political science is designed to promote

understanding of political ideas, institutions and process-

es and to develop skills in analyzing and evaluating

political problems.

A balanced program within the discipline, one that

exposes the student to various areas of inquiry in politi-

cal institutions and political processes as well as in the

comparative and philosophical perspectives of political

analysis, has been the way in which the goals of the

major program generally have been achieved. While the

major program outlined below will prove adequate for

most student needs, it may be that some special factors

such as late transfer or unusual interests and/or abilities

the outlined program does not accommodate some stu-

dents. In that case the students may, in consultation with

their advisers, develop a major program that in their

judgment will more adequately fulfill those needs.

The faculty adviser to the student majoring in political

science is designated by the department. The adviser

consults with the student and approves the major pro-

gram. The adviser attempts to help the student relate

courses offered by the department to the student’s educa-

tional goals. The adviser also may act as a resource for

the student, and may suggest courses in other disciplines,

language courses, and courses in research techniques that

may be of benefit.

A variety of experiential opportunities are available to

undergraduates majoring in political science. The depart-

ment, for example, offers a Community Politics

Internship every semester that includes opportunities for

internship placements in either local government, private

agencies or law offices. Students are also encouraged to

apply for off-campus internship opportunities, e.g.,

American University’s Washington Semester Program

and The Philadelphia Center’s Internship in

Philadelphia.

Completion of the political science major is considered

suitable training for the undergraduate who wishes to go

on to law school, to become a social science teacher, or

to work as a governmental official, party or civic leader,

public affairs commentator, or staff member of a govern-

ment research bureau. In addition, the business sector

continues to provide opportunities in areas such as bank-

ing, insurance, and marketing for bachelor of arts

graduates with training in the social sciences. Graduate

study is advisable for students contemplating certain

careers: college teaching, research, or public manage-

ment, for example.

The three core courses are required. Individual excep-

tions may be made, for good reasons, by the major

adviser with the approval of the department chairman.

Major Requirements

POLS 1 American Political System (4)

POLS 3 Comparative Politics (4)

POLS 100 Introduction to Political Thought (4)

POLS 101 Ancient Political Heritage (4) or

POLS 102 Modern Political Heritage (4)

Electives

Six elective courses with at least one course from each of

the two fields listed below. One of the electives may,

with the consent of the department, be in a cognate

field.

American Politics, Public Law and Interdisciplinary

POLS 104 Political Sociology (4)

POLS 107 The Politics of the Environment (4)

POLS 115 Technology As Politics (4)

POLS 179 Politics of Women (4)

POLS 230 Social Movements and Legacies of the

1960s (4)

POLS 232 The Vietnam War in Politics, Media,

and Memory (4)

POLS 240 Law and Order (4)

POLS 274 Political Parties and Elections (4)

POLS 282 First Ladies and the Changing Role of

Women (4)

POLS 302 Comparative State Politics (4)

POLS 306 Public Policy Process (4)

POLS 317 The American Presidency (4)

POLS 326 Organizing for Democracy (4)

POLS 328 U.S. Politics and the Environment (4)

POLS 329 Propaganda, Media, and American

Politics (4)

POLS 331 Community Politics Internship (4)

POLS 333 Social Psychology of Politics (4)

POLS 348 Land Use, Growth Management, and

the Politics of Sprawl (4)

POLS 351 Constitutional Law (4)

POLS 352 Civil Rights and Civil Liberties (4)

POLS 354 U.S. Health Care Policies (4)

POLS 358 Interest Groups, Factions, and

Coalitions in Politics (4)

POLS 359 U.S. Congress (4)

POLS 360 Public Administration (4)

POLS 368 Political Economy (4)

POLS 375 Seminar: Green Polity (4)

POLS 376 Seminar: National Social Policy (4)

POLS 377 Urban Politics (4)

POLS 378 Honors Thesis in Political Science (4)

POLS 379 Honors Thesis in Political Science (4)

Political Theory and Comparative Politics

POLS 100 Introduction to Political Thought (4)

POLS 101 Ancient Political Heritage (4)

POLS 102 Modern Political Heritage (4)

POLS 106 Environmental Values and Ethics (4)

POLS 125 International Political Economy (4)

376 Lehigh University Course Catalog 2009-2010

POLS 301 Current Political Controversies (4)

POLS 321 Research in Political Science (4)

POLS 323 Public Policy of the European

Union (4)

POLS 324 Politics of Western Europe (4)

POLS 325 Nationalism in Comparative

Perspective (4)

POLS 335 Latin American Political Systems (4)

POLS 336 U.S. Foreign Policy and Latin

America (4)

POLS 337 Religion and Politics in Latin America (4)

POLS 342 Gender and Third World

Development (4)

POLS 356 Seminar: Political Philosophy (4)

POLS 357 Politics of Authenticity (4)

POLS 364 Issues in Contemporary Political

Philosophy (4)

POLS 367 American Political Thought (4)

POLS 370 Seminar: The Citizen versus the

Administrative State (4)

Political Science Minor

The minor consists of two of the three core courses listed

above (POLS 1, POLS 3, and POLS 100 or 101 or 102)

plus any two other political science courses for a total of

16 credits.

Public Administration Minor

The minor consists of POLS 360 plus three other cours-

es chosen in consultation with the adviser for a

minimum of sixteen credits.

Political Science Honors

Students must have at least a 3.2 cumulative grade point

average, and a 3.3 major grade point average, in order to

proceed with departmental honors. Students with honors

must complete ten courses in the major, including an

independent study focusing on the honors thesis.

Undergraduate Courses

POLS 1. American Political System (4) fall-spring

Constitutional principles; organization and operation of

the national government; and dynamics of power within

the U.S. political system. (SS)

POLS 3. Comparative Politics (4) fall-spring

The political systems of foreign countries; approaches to

the study of comparative politics. (SS)

POLS 100. (PHIL 100) Introduction to Political

Thought (4)

A critical examination of political ideologies: Liberalism,

Marxism, Fascism, and Islamism. Matthews (ND)

POLS 101. (PHIL 100) Ancient Political

Heritage (4)

Important political thinkers from the pre-Socratics to

early, modern political theorists like Machiavelli.

Matthews (SS)

POLS 102. (PHIL 102) Modern Political

Heritage (4)

Begins where POLS 101 ends: from early, modern theo-

rists (e.g., Hobbes) up to contemporary thinkers (e.g.,

Marcuse). Matthews (SS)

POLS 104. (SSP 104). Political Sociology (4)

An introduction to political sociology through an exami-

nation of the major sociological questions concerning

power, politics, and the state. Covers historical questions

concerning state formation, nationalism, social move-

ments, globalization, political culture and participation,

and civil society. Includes examples such as racism, wel-

fare reform, campaign financing, coal mining in

Appalachia, revolution in Latin America, and the rise of

the Nazi party in Germany, and the place of the United

States in a global society. Munson (SS)

POLS 106. (ES 106) Environmental Values and

Ethics (4)

An introduction to the ethical perspectives and values

that shape human relationships to the natural environ-

ment in contemporary society. What are the moral

implications of these relationships for justice and human

collective action? Given these implications, what policy

responses to environmental problems are morally or

politically justifiable? In answering these questions, the

course explores ethical ideas developed in different

schools of environmental thought, such as deep ecology

and ecofeminism, in addition to ideas that emerge from

social movements, such as environmental justice and

bioregionalism. Holland (SS)

POLS 107. The Politics of the Environment (4)

A survey of the major environmental, resource, energy

and population problems of modern society, focusing on

the United States. The politics of man’s relationship with

nature, the political problems of ecological scarcity and

public goods, and the response of the American political

system to environmental issues. Wurth (SS)

POLS 108 (Global) Citizenship and its

Discontents (4)

The purpose of the course is to consider the nature-and

desirability-of citizenship, both as an ideal and as applied

(if possible) in the global context. What exactly does it

mean to be a “citizen?” Does citizenship require particu-

lar actions, thoughts, or values? What are the legal,

political, and moral obligations of this designation?

What exactly do you owe to your neighbor, or to some-

one on the other side of the world? Readings range from

Socrates to the Manefesto of the Unabomber. Pinaire

(SS/GC)

POLS 115. Technology as Politics (4)

Relationship of technology and technological change

with politics and public policy. Review of theories of

political significance of technology, including technologi-

cal determinism, technology assessment, technological

progress and appropriate technology. Specific issues in

technology with emphasis on U.S. Wurth (ND)

POLS 125. (IR 125) International Political

Economy (4)

Principles governing the interaction between the eco-

nomic and political components of international

phenomena. Political causes and consequences of trade

and investment. Foreign economic policy in its relation-

ship to domestic economic policy and other aspects of

foreign policy. Determinants of foreign economic policy.

Prerequisites: Economics 1 or 11 or 12; IR 10. Moon,

Barkey (SS)

POLS 179. (WS 179) Politics of Women (4)

Selected social and political issues relating to the role of

women in American society. Focuses on such questions

as economic equality, poverty, and work roles, the older

Political Science 377

woman, gender gap, political leadership, reproduction

technology, and sexual violence. Olson (SS)

POLS 230. (AAS 230) Social Movements and

Legacies of the 1960s (4)

The lessons and legacies of 1960s social and political

movements. Students examine civil rights, black power

movements, the New Left, campus protests, the Vietnam

war and antiwar movement, the counterculture, women’s

and ecology movements and assess their connection to

democracy, today’s world and their own lives. Morgan

(SS)

POLS 232. The Vietnam War in Politics, Media,

and Memory (4)

Examines the meaning of the American war in Vietnam

as interpreted and disputed in American politics, the

mass media, and private and public memory. Reviews

the political history and context of the war, personal

experiences and critical perspectives on the war, and

characterizations of the war in mainstream news media

and popular film. Morgan (SS)

POLS 240. Law and Order. The Politics of Crime

and Punishment (4)

This course explores the legal and political consequences

of various theories of crime, punishment and social con-

trol in the United States. Topics include policing, racial

profiling, trial court proceedings and the administration

of justice, growing incarceration rates and the prison

industry, capital punishment, the jury system, and the

nature of legal obligation. Pinaire. (ND)

POLS 274. Political Parties and Elections (4)

Study of the organization, functions and behavior of

political parties in the United States. Includes voting

behavior, campaigns and elections, polling, interest

groups, public opinion and the role of the media. (SS)

POLS 282. First Ladies and the Changing Role of

Women (4)

The role of presidential wives since Martha Washington

first held the position will be examined with particular

attention focused on the decades since 1932, beginning

with Eleanor Roosevelt. Olson (SS)

For Advanced Undergraduates and Graduate

Students

POLS 301. Current Political Controversies (4)

Selected topical policy issues and alternative approaches

to understanding them. Includes the major domestic

questions facing the U.S. Emphasis is on debating the

current issues of the day. Olson (SS)

POLS 302. Comparative State Politics (4)

Analysis of major questions relating to the role of the

states in the American federal system and their relation-

ship with the national government. (SS)

POLS 306. Public Policy Process (4)

Power relations and their impacts on selected public pol-

icy issues, specifically taxation, housing, environment,

poverty, energy, the military, and health. Olson (SS)

POLS 317. The American Presidency (4)

Role of the executive in the American political process.

Includes an analysis of the historical development, selec-

tion process, and scope of executive power. Emphasizes

domestic and foreign policy initiatives of selected presi-

dents from FDR to today. Prerequisite: POLS 1. Olson

(SS)

POLS 321. Research in Political Science (4)

Models in the explanation of political phenomena,

appropriateness of measurement techniques; construc-

tion of research designs; rationale and application of

statistical analyses; individual projects involving the con-

struction and testing of models employing a major social

science data set. Prerequisite: Consent of the instructor.

Davis (ND)

POLS 323. Politics of the European Union (4)

The institutions and policy-making processes of the

European Union. Topics include the creation of the sin-

gle market and the euro, environmental and agricultural

policy, regional development and the policy challenges of

eastward enlargement. Prerequisite: POLS 3 or IR 10.

Laible (SS)

POLS 324. Politics of Western Europe (4)

Comparative discussion of systems of government in

Western Europe and of major policy questions facing

these states in the post-war era. Topics include the evolu-

tion of social welfare systems, the impact of economic

crises and globalization on Western European political

economy, and immigration and identity politics.

Prerequisite: POLS 3. Laible

POLS 325. Nationalism in Comparative

Perspective (4)

Examination of major theoretical and policy debates in

contemporary studies of nationalism. Focus on the emer-

gence and endurance of nationalist movements in the

modern era. Discussion of efforts to evaluate the legiti-

macy of nationalist claims and to resolve nationalist

conflict. Prerequisite: POLS 3. Laible

POLS 326. Organizing for Democracy (4)

Seminar on the theory and practice of community and

political organizing and their relationship with democra-

cy and power in the United States, complementing

semester-long student field placements with community

groups and local organizations. Student teams help

enhance the political voice of under-resourced communi-

ty groups through organization-building, outreach, and

policy input at the local level. Prerequisite: consent of

instructor. Morgan (ND)

POLS 328. (ES 328) U.S. Politics and the

Environment (4)

An examination of contemporary American politics and

policy dealing with environmental issues. Current con-

troversies in the legislative and regulatory areas will be

covered to examine environmental issues and the politi-

cal process. Significant portions of the course readings

will be taken from government publications. Wurth (SS)

POLS 329. Propaganda, Media, and American

Politics (4)

The role of propaganda and mass media in sustaining

hegemony in the United States. Emphasis on television,

advertising and mass culture, public relations, news

media, and political propaganda pertaining to U.S. for-

eign and domestic policy. Students compare critical

counter-hegemonic theories to political speeches, docu-

ments, news reports, and media encounters that shape

much of American political life. Morgan (SS)

POLS 331. Community Politics Internship (4)

Integrated fieldwork and academic study. Seminar,

378 Lehigh University Course Catalog 2009-2010

research paper, and journal; internship with government

and social service agencies, political groups, elected offi-

cials, and law offices. May be repeated for credit.

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Olson (ND)

POLS 333. (PSYC 333, SSP 333) Social

Psychology of Politics (4)

Political behavior viewed from a psychological and social

psychological perspective. Prerequisite: Any one of the

following introductory courses: ANTH 1, ANTH 11,

ANTH 12, SSP 5, SSP 21, or department permission.

Rosenwein (SS)

POLS 335. Latin American Political Systems (4)

Democratic, authoritarian and revolutionary paths to

contemporary political issues. Political, economic and

social implications of contemporary “democratic”

regimes and neo-liberal economic policies. Discussion

groups and student presentations on prospects for demo-

cratic peace and prosperity in the future. Prerequisite:

POLS 3. (ND)

POLS 336. U.S. Foreign Policy and Latin

America (4)

U.S. historical relationship with Central America,

Caribbean and South America with emphasis on eco-

nomic and military dominance. Contemporary issues

such as U.S. invasions of Panama and Grenada, U.S.

Cuban relations, the militarization of the “drug

war,”counterinsurgency. Written analysis of competing

U.S. interests across time and regions. Prerequisite:

POLS 3. (ND)

POLS 337. Religion and Politics in Latin

America (4)

Indigenous and “imported” religious structures, the

prominent role of the Catholic Church in Latin America,

and the recent explosion of Protestant/ Pentecostal

churches. Emphasis on the intersection of religious belief

and power (i.e., gender, local politics, national develop-

ment, etc.). Short papers integrate material with students’

knowledge of religious/political phenomena. Discussion

groups analyze philosophical foundations of belief.

Prerequisite: POLS 3 and 336. (ND)

POLS 338. Markets, Justice, and Law (4)

The exploration of the various ways in which markets

shape cultural, social, ethical, and political practices in

contemporary society. Normative justification for market

as an institutional arrangement that is neutral between

different views of “the good”. Ethical critique of this nor-

mative justification and implications of the critique for

law and policy. Holland (SS)

POLS 342. (WS 342, GS 342) Gender and Third

World Development (4)

Focus on gender implications of contemporary strategies

for Third World economic growth, neo-liberalism. How

do economic theories affect ‘real people?’ How do eco-

nomic theories affect men vs. women? What is the role

of people who want to ‘help?’ Some background in eco-

nomic theories and/or Third World politics desired, but

not required. Prerequisite: POLS 1 or WS 1. (SS)

POLS 348. Land Use, Growth Management, and

the Politics of Sprawl (4)

This course is an introduction to the issues of Land Use

Planning, Community, Growth Management, and

Sprawl. It examines the history of urban development in

America in all its forms, from the earliest settlements to

the auto suburbs of today. The course explores such

planning and development factors as comprehensive

plans, zoning, and the influence of infrastructure on

development, as well as problems related to sprawl. It

concludes with an assessment of the revival of city cen-

ters, alternatives to sprawl, and comparisons to

development patterns in other countries. Freeman (SS)

POLS 351. Constitutional Law (4)

Exploration of the process of legal reasoning, the place of

the United States Supreme Court in the American politi-

cal system, the multiple influences on judicial

decision-making, and various interpretive debates over

the meaning of the U.S. Constitution. Following this

introduction to the interplay of law and politics, the

focus turns to particular domains within the canon of

constitutional law, including cases pertaining to the

Supreme Court’s jurisdiction and capacity; the separation

of powers between the three branches of government;

federalism (federal-state-local relations); the “takings”

clause; election law; the powers of Congress; “police

powers” at the state level; and, foreign affairs and consti-

tutional crises. POLS 001 is not a prerequisite but is

strongly recommended. Pinaire (ND)

POLS 352. Civil Rights and Civil Liberties (4)

A continuation of themes, issues, and debates of the pre-

vious semester (POLS 351). This course addresses the

major cases and controversies within several legal

domains, including the freedoms of and from religion;

freedom of speech; freedom of association; freedom of

the press; the right to bear arms; the rights of criminal

defendants and suspects; the right to privacy; capital

punishment; and, the equal protection of the law.

Prerequisite: POLS 351. Pinaire (ND)

POLS 354 (HMS 354). U.S. Health Care Policies (4)

Health care programs, policies, and their impact on

American society. Topics include approaches to health

care; public sector plans (Medicare and Medicaid); man-

aged care; the employer-sponsored system; medically

uninsured; vested interests and lobbyists; movements for

national health care; and options for change. Olson (SS)

POLS 355 (ES 355) Environmental Justice and

the Law (4)

This course is an in-depth exploration of the various

ways in which environmental law and policy can have

discriminatory effects. It examines the rise and evolution

of the environmental justice movement, and the impact

of environmental justice claims on administrative rule-

making at both the state and federal level. Reviewing the

history of case law concerning environmental justice

suits filed under the 1964 Civil Rights Act, it also exam-

ines the future of environmental justice in environmental

law and policy. Holland (SS)

POLS 356. Seminar: Political Philosophy (4)

Critical examination of several of the “great books”

and/or “great ideas” in political thought. Students will

help select the material for critical discussion. Course

may be repeated with permission of the instructor.

Matthews (SS)

POLS 357. Politics of Authenticity (4)

Works in political philosophy, psychoanalytic theory, lit-

erature, and film that discuss knowing and being one’s

self will be critically discussed. If you feel a life of “quiet

desperation” is inevitable, this course is for you.

Matthews (SS)

Political Science 379

POLS 358. Interest Groups, Factions, and

Coalitions in American Politics (4)

The rise of interest group power. Social, economic, and

political reasons for groups’ increasing influence. Value

of different group resources and influence in particular

national policy arenas. Types of more, and less, powerful

interests, and the implications of this distribution of

power for American politics. Davis (SS)

POLS 359. U.S. Congress (4)

Elections for the House and Senate and their significance

for the way in which Congress functions. The formal

structure of party leadership and committees, House and

Senate organizational and functional differences, and

informal and formal power of legislation and oversight.

Congressional relations with the president, bureaucracy,

and Supreme Court. Prerequisite: POLS 1. Davis (SS)

POLS 360. Public Administration (4)

The nature of administration; problems of organization

and management; public personnel policies; budgeting

and budgetary system; forms of administrative responsi-

bility. (ND)

POLS 364. (PHIL 364) Issues in Contemporary

Political Philosophy (4)

Selected topics in contemporary political philosophy,

such as the Frankfurt school, existentialism, legitimation,

authenticity, participatory democracy, and the alleged

decline of political philosophy. May be repeated for cred-

it with the consent of instructor. Matthews (SS)

POLS 367. (PHIL 367) American Political

Thought (4)

A critical examination of American political thought

from the founding of the Republic to the present.

Writings from Madison, Hamilton, and Jefferson to

Emma Goldman, Mary Daly, Malcolm X, Henry Kariel,

and others will be discussed. Matthews (SS)

POLS 368. Political Economy (4)

Relationship of democratic politics to government and

market, and significance of economic power in the

American polity. Economic rationale for the place of the

market and economic institutions in polity. Emphasis on

information in comparison of economic approaches to

public policy and organization (public goods, market

failure, and collective action) with traditional political

science approaches (group mobilization and conflict,

non-decisions and symbolic action). Wurth (SS)

POLS 370. Seminar: The Citizen versus the

Administrative State (4)

Administrative power and policy. Constitutional and

judicial control of administration. Remedies against

improper administrative acts. Major emphasis will be on

the United States, with some attention given to analo-

gous issues in other countries. (SS)

POLS 375. (ES 375) Seminar: Green Polity (4)

Development of guidelines and applications for public

policy and political action directed toward environmen-

tal sustainability and political feasibility. Focus on

problem-solving and policy design, connecting sustain-

able environmental goals with workable and responsive

institutional designs. Prerequisites: POLS 111, 368, or

consent of instructor. Wurth (SS)

POLS 376. Seminar: National Social Policy (4)

A readings/research seminar on current social policy

questions. Course analyzes, from alternatives political

perspectives, such issues as Social Security, Medicare,

health care, welfare reform, income inequality, and taxa-

tion. Students research a specific social issue of their

choice. Class discussion on individual research and com-

mon readings. Olson (SS)

POLS 377. Urban Politics (4)

The structure and processes of city government in the

United States; city-state and federal-city relationships;

the problems of metropolitan areas; political machines

and community power structures; the urban politics of

municipal reform; city planning and urban renewal. (SS)

POLS 378. Honors Thesis in Political Science (4)

Opportunity for undergraduate majors in Political

Science to pursue an extended project for senior honors.

Department permission required. (ND)

POLS 379. Honors Thesis in Political Science (4)

Continuation of POLS 378. Prerequisite: POLS 378.

Department permission required. (ND)

POLS 381, 382, 383, 384. Special Topics (1-4)

A seminar on a topic of special interest in a particular

political institution, process, or policy. Prerequisite: con-

sent of the department chairperson. (ND)

For Graduate Students the department of political sci-

ence offers a graduate program leading to the Master of

Arts degree. The applicant for admission is required to

demonstrate adequate undergraduate preparation. Those

seeking full time graduate studies must submit Graduate

Record Examination results.

Master of Arts in Politics and Policy

The Master of Arts in politics and policy is a 30-credit-

hour program that can be accomplished in 12 months

by full-time students. Students interested in enrolling on

a part-time basis will be given consideration, but the

expectation is that most students will complete the pro-

gram in a year. Students must take ten classes with a

minimum of seven classes at the 400 level. The normal

path would be at least two 400-level courses each semes-

ter and two over the summer. Students must take

Introduction to Politics and Policy, one methodology

course, and one course with a normative component.

With the approval of the department DGS, students

may take graduate level courses outside of the

Department of Political Science. Students interested in

state or local public service or nonprofit work may elect

to take the Community Fellows program in which the

student works for 15 hours per week for a local agency

on a project related to community (re)development.

Graduate students will be required to write a major

paper (one semester) or a Master’s thesis (two semesters)

that will be defended before a panel of faculty members.

Those participating in the Community Fellows program

will be required to write a paper summarizing and ana-

lyzing their community fellows experience.

The Master of Arts program is intended for high-achiev-

ing students with a social science and liberal arts

background who have a keen interest in the study of poli-

tics and/or are interested in the Community Fellows

program and related experiential learning opportunities.

The Master of Arts prepares students for further study in

political science, public policy, or the law as well as careers

in business, public service, or nonprofit organizations.

380 Lehigh University Course Catalog 2009-2010

Graduate Courses

POLS 401. Introduction to Politics and Policy (3)

Structured around a generative theme, such as inequality

and justice, or community and the environment, each

faculty member will discuss this issue from the perspec-

tive of his/her specialty. Staff

POLS 402. Methods of Policy Analysis (3)

Approaches or models used to analyze public policy.

Assumptions underlying each model and critiques of

each; may include a number of the following approaches:

institutional, process, rational, group, incremental,

and/or elite. Staff

POLS 403. Creativity, Ideas, and Methods in

Political Science (3)

Explore the challenges and creative possibilities of turn-

ing ‘research interests’ into doable research projects –

such as research papers, MA theses, or doctoral disserta-

tions. The traditional domains of qualitative

methodology and how social scientists seek to under-

stand, represent, and analyze the social world. Topics: the

politics of interpretation, observation, and quantification

in social research, and critiques of assumptions about

power and causality. Laible

POLS 404. Environmental Valuation: Policy

Design/Legal Analysis (3)

Review of the “contingent valuation method” for pricing

environmental resources. Assessment of the empirical

and normative strengths and weakness of this method.

Evaluation of the recent turn to “deliberative” methods

of resource valuation. Consideration of empirical and

normative problems and common problems that chal-

lenge resource valuation. Holland

POLS 408. American Politics Core (3)

A survey of American politics utilizing readings reflecting

a variety of methodological approaches and theoretical

perspectives. Readings include but are not limited to

works widely regarded as “classics” in American political

science. Davis

POLS 413. Modern Political Philosophy (3)

A study of selected modern political philosophers and

their continuing effect on politics and political philoso-

phy. Matthews

POLS 415. State and Local Government (3)

Comparative state government, urban politics, intergov-

ernmental relations, regional and local government.

POLS 416. American Environmental Policy (3)

Formation, implementation and impact of environmen-

tal policies in the U.S. An examination of the scope of

environmental problems, the development of environ-

ment as an issue, the role of interest groups and public

opinion, the policy-making process, and the various

approaches to implementing environmental policy.

Special attention to current issues and administrative

approaches and to the distinctive character of environ-

mental protection as a political issue. Wurth

POLS 421. Research Methods (3)

Models in the explanation of political phenomena,

appropriateness of measurement techniques; construc-

tion of research designs; rationale and application of

statistical analyses; individual projects involving the con-

struction and testing of models employing a major social

science data set. Davis

POLS 423. Politics of the European Union (3)

The institutions and policy-making processes of the EU.

Topics include the creation of the single market and the

euro, environmental and agricultural policy, regional

development and the policy challenges of eastward

enlargement. Laible

POLS 425. Nationalism in Comparative

Perspective (3)

Examination of major theoretical and policy debates in

contemporary studies of nationalism. Focus on the emer-

gence and endurance of nationalist movements in the

modern era. Discussion of efforts to evaluate the legiti-

macy of nationalist claims and to resolve nationalist

conflict. Laible

POLS 426. Organizing for Democracy (3)

Seminar on the theory and practice of community and

political organizing and their relationship with democra-

cy and power in the United States, complementing

semester-long student field placements with community

groups and local organizations. Student teams help

enhance the political voice of under-resourced communi-

ty groups through organization-building, outreach, and

policy input at the local level. Prerequisite: consent of

instructor. Morgan

POLS 427. American Democracy: Decline or

Revival? (3)

Theories of democracy, analysis of its decline, and possi-

ble scenarios for a revived democratic culture. Research

projects on topics of personal interest; class participation

in hands-on project in local democracy-building.

Morgan

POLS 428. Media & Democracy (3)

General & theoretical considerations about democracy,

the political economy of the mass media, and analysis of

ways in which the media influence political discourse in

the United States and globalized media culture. Hands-

on analysis of media samples: news coverage, political

advertising, public relations advertising, and interactive

learning on how group might utilize the media to

express its voice effectively. Morgan

POLS 429. Propaganda, Media & American

Politics (3)

The role of propaganda and mass media in sustaining

hegemony in the United States. Emphasis on television,

advertising and mass culture, public relations, news

media, and political propaganda pertaining to U.S. for-

eign and domestic policy. Students compare critical,

counter-hegemonic theories to political speeches, docu-

ments, news reports, and media encounters that shape

much of American political life. Morgan

POLS 430. Social Movements & Legacies of

1960s (3)

The lessons and legacies of 1960s social and political

movements. Students examine civil rights, black power

movements, the New Left, campus protests, the Vietnam

war and antiwar movement, the counterculture, women’s

and ecology movements and assess their connection to

democracy, today’s world, and their own lives. Morgan

POLS 431. Public Management (3)

The study of bureaucracy and problems of public and

nonprofit organization and management; executive lead-

ership; personnel management systems and regulatory

administration.

Political Science 381

POLS 433. The Politics of Health Care (3)

Examines the politics of American health care and its

impact on society. Issues ranging from the role of the

private sector to government-supported programs; focus

on ways to restructure the system, based on alternatives

in selected nations. Olson

POLS 434. Internship (3)

Internship in private or public agency. May be repeated

for credit.

POLS 435. Power, Persuasion and the American

Presidency (3)

Examination of selected modern presidents, from FDR

to the current occupant of the White House, and their

effectiveness as communicators and policy makers. Olson

POLS 438. Markets, Justice, and Law (3)

The exploration of the various ways in which markets

shape cultural, social, ethical, and political practices in

contemporary society. Normative justification for market

as an institutional arrangement that is neutral between

different views of “the good”. Ethical critique of this nor-

mative justification and implications of the critique for

law and policy. Holland

POLS 448. Land Use, Growth Management, and

the Politics of Sprawl (3)

This course is an introduction to the issues of Land Use

Planning, Community, Growth Management, and

Sprawl. It examines the history of urban development in

America in all its forms, from the earliest settlements to

the auto suburbs of today. The course explores such

planning and development factors as comprehensive

plans, zoning, and the influence of infrastructure on

development, as well as problems related to sprawl. It

concludes with an assessment of the revival of city cen-

ters, alternatives to sprawl, and comparisons to

development patterns in other countries. Freeman

POLS 450. Religion and Politics in Comparative

Perspective (3)

Consideration of the relationship between modernity

and religion, the politics of religion in comparison to the

other forms of secular identity, and the variation in the

ways in which religion and politics intersect in different

contexts. Deo

POLS 451. Comparative Politics Core (3)

Discussion of major recent works in comparative politics

that exemplify on-going substantive debates and

methodological problems in the field. Topics: state-

building and the construction of social order,

institutions, political economy, democracy, development,

and political mobilization. Staff

POLS 453. Seminar: Media, Propaganda and

Democracy (3)

Research seminar on theoretical and applied issues relat-

ed to democracy vs. political hegemony, as affected by

propaganda, the mass media, popular culture, and the

capitalist economy. Students will pursue individual

research topics linked to common class readings. Weekly

paper presentations and critical responses. Morgan

POLS 454. The State in Asia (3)

Examination of state-directed political, economic and

social development in and among Asian states, with an

addition focus on the relationships between the domestic

policies of various Asian states and relations with non-

Asian states. Fennell

POLS 455 (ES 455) Environmental Justice and

the Law (3)

This course is an in-depth exploration of the various

ways in which environmental law and policy can have

discriminatory effects. It examines the rise and evolution

of the environmental justice movement, and the impact

of environmental justice claims on administrative rule-

making at both the state and federal level. Reviewing the

history of case law concerning environmental justice

suits filed under the 1964 Civil Rights Act, it also exam-

ines the future of environmental justice in environmental

law and policy. Holland

POLS 456. Seminar: Political Philosophy (3)

Critical examination of several of the “great books”

and/or “great ideas” in political thought. Matthews

POLS 457. Politics of Authenticity (3)

Works in political philosophy, psychoanalytic theory, lit-

erature, and film that discuss knowing and being one’s

self will be critically discussed. If you feel a life of “quiet

desperation” is inevitable, this course is for you.

Matthews

POLS 462. Seminar: American Political

Thought (3)

Focus on a narrow topic or theorist in the field, e.g., the

work of Jefferson, Madison, Hamilton, or Tocqueville.

Students will be required to write a major paper and

present it to the class. Matthews

POLS 464. Community Fellowship I (3) Fall

15 hours/week in regional agency on specific project

relating to regional redevelopment with regularly sched-

uled contact hours with the faculty advisor.

POLS 465. Community Fellowship II (3) Spring

15 hours/week in regional agency on specific project

relating to regional redevelopment with regularly sched-

uled contact hours with the faculty advisor.

POLS 467. Legal Problems (3)

This course involves an examination of the role of legal

rules, agents, institutions, and values in our society.

Primary emphasis will be given to the American legal

system, though we will evaluate U.S. principles and poli-

tics through a comparative lens as well. Pinaire

POLS 468. Political Economy (3)

Relationship of democratic politics to government and

market, and significance of economic power in the

American polity. Economic rationale for the place of the

market and economic institutions in polity. Emphasis on

information in comparison of economic approaches to

public policy and organization (public goods, market

failure and collective action) with traditional political sci-

ence approaches (group mobilization and conflict,

non-decisions and symbolic actions. Wurth

POLS 475. Seminar: Green Polity (3)

Development of guidelines and applications for public

policy and political action directed toward environmen-

tal sustainability and political feasibility. Focus on

problem-solving and policy design, connecting sustain-

able environmental goals with workable and responsive

institutional designs. Prerequisites: Both POLS 111 and

368 or consent of instructor. Wurth

382 Lehigh University Course Catalog 2009-2010

POLS 477. (SR 477) Advanced Computer

Applications (3)

Uses of computers in social sciences, including data col-

lection, management, analysis, presentation, and

decision-making; includes weekly lab.

POLS 481. Special Topics (1-3)

Individual inquiry into some problem of government.

Reading, field work, and other appropriate techniques of

investigation. Conferences and reports. May be repeated

for credit.

POLS 482. Special Topics (1-3)

Continuation of POLS 481.

Psychology

Professors. Mark H. Bickhard, Ph.D. (Chicago), Henry

R. Luce Professor in Cognitive Robotics and the Philosophy

of Knowledge; Diane T. Hyland, Ph.D. (Syracuse), chair;

Barbara C. Malt, Ph.D. (Stanford).

Associate professors. Susan Barrett, Ph.D. (Brown);

Michael J. Gill, Ph.D. (Texas, Austin); Deborah J.

Laible, Ph.D. (Nebraska, Lincoln); Gordon B.

Moskowitz, Ph.D. (NYU); Ageliki Nicolopoulou, Ph.D.

(Berkeley); Padraig G. O’Seaghdha, Ph.D. (Toronto).

Assistant professors. Catherine M. Arrington, Ph.D.

(Michigan State); Christopher T. Burke, Ph.D. (NYU);

Heidi Grant, Ph.D. (Columbia); Almut Hupbach, Ph.D.

(University of Trier, Germany); Dominic T. Packer,

Ph.D. (Toronto).

Emeritus professors. George K. Shortess, (Brown);

Martin L. Richter, Ph.D. (Indiana); William Newman,

Ph.D. (Stanford).

The Psychology Department offers B.A. and B.S. under-

graduate degrees, undergraduate minors in general

psychology and clinical psychology, and a Ph.D. pro-

gram.

B.A. Major Program in Psychology

The bachelor of arts in psychology is a social science

major requiring approximately 40 credit hours in psy-

chology as described below. Students must also fulfill

college and university degree requirements. This flexible

program permits development of one or more minors in

other fields or the undertaking of a double major.

Freshmen who have completed PSYC 1 can enroll in

100-level courses.

Required Core Courses

PSYC 1 Introduction to Psychology (4)

PSYC 110 Statistical Analysis of Behavioral

Data (4)

PSYC 210 Experimental Research Methods and

Laboratory (4)

Required Breadth Courses

Four 100-level courses, spanning at least three of the fol-

lowing four categories.

A) PSYC 107 Child Development (4)

PSYC 109 (SSP 109) Adulthood and Aging

(4)

B) PSYC 121 (SSP 121) Social Psychology (4)

PSYC 153 (SSP 153) Personality (4)

C)PSYC 117 (COGS 117) Cognitive Psychology

(4)

D)PSYC 176 (COGS 176) Mind and Brain (4)

Required Advanced Psychology Seminars

Two Advanced Psychology Seminars are required.

Advanced Psychology Seminars are 300-level courses that

are offered in a small seminar format. These courses

include a significant writing component and utilize pri-

mary source readings. Courses that can be used to fulfill

this requirement have the Advanced Psychology Seminar

designation at the end of the course description.

Additional 300-level Course Requirement

Two additional 300-level courses are required. Students

can NOT use PSYC 310, 391, 392, 393 or 394 to fulfill

this requirement. All other 300-level psychology courses

can be used to fulfill this requirement. Students may opt

to take a third or fourth Advanced Psychology Seminar

or they may take any of the following courses. These

courses fulfill 300-level requirements but NOT the

Advanced Seminar requirement:

PSYC 301 Industrial Psychology

PSYC 305 Abnormal Psychology

PSYC 312 Interpersonal Behavior in Small

Groups

PSYC 323 The Child in Family and Society

PSYC 327 Health Psychology

PSYC 328 Educational Psychology

PSYC 333 Social Psychology of Politics

PSYC 335 Animal Behavior

PSYC 338 Phenomenology and Theory of

Childhood Disorders

PSYC 354 Psychological Assessment

PSYC 382 Endocrinology of Behavior

Recommended Electives

The bachelor of arts program in psychology is a flexible

preparation for a number of fields. With suitable selec-

tion of additional courses, students can prepare

themselves for graduate study in any subfield of psychol-

ogy or for careers in areas for which psychology is a

desirable and relevant major such as law, social work,

marketing, and education.

For graduate programs in developmental, social/person-

ality, cognitive, and clinical psychology, additional

coursework in research and statistics is desirable, as is

participation in the honors program.

Depending on the specific subfield of interest, many

courses in the Departments of Biological Sciences (espe-

cially the Behavioral Neuroscience program) and

Sociology and Anthropology, in the College of

Education, and in the interdisciplinary programs of

Cognitive Science, Women’s Studies, and Africana

Studies may be relevant.

Preparation for programs in health-related areas such as

nursing, medicine, and dentistry will include additional

coursework in biology, chemistry, and physics. Students

should consult with the appropriate pre-professional

advisers to determine specific requirements.

Students interested in applying psychology to fields such

as law, marketing, social work, or education should con-

sult with faculty in those areas to discuss relevant

courses.

The B.S. in Psychology

The bachelor of science in psychology is intended for

students seeking a structured behavioral science major.

This comprehensive program of study is especially suited

Psychology 383

as preparation for advanced graduate study in psychology

and related fields. The program offers broad scientific

training with a concentration in cognitive, developmen-

tal, social or clinical psychology. The program may also

be attractive to students who are preparing for careers in

medicine or health-related fields because it combines the

mathematics and natural science courses required for

professional study in these fields with exposure to ethics

and a specialization in a concentration area such as clini-

cal psychology. Progression through this program is best

served through early commitment. This program

requires a minimum of 108 credits of the 120 credits

required for a bachelors degree.

Requirements for the B.S. in Psychology

University and College Requirements (at least 25

credits):

College Seminar (3-4 credits)

English Composition (2 courses, 6 credits)

Distribution requirements in two of the following cate-

gories (Natural Science, Social Science, or Humanities)

(16 credits)

Courses taken for major and collateral requirements can

only be used to fulfill one of the three distribution cate-

gories (Natural Science, Social Science or Humanities, if

two philosophy courses are used to fulfill the Philosophy

and Cognitive Science collateral requirement). Students

must take additional courses to fulfill the university

requirements in the two remaining categories. Collateral

courses in mathematics can be used to fulfill the mathe-

matical science distribution category.

The B.S. Program in Psychology: Collateral

Requirements (at least 35 credits)

Mathematics: Select 2 courses from MATH 12, 43, or

any of the calculus courses (7-8 credits)

Computation and Formal Systems: Select either COGS

140 or PHIL 114 or CSE 12 or 15 (3-4 credits)

Natural Science: Select 3 courses from CHM 25, CHM

75, BIOS 41, EES 31, EES 25, EES 28, BIOS 115,

BIOS 177, BIOS 276, or PHY 10 (at least 10 credits)

Philosophy and Cognitive Science: Select two courses

from COGS 7, PHIL 105, 116, 128, 139, 220, 228,

250, 260 (8 credits)

Social Science: Select two courses from ECO 1, STS 11,

124, 145, 252, WS 101, and ANTH or SSP course

which is not cross-listed with psychology (7-8 credits)

Psychology Requirements (48 credits)

Psychology Core Requirements

PSYC 1 Introduction to Psychology (4)

PSYC 110 Statistical Analysis of Behavioral

Data (4)

PSYC 210 Experimental Research Methods and

Laboratory (4)

Required Breadth Courses

Four 100-level courses, one from each of the four cate-

gories.

A) PSYC 107 Child Development (4)

PSYC 109 (SSP 109) Adulthood and Aging

(4)

B) PSYC 121 (SSP 121) Social Psychology (4)

PSYC 153 (SSP 153) Personality (4)

C)PSYC 117 (COGS 117) Cognitive Psychology (4)

D)PSYC 176 (COGS 176) Mind and Brain (4)

Psychology Concentration

Complete the following courses for one of the following

concentrations:

A) Cognitive Psychology Concentration

COGS 7 (may not also be used to fulfill col-

lateral requirement)

Select any Advanced Psychology Seminar.

Select any 300-level course except 310, 391, 392, 393,

or 394.

Select two courses from the following list

PSYC 307 (Higher Order Cognition)

PSYC 320 (Psychology of Language)

PSYC 322 (Language in Atypical

Populations)

PSYC 351 (Cognitive Development in

Childhood)

PSYC 362 (Cognition in Practice & Policy)

PSYC 369 (Memory)

PSYC 373 (Sensation and Perception)

PSYC 377 (Attention and

Attentional Failures)

B) Social Psychology Concentration

Complete both 121 and 153

Select any Advanced Psychology Seminar.

Select any 300-level course except 310, 391, 392, 393,

or 394.

Select two courses from the following list

PSYC 308 (Seminar in Social Psychology)

PSYC 311 (The Psychology of Stereotyping,

Prejudice, and Discrimination)

PSYC 313 (Person Perception)

PSYC 314 (Social Cognition)

PSYC 318 (Seminar in Gender and

Psychology)

PSYC 325 (Theories in Social Psychology)

PSYC 341 (Social Psychology & Social

Issues)

PSYC 342 (Motivation)

PSYC 363 (Personality and Social

Development in Childhood)

PSYC 384 (Self and Identity)

C)Developmental Psychology Concentration

Complete both 107 and 109

Select any Advanced Psychology Seminar.

Select any 300-level course except 310, 391, 392, 393,

or 394.

Select two courses from the following list

PSYC 321 (Language Development)

PSYC 351 (Cognitive Development)

PSYC 358 (Seminar in Infant Development)

PSYC 361 (Personality and Social

Development in Adulthood)

384 Lehigh University Course Catalog 2009-2010

PSYC 363 (Personality and Social

Development in Childhood)

PSYC 364 (Narratives, Culture, and

Development)

PSYC 365 (Human Development in Cross-

Cultural Perspective)

PSYC 366 (Seminar in Cognitive Aging)

PSYC 368 (Children, Psychology and the

Law)

PSYC 378 (Emotional Development)

PSYC 383 (Attachment Theory & Research)

PSYC 386 (Psychological Perspectives on

Health and Illness in Children

and Adolescents)

D)Clinical Psychology Concentration

PSYC 367 (Clinical Psychology: only offered

in the summer)

Select any two Advanced Psychology Seminars

Select two courses from the following list

PSYC 305 (Abnormal Psychology)

PSYC 327 (Health Psychology)

PSYC 338 (Phenomenology and Theory of

Childhood Disorders)

PSYC 354 (Psychological Assessment)

Department Honors in Psychology

Students in either the B.A. or B.S. degree programs may

undertake a program that leads to graduation with

department honors. The honors program permits majors

of unusual academic ability and interest to explore topics

in greater depth than the curricula normally allow. Under

faculty supervision, a student normally spends the first

semester of the senior year enrolled in PSYC 391 doing

library research, learning the appropriate methodology,

and preparing a written proposal and oral presentation.

In the second semester, while the student is enrolled in

PSYC 392, the proposal is implemented, culminating in

a written honors thesis and oral presentation.

In the first semester of the junior year, students in either

the B.A. or B.S. degree programs may apply for the hon-

ors program with the Department Honors Program

Director. To be eligible to participate in the honors pro-

gram, a student must have an overall cumulative GPA of

3.3 and a minimum GPA of 3.3 in courses required for

their psychology degree at the time of application. These

GPAs must be maintained until graduation.

Minor Programs

General Psychology

The general psychology minor consists of a minimum of

four courses in psychology beyond the introductory

course (PSYC 1). Students should declare this minor in

the psychology department office.

Clinical Psychology

The clinical psychology minor consists of the following

courses:

PSYC 153 Personality

PSYC 305 Abnormal Psychology

PSYC 367 Clinical Psychology

And two of the following courses:

PSYC 327 Health Psychology

PSYC 338 Phenomenology and Theory of

Childhood Disorders

PSYC 354 Psychological Assessment

This minor is available to Psychology majors, as well as

to students from other programs, who desire to augment

their training in this aspect of applied psychology.

Students should be aware that only one course may be

used to jointly fulfill the requirements of a major pro-

gram and minor program. To complete this minor,

students must be prepared to register for at least one

summer session since some courses (PSYC 367, 354) are

only offered in the summer and other courses have limit-

ed enrollment during the academic year. Students

interested in this minor should consult the psychology

undergraduate coordinator.

Undergraduate Courses

PSYC 1. Introduction to Psychology (4)

Psychology as a science of behavior. Natural science

aspects such as learning, sensation-perception, and physi-

ological bases; and social science aspects such as human

development, intelligence, and personality.

Methodologies appropriate to these areas, and related

societal problems. (SS)

PSYC 107. Child Development (4)

Survey of theories and research concerning perceptual,

cognitive, social, and personality development through

infancy and childhood. Prerequisite: PSYC 1 or SSP 1.

May not be taken pass/fail. (SS)

PSYC 109. (SSP 109) Adulthood and Aging (4)

Social science approaches to the latter two-thirds of life.

Cognitive and personality development; attitudes toward

aging; social behavior of older adults; widowhood; retire-

ment. Prerequisite: PSYC 1 or SSP 1. May not be taken

pass/fail. Hyland (SS)

PSYC 110. Statistical Analysis of Behavioral Data (4)

Principles of experimental design and statistical analysis:

characteristics of data and data collection; descriptive sta-

tistics; hypothesis testing theory and practice;

correlation, chi-square, t-test, analysis of variance. Three

hours lecture and one hour computer lab. (ND)

PSYC 115. (REL 115) Religion and Psychology (4)

A study of the origins, development and consequences of

religion from a psychological perspective. Attention will

be given to classic and contemporary sources, with a

focus on major psychoanalytic theorists of religion

(Freud, Jung, Erikson); psychological analyses of reli-

gious experience (e.g., Wm. James, Victor Frankl); and

the diverse culture and religious forms that structure the

connection between religion and psychology (e.g.,

Buddhist psychology, Japanese Morita therapy). Course

examines the role of religion as a powerful meaning sys-

tem that can affect the lives of individuals in terms of

motivations, beliefs, emotions and behaviors, and can

influence their interactions on both interpersonal and

intergroup levels. (HU)

PSYC 117. (COGS 117). Cognitive Psychology (4)

The architecture and dynamics of the human mind:

How we acquire knowledge through perception, repre-

sent and activate it in memory, and use it to

communicate, make decisions, solve problems, and rea-

son creatively. Prerequisite: PSYC 1 or COGS 7. May

not be taken pass/fail. (SS)

Psychology 385

PSYC 121. (SSP 121) Social Psychology (4)

Theories, methods of investigation, and results of

research on the way social and psychological processes

interact in human behavioral settings. Topics include

analysis of self and relationships, dynamics of small

groups, attitudes and persuasion, prejudice, prosocial

and antisocial behavior. Prerequisite: ANTH 1, SSP1 or

PSYC 1. (SS)

PSYC 125. (SSP 125) Social Psychology of Small

Groups (4)

Theories and empirical research regarding interpersonal

behavior in small groups. Classroom exercises and group

simulations. Prerequisite: consent of instructor.

Rosenwein (SS)

PSYC 135. (SSP 135, Jour 135) Human

Communication (4)

Processes and functions of human communication in

relationships and groups. Rosenwein (SS)

PSYC 140. (ANTH 140, COGS 140, MLL 140)

Introduction to Linguistics (4)

Relationship between language and mind; formal proper-

ties of language; language and society; how languages

change over time. No pass/fail option. (SS)

PSYC 153. (SSP 153) Personality (4)

Examination of the major theoretical frameworks psy-

chologists use to understand human thought, feeling,

and behavior. Whereas these frameworks each emphasize

very different concepts (e.g., the unconscious mind vs.

culture vs. neurotransmitters), they are united in their

effort to answer the question: Why does a given individ-

ual think, feel, or behave as she does? Prerequisite: PSYC

1 or SSP 1. Gill (SS)

PSYC 160. Independent Study (1-3)

Readings on topics selected in consultation with a staff

member. Prerequisites: PSYC 1 and consent of the

department chair. May be repeated for credit. (SS)

PSYC 161. Supervised Research (1-3)

Apprenticeship in ongoing faculty research program.

Literature review, experimental design, data collection

and analysis, and professional writing under faculty

supervision. May be repeated for a maximum of 9 cred-

its. Prerequisites: PSYC 1 or COGS 7 and consent of

sponsor. (SS)

PSYC 162. Psychological Field Work (1-3)

Work-study practice including supervised experience in

one of several local agencies. Development of familiarity

with the operations of the agency and working with

individual patients or students. Prerequisites: PSYC 1

plus two additional psychology courses and consent of

instructor. (SS)

PSYC 176. (COGS 176) Mind and Brain (4)

Perception and cognitive neuroscience as the link

between mental processes and their biological bases.

Visual and auditory perception; the control of action;

neuropsychological syndromes of perception, language,

memory and thought; neural network (connectionist)

models of mental processes. Prerequisite: PSYC 1 or

COGS 7. May not be taken pass/fail. (NS)

PSYC 210. Experimental Research Methods and

Laboratory (4)

Designing, conducting, and reporting psychological

experiments. Laboratory exercises, report writing, and a

group research project. Prerequisites: PSYC 1 and 110

and consent of department chair. (ND)

PSYC 301. Industrial Psychology (4)

Psychological concepts and methods applied to business

and industrial settings. Personnel selection, placement

and training, leadership, work motivation, job satisfac-

tion and consumer behavior. Prerequisite: PSYC 1. (SS)

PSYC 305. (HMS 305). Abnormal Psychology (4)

Examines research and theory on the patterns, causes,

and treatment of various forms of abnormal behavior.

Prerequisite: PSYC 153 or consent of instructor. (SS)

PSYC 307. Higher Order Cognition (4)

In depth exploration of selected areas of higher level cog-

nition such as thinking and reasoning, metacognition,

expertise, executive processes, language and thought.

Prerequisites: PSYC 117 or PSYC 176 or COGS 7 or

consent of instructor. O’Seaghdha, Malt. (Advanced

Psychology Seminar) (SS)

PSYC 308. (SSP 308) Seminar in Social

Psychology (4)

Intensive consideration of selected topics in current theo-

ry and research in social psychology. The subject matter

varies from semester to semester, and includes such top-

ics as the social psychology of education, the applications

of perception and learning theory to social psychological

problems, the social psychology of science, and the social

environment of communication. May be repeated for

credit. Prerequisite: ANTH 1 or SSP 1 or department

permission. (Advanced Psychology Seminar) (SS)

PSYC 310. Advanced Research Methods in

Psychology (4)

Experimental and nonexperimental research design;

Sampling and selection from populations; Data explo-

ration; Quantitative and qualitative measurement and

analysis; Computer-based data collection; and other spe-

cialized topics. Prerequisite: PSYC 210. (ND)

PSYC 311. The Psychology of Stereotyping,

Prejudice, and Discrimination (4)

We will start by examining the basic cognitive processes

that make stereotyping a functional aspect of everyday

cognition, and then we will turn toward examining emo-

tional, motivational, and personality differences that

affect one’s level of prejudice. Finally, we will study the

role of social forces in transmitting prejudice (parents,

schools, religion, media) and the impact of societal prej-

udice (discrimination) on those who are the targets of

prejudice. The changing face through the decades of how

stereotypes, prejudice, and discrimination are measured,

expressed, and understood is the focus of the course.

Prerequisites: PSYC/SSP 153 or PSYC/SSP 121.

Moskowitz. (Advanced Psychology Seminar) (SS)

PSYC 312. (SSP 312) Interpersonal Behavior in

Small Groups (4)

Intensive consideration of theoretical and methodologi-

cal issues in the analysis of the development of small

groups. Prerequisite: Any one of the following introduc-

tory courses: ANTH 1 or SSP 1 or department

permission. Rosenwein (SS)

PSYC 313. Person Perception (4)

Psychological processes involved in forming impressions

of others. Survey of the factors that influence the way in

which we think about the people who make up our

social environment and of the laboratory methods with

386 Lehigh University Course Catalog 2009-2010

which experimental social psychology investigates person

perception. The emphasis is on demonstrating the joint

impact of the behaviors performed by others and the

biases/expectancies that we bring into the social setting.

Prerequisites: PSYC/SSP 153 or SSP/PSYC 121.

Moskowitz (Advanced Psychology Seminar) (SS)

PSYC 314. (SSP 314) Social Cognition (4)

Examines the cognitive processes through which people

make sense of social groups, individual others, them-

selves, and the world. Topics include judgment and

decision making, attitudes and persuasion, ordinary per-

sonology, stereotyping and prejudice, and the self.

Prerequisite: Psyc 110 or SR 111. Gill (SS)

(Advanced Psychology Seminar)

PSYC 315. History of Modern Psychology (4)

Origin and development of major theories within per-

ception, cognition, biological, clinical, personality,

developmental, learning. 19th and 20th century thought

to provide an overview of psychology as a discipline.

Prerequisites: two 300-level PSYC courses. (Advanced

Psychology Seminar) (SS)

PSYC 317. Psychology of Emotion (4)

A selective overview of the scientific study of emotion.

Topics will include: historical and modern theories of

emotion, physiological and neuropsychological aspects of

emotions, evidence that facial expressions of emotion

may be universal among humans, and the role of emo-

tion in cognition. Prerequisite: PSYC 110 or consent of

the instructor. (Advanced Psychology Seminar) (SS)

PSYC 318. (WS 318) Seminar in Gender and

Psychology (4)

Gender as shaped by psychological and social psychologi-

cal processes. Socialization, communication and power,

gender stereotypes, methodological issues in sex differ-

ences research. Prerequisite: PSYC 210 completed or

concurrent or permission of instructor. Hyland.

(Advanced Psychology Seminar). (SS)

PSYC 320. Psychology of Language (4)

Psychological processes involved in language comprehen-

sion, production, and use. Topics include the relation of

language to thought; word meaning; speech perception;

language acquisition; sign language. Prerequisite: PSYC

117 or 176 or COGS 7 or consent of instructor. Malt,

O’Seaghdha. (Advanced Psychology Seminar) (SS)

PSYC 321. Language Development (4)

Descriptive and theoretical accounts of the development

of language. Primary focus is on the development of spo-

ken language in infancy and early childhood. Involves

observation of children at various stages of language

development. Prerequisite: PSYC 107 or 117. (Advanced

Psychology Seminar). (SS)

PSYC 322. Language in Atypical Populations (4)

Analysis of language function in atypical populations

and circumstances. Language deficits throughout the

lifespan will be considered, with particular emphasis on

their relevance to current linguistic and cognitive science

theory. Topics covered include atypical language develop-

ment (e.g., in Specific Language Impairment, Autism,

Down Syndrome, Williams Syndrome) as well as lan-

guage impairment after brain damage (e.g., stroke) or as

a result of progressive degenerative disorders (e.g.,

Alzheimer’s Disease). Prerequisites: PSYC 117 or 176 or

COGS 7 or COGS 140. (Advanced Psychology

Seminar) (SS)

PSYC 323. (SSP 323) The Child in Family and

Society (4)

Influences such as marital discord, family violence,

poverty and prejudice on the development of the child

from birth through adolescence. Prerequisite: ANTH 1

or SSP1 or department permission. Herrenkohl (SS)

PSYC 325. Theories in Social Psychology (4)

This course will compare the contributions and limita-

tions of major theoretical perspectives on social behavior,

and examine the nature of theory-construction and theo-

ry-testing in psychology generally. We will discuss broad

theories of social behavior (Behaviorism, Gestalt,

Psychodynamics, Symbolic Interactionism), as well as

more specific theories of social phenomena, such as

social perception, self-perception, and social influence.

Prerequisite: Psyc 121 or consent of instructor. Grant

(Advanced Psychology Seminar) (SS)

PSYC 327. (HMS 327) Health Psychology (4)

An overview of the topic of health psychology. The

course presupposes a preventative intervention approach

to the problem of assisting healthy individuals to under-

stand the relationship between behavior and health, and

to engage those behaviors that promote health. This

course will be underpinned with basic science and

research on health psychology, but will include an appli-

cation focus. Prerequisite: PSYC 110. (SS)

PSYC 328. Educational Psychology (4)

Overview of historical, contemporary, and emerging

issues in the field of educational psychology. Implications

of various social, cognitive and behavioral educational-

psychological theories for teaching and learning in the

classroom. Prerequisite: PSYC 107 or 109 or 117. (SS)

PSYC 331. Humanistic Psychology (4)

The literature of and metaphors underlying the human-

istic point of view in psychology. These “models of man”

are contrasted with models underlying other modes of

psychological inquiry. Prerequisites: PSYC 153.

(Advanced Psychology Seminar). (SS)

PSYC 333. (SSP 333, POLS 333) Social

Psychology of Politics (4)

Political behavior viewed from a psychological and social

psychological perspective. Prerequisite: ANTH 1; SSP 1;

PSYC 1, or department permission. Rosenwein (SS)

PSYC 335. (BIOS 335) Animal Behavior (3)

Discussion of the behavior of invertebrates and verte-

brates and analysis of the physiological mechanisms

responsible for behavioral actions, and adaptive value of

specific behavior patterns. Prerequisite: BIOS 31 or EES

31. (NS)

PSYC 338. Phenomenology and Theory of

Childhood Disorders (4)

The nature, classification, and treatment of childhood

disorders. Prerequisite: PSYC 107 (SS)

PSYC 341. Social Psychology and Social Issues (4)

This course examines the methods, concepts, and

research findings associated with the effort to apply

social psychology to the understanding and amelioration

of social problems. Special attention will be paid to the

topic of human conflict. Gill (Advanced Psychology

Seminar) (SS)

Psychology 387

PSYC 342. Motivation (4)

This seminar emphasizes theory and research on motiva-

tional approaches to social psychology. We will focus on

the ways in which goals, motives, and needs guide

behavior. We will explore such key issues as the nature of

achievement, well-being, self-regulation and self-control;

emotions, values, and belief-protection as sources of

social action; and the role of motivated cognition in

understanding the self and others. Prerequisite: PSYC

153 or PSYC 121. Grant (Advanced Psychology

Seminar) (SS)

PSYC 351. Cognitive Development (4)

Covers Piaget, Vygotsky, and contemporary theoretical

perspectives on cognitive development as well as current

research in areas such as memory, conceptual under-

standing of biological and physical concepts,

mathematics, problem-solving and literacy. The implica-

tions of research in cognitive development for

instructional practices will be discussed. Prerequisite:

Psyc 107, 117, or COGS 7. Barrett (SS) (Advanced

Psychology Seminar)

PSYC 354. Psychological Assessment (4)

Basic concepts in the construction, selection, administra-

tion, scoring, and interpretation of assessment

procedures commonly used in psychology. Selection and

evaluation of assessment procedures. Supervised experi-

ence administering, scoring, and interpreting assessment

procedures. Prerequisites: PSYC 110. (SS)

PSYC 356. (SSP 356) Seminar in Personality

Psychology (4)

Topics in personality psychology: the self, personality

consistency, motivation, psychological adjustment.

Prerequisite: PSYC 153 or consent of instructor.

(Advanced Psychology Seminar) (SS)

PSYC 358. Seminar in Infant Development (4)

Theories and current research focusing on development

in the first two years of life. Topics include cognitive,

perceptual, language, social, and emotional development,

and methods used in infancy research. Prerequisites:

PSYC 107 and consent of department chair. Barrett.

(Advanced Psychology Seminar) (SS)

PSYC 359. Seminar on Psychological Issues in the

Legal System (4)

Contributions of psychological research to understand-

ing the legal system. Social science data on juries,

eyewitnesses, mental illness, and the death penalty will

be discussed. Conflicts between psychological and legal

approaches will be highlighted. Barrett (Advanced

Psychology Seminar) (SS)

PSYC 361. (SSP 361) Personality and Social

Development in Adulthood (4)

Theories and current research. Prerequisite: SSP/PSYC

109 or consent of instructor. Hyland (Advanced

Psychology Seminar) (SS)

PSYC 362. Cognition in Practice & Policy (4)

We will take the study of cognition from principle to

practice by examining how basic research and theory has

informed understanding of human performance in real-

world settings. Topics will be chosen from domains such

as aviation and automobile safety, environmental and

medical decision-making, learning and education, and

expert performance in chess or music. We will also con-

sider public policy implications of these findings.

Prerequisite: Psyc 117 and Department permission

required. Malt (Advanced Psychology Seminar) (SS)

PSYC 363. (SSP 363) Personality and Social

Development in Childhood (4)

Issues related to social development (e.g., attachment,

social competence), social contexts (e.g., family, day

care), and personality development (e.g., sex roles,

aggression, temperament) from infancy through adoles-

cence. Prerequisite: PSYC 107 or consent of instructor.

(Advanced Psychology Seminar) (SS)

PSYC 364. Narratives, Culture, and

Development (4)

Examines the complex role of narratives - told to and by

children, and enacted by children in play - in children’s

experience and development. Compares and seeks to

integrate different approaches in psychology and other

disciplines. In the process, we will also be addressing

three basic questions: what is narrative, how is it signifi-

cant, and how should we study it? Prerequisite: PSYC

107. Nicolopoulou (Advanced Psychology Seminar) (SS)

PSYC 365. Human Development in Cross-

Cultural Perspective (4)

The formation of mind and personality is shaped in pro-

found ways by the sociocultural contexts within which

individuals develop. This course introduces students to

basic theoretical and methodological issues and explores

important examples of cross-cultural variation and diver-

sity, using comparisons between different societies and

between different subcultures within American society.

Topics include cognition, language, personality, moral

development, socio-emotional development, identity,

attachment, and socialization. Materials drawn from

anthropology, sociology and education in addition to

psychology. Prerequisites: One of the following courses

or consent of instructor: PSYC 107, PSYC 109,

PSYC/SSP 121, ANTH 1. Nicolopoulou (Advanced

Psychology Seminar) (SS)

PSYC 366. Seminar in Cognitive Aging (4)

Information processing by older adults: perception,

attention, memory, speech and text processing and com-

prehension. The course will also examine the effects on

cognitive processing of such diseases as Alzheimer’s and

Parkinson’s. Prerequisite: PSYC 109; PSYC 117 not

required but strongly recommended. (Advanced

Psychology Seminar) (SS)

PSYC 367. Clinical Psychology (4)

The science and profession of helping people overcome

psychological problems. Theories of human personality

and abnormality in relation to techniques for assessing

and treating psychosocial problems and in the light of

empirical evidence of validity and effectiveness.

Professional issues are also covered. Prerequisites: PSYC

153 and PSYC 305 or consent of instructor. (Advanced

Psychology Seminar) (SS)

PSYC 368. Children, Psychology, and the Law (4)

Covers psychological research on child witnesses, child

victims, juvenile crime, children’s rights and decision-

making capabilities, divorce and custody. Implications of

psychological research for social policy and legal reform

will be discussed. Prerequisite: Psyc 107. Barrett. (SS)

(Advanced Psychology Seminar)

PSYC 369. Memory (4)

The paradoxical power and fallibility of memory in the

388 Lehigh University Course Catalog 2009-2010

light of observational, experimental, clinical, and neurosci-

entific evidence. Potential topics include expert memory;

false memory; recovered memory; social transmission;

amnesia; memory and personal identity. Prerequisite:

PSYC 117 or PSYC 176 or COGS 7 or consent of instruc-

tor. O’Seaghdha (Advanced Psychology Seminar) (SS)

PSYC 373. Sensation and Perception (4)

Receptor processes of vision, audition, touch, taste, and

smell. Psychological dimensions of such processes leading

to consideration of perception as characteristic of organ-

isms. Prerequisite: PSYC 117 or 176 or COGS 7.

(Advanced Psychology Seminar) (SS)

PSYC 377. Attention and Attentional Failures (4)

Attention allows us to function in complex environ-

ments where there is more information than we could

possibly process all at once and failures of attention can

have drastic consequences. Experimental and neuropsy-

chological evidence will be surveyed for topics including

basic attentional phenomena, the role of attention in

everyday tasks, and the impact of attentional failures

from mind wandering to neuropsychological deficits like

ADHD. Prerequisite: PSYC 117 or PSYC 176 or COGS

7. Arrington (SS) (Advanced Psychology Seminar)

PSYC 378. Emotional Development (4)

The course will cover selected topics in emotional devel-

opment from infancy through adulthood. Topics will

include: infant attachment (learning to love), romantic

attachment (being in love), emotion regulation, sympa-

thy/empathy, anger/aggression, temperament, etc. We

will also discuss the ways in which significant relation-

ships with peers and parents shape children’s emotional

development. Prerequisite: Psyc 107 and Department

permission required. Laible (Advanced Psychology

Seminar) (SS)

PSYC 380. Sports Psychology (4)

Theory, research and application comprise this focal area

of psychology. The course will allow students to explore

the theory and research giving rise to individual, team,

and peak performance assessment and interventions.

Topics will include assessment, affect modulation,

imagery, cognitive formulation, and psychodynamic

development. Prereq: Psyc 110 or Psyc/SSP153 and

department permission required. (Advanced Psychology

Seminar) (SS)

PSYC 381. Special Topics in Psychology (4)

Topics vary from semester to semester. Topics are pre-

sented at an advanced level. Previous course work in

psychology is required. May be repeated for credit. (SS)

PSYC 382. (BIOS 382) Endocrinology of

Behavior (3)

Hormonal effects upon animal and human behavior.

Emphasis on neuroendocrinology of steroid hormone

involvement in reproductive behaviors. Prerequisite:

BIOS 177. (NS)

PSYC 383. Attachment Theory & Research: The

Study of Close Relationships Across the Lifespan (4)

This course will examine the influence of close relation-

ships across the lifespan on personality development. We

will examine the influence of parents, peers, siblings, and

romantic relationships using traditional attachment theo-

ry. In addition, we will also explore how attachment

quality is measured and the clinical applications of

attachment theory. Prerequisite: PSYC 107. Laible. (SS)

(Advanced Psychology Seminar)

PSYC 384. Self and Identity (4)

We will examine different types of identity (e.g., person-

al, relational, collective) and the cognitive processes that

allow for a multi-faceted yet unified sense of self. We will

study how self-related motives (e.g., enhancement, con-

sistency, distinctiveness) influence self-knowledge,

self-regulation, and mental health. Finally, we will

explore the origins of self from evolutionary, neuroscien-

tific, and cultural perspectives. Prereq: Psyc/SSP 121 or

Psyc/SSP 153 and department permission required.

Packer (Advanced Psychology Seminar) (SS)

PSYC 386. (HMS 386) Psychological Perspectives on

Health and Illness in Children and Adolescents (4)

Focuses on developmental research and theory related to

health and wellness issues in children and adolescents.

Topics include children’s understanding of biology and

disease, disease management, medical consent, education

and policy efforts to promote children’s health.

Department permission required. Barrett (Advanced

Psychology Seminar) (SS)

PSYC 391. Thesis (3)

Written report: Literature review and design of project in

selected area of psychology. Only open to students in the

honors program. Requires consent of the Honors

Program Coordinator. (ND)

PSYC 392. Thesis. (3)

Execution of project designed in PSYC 391. Final report

and oral presentation. Only open to students in the hon-

ors program. Prerequisites: PSYC 391 and consent of the

Honors Program Coordinator. (ND)

PSYC 393. Independent Research (1-3)

Individual research projects designed and executed in

collaboration with faculty sponsor. Regular meetings

with sponsor to give progress reports and receive feed-

back. Student reads relevant literature and writes report

in APA format. May be repeated for a maximum of 6

credits. Prerequisites: PSYC 210 or 161 and consent of

sponsor. (ND)

PSYC 394. Senior Research Project (3)

Literature review, design and execution of project in

selected area of psychology. Intended for senior majors in

psychology. May be repeated for up to 6 credits.

Prerequisites: Department permission required. (ND)

For Graduate Students

The Department of Psychology offers a distinctive Ph.D.

program centered in areas of Human Cognition and

Development with specializations in cognition and lan-

guage, development, and social cognition and

personality. Students are trained primarily for positions

at universities and in basic or applied research settings.

For the most complete and current information visit

www.lehigh.edu/ ~inpsy/gradprogram.html.

In addition we offer two non-degree Certificate

Programs in collaboration with other departments and

programs.

The Graduate Certificate in Stereotypes, Prejudice,

Discrimination, and Intergroup Relations is adminis-

tered by the Psychology Department. Information is

available via: www.lehigh.edu/~inpsy/certStereo.htm.

Psychology 389

The Graduate Certificate in Cognitive Science is admin-

istered by the Cognitive Science Program. Information is

available at: www.lehigh.edu/~inpsy/certCogsci.htm.

Requirements for a Ph.D. in the Department of

Psychology:

Research

All graduate students are expected to be involved in

research throughout their graduate careers. There are also

several formal research requirements of the program.

First-Year-Project (PSYC 412). First-year students are

expected to choose an adviser and begin to work on a

research project as early as possible. A written and oral

report of the student’s research activities is made to the

department. Students entering with an approved Master’s

thesis are exempt from this requirement.

Master’s Thesis. A master’s thesis (usually empirical or

data-based) is required. An oral presentation of the thesis

is made to the department. Students entering with a

master’s thesis may instead conduct an equivalent non-

degree Pre-dissertation Project.

Doctoral Dissertation. This is an original piece of schol-

arly work usually involving empirical research, although

original theoretical or historical research is possible with

faculty approval.

Course work

Core courses. All students are required to take a one-

semester graduate core course in Cognitive Psychology

(PSYC 403), Developmental Psychology (PSYC 402),

and Social Cognition (PSYC 406).

PSYC 421 and 422. Statistical Analysis of

Psychological Data. These courses represent a two-

semester sequence of theoretical and applied statistics

and research methodology.

Graduate Seminars (PSYC 430 and above). Students

must take at least three graduate seminars, and one addi-

tional course approved by the adviser.

PSYC 409 and 410. Professional Seminar. Bookend

seminars that cover professional development issues for

new and advanced students.

Teaching

Students are encouraged to participate in teaching as

appropriate for their training throughout their graduate

years. Normally, students begin as teaching assistants and

progress to teaching independently.

General Examination

This is required for all doctoral candidates and must be

passed at least seven months prior to the awarding of the

degree. The sub areas to be covered on the exam are

selected by the student in consultation with the student’s

general exam committee.

Evaluation

Graduate students are evaluated on their performance in

coursework, research, teaching, assistantship assignments,

and the general examination. The faculty provides each

student with a written evaluation of progress in the grad-

uate program annually.

Financial Support

Support is available in the form of teaching and research

assistantships, fellowships, and scholarships.

How to Apply

Applications for admission and financial aid may be

obtained from the Department of Psychology. While a

good undergraduate background in psychology is desir-

able, promising students with majors other than

psychology are encouraged to apply. Completed applica-

tion forms plus transcripts, letters of recommendation,

and a report of scores on the Graduate Record Examina-

tion and advanced tests in psychology should be

returned no later than January 15 of the year of admis-

sion. New students are normally accepted for entrance

into the program only for the fall semester.

Graduate-Level Courses

PSYC 402. Developmental Psychology (3)

Survey of theories and research concerning perceptual,

cognitive, social, and personality development through

infancy and childhood. Prerequisite: Graduate standing

or consent of instructor.

PSYC 403. Cognitive Psychology (3)

Survey of theories and research in cognitive psychology.

Prerequisite: Graduate standing or consent of instructor.

PSYC 404. (BIOS 404) Behavioral Neuroscience (3)

Theoretical and empirical issues in biopsychology.

Prerequisite: Graduate standing or consent of instructor.

PSYC 406. Social Cognition (3)

Theory and research on cognitive processes in personali-

ty and social functioning. The self, personality

consistency and change, causal attributions, social judg-

ment, goals and self-regulation, and mood and emotion.

Topics may vary. Prerequisite: Graduate standing or con-

sent of instructor.

PSYC 409. Professional Seminar I (1).

For students entering the Ph.D. program: Acculturation

to graduate school and the Psychology Ph.D. program in

particular; professional issues of relevance to individuals

at the outset of a research career in psychology.

Requirement: Department permission.

PSYC 410. Professional Seminar II (1).

For students nearing graduation: Professional issues of

special relevance to Psychology Ph.D. students preparing

for academic or nonacademic post-doctoral employment.

Requirement: Department permission.

PSYC 412. First Year Research Project. (1-3)

Research project or paper to be completed by June of the

first year of the Ph.D. program under the direction of a

faculty advisor. May be repeated in second semester of

program.

PSYC 415. History of Modern Psychology (3)

Origin and development of major theories in various

areas of psychology. Review of 19th and 20th century

thought to provide perspective on psychology as a disci-

pline.

PSYC 421. Statistical Analysis of Psychological

Data I. (3)

First of a two-semester sequence covering essential issues

in statistical analysis as practiced by psychologists. Topics

include data description, probability, z and t-tests, gener-

al linear model, simple correlation/regression, univariate

analysis of variance, chi-square. Emphasis on connecting

research designs to appropriate statistical tests, data inter-

pretation, and implementation in statistical packages.

Department permission required.

390 Lehigh University Course Catalog 2009-2010

PSYC 422. Statistical Analysis of Psychological

Data II. (3)

Second course of the two-semester statistics sequence.

Topics include advanced analysis of variance designs,

analysis of covariance, multivariate analysis, multiple

regression, and analysis of categorical data. Emphasis on

connecting research designs to appropriate statistical

tests, data interpretation, and implementation in statisti-

cal packages. Requirement: PSYC 421.

PSYC 423. (COGS 423) Foundations of Cognitive

Science (3)

Survey of fundamental theory and methodologies from

artificial intelligence, linguistics, cognitive psychology,

philosophy, and neuroscience, as well as salient research

problems such as knowledge acquisition and representa-

tion, natural language processing, skill acquisition,

perception and action, and the philosophical question of

intentionality.

PSYC 434. Seminar in Personality (3)

Selected topics in personality theory and research,

including personality change, the self, personality consis-

tency, and the relationships among thought, emotion,

and behavior. Prerequisite: PSYC 406.

PSYC 443. Seminar in Language Acquisition (3)

Special topics in language acquisition. Content will vary

each time the seminar is offered. Prerequisite: PSYC 402

or PSYC 403 or consent of instructor.

PSYC 446. Developmental Theories and Special

Populations (3)

Traditional developmental theories focus on normative

development. children with disabilities have a unique set

of experiences that pose special challenges for these theo-

ries. In the developmental literature, children with

disabilities have sometimes been the focus of studies

because they provide a “tests case” for specific theoretical

predictions. In this course, we will consider some of

these theoretical issues and the insights that have been

gained by focusing on special populations. Prerequisite:

PSYC 402 or consent of instructor. Barrett

PSYC 448. Seminar in Psychology of

Language (3)

Topics in language comprehension and production.

Content will vary from year to year. Prerequisite: PSYC

403 or consent of instructor.

PSYC 450. Special Topics in Mathematical Models

and Statistics (3)

Selected topics in the application of mathematics to psy-

chological research. May be repeated for credit.

PSYC 460. Special Study (1-9)

Study of some special topic not covered in the regular

course offerings. May be repeated for credit.

PSYC 461. Research Seminar (1-9)

Original research designed and executed in collaboration

with the faculty. May be repeated for credit.

PSYC 462. Stereotypes, Prejudice, and

Discrimination (3)

An in-depth survey of the social psychological literature

on stereotypes, prejudice, and discrimination. Topics will

include: Origin of stereotypes, mental representation of

stereotypes, cognitive and behavioral consequences of

stereotypes, inevitability of stereotyping, nature of preju-

dice in contemporary American society,

context-specificity of discriminatory behavior, and theo-

ries of intergroup conflict reduction. Prerequisite: PSYC

406 or consent of instructor. Gill

PSYC 464. Naive Realism in Social Judgment (3)

This seminar examines the variety of unconscious influ-

ences that impact on social judgment, with a focus on

the cognitive processing mechanisms through which

influence is exerted. These influences include contribu-

tions to judgment from attitudes, goals, accessible

constructs, mind-sets, stereotypes, expectancies, heuris-

tics, and theories about social objects. Prerequisite: PSYC

406 or consent of instructor. Moskowitz

PSYC 476. Seminar in Cognition (3)

Selected topics in human information processing, includ-

ing such areas as attention, memory, language and

comprehension, and decision-making. Area of emphasis

will vary from year to year. Prerequisite: PSYC 403 or

consent of instructor.

PSYC 478. (COGS 478) Ontological Psychology (3)

Principles and constraints for the modeling of psycholog-

ical phenomena: perception, memory, knowing,

emotions, consciousness, language, and rationality.

Bickhard

PSYC 480. Seminar in Cognitive Development (3)

Selected topics in cognitive development in infancy and

childhood, including such areas as conceptual develop-

ment, memory development, the development of

reasoning abilities, and language acquisition. Emphasis

will vary from year to year. Prerequisite: PSYC 402 or

consent of instructor.

PSYC 481. Selected Topics in Social and

Personality Development (3)

Topics include emotional and sex-role development, peer

relations, and social competence. Emphasis will vary

from year to year. Prerequisite: PSYC 402 or consent of

instructor.

PSYC 482. Seminar in Adult Development (3)

Application of lifespan developmental theory and

methodology to personality, social, and cognitive devel-

opment in adulthood. Prerequisite: PSYC 402 or

consent of instructor. Hyland

PSYC 483. Seminar in Cultural Psychology (3)

Major theoretical approaches and empirical debates in

cultural psychology, with a focus on the interplay of

individual and sociocultural elements in the formation of

mind, the emergence of the self, and the definition and

reproduction of culture. Prerequisite: PSYC 402 or con-

sent of instructor. Nicolopoulou

PSYC 484. (WS 484). Psychology of Gender (3)

Major theoretical approaches and empirical debates in

the psychology of gender, with a focus on the interplay

of nature and nurture in producing gender similarities,

gender differences and gender variation in personality,

social behaviors, cognitive abilities, achievement, sexuali-

ty, and mental health. Methodological issues in gender

research. Prerequisite: graduate standing. Department

permission required. Hyland

PSYC 490. Thesis Research (1-6).

Master’s Thesis or Pre-dissertation Project research

directed by committee.

PSYC 495. Narrative & Psychology (3)

This course explores the increasing significance of narra-

Quality Engineering 391

tive analysis in psychology by delineating the conceptual

foundations of a narrative perspective and considering

arguments for narrative as an integrative paradigm in

psychological research. Particular emphasis will be on the

constitutive role of narrative in cognitive and socio-emo-

tional development, the formation of identity, moral

understanding, and other domains. Some specific topics

will be narrative development, autobiographical memory,

self-narrative, identity development, narratives of con-

flict, and the role of narrative in socialization and

education. Prerequisite: Psyc 402 or consent of instruc-

tor. Nicolopoulou

PSYC 499. Dissertation Research (1-15).

Ph.D. dissertation research directed by dissertation com-

mittee.

Quality Engineering

Program. The Master’s of Science degree in Quality

Engineering (MSQE) is offered by the Department of

Industrial and Systems Engineering (ISE). A list of the

faculty and descriptions of the courses are included in

the catalog description (see catalog index) of the ISE

department. The program is designed to accommodate

students who are employed full time. Courses are trans-

mitted via satellite to work sites anywhere in the

continental USA.

Admission. To be considered for admission to the

MSQE program, applicants must have a Bachelor’s of

Science degree in engineering (any discipline) or in sci-

ence.

University Requirements. All of the university rules that

apply to the awarding of Master’s degrees at Lehigh

apply to the MSQE, except for the following: no thesis

or report or general examination is required. The univer-

sity rules that do apply to the MSQE are spelled out in

the catalog, under the heading “Degree Information”

(see catalog index).

Departmental Requirements. All candidates must com-

plete thirty hours of course work—fifteen hours of core

courses and fifteen hours of electives. The core courses,

which all candidates take, are listed below:

IE 328 Engineering Statistics (3)

IE 332 Product Quality (3)

IE 410 Design of Experiments (3)

IE 422 Measurement and Inspection

Systems (3)

IE 442 Manufacturing Management (3)

Any offered IE or MSE course, if not a core course, is an

acceptable elective, and at least nine hours of the elec-

tives must be courses, which have prefix IE or MSE. Up

to six hours of the electives may be any graduate course

or courses that the candidate’s advisor approves.

Up to nine hours of credits earned at other institutions

may be used to satisfy degree requirements, if transfer of

credits is approved by the registrar.

Religion Studies

Professors. Norman J. Girardot, Ph.D. (Chicago),

University Distinguished Professor; Kenneth L. Kraft,

Ph.D. (Princeton); Michael L. Raposa, Ph.D.

(Pennsylvania) Fairchild Chair of American Studies;

Laurence J. Silberstein, Ph.D. (Brandeis), Philip and

Muriel Berman Professor of Jewish Studies, and Director of

the Philip and Muriel Berman Center for Jewish Studies;

Lloyd H. Steffen, Ph.D. (Brown); Lenore E. Chava

Weissler, Ph.D. (Pennsylvania), Philip and Muriel

Berman Chair of Jewish Civilization; Benjamin G.

Wright, III, Ph.D. (Pennsylvania) Chair.

Associate Professor. Robert Rozehnal, Ph.D. (Duke).

The religion studies department is committed to the aca-

demic investigation of religion as an intrinsic and vital

dimension of human culture. The scholarly study of reli-

gion is an integral facet of a liberal arts education. The

student of religion is engaged in the critical and interpre-

tive task of understanding patterns of religious thought

and behavior as aspects of the human cultural experience.

Religion studies is interdisciplinary in that it draws upon

humanistic and social scientific modes of inquiry. These

include historical, philosophical, sociological, anthropo-

logical, and psychological perspectives. Religion studies is

a cross-cultural, comparative discipline concerned with

the character and significance of the major religious tradi-

tions of the world. The student of religion confronts

ethical problems and basic issues of value and meaning

raised by modern multicultural and technological society.

Major in Religion Studies

The major in religion studies consists of 32 credit hours

of coursework (eight courses). Requirements include:

• In consultation with a major advisor from the depart-

mental faculty, students will devise a balanced plan of

study responsive to individual needs and interests.

The curriculum for each major will demonstrate

exposure to a diversity of approaches to the interdisci-

plinary, trans-cultural field of religion studies.

• At least four courses at the 100 level or above.

• REL 374 Seminar for Majors.

The department recommends that in consultation with a

major advisor, students concentrate in one of the major

religious traditions, or in a comparative or thematic

approach to the study of religion. The concentration

should include at least four courses. Language study

appropriate to the concentration is also desirable.

Students are particularly encouraged to consider a joint

or double major with another major field from any of

the three colleges at the university.

Departmental Honors

Religion studies majors are admitted to honors by invita-

tion of the departmental faculty toward the end of the

student’s junior year. To be eligible, a student must have

attained at least a 3.25 average in his or her major pro-

gram by the end of the junior year. Upon admittance to

honors, the student will work out a special program of

studies for the senior year with the major advisor, culmi-

nating in the writing of a senior essay.

Minor in Religion Studies

The minor in religion studies consists of a total of 16

credits. The specific courses to be taken by each student

are to be decided upon jointly by the student and the

departmental advisor. Ordinarily, the student will be

expected to take one introductory course unless specifi-

cally exempted by the department chair.

392 Lehigh University Course Catalog 2009-2010

Course Offerings

REL 1. Sacred Scriptures in Religious Traditions (4)

An encounter with the different sacred books of the

world’s major religions. Both the books and differing

attitudes in these traditions towards sacred books are

examined. Books investigated include the Bhagavad

Gita, the Analects of Confucius, the Qur’an and the

Jewish and Christian Bibles. Wright (HU)

REL 2. Death in Religious Traditions (4)

Introduces students to the study of religion through an

exploration of what different religious traditions have to

say about the great mystery that we all face, death.

Because we all must die, all religions must deal with the

challenge and sense of crisis provoked by the deaths of

those close to us, of innocent victims of disaster, disease,

and crime, and our own imminent deaths. Death thus

provides an excellent point of comparison among the

various religious traditions. Weissler (HU)

REL 3. (GCP 3, PHIL 3) Global Religion, Global

Ethics (4)

Introduction to philosophical and religious modes of

moral thinking, with attention given to ethical issues as

they arise cross-culturally in and through religious tradi-

tions. The course will reference the United Nations

Millennium Goals to consider family life and the role of

women, social justice, the environment, and ethical

ideals. Particular focus varies but may include one or

more of the following: abortion and reproductive health,

the death penalty, religiously motivated violence, and

problems of personal disorder (heavy drinking, anorexia,

vengeance). A Global Citizenship course. Steffen (HU)

REL 4. How to Study Religion (4)

How do sociologists, psychologists and philosophers

answer such questions as: Why and how do religions

arise? Why and how do people develop beliefs in God?

Where do religious scriptures come from? Why do peo-

ple ascribe authority to religious traditions? Why has

religious faith declined in modern society? Silberstein

(HU)

REL 5. Spiritual Exercises in Religious Traditions (4)

Explores a variety of religious disciplines developed in

various traditions, ranging from the practice of yoga and

the martial arts to various forms of prayer, meditation,

and asceticism. Raposa (HU)

REL 6. Religion and the Ecological Crisis (4)

Past and present responses to nature in world religions.

Contemporary topics include the animal rights debate,

ecofeminism, and the development of environmental

ethics. Is “the end of nature” at hand? Why is the envi-

ronment a religious issue? Kraft (HU)

REL 7. Jesus, Buddha, Mao, and Elvis (4)

Comparative and cross-cultural exploration of the nature

and meaning of “religious founders” in the history of

religions. Girardot (HU)

REL 8. (WS 8) Prehistoric Religion, Art, and

Technology (4)

Origins and early development of religions, with focus

on interactions of religion, art, and technology in the

Paleolithic and Neolithic periods. Special attention to

the emergence of patriarchal social forms and the figure

of the goddess. Interdisciplinary methods with a consid-

eration of feminist theories of cultural development.

Girardot (HU)

REL 9. Spiritual Journeys (4)

A comparative survey of spiritual traveling-from overland

pilgrimages to inward journeys in search of truth.

Through autobiographies, diaries, poetry and films, stu-

dents encounter the experiences of seekers from diverse

religious traditions, including Hinduism, Buddhism,

Christianity and Islam. Rozehnal (HU)

REL 22. (ART 22) Visions of God: 2000 Years of

Christian History and Art (4)

An Interdisciplinary course that combines art history and

the history of Christianity. From the beginnings of their

tradition, Christians have represented their theologies

and religious sentiments in visual arts and architecture,

and for the same two millennia, a myriad of Christians

have learned their Christianity through visual representa-

tions. Provides a one-semester survey of the history of

Christianity as expressed in the visual arts. Wright (HU)

REL 42. (ART 42) Representing the Sacred: Art

and Religious Experience in Italy [Lehigh in

Rome and Florence Program, alternate years] (6)

This course explores the interaction between artistic

expression and religious experience from the earliest

traces of Christian art in the catacombs to the sensual

and theatrical churches in the Baroque. All classes are

conducted on site: in museums, churches and in the

streets of Rome, Florence, and Assisi. Wright (HU)

REL 60. (ASIA 60) Religions of South Asia (4)

A thematic introduction to the foundational religious

traditions of South Asia: Hinduism, Jainism, Buddhism,

Sikhism and Islam. Students explore the social and spiri-

tual dimensions of these religious worlds through

scripture, ritual practices, narrative and teaching tradi-

tions, music and art. Rozehnal (HU)

REL 64. (ASIA 64) Religions of China (4)

History and meaning of the major forms of Chinese reli-

gion- especially Confucianism and Neo-Confucianism,

Taoist mysticism, Buddhism (Ch’an/Zen), and popular

religion. Girardot (HU)

REL 65. (ASIA 65) Religions of Japan (4)

A survey of Japan’s diverse religious heritage and its

impact on contemporary culture. Japanese approaches to

the self, the world, and the sacred are considered in com-

parative perspective. Topics covered include: Shinto,

Buddhism, Zen, Confucianism, the way of the warrior,

folklore, and postwar movements. Kraft (HU)

REL 67. (ASIA 67) Japanese Civilization (4)

The history and culture of Japan from its origins to the

present. Special consideration will be given to the rise

and fall of the warrior class, developments in art and reli-

gion, the dynamics of family life, and Japan’s “economic

miracle.” Kraft (H/S)

REL 68. Practical Justice: From Social Systems to

Responsible Community (4)

Examination of the role of moral and religious values in

social systems, including education, the economic sys-

tem, criminal justice, with particular attention to the

problems of poverty, literacy, homelessness and domestic

violence. Students engage in volunteer efforts to gain

practical experience with those who deliver and receive

services in these systems. An action-reflection model

(with reference to liberation theology and religious

thinkers like M.L. King, Dorothy Day, and Walter

Rauschenbusch) is employed to urge reflection on how

Religion Studies 393

social systems can be affected and transformed by visions

of justice, ethics, religion and social responsibility.

Steffen (HU)

REL 73. The Jewish Tradition (4)

Judaism is both a textual tradition and a lived religion.

Students read basic Jewish texts—Bible, Talmud,

Midrash—and study the ways Jews sanctify the life cycle

through rites of passage, and the round of the year

through the festival cycle. Silberstein, Weissler (HU)

REL 75. The Christian Tradition (4)

Introduction to the Christian tradition from its early

variety and subsequent classical definition in the church

councils up to the enlightenment. Special emphasis will

be placed on the multiform interpretations of the

Christian message. (HU)

REL 76. Reading the Bible in the Contemporary

World (4)

Reading passages from the Bible with an eye toward dis-

tinguishing and understanding different sorts of

questions that can be asked of them and various perspec-

tives that can be adopted when reading them. What are

these stories about? What do they mean, when, and to

whom? Wright (HU)

REL 77. (ASIA 77) The Islamic Tradition (4)

A thematic introduction to Islamic history, doctrine and

practice. Topics include: Qur’an; prophecy and sacred

history; ritual practices; community life; legal interpreta-

tion; art and aesthetics; mysticism; politics and polemics.

Rozehnal (HU)

REL 111. Jewish Scriptures/Old Testament (4)

The religious expression of the Hebrews, Israelites, and

Jews as found in the Jewish Scriptures

(TANAK/Christian Old Testament). Near Eastern con-

text of Hebrew religion, the Patriarchs, the Exodus, the

monarchy, prophecy, Exile and Return. Emphasis on his-

torical, literary, critical problems, and newer

socio-historical methods. Wright (HU)

REL 112. The Beginnings of Judaism and Jewish

Origins: Jewish Diversity in the Greco-Roman

World (4)

The variety of approaches to Judaism in the period fol-

lowing the Babylonian exile through the second century

C.E. The literature studied will include Apocrypha,

Pseudepigrapha, and the Dead Sea Scrolls. Wright (HU)

REL 114. (CLSS 114) Christian Origins: New

Testament and the Beginnings of Christianity (4)

Early Christianity from its beginnings until the end of

the second century. Coverage includes the Jewish and

Hellenistic matrices of Christianity, traditions about the

life of Jesus and his significance, and the variety of belief

and practice of early Christians. Emphasis on encounter-

ing primary texts. Wright (HU)

REL 115. (PSYC 115) Religion and

Psychology (4)

A study of the origins, development and consequences of

religion from a psychological perspective. Attention will

be given to classic and contemporary sources, with a

focus on major psychoanalytic theorists of religion

(Freud, Jung, Erikson); psychological analyses of reli-

gious experience (e.g., Wm. James, Victor Frankl); and

the diverse cultural and religious forms that structure the

connection between religion and psychology (e.g.,

Buddhist psychology, Japanese Morita therapy). Course

examines the role of religion as a powerful meaning sys-

tem that can affect the lives of individuals in terms of

motivations, beliefs, emotions and behaviors, and can

influence their interactions on both interpersonal and

intergroup levels. (HU)

REL 116. (PHIL 116) Bioethics (4)

Moral issues that arise in the context of health care and

related biomedical fields in the United States today,

examined in the light of the nature and foundation of

moral rights and obligations. Topics include: confiden-

tiality, informed consent, euthanasia, medical research

and experimentation, genetics, the distribution of health

care, etc. (HU)

REL 120. Newish Jewish: New Forms of Judaism

in North America (4)

The new millennium has seen the emergence of new

forms of Judaism and of Jewishness in North America:

Jewish hip hop music, graphic novels, zines, performance

arts, blogs, earth-based spirituality, and ecological

activism. The course will examine the roots of these phe-

nomena in Jewish traditions and texts and in American

popular culture, and explore the uses of hybridity and

pastiche in the forms of Jewish identity they create.

Weissler (HU)

REL 121. Sources for the Life of Jesus: the Jewish

and Christian Context (4)

Ancient sources that claim to provide information about

Jesus of Nazareth. Approaches taken to Jesus’ life and

career; early Christian interpretations of the significance

of Jesus; methodology in assessing evidence for the his-

torical Jesus and his message. Wright (HU)

REL 124. (PHIL 124) Philosophy of Religion (4)

A critical look, from a philosophical perspective, at some

fundamental problems of religion: The nature of reli-

gious experience and belief, reason and revelation, the

existence and nature of God, the problem of evil, and

religious truth. Raposa (HU)

REL 126. (HUM 126, PHIL 126) Professional

Ethics (4)

An examination of the moral rules and action guides

that govern various professions. Professions to be exam-

ined will include health (physician and nursing); legal;

counseling and psychiatry; engineering; military; clergy;

teaching. Attention will be given to modes of ethical rea-

soning and how those modes are practically applied in

professional life and activity. Among issues to be dis-

cussed will be the limits of confidentiality; employer

authority; power relationships; obligations to the public;

professional rights; sexual boundaries; whistle-blowing;

safety and risk; computer ethics; weapons development;

discrimination; professional review of ethical infractions.

Course will include guest lectures and case studies.

Steffen (HU)

REL 129. (PHIL 129) Jewish Philosophy (4)

How major Jewish thinkers from the first to the 20th

centuries confronted questions at the intersection of reli-

gion and philosophy: the existence and nature of God,

free will, evil, divine providence, miracles, creation, reve-

lation, and religious obligation. (HU)

REL 132. Hasidic Tales (4)

Examines the mysterious and beautiful tales told by

Hasidim, participants in the movement of spiritual

394 Lehigh University Course Catalog 2009-2010

revival which arose within 18th century Judaism.

Compares Hasidic tales to European fairy tales, and

shows how later writers transformed Hasidic narratives

to express their own religious or literary meanings.

Weissler (HU)

REL 133. Alternative Religions in the 21st

Century (4)

An exploration of alternative religious beliefs and prac-

tices in the 21st century. Topics include the new

pluralism, adaptations of Asian traditions, goddess reli-

gion, and spiritual environmentalism. What

distinguishes a religion from a cult? What goes awry

when violence is perpetrated in the name of religion?

Kraft (HU)

REL 137. (HUM 137, PHIL 137) Ethics in

Practice (1-4)

A variable content course focusing on ethical issues aris-

ing in a particular profession, such as law, health,

business, engineering, military. Variable credit. May be

taken more than once. Steffen (HU)

REL 138. (WS 138) Women in Jewish History (4)

Contributions of, and limitations on, women at different

stages of Jewish history, using both primary sources and

secondary material. Experience of modern Jewish

women, and the contemporary feminist critique of tradi-

tional gender roles. Weissler (HU)

REL 139. (ANTH 139) Jewish Folklore (4)

Examines the transformation of folk and popular

Judaism from the Old World, through the period of

immigration to America, to ethnic and later forms of

American Jewish culture. Attention paid to concept of

folklore revivals and their meanings. Four case studies:

folk tales and storytelling, klezmer music, life-cycle ritu-

als, and food. Weissler (SS)

REL 141. (PHIL 141) Medieval Islamic

Philosophy (4)

An introduction to Islamic philosophy in the medieval

era, the Golden Age of Islamic civilization. The course

focuses on primary sources. Readings include both expo-

sitions and critiques of philosophical doctrines and

argument, selected from the writings of al-Farabi, Ibn

Sina (Avicenna), al-Ghazali, Ibn Tufayl, and Ibn Rushd

(Averroes). Yaqub (HU)

REL 144. (ART 144) Raw Vision: Creativity and

Ecstasy in the Work of Shamans, Mystics, and

Artist Outsiders (4)

Comparative exploration of the nature and meaning of

religious and artistic experience as reflected in shaman-

ism (both prehistoric and tribal), mystic traditions

(especially Daoism and Christianity), and contemporary

self-taught artistic visionaries (e.g., Jean Dubuffet,

Howard Finster, Mr. Imagination, Lonnie Holley,

Norbert Kox). Various disciplinary perspectives will be

employed including comparative religions, anthropology,

art history, and psychology. Girardot (HU)

REL 145. (ASIA 145, GCP 145) Islam in the

Modern World (4)

Examines how numerous Muslim thinkers-religious

scholars, modernists, and Islamists-have responded to the

changes and challenges of the colonial and post-colonial

eras. Special emphasis is placed on the public debates

over Islamic authority and authenticity in contemporary

South Asia. Rozehnal (HU)

REL 146. (ASIA 146) Islam in South Asia (4)

A survey of the dynamic encounter between Islamic and

Indic civilizations. Topics include: Islamic identity, piety

and practice; art and aesthetic traditions; inter-commu-

nal exchange and conflict; the colonial legacy; and the

politics of contemporary religious nationalism. Rozehnal

(HU)

REL 148. (GCP 148) Islam Across Cultures (4)

Explores the Muslim world’s diversity and dynamism in

multiple cultural contests-from the Middle East and

North Africa, to Asia and America-through literature,

ethnography, and films. Topics include: travel and trade

networks; education; women and gender; Islam and cul-

tural pluralism; colonialism; and identity politics.

Rozehnal (HU)

REL 150. Judaism in the Modern World (4)

Fundamental themes in the experience of modern Jewry;

confrontation with secular culture; crisis of religious

faith; Zionism and the renewal of Jewish nationalism;

the problem of Jewish identity in America; and the

impact of the Holocaust. Silberstein, Weissler (HU)

REL 151. (HIST 151) Medieval Civilization (4)

Formation and development of western culture to about

1400. Rise of universities and towns, legal development

and origins of representative government, origins of

nation-states, scholasticism and decline of the medieval

church. Savage (HU)

REL 152. American Judaism (4)

Diverse cultural and social forms through which

American Jews express their distinct identity. Is

American Jewry an example of assimilation and decline

or creative transformation? What, if anything, do

American Jews share in common? Compatibility of

Judaism with individualism, pluralism, and voluntarism.

How have the Holocaust and the State of Israel shaped

the self-understanding of American Jewry? Silberstein

(HU)

REL 153. The Spiritual Quest in Contemporary

Jewish Life (4)

What factors explain the current growth of spirituality in

American Jewish life? How does spirituality differ from

conventional religion? What is the impact of Jewish spir-

ituality on contemporary Jewish worship? How does the

growth of Jewish spirituality relate to the broader issues

of Jewish identity? What accounts for the growing inter-

est in Buddhism among Jews? What is the impact of

feminism on Jewish spirituality? How does the growth of

spirituality among Jews relate to the growth of spirituali-

ty in general American culture? Silberstein (HU)

REL 154. (HIST 154) The Holocaust: History and

Meaning (4)

The Nazi holocaust in its historical, political and reli-

gious setting. Emphasis upon moral, cultural and

theological issues raised by the Holocaust. (HU)

REL 155. Responses to the Holocaust (4)

A multi-media study of the ways in which writers,

artists, film makers, cartoonists, composers, and comics

have responded to the horrors of the Holocaust. Among

the questions to be considered are: How is it possible to

describe and represent the Holocaust in writing? In art?

In film? What distinguishes the ways in which this is

done by different generations? How is the memory of

these events being effectively preserved and transmitted

Religion Studies 395

through monuments and museums? What role does the

memory of the Holocaust play in the life of contempo-

rary Jews? Silberstein (HU)

REL 156. Israel, Zionism, and the Renewal of

Judaism (4)

New interpretations of Judaism, the Jewish community

and Jewish history developed by Zionist thinkers.

Diverse currents within Jewish nationalist thought and

critical responses to Zionist ideology. Silberstein (HU)

REL 157. (HIST 157) Europe in the Age of the

Reformation (4)

The breakup of the religious culture of medieval

Christian Europe in the reformation movements of the

sixteenth century. The origins and varieties of

Protestantism; the intersection of religious ideas and pol-

itics in Germany, Switzerland, Britain, France, and the

Netherlands; the “wars of religion” and the emergence of

the European state system. Baylor (HU)

REL 158. (WS 158) Sex and Gender in Judaism (4)

Writings by Jewish feminists reflecting the encounter

between Judaism and feminism: prayer and ritual,

women rabbis, God, and God language, communal

power, the marriage and divorce. Silberstein (HU)

REL 159. Roman Catholicism in the Modern

World (4)

A survey of the various intellectual, cultural, political

and ecclesiastical developments that have shaped con-

temporary Roman Catholic life and thought. Raposa

(HU)

REL 160. (ASIA 160) The Daoist Tradition (4)

Consideration of the religious and cultural significance

of Daoism in its various historical forms. Primary atten-

tion will be given to a close reading of some of the most

important texts of the early philosophical tradition (e.g.

Tao Te Ching, Chuang Tzu) and of the later religious

tradition (e.g. Pao P’u Tzu and other selections from the

Tao Tsang). Contemporary implications of Daoist

thought will also be considered (e.g. “The Tao of

Physics”, “a Taoist on Wall Street”, and “the Tao of

Japanese Management”). Girardot (HU)

REL 162. (ASIA 162) Zen Buddhism (4)

History, doctrines, and practices of Zen Buddhism in

China, Japan, and the West. Monastic life, notable Zen

masters, Zen’s cultural impact, and enlightenment.

Current aspects of the Zen tradition. (Optional medita-

tion workshop.) Kraft (HU)

REL 164. (ASIA 164, IR 164) Japan’s Response to

the West (4)

A survey of Japanese history and culture from 1500 to

the present, following the theme of Japan’s contact with

the West. What enabled Japan to modernize and

Westernize so successfully? Topics covered include: the

expulsion of Christianity, the first samurai mission to the

U.S., the postwar American occupation, and contempo-

rary issues. Readings include Japanese novels and short

stories (in translation). Kraft (H/S)

REL 165. Jews, Christians, and Buddhism: The

Turn to the East in American Culture (4)

In recent decades, a growing number of Americans raised

as Jews and Christians have embraced the teachings and

practices of Buddhism. Through a study of contempo-

rary Buddhist writings, personal accounts, and other

readings, we shall examine what Jews and Christians find

attractive in Buddhism. We shall also explore the areas of

conflict between Buddhism and Western religions as well

as cultural conditions that are contributing to

Buddhism’s growing appeal. Silberstein (HU)

REL 166. (ASIA 166, GCP 166) Religious

Nationalism in South Asia (4)

This course explores the conflation and conflict of reli-

gion and politics in one of the most complex, dynamic

and volatile regions on the planet (South Asia). Through

literature, film and scholarly writings, students will

examine the history of cooperation and conflict between

the Muslim and Hindu communities in South Asia-from

the movements for national independence to twenty-first

century identity politics. (HU)

REL 167. (ASIA 167) Engaged Buddhism (4)

Examines a contemporary international movement that

applies Buddhist teachings and practices to social, politi-

cal, and environmental issues. Topics include: important

thinkers, forms of engagement, and areas of controversy.

Kraft (HU)

REL 168. (ASIA 168) Buddhism in the Modern

World (4)

Explores contemporary Buddhism in Asia, America, and

Europe. Topics include the plight of Tibet, Buddhist

environmentalism, and the emergence of a socially

engaged Buddhism. How are Westerners adapting this

ancient tradition to address present-day concerns? Kraft

(HU)

REL 171. (SSP 171) Religion and Society (4)

An introduction to the sociology of religion. Covers clas-

sical and contemporary approaches to defining and

studying the role of religion in society. Emphasis on

understanding religious beliefs and practices in the

United States, the sources and contours of religious

change, and the effects of religion on individuals and

society. Specific topics include religious fundamentalism,

religious conversion, religious practices and authority,

secularization, religion in public life, religion in social

change, religious terrorism, and the ways in which reli-

gion impacts our personal health, educational

attainment, and family life. Munson (SS)

REL 174. Contemporary Theology (4)

Major 20th century movements within Christian and

Jewish theology understood as responses to the problems

of modern times. May be repeated for credit as the sub-

ject matter varies. Raposa (HU)

REL 175. (ASIA 175, GCP 175) Sufi Saints and

Muslim Missionaries [Lehigh India Summer

Program] (6)

This month-long summer study-travel program in north

India focuses on the intersection of religion and politics

among South Asia’s dynamic Muslim communities. The

course focuses in particular on two distinct traditions of

Islamic piety: Sufism (Islamic mysticism) and the conser-

vative, transnational political movement, the Tablighi

Jama’at. Students travel to a range of important historical

sites, mosques, Sufi shrines and university campuses and

engage local experts through a series of guest lecturers.

Rozehnal (HU)

REL 176. (GCP 176) The Islamic Heritage of

Turkey [Lehigh in Turkey Summer Program] (6)

This month-long summer study-travel program in

396 Lehigh University Course Catalog 2009-2010

Turkey explores the religion, politics and culture of

Turkey, both past and present. A major frame for the

course is Sufism (Islamic mysticism) – both its historical

roots and contemporary expressions. Students will travel

to a range of important historical sites, mosques, Sufi

shrines and university campuses and engage local experts

through a series of guest lectures. Rozehnal (HU)

REL 180. (HIST 180) Religion and the American

Experience (4)

The historic development of major American religious

groups from colonial times to the present; their place in

social and political life, and the impact of the national

experience upon them. Najar (HU)

REL 181. (IR 181) Israel: Religion, Culture,

National Identity (4)

What is “Israeliness?” Beginning with an exploration of

the basic premises of Zionism, the course will then

examine the debates within Israeli society concerning

national identity, religion and culture. Silberstein (HU)

REL 184. (WS 184) Religion, Gender, and Power (4)

Gender differences as one of the basic legitimations for

the unequal distribution of power in Western society.

Feminist critiques of the basic social structures, cultural

forms, and hierarchies of power within religious commu-

nities, and the ways in which religious groups have

responded. Silberstein (HU)

REL 186. Judaism in Israel and the United States (4)

Explores the differences/similarities in the ideologies,

myths and symbols which shape the views of Jews in

Israel and the United States on such issues as: the mean-

ing of Judaism, the interpretation of Jewish history, the

relationship of religion and peoplehood, and the rela-

tionship of democracy and Jewish values. Readings

include Amos Oz, A.B. Yehoshua, Haim Hazaz, Leonard

Fein, Mordecai Kaplan. Silberstein (HU)

REL 187. Science, Technology, and the Religious

Imagination (4)

Impact of the scientific and technological culture on the

Western religious imagination. Roots of science and

technology in religious ideas and images. Ways of know-

ing and concepts of experience in religion and science.

Raposa (HU)

REL 188. Religion and Literature (4)

Religious themes in the modern novel or the spiritual

autobiography. Melville, Tolstoy, Camus, Updike,

Walker, and Morrison; or Woolman, Tolstoy, Malcolm

X, Wiesel, Frederick Douglass, Sojourner Truth, Kukai.

Steffen (HU)

REL 189. Religion and the Visual Arts (4)

To what extent does the process and production of artis-

tic images relate to visionary experience in the history of

world religions, and expose a religious dimension in life?

In what sense is an artistic vocation similar to the reli-

gious vocation of a shaman, prophet, or saint? In what

way do artists and religious figures respond to, change,

and create the “real” world? Girardot (HU)

REL 213. (CLSS 213, HIST 213) Ancient Roman

Religion (4)

Religious experience of the Roman people from prehisto-

ry to end of the empire. Nature of polytheism and its

interactions with monotheism (Christianity, Judaism).

Theories of religion. Emphasis on primary source mate-

rials. (SS)

REL 220. (ASIA 220) Classics of Asian

Religion (4)

Sacred scriptures of Asia and an introduction to the reli-

gions they represent. What do these texts teach about

reality, humanity, divinity, and society? How is the path

of spiritual practice presented in the different traditions?

Prerequisite: one prior course in Religion or Asian

Studies. Kraft, Girardot (HU)

REL 221. (ASIA 221) Topics in Asian

Religions (4)

Selected thematic and comparative issues in different

Asian religious traditions. May include Buddhism and

Christianity, religion and martial arts, Asian religions in

America, Taoist meditation, Zen and Japanese business,

Buddhist ethics. May be repeated for credit. Girardot,

Kraft, Rozehnal (H/S)

REL 222. Topics in Western Religions (4)

Selected historical, thematic, and comparative issues in

Judaism, Christianity, and Islam. May be repeated for

credit as the subject matter varies. (HU)

REL 224. (PHIL 224) Topics in the Philosophy of

Religion (4)

Selected problems and issues in the philosophy of reli-

gion. May be repeated for credit as the subject matter

varies. Raposa (HU)

REL 225. Topics in Religion and Ethics (4)

Analysis of various moral problems and social value

questions. Possible topics include: environmental and

non-human animal ethics; medical ethics; drug and alco-

hol abuse; spiritual meaning of anorexia. (HU)

REL 226. (HMS 226) From Black Death to AIDS:

Plague, Pandemic, Ethics and Religion (4)

An investigation into the way religion and morality

shape interpretations of plague and pandemics. Three

specific pandemics are examined: the bubonic plague of

the 14

century, the 1918 influenza pandemic, and the

current global AIDS crisis. Moral issues provoked by

institutional, political and social responses to pandemic

disease are also considered. Steffen (HU)

REL 228. Theories of Religion (4)

What is religion? Does it have a universal, cross-cultural

and trans-creedal essence? Drawing on numerous aca-

demic disciples, the course engages the major issues and

most influential authors in the academic study of com-

parative religions. Rozehnal (HU)

REL 230. Kabbalah: The Jewish Mystical

Tradition (4)

Explores the history of the quest to know God, through

mystical experience or theosophical speculation, as found

in Jewish tradition. Examines such issues as the tensions

between institutional religion and personal religious

experience, between views of God as immanent in the

world or transcending it, and between imagery for God

and religious experience of God. Weissler (HU)

REL 231. Classic Jewish Texts (4)

While many people know that the Hebrew Bible (“Old

Testament”) is a foundational scripture for Judaism,

fewer are familiar with the post-biblical Jewish classics.

Yet these works shaped the understanding of God, the

identity of the Jewish people, and the vision of history

Science, Technology and Society 397

and of the ethical life that inform Judaism as we know it

today. As students read the Talmud, Midrash, and tradi-

tional prayer-book, they will become familiar with the

wisdom of the rabbinic sages, and the central concepts of

Jewish tradition. Weissler (HU)

REL 241. (PHIL 241) Critics of Religion (4)

A seminar devoted to an analysis of the critiques of reli-

gion in the writings of Benedict Spinoza, Friedrich

Nietzsche, Sigmund Freud, Michel Foucault and

William E. Connolly. Silberstein (HU)

REL 244. (GCP 244, GS 244) Globalization and

Religion (4)

This course examines the complexity of globalization

and its multi-layered impact on religious identity and

piety. Though comparative in methodology and histori-

cal framework, the class will give special attention to

Islam and Hinduism in South Asia. Topics include:

European colonialism; Orientalism and its legacy; reli-

gious nationalism; Islamophobia; and the Internet and

mass media. Rozehnal (HU)

REL 247. (ASIA 247) Islamic Mysticism (4)

Sufism, the inner or ‘mystical’ dimension of Islam, has deep

historical roots and diverse expressions throughout the

Muslim world. Students examine Sufi doctrine and ritual,

the master-disciple relationship, and the tradition’s impact

on art and music, poetry and prose. Rozehnal (HU)

REL 251. (CLSS 251) Classical Mythology (3)

Myth, religion and ritual in ancient Greece and Rome.

Emphasis on primary sources; introduction to ancient and

modern theories of myth. Cross-cultural material. (SS)

REL 254. (ASIA 254, ES 254) Buddhism and

Ecology (4)

Buddhism’s intellectual, ethical, and spiritual resources

are reexamined in light of contemporary environmental

problems. Is Buddhism the most green of the major

world religions? What are the moral implications of

actions that affect the environment? Prerequisite: One

prior course in religion, environmental studies, or Asian

studies. Kraft (HU)

REL 335. (ANTH 335) Religion, Witchcraft and

Magic (4)

Addresses broad questions about the roles that religion,

magic, and witchcraft play in human life, as philosophi-

cal systems of meaning, as useful tools for

understanding, and as practical and moral guides for

human action. Special focus on the role of witchcraft

and magic in the modern world, especially in the lives of

disempowered people. Vann (SS)

REL 347. (PHIL 347, AMST 347) American

Religious Thinkers (4)

An examination of the writings of key figures in the his-

tory of American religious thought (such as Edwards,

Emerson, Bushnell, Peirce, James, Royce, Dewey and the

Niebuhrs). Attention will be directed both to the histori-

cal reception of these writings and to their contemporary

significance. Raposa (HU)

REL 361. Fieldwork (1-4)

Opportunity for students to work, or observe under

supervision, religious organizations or institutions.

Consent of chair required. (ND)

REL 371. Directed Readings (1-4)

Intensive study in areas appropriate to the interests and

needs of students and staff. (ND)

REL 373. (HUM 373, PHIL 373) Independent

Ethics Project (4)

Supervised ethics research into a topic approved by the

advisor for the Humanities Minor in Ethics. An option

for completing the ethics minor. For ethics minors only.

(HU)

REL 374. Seminar for Majors (4)

A capstone seminar for departmental majors. Considers

the methodologies of religious studies and assesses cur-

rent issues in the field. Offers opportunities for in-depth

work on a particular tradition under the guidance of a

faculty member. Offered in spring semester. May be

repeated for credit. (HU)

REL 375. (SSP 375) The Christian Right in

America (4)

What do we know about the Christian Right? Who are

they? What do they believe? Where do they come from?

Seminar explores answers to such questions through a

focus on the history of the Christian Right as well as its

ideologies and beliefs, the people who are a part of it,

and its evolving relationship to the American political

system. Topics include some of the most divisive social

issues of our time: abortion, homosexuality, capital pun-

ishment, pornography, taxes, education, and the

separation of church and state. Prerequisite: One 100-

level SSP course. Munson (SS)

REL 391. Senior Thesis in Religion (4)

Russian

See listing under Modern Languages and Literature.

School Psychology

See listings under Education.

Science, Environmental and

Technical Writing

See listings under Journalism and Communication.

Science, Technology and Society

Stephen H. Cutcliffe, Ph.D. (Lehigh), professor of sci-

ence, technology and society and history, and director,

STS program; Gail A Cooper, Ph.D. (U.C., Santa

Barbara), associate professor of history; Sharon M.

Friedman. M.A. (Penn State), professor of journalism

and communication; Steven Louis Goldman, Ph.D.

(Boston), Andrew W. Mellon Professor in the

Humanities; John K. Smith, Jr., Ph.D. (Delaware), asso-

ciate professor of history; Albert H. Wurth, Jr., Ph.D.

(N.C., Chapel Hill), associate professor of political sci-

ence.

The Science, Technology and Society (STS) program is

the product of a continuing cross-college effort to create

a common ground from which to explore the relations

between science, technology and society: between ideas,

machines and values.

398 Lehigh University Course Catalog 2009-2010

The STS program serves as a focal point for a wide range

of courses that study the natures of science and of tech-

nology, and analyze their social and personal

implications. It lends coherence and visibility to offerings

otherwise dispersed throughout the catalog.

STS Studies Major

The major in science, technology and society studies pre-

pares students for graduate study or for a wide variety of

career opportunities including policy analysis, planning,

or community relations with public or private sector

agencies concerned with the social relations of scientific

research and technological innovation. The intrinsically

cross-disciplinary character of science-technology-society

interactions is reflected in the B.A. requirements. Majors

must complete a minimum of 30 credit hours in STS

courses, listed below, together with at least 15 credit

hours in any traditional academic discipline: engineering,

physical or life science, the humanities, or the social sci-

ences. This collateral set of courses should be chosen in

consultation with the program director to provide the

foundation needed to engage STS studies issues in which

that discipline is implicated. The senior seminar provides

an opportunity for students to integrate the knowledge

they have gained and the skills they have acquired in

their coursework. Opportunities for student research are

available, especially through STS 181: Independent

Study and STS 391: Honors Thesis.

STS studies is a social science major in the College of

Arts and Science, and majors must fulfill the college’s

B.A. distribution requirements. A detailed description of

the STS studies major requirements follows.

Detailed Description of STS Major Requirements

A. Required STS Courses (minimum of 30 hours)

CORE Courses (20 credits)

STS 11 Technology and Human Values (4)

HIST 7 Technology in America’s Industrial

Age (4) or

HIST 8 Technology in Modern America (4)

STS/JOUR 124 Politics of Science (4) or

POLS 115 Technology as Politics (4)

PHIL 128 Philosophy of Science (4) or

PHIL 228 Topics in Philosophy of Science (4)

STS 381 Senior Seminar (4)

Electives

Three additional advanced courses (at least two of which

must be at the 100 level or higher) from the list of

approved STS Studies courses (10-12 credits)

B. Concentration in a complementary discipline (mini-

mum of 15 hours to be chosen in conjunction with

STS studies advisor); or approved departmental or

interdisciplinary program minor; or double major.

C. Science and Mathematics Requirement. Students

must fulfill the college’s regular B.A. distribution

requirements of at least eight credits in the natural

sciences; and at least three credits in mathematical

sciences. At least one of the courses in the natural sci-

ences must also include the associated laboratory

course. These courses should be chosen in consulta-

tion with the advisor.

Honors in STS

In order to receive Honors in STS, the student must

attain a 3.5 grade-point average in courses presented for

the major and a 3.2 grade-point average over all, and

must complete the 4-credit Honors Thesis sequence

(STS 391 and 392) beyond the required minimum of 30

Core credits required of all STS majors.

STS Studies Minor

The program also offers a minor in science, technology

& society studies which is open to all undergraduates.

Students electing the minor must take a set of courses

totaling a minimum of 15 hours that includes STS 11:

Technology and Human Values and electives chosen

from the list of all courses eligible for STS studies which

follows below. Students should consult with the program

director when selecting courses for either the major or

the minor.

Science, Technology and Society

Courses

STS 11. Technology and Human Values (4)

Impact of technology on society in relation to ethical

problems raised by the exploitation of technological inno-

vations. Illustrations from history, social studies,

philosophy, literature, and film. Cutcliffe (SS)

STS 112. Engineering and Society (4)

An examination of the social, political, commercial, and

cultural factors that determine the problems engineers are

asked to solve as well as the terms of acceptable solutions

to those problems. This is a discussion-based course using

a mix of books, articles, and videos. Goldman. (SS)

STS 117. (HIST 117/WS117) Women, Science

and Technology (4)

Explores the impact of technology and science on

women’s social roles and the contribution of women engi-

neers and scientists to their disciplines. Will focus on the

American experience. Among the topics discussed are

invention, design, laboratory research, education, engi-

neering, professionalism, labor force participation, office

mechanization, household appliances, virtual spaces,

childcare and reproduction. Cooper (SS)

STS 124. (JOUR 124) Politics of Science (4)

Analysis of the multi-dimensional interaction between the

federal government and the scientific community.

Explores historical growth of the science-government con-

nection, the scientific establishment both past and

present, and the role of scientific advice to the White

House and Congress. Also examines scientific ethics, pub-

lic attitudes toward science, science-society interactions,

and case studies of scientific controversies. S. Friedman

(SS)

STS 145. (HIST 145) Introduction to the History

of Science (4)

The history of modern science, primarily physical and

biological, with emphasis on the development of major

theoretical models since the seventeenth century.

Goldman (SS)

STS 181. Independent Study (1-4) fall-spring

Prerequisite: consent of the program director. (HU or SS)

STS 221. (MAT 221/ANTH 221) Materials in the

Development of Man (3)

Development of materials technology and engineering

Science, Technology and Society 399

from the Stone Age to Atomic Age as an example of the

interaction between technology and society. In-class

demonstration laboratories on composition and structure

of materials. Term projects using archaeological materials

and alloys. Course intended for, but not limited to, stu-

dents in the humanities and secondary science education.

Engineering students may not use this course for engi-

neering science or technical elective credit. Small (SS)

STS 252. (CSC 252) Computers, the Internet, and

Society (3)

An interactive exploration of the current and future role of

computers, the Internet, and related technologies in

changing the standard of living, work environments, soci-

ety and its ethical values. Privacy, security,

depersonalization, responsibility, and professional ethics;

the role of computer and Internet technologies in chang-

ing education, business modalities, collaboration

mechanisms, and everyday life. Nagel (SS)

STS 323. (JOUR 323) Controversies (4)

Exploration of science, health, and environmental contro-

versies from the dual perspectives of scientific uncertainty

and mass media coverage. Examines genetic engineering

and biotechnology, environmental health risks, and

human behavior research. Includes discussion of ethical

and social responsibilities and interactions of scientists,

journalists, and the public. S. Friedman (SS)

STS 341. Issues in American Competitiveness: At

Home and Abroad (4)

Issues affecting American commercial competitiveness

focusing on topics associated with the recent emergence of

a new commercial environment in all First World soci-

eties. Team taught in a highly interactive setting with

industry, public sector, and government experts, in addi-

tion to academics from various disciplines and

institutions. Students read topical articles and books, par-

ticipate in team projects and debates, and conduct team

research on competitiveness issues they have chosen for a

term report. Goldman, Nagel (SS)

STS 381. Senior Seminar (4)

In-depth study of selected topics in science, technology,

and society with special attention to methodological

issues. Subject matter may vary from semester to semester.

Intended for STS majors and minors, but open to others.

Prerequisite: STS 11 or consent of program director.

Cutcliffe (SS)

STS 391 Honors Thesis (1) Fall

Preparation for honors research thesis (STS 392).

Identification of topic, preliminary compilation of source

materials, and preparation of a proposal. Program permis-

sion required. (ND)

STS 392 Honors Thesis (3) Spring

Directed undergraduate research thesis required of stu-

dents who apply and qualify for graduation with program

honors. Prerequisite: STS 391, or concurrent with STS

392. (ND)

Graduate Courses in STS

(Open to undergraduates by petition only.)

STS 481. Readings in Science, Technology and

Society (3)

Readings seminar on selected themes and topics in sci-

ence, technology, and society. May be repeated for credit

with permission of the program director.

Other STS courses

The following courses, appropriate to STS studies, are

offered by various departments. Course descriptions may

be found under the catalog entry for the individual

department. New courses are frequently added to this list

and announced in bulletins published by the STS pro-

gram. For further information, please contact the

program director.

ANTH 221 Materials and the Development of

Man—Small

ARCH 107 History of American Architecture—

Thomas

ARCH 210 20th-Century Architecture—Zaknic

CHM 5 Chemistry and National Issues—

Schray

CSE 252 Computers, the Internet, and

Society—Nagel

DES 66 Design History

ECO 311 Environmental Economics—Munley

ECO 314 Energy Economics

EES 2 Intro to Environmental Science—

Sahagian

EES 4 Science of Environmental Issues—

Kodama

ES 1 Intro to Environmental Studies—

Briggs

ES 102 Environmental Values and Ethics—

Holland

ES/POLS 105 Environmental Policy and Planning—

Holland

ES 331 U.S. Environmental Law: Pollution

and Risk Abatement

ES 338 Environmental Risk: Perception and

Communication—Briggs

ES/POLS 355 Environmental Justice and the Law

HIST 7 Technology in America’s Industrial

Age—Smith

HIST 8 Technology in Modern America—

Smith

HIST 107 Technology and World History—

Smith

HIST 111 Engineering in the Modern World—

Smith

HIST 117 Women, Science and Technology—

Cooper

HIST 145 Introduction to the History of

Science—Goldman

HIST 308 Industrial American Since 1945 –

Cooper

HIST 315 American Environmental History –

Cutcliffe

HIST/ASIA 340 History of Japanese Industrialization

Since 1800 - Cooper

IR 34 Society, Technology, & War Since the

Renaissance—Kaufmann

IR/ES 333 International Environmental Law and

Policy—Gillroy

IR/ES 343 Comparative Environmental Law and

Policy—Gillroy

IR 344 International Politics of Oil—Barkey

JOUR 124 Politics of Science—Friedman

JOUR/ES 125 Environment, Public and Mass

Media—Friedman

JOUR 323 Controversies—Friedman

400 Lehigh University Course Catalog 2009-2010

MAT 221 Materials in the Development of

Man—Small

PHIL/REL 116 Bioethics—Staff

PHIL 128 Philosophy of Science—Goldman

PHIL 228 Topics in the Philosophy of Science—

Goldman

PHIL 250 The Philosophy of Mind—Staff

POLS/ES 107 The Politics of the Environment—

Wurth

POLS 115 Technology as Politics—Wurth

POLS 328 U.S. Politics and the Environment—

Wurth

POLS 375 Green Polity—Wurth

REL 6 Religion and the Ecological Crisis—

Kraft

REL 8 Prehistoric Religion, Art, and

Technology—Girardot

REL 187 Science, Technology, & the Religious

Imagination—Raposa

SSP 160 Medicine and Society—Lasker

SSP 302 The Sociology of Cyberspace—

Rosenwein

SSP/JOUR 327 Mass Communication and Society—

Rosenwein

SSP 367 Sociology of Science—Rosenwein

THTR/ARCH 161

Theater Design and Engineering—

Milet

WS 117 Women, Science and Technology—

Cooper

Social Psychology

See listings under Sociology and Anthropology.

Sociology and Anthropology

Professors. James R. McIntosh, Ph.D. (Syracuse);

Raymond Bell, Ed.D. (Lehigh) emeritus; Barbara B.

Frankel, Ph.D. (Princeton), Emerita; John B. Gatewood,

Ph.D. (Illinois); Roy C. Herrenkohl, Ph.D. (N.Y.U.)

Emeritus Distinguished Service Professor, Emeritus; Judith

N. Lasker, Ph.D. (Harvard) Chairperson and NEH

Distinguished Professor; Robert E. Rosenwein, Ph.D.

(Michigan); David B. Small, Ph.D. (Cambridge); Nicola

Tannenbaum, Ph.D. (U. of Iowa); Robert C.

Williamson, Ph.D. (Southern California), Emeritus.

Associate professor. Heather Johnson, Ph.D.

(Northeastern);

Assistant professors. Ziad Munson, Ph.D. (Harvard);

Matthew R. Sanderson, Ph.D. (Utah); Tanya L.

Saunders, Ph.D. (Michigan); Bruce Whitehouse, Ph.D.

(Brown); Yuping Zhang, Ph.D. (University of

Pennsylvania).

Web site: http://cas.lehigh.edu/socanthro

The department houses two disciplines, sociology and

anthropology. Sociology is concerned with the study of

human beings in relationships with others. Anthropology

takes a holistic approach to the study of humans today

and in the past, in a global, comparative, and multidi-

mensional perspective. Together these disciplines

encompass the study of the broadest range of human

activities, from the comparative examination of widely

divergent past and present cultures and societies, to the

inner life of individuals as this influences social behavior,

to an examination of the most pressing social issues of

our time.

The offerings within the department seek to foster self

and societal awareness as well as an understanding of

what it means to be human. Instruction within the

department also provides students with the necessary

analytic skills to understand and conduct social research.

Central to the department’s major programs is training

in research methods, statistics, and the use of computer

applications in social science.

The department offers three bachelor of arts majors:

anthropology, sociology and anthropology, and sociolo-

gy/ social psychology. The three programs are parallel in

structure and requirements and each consists of 40 credit

hours of course work. The sociology and anthropology

major is an interdisciplinary program for students desir-

ing a wider familiarity with social science fields, whereas

the anthropology and sociology/social psychology majors

are for students desiring more traditional, disciplinary

programs of study.

Research Opportunities. It is the explicit aim of the

department to involve majors, minors and other interest-

ed students in the ongoing research activities of faculty

members. Second-semester sophomore, junior and senior

students interested in a supervised research experience

are encouraged to consult with the chair or appropriate

faculty member. Course credit can be received for

research experience.

Internship Opportunities. The department maintains

close, working relationships with a variety of social agen-

cies and institutions in the area. Majors can earn course

credit by carrying out supervised work in field settings—

see http://cas.lehigh.edu/socanthro for a complete list.

This experience allows a student to apply the concepts

learned in the classroom to a field setting and to evaluate

vocational aspirations and interests.

Senior Thesis. All majors are encouraged to do inde-

pendent research culminating in a senior thesis; this is

especially recommended for students intending to go on

to graduate or professional school. The time to begin

discussing possible projects with faculty is during the

second-semester of the junior year. The department

chairperson should be consulted for further details. Our

web site has additional information.

Departmental Honors. To be eligible for departmental

honors, students must have at least a 3.3 GPA in the

major. In addition, students pursuing honors must take

ANTH or SSP 399 and write a thesis during their senior

year. Awarding of departmental honors is contingent on

both the quality of the thesis, as judged by a department

committee, and the candidate’s GPA at time of graduation.

B.A. Major Programs

Anthropology

Collateral Requirement (4 credits)

One general course in statistics: MATH 12, ECO 145,

PSYC 110, or equivalent. (Note: MATH 12 fulfills the

College of Arts and Sciences requirement.)

Introductory (4 credits)

ANTH 1. Introduction to Anthropology

Sociology and Anthropology 401

Disciplinary Core Courses (8 credits)

ANTH 111. Comparative Cultures [fall] or

ANTH 140. Introduction to Linguistics [spring]

and

ANTH 112. Doing Archaeology [spring] or

ANTH 145 Human Evolution (NS) [fall, alternate

years]

Methodology (4 credits)

SOAN 111. Research Methods and Data Analysis

[fall]

Major Electives (20 credits)

Five additional anthropology courses, at least two of

which must be at the 300-level. (Individualized study

courses 300, 393, 394, 395, and 399 cannot be used to

fulfill this requirement; however, one SSP course can be

substituted as an anthropology elective.)

Research, Internship, or Thesis (4 credits)

Preferably during the senior year, majors must complete

at least four credits of experiential learning on a subject

or in a context relevant to their major. Students may ful-

fill this requirement in a variety of ways research, field

school, internship, or thesis:

ANTH 300. Apprentice Teaching

ANTH 393. Supervised Research

ANTH 394. Field School

ANTH 395. Internship

ANTH 399. Senior Thesis

Students who intend going on to graduate or profession-

al school are strongly encouraged to do the senior thesis

option, and a senior thesis is required for departmental

honors.

Sociology and Anthropology

Collateral Requirement (4 credits)

One general course in statistics: MATH 12, ECO 145,

PSYC 110, or equivalent.

(Note: MATH 12 fulfills the College of Arts and Sciences’

mathematics requirement.)

Introductory (8 credits)

SSP 1 Introduction to Sociology and Social

Psychology (4)

ANTH 1 Introduction to Anthropology (4)

Theory and Methodology (8 credits)

SOAN 111 Research Methods and Data Analysis

(4) fall

SOAN 381 Development of Social Theory (4)

spring

Major Electives (24 credits)

Three additional courses in sociology/social psychology,

one of which must be at the 300-level or above, AND

three additional courses in anthropology, one of which

must be at the 300-level.

(Individualized study courses-300, 393, 394, 395, 395,

and 399-can be taken as major electives but cannot be

used to fulfill the 300 level course requirement.)

Sociology/Social Psychology

Collateral Requirement (4 credits)

One general course in statistics: MATH 12, Eco 145,

PSYC 110, or equivalent.

(Note: MATH 12 fulfills the College of Arts and Sciences’

mathematics requirement.)

Introductory (4 credits)

SSP 1 Introduction to Sociology and Social

Psychology (4) fall

Theory and Methodology (8 credits)

SOAN 111 Research Methods and Data Analysis

(4) fall

SOAN 381 Development of Social Theory (4)

spring

Major Electives (20 credits)

Five additional courses in sociology/social psychology, at

least two of which must be at the 300-level.

(Individualized study courses-300, 393, 394, 395, 395,

and 399- cannot be used to fulfill this requirement; how-

ever, one ANTH course can be substituted as a

“sociology/social psychology” elective.)

Research, Internship, or Thesis (4 credits)

Preferably during the senior year, majors must complete

at least four credits of experiential learning on a subject

or in a context relevant to their major. Students may ful-

fill this requirement in a variety of ways- research, field

school, internship, or thesis:

SSP 300 Apprentice Teaching (4)

SSP 393 Supervised Research (1-4)

SSP 394 Field School (1-8)

SSP 395 Internship (1-4)

SSP 399 Senior Thesis (2-4)

Students who intend going on to graduate or profession-

al school are strongly encouraged to do the senior thesis

option, and a senior thesis is required for departmental

honors.

Concentrations within the Anthropology Major.

Anthropology majors may choose to concentrate in cul-

tural or archaeological anthropology. These optional

concentrations in one or the other subfield entail addi-

tional constraints on course selection within the major

electives category, as described below.

Concentration in Cultural Anthropology

Anthropology majors electing to concentrate in cultural

anthropology must complete at least four courses in cul-

tural anthropology at the 100-level or above. Regular

course offerings that would satisfy this concentration

include the following:

ANTH 111. Comparative Cultures

ANTH 120. Culture and Globalization

ANTH 121. Culture and the Environment

ANTH 123. The Cultural Construction of Gender

ANTH 140. Introduction to Linguistics

ANTH 160. Health, Illness, and Healing

ANTH 182. North American Indians

ANTH 184. Cultures of the Pacific

ANTH 187. Peoples of Southeast Asia

ANTH 305. Anthropology of Fishing

ANTH 320. Global Capitalism

ANTH 325. Economic Anthropology

ANTH 330. Food for Thought

ANTH 335. Religion, Witchcraft, and Magic

ANTH 376. Culture and the Individual

Students choosing this concentration are strongly

encouraged to use their general education electives to

complete at least two physical anthropology/archaeology

402 Lehigh University Course Catalog 2009-2010

courses; the equivalent of two years of foreign language

study; pursue courses in museum studies, mathematics,

computer science, philosophy, religion studies, literature,

biology, and geology as specific interests dictate; and take

a wide range of courses in the social sciences, generally,

such as SSP 1, PSYC 1, POLS 3, IR 10, Eco 1, and his-

tory offerings.

Concentration in Archaeological Anthropology

Anthropology majors electing to concentrate in archaeo-

logical anthropology must complete at least four of

courses in archaeological anthropology at the 100-level

or above. Regular course offerings that would satisfy this

concentration include the following:

ANTH 112. Doing Archaeology

ANTH 121. Culture and the Environment

ANTH 145. Human Evolution

ANTH 172. North American Archaeology

ANTH 174. Greek Archaeology

ANTH 176. Roman Archaeology

ANTH 178. Mesoamerican Archaeology

ANTH 221. Materials in the Development of Man

ANTH 340. Archaeological Theory

ANTH 345. Evolution of the State

ANTH 370. Historical Archaeology

ANTH 377. Archaeology of Death

ANTH 394. Field School (archaeology field school)

Students choosing this concentration are strongly

encouraged to use their general education electives to

complete at least three courses in cultural anthropology;

pursue courses in museum studies, mathematics, com-

puter science, history, and the social sciences as interests

dictate; and take a wide range of natural science courses

of special relevance to archaeologists.

Minor Programs

Anthropology: ANTH 1 and four additional courses at

100 level or above in anthropology.

Sociology and Anthropology: One of the following

introductory courses: ANTH 1 or SSP 1 and two cours-

es in sociology at the 100 level or above and two courses

in anthropology at the 100 level or above.

Sociology/Social Psychology: SSP 1 and four additional

courses at 100 level or above in sociology/social psychology.

Undergraduate Courses

Anthropology

ANTH 1. (GCP 1) Introduction to Anthropology

(4) fall and spring

General introduction to the four subfields of anthropolo-

gy: biological, archaeological, cultural, and linguistic.

Class will center around lectures and discussion of ancil-

lary media. Staff (SS)

ANTH 100. Seminar in Anthropology (1-4)

Topics in anthropology. May be repeated for credit. (SS)

ANTH 104. (AAS 104) Contemporary Issues in

African Societies (4)

Using an anthropological lens to engage issues con-

fronting African societies today, we examine local-level

ethnographic accounts and analyses of continent-wide

trends, and consider a range of topics including famine,

political violence, AIDS, poverty, and corruption. Where

does Africa fit into the current neoliberal world order and

what is the role “African culture” plays in shaping all these

issues? Whitehouse (SS)

ANTH 106. (GS 106) Cultural Studies and

Globalization (4)

This course closely examines the complex relationship

between culture and globalization. The impact of global-

ization on local culture is an essential topic. But the

interaction of globalization and culture is not a one-way

process. People around the world adapt globalization to

their own uses, merging global cultural flows with local

practices in transformative ways. The course will study the

interaction of local culture with globalizing forces; immi-

gration and culture; the localizing of mass culture;

cultures of diasporic and migratory groups, and globaliza-

tion, gender and identity. Whitehouse. (SS)

ANTH 111. Comparative Cultures (4)

Anthropology is a comparative discipline; through com-

parisons we learn what is unique to a particular culture,

what is shared among a number of cultures, and how trait,

idea, practice or belief are related to each other. Students

will learn how anthropologists do comparisons and do

their own comparative research utilizing both qualitative

and quantitative techniques. Tannenbaum (SS)

ANTH 112. (CLSS 112) Doing Archaeology (4)

Principles of archaeological method and theory.

Excavation and survey methods, artifact analysis, dating

techniques, and cultural reconstruction. Course includes

field project. Small (SS)

ANTH 120. (GCP 120) Anthropology of

Globalization (4)

Examines the relationship between local patterns of cul-

ture and the presumably homogenizing forces of

globalization. Topics include migration, diaspora, and the

politics of identity, the scope and effects of global capital-

ism and consumerism, tourism, popular culture, the

global art market, and cultural authenticity. Staff (SS)

ANTH 121. (CLSS 121, ES 121) Environment

and Culture (4)

Impact of environment upon cultural variability and

change. Comparative study of modern and past cultures

and their environments as well as current theories of

human/ environmental interaction. Small (SS)

ANTH 123. (WS 123) The Cultural Construction

of Gender (4)

Comparative study of the meanings and social roles asso-

ciated with gender. Psychological, symbolic, and cultural

approaches. Tannenbaum (SS)

ANTH 127. (CLSS 127) Early Civilizations (4)

Introduction to early civilizations in the Near East,

Mediterranean, Africa, Europe, and New World.

Similarities and differences in economics, politics, social

organization, and religion. Small (SS)

ANTH 139. (REL 139) Jewish Folklore (4)

Examines the transformation of folk and popular Judaism

from the Old World, through the period of immigration

to America, to ethnic and later forms of American Jewish

culture. Attention paid to concept of folklore revivals and

their meanings. Four case studies: folk tales and story-

telling, klezmer music, life-cycle rituals, and food.

Weissler (SS)

Sociology and Anthropology 403

ANTH 140. (COGS 140, PSYC 140, MFL 140)

Introduction to Linguistics (4)

Relationship between language and mind; formal proper-

ties of language; language and society; how languages

change over time. (SS)

ANTH 145. Human Evolution (4)

Principles of biological anthropology focusing on the evo-

lution of the human species. Topics include evolutionary

theory, nonhuman primate diversity and behavior, the

relationship between biology and behavior in evolutionary

terms, the hominid fossil record, and genetic variability

among contemporary human populations. Prerequisite:

ANTH 1. Gatewood (NS)

ANTH 160. Health, Illness, and Healing (4)

Introduction to medical anthropology, a field of study

that examines how conceptions of illness and health and

methods of healing vary over time and across cultures.

Introduces a number of culturally specific approaches to

health and illness, including Western biomedicine, and

aims to provide a broad understanding of the relationship

between culture, illness, and healing. Staff (SS)

ANTH 172. North American Archaeology (4) fall

Development of prehistoric North American indigenous

population north of Mexico, beginning with earliest evi-

dence of people in the New World continuing up through

European contact. (SS)

ANTH 174. (CLSS 174, ART 174, ARCH 174)

Greek Archaeology (3)

Ancient Greek culture from the Neolithic to Hellenistic

periods. Reconstructions of Greek social dynamics from

study of artifacts. Small (SS)

ANTH 175. Archaeology of Classical Cultures (4)

Course introduces the student to an overview of the

archaeology of ancient Greece and Rome from Iron Age to

Late Antiquity. Emphasis on aspects of cultural develop-

ment and change. Small (SS)

ANTH 176. (CLSS 176, ART 176, ARCH 176)

Roman Archaeology (3)

Cultures of the Roman Empire. Reconstructions of social,

political, and economic dynamics of the imperial system

from study of artifacts. Small (SS)

ANTH 178. Mesoamerican Archaeology (4)

Ancient civilizations of Mesoamerica: Olmec, Zapotec,

Maya, Toltec, and Aztec. Reconstructions of urban cen-

ters, political and economic organizations, and theories of

the Mayan collapse. Small (SS)

ANTH 182. North American Indians (4)

Culture areas of native North America prior to substantial

disruption by European influences north of Mexico.

Environmental factors and cultural forms. Gatewood (SS)

ANTH 183. (AAS 183) Peoples and Cultures of

Africa (4)

Studies African modernity through a close reading of

ethnographies, social stories, novels, and African feature

films. Staff (SS)

ANTH 184. (Asian Studies 184) Cultures of the

Pacific (4)

Cultures of the Pacific Islanders prior to substantial dis-

ruption by European influences. Culture histories,

language families, social organizations, and religions of

Australian, Melanesian, Polynesian, and Micronesian peo-

ples. Gatewood (SS)

ANTH 187. (ASIA 187) Peoples of Southeast Asia

(4)

Peoples and cultures of Burma, Laos, Cambodia,

Thailand, Malaysia, Singapore, Indonesia, and the

Philippines. World view, religion, economy, politics, and

social organization. Tannenbaum (SS)

ANTH 188. Southeast Asians in Southeast Asia

and America (4)

In this course we explore the ways in which different peo-

ples lived in Southeast Asia, why they moved to America,

and the ways in which this move affected their cultures.

Topics explored include: aspects of their culture, particu-

larly religion and social organizations; motivations for

migrating including war, political, and economic reasons;

and their adaptations to America and American responses

to their presences. No prerequisites. Tannenbaum (SS)

ANTH 221. (MAT 221, STS 221) Materials in the

Development of Man (3) fall

Development of materials technology and engineering

from the stone age to atomic age as an example of the

interaction between technology and society. In-class

demonstration laboratories on composition and structure

of materials. Term projects using archaeological materials

and alloys. Course intended for, but not limited to, stu-

dents in the humanities and secondary science education.

Engineering students may not use this course for engi-

neering science or technical elective credit. Notis (SS)

ANTH 305. Anthropology of Fishing (4)

Comparative study of fishing peoples and their technolo-

gies. Fishing strategies, control of information, and social

organization of marine exploitation in subsistence and

modern industrial contexts. Theory of common-property

resources and the role of social science in commercial fish-

eries management. Gatewood (SS)

ANTH 312 The Anthropological Signature of the

Past (4)

Course covers the basic tenets of different anthropological

analyses of premodern cultures. Emphasis on the archaeo-

logical traces of different social constructions in the past.

Small (SS)

ANTH 320. (GCP 320) Global Capitalism (4)

Anthropological approach to the forms and effects of

global capitalism. Topics include the structure of contem-

porary global capitalism, including the growth of

multinational corporations, flexible corporate strategies,

overseas manufacturing, and global branding and market-

ing; the impact of global capitalism on the environment

and on the lives of people in “Third World” countries;

consumer culture and the diversity of non-Western con-

sumption practices; alternative capitalist systems,

especially Asian capitalisms. Staff (SS)

ANTH 325. Economic Anthropology (4)

Cross-cultural perspectives on the ways people produce,

distribute, and consume goods; how these systems are

organized; and how they are connected with other aspects

of society, particularly political and ideological systems.

Tannenbaum (SS)

ANTH 330. Food for Thought (4)

Symbolic and cultural analyses of foods and cuisines.

Examines what people eat, who prepares it, what it means,

404 Lehigh University Course Catalog 2009-2010

and the social and religious uses of foods historically and

cross-culturally. Tannenbaum (SS)

ANTH 335. (REL 335). Religion, Witchcraft, and

Magic (4)

Addresses broad questions about the roles that religion,

magic, and witchcraft play in human life, as philosophical

systems of meaning, as useful tools for understanding, and as

practical and moral guides for human action. Special focus

on the role of witchcraft and magic in the modern world,

especially in the lives of disempowered people. Staff (SS)

ANTH 339. Seminar in Anthropology (4)

Topics in anthropology. Varying semester to semester:

human evolution, politics and law, introduction to lin-

guistics, human use of space, anthropology of deviance.

May be repeated for credit. (SS)

ANTH 340. Archaeological Theory (4)

Explores important issues in the interpretation of archae-

ological material. Issues include variable utility of

anthropological analogies, unevenness of data, reconstruc-

tions of past cultures, processual and post-processual

approaches. Students will write a sample NSF proposal.

Small (SS)

ANTH 345. (CLSS 345) Evolution of the State (4)

Theories of state formation. Comparison of evolutionary

trajectories of early states in the Near East, Mediterranean,

and New World. Small (SS)

ANTH 370. (HIST 370) Historical Archaeology (4)

This course exams the unique nature of historical archae-

ology of post contact America. Topics include

reconstructing the past through the archaeological and

historical record, exhibiting past culture, and capturing

the real or imagined past. Course includes fieldwork and

visits to famous historical archaeological sites. Small (SS)

ANTH 371. Special Topics (1-4)

Advanced work through supervised readings. May be

repeated for credit. Prerequisite: consent of the depart-

ment chairperson. (SS)

ANTH 376. Culture and the Individual (4)

Concepts and methods of studying relations between the

individual and the sociocultural milieu. Culture and per-

sonality language and thought, cross-cultural studies of

cognition. Gatewood (SS)

ANTH 377. Archaeology of Death (4)

Course examines what we can determine about the past

from human remains. Class will study health, age, and

disease from the analysis of human bone, the cultural

aspects of burial and funerals, and take part in a field proj-

ect in Nisky Hill Cemetery in Bethlehem. Small (SS)

ANTH 393. Supervised Research (1-4)

Conducting anthropological research under the supervi-

sion of a faculty member. May be repeated for credit.

Prerequisite: consent of the department chairperson. (SS)

ANTH 394. Field School (1-8)

Field school in archaeology or ethnography. Maximum of

eight credits for a single season or field experience. May be

repeated once for credit. (SS)

ANTH 395. Internship (1-4)

Supervised experience involving non-paid work in a set-

ting relevant to anthropology. May be repeated once for

credit. Prerequisite: open only to department majors. (SS)

ANTH 399. Senior Thesis (2-4)

Research during senior year culminating in senior thesis.

Required for anthropology majors seeking departmental

honors. May be repeated up to a total of 4 credits.

Prerequisite: consent of the department chairperson. (SS)

Sociology and Anthropology

SOAN 41. (WS 41) Human Sexuality (4)

Sexuality and gender roles across the life cycle, including

human reproduction, decision-making, and the societal

regulation of sexual behavior. (ND)

SOAN 42. (WS 42) Sexual Minorities (4)

How minority sexual identities have been the subject of

speculation, misunderstanding, and sometimes violent

attempts at correction or elimination. Sexual orientation,

gender role, including transvestitism and “drag,” transsex-

ualism, sexism, heterosexism, and homophobia. Emphasis

on critical thinking, guest speakers, and discussions. (SS)

SOAN 100. Seminar in Social Relations (1-4)

Topics in social relations. May be repeated for credit. (SS)

SOAN 111. Research Methods and Data Analysis

(4) fall

Research skills in anthropology, sociology and social psy-

chology. Problem formulation; research design; methods

and measures; analysis and interpretation of data.

Emphasis on the use of statistics in the research process.

(ND)

SOAN 381. Development of Social Theory (4)

spring

Comparative study of social theory. (SS)

SOAN 395. Methods in Observation (4) alternate

years

Naturalistic and participant observation in uncontrolled

field settings. (SS)

SOAN 399. Senior Thesis (4)

Research during senior year culminating in senior thesis.

Required for social relations majors seeking departmental

honors. Prerequisite: consent of the department chairper-

son. (SS)

Sociology/Social Psychology

SSP 1. Introduction to Sociology and Social

Psychology (4) fall and spring

Patterns of social interaction, group behavior and atti-

tudes provide a focus on the relationship of the individual

to society. Social structure and social change within the

institutions of society provide a focus on the relationship

of society to the individual. The influences of social class,

gender and race are explored at each level of analyses.

Theories, methods and research results provide micro and

macro models for understanding society. Staff (SS)

SSP 100. Seminar in Sociology and Social

Psychology (1-4)

Topics in sociology and social psychology. May be repeat-

ed for credit. (SS)

SSP 103. (AAS 103) Race and Ethnicity (4) fall

Course examines race and ethnicity from a sociological

perspective. Focus on the role of the major racial and eth-

nic communities in modern American society. Explores

the roles of race and ethnicity in identity, social relations,

and social inequality. Topics include racial and ethnic

communities, minority/majority groups, assimilation,

Sociology and Anthropology 405

prejudice and discrimination, identity, and the social con-

struction of the concept of “race.” Johnson (SS)

SSP 104. (POLS 104). Political Sociology (4)

An introduction to political sociology through an exami-

nation of the major sociological questions concerning

power, politics, and the state. Covers questions concern-

ing state formation, nationalism, social movements,

globalization, political culture and participation, and civil

society. Includes examples such as racism, welfare reform,

campaign financing, coal mining in Appalachia, revolu-

tion in Latin America, the rise of the Nazi party in

Germany, and the place of the United States in a global

society. Munson (SS)

SSP 105. (GCP 105) The Social Origins of

Terrorism (4)

Examines the social, religious, and political foundations of

terrorism by studying the roots of terrorism historically

and cross-nationally. We will look at the differing kinds of

terrorism, including political terrorism in the Middle

East, anti-abortion terrorism in the United States, eco-ter-

rorism, and religious and state terrorism throughout the

world. Students will have a chance to better understand

the beliefs of terrorists, conditions that produce and sus-

tain terrorism, and the origins of political violence more

generally. Munson (SS)

SSP 109. (PSYC 109) Adulthood and Aging: (4)

Social science approaches to the latter two-thirds of the

life. Cognitive and personality development; attitudes

toward aging; social behavior of older adults; widowhood;

retirement. Prerequisite: PSYC 1 or SSP 1. May not be

taken pass/fail. Hyland (SS)

SSP 110. (WS 110, GCP 110) Women’s Work in

Global Perspectives (4)

This course brings to the forefront the intersections of

race, class, gender, and nation with women’s employment

around the world. We will examine women’s paid and

unpaid work in the U.S., Europe, Asia, Latin America,

and Africa in an effort to understand the striking persist-

ence of gender inequality over time and across the world.

Topics of study include: work and family relations,

women’s domestic labor, factory work, and agribusiness.

In addition, we will explore the ways in which women

have organized for changes in work and in their commu-

nities in order to conceive of possibilities for the future of

women’s work. Krasas (SS)

SSP 114. (Asia 114) Social Issues in

Contemporary China (4)

Dramatic economic, cultural and social changes are

underway in China today and have aroused much debate

among social scientists, East and West. The following

social issues are critical for understanding China’s devel-

opment trajectory: inequality and poverty; rapid

demographic shifts; provision of health care services; pro-

vision of education services; and becoming an

“information society.” We will explore how these issues

intersect with old hierarchies in China, urban-rural differ-

ences, and gender differences. Zhang (SS)

SSP 121. (PSYC 121) Social Psychology (4)

Theories, methods of investigation and results of research

on the way social and psychological processes interact in

human behavioral settings. Topics include analysis of self

and relationships, dynamics of small groups, attitudes and

persuasion, prejudice, prosocial and antisocial behavior.

Prerequisite: One of the following introductory courses:

ANTH 1 or SSP 1 or PSYC 1. Rosenwein (SS)

SSP 125. (PSYC 125) Social Psychology of Small

Groups (4)

Theories and empirical research regarding interpersonal

behavior in small groups. Classroom exercises and group

simulations. Prerequisite: consent of instructor.

Rosenwein (SS)

SSP 126. (GS 126) The Political Economy of

Globalization (4)

This course studies the relationship among economic,

political and cultural forces in an era of globalization.

Focus is on how global capitalism, the world market and

local economics shape and are shaped by social, cultural

and historical forces. Topics include political and cultural

determinants of trade and investment; culture and the

global economy; global capitalism, especially studied

through the lens of culture; globalization and patterns of

economic growth; cross-cultural study of consumerism;

poverty and inequality; the interplay of foreign and

domestic economic policy; international economic organ-

izations, such as the World Trade Organization, the

International Monetary Fund, and the World Bank, and

globalization and national development. Sanderson (SS)

SSP 128 (WS 128) Race, Gender, and Work (4)

Race, Gender and Work is a class designed to help stu-

dents understand racial and gender inequalities as they

relate specifically to work and employment. We explore

the origins and histories of inequalities, the ways in which

inequalities persist and/or change today, and what steps

might be taken toward creating a more equal society.

Krasas (SS)

SSP 135. (Jour 135, PSYC 135) Human

Communication (4)

Processes and functions of human communication in rela-

tionships and groups. Rosenwein (SS)

SSP 141. Social Deviance and Social Control (4)

Analysis of deviant social systems, supporting factors

maintaining them, and societal responses to deviant roles

and collectivities. McIntosh (SS)

SSP 152. Alcohol, Science and Society (4)

Alcohol use and abuse, its historical function in society,

moral entrepreneurship, status struggles and conflict over

alcohol. Current problems with attention to special pop-

ulation groups and strategies for prevention of alcohol

abuse. McIntosh (SS)

SSP 153. (PSYC 153) Personality (4)

Examination of the major theoretical frameworks psy-

chologists use to understand human thought, feeling, and

behavior. Whereas these frameworks each emphasize very

different concepts (e.g., the unconscious mind vs. culture

vs. neurotransmitters), they are united in their effort to

answer the question: Why does a given individual think,

feel, or behave as she does? Prerequisite: Psyc 1 or SSP 1.

Gill (SS)

SSP 160. Medicine and Society (4)

Health, illness, and the health professions from the socio-

logical perspective. Social epidemiology, social psychology

of illness, socialization of health professionals, organiza-

tion of health care, patient-professional relationships and

ethical issues in medical care. Lasker (SS)

406 Lehigh University Course Catalog 2009-2010

SSP 161. The American Dream: Popular

Ideologies in American Society (4)

Is the “American Dream” a myth or reality? This course

explores this question and various aspects of basic

American values through a sociological lens. The

American Dream, meritocracy, and individualism are

strongly held beliefs the United States - the of opportuni-

ty. We will examine the implications, causes, and

consequences of these beliefs and other popular ideologies

in the context of a highly stratified and increasingly

diverse society. The course focuses on how ideologies

function to both reproduce and transform society.

Johnson (SS)

SSP 162. AIDS and Society (4)

Impact of the AIDS epidemic on individuals and on social

institutions (medicine, religion, education, politics, etc.);

social and health policy responses; international experi-

ence; effect of public attitudes and policy on people

affected directly by AIDS. (SS)

SSP 163. Pass the Peas: Mapping the Blueprint of

Hip Hop Culture (4)

The appearance of the hip hop movement can be traced

to a specific time and place, the Bronx, New York, 1974.

However, hip hop has no single cultural antecedent. To

uncover the origins of hip hop culture, one must begin by

discovering the richly layered history of African American

and Jamaican music of the 20th century. Using this broad

canvas, students will discover how young Bronx natives in

the 1970s fused elements of past musical styles with their

own personal expression. From this point, the course will

chart the expansion of hip hop culture from a five bor-

ough folk movement to a multimillion dollar

entertainment industry in the late 20th century. Staff (SS)

SSP 165. Contemporary Social Problems (4)

Studies of major problems facing contemporary society.

(SS)

SSP 166. (AAS 166) Wealth and Poverty in the

United States (4)

Course examines the sociology of wealth and poverty -

affluence and disadvantage, “rags and riches” - in

American Society. Focus is a critical analysis of the wealth

gap, its causes, consequences, and social context. We will

consider the roles of wealth and poverty in determining

life chances and structuring opportunity, as well as their

roles in the perpetuation of social inequality across gener-

ations. We will address contemporary debates

surrounding public policy, tax laws, anti-poverty pro-

grams and other reform efforts aimed at decreasing the

gap between the “Haves” and the “Have-Nots.” Johnson

(SS)

SSP 171. (REL 171). Religion and Society (4)

An introduction to the sociology of religion. Covers clas-

sical and contemporary approaches to defining and

studying the role of religion in society. Emphasis on

understanding religious beliefs and practices in the United

States, the sources and contours of religious change, and

the effects of religion on individuals and society. Specific

topics include religious fundamentalism, religious conver-

sion, religious practices and authority, secularization,

religion in public life, religion in social change, religious

terrorism, and the ways in which religion impacts our per-

sonal health, educational attainment, and family life.

Munson (SS)

SSP 302. The Sociology of Cyberspace (4)

An examination of social life on the Internet and the

World Wide Web. Topics may include sociocultural and

psychological aspects of communication in cyber-environ-

ments (e.g., email, chat rooms, news groups, MUDS,

etc.), interpersonal relationships and group development,

the nature of community, the politics of cyberspace (con-

trol and democracy), privacy and ethics, and economic

dimensions. Examination of past and current case studies.

Rosenwein (SS)

SSP 308. (PSYC 308) Seminar in Social

Psychology (4)

Intensive consideration of selected topics in current theo-

ry and research in social psychology. The subject matter

varies from semester to semester, and includes such topics

as the social psychology of education, the applications of

perception and learning theory to social psychological

problems, the social psychology of science, and the social

environment of communication. May be repeated for

credit. Prerequisite: One of the following introductory

courses: ANTH 1 or SSP 1. (SS)

SSP 310. (AAS 310, WS 310) Gender, Race, and

Sexuality: The Social Construction of Differences

(4)

This course will provide the student with an opportunity

to engage current debates about the meaning and use of

racial and sexual classification systems in society. Using a

multi disciplinary approach, we will examine the histori-

cal and sociological contexts in which specific theories of

racial and sexual differences emerged in the U.S.

Additionally, we will explore the ways in which changes in

the images have implications on the role racial, gender,

and sexual identity plays in our understanding of the rela-

tionship between difference and inequality. Prerequisite:

SSP 103, or department permission. Staff (SS)

SSP 312. (PSYC 312) Interpersonal Behavior in

Small Groups (4)

Intensive consideration of theoretical and methodological

issues in the analysis of the development of small groups.

Prerequisite: One of the following introductory courses:

ANTH 1 or SSP 1. Rosenwein (SS)

SSP 313. (AAS 313) Social Movements (4)

Explores the origins, dynamics, and consequences of

social movements through both sociological theory and

empirical case studies. Covers questions of what consti-

tutes a social movement, where and when social

movements arise, who joins a social movement, and how

social movements are able to contribute to change.

Answers to these questions highlight issues of social move-

ment recruitment and leadership, interactions between

movements and the media, the state, and the broader pub-

lic, ideology, strategies and tactics, and the factors

contributing to the success and failure of social move-

ments. Course readings drawn from case studies on civil

rights, women’s rights, gay rights, the environment,

American Indians, abortion, globalization, antiapartheid,

democratization, peace, and Islamic fundamentalism.

Prerequisite: One 100-level SSP course. Munson (SS)

SSP 314. (PSYC 314) Social Cognition (4)

Examines the formation of beliefs about social groups,

individuals, the self, and the world. Consequences and

validity of those beliefs are considered. Areas of inquiry

include stereotypes and prejudice, impression formation

Sociology and Anthropology 407

processes, the self, attitudes and persuasion, and social

influence. Prerequisite: Psyc 110 or SOAN 111. Gill (SS)

SSP 317. (GS 317) Seminar in Globalization and

Social Issues (4)

Advanced seminar that focuses on research and discussion

of specialized topics in globalization and social issues.

Subjects vary by semester. May be repeated for credit.

Junior or senior standing and departmental permission

required. Matthew Sanderson SS

SSP 322. (GC 322, GS 322, HMS 322) Global

Health Issues (4)

Sociological dimensions of health, illness, and healing as

they appear in different parts of the world. Focus on pat-

terns of disease and mortality around the world, with

special emphasis on major epidemics such as HIV/AIDS,

and malaria; the relative importance of ‘traditional’ and

‘modern’ beliefs and practices with regard to disease and

treatment in different societies; the organization of

national health care systems in different countries; and the

role of international organizations and social movements

in promoting health. Lasker (SS)

SSP 323. (PSYC 323) The Child in Family and

Society (4)

Influences such as marital discord, family violence, pover-

ty and prejudice on the development of the child from

birth through adolescence. Prerequisite: One of the fol-

lowing introductory courses: ANTH 1 or SSP 1. Staff

(SS)

SSP 325. (HIST 325, WS 325) History of

Sexuality and the Family in the U.S. (3-4) fall

Social change from early agrarian communities to begin-

nings of industrialism, emphasizing socio-economic class,

family structure, and treatment of women and minority

groups. Najar (SS)

SSP 326. (HIST 326, WS 326) Social Class in

American History (3-4) spring

Changing role of women, minority groups, and the fami-

ly during the industrial era. Development of the modern

class structure and the impact of the welfare state. Simon

(SS)

SSP 327. (JOUR 327) Mass Communication and

Society (4)

A review of theories and research on the relationship of

mass communication to social processes. Intensive analy-

sis of selected media products (e.g., TV news, dramas, and

sitcoms; films; print; music videos, etc.). Prerequisite:

One of the following introductory courses: ANTH 1 or

SSP 1. Rosenwein (SS)

SSP 333. (POLS 333, PSYC 333) Social

Psychology of Politics (4)

Political behavior viewed from a psychological and social

psychological perspective. Prerequisite ANTH 1 or SSP 1;

PSYC 1 or department permission. Rosenwein (SS)

SSP 341. (WS 341) Women and Health (4)

Relationships of women to the medical system. Influence

of medicine on women’s lives and the impact of the

women’s movement on health care. (SS)

SSP 351. (WS 351) Gender and Social Change (4)

Changes in gender roles from social psychological and

structural perspectives. Comparative analyses of men and

women (including people of color) in the social structure;

their attitudes and orientations toward work, family, edu-

cation, and politics. (SS)

SSP 355. Sociology of Education (4)

Course examines the social organization of education as a

social institution and the role of schools in society. Focus

is primarily on educational processes in the United States.

Topics include: IQ, curriculum, tracking, educational

inequality, primary/secondary/higher education, private

vs. public, informal education and social capital, effects on

and of race/class/gender, schools as agents of socialization,

educational policy and school reform. Prerequisite:

ANTH 1 or SSP 1. Johnson (SS)

SSP 356. (PSYC 356) Seminar in Personality

Psychology (4)

Topics in personality psychology: the self, personality con-

sistency, motivation, psychological adjustment.

Prerequisite: SSP/PSYC 153 or consent of instructor.

Williams (SS)

SSP 361. (PSYC 361) Personality and Social

Development in Adulthood (4)

Theories and current research. Prerequisite: SSP/PSYC

109 or consent of Psychology department chair. Hyland

(SS)

SSP 363. (PSYC 363) Personality and Social

Development in Childhood (4)

Issues related to social development (e.g., attachment,

social competence), social contexts (e.g., family, day care),

and personality development (e.g., sex roles, aggression,

temperament) from infancy through adolescence.

Prerequisite: PSYC 107 or consent of instructor. (SS)

SSP 364. (WS 364) Sociology of the Family (4)

Sociological analysis of families in the United States,

including investigations of historical and contemporary

patterns. Issues addressed include parenting, combining

work and family, divorce and remarriage, family policies.

Staff (SS)

SSP 365. (WS 365) Inequalities at Work (4)

Primary focus is on race, gender, and class as axes of dis-

advantage and privilege in work and employment. We will

explore both theories and empirical studies of inequality

as well as their social, political, and practical ramifications

for the workplace. The course will be conducted seminar-

style and the` class will rely heavily on student

participation. Krasas (SS)

SSP 367. Sociology of Science (4)

Review of sociological, social psychological, and anthro-

pological perspectives on science as a cognitive and social

enterprise. Analysis of past and contemporary case studies

as well as experimental/simulation research. Rosenwein

(SS)

SSP 370. Juvenile Delinquency (4)

The development of delinquent behavior within its social

context; an analysis of delinquent gangs and subcultures

and the variable patterns of antisocial activity; and the

evaluation of institutional controls and treatment of the

problem. Staff (SS)

SSP 371. Special Topics (1-4)

Advanced work through supervised readings. May be

repeated for credit. Prerequisite: consent of the depart-

ment chairperson. (SS)

SSP 373. Seminar in Sociology (4)

Intensive consideration of selected topics in contemporary

408 Lehigh University Course Catalog 2009-2010

theory or research in sociology. The subject matter varies

from semester to semester. May be repeated for credit.

(SS)

SSP 374. Social Stratification: Race, Class, Gender

(4)

This course is an introduction to social stratification.

Examines social inequality as an organizing principle in

complex societies. Explores the intersection of the “great

divides” of race, class, and gender. Through readings from

classical sociological theory to cutting-edge literature we

embark on a critical analysis of the causes and conse-

quences of social stratification and social mobility in the

United States and in a global context. Prerequisite ANTH

1 or SSP 1. Johnson (SS)

SSP 375 (REL 375). The Christian Right in

America (4)

What do we know about the Christian Right? Who are

they? What do they believe? Where do they come from?

Seminar explores answers to such questions through a

focus on the history of the Christian Right as well as its

ideologies and beliefs, the people who are a part of it, and

its evolving relationship to the American political system.

Topics include some of the most divisive social issues of

our time: abortion, homosexuality, capital punishment,

pornography, taxes, education, and the separation of

church and state. Prerequisite: One 100- level SSP course.

Munson (SS)

SSP 379. (AAS 379) Race and Class in America (4)

This course focuses on the ways in which race and class

intersect in the social, economic, and political structures

of American society. Through sociological literature, fic-

tion, non-fiction, film, and other media we will explore

the place of race and class in American society. We will

examine how race and class operate on a personal, “micro”

level, while at the same time operating on a large-scale,

“macro” level. Prerequisite: SSP 103, or consent of

instructor. Johnson (SS)

SSP 391. Evaluation Research (4)

Application of social research methods of evaluation of the

effectiveness of social programs. Measurement, research

design, criteria of effectiveness and decision making.

Prerequisite: SOAN 111 or consent of department chair-

person. Staff (SS)

SSP 392. Teamwork and Leadership (4)

This course focuses on how teams function in organiza-

tional settings, especially in business and industry.

Consideration is given to team dynamics and the style(s)

of leadership needed to establish and lead teams.

Emphasis is placed on both the internal workings of teams

and on the external relationships that teams have in orga-

nizational settings. Research and theory are drawn from a

variety of perspectives and disciplines including social psy-

chology, sociology, and management. Case studies from

business and industry are examined. Staff (SS)

SSP 393. Supervised Research (1-4)

Conducting sociological or social psychological research

under the supervision of a faculty member. May be repeat-

ed for credit. Prerequisite: consent of the department

chairperson. (SS)

SSP 394. Field School (1-8)

Field school in sociology/social psychology. Maximum of

eight credits for a single season or field experience. May be

repeated once for credit. (SS)

SSP 395 Internship (1-4)

Supervised experience involving non-paid work in a set-

ting relevant to sociology/social psychology. May be

repeated once for credit. Prerequisite: open only to depart-

ment majors. (SS)

SSP 399. Senior Thesis (2-4)

Research during senior year culminating in senior thesis.

Required for sociology/social psychology majors seeking

departmental honors. May be repeated up to a total of 4 cred-

its. Prerequisite: consent of the department chairperson. (SS)

Graduate Courses in Sociology

The Master’s Program in Sociology prepares students to

apply sociological and social psychological perspectives

and methods to the analysis of social problems.

Grounded in a strong theoretical and substantive under-

standing of social institutions, social relations, and social

policy, as well as in advanced research and computer

skills, students are prepared to be effective and experi-

enced practitioners in the field of applied social research.

Specialty areas include: policy studies (health, education,

family, diversity, substance abuse, delinquency); human

communication (teamwork in organizations, interaction-

al processes, mass communication, personal

relationships); and program evaluation.

The program requires 30 hours of course work. Required

courses are: Advanced Research Methods; Statistics;

Classical Social Theory; Advanced Computer

Applications; Research Practicum, either in an agency or

firm in the community or with a faculty member; and

three electives. All students take a comprehensive exam.

Students choose whether to write a thesis or to take an

additional six credits of elective courses.

SSP 401. Classical Social Theory (3)

Explores influential sociological theory, the differences

among classical theoretical traditions, the main strengths

and weaknesses of such traditions. Emphasis is placed on

understanding the uses of theory in research, and the

implications of theoretical models when applied to con-

temporary research and problems. Staff (SS)

SSP 403. Sociology of Cyberspace (3)

The course focus is on case-based discussion of the social

psychology and sociology of the Internet and the World

Wide Web. Questions of what it means to be an individ-

ual online, how relationships develop, the nature of

groups, democracy and power, and education are consid-

ered. Evaluation is based on short papers related to the

cases and assigned readings, both in hard copy and online.

Rosenwein (SS)

SSP 411. Advanced Research Methods, Part I (3)

Study of quantitative and qualitative methodologies,

measurement and research design issues at an advanced

level. Specific methodologies include participant observa-

tion, survey/interview, laboratory or field methods,

content analysis, and focus groups. Prerequisite: SOAN

111 or equivalent. Staff (SS)

SSP 412. Advanced Research Methods, Part II (3)

Application of research methods to specific project,

including design, data collection, and analysis. Focus on

use of SPSS and other appropriate software. Prerequisite:

SSP 411 or equivalent. Staff (SS)

SSP 413. Research Practicum (3-6)

Supervised research, either with a faculty member or in a

community agency, designed to apply research skills to a

Sociology and Anthropology 409

particular problem as defined by the faculty member or

agency in collaboration with the student and supervising

instructor. Final paper should demonstrate theoretical

understanding, proper application of methodology and

data analysis, and results of the project. Staff (SS)

SSP 414. Survey Research (3)

Examination of survey methods, sample design, interview

design, training of survey personnel, data management

and analysis. (SS)

SSP 415. Case Studies of Social Control (3)

Social control leads to social order and also generates

social deviance. The processes involved in this dual pro-

duction are found in the formal institutions of society and

in the informal patterns of interaction within groups.

Macro and micro level approaches are explored, especially

in the drug and alcohol area. McIntosh (SS)

SSP 416. (EDUC 416) Quasi-Experimentation

and Program Evaluation (3)

Social science methods for non-laboratory settings.

Examination of quasi-experimental research designs,

threats to validity, possible controls, and uses in social pro-

gram evaluation. Non-mathematical presentation.

Knowledge of elementary statistics assumed. (SS)

SSP 417. Seminar in Globalization and Social

Issues: Migration (3)

Globalization is produced through various cross-national

flows that weave the fates and fortunes of the world’s peo-

ples more tightly together into an increasingly shared,

although contested, space. Explores the movement of peo-

ple across national boundaries, or international migration.

Investigates how international migration transforms soci-

eties at both the global and local levels, and in both origin

and destination countries. Provides a base of knowledge

for understanding the social causes and consequences of

contemporary international migration flows. Sanderson

(SS)

SSP 441 (WS 441) Women and Health (3)

Relationships of women to the medical system. Influence

of medicine on women’s lives and the impact of the

women’s movement on health. Staff (SS)

SSP 452. Organizing, Community, and Power (3)

Seminar on grassroots and national social movement

organizing built around theories of social and political

power. Specific topics to be covered include recruitment

and media strategies, organizational models, the role of

ideology, and movements in the political process.

Emphasis will be on practical, applied knowledge of help

to practitioners. We will examine examples of both faith

based and race-based organizing, as well as both liberal

and conservative social movements. Munson (SS)

SSP 453. Urban Communities (3)

Reading of classical and contemporary urban theory and

community studies in sociology and anthropology.

Examination of patterns of social class, power, and social

change in urban settings, community organizing and pub-

lic policy aimed at addressing urban social problems, and

evaluation of community interventions. Lasker (SS)

SSP 454. Urban Education: Inequality and Public

Policy (3)

Social inequality is found throughout American Society

but problems of inequality related to education have per-

haps received more attention than those of any other

contemporary social institution. Researchers, scholars,

journalists, social critics, and observers have studied, writ-

ten, and talked about educational inequality to an

enormous extent. Social service organizations, activists,

policy-makers, legal professionals, and government offi-

cials have focused massive reform efforts and political

agendas to tackle inequality in education. Many sociolo-

gists have long viewed education not just as an arena of

inequality but as the solution to the widespread inequali-

ties they see reflected in society. Urban education has been

an especially complex and controversial subject of scruti-

ny in recent scholarly and popular debates. This course

will focus with a sociological perspective on urban educa-

tion, inequality, and public policy in the contemporary

United States. The first portion of the course examines

research and literature relevant to the contemporary social

problems of urban education and inequality. The second

portion of the course will explore the role of public policy

in perpetuating educational inequality, and as a potential-

ly promising solution to it. Johnson (SS)

SSP 461. Seminar in Sociology (1-4)

Topics vary. (SS)

SSP 465 (WS 465) Inequalities at Work (3)

Primary focus in on race, gender, and class as axes of dis-

advantage and privilege in work and employment. We will

explore both theories and empirical studies of inequality

as well as their social, political, and practical ramifications

for the workplace. Krasas (SS)

SSP 471. Special Topics (1-3)

Intensive study in an area of sociology that is appropriate

to the interests and needs of staff and students. (SS)

SSP 472. Special Topics (1-3)

Continuation of SSP 471. (SS)

SSP 473. (EDUC 473) Social Basis of Human

Behavior (3)

Development of human behavior from a social psycho-

logical perspective. Emphasis placed on the impact of

society upon school-age children and adolescents. (SS)

SSP 476. Issues in Health Policy Analysis (3)

Sociological analyses of health care and health care policy

issues of current concern in American and other societies.

Application of analytic frameworks to several majors

issues such as organization and financing of services,

effects of aging populations on needs, impact of new dis-

eases and of new technologies. Students will analyze

selected health care problems faced by local communities.

Lasker (SS)

SSP 490. Master’s Thesis

SSP 492. Advanced Teamwork and Leadership (3)

Examines the development and functioning of teams in

the workplace. Includes the purpose of teams, team struc-

ture and process, team activities such as decision making

and problem-solving, the organizational context for

teams, strategies for implementing teams, and styles of

effective team leadership. Research results and case studies

are examined. Students participate in illustrative team

activities. Staff (SS)

SSP 493. Methods in Observation (3)

Naturalistic and participant observation in uncontrolled

field settings. Students will carry out a field project.

Tannenbaum (SS)

410 Lehigh University Course Catalog 2009-2010

South Mountain College

Benjamin Wright, program director

South Mountain College is a residential academic pro-

gram in the College of Arts and Sciences that unites a

community of students and faculty in the exploration of

intellectually exciting and practically significant topics of

investigation. Students in South Mountain College are

challenged to assume responsibility for their educations

and make connections across disciplinary barriers.

Assisted by core faculty – along with faculty and staff

‘friends’ of the program – South Mountain students also

draw from the curricular resources and intellectual capi-

tal of the University. South Mountain College consists of

a physical place (a dedicated residence), a curriculum (a

unique set of courses and activities), and an intellectual

community. Its guiding philosophy is that the problems

and conundrums which confront us as individuals and as

citizens are so thoroughly interconnected that our only

hope of disentangling them is through creative, critical

and comparative thinking across the full range of aca-

demic disciplines, and beyond. More information about

South Mountain College as well as information about

applications procedures can be found at the program’s

web site (http://cas.lehigh.edu/smc).

Participation in South Mountain College (SMC)

involves residence in its dedicated living space, pursuit of

a traditional Lehigh major, enrollment in SMC courses

(described below), participation in SMC activities such

as the annual planning retreats and extracurricular

events, and completion of free electives to meet

University graduation requirements. Students work

closely with their traditional major advisors, faculty

within SMC, and peers having a range of experience in

the program. As outcomes of their South Mountain

experience, students will experience a strong liberal-arts

education focused on the connections across disciplines,

and they will gain tangible skills in critical analysis, grap-

pling with complex issues and problems, and managing

their own work and those of others to make timely

progress on difficult issues.

Students who have joined South Mountain College will

spend roughly one third of their credits pursuing a tradi-

tional major, one third sampling free electives, and one

third in the formal South-Mountain curriculum. This

curriculum has two components, augmented by formal

and informal extracurricular activities and events. First,

in all semesters, students will join a section of an ongo-

ing multidisciplinary seminar devoted to the discussion

and analysis of important ideas; in consultation with

their faculty mentor, students will participate in selecting

both the topics to be considered and the works through

which to examine them. Second, in all semesters, stu-

dents will work either in groups or alone on

investigations related to one of the annual South

Mountain themes chosen by the faculty and student

community in a May retreat. Again, the nature of this

work, how goals will be achieved, and what products or

end-result is desired will be determined by students

working with faculty mentors devoted to each theme. A

strong focus on writing and communication skills is an

important part of both the South Mountain seminar and

investigations courses, and the theme-based work is

aimed at concrete outcomes no matter what path a stu-

dent or group of students chooses to take in working on

the theme.

When taking free electives or courses in their declared

major, South Mountain students earn letter grades and

accrue a grade-point average like any other Lehigh stu-

dent. However, in South Mountain courses, letter grades

are not used and students simply earn credit towards

graduation if they successfully complete the course (a

notation of ‘CR” will appear on their transcript). In lieu

of letter grades, for each offering of each course a student

receives a narrative assessment provided by their instruc-

tor, and these assessments become part of the student’s

permanent record. To continue in South Mountain

College, students must remain in good academic stand-

ing in the University and also in good standing within

the program.

Students admitted to the program have most College

requirements waived for them, including the first-year

English Composition sequence, the first-year College

Seminar, the junior writing-intensive requirement, and

distribution requirements (in Math, Natural Sciences,

Social Sciences, and Arts and Humanities). They do

need to complete one of the majors offered by the

College, meet all South Mountain requirements, and

take free electives to meet the graduation requirement of

at least 120 credits. In principle the program is open to

students from other colleges at Lehigh, but they would

have to meet all major and graduation requirements for

their College and degree program in addition to SMC

requirements.

Students can apply to South Mountain College in paral-

lel with application for admission to Lehigh and

participate in the program throughout their four years at

the University. It is possible to join the program after the

first year, and interested students should contact the pro-

gram’s director for information about procedures

(typically, applications are due on January first). Students

who choose to leave the program before graduation can

do so without penalty, given that they will already be

completing a major and accruing credits towards gradua-

tion; students in this situation should contact the SMC

Director for information about returning to the tradi-

tional Lehigh curriculum.

Degree Requirements for South

Mountain College

1. Residence in South Mountain College housing for at

least 4 semesters, two of which must include the first

year.

2. Participation in the annual planning retreats, each

year (usually in May and in August before First-Year

orientation)

3. Completion of a Lehigh B.A. or B.S. major (Note:

most B.S. majors will require careful planning in order

to meet all requirements in a timely fashion)

4. Completion of free electives, so as to meet the mini-

mum University graduation requirement of 120

credits.

5. Maintenance of good standing in the South

Mountain College program.

6. Completion of the South Mountain College

Curriculum (32-64 credits):

Year 1, fall and spring:

SMC 050 Investigations (2-6)

SMC 010 Seminar (2)

Years 2 – 4, fall and spring:

SMC 200 Seminar (2)

SMC 250 Investigations (2-6)

Supply Chain Management 411

Notes: Two credits of SMC Seminar are required each

semester a student is enrolled on-campus, for a total of up to

16 credits. A minimum of two credits of SMC Investigation

is required each semester a student is enrolled on-campus. If

a student is involved in Study Abroad or another off-campus

activity, they must still meet the minimum total of 16 cred-

its for SMC Investigation. A maximum total of 48 credits

of SMC Investigation may be applied to University gradua-

tion requirements. South Mountain College encourages

students to take advantage of opportunities like Study

Abroad and will assist students in developing a program

that works.

Courses in South Mountain College

SMC 10. South Mountain Seminar (2)

The subject of this multidisciplinary seminar is the criti-

cal analysis of significant ideas. Each offering is organized

around the discussion of books, articles, compositions,

performances, films, and artworks selected by the students

in consultation with their faculty mentor; sources will be

drawn from across disciplines. May include associated

workshops that provide a special focus on writing and

communication skills. This course is intended for fresh-

men in the SMC program, and meets concurrently with

SMC 050. May be repeated once for credit. (ND)

SMC 050. South Mountain Investigation (2-6)

Studies related to the annual theme, involving work across

disciplines by members of South Mountain College. Can

involve individual or group work, weekly meetings and

discussions, and written, artistic, technical or other work

as required to explore or make progress on the issue under

study. The advising and mentoring associated with this

course includes coverage equivalent to Arts 001 (Choices

and Decisions). This course is intended for freshmen in

the SMC program, and meets concurrently with SMC

050. May be repeated once for credit. (ND)

SMC 200. South Mountain Advanced Seminar (2)

The subject of this multidisciplinary seminar is the criti-

cal analysis of significant ideas. Each offering is organized

around the discussion of books, articles, compositions,

performances, films, and artworks selected by the students

in consultation with their faculty mentor; sources will be

drawn from across disciplines. May be repeated for credit.

(ND)

SMC 250. South Mountain Advanced

Investigation (2-6)

Studies related to the annual theme, involving work across

disciplines by members of South Mountain College. Can

involve individual or group work, weekly meetings and

discussions, and written, artistic, technical or other work

as required to explore or make progress on the issue under

study. Maybe repeated for credit. (ND)

Spanish

See listings under Modern Languages and Literature.

Special Education

See listings under Education.

Speech

See listings as Communication under Journalism and

Communication.

Statistics

See listing under Mathematics.

Supply Chain Management

Program director. Robert J. Trent, Ph.D. (Michigan

State) professor of management.

Program faculty. Susan A. Sherer, Ph.D. (Pennsylvania)

Kenan Professor of Information Technology Management,

chair department of management; Nada Sanders, Ph.D.

(Ohio State) Iacocca Chair; Yuliang Yao, Ph.D.

(Maryland) assistant professor of business information sys-

tems; Zachary Zacharia, PhD. (Tennessee) assistant

professor of management; Joel Sutherland, M.B.A.,

(Pepperdine) adjunct professor

Success in today’s business environment is driven by

competitive advantage and profitability. Customer-focus,

value added product differentiation and cost manage-

ment are the elements associated with industry leaders.

The Supply Chain Management undergraduate major at

Lehigh University prepares students to understand and

manage the processes that distinguish the successful

company from its competitors.

The Supply Chain Management major equips students

with the knowledge, skills and abilities necessary for suc-

cess in the complex business environment of the 21st

Century. This program:

• Provides solid exposure to supply management, logistics,

business-to-business, and operations management top-

ics.

• Develops cross-functional team skills by integrating

Supply Chain Management students with engineer-

ing students in the Integrated Product Development

(IPD) program.

• Emphasizes advanced cost analysis, negotiation, qual-

ity management and improvement, logistics network

modeling and e-business.

• Integrates core business courses with supply chain

major courses.

• Provides field study and experiential learning oppor-

tunities.

Supply Chain Management graduates will be prepared to

enter industry at a level that accelerates their on-the-job

learning and development. Supply Chain Management

graduates typically work within four areas, each with its

own set of positions and career paths:

• purchasing and supply management

• transportation and logistics

• operations management

• inventory management and control

• supply chain planning

Supply Chain Management Program

and Courses

For specific course descriptions please see subject area

heading in this catalog. Check index for page number.

412 Lehigh University Course Catalog 2009-2010

Required Major Courses (18 hours)

SCM 309 Supply and Cost Management (3)

SCM 354 Integrated Transportation and Logistics

Systems (3)

BUS 211 Integrated Product Development

SCM/MGT 328 Negotiations and Conflict

Management (3)

SCM 340 Demand and Supply Chain Planning

(3)

SCM 342 e-Business Enterprise Applications (3)

(also cross-listed as BIS 342)

And an optional:

SCM 373 Supply Chain Management Internship

(1-3)

Undergraduate Courses

SCM 309. Supply and Cost Management (3)

This class presents a framework for achieving sustainable

competitive advantage through progressive supply man-

agement leadership and approaches. It presents the need

for supply leadership, the organizational enablers that

must be in place, and the strategies and approaches that

leading organizations pursue to achieve competitive

advantage in price and cost, quality, delivery, cycle time,

technology, flexibility, and end customer responsiveness.

Special attention is given to a wide range of price and cost

management techniques. Prerequisites: SCM 186 or

department permission.

SCM 328. Negotiations and Conflict Management

(3) (cross list with MGT 328)

This course covers the theory and processes of negotiation

in a variety of settings including face-to-face, virtual and

cross-cultural business environments. Students will learn

negotiating skills by preparing and simulating a broad

mixture of negotiations, ranging from one-on-one, to

three-person, to multiparty and team negotiations. They

will learn to analyze outcomes and strategies during the

debriefing sessions and will have an opportunity to com-

pare results of their negotiations to the results of other

people in class.

SCM 340. Demand and Supply Chain Planning (3)

Students will learn how businesses work with other busi-

nesses to build relationships and integrate demand and

supply planning activities across the supply chain to deliv-

er value to customers. They will learn about tools and

technologies enabling integration, and the critical drivers

and key metrics of supply chain performance. Current

readings, case studies, simulations and written assign-

ments will be used. Prerequisite: MGT 186 or MGT 280

and MKT 111 or consent of instructor.

SCM 342 (BIS 342). E-Business Enterprise

Applications (3)

Introduction to the implications of key information tech-

nologies used within and across businesses to conduct

e-business. The course covers the functionality of various

enterprise applications and their integration: customer

relationship management, enterprise resource planning,

supply chain management, supplier relationship manage-

ment, data warehousing and mining, business

intelligence, and product lifecycle management.

Prerequisites: BIS 111 or consent of the instructor.

SCM 354. Integrated Transportation and Logistics

Systems (3)

A combined lecture, discussion, and experiential course

designed to (1) expose students to the fundamentals of

logistics management and (2) apply course material

directly. For example, students will analyze a logistics sys-

tem for a manufacturing or service firm to identify the

cost-effective transportation and storage of raw materials,

work-in-process inventory, and finished goods from point

of origin to final consumer and the supporting informa-

tion and decision support systems. Topics addressed

include integrated logistics, logistical resources, logistics

system design, and logistics administration. Students will

read seminal and contemporary best-practice logistics arti-

cles throughout the course. In addition to addressing the

logistics activities inherent in integrated supply chain

management, this course provides a field study/experien-

tial learning opportunity. Prerequisites: MGT 186 or

department permission

Bus 211. Integrated Product Development

Projects (3)

Business, engineering, and design students work in cross

disciplinary teams of 4-6 students on marketing, financial

and economic planning, economic and technical feasibil-

ity of new product concepts. Team work on industrial

projects with faculty advisors. Oral presentations and

written reports. Prerequisite: Junior standing in business,

economics, arts or engineering.

SCM 371. Directed Readings (1-3)

Readings in various fields of supply chain management

designed for the student who has a special interest in some

field of supply chain management not covered by the reg-

ularly scheduled courses. Consent of the department

chair. May be repeated.

SCM 372. Special Topics (1-3)

Special problems and issues in supply chain management

for which no regularly scheduled course work exists.

When offered as group study, coverage varies according to

interests of instructor and students. Consent of the

department chair. May be repeated.

SCM 373. Supply Chain Management Internship

(1-3)

A sponsoring faculty member shall direct readings, proj-

ects and other assignments including a comprehensive

final report in conjunction with an industry sponsored

internship. The work experience itself, whether paid or

unpaid, is not the basis for academic credit. Intellectual

development in the context of a field study learning expe-

rience comparable to Bus 211 (Engr 211), Integrated

Product Development Projects, and Mgt 372, Special

Topics in Logistics, will be the determining factor in

awarding academic credit. This course cannot be used to

satisfy requirements of the Supply Chain Management

major. Consent of the department chair. Prerequisite:

Junior standing in the College of Business and Economics

and Supply Chain Management declaration.

Supply Chain Management Minor

The Supply Chain Management minor is designed to

offer students in other disciplines an opportunity to

learn about the implications of supply chain issues. The

College of Business and Economics offers a Supply

Chain Management minor to any student that has com-

pleted the following prerequisites:

ECO 1 Principles of Economics

ECO 145 Statistical Methods or applicable statis-

tics from the student’s college

Theatre 413

The SCM minor consists of 3 courses equaling 9 credit

hours

All SCM minors take the following two (2) courses:

SCM 309 Supply and Cost Management (3)

SCM 354 Integrated Transportation and Logistics

Systems (3)

Plus one (1) of the following:

SCM/MGT 328 Negotiations and Conflict

Management (3)

SCM 324 E-Business Enterprise Applications (3)

SCM 340 Demand and Supply Chain

Planning (3)

Technology, Interdisciplinary

Courses

See listings under Science, Technology and Society.

Theatre

Professors. Jeffrey Milet, M.F.A. (Yale); Augustine Ripa,

M.F.A. (Northwestern); Pam Pepper, M.F.A. (Ohio).

Associate professors. Drew Francis, M.F.A. (Brandeis);

Erica Hoelscher, M.F.A. (Northwestern); Kashi Johnson,

M.F.A. (Pittsburgh).

Assistant professor. Jorge I. Cortiñas, M.F.A. (Brown).

Adjunct professors. E. Laura Hausmann, B.F.A. (Boston

Conservatory); R. Elizabeth Miller, Certificate

(LAMDA); Pamela Richey, M.F.A. (Montana); Chi Kit

Ng, M.F.A. (Brandeis); Raymond Saraceni, M.A.

(Villanova); Christopher Bohan, M.F.A. (Wayne State);

Kate Foretek, B.A. (Muhlenbburg); Travis Kerr, B.A.

(Lehigh); Sue Ragusa, M.F.A. (Wisconsin-Madison).

To study theatre is to examine its many internal disci-

plines. Acting and directing combine with design,

technical theatre, dramatic literature and theatre history

to form the body of our art. Students may pursue gener-

al theatre studies or focus on particular areas such as

performance, design or history and literature. They may

major in theatre, minor in theatre or participate strictly

in our production program. Students may even complete

a minor in theatre from outside the College of Arts and

Sciences.

The bachelor of arts degree in theatre is granted after at

least 48 credit hours of study. Because we believe that

undergraduate theatre education should be broad based

with an emphasis on diversity of experience, students are

encouraged to take a variety of courses outside the major.

Many students complete double majors. Those with the

talents and aspirations for a career in theatre have gone

to graduate schools offering intense, pre-professional

training. Other majors who have not pursued a theatrical

career have gone from our program directly into careers

in business, social services, sales. Theatre study is an

excellent preparation for vocations in which self presen-

tation is important, such as law. The problem solving,

analytical and interpersonal skills gained from this disci-

pline are applicable across a wide range of careers. An

understanding and appreciation of the complex art of

the theatre will enrich a lifetime.

The department’s active production program is curricu-

lar and promotes collaborative projects involving

students, faculty, staff and guest artists. Our large per-

formance facility is the Diamond Theater, a 300-seat

thrust theatre housed in the Zoellner Arts Center. The

core of our work in this space is dedicated to produc-

tions featuring primarily student actors directed by

faculty or guest artists. When possible, a highly qualified

student may direct or design in this space. In addition to

our own productions, we regularly invite outside profes-

sional performers and ensembles to work with us and

perform. We also operate a lab theatre (Zoellner’s Black

Box Theatre) for student and faculty experimentation.

The availability of valuable hands-on experience and the

very close working relationships developed between stu-

dents and faculty uniquely characterize the department

of theatre. The department enjoys a special relationship

with Bethlehem’s professional theatre company,

Touchstone Theatre. Performance and administrative

internships with the company are available to qualified

students and the department and Touchstone often col-

laborate on workshops and seminars.

Students interested in designing a major or minor in the-

atre should consult with the department chairperson.

Experienced theatre students with questions regarding

accurate placement in any theatre course should, like-

wise, consult with the chairperson.

Lehigh University is an accredited institution of the

National Association of Schools of Theatre.

Theatre Major

Through the selection of appropriate electives, students

may concentrate their major in one of these areas:

Acting/Directing

Design/Technical Theatre

Theatre History/Dramatic Literature

General Theatre Studies

The major in theatre consists of 48 hours distributed as

follows:

Coursework required of all majors, 24 hrs

THTR 1 Introduction to Theatre (4)

THTR 60 Dramatic Action, (4)

THTR 87 Scenography I, (4)

THTR 127 The Development of Theatre and

Drama from Ritual to Renaissance (4)

THTR 128 The Development of Theatre and

Drama from Renaissance to Present (4)

THTR Acting, any appropriate level (4)

THTR 315 Senior Study (0)

Production Requirement, 8 hrs

Four courses from the following: THTR 20, 21, 22, 23,

25, 26, 27, 28, 30, 31, 35, 42, 45, 47, 67, 68, 69, 175.

Advanced courses may be substituted.

Electives, 16 hrs

Four courses carefully selected with an advisor, emphasiz-

ing depth or breadth of study.

Recommended electives from other

departments:

The departments of art and architecture, English, mod-

ern languages and literature, music and others all offer

courses of value to a theatre major or minor. Consult

with your advisor about enriching your academic career

outside the theatre department.

414 Lehigh University Course Catalog 2009-2010

Theatre Minor

The minor in theatre consists of at least 22 hours of

course work selected in consultation with a departmental

advisor. This includes at least five courses (18-20 hrs)

and two active semesters in theatre production totaling

at least four credits. Fulfill the production requirement

through an approved production-oriented course. An

approved minor in theatre will include some academic

diversity beyond a single curricular area.

Departmental Honors

The exceptional student may elect to pursue departmen-

tal honors in the senior year. This student must have a

GPA of 3.3 in all theatre courses presented for the major.

No later than the fall of the senior year the student, with

faculty supervision, elects a special project in a particular

area of theatre. This may take the form of preparing to

direct a play, researching a role to be performed, prepar-

ing a design presentation or researching in an area of

theatre scholarship in preparation for the writing of a

substantial report. In the next semester, usually the

spring of the senior year, the report or project would be

executed. The student would enroll in two, four-credit

independent study courses, one each senior semester.

The Acting Sequence

Students with little or no prior acting experience should

elect Theatre 11, Introduction to Acting, as their first

course. Students with some prior acting experience

should consult with the department chairperson for

accurate placement and waiver of the Theatre 11 prereq-

uisite.

Courses in Theatre

THTR 1. Introduction to Theatre (4)

Foundations of theatre: historical, literary and practical.

(HU)

THTR 11. Introduction to Acting (4)

Preparation for scene study and characterization. (HU)

THTR 20. Stage Technology and Production I (2)

Scenic construction materials and techniques. Scenic stag-

ing theory, methods and practice. Production assignment

in construction and/or crew. Not repeatable for added

credit. (HU)

THTR 21. Stage Technology and Production II (2)

Theory, methods and practice for advanced or managerial

assignments in construction and/or run crew. Can be

repeated for credit. (HU)

THTR 22. Stage Properties and Decoration (2)

Creating props and decor for the stage. Production assign-

ment as assistant property master. (HU)

THTR 23. Basic Scene Painting (2)

Painting for the stage. Production assignments painting

with scenic artist. (HU)

THTR 25. Costume Technology & Production I (2)

Costume construction methods and materials. Production

assignment in construction or wardrobe. (HU)

THTR 26. Costume Technology & Production II

(2)

Theory, methods and practice for advanced or managerial

assignments in construction and/or run crew. (HU)

THTR 27. Lighting Technology & Production I

(2)

Computerized lighting systems. Instrumentation and

lighting crew participation. Production assignment in

light board operation. Prerequisite: (HU)

THTR 28. Lighting Technology & Production II (2)

Master Electrician assignment. (HU)

THTR 30. Sound Technology & Production I (2)

State of the art digital audio technology. Pre-production

sound assignments, recording, equipment. Production

assignment in sound operation . (HU)

THTR 31. Sound Technology & Production II (2)

Sound engineer assignment. (HU)

THTR 35. Performance (2)

Performing in a department-approved production. May

be repeated for credit. (HU)

THTR 42. Marketing and Publicity for the

Theatre (2)

Theory and practice of marketing and publicity for pro-

ductions. (HU)

THTR 45. Stage Management (2)

Organization, scheduling, coordination of various pro-

duction specialties. Production assignment as assistant

stage manager. (HU)

THTR 47. House Management (2)

Front of house coordination, audience services, interface

with stage management and production team. Production

assignment as house manager. (HU)

THTR 50. (DES 50) Stage Lighting (4)

An introduction to the art and practice of lighting design

for the stage. History of theatrical lighting design. (HU)

THTR 54. (CLSS 54) Greek Tragedy (3)

Aspects of Greek theater and plays of Aeschylus,

Sophocles, and Euripides in their social and intellectual

contexts. Pavlock (HU)

THTR 56. Jazz Dance (2)

Jazz dance styles and combinations. May be repeated for

credit. Prerequisite: fee. (HU)

THTR 57. Modern Dance (2)

Modern dance styles and combinations. May be repeated

for credit. Prerequisite: fee. (HU)

THTR 58. (CLSS 58) Greek and Roman

Comedy (3)

Study of comedy as a social form through plays of

Aristophanes, Menander, Plautus, and Terence. Pavlock

(HU)

THTR 60. (ENGL 60) (GC 60) Dramatic Action (4)

How plays are put together; how they work and what they

accomplish. Examination of how plot, character, aural

and visual elements of production combine to form a uni-

fied work across genre, styles and periods. Recommended

as a foundation for further studies in design, literature, or

performance. (HU) FALL

THTR 67. Stagecraft (2)

Stagecraft, rigging, problem solving, materials and tech-

niques. Practical experience in executing scenery for the

stage. (HU)

THTR 68. Costume Construction (2)

Techniques of sewing, pattern drafting and fitting.

Theatre 415

Practical experience in executing costumes for the stage.

(HU)

THTR 69. Stage Electrics (2)

Theatre lighting techniques, equipment, materials, meth-

ods and theory. Practical experience in executing lighting

for the theatre. (HU)

THTR 77. Ballet (2)

Classical ballet for beginners and those who have had

some training. May be repeated for credit. Prerequisite:

fee. (HU)

THTR 87. (DES 87) Scenography I (4)

Introduction to the process of creating integrated designs

in theatre production. The study and practice of the prin-

ciples of visual representation, historical and conceptual

research and the study of theatrical styles. (HU) SPRING

THTR 111. (DES 111) Sound Design (2)

Techniques, materials, and methods of designing sound

for theatrical production (HU)

THTR 127 (ENGL 127). The Development of

Theatre and Drama from Ritual to Renaissance (4)

Survey of Western theatre and dramatic literature from

ritual origins to the Renaissance. (HU) FALL

THTR 128 (ENGL 128). The Development of

Theatre and Drama from Renaissance to Present

(4)

Survey of Western theatre and dramatic literature from

the renaissance to the present. (HU) SPRING

THTR 129 (WS 129). History of Fashion and

Style (4): also C/L w/ (DES 129)

Dress and culture in the Western Hemisphere from pre-

history to today. The evolution of silhouette, garment

forms and technology. The relationship of fashion to pol-

itics, art and behavior. Cultural and environmental

influences on human adornment. (HU)

THTR 132 (AAS 132). Hip Hop Theatre (4)

Introduction to the creation and performance of Hip Hop

theatre. Exploration of the history and culture of Hip

Hop through original written material, live performance,

music, film, video and web based content. Public per-

formances. Prerequisite: Audition. Consent of instructor.

(HU)

THTR 130. Drafting for the Theatre (4)

Theatre drafting techniques and conventions. Material,

methods and theory in stage graphics. Model building

techniques and practice. An introduction to computer

drafting. (HU)

THTR 140 (AAS 140). African American Theatre (4)

Studies in African American theatre: literary, and practical

and historical. May be repeated for credit. (HU)

THTR 144. Directing (4)

Introduction to the theatrical director’s art. Research,

rehearsal techniques, scene work. Prerequisites: THTR

60, Dramatic Action, and acting experience as determined

by the department, or consent of chairperson. (HU)

SPRING

THTR 147. Acting Modern Realism (4)

Characterization and scene study in modern realistic

drama e.g. Ibsen, Chekov, O’Neill, Hellman, Miller and

Williams. Prerequisite: THTR 11.

THTR 148. Acting Contemporary Drama (4)

Characterization and scene study in modern contempo-

rary drama. Prerequisite: THTR 11.

THTR 152. Stage Make-up (4)

Theatrical make-up techniques for the actor and designer.

(HU)

THTR 154. (DES 154) Scene Painting(4)

Study and practice of basic and advanced methods of

painting for the theatre. Includes basic elements and prin-

ciples of design, color theory, the influence of light,

atmosphere and aesthetics for the theatre. (HU)

THTR 161. (Arch 161) Performing Arts Venue

Design and Technology (4)

Designing theatres. Theatre equipment systems and

acoustics. Function and form. ((HU)

THTR 175. Special Projects (1-4)

Theatrical topics of current or special interest. Can be

repeated for credit. (HU)

THTR 181. Theatre Management (4)

Concepts, techniques and practices related to managing

the theatrical enterprise. (HU)

THTR 185. Production Seminar (1-4)

Practicum in various approaches to theatre production,

e.g. performance ensemble. Prerequisite: audition, or con-

sent of the chairperson. Can be repeated for credit. (HU)

THTR 187. (DES 187) Scenography II (4)

Includes beginning scene design, lighting design, and cos-

tume design principles and techniques. Introduction to

design history. Significant texts, scenographic design and

media techniques in graphic and three-dimensional solu-

tions. Introduction to drafting and mechanical

perspective. Prerequisite: THTR 87 or consent of instruc-

tor. (HU) FALL

THTR 211 (Germ 211). German Drama (4)

Drama as a literary genre; plays from various periods of

German literature. (HU)

THTR 218 (Germ 218). Goethe’s “Faust” (4)

Study of Goethe’s play with an introduction to the Faust

tradition. (HU)

THTR 221. Breaking into the Business (4)

This course will explore the world of the professional

actor with comprehensive coverage of all aspects of the

acting profession. Abundant information on auditioning

techniques, the tools of the actor, the acting unions, pro-

fessional theater companies, graduate and professional

training programs and the world of film & television will

be examined.

THTR 236. Acting Presentational Styles (4)

Elements of characterization and scene study in presenta-

tional dramatic literature from classical through

post-modern periods. Prerequisite: 100-level acting

course, or consent of chairperson. (HU)

THTR 244. Acting Shakespeare (4)

Monologue, scene study and ensemble work from

Shakespeare’s dramatic and poetic canon. Prerequisite:

100-level acting course. (HU)

THTR 245. Advanced Directing (4)

Continuation of Theatre 144. The director’s voice.

Supervised practical experience. Prerequisite: THTR 144.

(HU)

416 Lehigh University Course Catalog 2009-2010

THTR 253. Scene Painting II (4)

Applied advanced scene painting methods for the theatre.

Shop management for the scenic artist. Collaboration

with designers and stage technology. Prerequisite: THTR

154. (HU)

THTR 260. Design Practicum (1-4)

Scenic, costume, lighting or sound design for the theatre.

Realized design production assignments and portfolio

building. Collaboration, process and presentation.

Prerequisite: Dept. Permission. Repeatable for credit.

(HU)

THTR 271. Playwriting (4)

The art and practice of writing plays for the stage. (HU)

THTR 275. Internship (1-4)

Professionally supervised work in theatres and theatrical

organizations in the areas of performance, design, techni-

cal theatre, theatre administration and management. May

be repeated for credit. Prerequisite: consent of chairper-

son. (ND)

THTR 287. (DES 287) Scenography III (4)

Includes advanced scene design, lighting design, and cos-

tume design principles and techniques. Design history

projects in specific periods. Complex design problems of

traditional texts. Emphasis on color and color theory.

Prerequisite: THTR 187 or permission. (HU) SPRING

THTR 315. Senior Study (0)

Seminar for senior theatre majors. Enhancement of cur-

rent theatre studies while preparing for further theatre

studies or activity. (ND)

THTR 318. (FREN 318) Drama in the Twentieth

Century (3)

Contemporary French drama with an analysis of its ori-

gins and movements. Armstrong (HU)

THTR 328. (ENG 328). Shakespeare (4)

An introduction to Shakespearean drama including come-

dies, histories, tragedies, and romances. Emphasis on

textual study, cultural contexts, and performance strate-

gies. Hawkes, Traister (HU)

THTR 351. Advanced Special Projects (1-8)

Independent study in theatre. Prerequisite: consent of the

chairperson. Can be repeated for credit. (HU)

THTR 361. Research in Theatre Technology (1-4)

Solving technological problems in theatre. Application of

new technologies. May be repeated for credit.

Prerequisite: consent of chairperson. (HU)

THTR 387. (DES 387) Scenography IV (4)

Advanced problem solving of non-traditional design

problems, experimental approaches and solutions, con-

temporary issues in environmental design. Design history

focus on contemporary design trends and non-traditional

history. Prerequisite: THTR 287 or permission. (HU)

FALL

Women’s Studies

The Women’s Studies Program has several major goals: to

expand students’ understanding of women’s present status

and rich history; to stimulate a critical examination of the

impact of gender roles and stereotypes on social structures

and individual lives; to evaluate proposals for alternative

arrangements; and to connect issues addressed in the

classroom with those raised in personal, political, and cul-

tural contexts. The program challenges students to think

beyond the boundaries of traditional gender roles, tradi-

tional disciplines, and established institutions. In the best

tradition of a liberal arts education, Women’s Studies

encourages women and men to think critically and con-

structively, to redesign knowledge, and to gain a better

understanding of themselves and their world.

Professors. Marie-Helene Chabut, Ph.D. (U.C., San

Diego), professor of French; Alexander M. Doty, Ph.D.

(Illinois), professor of English; Jan S. Fergus, Ph.D.

(CUNY), professor of English; Elizabeth N. Fifer, Ph.D.

(Michigan), professor of English; Edward J. Gallagher,

Ph.D. (Notre Dame), professor of English; Lucy C. Gans,

M.F.A. (Pratt), professor of art and architecture; Diane T.

Hyland, Ph.D. (Syracuse), professor of psychology; Judith

N. Lasker, Ph.D. (Harvard), professor of sociology and

anthropology; Laura Katz Olson, Ph.D. (Colorado), pro-

fessor of political science; Jill E. Schneider, Ph.D.

(Wesleyan), professor of biological sciences; Laurence J.

Silberstein, Ph.D. (Brandeis), Philip & Muriel Berman

Professor of Jewish Studies and professor of religion studies;

Jean R. Soderlund, Ph.D. (Temple), professor of history;

Lloyd H. Steffen, Ph.D. (Brown), University Chaplain

and professor of religion studies; Nicola B. Tannenbaum,

Ph.D. (Iowa), professor of sociology and anthropology;

Lenore E. Chava Weissler, Ph.D. (Pennsylvania), Philip

and Muriel Berman Chair of Jewish Civilization and pro-

fessor of religion studies.

Associate professors. Constance A. Cook, Ph.D., (U.C.,

Berkeley) associate professor of modern languages and liter-

ature; Gail A. Cooper, Ph.D. (U.C., Santa Barbara),

associate professor of history; Robin S. Dillon, Ph.D.

(Pittsburgh), associate professor of philosophy; Erica

Hoelscher, M.F.A (Northwestern) associate professor of

theatre; Dawn Keetley, Ph.D., (Wisconsin, Madison),

associate professor of English, Women’s Studies, and

American Studies; Jackie Krasas, Ph.D. (U. Southern

California), associate professor of sociology and anthropolo-

gy, director of women’s studies; Monica Najar, Ph.D.,

(Wisconsin), associate professor of history; Ageliki

Nicolopoulou, PhD. (U.C., Berkeley), associate professor

of psychology; John Pettegrew, Ph.D. (Wisconsin,

Madison), associate professor of history.

Assistant professors. Miren Edurne Portela, Ph.D.

(N.C., Chapel Hill), Spanish.

Undergraduate Major in Women’s

Studies

The Women’s Studies BA will provide students an in

depth education in an interdisciplinary field of academic

inquiry that critically examines the diverse realities of

women’s lives and the ways in which gender and power

differentials shape human lives and human societies.

Women’s studies pursues a fundamental critique of

knowledge by challenging the basic assumptions, meth-

ods of inquiry, theoretical frameworks, and knowledge

claims of traditional fields of inquiry that have thought

it unimportant to study women or gender. Women’s

studies seeks to create new paradigms of knowledge and

inquiry, to develop more truthful and comprehensive

understandings of humans and our world, and to explore

non-sexist alternatives for more richly human lives and

more fully human social orders.

The Women’s Studies major requires 38-40 credits of

coursework and is designed to complement other areas

Women’s Studies 417

of study within CAS in order to facilitate double-majors

for our students. WS majors can stand alone; however,

many students find the major an invaluable asset as part

of a double-major. The major will have a core curricu-

lum, a concentration (social sciences or humanities),

electives, and a senior experience.

I. Major Core Courses - 16 credits total:

Required Core Courses - 12 credits:

WS 101 - Introduction to Women’s Studies - 4 credits

(HU)

WS 124 (HIST 124) - Women in America - 4 credits

(SS)

WS 350 - Seminar in Feminist Theory - 4 credits (SS)

Global/Diversity - 4 credits: (Please choose 1- cannot be

double-counted in categories)

WS 42 (SOAN 42) - Sexual Minorities - 4 credits (SS)

WS 73 (ASIA 73/GC 73/MLL 73) - Film, Fiction,

and Gender in Modern China - 4 credits (HU)

WS 110 (GC 110/SSP 110) - Women’s Work in

Global Perspectives - 4 credits (SS)

WS 123 (ANTH 123) - Cultural Construction of

Gender - 4 credits (SS)

WS 138 (REL 138) - Women in Jewish History - 4

credits (HU)

WS 145 (AAS 145) - African American Women

Writers - 4 credits (HU)

WS 158 (REL 158) - Sex and Gender in Judaism: The

Feminist Critique - 4 credits (HU)

WS 310 (AAS 310/SSP 310) - Gender, Race, and

Sexuality: The Social Construction of Differences - 4

credits (SS)

WS 326 (SPAN 326) - Traditions and Resistance:

Women Writers of Latin America - 4 credits (HU)

WS 327 (FREN 327) - Women Writing in French - 4

credits (HU)

II. Major Concentration - students must concentrate in

Social Science or Humanities - 8 credits total:

Required Social Science Courses - choose any 2 from

the social science list for a total of 8 credits;

Required Humanities Courses - choose any 2 from the

humanities list for a total of 8 credits.

III.Major Non-concentration - either from social science

if humanities concentration OR humanities if social

sciences concentration. Choose from the list below -

4 credits total.

IV. Major Electives -Can be any combination of social

science and humanities - 8 credits total.

V. Major Senior Experience (2 electives) - choose intern-

ship, independent research, or senior thesis- 2 to 4

credits total.

Social Science Courses:

WS 41 (SOAN 41) - Human Sexuality - 4 credits

(ND)

WS 42 (SOAN 42) - Sexual Minorities - 4 credits (SS)

WS 110 (GC 110/SSP 110) - Women’s Work in

Global Perspective - 4 credits (SS)

WS 117 (HIST 117/STS 117) - Women, Science, and

Technology - 4 credits (SS)

WS 123 (ANTH 123) - Cultural Construction of

Gender - 4 credits (SS)

WS 128 (SSP 128) - Race, Gender, and Work - 4 cred-

its (SS)

WS 130 (ECO 130) - Economics of Race and Gender

- 2 credits (SS)

WS 153 (HIST 153) - Women in European History:

1500-Present - 4 credits (SS)

WS 179 (POLS 179) - Politics of Women - 4 credits

(SS)

WS 310 (AAS 310/SSP 310) - Gender, Race, and

Sexuality: The Social Construction of Differences - 4

credits (SS)

WS 318 (PSYC 318) - Seminar in Gender and

Psychology - 4 credits (SS)

WS 325 (HIST 325/SSP 325) - History of Sexuality

and the Family in the U.S. - 3 to 4 credits (SS)

WS 341 (SSP 341) - Women and Health - 4 credits

(SS)

WS 351 (SSP 351) - Gender and Social Change - 4

credits (SS)

WS 364 (SSP 364) - Sociology of the Family - 4 cred-

its (SS)

WS 365 (SSP 365) - Inequalities at Work - 4 credits

(SS)

WS 396 (SSP 396) - The Social Evolution of Women’s

Sexuality - 4 credits (SS) (when offered)

Humanities Courses:

WS 8 (REL 8) - Prehistoric Religion, Art, and

Technology - 4 credits (HU)

WS 73 (ASIA 73/GC 73/MLL 73) - Film, Fiction,

and Gender in Modern China - 4 credits (HU)

WS 121 (ART 121/GC 121) - Women in Art - 4 cred-

its (HU)

WS 129 (THTR 129) - History of Fashion and Style

- 4 credits (HU)

WS 138 (REL 138) - Women in Jewish History - 4

credits (HU)

WS 145 (AAS 145) - African American Women

Writers - 4 credits (HU)

WS 158 (REL 158) - Sex and Gender in Judaism: The

Feminist Critique - 4 credits (HU)

WS 184 (REL 184) - Religion, Gender, and Power - 4

credits (HU)

WS 226 (PHIL 226) - Feminism and Philosophy - 4

credits (HU)

WS 303 (GERM 303 / MLL 303) Grimms’ Fairy

Tales: Folklore, Feminism, Film (4)

WS 311 (ENGL 311) - Literature of Women - 4 cred-

its (HU)

WS 326 (SPAN 326) - Tradition and Resistance:

Women Writers of Latin America - 4 credits (HU)

WS 327 (FREN 327) - Women Writing in French - 4

credits (HU)

WS 346 (SPAN 346) - Contemporary Hispanic

Women Writers: The Novelists - 4 credits (HU)

WS 387 (ENGL 387) - Gender and Sexuality in the

418 Lehigh University Course Catalog 2009-2010

Horror Film - 4 credits (HU)

Other:

WS 271 - Independent Reading and Research - 1 to 4

credits (SS/HU)

WS 330 - Internship in Women’s Studies - 1 to 4 cred-

its (2-4 - SS)

WS 373 - Internship in Women’s Center - 1 to 3 cred-

its (SS)

Special Topics Courses - 91, 191, 272, 291, 371, 381,

382, 391, 392 - 1 to 4 credits (ND)

Undergraduate Minor in Women’s

Studies

The minor in Women’s Studies engages students in the

study of two interrelated subjects. The first is an exami-

nation of the cultural, historical, and social experiences

and contributions of women. The second is an explo-

ration of gender (the social construction of differential

identity for males and females) and of the ways in which

gender distinctions shape human consciousness and

human society.

Nearly all academic disciplines have defined human

nature and significant achievement in terms of male

experience and have underestimated the impact of gen-

der on social structures and human lives. By contrast,

Women’s Studies courses attend to women’s diverse expe-

riences and perspectives and acknowledge the critical

significance of gender. By shifting the focus to women

and gender, Women’s Studies seeks to provide an alterna-

tive paradigm for understanding human experience.

Students in Women’s Studies courses are encouraged to

reevaluate traditional assumptions about human beings,

human knowledge, and human culture and society, and

to explore non-sexist alternatives for a more fully human

social order.

The minor in Women’s Studies consists of a minimum

of 18 credit hours. Students pursuing the minor are

required to take the introductory course (WS 101) and

one upper-level course from among those concerned

with the theory and practice of Women’s Studies. The

remaining courses must include at least one course in the

arts and humanities and one course in the natural and

social sciences. Students arrange their program in consul-

tation with the program director.

Undergraduate Minor Required Courses - 6 credits

totals:

Students must take WS 101 and one of the required

undergraduate courses for a total of 6 credits. Please see

the “Required Undergraduate Courses” listed after the

Graduate Certificate description and requirements.

Undergraduate Minor Elective Courses - 12 credits

total:

Students must take any of the undergraduate elective

courses for a total of 12 credits. Please see the “Elective

Undergraduate Courses” listed after the Graduate Cer-

tificate description and requirements.

Graduate Certificate in Women’s Studies

The Graduate Certificate in Women’s Studies is designed

as a complement to a disciplinary graduate program or

as a stand-alone post-baccalaureate course of study. The

Certificate is a small, flexible program that provides stu-

dents with breadth and the challenge of working outside

their home discipline in concentrated interdisciplinary

study of women and gender. In recognition of contem-

porary educational and employment contexts that are

increasingly diverse and international, the Women’s

Studies Program offers the Graduate Certificate as a

means to enrich academic, personal, and employment

horizons. A Certificate in Women’s Studies will be espe-

cially beneficial to those who wish to incorporate a

broader perspective into their teaching (either in second-

ary or higher education), and qualifies them for positions

that require such expertise. Additionally, individuals

interested in fields such as social policy, human

resources, and business will also gain from understanding

how gender operates at individual, organizational, and

institutional levels. Students will work closely with out-

standing faculty from diverse disciplinary backgrounds.

Basic Requirements:

• 4 courses for a total of at least 12 credits

• 2 courses outside home department (for matriculat-

ing students)

• WS 450 Seminar in Feminist Theory

Admissions:

Students in degree programs must be in good standing

in their programs and are encouraged to apply early in

their course of studies. Non-degree students must hold a

bachelor’s degree or equivalent with a 3.0 GPA.

Sample Courses:

WS 403 (GERM 403) – Grimms’ Fairy Tales: Folklore,

Feminism, Film – 3 credits (HU)

WS 411 (ENGL 411) - Literature of Women - 3 credits

(HU)

WS 441 (SSP 441) - Women and Health - 3 credits (SS)

WS 450 - Seminar in Feminist Theory - 3 credits (SS)

WS 465 (SSP 465) - Inequalities at Work - 3 credits (SS)

WS 484 (PSYC 484) - Psychology of Gender - 3 credits (SS)

Undergraduate Courses in Women’s

Studies

Required Undergraduate Courses in Women’s

Studies:

WS 101 Introduction to Women’s

Studies (4)

And one of the following

WS 271 Independent Reading and

Research (1-4)

WS 330 Internship in Women’s

Studies (1-4)

WS 350 Seminar in Feminist Theory (4)

WS 373 Internship in Women’s

Center (1-3)

Elective Undergraduate Courses in Women’s Studies

WS 8 (REL 8) Prehistoric Religion, Art, and

Technology (4)

WS 41 (SOAN 41) Human Sexuality (4)

WS 42 (SOAN 42) Sexual Minorities(4)

WS 73 (ASIA 73/GC 73/ MLL 73) Film, Fiction, and

Gender in Modern China (4)

WS 110 (SSP 110/ GCP 110) Women’s Work in Global

Perspectives (4)

Women’s Studies 419

WS 117 (HIST 117/STS 117) Women, Science, and

Technology (4)

WS 121 (ART 121/ GCP 121) Women in Art (4)

WS 123 (ANTH 123) Cultural Construction of

Gender (4)

WS 124 (HIST 124) Women in America (4)

WS 128 (SSP 128) Race, Gender, and Work (4)

WS 129 (THTR 129) History of Fashion and Style (4)

WS 130 (ECO 130) Economics of Race and

Gender (2)

WS 138 (REL 138) Women in Jewish History (4)

WS 145 (AAS 145) African American Women

Writers (4)

WS 153 (HIST 153) Women in European History,

1500-Present (4)

WS 158 (REL 158) Sex and Gender in Judaism: The

Feminist Critique (4)

WS 179 (POLS 179) Politics of Women (4)

WS 184 (REL 184) Religion, Gender, and Power (4)

WS 226 (PHIL 226) Feminism and Philosophy (4)

WS 275 (SPAN 275) Introduction to Hispanic Women

Writers (4)

WS 303 (GERM 303 / MLL 303) Grimms’ Fairy Tales:

Folklore, Feminism, Film (4)

WS 310 (AAS 310/ SSP 310) Gender, Race, and

Sexuality: The Social

Construction of Differences (4)

WS 311 (ENGL 311) Literature of Women (4)

WS 318 (PSYC 318) Seminar in Gender and

Psychology (4)

WS 325 (HIST 325/ SSP 325) History of Sexuality and

the Family in the U.S. (3-4)

WS 326 (SPAN 326) Traditions and Resistance:

Women Writers of Latin

America (4)

WS 327 (FREN 327) Women Writing in French (4)

WS 341 (SSP 341) Women and Health (4)

WS 346 (SPAN 346) Contemporary Hispanic Women

Writers: The Novelists (4)

WS 351 (SSP 351) Gender and Social Change (4)

WS 364 (SSP 364) Sociology of the Family (4)

WS 365 (SSP 365) Inequalities at Work (4)

WS 387 (ENG 387) Gender and Sexuality in the

Horror Film (4)

Graduate Courses in Women’s Studies:

WS 403 (GERM 403) Grimms’ Fairy Tales: Folklore,

Feminism, Film (3)

WS 411 (ENGL 411) Literature of Women (3)

WS 430 Internship in Women’s

Studies (1-3)

WS 441 (SSP 441) Women and Health (3)

WS 450 Seminar in Feminist Theory (3)

WS 465 (SSP 465) Inequalities at Work (3)

WS 484 (PSYC 484) Psychology of Gender (3)

WS 491 Independent Study (3)

Other Topic Courses in Women’s Studies

WS 91, 191, 272, 291, 371, 381, 382, 391, 392: Special

Topics (1-4)

In addition, new courses may be offered annually. Students

should check with the director for an updated list.

Women’s Studies Course Descriptions

Description of Required Undergraduate Courses

WS 101. Introduction to Women’s Studies (4)

Placing women’s experience at the center of analysis, the

course introduces students to the key concepts, theoretical

frameworks, and interdisciplinary research in the field of

Women’s Studies. Examines how gender interacts with

race, age, class, etc., to shape human consciousness and

determine the social organization of human society. (HU)

WS 271. Independent Reading and Research (1-4)

Independent study of selected topics designated and exe-

cuted in close collaboration with a member of Women’s

Studies faculty. Students taking this course as a require-

ment for the minor must elect at least the three-credit

option. May be repeated for elective credit. Prerequisite:

consent of the Women’s Studies program director.

(SS/HU)

WS 330. Internship in Women’s Studies (1-4)

Supervised work in women’s organizations or settings,

combined with an analysis, in the form of a major paper,

of the experience using the critical perspectives gained in

Women’s Studies courses. Placements arranged to suit

individual interests and career goals; can include social

service agencies, women’s advocacy groups, political

organizations, etc. May be repeated for credit.

Prerequisites: WS 101 and consent of the Women’s

Studies program director. (SS)

WS 350. Seminar in Feminist Theory (4)

An upper-level seminar serving as a capstone experience

that challenges students to systematize insights gained

from introductory and elective courses through the more

deeply analytical lens of feminist theory. Prerequisite: WS

101 or consent of the Women’s Studies program director.

(SS)

WS 373. Internship in Women’s Center (1-3)

Supervised work in the Women’s Center allows students

to bring critical perspectives on women and gender into

the campus community. Students who wish to fulfill the

internship requirement of the Women’s Studies minor

must take the Women’s Center internship for 3 credits.

This course may be repeated for credit up to a maximum

of 6 credits. Prerequisites: WS 101 and consent of the

Women’s Center director. Jones (SS)

Description of Elective Undergraduate Courses

WS 8. (REL 8) Prehistoric Religion, Art, and

Technology (4)

Origins and early development of religions, with focus on

interactions of religion, art, and technology in the

Paleolithic and Neolithic periods. Special attention to the

emergence of patriarchal social forms and the figure of the

goddess. Interdisciplinary methods with a consideration

of feminist theories of cultural development. Girardot

(HU)

WS 41. (SOAN 41) Human Sexuality (4)

Sexuality and gender roles across the life cycle, including

human reproduction, decision-making, and the societal

regulation of sexual behavior. (ND)

WS 42. (SOAN 42) Sexual Minorities (4)

How minority sexual identities have been the subject of

speculation, misunderstanding, and sometimes violent

attempts at correction or elimination. Sexual orientation,

420 Lehigh University Course Catalog 2009-2010

gender role, including transvestism and “drag”, transsexu-

alism, sexism, heterosexism, and homophobia. Emphasis

on critical thinking, guest speakers, and discussions. (SS)

WS 73. (ASIA 73, GC 73, MLL 73) Film, Fiction,

and Gender in Modern China (4)

Study of the struggle for an individual “modern” identity

out of traditionally defined roles for men and women as

depicted by Chinese writers and filmmakers. Class, texts,

and films in English. Students interested in setting up a

corollary Chinese language component for credit as

CHIN 251 may discuss this possibility with the professor.

Cook (HU)

WS 110. (GC 110, SSP 110) Women’s Work in

Global Perspectives (4)

This course brings to the forefront the intersections of

race, class, gender, and nation with women’s employment

around the world. We will examine women’s paid and

unpaid work in the U.S., Europe, Asia, Latin America,

and Africa, in effort to understand the striking persistence

of gender inequality over time and across the world.

Topics of study include: work and family relations,

women’s domestic labor, factory work, and agribusiness.

In addition we will explore the ways in which women have

organized for changes in work and in their communities

in order to conceive of possibilities for the future of

women’s work. Krasas (SS)

WS 117. (HIST 117, STS 117) Women, Science,

and Technology (4)

Explores the impact of technology and science on

women’s social roles, and the contribution of women engi-

neers and scientists to their disciplines. Will focus on the

American experience. Among the topics discussed are

invention, design, laboratory research, education, engi-

neering professionalism, labor force participation, office

mechanization, household appliances, virtual spaces,

childcare and reproduction. Cooper (SS)

WS 121. (ART 121, GC 121) Women in Art (4)

A history of women artists from Renaissance to present

day, with an emphasis on artists of the 20th and 21st cen-

tury from a global perspective. We explore attitudes

toward women artists and their work as well as the chang-

ing role of women in art world. There may be required

visits to museums and/or artists’ studios. Gans (HU)

WS 123. (ANTH 123) Cultural Construction of

Gender (4)

Comparative study of the meanings and social roles asso-

ciated with gender. Psychological, symbolic, and cultural

approaches. Tannenbaum (SS)

WS 124. (HIST 124) Women in America (4)

Roles of women in American society from colonial to

present times; attitudes toward women, female sexuality,

women’s work, and feminism. Cooper, Najar (SS)

WS 128. (SSP 128) Race, Gender and Work (4)

Race, Gender and Work is a class designed to help stu-

dents understand racial and gender inequalities as they

relate specifically to work and employment. We explore

the origins and histories of inequalities, the ways in which

inequalities persist and/or change today, and what steps

might be taken toward creating a more equal society.

Krasas (SS)

WS 129. (THTR 129) History of Fashion and

Style (4)

Dress and culture in the Western Hemisphere from pre-

history to today. The evolution of silhouette, garment

forms and technology. The relationship of fashion to pol-

itics, art and behavior. Cultural and environmental

influences on human adornment. (HU)

WS 130. (ECO 130) Economics of Race and

Gender (2)

The question of the role of race and gender in economic

decision-making is explored. Various sorts of discrimina-

tion are discussed in an economic framework and possible

remedies are evaluated. The historical role of race and gen-

der in the economy is also discussed. Prerequisite: ECO 1.

(SS)

WS 138. (REL 138) Women in Jewish History (4)

Contributions of, and limitations on, women at different

stages of Jewish history, using both primary sources and

secondary material. Experience of modern Jewish women,

and the contemporary feminist critique of traditional gen-

der roles. Weissler (HU)

WS 145. (AAS 145) African American Women

Writers (4)

Literature by African American women writers with a

focus on the experiences and images of black women in

the U.S. Explores the written portraits and voices of 20th

century black female novelists and poets, including

Hurston, Petry, Morrison, Angelou, and Walker. Levy

(HU)

WS 153. (HIST 153) Women in European

History, 1500-present (4)

Examines the position of women in Europe since the

Renaissance. Particular attention to changing conceptions

of women and their roles in society, the evolution of

“women’s work”, the origins, growth and impact of femi-

nism, and gender distinction as reflected in law, politics,

popular culture, and leisure. (SS)

WS 158. (REL 158) Sex and Gender in Judaism:

The Feminist Critique (4)

Writings by Jewish feminists reflecting the encounter

between Judaism and feminism: prayer and ritual, women

rabbis, God and God language, communal power, and

marriage and divorce. Silberstein (HU)

WS 179. (POLS 179) Politics of Women (4)

Major social and political issues relating to the role of

women in American society. Study of other countries will

be included for comparative analysis. Olson (SS)

WS 184. (REL 184) Religion, Gender, and Power

(4)

Gender differences as one of the basic legitimations for

the unequal distribution of power in Western society.

Feminist critiques of the basic social structures, cultural

forms, and hierarchies of power within religious commu-

nities, and the ways in which religious groups have

responded. Silberstein (HU)

WS 226. (PHIL 226) Feminism and Philosophy

(4)

Analysis of the nature, sources and consequences of the

oppression and exploitation of women, and justification

of strategies for liberation. Topics include women’s nature

and human nature, sexism, femininity, sexuality, repro-

Women’s Studies 421

duction, mothering. Prerequisite: one previous course in

philosophy or women’s studies. Dillon (HU)

WS 275. (SPAN 275) Introduction to Hispanic

Women Writers (4)

The objective of this class is to introduce students to

Hispanic contemporary female authors from Latin

America, Spain, and the United States through the analy-

sis of all literary genres (novel, short story, poetry, essay,

and drama). This class provides students with a solid

introduction to both Hispanic women’s writing from the

last years of the 19th century to the present, as well as to

feminist literary theory. Portela (HU)

WS 303 (GERM 303, MLL 303) Grimms’ Fairy

Tales: Folklore, Feminism, Film (4)

This intercultural history of the Grimms’ fairy tales inves-

tigates how folktale types and gender stereotypes

developed and became models for children and adults.

The course covers the literary fairy tale in Germany as well

as Europe and America. Versions of “Little Red Riding

Hood”, “Cinderella”, or “Sleeping Beauty” exist not only

in the Grimms’ collection but in films and many forms of

world literature. Modern authors have rewritten fairy tales

in feminist ways, promoting social change. Taught in

English. German language students may receive a German

component. Stegmann (HU)

WS 310. (AAS 310, SSP 310) Gender, Race, and

Sexuality: The Social Construction of Differences

(4)

This course will provide the student with an opportunity

to engage current debates about the meaning and use of

racial and sexual classification systems in society. Using a

multidisciplinary approach, we will examine the historical

and sociological contexts in which specific theories of

racial and sexual differences emerged in the U.S.

Additionally, we will explore the ways in which changes in

the images have implications on the role racial, gender

and sexual identity plays in our understanding of the rela-

tionship between difference and inequality. Prerequisite:

SSP 103 or department permission. (SS)

WS 311. (ENGL 311) Literature of Women (4)

Women’s works about women: is literary creativity gen-

der- identified? Are there specifically “feminine” subjects

or themes? Besides re-reading some familiar fiction,

drama, and poems, introduction to contemporary and

often experimental works by less famous writers. (HU)

WS 318. (PSYC 318) Seminar in Gender and

Psychology (4)

Gender as shaped by psychological and social psychologi-

cal processes. Socialization, communication and power,

gender stereotypes, methodological issues in sex differ-

ences research. Prerequisite: PSYCH 210 completed or

concurrent or permission of instructor. (Advanced

Psychology Seminar) Hyland (SS)

WS 325. (HIST 325, SSP 325) History of

Sexuality and the Family in the U.S. (3-4)

Changing conceptions of sexuality and the role of women,

men, and children in the family and society from the colo-

nial to the post-World War II era. Emphasis on the

significance of socio-economic class and cultural back-

ground. Topics include family structure, birth control,

legal constraints, marriage, divorce, and prostitution.

Najar (SS)

WS 326. (SPAN 326) Tradition and Resistance:

Women Writers of Latin America (4)

Study of poetry and narrative works by Latin American

women writers. Authors include Rosario Ferr, Rosario

Castellanos, Elena Poniatowska, Cristina Peri Rossi,

among others. Prerequisite: Spanish 152 or equivalent.

(HU)

WS 327. (FREN 327) Women Writing in French (4)

Reading and discussion of works written by women in

French. The emphasis is on 19th and 20th Century writ-

ers, such as G. Sand, Colette, S. de Beauvoir, M. Duras,

Andree Chedid. Chabut (HU)

WS 341. (SSP 341) Women and Health (4)

Relationships of women to the medical system. Influence

of medicine on women’s lives and the impact of the

women’s movement on health care. Lasker (SS)

WS 346. (SPAN 346) Contemporary Hispanic

Women Writers: The Novelists (4)

This course explores the works of Hispanic women writ-

ers who have been oppositional to hegemonic cultural

politics during the twentieth century in Latin America

and Spain. Grounding the readings in their particular

contexts, the class discusses the issues these writers define

as important in their work, the impact of their creations

in both the literary cannon as well as in the politics of

their countries, the use of literature as a weapon to

empower minority positions, and the effect of their narra-

tives on the changing literary cannon. Special attention

will be paid to issues related to interpretations of history,

exile, different forms of violence and repression, expres-

sions of desire, and sexuality. Portela (HU)

WS 351. (SSP 351) Gender and Social Change (4)

Changes in gender roles from social psychological and

structural perspectives. Comparative analyses of men and

women (including people of color) in the social structure;

their attitudes and orientations toward work, family, edu-

cation, and politics. (SS)

WS 364. (SSP 364) Sociology of the Family (4)

Sociological analysis of families in the United States,

including investigations of historical and contemporary

patterns. Issues addressed include parenting, combining

work and family, divorce and remarriage, family policies.

(SS)

WS 365. (SSP 365) Inequalities at Work (4)

This course’s primary focus is on race, gender, and class as

axes of disadvantage and privilege in work and employ-

ment. We will explore both theories and empirical studies

of inequality as well as their social, political, and practical

ramifications for the workplace. The course will be con-

ducted seminar-style with most classes relying heavily on

student participation with guidance from the instructor.

Krasas (SS)

WS 387. (ENGL 387) Gender and Sexuality in the

Horror Film (4) (when offered)

Horror films are centrally concerned with issues of mas-

culinity, femininity, heterosexuality, homosexuality,

bisexuality, and less defined queerness. This course will

explore these topics with reference to subgenres like the

slasher film, the vampire film, the psychological horror

film, and the science fiction horror film. Films screened

include: Dracula, Aliens, The Silence of the Lambs, Cat

People, and Halloween. Doty (HU)

422 Lehigh University Course Catalog 2009-2010

Description of Graduate Courses

WS 403 (GERM 403) Grimms’ Fairy Tales:

Folklore, Feminism, Film (3)

This intercultural history of the Grimms’ fairy tales inves-

tigates how folktale types and gender stereotypes

developed and became models for children and adults.

The course covers the literary fairy tale in Germany as well

as Europe and America. Versions of “Little Red Riding

Hood”, “Cinderella”, or “Sleeping Beauty” exist not only

in the Grimms’ collection but in films and many forms of

world literature. Modern authors have rewritten fairy tales

in feminist ways, promoting social change. Taught in

English. German language students may receive a German

component. Stegmann (HU)

WS 411. (ENGL 411) Literature of Women (3)

Women’s works about women. Besides re-reading familiar

feminists’ fiction, drama, and poems, an introduction to

contemporary and often experimental works by less

famous writers. (HU)

WS 430. Internship in Women’s Studies (1-3)

Internship related to women’s studies. Supervised by

Women’s Studies faculty. Prerequisite: consent of the

Women’s Studies program director. (SS)

WS 441. (SSP 441) Women and Health (3)

Relationships of women to the medical system. Influence

of medicine on women’s lives and the impact of the

women’s movement on health care. (SS)

WS 450. Seminar in Feminist Theory (3)

A graduate seminar providing foundational study of mul-

tidisciplinary theoretical frameworks of women’s studies.

(SS)

WS 465. (SSP 465) Inequalities at Work (3)

Primary focus is on race, gender, and class as axes of dis-

advantage and privilege in work and employment. We will

explore both theories and empirical studies of inequality

as well as their social, political, and practical ramifications

for the workplace. Krasas (SS)

WS 484. (PSYC 484) Psychology of Gender (3)

Major theoretical approaches and empirical debates in the

psychology of gender, with a focus on the interplay of

nature and nurture in producing gender similarities, gen-

der differences and gender variation in personality, social

behaviors, cognitive abilities, achievement, sexuality, and

mental health. Methodological issues in gender research.

Prerequisite: graduate standing. Department permission

required. Hyland (SS)

WS 491. Independent Study (3)

Individually supervised course in area of Women’s Studies

not ordinarily covered in regularly listed courses.

Prerequisite: consent of the Women’s Studies program

director. (SS)

Description of Other Topic Courses

WS 91, 191, 272, 291, 371, 381, 382, 391, 392.

Special Topics (1-4)

Intensive study of a topic of special interest not covered in

other courses. May be cross-listed with relevant offerings

in major department or other programs. May be repeated

for credit as topic varies. Prerequisite: consent of the

Women’s Studies program office. (ND)

An Overview from Past and Present 423

VI. An Overview from Past and Present

Lehigh University is independent, nondenominational,

and coeducational.

Founded in 1865 as a predominantly technical four-year

school, the university now has approximately 4,650

undergraduates within its three major units - the College

of Arts and Sciences, the College of Business and

Economics, and the College of Engineering and Applied

Science - and approximately 2,000 students enrolled in

graduate programs offered through the graduate schools

in these colleges and in the College of Education. There

are undergraduates from nearly every state and U.S. ter-

ritory and more than 40 foreign nations.

The university is primarily situated on the Asa Packer

Campus on the north slope of South Mountain over-

looking Bethlehem, Pennsylvania. Sayre Park, the

wooded refuge located toward the top of the mountain,

is the setting for many living groups. The residences are

reached via winding private roads. Many residential units

on campus command a panoramic view of the Lehigh

Valley. The Appalachians are visible to the west, with an

especially good view from The Lookout on the Packer

Campus. Both the tower and dining room in Iacocca

Hall on the Mountaintop Campus afford panoramic

views of the Lehigh Valley. The campus at its highest

point is 971 feet above sea level.

A substantial portion of the upper level of Lehigh’s cam-

pus is maintained as a nature preserve. The preserve

supports deer, squirrels, chipmunks, raccoons, wild

turkeys and other birds.

Besides the Asa Packer Campus, the university has exten-

sive athletic fields and facilities on the Murray H.

Goodman Campus, two miles to the south in Saucon

Valley. The university acquired the Mountaintop

Campus at the end of 1986. It links the Asa Packer and

Murray H. Goodman campuses and brings total land

holdings in Bethlehem to 1,600 acres, nearly double the

former total.

The board of trustees and university officers have estab-

lished and enforce policies designed to preserve Lehigh’s

natural beauty. It is their contention that the environ-

ment in which the young adult university student

pursues knowledge can make the total educational expe-

rience more meaningful, and that the ideal environment

is separate and unique from the distractions of the

nonacademic community.

There are approximately 400 members of the faculty,

teaching a total of more than 2,000 course titles (not all

of which are offered every semester). Among faculty

members who are tenured and to whom the university

has a permanent commitment, nearly all hold the doc-

torate degree (typically Ph.D. or Sc.D.).

In total, there are more than 2,000 employees of the uni-

versity, making it the second-largest employer in the

community.

History and Purpose

The principal author of the brief history of Lehigh

University that follows, Dr. W. Ross Yates, holds the bachelor

of arts and master of arts degrees from the University of

Oregon, in his native state. He received the doctor of philos-

ophy degree from Yale University and studied in France on a

Fulbright Scholarship. He joined the Lehigh staff in 1955

and served as dean of the College of Arts and Science from

1963 to 1972. Today he is professor emeritus of government,

and lives in Oregon.

When the sound of the last cannon of the Civil War

died away, statesmen, educators, and industrial pioneers

marshalled the victorious forces of the North and turned

their attention to education. They wanted to increase the

number of trained scientists, engineers, and other skilled

people so they could transform the vast natural resources

of the country into a strong and independent national

economy.

Asa Packer was one of the industrial pioneers. He built

the Lehigh Valley Railroad and controlled a coal-mining

empire in the mountains of eastern Pennsylvania. He

knew, as did many others, that a strong national econo-

my depended on more than technical skills. It needed

above all people broadly educated in the liberal arts and

sciences-people who could combine practical skills with

informed judgments and strong moral self-discipline. He

kept this in mind when founding and endowing Lehigh

University.

The site that Packer chose for his university was a rail-

road junction across the Lehigh River from Bethlehem, a

community founded in 1741 by Moravian missionaries.

William Bacon Stevens, Episcopal bishop of the Diocese

of Pennsylvania and the first president of the university’s

board of trustees, in 1869 described the origin of the

university as follows:

“In the fall of 1864 an interview was requested of me by

the Hon. Asa Packer, of Mauch Chunk (now Jim

Thorpe), Pa. He came to my house in Philadelphia, and

said that he had long contemplated doing something for

the benefit of his State, and especially of the Lehigh

Valley. From that valley he said he had derived much of

the wealth which GOD had given to him, and to the

best interests of that valley he wished to devote a portion

of it in the founding of some educational institution, for

the intellectual and moral improvement of the young

men of that region.

“After conversing with him a little while, and drawing

out his large and liberal views, I asked him how much

money he purposed to set aside for this institution, when

he quietly answered that he deigned to give $500,000.

At the time of this interview no one in this country, it is

believed, had offered in a single sum such an endowment

for a literary institution. It was the noblest offering

which an American had ever laid on the altar of learning,

and more than equaled many royal donations which

have carried down the names of kings as patrons of

European universities.

“Filled with profound emotions at the mention of such a

gift for such an object, I asked the noble donor what

specific plans he had dreamed in his own mind in refer-

ence to it. His reply was, “I am not much acquainted

with these matters, but you are, and I want you if you

will to devise a plan which I can put into effective opera-

tion.’ I told him that I would make the attempt. I did

so. I drew up the outline sketch of such an institution as

I thought would give the largest results for the means

used, and submitted it in a few weeks to his inspection.

“He examined it with the practical judgment and business

habits with which he deals with all great questions, and

adopted the scheme as the basis of his future university.

“The first meeting of the Board of Trustees, selected by

Judge Packer, met at the “Sun Hotel,” in Bethlehem, July

27th, 1865, and began to organize the work before them.”

The trustees followed several principles in setting up the

university. One was that of combining scientific and

classical education. They considered both to be practical.

The principle carried forward an ideal of the great 17th-

Century Moravian educator, John Amos Comenius. A

motto taken from the works of Francis Bacon was used

to summarize this principle, namely, Homo minister et

interpres naturae-man, the servant and interpreter of

nature, to use a free translation. That motto lives on at

Lehigh, being an element in the university seal.

The trustees chose as first president a man whose educa-

tion and habits expressed this principle, Henry Coppee.

They established five schools, including a school of gen-

eral literature in addition to four scientific schools of,

respectively, civil engineering, mechanical engineering,

mining and metallurgy, and analytical chemistry.

Another principle upon which the trustees insisted was

that of keeping the size of the student body proportion-

ate to the abilities of the faculty to teach them well. The

university would admit only as many freshmen each year

as it could be assured of providing with the highest qual-

ity of education. In the 19th century the total

enrollment never exceeded several hundred students; the

size has increased significantly in recent decades, along

with the number of faculty members.

The trustees also insisted that Lehigh was to be nonde-

nominational and would have an admission policy based

on merit. Competitive examinations were held for appli-

cants for admission. From 1871 to 1891 no tuition was

charged, but the national financial crisis at the turn of

the century decimated the value of the Lehigh Valley

Railroad stock that Packer had given to Lehigh, which

was the principal source of income.

At first the student body was entirely male. The contem-

porary ideological climate would permit nothing else.

But around 1916, women were admitted to graduate

programs. In 1971, the university opened its undergrad-

uate program to them as well. Today men and women

applicants are considered on an equal basis.

From the first, the students were serious-minded. In

1924, Catherine Drinker Bowen, daughter of president

Drinker and later a famous biographer, published a brief

History of Lehigh University, in which she commented:

“Ask any college professor which brand of boy he would

prefer to teach, the cigarette brand or the flannel shirt

variety. Right here we offer ten to one the flannel

shirts...Lehigh still holds to the emblem of the flannel

shirt-long may it wave! Engineers come to college to

work. A writer in the Syracuse Post in 1895 spoke truth-

fully when he said, ‘From the first, Lehigh’s characteristic

has been her earnestness. It is the boast of her graduates,

the inspiration of her students. Men go there to learn to

take a useful part in the economy of life.’ “

The university community was constantly infused with

new faculty and students determined to renew and

rework the original principles in the light of changing

times. The students’ ambition and zeal bore fruit; as

alumni they carried the university’s educational goals

into the work of nation-building. And, having received,

they gave to perpetuate Lehigh’s work of service.

Today, Lehigh University still adheres to Asa Packer’s

goal of a liberal and scientific education for practical

service. Faculty and students work to maintain high

quality in instructional programs. Generous support

from individuals, foundations, industry, and government

help Lehigh to retain high quality of education and fac-

ulty while keeping tuition as low as possible. (Tuition

covers only a part of the cost of a Lehigh education.)

Presidents of the University

The presidents of Lehigh University are described and

their achievements cited in the following paragraphs. The

years in parentheses are those served in the presidency.

Henry Coppee (1866-1875). Coppee served as a railroad

engineer in Georgia, a captain in the Army during the

Mexican War, and taught at West Point and at the

University of Pennsylvania before becoming first presi-

dent in 1866.

Much building was done on the new university campus.

A Moravian church on Packer Avenue was remodeled

into Christmas Hall; a house for the president was erect-

ed on campus; and Packer Hall, the university center,

was built.

Coppee lectured in history, logic, rhetoric, political econ-

omy, and Shakespeare.

John McDowell Leavitt (1875-1880). Leavitt was an

Episcopal clergyman who graduated from Jefferson

College and taught at Kenyon College and Ohio

University. During his incumbency, the university was

divided into two schools, General Literature and

Technology. As of 1876, a student could receive two

engineering degrees by taking a longer course, and

beginning in 1877 the master of arts, doctor of philoso-

phy, and doctor of science degrees were established.

Linderman Library rotunda was completed in 1877. Asa

Packer died in May, 1879, and Founder’s Day was held

in his honor the following October.

Robert Alexander Lamberton (1880-1893). Lamberton,

a graduate of Dickinson College, practiced law in

Harrisburg, Pa., and was a university trustee when asked

to become president. During his administration, stu-

dents and the community witnessed the first Mustard

and Cheese dramatic presentation.

A gymnasium (now Coppee Hall) was erected, and

Chandler Chemistry Laboratory was built, now known

as Chandler-Ullmann Hall. Lehigh was also building its

reputation for academic excellence; the mechanical engi-

neering department was established in 1881 and the

Lehigh chapter of Phi Beta Kappa was founded in 1887.

Thomas Messinger Drown (1895-1904). Drown studied

medicine at the University of Pennsylvania and went

abroad to study chemistry. Thereafter he was professor of

chemistry at Lafayette College. In 1895 he assumed the

presidency of Lehigh and was greatly interested in fur-

thering the university’s development as a technical school.

424 Lehigh University Course Catalog 2009-2010

His first years were difficult ones because the Panic of

1893 decimated the university’s stock holdings in the

Lehigh Valley Railroad. Nevertheless, Lehigh managed to

grow in enrollment, academics, and in physical plant.

Williams Hall was completed. The curriculum leading to

a degree in arts and engineering was established, as was

the department of zoology and biology. New curricula

were adopted in metallurgical engineering, geology, and

physics.

Drown died in office in 1904. Professor William H.

Chandler became acting president.

Henry Sturgis Drinker (1905-1920). Drinker, an 1871

Lehigh graduate, was the only university alumnus ever to

become president. In 1907, the alumni endowment fund

began, the Lehigh Alumni Bulletin was first published in

1913, and the Alumni Association was incorporated in

1917.

Drinker, besides being a lawyer, was a mechanical engi-

neer and had been largely instrumental in solving the

problems of constructing the two-mile-long

Musconetcong Tunnel, an engineering feat that made

possible a railroad line between Easton, Pa., and New

York City. He started a tradition of businesslike manage-

ment of university affairs.

During Drinker’s years, more buildings were completed:

the original section of Fritz Engineering Laboratory,

Drown Hall, Coxe Mining Laboratory, Taylor Hall,

Taylor Gymnasium and Field House, Taylor Stadium

and Lamberton Hall. Drinker’s interest in horticulture

led to the planting of many rare trees and plants.

A teacher’s course and business administration course

were begun in 1909 and in 1918 the university was

divided into three colleges, liberal arts, business adminis-

tration, and engineering-the roots of colleges of today.

Army ROTC was established in 1919.

Drinker’s daughter, Catherine Drinker Bowen, went on

to become a historical writer of note. Her experiences as

the daughter of a Lehigh president and occupant of the

President’s House are recorded in Family Portrait

(Atlantic Little-Brown).

Drinker resigned in 1920 and Natt M. Emery, vice presi-

dent, served as chief executive officer until 1922.

Charles Russ Richards (1922-1935). Richards took

office in 1922. During his presidency, the first graduate

degrees were awarded to women. Lehigh faced a shortage

of students from 1929 to 1936 as a result of the

Depression, but the newly established office of admis-

sion, as well as university scholarships, fellowships, and

deferred tuition payments, helped to ease the shortage.

Changing concepts of education were evident in several

newly organized academic offerings: philosophy, music,

psychology, journalism, history, and fine arts. The majors

system was instituted as were the senior comprehensive

examinations in the Arts College. The placement bureau,

a public relations office, and a student health service

were organized.

The Alumni Memorial Building-a memorial to the

Lehigh alumni who served in World War I was opened

in 1925-and Packard Laboratory was completed in 1929.

In the same decade, a major addition to Linderman

Library also was completed.

Clement C. Williams (1935-1944). Williams, a civil

engineer, was president during an era of unprecedented

alumni support. Undergraduate enrollment rose to an

all-time high, passing 2,000 in 1938. Richards and

Drinker residential houses, and the Ullmann wing

adjoining the Chandler Chemistry Laboratory, were

built. Grace Hall, the first arena-type facility of any size

on campus, was completed in 1940, the gift of Eugene

G. Grace, an 1899 graduate, who headed the board of

trustees. A Graduate School implemented the programs

in the three colleges. Williams retired in 1944, and the

university was without a president for approximately two

years.

Martin Dewey Whitaker (1946-1960). Dr. Whitaker,

who had been director of the Atomic Energy

Commission Laboratory at Oak Ridge, Tenn., and had

worked in developing the atomic bomb, faced the

responsibility of helping the university community read-

just to peacetime conditions after World War II.

During his time as president, Lehigh’s assets nearly

tripled; the endowment more than doubled to $18 mil-

lion. Many buildings were renovated, and the Dravo

House and McClintic-Marshall House residence halls

were built. The faculty increased in number by 75 per-

cent and the first endowed distinguished professorships

were established.

The Centennial development program was begun in

1959. It raised more than $22 million for faculty salaries

and construction that later included Whitaker

Laboratory.

An extensive renovation and enlargement project associ-

ated with Packer Hall was undertaken in 1957, and,

upon completion in 1958, the building became a univer-

sity center.

Whitaker died in office.

Harvey A. Neville (1961-1964). Dr. Neville was the

only faculty member ever elected president. His associa-

tion with the university began in 1927 as an assistant

professor of chemistry. During his three-year term as

president, the first phase of the Saucon Valley athletic

complex was completed, and Sayre Field was opened

atop South Mountain. The Center for Information and

Computing Science was established.

Neville, a strong supporter of research who fostered its

growth on the campus, died in 1983.

Deming Lewis (1964-1982). Willard Deming Lewis

became Lehigh’s 10th president after a distinguished

career as a space engineer and research administrator.

Dr. Lewis earned three degrees at Harvard and two from

England’s Oxford University, where he was a Rhodes

Scholar in advanced mathematics. In 1941, he joined

Bell Telephone Laboratories, and in 1962 he became

general manager of systems development with Bellcomm

Inc., which engineered systems for the Apollo project

that placed the first man on the moon.

Lewis, who died in 1989, received 33 U.S. patents on

such devices as microwave antennas and filter and digital

error detection systems. He helped write the equations

describing a stylus sliding through a warped groove.

During Lewis’ tenure as Lehigh president, women were

admitted as undergraduate students in 1971. New majors

were begun in natural science, biology, social relations,

geological sciences, environmental science and resource

management, religion studies, computer engineering,

computing and information science, applied mathematics,

management science, American studies and other fields.

Six research centers and seven institutes were established.

An Overview from Past and Present 425

Capital campaigns brought in more than $130 million,

and construction was completed on Maginnes Hall,

Whitaker Lab, Mart Science and Engineering Library,

Sinclair Lab, the Seeley G. Mudd Building, Neville Hall,

Rathbone Hall dining room, 13 fraternity houses, the

Centennial I and Centennial II residential complexes,

the Brodhead House residence hall, the Trembley Park

student apartments, the Saucon Village Apartments, the

Philip Rauch Field House and the Stabler Athletic and

Convocation Center. The restoration of Packer

Memorial Church was completed, and Packard Lab was

renovated.

The original Physics Laboratory is now named in Lewis’s

honor, as is the indoor tennis center.

Peter Likins (1982-1997). Dr. Likins, who earned a B.S.

and Ph.D. from Stanford, and an M.S. from the

Massachusetts Institute of Technology, became Lehigh’s

11th president in 1982. He sought balanced excellence

in undergraduate programs while pursuing focused

objectives in graduate study and research.

Under Likins, Lehigh doubled in size with the purchase

in 1986 of 742 acres of land and a research complex

from Bethlehem Steel Corp. The new Mountaintop

Campus links the Asa Packer and Goodman campuses.

Lehigh also added many new buildings and facilities.

Perhaps most notable was the $33-million Zoellner Arts

Center, which provided a new home to Lehigh’s depart-

ments of music and theatre and to the University Art

Galleries, and made Lehigh a center for the fine arts.

The Arts Center and the new Rauch Business Center,

home of the College of Business and Economics, were

built on the site of Taylor Stadium, which was replaced

by Goodman Stadium on Lehigh’s athletic campus.

Also during Likins’ term, Lehigh built a $20-million,

state-of-the-art telecommunications system, the E.W.

Fairchild-Martindale Library and Computing Center -

one of the most automated libraries anywhere - and the

Harold S. Mohler Lab, which honors the former chair-

man of the board of trustees.

Also dedicated was the Sherman Fairchild Center for the

Physical Sciences, which includes the renovated Physics

Building (renamed Lewis Lab), and the adjoining

Sherman Fairchild Lab.

Lehigh became home to the North East Tier Ben

Franklin Advanced Technology Center, which has helped

hundreds of new high-technology businesses get started.

And the university led the way in establishing the

Colonial League, now the Patriot League, in football.

The league is committed to the Lehigh tradition of

“scholar-athletes.”

Financial support grew from $10 million a year to over

$24 million. With over half of alumni making gifts,

Lehigh ranked among the top Ph.D.-granting schools in

percentage of alumni donors.

Likins’ term also saw the establishment of the Lehigh

Valley Center for Jewish Studies at Lehigh, the Center

for Advanced Technology for Large Structural Systems,

largest of its kind in North America, and centers in inte-

grated circuits, management studies, chemical process

modeling and control, and international studies.

Likins, an expert in spacecraft dynamics and control who

has written textbooks in engineering mechanics, was one

of 13 science advisers to President George Bush. He

came to Lehigh after serving as dean of engineering and

provost at Columbia, and left to become president of the

University of Arizona.

William C. Hittinger (1997-98). A former chairman of

the university’s board of trustees, Hittinger became inter-

im president after the departure of Peter Likins. A

member of the National Academy of Engineering,

Hittinger served for 22 years on the board of trustees.

He graduated from Lehigh in 1944 with a B.S. in metal-

lurgical engineering, and received an honorary Doctor of

Engineering degree from Lehigh in 1973.

Over a 40-year career in the electronics industry,

Hittinger worked for Western Electric Co., National

Union Radio Corp., Bell Telephone Laboratories,

Bellcomm Inc., General Instrument Corp., and RCA

Corp. At Bellcomm, he oversaw systems engineering for

NASA’s manned spaceflight program, and at RCA, where

he became executive vice president, he was responsible

for corporate technology, patents, licensing, international

business and marketing development, and corporate

technology planning.

Hittinger was a member of President Reagan’s National

Security Telecommunications Advisory Committee from

1982-86. He was also a member of the U.S.-Brazil

Presidential Committee on Science and Technology and

a member of the board of directors for eight companies.

Hittinger served as national president of the Lehigh

Alumni Association 1971-72 and received the prestigious

L-in-Life award in 1979. An ROTC student at Lehigh,

Hittinger served in the U.S. Army in 1943-46 during

World War II, rising to the rank of captain.

During Hittinger’s term as chairman of the board of

trustees, Lehigh began construction of the Zoellner Arts

Center, completed the Ulrich Student Center, aggressive-

ly improved its financial aid for undergraduates, and

completed the $300 million Campaign for Preserving

The Vision. As president, Hittinger realigned the Iacocca

Institute into the College of Business and Economics,

oversaw the construction of the new Sayre Park Village

residential complex, and helped Lehigh move forward

during a time of presidential transition.

Gregory C. Farrington (1998-2006). Dr. Farrington was

appointed Lehigh’s 12th president in May 1998 and

served the university for eight years before stepping

down in June 2006. Proclaiming on many occasions that

“the only thing good enough for Lehigh is the best,”

Farrington promoted academic excellence, improved

facilities, and fostered collaborative relationships between

Lehigh and the surrounding community.

Farrington earned his B.S. from Clarkson University and

his A.M. and Ph.D. from Harvard, all in chemistry and

specializing in solid state electrochemistry. Before joining

the University of Pennsylvania’s Department of materials

Science and Engineering in 1979, he was a research

chemist for General Electric Company’s Corporate

Research and Development Center in New York State.

At Penn, he served as dean of the School of Engineering

and Applied Science. He holds or shares more than two

dozen patents and has written or edited books and book

chapters, as well as 100 technical papers.

While at Lehigh, Farrington established the university’s

bold and creative Lehigh 2020 initiative. Launched in

October 2000, the $75 million academic venture capital

fund focused investment on attracting and retaining the

best faculty and students, creating distinctive academic

programs, funding critical research fields and stimulating

426 Lehigh University Course Catalog 2009-2010

cross curricular collaboration. New programs created

through the 2020 program include those in bioscience,

bioengineering, applied life science, computer science

and engineering, information systems and engineering,

and bioeconomics.

Along with the reinvigoration of academics and the pro-

motion of interdisciplinary learning, Farrington also

literally changed the face of Lehigh’s historic campus.

More than 20 major campus enhancement projects were

completed during Farrington’s term, among them the

construction of Campus Square, a new Alumni Building

Arrival Court and parking garage, and a pedestrian walk-

way through the heart of the campus green,

transforming it into a central gathering place. In addi-

tion, Coppee Hall, Lamberton Hall, Maginnes Hall,

Wilbur Power House, Grace Hall, the A. Haigh Cundey

Varsity House and Linderman Library were renovated.

Under Farrington’s leadership, Shine Forever: The

Campaign for Lehigh generated more than half of its $500

million goal to endow faculty chairs, scholarships, academic

programs, and facilities.

He also advocated collaborations with the city of

Bethlehem, the state and federal governments, industry

and other partners to strengthen the university and spur

regional economic development. His commitment to the

Lehigh Valley was evident in his participation on various

boards as well. He actively participated on the board of

trustees of St. Luke’s Hospital & Health Network, the

National Museum of Industrial History and Lehigh

Valley Partnership.

Alice P. Gast (2006-). On August 1, 2006, Alice P. Gast

became Lehigh University’s 13th president. Previously she

was the Robert T. Haslam Professor of Chemical

Engineering and the Vice President for Research and

Associate Provost at Massachusetts Institute of Technology.

Prior to moving to MIT in 2001, she spent 16 years as a

professor of chemical engineering at Stanford University

and at the Stanford Synchrotron Radiation Laboratory.

In her research she studies surface and interfacial phe-

nomena, in particular the behavior of complex fluids.

Some of her areas of research include colloidal aggrega-

tion and ordering, protein lipid interactions and enzymes

reactions at surfaces. In 1997 Gast co-authored the sixth

edition of “Physical Chemistry of Surfaces.” with Arthur

Adamson.

Professor Gast received her BS in Chemical Engineering

from the University of Southern California. After earn-

ing her Ph.D. in chemical engineering from Princeton

University, Gast spent a postdoctoral year on a NATO

fellowship at the Ecole Superieure de Physique et de

Chimie Industrielles in Paris.

She returned there for a sabbatical as a Guggenheim

Fellow. She was a 1999 Alexander von Humboldt Fellow

at the Technical University in Garching, Germany. She

received the National Academy of Sciences Award for

Initiative in Research, and the Colburn Award of the

American Institute of Chemical Engineers. She was elect-

ed to the National Academy of Engineering in 2001 and

to the American Academy of Arts and Sciences in 2002.

She has served on numerous advisory committees includ-

ing the NRC Board on Chemical Science and

Technology, and the Homeland Security Science and

Technology Advisory Committee. She was elected to the

Board of the American Association for the Advancement

of Science in 2006.

University Campuses

Lehigh University’s three campuses are located in

Bethlehem, Pa., and comprise 1,600 acres.

Asa Packer Campus. Lehigh’s main academic campus,

encompassing approximately 360 acres on the north

slope of South Mountain overlooking Bethlehem, is a

wooded area where most students attend class and live.

This contains the original campus of the university.

Murray H. Goodman Campus. During the 1960s, the

university acquired extensive acreage in the Saucon

Valley just south of South Mountain. Development of

one of the nation’s finest collegiate athletic complexes

has continued since that time. The 500-acre campus

now includes the Murray H. Goodman Stadium and

other athletic fields, as well as the 6,000-seat Stabler

Athletic and Convocation Center, the Ben Franklin

Technology Partners of Northeastern Pennsylvania, the

Philip Rauch Field House, the Cundey Varsity House,

the Lewis Indoor Tennis Facility, and the Ulrich Sports

Complex. The campus is named for a major benefactor,

Lehigh alumnus Murray H. Goodman, of West Palm

Beach, Fla.

Mountaintop Campus. Lehigh bought this campus from

Bethlehem Steel Corp. in 1986. It contains 670 acres of

woods and a 72-acre research site with 8 buildings, five

of which are owned by the University, including a land-

mark tower building visible for miles around.

Acquisition of the facilities-the largest single transaction

in Lehigh history-connects the two older campuses. The

Mountaintop Campus houses the College of Education;

the departments of Biological Sciences and Chemical

Engineering; programs in biochemistry, biotechnology,

bioengineering, ATLSS (Advanced Technology for Large

Structural Systems) center, Energy Research Center, and

Ben Franklin TechVentures incubator companies.

University Buildings

Lehigh has a major collection of 19th-century buildings

Hutton (1834-1916), Edward T. Potter (1831-1904) and

the firm of Furness and Evans (Frank Furness, 1839-

1912).

Rauch Business Center is the new Zoellner Arts Center,

which houses a 1000-seat music auditorium, a 300-seat

theatre, a permanent art gallery and museum store, and

the departments of music and theatre. A 350-car parking

garage is on the same site.

Opened in 2002, and designed by the AIA award-win-

ning architectural firm of Bohlin Cywinski Jackson, is

The Campus Square residential and retail complex with

upper-class student apartments, bookstore and various

eateries.

The university’s newer structures include the Ulrich

Sports Complex (2002) and additions to the Cundey

Varsity House (2002), Iacocca Hall for biological sci-

ences (2003), Stabler Arena (2004), and Sinclair Lab for

optical technologies (2005).

Recently completed are campus enhancements that elim-

inated vehicular traffic and created landscaped walkways

in the historic core of The Asa Packer Campus. Recently

opened is a 350-car parking garage pavilion and visitors

arrival court at the west entrance to The Alumni

Memorial Building.

An Overview from Past and Present 427

Altogether, the three campuses contain more than 150

buildings with more than 4 million square feet of floor

space.

In the following list, the first date after the name of each

building indicates the year of construction. The second

date indicates the year of a major addition.

Campus Landmarks

Alumni Memorial Building (1925). This edifice of

Gothic design, housing the Visitor Center, Admissions

and other administrative offices and those of the Alumni

Association, represents a memorial to the 1,921 Lehigh

alumni who served in World War I and the 46 who died.

The building was designed by Theodore G. Visscher,

Class of 1899, and James Lindsey Burley, Class of 1894.

E. W. Fairchild-Martindale Library and Computing

Center (1985). The high-technology building houses sci-

ence and engineering holdings, The Media Center,

library and technology services staff, and a computer

center. Construction was made possible by a major gift

from Harry T. Martindale, a 1927 Lehigh graduate, and

his wife, Elizabeth, daughter of the late Edmund W.

Fairchild, founder of a business-publications and com-

munications empire.

Linderman Library (1877). The rotunda, designed by

Addison Hutton, was built as a gift to the university by

founder Asa Packer as a memorial to his daughter, Lucy

Packer Linderman. The rotunda is surrounded except on

the south by a major addition constructed in 1929. The

building houses more than 20,000 rare books and vol-

umes related to the humanities and social science. The

Bayer Galleria of Rare Books, made possible by a gift

from Curtis F. Bayer, ‘35, was dedicated in 1985. The

building reopened in the spring of 2007 as the intellec-

tual and humanities hub of the university after being

closed for renovations for nearly two years. Major new

features include more seminar and group study rooms,

wireless Internet access throughout, central air condi-

tioning, new furniture and finishes, and a café.

Packer Memorial Church (1887). The church was the

gift of Mary Packer Cummings in memory of her father,

founder Asa Packer. It was dedicated on Founder’s Day,

October 13, 1887. The building was designed by

Addison Hutton; the stained-glass window over the main

door is attributed to Louis Comfort Tiffany.

President’s House (1868). This 21-room residence,

presidents and is often used for receptions on special

university occasions.

Packer Hall, The University Center (1868). When con-

struction of the building began in 1865, a railroad was

built to transport stone to the site. The building,

designed originally by Potter, was extensively renovated

and enlarged in 1958.

The building was constructed at the expense of the

founder, who vetoed a plan to erect it of brick. “It will

be built of stone,” Asa Packer responded.

Today the building houses student and faculty dining

facilities, a food court, deans’ offices, the military science

(ROTC) department, the Women’s Networking Center,

The Center for Academic Success, a bank office, and

conference facilities.

Academic and Research Facilities

Chandler-Ullmann Hall (1883, 1938, respectively).

These adjoining buildings formerly were the William H.

Chandler Chemistry Building (designed by Hutton) and

the Harry M. Ullmann Chemistry Laboratory. Chandler

served as acting university president, 1904 and 1905,

and taught chemistry from 1871 to 1906. Ullmann

served as chairman of the chemistry department. The

building has been named a National Historic Chemical

Landmark by the American Chemical Society.

The Department of Art and Architecture and

Department of Psychology are located in Chandler-

Ullmann.

Christmas-Saucon Hall (1865 and 1872, respectively).

Christmas Hall is the university’s oldest building. When

Asa Packer acquired the South Mountain site for the

university in 1865, a Moravian church was being con-

structed. The newly formed university took over the

building and completed it for use in recitations and as a

dormitory and chapel. The name Christmas Hall was

chosen in keeping with Moravian religious tradition. In

1872, Saucon Hall was constructed a few feet to the east

of Christmas Hall. The buildings were connected with

the construction of a “hyphen” in 1926. The building

houses the Department of Mathematics, The University

Press, and classrooms.

Coppee Hall (1883). The building originally housed

classrooms and a gymnasium. It is named in honor of

Henry Coppee, first president. The building was reno-

vated in 2002 and houses the Weinstock Center for

Journalism and Communication.

Coxe Hall (1910). Originally a mining laboratory, the

structure is named for Eckley B. Coxe, pioneer mining

engineer and trustee of the university. The building was

recently renovated for the International Students and

Scholars and the English as a Second Language programs

and the Global Union. It also houses the office of the

Vice President for International Affairs.

Drown Hall (1908). The building, designed by Furness

and Evans, is a memorial to Thomas M. Drown, presi-

dent from 1895 to 1904. It is headquarters for the

English Department and the Writing and Math Center.

Fritz Engineering Laboratory (1909, 1955). The labora-

tory is named for John Fritz, pioneer in the steel

industry in the United States and a member of the uni-

versity’s original board of trustees. Fritz provided funds

for the original section; a seven-story addition accommo-

dates the university’s testing machine, which is capable of

applying a five-million-pound load to tension or com-

pression members up to forty feet in length. The

hydraulic testing machine is the largest facility of its kind

currently in operation in the world. The laboratory is

used primarily by the Department of Civil and

Environmental Engineering, but it is also the home of

the Energy Systems Engineering Institute.

Iacocca Hall (1958, 2003). Known as the tower building

for its panoramic views of the Lehigh Valley, it houses

the College of Education, the chemical engineering

department, the biological sciences department, as well

as a dining room and food service facilities, plus a tele-

conferencing classroom.

Imbt Laboratories. This is primarily a high-bay research

lab space where the ATLSS project was constructed, and

where chemical engineering and Energy Research Center

have major research facilities. It is also the headquarters

428 Lehigh University Course Catalog 2009-2010

of the “Fleet of the Future” program.

Johnson Hall (1955). The building houses the university

health service, the counseling service, campus police, and

the parking services office. Earle F. “Coxey” Johnson,

‘07, a director of General Motors Corp. and university

trustee, provided funding for the structure.

Lamberton Hall (1907). The structure served as the uni-

versity commons and dining room until the renovation

of Packer Hall in 1958. The building honors the memo-

ry of Robert A. Lamberton, third president. It most

recently housed the music department until its move to

the Zoellner Arts Center. In January of 2006 it reopened

as a late-night diner called the “Hawk’s Nest” and stu-

dent programming facility.

Maginnes Hall (1970). The multilevel structure is head-

quarters for the College of Arts and Sciences and also

houses the departments of modern languages and litera-

ture, history, international relations, political science, and

religion studies, as well as the Science, Technology, and

Society Program, the Philip and Muriel Berman Center

for Jewish Studies, and the Center for International

Studies. New classrooms opened on the ground floor in

January 2004. The building is named for Albert B.

Maginnes, ‘21, who was a lawyer and university trustee.

Mart Science and Engineering Library (1968). This struc-

ture honors the memory of Leon T. Mart, ‘13, and his son,

Thomas, ‘51. It operates in conjunction with the E. W.

Fairchild-Martindale Library and Computing Center.

Seeley G. Mudd Building (1975). This seven-story

building houses the chemistry department. The late

Seeley G. Mudd was a California medical doctor. The

Seeley G. Mudd Foundation, of Los Angeles, made a

major gift toward the building.

Neville Hall (1975). This building in the chemistry

complex has three auditoriums used for lectures and

events. The building is named for Dr. Harvey A. Neville,

president from 1961 to 1964, who was a chemist.

Dialogue Center. This Victorian structure, until recently

used by the Newman Association, was converted to a

center for dialogue on values and spirituality, and also

houses the university chaplain’s office.

Packard Laboratory (1929). The structure was the gift of

James Ward Packard, Class of 1884, the electrical pio-

neer and inventor of the Packard automobile who served

as a university trustee. The first Packard automobile

(1898) is displayed in the lobby. The building is the

headquarters for the College of Engineering and Applied

Science. It also houses classrooms and laboratories for

mechanical engineering and mechanics, for electrical and

computer engineering, and computer science and engi-

neering. An auditorium accommodates large classes and

various events.

Philosophy Building (1879). This small building just

below Packer Memorial Church was constructed as a

porter’s lodge. Today it houses the philosophy department.

Price Hall. This structure formerly was a brewery named

Die Alte Brauerei. In 1912 it was remodeled to serve as a

dormitory, and it was named in honor of Henry Reese

Price, president of the university board of trustees. It serves

as the home of the sociology and anthropology department.

Rathbone Hall (1971). This building’s upper level is a

major and recently renovated student dining facility, with

window walls affording a panoramic view of the Lehigh

Valley. The building bears the name of its donor, Monroe

Jackson Rathbone, ‘21, president of the university board

of trustees from 1957 to 1973. Rathbone was chairman

of the board, Standard Oil Co. (New Jersey), now Exxon

Corp., and was a major innovator in the oil industry. The

lower level houses the Residential Services Office.

Rauch Business Center (1990). Philip Rauch ‘33,

L.L.D. ‘79, retired Chairman of the Board and Director

of the Parker-Hannifin Corp., made the principal contri-

bution to build this facility. Lehigh’s Rauch Business

Center was dedicated in 1990 as the state-of-the-art

home of the university’s College of Business and

Economics. The $17.8-million facility has 115,000

square feet of floor space on five stories and features a

diverse array of classrooms, auditoria, conference rooms,

the Career Services Office and is also home to the Perella

Financial Services Lab.

Sayre Building (1869). Originally known as the Sayre

Observatory, the dome that once housed the telescope

can still be seen.

Sherman Fairchild Center for the Physical Sciences

(1892, 1976, 1986). The center, completed with help

from the Sherman Fairchild Foundation, houses class-

rooms and laboratories for undergraduate and graduate

students in physics, faculty offices and a 260-seat audito-

rium. The complex includes the Lewis Laboratory, the

original five-story stone structure built in 1892, the

Sherman Fairchild Laboratory for Solid-State Studies

built in 1976, and the 1986 addition comprised of the

Oberkotter Auditorium and research laboratories.

Sinclair Laboratory (1970). This facility houses the

office of the Vice President for Research, the Center for

Optical Technologies, The International Materials

Institute, and other research laboratories. It is named for

Francis MacDonald Sinclair, and was the gift of his

widow, Jennie H. Sinclair. A 12,000-square foot research

addition (The Smith Family Center for Optical

Technologies) was completed in 2005.

Whitaker Laboratory (1965). This five-story structure

with an adjoining two-level classroom-auditorium sec-

tion honors the memory of Martin Dewey Whitaker,

university president from 1946 to 1960. The building

serves the Department of Materials Science and

Engineering and Center for Advanced Materials and

Nanotechnology. There are laboratories for high-pressure

research and reaction kinetics, nuclear studies, analog

computation, process control, optoelectronics, high-tem-

perature thermodynamics and kinetics, and fine

structures and metallography. The Offices of

Government and Community Relations and Technology

Transfer are also located in the building.

Wilbur Powerhouse (1908). During most of its life, the

building served as a power plant with some early engineer-

ing laboratory use. Renovated during the 1970s, it provided

performing space for student theatrical productions, until

the Zoellner Arts Center was built, and it is now the new

home for student shops and project studios for the IPD

(Integrated Product Development) IBE (Integrated Business

and Engineering) and Design Arts programs.

Williams Hall (1903). This brick structure was the gift

of Edward H. Williams, Jr., Class of 1875. Dr. Williams

was a professor of mining and geology and the founder

of the Tau Beta Pi engineering society. The building con-

tains classrooms and laboratories for the departments of

biological sciences and of earth and environmental sci-

ences. A small greenhouse adjoins the building. The

building was extensively renovated and a fourth story

added in 1956 following a fire.

An Overview from Past and Present 429

Zoellner Arts Center (1997). With major gifts from

Vickie and Robert Zoellner ‘54, Dorothy and Dexter

Baker ‘50, and Claire and Theodore Diamond ‘37,

Dagit-Saylor Architects created a 105,000 sq. ft. struc-

ture designed to showcase Lehigh’s rapidly growing

programs in the performing and visual arts as well as the

departments of music and theater and 5,000 sq. ft. of

exhibition space for the Lehigh University Art Galleries.

Baker Hall has a seating capacity of more than 1,000,

Diamond Theatre features a thrust stage and seating for

307; and a “black box” theater provides flexible space for

experimental productions.

Athletic and Convocational Facilities

Murray H. Goodman Stadium (1988). Joanie and Murray

Goodman ‘48, L.L.D. ‘88, were the principal benefactors.

On October 1, 1988, Lehigh opened the gates to Murray

H. Goodman Stadium, located on the Goodman Campus.

Capacity is 16,000, and the stadium features a three-tiered

press box, and limited chair back seating, with picturesque

South Mountain in the background.

Grace Hall (1940). The building is named for its donor,

Eugene G. Grace, Class of 1899, who was chairman of

Bethlehem Steel Corp. and president of the university’s

board of trustees, 1924 to 1956. Grace Hall serves as the

headquarters and offices for Lehigh intramural and club

sports. The upper level houses the Ulrich Student

Center, including movie theatre, gameroom and mail-

boxes. The lower level houses the recently renovated

Leeman-Turner Arena.

Ulrich Sports Complex (1999; expanded in 2009).

Lehigh chairman of the board of trustees, Ronald J.

Ulrich ‘66, provided the principal funding for the con-

struction of a multi-field game complex used for men’s

and women’s soccer, men’s and women’s lacrosse, and

field hockey. The complex features a natural grass and

two artificial surface fields: Frank Banko Field and

Ronald J. Ulrich Field. The complex has permanent seat-

ing, press boxes and lighting for night contests. A group

of students enrolled in the University’s distinctive ILE

(Integrated Learning Experience) program collaborated in

the design of the original complex, illustrating the strong

partnership between athletics and academics at Lehigh.

Lewis Tennis Facility (1994). An anonymous donor

made possible the construction of four indoor tennis

courts for recreational use as well as team practice, and is

named for former Lehigh President W. Deming Lewis.

The building also includes men’s and women’s locker

room facilities.

Philip Rauch Field House (1976). Philip Rauch, ‘33,

L.L.D. ‘79 made a gift toward the facility. The building

has 62,000 square feet of uninterrupted floor space-the

equivalent of two football fields-for a variety of athletic

activities. It has a six-lane, one-eighth-mile flat track.

Sayre Field (1961). Located atop South Mountain, the

field is used for intramural sports.

Stabler Athletic & Convocation Center (1979). This

arena provides seating for 6,000 people for concerts,

spectator sports, including Lehigh’s basketball teams, and

other events. University trustee Donald B. Stabler, ‘30,

made a major financial contribution toward the facility.

Taylor Gymnasium (1904 and 1913). This structure was

the gift of Charles L. Taylor, Class of 1876, who was a

friend and business associate of steel magnate Andrew

Carnegie. There are two indoor swimming pools, two

basketball courts, the Welch Fitness Center, men’s and

women’s locker rooms, two racquetball and two squash

courts, a steam room, a multi-purpose dance/aerobics

room, a climbing wall, a Sports Medicine Complex, and

the Penske Hall of Fame. The athletic department offices

are also housed in the Warren (Pete) Musser wing.

Cundey Varsity House (1963 and 2002). The building,

expanded and renovated in 2002, houses a modern

weight training facility, sports medicine and equipment

areas, team meeting and reception areas, and locker

rooms for several varsity teams. The Varsity House is

located on the Murray H. Goodman Campus adjacent

to the John C. Whitehead Football Practice Facility.

Central Heating/Refrigeration Plant

Central Heating and Refrigeration (1969). This glass-

walled building houses three boilers that can be fired by

either oil or gas. Other equipment provides chilled water

for air conditioning.

Technology Center

125 Goodman Drive (1972). Situated on the Murray H.

Goodman Campus in Saucon Valley, the building houses

the Lehigh-based North East Tier Ben Franklin

Advanced Technology Center, the Manufacturers

Resource Center, and the University Relations office.

Residential Facilities

Brodhead House (1979). This structure is the university’s

first high-rise residential facility. The six-story building

includes 4-person suites on the five upper floors, with a

dining facility and lobby on the entrance level. The

building is named in memory of Albert Brodhead, a

member of the Class of 1888 who died in 1933, leaving

51 Bethlehem properties to his alma mater.

Campus Square (2002). In August of 2002, Lehigh

opened a 250-bed residential complex that includes the

campus bookstore and several retail stores. Air-condi-

tioned, two, three and four-bedroom apartments are

complete with full kitchen, private bathroom and fully

furnished living room/dining room areas. Attached to

the complex is a parking garage for 350 cars for resi-

dents’ convenience.

Dravo House (1948). This 5-story stone edifice is the

university’s largest residential facility. It bears the name

of two brothers, Ralph M. Dravo, Class of 1889, and

Francis F. Dravo, Class of 1887, who founded the Dravo

Corp., a Pittsburgh-based international construction

company. Both men served as university trustees.

Drinker House (1940). This stone building honors the

memory of Henry S. Drinker, Class of 1871, university

president from 1905 to 1920.

McClintic-Marshall House (1957). This U-shaped stone

structure was built in memory of Howard H. McClintic

and Charles D. Marshall, both Class of 1888, who

founded the McClintic-Marshall Construction Co. The

firm was the world’s largest independent steel fabricating

firm before its acquisition by Bethlehem Steel Corp. in

1931. It built locks for the Panama Canal and construct-

ed the Golden Gate Bridge in San Francisco Bay.

Packer House. The Graduate Student Center and office

of Graduate Life will move here in the summer of 2009,

offering multipurpose social programming and meeting

space as well as residential space for graduate students.

Richards House (1938). The building honors the mem-

ory of Charles Russ Richards, president of the university

from 1922 to 1935. The building is constructed of stone

in modified Gothic design.

430 Lehigh University Course Catalog 2009-2010

Sayre Park Village (1998). This residential complex is

comprised of three apartment buildings and houses stu-

dents in three- and four-person apartments. Included is a

fourth multipurpose community building and outdoor

recreation facilities.

Taylor Residential College (1907, 1984). The U-shaped

building is one of the earliest concrete structures ever

built. It was the gift of industrialist Andrew Carnegie in

honor of his friend and associate, university trustee

Charles L. Taylor, Class of 1876. The interior of the

building was reconstructed and the exterior refinished

prior to the facility becoming Lehigh’s first residential

college in 1984.

Trembley Park (1975). This seven-building undergradu-

ate apartment complex is named in memory of Francis J.

Trembley, Lehigh professor and pioneer ecologist.

Warren Square Complex. This cluster of four residence

halls is located on Warren Square and Summit Street.

They are upperclass facilities and some are used as spe-

cial-interest houses.

Centennial I Complex (1965)

Congdon House. Located at the east end of the

Centennial I complex. Dr. Wray H. Congdon served as

dean of students, dean of the graduate school, and spe-

cial assistant to the president.

Emery House. It is named for Dr. Natt M. Emery, who

was vice president and controller.

Leavitt House. The Rev. Dr. John McD. Leavitt was the

second president, 1875 to 1879.

McConn House. C. Maxwell McConn was dean of the

university from 1923 to 1938.

Smiley House. Dr. E. Kenneth Smiley served as vice

president from 1945 to 1964.

Thornburg House. Dr. Charles G. Thornburg was pro-

fessor and head of the Department of Mathematics,

1895 to 1923

Centennial II complex (1970)

Beardslee House. Dr. Claude G. Beardslee was chaplain

from 1931 to 1947.

Carothers House. Dr. Neil Carothers was dean of business.

Palmer House. Dr. Philip M. Palmer was dean of the arts.

Stevens House. The Rt. Rev. William Bacon Stevens, of

Philadelphia, was Protestant Episcopal bishop of the

Diocese of Pennsylvania and first president of the univer-

sity board of trustees. He was the principal architect of

the university’s original academic plan.

Stoughton House. Dr. Bradley Stoughton was dean of

the engineering college, 1936 to 1939.

Williams House. Dr. Clement C. Williams was presi-

dent of the university, 1935 to 1944.

Saucon Village Apartments (1974)

The five-building garden apartment complex includes

housing for married, graduate, and undergraduate stu-

dents.

Diamond. Dr. Herbert M. Diamond, professor emeritus

of economics, retired in 1964.

Gipson. Dr. Lawrence Henry Gipson, research professor

of history, bequeathed his estate to the university to

establish the Lawrence Henry Gipson Institute for

Eighteenth-Century Studies. Dr. Gipson wrote a monu-

mental 15-volume history, The British Empire before the

American Revolution. He won the Pulitzer Prize for vol-

ume 10, The Triumphant Empire: Thunderclouds

Gather in the West, 1763-1766.

Hartman. Dr. James R. Hartman was chairman of the

department of mechanical engineering and mechanics.

More. Dr. Robert P. More, ‘10, dean of the College of

Arts and Sciences, who also taught German for forty

years, bequeathed to the university his $746,000 estate,

amassed after investing $3,000 in IBM stock. The uni-

versity child care center is located in this building.

Severs. Dr. J. Burke Severs, of Bethlehem, is distin-

guished professor emeritus of English. He is a

Chaucerian scholar.

Fraternities and Sororities

The university has a strong fraternity tradition, dating

back to 1872. Since the admission of undergraduate

women in 1971, several sororities have come into being.

Some 500 men live in 17 fraternities.

All of the fraternities have houses located on Asa Packer

campus. All are chapters of national fraternities.

An alphabetical listing follows. The date of the founding

of the chapter is given in the first column. The second

column lists the date the chapter occupied its present

house; any additional date indicates the most recent

addition or major renovation.

Alpha Tau Omega 1966

Chi Phi 1872 1923 1968

Chi Psi 1893 1915 2005

Delta Phi 1884 1963

Delta Sigma Phi 1931 1971

Delta Tau Delta 1874 1985 1959

Delta Upsilon 1885 1968

Kappa Alpha 1894 1961

Lambda Chi Alpha 1926 1973

Phi Gamma Delta 1921 1921 1968

Phi Kappa Theta 1966

Phi Sigma Kappa 1901 1957 1970

Psi Upsilon 1884 1909 1966

Sigma Chi 1953 1953

Sigma Phi Epsilon 1907 1963

Theta Chi 1942 1964

Theta Xi 1904 1967

There are eight sororities. All are nationally affiliated and

all reside in Sayre Park. Over 320 women live in sororities.

The sororities are listed with year of establishment at

Lehigh in the first column and year of moving into their

present house in the second column.

Alpha Chi Omega 1988 2007

Alpha Gamma Delta 1975 2000

Alpha Omicron Pi 1983 2004

Alpha Phi 1975 1996

Delta Gamma 1982 2003

Gamma Phi Beta 1975 1998

Kappa Alpha Theta 1984 2006

Pi Beta Phi 1997 2008

An Overview from Past and Present 431

432 Lehigh University Course Catalog 2009-2010

This section lists the people whose talents and abilities

constitute the university’s most important resource.

Members of the board of trustees contribute their expert-

ise to establish the policies of the university. Also listed

are the administration, members of the faculty and staff,

and the members of the visiting committees who help to

keep courses of instruction current and of maximum

value to the students and prospective employers.

Board of Trustees

When only the year of the degree is listed, the degree

was awarded by Lehigh University.

Daniel E. Smith Jr., chair

William F. Hecht, vice chair

Dennis E. Singleton III, vice chair

Frank A. Roth, corporate secretary

Denise M. Blew, treasurer and assistant secretary

David L. Hammer, assistant treasurer

Members of the Board

Peter E. Bennett, B.S. ’63, M.B.A. ’67, Columbia

University; chairman/chief executive officer, Liberty

Partners LP

Nancy M. Berman, B.A. ’67, Wellesley College; M.A.

’77, Hebrew Union College; Honorary Doctor of

Humane Letters ’97; president, Philip and Muriel

Berman Foundation; Museum Director Emerita, Skirball

Cultural Center

Robert L. Brown, III, B.S. ’78, partner, Pricewaterhouse

Coopers

Michael J. Caruso, B.A. ’67, president, Caruso Benefits

Group, Inc.

Maria K. Chrin, B.S. ’87, MBA ’89, Columbia

University, partner, Circle Wealth Management

Amy R. Churgin, B.A. ’77, M.A., Hunter College

Kevin L. Clayton, B.A. ’84, M.B.A. ’88, St. Joseph’s

University; principal, Oaktree Capital Management LLC

William W. Crouse, III, B.S. ’64, M.B.A. ’71, Pace

University; general partner- managing director,

Healthcare Ventures.

Janet G. Davidson, B.A. ’78,M.S. ’79, Georgia Tech

University; chief compliance officer, Alcatel-Lucent

James J. Duane, III, B.A. ’73; M.A. ’75, Manchester

University; J.D. ’78, Harvard University, attorney,

Taylor, Duane, Barton & Gilman, LLP

Andrew C. Fiala, B.S. ’92 M.B.A. ’2000, University of

Pennsylvania Wharton School, vice president, director of

human resources, DMJM H&N

Patrick A. Fischer, B.S. ’97, M.S. ’98, safesforce.com

John H. Glanville, B.A. ’77, M.S. ’85, University of

Texas, Austin, general partner, Athenaeum Capital

Partners.

Daniel Haime, B.S. ’82, Trans Oceanic Corporation

Thomas J. Healy Jr., B.S. ’85, M.B.A. ’90, Vanderbilt

University; J.D. ’95, New York Law School; principal,

Bessemer Trust Company N.A.

William F. Hecht, B.S. ’64, M.S. ’70, retired chairman

and chief executive officer, PPL

Francis J. Ingrassia, B.S. ’75, retired managing direc-

tor/partner, Goldman Sachs & Company

Jane P. Jamieson, B.A. ’75, M.S. ’76, Boston University,

retired executive vice president, Pyramid Global

Advisors.

George N. Kledaras, B.S. ’87, M.S. ’96, New York

University, chief executive officer, CecilRep, LLC

Paul N. Leitner, B.S. ’76, M.B.A. ’80, New York

University, principal, The Leitner Thomas Group

John E. McGlade, B.S. ’76, M.B.A. ’81, president &

chief operating officer, Air Products & Chemicals, Inc.

Marc L. Paley, B.S. ’83, M.B.A. ’87, Columbia

University, chief executive officer & president, Beacon

Trust Company

Joseph R. Perella, B.S. ’64, M.B.A. ’72, Harvard

University, principal, Perella Weinberg Partners

Gail Price, B.A. ’79, J.D. ’82, Seton Hall University;

partner, Price Meese Shulman

Brad Eric Scheler, B.A. ’74, J.D. ’77, Hofstra University;

senior partner, Fried, Frank, Harris, Schriver & Jacobson

LLP

Dennis E. Singleton, III, B.S. ’66; M.B.A. ’68, Harvard

University; partner, Spieker Properties, Inc.

Daniel E. Smith, Jr., B.S. ’71, M.B.A. ’76, Harvard

University, president and CEO, Sycamore Networks,

Inc.

Tara I. Stacom, B.S. ’80, vice chairman, Cushman &

Wakefield, Inc.

Elliot J. Sussman, B.S. ’73 Yale University, M.D. ’77,

Harvard Medical School, M.B.A. ’81, University of

Pennsylvania; president, Lehigh Valley Hospital and

Health Network

James R. Tanenbaum, B.A. ’71; M.A. ’72, Fletcher

School of Diplomacy; J.D. ’75, Partner, Morrison &

Foerster, LLP

Ralph Albert Thomas, B.S. ’76, M.B.A. ’77, executive

director, New Jersey Society of CPA’s

Kathleen D. Trimble, B.A. ’87, principal, Duggan

Resources, LLC

R. Charles Tschampion, III, B.S. ’67; M.B.A. ’68;

director, Industry Relations, CFA Marketing Division,

CFA Institute

Ronald J. Ulrich, B.S. ’67; M.B.A. ’71, New York

University, principal, R. Ulrich & Co.

Wendell P. Weeks, B.S. ’81, M.B.A. ’87, Harvard

University; chairman and chief executive officer, Corning

Inc.

Deborah E. Zajac, B.S. ’97, B.A. ’97, vice president,

commercialization and growth, General Electric

Company

Michael D. Zisman, B.S. ’70, M.S. ’73, University of

Pennsylvania, Ph.D. ’77, University of Pennsylvania,

Internet Capital Group

VII. Administration, Faculty and Staff

Trustees Emeriti

Dexter F. Baker, B.S. ’50, M.B.A. ’57, Honorary Doctor

of Engineering ’91, Honorary Doctor of Humane Letters

’91, DeSales University, former chairman, Air Products

& Chemicals, Inc.

William L. Clayton, B.S. ’51, Honorary Doctor of Laws

’87, senior vice president, Salomon Smith Barney

Theodore L. Diamond, B.S. ’37, M.B.A. ’39 Harvard

University, president, T. L. Diamond & Co., Inc.

William B. Eagleson, Jr., B.S. ’49, M.B.A. ’51

University of Pennsylvania, Honorary Doctor of Laws

’83, retired chairman emeritus, Mellon Bank

Murray H. Goodman, B.S. ’48, Honorary Doctor of

Laws ’88, chairman, The Goodman Company

William C. Hittinger, B.S. ’44, Honorary Doctor of

Engineering ’73, retired executive vice president, research

and engineering, RCA Corp.

Ronald R. Hoffman, B.S. ’54, retired executive vice

president-human resources, Aluminum Co. of America

Douglas C. Lane, B.S. ’67, M.B.A. ’68, University of

Michigan-Ann Arbor, president, Douglas C. Lane &

Associates

Eugene Mercy, Jr., B.S. ’59, Honorary Doctor of Laws

’98, Chairman, Granite Capital International Group

Philip R. Peller, B.S. ’60, M.B.A. ’61 New York

University; retired partner, Andersen World Wide

Stanley M. Richman, B.S. ’55, retired president,

Lightning Service Electric Co.

S. Murray Rust, Jr., B.S.’34, Honorary Doctor of

Humane Letters ’80, retired chairman of the board, Rust

Engineering Co.

Edwin F. Scheetz, Jr., B.S. ’54, Chairman of the Board

& CEO, Guyasuta Investment Advisors, Inc.

Karen L. Stuckey, B.S. ’75, partner, Price Waterhouse

Coopers LLP

James B. Swenson, B.S. ’59, retired partner,

Pricewaterhouse

Edward G. Uhl, B.S. ’40, Honorary Doctorate of

Science ’75; retired chairman, Fairchild Industries, Inc.

Honorary Trustees

Hans J. Baer, B.S. ’47, M.A. ’50, New York University;

Honorary Doctor of Laws ’97, honorary chairman,

Julius Baer Holding

Lee A. Iacocca, B.S. ’45, M.S., ’46 Princeton University;

Doctor of Laws ’65, Babson College; LL.D., Eng.D. ’69,

Iacocca & Associates

Warren V. Musser, B.S. ’49; chairman emeritus,

Safeguard Scientific

Robert E. Zoellner, B.S. ’54, Alpine Associates

Victoria Zoellner, Alpine Associates

Principal Officers

Educational information (degrees earned and colleges

and universities attended) may be found in the alphabet-

ical listing that follows in this section. The highest

degree earned is given here. All offices, unless otherwise

noted, are located at Bethlehem, PA 18015; the area

code, unless otherwise noted, is (610).

Principal Officers

Alice P. Gast, Ph.D., president; 758-3156

Patrick V. Farrell, Ph.D., provost and vice president for

academic affairs; 758-3605

Margaret F. Plympton, M.B.A., vice president for

finance and administration; 758-3178

Joseph P. Kender, M.B.A., vice president for advance-

ment; 758-4711

Fred J. McGrail, B.A. vice president for communica-

tions; 758-4487

Frank A. Roth, J.D., general counsel, secretary to the

board; 758-3572

Joanne C. Anderson, B.A., director, Office of the

President; 758-3069

Denise M. Blew, B.S., CMA, CPA, associate vice presi-

dent for finance and administration and assistant

secretary to the board; 758-4405

Bruce E. Koel, Ph.D., vice president & associate provost

for research & graduate studies, 758-6964

John W. Smeaton, Ph.D., vice provost for student

affairs; 758-3890

Joseph D. Sterrett, Ed.D, Murray H. Goodman dean of

athletics; 758-4320

Peter M. Gilbert, M.B.A chief investment officer; 758-

2920

Mohamed S. El-Aasser, Ph.D., vice president for inter-

national affairs; 758-2981

Paul R. Brown, Ph.D., dean, College of Business and

Economics; 758-6725

Anne S. Meltzer, Ph.D., Herbert J. and Ann L. Siegel,

dean, College of Arts and Sciences 758-4570

Gary M. Sasso, Ph.D., dean, College of Education; 758-

3221

S. David Wu, Ph.D., dean, P.C. Rossin College of

Engineering and Applied Science; 758-5308

Carl O. Moses, Ph.D., deputy provost for academic

affairs; 758-5891

Jean R. Soderlund, Ph.D., deputy provost for faculty

affairs; 758-5891

J. Leon Washington, M.A., dean of admissions and

financial aid; 758-3101

Bruce M. Taggart, Ph.D., vice provost for library and

technology services; 758-3025

Jacqueline Matthews, M.S., associate vice president for

human resources; 758-3894

Anthony L. Corallo, M.A., associate vice president for

facilities services and campus planning; 758-3970

William D. Michalerya, M.B.A., M.Eng., associate vice

president for government relations and economic devel-

opment; 758-5802

Administration, Faculty and Staff 433

College Offices

College of Arts and Sciences

Maginnes Hall

9 West Packer Avenue; 758-3300

Anne S. Meltzer, Ph.D., Herbert J. and Ann L. Siegel

dean

Jeffrey Sands, associate dean for faculty and staff

Michael Stavola, associate dean, research and graduate

programs

Augustine Ripa, associate dean, undergraduate programs

College of Business and Economics

Rauch Business Center

621 Taylor Street; 758-3400

Paul R. Brown, Ph.D., dean

Katrina Zalatan, acting associate dean and director of the

undergraduate programs

Marty Saffer, Ph.D., associate dean, graduate programs

College of Education

Iacocca Hall

111 Research Drive; 758-3221

Gary M. Sasso , Ph.D., dean

Ward Cates, Ph.D., associate dean

P.C. Rossin College of Engineering and Applied

Science

Packard Laboratory

19 Memorial Drive West; 758-4025

S. David Wu, Ph.D., dean

John P. Coulter, Ph.D., associate dean, graduate studies

& research

Gerard P. Lennon, Ph.D., associate dean, undergraduate

studies

Offices and Resources

In this section, only the principal officers are listed. For

degree information, consult the alphabetical listing that

follows.

Academic Outreach

618 Brodhead Avenue; 758-4802

Henry U. Odi, executive director of academic outreach

and special projects

Admissions

27 Memorial Drive West; 758-3100

J. Leon Washington, dean of admissions and financial

aid

Advancement

27 Memorial Drive West; 758-4711

Joseph P. Kender, vice president for advancement

Alumni Association

27 Memorial Drive West; 758-3135

Robert W. Wolfenden, assistant vice president alumni

relations

Art Galleries/Museum Operations

420 East Packer Avenue; 758-3615

Ricardo Viera, director/curator

Athletics

641 Taylor Street; 758-4300

Joseph D. Sterrett, Murray H. Goodman dean of athletics

Ben Franklin Technology Center

125 Goodman Drive; 758-5200

R. Chad Paul, executive director

Bookstore

9 West Packer Avenue; 758-3383

Steve A. Schatten, General Manager

Budget Office

422 Brodhead Avenue, 758-4204

Stephen J. Guttman, director of budget

Bursar

27 Memorial Drive West; 758-3160

Michael J. King, bursar

Business Services

516 Brodhead Avenue; 758-3840

Mark R. Ironside, executive director

Career Services

621 Taylor Street 484 RBC; 758-3710

Donna L. Goldfeder, director

Center for Writing, Math and Study Skills

35 Sayre Drive; 758-3098

Edward E. Lotto, director

Chaplaincy Services

36 University Drive; 758-3877

Rev. Dr. Lloyd H. Steffen, university chaplain, chairper-

son and professor of religion studies

Child Care Center

5 Duh Drive #21; 758-5437

Kathy N. Calabrese, director

Community and Regional Affairs

343 Whitaker Lab, 5 E. Packer; 758-5801

Dale A. Kochard, executive director for community and

regional affairs

Computing Center (see Information Resources)

Conference Services

63 University Drive, Rathbone Hall; 758-5306

Mary Kay Baker, director

Controller’s Office

524 Brodhead Avenue; 758-3140

Kathleen J. Miller, controller

Corporate and Foundation Relations

27 Memorial Drive West; 758-6845

Kathryn Humphreys, assistant vice president corporate

foundation relations & career services

Counseling & Psychological Services

36 University Drive; 758-3880

Ian T. Birky, director

Dean of Students

29 Trembley Drive, C108 University Center; 758-4156

Sharon K. Basso, associate vice provost and dean of stu-

dents

Development (see Advancement)

Distance Education (see Special Academic

Programs)

434 Lehigh University Course Catalog 2009-2010

Environmental Health and Safety

616 Brodhead Avenue; 758-4251

Barbara A. Plohocki, director

Facilities Services and Planning

461 Webster Street; 758-3970

Anthony L. Corallo, associate vice president

Finance and Administration

27 Memorial Drive West; 758-3180

Margaret F. Plympton, vice president

Denise M. Blew, associate vice president for finance and

administration

Financial Aid

218 W. Packer Avenue; 758-3181

Linda F. Bell, director

Fraternity Management Association

219 Warren Square; 758-3888

Elizabeth M. Fisher, executive director

General Counsel

27 Memorial Drive West, Room 307; 758-3572

Frank A. Roth. Esq., general counsel

Heather K. Hosfield, assistant general counsel

Government Affairs and Community Affairs

5 Whitaker Lab; 758-5802

William D. Michalerya, associate vice president; 758-

5802

Vito G. Gallo, assistant vice president for state relations;

758-5801

Dale Kochard, executive Director for Community &

Regional affairs; 758-5801

Graduate Student Life

Christmas Saucon 38, 14 E. Packer Ave.

Kathleen S. Hutnik , director of graduate student life;

758-4722

Health Center

36 University Drive, Johnson Hall; 758-3870

Susan C. Kitei, M.D., director

Human Resources

428 Brodhead Avenue; 758-3900

Jacqueline Matthews, associate vice president

Institutional Research

422 Brodhead Ave.; 758-5890

Yenny Anderson, associate director of institutional

research

Internal Audit

526 Brodhead Avenue; 758-5012

Robert J. Eichenlaub, director

International Affairs

32 Sayre Drive, Coxe Hall; 758-2981

Mohamed S. El-Aasser, vice president for international

affairs

International Students and Scholars

32 Sayre Drive, Coxe Hall; 758-4859

Gisela Nansteel, manager of office of international stu-

dents and scholars

Library and Technology Services

8A East Packer Avenue; 758-3025

Bruce M. Taggart, vice provost

Mailing and Printing Services

118 ATLSS Drive; 758-5402 (Mailing); 758-5408

(Printing)

Glenn H. Strause, director

Manufacturers Resource Center

125 Goodman Drive; 758-5599

Jack E. Pfunder, executive director

Parking Services

36 University Drive 106 Johnson Hall; 758-3893

Christopher J. Christian, director

Personnel (see Human Resources)

Police (see University Police)

President’s Office

27 Memorial Drive West; 758-3156

Alice P. Gast, president

Provost’s Office

27 Memorial Drive West; 758-3605

Patrick V. Farrell, provost and vice president for academic

affairs

Purchasing

516 Brodhead Avenue; 758-3266

Registrar

27 Memorial Drive West; 758-3200

Bruce S. Correll, registrar

Research and Sponsored Programs

526 Brodhead Avenue; 758-3021

Thomas J. Meischeid, director

Residential Services

63 University Drive, Rathbone Hall; 758-3500

Ozzie Breiner, director

Risk Management

616 Brodhead Ave.; 758-3899

Richard Freeman, director

Special Academic Programs (Distance Education

and Summer Studies)

436 Brodhead Avenue; 758-3966 (Summer); 758-4373

(Distance)

Margaret Portz, director

Sports Communications

641 Taylor Street; 758-3174

Jeff Tourial, director

Student Affairs

29 Trembley Drive, University Center; 758-3890

John W. Smeaton, vice provost for student affairs

Student Auxiliary Services

63 Rathbone Hall; 758-5339

David M. Joseph, executive director

Summer Studies (see Special Academic Programs)

Transportation Services

126 Goodman Drive; 758-4410

Christopher J. Christian, director

Administration, Faculty and Staff 435

Treasurer (see Finance and Administration)

University Police

36 University Drive, Johnson Hall 221; 758-4200

Edward K. Shupp, chief

University Relations

125 Goodman Drive; 758-4487

Fred J. McGrail, vice president for communications

Vice Provost for Research

7 Sinclair Laboratory, Rm. 305

Bruce E. Koel, vice president & associate provost for

research & graduate studies, 758-6964

Women’s Center

29 Trembley Drive; 758-6484

Rita Jones, director of women’s center

Zoellner Arts Center

420 East Packer Avenue; 758-5323

Elizabeth Scofield, executive director

Faculty and Emeriti

The first date after the name is the date of appointment

to continuous service on the Lehigh University faculty or

staff; the second date, when the first fails to do so, indi-

cates the date of appointment to the present professional

rank. Where the name of the institution awarding a

high-level degree is not given, the institution is the same

one that awarded the previous degree listed.

P.E. indicates certification as a professional engineer;

C.P.A. indicates certified public accountant. A.P.R. indi-

cates accreditation by Public Relations Society of America.

John H. Abel, Jr. (1985, 2003), professor emeritus of

biological sciences. B.A., Wooster, 1959; M.A., Brown,

1964; Ph.D., 1966.

John W. Adams (1965, 1995), professor emeritus of

industrial engineering. B.S., Nebraska, 1952; Ph.D.,

North Carolina, 1962; CQE.

Eugene O. Albulescu (1997, 2007), Ronald J. Ulrich

chair in orchestral and string music and associate profes-

sor of music. P.D., Conservatorium of Music (New

Zealand), 1988; A.D., Indiana, 1992; M.M., 1994;

B.D., Rongotai (New Zealand), 1997.

Jack A. Alhadeff (1982), professor of chemistry. B.A.,

Chicago, 1965; Ph.D., Oregon Medical School, 1972.

Carlos J. Alvare (1984), professor emeritus of art and

architecture. B. Arch., Yale, 1947; M.C.P., Pennsylvania,

1954; M. Arch., Yale, 1973.

David Curtis Amidon, Jr. (1965, 2008), professor

emeritus of urban studies. B.A., Juniata, 1957; M.A.,

Pennsylvania State, 1959.

David J. Anastasio (1986, 2007), professor of earth and

environmental sciences. B.A., Franklin and Marshall,

1980; M.A., Johns Hopkins, 1984; Ph.D., 1988.

Anne-Marie Anderson (2003, 2009), associate professor

of finance. B.S., U.S. Military Academy, 1987; M.B.A.,

Tulsa, 1998; Ph.D., Arizona, 2003.

David C. Angstadt (2009), professor of practice of

finance. B.S., Lehigh, 1987; M.S., 2001; Ph.D., 2004.

Rosemarie Arbur (1972, 2000), professor emerita of

English. B.A., Nazareth, 1966; M.A., Illinois, 1967;

Ph.D., 1972.

Marie-Sophie Armstrong (1986, 1992), associate profes-

sor of modern languages and literature. B.A., Institut

Superieur d’Interpretariat et de Traduction (France),

1979; B.A., Sorbonne (France), 1979; M.A., Oregon,

1982; Ph.D., 1986.

J. Richard Aronson (1965, 1972), William L. Clayton

professor of business and economics and director,

Martindale Center for the study of private enterprise.

B.A., Clark, 1959; M.A., Stanford, 1961; Ph.D., Clark,

1964.

Catherine M. Arrington (2005), assistant professor of

psychology. B.A./B.S., Furman, 1994; M.A., Wake

Forest, 1996; Ph.D., Michigan, 2002.

Lloyd W. Ashby (1966, 1971), professor emeritus of

education and human services. A.B., Hastings , 1927;

M.A., Teachers College-Columbia, 1935; Ed.D., 1950.

Betzalel Avitzur (1964, 1995), professor emeritus of

materials science and engineering. B.S., Israel Inst. of

Tech. (Israel), 1947; Dip., 1949; M.S., Michigan, 1956;

Ph.D., 1961.

Youngsoo Bae (2006), assistant professor of economics.

B.A., Seoul National (Korea), 1994; M.A., Ohio State,

2002; Ph.D., 2006.

D. Raymond Bainbridge (1972, 2001), professor emeri-

tus of accounting. B.S., Rider, 1963; M.S., Lehigh,

1972; Ph.D., 1978; C.P.A., Pennsylvania, 1971.

Henry S. Baird (2004), professor of computer science

and engineering. B.A., Harvard, 1966; M.S., Rutgers,

1976; Ph.D., Princeton, 1984.

Nicholas W. Balabkins (1957, 1994), professor emeritus

of economics. Dipl.rer.pol., Gottingen (Germany), 1949;

M.A., Rutgers, 1953; Ph.D., 1956.

Linda M. Bambara (1988, 2002), associate chair and

professor of education and human services. B.S., SUNY

at Oneonta, 1975; M.S.Ed., SUNY at Binghamton,

1977; Ed.D., Vanderbilt, 1985.

Margaret E. Barber (2005), assistant professor of educa-

tion and human services. B.A., Bates, 1993; M.A.,

Teachers College-Columbia, 2001; Ed.D., 2006.

Thoburn V. Barker (1953, 1984), professor emeritus of

speech. B.A., Ohio Wesleyan, 1943; M.A., Columbia,

1951.

Henri J. Barkey (1987, 1999), Bernard L. and Bertha

Cohen professor of international relations. B.Sc., City

Univ. (London), 1975; M.Sc., Univ. College (London),

1976; Ph.D., Pennsylvania, 1984.

Robert F. Barnes, Jr. (1965, 1995), professor emeritus of

philosophy; professor emeritus of computer science.

B.S., M.I.T., 1957; M.A., Dartmouth, 1959; Ph.D.,

California at Berkeley, 1965.

Susan E. Barrett (1987, 1994), associate professor of

psychology. B.A., Clark, 1981; ScM., Brown, 1983;

Ph.D., 1987.

Donald D. Barry (1963, 2000), university professor

emeritus of political science. B.A., Ohio, 1956; M.A.,

Syracuse, 1959; Ph.D. 1963.

436 Lehigh University Course Catalog 2009-2010

Richard W. Barsness (1978, 2004), dean emeritus, col-

lege of business and economics and university service

professor emeritus of management. B.S., Minnesota,

1957; M.A., 1958; M.A., 1960; Ph.D., 1963.

Filbert Bartoli (2005), Chandler-Weaver chair and

chairperson of electrical and computer engineering.

B.E.E., Catholic University of America, 1965; M.E.E.,

1967; Ph.D., 1971.

Daniel Bayak (2007), professor of practice of finance.

B.S., Bloomsburg, 1971; M.B.A., Scranton, 1974.

Michael G. Baylor (1976, 1990), chairperson and pro-

fessor of history. B.A., Knox, 1964; M.A., Stanford,

1966; Ph.D., 1971.

Floyd D. Beachum (2009), Peter E. Bennett ’63 chair in

urban principalship and associate professor of education

and human services. B.S., Alabama State, 1995; M.E.,

1999; Ph.D., Bowling Green State, 2002.

Barry S. Bean (1973, 1998), professor of biological sci-

ences. B.S., Tufts, 1964; Ph.D., Rockefeller, 1970.

Gordon C. F. Bearn (1986, 2002), William Wilson

Selfridge professor of philosophy. B.A., Williams, 1977;

B.A., Oxford, 1979; Ph.D., Yale, 1985.

Gray E. Bebout (1991, 2003), professor of earth and

environmental sciences. B.S., Texas, 1981; M.A., 1984;

Ph.D., California at Los Angeles, 1989.

Michael J. Behe (1985, 1997), professor of biological

sciences. B.S., Drexel, 1974; Ph.D., Pennsylvania, 1978.

Carl R. Beidleman (1967, 1995), DuBois professor

emeritus of finance. B.S., Lafayette, 1954; M.B.A.,

Drexel, 1961; Ph.D., Pennsylvania, 1968.

Peter G. Beidler (1967, 2007), Lucy G. Moses distin-

guished professor emeritus of English. B.A., Earlham,

1962; M.A., Lehigh, 1965; Ph.D., 1968.

Liuba Y. Belkin (2007), assistant professor of manage-

ment. B.S., Institute for Economics and Law (Russia),

M.S., 1997; M.B.A., Rutgers, 2002; Ph.D., 2002.

Raymond Bell (1966, 2004), university service professor

emeritus of education and social relations. Teaching

Cert., St. John’s (England), 1961; M.A., Temple, 1967;

Ed.D., Lehigh, 1971.

Russell E. Benner (1962), professor emeritus of mechan-

ical engineering and mechanics. B.S., Cornell, 1947;

M.S., Lehigh, 1951; Ph.D., 1959; P.E., Pennsylvania,

1970.

Bryan W. Berger (2010), assistant professor of chemical

engineering. B.S., Illinois at Urbana-Champaign, 1999;

Ph.D., Delaware, 2005.

Taïeb Berrada (2009), assistant professor of French,

modern languages and literature. Maîtrise de langues

étrangères appliqués, Paul Valéry (France), 1997; M.A.,

North Carolina at Chapel Hill, 2001; Ph.D.,

Northwestern, 2007.

William A. Best (2008) professor of practice of electrical

and computer engineering. B.S.M.E., Tufts , 1981;

M.S., Virginia Polytechnic Inst. and State University,

1984; Ph.D., London (United Kingdom).

Ivan Biaggio (2002), associate professor of physics. M.S.,

Swiss Federal Inst. of Tech. (Switzerland), 1986; Ph.D.

1993.

Mark H. Bickhard (1990), Henry R. Luce professor in

cognitive robotics and director, institute for interactivist

studies. B.S., Chicago, 1966; M.S., 1970; Ph.D., 1973.

Jerry T. Bidlack (1973, 1995), professor emeritus of

music. B.A., Oberlin, 1953; M.A., Boston, 1957.

Alberto Bilenca (2009), assistant professor of electrical

and computer engineering. B.S., Technion (Israel), 1996;

M.S., 2000; Ph.D. 2005.

Mary Jean Bishop (2001, 2007), associate professor of

education and human services. B.A., Lebanon Valley,

1984; M.A., Millersville, 1987; Ed.D., Lehigh, 2000.

Glenn D. Blank (1984, 1990), associate professor of

computer science and engineering. B.A., Pennsylvania

State, 1974; M.A., Michigan, 1975; M.S., Wisconsin-

Madison, 1983; Ph.D., 1984.

Rick S. Blum (1991, 2002), Robert W. Wieseman chair

in electrical engineering and professor of electrical and

computer engineering. B.S., Pennsylvania State, 1984;

M.S., Pennsylvania, 1987; Ph.D., 1991.

Philip A. Blythe (1968, 1970), professor of mechanical

engineering and mechanics. B.Sc., Manchester

(England), 1958; Ph.D., 1961.

Alec M. Bodzin (1999, 2005), associate professor of

education and human services. B.S., Michigan, 1988;

M.Ed., George Washington, 1992; Ph.D., North

Carolina State, 1999.

Teresa V. Bohlsen (1999), lecturer in Spanish, modern

languages and literature. B.A., Inst. Tech. Estudio.

Superiores (Mexico), 1964; M.A., San Diego, 1984.

John W. Bonge (1972, 2002), professor emeritus of

management. B.S., Princeton, 1957; M.B.A.,

Northwestern, 1959; Ph.D., 1968.

Robert Booth (2006), assistant professor of earth and

environmental sciences. B.S., Pennsylvania State, 1995;

M.S., Georgia Southern, 1998; Ph.D., Wyoming, 2003.

Berrisford W. Boothe (1989, 1996), associate professor

of art and architecture. B.A., Lafayette, 1983; M.F.A.,

Maryland Institute, 1986.

Garold J. Borse (1966, 2007), professor emeritus of

physics. B.S., Detroit, 1962; M.S., Virginia, 1964;

Ph.D., 1966.

Chad M. Briggs (2006), assistant professor of interna-

tional relations and environmental initiative. B.A.,

Wisconsin-Madison, 1994; M.A., Limerick (Ireland),

1996; Ph.D., Carleton (Canada), 2001.

Paul D. Brockman (2009), Joseph R. Perella and Amy

M. Perella chair and professor of finance. B.A., Ohio

State, 1983; M.B.A., Nova, 1987; M.B.A., Florida

Atlantic, 1989; Ph.D., Louisiana State, 1994.

Jay D. Brodish (2009), professor of practice of account-

ing. B.S., Lehigh, 1966.

Addison C. Bross (1967, 2009), professor emeritus of

English. B.A., Davidson, 1959; M.A., Duke, 1960;

Ph.D., Louisiana State, 1967.

Derick G. Brown (2001, 2007), associate professor of

civil and environmental engineering. B.S., Boston, 1986;

M.S., California, 1994; M.A., Princeton, 1996; Ph.D.,

2000.

Forbes T. Brown (1970, 2004), professor emeritus of

mechanical engineering and mechanics. B.S., M.I.T.,

1958; M.S., 1958; Mech.E., 1959; Sc.D., 1962.

Jill A. Brown (2007), assistant professor of management.

B.A., Lehigh, 1983; M.B.A., Augusta State, 1998;

Ph.D., Terry College of Business, Georgia, 2007.

Administration, Faculty and Staff 437

Paul Brown (2007), dean of the college of business and

economics and professor of accounting. B.A., Franklin

and Marshall, 1972; M.P.A., Texas at Austin, 1978;

Ph.D., 1979.

Stephen G. Buell (1973, 1995), professor of finance.

B.S., Lehigh, 1970; M.A., 1971; Ph.D., 1977.

R. Michael Burger (2006), assistant professor of biologi-

cal sciences. B.A., Ithaca College, 1993; Ph.D., Texas at

Austin, 2000.

Christopher T. Burke (2008), assistant professor of psy-

chology. B.S., Carnegie Mellon, 2003; Ph.D., New York,

2008.

Matthew Bush (2008), assistant professor of modern

languages and literature. B.A., Nebraska at Lincoln,

2000; M.A., Colorado at Boulder, 2003; Ph.D., 2008.

Sidney R. Butler (1969, 1991), professor emeritus of

materials science and engineering. B.S., Maine, 1954;

M.S., Pennsylvania State, 1956; Ph.D., 1960.

Huai-Dong Cao (2003), A. Everett Pitcher professor of

mathematics. B.A., Tsinghua (China), 1981; M.A.,

Princeton, 1983; Ph.D., 1986.

Hugo S. Caram (1977, 1986), professor of chemical

engineering. B.S., Buenos Aires (Argentina), 1967;

Ph.D., Minnesota, 1977.

G. Slade Cargill III (1997, 2008), Sherman Fairchild

professor emeritus of materials science and engineering.

B.S., Georgia Institute of Technology, 1966; S.M.,

Harvard, 1966; Ph.D., 1969.

Kimberley Carrell-Smith (2002), professor of practice of

history. B.A., Wesleyan, 1979; M.A., Delaware, 1981;

Ph.D., 1989.

Bobb Carson (1971, 2003), dean emeritus and professor

emeritus of earth and environmental sciences. B.A.,

Carleton, 1965; M.S., Washington, 1967; Ph.D., 1971.

Grace Caskie (2004), Frank Hook assistant professor of

education and human services. B.A., Millersville, 1993;

M.A., North Carolina, 1996; Ph.D., 1998.

Lynne U. Cassimeris (1992, 2004), professor of biologi-

cal sciences. B.S., Springfield, 1980; Ph.D., North

Carolina at Chapel Hill, 1988.

Alfred J. Castaldi (1966, 1987), professor emeritus of

education and human services. B.S., Pennsylvania, 1951;

M.S., 1956; Ed.D., 1964.

Ward M. Cates (1991, 2007), associate dean of the col-

lege of education and professor of education and human

services. B.A., Duke, 1971; Ed.D., 1979.

Marie-Hélène Chabut (1988, 2000), chairperson and

professor of modern languages and literature. Licence de

Lettres Modernes, Université de Toulouse (France),

1977; Maïtrise de Lettres Modernes , 1979; C. Phil.,

California at San Diego, 1982; Ph.D., 1984.

Helen M. Chan (1986, 1995), New Jersey Zinc

Company professor and chairperson of materials science

and engineering. B.S., Imperial College of Science Tech.

(England), 1979; Ph.D., 1982.

Deepa Chandrasekaran (2007), assistant professor of

marketing. B.A., Steela Maris College (India), 1997;

M.A., 1999; M.B.A., Indian Institute of Management

(India), 2001; Ph.D., Marshall School of Business,

Southern California, 2006.

Marvin Charles (1970, 2004), professor emeritus of

chemical engineering. B.S., Brooklyn Polytechnic, 1964;

M.S., 1967; Ph.D., 1970.

Manoj K. Chaudhury (1994, 2001), Franklin J. Howes,

Jr. distinguished professor of chemical engineering..B.S.,

Calcutta, 1976; M.S., SUNY at Buffalo, 1980; Ph.D.,

1984.

John C. Chen (1970, 2005), professor emeritus of

chemical engineering. B.S., Cooper Union, 1956; M.S.,

Carnegie Mellon, 1959; Ph.D., Michigan, 1961.

Liang Cheng (2002, 2009), associate professor of com-

puter science and engineering. B.S.E.E., Huazhong

(China), 1994; M.S.E.E., Tsinghua (China), 1997;

Ph.D., Rutgers, 2002.

Xuanhong Cheng (2008), assistant professor of materials

science and engineering. B.S., Wuhan (China), 1998;

M.E., Washington, 2004; Ph.D., 2004.

Meng-Sang Chew (1992, 1995), associate professor of

mechanical engineering and mechanics. B.S., Columbia,

1977; M.S., 1977; M.Ph., 1979; Ph.D., 1980; P.E.,

Virginia, 1992.

Ravindra Chitturi (2003, 2009), associate professor of

marketing. B.E., Regional Engineering College at Trichy

(India), 1982; M.S., Illinois Institute of Technology,

Chicago, 1984; M.B.A., Texas, 1996; Ph.D., 2003.

Shin-Yi Chou (2003, 2006), associate professor of eco-

nomics. B.A., National Taiwan (Taiwan), 1994; Ph.D.,

Duke, 1999.

Ye T. Chou (1968, 1995), New Century Fund professor

emeritus of materials science and engineering. B.S.,

Chung King, 1945; M.S., Carnegie Mellon, 1954;

Ph.D., 1957.

Mooi Choo Chuah (2004), associate professor of com-

puter science and engineering. B.E., Malaya (Malaysia),

1984; M.S., California, 1988; Ph.D., 1991.

Anna M. Chupa (2004), associate professor of art and

architecture and director, design arts. B.A., Rutgers,

1977; M.A.L.S., Dartmouth, 1981; M.F.A., Delaware,

1996.

Christine L. Cole (1988, 2001), professor of school psy-

chology. B.A., St. Olaf, 1975; M.S., Wisconsin-Madison,

1977; Ph.D., 1982.

Karen M. Collins (1990, 1994), associate professor of

accounting. B.S., Salisbury State, 1976; M.B.A., 1984;

Ph.D., Virginia Polytechnic, 1988.

Helen L. Columba (1989, 1995), associate professor of

education and human services. B.A., Morehead State;

M.Ed., Louisville, 1977; Ed.D., 1989.

Constance A. Cook (1989, 2007), professor of modern

languages and literature. B.A., Washington, 1976; M.A.,

1980; Ph.D., California at Berkeley, 1990.

Gail A. Cooper (1987, 1996), associate professor of his-

tory. B.A., California at Santa Barbara, 1975; M.A.,

1980; Ph.D., 1987.

Jorge Ignacio Cortiñas (2009), assistant professor of the-

atre. B.A., Georgetown, 1989; M. of Public Health,

California at Berkeley, 1993; M.F.A., Brown, 2000.

Pasquale J. Costa (2003), professor of practice of indus-

trial and systems engineering. B.S., Pennsylvania State,

1969.

438 Lehigh University Course Catalog 2009-2010

John P. Coulter (1990, 2001), associate dean of graduate

studies and research for the P.C. Rossin college of engi-

neering and applied science and professor of mechanical

engineering and mechanics. B.S., Delaware, 1983; M.S.,

1985; Ph.D., 1988.

Katherine Crassons (2004), assistant professor of

English. B.A., Louisiana, 1996; M.A., Colorado, 1998;

Ph.D., Duke, 2004.

Brad K. Cressman (2005), professor of practice of edu-

cation and human services. B.S., Mansfield, 1974;

Ed.D., Lehigh, 1995.

David L. Cundall (1975, 1992), professor of biological

sciences. B.S., McGill, 1967; M.S., Arkansas, 1970;

Ph.D., 1974.

Frank E. Curtis (2009), assistant professor of industrial

and systems engineering. M.Sc., Politencnico di Milano

(Italy), 1999; Ph.D., 2003.

Stephen H. Cutcliffe (1976, 2002), chairperson of his-

tory and professor of science, technology, and society

and history; and director, STS program. A.B., Bates,

1968; M.A., Lehigh, 1973; Ph.D., 1976.

J. Hartley Daniels (1967, 1991), professor emeritus of

civil engineering. B.S., Alberta (Canada), 1955; M.S.,

Illinois, 1959; Ph.D., Lehigh, 1967; P.E., Alberta

(Canada), 1955; P.E., Pennsylvania, 1975.

Donald M. Davis (1974, 1984), professor of mathemat-

ics. B.S., M.I.T., 1967; Ph.D., Stanford, 1972.

Frank L. Davis (1987, 1993), associate professor of

political science. B.A., Nevada, 1973; M.A., North

Carolina, 1980; Ph.D., 1987.

Brian D. Davison (2001, 2009), associate professor of

computer science and engineering. B.S., Bucknell, 1991;

M.S., Rutgers, 1995: Ph.D., 2001.

James A. Dearden (1989, 2000), chairperson and profes-

sor of economics. A.B., Muhlenberg, 1982; Ph.D.,

Pennsylvania State, 1987.

Jack A. DeBellis (1964, 2002), professor emeritus of

English. B.A., Florida, 1957; M.A., Californiaat Los

Angeles, 1959; Ph.D., 1964.

Cirleen DeBlaere (2009), assistant professor of educa-

tion and human services. B.A., Boston, 2000; M.A.,

New York, 2004; Ph.D., Florida at Gainesville, 2009.

D. Richard Decker (1982, 1984), professor of electrical

and computer engineering. B.S., North Carolina State,

1961; M.S., 1963; Ph.D., Lehigh, 1970.

Mary E. Deily (1991, 2007), professor of economics.

B.A., Maryland, 1979; M.A., Harvard, 1983; Ph.D.,

1985.

Gary G. DeLeo (1979, 1996), professor of physics. B.S.,

SUNY at Fredonia, 1974; M.S., Connecticut, 1976;

Ph.D., 1979.

Terry J. Delph (1979, 1989), professor of mechanical

engineering and mechanics. B.S., Georgia Inst. of Tech.,

1967; M.S., Calif. Inst. of Tech., 1968; Ae.E., 1969;

Ph.D., Stanford, 1976.

Nandini Deo (2008), assistant professor of political sci-

ence. A.B., Bryn Mawr College, 2001; M.A., Yale, 2003;

M. Phil., 2004; Ph.D., 2007.

Volkmar Dierolf (2000, 2008), professor of physics.

M.A., Stuttgart (Germany), 1987; Ph.D., Utah, 1992.

David Diggs (1999), lecturer in music. B.Mus.,

Oklahoma City, 1969; M. Mus., SUNY, 1974.

Robin S. Dillon (1987, 2008), professor of philosophy.

B.A., Pittsburgh, 1978; M.A., 1981; Ph.D., 1987.

Yujie Ding (2002, 2005), professor of electrical and

computer engineering. B.S.E.E., Jilin (China), 1984;

M.S.E.E., Purdue, 1987; Ph.D., Johns Hopkins, 1990.

George A. Dinsmore (1955, 1987), professor emeritus

of civil engineering. B.E., Yale, 1946; M.S., Colorado,

1955.

Kathryn A. DiPietro (2002), assistant professor of edu-

cation and human services. B.A., North Florida, 1989;

M.E., 1994.

Vladimir Dobric (1987, 2000), professor of mathemat-

ics. B.S., Zagreb (Croatia), 1974; M.S., 1980; Ph.D.,

1985.

Bruce A. Dodson (1978, 1986), associate professor of

mathematics. B.S., Oregon, 1972; M.A., SUNY at Stony

Brook, 1975; Ph.D., 1976.

Elizabeth A. Dolan (2001, 2007), associate professor of

English. B.A., Davidson, 1989; M.A., North Carolina,

1992; Ph.D., 1999.

Beibei Dong (2009), assistant professor of marketing.

B.A., Tongji (China), 2002; Ph.D., Missouri at

Columbia, 2009.

Joseph A. Dowling (1958, 1994), distinguished profes-

sor emeritus of history. B.A., Lincoln Memorial, 1948;

M.A., New York, 1951; Ph.D., 1958.

George J. Du Paul (1992, 1998), chairperson and pro-

fessor of education and human services. B.A., Wesleyan,

1979; M.S., Rhode Island, 1983; Ph.D., 1985.

Judith A. Duffield (2004), associate professor of educa-

tion and human services. B.A., San Diego State, 1972;

M.A., 1986; Ph.D., Florida State, 1989.

Ian P. H. Duffy (1975, 1989), professor of history and

director, Eckardt Scholars program. B.A., Oxford

(England), 1965; M.A., 1966; Ph.D., 1974.

John N. DuPont (1991, 2007), Robert D. Stout distin-

guished professor of materials science and engineering.

B.S., Ohio, 1990; Ph.D., Lehigh, 1974.

Alwyn Eades (1997, 2009), professor emeritus of mate-

rials science and engineering. B.A., Trinity, Cambridge

(United Kingdom), 1962; Ph.D., Cambridge (United

Kingdom), 1967.

Nikolai Eberhardt (1962, 1995), professor emeritus of

electrical engineering. M.S., Munich (Germany), 1957;

Ph.D., 1962.

Alice L. Eckardt (1972, 1987), professor emerita of reli-

gion studies. B.A., Oberlin, 1944; M.A., Lehigh, 1966.

Dominic G. B. Edelen (1969, 1993), professor emeritus

of mathematics. B.E.S., Johns Hopkins, 1954; M.S.E.,

1956; Ph.D., 1956.

Suzanne M. Edwards (2008), assistant professor of

English. B.A., Amherst College, 1997; M.A., Chicago,

2002; Ph.D., 2006.

Bennett Eisenberg (1972, 1984), professor of mathe-

matics. A.B., Dartmouth, 1964; Ph.D., M.I.T., 1968.

Administration, Faculty and Staff 439

Mohamed S. El-Aasser (1972, 2009), vice president for

international affairs; director, emulsion polymers insti-

tute and professor of chemical engineering; B.S.,

Alexandria (Egypt), 1962; M.S., 1966; Ph.D., McGill

(Canada), 1972.

G. Mark Ellis (1967, 1989), associate dean emeritus,

college of arts and sciences and professor emeritus of his-

tory. B.A., Yale, 1943; M.A., Harvard, 1949; Ph.D.,

1952.

Fazil Erdogan (1957, 2001), G. Whitney Snyder profes-

sor emeritus of mechanical engineering and mechanics.

M.S., Istanbul Tec. (Turkey), 1948; Ph.D., Lehigh,

1955.

Edward B. Evenson (1973, 1985), professor of earth and

environmental sciences. B.S., Wisconsin, 1965; M.S.,

1970; Ph.D., Michigan, 1972.

Dale F. Falcinelli (1978, 2002), professor of practice of

management. B.S., Lehigh, 1970; M.S., 1972.

Matthias M. Falk (2003, 2009), associate professor of

biological sciences. B.A., Giessen (Germany), 1984;

M.A., 1987; Ph.D., Hiedelberg (Germany), 1992.

Hsai Yang Fang (1966, 1996), professor emeritus of civil

engineering. B.S., Hangchow, 1947; M.S., Purdue,

1957; Ph.D., West Virginia, 1966.

Patrick V. Farrell (2009), provost and vice president for

academic affairs and professor of mechanical engineering

and mechanics. B.S., Michigan, 1976; M.S., California

at Berkeley, 1978; Ph.D., Michigan, 1982.

Douglas D. Feaver (1956, 1985), professor emeritus of

classics. B.A., Toronto (Canada), 1948; M.A., Johns

Hopkins, 1949; Ph.D., 1951.

Benjamin Felzer (2008), assistant professor of earth and

environmental sciences. B.A., Swarthmore, 1987; M.S.,

Colorado at Boulder, 1991; Ph.D., Brown, 1995.

Vera Leigh Fennel (2008), associate professor of political

science and globalization and social change initiative.

M.A., Princeton, 1990; Ph.D., Chicago, 2001.

Jan S. Fergus (1976, 2008), professor emerita of English.

B.A., Stanford, 1964; Ph.D., CUNY, 1975.

Gregory S. Ferguson (1990, 1996), associate professor of

chemistry. B.S., William and Mary, 1982; M.S., Cornell,

1984; Ph.D., 1987.

Debra Field (2002, 2006), Cutler professor of practice

of music. B.A., Central Missouri State, 1976; B.A.,

Houston, 1979.

Elizabeth N. Fifer (1973, 1989), professor of English.

B.A., Michigan, 1965; M.A., 1966; Ph.D., 1969.

John W. Fisher (1961, 2002), Joseph T. Stuart professor

emeritus of civil engineering. B.S., Washington, 1956;

M.S., Lehigh, 1958; Ph.D., 1964; P.E., Illinois, 1960.

Robert A. Flowers II (2004), Danser distinguished fac-

ulty chair and professor of chemistry. B.S., East

Stroudsburg, 1986; Ph.D., Lehigh, 1991.

Robert T. Folk (1961, 1966), professor of physics. B.S.,

Lehigh, 1953; B.S., 1954; M.S., 1955; Ph.D., 1958.

David M. Folsom (2009), assistant professor of account-

ing. B.S., Brigham Young, 2001; M.A., 2002; Ph.D.,

Iowa, 2009.

Amy Forsyth (2001), associate professor of art and archi-

tecture. B. Arch., Pennsylvania State, 1986; M. Arch.,

Princeton, 1990.

Mary C. Foltz (2009), assistant professor of English.

B.A., Georgetown, 2000; M.A., Buffalo, 2005; Ph.D.,

2009.

William Forster (2009), assistant professor of manage-

ment. B.S., United States Air Force Academy at

Colorado, 1995; M.S., Air Force Institute of Technology

at Ohio, 1997; M.B.A., Colorado, 2003; Ph.D.,

Virginia, Darden School of Business, 2009.

Natalie Foster (1981, 1989), associate professor of

chemistry. B.S., Muhlenberg, 1971; M.S., Lehigh, 1973;

D.A., 1977; Ph.D., 1982.

W. Beall Fowler, Jr. (1966, 2001), professor emeritus of

physics. B.S., Lehigh, 1959; Ph.D., Rochester, 1963.

Drew Francis (1995, 2009), professor of theatre. B.A.,

SUNY at Brockport, 1980; M.F.A., Brandeis, 1983.

Dan M. Frangopol (2006), professor and Fazlur

Rahman Khan chair of civil and environmental engineer-

ing. Dipl.-Ing., Institute of Civil Engineering

(Romania), 1969; Ph.D., Liege (Belgium), 1976.

Barbara B. Frankel (1973, 1994), professor emerita of

sociology and anthropology. Ph.B., Chicago, 1947; B.A.,

Goddard, 1966; M.A., Temple, 1970; Ph.D., Princeton,

1973.

Douglas R. Frey (1977, 1998), professor of electrical

and computer engineering. B.S., Lehigh, 1973; M.S.,

1974; Ph.D., 1977.

Sharon M. Friedman (1974, 1986), professor of jour-

nalism and communication. B.A., Temple, 1964; M.A.,

Pennsylvania State, 1974.

Bruce D. Fritchman (1969, 2008), professor emeritus of

electrical and computer engineering. B.S., Lehigh, 1960;

B.S., 1961; M.S., 1963; Ph.D., 1967.

Nanette S. Fritschmann (2006), assistant professor of

special education. B.S., Woodbury, 1992; M.B.A., 1996;

M.S., California State, Fullerton, 2002; Ph.D., Kansas,

2006.

Matthew W. Gaffney (1971, 1979), professor emeritus

of education and human services. A.B., Hobart, 1935;

M.A., Rochester, 1941; Ed.D., Buffalo, 1953.

Edward J. Gallagher (1969, 1984), professor of English.

B.S., St. Joseph’s, 1964; Ph.D., Notre Dame, 1970.

Lucy C. Gans (1981, 1999), professor of art and design.

B.F.A., Lake Erie, 1971; M.F.A., Pratt, 1974.

Gerald Garb (1967, 1989), professor emeritus of eco-

nomics. B.S., Pennsylvania, 1948; M.A., California at

Berkeley, 1951; Ph.D., 1957.

Keith M. Gardiner (1987, 1989), director, center for

manufacturing systems engineering, and professor of

industrial and systems engineering. B.S., Manchester

(England), 1953; Ph.D., 1957; P.E., California, 1978.

Alice P. Gast (2006), president. B.S.c.ChE., Southern

California, 1980; M.S., Princeton, 1981; Ph.D., 1984.

John B. Gatewood (1978, 1991), professor of sociology

and anthropology. B.A., Illinois, 1971; M.A., 1974;

Ph.D., 1978.

440 Lehigh University Course Catalog 2009-2010

Robert C. Giambatista (2004), assistant professor of

management. B.S., Pennsylvania State, 1985; M.S.,

1987; Ph.D., Wisconsin-Madison, 1999.

Michael J. Gill (1998, 2004), associate professor of psy-

chology. B.A./B.S., North Carolina at Charlotte, 1993;

Ph.D., Texas at Austin, 1998.

John Martin Gillroy (2004), professor of international

relations and the environmental initiative. B.A., Drury,

1975; M.A., Queen’s, 1978; M.A., Chicago, 1980;

M.A., Vermont Law, 1994; M.A., Wolfson College &

Faculty of Law (United Kingdom), 2003; Ph.D.,

Chicago, 1985.

James G. Gilchrist (2004), P.C. Rossin assistant profes-

sor of chemical engineering. B.S., Washington, 1997;

Ph.D., Northwestern, 2003.

Norman J. Girardot (1980, 1987), university distin-

guished professor of religion studies. B.S., Holy Cross,

1965; M.A., Chicago, 1968; Ph.D., 1974.

Kerney Jebrell Glover (2006), assistant professor of

chemistry. B.A., Williams College, 1995; M.S.,

California, 1998; Ph.D., 2001.

Steven L. Goldman (1977), Andrew W. Mellon chair

and professor in humanities. B.S., Brooklyn Polytechnic,

1962; M.A., Boston, 1966; Ph.D., 1971.

Scott Paul Gordon (1995, 2008), professor of English

and co-director, Lawrence Henry Gipson Institute for

eighteenth-century studies. A.B., Harvard, 1989; M.A.,

1989; Ph.D., 1993.

James A. Greenleaf (1970, 2009), professor emeritus of

finance and law and director, institute for the study of

commodities. B.S., Pennsylvania State, 1964; M.S.,

Lehigh, 1966; Ph.D., New York, 1974.

Joachim L. Grenestedt (2000, 2007), professor of

mechanical engineering and mechanics. M.S., KTH in

Stockholm (Sweden), 1987; Ph.D., 1992; Docent, 1996.

Mikell P. Groover (1964, 1978), professor of industrial

and systems engineering, director, manufacturing tech-

nology laboratory. B.A., Lehigh, 1961; B.S., 1962; M.S.,

1966; Ph.D., 1969; P.E., Pennsylvania, 1972.

Jennifer H. Gross (2008), professor of practice of civil

and environmental engineering. B.S., Lehigh, 1994;

M.S., Texas, Austin, 1996.

Charles W. Guditus (1965, 1987), professor emeritus of

education and human services. B.S., Pennsylvania State,

1950; M.A., Bucknell, 1952; Ed.D., Lehigh, 1965.

Frank R. Gunter (1984, 1991), associate professor of

economics. B.A., Pennsylvania State, 1977; M.A., Johns

Hopkins, 1980; Ph.D., 1985.

James D. Gunton (1988), Joseph A. Waldschmitt chair

in physics. B.A., Linfield, 1958; B.A., Oxford (England),

1961; Ph.D., Stanford, 1967.

Parveen P. Gupta (1987, 2007), Frank L. Magee profes-

sor and chairperson of accounting. B.Com., Delhi

(India), 1976; L.L.B., 1980; M.B.A., Connecticut, 1983;

Ph.D., Pennsylvania State, 1987.

Reetika Gupta (2005), assistant professor of marketing.

B.A., St. Stephens College (India), 1994; Ph.D., Baruch

College, 2004.

Theodore Hailperin (1946, 1980), professor emeritus of

mathematics. B.S., Michigan, 1939; Ph.D., Cornell,

1943.

James A. Hall (1979, 1985), Peter E. Bennett chair of

computer science and business and associate professor of

accounting. B.A., Tulsa, 1974; M.A., 1975; Ph.D.,

Oklahoma State, 1979.

William R. Haller (2001), professor of practice of elec-

trical and computer engineering. B.S., Lehigh, 1973;

M.S., 1975.

Heidi Halvorson (2004), assistant professor of psycholo-

gy. B.A., Pennsylvania, 1995; M.A., Columbia; Ph.D.,

2001.

Thomas Hammond (2007), assistant professor of educa-

tion and human services. B.A., Yale, 1994; Ph.D.,

Virginia, 2007.

James E. Hansz (1974, 2001), professor emeritus of

marketing. B.A., Albion, 1964; M.A., Michigan State,

1965; Ph.D., Cincinnati, 1971.

Bruce R. Hargreaves (1977, 1983), associate professor of

earth and environmental sciences. B.A., Pomona, 1970;

Ph.D., California at Berkeley, 1977.

D. Gary Harlow (1982, 1992), chairperson and profes-

sor of mechanical engineering and mechanics. B.A.,

Western Kentucky, 1973; M.S., Cornell, 1976; Ph.D.,

1977.

Martin P. Harmer (1980, 1988), Alcoa Foundation pro-

fessor of materials science and engineering, and director,

center for advanced materials and nanotechnology. B.S.,

Leeds (England), 1976; Ph.D., 1980.

Robert R. Harson (1966, 1995), professor emeritus of

English. B.A., Wagner, 1963; M.A., Ohio, 1964; Ph.D.,

1966.

Terry Hart (2007), professor of practice of mechanical

engineering and mechanics and co-director of IDEAS

program. B.S., Lehigh; M.S., MIT; M.S., Rutgers.

Ronald J. Hartranft (1966, 2007), professor emeritus of

mechanical engineering and mechanics. B.S., Lehigh,

1963; M.S., 1964; Ph.D., 1966.

Miltiadis K. Hatalis (1987, 1995), professor of electrical

and computer engineering. B.S., Aristotle U. of

Thessaloniki (Greece), 1982; M.S., SUNY at Buffalo,

1984; Ph.D., Carnegie Mellon, 1987.

Jeffrey Heflin (2001, 2007), associate professor of com-

puter science and engineering. B.S., William and Mary,

1992; M.S., Maryland, 1999; Ph.D., 2001.

Ned D. Heindel (1966, 1973), Howard S. Bunn profes-

sor of chemistry. B.S., Lebanon Valley, 1959; M.S.,

Delaware, 1961; Ph.D., 1963.

B. Wesley Heiss (2006), professor of practice of design

arts. B.A., Bennington College, 1996; M.Arch., Rice,

2000.

Roy C. Herrenkohl (1966, 2006), professor emeritus of

sociology and anthropology and education. B.A.,

Washington and Lee, 1954; Ph.D., New York, 1966.

Richard W. Hertzberg (1964, 1998), New Jersey Zinc

professor emeritus of materials science and engineering.

B.S., CUNY, 1960; M.S., M.I.T., 1961; Ph.D., Lehigh,

1965.

Administration, Faculty and Staff 441

Anna P. Herz (1966, 1992), professor emerita of mod-

ern languages and literature. B.S., Pennsylvania, 1949;

M.A., 1950; M.A., Columbia, 1951; Ph.D.,

Pennsylvania, 1956.

Lori Herz (2008), professor of practice of chemical/bio

engineering. B.S., Cornell, 1993; Ph.D., Rutgers, 2000.

Warren R. Heydenberk (1973, 2005), professor emeri-

tus of education and human services. B.S., Western

Michigan, 1964; M.A., 1965; Ph.D., Northern

Colorado, 1971.

A. Peet Hickman (1994), professor of physics. B.A.,

Rice, 1969; M.A., 1971; Ph.D., 1973.

Frank H. Hielscher (1971, 2001), professor emeritus of

electrical and computer engineering. B.S., Drexel, 1961;

M.S., Denver, 1963; Ph.D., Illinois, 1966.

Donald J. Hillman (1960, 1964), professor of computer

science and engineering. B.A., Cambridge (England),

1955; M.A., 1959; Ph.D., 1962.

David J. Hinrichs (2005), lecturer of accounting. B.S.,

North Dakota, 1972; M.B.A., Lehigh, 1976; M.S.,

2000.

James B. Hobbs (1966, 1991), associate dean emeritus

of the college of arts and sciences, Frank L. Magee dis-

tinguished professor emeritus of business administration

(management and accounting). A.B., Harvard, 1952;

M.B.A., Kansas, 1957; D.B.A., Indiana, 1962.

Erica Hoelscher (1996, 2001), associate professor of the-

atre. B.A., Simpson, 1989; M.F.A., Northwestern, 1992.

Robin Hojnoski (2006), assistant professor of school

psychology. B.A., Smith College, 1991; M.A., Tufts,

1994; Ph.D., Massachusetts, Amherst, 2002.

Carl S. Holzinger (1964, 2008), professor emeritus of

electrical and computer engineering. B.S., Lehigh, 1956;

M.S., 1957; Ph.D., 1963.

James Tsai-An Hsu (1986, 1993), director, biopharma-

ceutical technology institute and professor of chemical

engineering. B.S., National Cheng-Kung (Taiwan),

1969; M.S., Rhode Island, 1972; Ph.D., Northwestern,

1979.

Ti Huang (1967, 1994), professor emeritus of civil and

environmental engineering. B.S., Tangshan (China),

1948; M.S., Michigan, 1952; Ph.D., 1960; P.E., New

Mexico, 1960.

Wei-Min Huang (1982, 1995), chairperson and profes-

sor of mathematics. B.S., Tamkang (Taiwan), 1973;

M.S., 1976; M.A., Rochester, 1980; Ph.D., 1982.

Xiaolei Huang (2006), assistant professor of computer

science and engineering. B.S., Tsinghua (China), 1999;

M.S., Rutgers, 2001; Ph.D., 2006.

John P. Huennekens (1984, 1994), professor of physics.

B.A., California at Berkeley, 1973; B.S., 1974; M.S.,

Illinois, 1976; Ph.D., Colorado, 1982.

Arthur E. Humphrey (1980, 1992), provost emeritus

and Theodore L. Diamond professor emeritus of chemi-

cal engineering. B.S., Idaho, 1948; M.S., 1950; Ph.D.,

Columbia, 1953; M.S., M.I.T., 1960; Ph.D. (hon.),

Idaho, 1974.

Almut Hupbach (2009), assistant professor of psycholo-

gy. Dipl., Trier (Germany), 1996; Dr. rer. nat., 2000.

James C.M. Hwang (1986, 1993), professor of electrical

and computer engineering. B.S., National Taiwan

(Taiwan), 1970; M.S., Cornell, 1973; Ph.D., 1976.

Thomas J. Hyclak (1979, 1990), professor of econom-

ics. B.A., Cleveland State, 1969; M.A., 1970; Ph.D.,

Notre Dame, 1976.

Diane T. Hyland (1981, 1998), chairperson and profes-

sor of psychology and director, center for social research.

B.A., Bates, 1974; M.A., Fairfield, 1978; M.S., Syracuse,

1980; Ph.D., 1981.

Arpana G. Inman (2002, 2008), associate professor of

education and human services. B.A., Ferguson (India),

1983; M.A., Pune (India), 1985; M.S., Wisconsin,

1985; Ph.D., Temple, 1999.

Jon T. Innes (1965, 2002), professor emeritus of eco-

nomics. B.S., Pennsylvania State, 1958; M.A., Oregon,

1967; Ph.D., 1967.

Mary Kathryn Iovine (2002, 2009), associate professor

of biological sciences. B.S., Carnegie Mellon, 1993;

Ph.D., Washington, 1998.

Garth Isaak (1993, 2005), professor of mathematics.

B.A., Bethel, 1984; Ph.D., Rutgers, 1990.

Murray Itzkowitz (1979, 1991), chairperson and profes-

sor of biological sciences. B.S., Illinois, 1965; M.S.,

Arizona State, 1967; Ph.D., Maryland, 1970.

Ralph J. Jaccodine (1981, 1995), Sherman Fairchild

professor emeritus in solid-state studies. B.S., U.S. Naval

Academy, 1947; M.S., Stevens Inst. of Tech., 1951;

Ph.D., Notre Dame, 1957.

Anand Jagota (2004), professor of chemical engineering

and director, bioengineering and applied life sciences.

Bachelor of Tech., Indian Inst. of Tech. (India), 1983;

M.S., Cornell, 1986; Ph.D., 1988.

Himanshu Jain (1985, 1993), Theodore L. Diamond

distinguished chair in engineering and applied science

and professor of materials science and engineering. B.S.,

Kanpur (India), 1970; M.S., Banaras (India), 1972;

M.Tech., Indian Inst. of Tech. (India), 1974; Eng.Sc.D.,

Columbia, 1979.

Sabrina Jedlicka (2008), assistant professor of materials

science and engineering. B.S., Kansas State, 2000, 2002;

B.S.E., 2002; M.S., Purdue, 2006; Ph.D., 2007.

Kristen L. Jellison (2003), assistant professor of civil and

environmental engineering. B.S., Cornell, 1997; Ph.D.,

M.I.T., 2003.

John Jirik (2008), assistant professor of journalism and

communications and globalization and social change ini-

tiative. B.A., Melbourne (Australia), 1986; M.A.,

Leicester (United Kingdom), 2000; Ph.D., Texas, Austin,

2008.

David L. Johnson (1984), associate professor of mathe-

matics. A.B., California at Berkeley, 1973; Ph.D.,

M.I.T., 1977.

Heather B. Johnson (2001, 2007), associate professor of

sociology and anthropology. B.A., Colby, 1994; M.A.,

Northeastern, 1997; Ph.D., 2001.

Kashi K. Johnson (1999, 2005), associate professor of

theatre. B.A., Lehigh, 1994; M.F.A., Pittsburgh, 1997.

Robert L. Johnson (1970, 1994), professor emeritus of

civil and environmental engineering. B.S., Iowa State,

1957; M.S., 1963; Ph.D., 1969; P.E., Iowa, 1961; P.E.,

Pennsylvania, 1971.

442 Lehigh University Course Catalog 2009-2010

Stanley H. Johnson (1973, 2006), professor emeritus of

mechanical engineering and mechanics. B.S., California

at Berkeley, 1962; M.S., 1967; Ph.D., 1973.

Marilyn Jones (2007), assistant professor of art and

architecture. B.A., Kutztown, 1973; B.F.A., Syracuse,

1976; M.F.A., Marywood, 2007.

Sharon Kalafut (2005), professor of practice of comput-

er science and engineering. B.S., Cedar Crest, 1988;

M.S., Pennsylvania State, 2003.

Arturs Kalnins (1965, 2004), professor emeritus of

mechanical engineering and mechanics. B.S., Michigan,

1955; M.S., 1956; Ph.D., 1960.

Alvin S. Kanofsky (1967, 1976), professor of physics.

B.A., Pennsylvania, 1961; M.S., 1962; Ph.D., 1966.

Stephanie Katz (1999), lecturer of Spanish, modern lan-

guages and literature. B.A., Pomona, 1970.

Chaim D. Kaufmann (1992, 1998), associate professor

of international relations. A.B., Princeton, 1983; Ph.D.,

Columbia, 1990.

Edwin J. Kay (1971, 1988), professor of computer sci-

ence and engineering. B.A., Rensselaer Polytechnic,

1964; M.S., Lehigh, 1966; Ph.D., 1968; Ph.D., 1971.

Jacob Y. Kazakia (1972, 1989), professor of engineering

mathematics. M.S., Istanbul Tech. (Turkey), 1968;

Ph.D., Lehigh, 1972.

John D. Keefe (1955, 1987), professor emeritus of eco-

nomics. B.S., Lehigh, 1948; M.A., Miami, 1955.

Dawn Keetley (2000, 2005), associate professor of

English. B.A., South Alabama, 1985; M.A., Pennsylvania

State, 1988; Ph.D., Wisconsin-Madison, 1994.

Joseph P. Kender (1968, 1998), professor emeritus of

education and human services. B.A., Mount St. Mary’s,

1952; M.A., Villanova, 1955; Ed.D., Pennsylvania,

1967.

Lee Kern (1999, 2004), Iacocca professor of education

and human services. B.A., California at Santa Barbara,

1978; M.A., Marshall, 1988; Ph.D., South Florida,

1993.

Samir A. Khabbaz (1960, 2006), professor emeritus of

mathematics. B.A., Bethel, 1955; M.A., Kansas, 1957;

Ph.D., 1960.

Christopher J. Kiely (2002), professor of materials sci-

ence and engineering. B.Sc., Bristol (UK), 1983; Ph.D.,

1986.

Yong W. Kim (1968, 1977), professor of physics. B.S.,

Seoul National (Korea), 1960; M.S., 1962; Ph.D.,

Michigan, 1968.

Arthur E. King (1976, 1990), professor of economics.

B.A., Middlebury, 1971; M.A., Ohio State, 1973; Ph.D.,

1976.

Jerry P. King (1962, 2007), dean emeritus of the gradu-

ate school and professor emeritus of mathematics.

B.S.E.E., Kentucky, 1958; M.S., 1959; Ph.D., 1962.

Richard J. Kish (1988, 2002), Allen C. DuBois distin-

guished professor, chairperson and professor of finance

and law. B.S., Clarion State, 1977; M.B.A., Florida,

1985; Ph.D., 1988.

Shalinee Kishore (2003, 2009), associate professor of

electrical and computer engineering. B.S., Rutgers,

1996; M.S., 1999; M.A., Princeton, 2001; Ph.D., 2002.

Andrew Klein (1979, 1990), professor of chemical engi-

neering. B.S., CUNY, 1961; M.S., Stevens Inst. of Tech.,

1965; Ph.D., North Carolina State, 1972.

Joseph P. Klein (1980, 1991), assistant dean emeritus of

the college of business and economics. B.S.,

Pennsylvania State, 1950; M.B.A., Lehigh, 1977.

Kamil Klier (1967, 1973), university distinguished pro-

fessor of chemistry. Dipl. Chem., Charles (Prague),

1954; Ph.D., Czechoslovakia Academy of Sciences

(Czechoslovakia), 1961.

Thomas L. Koch (2003), Daniel E. and Patricia M.

Smith endowed chair and director, center for optical

technologies and professor of electrical and computer

engineering. A.B., Princeton, 1977; Ph.D., California

Institute of Technology, 1982.

Bruce Koel (2005), professor of chemistry. B.S.,

Emporia State University, 1976; M.S., 1978, Ph.D.,

Texas at Austin, 1981.

Kenneth P. Kodama (1978, 1989), professor of earth

and environmental sciences. B.A., Pennsylvania, 1973;

M.S., Stanford, 1977; Ph.D., 1977.

Michael G. Kolchin (1979, 2009), professor emeritus of

management. B.A., Miami, 1965; M.B.A., 1970;

D.B.A., Indiana, 1980.

Henry F. Korth (2002), Robert W. Weiseman 1916

endowed engineering chair and chairperson of computer

science and engineering. B.A., Williams, 1977; M.A.,

Princeton, 1979; M.S.E., 1979; Ph.D., 1981.

Mayuresh V. Kothare (1998, 2008), R.L. McCann pro-

fessor of chemical engineering and co-director, chemical

process model and control center. B.S., Indian Inst. of

Tech. (India), 1991; M.S., California Inst. of Tech.,

1995; Ph.D., 1997.

Nevena Koukova (2005), assistant professor of market-

ing. B.S., National and World Economy (Bulgaria),

1994; B.A., Case Western Reserve, 2000; Ph.D.,

Maryland, 2005.

Kenneth L. Kraft (1990, 2001), professor of religion

studies. B.A., Harvard, 1971; M.A., Michigan, 1978;

Ph.D., Princeton, 1984.

Charles S. Kraihanzel (1962, 2001), professor emeritus

of chemistry. B.S., Brown, 1957; M.S., Wisconsin,

1959; Ph.D., 1962.

Jacqueline Krasas (2004), associate professor of sociolo-

gy and anthropology and director, women’s studies

program. B.A., Lehigh, 1987; M.A., Southern

California, 1993; Ph.D., 1995.

Steven Krawiec (1970, 2007), professor emeritus of bio-

logical sciences. B.A., Brown, 1963; Ph.D., Yale, 1968.

Gopal V. Krishnan (2008), Joseph R. Perella and Amy

M. Perella chair and professor of accounting. D. Comm,

Indian Merchants’ Chamber (India), 1975; M.B.A., Sam

Houston State, 1982; Ph.D., North Texas, 1986.

Arnold H. Kritz (1991), professor of physics. Sc.B.,

Brown, 1956; M.S., Yale, 1957; Ph.D., 1961.

Barry M. Kroll (1995), chairperson and Robert D.

Rodale professor in writing, English. B.A., Delaware,

1968; A.M., Boston , 1973; Ph.D., Michigan, 1977.

Administration, Faculty and Staff 443

Michael R. Kuchka (1988, 1994), associate professor of

biological sciences. B.A., Pennsylvania, 1978; Ph.D.,

Carnegie Mellon, 1984.

Robert Kuchta (2002), professor of practice of market-

ing. B.S., Newark, 1975; M.S., 1982.

Nicholas Ladany (1996, 2005), professor of counseling

psychology. B.S., Maryland, 1985; Ph.D., SUNY at

Albany, 1992.

Kong Wah Lai (2009), assistant professor of economics.

B.B.A., Hong Kong University of Science and Tech

(Hong Kong), 1997; M.E., University of Hong Kong

(Hong Kong), 2000; Ph.D., Pittsburgh, 2009.

Deborah Laible (2005, 2008), associate professor of psy-

chology. B.A., Brandeis, 1995; M.A.. Nebraska-Lincoln,

1997; Ph.D., 2000.

Janet M. Laible (2001, 2008), associate professor of

political science. B.A., California at Berkeley, 1990;

M.A., Yale, 1993; Ph.D., 2002.

Kai Landskron (2006), assistant professor of chemistry.

Undergraduate studies, Bayreuth (Germany), 1998;

Ph.D., Ludwig Maximilians (Germany), 2001.

James A. Largay III (1980), Arthur Andersen & Co.

Alumni professor of accounting. B.S., Denver, 1964;

M.B.A., Texas Tech., 1965; M.S., Cornell, 1970; Ph.D.,

1971. C.P.A., Colorado, 1967.

Arthur I. Larky (1954, 1995), professor emeritus of elec-

trical and computer engineering. B.S., Lehigh, 1952;

M.S., Princeton, 1953; Ph.D., Stanford, 1957.

John W. Larsen (1984, 2003), professor emeritus of

chemistry. B.S., Tufts, 1962; Ph.D., Purdue, 1966.

Judith N. Lasker (1981, 1989), chairperson and NEH

distinguished professor of sociology and anthropology.

B.A., Brandeis, 1969; M.A., Harvard, 1973; Ph.D., 1976.

Ian Laurenzi (2004), assistant professor of chemical

engineering. B.S., Albany, 1995; B.S., Rensselaer

Polytechnic Institute, 1997; Ph.D., Pennsylvania, 2002.

Michelle LeMaster (2006), assistant professor of history.

B.A., Western Washington, 1992; M.A., Johns Hopkins,

1997; Ph.D., 2002.

Kiri Lee (1994, 2002), associate professor of modern

languages and literature. B.A., Nara Women’s (Japan),

1981; M.Ed., Lesley, 1982; M.A., Harvard, 1988;

Ph.D., 1993.

Linda S. Lefkowitz (1974, 1979), associate professor of

Spanish, modern languages and literature. B.A., Queens,

1964; M.A., California at Berkeley, 1966; Ph.D.,

Princeton, 1973.

Henry Leidheiser, Jr. (1968, 1990), professor emeritus

of chemistry. B.S., Virginia, 1941; M.S., 1943; Ph.D.,

1946.

Gerard P. Lennon (1980, 2006), associate dean of

undergraduate studies and research in the P.C. Rossin

college of engineering and applied science and professor

of civil and environmental engineering. B.S., Drexel,

1975; M.S., Cornell, 1977; Ph.D., 1980.

Edward K. Levy (1967, 1976), professor of mechanical

engineering and mechanics and director, energy research

center. B.S., Maryland, 1963; M.S., M.I.T., 1964; Sc.D.,

1967.

David W. P. Lewis (1994), professor emeritus of modern

languages and literature. B.A., Oxford (England), 1953;

M.A., 1968; Dipl. European Studies, College of Europe

(Bruges), 1957; Dr. de l’Univ., Sorbonne (France), 1973.

Tiffany J. Li (2002, 2008), associate professor of electri-

cal and computer engineering. B.S., Beijing (China),

1997; M.E., Texas A&M, 1999; Ph.D., 2002.

Jerome C. Licini (1987, 1993), associate professor of

physics. B.A., Princeton, 1980; Ph.D., M.I.T., 1987.

John O. Liebig, Jr. (1946, 1984), professor emeritus of

civil and environmental engineering. B.S., Lehigh, 1940;

M.S., 1949.

Lin Lin (2004), assistant professor of management. B.S.,

USTC (China), 1996; M.S., Arizona, 2000; Ph.D.,

2004.

J. Ralph Lindgren (1965, 1995), Clara H. Stewardson

professor emeritus of philosophy. B.S., Northwestern,

1959; M.A., Marquette, 1961; Ph.D., 1963.

Benjamin Litt (1970, 2002), professor emeritus of man-

agement and marketing. B.M.E., Brooklyn Polytechnic,

1950; M.S., Stevens, 1957; M.B.A., New York, 1964;

Ph.D., 1970.

Jeremy Littau (2009), assistant professor of journalism

and communication. B.A., Biola, 1997; M.A., Missouri,

2007; Ph.D., Missouri School of Journalism, 2009.

Tianbo Liu (2005, 2009), associate professor of chem-

istry. B.S., Peking (China), 1994; Ph.D., Stony Brook,

1999.

Daniel P. Lopresti (2003, 2009), professor of computer

science and engineering. A.B., Dartmouth, 1982; M.A.,

Princeton, 1984; Ph.D., 1987.

Edward E. Lotto (1983, 1989), associate professor of

English and director, center for writing, math and study

skills. B.A., Amherst, 1969; M.A., Boston, 1973; Ph.D.,

Indiana, 1980.

Roland W. Lovejoy (1962, 1993), professor emeritus of

chemistry. B.A., Reed, 1955; Ph.D., Washington State,

1960.

Linda J. Lowe-Krentz (1986, 2002), professor of biolog-

ical sciences. B.A., Northwestern, 1974; Ph.D., 1980.

Le-Wu Lu (1961, 2004), Bruce G. Johnston professor

emeritus of civil engineering. B.S., National Taiwan

(Taiwan), 1954; M.S., Iowa State, 1956; Ph.D., Lehigh,

1960.

Yvonne Y. Lu (2009), assistant professor of accounting.

B.A., Texas, Austin, 1994; M.P.A., 1994; Ph.D.,

Stanford, 2004.

Robert A. Lucas (1959, 1969), associate chair and asso-

ciate professor of mechanical engineering and mechanics.

B.S., Lehigh, 1957; M.S., 1959; Ph.D., 1964.

Timothy E. Lucas (2004), professor of practice of educa-

tion and human services. B.A., Pearson State, 1973;

M.A., William Paterson, 1979, 1983.

Frank S. Luh (1965, 1995), professor emeritus of

accounting. B.S., National Taiwan (Taiwan), 1957;

M.A., Illinois, 1961; Ph.D., Ohio State, 1965.

John F. Lule (1990, 1999), Joseph B. McFadden distin-

guished professor of journalism. B.A., SUNY at

Binghamton, 1976; M.A., Temple, 1980; Ph.D.,

Georgia, 1987.

444 Lehigh University Course Catalog 2009-2010

J. Gary Lutz (1971, 1981), professor of education and

human services. B.S., Lehigh, 1965; M.S., 1968; Ed.D.,

1969.

William L. Luyben (1967, 1973), professor of chemical

engineering and co-director, chemical process model and

control center. B.S., Pennsylvania State, 1955; Ph.D.,

Delaware, 1963.

Charles E. Lyman (1984, 1990), professor of materials

science and engineering. B.S., Cornell, 1968; Ph.D.,

M.I.T., 1974.

Yung-Yu Ma (2009), assistant professor of finance. B.A.,

Williams College, 1993; M.S., Portland State, 2004;

Ph.D., Utah, 2009.

Alistair K. MacPherson (1971, 1975), professor of

mechanical engineering and mechanics. B.S., Sydney

(Australia), 1957; M.S., 1965; Ph.D., 1967.

Stefan Maas (2003), assistant professor of biological sci-

ences. M.A., Free University (Germany), 1993; Ph.D.,

Heidelberg (Germany), 1996.

Douglas M. Mahony (2009), assistant professor of man-

agement. B.A., Toronto (Canada), 1993; Ph.D., Rutgers,

School of Management and Labor Relations, 2001.

Barbara C. Malt (1985, 1998), professor of psychology.

B.A., Wesleyan, 1978; Ph.D., Stanford, 1982.

Patricia H. Manz (2003, 2009), associate professor of

school psychology. B.S., Saint Joseph’s, 1986; M.S.Ed.,

Pennsylvania, 1987; Ph.D., 1994.

Arnold R. Marder (1986, 2007), Robert D. Stout distin-

guished professor emeritus of materials science and

engineering. B.S., Brooklyn Polytechnic, 1962; M.S.,

1965; Ph.D., Lehigh, 1968; P.E., 1988.

Jutta Marzillier (2004), professor of practice of biologi-

cal sciences. B.S., Giessen (Germany), 1984; M.S., 1988,

1989; Ph.D., Heidelberg (Germany), 1993.

James M. Maskulka (1985, 1991), associate professor of

marketing. B.S., Youngstown State, 1972; M.B.A., 1975;

D.B.A., Kent State, 1984.

Janice Bially Mattern (2003, 2007), associate professor

of international relations. B.A., Wisconsin-Madison,

1991; M.A., Yale, 1994; M. Phil., 1996; Ph.D., 1998.

Richard K. Matthews (1986, 1991), chairperson and

NEH distinguished professor of political science. B.A.,

Muhlenberg, 1974; M.A., Delaware, 1976; Ph.D.,

Toronto (Canada), 1981.

Alastair D. McAulay (1992, 1992), professor of electri-

cal and computer engineering. B.A., Cambridge, 1961;

M.A., 1964; Ph.D., Carnegie Mellon, 1974.

George E. McCluskey, Jr. (1965, 1976), professor of

physics. B.A., Pennsylvania, 1960; M.S., 1963; Ph.D.,

1965.

Judith Ann McDonald (1991, 2009), professor of eco-

nomics. B.A., Western Ontario (Canada), 1979; Ph.D.,

Princeton, 1986.

Iveta Silova McGurty (2007), assistant professor of edu-

cation and human services. B.A., Latvia (Latvia), 1994;

M.A., Teachers College, Columbia, 1996; M.Ed., 1997;

M.Phil., 2000; Ph.D., Columbia, 2002.

Anthony J. McHugh (2002), Ruth H. and Sam Madrid

endowed chair and chairperson of chemical engineering.

B.S., Cleveland State, 1966; M.S., Delaware, 1970;

Ph.D., 1972.

James R. McIntosh (1966, 1984), professor of sociology

and anthropology. B.A., Colby, 1960; M.A., New School

for Social Research, 1963; Ph.D., Syracuse, 1970.

John R. McNamara (1973, 2001), professor emeritus of

economics. B.A., Columbia, 1959; M.A., Rensselaer,

1965; Ph.D., 1971.

M. Virginia McSwain (2007), assistant professor of

physics. B.S., Georgia Institute of Tech., 1999; M.S.,

2001; Ph.D., Georgia State, 2004.

Norman P. Melchert (1962, 1995), William W. Selfridge

professor emeritus of philosophy. B.A., Wartburg, 1955;

B.D., Lutheran Theological Seminary, 1958; M.A.,

Pennsylvania, 1959; Ph.D., 1964.

Matthew A. Melone (1993, 2007), professor of law.

B.S., Villanova, 1980; C.P.A., Pennsylvania, 1982; M.T.,

Villanova School of Law, 1987; J.D., Pennsylvania,

1993.

Anne S. Meltzer (1990, 2004), Herbert J. and Ann L.

Siegel dean of the college of arts and sciences and profes-

sor of earth and environmental sciences and director,

Lehigh earth observatory. B.S., Guilford, 1980; M.S.,

North Carolina at Chapel Hill, 1982; Ph.D., Rice,

1989.

Michael Mendelson (1995, 2001), associate professor of

philosophy. B.A., Massachusetts-Boston, 1982; M.A.,

California at San Diego, 1988; Ph.D., 1990.

Rajan M. Menon (1985, 1991), Monroe J. Rathbone

distinguished professor and chairperson of international

relations. B.A., Delhi (India), 1974; M.A., Lehigh,

1975; Ph.D., Illinois-Urbana, 1979.

Joseph R. Merkel (1962, 1988), professor emeritus of

chemistry. B.S., Moravian, 1948; M.S., Purdue, 1950;

Ph.D., Maryland, 1952.

Chad D. Meyerhoefer (2008), assistant professor of eco-

nomics. B.S., Binghamton, 1997; M.S., Cornell, 2001;

Ph.D., 2002.

Fortunato J. Micale (1966, 1995), professor emeritus of

chemistry. B.A., St. Bonaventure, 1956; B.S., Niagara,

1959; M.S., Purdue, 1961; Ph.D., Lehigh, 1965.

John A. Mierzwa (1966, 1995), professor emeritus of

counseling psychology. B.S., Ohio, 1954; M.A., 1955;

M.Ed., Harvard, 1958; Ed.D., 1961.

Jeffrey R. Milet (1976, 1989), professor of theatre. B.S.,

Bridgeport, 1963; M.F.A., Yale, 1969.

Rebecca S. Miller (2004), professor of practice of chem-

istry. B.S., Shippensburg, 1992; Ph.D., Duke, 1996.

Robert H. Mills (1964, 1991), professor emeritus of

accounting. B.S., Colorado, 1949; M.S., 1955; Ph.D.,

Wisconsin, 1960; C.P.A., Illinois, 1957.

Wojciech Z. Misiolek (1997, 2005), Loewy chair and

professor of materials forming and processing; director,

institute for metal forming and professor of materials sci-

ence and engineering. M.Eng., Mining and Metallurgy

(Poland), 1980; Sc.D., 1985.

Graham Mitchell (2006), professor of practice of man-

agement. B.S., Westminster (England); Ph.D.

Administration, Faculty and Staff 445

Jeetain Mittal (2009), assistant professor of chemical

engineering. B. Tech., Punjab Technical (India), 2000;

M. Tech., Indian Inst. of Tech. (India), 2002; Ph.D.,

Texas at Austin, 2007.

Alden J. Moe (1988, 2003), university service professor

emeritus of education. B.S., Minnesota, 1963; M.A.,

Clarke, 1967; Ph.D., Minnesota, 1971.

Seth Moglen (1999, 2005), associate professor of

English. B.S., Yale, 1986; Ph.D., California at Berkeley,

1999.

Bruce E. Moon (1987, 1997), professor of international

relations. B.A., Ohio State, 1972; Ph.D., 1977.

Carl L. Moore (1948, 1986), professor emeritus of

accounting. B.A., Bucknell, 1943; M.A., Pittsburgh,

1948; C.P.A., Pennsylvania, 1952.

David Moore (2007), assistant professor of chemistry.

B.A., Williams College, 1992; M.S., North Carolina at

Charlotte, 1997; Ph.D., North Carolina at Chapel Hill,

2001.

Edward P. Morgan (1976, 1989), university distin-

guished professor of political science. B.A., Oberlin,

1968; M.A., Brandeis, 1973; Ph.D., 1975.

Donald P. Morris (1993, 1998), associate professor of

earth and environmental sciences. B.A., Colorado, 1978;

M.A., 1985; Ph.D., 1990.

Carl O. Moses (1987, 2005), deputy provost for aca-

demic affairs and associate professor of earth and

environmental sciences. A.B., Princeton, 1978; M.S.,

Virginia, 1982; Ph.D., 1987.

Gordon B. Moskowitz (2001, 2004), associate professor

of psychology. B.S., McGill (Canada), 1984; M.A., New

York, 1989; Ph.D., 1992.

Peter Mueller (1980, 1983), associate professor of civil

engineering. Dipl. Ing., ETH (Switzerland), 1967; Dr.

sc. tech., 1978.

Sean Mullen (2007), assistant professor of biological sci-

ences. B.S., Dickinson College, 1995; M.S., Villanova,

2001; Ph.D., Cornell, 2006.

Rosemary J. Mundhenk (1973, 1986), professor of

English. B.A., Southern California, 1967; M.A.,

California at Los Angeles, 1969; Ph.D., 1972.

Vincent G. Munley (1980, 1992), Iacocca professor of

economics. B.A., Lehigh, 1974; B.S., 1974; M.A.,

SUNY at Binghamton, 1977; Ph.D., 1979.

Héctor Muñoz-Avila (2001, 2007), associate professor of

computer science and engineering. B.S., Andes

(Colombia), 1989; B.S., 1991; M.S., 1991; Ph.D.,

Kaiserslautern (Germany), 1998.

Ziad W. Munson (2003, 2009), associate professor of

sociology and anthropology. B.A., Chicago, 1993;

Ph.D., Harvard, 2002.

David H. Myers (2000, 2004), Amy and Joseph R.

Perella ’64 professor and professor of practice. B.A.,

Wesleyan, 1983; M.B.A., New York, 1987; Ph.D.,

Washington, 2001.

Paul B. Myers, Jr. (1962, 2002), professor emeritus of

earth and environmental sciences. B.A., Colgate, 1955;

M.S., Lehigh, 1957; Ph.D., 1960.

Roger N. Nagel (1982), Harvey E. Wagner chair in

manufacturing systems engineering, professor of com-

puter science and engineering; director, intelligent

systems laboratory. B.S., Stevens Inst. of Tech., 1964;

M.S., 1969; Ph.D., Maryland, 1976.

Clay J. Naito (2002, 2007), associate professor of civil

and environmental engineering. B.S., Hawaii, 1993;

M.S., California at Berkeley, 1994; Ph.D., 2000.

Monica Najar (2000, 2006), associate professor of histo-

ry and co-director, Lawrence Henry Gipson Institute for

eighteenth-century studies. B.A., California at Berkeley,

1990; M.A., Wisconsin-Madison, 1992; Ph.D., 2000.

Terrence J. Napier (1992, 2007), professor of mathe-

matics. B.S., Notre Dame, 1982; M.S., Chicago, 1983;

Ph.D., 1989.

Kevin Narizny (2007), assistant professor of internation-

al relations. B.A., College of Liberal Arts, Drew, 1995;

M.A., Princeton, 1997; Ph.D., 2001.

George A. Nation, III (1985, 2000), Sue and Eugene

Mercy Jr. professor of business and economics, and asso-

ciate professor of law. B.S., Villanova, 1980; J.D., 1983.

Chitra Nayar (2004), lecturer of management. B.Sc.,

Aston (England), 1981; M.B.A., Iowa, 1987.

Nandkumar (Nandu) Nayar (2001), Hans J. Baer chair

and professor of international finance. B. Tech., Indian

Instit. of Tech. (India), 1981; M.S., Iowa, 1984; Ph.D.,

1988.

Robert W. Neel (2009), assistant professor of mathemat-

ics. B.S., Stanford, 1999; Ph.D., Harvard, 2005.

Sudhakar Neti (1978, 1992), professor of mechanical

engineering and mechanics. B.S., Osmania (India),

1968; M.S., Kentucky, 1970; Ph.D., 1977.

William Newman (1968, 2003), professor emeritus of

psychology. B.S., CUNY, 1964; Ph.D., Stanford, 1968.

Mary A. Nicholas (1989, 1995), associate professor of

modern languages and literature. B.A., Wyoming, 1977;

M.A., Illinois, 1979; Ph.D., Pennsylvania, 1988.

Ageliki Nicolopoulou (1996, 2009), professor of psy-

chology. B.A., Rhode Island, 1973; M.A., 1977; Ph.D.,

California at Berkeley, 1984.

Herman F. Nied (1995), professor of mechanical engi-

neering and mechanics. B.S., Rochester, 1976; M.S.,

Lehigh, 1978; Ph.D., 1981.

R. Sam Niedbala (2004), professor of practice of chem-

istry. B.S., East Stroudsburg, 1982; M.S., Lehigh, 1983;

Ph.D., 1986.

Karl H. Norian (1982), associate professor of electrical

and computer engineering. B.S., Queen Mary (England),

1973; Ph.D., Imperial (England), 1977.

Michael R. Notis (1967, 2004), professor emeritus of

materials science and engineering. B.S., Lehigh, 1960;

M.S., 1963; Ph.D., 1969.

Christine G. Novak (2009), professor of practice of

school psychology and special education. B.A., Missouri-

Kansas, 1973; M.A., 1979; Ph.D., Iowa, 1992.

John G. Nyby (1977, 1989), professor of biological sci-

ences. B.A., Texas, 1968; Ph.D., 1974.

446 Lehigh University Course Catalog 2009-2010

Anthony P. O’Brien (1987, 1998), professor of econom-

ics. A.B., California at Berkeley, 1976; Ph.D., 1987.

Holona L. Ochs (2009), assistant professor of political

science. B.S., Kansas State, 1997; M.S., 1999; M.A.,

Kansas, 2005; Ph.D., 2007.

John B. Ochs (1979, 1990), professor of mechanical

engineering and mechanics and director, integrated

product development program. B.S., Villanova, 1971;

M.S., Pennsylvania State, 1976; Ph.D., 1980.

Nicholas G. Odrey (1983, 1991), professor of industrial

and systems engineering. B.S., Pennsylvania State, 1964;

M.S., 1968; Ph.D., 1978.

Kathleen K. Olson (2000, 2006), associate professor of

journalism and communication. B.S., Northwestern,

1985; J.D., Virginia School of Law, 1989; M.A., Texas,

1995; Ph.D., North Carolina, 2000.

Laura K. Olson (1974, 1985), professor of political sci-

ence. B.A., CUNY, 1967; M.A., Colorado, 1972; Ph.D.,

1974.

Padraig G. O’Seaghdha (1990, 1996), associate profes-

sor of psychology. B.A., Univ. College Cork (Ireland),

1973; M.A., 1977; Ph.D., Toronto (Canada), 1986.

Alexis Ostapenko (1957, 1994), professor emeritus of

civil and environmental engineering. Dipl. Ing., Munich

Inst. of Tech. (Germany), 1951; Sc.D., M.I.T., 1957.

H. Daniel Ou-Yang (1988, 2000), professor of physics.

B.S., Fu-Jen Catholic (Taiwan), 1975; M.S., 1977;

Ph.D., California at Los Angeles, 1985.

Jerzy A. Owczarek (1960, 1995), professor emeritus of

mechanical engineering and mechanics. Dip. Ing., Polish

Univ. College (England), 1950; Ph.D., London

(England), 1954.

Bradford B. Owen (1945, 1974), professor emeritus of

biology. B.A., Williams, 1934; M.A., 1936; Ph.D.,

Harvard, 1940.

T.M. Ozsoy (1984, 1996), professor of mechanical engi-

neering and mechanics. B.S., Technical University of

Istanbul (Turkey), 1971; M.S., 1971; Ph.D., 1980.

Alparslan Öztekin (1994, 2000), associate professor of

mechanical engineering and mechanics. B.S., Technical

University of Istanbul (Turkey), 1982; M.S., Arizona,

1987; Ph.D., Illinois at Urbana-Champaign, 1991.

Murat Ozturk (2008), professor of practice of mechani-

cal engineering and mechanics, B.S., Technical

University of Istanbul (Turkey), 1982; M.S., Lehigh,

1987; Ph.D., 1992.

Dominic J. Packer (2009), assistant professor of psychol-

ogy. B.A., McGill (Canada), 2001; M.A., Toronto

(Canada), 2003; Ph.D., 2007.

Shamim N. Pakzad (2008), P.C. Rossin assistant profes-

sor of civil and environmental engineering. B.S., Bahai

Inst. For Higher Ed. (Iran), 1995; M.Sc., San Jose State,

2000; Ph.D., California at Berkeley, 2008.

Sibel Pamukcu (1986, 2005), professor of civil and envi-

ronmental engineering. B.Sc., Bogazici (Turkey), 1978;

M.S., Louisiana State, 1981; Ph.D., 1986.

David W. Pankenier (1986, 1998), professor of Chinese,

modern languages and literature. B.A., Rochester, 1968;

M.A., Stanford, 1979; Ph.D., 1983.

John W. Paul (1974, 1994), professor of accounting.

B.A., Cornell, 1965; M.B.A., Lehigh, 1971; Ph.D.,

1978. C.P.A., Florida, 1972.

Barbara R. Pavlock (1989, 1991), associate professor of

English and director, classical studies program. B.A.,

Barnard, 1969; M.A., Yale, 1972; Ph.D., Cornell, 1977.

Frank J. Pazzaglia (1999, 2007), chairperson and profes-

sor of earth and environmental sciences. B.S.,

Pennsylvania State, 1986; M.S., New Mexico, 1989;

Ph.D., Pennsylvania State, 1993.

Raymond Pearson (1990, 2003), professor of materials

science and engineering and director, center for polymer

science and engineering. B.S., New Hampshire, 1980;

Ph.D., Michigan, 1990.

Alan W. Pense (1957, 1997), provost emeritus and pro-

fessor emeritus of materials science and engineering.

B.S., Cornell, 1957; M.S., Lehigh, 1959; Ph.D., 1962.

Pam Pepper (1986, 2005), chairperson and professor of

theatre. B.A., Wooster, 1975; M.F.A., Ohio, 1981.

Eugene Perevalov (2001, 2008), associate professor of

industrial and systems engineering. M.S., Moscow

Engineering Physics Inst. (Russia), 1993; Ph.D., Texas,

1998.

N. Duke Perreira (1985, 1988), associate professor of

mechanical engineering and mechanics. B.S., Rensselaer

Polytechnic, 1972; M.S., 1973; Ph.D., California at Los

Angeles, 1977; P.E., Hawaii, 1980.

Susan Fuesko Perry (2006), professor of practice of

chemical engineering. B.A., Hartwick, 1986; Ph.D.,

Pennsylvania State, 1992.

Stephen P. Pessiki (1990, 2005), P.C. Rossin Senior pro-

fessor and chairperson and professor of civil and

environmental engineering. B.S., Drexel, 1984; M.S.,

Cornell, 1986; Ph.D., 1990.

Tom F. Peters (1989, 2008), professor emeritus of art

and architecture, and history. M. Arch., ETH

(Switzerland), 1969; Dr.sc., 1977; Habilitation Fuer

Technikgeschichte TH, Darmstadt, 1992.

Stephen C. Peters (2003), Frank Hook assistant profes-

sor of earth and environmental sciences. B.S., Bates,

1992; M.S., Dartmouth, 1997; Ph.D, Michigan, 2001.

John Pettegrew (1996, 2001), associate professor of his-

tory and director of the American studies program. B.A.,

Valparaiso, 1981; J.D., Marquette, 1984; M.A.,

Chicago, 1986; Ph.D., Wisconsin-Madison, 1994.

Marietta Peytcheva (2008), assistant professor of

accounting. B.S., Rutgers, 1998; Ph.D., 2007.

C. Robert Phillips III (1976, 1987), professor of history.

B.A., Yale, 1970; B.A., Oxford (England), 1972; M.A.,

1979; Ph.D., Brown, 1974.

Warren A. Pillsbury (1962, 1995), professor emeritus of

economics. B.A., New Hampshire, 1953; M.S., Florida

State, 1958; Ph.D., Virginia, 1963.

Brian K. Pinaire (2003, 2009), associate professor of

political science. B.A., Whitman, 1997; Ph.D., Rutgers,

2003.

Louis J. Plebani, Jr. (1974, 1982), associate professor of

industrial and systems engineering. B.S., Lehigh, 1968;

M.S., American, 1972; Ph.D., Lehigh, 1976.

Peter P. Poole (1987, 2001), professor emeritus of man-

agement. B.S., Northeastern, 1959; M.B.A., 1964;

Ph.D., Pennsylvania State, 1986.

Administration, Faculty and Staff 447

Miren E. Portela (2003, 2009), associate professor of

modern languages and literature. B.A., Navarra (Spain),

1997; M.A., North Carolina, 1999; Ph.D., 2003.

Corinne A. Post (2008), assistant professor of manage-

ment. B.A., Geneva (Switzerland), 1994; M.A.,

Lausanne (Switzerland), 1996; Ph.D., Rutgers Business

School, 2003.

Antonio Prieto (1985, 1992), associate professor of

modern languages and literature. B.A., Princeton, 1976;

M.A., 1980; Ph.D., 1986.

Hayden N. Pritchard (1964, 1993), professor emeritus

of earth and environmental sciences. B.A., Princeton,

1955; M.S., Lehigh, 1960; Ph.D., 1963.

Clifford S. Queen (1972, 1976), associate professor of

mathematics. Ph.D., Ohio State, 1979.R

Shelden H. Radin (1963, 2001), professor emeritus of

physics. B.S., Worcester Polytechnic, 1958; M.S., Yale,

1959; Ph.D., 1963.

Theodore K. Ralphs (2000, 2006), associate professor of

industrial and systems engineering. B.S., Carnegie

Mellon, 1991; M.S., 1991; Ph.D., Cornell, 1995.

Joan M. Ramage (2004), assistant professor of earth and

environmental sciences. B.A., Carleton, 1993; M.S.,

Pennsylvania State, 1995; Ph.D., Cornell, 2001.

Michael L. Raposa (1985, 1997), Edmund W. Fairchild

chair in American studies and professor of religion stud-

ies. B.A., Yale, 1977; M.A.R., Yale Divinity School,

1979; Ph.D., Pennsylvania, 1987.

Richard J. Redd (1958, 1995), professor emeritus of art.

B.Ed., Toledo, 1953; M.F.A., Iowa, 1958.

Steven L. Regen (1985, 1999), university distinguished

professor of chemistry. A.B., Rutgers, 1968; Ph.D.,

M.I.T., 1972.

Tina Q. Richardson (1991, 1997), associate professor of

counseling psychology. B.A., Maryland, 1985; M.A.,

1988; Ph.D., 1991.

Martin L. Richter (1965, 2002), professor emeritus of

psychology. B.A., Rutgers, 1960; Ph.D., Indiana, 1965.

Jeffrey M. Rickman (1993, 2005), Harold Chambers

junior professor and professor of materials science and

engineering. B.S., Miami at Ohio, 1982; B.A. 1982;

M.S., Carnegie Mellon, 1984; Ph.D., 1989.

James M. Ricles (1992, 2000), Bruce G. Johnston profes-

sor of structural engineering and professor of civil and

environmental engineering. B.S., Texas, 1979; M.S., 1980;

Ph.D., California at Berkeley, 1987; P.E., California.

Catherine M. Ridings (2000, 2006), associate professor

of management. B.S., Villanova, 1988; M.B.A., Drexel,

1994; Ph.D., 2000.

Augustine Ripa, Jr. (1979, 1994), associate dean of

undergraduate programs in the college of arts and sci-

ences and professor of theatre. B.A., Loyola, 1974;

M.F.A., Northwestern, 1976.

James E. Roberts (1985, 1991), associate professor of

chemistry. B.S., Illinois at Urbana, 1977; B.S., 1977;

Ph.D., Northwestern, 1982.

Richard Roberts (1962, 2004), professor emeritus of

mechanical engineering and mechanics. B.S., Drexel,

1961; M.S., Lehigh, 1962; Ph.D., 1964.

Donald O. Rockwell, Jr. (1970, 1976), Paul B.

Reinhold professor and professor of mechanical engi-

neering and mechanics. B.S., Bucknell, 1960; M.S.,

Lehigh, 1964; Ph.D., 1968.

Robert E. Rosenwein (1972, 1986), professor of sociolo-

gy and anthropology. B.A., California at Berkeley, 1962;

M.A., Michigan, 1963; Ph.D., 1970.

Nancy S. Ross (1996), lecturer of journalism and com-

munication. B.S., Cincinnati, 1968; M.A.T., 1969.

Vyacheslav Rotkin (2004), assistant professor of physics.

M.S., St. Petersburg (Russia), 1994; Ph.D., 1997.

Robert Rozehnal (2003, 2009), associate professor of

religion studies. B.A., Puget Sound, 1991; M.A.,

Wisconsin-Madison, 1995; Ph.D., Duke, 2003.

Herbert Rubenstein (1967, 1989), professor emeritus of

leadership, instruction and technology. B.A., Pennsylvania,

1942; M.A., 1943; Ph.D., Columbia, 1949.

James S. Saeger (1967, 1985), professor of history. B.A.,

Ohio State, 1960; M.A., 1963; Ph.D., 1969.

Dork L. Sahagian (2004), director, environmental initia-

tive and professor of earth and environmental sciences.

B.S., Rensselaer Polytechnic Inst., 1997; M.S., Rutgers,

1980; Ph.D., Chicago, 1987.

Jesus M. Salas (2008), assistant professor of finance.

B.S., St. Mary’s, 2000; M.A., Miami Univ. of Ohio,

2003; Ph.D., 2008.

Eric P. Salathe (1967, 1977), professor of mathematics

and director, institute for biomedical engineering and

mathematical biology. B.S., Brown, 1960; M.S.,

Princeton, 1962; Ph.D., Brown, 1965.

Colin J. Saldanha (2001, 2007), associate professor of

biological sciences. B.A., Gustavus Adolphus, 1988;

M.A., Columbia, 1991; M.Phil, 1993; Ph.D., 1995.

Paul F. Salerni (1979, 1993), chairperson and NEH dis-

tinguished professor of music and director of Lehigh

University very modern ensemble (LUVME). B.A.,

Amherst, 1973; M.A., Harvard, 1975; Ph.D., 1979.

Norman H. Sam (1962, 1986), professor emeritus of

education and human services and director emeritus of

summer sessions. B.S., Pittsburgh, 1951; M.S., 1955;

Ed.D., 1962.

Heibatollah Sami (2005), Sue and Eugene Mercy, Jr.

professor of accounting. B.S., Iranian Inst. of Advanced

Accounting (Iran), 1973; M.S., Central Michigan, 1981;

Ph.D., Louisiana State, 1984.

Steven P. Sametz (1979, 1991), Ronald J. Ulrich

endowed chair in music and director, university choir.

Dipl., Hochschule Fur Musik (Germany), 1975; B.A.,

Yale, 1976; M.A., Wisconsin, 1978; D.M.A., 1980.

Nada R. Sanders (2009), Iacocca chair and professor of

management. B.S., Franklin, 1978; M.B.A., Ohio State,

1981; Ph.D., Ohio State, Fisher College of Business,

1986.

Matthew R. Sanderson (2008), assistant professor of

sociology and anthropology. B.S., Kansas State, 2002;

M.A., 2004; Ph.D., Utah, 2008.

448 Lehigh University Course Catalog 2009-2010

Jeffrey A. Sands (1973, 1983), associate dean for faculty

and staff in the college of arts and sciences and professor

of biological sciences. B.S., Delaware, 1969; M.S.,

Pennsylvania State, 1971; Ph.D., 1973.

Michael D. Santoro (2000, 2005), James T. Kane fellow

and associate professor of management. B.S., William

Patterson, 1973; M.B.A., Adelphi, 1983; M.B.A.,

Rutgers, 1998; Ph.D., 1998.

Robert G. Sarubbi (1968, 1995), professor emeritus of

mechanical engineering and mechanics. B.S., Cooper

Union, 1953; M.S., Lehigh, 1957; Ph.D., 1963.

Gary M. Sasso (2008), dean of the college of education

and professor of education and human services. B.S.,

Central Mission State, 1975; M.S., Kansas, 1979; Ph.D.,

1983.

Tanya L. Saunders (2009), assistant professor of sociolo-

gy and anthropology. B.A., St. Mary’s College, 1998;

M.P.P., Michigan, Gerald R. Ford School of Public

Policy, 2002; M.A./Ph.D., Michigan, 2008.

Richard Sause (1989, 2000), Joseph T. Stuart professor

of civil engineering and director, advanced technology

for large structural systems center. B.S., Rensselaer

Polytechnic, 1981; M.S., California at Berkeley, 1983;

Ph.D., 1989; P.E., California.

John Savage (2001, 2007), associate professor of history.

B.A., George Washington, 1985; D.E.A., Ecole des

Hautes Etudes en Sciences Sociales (France), 1991;

Ph.D., New York, 1999.

Nicholas Sawicki (2009), assistant professor of art and

architecture. B.A., New York, 1996; Ph.D.,

Pennsylvania, 2007.

Kenneth N. Sawyers (1969, 2008), professor emeritus of

mechanical engineering and mechanics. B.S., Illinois

Inst. of Tech., 1962; Ph.D., Brown, 1967.

Murray Schechter (1963, 2001), professor emeritus of

mathematics. B.A., Brooklyn, 1957; Ph.D., 1965.

William E. Schiesser (1960, 2004), professor emeritus

of engineering and mathematics. B.S., Lehigh, 1955;

M.A., Princeton, 1958; Ph.D., 1960.

Theodore W. Schlie (1989), co-director, management of

technology program and associate professor of manage-

ment. B.A., Valparaiso, 1963; M.S., Northwestern,

1969; Ph.D., 1973.

Jill E. Schneider (1992, 2004), professor of biological

sciences. B.S., Florida State, 1977; Ph.D., Wesleyan,

1982.

Keith J. Schray (1972, 1980), professor of chemistry.

B.S., Portland, 1965; Ph.D., Pennsylvania State, 1970.

Eugenio Schuster (2004), assistant professor of mechani-

cal engineering and mechanics. B.S., Buenos Aires

(Argentina), 1993; M.S., Balseiro Institute (Argentina),

1998; M.S., California at San Diego, 2000; Ph.D.,

2004.

Eli Schwartz (1954, 1991), Charles W. MacFarlane pro-

fessor emeritus of theoretical economics. B.S., Denver,

1943; M.A., Connecticut, 1948; Ph.D., Brown, 1952.

Timothy Schwarz (2009), professor of practice of music.

B.Mus., Cincinnati, College-Conservatory of Music,

1991; M.Mus., Johns Hopkins, Peabody Conservatory,

1993; D.M.A., Temple, 2007.

William R. Scott (1992), professor of history and direc-

tor, Africana studies program. B.A., Lincoln, 1960;

M.A., Howard, 1966; M.A., Princeton, 1970; Ph.D.,

1972.

Arup K. SenGupta (1985, 1998), P.C. Rossin Senior

professor of civil engineering. B.S., Jadavpur (India),

1973; M.S., Houston, 1982; Ph.D., 1984.

Ruth Knafo Setton (2005), professor of practice of

English. M.A., Denver, 1975; Ph.D., Rice, 1981.

Russell A. Shaffer (1964, 2006), professor emeritus of

physics. B.S., Drexel, 1956; Ph.D., Johns Hopkins,

1962.

Edward S. Shapiro (1983, 2004), professor of school

psychology, and center director, promoting research to

practice. B.S., Pittsburgh, 1973; M.A., Marshall, 1975;

Ph.D., Pittsburgh, 1978.

Susan A. Sherer (1987, 2000), William R. Kenan Jr.

professor of management and chairperson of manage-

ment and co-director, center for value chain research.

B.S., SUNY at Albany, 1973; M.S., SUNY at Buffalo,

1975; M.S., Pennsylvania, 1986; Ph.D., Wharton, 1988.

George K. Shortess (1969, 1994), professor emeritus of

psychology. B.A., Lycoming, 1954; M.A., Brown, 1960;

Ph.D., 1962.

George C. M. Sih (1958, 1995), professor emeritus of

mechanics. B.S., Portland, 1953; M.S., New York, 1958;

Ph.D., Lehigh, 1960.

Laurence J. Silberstein (1984, 1990), Philip and Muriel

Berman chair in Jewish studies, professor of religion

studies, and director, Philip and Muriel Berman center

for Jewish studies. B.A., Brandeis, 1958; M.A., Jewish

Theological Seminary, 1962; Ph.D., Brandeis, 1971.

Cesar A. Silebi (1973, 1991), professor of chemical

engineering. B.S., Universidad del Atlantico (Colombia),

1970; M.S., Lehigh, 1974; Ph.D., 1978.

Gary W. Simmons (1970, 2006), professor emeritus of

chemistry. B.S., West Virginia, 1961; Ph.D., Virginia,

1967.

Neal G. Simon (1983, 1993), professor of biological sci-

ences. B.A., SUNY at Binghamton, 1974; M.S., Rutgers,

1977; Ph.D., 1979.

Roger D. Simon (1970, 1986), professor of history.

B.A., Rutgers, 1965; M.A., Wisconsin, 1966; Ph.D.,

1971.

Dale R. Simpson (1960, 1995), professor emeritus of

earth and environmental sciences. B.S., Pennsylvania

State, 1956; M.S., California Inst. of Tech., 1958;

Ph.D., 1960.

Kenneth P. Sinclair (1972, 1988), professor of account-

ing. B.A., Massachusetts, 1968; M.S., 1970; Ph.D.,

1972.

Nadine J. Sine (1980, 1996), professor of music.

B.M.E., Temple, 1970; M.M., 1976; Ph.D., New York,

1983.Amardeep Singh (2001, 2008), associate professor

of English. B.A., Cornell, 1995; M.A., Tufts, 1996;

Ph.D., Duke, 2001.

K. Sivakumar (2001, 2003), Arthur C. Tauck professor

of international marketing and logistics, chairperson and

professor of marketing. B.E., Madras University (India),

1980; PGDRM, Institute of Rural Management (India),

1982; Ph.D., Syracuse, 1992.

Administration, Faculty and Staff 449

Mark Skandera (2006), assistant professor of mathematics.

Sc.B., Brown, 1991; M.S., California at Berkeley, 1993;

Ph.D., Massachusetts Institute of Technology, 2000.

Robert V. Skibbens (1999, 2005), associate professor of

biological sciences. B.S., Ohio State, 1981; Ph.D., North

Carolina at Chapel Hill, 1994.

Zdenek J. Slouka (1972, 1993), Bernard L. and Bertha

F. Cohen professor emeritus of international relations.

B.A., Masaryk (Czechoslovakia), 1948; M.A., New York,

1958; Ph.D., Columbia, 1965.

David B. Small (1987, 1998), professor of sociology and

anthropology. B.A., SUNY at Albany, 1973; M.A., 1977;

Ph.D., Cambridge (United Kingdom), 1983.

Charles R. Smith (1978, 1983), professor of mechanical

engineering and mechanics. B.S., Stanford, 1966; M.S.,

1968; Ph.D., 1971.

Gerald F. Smith (1994), professor emeritus of mechani-

cal engineering and mechanics. B.S., Buffalo, 1952;

Ph.D., Brown, 1956.

John K. Smith, Jr. (1987, 1991), associate professor of

history. B.S., Delaware, 1974; B.A., 1974; M.S.,

Virginia, 1976; Ph.D., Delaware, 1986.

Wesley R. Smith (1958, 1995), professor emeritus of

physics. B.S., Lehigh, 1950; M.S., 1951; Ph.D.,

Princeton, 1957.

Oles M. Smolansky (1963, 2004), university professor

emeritus of international relations. B.A., New York,

1953; M.A., Columbia, 1955; Ph.D., 1959.

Donald M. Smyth (1971, 1995), Paul B. Reinhold

Professor emeritus of materials science and engineering,

and professor emeritus of chemistry. B.S., Maine, 1951;

Ph.D., M.I.T., 1954.

Max D. Snider (1946, 1980), professor emeritus of mar-

keting and associate dean emeritus of the college of

business and economics. B.S., Illinois, 1936; M.S.,

1937; M.B.A., Stanford, 1941.

Andrew K. Snyder (1964, 2000), professor emeritus of

mathematics. B.A., Swarthmore, 1959; M.A., Colorado,

1961; Ph.D., Lehigh, 1965.

Lawrence V. Snyder (2003), assistant professor of indus-

trial and systems engineering and co-director, center for

value chain research. B.A., Amherst 1996; M.S.,

Northwestern, 1999; Ph.D., 2003.

Mark A. Snyder (2009), P.C. Rossin assistant professor

of chemical engineering. B.S., Lehigh, 2000; Ph.D.,

Delaware, 2006.

Stephen E. Snyder (2004), assistant professor of eco-

nomics. B.A., Maryland, 1974; M.A., Virginia, 1977;

M.A., Maryland, 1999; Ph.D., 2004.Jean R. Soderlund

(1994, 2005), deputy provost for faculty affairs and pro-

fessor of history. B.A., Douglass, 1968; M.A., Glassboro

State, 1971; Ph.D., Temple, 1982.

Robert M. Sorensen (1982, 2009), professor emeritus of

civil and environmental engineering. B.S., Newark

College of Engineering, 1960; M.S., Lehigh, 1962;

Ph.D., California at Berkeley, 1966. P.E., Texas, 1969.

Michael F. Spear (2009), assistant professor of computer

science and engineering. B.S., United States Military

Academy, 1999; M.B.A., Alaska, 2003; M.S., Rochester,

2005; Ph.D., 2009.

John R. Speltzer (2003, 2009), associate professor of

computer science and engineering. B.S., Temple, 1989;

M.A., Johns Hopkins, 1993; M.S., Pennsylvania, 1999;

Ph.D., 2003.

Jill Sperandio (2004), assistant professor of education

and human services. B.A., College of Wales (United

Kingdom), 1970; M.Ed., Worcester State, 1983; Ph.D.,

Chicago, 1998.

Leslie H. Sperling (1967, 2002), professor emeritus of

chemical engineering and materials science and engineer-

ing. B.S., Florida, 1954; M.A., Duke, 1957; Ph.D.,

1959.

Arnold R. Spokane (1989), professor of counseling psy-

chology. B.A., Ohio, 1970; M.S.Ed., Kentucky, 1972;

Ph.D., Ohio State, 1976.

Robert S. Sprague (1957, 1988), professor emeritus of

chemistry. B.S., Washington and Jefferson, 1943; Ph.D.,

Illinois, 1949.

William B. Stafford (1967, 1994), professor emeritus of

education and human services. A.B., Ohio, 1954; M.A.,

1955; Ph.D., Indiana, 1965.

Lee J. Stanley (1982, 1994), professor of mathematics.

A.B., Princeton, 1971; M.A., California at Berkeley,

1973; Ph.D., 1977.

Michael Stavola (1989, 1993), associate dean for

research and graduate studies in the college of arts and

sciences and Sherman Fairchild chair in physics, chair-

person and professor of physics. B.S., Trinity, 1975;

Ph.D., Rochester, 1980.

Lloyd H. Steffen (1990, 2000), university chaplain, pro-

fessor of religion studies. B.A., New College, 1973;

M.A., Andover Newton Theo. School, 1978; M. Div.,

Yale Divinity School, 1978; Ph.D., Brown, 1984.

Vera S. Stegmann (1991, 1996), associate professor of

modern languages and literature. B.A., Missouri, 1979;

M.A., 1981; M.A., Illinois, 1983; Ph.D., Indiana, 1989.

Fred P. Stein (1963, 2001), professor emeritus of chemi-

cal engineering. B.S., Lehigh, 1956; M.S.E., Michigan,

1957; Ph.D., 1961.

Gilbert A. Stengle (1960, 2002), professor emeritus of

mathematics. B.S., Cornell, 1954; M.S., Wisconsin,

1957; Ph.D., 1961.

John E. Stevens (1975, 2003), professor emeritus of

management and marketing. B.S., Dayton, 1968;

M.B.A., 1970; M.A., Cincinnati, 1974; Ph.D., 1975.

Robert H. Storer (1986, 1999), professor of industrial

and systems engineering. B.S.E., Michigan, 1979; M.S.,

Georgia Inst. of Tech. 1982; Ph.D., 1987.

Robert D. Stout (1939, 1980), dean emeritus of the

graduate school and professor emeritus of metallurgy and

materials engineering. B.S., Pennsylvania State, 1935;

M.S., Lehigh, 1941; Ph.D., 1944; D.Sc., Albright, 1967;

P.E., Pennsylvania, 1946.

James E. Sturm (1956, 1995), professor emeritus of

chemistry. B.A., St. John’s (Minnesota), 1951; Ph.D.,

Notre Dame, 1957.

Xiaofeng Sun (2005), assistant professor of mathematics.

B.S., Peking (China), 1996; Ph.D., Stanford, 2001.

Jennifer Swann (1996, 2008), professor of biological sci-

ences. B.S., Pennsylvania State, 1976; M.S., Florida

State, 1979; Ph.D., Northwestern, 1984.

450 Lehigh University Course Catalog 2009-2010

Susan Szczepanski (1982, 1989), associate professor of

mathematics. B.A., LaSalle, 1975; Ph.D., Rutgers, 1980.

Donald L. Talhelm (1960, 1995), professor emeritus of

electrical engineering and computer science. B.S.,

Lehigh, 1959; M.S., 1960.

Gang Tan (2008), assistant professor of computer sci-

ence and engineering, B. Engr., Tsinghua (China), 1999;

M.A., Princeton, 2001; Ph.D., 2005.

Nicola B. Tannenbaum (1989, 2001), professor of soci-

ology and anthropology. B.A., Grinnell, 1973; M.A.,

Iowa, 1975; Ph.D., 1982.

Nelson Tansu (2003, 2009), associate professor of elec-

trical and computer engineering. B.S.,

Wisconsin-Madison, 1998; Ph.D., 2003.

Stephen K. Tarby (1961, 2002), professor emeritus of

materials science and engineering. B.S., Carnegie Tech.,

1956; M.S., 1959; Ph.D., 1962.

Svetlana Tatic-Lucic (2002, 2008), associate professor of

electrical and computer engineering. B.S., Belgrade

(Yugoslavia), 1986; M.S., California Inst. of Tech., 1980;

Ph.D., 1994.

Larry W. Taylor (1984, 1996), professor of economics.

B.S., North Alabama, 1980; Ph.D., North Carolina,

1984.

Tamás Terlaky (2008), Soterial and George N. Kledaras

’87 chair and chairperson of industrial and systems engi-

neering. M.Sc., Loránd Eötvös (Hungary), 1979; Ph.D.,

1981.

Theodore A. Terry (1951, 1995), professor emeritus of

mechanical engineering and mechanics. B.S., Drexel,

1950; M.S., Lehigh, 1951; Ph.D., 1963. P.E.,

Pennsylvania, 1957.

Aurelie Thiele (2004), assistant professor of industrial

and systems engineering. M.S., M.I.T., 2000; Ph.D.,

2004.

Stephen F. Thode (1982, 1988), associate professor of

finance and director, Murray H. Goodman center for

real estate studies. B.A., Coe, 1973; M.B.A., Indiana,

1979; D.B.A., 1980.

J. Bruce Thomas (1990, 1996), associate professor of art

and architecture. B.S., Cincinnati, 1972; M.Arch.,

California, 1982; Ph.D., 1989.

David A. Thomas (1968, 1994), professor emeritus of

materials science and engineering. B.S., Cornell, 1953;

Sc.D., M.I.T., 1958.

Eric D. Thompson (1983, 1995), professor emeritus of

electrical engineering and computer science. S.B.,

M.I.T., 1956; S.M., 1956; Ph.D., 1960.

Robert J. Thornton (1970, 1981), Charles W.

MacFarlane professor of economics. H.A.B., Xavier,

1965; M.A., Illinois, 1967; Ph.D., 1970.

Gregory L. Tonkay (1986, 1993), associate professor of

industrial and systems engineering. B.S., Pennsylvania

State, 1981; Ph.D., 1987.

Jean Toulouse (1984, 1994), professor of physics. M.A.,

Paris, 1971; M.S., Columbia, 1977; Ph.D., 1981.

Barbara H. Traister (1973, 1986), professor of English.

B.A., Colby, 1965; M.A., Yale, 1968; Ph.D., 1973.

Jason E. Travers (2009), lecturer in art and architecture.

B.A., Moravian College, 1994; M.F.A., Pennsylvania,

1998.

Robert J. Trent (1993, 2008), George N. Beckwith ’32

professor of management. B.S., Michigan State, 1980;

M.B.A., Wayne State, 1982; Ph.D., Michigan State,

1993.

Walter W. Trimble (1978, 1984), chairperson and asso-

ciate professor of journalism and communication. B.A.,

Ohio State, 1970; M.A., 1972.

LeRoy J. Tuscher (1971, 2004), professor emeritus of

education and human services. B.S., Northern State,

1958; M.A., Stanford, 1964; Ph.D., Florida State, 1971.

Kemal Tuzla (2002), professor of practice of chemical

engineering. M.S., Tech. Univ. of Istanbul (Turkey),

1966; Ph.D., 1972.

Kenneth K. Tzeng (1969, 2004), professor emeritus of

electrical and computer engineering. B.S., National

Taiwan (Taiwan), 1959; M.S., Illinois, 1962; Ph.D.,

1969.

Dean P. Updike (1965, 1995), professor emeritus of

mechanical engineering and mechanics. B.S., Princeton,

1957; M.S., New York, 1960; Ph.D., Brown, 1964.

Christine Ussler (1984, 2001), professor of practice of

art and architecture. B.A., Lehigh, 1981; M.Arch.,

Columbia, 1984.

Anje C. van der Naald (1969, 1995), professor emeritus

of Spanish. B.A., Carleton (Ottawa), 1963; M.A.,

Illinois, 1965; Ph.D., 1967.

David A. VanHorn (1962, 1995), professor emeritus of

civil and environmental engineering. B.S., Iowa State,

1951; M.S., 1956; Ph.D., 1959; P.E., Iowa, 1957; P.E.,

Pennsylvania, 1986.

Eric Varley (1967, 1969), professor of mechanical engi-

neering and mechanics. B.S., Manchester (England),

1955; M.S., 1957; Ph.D., Brown, 1961.

Geraldo M. Vasconcellos (1988, 2004), professor of

finance and economics. B.S., Military Academy of

Agulhas Negras (Brazil), 1971; B.S., State Univ. of Rio

de Janeiro (Brazil), 1979; M.S., Federal Univ. of Rio de

Janeiro (Brazil), 1981; M.S., Illinois, 1983; Ph.D., 1986.

Dimitrios Vavylonis (2006), assistant professor of

physics. B.A., Athens (Greece), 1994; M.A., Columbia,

1996; M. Phil., 1998; Ph.D., 2000.

Ramamirthan Venkataraman (1968, 1974), associate

professor of applied mathematics and statistics. B.S., St.

Joseph’s (India), 1960; M.S., Brown, 1966; Ph.D., 1968.

Parvathinathan Venkitasubramaniam (2009), assistant

professor of electrical and computer engineering.

B.Tech., Indian Instit. of Tech. (India), 2002; M.S.,

Cornell, 2005; Ph.D., 2007.

Dmitri Vezenov (2006), assistant professor of chemistry.

B.S., Moscow State University (Russia), 1991; M.S.,

Case Western Reserve, 1994; Ph.D., Harvard, 1999.

John F. Vickrey (1961, 1995), professor emeritus of

English. B.A., Chicago, 1949; M.A., 1952; Ph.D.,

Indiana, 1960.

Administration, Faculty and Staff 451

Ricardo Viera (1974, 1986), professor of art and archi-

tecture and director, art galleries. Dipl., Boston Museum

School, 1972; B.F.A., Tufts, 1973; M.F.A., Rhode Island

School of Design, 1974.

Richard P. Vinci (1998, 2004), associate professor of

materials science and engineering. B.S., M.I.T., 1988;

M.S., Stanford, 1990; Ph.D., 1994.

Anthony Viscardi (1992, 2007), chairperson and profes-

sor of art and architecture. B.Arch., Virginia Polytechnic,

1973; M.Arch., Georgia Inst. of Tech., 1988.

Arkady S. Voloshin (1984, 1991), professor of mechani-

cal engineering and mechanics. Ph.D., Tel-Aviv (Israel),

1978.

Israel E. Wachs (1987, 1992), G. Whitney Snyder pro-

fessor of chemical engineering. B.E., City College of

CUNY, 1973; M.S., Stanford, 1974; Ph.D., 1977.

Lanette Waddell (2007), professor of practice of educa-

tion and human services. B.S., Pennsylvania State, 1987;

E.A., Rutgers, 2001; M.S., Pennsylvania, 2003, Ph.D.,

2006.

Meghanad D. Wagh (1984), associate professor of elec-

trical and computer engineering. B. Tech., Indian Inst.

of Tech. (India), 1971; Ph.D., 1977.

Andrew Ward (2009), associate professor of manage-

ment. Dipl. in Marketing, The Chartered Instit. of

Marketing (England), 1986; B.Sc., Surrey (England),

1986; M.B.A., Emory, 1991; Ph.D., Pennsylvania, 1996.

Vassie C. Ware (1985, 1991), associate professor of bio-

logical sciences. B.A., Brown, 1975; M.Phil., Yale, 1978;

Ph.D., 1981.

William Warfield (1996, 2005), associate professor of

music. B.Mus., Manhattan School of Music, 1992;

M.Mus., 1994.

George D. Watkins (1975, 1995), Sherman Fairchild

professor emeritus of solid-state studies. B.S., Randolph-

Macon, 1943; M.S., Harvard, 1947; Ph.D., 1952.

Todd A. Watkins (1992, 2009), professor of economics.

B.S., Rochester, 1984; M.P.P., Harvard, 1986; Ph.D.,

Harvard, 1995.

Bob Watts (2004, 2007), assistant professor of English.

B.S., B.A., Appalachian State, 1985; M.A., North

Carolina, 1990; Ph.D., Missouri-Columbia, 2003.

Stephanie P. Watts (2003, 2009), associate professor of

English. B.A., North Carolina, 1997; M.A., Missouri-

Columbia, 1998; Ph.D., 2002.

Samuel C. Weaver (1998, 2004), professor of practice of

finance. B.S., Lehigh, 1975; M.B.A., 1978; Ph.D., 1985.

Ben L. Wechsler (1974, 1982), professor emeritus of

industrial and systems engineering. B.S., Carnegie, 1942;

M.A., George Washington, 1962; Ph.D., Lehigh, 1974.

Robert P. Wei (1966, 2008), Paul B. Reinhold professor

emeritus of engineering and professor emeritus of

mechanical engineering and mechanics. B.S., Princeton,

1953; M.S., 1954; Ph.D., 1960.

Steven H. Weintraub (2001), professor of mathematics.

A.B., Princeton, 1971; Ph.D., 1974.

Alexander W. Wiseman (2007), associate professor of

education and human services. B.A., Oklahoma, 1991;

M.A., Tulsa, 1993; M.A., Stanford, 1998; Ph.D.,

Pennsylvania State, 2001.

Richard N. Weisman (1977, 1995), professor of civil

and environmental engineering. B.S., Cornell, 1967;

M.S., 1968; Ph.D., 1973.

Roslyn E. Weiss (1991, 1999), chairperson and Clara H.

Stewardson professor of philosophy. B.A., Brooklyn,

1973; M.A., Columbia, 1975; M.Phil., 1976; Ph.D.,

1982.

Lenore E. Chava Weissler (1988, 1999), Philip and

Muriel Berman chair of Jewish civilization and professor

of religion studies. B.A., Brandeis, 1967; M.S.,

Columbia, 1970; Ph.D., Pennsylvania, 1982.

Howard R. Whitcomb (1967, 1999), professor emeritus

of political science. B.A., Brown, 1961; M.A., Lehigh,

1963; Ph.D., SUNY at Albany, 1971.

George P. White (1989, 2002), professor of education

and human services. B.S., West Chester, 1974; M.A.,

Northern Colorado, 1979; Ed.D., Vanderbilt, 1989.

Marvin H. White (1981), Sherman Fairchild chair in

electrical sciences and director, Sherman Fairchild center.

A.S., Henry Ford Community, 1957; B.S.E., 1960;

M.S., Michigan, 1961; Ph.D., Ohio State, 1969.

Bruce Whitehouse (2008), assistant professor of sociolo-

gy and anthropology. B.A., Carleton, 1993; A.M.,

Brown, 2003; Ph.D., 2007.

Edward Whitley (2004), assistant professor of English.

B.A., Brigham Young, 1997; M.A., 1999; Ph.D.,

Maryland, 2004.

John C. Wiginton (1983, 1993), professor emeritus of

industrial and systems engineering. B.A.Sc., British

Columbia, 1957; M.B.A., 1966; M.S., Carnegie Mellon,

1969; Ph.D., 1970.

Albert Wilansky (1948, 1992), university distinguished

professor emeritus of mathematics. Ph.D., Brown, 1947.

David B. Williams (1976, 2007), Harold Chambers sen-

ior professor emeritus of materials science and

engineering. B.A., Cambridge (England), 1970; M.A.,

1974; Ph.D., 1974.

Robert C. Williamson (1963, 1984), professor emeritus

of sociology. B.A., California at Los Angeles, 1938;

M.A., 1940; Ph.D., Southern California, 1951.

George R. Wilson (1978, 1984), associate professor of

industrial and systems engineering. B.S., Pennsylvania

State, 1971; M.S., 1973; Ph.D., 1979.

John L. Wilson (1982, 1988), professor of civil engi-

neering. B.S., Tufts, 1963; M.S., Yale, 1964; Ph.D.,

Pittsburgh, 1972.

Lenora D. Wolfgang (1980, 2007), professor emerita of

French, modern languages and literature. B.A.,

Pennsylvania, 1956; M.A., 1965; Ph.D., 1973.

Brenna K. Wood (2009), assistant professor of special

education. B.A., Portland State, 2003; M.Ed.,

Vanderbilt, 2005; Ph.D., Arizona, 2009.

Benjamin G. Wright, III (1990, 2001), chairperson and

professor of religion studies. B.A., Ursinus, 1975; M.

Div., Eastern Baptist Theological Seminary, 1978; Ph.D.,

Pennsylvania, 1988.

Ping-Shi Wu (2006), assistant professor of mathematics.

B.S., Tamkang (Taiwan), 1994; M.S., 1996; M.S.,

California at Davis, 2002; Ph.D., 2005.

452 Lehigh University Course Catalog 2009-2010

Szu-Yung David Wu (1987, 2004), dean of the P.C.

Rossin college of engineering and applied science,

Iacocca professor of industrial and systems engineering.

B.S., Tunghai (Taiwan), 1981; M.S., Pennsylvania State,

1985; Ph.D., 1987.

Albert H. Wurth, Jr. (1985, 1993), associate professor of

political science. B.A., Northwestern, 1971; M.A.,

Southern Illinois, 1981; Ph.D., North Carolina at

Chapel Hill, 1987.

Raymond F. Wylie (1973, 2009), professor emeritus of

international relations. B.A., Toronto (Canada), 1964;

M.A., 1968; Ph.D., London (England), 1976.

Zhiyuan Yan (2003), assistant professor of electrical and

computer engineering. B.E., Tsinghua (China), 1995;

M.S., Illinois, 1999, 2003; Ph.D., 2003.

Ke Yang (2008), assistant professor of accounting. B.S.,

Henan (China), 2000; M.A., Nebraska-Omaha, 2002;

Ph.D., Iowa, 2008.

Muzhe Yang (2008), assistant professor of economics.

B.S., Peking (China), 2000; M.S., 2002; Ph.D.,

California at Berkeley, 2008.

Yuliang Yao (2003), C. Scott Hartz ’68 term professor

and assistant professor of management. B.S., Shanghai

Jiao Tong (China), 1995; M.B.A., Rensselaer Polytechnic

Inst., 1997; Ph.D., Maryland, 2002.

Aladdin M. Yaqub (2006), associate professor of philos-

ophy. B.S., Baghdad (Iraq), 1978; M.A., Wisconsin,

1988, 1990; Ph.D., 1991.

W. Ross Yates (1955, 1986), professor emeritus of gov-

ernment. B.A., Oregon, 1948; M.A., 1949; Ph.D., Yale,

1956.

Ben T. Yen (1957, 2001), professor emeritus of civil and

environmental engineering. B.S., National Taiwan

(Taiwan), 1955; M.S., Lehigh, 1959; Ph.D., 1963.

Roland K. Yoshida (1996), professor of educational psy-

chology. B.A., Southern California, 1970; M.S., 1971;

Ph.D., 1974.

Donald R. Young (1986, 1992), professor emeritus of

electrical engineering. B.S., Utah State, 1942; Ph.D.,

M.I.T., 1949.

Wei Yu (2008), assistant professor of accounting. B.S.,

University of Internal Business and Economics (China),

2000; M.A., Central Michigan, 2003; Ph.D., Georgia

Inst. of Tech., 2008.

Zicheng Yu (2001, 2007), associate professor of earth

and environmental sciences. B.S., Peking (China), 1985;

M.S., 1988; M.S., Toronto (Canada), 1992; Ph.D.,

1997.

Joseph E. Yukich (1985, 1995), professor of mathemat-

ics. B.A., Oberlin, 1978; Ph.D., M.I.T., 1982.

Zach G. Zacharia (2008), assistant professor of manage-

ment. B.S., Calgary (Canada), 1985; M.B.A., Alberta

(Canada), 1993; Ph.D., Tennessee, 2001.

Ivan Zaknic (1986, 2009), professor emeritus of art and

architecture. B.Arch., Cooper Union, 1972; M.Arch.,

Princeton, 1975.

Peter K. Zeitler (1988, 1996), Iacocca professor of earth

and environmental sciences. B.A., Dartmouth, 1978;

M.A., 1980; Ph.D., 1983.

Daniel Zeroka (1967, 2007), professor emeritus of

chemistry. B.S., Wilkes, 1963; Ph.D., Pennsylvania,

1966.

Linghai Zhang (2002, 2008), associate professor of

mathematics. B.S., Beijing Normal (China), 1986; M.S.,

Beijing Institute (China), 1989; Ph.D., Ohio State,

1999.

Weixian Zhang (1995, 2001), associate professor of civil

and environmental engineering. B.S., Tongji (China),

1984; M.S., Johns Hopkins, 1992; Ph.D., 1995.

Yuping Zhang (2007), assistant professor of sociology

and anthropology. B.A., Tianjin Teachers’ College

(China), 1982; M.A., Tianjin Foreign Languages

Institute (China), 1985; M.A., Boston, 2001; Ph.D.,

Pennsylvania, 2007.

Emory W. Zimmers, Jr. (1969, 1980), director, enter-

prise systems center and professor of industrial and

systems engineering. B.S., Lehigh, 1966; B.S., 1967;

M.S., 1967; Ph.D., 1973.

Perry A. Zirkel (1977, 1979), Iacocca professor of edu-

cation and law. B.A., SUNY at Oswego, 1966; M.A.,

Connecticut, 1968; Ph.D. 1972; J.D., 1976; LL.M.,

Yale, 1983.

Administration, Faculty and Staff 453

454 Lehigh University Course Catalog 2009-2010

Calendar 5

Campus Life 14

Campus Visits 7

Campuses 427

Career Placement 39

Career Services 25

Center for Academic Success 25

Center for Optical Technologies [COT] 78

Centers and Institutes 69

Certificate Programs 60, 69

Chemical Engineering 149

Chemical Process Modeling and Control

Research Center 72

Chemistry 157

Civil and Environmental Engineering 169

Civil and Environmental Engineering and

Earth and Environmental Sciences 179

Classical Studies 181

Cognitive Science 184

Colleges 33

Arts and Sciences 33

Business and Economics 39

Education 42

P.C. Rossin College of Engineering and

Applied Science 42

Communication 187

Computer Engineering 187

Computer Science and Business Program 40, 189

Computer Science and Engineering 190

Continuing Education 27

Cooperative (Undergraduate) Education 199

Cooperative Education (Co-Op) 44

Cooperative Graduate Education 199

Counseling and Psychological Service 24

Course Numbering 89

Credit and Grades 29, 55

Graduate 55

Undergraduate 29

Credit by Examination 48

Credit Hours 89

Degree Information 28, 51

Graduate 51

Undergraduate 28

Department Honors 32

Deposit 8

Developing Urban Educational Leaders, The Center for

(CDUEL) 74

Disability Support Services 24

Distance Education 26

Index

Abbreviations 89

Academic and Research Facilities 428

Academic Rules and Regulations 28

Accounting 90

Accreditation 6

Admission Guidelines 6

Admission to Graduate Study 53

Advanced Materials and Nanotechnology (CAMN)

(Center for) 69

Advanced Placement 8

Advanced Technology For Large Structural Systems

(ATLSS) Research Center 71

Advisement 28

Africana Studies 92

Alcohol, Drugs, and Other Lifestyle Choices

Programs 23

American Studies 94

Application for Degree 29

Application Procedure 7, 12

Applied Mathematics and Statistics 96

Applied Science 96

Apprentice Teaching 48, 96

Art Galleries 21

Art, Architecture, and Design 96

Arts-Engineering 107

Arts-Engineering Option 45

ArtsLehigh 17

Asian Studies 114

Astronomy and Astrophysics 120

Athletic and Convocational Facilities 430

Athletic Opportunities 17

Auditing 32

Ben Franklin Technology Partners 84

Bethlehem 18

Billing and Payments 10

Biochemistry 122

Bioengineering Program 122

Biological Sciences 126

Biology 136

Board of Trustees 432

Business 136

Business Administration and Economics,

Graduate Degrees in 59

Business and Economics Graduate Courses 140

Business Information Systems 138

Business Minor 41

Early Decision 7

Earth and Environmental Sciences 199

Eckardt Scholars Program 33, 210

Economics 210

Education Minor 38

Education, College of 216

Education, Graduate Degrees in 63

Electrical and Computer Engineering 229

Electrical Engineering 240

Electrical Engineering and Engineering Physics 240

Eligibility for Degree 28

Emulsion Polymers Institute 74

Energy Research Center 74

Engineering 241

Engineering Mathematics 244

English 244

English as a Second Language 47, 254

Enterprise Systems Center (ESC) 75

Entrance Examinations 6

Entrepreneurship 255

Environmental Initiative 255

Equality, Policy of 6

Experiential Learning 47

Faculty and Emeriti 436

Faculty Development 22

Finance 262

Financial Aid 12

Financial Aid, Graduate 56

Fine Arts 264

Five-Year Programs 28, 264

Foreign Culture and Civilization 264

Foreign Language Study 35

Foreign Literature 264

Fraternities and Sororities 15, 431

French 264

General College Division 50

Geology 264

German 264

Global Citizenship 264

Global Studies 265

Global Union 46

Government 268

Graduate Studies Organizations 65

Graduate Study 51

Graduation 55

Graduation Honors 32

Graduation Requirements 28

Greek 269

Guest Speakers 17

Health & Wellness Center 24

Health Professional Programs 37

Health, Medicine, and Society 269

Hebrew 270

History 270

History and Purpose 423

Honor Societies 32

Humanities 278

Humanities Center 76

Iacocca Institute® 85

IDEAS: Integrated Degree in Engineering,

Arts and Sciences 292

Industrial and Systems Engineering 281

Information and Systems Engineering 289

Information Limits 89

Institute for Interactivist Studies 76

Institute for Metal Forming 77

Integrated Business and Engineering

Honors Program 40, 44, 291

Integrated Real Estate @t Lehigh (ire@l) Program 42

Integrated Real Estate at Lehigh Program 294

Interdisciplinary Graduate Programs 66

Interdisciplinary Graduate Study and Research 65

Interdisciplinary Programs 45

Interdisciplinary Technology 295

International English Language Center (IELC) 27

International Materials Institute for New

Functionality in Glass 77

International Relations 295

Internships 35

Intramural/Club Sports 18

Japanese 300

Jewish Studies 301

Journalism and Communication 301

Junior-Year Writing Certification 35

Landmarks 428

Languages 307

Latin American Studies 307

Law 308

Lawrence Henry Gipson Institute for

Eighteenth-Century Studies 78

Library and Technology Services 20

LVAIC Cross-Registration 49

Index 455

Management 308

Management Science 310

Manufacturers Resource Center (MRC) 86

Manufacturing Systems Engineering 311

Manufacturing Systems Engineering (Center for) 86

Marketing 312

Martindale Center for the Study of Private Enterprise 80

Materials Science and Engineering 315

Mathematics 323

Mechanical Engineering and Mechanics 332

Media Services 21

Military Science 345

Modern Languages and Literatures 347

Murray H. Goodman Center for Real Estate Studies 80

Music 359

Musical Organizations 16

Networking and Voice Communications 20

Office of Fellowship Advising 26

Office of International Students and Scholars 45

Offices and Resources 434

Pass-Fail Systems for Undergraduates 31

Philip and Muriel Berman Center for Jewish Studies 80

Philip Rauch Center for Business

Communications (The) 86

Philosophy 363

Physics 368

Political Science 375

Polymer Science and Engineering (Center for) 81

Pre-Law Programs 36

Prerequisites 89

Presidents of the University 424

Principal Officers 433

Promoting Research to Practice - Schools, Families,

Communities (Center for) 82

Psychology 382

Quality Engineering 391

Recommendations 7

Refunds of Charges 11

Registration, Graduate 54

Religion Studies 391

Religious Activities 15

Research Centers and Institutes 69

Residence Halls 14

Residency Requirement, Undergraduate 28

Residential Facilities 430

Review-Consultation-Study Period 32

Russian 397

Scholastic Averages and Probation 30

School Psychology 397

Science, Environmental and Technical Writing 397

Science, Technology and Society 397

Science, Technology and Society Program and

Technology Studies Resource Center 87

Sherman Fairchild Center for Solid-State Studies 82

Small Business Development Center 87

Social Psychology 400

Social Research (Center for) 83

Sociology and Anthropology 400

South Mountain College 410

Spanish 411

Special Academic Programs 26

Special Education 411

Special Undergraduate Academic Opportunities 45

Speech 411

Statistics 411

Student Code of Conduct 18

Student Employment 21

Student Organizations 16

Student Responsibilities 14

Student Rights 14

Student Services 21

Study Abroad Office 46

Summer Studies 27

Supply Chain Management 411

Technology Studies Resource Center 88

Technology, Interdisciplinary Courses 413

Theatre 16, 413

Thesis 29

Transfer Credit 31

Transfer Students 8

Trustees 432

Tuition and Fees 10

Tuition and Fees, Graduate 56

Tuition Refunds 56

Two-Bachelor-Degree Programs 28

University Aid 13

University Buildings 427

University Press 22

Value Chain Research (Center for) 84

Volunteer and Community Services 17

Women’s Studies 416

Writing and Math Center 25

456 Lehigh University Course Catalog 2009-2010